From ed5640d8b587fbcfed7dd7967f3de04b37a76f26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Daniel Baumann Date: Sun, 7 Apr 2024 11:06:44 +0200 Subject: Adding upstream version 4:7.4.7. Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann --- .../source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp | 181 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp | 36 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp | 248 ++ .../text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp | 196 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp | 139 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp | 151 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp | 75 + .../text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp | 293 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp | 169 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp | 36 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp | 118 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp | 166 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp | 129 + .../text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp | 321 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp | 158 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp | 352 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp | 266 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp | 169 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp | 83 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp | 211 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp | 255 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp | 440 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp | 474 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp | 52 + .../text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp | 247 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp | 46 + .../text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp | 30 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp | 35 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp | 842 +++++++ .../text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp | 30 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp | 968 ++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp | 372 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp | 659 +++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp | 2031 +++++++++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp | 504 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp | 404 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp | 681 ++++++ .../text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp | 1273 ++++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp | 523 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp | 729 ++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp | 459 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp | 1129 +++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp | 841 +++++++ .../text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp | 1173 +++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp | 181 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp | 375 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp | 324 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp | 211 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp | 412 ++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp | 348 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp | 605 +++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp | 107 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp | 693 ++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp | 1501 ++++++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp | 376 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp | 315 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp | 704 ++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp | 818 +++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp | 189 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp | 227 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp | 156 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp | 97 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp | 128 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp | 125 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp | 171 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp | 122 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp | 194 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp | 157 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp | 186 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp | 618 +++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp | 83 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp | 102 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp | 123 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp | 87 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp | 88 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp | 115 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp | 163 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp | 275 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp | 137 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp | 131 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp | 142 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp | 173 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp | 118 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp | 372 +++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp | 125 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp | 132 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp | 1037 ++++++++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp | 191 ++ .../text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp | 92 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp | 110 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp | 127 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp | 181 ++ .../source/text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp | 33 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp | 161 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp | 34 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp | 172 ++ .../source/text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp | 87 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp | 164 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp | 115 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp | 194 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp | 110 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 1022 ++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp | 139 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 737 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp | 742 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp | 202 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 1554 ++++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp | 1162 +++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp | 153 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 700 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp | 759 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp | 204 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp | 682 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp | 428 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp | 428 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp | 606 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp | 611 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp | 714 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp | 496 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp | 326 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp | 561 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp | 786 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp | 297 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp | 87 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp | 165 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp | 183 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp | 107 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp | 168 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp | 157 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp | 25 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp | 32 + .../source/text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp | 108 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp | 40 + .../text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp | 163 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp | 162 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp | 386 +++ .../source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp | 36 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp | 441 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp | 150 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp | 1744 +++++++++++++ .../source/text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp | 113 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp | 132 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp | 69 + .../text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp | 69 + .../text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp | 61 + .../text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp | 67 + .../text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp | 92 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp | 151 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp | 184 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp | 37 + .../source/text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver.xhp | 153 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp | 386 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp | 91 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp | 1337 ++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp | 271 ++ .../text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp | 101 + .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp | 97 + .../text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp | 240 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp | 177 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp | 652 +++++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp | 155 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp | 242 ++ .../text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp | 191 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp | 211 ++ .../source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp | 188 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp | 75 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp | 859 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp | 426 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp | 320 +++ .../source/text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp | 33 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp | 227 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 83 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp | 79 + .../text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp | 87 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp | 65 + .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp | 73 + .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp | 139 ++ .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp | 53 + .../text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp | 88 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp | 48 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp | 82 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp | 50 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp | 56 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp | 80 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp | 50 + .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp | 106 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp | 73 + .../text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp | 71 + .../text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp | 152 ++ .../source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp | 36 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp | 105 + .../text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp | 223 ++ .../source/text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp | 56 + .../text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp | 120 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp | 107 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0101.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0102.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0103.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0104.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0105.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0107.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0116.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp | 135 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp | 87 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp | 227 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp | 125 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050100.xhp | 209 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp | 98 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp | 142 ++ .../text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp | 64 + .../text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp | 170 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp | 143 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp | 266 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp | 117 + .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp | 174 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp | 855 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp | 34 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp | 36 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11000002.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp | 34 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp | 130 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/main.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/password.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp | 237 ++ .../source/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp | 112 + .../source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp | 112 + .../source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp | 193 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp | 193 ++ .../source/text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp | 30 + .../source/text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp | 28 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp | 27 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/sdraw/01/page_properties.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp | 31 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 463 ++++ .../source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp | 139 ++ .../source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp | 99 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp | 141 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0103.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_page.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp | 25 + helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 295 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp | 208 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp | 113 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp | 378 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp | 295 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp | 193 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 306 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp | 117 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp | 247 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp | 344 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp | 275 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 217 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp | 368 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp | 445 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 543 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp | 266 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp | 218 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 126 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp | 373 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp | 155 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 411 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 415 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp | 175 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp | 162 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp | 249 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp | 108 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp | 156 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 126 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 188 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp | 135 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp | 2583 ++++++++++++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp | 143 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp | 116 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 197 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp | 113 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp | 186 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp | 101 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp | 196 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp | 335 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp | 125 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp | 153 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp | 205 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp | 128 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp | 149 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp | 107 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp | 239 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp | 98 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp | 305 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp | 117 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 229 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp | 118 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp | 130 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp | 101 + .../source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp | 154 ++ .../source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp | 34 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp | 34 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp | 36 + .../source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp | 123 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 59 + .../shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp | 86 + .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp | 174 ++ .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp | 63 + .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp | 87 + .../01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp | 73 + .../shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp | 33 + .../source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp | 102 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp | 284 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp | 565 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp | 85 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp | 33 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp | 821 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp | 694 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp | 94 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp | 116 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp | 199 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp | 99 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 297 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp | 234 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp | 26 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp | 27 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 989 ++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp | 272 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp | 33 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp | 189 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp | 141 ++ .../source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp | 25 + .../text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp | 25 + .../source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp | 24 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 167 ++ .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp | 114 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp | 129 + .../source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp | 58 + .../text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp | 105 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp | 120 + .../text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp | 209 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp | 127 + .../text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp | 2002 +++++++++++++++ .../text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp | 66 + .../text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp | 287 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp | 142 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp | 167 ++ .../text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp | 109 + .../text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 130 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp | 113 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp | 78 + .../text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp | 118 + .../source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp | 96 + .../source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp | 115 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp | 87 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp | 97 + .../source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp | 137 ++ .../text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp | 117 + .../text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 408 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp | 208 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp | 144 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp | 210 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp | 126 + .../source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp | 195 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp | 57 + .../shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp | 187 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 133 + .../source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp | 54 + .../text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp | 139 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp | 66 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp | 59 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp | 217 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp | 137 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp | 640 +++++ .../source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 160 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp | 359 +++ .../source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp | 45 + .../text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp | 134 + .../text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp | 169 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp | 206 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp | 216 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp | 37 + .../source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp | 51 + .../text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp | 35 + .../source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp | 37 + .../text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp | 24 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp | 151 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 163 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp | 194 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp | 149 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp | 161 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 190 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp | 116 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp | 133 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp | 119 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp | 190 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp | 111 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp | 101 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 141 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp | 112 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp | 241 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp | 38 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp | 111 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp | 115 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp | 109 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp | 130 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp | 94 + .../text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp | 32 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp | 110 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp | 40 + .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp | 56 + .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp | 45 + .../text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp | 43 + .../text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp | 71 + .../text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp | 43 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp | 39 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp | 41 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp | 42 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp | 183 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp | 116 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp | 94 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp | 168 ++ .../source/text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp | 101 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp | 136 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp | 75 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp | 205 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp | 149 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp | 125 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp | 46 + .../text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp | 65 + .../text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp | 239 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp | 200 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp | 232 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp | 107 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp | 170 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp | 249 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp | 174 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp | 195 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp | 518 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp | 196 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp | 865 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp | 174 ++ .../source/text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp | 31 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp | 125 + .../text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp | 91 + .../text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp | 58 + .../text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp | 82 + .../text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp | 184 ++ .../source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp | 105 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp | 92 + .../text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp | 118 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp | 144 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp | 83 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp | 114 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp | 99 + .../text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp | 126 + .../text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp | 92 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp | 140 ++ .../source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0107.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp | 147 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_edit.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_format.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_slide.xhp | 128 + helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_tools.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp | 27 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp | 237 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp | 322 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp | 527 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp | 256 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp | 448 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp | 380 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp | 382 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp | 302 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp | 397 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp | 133 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp | 411 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp | 548 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp | 379 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp | 444 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp | 277 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp | 399 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp | 360 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp | 377 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp | 286 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp | 340 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp | 145 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/chemical.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/06/screenshots.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/color.xhp | 448 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0106.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp | 122 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp | 75 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp | 316 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp | 393 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp | 25 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp | 548 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp | 126 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp | 166 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 186 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp | 264 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 190 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp | 147 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp | 193 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp | 125 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp | 143 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 447 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp | 137 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp | 146 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp | 91 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp | 119 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp | 85 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp | 242 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp | 189 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp | 275 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp | 75 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 379 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp | 210 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 85 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp | 217 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp | 103 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp | 112 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp | 158 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp | 190 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 101 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp | 83 + .../text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp | 39 + .../text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp | 144 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp | 661 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp | 29 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp | 1108 +++++++++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp | 113 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 112 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 114 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp | 83 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp | 85 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp | 228 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp | 62 + .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp | 57 + .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 64 + .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp | 65 + .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp | 80 + .../text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 115 + .../text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp | 232 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 135 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp | 66 + .../text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 130 + .../text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp | 79 + .../text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp | 170 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 70 + .../text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 95 + .../text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp | 126 + .../text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 74 + .../text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 126 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 88 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 96 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp | 47 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp | 46 + .../swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp | 61 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp | 59 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp | 51 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp | 59 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp | 60 + .../text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp | 233 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp | 55 + .../text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 127 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 139 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 145 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 144 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp | 92 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp | 168 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp | 133 + .../text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp | 71 + .../text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp | 105 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp | 97 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp | 82 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 58 + .../text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp | 67 + .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp | 69 + .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp | 102 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp | 188 ++ .../guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 66 + .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 158 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp | 100 + .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp | 79 + .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 97 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 68 + .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp | 420 ++++ .../source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp | 75 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp | 87 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp | 162 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp | 91 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp | 36 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp | 56 + .../text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp | 46 + .../text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp | 41 + .../text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp | 267 ++ 2561 files changed, 248173 insertions(+) create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0116.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/password.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/page_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_format.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_slide.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_tools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/chemical.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/06/screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/color.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..507a63c9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Access2Base + /text/sbasic/guide/access2base.xhp + + + Access2Base topic first insertion, by Jean-Pierre Ledure + + + + +Access2Base +Microsoft Access; Access2Base +Access databases; run in Base + + Access2Base + What is Access2Base? + Access2Base is a %PRODUCTNAME BASIC library of macros for (business or personal) application developers and advanced users. It is one of the libraries stored in "Application macros and dialogs". + The functionalities provided by the implemented macros are all directly inspired by Microsoft Access. The macros are callable mainly from a %PRODUCTNAME Base application, but also from any %PRODUCTNAME document (Writer, Calc, ...) where access to data stored in a database makes sense. + The API provided by Access2Base is intended to be more concise, intuitive and easy to learn than the standard UNO API (API = Application Programming Interface). + The library is documented online on http://www.access2base.com. + The implemented macros include: + + + a simplified and extensible API for forms, dialogs and controls manipulations similar with the Microsoft Access object model, + + + an API for database access with the table, query, recordset and field objects, + + + a number of actions with a syntax identical to their corresponding Microsoft Access macros/actions, + + + the DLookup, DSum, ... database functions, + + + the support of the shortcut notations like Forms!myForm!myControl + + + in addition + + + a consistent errors and exceptions handler, + + + facilities for programming form, dialog and control events and + + + the support of both embedded forms and standalone (Writer) forms. + + + Compare Access2Base with Microsoft Access VBA + + REM Open a form ... + OpenForm("myForm") + REM Move a form to new left-top coordinates ... + Dim ofForm As Object ' In VBA => Dim ofForm As Form + Set ofForm = Forms("myForm") + ofForm.Move(100, 200) + REM Get the value of a control ... + Dim ocControl As Object + ocControl = ofForm.Controls("myControl") + MsgBox ocControl.Value + REM Hide a control ... + ocControl.Visible = False + REM ... or alternatively ... + setValue("Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible", False) ' Shortcut notation + ' In VBA => Forms!myForm!myControl.Visible = False + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ea2d89f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + Basic to Python + /text/sbasic/guide/basic_2_python.xhp + + + + + Basic;Calling Python + API;SimpleFileAccess + API;PathSettings + API;XScript + +

Calling Python Scripts from Basic

+ Calling Python scripts from %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros is possible, and valuable features can be obtained such as: + + ComputerName identification or OSName detection are possible, + Basic FileLen() function and com.sun.star.ucb.SimpleFileAccess.getSize() API function exhibit a 2 Gigabytes file size upper limit that Python helps to overcome, + com.sun.star.util.PathSettings can be normalized, + and many more. + + A reasonable exposure to %PRODUCTNAME Basic and to Application Programming Interface (API) features is recommended prior to perform inter-language calls from Basic to Python, to JavaScript or any other script engine. +

Retrieving Python Scripts

+ Python scripts can be personal, shared, or embedded in documents. In order to execute them, %PRODUCTNAME Basic needs to be provided with Python script locations. Locating com.sun.star.script.provider.XScript interface compliant UNO objects allows the execution of Python scripts: + + Option Explicit + + Public Function GetPythonScript(macro As String, _ + Optional location As String) As com.sun.star.script.provider.Xscript + ''' Grab Python script object before execution + ' Arguments: + ' macro : as "library/module.py$macro" or "module.py$macro" + ' location: as "document", "share", "user" or ENUM(eration) + ' Result: + ' located com.sun.star.script.provider.XScript UNO service''' + If IsMissing(location) Then location = "user" + Dim mspf As Object ' com.sun.star.script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory + Dim sp As Object ' com.sun.star.script.provider.XScriptProvider compatible + Dim uri As String + If location="document" Then + sp = ThisComponent.getScriptProvider() + Else + mspf = CreateUNOService("com.sun.star.script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory") + sp = mspf.createScriptProvider("") + End If + uri = "vnd.sun.star.script:"& macro &"?language=Python&location="& location + GetPythonScript = sp.getScript(uri) + End Function ' GetPythonScript + +

Executing Python Scripts

+ +

Syntax

+ workstation_name = script.invoke(Array(), Array(), Array()) + opSysName = script.invoke(Array(), in_outs, Array()) ' in_out is an Array + file_len = script.invoke(Array(systemFilePath), Array(), Array()) + normalizedPath = script.invoke(Array(systemFilePath), Array(), Array()) +

Embedded Scripts Examples

+ Below ComputerName, and GetFilelen routines are calling their Python counterparts, using aforementioned GetPythonScript function. Exception handling is not detailed. + + Option Explicit + Option Compatible ' Properties are supported + + Private scr As Object ' com.sun.star.script.provider.XScript + + Private Property Get ComputerName As String + '''Workstation name''' + scr = GetPythonScript("Platform.py$computer_name", "document") + ComputerName = scr.invoke(Array(), Array(), Array()) + End Property ' ComputerName + + Private Function GetFilelen(systemFilePath As String) As Currency + '''File size in bytes''' + scr = GetPythonScript("Os/Path.py$get_size", Script.ISEMBEDDED) + GetFilelen = scr.invoke(Array(systemFilePath), Array(), Array(),) + End Function ' GetFilelen + + Private Type _SCRIPT_LOCATION + ISEMBEDDED As String ' document script + ISPERSONAL As String ' user script + ISSHARED As String ' %PRODUCTNAME macro + End Type ' _SCRIPT_LOCATION + + Public Function Script() As Object ' Text enumeration + Static enums As _SCRIPT_LOCATION : With enums + If .ISEMBEDDED = "" Then + .ISEMBEDDED = "document" ' document script + .ISPERSONAL = "user" ' user scripts + .ISSHARED = "share" ' %PRODUCTNAME macro + End If : End With ' enums + Script = enums + End Function ' Script + + Two different Python modules are called. They can either be embedded in the current document, either be stored on the file system. Argument type checking is skipped for clarity: + + Platform.py + + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import platform + + def computer_name() -> str: + return platform.node() + + def OSname() -> str: + return platform.system() + + + Os/Path.py + + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import os.path + + def get_size(systemFilePath: str) -> str: + return str(os.path.getsize(systemFilePath)) + + def normalyze(systemPath: str) -> str: + return os.path.normpath(systemPath) + +

Personal or Shared Scripts Examples

+ The calling mechanism for personal or shared Python scripts is identical to that of embedded scripts. Library names are mapped to folders. Computing %PRODUCTNAME user profile and shared modules system file paths can be performed as detailed in Getting session information. Below OSName, HelloWorld and NormalizePath routines are calling their Python counterparts, using aforementioned GetPythonScript function. Exception handling is not detailed. + + Option Explicit + Option Compatible ' Properties are supported + + Private scr As Object ' com.sun.star.script.provider.XScript + + Private Property Get OSName As String + '''Platform name as "Linux", "Darwin" or "Windows"''' + scr = GetPythonScript("Platform.py$OSname", Script.ISPERSONAL) + OSName = scr.invoke(Array(), Array(), Array()) + End Property ' OSName + + Private Sub HelloWorld() + '''%PRODUCTNAME Python shared sample''' + scr = GetPythonScript("HelloWorld.py$HelloWorldPython", Script.ISSHARED) + scr.invoke(Array(), Array(), Array(),) + End Sub ' HelloWorld + + Public Function NormalizePath(systemFilePath As String) As String + '''Strip superfluous '\..' in path''' + scr = GetPythonScript("Os/Path.py$normalyze", "user") + NormalizePath = scr.invoke(Array(systemFilePath), Array(), Array()) + End Function ' NormalizePath + +

Python standard modules

+ %PRODUCTNAME embedded Python contains many standard libraries to benefit from. They bear a rich feature set, such as but not limited to: + + argparse Parser for command-line options, arguments and sub-commands + cmath Mathematical functions for complex numbers + csv CSV files reading and writing + datetime Genuine date and time types + json JSON encoder and decoder + math Mathematical functions + re Regular expression operations + socket Low-level networking interface + sys System-specific parameters and functions + unittest and trace Unit testing framework and Track Python execution + xml.etree.ElementTree ElementTree XML API + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97b11c065 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + Basic Programming Examples + /text/sbasic/guide/basic_examples.xhp + + + + + Basic;programming examples + +
+

Basic Programming Examples

+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23fa7b885 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Borders in Calc with Macros + /text/sbasic/guide/calc_borders.xhp + + + + + + macros;format borders + +

Formatting Borders in Calc with Macros

+ By using Basic or Python programming languages it is possible to write macros that apply formats to ranges of cells in Calc. + +

Formatting Borders in Ranges of Cells

+ The code snippet below creates a Sub called FormatCellBorder that applies new border formats to a given range address in the current Calc sheet. + + Sub FormatCellBorder(cellAddress as String, newStyle as Byte, newWidth as Long, Optional newColor as Long) + ' Creates the UNO struct that will store the new line format + Dim lineFormat as New com.sun.star.table.BorderLine2 + lineFormat.LineStyle = newStyle + lineFormat.LineWidth = newWidth + If Not IsMissing(newColor) Then lineFormat.Color = newColor + ' Gets the target cell + Dim oCell as Object + Set oCell = ThisComponent.CurrentController.ActiveSheet.getCellRangeByName(cellAddress) + ' Applies the new format to all borders + oCell.TopBorder = lineFormat + oCell.RightBorder = lineFormat + oCell.LeftBorder = lineFormat + oCell.BottomBorder = lineFormat + End Sub + + The Sub described above takes in four arguments: + + + cellAddress is a string denoting the range to be formatted in the format "A1". + + + newStyle is an integer value that corresponds to the border line style (see Line Styles below). + + + newWidth is an integer value that defines the line width. + + + newColor is an integer value corresponding to a color defined using the RGB function. + + + To call FormatCellBorder create a new macro and pass the desired arguments, as shown below: + + Sub MyMacro + ' Gives access to the line style constants + Dim cStyle as Object + Set cStyle = com.sun.star.table.BorderLineStyle + ' Formats "B5" with solid blue borders + FormatCellBorder("B5", cStyle.SOLID, 20, RGB(0, 0, 255)) + ' Formats all borders in the range "D2:F6" with red dotted borders + FormatCellBorder("D2:F6", cStyle.DOTTED, 20, RGB(255, 0, 0)) + End Sub + + It is possible to implement the same functionality in Python: + + from uno import createUnoStruct + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + + def formatCellBorder(cellAddress, newStyle, newWidth, newColor=0): + # Defines the new line format + line_format = createUnoStruct("com.sun.star.table.BorderLine2") + line_format.LineStyle = newStyle + line_format.LineWidth = newWidth + line_format.Color = newColor + # Scriptforge service to access cell ranges + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + cell = doc.XCellRange(cellAddress) + cell.TopBorder = line_format + cell.RightBorder = line_format + cell.LeftBorder = line_format + cell.BottomBorder = line_format + + The code snippet below implements a macro named myMacro that calls formatCellBorder: + + from com.sun.star.table import BorderLineStyle as cStyle + + def myMacro(): + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + formatCellBorder("B5", cStyle.SOLID, 20, bas.RGB(0, 0, 255)) + formatCellBorder("D2:F6", cStyle.DOTTED, 20, bas.RGB(255, 0, 0)) + + The Python code presented above uses the ScriptForge library that is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.2. + +
+

Line Styles

+
+ Line styles are defined as integer constants. The table below lists the constants for the line styles available in Format - Cells - Borders: + + + + Constant name + + + Integer value + + + Line style name + + + + + SOLID + + + 0 + + + Solid + + + + + DOTTED + + + 1 + + + Dotted + + + + + DASHED + + + 2 + + + Dashed + + + + + FINE_DASHED + + + 14 + + + Fine dashed + + + + + DOUBLE_THIN + + + 15 + + + Double thin + + + + + DASH_DOT + + + 16 + + + Dash dot + + + + + DASH_DOT_DOT + + + 17 + + + Dash dot dot + + +
+ Refer to the BorderLineStyle Constant Reference in the LibreOffice API documentation to learn more about line style constants. + +

Formatting Borders Using TableBorder2

+ Range objects have a property named TableBorder2 that can be used to format range borders as it is done in the Format - Cells - Borders dialog in the Line Arrangement section. + In addition to top, bottom, left and right borders, TableBorder2 also defines vertical and horizontal borders. The macro below applies only the top and bottom borders to the range "B2:E5". + + Sub TableBorder2Example + Dim cStyle as Object + Set cStyle = com.sun.star.table.BorderLineStyle + ' Defines the new line format + Dim lineFormat as New com.sun.star.table.BorderLine2 + lineFormat.LineStyle = cStyle.SOLID + lineFormat.LineWidth = 15 + lineFormat.Color = RGB(0, 0, 0) + ' Struct that stores the new TableBorder2 definition + Dim tableFormat as New com.sun.star.table.TableBorder2 + tableFormat.TopLine = lineFormat + tableFormat.BottomLine = lineFormat + tableFormat.IsTopLineValid = True + tableFormat.IsBottomLineValid = True + ' Applies the table format to the range "B2:E5" + Dim oCell as Object + oCell = ThisComponent.CurrentController.ActiveSheet.getCellRangeByName("B2:E5") + oCell.TableBorder2 = tableFormat + End Sub + + The macro can be implemented in Python as follows: + + from com.sun.star.table import BorderLineStyle as cStyle + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + + def tableBorder2Example(): + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + line_format = createUnoStruct("com.sun.star.table.BorderLine2") + line_format.LineStyle = cStyle.SOLID + line_format.LineWidth = 18 + line_format.Color = bas.RGB(0, 0, 0) + table_format = createUnoStruct("com.sun.star.table.TableBorder2") + table_format.TopLine = line_format + table_format.BottomLine = line_format + table_format.IsTopLineValid = True + table_format.IsBottomLineValid = True + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + cell = doc.XCellRange("B2:E5") + cell.TableBorder2 = table_format + + Refer to the TableBorder2 Struct Reference in the LibreOffice API documentation to learn more about its attributes. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d8ff2c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Properties of Controls in the Dialog Editor +/text/sbasic/guide/control_properties.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +properties; controls in dialog editor +changing;control properties +controls;changing properties +dialog editor;changing control properties + +Changing the Properties of Controls in the Dialog Editor + +You can set the properties of control that you add to a dialog. For example, you can change the color, name, and size of a button that you added. You can change most control properties when you create or edit a dialog. However, you can only change some properties at runtime. +To change the properties of a control in design mode, right-click the control, and then choose Properties. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e948d4467 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Creating a Basic Dialog +/text/sbasic/guide/create_dialog.xhp + + + +dialogs;creating Basic dialogs +Creating a Basic Dialog + + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Dialogs, and then click New. + + +Enter a name for the dialog and click OK. To rename the dialog later, right-click the name on the tab and choose Rename.UFI: issue #i51589# + + +Click Edit. The Basic dialog editor opens and contains a blank dialog. + + +If you do not see the Toolbox bar, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon to open the Toolbox bar. + + +Click a tool and then drag in the dialog to create the control. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbc6fdbdb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating Controls in the Dialog Editor +/text/sbasic/guide/insert_control.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +controls; creating in the dialog editor +dialog editor;creating controls + +Creating Controls in the Dialog Editor + +Use the tools on the Toolbox of the BASIC dialog editor to add controls to your dialog. + + +To open the Toolbox, click the arrow next to the Insert Controls icon on the Macro toolbar. + + +Click a tool on the toolbar, for example, Button. + + +On the dialog, drag the button to the size you want. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8dab321c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ + + + + + + + Reading and Writing values to Ranges + /text/sbasic/guide/read_write_values.xhp + + + + + + macros;read values from cells + macros;write values to cells + +

Reading and Writing values to Ranges

+ Macros in %PRODUCTNAME Calc often need to read and write values from/to sheets. This help page describes the various approaches to accessing sheets and ranges to read or write their values. + All examples presented in this page can be implemented both in Basic and Python. + +

Accessing a Single Cell

+ The example below enters the numeric value 123 into cell "A1" of the current sheet. + + Dim oSheet as Object + Dim oCell as Object + oSheet = ThisComponent.CurrentController.getActiveSheet() + oCell = oSheet.getCellRangeByName("A1") + oCell.setValue(123) + + The same can be accomplished with Python: + + doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + sheet = doc.getCurrentController().getActiveSheet() + cell = sheet.getCellRangeByName("A1") + cell.setValue(123) + + Note that in the previous examples the cell is accessed using its range name "A1". It is also possible to access cells using indices as though the sheet were a matrix where columns and rows are indexed starting from zero. + This can be done using the getCellByPosition(colIndex, rowIndex) method, that takes in a column and a row index. The example below in Basic changes the text value in cell "C1" (column 2, row 0). + + oSheet = ThisComponent.CurrentController.getActiveSheet() + oCell = oSheet.getCellByPosition(2, 0) + oCell.setString("Hello") + + This example can also be implemented in Python as follows: + + doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + sheet = doc.getCurrentController().getActiveSheet() + cell = sheet.getCellByPosition(2, 0) + cell.setString("Hello") + + The main difference between Python and Basic scripts lies on how to get access to the sheet object by using the XSCRIPTCONTEXT context variable. After that, all methods and properties are identical in Basic and Python. +

Values, Strings and Formulas

+ Calc cells can have three types of values: numeric, strings and formulas. Each type has its own set and get methods: + + + + Type + + + Get Method + + + Set Method + + + + + Numeric + + + getValue() + + + setValue(newValue) + + + + + Text + + + getString() + + + setString(newString) + + + + + Formula + + + getFormula() + + + setFormula(newFormula) + + +
+ Dates and currency values are considered as numeric values in Calc. + The following example enters numeric values into cells "A1" and "A2" and inserts a formula in cell "A3" that returns the multiplication of these values. + + oSheet = ThisComponent.CurrentController.getActiveSheet() + oCell = oSheet.getCellRangeByName("A1") + oCell.setValue(10) + oCell = oSheet.getCellRangeByName("A2") + oCell.setValue(20) + oCell = oSheet.getCellRangeByName("A3") + oCell.setFormula("=A1*A2") + +

Accessing Ranges in Different Sheets

+ The previous examples used only the active sheet to perform operations. It is possible to access cell ranges in different sheets by their indices or names. + The example below enters a numeric value into cell "A1" of the sheet named "Sheet2". + + oSheet = ThisComponent.Sheets.getByName("Sheet2") + oCell = oSheet.getCellRangeByName("A1") + oCell.setValue(123) + + This example can also be implemented in Python as follows: + + doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + sheet = doc.Sheets["Sheet2"] + cell = sheet.getCellRangeByName("A1") + cell.setValue(123) + + Sheets can also be accessed using zero-based indices indicating which sheet considering the order they appear in the Calc file. + In Basic, instead of using the getByName method, use Sheets(sheetIndex) as shown next: + + oSheet = ThisComponent.Sheets(0) + + This can be done in a similar fashion in Python: + + sheet = doc.Sheets[0] + +

Using the ScriptForge Library

+ The Calc service of the ScriptForge library can be used to get and set cell values as follows: + + ' Loads the ScriptForge library + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + ' Gets access to the current Calc document + oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + ' Sets the value of cells A1 and A2 + oDoc.setValue("A1", "Hello") + oDoc.setValue("A2", 123) + + The setValue method can be used to set both numeric and text values. To set a cell formula, use the setFormula method. + With the Calc service, getting and setting cell values can be done with a single line of code. The example below gets the value from cell "A1" and shows it on a message box. + + Dim val as Variant, oDoc as Object + oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + val = oDoc.getValue("A1") + MsgBox val + + The ScriptForge library also makes it simpler to access ranges in different sheets, as demonstrated in the example below: + + Dim val1, val2 + ' Gets cell "A1" from the sheet named "Sheet1" + val1 = oDoc.getValue("Sheet1.A1") + ' Gets cell "B3" from the sheet named "Sheet2" + val2 = oDoc.getValue("Sheet2.B3") + ' Places the result into cell "A1" of sheet "Report" + Dim result : result = val1 * val2 + oDoc.setValue("Report.A1", result) + + The examples above can also be implemented in Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + doc.setValue("A1", "Hello") + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + val = doc.getValue("A1") + bas.MsgBox(val) + + + first_val = doc.getValue("Sheet1.A1") + second_val = doc.getValue("Sheet2.B3") + result = first_val * second_val + doc.setValue("Report.A1", result) + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdb79e383 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + Programming Examples for Controls in the Dialog Editor + /text/sbasic/guide/sample_code.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + programming examples for controls + dialogs;loading (example) + dialogs;displaying (example) + controls;reading or editing properties (example) + list boxes;removing entries from (example) + list boxes;adding entries to (example) + examples; programming controls + dialog editor;programming examples for controls + Tools;LoadDialog + +
+ Programming Examples for Controls in the Dialog Editor + +
+The following examples are for a new dialog called "Dialog1". Use the tools on the Toolbox bar in the dialog editor to create the dialog and add the following controls: a Check Box called "CheckBox1", a Label Field called "Label1", a Button called "CommandButton1", and a List Box called "ListBox1". +Be consistent with uppercase and lowercase letter when you attach a control to an object variable. +Global Function for Loading Dialogs + +Function LoadDialog(Libname as String, DialogName as String, Optional oLibContainer) +Dim oLib as Object ' com.sun.star.script.XLibraryContainer +Dim oLibDialog as Object +Dim oRuntimeDialog as Object + If IsMissing(oLibContainer) Then + oLibContainer = DialogLibraries + End If + oLibContainer.LoadLibrary(LibName) + oLib = oLibContainer.GetByName(Libname) + oLibDialog = oLib.GetByName(DialogName) + oRuntimeDialog = CreateUnoDialog(oLibDialog) + LoadDialog() = oRuntimeDialog +End Function + +LoadDialog function is stored in Tools.ModuleControls available from Application Macros and Dialogs. +Displaying a Dialog + +REM global definition of variables +Dim oDialog1 AS Object +Sub StartDialog1 + With GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + oDialog1 = Tools.ModuleControls.LoadDialog("Standard", "Dialog1") + oDialog1.Execute() +End Sub + +Read or Edit Properties of Controls in the Program + +Sub Sample1 + With GlobalScope.Basiclibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + oDialog1 = Tools.LoadDialog("Standard", "Dialog1") + REM get dialog model + oDialog1Model = oDialog1.Model + REM display text of Label1 + oLabel1 = oDialog1.GetControl("Label1") + MsgBox oLabel1.Text + REM set new text for control Label1 + oLabel1.Text = "New Files" + REM display model properties for the control CheckBox1 + oCheckBox1Model = oDialog1Model.CheckBox1 + MsgBox oCheckBox1Model.Dbg_Properties + REM set new state for CheckBox1 for model of control + oCheckBox1Model.State = 1 + REM display model properties for control CommandButton1 + oCMD1Model = oDialog1Model.CommandButton1 + MsgBox oCMD1Model.Dbg_Properties + REM display properties of control CommandButton1 + oCMD1 = oDialog1.GetControl("CommandButton1") + MsgBox oCMD1.Dbg_Properties + REM execute dialog + oDialog1.Execute() +End Sub + +Add an Entry to a ListBox + +Sub AddEntry + With GlobalScope.Basiclibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + oDialog1 = ModuleControls.LoadDialog("Standard", "Dialog1") + REM adds a new entry to the ListBox + oDialog1Model = oDialog1.Model + oListBox = oDialog1.GetControl("ListBox1") + Dim iCount as integer + iCount = oListbox.ItemCount + oListbox.additem("New Item" & iCount,0) +End Sub + +Remove an Entry from a ListBox + +Sub RemoveEntry + With GlobalScope.Basiclibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + oDialog1 = Tools.ModuleControls.LoadDialogLoadDialog("Standard", "Dialog1") + REM remove the first entry from the ListBox + oDialog1Model = oDialog1.Model + oListBox = oDialog1.GetControl("ListBox1") + oListbox.removeitems(0,1) +End Sub + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..117ff796c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Opening a Dialog With Basic +/text/sbasic/guide/show_dialog.xhp + + + + + module/dialog toggle + dialogs;using Basic to show (example) + examples; showing a dialog with Basic + Tools;LoadDialog + +Opening a Dialog With Basic + +In the %PRODUCTNAME BASIC window for a dialog that you created, leave the dialog editor by clicking the name tab of the Module that the dialog is assigned to. The name tab is at the bottom of the window. +Enter the following code for a subroutine called Dialog1Show. In this example, the name of the dialog that you created is "Dialog1": + +Sub Dialog1Show + With GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + oDialog1 = Tools.ModuleControls.LoadDialog("Standard", "Dialog1") + oDialog1.Execute() +End Sub + +Without using "LoadDialog" you can call the code as follows: + +Sub Dialog1Show + DialogLibraries.LoadLibrary("Standard") + oDialog1 = CreateUnoDialog( DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 ) + oDialog1.Execute() +End Sub + +When you execute this code, "Dialog1" opens. To close the dialog, click the close button (x) on its title bar. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38608ddea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Translation of Controls in the Dialog Editor +/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp + + + +dialogs;translating +localizing dialogs +translating dialogs + +Translation of Controls in the Dialog Editor + +The Language toolbar in the Basic IDE dialog editor shows controls to enable and manage localizable dialogs. +By default, any dialog that you create only contains string resources for one language. You may want to create dialogs that automatically show localized strings according to the user's language settings. +Select the language for the strings that you want to edit. Click the Manage Languages icon to add languages.Manage Language icon is in sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp + + +Click a language, then click Default to set the language as default, or click Delete to remove the language from the list. +Opens a dialog where you can add a language to the list. +Select a language in the list and click Delete to remove that language. When you remove all languages, the string resources for localizable dialogs are removed from all dialogs in the current library. +Select a language in the list and click Default to set the language as default language. + + +The default language will be used as a source for all other language strings. +Add UI languages for your dialog strings. +To enable localizable dialogs + + +In the Basic IDE dialog editor, open the Language toolbar choosing View - Toolbars - Language. +If the current library already contains a localizable dialog, the Language toolbar is shown automatically. + + +Click the Manage Languages icon +Manage Language icon + on the Language toolbar or on the Toolbox bar. +You see the Manage User Interface Language dialog. The dialog manages languages for the current library. The name of the current library is shown on the title bar. + + +Click Add in the dialog to add a language entry. +This step enables all new dialogs to contain localizable string resources. + + +The first time you click Add, you see the Set Default User Interface Language dialog. The following times you click Add, this dialog has the name Add User Interface Language. +You can also change the default language in the Manage User Interface Language dialog. + + +Select a language. +This adds string resources to contain the translated versions of all strings to the dialog properties. The set of dialog strings of the default language is copied to the new set of strings. Later, you can switch to the new language and then translate the strings. + + +Close the dialog or add additional languages. + + +To edit localizable controls in your dialog +Once you have added the resources for localizable strings in your dialogs, you can select the current language from the Current Language listbox on the Language toolbar. + + +Switch the Current Language listbox to display the default language. + + +Insert any number of controls to your dialog and enter all strings you want. + + +Select another language in the Current Language listbox. + + +Using the control's property dialogs, edit all strings to the other language. + + +Repeat for all languages that you added. + + +The user of your dialog will see the strings of the user interface language of the user's version of %PRODUCTNAME, if you did provide strings in that language. +If no language matches the user's version, the user will see the default language strings. +If the user has an older version of %PRODUCTNAME that does not know localizable string resources for Basic dialogs, the user will see the default language strings. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e84d9b2d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + Python Scripts + /text/sbasic/python/main0000.xhp + + + + + macros;Python scripts + Python;macros + scripts;Python + +

%PRODUCTNAME Python Scripts Help

+ +
+ %PRODUCTNAME provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that allows controlling the $[officename] components with different programming languages by using the $[officename] Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information about the $[officename] API and the Software Development Kit, visit https://api.libreoffice.org + This help section explains the most common Python script functions for %PRODUCTNAME. For more in-depth information please refer to the Designing & Developing Python Applications on the Wiki. +
+

Working with Python Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME

+ You can execute Python scripts choosing Tools - Macros - Run Macro. Editing scripts can be done with your preferred text editor. Python scripts are present in various locations detailed hereafter. You can refer to Programming examples for macros illustrating how to run the Python interactive console from %PRODUCTNAME. + + + The %PRODUCTNAME scripting framework for Python is optional on some GNU/Linux distributions. If it is installed, selecting Tools - Macros - Run Macro and checking Application Macros for the presence of HelloWorld – HelloWorldPython macro is sufficient. If absent, please refer to your distribution documentation in order to install the %PRODUCTNAME scripting framework for Python. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ce9f4417 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + Python to Basic + /text/sbasic/python/python_2_basic.xhp + + + + + Python;Calling Basic + ParamArray + +

Calling Basic Macros from Python

+ You can call %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros from Python scripts, and notable features can be obtained in return such as: + + Simple logging facilities out of Access2Base library Trace console, + InputBox and MsgBox screen I/O functions based on Basic to ease Python development, + Xray calls interrupting Python script execution to help inspect variables. + +
+ The %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API) Scripting Framework supports inter-language script execution between Python and Basic, or other supported programming languages for that matter. Arguments can be passed back and forth across calls, provided that they represent primitive data types that both languages recognize, and assuming that the Scripting Framework converts them appropriately. +
+ It is recommended to have knowledge of Python standard modules and %PRODUCTNAME API features prior to perform inter-language calls from Python to Basic, JavaScript or any other script engine. + + When running Python scripts from an Integrated Development Environment (IDE), the %PRODUCTNAME-embedded Basic engine may be absent. Avoid Python-to-%PRODUCTNAME Basic calls in such contexts. However Python environment and Universal Networks Objects (UNO) are fully available. Refer to Setting Up an Integrated IDE for Python for more information. +

Retrieving %PRODUCTNAME Basic Scripts

+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros can be personal, shared, or embedded in documents. In order to execute them, Python run time needs to be provided with Basic macro locations. Implementing the com.sun.star.script.provider.XScriptProvider interface allows the retrieval of executable scripts: +
+ + API;script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory: Retrieving Basic scripts + API;script.provider.XScript: Executing Basic scripts + API;XScriptProvider: Retrieving Basic scripts + + + import uno + from com.sun.star.script.provider import Xscript + + def getBasicScript(macro='Main', module='Module1', library='Standard', + isEmbedded=False) -> XScript: + '''Grab Basic script object before invocation.''' + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.ServiceManager + if isEmbedded: + desktop = smgr.createInstanceWithContext('com.sun.star.frame.Desktop', ctx) + scriptPro = desktop.CurrentComponent.getScriptProvider() + location = "document" + else: + mspf = smgr.createInstanceWithContext( + "com.sun.star.script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory", ctx) + scriptPro = mspf.createScriptProvider("") + location = "application" + scriptName = "vnd.sun.star.script:"+library+"."+module+"."+macro+ \ + "?language=Basic&location="+location + xScript = scriptPro.getScript(scriptName) + return xScript + +
+

Executing %PRODUCTNAME Basic Scripts

+
+ + API;script.provider.XScript : Executing Basic scripts + + The %PRODUCTNAME Software Development Kit (SDK) documentation for com.sun.star.script.provider.XScript interface details the calling convention for inter-language calls. Invocation of functions requires three arrays: + + the first lists the arguments of the called routine + the second identifies modified arguments + the third stores the return values + +
+

Python Syntax

+ results = script.invoke((prompt,buttons,title), (), ()) + script.invoke((message,), tuple, ()) + script.invoke((args), (), results) +

Examples of Personal or Shared Scripts

+ Examples in Input/Output to Screen detail Python to Basic invocation calls. Monitoring Document Events illustrates the usage of *args Python idiom to print a variable number of parameters to Access2Base logging console dialog. + At time of development you can interrupt Python script execution using Xray extension in order to inspect properties and methods of UNO objects. The APSO extension debugger allows object introspection using either Xray either MRI extensions. + + def xray(myObject): + script = getBasicScript(library="XrayTool", module="_Main", macro="Xray") + script.invoke((myObject,), (), ()) + +

Examples of Embedded Scripts in Documents

+ *argsPython simplified syntax can be used in conjunction with %PRODUCTNAME Basic routines that accept a variable number of arguments. Below Print and SUM Python functions call their Basic Print and SUM counterparts, using aforementioned getBasicScript function. Exception handling is not detailed. + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + def Print(*args): + """Outputs the specified strings or numeric expressions in a dialog box.""" + xScript = getBasicScript("Print", "Scripting", embedded=True) + xScript.invoke((args), (), ()) + + def SUM(*args): + """SUM the specified number expression.""" + xScript = getBasicScript("SUM", "Scripting", embedded=True) + res = xScript.invoke((args), (), ()) + return res[0] + + # def getBasicScript() # see above + + def playWithArgs(): + Print("Fun with *args ", -9.81, 297864.681974, 8762E-137) + Print(SUM(45, -9.81, 297864.681974)) + Print(SUM(45, -9.81, 297864.681974, 8762E+137)) + + g_exportedScripts = (playWithArgs,) + + The %PRODUCTNAME Basic Print and SUM document-based routines accept a variable number of arguments. The Private or Public attributes have no effect. The arguments type checking is skipped for clarity. + + Option Compatible ' "Standard.Scripting" module + Option Explicit + + Private Sub Print(ParamArray args() As Variant, Optional sep As String = " ") + ''' Print item list of variable number ''' + ' all CStr() convertible args are accepted + Dim str As String, i As Integer + If UBound(args) >= 0 Then + For i = 0 To UBound(args) + str = str + Cstr(args(i))+ sep + Next i + End If + Print str + End Sub ' Standard.Scripting.Print() + + Public Function SUM(ParamArray args() As Variant) As Variant + ''' SUM a variable list of numbers ''' + Dim ndx As Integer + If UBound(args) >= 0 Then + For ndx = 0 To UBound(args) + SUM = SUM + args(ndx) + Next ndx + End If + End Function ' Standard.Scripting.SUM() + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee6c6ee0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + Opening a Dialog with Python + /text/sbasic/python/python_dialogs.xhp + + + + + Python;dialogs + dialog box;Python + dialogs;Python + +
+

Opening a Dialog with Python

+
+ %PRODUCTNAME static dialogs are created with the Dialog editor and are stored in varying places according to their personal (My Macros), shared (Application Macros) or document-embedded nature. In reverse, dynamic dialogs are constructed at runtime, from Basic or Python scripts, or using any other %PRODUCTNAME supported language for that matter. Opening static dialogs with Python is illustrated herewith. Exception handling and internationalization are omitted for clarity. +

My Macros or Application Macros dialogs

+ The examples below open Access2Base Trace console or the imported TutorialsDialog dialog with Tools - Macros - Run Macro menu: + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + def consoleDlg(): + ctx =XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithContext("com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider", ctx) + dlg = dp.createDialog( "vnd.sun.star.script:Access2Base.dlgTrace?location=application") + dlg.execute() + dlg.dispose() + + def tutorDialog(): + ctx =XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithContext("com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider", ctx) + dlg = dp.createDialog("vnd.sun.star.script:Standard.TutorialsDialog?location=application") + dlg.execute() + dlg.dispose() + + g_exportedScripts = (consoleDlg, tutorDialog) + +

Document embedded dialogs

+ The example below opens a newly edited Dialog1 dialog from a document with Tools - Macros - Run Macro menu: + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + def docDialog(): + """ Display a doc-based dialog """ + model = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + smgr = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext().ServiceManager + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithArguments( "com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider", (model,)) + dlg = dp.createDialog( "vnd.sun.star.script:Standard.Dialog1?location=document") + dlg.execute() + dlg.dispose() + + g_exportedScripts = (docDialog,) + + Refer to msgbox.py in {installation}/program/ directory for Python dynamic dialog examples. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..814047b1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ + + + + + + Monitoring Document Events + /text/sbasic/python/python_document_events.xhp + + + + + Basic;Monitoring Document Events + Python;Monitoring Document Events + Access2Base;Console + Access2Base;Trace + API;document.DocumentEvent: Monitoring Document Event + API;document.XDocumentEventBroadcaster: Monitoring Document Event + API;document.XDocumentEventListener: Monitoring Document Event + API;lang.EventObject: Monitoring Document Event + +
+

Listening to Document Events

+ Listening to document events can help in the following situations: + + + Identify a new document at opening time, as opposed to existing ones, and perform a dedicated setup. + + + Control the processing of document save, document copy, print or mailmerge requests. + + + Recalculate table of contents, indexes or table entries of a Writer document when document is going to be closed + + + Import math Python packages before opening a Calc document. Release these packages when the document closes. + + + Next to assigning macros to events, one can monitor events raised by %PRODUCTNAME documents. Application Programming Interface (API) broadcasters are responsible for calling event scripts. Unlike listeners that require to define all supported methods, even if unused, document monitors require only two methods next to hooked event scripts. +
+

Monitoring Document Events

+ Monitoring is illustrated herewith for Basic and Python languages using object-oriented programming. Assigning OnLoad script, to the Open Document event, suffices to initiate and terminate document event monitoring. Tools - Customize menu Events tab is used to assign either scripts. + Intercepting events helps setting scripts pre- and post-conditions such as loading and unloading libraries or track script processing in the background. Access2Base.Trace module usage is illustrating that second context. +

With Python

+ + API;frame.Desktop: Monitoring Document Event + API;script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory: Monitoring Document Event + API;script.provider.XScript: Monitoring Document Event + + Events monitoring starts from object instantiation and ultimately stops when Python releases the object. Raised events are reported using Access2Base console. + OnLoad and OnUnload events can be used to respectively set and unset Python programs path. They are described as Open document and Document closed. + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import os.path, uno, unohelper + from com.sun.star.document import DocumentEvent, \ + XDocumentEventListener as AdapterPattern + from com.sun.star.lang import EventObject + + class UiDocument(unohelper.Base, AdapterPattern): + """ Monitor document events """ + ''' + adapted from 'Python script to monitor OnSave event' at + https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/viewtopic.php?t=68887 + ''' + def __init__(self): + """ Document events monitor """ + ''' report using Access2Base.Trace console OR + report in 1st sheet, 1st column for Calc docs ''' + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + desktop = smgr.createInstanceWithContext( + 'com.sun.star.frame.Desktop' , ctx) + self.doc = desktop.CurrentComponent + #self.row = 0 # uncomment for Calc documents only + Console.setLevel("DEBUG") + self.listen() # Start monitoring doc. events + + @property + def Filename(self) -> str: + sys_filename = uno.fileUrlToSystemPath(self.doc.URL) + return os.path.basename(sys_filename) + + def setCell(self, calcDoc, txt: str): + """ Output doc. events on 1st column of a Calc spreadsheet """ + sheet = calcDoc.getSheets().getByIndex(0) + sheet.getCellByPosition(0,self.row).setString(txt) + self.row = self.row + 1 + + def listen(self, *args): # OnLoad/OnNew at the earliest + """ Start doc. events monitoring """ + self.doc.addDocumentEventListener(self) + Console.log("INFO", "Document events are being logged", True) + + def sleep(self, *args): # OnUnload at the latest (optional) + """ Stop doc. events monitoring """ + self.doc.removeDocumentEventListener(self) + Console.log("INFO", "Document events have been logged", True) + + def documentEventOccured(self, event: DocumentEvent): + """ Intercepts all doc. events """ + #self.setCell(event.Source, event.EventName) # only for Calc docs + Console.log("DEBUG", + event.EventName+" in "+self.Filename, + False) + + def disposing(self, event: EventObject): + """ Release all activities """ + self.sleep() + Console.show() + + def OnLoad(*args): # 'Open Document' event + listener = UiDocument() # Initiates listening + + def OnUnload(*args): # 'Document has been closed' event + pass # (optional) performed when disposed + + g_exportedScripts = (OnLoad,) + + from com.sun.star.script.provider import XScript + class Console(): + """ + (Back/Fore)ground console to report/log program execution. + """ + @staticmethod + def trace(*args,**kwargs): + """ Print free item list to console """ + scr = Console._a2bScript(script='DebugPrint', module='Compatible') + scr.invoke((args),(),()) + @staticmethod + def log(level: str, text: str, msgBox=False): + """ Append log message to console, optional user prompt """ + scr = Console._a2bScript(script='TraceLog') + scr.invoke((level,text,msgBox),(),()) + @staticmethod + def setLevel(logLevel: str): + """ Set log messages lower limit """ + scr = Console._a2bScript(script='TraceLevel') + scr.invoke((logLevel,),(),()) + @staticmethod + def show(): + """ Display console content/dialog """ + scr = Console._a2bScript(script='TraceConsole') + scr.invoke((),(),()) + @staticmethod + def _a2bScript(script: str, library='Access2Base', + module='Trace') -> XScript: + ''' Grab application-based Basic script ''' + sm = uno.getComponentContext().ServiceManager + mspf = sm.createInstanceWithContext( + "com.sun.star.script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory", + uno.getComponentContext()) + scriptPro = mspf.createScriptProvider("") + scriptName = "vnd.sun.star.script:"+library+"."+module+"."+script+"?language=Basic&location=application" + xScript = scriptPro.getScript(scriptName) + return xScript + + Mind the misspelled documentEventOccured method that inherits a typo from %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API). + Start application and Close application events can respectively be used to set and to unset Python path for user scripts or %PRODUCTNAME scripts. In a similar fashion, document based Python libraries or modules can be loaded and released using Open document and Document closed events. Refer to Importing Python Modules for more information. +

With %PRODUCTNAME Basic

+ + API;GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + Tools;Strings + + Using Tools - Customize menu Events tab, the Open document event fires a ConsoleLogger initialisation. _documentEventOccured routine - set by ConsoleLogger - serves as a unique entry point to trap all document events. +

controller.Events module

+ + Option Explicit + + Global _obj As Object ' controller.ConsoleLogger instance + + Sub OnLoad(evt As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent) ' >> Open Document << + _obj = New ConsoleLogger : _obj.StartAdapter(evt) + End Sub ' controller.OnLoad + Sub _documentEventOccured(evt As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent) + ''' ConsoleLogger unique entry point ''' + _obj.DocumentEventOccurs(evt) + End Sub ' controller._documentEventOccured + +

controller.ConsoleLogger class module

+ Events monitoring starts from the moment a ConsoleLogger object is instantiated and ultimately stops upon document closure. StartAdapter routine loads necessary Basic libraries, while caught events are reported using Access2Base.Trace module. + + Option Explicit + Option Compatible + Option ClassModule + + ' ADAPTER design pattern object to be instantiated in the "Open Document" event + Private Const UI_PROMPT = True + Private Const UI_NOPROMPT = False ' Set it to True to visualise documents events + + ' MEMBERS + Private _evtAdapter As Object ' com.sun.star.document.XDocumentEventBroadcaster + Private _txtMsg As String ' text message to log in console + + ' PROPERTIES + Private Property Get FileName As String + ''' System-dependent filename ''' + Const _LIBRARY = "Tools" : With GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded(_LIBRARY) Then .LoadLibrary(_LIBRARY) + End With + Filename = Tools.Strings.FilenameOutofPath(ThisComponent.URL) + End Property ' controller.ConsoleLogger.Filename + + ' METHODS + Public Sub DocumentEventOccurs(evt As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent) + ''' Monitor document events ''' + Access2Base.Trace.TraceLog("DEBUG", _ + evt.EventName &" in "& Filename(evt.Source.URL), _ + UI_NOPROMPT) + Select Case evt.EventName + Case "OnUnload" : _StopAdapter(evt) + End Select + End Sub ' controller.ConsoleLogger.DocumentEventOccurs + + Public Sub StartAdapter(Optional evt As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent) + ''' Initialize document events logging ''' + Const _LIBRARY = "Access2Base" : With GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded(_LIBRARY) Then .LoadLibrary(_LIBRARY) + End With : Access2Base.Trace.TraceLevel("DEBUG") + If IsMissing(evt) Then _txtMsg = "" Else _txtMsg = evt.EventName & "-" + Access2Base.Trace.TraceLog("INFO", _txtMsg & "Document events are being logged", UI_PROMPT) + _evtAdapter = CreateUnoListener( "_", "com.sun.star.document.XDocumentEventListener" ) + ThisComponent.addDocumentEventListener( _evtAdapter ) + End Sub ' controller.ConsoleLogger.StartAdapter + + Private Sub _StopAdapter(Optional evt As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent) + ''' Terminate document events logging ''' + ThisComponent.removeDocumentEventListener( _evtAdapter ) + If IsMissing(evt) Then _txtMsg = "" Else _txtMsg = evt.EventName & "-" + Access2Base.Trace.TraceLog("INFO", _txtMsg & "Document events have been logged", UI_PROMPT) + Access2Base.Trace.TraceConsole() ' Captured events dialog + End Sub ' controller.ConsoleLogger._StopAdapter + + ' EVENTS + ' Your code for handled events goes here + + Mind the misspelled _documentEventOccured method that inherits a typo from %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API). +

Discovering Documents Events

+ + API;frame.GlobalEventBroadcaster: Monitoring Document Event + + The broadcaster API object provides the list of events it is responsible for: +

With Python

+ + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import uno, apso_utils as ui + + def displayAvailableEvents(): + """ Display document events """ + ''' + adapted from DisplayAvailableEvents() by A. Pitonyak + https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/viewtopic.php?&t=43689 + ''' + ctx = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.ServiceManager + geb = smgr.createInstanceWithContext( + "com.sun.star.frame.GlobalEventBroadcaster", ctx) + events = geb.Events.getElementNames() + ui.msgbox('; '.join(events)) + + g_exportedScripts = (displayAvailableEvents,) + + The Alternative Python Script Organizer (APSO) extension is used to render events information on screen. +

With %PRODUCTNAME Basic

+ + Sub DisplayAvailableEvents + ''' Display document events ''' + Dim geb As Object ' com.sun.star.frame.GlobalEventBroadcaster + Dim events() As String + geb = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.frame.GlobalEventBroadcaster") + events = geb.Events.ElementNames() + MsgBox Join(events, "; ") + End Sub + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5b496ed0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + Python examples + /text/sbasic/python/python_examples.xhp + + + +
+ + Python;examples + Python;shell + Python;platform + Python;session + Python;screen input/output + +

Python programming examples

+
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87887105e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + Creating A Dialog Handler + /text/sbasic/python/python_handler.xhp + + + + + Basic;Dialog Handler + Python;Dialog Handler + Access2Base;dlgTrace + Access2Base;_DumpToFile + API;DialogProvider2 + API;XDialogEventHandler + + +

Creating a Dialog Handler

+ Next to assigning macros to events or creating event listeners, one can use dialog handlers, whose principle is to define UNO keywords, or methods, that are mapped to events to watch for. The event handler is responsible for executing methods using the vnd.sun.star.UNO:<method_name> protocol. Unlike listeners that require to define all supported methods, even if unused, dialog handlers require only two methods on top of intended control hook scripts. + The advantages of this approach are: + + It packs the code that handles event-driven macros, + it decorrelates events from macros names which facilitates maintenance or updates, in particular when moving macros or modules. + + This mechanism is illustrated herewith for Basic and Python languages using an imported copy of Access2Base dlgTrace dialog. Exception handling and localisation are omitted for clarity. +

Assigning Dialog methods

+ Export Access2Base dlgTrace dialog and import it into MyLib application library. + Inside the control properties pane of the Dialog Editor, use the Events tab to replace macro assignments by component assignments, and type in the intended method names: + + Set Dump to file dialog button component method name to _dump2File + Optionally define txtTracelog key pressed and mouse button pressed events component method names as _openHelp + Optionally define Ok button receiving focus event component method name as onOkHasfocus + + Events assigned actions should mention the vnd.sun.star.UNO: protocol. +

Creating the handler

+ createDialogWithHandler method of com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider2 service is used to set the dialog and its handler. The handler is responsible for implementing com.sun.star.awt.XDialogEventHandler interface. + All component method names must be explicitly declared when using a dialog handler. +

With Python

+ In this example the dialog is located on the computer. + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import uno, unohelper + from com.sun.star.awt import XDialogEventHandler + + _DLG_PROVIDER = "com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider2" + + class Console(unohelper.Base, XDialogEventHandler): + """ Access2Base Console Handler """ + ''' adapted from « Créer un dialogue avec gestionnaire d'événements » by JM Zambon + https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/FR/Documentation/Python/Creating_Dialog_with_Handler ''' + def show(self): + dialog = self.getDialog("MyLib.dlgTrace", embedded=True) + dialog.Title = "Konsole" + dialog.execute() + + def callHandlerMethod(self, dialog, event, method): + if method == '_dump2File': + event.Source.setLabel("dump requested") + scr = getBasicScript(script="_DumpToFile", module="Trace", + library='Access2Base') + scr.invoke((event,), (), ()) + elif method == '_openHelp': + _msgbox('Not yet implemented') + dialog.endDialog(1) + else: + return False + + def getSupportedMethodNames(self): + return ('_dump2File', '_openHelp') + + def getDialog(self, libr_dlg: str, embedded=False): + """ Create a Dialog from its location """ + smgr = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext().ServiceManager + if embedded: + model = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithArguments(_DLG_PROVIDER, (model,)) + location = "?location=document" + else: + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithContext(_DLG_PROVIDER, ctx) + location = "?location=application" + dlg = dp.createDialogWithHandler("vnd.sun.star.script:"+libr_dlg+location, self) + return dlg + + + # def getBasicScript() # see note + + def _msgbox(prompt='', title=''): + ''' Ugly MsgBox ''' + import msgbox + mb = msgbox.MsgBox(uno.getComponentContext()) + mb.addButton('Howdy') + mb.show(prompt,0,title) + + def ConsoleHandler(): + Console().show() + + g_exportedScripts = (ConsoleHandler,) + + + As expected, onOkHasFocus missing method throws an exception. + Refer to Python calls to %PRODUCTNAME Basic page for getBasicScript routine description and for details about cross-language scripting execution. +

With %PRODUCTNAME Basic

+ In this example the dialog is embedded in a document, and can equally be located on the computer. + + ' <MyLib>.<Handler> module + + Public Sub Console_Show() + Dim dp as Object ' com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider2 + Dim dialog As Object ' com.sun.star.awt.XDialog, com.sun.star.awt.XDialogEventHandler + Dim eventHandler As Object ' com.sun.star.awt.XDialogEventHandler + dp = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider2") + dp.Initialize(Array(ThisComponent)) ' if doc-embedded dialog + eventHandler = CreateUnoListener("Console_", "com.sun.star.awt.XDialogEventHandler") + dialog = dp.createDialogWithHandler("vnd.sun.star.script:MyLib.dlgTrace?location=document", eventHandler) + dialog.Title = "Konsole" + dialog.execute() + End Sub ' <Handler>.Console_Show() + + Private Function Console_callHandlerMethod(dialog as Object, _ + event As com.sun.star.document.DocumentEvent, _ + method As String) As Boolean + ''' Intercept dialog events using .UNO protocol ''' + Console_callHandlerMethod = True + Select Case method + Case "_dump2File" + event.Source.setLabel("dump requested") + With GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Access2Base") Then .LoadLibrary("Access2Base") + End With + Access2Base.Trace._DumpToFile + Case "_openHelp" + MsgBox "Not yet implemented",0 , "Howdy" + 'dialog.endDialog(1) if computer-based dialog + Case Else : Console_callHandlerMethod = False + End Select + End Function ' <Handler>.Console_callHandlerMethod + + Private Function Console_getSupportedMethodNames() + Console_getSupportedMethodNames = Array("_dump2File", "_openHelp") + End Function ' <Handler>.Console _getSupportedMethodNames + + ' adapted from « Créer un dialogue avec gestionnaire d'événements » by JM Zambon + ' https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/FR/Documentation/Python/Creating_Dialog_with_Handler + + As expected, onOkHasFocus missing method throws an exception. +
+ + + CreateUnoListener Function + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6d715630 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + IDE for Python + /text/sbasic/python/python_ide.xhp + + + +
+ + + APSO + Alternative Python Scripts Organizer + python;IDE - integrated development environment + python;editor + +

Setting up an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for Python

+ Writing Python macros requires extra configuration steps to set an IDE of choice. +
+ Unlike Basic language macros development in %PRODUCTNAME, developing Python scripts for %PRODUCTNAME requires to configure an external Integrated Development Environment (IDE). Multiple IDEs are available that range from beginners to advanced Python coders. While using a Python IDE programmers benefit from numerous features such as syntax highlighting, code folding, class browsing, code completion, coding standard enforcement, test driven development, debugging, version control and many more. You can refer to Designing & Developing Python Applications on the Wiki for more in-depth information about the setup of a bridge between your IDE and a running instance %PRODUCTNAME. +

The APSO Extension

+ The Alternative Python Script Organizer (APSO) extension eases the edition of Python scripts, in particular when embedded in a document. Using APSO you can configure your preferred source code editor, start the integrated Python shell and debug Python scripts. Extensions exist that help inspect arbitrary UNO objects, refer to Designing & Developing Python Applications for additional details on such extensions. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af3b243d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + Python : Importing Modules + /text/sbasic/python/python_import.xhp + + + + + Python;import + Python;Modules + Python;pythonpath + PythonLibraries + +

Importing Python Modules

+ %PRODUCTNAME Python scripts come in three distinct flavors, they can be personal, shared or embedded in documents. They are stored in varying places described in Python Scripts Organization and Location. In order to import Python modules, their locations must be known from Python at run time. + This mechanism is illustrated for file system based modules and document based modules. Exception handling is omitted for clarity. The terms library or directory, scripts or modules are used interchangeably. A Python macro refers to a function inside a module. + Note that <User Profile>/Scripts/python/pythonpath local directory is always explored when running a Python macro from <User Profile>/Scripts/python. +

File System module import

+ +

User or Shared Modules

+ Personal & shared Python scripts can be imported once their directories are included in Python run time path. Refer to Getting session information page for more details regarding omitted Session Class. + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + import sys + + user_lib = Session().UserPythonScripts # User scripts location + if not user_lib in sys.path: + sys.path.insert(0, user_lib) # Add to search path + import screen_io as ui # 'screen_io.py' module resides in user_lib directory + # Your code follows here + + This Python example exposes a local XSCRIPTCONTEXT variable to an imported module: + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + import uno, sys + + share_lib = Session.SharedPythonScripts() # Shared scripts location + if not share_lib in sys.path: + sys.path.insert(0, share_lib) # Add to search path + from IDE_utils import ScriptContext # 'IDE_utils.py' sits with shared Python scripts. + XSCRIPTCONTEXT = ScriptContext(uno.getComponentContext) + # Your code follows here + +

Installation Modules for Applications

+ Unlike personal and shared scripts, %PRODUCTNAME installation scripts can be imported any time. Next to uno & unohelper %PRODUCTNAME Python modules, other scripts present in <installation_path>/program directory can be imported directly, such as the msgbox module. + With Python shell: + >>> import msgbox, uno + >>> myBox = msgbox.MsgBox(uno.getComponentContext()) + >>> myBox.addButton("okay") + >>> myBox.renderFromButtonSize() + >>> myBox.numberOflines = 2 + >>> print(myBox.show("A small message",0,"Dialog title")) +

Document Module Import

+ Importing a Python document embedded module is illustrated below. Error handling is not detailed. Python run time path is updated when document has been opened and before closure. Refer to Event-Driven Macros to learn how to associate Python macros to document events. + + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import sys, uno + + def OnDocPostOpenLoadPython(): + """ Prepare Python modules import when doc. loaded """ + PythonLibraries.loadLibrary('lib/subdir') # Add directory to search path + PythonLibraries.loadLibrary('my_gui', 'screen_io') # Add dir. & import screen_io + + def OnDocQueryCloseUnloadPython(): + """ Cleanup PYTHON_PATH when doc. Gets closed """ + PythonLibraries.unloadLibrary('my_gui') # Python runtime path cleanup + # Note: imported modules remain loaded in this example. + + class PythonLibraries(): + """ Python library loader and module importer + + adapted from 'Bibliothèque de fonctions' by Hubert Lambert + at https://forum.openoffice.org/fr/forum/viewtopic.php?p=286213 """ + def isImportedModule(module_name: str) -> bool: + """ Check run time module list """ + return (module_name in sys.modules.keys()) + def isLoadedLibrary(lib_name: str) -> bool: + """ Check PYTHON_PATH content """ + return (lib_name in sys.path) + def loadLibrary(lib_name: str, module_name=None): + """ add directory to PYTHON_PATH, import named module """ + doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + url = uno.fileUrlToSystemPath( + '{}/{}'.format(doc.URL,'Scripts/python/'+lib_name) + if not url in sys.path: + sys.path.insert(0, url) + if module_name and not module_name in sys.modules.keys(): + return zipimport.zipimporter(url).load_module(module_name) + def unloadLibrary(lib_name: str): + """ remove directory from PYTHON_PATH """ + sys.path.remove(lib_name) + + g_exportedScripts = (OnDocPostOpenLoadPython, OnDocQueryCloseUnloadPython) + +
+ + + + + Refer to Creating a Python Listener for examples of event-driven macros. + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cffde6a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + Python Listeners : Creating Event Listeners + /text/sbasic/python/python_listener.xhp + + + + + Python;Event Listener + Python;createUnoListener + Basic;Event Listener + API;ActionEvent + API;DialogProvider + API;EventObject + API;ExecutableDialogResults + API;XActionListener + +
+

Creating Event Listeners

+
+ Events raised by dialogs, documents, forms or graphical controls can be linked to macros, which is referred to as event-driven programming. The most common method to relate events to macros are the Events tab in Tools – Customize menu and the Dialog Editor Control properties pane from Tools - Macros – Organise Dialogs... menu. + Graphical artifacts, keyboard inputs, mouse moves and other man/machine interactions can be controlled using UNO listeners that watch for the user’s behavior. Listeners are dynamic program code alternatives to macro assignments. One may create as many UNO listeners as events to watch for. A single listener can also handle multiple user interface controls. +

Creating an event listener

+ Listeners get attached to controls held in dialogs, as well as to document or form events. Listeners are also used when creating runtime dialogs or when adding controls to a dialog on the fly. + This example creates a listener for Button1 control of Dialog1 dialog in Standard library. +

With Python

+ + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import uno, unohelper + from com.sun.star.awt import XActionListener + from com.sun.star.awt import ActionEvent + from com.sun.star.lang import EventObject + from com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults \ + import OK, CANCEL + import msgbox as util + + _MY_BUTTON = "Button1" + _MY_LABEL = 'Python listens..' + _DLG_PROVIDER = "com.sun.star.awt.DialogProvider" + + def Main(*args): + ui = createUnoDialog("Standard.Dialog1", embedded=True) + ui.Title = "Python X[any]Listener" + ctl = ui.getControl(_MY_BUTTON) + ctl.Model.Label = _MY_LABEL + act = ActionListener() + ctl.addActionListener(act) + rc = ui.execute() + if rc == OK: + MsgBox("The user acknowledged the dialog.") + elif rc == CANCEL: + MsgBox("The user canceled the dialog.") + ui.dispose() # ui.endExecute + ctl.removeActionListener(act) + + def createUnoDialog(libr_dlg: str, embedded=False): + """ Create a Dialog from its location """ + smgr = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext().ServiceManager + if embedded: + model = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithArguments(_DLG_PROVIDER, (model,)) + location = "?location=document" + else: + dp = smgr.createInstanceWithContext(_DLG_PROVIDER, ctx) + location = "?location=application" + dlg = dp.createDialog("vnd.sun.star.script:"+libr_dlg+location) + return dlg + + class ActionListener(unohelper.Base, XActionListener): + """ Listen to & count button clicks """ + def __init__(self): + self.count = 0 + + def actionPerformed(self, evt: ActionEvent): + self.count = self.count + 1 + #mri(evt) + if evt.Source.Model.Name == _MY_BUTTON: + evt.Source.Model.Label = _MY_LABEL+ str( self.count ) + return + + def disposing(self, evt: EventObject): # mandatory routine + pass + + def MsgBox(txt: str): + mb = util.MsgBox(uno.getComponentContext()) + mb.addButton("Ok") + mb.show(txt, 0, "Python") + + g_exportedScripts = (Main,) + + + msgbox.py in {installation}/program/ directory has some examples of button listeners. + +

With %PRODUCTNAME Basic

+ + Option Explicit + + Const MY_LIBRARY = "Standard", MY_DIALOG = "Dialog1", MY_BUTTON = "Button1" + Const MY_LABEL = "Basic listens.." + Dim count As Integer + + Sub Main + Dim libr As Object ' com.sun.star.script.XLibraryContainer + Dim dlg As Object + Dim ui As Object ' stardiv.Toolkit.UnoDialogControl + Dim ctl As Object ' stardiv.Toolkit.UnoButtonControl + Dim act As Object ' com.sun.star.awt.XActionListener + Dim rc As Object : rc = com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults + + BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary(MY_LIBRARY) + libr = DialogLibraries.GetByName(MY_LIBRARY) + dlg = libr.GetByName(MY_DIALOG) + ui = CreateUnoDialog(dlg) + ui.Title = "Basic X[any]Listener example" + count = 0 + ctl = ui.GetControl(MY_BUTTON) + ctl.Model.Label = MY_LABEL + act = CreateUnoListener("awt_", "com.sun.star.awt.XActionListener") + ctl.addActionListener(act) + Select Case ui.Execute + Case rc.OK : MsgBox "The user acknowledged the dialog.",, "Basic" + Case rc.CANCEL : MsgBox "The user canceled the dialog.",, "Basic" + End Select + ui.dispose ' ui.endExecute() + ctl.removeActionListener(act) + End Sub + + Private Sub awt_actionPerformed(evt As com.sun.star.awt.ActionEvent) + ''' Listen to & count button clicks ''' + With evt.Source.Model + If .Name = MY_BUTTON Then + count = count + 1 + .Label = MY_LABEL+Cstr(count) + End If + End With + End Sub ' awt_actionPerformed + + Private Sub awt_disposing(evt As com.sun.star.lang.EventObject) ' mandatory Sub + ' your code goes here + End Sub ' awt_disposing + +

Other Event Listeners

+ Listeners are usually coded along with dialog opening. Numerous listener approaches are possible such as event handlers for dialogs or event monitors for documents or forms. +
+ + CreateUnoListener Function + Events mapping to objects + See also Document events, Form events. + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f145416a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Python Scripts Organization + /text/sbasic/python/python_locations.xhp + + + +
+ Python Scripts Organization and Location + %PRODUCTNAME macros are grouped in module files, modules are usually grouped in library folders, and libraries are grouped in library containers although containers can contain modules too. + A library is used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros, or for an entire application. Modules usually split functionality, such as user interaction and calculations. Individual macros are subroutines and functions. The Figure below shows an example of the hierarchical structure of macro libraries in %PRODUCTNAME. + Library Container diagram + Figure: Macro Library hierarchy + The containers are accessible in all %PRODUCTNAME programs through the user interface. Go to Tools > Macros > Organize Macros > Python, to open the Python Macros dialog. + Three library containers are shown in the Macro From list: + + + My Macros: personal macros available for the %PRODUCTNAME user + + + Application Macros: system macros distributed with %PRODUCTNAME for every computer user + + + Document macros: every document can contain macro libraries available in that document for all users + + +
+

Python Script Locations

+ Refer to Getting Session Information in order to get programmatic access to Python script locations. +

Application Macros

+ Existing macros in this location (container) were copied by the installation program and are available to every computer user, and any open document can access macros stored the container. You need administrative rights to store or edit macros here. + The %PRODUCTNAME Macros container location in the file system depends on the operating system: + + + For Windows: {Installation}\share\Scripts\python. + + + For Linux and macOS: {Installation}/share/Scripts/python. + + +

My Macros

+ This container is accessible only by the %PRODUCTNAME user. Any open document can access macros stored the container. Macros in this location are stored in the %PRODUCTNAME user profile. + The My Macros container location is in the user space and depends on the operating system: + + + For Windows,
%APPDATA%\LibreOffice\4\user\Scripts\python. + + + For Linux and macOS,
$HOME/.config/libreoffice/4/user/Scripts/python. + + +

Document macros

+ Document macros are embedded in the document and are accessible only when the document is open. +

Libraries, Modules and Macros

+ Python macros can be organized in libraries, modules and macros. Use the Macro Library hierarchy as a guide when creating or installing new macros in module files, new module files in library folders or new library folders in containers. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364e067f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + Python : Platform class + /text/sbasic/python/python_platform.xhp + + + + + Platform;isLinux + Platform;isMacOsX + Platform;isWindows + Platform;ComputerName + Platform;OSName + API;ConfigurationAccess + Tools;GetRegistryContent + +

Identifying the operating system

+ Identifying the operating system can be performed with Python or Basic language. + ComputerName property is solely available for Windows. Basic calls to Python macros help overcome %PRODUCTNAME Basic limitations. +

Using a Python class:

+ + import os, platform + class Platform(): + @property + def ComputerName(self): return platform.node() + @property + def DirSeparator(self): return os.sep + @property + def isLinux(self): return (self.OSName=='Linux') + @property + def isMacOSX(self): return (self.OSName=='Darwin') + @property + def isWindows(self): return (self.OSName=='Windows') + @property + def OSName(self): return platform.system() + @property + def PathDelimiter(self): return os.pathsep + +

Using a Basic classmodule:

+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic lacks MacOS X native recognition. Platform identification is possible using %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API). + + Option Compatible + Option ClassModule + Option Explicit + + Public Property Get ComputerName As String + If isWindows Then ComputerName = Environ("ComputerName") + End Property ' Platform.ComputerName + + Public Property Get DirSeparator As String + DirSeparator = GetPathSeparator() + End Property ' Platform.DirSeparator + + Public Property Get IsLinux As Boolean + isLinux = ( GetGUIType()=4 ) ' Applies to macOS as well + End Property ' Platform.isLinux + + Public Property Get IsMacOSX As Boolean + isMacOSX = ( OSName="MAC" ) + End Property ' Platform.isMacOSX + + Public Property Get IsWindows As Boolean + isWindows = ( GetGUIType()=1 ) + End Property ' Platform.isWindows + + Public Property Get OSName As String + ' Return platform name as "MAC", "UNIX", "WIN" + ' Inferred from "Tools.UCB.ShowHelperDialog" function + With GlobalScope.Basiclibraries + If Not .IsLibraryLoaded("Tools") Then .LoadLibrary("Tools") + End With + Dim keyNode As Object ' com.sun.star.configuration.ConfigurationAccess + keyNode = Tools.Misc.GetRegistryKeyContent("org.openoffice.Office.Common/Help") + OSName = keyNode.GetByName("System") + End Property ' Platform.OSName + + Public Property Get PathDelimiter As String + Select Case OSName + Case "MAC", "UNIX" : PathDelimiter = ":" + Case "WIN" : PathDelimiter = ";" + End Select + End Property ' Platform.PathDelimiter + +

Examples:

+ With Python + >>> from <the_module> import Platform + >>> print(Platform().isMacOSX) # object property + True + >>> input(Platform().OSName) # object property + Darwin + + From Tools – Macros - Run Macro... menu. + + from <the_module> import Platform + import screen_io as ui + p = Platform() + ui.MsgBox(''.join(['isMacOS: ',str(p.isMacOSX)]),0,p.OSName) + + With %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + Sub Platform_example() + Dim p As New Platform ' instance of Platform class + MsgBox p.isLinux ' object property + Print p.isWindows, p.OSName ' object properties + End Sub ' Platform_example + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96deb8606 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,321 @@ + + + + + + Python : Programming with Python + /text/sbasic/python/python_programming.xhp + + + + + Python;Programming + XSCRIPTCONTEXT;Python + XSCRIPTCONTEXT;getComponentContext() + uno.py + uno.py;getComponentContext() + +
+

Programming with Python Scripts

+
+ A Python macro is a function within a .py file, identified as a module. Unlike %PRODUCTNAME Basic and its dozen of UNO objects functions or services, Python macros use the XSCRIPTCONTEXT UNO single object, shared with JavaScript and BeanShell. The g_exportedScripts global tuple explicitly lists selectable macros from a module. Python modules hold autonomous code logic, and are independent from one another. +

XSCRIPTCONTEXT Global Variable

+ Genuine Basic UNO facilities can be inferred from XSCRIPTCONTEXT global variable. Refer to %PRODUCTNAME API for a complete description of XSCRIPTCONTEXT. XSCRIPTCONTEXT methods summarize as: + + + + Methods + + + Description + + + Mapped in Basic as + + + + + getDocument() + + + The document reference on which the script can operate. + + + ThisComponent + + + + + getDesktop() + + + The desktop reference on which the script can operate. + + + StarDesktop + + + + + getComponentContext() + + + The component context which the script can use to create other uno components. + + + GetDefaultContext + + +
+ HelloWorld and Capitalise installation shared scripts illustrate UNO-related macros making use of XSCRIPTCONTEXT global variable. + Python standard output file is not available when running Python macros from Tools - Macros - Run Macro menu. Refer to Input/Output to Screen for more information. +

Module import

+ XSCRIPTCONTEXT is not provided to imported modules. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries contain classes, routines and variables, Python modules contain classes, functions and variables. Common pieces of reusable Python or UNO features must be stored in My macros within (User Profile)/Scripts/python/pythonpath. Python libraries help organize modules in order to prevent module name collisions. Import uno.py inside shared modules. +
+ Genuine BASIC UNO facilities can be inferred using uno.py module. Use Python interactive shell to get a complete module description using dir() and help() Python commands. + + + + Functions + + + Description + + + Mapped in Basic as + + + + + absolutize() + + + Returns an absolute file url from the given urls. + + + + + + + createUnoStruct() + + + Creates a UNO struct or exception given by typeName. + + + CreateUNOStruct() + + + + + fileUrlToSystemPath() + + + Returns a system path. + + + ConvertFromURL() + + + + + getClass() + + + Returns the class of a concrete UNO exception, struct, or interface. + + + + + + + getComponentContext() + + + Returns the UNO component context used to initialize the Python runtime. + + + GetDefaultContext() + + + + + Enum() + getConstantByName() + + + Looks up the value of an IDL constant by giving its explicit name. + + + See API constant groups + + + + + isInterface() + + + Returns True, when obj is a class of a UNO interface. + + + + + + + systemPathToFileUrl() + + + Returns a file URL for the given system path. + + + ConvertToURL() + + +
+ LibreLogo and TableSample installation shared scripts use uno.py module. +

More Python-Basic samples

+ + + + Python UNO + + + Basic UNO features + + + + + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + obj = smgr.createInstanceWithContext( .. , ctx) + + + CreateUnoService() + + + + + See Opening a Dialog + + + CreateUnoDialog() + + + + + See Creating a Listener + + + CreateUnoListener() + + + + + See UNO data types + + + CreateUnoValue() + CreateObject() + + + + + + + EqualUnoObjects() + + + + + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + + + GetProcessServiceManager() + + + + + def hasUnoInterfaces(obj, *interfaces): + return set(interfaces).issubset(t.typeName for t in obj.Types) + + + + HasUnoInterfaces() + + + + + + + IsUnoStruct() + + + + + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + DESK = 'com.sun.star.frame.Desktop' + desktop = smgr.createInstanceWithContext(DESK , ctx) + + + StarDesktop + + + + + desktop = smgr.createInstanceWithContext(DESK , ctx) + doc = desktop.CurrentComponent + + + ThisComponent + + +
+

Importing an embedded Module

+
+ Similarly to %PRODUCTNAME Basic that supports browsing and dynamic loading of libraries, Python libraries can be explored and imported on demand. For more information on library containers, visit %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API) or download %PRODUCTNAME Software Development Kit (SDK). + Importing a Python document embedded module is illustrated below, exception handling is not detailed: + + import uno, sys + + def load_library(library_name: str, module_name=None): + """ load library and import module + + Adapted from 'Bibliothèque de fonctions' by Hubert Lambert + at https://forum.openoffice.org/fr/forum/viewtopic.php?p=286213""" + doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument() # current document + url = uno.fileUrlToSystemPath( \ + '{}/{}'.format(doc.URL, 'Scripts/python'+library_name)) # ConvertToURL() + if not url in sys.path: # add path if necessary + sys.path.insert(0, url) # doclib takes precedence + if module_name: # import if requested + return zipimport.zipimporter(url).load_module(module_name) + + def import_embedded_python(): + ui = load_library("my_gui",'screen_io') # add <lib> path + import <module> + ui.MsgBox(sys.modules.keys()) + + g_exportedScripts = (import_embedded_python,) # Public macros + +
+
+ Basic UNO Objects, Functions and Services + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b88fa923a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + Python : Screen Input/Output + /text/sbasic/python/python_screen.xhp + + + + + Python;InputBox + Python;MsgBox + Python;Print + API;script.provider.MasterScriptProvider: Screen Input/Output + API;script.provider.XScript: Screen Input/Output + +

Input/Output to Screen

+ Python standard output file is not available when running Python macros from Tools – Macros - Run Macro... menu. Presenting the output of a module requires the Python interactive console. Features such as input(), print(), repr() and str() are available from the Python shell. + The Alternative Python Script Organizer (APSO) extension offers a msgbox() function out of its apso_utils module. + %PRODUCTNAME Basic proposes InputBox(), Msgbox() and Print() screen I/O functions. Python alternatives exist relying either on %PRODUCTNAME API Abstract Windowing Toolkit, either on Python to Basic function calls. The latter proposes a syntax that is intentionally close to that of Basic, and uses a Python module next to a Basic module. The API Scripting Framework is used to perform Basic, BeanShell, JavaScript and Python inter-languages function calls. +

Python syntax:

+ MsgBox(txt, buttons=0, title=None)
 + InputBox(txt, title=None, default=None)
 + Print(txt) +

Examples:

+ >>> import screen_io as ui + >>> reply = ui.InputBox('Please enter a phrase', title='Dear user', defaultValue="here..") + >>> rc = ui.MsgBox(reply, title="Confirmation of phrase") + >>> age = ui.InputBox('How old are you?', title="Hi") + >>> ui.Print(age) +

Installation:

+ + + Copy screen_io Python module in My macros within <UserProfile>/Scripts/python/pythonpath, + + + Copy uiScripts Basic module in My macros Standard Basic library, + + + Restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + +

screen_io Python module

+ + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + def MsgBox(prompt: str, buttons=0, title='LibreOffice') -> int: + """ Displays a dialog box containing a message and returns a value.""" + xScript = _getScript("_MsgBox") + res = xScript.invoke((prompt,buttons,title), (), ()) + return res[0] + + def InputBox(prompt: str, title='LibreOffice', defaultValue='') -> str: + """ Displays a prompt in a dialog box at which the user can enter text.""" + xScript = _getScript("_InputBox") + res = xScript.invoke((prompt,title,defaultValue), (), ()) + return res[0] + + def Print(message: str): + """Outputs the specified strings or numeric expressions in a dialog box.""" + xScript = _getScript("_Print") + xScript.invoke((message,), (), ()) + + import uno + from com.sun.star.script.provider import XScript + def _getScript(script: str, library='Standard', module='uiScripts') -> XScript: + sm = uno.getComponentContext().ServiceManager + mspf = sm.createInstanceWithContext("com.sun.star.script.provider.MasterScriptProviderFactory", uno.getComponentContext()) + scriptPro = mspf.createScriptProvider("") + scriptName = "vnd.sun.star.script:"+library+"."+module+"."+script+"?language=Basic&location=application" + xScript = scriptPro.getScript(scriptName) + return xScript + +

uiScripts Basic module

+ + Option Explicit + Private Function _MsgBox( prompt As String, Optional buttons As Integer, _ + Optional title As String ) As Integer + _MsgBox = MsgBox( prompt, buttons, title ) + End Function + Private Function _InputBox( prompt As String, Optional title As String, _ + Optional default As String) As String + _InputBox = InputBox( prompt, title, default ) + End Function + Private Sub _Print( msg As String ) + Print msg + End Sub + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8c378dee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + Python_Session : Session class + /text/sbasic/python/python_session.xhp + + + + + Session;UserName + Session;SharedScripts + Session;SharedPythonScripts + Session;UserProfile + Session;UserScripts + Session;UserPythonScripts + API;PathSubstitution + +

Getting Session Information

+ Computing %PRODUCTNAME user profile and shared modules system file paths can be performed with Python or with Basic languages. BeanShell, Java, JavaScript and Python scripts locations can be derived from this information. +

Examples:

+ With Python shell. + >>> from <the_module> import Session + >>> print(Session.SharedPythonScripts()) # static method + >>> print(Session().UserName) # object property + >>> input(Session().UserProfile) # object property +

From Tools – Macros - Run Macro... menu.

+ + from <the_module> import Session + + def demo_session(): + import screen_io as ui + ui.MsgBox(Session.Share(),title='Installation Share') # static method + ui.Print(Session.SharedPythonScripts()) # static method + s = Session() # instance creation + ui.MsgBox(s.UserName,title='Hello') # object property + ui.Print(s.UserPythonScripts) # object property + + g_exportedScripts = (demo_session,) # public macros + +

With %PRODUCTNAME Basic.

+ + Sub Session_example() + Dim s As New Session ' instance of Session class + Print "Shared scripts location:", s.SharedScripts + MsgBox s.UserName,,"Hello" + Print s.UserScripts, Chr(13), s.UserPythonScripts + End Sub ' Session_example + +

Using COM/OLE and Visual Basic Scripting language.

+ + ' The service manager is always the entry point + ' If there is no office running then an office is started up + Set sm = WScript.CreateObject("com.sun.star.ServiceManager") + ' PathSubstitution service exhibits information to infer + ' <UserProfile|Share>/Scripts/python locations from + Set obj = sm.createInstance("com.sun.star.util.PathSubstitution") + + MsgBox CreateObject("WScript.Network").UserName,, "Hello" + user = obj.getSubstituteVariableValue("$(user)") + MsgBox user & "/Scripts",, "User scripts location" + libO = Replace(obj.getSubstituteVariableValue("$(inst)"), "program/..", "Share") + MsgBox libO & "/Scripts",, "Shared scripts location" + +

Python Session class:

+ + import getpass, os, os.path, uno + + class Session(): + @staticmethod + def substitute(var_name): + ctx = uno.getComponentContext() + ps = ctx.getServiceManager().createInstanceWithContext( + 'com.sun.star.util.PathSubstitution', ctx) + return ps.getSubstituteVariableValue(var_name) + @staticmethod + def Share(): + inst = uno.fileUrlToSystemPath(Session.substitute("$(prog)")) + return os.path.normpath(inst.replace('program', "Share")) + @staticmethod + def SharedScripts(): + return ''.join([Session.Share(), os.sep, "Scripts"]) + @staticmethod + def SharedPythonScripts(): + return ''.join([Session.SharedScripts(), os.sep, 'python']) + @property # alternative to '$(username)' variable + def UserName(self): return getpass.getuser() + @property + def UserProfile(self): + return uno.fileUrlToSystemPath(Session.substitute("$(user)")) + @property + def UserScripts(self): + return ''.join([self.UserProfile, os.sep, 'Scripts']) + @property + def UserPythonScripts(self): + return ''.join([self.UserScripts, os.sep, "python"]) + + Unlike Basic, pathname normalization is performed with Python inside Session class. +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Session class:

+ + Option Explicit + Option Compatible + Option ClassModule + + Private _ps As Object ' Private member + + Private Sub Class_Initialize() + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") + Set _ps = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.util.PathSubstitution") + End Sub ' Constructor + + Private Sub Class_Terminate() + _ps = Nothing + End Sub ' Destructor + + Public Property Get SharedScripts() As String + Dim inst As String, shr As String + inst = ConvertFromURL(_ps.getSubstituteVariableValue("$(prog)")) + shr = Tools.Strings.ReplaceString(inst,"Share","program") + SharedScripts = shr & GetPathSeparator() &"Scripts" + End Property ' Session.sharedScripts + + Public Property Get SharedPythonScripts() As String + sharedPythonScripts = sharedScripts() & GetPathSeparator() &"python" + End Property ' Session.sharedPythonScripts + + Public Property Get UserName() As String ' User account name + userName = _ps.getSubstituteVariableValue("$(username)") + End Property ' Session.userName + + Public Property Get UserProfile() As String ' User profile system path + userProfile = ConvertFromURL(_ps.getSubstituteVariableValue("$(user)")) + End Property ' Session.userProfile + + Public Property Get UserScripts() As String ' User scripts system path + userScripts = userProfile() & GetPathSeparator() &"Scripts" + End Property ' Session.userScripts + + Public Property Get UserPythonScripts() As String ' User Python scripts system path + userPythonScripts = userScripts() & GetPathSeparator() &"python" + End Property ' Session.userPythonScripts + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..52cea354a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + Python Interactive Shell + /text/sbasic/python/python_shell.xhp + + + + + Python console + Python Interactive Shell + +
+

Running Python Interactive Console

+
+ The Python interactive console, also known as Python interpreter or Python shell, provides programmers with a quick way to execute commands and try out and test code without creating a file. UNO objects introspection as well as %PRODUCTNAME Python modules documentation can be obtained from the terminal. + + From a full-featured %PRODUCTNAME installed package, use either Basic or Python: +

Using a Basic macro

+ + Sub interpreter_console + Const UNIX = 4 + ps = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.util.PathSettings") + install_path = ConvertFromURL(ps.Module) + cmd = IIF(GetGuiType()=UNIX,"x-terminal-emulator -e ","") + Shell(cmd + install_path + GetPathSeparator() + "python" ) + End Sub + + +

Using a Python macro

+ + # -*- coding: utf-8 -*- + from __future__ import unicode_literals + + import uno, os, subprocess + + def interpreter_console(): + ctx = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext() + smgr = ctx.getServiceManager() + ps = smgr.createInstanceWithContext("com.sun.star.util.PathSettings", ctx) + install_path = uno.fileUrlToSystemPath(ps.Module) + pgm = install_path + os.sep + "python" # Python shell/console path + subprocess.Popen(pgm) # Start Python interactive Shell + + +

Example output

+ + Python Interactive Console + + + + +

Using the Terminal

+ From a %PRODUCTNAME copy included in a GNU/Linux platform, use the terminal as shown: + whereis or type terminal commands help locate Python interactive console: +
user@computer:~$ type -p python3
/usr/bin/python3
user@computer:~$ /usr/bin/python3
Python 3.7.5 (default, Nov 20 2019, 09:21:52)
[GCC 9.2.1 20191008] on linux
Type "help", "copyright", "credits" or "license" for more information.
>>> import uno
>>> dir(uno)
['Any', 'Bool', 'ByteSequence', 'Char', 'Enum', 'PY2', 'Type', '_ConstantGroup', '__builtin__', '__builtins__', '__cached__', '__doc__', '__file__', '__loader__', '__name__', '__package__', '__spec__', '_builtin_import', '_component_context', '_impl_getConstantGroupByName', '_uno_extract_printable_stacktrace', '_uno_import', '_uno_struct__eq__', '_uno_struct__getattr__', '_uno_struct__init__', '_uno_struct__ne__', '_uno_struct__repr__', '_uno_struct__setattr__', '_uno_struct__str__', 'absolutize', 'createUnoStruct', 'fileUrlToSystemPath', 'generateUuid', 'getClass', 'getComponentContext', 'getConstantByName', 'getCurrentContext', 'getTypeByName', 'invoke', 'isInterface', 'os', 'pyuno', 'setCurrentContext', 'six_string_types', 'socket', 'sys', 'systemPathToFileUrl', 'traceback', 'warnings']
>>> exit()
user@computer:~$ + + + +

Alternative console

+ Use APSO extension console as an alternative: + + APSO console + +
+ + + PythonShell function in ScriptForge.Exception service + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..295664a71 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +$[officename] Basic Glossary +/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

$[officename] Basic Glossary

+This glossary explains some technical terms that you may come across when working with $[officename] Basic. + +
+

Decimal Point

+When converting numbers, $[officename] Basic uses the locale settings of the system for determining the type of decimal and thousand separator. +The behavior has an effect on both the implicit conversion ( 1 + "2.3" = 3.3 ) as well as the function IsNumeric. +
+
+

Colors

+In $[officename] Basic, colors are treated as long integer value. The return value of color queries is also always a long integer value. When defining properties, colors can be specified using their RGB code that is converted to a long integer value using the RGB function. +
+
+

Measurement Units

+In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or a property expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - (Document Type) - General. +
+
+twips; definition + +

Twips

+A twip is a screen-independent unit which is used to define the uniform position and size of screen elements on all display systems. A twip is 1/1440th of an inch or 1/20 of a printer's point. There are 1440 twips to an inch or about 567 twips to a centimeter. +
+
+

URL Notation

+URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) are used to determine the location of a resource like a file in a file system, typically inside a network environment. A URL consists of a protocol specifier, a host specifier and a file and path specifier: + +protocol://host.name/path/to/the/file.html + +The most common usage of URLs is on the internet when specifying web pages. Example for protocols are http, ftp, or file. The file protocol specifier is used when referring to a file on the local file system. +URL notation does not allow certain special characters to be used. These are either replaced by other characters or encoded. A slash (/) is used as a path separator. For example, a file referred to as C:\Users\alice\Documents\My File.odt on the local host in "Windows notation" becomes file:///C:/Users/alice/Documents/My%20File.odt in URL notation. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05b579478 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,352 @@ + + + + + + Information + /text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp + + + +

Information

+
+You can set the locale used for controlling the formatting numbers, dates and currencies in $[officename] Basic in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. In Basic format codes, the decimal point (.) is always used as placeholder for the decimal separator defined in your locale and will be replaced by the corresponding character. +The same applies to the locale settings for date, time and currency formats. The Basic format code will be interpreted and displayed according to your locale setting. +
+
+The color values of the 16 basic colors are as follows: + + + + Color Value + + + Color Name + + + + + 0 + + + Black + + + + + 128 + + + Blue + + + + + 32768 + + + Green + + + + + 32896 + + + Cyan + + + + + 8388608 + + + Red + + + + + 8388736 + + + Magenta + + + + + 8421376 + + + Yellow + + + + + 8421504 + + + White + + + + + 12632256 + + + Gray + + + + + 255 + + + Light blue + + + + + 65280 + + + Light green + + + + + 65535 + + + Light cyan + + + + + 16711680 + + + Light red + + + + + 16711935 + + + Light magenta + + + + + 16776960 + + + Light yellow + + + + + 16777215 + + + Transparent white + + +
+
+
+ Open Tools - Macros - Organize Dialogs and select %PRODUCTNAME Dialogs container. +
+
+ Open Tools - Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic - Edit and select Application Macros container. +
+
+ This library must be loaded before execution. Execute the following statement before running any macro that uses this library: +
+
+ This constant, function or object is enabled with the statement Option VBASupport 1 placed before the executable program code in a module. +
+
+ This statement must be added before the executable program code in a module. +
+
+

Syntax:

+
+
+

Return value:

+
+
+

Parameters:

+
+
+

Example:

+
+
+

In Basic

+
+
+

In Python

+
+
+This method is only available for Basic scripts. +
+
+This method is only available for Python scripts. +
+
+This method requires the installation of the APSO (Alternative Script Organizer for Python) extension. In turn APSO requires the presence of %PRODUCTNAME Python scripting framework. If APSO or Python are missing, an error occurs. +
+
+This service is fully supported in both Basic and Python languages. All examples are expressed using the Basic programming language and can be easily converted to Python. +
+String functions +VBA financial functions +VBA Time and Date functions +VBA I/O functions +VBA Mathematical functions +VBA Object functions +
+

Error codes:

+
+
+1 An exception occurred +2 Syntax error +3 Return without Gosub +4 Incorrect entry; please retry +5 Invalid procedure call +6 Overflow +7 Not enough memory +8 Array already dimensioned +9 Index out of defined range +10 Duplicate definition +11 Division by zero +12 Variable not defined +13 Data type mismatch +14 Invalid parameter +18 Process interrupted by user +20 Resume without error +28 Not enough stack memory +35 Sub-procedure or function procedure not defined +48 Error loading DLL file +49 Wrong DLL call convention +51 Internal error +52 Invalid file name or file number +53 File not found +54 Incorrect file mode +55 File already open +57 Device I/O error +58 File already exists +59 Incorrect record length +61 Disk or hard drive full +62 Reading exceeds EOF +63 Incorrect record number +67 Too many files +68 Device not available +70 Access denied +71 Disk not ready +73 Not implemented +74 Renaming on different drives impossible +75 Path/file access error +76 Path not found +91 Object variable not set +93 Invalid string pattern +94 Use of zero not permitted +250 DDE Error +280 Awaiting response to DDE connection +281 No DDE channels available +282 No application responded to DDE connect initiation +283 Too many applications responded to DDE connect initiation +284 DDE channel locked +285 External application cannot execute DDE operation +286 Timeout while waiting for DDE response +287 user pressed ESCAPE during DDE operation +288 External application busy +289 DDE operation without data +290 Data are in wrong format +291 External application has been terminated +292 DDE connection interrupted or modified +293 DDE method invoked with no channel open +294 Invalid DDE link format +295 DDE message has been lost +296 Paste link already performed +297 Link mode cannot be set due to invalid link topic +298 DDE requires the DDEML.DLL file +323 Module cannot be loaded; invalid format +341 Invalid object index +366 Object is not available +380 Incorrect property value +382 This property is read-only +394 This property is write-only +420 Invalid object reference +423 Property or method not found +424 Object required +425 Invalid use of an object +430 OLE Automation is not supported by this object +438 This property or method is not supported by the object +440 OLE automation error +445 This action is not supported by given object +446 Named arguments are not supported by given object +447 The current locale setting is not supported by the given object +448 Named argument not found +449 Argument is not optional +450 Invalid number of arguments +451 Object is not a list +452 Invalid ordinal number +453 Specified DLL function not found +460 Invalid clipboard format +951 Unexpected symbol: +952 Expected: +953 Symbol expected +954 Variable expected +955 Label expected +956 Value cannot be applied +957 Variable already defined +958 Sub procedure or function procedure already defined +959 Label already defined +960 Variable not found +961 Array or procedure not found +962 Procedure not found +963 Label undefined +964 Unknown data type +965 Exit expected +966 Statement block still open: missing +967 Parentheses do not match +968 Symbol already defined differently +969 Parameters do not correspond to procedure +970 Invalid character in number +971 Array must be dimensioned +972 Else/Endif without If +973 not allowed within a procedure +974 not allowed outside a procedure +975 Dimension specifications do not match +976 Unknown option: +977 Constant redefined +978 Program too large +979 Strings or arrays not permitted +1000 Object does not have this property +1001 Object does not have this method +1002 Required argument lacking +1003 Invalid number of arguments +1004 Error executing a method +1005 Unable to set property +1006 Unable to determine property +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bf476bff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Macro +/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +macros; Basic IDE +Basic IDE; macros +this file needs more work, see i62546 +Macro +Opens the Macro dialog, where you can create, edit, organize, and run $[officename] Basic macros. +Macro name +Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. +Macro from / Save macro in +Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. +Run / Save +Runs or saves the current macro. +Assign +Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. +Edit +Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro for editing. +New/Delete +Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. +To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. +To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. +Organizer +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +Module/Dialog +Lists the existing macros and dialogs. +You can drag-and-drop a module or a dialog between libraries. +To copy a dialog or a module, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you drag-and-drop. +Edit +Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. +New +Creates a new module. +Creates a new dialog. +Libraries tab page +Lets you manage the macro libraries. +Location +Select the location containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. +Library +Lists the macro libraries in the chosen location. +Edit +Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. +Password +Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. "Standard" libraries cannot have a password. +New +Creates a new library. +Name +Enter a name for the new module, dialog, or library. +Append +Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ccfab746 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Password +/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130100.xhp + + +Change Password +Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. +Old password +Password +Enter the current password for the selected library. +New password +Password +Enter a new password for the selected library. +Confirm +Repeat the new password for the selected library.i66515 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7d978604 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Append libraries +/text/sbasic/shared/01/06130500.xhp + + + + + +libraries; adding +inserting;Basic libraries + + Append libraries + Locate that %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. + + + File name: + Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. + Options + Insert as reference (read-only) + Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. + Replace existing libraries + Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..786937634 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Programming with $[officename] Basic +/text/sbasic/shared/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Programming with $[officename] Basic + This is where you find general information about working with macros and $[officename] Basic. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e60bdab22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Basics +/text/sbasic/shared/01010210.xhp + + + +
+fundamentals +subroutines +variables;global and local +modules;subroutines and functions +Basics +This section provides the fundamentals for working with $[officename] Basic. +
+$[officename] Basic code is based on subroutines and functions that are specified between sub...end sub and function...end function sections. Each Sub or Function can call other Subs and Functions. If you take care to write generic code for a Sub or Function, you can probably re-use it in other programs. See also Procedures and Functions. + +Some restrictions apply for the names of your public variables, subs, and functions. You must not use the same name as one of the modules of the same library. + +What is a Sub? + +Sub is the short form of subroutine, that is used to handle a certain task within a program. Subs are used to split a task into individual procedures. Splitting a program into procedures and sub-procedures enhances readability and reduces the error-proneness. A sub possibly takes some arguments as parameters but does not return any values back to the calling sub or function, for example: +DoSomethingWithTheValues(MyFirstValue,MySecondValue) +What is a Function? +A function is essentially a sub, which returns a value. You may use a function at the right side of a variable declaration, or at other places where you normally use values, for example: +MySecondValue = myFunction(MyFirstValue) +Global and local variables +Global variables are valid for all subs and functions inside a module. They are declared at the beginning of a module before the first sub or function starts. +Variables that you declare within a sub or function are valid only inside this sub or function. These variables override global variables with the same name and local variables with the same name coming from superordinate subs or functions. +Structuring +After separating your program into procedures and functions (Subs and Functions), you can save these procedures and functions as files for reuse in other projects. $[officename] Basic supports Modules and Libraries. Subs and functions are always contained in modules. You can define modules to be global or part of a document. Multiple modules can be combined to a library. +You can copy or move subs, functions, modules and libraries from one file to another by using the Macro dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccec8f509 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Syntax +/text/sbasic/shared/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Syntax + This section describes the basic syntax elements of $[officename] Basic. For a detailed description please refer to the $[officename] Basic Guide which is available separately. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed5ce1eaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + + + + + + + Using Variables + /text/sbasic/shared/01020100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + names of variables + variables; using + types of variables + declaring variables + values;of variables + literals;date + literals;integer + literals;integer + literals;floating point + constants + arrays;declaring + defining;constants + + + +

Using Variables

+The following describes the basic use of variables in $[officename] Basic. +
+ +

Naming Conventions for Variable Identifiers

+A variable name can consist of a maximum of 255 characters. The first character of a variable name must be a letter A-Z or a-z. Numbers can also be used in a variable name, but punctuation symbols and special characters are not permitted, with exception of the underscore character ("_"). In $[officename] Basic variable identifiers are not case-sensitive. Variable names may contain spaces but must be enclosed in square brackets if they do. +Examples for variable identifiers: + + + MyNumber=5 'Correct' + MyNumber5=15 'Correct' + MyNumber_5=20 'Correct' + My Number=20 'Not valid, variable with space must be enclosed in square brackets' + [My Number]=12 'Correct' + DéjàVu=25 'Not valid, special characters are not allowed' + 5MyNumber=12 'Not valid, variable may not begin with a number' + Number,Mine=12 'Not valid, punctuation marks are not allowed' + + +

Declaring Variables

+In $[officename] Basic you don't need to declare variables explicitly. A variable declaration can be performed with the Dim statement. You can declare more than one variable at a time by separating the names with a comma. To define the variable type, use either a type-declaration sign after the name, or the appropriate key word. +Examples for variable declarations: + + + Dim a$ 'Declares the variable "a" as a String' + Dim a As String 'Declares the variable "a" as a String' + Dim a$, b As Integer 'Declares one variable as a String and one as an Integer' + Dim c As Boolean 'Declares c as a Boolean variable that can be TRUE or FALSE' + + +Once you have declared a variable as a certain type, you cannot declare the variable under the same name again as a different type! + +When you declare multiple variables in a single line of code you need to specify the type of each variable. If the type of a variable is not explicitly specified, then Basic will assume that the variable is of the Variant type. + + ' Both variables "a" and "b" are of the Integer type + Dim a As Integer, b As Integer + ' Variable "c" is a Variant and "d" is an Integer + Dim c, d As Integer + ' A variable can also be explicitly declared as a Variant + Dim e As Variant, f As Double + +The Variant type is a special data type that can store any kind of value. To learn more, refer to the section The Variant type below. + +

Forcing Variable Declarations

+To force declaration of variables, use the following command: + +Option Explicit + +The Option Explicit statement has to be the first line in the module, before the first SUB. Generally, only arrays need to be declared explicitly. All other variables are declared according to the type-declaration character, or - if omitted - as the default type Single. + +

Variable Types

+$[officename] Basic supports four variable classes: + + + + Numeric variables can contain number values. Some variables are used to store large or small numbers, and others are used for floating-point or fractional numbers. + + + String variables contain character strings. + + + Boolean variables contain either the TRUE or the FALSE value. + + + Object variables can store objects of various types, like tables and documents within a document. + + +

Integer Variables

+Integer variables range from -32768 to 32767. If you assign a floating-point value to an integer variable, the decimal places are rounded to the next integer. Integer variables are rapidly calculated in procedures and are suitable for counter variables in loops. An integer variable only requires two bytes of memory. "%" is the type-declaration character. + +Dim Variable% +Dim Variable As Integer + + +

Long Integer Variables

+Long integer variables range from -2147483648 to 2147483647. If you assign a floating-point value to a long integer variable, the decimal places are rounded to the next integer. Long integer variables are rapidly calculated in procedures and are suitable for counter variables in loops for large values. A long integer variable requires four bytes of memory. "&" is the type-declaration character. + +Dim Variable& +Dim Variable As Long + + +

Decimal Variablessee i64349

+Decimal variables can take positive or negative numbers or zero. Accuracy is up to 29 digits.i85284 +You can use plus (+) or minus (-) signs as prefixes for decimal numbers (with or without spaces). +If a decimal number is assigned to an integer variable, %PRODUCTNAME Basic rounds the figure up or down.information from "Programming Guide for BASIC" about decimal variables + +

Single Variables

+Single variables can take positive or negative values ranging from 3.402823 x 10E38 to 1.401298 x 10E-45. Single variables are floating-point variables, in which the decimal precision decreases as the non-decimal part of the number increases. Single variables are suitable for mathematical calculations of average precision. Calculations require more time than for Integer variables, but are faster than calculations with Double variables. A Single variable requires 4 bytes of memory. The type-declaration character is "!". + +Dim Variable! +Dim Variable As Single + + +

Double Variables

+Double variables can take positive or negative values ranging from 1.79769313486232 x 10E308 to 4.94065645841247 x 10E-324. Double variables are floating-point variables, in which the decimal precision decreases as the non-decimal part of the number increases. Double variables are suitable for precise calculations. Calculations require more time than for Single variables. A Double variable requires 8 bytes of memory. The type-declaration character is "#". + +Dim Variable# +Dim Variable As Double + + +

Currency Variables

+Currency variables are internally stored as 64-bit numbers (8 Bytes) and displayed as a fixed-decimal number with 15 non-decimal and 4 decimal places. The values range from -922337203685477.5808 to +922337203685477.5807. Currency variables are used to calculate currency values with a high precision. The type-declaration character is "@". + +Dim Variable@ +Dim Variable As Currency + + +

Literals for integers

+Numbers can be encoded using octal and hexadecimal forms. + + xi = &o13 ' 8 + 3 + ci = &h65 ' 6*16 + 5 + MAX_Integer = &o77777 ' 32767 = &h7FFF + MIN_Integer = &o100000 ' -32768 = &h8000 + MAX_Long = &h7fffffff ' 2147483647 = &o17777777777 + MIN_Long = &h80000000 ' -2147483648 = &o20000000000 + + +

String Variables

+String variables can hold character strings with up to 2,147,483,648 characters. Each character is stored as the corresponding Unicode value. String variables are suitable for word processing within programs and for temporary storage of any non-printable character up to a maximum length of 2 Gbytes. The memory required for storing string variables depends on the number of characters in the variable. The type-declaration character is "$". +In BASIC String functions, the first character of the string has index 1. + +Dim Variable$ +Dim Variable As String + + +

Boolean Variables

+Boolean variables store only one of two values: TRUE or FALSE. A number 0 evaluates to FALSE, every other value evaluates to TRUE. + +Dim Variable As Boolean + + +

Date Variables

+Date variables can only contain dates and time values stored in an internal format. Values assigned to Date variables with Dateserial, Datevalue, Timeserial or Timevalue are automatically converted to the internal format. Date-variables are converted to normal numbers by using the Day, Month, Year or the Hour, Minute, Second function. The internal format enables a comparison of date/time values by calculating the difference between two numbers. These variables can only be declared with the key word Date. + +Dim Variable As Date + + + + ampersand symbol; in literal notation + literals;hexadecimal + literals;octal + literals;&h notation + literals;&o notation + +

Literals for Dates

+
+Date literals allow to specify unambiguous date variables that are independent from the current language. Literals are enclosed between hash signs #. Possible formats are: + + + #yyyy-mm-dd# + + + #mm/dd/yyyy# + + +
+ + start_date = #12/30/1899# ' = 1 + dob = #2010-09-28# + + + + The Variant type + The Any type + +

The Variant type

+Variables declared as Variant can handle any data type. This means that the actual data type is defined during runtime as a value is assigned to the variable. +There are three main ways to create a Variant variable, as shown below: + + Dim varA ' The type is not specified, hence the variable is a Variant + Dim varB as Variant ' The variable is explicitly declared as a Variant + varC = "abc" ' Previously undeclared variables are treated as Variants + +The example below uses the TypeName function to show how the type of a Variant variable changes upon assignment. + + Dim myVar As Variant + MsgBox TypeName(myVar) ' Empty + myVar = "Hello!" + MsgBox TypeName(myVar) ' String + myVar = 10 + MsgBox TypeName(myVar) ' Integer + +A Variant variable is initialized with the Empty special data type. You can use the IsEmpty function to test if a variable is an Empty Variant. +You can also use the keyword Any to declare a variable as a Variant. However, Any is deprecated and is available for backward compatibility. +Arguments with type Variant or Any passed in function calls are not checked for their types. + + Dim myVar As Any ' Variable "myVar" is a Variant + + +

Initial Variable Values

+As soon as the variable has been declared, it is automatically set to the "Null" value. Note the following conventions: + Numeric variables are automatically assigned the value "0" as soon as they are declared. + Date variables are assigned the value 0 internally; equivalent to converting the value to "0" with the Day, Month, Year or the Hour, Minute, Second function. + String variables are assigned an empty-string ("") when they are declared. + +

Arrays

+$[officename] Basic knows one- or multi-dimensional arrays, defined by a specified variable type. Arrays are suitable for editing lists and tables in programs. Individual elements of an array can be addressed through a numeric index. +Arrays must be declared with the Dim statement. There are several ways to define the index range of an array: + + + Dim Text$(20) '21 elements numbered from 0 to 20' + Dim Text$(5,4) '30 elements (a matrix of 6 x 5 elements)' + Dim Text$(5 To 25) '21 elements numbered from 5 to 25' + Dim Text$(-15 To 5) '21 elements (including 0), numbered from -15 to 5' + + +The index range can include positive as well as negative numbers. i36558 + +

Constants

+Constants have a fixed value. They are only defined once in the program and cannot be redefined later: + +Const ConstName=Expression + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..186a43f39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Objects +/text/sbasic/shared/01020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Using the Object Catalog + +The object catalog provides an overview of all modules and dialogs you have created in $[officename]. +
+
+Click the Object Catalog icon +Icon + in the Macro toolbar to display the object catalog. +The dialog shows a list of all existing objects in a hierarchical representation. Double-clicking a list entry opens its subordinate objects. +To display a certain module in the Editor or to position the cursor in a selected SUB or FUNCTION, double click on the corresponding entry. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b50699fe2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + Using Procedures, Functions or Properties + /text/sbasic/shared/01020300.xhp + + + + + procedures + functions;using + variables;passing to procedures, functions, properties + parameters;for procedures, functions or properties + parameters;passing by reference or value + variables;scope + scope of variables + GLOBAL variables + PUBLIC variables + PRIVATE variables + functions;return value type + return value type of functions + +
+

Using Procedures, Functions and Properties

+The following describes the basic use of procedures, functions and properties in %PRODUCTNAME Basic. +
+When you create a new module, %PRODUCTNAME Basic automatically inserts a Sub called "Main". This default name has nothing to do with the order or the starting point of a %PRODUCTNAME Basic project. You can also safely rename this Subroutine. +Some restrictions apply for the names of your public variables, subroutines, functions and properties. You must not use the same name as one of the modules of the same library. +Procedures (Subroutines) functions (Function) and properties (Property) help you maintaining a structured overview by separating a program into logical pieces. +One benefit of procedures, functions and properties is that, once you have developed a program code containing task components, you can use this code in another project. +

Passing Variables to Procedures, Functions or Properties

+Variables can be passed to both procedures, functions or properties. The Sub Function or Property must be declared to expect parameters: + + Sub SubName(Parameter1 As TYPENAME, Parameter2 As TYPENAME,...) + ' your code goes here + End Sub + +The Sub is called using the following syntax: + + [Call] SubName( [Parameter1:=]Value1, [Parameter2:=]Value2, ...) + +The parameters passed to a Sub must fit to those specified in the Sub declaration. +The same process applies to a Function. In addition, functions always return a function result. The result of a function is defined by assigning the return value to the function name: + + Function FunctionName(Parameter1 As TYPENAME, Parameter2 As TYPENAME,...) As TYPENAME + ' your code goes here + FunctionName=Result + End Function + +The Function is called using the following syntax: + + Variable = FunctionName( [Parameter1:=]Value1, [Parameter2:=]Value2, ...) + +Properties combine the syntax of procedures and functions. A Property usually requires up to one parameter. + + Private _IsApproved As TYPENAME + Property Get IsApproved As TYPENAME + ' your code goes here + IsApproved = some_computation + End Property + Property Let IsApproved(value As TYPENAME) + ' your code goes here + _IsApproved = computed_value + End Property + +The Property is called using the following syntax: + + var = IsApproved + IsApproved = some_value + +You can also use the fully qualified name to call a procedure, function or property:
[Call] Library.Module.Macro(), where Call is optional.
For example, to call the Autotext macro from the Gimmicks library, use the following command:
Gimmicks.AutoText.Main() +

Passing Variables by Value or Reference

+Parameters can be passed to a procedure, a function or a property either by reference or by value. Unless otherwise specified, a parameter is always passed by reference. That means that a Sub, a Function or a Property gets the parameter and can read and modify its value. +If you want to pass a parameter by value insert the key word ByVal in front of the parameter when you call a Sub, a Function or a Property, for example: + + Function ReadOnlyParms(ByVal p2, ByVal p2) + ' your code goes here + End Function + result = ReadOnlyParms(parm1, parm2) + +In this case, the original content of the parameter will not be modified by the Function since it only gets the value and not the parameter itself. +

Defining Optional Parameters

+Functions, procedures or properties can be defined with optional parameters, for example: + + Sub Rounding(number, Optional decimals, Optional format) + ' your code goes here + End Sub + +

Positional or Keyword Arguments

+When you call a function or a subroutine, you may pass its arguments by position or by name. Passing by position means just listing the arguments in the order in which the parameters are defined in the function or subroutine. Passing by name requires you to prefix the argument with the name of the corresponding parameter followed by a colon and an equal sign (:=). Keyword arguments may appear in any order. Refer to Basic Replace() function for such examples. +
+When needing to pass less parameters, use keywords arguments. Passing values for fewer parameters by position requires to supply values for all parameters before them, optional or not. This ensures that the values are in the correct positions. If you pass the parameters by name - using keyword arguments - you may omit all other intermediate arguments. +
+

Scope of Variables

+A variable defined within a Sub, a Function or a Property, only remains valid until the procedure is exited. This is known as a "local" variable. In many cases, you need a variable to be valid in all procedures, in every module of all libraries, or after a Sub, a Function or a Property is exited. +

Declaring Variables Outside a Sub a Function or a Property

+ +Global VarName As TYPENAME + +The variable is valid as long as the %PRODUCTNAME session lasts. + +Public VarName As TYPENAME + +The variable is valid in all modules. + +Private VarName As TYPENAME + +The variable is only valid in this module. + +Dim VarName As TYPENAME + +The variable is only valid in this module. +

Example for private variables

+Enforce private variables to be private across modules by setting CompatibilityMode(True).from i17948, see i54894 + + ' ***** Module1 ***** + Private myText As String + Sub initMyText + myText = "Hello" + Print "In module1 : ", myText + End Sub + + ' ***** Module2 ***** + 'Option Explicit + Sub demoBug + CompatibilityMode( True ) + initMyText + ' Now returns empty string + ' (or raises error for Option Explicit) + Print "Now in module2 : ", myText + End Sub + +

Saving Variable Content after Exiting a Sub a Function or a Property

+ + Static VarName As TYPENAME + +The variable retains its value until the next time the a Function, Sub or Property is entered. The declaration must exist inside a Sub, a Function or a Property. +

Specifying the Return Value Type of a Function or a Property

+As with variables, include a type-declaration character after the function name, or the type indicated by As and the corresponding data type at the end of the parameter list to define the type of the function or property's return value, for example: + + Function WordCount(WordText As String) As Integer + +
+ + + Optional keyword + Property Statement + Static Statement +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4be972c38 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Libraries, Modules and Dialogs +/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Libraries, Modules and Dialogs +The following describes the basic use of libraries, modules and dialogs in $[officename] Basic. +
+$[officename] Basic provides tools to help you structuring your projects. It supports various "units" which enable you to group individual SUBS and FUNCTIONS in a Basic project. +Libraries +Libraries serve as a tool for organizing modules, and can either be attached to a document or a template. When the document or a template is saved, all modules contained in the library are automatically saved as well. +A library can contain up to 16,000 modules. +Modules +A module contains SUBS and FUNCTIONS along with variable declarations. The length of the program that can be saved in a module is limited to 64 kB. If more space is required you can divide a $[officename] Basic project among several modules, and then save them in a single library. +Dialog Modules +Dialog modules contain dialog definitions, including the dialog box properties, the properties of each dialog element and the events assigned. Since a dialog module can only contain a single dialog, they are often referred to as "dialogs". +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da133db88 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Integrated Development Environment (IDE) +/text/sbasic/shared/01030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Basic IDE;Integrated Development Environment +IDE;Integrated Development Environment + +Integrated Development Environment (IDE) +This section describes the Integrated Development Environment for $[officename] Basic. +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..027ee2806 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +IDE Overview +/text/sbasic/shared/01030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+IDE Overview +
+The Macro Toolbar in the IDE provides various icons for editing and testing programs. +In the Editor window, directly below the Macro toolbar, you can edit the Basic program code. The column on the left side is used to set breakpoints in the program code. +The Watch window (observer) is located below the Editor window at the left, and displays the contents of variables or arrays during a single step process. +The Call Stack window to the right provides information about the call stack of SUBS and FUNCTIONS when a program runs. +
+Basic IDE +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bafdfa0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +The Basic Editor +/text/sbasic/shared/01030200.xhp + + + + +
+saving;Basic code +loading;Basic code +Basic editor +navigating;in Basic projects +long lines;in Basic editor +lines of text;in Basic editor +continuation;long lines in editor + +

The Basic Editor

+
+The Basic Editor provides the standard editing functions you are familiar with when working in a text document. It supports the functions of the Edit menu (Cut, Delete, Paste), the ability to select text with the Shift key, as well as cursor positioning functions (for example, moving from word to word with CommandCtrl and the arrow keys). +Long lines can be split into several parts by inserting a space and an underline character _ as the last two characters of a line. This connects the line with the following line to one logical line. (If "Option Compatible" is used in the same Basic module, the line continuation feature is also valid for comment lines.) +If you press the Run BASIC icon on the Macro bar, program execution starts at the first line of the Basic editor. The program executes the first Sub or Function and then program execution stops. The "Sub Main" does not take precedence on program execution. +Insert your Basic code between the Sub Main and End Sub lines that you see when you first open the IDE. Alternatively, delete all lines and then enter your own Basic code. +

Navigating in a Project

+

The Library List

+Select a library from the Library list at the left of the toolbar to load the library in the editor. The first module of the selected library will be displayed. +

The Object Catalog

+ +

Saving and Loading Basic Source Code

+You can save Basic code in a text file for saving and importing in other programming systems. +You cannot save Basic dialogs to a text file. +

Saving Source Code to a Text File

+ + +Select the module that you want to export as text from the object catalog. + + +Click the Save Source As icon in the Macro toolbar. + + +Select a file name and click OK to save the file. + + +

Loading Source Code From a Text File

+ + +Select the module where you want to import the source code from the object catalog. + + +Position the cursor where you want to insert the program code. + + +Click the Insert Source Text icon in the Macro toolbar. + + +Select the text file containing the source code and click OK. + + +
+Basic IDE + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0345d9250 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Debugging a Basic Program +/text/sbasic/shared/01030300.xhp + + + +
+debugging Basic programs +variables; observing values +watching variables +run-time errors in Basic +error codes in Basic +breakpoints +Call Stack window +Debugging a Basic Program +
+Breakpoints and Single Step Execution +You can check each line in your Basic program for errors using single step execution. Errors are easily traced since you can immediately see the result of each step. A pointer in the breakpoint column of the Editor indicates the current line. You can also set a breakpoint if you want to force the program to be interrupted at a specific position. +Double-click in the breakpoint column at the left of the Editor window to toggle a breakpoint at the corresponding line. When the program reaches a breakpoint, the program execution is interrupted. +The single step execution using the Single Step icon causes the program to branch into procedures and functions. +The procedure step execution using the Procedure Step icon causes the program to skip over procedures and functions as a single step. +Properties of a Breakpoint +The properties of a breakpoint are available through its context menu by right-clicking the breakpoint in the breakpoint column. +You can activate and deactivate a breakpoint by selecting Active from its context menu. When a breakpoint is deactivated, it does not interrupt the program execution. +Select Properties from the context menu of a breakpoint or select Breakpoints from the context menu of the breakpoint column to call the Breakpoints dialog where you can specify other breakpoint options. +The list displays all breakpoints with the corresponding line number in the source code. You can activate or deactivate a selected breakpoint by checking or clearing the Active box. +The Pass Count specifies the number of times the breakpoint can be passed over before the program is interrupted. If you enter 0 (default setting) the program is always interrupted as soon as a breakpoint is encountered. +Click Delete to remove the breakpoint from the program. +Observing the Value of Variables +You can monitor the values of a variable by adding it to the Watch window. To add a variable to the list of watched variables, type the variable name in the Watch text box and press Enter. +The values of variables are only displayed if they are in scope. Variables that are not defined at the current source code location display ("Out of Scope") instead of a value. +You can also include arrays in the Watch window. If you enter the name of an array variable without an index value in the Watch text box, the content of the entire array is displayed. +If you rest the mouse over a predefined variable in the Editor at run-time, the content of the variable is displayed in a pop-up box.The Call Stack Window +Provides an overview of the call hierarchy of procedures and functions. You can determine which procedures and functions called which other procedures and functions at the current point in the source code. +List of Run-Time Errors + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71a53f428 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + +Organizing Libraries and Modules +/text/sbasic/shared/01030400.xhp + + + +
+ +libraries;organizing +libraries;containers +modules;organizing +copying;modules +adding libraries +deleting;libraries/modules/dialogs +dialogs;organizing +moving;modules +organizing;modules/libraries/dialogs +renaming modules and dialogs +

Organizing Libraries and Modules +

+
+

Basic Libraries Containers

+%PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries can be stored in 3 different containers: + + + Application Macros: libraries stored in this container are available for all users of the computer and are managed by the computer administrator. The container is located in the %PRODUCTNAME installation directory. + + + My Macros: libraries stored in this container are available to all documents of your user. The container is located in the user profile area and is not accessible by another user. + + + Document: libraries stored in the document container are only available for the document and are accessible only when the document is open. You cannot access macros of a document from another document. + + +To access macros stored in libraries of Application Macros or My Macros from another container, including the document container, use the GlobalScope specifier. +

Organizing Libraries

+

Creating a New Library

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Libraries tab. + + +Select to where you want to attach the library in the Location list. If you select Application Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be attached to this document and only available from there. + + +Click New and insert a name to create a new library. + + +

Import a Library

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Libraries tab. + + +Select to where you want to import the library in the Location list. If you select Application Macros & Dialogs, the library will belong to the $[officename] application and will be available for all documents. If you select a document the library will be imported to this document and only available from there. + + +Click Import... and select an external library to import. + + +Select all libraries to be imported in the Import Libraries dialog. The dialog displays all libraries that are contained in the selected file. + + +If you want to insert the library as a reference only check the Insert as reference (read-only) box. Read-only libraries are fully functional but cannot be modified in the Basic IDE. + + +Check the Replace existing libraries box if you want existing libraries of the same name to be overwritten. + + +Click OK to import the library. + + +

Export a Library

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Libraries tab. + + +In the Location list you specify where your library is stored. Select the library that you want to export. Note that you cannot export the Standard library. + + +Click Export... + + +Choose whether you want to export the library as an extension or as a BASIC library. + + +Click OK. + + +Select where you want your library exported. + + +Click Save to export the library. + + +

Deleting a Library

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Libraries tab. + + +Select the library to be deleted from the list. + + +Click Delete. + + + + +Deleting a library permanently deletes all existing modules and corresponding procedures and functions. + + +You cannot delete the default library named "Standard". + + +If you delete a library that was inserted as reference only the reference is deleted but not the library itself. + + +

Organizing Modules and Dialogs

+

Creating a New Module or Dialog

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. + + +Select the library where the module will be inserted and click New. + + +Enter a name for the module or the dialog and click OK. + + +

Renaming a Module or Dialog

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the module to be renamed twice, with a pause between the clicks. Enter the new name. +In the Basic IDE, right-click the name of the module or dialog in the tabs at the bottom of the screen, choose Rename and type in the new name. + + +Press Enter to confirm your changes. + + +

Deleting a Module or Dialog

+ + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +Click the Modules tab or the Dialogs tab. + + +Select the module or dialog to be deleted from the list. Double-click an entry to reveal sub-entries, if required. + + +Click Delete. + + +Deleting a module permanently deletes all existing procedures and functions in that module. +

Organizing Projects among Documents or Templates

+

Moving or copying modules between documents, templates and the application.

+ + +Open all documents or templates among which you want to move or copy the modules or dialogs. + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic and click Organizer or click the Select Module icon in the Basic IDE to open the Macro Organizer dialog. + + +To move a module or dialog to another document, click the corresponding object in the list and drag it to the desired position. A horizontal line indicates the target position of the current object while dragging. Hold the CommandCtrl key while dragging to copy the object instead of moving it. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..942be5ce6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,255 @@ + + + + + + + + Document Event-Driven Macros + /text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp + + + +
+ + deleting; macro assignments to events + macros; assigning to events + assigning macros to events + documents; events + events; assigning macros + events; in documents + API; XDocumentEventListener + +

Document Event-Driven Macros

+ This section describes how to assign scripts to application, document or form events. +
+ You can automatically execute a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of document events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. + + + + Event + An assigned macro is executed... + routine + + + Start Application + ...after a $[officename] application is started. + OnStartApp + + + Close Application + ...before a $[officename] application is terminated. + OnCloseApp + + + Document created + ...New document created with File - New or with the New icon. Note that this event also fires when Basic IDE opens. + OnCreate + + + New Document + ...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. + OnNew + + + Document loading finished + ...before a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. + OnLoadFinished + + + Open Document + ...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. + OnLoad + + + Document is going to be closed + ...before a document is closed. + OnPrepareUnload + + + Document closed + ...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. + OnUnload + + + -no UI- + + OnLayoutFinished + + + View created + Document is displayed. Note that this event also happens when a document is duplicated. + OnViewCreated + + + View is going to be closed + Document layout is getting removed. + OnPrepareViewClosing + + + View closed + Document layout is cleared prior to the document closure. + OnViewClosed + + + Activate Document + ...after a document is brought to the foreground. + OnFocus + + + Deactivate Document + ...after another document is brought to the foreground. + OnUnfocus + + + Save Document + ...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + OnSaveAs + + + Document has been saved + ...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + OnSaveDone + + + Saving of document failed + Document could not be saved. + OnSaveFailed + + + Save Document As + ...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + OnSaveAs + + + Document has been saved as + ... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + OnSaveAsDone + + + 'Save As' has failed + Document could not be saved. + OnSaveAsFailed + + + -no UI- + When the document disk location has changed, for example after a File - Save As action. + OnStorageChanged + + + Storing or exporting copy of document + ...before a document is saved with File - Save a Copy, File - Export, File - Export as PDF or the Save icons. + OnCopyTo + + + Document copy has been created + ...after a document is saved with File - Save a Copy, File - Export, File - Export as PDF or the Save icons. + OnCopyToDone + + + Creating of document copy failed + Document could not be copied or exported. + OnCopyToFailed + + + Print document + ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. + OnPrint + + + -no UI- + ...after document security settings have changed. + OnModeChanged + + + 'Modified' status was changed + Modified state of a document has changed. + OnModifyChanged + + + Document title changed + When the document title gets updated. + OnTitleChanged + + + Loaded a sub component + ...after a database form has been opened. + OnSubComponentOpened + + + Closed a sub component + ...after a database form has been closed. + OnSubComponentClosed + + + Printing of form letters started + ...before printing form letters using File - Print or Tools - Mail Merge Wizard menus. + OnMailMerge + + + Printing of form letters finished + ...after printing of form letters using File - Print or Tools - Mail Merge Wizard menus. + OnMailMergeFinished + + + Printing of form fields started + ...before printing form fields. + OnFieldMerge + + + Printing of form fields finished + ...after printing form fields. + OnFieldMergeFinished + + + Change of the page count + When the page count changes. + OnPageCountChanged + +
+ + Most events relate to documents, except OnStartApp, OnCloseApp, OnCreate and OnLoadFinished that occur at application level. OnSubComponentOpened, and OnSubComponentClosed events are fired by database's forms. + + Writer documents are triggering those specific events: OnLayoutFinished, OnMailMerge, OnMailMergeFinished, OnFieldMerge, OnFieldMergeFinished and OnPageCountChanged. + +

Assigning a Macro to an Event

+ + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document in the Save In listbox. + Select the event from the Event list. + Click Macro and select the macro to be assigned to the selected event. + Click OK to assign the macro. + Click OK to close the dialog. + + +

Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event

+ + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + Select whether you want to remove a global assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the option in the Save In listbox. + Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. + Click Remove. + Click OK to close the dialog. + + +
+ In addition to assigning macros to events, one can monitor events triggered in %PRODUCTNAME documents. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d243b6102 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Basic IDE +/text/sbasic/shared/01050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+$[officename] Basic IDE + +This section describes the structure of the Basic IDE. + +Opens the Basic IDE where you can write and edit macros. +
+ + + + + +Commands From the Context menu of the Module Tabs +Insert + +Module +Inserts a new module into the current library. + +Dialog +Inserts a new dialog into the current library. + +Delete +Deletes the selected module. + +Rename +Renames the current module in place. + +Hide +Hides the current module. +Modules +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..572fa6619 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Watch Window +/text/sbasic/shared/01050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Watch Window +The Watch window allows you to observe the value of variables during the execution of a program. Define the variable in the Watch text box. Click on Enable Watch to add the variable to the list box and to display its values. +
+ +Watch +Enter the name of the variable whose value is to be monitored. + +Remove Watch +Removes the selected variable from the list of watched variables. + + + + +Icon + + + +Remove Watch + + +
+ + +Editing the Value of a Watched Variable +Displays the list of watched variables. Click twice with a short pause in between on an entry to edit its value. The new value will be taken as the variable's value for the program. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef0810332 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Call Stack Window (Calls) +/text/sbasic/shared/01050200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Call Stack Window (Calls) +Displays the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The Call Stack allows you to monitor the sequence of procedures and functions during the execution of a program. The procedures are functions are displayed bottom to top with the most recent function or procedure call at the top of the list. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15537dcce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Manage Breakpoints +/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + + +Manage Breakpoints +Specifies the options for breakpoints. +
+ +Breakpoints +Enter the line number for a new breakpoint, then click New. + + +Active +Activates or deactivates the current breakpoint. + +Pass Count +Specify the number of loops to perform before the breakpoint takes effect. + +New +Creates a breakpoint on the line number specified. + +Delete +Deletes the selected breakpoint. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a532491c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + +Control and Dialog Properties +/text/sbasic/shared/01170100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+controls; properties +properties; controls and dialogs +dialogs; properties + +Control and Dialog Properties +
+Specifies the properties of the selected dialog or control. You must be in the design mode to be able to use this command. +Entering Data in the Properties Dialog +The following key combinations apply to enter data in multiline fields or combo boxes of the Properties dialog: + + + +Keys + + +Effects + + + + +Alt+Down Arrow + + +Opens a combo box + + + + +Alt+Up Arrow + + +Closes a combo box + + + + +Shift+Enter + + +Inserts a line break in multiline fields. + + + + +(UpArrow) + + +Goes to the previous line. + + + + +(DownArrow) + + +Goes to the next line. + + + + +Enter + + +Applies the changes made to a field and places the cursor into the next field. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35768089c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,440 @@ + + + + + +General +/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp + + + +
+

General

+Define the properties for the selected control or dialog. The available properties depend on the type of control selected. The following properties therefore are not available for every type of control. +
+ +
+

Alignment

+Specify the alignment option for the selected control. +
+
+

AutoFill

+Select "Yes" to enable the AutoFill function for the selected control. +
+

Background color

+Specify the background color for the current control. +
+
+

Large change

+Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks in the area between the slider and the arrows on a scrollbar. +
+

Border

+Specify the border type for the current control. +
+
+

Button type

+Select a button type. Button types determine what type of action is initiated. +
+

Character set

+Select the font to be used for displaying the contents of the current control. +
+
+

Currency symbol

+Enter the currency symbol to be used for currency controls. +
+
+

Date

+Specify the default date to be shown in the Date control. +
+
+

Date format

+Specify the desired format for a date control. A date control interprets the user input depending on this format setting. +
+
+

Date max.

+Specify the upper limit for a date control. +
+
+

Date min.

+Specify the lower limit for a date control. +
+
+

Decimal accuracy

+Specify the number of decimal places displayed for a numerical or currency control. +
+
+

Default button

+Select "Yes" to make the current button control the default selection. Pressing Return in the dialog activates the default button. +
+
+

Delay

+Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. A trigger event occurs when you click a scrollbar arrow or click the background area in a scrollbar. Repeated trigger events occur if you keep the mouse button pressed when you click a scrollbar arrow or background area in a scrollbar. If you want, you can include valid time units with the number that you enter, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +
+

Dropdown

+Select "Yes" to enable the dropdown option for list or combo box controls. A dropdown control field has an arrow button which you can click to open a list of the existing form entries. +
+
+

Enabled

+Select "Yes" to enable the control. If the control is disabled, it is grayed out in the dialog. +
+
+

Edit mask

+Specify the edit mask for a pattern control. This is a character code that defines the input format for the control. +You need to specify a masking character for each input character of the edit mask to restrict the input to the values that are listed in the following table: + + + + Character + + +Meaning + + + + +L + + +A text constant. This character cannot be modified by the user. + + + + +a + + +The characters a-z can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. + + + + +A + + +The characters A-Z can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + + + + +c + + +The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a capital letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a lowercase letter. + + + + +C + + +The characters a-z and 0-9 can be entered here. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + + + + +N + + +Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. + + + + +x + + +All printable characters can be entered. + + + + +X + + +All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + +
+
+
+

Editable

+Specifies whether the nodes of the tree control are editable. +The default value is FALSE. +
+

Graphics

+Specify the source of the graphics for a button or an image control. Click "..." to select a file. +
+
+

Height

+Specify the height of the current control or the dialog. +
+
+

Help text

+Enter a help text that is displayed as a tip (bubble help) when the mouse rests over the control. +
+
+

Help URL

+Specify the help URL that is called when you press F1 while the focus is on a particular control. For example, use the format HID:1234 to call the Help-ID with the number 1234. +Set the environment variable HELP_DEBUG to 1 to view the Help-IDs as extended help tips. +
+
+

Incr./decrement value

+Specify the increment and decrement interval for spin button controls. +
+
+

Invokes stop mode editing

+Specifies what happens when editing is interrupted by selecting another node in the tree, a change in the tree's data, or by some other means. +Setting this property to TRUE causes the changes to be automatically saved when editing is interrupted. FALSE means that editing is canceled and changes are lost. +The default value is FALSE. +
+

Label

+Specifies the label of the current control. The label is displayed along with the control. +You can create multi-line labels by inserting manual line breaks in the label using Shift+Enter. +
+
+

Line Count

+Enter the number of lines to be displayed for a list control. For combo boxes, this setting is only active if the dropdown option is enabled. +
+
+

Scrollbar

+Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +
+
+

Small change

+Specify the number of units to scroll when a user clicks an arrow on a scrollbar. +
+

List entries

+Specify the entries for a list control. One line takes one list entry. Press Shift+Enter to insert a new line. +
+
+

Literal mask

+Specify the initial values to be displayed in a pattern control. This helps the user to identify which values are allowed in a pattern control. The literal mask is restricted by the format specified by the edit mask. +
+
+

Manual line break

+Select "Yes" to allow manual line breaks inside multiline controls. +
+
+

Max. text length

+Specify the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. +
+

Multiline Input

+Select "Yes" to allow the input of multiple lines in the control. Press Enter to insert a manual line break in the control. +
+
+

Multiselection

+Select "Yes" to allow the selection of multiple entries in list controls. +
+

Name

+Insert a name for the current control. This name is used to identify the control. +
+

Order

+Specify the order in which the controls receive the focus when the Tab key is pressed in the dialog. On entering a dialog, the control with the lowest order (0) receives the focus. Pressing the Tab key the successively focuses the other controls as specified by their order number. +Initially, the controls receive numbers in the order they are added to the dialog. You can change the order numbers for controls. $[officename] Basic updates the order numbers automatically to avoid duplicate numbers. Controls that cannot be focused are also assigned a value but these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. +
+
+

Orientation

+Specify the orientation for a scrollbar control. +
+
+

Page (step)

+Specify the number of the dialog page to which the current control is assigned or the page number of the dialog you want to edit. If a dialog has only one page set its Page (Step) value to 0. +Select Page (Step) = 0 to make a control visible on every dialog page. +To switch between dialog pages at run time, you need to create a macro that changes the value of Page (Step). +
+
+

Password characters

+Enter a character to be displayed instead of the characters that are typed. This can be used for entering passwords in text controls. +
+
+

PositionX

Specify the distance of the current control from the left side of the dialog. +
+
+

PositionY

+Specify the distance of the current control from the top of the dialog. +
+
+

Prefix symbol

+Select "Yes" to display the currency symbol prefix in currency controls when a number was entered. +
+
+

Print

+Select "Yes" to include the current control in a document's printout. +
+
+

Progress value

+Specify a progress value for a progress bar control. +
+
+

Progress value max.

+Specify the maximum value of a progress bar control. +
+
+

Progress value min.

+Specify the minimum value of a progress bar control. +
+

Read-only

+Select "Yes" to prevent the user from editing the value of the current control. The control is enabled and can be focused but not modified. +
+
+

RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw

+Repeats trigger events when you keep the mouse button pressed on a control such as a spin button. +
+
+

Root displayedsee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt

+Specifies if the root node of the tree control is displayed. +If Root displayed is set to FALSE, the root node of a model is no longer a valid node for the tree control and can't be used with any method of XTreeControl. +The default value is TRUE. +
+
+

Row height

+Specifies the height of each row of a tree control, in pixels. +If the specified value is less than or equal to zero, the row height is the maximum height of all rows. +The default value is 0. +
+
+

Scale

+Scales the image to fit the control size. +
+
+ + +

Scrollbar

+Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +
+
+

Scroll value

+Specify the initial value of a scrollbar control. This determines the position of the scrollbar slider. +
+
+

Scroll value max.

+Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+

Scroll value min.

+Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+

Show handles

+Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should be displayed. +The handles are dotted lines that visualize the hierarchy of the tree control. +The default value is TRUE. +
+
+

Show root handles

+Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should also be displayed at root level. +The default value is TRUE. +
+
+

SelectionUFI: udk.features "New property and help ID for property browser in Basic IDE"

+Specifies the sequence of the selected items, where "0" corresponds to the first item. To select more than one item, Multiselection must be enabled. +Click the ... button to open the Selection dialog. +Click the item or items that you want to select. To select more than one item, ensure that the Multiselection option is selected. +
+
+

Selection typesee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt

+Specifies the selection mode that is enabled for this tree control. +
+

Spin Button

+Select "Yes" to add spin buttons to a numerical, currency, date, or time control to allow increasing and decreasing the input value using arrow buttons. +
+
+

State

+Select the selection state of the current control. +
+
+

Strict format

+Select "Yes" to only allow valid characters to be entered in a numerical, currency, date, or time control. +
+

Tabstop

+Select the focus behavior of the current control when using the Tab key. + + + +Default + + +Only input controls receive the focus when using the Tab key. Controls without input like caption controls are omitted. + + + + +No + + +When using the tab key focusing skips the control. + + + + +Yes + + +The control can be selected with the Tab key. + + +
+
+
+

Thousands Separator

+Select "Yes" to display thousands separator characters in numerical and currency controls. +
+
+

Time Format

+Select the format to be used for time controls. +
+
+

Time max.

+Specify the maximum time value for a time control. +
+
+

Time min.

+Specify the minimum time value for a time control. +
+
+

Title

+Specify the title of the dialog. Click the border of the dialog to select the dialog. + +Titles are only used for labeling a dialog and can only contain one line. Please note that if you work with macros, controls are only called through their Name property. +
+
+

Tristate

+Select "Yes" to allow a check box to have three states (checked, unchecked, and grayed out) instead of two (checked and unchecked). +
+
+

Value

+Specify the value for the current control. +
+
+

Value max.

+Specify the maximum value for the current control. +
+
+

Value min.

+Specify the minimum value for the current control. +
+
+

Visible size

+Specify the length of the slider of a scrollbar control. +
+

Width

+Specify the width of the current control or dialog. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd3d25ae8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Events +/text/sbasic/shared/01170103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Events +Define event assignments for the selected control or dialog. The available events depend on the type of control selected. +
+When receiving focus +This event takes place if a control receives the focus. +When losing focus +This event takes place if a control loses the focus. +Key pressed +This event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. +Key released +This event occurs when the user releases a key while the control has the focus. +Modified +This event takes place, when the control loses the focus and the contents of the control were changed since it lost the focus. +Text modified +This event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. +Item status changed +This event takes place if the status of the control field is changed, for example, from checked to unchecked. +Mouse inside +This event takes place when the mouse enters the control. +Mouse moved while key pressed +This event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. +Mouse moved +This event takes place when the mouse moves over the control. +Mouse button pressed +This event takes place when the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. +Mouse button released +This event takes place when the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. +Mouse outside +This event takes place when the mouse leaves the control. +While adjusting +This event takes place when a scrollbar is being dragged. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad5f0a5c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Library +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Library + Select the library that you want to edit. The first module of the library that you select is displayed in the Basic IDE. +
+
+ + + + + + + List box Library + + + Library List Box + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce53ee438 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Compile +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Compile

+ Compiles the Basic macro. You need to compile a macro after you make changes to it, or if the macro uses single or procedure steps. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Compile + + + Compile + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91d2c92f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Run +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Run +Runs the first macro of the current module. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Run + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8a7aa415 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Stop +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11040000.xhp + + + +
+macros; stopping +program stops +stopping macros + + +Stop +Stops running the current macro. + You can also press Shift+Ctrl+Q. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Stop + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57a75a94e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Single Step +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Single Step +Runs the macro and stops it after the next command. +
+You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Single Step + + +
+ +
+
+Procedure Step function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd497d144 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Procedure Step +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Procedure Step +Runs the macro and stops it after the next procedure. +
+You can use this command in conjunction with the Watch command to troubleshoot errors. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Procedure Step + + +
+ +
+
+Single Step function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8382317d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Breakpoint +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11070000.xhp + + + +
+ +Breakpoint +Inserts a breakpoint in the program line. +
+The breakpoint is inserted at the cursor position. Use a breakpoint to interrupt a program just before an error occurs. You can then troubleshoot the program by running it in Single Step mode until the error occurs. You can also use the Watch icon to check the content of the relevant variables. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Breakpoint + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..98643b7db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Enable Watch +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Enable Watch +Click this icon to view the variables in a macro. The contents of the variable are displayed in a separate window. +
+Click the name of a variable to select it, then click the Enable Watch icon. The value that is assigned to the variable is displayed next to its name. This value is constantly updated. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Enable Watch + + +
+ +
+To remove the variable watch, select the variable in the Watch window, and then click on the Remove Watch icon. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4f68b8a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Object Catalog +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Object Catalog +Opens the Objects pane, where you can view Basic objects. +
+Double click the name of a function or sub to load the module that contains that function or sub, and to position the cursor. Double click the name of a module or dialog to load and display that module or dialog. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Object Catalog + + +
+ +
+ + +Window Area +Displays a hierarchical view of the current $[officename] macro libraries, modules, and dialogs. To display the contents of an item in the window, double click its name. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fe1f4955 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Macros +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Macros

+ Opens the Macro dialog. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Macros + + + Macros + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a982589e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Modules +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Modules

+ Click here to open the Macro Organizer dialog. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Modules + + + Modules + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a9ee3c26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Find Parentheses +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Find Parentheses

+ Highlights the text that is enclosed by two corresponding brackets. Place the text cursor in front of an opening or closing bracket, and then click this icon. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Find Parentheses + + + Find Parentheses + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a33237355 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Source Text +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Insert Source Text +Opens the Basic source text in the Basic IDE window. +
+Place the cursor in the code where you want to insert the source text, and then click the Insert source text icon. Locate the file that contains the Basic source text that you want to insert, and then click Open. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert source text + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a08b9245b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Save Source As +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Save Source As +Saves the source code of the selected Basic macro. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Save Source As + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1345affde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Step Out +/text/sbasic/shared/02/11160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Step Out

+ Jumps back to the previous routine in the current macro. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Step Out + + + Step Out + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f944e2aba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Breakpoints + /text/sbasic/shared/02/11170000.xhp + + + +
+ +Manage Breakpoints + Calls a dialog to manage breakpoints. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Manage Breakpoints + + +
+ +
+
+ Manage Breakpoints dialog +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..594c3cc16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Import Dialog + /text/sbasic/shared/02/11180000.xhp + + + +
+ +Import Dialog + Calls an "Open" dialog to import a BASIC dialog file. + If the imported dialog has a name that already exists in the library, you see a message box where you can decide to rename the imported dialog. In this case the dialog will be renamed to the next free "automatic" name like when creating a new dialog. Or you can replace the existing dialog by the imported dialog. If you click Cancel the dialog is not imported. + Dialogs can contain localization data. When importing a dialog, a mismatch of the dialogs' localization status can occur. + If the library contains additional languages compared to the imported dialog, or if the imported dialog is not localized at all, then the additional languages will silently be added to the imported dialog using the strings of the dialog's default locale. + If the imported dialog contains additional languages compared to the library, or if the library is not localized at all, then you see a message box with Add, Omit, and Cancel buttons. + + + Add: The additional languages from the imported dialog will be added to the already existing dialog. The resources from the library's default language will be used for the new languages. This is the same as if you add these languages manually. + + + Omit: The library's language settings will stay unchanged. The imported dialog's resources for the omitted languages are not copied into the library, but they remain in the imported dialog's source files. + + +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Import Dialog + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc39139a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + Export Dialog + /text/sbasic/shared/02/11190000.xhp + + + +
+ +Export Dialog + In the dialog editor, this command calls a "Save as" dialog to export the current BASIC dialog. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Export Dialog + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6c9c97f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,474 @@ + + + + + +Insert Controls +/text/sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhp + + + +
+controls; in dialog editor +push button control in dialog editor +icon control +buttons; controls +image control +check box control +radio button control +option button control +fixed text control +label field control +editing; controls +text boxes; controls +list boxes; controls +combo box control +scroll bar control +horizontal scrollbar control +vertical scrollbar control +group box control +progress bar control +fixed line control +horizontal line control +line control +vertical line control +date field control +time field control +numerical field control +currency field control +formatted field control +pattern field control +masked field control +file selection control +selection options for controls +test mode control + + +

Insert Controls

+Opens the Toolbox bar.
+
+ + + + +Icon Choose Controls + + +Insert Controls + + +
+
+ + +In edit mode, double-click a control to open the properties dialog. + + +In edit mode, you can also right-click a control and choose the cut, copy, and paste command. + + + +
+

Button

+ + + + +Icon Button + + +Adds a command button. You can use a command button to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. +If you want, you can add text or a graphic to the button. + + +
+
+ +
+

Image Control

+ + + + +Icon Image Control + + +Adds a control that displays a graphic. + + +
+
+
+

Check Box

+ + + + +Icon Check Box + + +Adds a check box that you can use to turn a function on or off. + + +
+
+
+

Option Button

+ + + + +Icon Option Button + + +Adds a button that allows a user to select from a number of options. Grouped option buttons must have consecutive tab order. They are commonly encircled by a group box. If you have two groups of option buttons, you must insert a tab order between the tab orders of the two groups. For example, to the frame of the second group, or to any other control in the dialog, with the exception of another option button. + + +
+
+
+

Label Field

+ + + + +Icon Label Field + + +Adds a field for displaying text labels. These labels are only for displaying predefined text, and not for entering text. + + +
+
+
+

Text Box

+ + + + +Icon Text Box + + +Adds an input box where you can enter and edit text. + + +
+
+
+

List Box

+ + + + +Icon List Box + + +Adds a box where you can click an entry on a list. + + +
+
+
+

Combo Box

+ + + + +Icon Combo Box + + +Adds a combo box. A combo box is a one line list box that a user can click, and then choose an entry from the list. If you want, you can make the entries in the combo box "read only". + + +
+
+
+

Horizontal Scrollbar

+ + + + +Icon Horizontal Scrollbar + + +Adds a horizontal scrollbar to the dialog. + + +
+
+
+

Vertical Scrollbar

+ + + + +Icon Vertical Scrollbar + + +Adds a vertical scrollbar to the dialog. + + +
+
+
+

Group Box

+ + + + +Icon Group Box + + +Adds a frame that you can use to visually group similar controls, such as option buttons. + + +
+
+To define two different groups of option buttons, ensure that the tab index of the group frame is between the tab indices of the two groups. + +
+

Progress Bar

+ + + + +Icon Progress Bar + + +Adds a progress bar to the dialog. + + +
+
+
+

Horizontal Line

+ + + + +Icon Horizontal Line + + +Adds a horizontal line to the dialog. + + +
+
+
+

Vertical Line

+ + + + +Icon Vertical Line + + +Adds a vertical line to the dialog. + + +
+
+
+

Date Field

+ + + + +Icon Date Field + + +Adds a date field. + + +
+If you assign the "dropdown" property to the date field, a user can drop down a calendar to select a date. +
+
+ +

Time Field

+ + + + +Icon Time Field + + +Adds a time field. + + +
+
+
+

Numeric Field

+ + + + +Icon Numeric Field + + +Adds a numeric field. + + +
+
+
+

Currency Field

+ + + + +Icon Currency Field + + +Adds a currency field. + + +
+
+
+

Formatted Field

+ + + + +Icon Formatted Field + + +Adds a text box where you can define the formatting for text that is inputted or outputted as well as any limiting values. + + +
+
+
+

Pattern Field

+ + + + +Icon Pattern Field + + +Adds a masked field. A masked field consists of an input mask and a literal mask. The input mask determines which user data can be entered. The literal mask determines the state of the masked field when the form is loaded. + + +
+
+
+

File Selection

+ + + + +Icon File Selection + + +Adds a button that opens a file selection dialog. + + +
+
+

Select

+ + + + +Icon Select + + +Activates or deactivates the Selection mode. In this mode, you can select the controls in a dialog so that you can edit them. + + +
+

Properties

+ + + + +Icon Properties + + +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the selected control. + + +
+

Activate Test Mode

+ + + + +Icon Activate Test Mode + + +Starts test mode. Click the dialog closer icon to end test mode. + + +
+

Manage Language

+ + + + +Manage Language icon + + +Opens a dialog to enable or manage multiple sets of dialog resources for multiple languages. + + +
+

Tree Control

+ + + + +Icon Tree Control + + +Adds a tree control that can show a hierarchical list. You can populate the list by your program, using API calls (XtreeControl). + + +
+ +

Table Control

+ + + + +Table control icon + + +Adds a table control that can show a table data. You can populate the data by your program, using API calls. + + +
+ +

Hyperlink Control

+ + + + +Insert hyperlink control icon + + +Adds a hyperlink control that can open an address in web browser. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..019363a95 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + (Un)Available since release + /text/sbasic/shared/03/avail_release.xhp + + + +
This method is not available in Basic.
+
This property is not available in Basic.
+
This method is not available in Python.
+
This property is not available in Python.
+ Tags for LibreOffice 7.3 +
+ This service is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.3 onwards. +
+
+ This method is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.3 onwards. +
+
+ This property is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.3 onwards. +
+ Tags for LibreOffice 7.2 +
+ This service is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+
+ These methods are available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+
+ This method is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+
+ This control is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+
+ These event properties are available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+
+ This property is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..946280ba4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge Libraries + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_ScriptForge.xhp + + + +

The ScriptForge Library

+ + BASIC ScriptForge library + Python scriptforge module + +
+ +
+ ScriptForge libraries build up an extensible collection of macro scripting resources for %PRODUCTNAME to be invoked from Basic macros or Python scripts. +
+ • Basic macros require to load ScriptForge library using the following statement:
GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge")

• Python scripts require an import from scriptforge module:
from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + +
+ To learn more about how to create and execute Python scripts using the ScriptForge library, read the help page Creating Python Scripts with ScriptForge. + +

Invoking ScriptForge services

+ The described modules and classes are invoked from user scripts as "Services". A generic constructor of those services has been designed for that purpose for each language. + The Dispose method is available in all services and should be called to free up resources after usage: + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Set oSvc = CreateScriptService("servicename"[, arg0, arg1, ...]) + ' ... + oSvc.Dispose() + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc = CreateScriptService('servicename'[, arg0, arg1, ...]) + # ... + svc.Dispose() + + +

Services provided by the ScriptForge library

+ + + + + Category + + + Services + + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + + + Array
+ Dictionary
+ + + + + Exception
+ FileSystem
+ + + + + String
+ TextStream
+ + + + + + Document Content + + + + Base
+ Calc
+ + + + + Chart
+ Database
+ + + + + Document
+ Writer
+ + + + + + User Interface + + + + Dialog
+ DialogControl
+ Form
+ + + + + FormControl
+ Menu

+ + + + + PopupMenu
+ UI

+ + + + + + Utilities + + + + Basic
+ L10N
+ Platform
+ + + + + Region
+ Services
+ Session
+ + + + + Timer
+ UnitTest

+ + + +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ Restricted use for SF_Root, SF_Utils modules as well as internal methods + Note: Other ScriptForge undescribed modules are reserved for internal use. Their content is subject to change without notice. +
+ All ScriptForge Basic routines or identifiers that are prefixed with an underscore character "_" are reserved for internal use. They are not meant be used in Basic macros or Python scripts. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c4a01ba1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + DEPOT Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_depot.xhp + + + + The Depot Library + +
+ +
+
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Depot") + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d975c69d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + EURO Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_euro.xhp + + + +

The Euro Library

+ + BASIC Euro library + +
+ +
+ +

Description

+ The Euro library is used by the Euro converter… wizard. + Its entry points are: + + Euro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot + Euro.ConvertRun.Main + + Selecting the Euro Converter wizard loads the following libraries in memory: + + Euro + ImportWizard + Tools + + Basic routine name conflicts may exist when multiple Basic libraries are loaded in memory. +
+ ImportWizard and Tools Basic libraries + Euro Converter Wizard describes what the Euro library does. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3ff82a11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + FORMWIZARD Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_formwizard.xhp + + + + The FormWizard Library + +
+ +
+
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("FormWizard") + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01c7d0171 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + GIMMICKS Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_gimmicks.xhp + + + + The Gimmicks Library + + BASIC Gimmicks library + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Gimmicks") + +

Description

+ The Gimmicks library is used by the AutoText wizard. + Its entry points are: + + Gimmicks.AutoText.Main + Gimmicks.GetTexts.Main + + + Selecting Tools - AutoText loads the following library in memory: + + Tools + + Basic routine name conflicts may exist when multiple Basic libraries are loaded in memory. + +
+ Tools Basic library + Using AutoText explains what the Gimmicks library does. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20669ec99 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + ImportWizard Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_importwiz.xhp + + + +

The ImportWizard Library

+ + BASIC ImportWizard library + +
+ + +
+ +

Description

+ The ImportWizard library is used by the Document Converter wizard. + Its entry point is: + + ImportWizard.Main.Main + + Selecting the Document Converter wizard loads the following libraries in memory: + + ImportWizard + Tools + + Basic routine name conflicts may exist when multiple Basic libraries are loaded in memory. +
+ Tools Basic library + Document Converter describes what the ImportWizard library does. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00cf3dcc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + SCHEDULE Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_schedule.xhp + + + + The Schedule Library + + BASIC Schedule library + +
+ +
+
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Schedule") + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2ef92b9b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + SCRIPTBINDINGLIBRARY Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_script.xhp + + + +

The ScriptBindingLibrary Library

+ + BASIC ScriptBindingLibrary library + +
+ +
+

Description

+ The ScriptBindingLibrary library only contains dialogs, it is used by Highlight %PRODUCTNAME example scripts. Its dialogs are shared by Beanshell, Java and JavaScript example scripts. + Running any Highlight example script loads the ScriptBindingLibrary library in memory. + This library is not used by %PRODUCTNAME Basic. +
+ Basic macro selector + Beanshell, Java and JavaScript Scripts +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7e093fa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + TEMPLATE Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_template.xhp + + + + The Template Library + +
+ +
+
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Template") + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ed625b5a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,842 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_tools.xhp + + + + The Tools Library + + BASIC Tools library + +
+ +
+
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("Tools") + Debug Module + ListBox Module + Misc Module + ModuleControls Module + Strings Module + UCB Module + + BASIC Tools library;Debug module + +
+ Debug Module + Functions and subroutines for debugging Basic macros. +

ActivateReadOnlyFlag

+ + Sub ActivateReadOnlyFlag() + +

DeactivateReadOnlyFlag

+ + Sub DeactivateReadOnlyFlag() + +

SetBasicReadOnlyFlag

+ + Sub SetBasicReadOnlyFlag(bReadOnly as Boolean) + +

WritedbgInfo

+ + Sub WritedbgInfo(LocObject as Object) + +

WriteDbgString

+ + Sub WriteDbgString(LocString as String) + +

ShowArray

+ + Sub ShowArray(LocArray()) + +

ShowPropertyValues

+ + Sub ShowPropertyValues(oLocObject as Object) + +

ShowNameValuePair

+ + Sub ShowNameValuePair(Pair()) + +

ShowElementNames

+ ' Retrieves all the Elements of aSequence of an object, with the + ' possibility to define a filter(sfilter <> "") + + Sub ShowElementNames( + oLocElements() as Object, + Optional sFiltername as String) + +

ShowSupportedServiceNames

+ ' Retrieves all the supported servicenames of an object, with the + ' possibility to define a filter(sfilter <> "") + + Sub ShowSupportedServiceNames( + oLocObject as Object, + Optional sFilterName as String) + +

ShowAvailableServiceNames

+ ' Retrieves all the available Servicenames of an object, with the + ' possibility to define a filter(sfilter <> "") + + Sub ShowAvailableServiceNames( + oLocObject as Object, + Optional sFilterName as String) + +

ShowCommands

+ + Sub ShowCommands(oLocObject as Object) + +

ProtectCurrentSheets

+ + Sub ProtectCurrentSheets() + +

FillDocument

+ + Sub FillDocument() + +
+ + BASIC Tools library;ListBox module + +
+ ListBox Module + Functions and subroutines for handling ListBox elements. + +
+ + BASIC Tools library;Misc module + +
+ Misc Module + Miscellaneous functions and subroutines. +

RegisterNewDataSource

+ + Function RegisterNewDataSource( + DSName as String, + PropertyList(), + Optional DriverProperties() + as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue) + +

ConnecttoDatabase

+ + Function ConnecttoDatabase( + DSName as String, + UserID as String, + Password as String, + Optional Propertylist(), + Optional DriverProperties() + as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue) + +

GetStarOfficeLocale

+ + Function GetStarOfficeLocale() + as New com.sun.star.lang.Locale + +

GetRegistryKeyContent

+ + Function GetRegistryKeyContent( + sKeyName as string, + Optional bforUpdate as Boolean) + +

GetProductname

+ + Function GetProductname() as String + +

OpenDocument

+ ' Opens a Document, checks beforehand, whether it has to be loaded or whether it is already on the desktop. If the parameter bDisposable is set to False then the returned document should not be disposed afterwards, because it is already opened. + + Function OpenDocument( + DocPath as String, + Args(), + Optional bDisposable as Boolean) + +

TaskonDesktop

+ + Function TaskonDesktop(DocPath as String) as Boolean + +

RetrieveFileName

+ ' Retrieves a FileName out of a StarOffice-Document. + + Function RetrieveFileName(LocDoc as Object) + +

GetPathSettings

+ ' Gets a special configured PathSetting. + + Function GetPathSettings( + sPathType as String, + Optional bshowall as Boolean, + Optional ListIndex as integer) as String + +

GetOfficeSubPath

+ ' Gets the fully qualified path to a subdirectory of the Template Directory, e. g. with the parameter "wizard/bitmap". The parameter must be passed over in Url-scription. The return-Value is in Urlscription. + + Function GetOfficeSubPath( + sOfficePath as String, + ByVal sSubDir as String) + +

ShowNoOfficePathError

+ + Sub ShowNoOfficePathError() + +

InitResources

+ + Function InitResources( + Description, + ShortDescription as String) as boolean + +

GetResText

+ + Function GetResText( nID as integer ) As string + +

CutPathView

+ + Function CutPathView( + sDocUrl as String, + Optional PathLen as Integer) + +

DeleteInputCells

+ ' Deletes the content of all cells that are softformatted according to the 'InputStyleName'. + + Sub DeleteInputCells( + oSheet as Object, + InputStyleName as String) + +

ChangeValueofRange

+ ' Inserts a certain String to all cells of a Range that is passed over either as an object or as the RangeName. + + Sub ChangeValueofRange( + oSheet as Object, + Range, + ReplaceValue, + Optional StyleName as String) + +

ReplaceRangeValues

+ + Sub ReplaceRangeValues( + oRange as Object, + ReplaceValue) + +

GetValueofCellbyName

+ ' Returns the Value of the first cell of a Range. + + Function GetValueofCellbyName( + oSheet as Object, + sCellName as String) + +

DuplicateRow

+ + Function DuplicateRow( + oSheet as Object, + RangeName as String) + +

GetStringofCellbyName

+ ' Returns the String of the first cell of a Range. + + Function GetStringofCellbyName( + oSheet as Object, + sCellName as String) + +

GetCellByName

+ ' Returns a named Cell + + Function GetCellByName( + oSheet as Object, + sCellName as String) as Object + +

ChangeCellValue

+ ' Changes the numeric Value of a cell by transmitting the String of the numeric Value. + + Sub ChangeCellValue( + oCell as Object, + ValueString as String) + +

GetDocumentType

+ + Function GetDocumentType(oDocument) + +

GetNumberFormatType

+ + Function GetNumberFormatType( + oDocFormats, + oFormatObject as Object) as Integer + +

ProtectSheets

+ + Sub ProtectSheets(Optional oSheets as Object) + +

UnprotectSheets

+ + Sub UnprotectSheets(Optional oSheets as Object) + +

GetRowIndex

+ + Function GetRowIndex( + oSheet as Object, + RowName as String) + +

GetColumnIndex

+ + Function GetColumnIndex( + oSheet as Object, + ColName as String) + +

CopySheetbyName

+ + Function CopySheetbyName( + oSheets as Object, + OldName as String, + NewName as String, + DestPos as Integer) as Object + +

ToggleWindow

+ ' Dis-or enables a Window and adjusts the mousepointer accordingly + + Sub ToggleWindow(bDoEnable as Boolean) + +

CheckNewSheetname

+ + Function CheckNewSheetname( + oSheets as Object, + Sheetname as String, + Optional oLocale) as String + +

AddNewSheetName

+ + Sub AddNewSheetName( + oSheets as Object, + ByVal SheetName as String) + +

GetSheetIndex

+ + Function GetSheetIndex(oSheets, sName) as Integer + +

GetLastUsedRow

+ + Function GetLastUsedRow(oSheet as Object) as Integer + +

ModifyBorderLineWidth

+ ' Note To set a one lined frame you have to set the inner width to 0 In the API all Units that refer to pt-Heights are "1/100mm" The convert factor from 1pt to 1/100 mm is approximately 35 + + Function ModifyBorderLineWidth( + ByVal oStyleBorder, + iInnerLineWidth as Integer, + iOuterLineWidth as Integer) + +

AttachBasicMacroToEvent

+ + Sub AttachBasicMacroToEvent( + oDocument as Object, + EventName as String, + SubPath as String) + +

ModifyPropertyValue

+ + Function ModifyPropertyValue( + oContent() as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue, + TargetProperties() + as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue) + +

GetPropertyValueIndex

+ + Function GetPropertyValueIndex( + SearchName as String, + TargetProperties() + as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue ) as Integer + +

DispatchSlot

+ + Sub DispatchSlot(SlotID as Integer) + +

IsFatOffice

+ 'returns the type of the office application FatOffice = 0, WebTop = 1 This routine has to be changed if the Product Name is being changed! + + Function IsFatOffice() As Boolean + +

GetLocale

+ + Function GetLocale( + sLanguage as String, + sCountry as String) + +

ToggleDesignMode

+ + Sub ToggleDesignMode(oDocument as Object) + +

isHighContrast

+ + Function isHighContrast(oPeer as Object) + +

CreateNewDocument

+ + Function CreateNewDocument( + sType as String, + Optional sAddMsg as String) as Object + +

DisposeDocument

+ ' This Sub has been used in order to ensure that after disposing a document from the backing window it is returned to the backing window, so the office won't be closed + + Sub DisposeDocument(oDocument as Object) + +

CalIsLeapYear

+ 'Function to calculate if the year is a leap year + + Function CalIsLeapYear( + ByVal iYear as Integer) as Boolean + +
+ + BASIC Tools library;ModuleControl module + +
+ ModuleControls Module + Functions and subroutines for module control. +

GetControlShape

+ ' Gets the Shape of a Control( e. g. to reset the size or Position of the control + ' Parameters: + ' The 'oContainer' is the Document or a specific sheet of a Calc - Document + ' 'CName' is the Name of the Control + + Function GetControlShape( + oContainer as Object, + CName as String) + +

getControlView

+ ' Returns the View of a Control + ' Parameters: + ' The 'oContainer' is the Document or a specific sheet of a Calc - Document + ' The 'oController' is always directly attached to the Document + ' 'CName' is the Name of the Control + + Function getControlView( + oContainer , + oController as Object, + CName as String) as Object + +

DisposeControl

+ ' Parameters: + ' The 'oContainer' is the Document or a specific sheet of a Calc - Document + ' 'CName' is the Name of the Control + + Function DisposeControl( + oContainer as Object, + CName as String) as Boolean + +

GetControlGroupModel

+ ' Returns a sequence of a group of controls like option buttons or checkboxes + ' The 'oContainer' is the Document or a specific sheet of a Calc - Document + ' 'sGroupName' is the Name of the Controlgroup + + Function GetControlGroupModel( + oContainer as Object, + sGroupName as String ) + +

GetRefValue

+ ' Returns the Referencevalue of a group of e.g. option buttons or check boxes + ' 'oControlGroup' is a sequence of the Control objects + + Function GetRefValue( + oControlGroup() as Object) + +

GetRefValueOfControlGroup

+ + Function GetRefValueOfControlGroup( + oContainer as Object, + GroupName as String) + +

GetOptionGroupValue

+ + Function GetOptionGroupValue( + oContainer as Object, + OptGroupName as String) as Boolean + +

WriteOptValueToCell

+ + Function WriteOptValueToCell( + oSheet as Object, + OptGroupName as String, + iCol as Integer, + iRow as Integer) as Boolean + +

LoadDialog

+ + Function LoadDialog( + Libname as String, + DialogName as String, + Optional oLibContainer) + + Refer to Opening a Dialog with Basic for an example of LoadDialog function. +

GetFolderName

+ + Sub GetFolderName(oRefModel as Object) + +

GetFileName

+ + Sub GetFileName( + oRefModel as Object, + Filternames()) + +

StoreDocument

+ + Function StoreDocument( + oDocument as Object, + FilterNames() as String, + DefaultName as String, + DisplayDirectory as String, + Optional iAddProcedure as Integer) as String + +

AddFiltersToDialog

+ + Sub AddFiltersToDialog( + FilterNames() as String, + oDialog as Object) + +

SwitchMousePointer

+ + Sub SwitchMousePointer( + oWindowPeer as Object, + bDoEnable as Boolean) + +

ShowOverwriteAllDialog

+ + Sub ShowOverwriteAllDialog( + FilePath as String, + sTitle as String) + +

SetOVERWRITEToQuery

+ + Sub SetOVERWRITEToQuery() + +

SetOVERWRITEToAlways

+ + Sub SetOVERWRITEToAlways() + +

SetOVERWRITEToNever

+ + Sub SetOVERWRITEToNever() + +
+ + BASIC Tools library;Strings module + +
+ Strings Module + Advanced functions and subroutines for string manipulation. +

ElimChar

+ + Function ElimChar( + ByVal BigString as String, + ElimArray() as String) + +

DeleteStr

+ ' Deletes out of a String 'BigString' a possible Partstring 'CompString' + + Function DeleteStr( + ByVal BigString, + CompString as String) as String + +

FindPartString

+ ' Finds a PartString, that is framed by the Strings 'Prestring' and 'PostString' + + Function FindPartString( + BigString, + PreString, + PostString as String, + SearchPos as Integer) as String + +

PartStringInArray

+ ' Note iCompare = 0 (Binary comparison) + ' iCompare = 1 (Text comparison) + + Function PartStringInArray( + BigArray(), + SearchString as String, + iCompare as Integer) as Integer + +

RTrimStr

+ ' Deletes the String 'SmallString' out of the String 'BigString' + ' in case SmallString's Position in BigString is right at the end + + Function RtrimStr( + ByVal BigString, + SmallString as String) as String + +

LTRimChar

+ ' Deletes the Char 'CompChar' out of the String 'BigString' + ' in case CompChar's Position in BigString is right at the beginning + + Function LTRimChar( + ByVal BigString as String, + CompChar as String) as String + +

ArrayOutOfString

+ ' Retrieves an Array out of a String. + ' The fields of the Array are separated by the parameter 'Separator', that is contained + ' in the Array + ' The Array MaxIndex delivers the highest Index of this Array + + Function ArrayOutOfString( + BigString, + Separator as String, + Optional MaxIndex as Integer) + +

ClearArray

+ ' Deletes all fieldvalues in one-dimensional Array + + Sub ClearArray(BigArray) + +

ClearMultiDimArray

+ ' Deletes all fieldvalues in a multidimensional Array + + Sub ClearMultiDimArray( + BigArray, + DimCount as integer) + +

FieldinArray

+ ' Checks if a Field (LocField) is already defined in an Array + ' Returns 'True' or 'False' + + Function FieldinArray( + LocArray(), + MaxIndex as integer, + LocField as String) As Boolean + +

FieldinList

+ ' Checks if a Field (LocField) is already defined in an Array + ' Returns 'True' or 'False' + + Function FieldinList( + LocField, + BigList()) As Boolean + +

IndexinArray

+ ' Retrieves the Index of the delivered String 'SearchString' in + ' the Array LocList()' + + Function IndexinArray( + SearchString as String, + LocList()) as Integer + +

MultiArrayInListbox

+ + Sub MultiArrayInListbox( + oDialog as Object, + ListboxName as String, + ValList(), + iDim as Integer) + +

StringInMultiArray

+ ' Searches for a String in a two-dimensional Array by querying all Searchindexes of the second dimension + ' and delivers the specific String of the ReturnIndex in the second dimension of the Searchlist() + + Function StringInMultiArray( + SearchList(), + SearchString as String, + SearchIndex as Integer, + ReturnIndex as Integer, + Optional MaxIndex as Integer) as String + +

GetIndexInMultiArray

+ ' Searches for a Value in multidimensial Array by querying all Searchindices of the passed dimension + ' and delivers the Index where it is found. + + Function GetIndexInMultiArray( + SearchList(), + SearchValue, + SearchIndex as Integer) as Integer + +

GetIndexForPartString_

+ inMultiArray + ' Searches for a Value in multidimensial Array by querying all Searchindices of the passed dimension + ' and delivers the Index where the Searchvalue is found as a part string + + Function GetIndexForPartStringinMultiArray( + SearchList(), + SearchValue, + SearchIndex as Integer) as Integer + +

ArrayfromMultiArray

+ + Function ArrayfromMultiArray( + MultiArray as String, + iDim as Integer) + +

ReplaceString

+ ' Replaces the string "OldReplace" through the String "NewReplace" in the String + ' 'BigString' + + Function ReplaceString( + ByVal Bigstring, + NewReplace, + OldReplace as String) as String + +

FindSecondValue

+ ' Retrieves the second value for a next to 'SearchString' in + ' a two-dimensional string-Array + + Function FindSecondValue( + SearchString as String, + TwoDimList() as String ) as String + +

Power

+ ' raises a base to a certain power + + Function Power( + Basis as Double, + Exponent as Double) as Double + +

Round

+ ' rounds a Real to a given Number of Decimals + + Function Round( + BaseValue as Double, + Decimals as Integer) as Double + +

FileNameoutofPath

+ 'Retrieves the mere filename out of a whole path + + Function FileNameoutofPath( + ByVal Path as String, + Optional Separator as String) as String + +

GetFileNameExtension

+ + Function GetFileNameExtension( + ByVal FileName as String) + +

GetFileNameWithoutExtension

+ + Function GetFileNameWithoutExtension( + ByVal FileName as String, + Optional Separator as String) + +

DirectoryNameoutofPath

+ + Function DirectoryNameoutofPath( + sPath as String, + Separator as String) as String + +

CountCharsinString

+ + Function CountCharsinString( + BigString, + LocChar as String, + ByVal StartPos as Integer) as Integer + +

BubbleSortList

+ + Function BubbleSortList( + ByVal SortList(), + optional sort2ndValue as Boolean) + + 'This function bubble sorts an array of maximum 2 dimensions. + 'The default sorting order is the first dimension + 'Only if sort2ndValue is True the second dimension is the relevant for the sorting order +

GetValueoutofList

+ + Function GetValueoutofList( + SearchValue, + BigList(), + iDim as Integer, + Optional ValueIndex) + +

AddListtoList

+ + Function AddListtoList( + ByVal FirstArray(), + ByVal SecondArray(), + Optional StartIndex) + +

CheckDouble

+ + Function CheckDouble(DoubleString as String) + +
+ + BASIC Tools library;UCB module + +
+ UCB Module + Universal Content Broker functions and subroutines. +

ReadDirectories

+ + Function ReadDirectories( + ByVal AnchorDir As String, + bRecursive as Boolean, + bcheckFileType as Boolean, + bGetByTitle as Boolean, + Optional sFileContent(), + Optional sExtension as String) + +

AddFoldertoList

+ + Sub AddFoldertoList( + sDirURL as String, + iDirIndex) + +

AddFileNameToList

+ + Sub AddFileNameToList( + sFileArray(), + FileName as String, + FileContent as String, + bGetByTitle as Boolean, + CurIndex) + +

RetrieveDocTitle

+ + Function RetrieveDocTitle( + oDocProps as Object, + sFileName as String) As String + +

GetRealFileContent

+ ' Retrieves The Filecontent of a Document by extracting the content + ' from the Header of the document + + Function GetRealFileContent( + FileName as String) As String + +

CopyRecursively

+ + Function CopyRecursively( + SourceFilePath as String, + SourceStemDir as String, + TargetStemDir as String) + +

ShowHelperDialog

+ ' Opens a help url referenced by a Help ID that is retrieved from the calling button tag + + Sub ShowHelperDialog(aEvent) + +

SaveDataToFile

+ + Sub SaveDataToFile( + FilePath as String, + DataList()) + +

LoadDataFromFile

+ + Function LoadDataFromFile( + FilePath as String, + DataList()) as Boolean + +

CreateFolder

+ + Function CreateFolder(sNewFolder) as Boolean + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bf31fc1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + WikiEditor Library + /text/sbasic/shared/03/lib_wikieditor.xhp + + + +

The WikiEditor Library

+ + BASIC WikiEditor library + +
+ +
+ +

Description

+ The WikiEditor library only contains dialogs, it is used by Wiki Publisher bundled Java extension. + This library is not used by %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..241bbd408 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,968 @@ + + + + + + ScriptForge.Array service (SF_Array) + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_array.xhp + + + + +
+ + Array service + + +

ScriptForge.Array service

+ Provides a collection of methods for manipulating and transforming arrays of one dimension (vectors) and arrays of two dimensions (matrices). This includes set operations, sorting, importing from and exporting to text files. + Arrays with more than two dimensions cannot be used with the methods in this service, the only exception being the CountDims method that accepts Arrays with any number of dimensions. +
+ + Array items may contain any type of value, including (sub)arrays. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Array service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded using: + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + + Loading the library will create the SF_Array object that can be used to call the methods in the Array service. + The following code snippets show the various ways to call methods in the Array service (the Append method is used as an example): + + Dim arr : arr = Array(1, 2, 3) + arr = SF_Array.Append(arr, 4) + + + Dim arr : arr = Array(1, 2, 3) + Dim svc : svc = SF_Array + arr = svc.Append(arr, 4) + + + Dim arr : arr = Array(1, 2, 3) + Dim svc : svc = CreateScriptService("Array") + arr = svc.Append(arr, 4) + + Because Python has built-in list and tuple support, most of the methods in the Array service are available for Basic scripts only. The only exception is ImportFromCSVFile which is supported in both Basic and Python. + + + List of Methods in the Array Service + + + + Append
+ AppendColumn
+ AppendRow
+ Contains
+ ConvertToDictionary
+ Copy
+ CountDims
+ Difference
+ ExportToTextFile
+ ExtractColumn
+ ExtractRow
+ + + Flatten
+ ImportFromCSVFile
+ IndexOf
+ Insert
+ InsertSorted
+ Intersection
+ Join2D
+ Prepend
+ PrependColumn
+ PrependRow
+ RangeInit
+ + + Reverse
+ Shuffle
+ Slice
+ Sort
+ SortColumns
+ SortRows
+ Transpose
+ TrimArray
+ Union
+ Unique

+ + +
+ The first argument of most methods is the array object to be considered. It is always passed by reference and left unchanged. Methods such as Append, Prepend, etc return a new array object after their execution. + +
+ Append --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Append + +

Append

+ Appends the items listed as arguments to the end of the input array. + + + svc.Append(array_1d: any[0..*], arg0: any, [arg1: any] ...): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. + arg0, arg1, ...: Items that will be appended to array_1d. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Append(Array(1, 2, 3), 4, 5) + ' (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) + +
+ +
+ AppendColumn --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;AppendColumn + +

AppendColumn

+ Appends a new column to the right side of a two dimensional array. The resulting array has the same lower bounds as the initial two dimensional array. + + + svc.AppendColumn(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], column: any[0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. If that array has only one dimension, it is considered as the first column of the resulting two-dimensional array. + column: A 1-dimensional array with as many items as there are rows in array_2d. + + + Dim a As Variant, b As variant + a = SF_Array.AppendColumn(Array(1, 2, 3), Array(4, 5, 6)) + ' ((1, 4), (2, 5), (3, 6)) + b = SF_Array.AppendColumn(a, Array(7, 8, 9)) + ' ((1, 4, 7), (2, 5, 8), (3, 6, 9)) + c = SF_Array.AppendColumn(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + ' ∀ i ∈ {0 ≤ i ≤ 2} : b(0, i) ≡ i + +
+ +
+ AppendRow ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;AppendRow + +

AppendRow

+ Append to the bottom of a two dimension array a new row. The resulting array has the same lower bounds as the initial two dimension array. + + + svc.AppendRow(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], row: any[0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*]) + + + array_2d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. If that array has 1 dimension, it is considered as the first row of the resulting 2 dimension array. + row: A 1-dimensional array with as many items as there are columns in array_2d. + + + Dim a As Variant, b As variant + a = SF_Array.AppendRow(Array(1, 2, 3), Array(4, 5, 6)) + ' ((1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6)) + b = SF_Array..AppendRow(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + ' ∀ i ∈ {0 ≤ i ≤ 2} : b(i, 0) ≡ i + +
+ +
+ Contains ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Contains + +

Contains

+ Check if a one dimension array contains a certain number, text or date. Text comparison can be case-sensitive or not. +
Sorted input arrays must be filled homogeneously, meaning all items must be scalars of the same type (Empty and Null items are forbidden). +
The result of the method is unpredictable when the array is announced as sorted and is in reality not. +
A binary search is done when the array is sorted, otherwise, it is simply scanned from top to bottom and Empty and Null items are ignored. + + + svc.Contains(array_1d: any[0..*], tofind: any, casesensitive: bool = False, sortorder: str = ""): bool + + + array_1d: The array to scan. + tofind: A number, a date or a string to find. + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + sortorder: It can be either "ASC", "DESC" or "" (not sorted). The default value is "". + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Contains(Array("A","B","c","D"), "C", SortOrder := "ASC") ' True + SF_Array.Contains(Array("A","B","c","D"), "C", CaseSensitive := True) ' False + +
+ +
+ ConvertToDictionary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;ConvertToDictionary + +

ConvertToDictionary

+ Store the content of a 2-columns array into a ScriptForge.Dictionary object. +
The key will be extracted from the first column, the item from the second. + + + svc.ConvertToDictionary(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..1]): obj + + + array_2d: Data to be converted into a ScriptForge.Dictionary object. + + + The first column must contain exclusively strings with a length greater than zero, in any order. These values will be used as labels in the dictionary. + + + The second column contains the data that will be associated to the corresponding label in the dictionary. + + + + + Dim a As Variant, b As Variant + a = SF_Array.AppendColumn(Array("a", "b", "c"), Array(1, 2, 3)) + b = SF_Array.ConvertToDictionary(a) + MsgBox b.Item("c") ' 3 + +
+ +
+ Copy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Copy + +

Copy

+ Creates a copy of a 1D or 2D array. + + + svc.Copy(array_nd: any[0..*]): any[0..*] + + + svc.Copy(array_nd: any[0..*, 0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_nd: The 1D or 2D array to be copied. + + A simple assignment of an Array object will copy its reference instead of creating a copy of the object's contents. See the example below: + + Dim a as Variant, b as Variant + a = Array(1, 2, 3) + ' The assignment below is made by reference + b = a + ' Hence changing values in "b" will also change "a" + b(0) = 10 + MsgBox a(0) ' 10 + + By using the Copy method, a copy of the whole Array object is made. In the example below, a and b are different objects and changing values in b will not affect values in a. + + Dim a as Variant, b as Variant + a = Array(1, 2, 3) + ' Creates a copy of "a" using the "Copy" method + b = SF_Array.Copy(a) + b(0) = 10 + MsgBox a(0) ' 1 + +
+ +
+ CountDims ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;CountDims + +

CountDims

+ Count the number of dimensions of an array. The result can be greater than two. +
If the argument is not an array, returns -1 +
If the array is not initialized, returns 0. + + + svc.CountDims(array_nd: any): int + + + array_nd: The array to examine. + + + Dim a(1 To 10, -3 To 12, 5) + MsgBox SF_Array.CountDims(a) ' 3 + +
+ +
+ Difference --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Difference + +

Difference

+ Build a set, as a zero-based array, by applying the difference operator on the two input arrays. Resulting items originate from the first array and not from the second. +
The resulting array is sorted in ascending order. +
Both input arrays must be filled homogeneously, their items must be scalars of the same type. Empty and Null items are forbidden. +
Text comparison can be case sensitive or not. + + + svc.Difference(array1_1d: any[0..*], array2_1d: any[0..*], casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array1_1d: A 1-dimensional reference array, whose items are examined for removal. + array2_1d: A 1-dimensional array, whose items are subtracted from the first input array. + casesensitive: This argument is only applicable if the arrays are populated with strings (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Difference(Array("A", "C", "A", "b", "B"), Array("C", "Z", "b"), True) + ' ("A", "B") + +
+ +
+ ExportToTextFile --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;ExportToTextFile + +

ExportToTextFile

+ Write all items of the array sequentially to a text file. If the file exists already, it will be overwritten without warning. + + + svc.ExportToTextFile(array_1d: any[0..*], filename: str, [encoding: str]): bool + + + array_1d: The array to export. It must contain only strings. + filename: The name of the text file where the data will be written to. The name must be expressed according to the current FileNaming property of the SF_FileSystem service. + encoding: The character set that should be used. Use one of the names listed in IANA character sets. Note that %PRODUCTNAME may not implement all existing character sets (Default is "UTF-8"). + + + SF_Array.ExportToTextFile(Array("A","B","C","D"), "C:\Temp\A short file.txt") + +
+ +
+ ExtractColumn ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;ExtractColumn + +

ExtractColumn

+ Extract from a two dimension array a specific column as a new array. +
Its lower LBound and upper UBound boundaries are identical to that of the first dimension of the input array. + + + svc.ExtractColumn(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], columnindex: int): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The array from which to extract. + columnindex: The column number to extract - must be in the interval [LBound, UBound]. + + + 'Creates a 3x3 matrix: |1, 2, 3| + ' |4, 5, 6| + ' |7, 8, 9| + Dim mat as Variant, col as Variant + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(mat, Array(4, 5, 6)) + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(mat, Array(7, 8, 9)) + 'Extracts the third column: |3, 6, 9| + col = SF_Array.ExtractColumn(mat, 2) + +
+ +
+ ExtractRow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;ExtractRow + +

ExtractRow

+ Extract from a two dimension array a specific row as a new array. +
Its lower LBound and upper UBound boundaries are identical to that of the second dimension of the input array. + + + svc.ExtractRow(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], rowindex: int): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The array from which to extract. + rowindex: The row number to extract - must be in the interval [LBound, UBound]. + + + 'Creates a 3x3 matrix: |1, 2, 3| + ' |4, 5, 6| + ' |7, 8, 9| + Dim mat as Variant, row as Variant + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(mat, Array(4, 5, 6)) + mat = SF_Array.AppendRow(mat, Array(7, 8, 9)) + 'Extracts the first row: |1, 2, 3| + row = SF_Array.ExtractRow(mat, 0) + +
+ +
+ Flatten ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;Flatten + +

Flatten

+ Stack all single items of an array and all items in its subarrays into one new array without subarrays. Empty subarrays are ignored and subarrays with a number of dimensions greater than one are not flattened. + + + svc.Flatten(array_1d: any[0..*]): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Flatten(Array(Array(1, 2, 3), 4, 5)) + ' (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) + + You can use the Flatten method along with other methods such as Append or Prepend to concatenate a set of 1D arrays into a single 1D array. + + Next is an example of how the methods Flatten and Append can be combined to concatenate three arrays. + + 'Creates three arrays for this example + Dim a as Variant, b as Variant, c as Variant + a = Array(1, 2, 3) + b = Array(4, 5) + c = Array(6, 7, 8, 9) + 'Concatenates the three arrays into a single 1D array + Dim arr as Variant + arr = SF_Array.Flatten(SF_Array.Append(a, b, c)) + '(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) + +
+ +
+ ImportFromCSVFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;ImportFromCSVFile + +

ImportFromCSVFile

+ Import the data contained in a comma-separated values (CSV) file. The comma may be replaced by any character. + The applicable CSV format is described in IETF Common Format and MIME Type for CSV Files. + Each line in the file contains a full record (line splitting is not allowed). +
However sequences like \n, \t, ... are left unchanged. Use SF_String.Unescape() method to manage them. + The method returns a two dimension array whose rows correspond to a single record read in the file and whose columns correspond to a field of the record. No check is made about the coherence of the field types across columns. A best guess will be made to identify numeric and date types. + If a line contains less or more fields than the first line in the file, an exception will be raised. Empty lines however are simply ignored. If the size of the file exceeds the number of items limit (see inside the code), a warning is raised and the array is truncated. + + + svc.ImportFromCSVFile(filename: str, delimiter: str = ',', dateformat: str = ''): any[0..*] + + + filename: The name of the text file containing the data. The name must be expressed according to the current FileNaming property of the SF_FileSystem service. + delimiter: A single character, usually, a comma, a semicolon or a TAB character (Default = ","). + dateformat: A special mechanism handles dates when dateformat is either "YYYY-MM-DD", "DD-MM-YYYY" or "MM-DD-YYYY". The dash (-) may be replaced by a dot (.), a slash (/) or a space. Other date formats will be ignored. Dates defaulting to an empty string "" are considered as normal text. + + Consider the CSV file "myFile.csv" with the following contents: + Name,DateOfBirth,Address,City + Anna,2002/03/31,"Rue de l'église, 21",Toulouse + Fred,1998/05/04,"Rue Albert Einstein, 113A",Carcassonne + The examples below in Basic and Python read the contents of the CSV file into an Array object. + + + Dim arr As Variant + arr = SF_Array.ImportFromCSVFile("C:\Temp\myFile.csv", DateFormat := "YYYY/MM/DD") + MsgBox arr(0, 3) ' City + MsgBox arr(1, 2) ' Rue de l'église, 21 + MsgBox arr(1, 3) ' Toulouse + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc = CreateScriptService("Array") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + arr = svc.ImportFromCSVFile(r"C:\Temp\myFile.csv", dateformat = "YYYY/MM/DD") + bas.MsgBox(arr[0][3]) # City + bas.MsgBox(arr[1][2]) # Rue de l'église, 21 + bas.MsgBox(arr[1][3]) # Toulouse + +
+ +
+ IndexOf ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;IndexOf + +

IndexOf

+ Look in a one dimension array for a number, a string or a date. Text comparison can be case-sensitive or not. +
If the array is sorted it must be filled homogeneously, which means that all items must be scalars of the same type (Empty and Null items are forbidden). +
The result of the method is unpredictable when the array is announced as sorted and actually is not. +
A binary search is performed on sorted arrays. Otherwise, arrays are simply scanned from top to bottom and Empty and Null items are ignored. +
+
The method returns LBound(input array) - 1 if the search was not successful. + + + svc.IndexOf(array_1d: any[0..*], tofind: any, casesensitive: bool = False, sortorder: str = ''): int + + + array_1d: The array to scan. + tofind: A number, a date or a string to find. + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + sortorder: It can be either "ASC", "DESC" or "" (not sorted). The default value is "". + + + MsgBox SF_Array.IndexOf(Array("A","B","c","D"), "C", SortOrder := "ASC") ' 2 + MsgBox SF_Array.IndexOf(Array("A","B","c","D"), "C", CaseSensitive := True) ' -1 + +
+ +
+ Insert ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Insert + +

Insert

+ Insert before a given index of the input array the items listed as arguments. +
Arguments are inserted blindly. Each of them might be either a scalar of any type or a subarray. + + + svc.Insert(array_1d: any[0..*], before: int, arg0: any, [arg1: any] ...): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. + before: The index before which to insert; must be in the interval [LBound, UBound + 1]. + arg0, arg1, ...: Items that will be inserted into array_1d. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Insert(Array(1, 2, 3), 2, "a", "b") + ' (1, 2, "a", "b", 3) + +
+ +
+ InsertSorted ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;InsertSorted + +

InsertSorted

+ Inserts into a sorted array a new item on its place. +
The array must be filled homogeneously, meaning that all items must be scalars of the same type. +
Empty and Null items are forbidden. + + + svc.InsertSorted(array_1d: any[0..*], item: any, sortorder: str = 'ASC', casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array into which the value will be inserted. + item: The scalar value to insert, of the same type as the existing array items. + sortorder: It can be either "ASC" (default) or "DESC". + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.InsertSorted(Array("A", "C", "a", "b"), "B", CaseSensitive := True) + ' ("A", "B", "C", "a", "b") + +
+ +
+ Intersection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Intersection + +

Intersection

+ Build a set, as a zero-based array, by applying the intersection set operator on the two input arrays. Resulting items are contained in both arrays. +
The resulting array is sorted in ascending order. +
Both input arrays must be filled homogeneously, in other words all items must be scalars of the same type. Empty and Null items are forbidden. +
Text comparison can be case sensitive or not. + + + svc.Intersection(array1_1d: any[0..*], array2_1d: any[0..*], casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array1_1d: The first input array. + array2_1d: The second input array. + casesensitive: Applies to arrays populated with text items (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Intersection(Array("A", "C", "A", "b", "B"), Array("C", "Z", "b"), True) + ' ("C", "b") + +
+ +
+ Join2D ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Join2D + +

Join2D

+ Join a two-dimensional array with two delimiters, one for the columns, one for the rows. + + + svc.Join2D(array_2d: any [0..*, 0..*], [columndelimiter: str], [rowdelimiter: str], [quote: str]): str + + + array_2d: Each item must be either text, a number, a date or a boolean. +
Dates are transformed into the YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss format. +
Invalid items are replaced by a zero-length string. + columndelimiter: Delimits each column (default = Tab/Chr(9)). + rowdelimiter: Delimits each row (default = LineFeed/Chr(10)) + quote: If True, protect strings with double quotes. The default is False. + + + ' arr = | 1, 2, "A", [2020-02-29], 51, 2, "A", [2020-02-29], 5 | + ' | 6, 7, "this is a string", 9, 106, 7, "this is a string", 9, 10 | + Dim arr as Variant : arr = Array() + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(1, 2, "A", [2020-02-29], 51, 2, "A", [2020-02-29], 5)) + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(6, 7, "this is a string", 9, 106, 7, "this is a string", 9, 10)) + Dim arrText as String + arrText = SF_Array.Join2D(arr, ",", "/", False) + ' 1,2,A,,51,2,A,,5/6,7,this is a string,9,106,7,this is a string,9,10 + +
+ +
+ Prepend -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Prepend + +

Prepend

+ Prepend at the beginning of the input array the items listed as arguments. + + + svc.Prepend(array_1d: any[0..*], arg0: any, [arg1: any] ...): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. + arg0, arg1, ...: A list of items to prepend to array_1d. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Prepend(Array(1, 2, 3), 4, 5) + ' (4, 5, 1, 2, 3) + +
+ +
+ PrependColumn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;PrependColumn + +

PrependColumn

+ Prepend to the left side of a two dimension array a new column. The resulting array has the same lower boundaries as the initial two dimension array. + + + svc.PrependColumn(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], column: any[0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. If that array has 1 dimension, it is considered as the last column of the resulting 2 dimension array. + column: A 1-dimensional array with as many items as there are rows in array_2d. + + + Dim a As Variant, b As variant + a = SF_Array.PrependColumn(Array(1, 2, 3), Array(4, 5, 6)) + ' ((4, 1), (5, 2), (6, 3)) + b = SF_Array.PrependColumn(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + ' ∀ i ∈ {0 ≤ i ≤ 2} : b(0, i) ≡ i + +
+ +
+ PrependRow ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;PrependRow + +

PrependRow

+ Prepend a new row at the beginning of a 2-dimensional array. The resulting array has the same lower boundaries as the initial 2-dimensional array. + + + svc.PrependRow(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], row: any[0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The pre-existing array, may be empty. If that array has 1 dimension, it is considered as the last row of the resulting 2-dimensional array. + row: A 1-dimensional array containing as many items as there are columns in array_2d. + + + Dim a As Variant, b As variant + a = SF_Array.PrependRow(Array(1, 2, 3), Array(4, 5, 6)) + ' ((4, 5, 6), (1, 2, 3)) + b = SF_Array.PrependRow(Array(), Array(1, 2, 3)) + ' ∀ i ∈ {0 ≤ i ≤ 2} : b(i, 0) ≡ i + +
+ +
+ RangeInit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Array service;RangeInit + +

RangeInit

+ Initialize a new zero-based array with numeric values. + + + svc.RangeInit(from: num, upto: num, [bystep: num]): num[0..*] + + + from: Value of the first item. + upto: The last item should not exceed UpTo. + bystep: The difference between two successive items (Default = 1). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.RangeInit(10, 1, -1) + ' (10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1) + +
+ +
+ Reverse -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Reverse + +

Reverse

+ Return the reversed one dimension input array. + + + svc.Reverse(array_1d: any[0..*]): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array to reverse. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Reverse(Array("a", 2, 3, 4)) + ' (4, 3, 2, "a") + +
+ +
+ Shuffle -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Shuffle + +

Shuffle

+ Returns a random permutation of a one-dimensional array. + + + svc.Shuffle(array_1d: any[0..*]): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array to shuffle. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Shuffle(Array(1, 2, 3, 4)) + ' Array "a" is now in random order, f.i. (2, 3, 1, 4) + +
+ +
+ Slice ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Slice + +

Slice

+ Returns a subset of a one-dimensional array. + + + svc.Slice(array_1d: any[0..*], from: int, [upto: int]): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array to slice. + from: The lower index in array_1d of the subarray to extract (from included) + upto: The upper index in array_1d of the subarray to extract (upto included). The default value is the upper bound of array_1d. If upto < from then the returned array is empty. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Slice(Array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5), 1, 3) ' (2, 3, 4) + +
+ +
+ Sort ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Sort + +

Sort

+ Sort a one dimension array in ascending or descending order. Text comparisons can be case-sensitive or not. +
The array must be filled homogeneously, which means that items must be scalars of the same type. +
Empty and Null items are allowed. Conventionally Empty < Null < any other scalar value. + + + svc.Sort(array_1d: any[0..*], sortorder: str, casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array to sort. + sortorder: It can be either "ASC" (default) or "DESC". + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Sort(Array("a", "A", "b", "B", "C"), CaseSensitive := True) + ' ("A", "B", "C", "a", "b") + +
+ +
+ SortColumns ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;SortColumns + +

SortColumns

+ Return a permutation of the columns of a two dimension array, sorted on the values of a given row. +
The row must be filled homogeneously, which means that all items must be scalars of the same type. +
Empty and Null items are allowed. Conventionally Empty < Null < any other scalar value. + + + svc.SortColumns(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], rowindex: int, sortorder: str, casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The 2-dimensional array to sort. + rowindex: The index of the row that will be used as reference to sort the columns. + sortorder: It can be either "ASC" (default) or "DESC". + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + + + ' arr = | 5, 7, 3 | + ' | 1, 9, 5 | + ' | 6, 1, 8 | + Dim arr as Variant : arr = Array(5, 7, 3) + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(1, 9, 5)) + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(6, 1, 8)) + arr = SF_Array.SortColumns(arr, 2, "ASC") + ' arr = | 7, 5, 3 | + ' | 9, 1, 5 | + ' | 1, 6, 8 | + +
+ +
+ SortRows ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;SortRows + +

SortRows

+ Return a permutation of the rows of a two dimension array, sorted on the values of a given column. +
The column must be filled homogeneously, therefore all items must be scalars of the same type. +
Empty and Null items are allowed. Conventionally Empty < Null < any other scalar value. + + + svc.SortRows(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*], columnindex: int, sortorder: str, casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The array to sort. + columnindex: The index of the column that will be used as reference to sort the rows. + sortorder: It can be either "ASC" (default) or "DESC". + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons (Default = False). + + + ' arr = | 5, 7, 3 | + ' | 1, 9, 5 | + ' | 6, 1, 8 | + Dim arr as Variant : arr = Array(5, 7, 3) + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(1, 9, 5)) + arr = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr, Array(6, 1, 8)) + arr = SF_Array.SortRows(arr, 0, "ASC") + ' arr = | 1, 9, 5 | + ' | 5, 7, 3 | + ' | 6, 1, 8 | + +
+ +
+ Transpose ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Transpose + +

Transpose

+ Swaps rows and columns in a two-dimensional array. + + + svc.Transpose(array_2d: any[0..*, 0..*]): any[0..*, 0..*] + + + array_2d: The 2-dimensional array to transpose. + + + ' arr1 = | 1, 2 | + ' | 3, 4 | + ' | 5, 6 | + arr1 = Array(1, 2) + arr1 = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr1, Array(3, 4)) + arr1 = SF_Array.AppendRow(arr1, Array(5, 6)) + arr2 = SF_Array.Transpose(arr1) + ' arr2 = | 1, 3, 5 | + ' | 2, 4, 6 | + MsgBox arr2(0, 2) ' 5 + +
+ +
+ TrimArray ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;TrimArray + +

TrimArray

+ Remove from a one dimension array all Null, Empty and zero-length entries. +
String items are trimmed with %PRODUCTNAME Basic Trim() function. + + + svc.TrimArray(array_1d: any[0..*]): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The array to trim. + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.TrimArray(Array("A", "B", Null, " D ")) + ' ("A", "B", "D") + +
+ +
+ Union -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Union + +

Union

+ Builds a set, as a zero-based array, by applying the union operator on the two input arrays. Resulting items originate from any of both arrays. +
The resulting array is sorted in ascending order. +
Both input arrays must be filled homogeneously, their items must be scalars of the same type. Empty and Null items are forbidden. +
Text comparison can be case sensitive or not. + + + svc.Union(array1_1d: any[0..*], array2_1d: any[0..*], casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array1_1d: The first input array. + array2_1d: The second input array. + casesensitive: Applicable only if the arrays are populated with strings (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Union(Array("A", "C", "A", "b", "B"), Array("C", "Z", "b"), True) + ' ("A", "B", "C", "Z", "b") + +
+ +
+ Unique ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Array service;Unique + +

Unique

+ Build a set of unique values derived from the input array. +
The input array must be filled homogeneously, its items must be scalars of the same type. Empty and Null items are forbidden. +
Text comparison can be case sensitive or not. + + + svc.Unique(array_1d: any[0..*], casesensitive: bool = False): any[0..*] + + + array_1d: The input array. + casesensitive: Applicable only if the array is populated with strings (Default = False). + + + Dim a As Variant + a = SF_Array.Unique(Array("A", "C", "A", "b", "B"), CaseSensitive := True) + ' ("A", "B", "C", "b") + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee0f5b2e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ + + + + + + + SFDocuments.Base service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_base.xhp + + + + +
+ + Base service + +

SFDocuments.Base service

+ + The Base service provides a number of methods and properties to facilitate the management and handling of %PRODUCTNAME Base documents. + This service is closely related to the Document service, which provides generic methods for handling %PRODUCTNAME documents, including Base documents. Hence, the Base service extends the Document service and provides additional methods that are specific for Base documents, enabling users to: + + + Get access to the database contained in a Base document. + + + Open form documents stored in a Base document. + + + Check if a form document from a Base document is currently loaded. + + +
+ + Refer to the Document service to learn more about methods and properties that can be used to manage %PRODUCTNAME documents. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Base service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + The Base service can be invoked in a variety of ways. The code snippet below uses the method CreateBaseDocument from the UI service to create a new Base file. + Note that in all examples the object oDoc is an instance of the Base service. + + Dim ui As Object, oDoc As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.CreateBaseDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.odb") + + The Base service can also be instantiated while opening an existing Base file, as shown below: + + Set oDoc = ui.OpenBaseDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.odb") + + If a Base document is already open, it is possible to instantiate the Base service directly: + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", "MyFile.odb") + + + The examples above can be translated to Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + doc = ui.CreateBaseDocument(r"C:\Documents\MyFile.odb") + + + doc = ui.OpenBaseDocument(r"C:\Documents\MyFile.odb") + + + doc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", "MyFile.odb") + + The use of the "SFDocuments." substring in the previous example is optional. + + + + + List of Methods in the Base Service + + + + + + CloseFormDocument
+ FormDocuments
+ Forms
+ + + + + GetDatabase
+ IsLoaded
+ OpenFormDocument
+ + + + + PrintOut
+ SetPrinter

+ + + +
+ +
+ CloseFormDocument ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;CloseFormDocument + +

CloseFormDocument

+ Closes the given form document. Returns True if closure is successful. + + + svc.CloseFormDocument(formdocument: str): bool + + + formdocument: The name of the FormDocument to be closed, as a case-sensitive string. + + If form documents are organized in folders, it is necessary to include the folder name to specify the form document to be opened, as illustrated in the following examples: + + + oDoc.CloseFormDocument("Folder1/myFormDocument") + + + + doc.CloseFormDocument('Folder1/myFormDocument') + +
+ +
+ FormDocuments --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;FormDocuments + +

FormDocuments

+ Returns an array with the full names (path/name) of all form documents in the Base document as a zero-based Array of strings. + + + svc.FormDocuments(): str[0..*] + + + The code snippet below prints the names of all form documents in the current Base document. + + + Dim oDoc as Object, myForms as Object, formName as String + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document", ThisDataBaseDocument) + Set myForms = oDoc.FormDocuments() + For Each formName In myForms + MsgBox formName + Next formName + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + doc = CreateScriptService("Document", bas.ThisDataBaseDocument) + myForms = doc.FormDocuments() + for formName in myForms: + bas.MsgBox(formName) + + To learn more about form documents, refer to the Form service help page. +
+ +
+ Forms ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;Forms + +

Forms

+ Depending on the parameters provided this method will return: + + + A zero-based Array with the names of all the forms contained in a form document (if the Form argument is absent) + + + A SFDocuments.Form object representing the form specified in the Form argument. + + + + + svc.Forms(formdocument: str): str[0..*] + + + svc.Forms(formdocument: str, form: str = ''): svc + + + svc.Forms(formdocument: str, form: int): svc + + + formdocument: The name of a valid form document as a case-sensitive string. + form: The name or index number of the form stored in the form document. If this argument is absent, the method will return a list with the names of all forms available in the form document. + Although it is possible to use index numbers to refer to forms, this is only recommended when there is just one form in the form document. If there are two or more forms, it is preferable to use the form name instead. + + The first line of the example below returns a list of all forms in the form document "myFormDocument". The second line returns an instance of the Form service representing the form "myForm". + + + Dim formsList as Object : formsList = oDoc.Forms("myFormDocument") + Dim oForm as Object : oForm = oDoc.Forms("myFormDocument", "myForm") + + + + formsList = doc.Forms("myFormDocument") + form = doc.Forms("myFormDocument", "myForm") + +
+ +
+ GetDatabase ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;GetDatabase + +

GetDatabase

+ Returns an instance of the Database service that allows the execution of SQL commands on the database defined and/or stored in the current Base document + + + svc.GetDatabase(user: str = '', password: str = ''): svc + + + user, password: Optional login parameters as strings. The default value for both parameters is an empty string "". + + + + Dim myDoc As Object, myDatabase As Object, ui As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set myDoc = ui.OpenBaseDocument("C:\Documents\myDb.odb") + ' User and password are supplied below, if needed + Set myDatabase = myDoc.GetDatabase() + ' ... Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + myDoc.CloseDocument() + + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + myDoc = ui.OpenBaseDocument(r"C:\Documents\myDb.odb") + myDatabase = myDoc.GetDatabase() + # ... Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + myDoc.CloseDocument() + +
+ +
+ IsLoaded -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;IsLoaded + +

IsLoaded

+ Returns True if the specified FormDocument is currently open. + + + svc.IsLoaded(formdocument: str): bool + + + formdocument: The name of a FormDocument to be checked, as a case-sensitive string. + + + + If Not oDoc.IsLoaded("myFormDocument") Then + oDoc.OpenFormDocument("myFormDocument") + End If + + + + if not doc.IsLoaded("myFormDocument"): + doc.OpenFormDocument("myFormDocument") + +
+ +
+ OpenFormDocument ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;OpenFormDocument + +

OpenFormDocument

+ Opens the specified FormDocument either in normal or in design mode. + If the form document is already open, it is activated without changing its mode. The method returns True if the form document could be opened. + + + svc.OpenFormDocument(formdocument: str, designmode: bool = False): bool + + + formDocument: The name of the FormDocument to be opened, as a case-sensitive string. + designmode: If this argument is True the FormDocument will be opened in design mode. + + + Most form documents are stored in the root of the Base document and they can be opened simply using their names, as in the example below: + + oDoc.OpenFormDocument("myFormDocument") + + If form documents are organized in folders, it becomes necessary to include the folder name to specify the form document to be opened, as illustrated in the following example: + + oDoc.OpenFormDocument("myFolder/myFormDocument") + + + + doc.OpenFormDocument("myFormDocument") + + + doc.OpenFormDocument("myFolder/myFormDocument") + +
+ +
+ PrintOut ---------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;PrintOut + +

PrintOut

+ This method sends the content of the given form document to a default printer or a printer defined by the SetPrinter() method. + Returns True if the document was successfully printed. + + + svc.PrintOut(opt formdocument: str, pages: str = "", copies: num = 1): bool + + + formdocument: A valid document form name as a case-sensitive string. The form document must be open. It is activated by the method. + pages: The pages to print as a string, like in the user interface. Example: "1-4;10;15-18". Default is all pages. + copies: The number of copies. Default is 1. + + + + If oDoc.PrintOut("myForm", "1-4;10;15-18", Copies := 2) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + if doc.PrintOut('myForm', copies=3, pages='45-88'): + # ... + +
+ +
+ SetPrinter ------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Base service;SetPrinter + +

SetPrinter

+ Define the printer options for a form document. The form document must be open. + Returns True when successful. + + + svc.SetPrinter(opt formdocument: str, opt printer: str, opt orientation: str, paperformat: str): bool + + + formdocument: A valid document form name as a case-sensitive string. + + + + + oDoc.SetPrinter("myForm", Orientation := "PORTRAIT") + + + + doc.SetPrinter('myForm', paperformat='TABLOID') + +
+ + +
+ + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..300838e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,659 @@ + + + + + + ScriptForge.Basic service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_basic.xhp + + + +
+ + Basic service + +
+
+

ScriptForge.Basic service

+ The ScriptForge.Basic service proposes a collection of %PRODUCTNAME Basic methods to be executed in a Python context. Basic service methods reproduce the exact syntax and behaviour of Basic builtin functions. + +
+ Typical example: + + bas.MsgBox('Display this text in a message box from a Python script') + + ScriptForge.Basic service is limited to Python scripts. +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Basic service, import the CreateScriptService() method from the scriptforge module: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + +

Properties

+ + + Name + ReadOnly + Type + Description + + + + MB_OK, MB_OKCANCEL, MB_RETRYCANCEL, MB_YESNO, MB_YESNOCANCEL + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Values: 0, 1, 5, 4, 3 + + + + + MB_ICONEXCLAMATION, MB_ICONINFORMATION, MB_ICONQUESTION, MB_ICONSTOP + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Values: 48, 64, 32, 16
 + + + + + MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE, MB_DEFBUTTON1, MB_DEFBUTTON2, MB_DEFBUTTON3 + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Values: 2, 128, 256, 512 + + + + + IDABORT, IDCANCEL, IDIGNORE, IDNO, IDOK, IDRETRY, IDYES + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Values: 3, 2, 5, 7, 1, 4, 6
Constants indicating MsgBox selected button. + + + + + StarDesktop + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + StarDesktop object represents %PRODUCTNAME Start Center. + + +
+ + + List of Methods in the Basic Service + + + + + CDate
+ CDateFromUnoDateTime
+ CDateToUnoDateTime
+ ConvertFromUrl
+ ConvertToUrl
+ CreateUnoService
+ DateAdd
+ DateDiff
+ DatePart
+ + + + + DateValue
+ Format
+ GetDefaultContext
+ GetGuiType
+ GetPathSeparator
+ GetSystemTicks
+ GlobalScope.BasicLibraries
+ GlobalScope.DialogLibraries
+ InputBox
+ + + + + MsgBox
+ Now
+ RGB
+ ThisComponent
+ ThisDatabaseDocument
+ Xray



+ + + +
+ +
+ CDate ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;CDate + +

CDate

+ Converts a numeric expression or a string to a datetime.datetime Python native object. + This method exposes the Basic builtin function CDate to Python scripts. + + + svc.CDate(expression: any): obj + + + expression: a numeric expression or a string representing a date. + + + + d = bas.CDate(1000.25) + bas.MsgBox(str(d)) # 1902-09-26 06:00:00 + bas.MsgBox(d.year) # 1902 + +
+ +
+ CDateFromUnoDateTime ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;CDateFromUnoDateTime + +

CDateFromUnoDateTime

+ Converts a UNO date/time representation to a datetime.datetime Python native object. + + + svc.CDateFromUnoDateTime(unodate: uno): obj + + + unodate: A UNO date/time object of one of the following types: com.sun.star.util.DateTime, com.sun.star.util.Date or com.sun.star.util.Time + + The following example creates a com.sun.star.util.DateTime object and converts it to a datetime.datetime Python object. + + import uno + uno_date = uno.createUnoStruct('com.sun.star.util.DateTime') + uno_date.Year = 1983 + uno_date.Month = 2 + uno_date.Day = 23 + new_date = bas.CDateFromUnoDateTime(uno_date) + bas.MsgBox(str(new_date)) # 1983-02-23 00:00:00 + +
+ +
+ CDateToUnoDateTime ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;CDateToUnoDateTime + +

CDateToUnoDateTime

+ Converts a date representation into a com.sun.star.util.DateTime object. + + + svc.CDateToUnoDateTime(date: obj): uno + + + date: A Python date/time object of one of the following types: datetime.datetime, datetime.date, datetime.time, float (time.time) or time.struct_time. + + + from datetime import datetime + current_datetime = datetime.now() + uno_date = bas.CDateToUnoDateTime(current_datetime) + bas.MsgBox(str(uno_date.Year) + "-" + str(uno_date.Month) + "-" + str(uno_date.Day)) + +
+ +
+ ConvertFromUrl ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;ConvertFromUrl + +

ConvertFromUrl

+ Returns a system path file name for the given file: URL. + + svc.ConvertFromUrl(url: str): str + + url: An absolute file: URL. + + A system path file name. + + + filename = bas.ConvertFromUrl( "file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/LibreOffice/News.txt") + bas.MsgBox(filename) + +
+ +
+ ConvertToUrl --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;ConvertToUrl + +

ConvertToUrl

+ Returns a file: URL for the given system path. + + svc.ConvertToUrl(systempath: str): str + + systempath: A system file name as a string. + + A file: URL as a string. + + + url = bas.ConvertToUrl( 'C:\Program Files(x86)\LibreOffice\News.txt') + bas.MsgBox(url) + +
+ +
+ CreateUnoService ----------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;CreateUnoService + +

CreateUnoService

+ Instantiates a UNO service with the ProcessServiceManager. + + svc.CreateUnoService(servicename: str): uno + + servicename: A fully qualified service name such as com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker or com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess. + + + dsk = bas.CreateUnoService('com.sun.star.frame.Desktop') + +
+ +
+ DateAdd -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;DateAdd + +

DateAdd

+ Adds a date or time interval to a given date/time a number of times and returns the resulting date. + + svc.DateAdd(interval: str, number: num, date: datetime): datetime + + interval: A string expression from the following table, specifying the date or time interval. + + number: A numerical expression specifying how often the interval value will be added when positive or subtracted when negative. + date: A given datetime.datetime value, the interval value will be added number times to this datetime.datetime value. + + A datetime.datetime value. + + + dt = datetime.datetime(2004, 1, 31) + dt = bas.DateAdd("m", 1, dt) + print(dt) + +
+ +
+ DateDiff ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;DateDiff + +

DateDiff

+ Returns the number of date or time intervals between two given date/time values. + + svc.DateDiff(interval: str, date1: datetime, date2: datetime, firstdayofweek = 1, firstweekofyear = 1): int + + interval: A string expression specifying the date interval, as detailed in above DateAdd method. + date1, date2: The two datetime.datetime values to be compared. + + + A number. + + + date1 = datetime.datetime(2005,1, 1) + date2 = datetime.datetime(2005,12,31) + diffDays = bas.DateDiff('d', date1, date2) + print(diffDays) + +
+ +
+ DatePart ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;DatePart + +

DatePart

+ The DatePart function returns a specified part of a date. + + svc.DatePart(interval: str, date: datetime, firstdayofweek = 1, firstweekofyear = 1): int + + interval: A string expression specifying the date interval, as detailed in above DateAdd method. + date: The date/time from which the result is calculated. + firstdayofweek, firstweekofyear: optional parameters that respectively specify the starting day of a week and the starting week of a year, as detailed in above DateDiff method. + + The extracted part for the given date/time. + + + print(bas.DatePart("ww", datetime.datetime(2005,12,31) + print(bas.DatePart('q', datetime.datetime(1999,12,30) + +
+ +
+ DateValue ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Basic service;DateValue + +

DateValue

+ Computes a date value from a date string. + + svc.DateValue(date: str): datetime + + + + The computed date. + + + dt = bas.DateValue("23-02-2011") + print(dt) + +
+ +
+ Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;Format + +

Format

+ Converts a number to a string, and then formats it according to the format that you specify. + + svc.Format(expression: any, format = ''): str + +

Formatting Codes

+ +

Predefined Formats

+ + + + + txt = bas.Format(6328.2, '##.##0.00') + print(txt) + +
+ +
+ GetDefaultContext ---------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GetDefaultContext + +

GetDefaultContext

+ Returns the default context of the process service factory, if existent, else returns a null reference. + GetDefaultContext is an alternative to the getComponentContext() method available from XSCRIPTCONTEXT global variable or from uno.py module. + + svc.GetDefaultContext(): uno + + The default component context is used, when instantiating services via XMultiServiceFactory. See the Professional UNO chapter in the Developer's Guide on api.libreoffice.org for more information. + + + ctx = bas.GetDefaultContext() + +
+ +
+ GetGuiType ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GetGuiType + +

GetGuiType

+ Returns a numerical value that specifies the graphical user interface. This function is only provided for backward compatibility with previous versions. + Refer to system() method from platform Python module to identify the operating system. + + svc.GetGuiType(): int + + + n = bas.GetGuiType() + +
+ +
+ GetPathSeparator ---------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GetPathSeparator + +

GetPathSeparator

+ Returns the operating system-dependent directory separator used to specify file paths. + Use os.pathsep from os Python module to identify the path separator. + + svc.GetPathSeparator(): str + + + sep = bas.GetPathSeparator() + +
+ +
+ GetSystemTicks ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GetSystemTicks + +

GetSystemTicks

+ Returns the number of system ticks provided by the operating system. You can use this function to optimize certain processes. Use this method to estimate time in milliseconds: + + svc.GetSystemTicks(): int + + + ticks_ini = bas.GetSystemTicks() + time.sleep(1) + ticks_end = bas.GetSystemTicks() + bas.MsgBox("{} - {} = {}".format(ticks_end, ticks_ini,ticks_end - ticks_ini)) + +
+ +
+ InputBox ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GlobalScope.BasicLibraries + +

GlobalScope.BasicLibraries

+ Returns the UNO object containing all shared Basic libraries and modules. + This method is the Python equivalent to GlobalScope.BasicLibraries in Basic scripts. + + + svc.GlobalScope.BasicLibraries(): uno + + + com.sun.star.script.XLibraryContainer + + The following example loads the Gimmicks Basic library if it has not been loaded yet. + + libs = bas.GlobalScope.BasicLibraries() + if not libs.isLibraryLoaded("Gimmicks"): + libs.loadLibrary("Gimmicks") + +
+ +
+ InputBox ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;GlobalScope.DialogLibraries + +

GlobalScope.DialogLibraries

+ Returns the UNO object containing all shared dialog libraries. + This method is the Python equivalent to GlobalScope.DialogLibraries in Basic scripts. + + + svc.GlobalScope.DialogLibraries(): uno + + + com.sun.star.comp.sfx2.DialogLibraryContainer + + The following example shows a message box with the names of all available dialog libraries. + + dlg_libs = bas.GlobalScope.DialogLibraries() + lib_names = dlg_libs.getElementNames() + bas.MsgBox("\n".join(lib_names)) + +
+ +
+ InputBox ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;InputBox + +

InputBox

+ + svc.InputBox(prompt: str, [title: str], [default: str], [xpostwips: int, ypostwips: int]): str + + + + String + +
+ + txt = s.InputBox('Please enter a phrase:', "Dear user") + s.MsgBox(txt, s.MB_ICONINFORMATION, "Confirmation of phrase") + + For in-depth information please refer to Input/Output to Screen with Python on the Wiki. +
+
+ +
+ MsgBox -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;MsgBox + +

MsgBox

+ Displays a dialog box containing a message and returns an optional value.
MB_xx constants help specify the dialog type, the number and type of buttons to display, plus the icon type. By adding their respective values they form bit patterns, that define the MsgBox dialog appearance. + + bas.MsgBox(prompt: str, [buttons: int], [title: str])[: int] + + + + An optional integer as detailed in above IDxx properties. + + +
+ +
+ Now ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Basic service;Now + +

Now

+ Returns the current system date and time as a datetime.datetime Python native object. + + svc.Now(): datetime + + + bas.MsgBox(bas.Now(), bas.MB_OK, "Now") + +
+ +
+ RGB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Basic service;RGB + +

RGB

+ Returns an integer color value consisting of red, green, and blue components. + + svc.RGB(red:int, green: int, blue: int): int + + + + Integer + + + YELLOW = bas.RGB(255,255,0) + +
+ +
+ ThisComponent -------------------------------------------------- + + Basic service;ThisComponent + +

ThisComponent

+ If the current component refers to a %PRODUCTNAME document, this method returns the UNO object representing the document. + The method will return None when the current component does not correspond to a document. + + + svc.ThisComponent(): uno + + + + comp = bas.ThisComponent + bas.MsgBox("\n".join(comp.getSupportedServiceNames())) + +
+ +
+ ThisDatabaseDocument ------------------------------------------ + + Basic service;ThisDatabaseDocument + +

ThisDatabaseDocument

+ If the script is being executed from a Base document or any of its subcomponents this method returns the main component of the Base instance. + This method returns None otherwise. + + + svc.ThisDatabaseDocument(): uno + + + + db_doc = bas.ThisDatabaseDocument + table_names = db_doc.DataSource.getTables().getElementNames() + bas.MsgBox("\n".join(table_names)) + + Visit the OfficeDatabaseDocument API page to learn more about Base's main component structure. +
+ +
+ Xray ------------------------------------------------------------ + + Basic service;Xray + +

Xray

+ Inspect Uno objects or variables. + + svc.Xray(obj: any) + + obj: A variable or UNO object. + + + bas.Xray(bas.StarDesktop) + +
+ + +
+ + + uno.fileUrlToSystemPath() + uno.systemPathToFileUrl() + Input/Output to Screen with Python on the wiki + XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getComponentContext() + uno.getComponentContext() + platform.system() + os.pathsep() +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b75f86dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,2031 @@ + + + + + + + SFDocuments.Calc service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_calc.xhp + + + + +
+ + Calc service + +
+ +
+

SFDocuments.Calc service

+ The SFDocuments shared library provides a number of methods and properties to facilitate the management and handling of %PRODUCTNAME documents. + The SFDocuments.Calc service is a subclass of the SFDocuments.Document service. All methods and properties defined for the Document service can also be accessed using a Calc service instance. + The Calc service is focused on: + + + Handling sheets within a Calc document (copy, insert, move, etc) + + + Exchanging data between Basic data structures and Calc ranges + + + Copying and importing massive amounts of data + + +
+ This help page describes methods and properties that are applicable only to Calc documents. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Calc service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The Calc service is closely related to the UI service of the ScriptForge library. Below are a few examples of how the Calc service can be invoked. + + The code snippet below creates a Calc service instance that corresponds to the currently active Calc document. + + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + + Another way to create an instance of the Calc service is using the UI service. In the following example, a new Calc document is created and oDoc is a Calc service instance: + + Dim ui As Object, oDoc As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + + Or using the OpenDocument method from the UI service: + + Set oDoc = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.ods") + + It is also possible to instantiate the Calc service using the CreateScriptService method: + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Calc", "MyFile.ods") + + In the example above, "MyFile.ods" is the name of an open document window. If this argument is not provided, the active window is considered. + It is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set oDoc = oDoc.Dispose() + + However, if the document was closed using the CloseDocument method, it becomes unnecessary to free resources using the command described above. + + + myDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + myDoc = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + + + myDoc = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\MyFile.ods") + + + myDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Calc", "MyFile.ods") + myDoc.Dispose() + + The use of the prefix "SFDocuments." while calling the service is optional. + +

Definitions

+ Many methods require a "Sheet" or a "Range" as argument. Single cells are considered a special case of a Range. + Both may be expressed either as a string or as a reference (= object) depending on the situation: + + + Within a specific Calc instance, sheets and ranges are given as strings such as "Sheet1" and "D2:F6". + + + Additionally, the .Sheet and .Range properties return a reference that may be used as argument of a method called from another instance of the Calc service. + + + + The example below copies data from document A (opened as read-only and hidden) to document B. + + + Dim oDocA As Object, oDocB As Object + Set oDocA = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileA.ods", Hidden := True, ReadOnly := True) + Set oDocB = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + oDocB.CopyToRange(oDocA.Range("SheetX.D4:F8"), "D2:F6") 'CopyToRange(source, target) + + + + docA = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileA.ods", hidden = True, readonly = True) + docB = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + docB.CopyToRange(docA.Range("SheetX.D4:F8"), "D2:F6") + + +

SheetName

+ Either the sheet name as a string or an object produced by the .Sheet property. + The shortcut "~" (tilde) represents the current sheet. +

RangeName

+ Either a string designating a set of contiguous cells located in a sheet of the current instance or an object produced by the .Range property. + The shortcut "~" (tilde) represents the current selection or the first selected range if multiple ranges are selected. + The shortcut "*" represents all used cells. + The sheet name is optional when defining a range. If no sheet name is provided, then the active sheet is used. Surrounding single quotes and $ signs are allowed but ignored. + When specifying a SheetName as a string, the use of single quotes to enclose the sheet name are required if the name contains blank spaces " " or periods ".". + The examples below illustrate in which cases the use of single quotes is mandatory: + + ' The use of single quotes is optional + oDoc.clearAll("SheetA.A1:B10") + oDoc.clearAll("'SheetA'.A1:B10") + ' The use of single quotes is required + oDoc.clearAll("'Sheet.A'.A1:B10") + + Except for the CurrentSelection property, the Calc service considers only single ranges of cells. + + + + Examples of valid ranges + + + + + 1) $'SheetX'.D2
2) $D$2 + + + A single cell + + + + + 1) $'SheetX'.D2:F6
2) D2:D10 + + + Single range with multiple cells + + + + + $'SheetX'.* + + + All used cells in the given sheet + + + + + 1) $'SheetX'.A:A (column A)
2) 3:5 (rows 3 to 5) + + + All cells in contiguous columns or rows up to the last used cell + + + + + myRange + + + A range named "myRange" at spreadsheet level + + + + + 1) ~.someRange
2) SheetX.someRange + + + A range name at sheet level + + + + + myDoc.Range("SheetX.D2:F6") + + + A range within the sheet SheetX in file associated with the myDoc Calc instance + + + + + ~.~ or ~ + + + The current selection in the active sheet + + +
+ +

Properties

+ All the properties generic to any document are implicitly applicable also to Calc documents. For more information, read the Document service Help page. + The properties specifically available for Calc documents are: + + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Argument + + + Return type + + + Description + + + + + CurrentSelection + + + No + + + None + + + String or array of strings + + + The single selected range as a string or the list of selected ranges as an array. + + + + + FirstCell + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + String + + + Returns the first used cell in a given range or sheet. + + + + + FirstColumn + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + Long + + + Returns the leftmost column number in a given range or sheet. + + + + + FirstRow + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + Long + + + Returns the topmost row number in a given range or sheet. + + + + + Height + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + Long + + + The number of rows (>= 1) in the given range. + + + + + LastCell + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + String + + + Returns the last used cell in a given range or sheet. + + + + + LastColumn + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + Long + + + The last used column in a given range or sheet. + + + + + LastRow + + + Yes + + + SheetName or RangeName as String + + + Long + + + The last used row in a given range or sheet. + + + + + Range + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + Object + + + A range reference that can be used as argument of methods like CopyToRange. + + + + + Region + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + String + + + Returns the address of the smallest area that contains the specified range so that the area is surrounded by empty cells or sheet edges. This is equivalent to applying the Command + *Ctrl + * shortcut to the given range. + + + + + Sheet + + + Yes + + + SheetName As String + + + Object + + + A sheet reference that can be used as argument of methods like CopySheet. + + + + + SheetName + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + String + + + Returns the sheet name of a given range address. + + + + + Sheets + + + Yes + + + None + + + Array of strings + + + The list with the names of all existing sheets. + + + + + Width + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + Long + + + The number of columns (>= 1) in the given range. + + + + + XCellRange + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + Object + + + A com.sun.star.Table.XCellRange UNO object. + + + + + XSheetCellCursor + + + Yes + + + RangeName As String + + + Object + + + A com.sun.star.sheet.XSheetCellCursor UNO object. After moving the cursor, the resulting range address can be accessed through the AbsoluteName UNO property of the cursor object, which returns a string value that can be used as argument for properties and methods of the Calc service. + + + + + XSpreadsheet + + + Yes + + + SheetName As String + + + Object + + + A com.sun.star.sheet.XSpreadsheet UNO object. + + +
+ + Visit %PRODUCTNAME API Documentation's website to learn more about XCellRange, XSheetCellCursor and XSpreadsheet UNO objects. + +

Methods

+ + + List of Methods in the Calc Service + + + + + A1Style
+ Activate
+ Charts
+ ClearAll
+ ClearFormats
+ ClearValues
+ CompactLeft
+ CompactUp
+ CopySheet
+ CopySheetFromFile
+ CopyToCell
+ CopyToRange
+ CreateChart
+ CreatePivotTable
+ DAvg
+ + + + + DCount
+ DMax
+ DMin
+ DSum
+ ExportRangeToFile
+ Forms
+ GetColumnName
+ GetFormula
+ GetValue
+ ImportFromCSVFile
+ ImportFromDatabase
+ InsertSheet
+ MoveRange
+ MoveSheet
+ Offset
+ + + + + OpenRangeSelector
+ PrintOut
+ Printf
+ RemoveSheet
+ RenameSheet
+ SetArray
+ SetValue
+ SetCellStyle
+ SetFormula
+ ShiftDown
+ ShiftLeft
+ ShiftRight
+ ShiftUp
+ SortRange

+ + + +
+ +
+ A1Style ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;A1Style + +

A1Style

+ Returns a range address as a string based on sheet coordinates, i.e. row and column numbers. + If only a pair of coordinates is given, then an address to a single cell is returned. Additional arguments can specify the bottom-right cell of a rectangular range. + + + svc.A1Style(row1: int, column1: int, row2: int = 0; column2: int = 0; sheetname: str = "~"): str + + + row1, column1: Specify the row and column numbers of the top-left cell in the range to be considered. Row and column numbers start at 1. + row2, column2: Specify the row and column numbers of the bottom-right cell in the range to be considered. If these arguments are not provided, or if values smaller than row1 and column1 are given, then the address of the single cell range represented by row1 and column1 is returned. + sheetname: The name of the sheet to be appended to the returned range address. The sheet must exist. The default value is "~" corresponding to the currently active sheet. + + The examples below in Basic and Python consider that "Sheet1" is the currently active sheet. + + + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + addr1 = oDoc.A1Style(1, 1) ' '$Sheet1'.$A$1 + addr2 = oDoc.A1Style(2, 2, 3, 6) ' '$Sheet1'.$B$2:$F$3 + addr3 = oDoc.A1Style(2, 2, 0, 6) ' '$Sheet1'.$B$2 + addr4 = oDoc.A1Style(3, 4, 3, 8, "Sheet2") ' '$Sheet2'.$D$3:$H$3 + addr5 = oDoc.A1Style(5, 1, SheetName := "Sheet3") ' '$Sheet3'.$A$5 + + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + addr1 = doc.A1Style(1, 1) # '$Sheet1'.$A$1 + addr2 = doc.A1Style(2, 2, 3, 6) # '$Sheet1'.$B$2:$F$3 + addr3 = doc.A1Style(2, 2, 0, 6) # '$Sheet1'.$B$2 + addr4 = doc.A1Style(3, 4, 3, 8, "Sheet2") # '$Sheet2'.$D$3:$H$3 + addr5 = doc.A1Style(5, 1, sheetname="Sheet3") # '$Sheet3'.$A$5 + + The method A1Style can be combined with any of the many properties and methods of the Calc service that require a range as argument, such as GetValue, GetFormula, ClearAll, etc. +
+ +
+ Activate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;Activate + +

Activate

+ If the argument sheetname is provided, the given sheet is activated and it becomes the currently selected sheet. If the argument is absent, then the document window is activated. + + + svc.Activate(sheetname: str = ""): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet to be activated in the document. The default value is an empty string, meaning that the document window will be activated without changing the active sheet. + + The example below activates the sheet named "Sheet4" in the currently active document. + + + Dim ui as Variant, oDoc as Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.GetDocument(ui.ActiveWindow) + oDoc.Activate("Sheet4") + + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + myDoc = ui.GetDocument(ui.ActiveWindow) + myDoc.Activate("Sheet4") + + Activating a sheet makes sense only if it is performed on a Calc document. To make sure you have a Calc document at hand you can use the isCalc property of the document object, which returns True if it is a Calc document and False otherwise. +
+ +
+ Charts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Calc service;Charts + +

Charts

+ Returns either the list with the names of all chart objects in a given sheet or a single Chart service instance. + + + If only sheetname is specified, a zero-based array of strings containing the names of all charts is returned. + + + If a chartname is provided, then a single object corresponding to the desired chart is returned. The specified chart must exist. + + + + + svc.Charts(sheetname: str, chartname: str = ""): obj + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet from which the list of charts is to be retrieved or where the specified chart is located. + chartname: The user-defined name of the chart object to be returned. If the chart does not have a user-defined name, then the internal object name can be used. If this argument is absent, then the list of chart names in the specified sheet is returned. + Use the Navigator sidebar to check the names assigned to charts under the OLE objects category. + + + The example below shows the number of chart objects in "Sheet1". + + Dim arrNames as Object + arrNames = oDoc.Charts("Sheet1") + MsgBox "There are " & UBound(arrNames) + 1 & " charts in Sheet1" + + The following example accesses the chart named "MyChart" in "Sheet1" and prints its type. + + Dim oChart as Object + oChart = oDoc.Charts("Sheet1", "MyChart") + MsgBox oChart.ChartType + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + chart_names = doc.Charts("Sheet1") + bas.MsgBox(f"There are {len(chart_names)} charts in Sheet1") + + + chart = doc.Charts("Sheet1", "MyChart") + bas.MsgBox(chart.ChartType) + +
+ +
+ ClearAll -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ClearAll + +

ClearAll

+ Clears all the contents and formats of the given range. + + + svc.ClearAll(range: str) + + + range: The range to be cleared, as a string. + + + + oDoc.ClearAll("SheetX.A1:F10") + + + + myDoc.ClearAll("SheetX.A1:F10") + +
+ +
+ ClearFormats -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ClearFormats + +

ClearFormats

+ Clears the formats and styles in the given range. + + + svc.ClearFormats(range: str) + + + range: The range whose formats and styles are to be cleared, as a string. + + + + oDoc.ClearFormats("SheetX.*") + + + + myDoc.ClearFormats("SheetX.*") + +
+ +
+ ClearValues -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ClearValues + +

ClearValues

+ Clears the values and formulas in the given range. + + + svc.ClearValues(range: str) + + + range: The range whose values and formulas are to be cleared, as a string. + + + + oDoc.ClearValues("SheetX.A1:F10") + + + + myDoc.ClearValues("SheetX.A1:F10") + +
+ +
+ CompactLeft ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CompactLeft + +

CompactLeft

+ Deletes the columns of a specified range that match a filter expressed as a Calc formula. The filter is applied to each column to decide whether it will be deleted or not. + The deleted column can be limited to the height of the specified range or span to the height of the entire sheet, thus deleting whole columns. + This method returns a string with the range address of the compacted range. If all columns are deleted, then an empty string is returned. + If a range of cells is selected, calling this method will not impact the selection. + + + svc.CompactLeft(range: str, wholecolumn: bool = False, opt filterformula: str): str + + + range: The range from which columns will be deleted, as a string. + wholecolumn: If this option is set to True the entire column will be deleted from the sheet. The default value is False, which means that the deleted column will be limited to the height of the specified range. + filterformula: The filter to be applied to each column to determine whether or not it will be deleted. The filter is expressed as a Calc formula that should be applied to the first column. When the formula returns True for a column, that column will be deleted. The default filter deletes all empty columns. + For example, suppose range A1:J200 is selected (height = 200), so the default formula is =(COUNTBLANK(A1:A200)=200). This means that if all 200 cells are empty in the first column (Column A), then the column is deleted. Note that the formula is expressed with respect to the first column only. Internally the CompactLeft method will generalize this formula for all the remaining columns. + + + + ' Delete all empty columns in the range G1:L10 from Sheet1 + newrange = oDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10") + ' The example below is similar, but the entire column is deleted from the sheet + newrange = oDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", WholeColumn := True) + ' Deletes all columns where the first row is marked with an "X" + newrange = oDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", FilterFormula := "=(G1=""X"")") + ' Deletes all columns where the sum of values in the column is odd + newrange = oDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", FilterFormula := "=(MOD(SUM(G1:G10);2)=1)") + + + + newrange = myDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10") + newrange = myDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", wholecolumn = True) + newrange = myDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", filterformula = '=(G1="X")') + newrange = myDoc.CompactLeft("Sheet1.G1:L10", filterformula = '=(MOD(SUM(G1:G10);2)=1)') + +
+ +
+ CompactUp --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CompactUp + +

CompactUp

+ Deletes the rows of a specified range that match a filter expressed as a Calc formula. The filter is applied to each row to decide whether it will be deleted or not. + The deleted rows can be limited to the width of the specified range or span to the width of the entire sheet, thus deleting whole rows. + This method returns a string with the range address of the compacted range. If all rows are deleted, then an empty string is returned. + If a range of cells is selected, calling this method will not impact the selection. + + + svc.CompactUp(range: str, wholerow: bool = False, opt filterformula: str): str + + + range: The range from which rows will be deleted, as a string. + wholerow: If this option is set to True the entire row will be deleted from the sheet. The default value is False, which means that the deleted row will be limited to the width of the specified range. + filterformula: The filter to be applied to each row to determine whether or not it will be deleted. The filter is expressed as a Calc formula that should be applied to the first row. When the formula returns True for a row, that row will be deleted. The default filter deletes all empty rows. + For example, suppose range A1:J200 is selected (width = 10), so the default formula is =(COUNTBLANK(A1:J1)=10). This means that if all 10 cells are empty in the first row (Row 1), then the row is deleted. Note that the formula is expressed with respect to the first row only. Internally the CompactUp method will generalize this formula for all the remaining rows. + + + + ' Delete all empty rows in the range G1:L10 from Sheet1 + newrange = oDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10") + ' The example below is similar, but the entire row is deleted from the sheet + newrange = oDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", WholeRow := True) + ' Deletes all rows where the first column is marked with an "X" + newrange = oDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", FilterFormula := "=(G1=""X"")") + ' Deletes all rows where the sum of values in the row is odd + newrange = oDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", FilterFormula := "=(MOD(SUM(G1:L1);2)=1)") + + + + newrange = myDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10") + newrange = myDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", wholerow = True) + newrange = myDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", filterformula = '=(G1="X")') + newrange = myDoc.CompactUp("Sheet1.G1:L10", filterformula = '=(MOD(SUM(G1:L1);2)=1)') + +
+ +
+ CopySheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CopySheet + +

CopySheet

+ Copies a specified sheet before an existing sheet or at the end of the list of sheets. The sheet to be copied may be contained inside any open Calc document. Returns True if successful. + + + svc.CopySheet(sheetname: any, newname: str, [beforesheet: any]): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet to be copied as a string or its reference as an object. + newname: The name of the sheet to insert. The name must not be in use in the document. + beforesheet: The name (string) or index (numeric, starting from 1) of the sheet before which to insert the copied sheet. This argument is optional and the default behavior is to add the copied sheet at the last position. + + + The following example makes a copy of the sheet "SheetX" and places it as the last sheet in the current document. The name of the copied sheet is "SheetY". + + Dim oDoc as Object + 'Gets the Document object of the active window + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + oDoc.CopySheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + + The example below copies "SheetX" from "FileA.ods" and pastes it at the last position of "FileB.ods" with the name "SheetY": + + Dim oDocA As Object : Set oDocA = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileA.ods", Hidden := True, ReadOnly := True) + Dim oDocB As Object : Set oDocB = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + oDocB.CopySheet(oDocA.Sheet("SheetX"), "SheetY") + + + + myDoc.CopySheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + + + docA = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileA.ods", hidden = True, readonly = True) + docB = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + docB.CopySheet(docA.Sheet("SheetX"), "SheetY") + + To copy sheets between open documents, use CopySheet. To copy sheets from documents that are closed, use CopySheetFromFile. +
+ +
+ CopySheetFromFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CopySheetFromFile + +

CopySheetFromFile

+ Copies a specified sheet from a closed Calc document and pastes it before an existing sheet or at the end of the list of sheets of the file referred to by a Document object. + If the file does not exist, an error is raised. If the file is not a valid Calc file, a blank sheet is inserted. If the source sheet does not exist in the input file, an error message is inserted at the top of the newly pasted sheet. + + + svc.CopySheetFromFile(filename: str, sheetname: str, newname: str, [beforesheet: any]): bool + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. The file must not be protected with a password. + sheetname: The name of the sheet to be copied as a string. + newname: The name of the copied sheet to be inserted in the document. The name must not be in use in the document. + beforesheet: The name (string) or index (numeric, starting from 1) of the sheet before which to insert the copied sheet. This argument is optional and the default behavior is to add the copied sheet at the last position. + + The following example copies "SheetX" from "myFile.ods" and pastes it into the document referred to by "oDoc" as "SheetY" at the first position. + + + oDoc.CopySheetFromFile("C:\Documents\myFile.ods", "SheetX", "SheetY", 1) + + + + myDoc.CopySheetFromFile(r"C:\Documents\myFile.ods", "SheetX", "SheetY", 1) + +
+ +
+ CopyToCell -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CopyToCell + +

CopyToCell

+ Copies a specified source range (values, formulas and formats) to a destination range or cell. The method reproduces the behaviour of a Copy/Paste operation from a range to a single cell. + It returns a string representing the modified range of cells. The size of the modified area is fully determined by the size of the source area. + The source range may belong to another open document. + + + svc.CopyToCell(sourcerange: any, destinationcell: str): str + + + sourcerange: The source range as a string when it belongs to the same document or as a reference when it belongs to another open Calc document. + destinationcell: The destination cell where the copied range of cells will be pasted, as a string. If a range is given, only its top-left cell is considered. + + + Next is an example where the source and destination are in the same file: + + oDoc.CopyToCell("SheetX.A1:F10", "SheetY.C5") + + The example below illustrates how to copy a range from another open Calc document: + + Dim ui as Variant : ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Dim oDocSource As Object, oDocDestination As Object + 'Open the source document in the background (hidden) + Set oDocSource = ui.OpenDocument("C:\SourceFile.ods", Hidden := True, ReadOnly := True) + Set oDocDestination = CreateScriptService("Calc") + oDocDestination.CopyToCell(oDocSource.Range("Sheet1.C2:C4"), "SheetT.A5") + 'Do not forget to close the source document because it was opened as hidden + oDocSource.CloseDocument() + + + + docSource = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\SourceFile.ods", hidden = True, readonly = True) + docDestination = CreateScriptService("Calc") + docDestination.CopyToCell(docSource.Range("Sheet1.C2:C4"), "SheetT.A5") + docSource.CloseDocument() + + To simulate a Copy/Paste from a range to a single cell, use CopyToCell. To simulate a Copy/Paste from a range to a larger range (with the same cells being replicated several times), use CopyToRange. +
+ +
+ CopyToRange -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CopyToRange + +

CopyToRange

+ Copies downwards and/or rightwards a specified source range (values, formulas and formats) to a destination range. The method imitates the behaviour of a Copy/Paste operation from a source range to a larger destination range. + + + If the height (or width) of the destination area is > 1 row (or column) then the height (or width) of the source must be <= the height (or width) of the destination. Otherwise nothing happens. + + + If the height (or width) of the destination is = 1 then the destination is expanded downwards (or rightwards) up to the height (or width) of the source range. + + + The method returns a string representing the modified range of cells. + The source range may belong to another open document. + + + svc.CopyToRange(sourcerange: any, destinationrange: str): str + + + sourcerange: The source range as a string when it belongs to the same document or as a reference when it belongs to another open Calc document. + destinationrange: The destination of the copied range of cells, as a string. + + + Copy within the same document: + + oDoc.CopyToRange("SheetX.A1:F10", "SheetY.C5:J5") + ' Returns a range string: "$SheetY.$C$5:$J$14" + + Copy from one file to another: + + Dim oDocA As Object : Set oDocA = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileA.ods", Hidden := True, ReadOnly := True) + Dim oDocB As Object : Set oDocB = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + oDocB.CopyToRange(oDocA.Range("SheetX.A1:F10"), "SheetY.C5:J5") + + + + doc.CopyToRange("SheetX.A1:F10", "SheetY.C5:J5") + + + docA = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileA.ods", hidden = True, readonly = True) + docB = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\FileB.ods") + docB.CopyToRange(docA.Range("SheetX.A1:F10"), "SheetY.C5:J5") + +
+ +
+ CreateChart ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CreateChart + +

CreateChart

+ Creates a new chart object showing the data in the specified range. The returned chart object can be further manipulated using the Chart service. + + + svc.CreateChart(chartname: str, sheetname: str, range: str, columnheader: bool = False, rowheader: bool = False): obj + + + chartname: The user-defined name of the chart to be created. The name must be unique in the same sheet. + sheetname: The name of the sheet where the chart will be placed. + range: The range to be used as the data source for the chart. The range may refer to any sheet of the Calc document. + columnheader: When True, the topmost row of the range is used as labels for the category axis or the legend (Default = False). + rowheader: When True, the leftmost column of the range is used as labels for the category axis or the legend. (Default = False). + + The examples below in Basic and Python create a chart using the data contained in the range "A1:B5" of "Sheet1" and place the chart in "Sheet2". + + + Set oChart = oDoc.CreateChart("MyChart", "Sheet2", "Sheet1.A1:B5", RowHeader := True) + oChart.ChartType = "Donut" + + + + chart = doc.CreateChart("MyChart", "Sheet2", "Sheet1.A1:B5", rowheader=True) + chart.ChartType = "Donut" + + Refer to the help page about ScriptForge's Chart service to learn more how to further manipulate chart objects. It is possible to change properties as the chart type, chart and axes titles and chart position. +
+ +
+ CreatePivotTable ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;CreatePivotTable + +

CreatePivotTable

+ Creates a new pivot table with the properties defined by the arguments passed to the method. + A name must be provided for the pivot table. If a pivot table with the same name already exists in the targeted sheet, it will be replaced without warning. + This method returns a string containing the range where the new pivot table was placed. + + + svc.CreatePivotTable(pivottablename: str, sourcerange: str, targetcell: str, datafields: str[0..*], rowfields: str[0..*], columnfields: str[0..*], filterbutton: bool = true, rowtotals: bool = true, columntotals: bool = true): str + + + pivottablename: The user-defined name of the new pivot table. + sourcerange: The range containing the raw data, as a string. It is assumed that the first row contains the field names that are used by the pivot table. + targetcell: The top-left cell where the new pivot table will be placed. If a range is specified, only its top-left cell is considered. + datafields: It can be either a single string or an array containing strings that define field names and functions to be applied. When an array is specified, it must follow the syntax Array("FieldName[;Function]", ...). + The allowed functions are: Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, CountNums, StDev, StDevP, Var, VarP and Median. Function names must be provided in English. When all values are numerical, Sum is the default function, otherwise the default function is Count. + rowfields: A single string or an array with the field names that will be used as the pivot table rows. + columnfields: A single string or an array with the field names that will be used as the pivot table columns. + filterbutton: Determines whether a filter button will be displayed above the pivot table (Default = True). + rowtotals: Specifies if a separate column for row totals will be added to the pivot table (Default = True). + columntotals Specifies if a separate row for column totals will be added to the pivot table (Default = True) + + + + Dim vData As Variant, oDoc As Object, ui As Object, sTable As String, sPivot As String + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + vData = Array(Array("Item", "State", "Team", "2002", "2003", "2004"), _ + Array("Books", "Michigan", "Jean", 14788, 30222, 23490), _ + Array("Candy", "Michigan", "Jean", 26388, 15641, 32849), _ + Array("Pens", "Michigan", "Jean", 16569, 32675, 25396), _ + Array("Books", "Michigan", "Volker", 21961, 21242, 29009), _ + Array("Candy", "Michigan", "Volker", 26142, 22407, 32841)) + sTable = oDoc.SetArray("A1", vData) + sPivot = oDoc.CreatePivotTable("PT1", sTable, "H1", _ + Array("2002", "2003;count", "2004;average"), _ ' Three data fields + "Item", _ ' A single row field + Array("State", "Team"), False) ' Two column fields + + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + doc = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + vData = [["Item", "State", "Team", "2002", "2003", "2004"], + ["Books", "Michigan", "Jean", 14788, 30222, 23490], + ["Candy", "Michigan", "Jean", 26388, 15641, 32849], + ["Pens", "Michigan", "Jean", 16569, 32675, 25396)], + ["Books", "Michigan", "Volker", 21961, 21242, 29009], + ["Candy", "Michigan", "Volker", 26142, 22407, 32841]] + sTable = doc.SetArray("A1", vData) + sPivot = doc.CreatePivotTable("PT1", sTable, "H1", + ["2002", "2003;count", "2004;average"], + "Item", + ["State", "Team"], False) + + To learn more about Pivot Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Calc, read the Pivot Table help page. +
+ + +
+ DAvg, DCount, DMax, DMin, DSum -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;DAvg + Calc service;DCount + Calc service;DMax + Calc service;DMin + Calc service;DSum + +

DAvg, DCount, DMax, DMin and DSum

+ Apply the functions Average, Count, Max, Min and Sum, respectively, to all the cells containing numeric values on a given range. + + + svc.DAvg(range: str): float + + + svc.DCount(range: str): float + + + svc.DMax(range: str): float + + + svc.DMin(range: str): float + + + svc.DSum(range: str): float + + + range: The range to which the function will be applied, as a string. + + The example below applies the Sum function to the range "A1:A1000" of the currently selected sheet: + + + result = oDoc.DSum("~.A1:A1000") + + + + result = myDoc.DSum("~.A1:A1000") + + Cells in the given range that contain text will be ignored by all of these functions. For example, the DCount method will not count cells with text, only numerical cells. +
+ +
+ ExportRangeToFile --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ExportRangeToFile + +

ExportRangeToFile

+ Exports the specified range as an image or PDF file. + This method returns True if the destination file was successfully saved. + Hidden rows or columns in the specified range are not exported to the destination file. + + + svc.ExportRangeToFile(range: str, filename: str, imagetype: str = "pdf", overwrite: bool = False): bool + + + range: A sheet name or a cell range to be exported, as a string. + filename: The name of the file to be saved. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + imagetype: Identifies the destination file type. Possible values are "jpeg", "pdf" (default) and "png". + overwrite: When set to True, the destination file may be overwritten (Default = False). + + + + ' Exports the entire sheet as a PDF file + oDoc.ExportRangeToFile("SheetX", "C:\Temp\image.pdf") + ' Exports the range as a PNG file and overwrites the destination file if it exists + oDoc.ExportRangeToFile("SheetX.A1:D10", "C:\Temp\image.png", "png", Overwrite := True) + + + + doc.ExportRangeToFile("SheetX", r"C:\Temp\image.pdf") + doc.ExportRangeToFile("SheetX.A1:D10", r"C:\Temp\image.png", "png", overwrite = True) + +
+ +
+ Forms ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;Forms + +

Forms

+ Depending on the parameters provided this method will return: + + + A zero-based Array (or a tuple in Python) with the names of all the forms contained in a given sheet (if the form argument is absent) + + + A SFDocuments.Form service instance representing the form specified as argument. + + + + + svc.Forms(sheetname: str): str[0..*] + + + svc.Forms(sheetname: str, form: str = ''): svc + + + svc.Forms(sheetname: str, form: int): svc + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet, as a string, from which the form will be retrieved. + form: The name or index corresponding to a form stored in the specified sheet. If this argument is absent, the method will return a list with the names of all forms available in the sheet. + + In the following examples, the first line gets the names of all forms stored in "Sheet1" and the second line retrieves the Form object of the form named "Form_A" which is stored in "Sheet1". + + + Set FormNames = oDoc.Forms("Sheet1") + Set FormA = oDoc.Forms("Sheet1", "Form_A") + + + + form_names = doc.Forms("Sheet1") + form_A = doc.Forms("Sheet1", "Form_A") + +
+ +
+ GetColumnName -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;GetColumnName + +

GetColumnName

+ Converts a column number ranging between 1 and 1024 into its corresponding letter (column 'A', 'B', ..., 'AMJ'). If the given column number is outside the allowed range, a zero-length string is returned. + + + svc.GetColumnName(columnnumber: int): str + + + columnnumber: The column number as an integer value in the interval 1 ... 1024. + + + Displays a message box with the name of the third column, which by default is "C". + + MsgBox oDoc.GetColumnName(3) + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(myDoc.GetColumnName(3)) + + The maximum number of columns allowed on a Calc sheet is 1024. +
+ +
+ GetFormula -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;GetFormula + +

GetFormula

+ Get the formula(s) stored in the given range of cells as a single string, a 1D or a 2D array of strings. + + + svc.GetFormula(range: str): any + + + range: The range where to get the formulas from, as a string. + + + The following example returns a 3 by 2 array with the formulas in the range "A1:B3" (3 rows by 2 columns): + + arrFormula = oDoc.GetFormula("~.A1:B3") + + + + arrFormula = myDoc.GetFormula("~.A1:B3") + +
+ +
+ GetValue -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;GetValue + +

GetValue

+ Get the value(s) stored in the given range of cells as a single value, a 1D array or a 2D array. All values are either doubles or strings. + + + svc.GetValue(range: str): any + + + range: The range where to get the values from, as a string. + + + + arrValues = oDoc.GetValue("~.B1:C100") + + + + arrValues = myDoc.GetValue("~.B1:C100") + + If a cell contains a date, the number corresponding to that date will be returned. To convert numeric values to dates in Basic scripts, use the Basic CDate builtin function. In Python scripts, use the CDate function from the Basic service. +
+ +
+ ImportFromCSVFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ImportFromCSVFile + +

ImportFromCSVFile

+ Imports the contents of a CSV-formatted text file and places it on a given destination cell. + The destination area is cleared of all contents and formats before inserting the contents of the CSV file. The size of the modified area is fully determined by the contents of the input file. + The method returns a string representing the modified range of cells. + + + svc.ImportFromCSVFile(filename: str, destinationcell: str, [filteroptions: str]): str + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + destinationcell: The destination cell to insert the imported data, as a string. If instead a range is given, only its top-left cell is considered. + filteroptions: The arguments for the CSV input filter. The default filter makes following assumptions: + + + The input file encoding is UTF8. + + + The field separator is a comma, a semi-colon or a Tab character. + + + The string delimiter is the double quote ("). + + + All lines are included. + + + Quoted strings are formatted as text. + + + Special numbers are detected. + + + All columns are presumed to be texts, except if recognized as valid numbers. + + + The language is English/US, which implies that the decimal separator is "." and the thousands separator is ",". + + + + + + oDoc.ImportFromCSVFile("C:\Temp\myCSVFile.csv", "SheetY.C5") + + + + myDoc.ImportFromCSVFile(r"C:\Temp\myCSVFile.csv", "SheetY.C5") + + To learn more about the CSV Filter Options, refer to the CSV Filter Options help page. +
+ +
+ ImportFromDatabase -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ImportFromDatabase + +

ImportFromDatabase

+ Imports the contents of a database table, query or resultset, i.e. the result of a SELECT SQL command, inserting it on a destination cell. + The destination area is cleared of all contents and formats before inserting the imported contents. The size of the modified area is fully determined by the contents in the table or query. + The method returns True when the import was successful. + + + svc.ImportFromDatabase(filename: str = "", registrationname: str = "", destinationcell: str = "", sqlcommand: str = "", directsql: bool): bool + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + registrationname: The name to use to find the database in the databases register. This argument is ignored if a filename is provided. + destinationcell: The destination of the imported data, as a string. If a range is given, only its top-left cell is considered. + sqlcommand: A table or query name (without surrounding quotes or square brackets) or a SELECT SQL statement in which table and field names may be surrounded by square brackets or quotes to improve its readability. + directsql: When True, the SQL command is sent to the database engine without pre-analysis. Default is False. The argument is ignored for tables. For queries, the applied option is the one set when the query was defined. + + + + oDoc.ImportFromDatabase("C:\Temp\myDbFile.odb", , "SheetY.C5", "SELECT * FROM [Employees] ORDER BY [LastName]") + + + + myDoc.ImportFromDatabase(r"C:\Temp\myDbFile.odb", , "SheetY.C5", "SELECT * FROM [Employees] ORDER BY [LastName]") + +
+ +
+ InsertSheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;InsertSheet + +

InsertSheet

+ Inserts a new empty sheet before an existing sheet or at the end of the list of sheets. + + + svc.InsertSheet(sheetname: str, [beforesheet: any]): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the new sheet. + beforesheet: The name (string) or index (numeric, starting from 1) of the sheet before which to insert the new sheet. This argument is optional and the default behavior is to insert the sheet at the last position. + + The following example inserts a new empty sheet named "SheetX" and places it before "SheetY": + + + oDoc.InsertSheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + + + + myDoc.InsertSheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + +
+ +
+ MoveRange -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;MoveRange + +

MoveRange

+ Moves a specified source range to a destination range of cells. The method returns a string representing the modified range of cells. The dimension of the modified area is fully determined by the size of the source area. + + + + svc.MoveRange(source: str, destination: str): str + + + source: The source range of cells, as a string. + destination: The destination cell, as a string. If a range is given, its top-left cell is considered as the destination. + + + + oDoc.MoveRange("SheetX.A1:F10", "SheetY.C5") + + + + myDoc.MoveRange("SheetX.A1:F10", "SheetY.C5") + +
+ +
+ MoveSheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;MoveSheet + +

MoveSheet

+ Moves an existing sheet and places it before a specified sheet or at the end of the list of sheets. + + + svc.MoveSheet(sheetname: str, [beforesheet: any]): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet to move. The sheet must exist or an exception is raised. + beforesheet: The name (string) or index (numeric, starting from 1) of the sheet before which the original sheet will be placed. This argument is optional and the default behavior is to move the sheet to the last position. + + The example below moves the existing sheet "SheetX" and places it before "SheetY": + + + oDoc.MoveSheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + + + + myDoc.MoveSheet("SheetX", "SheetY") + +
+ +
+ Offset ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Calc service;Offset + +

Offset

+ Returns a new range (as a string) offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given range. + This method has the same behavior as the homonymous Calc's Offset function. + + + svc.Offset(reference: str, rows: int = 0, columns: int = 0, [height: int], [width: int]): str + + + reference: The range, as a string, that the method will use as reference to perform the offset operation. + rows: The number of rows by which the initial range is offset upwards (negative value) or downwards (positive value). Use 0 (default) to stay in the same row. + columns: The number of columns by which the initial range is offset to the left (negative value) or to the right (positive value). Use 0 (default) to stay in the same column. + height: The vertical height for an area that starts at the new range position. Omit this argument when no vertical resizing is needed. + width: The horizontal width for an area that starts at the new range position. Omit this argument when no horizontal resizing is needed. + Arguments rows and columns must not lead to zero or negative start row or column. + Arguments height and width must not lead to zero or negative count of rows or columns. + + + + oDoc.Offset("A1", 2, 2) + 'SheetX.$C$3 (A1 moved by two rows and two columns down) + oDoc.Offset("A1", 2, 2, 5, 6) + 'SheetX.$C$3:$H$7 (A1 offset by two rows and columns with width of 5 rows and 6 columns) + + + + myDoc.Offset("A1", 2, 2) + myDoc.Offset("A1", 2, 2, 5, 6) + +
+ +
+ OpenRangeSelector ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;OpenRangeSelector + +

OpenRangeSelector

+ Opens a non-modal dialog that can be used to select a range in the document and returns a string containing the selected range. + This method opens the same dialog that is used by %PRODUCTNAME when the Shrink button is pressed. For example, the Tools - Goal Seek dialog has a Shrink button to the right of the Formula cell field. + This method does not change the current selection. + + + svc.OpenRangeSelector(opt title: str, opt selection: str, singlecell: bool = False, closeafterselect: bool = True): str + + + title: The title of the dialog, as a string. + selection: An optional range that is initially selected when the dialog is displayed. + singlecell: When True (default) only single-cell selection is allowed. When False range selection is allowed. + closeafterselect: When True (default) the dialog is closed immediately after the selection is made. When False the user can change the selection as many times as needed and then manually close the dialog. + + + + Dim sRange as String + sRange = oDoc.OpenRangeSelector(Title := "Select a range") + + + + sRange = myDoc.OpenRangeSelector(title = "Select a range") + +
+ +
+ Printf ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Calc service;Printf + +

Printf

+ Returns the input string after substituting its token characters by their values in a given range. + This method does not change the current selection. + This method can be used to quickly extract specific parts of a range name, such as the sheet name or first cell column and row, and use them to compose a new range address. + + + svc.Printf(inputstr: str, range: str, tokencharacter: str = "%"): str + + + inputstr: The string containing the tokens that will be replaced by the corresponding values in range. + range: A RangeName from which values will be extracted. If it contains a sheet name, the sheet must exist. + tokencharacter: Character used to identify tokens. By default "%" is the token character. The following tokens are accepted: + + + %S - The sheet name containing the range, including single quotes when necessary. + + + %R1 - The row number of the top left cell of the range. + + + %C1 - The column letter of the top left cell of the range. + + + %R2 - The row number of the bottom right cell of the range. + + + %C2 - The column letter of the bottom right cell of the range. + + + + + The example below extracts each element of the RangeName defined in sRange and uses them to compose a message. + + Dim sRange as String, sInputStr as String + sRange = "Sheet1.A1:E10" + sInputStr = "Sheet name: %S" & Chr(10) & _ + "First row: %R1" & Chr(10) & _ + "First column %C1" & Chr(10) & _ + "Last row %R2" & Chr(10) & _ + "Last column %C2" + MsgBox oDoc.Printf(sInputStr, sRange) + + The Printf method can be combined with SetFormula to create formulas over multiple cells. For instance, consider a table with numeric values in the range "A1:E10" from which formulas are to be created to sum the values in each row and place the results in the range "F1:F10": + + Dim sFormula as String, sRange as String + sRange = "A1:E10" + ' Note the use of the "$" character + sFormula = "=SUM($%C1%R1:$%C2%R1)" + oDoc.SetFormula("F1:F10", oDoc.Printf(sFormula, sRange)) + + + + sRange = "Sheet1.A1:E10" + sInputStr = "Sheet name: %S\n" \ + "First row: %R1\n" \ + "First column %C1\n" \ + "Last row %R2\n" \ + "Last column %C2" + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(myDoc.Printf(sInputStr, sRange)) + + + sRange = "A1:E10 + sFormula = "=SUM($%C1%R1:$%C2%R1)" + myDoc.SetFormula("F1:F10", myDoc.Printf(sFormula, sRange)) + +
+ +
+ PrintOut ---------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;PrintOut + +

PrintOut

+ This method sends the contents of the given sheet to the default printer or to the printer defined by the SetPrinter method of the Document service. + Returns True if the sheet was successfully printed. + + + svc.PrintOut(opt sheetname: str, pages: str = "", copies: num = 1): bool + + + sheetname: The sheet to print, default is the active sheet. + pages: The pages to print as a string, like in the user interface. Example: "1-4;10;15-18". Default is all pages. + copies: The number of copies. Default is 1. + + + + If oDoc.PrintOut("SheetX", "1-4;10;15-18", Copies := 2) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + if doc.PrintOut('SheetX', copies=3, pages='45-88'): + # ... + +
+ +
+ RemoveSheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;RemoveSheet + +

RemoveSheet

+ Removes an existing sheet from the document. + + + svc.RemoveSheet(sheetname: str): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet to remove. + + + + oDoc.RemoveSheet("SheetY") + + + + myDoc.RemoveSheet("SheetY") + +
+ +
+ RenameSheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;RenameSheet + +

RenameSheet

+ Renames the given sheet and returns True if successful. + + + svc.RenameSheet(sheetname: str, newname: str): bool + + + sheetname: The name of the sheet to rename. + newname: the new name of the sheet. It must not exist yet. + + This example renames the active sheet to "SheetY": + + + oDoc.RenameSheet("~", "SheetY") + + + + mydoc.RenameSheet("~", "SheetY") + +
+ +
+ SetArray -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;SetArray + +

SetArray

+ Stores the given value starting from a specified target cell. The updated area expands itself from the target cell or from the top-left corner of the given range to accommodate the size of the input value argument. Vectors are always expanded vertically. + The method returns a string representing the modified area as a range of cells. + + + svc.SetArray(targetcell: str, value: any): str + + + targetcell: The cell or a range as a string from where to start to store the given value. + value: A scalar, a vector or an array (in Python, one or two-dimensional lists and tuples) with the new values to be stored from the target cell or from the top-left corner of the range if targetcell is a range. The new values must be strings, numeric values or dates. Other types will cause the corresponding cells to be emptied. + + + The following example uses the builtin DimArray function to create an array and then store it in cell "A1": + + Dim arrData as Variant + arrData = DimArray(2, 1) + arrData(0, 0) = 1 : arrData(1, 0) = 2 : arrData(2, 0) = 3 + arrData(0, 1) = "One" : arrData(1, 1) = "Two" : arrData(2, 1) = "Three" + oDoc.SetArray("Sheet1.A1", arrData) + + This example uses the RangeInit method of the ScriptForge Array service to create an array with values that are then stored from cell "A1" and downwards. + + 'Fill 1st column with values from 1 to 1000 + oDoc.SetArray("Sheet1.A1", SF_Array.RangeInit(1, 1000)) + + + + arrData = ((1, "One"), (2, "Two"), (3, "Three")) + myDoc.SetArray("Sheet1.A1", arrData) + + + myDoc.SetArray("Sheet1.A1", tuple(i + 1 for i in range(1000))) + + To dump the full contents of an array in a sheet, use SetArray. To dump the contents of an array only within the boundaries of the targeted range of cells, use SetValue. +
+ +
+ SetValue -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;SetValue + +

SetValue

+ Stores the given value in the specified range. The size of the modified area is equal to the size of the target range. + The method returns a string representing the modified area as a range of cells. + + + svc.SetValue(targetrange: str, value: any): str + + + targetrange: The range where to store the given value, as a string. + value: A scalar, a vector or an array with the new values for each cell of the range. The new values must be strings, numeric values or dates. Other types will cause the corresponding cells to be emptied. + The full range is updated and the remainder of the sheet is left unchanged. If the size of value is smaller than the size of targetrange, then the remaining cells will be emptied. + If the size of value is larger than the size of targetrange, then value is only partially copied until it fills the size of targetrange. + Vectors are expanded vertically, except if targetrange has a height of exactly 1 row. + + + + oDoc.SetValue("A1", 2) + 'Below the Value array is smaller than the TargetRange (remaining cells are emptied) + oDoc.SetValue("A1:F1", Array(1, 2, 3)) + 'Below the Value and TargetRange have the same size + oDoc.SetValue("A1:D2", SF_Array.AppendRow(Array(1, 2, 3, 4), Array(5, 6, 7, 8))) + + If you want to fill a single row with values, you can use the Offset function. In the example below, consider that arrData is a one-dimensional array: + + Dim firstCell As String : firstCell = "A1" + Dim lenArray As Integer : lenArray = UBound(arrData) - LBound(arrData) + 1 + Dim newRange As String : newRange = oDoc.Offset(firstCell, width = lenArray) + oDoc.SetValue(newRange, arrData) + + + + myDoc.SetValue("A1", 2) + myDoc.SetValue("A1:F1", (1, 2, 3)) + myDoc.SetValue("A1:D2", ((1, 2, 3, 4), (5, 6, 7, 8))) + + + firstCell = "A1" + newRange = doc.Offset(firstCell, width = len(arrData)) + doc.SetValue(newRange, arrData) + +
+ +
+ SetCellStyle -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;SetCellStyle + +

SetCellStyle

+ Applies the specified cell style to the given target range. The full range is updated and the remainder of the sheet is left untouched. If the cell style does not exist, an error is raised. + The method returns a string representing the modified area as a range of cells. + + + svc.SetCellStyle(targetrange: str, style: str): str + + + targetrange: The range to which the style will be applied, as a string. + style: The name of the cell style to apply. + + + + oDoc.SetCellStyle("A1:J1", "Heading 1") + oDoc.SetCellStyle("A2:J100", "Neutral") + + + + myDoc.SetCellStyle("A1:J1", "Heading 1") + myDoc.SetCellStyle("A2:J100", "Neutral") + +
+ +
+ SetFormula -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;SetFormula + +

SetFormula

+ Inserts the given (array of) formula(s) in the specified range. The size of the modified area is equal to the size of the range. + The method returns a string representing the modified area as a range of cells. + + + svc.SetFormula(targetrange: str, formula: any): str + + + targetrange: The range to insert the formulas, as a string. + formula: A string, a vector or an array of strings with the new formulas for each cell in the target range. + The full range is updated and the remainder of the sheet is left unchanged. + If the given formula is a string, the unique formula is pasted along the whole range with adjustment of the relative references. + If the size of formula is smaller than the size of targetrange, then the remaining cells are emptied. + If the size of formula is larger than the size of targetrange, then the formulas are only partially copied until it fills the size of targetrange. + Vectors are always expanded vertically, except if targetrange has a height of exactly 1 row. + + + + oDoc.SetFormula("A1", "=A2") + 'Horizontal vector, partially empty + oDoc.SetFormula("A1:F1", Array("=A2", "=B2", "=C2+10")) + 'D2 contains the formula "=H2" + oDoc.SetFormula("A1:D2", "=E1") + + + + myDoc.SetFormula("A1", "=A2") + myDoc.SetFormula("A1:F1", ("=A2", "=B2", "=C2+10")) + myDoc.SetFormula("A1:D2", "=E1") + +
+ +
+ ShiftDown --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ShiftDown + +

ShiftDown

+ Moves a given range of cells downwards by inserting empty rows. The current selection is not affected. + Depending on the value of the wholerow argument the inserted rows can either span the width of the specified range or span all columns in the row. + This method returns a string representing the new location of the initial range. + If the shifted range exceeds the sheet edges, then nothing happens. + + + svc.ShiftDown(range: str, wholerow: bool = False, opt rows: int): str + + + range: The range above which rows will be inserted, as a string. + wholerow: If set to False (default), then the width of the inserted rows will be the same as the width of the specified range. Otherwise, the inserted row will span all columns in the sheet. + rows: The number of rows to be inserted. The default value is the height of the original range. The number of rows must be a positive number. + + + + ' Moves the range "A3:D3" down by one row; affects only columns A to D + oDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3") + ' The inserted row spans all columns in the sheet + oDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3", WholeRow := True) + ' Moves the range "A3:D3" down by five rows + oDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3", Rows := 5) + ' Moves the range "A3:D10" down by two rows and shows the new location of the original range + Dim sNewRange as String + sNewRange = oDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D10", Rows := 2) + MsgBox sNewRange ' $Sheet1.$A$5:$D$12 + + + + myDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3") + myDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3", wholerow = True) + myDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D3", rows = 5) + sNewRange = myDoc.ShiftDown("A3:D10", rows = 2) + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(sNewRange) + +
+ +
+ ShiftLeft --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ShiftLeft + +

ShiftLeft

+ Deletes the leftmost columns of a given range and moves to the left all cells to the right of the affected range. The current selection is not affected. + Depending on the value of the wholecolumn argument the deleted columns can either span the height of the specified range or span all rows in the column. + This method returns a string representing the location of the remaining portion of the initial range. If all cells in the original range have been deleted, then an empty string is returned. + + + svc.ShiftLeft(range: str, wholecolumn: bool = False, opt columns: int): str + + + range: The range from which cells will be deleted, as a string. + wholecolumn: If set to False (default), then the height of the deleted columns will be the same as the height of the specified range. Otherwise, the deleted columns will span all rows in the sheet. + columns: The number of columns to be deleted from the specified range. The default value is the width of the original range, which is also the maximum value of this argument. + + + + ' Deletes the range "B3:B6"; moves left all cells to the right + oDoc.ShiftLeft("B3:B6") + ' Deletes the first column in the range "A3:D6" + oDoc.ShiftLeft("A3:D6", Columns := 1) + ' The deleted columns (A to D) spans all rows in the sheet + oDoc.ShiftLeft("A3:D6", WholeColumn := True) + + + + myDoc.ShiftLeft("B3:B6") + myDoc.ShiftLeft("A3:D6", Columns = 1) + myDoc.ShiftLeft("A3:D6", WholeColumn = True) + +
+ +
+ ShiftUp ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ShiftUp + +

ShiftUp

+ Deletes the topmost rows of a given range and moves upwards all cells below the affected range. The current selection is not affected. + Depending on the value of the wholerow argument the deleted rows can either span the width of the specified range or span all columns in the row. + This method returns a string representing the location of the remaining portion of the initial range. If all cells in the original range have been deleted, then an empty string is returned. + + + svc.ShiftUp(range: str, wholerow: bool = False, opt rows: int): str + + + range: The range from which cells will be deleted, as a string. + wholerow: If set to False (default), then the width of the deleted rows will be the same as the width of the specified range. Otherwise, the deleted row will span all columns in the sheet. + rows: The number of rows to be deleted from the specified range. The default value is the height of the original range, which is also the maximum value of this argument. + + + + ' Deletes the range "A3:D3"; moves all cells below it by one row up + oDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D3") + ' Deletes the first row in the range "A3:D6" + oDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D6", Rows := 1) + ' The deleted rows spans all columns in the sheet + oDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D6", WholeRow := True) + + + + myDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D3") + myDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D6", rows = 1) + myDoc.ShiftUp("A3:D6", wholerow = True) + +
+ +
+ ShiftRight --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;ShiftRight + +

ShiftRight

+ Moves a given range of cells to the right by inserting empty columns. The current selection is not affected. + Depending on the value of the wholecolumn argument the inserted columns can either span the height of the specified range or span all rows in the column. + This method returns a string representing the new location of the initial range. + If the shifted range exceeds the sheet edges, then nothing happens. + + + svc.ShiftRight(range: str, wholecolumn: bool = False, opt columns: int): str + + + range: The range which will have empty columns inserted to its left, as a string. + wholecolumn: If set to False (default), then the height of the inserted columns will be the same as the height of the specified range. Otherwise, the inserted columns will span all rows in the sheet. + columns: The number of columns to be inserted. The default value is the width of the original range. + + + + ' Moves the range "A3:A6" right by one column; affects only rows 3 to 6 + oDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6") + ' Moves the range "A3:A6" right by five columns + oDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6", Columns := 5) + ' The inserted column spans all rows in the sheet + oDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6", WholeColumn := True) + + + + myDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6") + myDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6", columns = 5) + myDoc.ShiftRight("A3:A6", wholecolumn = True) + +
+ +
+ SortRange -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Calc service;SortRange + +

SortRange

+ Sorts the given range based on up to 3 columns/rows. The sorting order may vary by column/row. It returns a string representing the modified range of cells. The size of the modified area is fully determined by the size of the source area. + + + svc.SortRange(range: str, sortkeys: any, sortorder: any = "ASC", destinationcell: str = "", containsheader: bool = False, casesensitive: bool = False, sortcolumns: bool = False): str + + + range: The range to be sorted, as a string. + sortkeys: A scalar (if 1 column/row) or an array of column/row numbers starting from 1. The maximum number of keys is 3. + sortorder: A scalar or an array of strings containing the values "ASC" (ascending), "DESC" (descending) or "" (which defaults to ascending). Each item is paired with the corresponding item in sortkeys. If the sortorder array is shorter than sortkeys, the remaining keys are sorted in ascending order. + destinationcell: The destination cell of the sorted range of cells, as a string. If a range is given, only its top-left cell is considered. By default the source Range is overwritten. + containsheader: When True, the first row/column is not sorted. + casesensitive: Only for string comparisons. Default = False + sortcolumns: When True, the columns are sorted from left to right. Default = False : rows are sorted from top to bottom. + + + + 'Sort range based on columns A (ascending) and C (descending) + oDoc.SortRange("A2:J200", Array(1, 3), Array("ASC", "DESC"), CaseSensitive := True) + + + + myDoc.SortRange("A2:J200", (1, 3), ("ASC", "DESC"), casesensitive = True) + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca1cc338f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,504 @@ + + + + + + SFDocuments.Chart service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_chart.xhp + + + +
+ + Chart service + +
+
+

SFDocuments.Chart service

+ The Chart service provides a set of properties and methods to handle charts in Calc documents. With this service it is possible to: + + + Access chart objects in Calc documents and manipulate their properties. + + + Create and insert new charts into a Calc document. + + + Export charts as image files. + + +
+ +

Chart names

+ Charts may have two different names: + + + An internal name given by %PRODUCTNAME as soon as the chart object is created (usually "Object 1", "Object 2" and so on). + + + A user-defined name, which can be defined by right-clicking the chart and choosing Name in the context menu. + + + The Chart service primarily uses the user-defined name to access a chart object. If it does not exist, than the internal name is used. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Chart service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The Chart service is instantiated from a Calc service instance either using the Charts or CreateChart methods. + + The example below creates a Chart service instance from an existing chart in the current Calc document: + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim oDoc as Object, oChart as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + Set oChart = oDoc.Charts("Sheet1", "Object 1") + + The following example instantiate the Chart service by creating a new chart object based on the data contained in the range "Sheet1.A1:C10". + + Dim oDoc as Object, oChart as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + Set oChart = oDoc.CreateChart("My Chart", "Sheet1", "Sheet1.A1:C10") + + Read the CreateChart method description to learn more about its arguments. + + + The examples above can be written in Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + chart = doc.Charts("Sheet1", "Object 1") + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + chart = doc.CreateChart("My Chart", "Sheet1", "Sheet1.A1:C10") + + + + Chart service;ChartType + Chart service;Deep + Chart service;Dim3D + Chart service;Exploded + Chart service;Filled + Chart service;Legend + Chart service;Percent + Chart service;Stacked + Chart service;Title + Chart service;XTitle + Chart service;YTitle + Chart service;XChartObj + Chart service;XDiagram + Chart service;XShape + Chart service;XTableChart + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + ChartType + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies the chart type as a string that can assume one of the following values: "Pie", "Bar", "Donut", "Column", "Area", "Line", "XY", "Bubble", "Net". + + + + + Deep + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When True indicates that the chart is three-dimensional and each series is arranged in the z-direction. + When False series are arranged considering only two dimensions. + + + + + Dim3D + + + No + + + Boolean or String + + + Specifies if the chart is displayed with 3D elements. If the value is a string, it must be either "Bar", "Cylinder", "Cone" or "Pyramid". + If the boolean True value is specified, then the chart is displayed using 3D bars. + + + + + Exploded + + + No + + + Numeric + + + Specifies how much pie segments are offset from the chart center as a percentage of the radius. Applicable to pie and donut charts only. + + + + + Filled + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When True, specifies a filled net chart. Applicable to net charts only. + + + + + Legend + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Specifies whether or not the chart has a legend. + + + + + Percent + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When True, chart series are stacked and each category sums up to 100%. Applicable to Area, Bar, Bubble, Column and Net charts. + + + + + Stacked + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When True, chart series are stacked. Applicable to Area, Bar, Bubble, Column and Net charts. + + + + + Title + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies the main title of the chart. + + + + + XTitle + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies the title of the X axis. + + + + + YTitle + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies the title of the Y axis. + + + + + XChartObj + + + Yes + + + UNO Object + + + Returns the object representing the chart, which is an instance of the ScChartObj class. + + + + + XDiagram + + + Yes + + + UNO Object + + + Returns the com.sun.star.chart.XDiagram object representing the diagram of the chart. + + + + + XShape + + + Yes + + + UNO Object + + + Returns the com.sun.star.drawing.XShape object representing the shape of the chart. + + + + + XTableChart + + + Yes + + + UNO Object + + + Returns the com.sun.star.table.XTableChart object representing the data being displayed in the chart. + + +
+ +

Creating a chart

+ Consider the following data in the range "A1:B6" of a sheet named "Report". + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + Sample A + + + Sample B + + + + + 2 + + + 36 + + + 40 + + + + + 3 + + + 39 + + + 43 + + + + + 4 + + + 45 + + + 40 + + + + + 5 + + + 52 + + + 48 + + +
+ The examples below in Basic and Python show how to create a line chart from this data with legends. + + + oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + oChart = oDoc.CreateChart("Samples", "Report", "Report.A1:B6") + oChart.ChartType = "Line" + oChart.Legend = True + oChart.Resize(1000, 1000, 25000, 15000) + + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + chart = doc.CreateChart("Samples", "Report", "Report.A1:B6") + chart.ChartType = "Line" + chart.Legend = True + chart.Resize(1000, 1000, 25000, 15000) + + The chart does not need to be created in the same sheet where the data is located. It can be created in any existing sheet in the current file by specifying the sheet name in the second argument of the CreateChart method. + +

Methods

+ + + List of Methods in the Chart Service + + + + + ExportToFile
+ + + + + Resize
+ + + +
+ +
+ ExportToFile ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Chart service;ExportToFile + +

ExportToFile

+ Saves the chart as an image file in a specified location. Returns True if the image file could be successfully created. + + + chart.ExportToFile(filename: str, imagetype: str = "png", overwrite: bool = False): bool + + + filename: Identifies the path and file name where the image will be saved. It must follow the notation defined in SF_FileSystem.FileNaming. + imagetype: The name of the image type to be created. The following values are accepted: "gif", "jpeg", "png" (default), "svg" and "tiff". + overwrite: Specifies if the destination file can be overwritten (Default = False). + + + + oChart.ExportToFile("C:\Temp\myChart.svg", ImageType := "svg", Overwrite := True) + + + + chart.ExportToFile(r"C:\Temp\myChart.svg", imagetype="svg", overwrite=True) + +
+ +
+ Resize ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Chart service;Resize + +

Resize

+ Changes the position of the chart in the current sheet and modifies its width and height. Returns True if resizing was successful. + + + chart.Resize([xpos: int], [ypos: int], [width: int], [height: int]): bool + + + xpos, ypos: Specify the new X and Y positions of the chart. If any of these values are omitted or if negative values are provided, the corresponding positions are left unchanged. + width: Specify the new width of the chart. If this argument is omitted or if a negative value is provided, the chart width is left unchanged. + height: Specify the new height of the chart. If this argument is omitted or if a negative value is provided, the chart height is left unchanged. + All arguments are provided as integer values that correspond to 1/100 of a millimeter. + + + + ' Changes only X and Y position + oChart.Rezise(1000, 3000) + ' Changes only the chart width and height + oChart.Resize(, , 25000, 12500) + ' Keyword arguments are supported + oChart.Resize(Width := 25000, Height := 12500) + + + + chart.Rezise(1000, 3000) + chart.Resize(-1, -1, 20000, 20000) + chart.Resize(width=25000, height=12500) + +
+ + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..468f83b58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,404 @@ + + + + + + + SFDatabases.Database service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_database.xhp + + + +
+ + Database service + +
+ +
+

SFDatabases.Database service

+ The Database service provides access to databases either embedded or described in Base documents. This service provides methods to: + + + Get access to data in database tables. + + + Run SELECT queries and perform aggregate functions. + + + Run SQL action statements such as INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, etc. + + +
+ Each instance of the Database service represents a single database and gives access to its tables, queries and data. + This service does not provide access to forms or reports in the Base document that contains the database. To access forms in a Base document, refer to the method FormDocuments of the Base service. + All exchanges between this service and the database are done using SQL only. + SQL statements may be run in direct or indirect mode. In direct mode the statement is transferred to the database engine without any syntax checking or review. + The provided interfaces include simple tables and queries lists, as well as access to database data. + To make SQL statements more readable, you may use square brackets "[ ]" to enclose names of tables, queries and fields instead of using other enclosing characters that may be exclusive to certain Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). But beware that enclosing characters are mandatory in this context. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Database service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + To create a instance of the Database service you can use the CreateScriptService method: + + CreateScriptService("SFDatabases.Database", [filename: str], [registrationname], [readonly], [user, [password]]): svc + + In the syntax described above you can use either "SFDatabases.Database" or simply "Database" as the first argument of the CreateScriptService method. + + filename: The name of the Base file. Must be expressed using SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + registrationname: The name of a registered database. If filename is provided, this argument should not be used. + Conversely, if a registrationname is specified, the filename parameter should not be defined. + readonly: Determines if the database will be opened as readonly (Default = True). + user, password: Additional connection parameters to the database server. + + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myDatabase as Object + Set myDatabase = CreateScriptService("Database", "/home/user/Documents/myDB.odb") + ' Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + myDatabase = CreateScriptService("Database", "/home/user/Documents/myDB.odb") + # Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + + +

Accessing Databases with the UI Service

+ It is also possible to access the database associated with a Base document using the ScriptForge.UI service, as shown in the examples below: + + + Dim myDoc As Object, myDatabase As Object, ui As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set myDoc = ui.OpenBaseDocument("/home/user/Documents/myDB.odb") + ' User and password are supplied below, if needed + Set myDatabase = myDoc.GetDatabase() + ' Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + myDoc.CloseDocument() + + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + doc = ui.OpenBaseDocument("/home/user/Documents/myDB.odb") + # User and password are supplied below, if needed + myDatabase = doc.GetDatabase() + # Run queries, SQL statements, ... + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() + doc.CloseDocument() + + The GetDatabase method used in the example above is part of ScriptForge's Base service. + + + Database Service;Queries + Database Service;Tables + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Queries + + + Yes + + + Array of strings + + + The list of stored queries. + + + + + Tables + + + Yes + + + Array of strings + + + The list of stored tables. + + + + + XConnection + + + Yes + + + XConnection + + + The UNO object representing the current database connection. + + + + + XMetaData + + + Yes + + + XDatabaseMetaData + + + The UNO object representing the metadata describing the database system attributes. + + +
+ + + + + List of Methods in the Database Service + + + + + + CloseDatabase
+ DAvg
+ DCount + + + + + DMin
+ DMax
+ DSum + + + + + DLookup
+ GetRows
+ RunSql + + + +
+ +
+ CloseDatabase ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Database Service;CloseDatabase + +

CloseDatabase

+ Closes the current database connection. + + + db.CloseDatabase() + + + + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() ' Basic + + + myDatabase.CloseDatabase() # Python + +
+ +
+ DFunctions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Database Service;DAvg + + + Database Service;DCount + + + Database Service;DMax + + + Database Service;DMin + + + Database Service;DSum + +

DAvg, DCount, DMin, DMax, DSum

+ Computes the given aggregate function on a field or expression belonging to a table. + Optionally, a SQL WHERE clause can be specified as a filter that will be applied prior to the aggregate function. + + + db.DAvg(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria: str]): any + + + db.DCount(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria: str]): any + + + db.DMin(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria: str]): any + + + db.DMax(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria: str]): any + + + db.DSum(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria: str]): any + + + expression: A SQL expression in which the field names are surrounded with square brackets. + tablename: A table name (without square brackets). + criteria: A WHERE clause without the "WHERE" keyword, in which field names are surrounded with square brackets. + + The example below assumes the file Employees.odb has a table named EmployeeData. + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myDB as Variant + Set myDB = CreateScriptService("Database", "/home/user/Databases/Employees.odb") + ' Counts the number of employees in the table + MsgBox myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData") + ' Returns the sum of all salaries in the table + MsgBox myDB.DSum("[Salary]", "EmployeeData") + ' Below are some examples of how tables can be filtered + MsgBox myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[Position] = 'Manager'") + MsgBox myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[Position] = 'Sales' AND [City] = 'Chicago'") + MsgBox myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[FirstName] LIKE 'Paul%'") + + + + myDB = CreateScriptService("Database", "/home/user/Databases/Employees.odb") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DSum("[Salary]", "EmployeeData")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[Position] = 'Manager'")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[Position] = 'Sales' AND [City] = 'Chicago'")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DCount("[ID]", "EmployeeData", "[FirstName] LIKE 'Paul%'")) + +
+ +
+ DLookup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Database Service;DLookup + +

DLookup

+ Computes a SQL expression on a single record returned by a WHERE clause defined by the Criteria parameter. + If the query returns multiple records, only the first one is considered. Use the OrderClause parameter to determine how query results are sorted. + + + db.DLookup(expression: str, tablename: str, [criteria:str], [orderclause: str]): any + + + expression: A SQL expression in which the field names are surrounded with square brackets. + tablename: A table name (without square brackets). + criteria: A WHERE clause without the "WHERE" keyword, in which field names are surrounded with square brackets. + orderclause: An ORDER BY clause without the "ORDER BY" keywords. Field names should be surrounded with square brackets. + + + + MsgBox myDB.DLookup("[FirstName]", "EmployeeData", Criteria := "[LastName] LIKE 'Smith'", OrderClause := "[FirstName] DESC") + MsgBox myDB.DLookup("[Salary]", "EmployeeData", Criteria := "[ID] = '3'") + MsgBox myDB.DLookup("[Quantity] * [Value]", "Sales", Criteria := "[SaleID] = '5014'") + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DLookup("[FirstName]", "EmployeeData", criteria = "[LastName] LIKE 'Smith'", orderclause = "[FirstName] DESC")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DLookup("[Salary]", "EmployeeData", criteria = "[ID] = '3'")) + bas.MsgBox(myDB.DLookup("[Quantity] * [Value]", "Sales", criteria = "[SaleID] = '5014'")) + +
+ +
+ GetRows ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Database Service;GetRows + +

GetRows

+ Stores the contents of a table or the results of a SELECT query or of an SQL statement in a two-dimensional array. The first index in the array corresponds to the rows and the second index refers to the columns. + An upper limit can be specified to the number of returned rows. Optionally column names may be inserted in the first row of the array. + The returned array will be empty if no rows are returned and the column headers are not required. + + + db.GetRows(sqlcommand: str, directsql: bool = False, header: bool = False, maxrows: int = 0): any + + + sqlcommand: A table or query name (without square brackets) or a SELECT SQL statement. + directsql: When True, the SQL command is sent to the database engine without pre-analysis. Default is False. This argument is ignored for tables. For queries, the applied option is the one set when the query was defined. + header: When True, the first row of the returned array contains the column headers. + maxrows: The maximum number of rows to return. The default is zero, meaning there is no limit to the number of returned rows. + + Below are a few examples of how the GetRows method can be used: + + + Dim queryResults as Variant + ' Returns all rows in the table with column headers + queryResults = myDB.GetRows("EmployeeData", Header := True) + ' Returns the first 50 employee records ordered by the 'FirstName' field + queryResults = myDB.GetRows("SELECT * FROM EmployeeData ORDER BY [FirstName]", MaxRows := 50) + + + + queryResults = myDB.GetRows("EmployeeData", header = True) + queryResults = myDB.GetRows("SELECT * FROM EmployeeData ORDER BY [FirstName]", maxrows = 50) + +
+ +
+ RunSql -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Database Service;RunSql + +

RunSql

+ Executes an action query of an SQL statement such as creating a table, as well as inserting, updating and deleting records. + The method returns True when successful. + The RunSql method is rejected with an error message in case the database was previously opened in read-only mode. + + + db.RunSql(sqlcommand: str, directsql: bool = False): bool + + + sqlcommand: A query name (without square brackets) or a SQL statement. + directsql: When True, the SQL command is sent to the database engine without pre-analysis. (Default = False). For queries, the applied option is the one set when the query was defined. + + + + myDatabase.RunSql("INSERT INTO [EmployeeData] VALUES(25, 'Smith', 'John')", DirectSQL := True) + + + + myDatabase.RunSql("INSERT INTO [EmployeeData] VALUES(25, 'Smith', 'John')", directsql = True) + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f9f755c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,681 @@ + + + + + + SFDialogs.Dialog service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialog.xhp + + + +
+ + Dialog service + +
+
+

SFDialogs.Dialog service

+ The Dialog service contributes to the management of dialogs created with the Basic Dialog Editor. Each instance of the current class represents a single dialog box displayed to the user. +
+ A dialog box can be displayed in modal or in non-modal modes. + In modal mode, the box is displayed and the execution of the macro process is suspended until one of the OK or Cancel buttons is pressed. In the meantime, user actions executed on the box can trigger specific actions. + In non-modal mode, the dialog box is "floating" on the user desktop and the execution of the macro process continues normally. A non-modal dialog closes when it is terminated with the Terminate() method or when the %PRODUCTNAME session ends. The window close button is inactive in non-modal dialogs. + A dialog box disappears from memory after its explicit termination. + The SFDialogs.Dialog service is closely related to the SFDialogs.DialogControl service. + +

Service invocation and usage

+ Before using the Dialog service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The Dialog service is invoked through the CreateScriptService method. It requires three positional arguments to specify the dialog box to activate: + Container: "GlobalScope" for preinstalled libraries or a window name as defined by ScriptForge.UI service. Empty string "" default value stands for the current document. + Library: The case-sensitive name of a library contained in the container. Default value is "Standard". + DialogName: A case-sensitive string designating the dialog. + Below %PRODUCTNAME Basic and Python examples are displaying the dlgConsole dialog that belongs to ScriptForge shared library: + + Dim oDlg As Object, lButton As Long + Dim Container As String, Library As String, DialogName As String + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog", "GlobalScope", "ScriptForge", "dlgConsole") + '... controls initialization goes here... + lButton = oDlg.Execute() + 'Default mode = Modal + If lButton = oDlg.OKBUTTON Then + '... Process controls and do what is needed here + End If + oDlg.Terminate() + + Or using Python: + + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog', 'GlobalScope', 'ScriptForge', 'dlgConsole') + # ... controls initialization goes here... + rc = dlg.Execute() + # Default mode is Modal + if rc == dlg.OKBUTTON: + # ... Process controls and do what is needed here + dlg.Terminate() + + + Alternatively a Dialog instance can be retrieved via the SFDialogs.DialogEvent service, providing that the dialog was initiated with the Dialog service. DialogEvent returns the SFDialogs.Dialog service instance that triggered the event. + + Sub SomeEvent(ByRef poEvent As Object) + Dim oDlg As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.DialogEvent", poEvent) + End Sub + + with Python: + + def some_event(event: uno): + dlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.DialogEvent", event) + + Note that in previous examples, the prefix "SFDialogs." may be omitted when deemed appropriate. + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + OKBUTTON + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Value = 1. An OK button was pressed. + + + + + CANCELBUTTON + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Value = 0. A Cancel button was pressed. + + + + + Caption + + + No + + + String + + + Specify the title of the dialog. + + + + + Height + + + No + + + Long + + + Specify the height of the dialog box. + + + + + Modal + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + Specifies if the dialog box is currently in execution in modal mode. + + + + + Name + + + Yes + + + String + + + The name of the dialog + + + + + Page + + + No + + + Integer + + + A dialog may have several pages that can be traversed by the user step by step. The Page property of the Dialog object defines which page of the dialog is active. + + + + + Visible + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Specify if the dialog box is visible on the desktop. By default it is not visible until the Execute() method is run and visible afterwards. + + + + + XDialogModel + + + Yes + + + + API;UnoControlDialogModel + + UNO
object + + + The UNO object representing the dialog model. Refer to XControlModel and UnoControlDialogModel in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + XDialogView + + + Yes + + + + API;UnoControlDialog + + UNO
object + + + The UNO object representing the dialog view. Refer to XControl and UnoControlDialog in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + Width + + + No + + + Long + + + Specify the width of the dialog box. + + +
+

Event properties

+ Returns a URI string with the reference to the script triggered by the event. Read its specification in the scripting framework URI specification. + + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Basic IDE Description + + + + + OnFocusGained + + + Yes + + + When receiving focus + + + + + OnFocusLost + + + Yes + + + When losing focus + + + + + OnKeyPressed + + + Yes + + + Key pressed + + + + + OnKeyReleased + + + Yes + + + Key released + + + + + OnMouseDragged + + + Yes + + + Mouse moved while key presses + + + + + OnMouseEntered + + + Yes + + + Mouse inside + + + + + OnMouseExited + + + Yes + + + Mouse outside + + + + + OnMouseMoved + + + Yes + + + Mouse moved + + + + + OnMousePressed + + + Yes + + + Mouse button pressed + + + + + OnMouseReleased + + + Yes + + + Mouse button released + + +
+ + + + Methods + + + + + Activate
+ Center
+ Controls
+ + + EndExecute
+ Execute
+ GetTextsFromL10N
+ + + Resize
+ Terminate

+ + +
+ +
+ Activate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Activate + +

Activate

+ Set the focus on the current Dialog instance. Return True if focusing was successful. + This method is called from a dialog or control event, or when a dialog is displayed in non-modal mode. + + svc.Activate(): bool + + + Dim oDlg As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService(,, "myDialog") + oDlg.Execute() + ' ... + oDlg.Activate() + + Python and %PRODUCTNAME Basic examples both assume that the dialog is stored in current document's Standard library. + + dlg = CreateScriptService(,,'myDialog') + dlg.Execute() + # ... + dlg.Activate() + +
+ +
+ Center -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Center + +

Center

+ Centers the current dialog instance in the middle of a parent window. Without arguments, the method centers the dialog in the middle of the current window. + Returns True when successful. + + svc.Center(opt Parent: obj): bool + + Parent: An optional object that can be either … + + + a ScriptForge dialog object + + + a ScriptForge document (Calc, Base, ...) object + + + + + + Sub TriggerEvent(oEvent As Object) + Dim oDialog1 As Object, oDialog2 As Object, lExec As Long + Set oDialog1 = CreateScriptService("DialogEvent", oEvent) ' The dialog that caused the event + Set oDialog2 = CreateScriptService("Dialog", ...) ' Open a second dialog + oDialog2.Center(oDialog1) + lExec = oDialog2.Execute() + Select Case lExec + ... + End Sub + + + + def triggerEvent(event: uno): + dlg1 = CreateScriptService('DialogEvent.Dialog', event) # The dialog having caused the event + dlg2 = CreateScriptService('Dialog', ...) # Open a second dialog + dlg2.Center(dlg1) + rc = dlg2.Execute() + if rc is False: + # ... + +
+ +
+ Controls -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Controls + +

Controls

+ Return either: + + + the list of the controls contained in the dialog + + + a DialogControl class instance based on its name + + + + svc.Controls(): str[0..*] + svc.Controls(controlname: str): svc + + ControlName : A valid control name as a case-sensitive string. If absent, the list of control names is returned as a zero-based array. + + + Dim myDialog As Object, myList As Variant, myControl As Object + Set myDialog = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog", , "Standard", "Dialog1") + myList = myDialog.Controls() + Set myControl = myDialog.Controls("myTextBox") + + + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog','', 'Standard', 'Dialog1') + ctrls = dlg.Controls() + ctrl = dlg.Controls('myTextBox') + +
+ +
+ EndExecute -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;EndExecute + +

EndExecute

+ Ends the display of a modal dialog and gives back the argument as return value for the current Execute() running action. + EndExecute() is usually contained in the processing of a macro triggered by a dialog or control event. + + svc.EndExecute(returnvalue: int) + + returnvalue: The value passed to the running Execute() method. + + Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic: + + Sub OnEvent(poEvent As com.sun.star.lang.EventObject) + Dim oDlg As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.DialogEvent", poEvent) + oDlg.EndExecute(ReturnValue := 25) + End Sub + + Using Python: + + from com.sun.star.lang import EventObject + def on_event(event: EventObject): + dlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.DialogEvent", event) + dlg.EndExecute(25) + + Above com.sun.star.lang.EventObject mentions are optional. Such annotations help identify %PRODUCTNAME Application Programming Interface (API). +
+ +
+ Execute -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Execute +

Execute

+ Display the dialog box and, when modal, wait for its termination by the user. The returned value is either: + + + 0 : Cancel button pressed + + + 1 : OK button pressed + + + Otherwise the dialog stopped with an EndExecute() statement issued by a dialog or control event + + + For non-modal dialog boxes the method always returns 0 and the execution of the macro continues. + + svc.Execute(modal: bool = True): int + + modal: False when non-modal dialog. Default = True. + + In this Basic example myDialog dialog is stored in current document's Standard library. + + Dim oDlg As Object, lReturn As Long + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog", , , "myDialog") + lReturn = oDlg.Execute(Modal := False) + Select Case lReturn + ' ... + End Select + + This Python code displays DlgConvert modal dialog from Euro shared Basic library. + + dlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog", 'GlobalScope', 'Euro', "DlgConvert") + rc = dlg.Execute() + if rc == dlg.CANCELBUTTON: + # ... + +
+ +
+ GetTextsFromL10N -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;GetTextsFromL10N + +

GetTextsFromL10N

+ Replaces all fixed text strings in a dialog by their translated versions based on a L10N service instance. This method translates the following strings: + + The method returns True if successful. + To create a list of translatable strings in a dialog use the AddTextsFromDialog method from the L10N service. + + + svc.GetTextsFromL10N(l10n: svc): bool + + + l10n: A L10N service instance from which translated strings will be retrieved. + + The following example loads translated strings and applies them to the dialog "MyDialog". + + + oDlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "MyDialog") + myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "/home/user/po_files/") + oDlg.GetTextsFromL10N(myPO) + oDlg.Execute() + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "MyDialog") + myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "/home/user/po_files/") + dlg.GetTextsFromL10N(myPO) + dlg.Execute() + + Read the L10N service help page to learn more about how PO and POT files are handled. +
+ +
+ Resize -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Resize + +

Resize

+ Moves the topleft corner of a dialog to new coordinates and/or modify its dimensions. All distances are expressed in 1/100 mm. Without arguments, the method resets the initial dimensions. Return True if the resize was successful. + + svc.Resize(opt Left: num, opt Top: num, opt Width: num, opt Height: num): bool + + Left: the horizontal distance from the top-left corner + Top: the vertical distance from the top-left corner + Width: the width of the rectangle containing the dialog + Height: the height of the rectangle containing the dialog + Negative or missing arguments are left unchanged + + + + oDialog.Resize(1000, 2000, Height := 6000) ' Width is not changed + + + With Python: + + oDialog.Resize(1000, 2000, Height = 6000) # Width is not changed + +
+ +
+ Terminate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dialog service;Terminate + +

Terminate

+ Terminate the Dialog service for the current instance. Return True if the termination was successful. + + svc.Terminate(): bool + + Below Basic and Python examples open DlgConsole and dlgTrace non-modal dialogs. They are respectively stored in ScriptForge and Access2Base shared libraries. Dialog close buttons are disabled and explicit termination is performed at the end of a running process. + In this example a button in DlgConsole is substituting inhibited window closing: + + + oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog","GlobalScope","ScriptForge","DlgConsole") + oDlg.Execute(modal:=False) + Wait 5000 + oDlg.Terminate() + + With Python: + + + from time import sleep + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog',"GlobalScope",'Access2Base',"dlgTrace") + dlg.Execute(modal=False) + sleep 5 + dlg.Terminate() + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59bb03085 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1273 @@ + + + + + + SFDialogs.DialogControl service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dialogcontrol.xhp + + + +
+ + DialogControl service + +

SFDialogs.DialogControl service

+ The DialogControl service manages the controls belonging to a dialog defined with the Basic Dialog Editor. Each instance of the current service represents a single control within a dialog box. + + API;awt.XControl + API;awt.XControlModel + + The focus is set on getting and setting the values displayed by the controls of the dialog box. Formatting is accessible via the XControlModel and XControlView properties. + Note that the unique DialogControl.Value property content varies according to the control type. + A special attention is given to controls of type tree control. It is easy to populate a tree, either branch by branch, or with a set of branches at once. Populating a tree control can be performed statically or dynamically. +
+ The SFDialogs.DialogControl service is closely related to the SFDialogs.Dialog service. +

Service invocation

+ Before using the DialogControl service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The DialogControl service is invoked from an existing Dialog service instance through its Controls() method. The dialog must be initiated with the SFDialogs.Dialog service. + + Dim myDialog As Object, myControl As Object + Set myDialog = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog", "GlobalScope", myLibrary, DialogName) + Set myControl = myDialog.Controls("myTextBox") + myControl.Value = "Dialog started at " & Now() + myDialog.Execute() + ' ... process the controls actual values + myDialog.Terminate() + + + from time import localtime, strftime + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog', 'GlobalScope', lib_name, dlg_name) + text = dlg.Controls('myTextBox') + text.Value = "Dialog started at " + strftime("%a, %d %b %Y %H:%M:%S", localtime()) + dlg.Execute() + # ... process the controls actual values + dlg.Terminate() + + Alternatively a control instance can be retrieved via the SFDialogs.DialogEvent service, providing the dialog was initiated with the Dialog service. DialogEvent returns the SFDialogs.DialogControl class instance that triggered the event. + + Sub SomeEvent(ByRef poEvent As Object) + Dim oControl As Object + Set oControl = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.DialogEvent", poEvent) + ' ... + End Sub + + + def some_event(event: uno): + ctrl = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.DialogEvent', event) + # ... + + Note that in previous examples, the prefix "SFDialogs." may be omitted. +

Control types

+ The DialogControl service is available for these control types: + + + Button + + + CheckBox + + + ComboBox + + + CurrencyField + + + DateField + + + FileControl + + + FixedLine + + + FixedText + + + FormattedField + + + GroupBox + + + ImageControl + + + ListBox + + + NumericField + + + PatternField + + + ProgressBar + + + RadioButton + + + ScrollBar + + + TableControl + + + TextField + + + TimeField + + + TreeControl + + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Type + + + Applicable to + + + Description + + + + + Cancel + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Button + + + Specifies if a command button has or not the behaviour of a Cancel button. + + + + + Caption + + + No + + + String + + + Button, CheckBox, FixedLine, FixedText, GroupBox, RadioButton + + + Specifies the text associated with the control. + + + + + ControlType + + + Yes + + + String + + + All + + + One of the types listed above. + + + + + CurrentNode + + + No + + + UNO
object + + + TreeControl + + + The currently upmost node selected in the tree control. Refer to XmutableTreeNode in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + Default + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Button + + + Specifies whether a command button is the default (OK) button. + + + + + Enabled + + + No + + + Boolean + + + All + + + Specifies if the control is accessible with the cursor. + + + + + Format + + + No + + + String + + + DateField, TimeField, FormattedField + (read-only) + + + Specifies the format used to display dates and times. It must be one these strings: + For dates: "Standard (short)", "Standard (short YY)", "Standard (short YYYY)", "Standard (long)", "DD/MM/YY", "MM/DD/YY", "YY/MM/DD", "DD/MM/YYYY", "MM/DD/YYYY" , "YYYY/MM/DD", "YY-MM-DD", "YYYY-MM-DD". + For times: "24h short", "24h long", "12h short", "12h long". + + + + + ListCount + + + Yes + + + Long + + + ComboBox, ListBox, TableControl + + + Specifies the number of rows in a ListBox, a ComboBox or a TableControl. + + + + + ListIndex + + + No + + + Long + + + ComboBox, ListBox, TableControl + + + Specifies which item is selected in a ListBox, a ComboBox or a TableControl. + + + + + Locked + + + No + + + Boolean + + + ComboBox, CurrencyField, DateField, FileControl, FormattedField, ListBox, NumericField, PatternField, TextField, TimeField + + + Specifies if the control is read-only. + + + + + MultiSelect + + + No + + + Boolean + + + ListBox + + + Specifies whether a user can make multiple selections in a listbox. + + + + + Name + + + Yes + + + String + + + All + + + The name of the control. + + + + + Page + + + No + + + Integer + + + All + + + A dialog may have several pages that can be traversed by the user step by step. The Page property of the Dialog object defines which page of the dialog is active. + The Page property of a control defines the page of the dialog on which the control is visible. + + + + + Parent + + + Yes + + + Dialog
service + + + All + + + The parent SFDialogs.Dialog class object instance. + + + + + Picture + + + No + + + String + + + Button, ImageControl + + + Specifies the file name containing a bitmap or other type of graphic to be displayed on the specified control. The filename must comply with the FileNaming attribute of the ScriptForge.FileSystem service. + + + + + RootNode + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + TreeControl + + + An object representing the lowest root node (usually there is only one such root node). Refer to XmutableTreeNode in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + RowSource + + + No + + + Array of strings + + + ComboBox, ListBox + + + Specifies the data contained in a combobox or a listbox. + + + + + Text + + + Yes + + + String + + + ComboBox, FileControl, FormattedField, PatternField, TextField + + + Gives access to the text being displayed by the control. + + + + + TipText + + + No + + + String + + + All + + + Specifies the text that appears as a tooltip when you hold the mouse pointer over the control. + + + + + TripleState + + + No + + + Boolean + + + CheckBox + + + Specifies if the checkbox control may appear dimmed (grayed) or not. + + + + + Value + + + No + + + Variant + + + + Refer to Value property + + + + + Visible + + + No + + + Boolean + + + All + + + Specifies if the control is hidden or visible. + + + + + XControlModel + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + All + + + The UNO object representing the control model. Refer to XControlModel and UnoControlDialogModel in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + XControlView + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + All + + + The UNO object representing the control view. Refer to XControl and UnoControlDialog in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + + + + XTreeDataModel + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + TreeControl + + + The UNO object representing the tree control data model. Refer to XMutableTreeDataModel in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. + + +
+ +

The Value property

+ + + + Control type + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Button + + + Boolean + + + For toggle buttons only + + + + + CheckBox + + + Boolean or Integer + + + 0, False: not checked
1, True: checked
2: grayed, don't know + + + + + ComboBox + + + String + + + The selected value. The ListIndex property is an alternate option. + + + + + CurrencyField + + + Numeric + + + + + + + DateField + + + Date + + + + + + + FileControl + + + String + + + A file name formatted in accordance with the FileNaming property of the ScriptForge.FileSystem service + + + + + FormattedField + + + String or Numeric + + + + + + + ListBox + + + String or array of strings + + + The selected row(s) as a scalar or as an array depending on the MultiSelect attribute + + + + + NumericField + + + Numeric + + + + + + + PatternField + + + String + + + + + + + ProgressBar + + + Numeric + + + Must be within the predefined bounds + + + + + RadioButton + + + Boolean + + + Each button has its own name. They are linked together if their TAB positions are contiguous. If a radiobutton is set to True, the other related buttons are automatically set to False + + + + + ScrollBar + + + Numeric + + + Must be within the predefined bounds + + + + + TableControl + + + Array + + + One-dimensional array with the data of the currently selected row. + + + + + TextField + + + String + + + The text appearing in the field + + + + + TimeField + + + Date + + + + +
+

Event properties

+ Returns a URI string with the reference to the script triggered by the event. Read its specification in the scripting framework URI specification. + + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Description as labeled in the Basic IDE + + + + + OnActionPerformed + + + Yes + + + Execute action + + + + + OnAdjustmentValueChanged + + + Yes + + + While adjusting + + + + + OnFocusGained + + + Yes + + + When receiving focus + + + + + OnFocusLost + + + Yes + + + When losing focus + + + + + OnItemStateChanged + + + Yes + + + Item status changed + + + + + OnKeyPressed + + + Yes + + + Key pressed + + + + + OnKeyReleased + + + Yes + + + Key released + + + + + OnMouseDragged + + + Yes + + + Mouse moved while key presses + + + + + OnMouseEntered + + + Yes + + + Mouse inside + + + + + OnMouseExited + + + Yes + + + Mouse outside + + + + + OnMouseMoved + + + Yes + + + Mouse moved + + + + + OnMousePressed + + + Yes + + + Mouse button pressed + + + + + OnMouseReleased + + + Yes + + + Mouse button released + + + + + OnNodeExpanded + + + No + + + (Not in Basic IDE) when the expansion button is pressed on a node in a tree control + + + + + OnNodeSelected + + + No + + + (Not in Basic IDE) when a node in a tree control is selected + + + + + OnTextChanged + + + Yes + + + Text modified + + +
+ +

Methods

+ + + + List of Methods in the DialogControl Service + + + + AddSubNode
+ AddSubTree
+ CreateRoot
+ + + FindNode
+ SetFocus

+ + + SetTableData
+ WriteLine

+ + +
+ +
+ AddSubNode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;AddSubNode + +

AddSubNode

+ Create and return a new node of the tree control as a UNO object subordinate to a parent node. Refer to XMutableTreeNode in Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for detailed information. +
+ This method may be called before displaying the dialog box to build the initial tree. It may also be called from a dialog or control event - using the OnNodeExpanded event - to complete the tree dynamically. +
+ + + svc.AddSubNode(parentnode: uno, displayvalue: str, opt datavalue: any): uno + + + parentnode: A node UNO object, of type com.sun.star.awt.tree.XMutableTreeNode. + displayvalue: The text appearing in the tree control box. +
+ datavalue: Any value associated with the new node. datavalue may be a string, a number or a date. Omit the argument when not applicable. +
+ + %PRODUCTNAME Basic and Python examples pick up current document's myDialog dialog from Standard library. + + + Dim oDlg As Object, myTree As Object, myNode As Object, theRoot As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog",,, "myDialog") + Set myTree = oDlg.Controls("myTreeControl") + Set theRoot = myTree.CreateRoot("Tree top") + Set myNode = myTree.AddSubNode(theRoot, "A branch ...") + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog', None, None, 'myDialog') + tree = dlg.Controls('myTreeControl') + root = tree.CreateRoot('Tree top') + node = tree.AddSubNode(root, 'A branch ...') + +
+ +
+ AddSubTree -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;AddSubTree + +

AddSubTree

+ Return True when a subtree, subordinate to a parent node, could be inserted successfully in a tree control. If the parent node had already child nodes before calling this method, the child nodes are erased. + + + + svc.AddSubTree(parentnode: uno, flattree: any, opt withdatavalue: bool): bool + + + parentnode: A node UNO object, of type com.sun.star.awt.tree.XMutableTreeNode. + flattree: a two dimension array sorted on the columns containing the display values. Such an array can be issued by the GetRows method applied on the SFDatabases.Database service. When an array item containing the text to be displayed is Empty or Null, no new subnode is created and the remainder of the row is skipped. + + Flat tree >>>> Resulting subtree + A1 B1 C1 |__ A1 + A1 B1 C2 |__ B1 + A1 B2 C3 |__ C1 + A2 B3 C4 |__ C2 + A2 B3 C5 |__ B2 + A3 B4 C6 |__ C3 + |__ A2 + |__ B3 + |__ C4 + |__ C5 + |__ A3 + |__ B4 + |__ C6 + + withdatavalue: When False default value is used, every column of flattree contains the text to be displayed in the tree control. When True, the texts to be displayed (displayvalue) are in columns 0, 2, 4, ... while the data values (datavalue) are in columns 1, 3, 5, ... + + + + Dim myTree As Object, theRoot As Object, oDb As Object, vData As Variant + Set myTree = myDialog.Controls("myTreeControl") + Set theRoot = myTree.CreateRoot("By product category") + Set oDb = CreateScriptService("SFDatabases.Database", "/home/.../mydatabase.odb") + vData = oDb.GetRows("SELECT [Category].[Name], [Category].[ID], [Product].[Name], [Product].[ID] " _ + & "FROM [Category], [Product] WHERE [Product].[CategoryID] = [Category].[ID] " _ + & "ORDER BY [Category].[Name], [Product].[Name]") + myTree.AddSubTree(theRoot, vData, WithDataValue := True) + + + + SQL_STMT = "SELECT [Category].[Name], [Category].[ID], [Product].[Name], [Product].[ID] \ + FROM [Category], [Product] WHERE [Product].[CategoryID] = [Category].[ID] \ + ORDER BY [Category].[Name], [Product].[Name]" + tree = dlg.Controls('myTreeControl') + root = tree.CreateRoot('By Product category') + db = CreateScriptService('SFDatabases.Database', '/home/.../mydatabase.odb') + sub_tree = db.GetRows(SQL_STMT) + tree.AddSubTree(root, sub_tree, withdatavalue=True) + +
+ +
+ CreateRoot ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;CreateRoot + +

CreateRoot

+ Returns a new root node of the tree control, as a node UNO object of type com.sun.star.awt.tree.XMutableTreeNode. The new tree root is inserted below pre-existing root nodes. + This method may be called before displaying the dialog box to build the initial tree. It may also be called from a dialog or control event to complete the tree dynamically. + + + svc.CreateRoot(displayvalue: str, opt datavalue: any): uno + + + displayvalue: The text appearing in the tree control box. + + + + + Dim myTree As Object, myNode As Object + Set myTree = myDialog.Controls("myTreeControl") + Set myNode = myTree.CreateRoot("Tree starts here ...") + + + + tree = dlg.Controls('myTreeControl') + node = tree.CreateRoot('Tree starts here ...') + +
+ +
+ FindNode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;FindNode + +

FindNode

+ Traverses the tree and finds recursively, starting from the root, a node meeting some criteria. Either - 1 match is enough - having its display value matching displayvalue pattern or having its data value equal to datavalue. The comparisons may be or not case-sensitive. The first matching occurrence is returned as a node UNO object of type com.sun.star.awt.tree.XMutableTreeNode. + When not found, the method returns Nothing, to be tested with the IsNull() builtin function. + This method may be called before displaying the dialog box to build the initial tree. It may also be called from a dialog or control event. + + + svc.FindNode(displayvalue: str = '', opt datavalue: any, casesensitive = False): uno + + + One argument out of displayvalue or datavalue must be specified. If both present, one match is sufficient to select the node. + displayvalue: The pattern to be matched. Refer to SF_String.IsLike() method for the list of possible wildcards. When equal to the zero-length string (default), this display value is not searched for. + + casesensitive: Default value is False + + + + Dim myTree As Object, myNode As Object + Set myTree = myDialog.Controls("myTreeControl") + Set myNode = myTree.FindNode("*Sophie*", CaseSensitive := True) + + + + tree = dlg.Controls('myTreeControl') + node = FindNode('*Sophie*', casesensitive=True) + if node is None: + # ... + +
+ +
+ SetFocus ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;SetFocus + +

SetFocus

+ Set the focus on the control. Return True if focusing was successful. + This method is often called from a dialog or control event. + + + svc.SetFocus(): bool + + + + + Dim oControl As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog",,, "myDialog") + Set oControl = oDlg.Controls("thisControl") + oControl.SetFocus() + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService('Dialog', None, None, 'myDialog') + ctrl = dlg.Controls('thisControl') + ctrl.SetFocus() + +
+ +
+ SetTableData ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + DialogControl service;SetTableData + +

SetTableData

+ Fills a TableControl with the given data. All preexisting data is cleared before inserting the new data passed as argument. + When the TableControl is added to the dialog, it is possible to use the Basic IDE to define whether column and row headers will be shown in the table. If the TableControl has column and/or row headers, the first column and/or row in the provided data array are used as labels for the table headers. + This method returns True when successful. + + + svc.SetTableData(dataarray: any[0..*, 0..*], widths: int[0..*], alignments: str): bool + + + dataarray: Data to be entered into the table represented as an Array of Arrays in Basic or a tuple of tuples in Python. The data must include column and row headers if they are to be displayed by the TableControl. + widths: Array containing the relative widths of each column. In other words, widths = Array(1, 2) means that the second column is twice as wide as the first one. If the number of values in the array is smaller than the number of columns in the table, then the last value in the array is used to define the width of the remaining columns. + alignments: Defines the alignment in each column as a string in which each character can be "L" (Left), "C" (Center), "R" (Right) or " " (whitespace, default, meaning left for strings and right for numeric values). If the length of the string is shorter than the number of columns in the table, then the last character in the string is used to define the alignment of the remaining columns. + + + The following example assumes that the dialog myDialog has a TableControl named Grid1 with "Show row header" and "Show column header" properties set to "Yes". + + Dim myDialog As Object, oTable As Object, tableData As Variant + myDialog = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "myDialog") + oTable = myDialog.Controls("Grid1") + tableData = Array("Column A", "Column B", "Column C") + tableData = SF_Array.AppendRow(tableData, Array("Row 1", 1, 2)) + tableData = SF_Array.AppendRow(tableData, Array("Row 2", 3, 4)) + tableData = SF_Array.AppendRow(tableData, Array("Row 3", 5, 6)) + vAlignments = "LCC" + vWidths = Array(2, 1, 1) + oTable.SetTableData(tableData, vWidths, vAlignments) + myDialog.Execute() + + The Value property returns the selected row in the table. If no row is selected, an empty Array object is returned. The following code snippet shows how to test if any row is selected in the table. + + rowValues = oTable.Value + If UBound(rowValues) < 0 Then + MsgBox "No row selected." + Else + MsgBox "Row " & oTable.ListIndex & " is selected." + End If + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "myDialog") + table_control = dlg.Controls("Grid1") + table_data = (("Column A", "Column B", "Column C"), + ("Row 1", 1, 2), + ("Row 2", 3, 4), + ("Row 3", 5, 6)) + alignments = "LCC" + widths = (100, 50, 50) + table_control.SetTableData(table_data, widths, alignments) + dlg.Execute() + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + row_values = table_control.Value + if len(row_values) == 0: + bas.MsgBox("No row selected.") + else: + bas.MsgBox(f"Row {table_control.ListIndex} is selected.") + +
+ +
+ WriteLine -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + DialogControl service;WriteLine + +

WriteLine

+ Add a new line at the end of a multiline text field. A newline character will be inserted when appropriate. The method returns True when successful. + An error is raised if the actual control is not of the type TextField or is not multiline. + + + svc.WriteLine(opt line: str): bool + + + Line: The string to insert. Default is an empty line. + + + + Dim oDlg As Object, oControl As Object + Set oDlg = CreateScriptService("SFDialogs.Dialog",,, "myDialog") + Set oControl = oDlg.Controls("thisControl") + oControl.WriteLine("a new line") + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService('SFDialogs.Dialog', None, None, 'myDialog') + ctrl = dlg.Controls('thisControl') + ctr.WriteLine("a new line") + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d94a6c9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,523 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.Dictionary service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_dictionary.xhp + + + +
+ + Dictionary service + + +

ScriptForge.Dictionary service

+ + A dictionary is a collection of key-item pairs + + The key is a case-insensitive string + Items may be of any type + +
+ + Keys and items can be retrieved, counted, updated, and much more. + The Dictionary service is similar to the built-in %PRODUCTNAME Basic Collection object, however with more features. For example, Collection objects do not support the retrieval of keys. Moreover, Dictionaries provide additional capabilities as replacing keys, testing if a specific key already exists and converting the Dictionary into an Array object or JSON string. + +

Service invocation

+ + The following example creates myDict as an empty dictionary. + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myDict As Variant + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + + + It is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set myDict = myDict.Dispose() + + + The example below creates an empty instance of the Dictionary service and uses the Python native update method to populate it with the contents of a Python dict object. + + dico = dict('A' = 1, 'B' = 2, 'C' = 3) + # Initialize myDict as an empty dict object + myDict = CreateScriptService('Dictionary') + # Load the values of dico into myDict + myDict.update(dico) + myDict['D'] = 4 + print(myDict) # {'A': 1, 'B': 2, 'C': 3, 'D': 4} + propval = myDict.ConvertToPropertyValues() + + It is possible to create an instance of the Dictionary service using a Python dict object as argument as shown in the following example. + + dico = dict('A' = 1, 'B' = 2, 'C' = 3) + # Initialize myDict with the content of dico + myDict = CreateScriptService('Dictionary', dico) + myDict['D'] = 4 + print(myDict) # {'A': 1, 'B': 2, 'C': 3, 'D': 4} + propval = myDict.ConvertToPropertyValues() + + Because Python has built-in dictionary support, most of the methods in the Dictionary service are available for Basic scripts only. Exceptions are ConvertToPropertyValues and ImportFromPropertyValues that are supported in both Basic and Python. + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Read-only + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Count + + + Yes + + + Long + + + The number of entries in the dictionary + + + + + Items + + + Yes + + + Array of Variants + + + The list of items as a one dimensional array + + + + + Keys + + + Yes + + + Array of Strings + + + The list of keys as a one dimensional array + + +
+ + The Keys and Items properties return their respective contents, using an identical ordering. The order is unrelated to the creation sequence. + + + The following example uses the Keys property to iterate over all keys in the dictionary myDict. + + Dim a As Variant, b As String + a = myDict.Keys + For Each b In a + MsgBox(myDict.Item(b)) + Next b + + + + + + Methods + + + + + Add
+ ConvertToArray
+ ConvertToJson
+ ConvertToPropertyValues + + + Exists
+ ImportFromJson
+ ImportFromPropertyValues
+ Item + + + Remove
+ RemoveAll
+ ReplaceItem
+ ReplaceKey + + +
+ +
+ Add ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;Add + +

Add

+ Adds a new key-item pair into the dictionary. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.Add(key: str, item: any): bool + + + key: String value used to identify the Item. The key is not case-sensitive. + item: Any value, including an array, a Basic object, a UNO object, a dictionary, etc. + + + Dim NewValue As Variant + myDict.Add("NewKey", NewValue) + + Every key must be unique in the same dictionary. If the key already exists in the dictionary, a DUPLICATEKEYERROR will be raised. Keys that are made of space characters will raise a INVALIDKEYERROR error. +
+ +
+ ConvertToArray ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ConvertToArray + +

ConvertToArray

+ Stores the contents of the dictionary in a two-columns zero-based array. The keys are stored in the first column and the items are stored in the second column. + If the dictionary is empty, this method will return an empty Array. + + + dict.ConvertToArray(): any[0..*, 0..1] + + + + Dim myDict as Variant + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + myDict.Add("a", 1) + myDict.Add("b", 2) + myDict.Add("c", 3) + Dim arr as Variant + arr = myDict.ConvertToArray() + '(("a", 1), ("b", 2), ("c", 3)) + +
+ +
+ ConvertToJson ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Dictionary service;ConvertToJson + +

ConvertToJson

+ Converts the contents of a dictionary to JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) text. +

Limitations

+ This method supports the following data types: String, Boolean, numbers, Null and Empty. Arrays containing items of those types are also allowed, whatever their dimensions. Dates are converted into strings, however they cannot be used inside Arrays. Other data types are converted to their string representation using the SF_String.Represent service. + + + dict.ConvertToJson(indent: str = ""): str + + + indent: When indent is a positive number or a text, JSON array elements and object members are pretty-printed with that indentation level. A negative indent value will add new lines with no indentation. The default value is an empty string "" which selects the most compact representation. Using a positive integer for indent indents that many spaces per level. When indent is a string, such as Chr(9) or Tab(1), the Tab character is used to indent each level. + + + myDict.Add("p0", 12.5) + myDict.Add("p1", "a string àé""ê") + myDict.Add("p2", DateSerial(2020,9,28)) + myDict.Add("p3", True) + myDict.Add("p4", Array(1,2,3)) + MsgBox myDict.ConvertToJson() + '{"p0": 12.5, "p1": "a string \u00e0\u00e9\"\u00ea", "p2": "2020-09-28", "p3": true, "p4": [1, 2, 3]} + +
+ +
+ ConvertToPropertyValues --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ConvertToPropertyValues + API;PropertyValue + API;DateTime + +

ConvertToPropertyValues

+ Stores the contents of the dictionary into an array of PropertyValues. + Each entry in the array is a com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue. The key is stored in Name, the item is stored in Value. + If one of the items has a type Date, it is converted to a com.sun.star.util.DateTime structure. If one of the items is an empty array, it is converted to Null. The resulting array is empty when the dictionary is empty. + + + dict.ConvertToPropertyValues(): obj[0..*] + + + + + Dim myDict as Variant + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + 'Adds some properties to the dictionary + myDict.Add("Color", "Blue") + myDict.Add("Width", 20) + 'Converts to an Array of PropertyValue objects + Dim prop as Variant + prop = myDict.ConvertToPropertyValues() + + + Note in the example below that a Python dictionary needs to be passed as the second argument of the CreateScriptService method. + + myDict = dict() + myDict["Color"] = "Blue" + myDict["Width"] = 30 + sfDic = CreateScriptService("Dictionary", myDict) + prop = sfDic.ConvertToPropertyValues() + + Many services and methods in the UNO library take in parameters represented using the PropertyValue struct, which is part of the %PRODUCTNAME API. +
+ +
+ Exists ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;Exists + +

Exists

+ Determines if a key exists in the dictionary. + + + dict.Exists(key: str): bool + + + key: The key to be looked up in the dictionary. + + + Dim myDict as Variant + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + 'Adds some properties to the dictionary + myDict.Add("Color", "Blue") + myDict.Add("Width", 20) + '(...) + If Not myDict.Exists("Size") Then + MsgBox "You have to provide a Size value" + End If + +
+ +
+ ImportFromJson ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ImportFromJson + +

ImportFromJson

+ Adds the content of a JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) string into the current dictionary. Returns True if successful. +

Limitations

+ The JSON string may contain numbers, text, booleans, null values and arrays containing those types. It must not contain JSON objects namely sub-dictionaries. + An attempt is made to convert text to date if the item matches one of these patterns: YYYY-MM-DD, HH:MM:SS or YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS. + + + dict.ImportFromJson(inputstr: str, overwrite: bool = False): bool + + + inputstr: The string to import. + overwrite: When True, entries with same name may exist in the dictionary and their values are overwritten. When False (default), repeated keys will raise an error. Beware that dictionary keys are not case-sensitive while names are case-sensitive in JSON strings. + + + Dim s As String + s = "{'firstName': 'John','lastName': 'Smith','isAlive': true,'age': 66, 'birth': '1954-09-28 20:15:00'" _ + & ",'address': {'streetAddress': '21 2nd Street','city': 'New York','state': 'NY','postalCode': '10021-3100'}" _ + & ",'phoneNumbers': [{'type': 'home','number': '212 555-1234'},{'type': 'office','number': '646 555-4567'}]" _ + & ",'children': ['Q','M','G','T'],'spouse': null}" + s = Replace(s, "'", """") + myDict.ImportFromJson(s, OverWrite := True) + 'The (sub)-dictionaries "address" and "phoneNumbers" (0) and (1) are imported as Empty values. + +
+ +
+ ImportFromPropertyValues ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ImportFromPropertyValues + +

ImportFromPropertyValues

+ Inserts the contents of an array of PropertyValue objects into the current dictionary. PropertyValue Names are used as Keys in the dictionary, whereas Values contain the corresponding values. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.ImportFromPropertyValues(propertyvalues: obj[0..*], overwrite: bool = False): bool + + + propertyvalues: A zero-based 1-dimensional array containing com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue objects. This parameter may also be a single PropertyValue object not contained in an Array. + overwrite: When True, entries with same name may exist in the dictionary and their values are overwritten. When False (default), repeated keys will raise an error. Note that dictionary keys are not case-sensitive in Basic, whereas names are case-sensitive in sets of property values and in Python dictionaries. + + The examples below first create an array with two PropertyValue objects and then convert it to a dictionary. + + + Dim vProp As New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue + Dim arrProp : arrProp = Array() + vProp.Name = "Color" + vProp.Value = "Blue" + arrProp = SF_Array.Append(arrProp, vProp) + vProp.Name = "Date" + vProp.Value = CDateToUnoDateTime(Now) + arrProp = SF_Array.Append(arrProp, vProp) + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + myDict.ImportFromPropertyValues(arrProp, Overwrite := True) + Dim keys : keys = myDict.Keys + For Each k In keys + MsgBox k & " - " & myDict.Item(k) + Next k + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + from datetime import datetime + import uno + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + arrProp = list() + vProp = uno.createUnoStruct("com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue") + vProp.Name = "Color" + vProp.Value = "Blue" + arrProp.append(vProp) + vProp = uno.createUnoStruct("com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue") + vProp.Name = "Date" + vProp.Value = bas.CDateToUnoDateTime(datetime.now()) + arrProp.append(vProp) + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + myDict.ImportFromPropertyValues(arrProp, overwrite=True) + for k in myDict.keys(): + bas.MsgBox("{} - {}".format(k, myDict[k])) + +
+ +
+ Item --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;Item + +

Item

+ Retrieves an existing dictionary entry based on its key. Returns the value of the item if successful, otherwise returns Empty. + + + dict.Item(key: str): any + + + key: Not case-sensitive. If it does not exist, Empty value is returned. + + The following example iterates over all keys in the dictionary and uses the Item method to access their values. + + Dim myDict as Variant, k as Variant, allKeys as Variant + myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + myDict.Add("key1", 100) + myDict.Add("key2", 200) + myDict.Add("key3", 300) + allKeys = myDict.Keys + For Each k in allKeys + MsgBox(myDict.Item(k)) + Next k + +
+ +
+ Remove ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;Remove + +

Remove

+ Removes an existing dictionary entry based on its key. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.Remove(key: str): bool + + + key: Not case-sensitive. Must exist in the dictionary, otherwise an UNKNOWNKEYERROR error is raised. + + + myDict.Add("key1", 100) + myDict.Add("key2", 200) + myDict.Add("key3", 300) + MsgBox(myDict.Count) ' 3 + myDict.Remove("key2") + MsgBox(myDict.Count) ' 2 + +
+ +
+ RemoveAll ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;RemoveAll + +

RemoveAll

+ Removes all the entries from the dictionary. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.RemoveAll(): bool + + + + myDict.Add("key1", 100) + myDict.Add("key2", 200) + myDict.Add("key3", 300) + MsgBox(myDict.Count) ' 3 + myDict.RemoveAll() + MsgBox(myDict.Count) ' 0 + +
+ +
+ ReplaceItem -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ReplaceItem + +

ReplaceItem

+ Replaces an existing item value based on its key. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.ReplaceItem(key: str, value: any): bool + + + key: String value representing the key whose value will be replaced. Not case-sensitive. If the key does not exist in the dictionary, an UNKNOWNKEYERROR error is raised. + value: The new value of the item referred to with the key parameter. + + + myDict.Add("a", 1) + MsgBox(myDict.Item("a")) ' 1 + myDict.ReplaceItem("a", 100) + MsgBox(myDict.Item("a")) ' 100 + +
+ +
+ ReplaceKey --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Dictionary service;ReplaceKey + +

ReplaceKey

+ Replaces an existing key in the dictionary by a new key. The item value is left unchanged. Returns True if successful. + + + dict.ReplaceKey(key: str, value: str): bool + + + key: String value representing the key to be replaced. Not case-sensitive. If the key does not exist in the dictionary, a UNKNOWNKEYERROR error is raised. + value: String value for the new key. Not case-sensitive. If the new key already exists in the dictionary, an DUPLICATEKEYERROR error is raised. + + + myDict.Add("oldKey", 100) + MsgBox(myDict.Item("oldKey")) ' 100 + myDict.ReplaceKey("oldKey", "newKey") + MsgBox(myDict.Item("newKey")) ' 100 + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0c0ee7c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ + + + + + + + SFDocuments.Document service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_document.xhp + + + + +
+ + Document service + +
+ +
+

SFDocuments.Document service

+ The SFDocuments library provides methods and properties to facilitate the management and manipulation of %PRODUCTNAME documents. + Methods that are applicable for all types of documents (Text Documents, Sheets, Presentations, etc) are provided by the SFDocuments.Document service. Some examples are: + + + Opening, closing and saving documents + + + Accessing standard or custom properties of documents + + +
+ + The properties, methods or arguments marked with (*) are NOT applicable to Base documents. + Methods and properties that are specific to certain %PRODUCTNAME components are stored in separate services, such as SFDocuments.SF_Calc and SFDocuments.SF_Base. + Although the Basic language does not offer inheritance between object classes, the latter services may be considered as subclasses of the SFDocuments.Document service. Such subclasses can invoke the properties and methods described below. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Document service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + Below are three variants of how the Document service can be invoked. + + Using the getDocument method from the ScriptForge.UI service: + + Dim ui As Object, oDoc As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.GetDocument("Untitled 1") + + Alternatively you can use the methods CreateDocument and OpenDocument from the UI service. + + Set oDocA = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + Set oDocB = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.odt") + + Directly if the document is already open. + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", "Untitled 1") 'Default = ActiveWindow + + From a macro triggered by a document event. + + Sub RunEvent(ByRef poEvent As Object) + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.DocumentEvent", poEvent) + ' (...) + End Sub + + The Document service is closely related to the UI and FileSystem services. + Except when the document was closed by program with the CloseDocument method (it is then superfluous), it is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set oDoc = oDoc.Dispose() + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + doc = ui.GetDocument("Untitled 1") + # (...) + doc.Dispose() + + + docA = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + docB = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.odt") + + + doc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", "Untitled 1") + + + def RunEvent(event) + doc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.DocumentEvent", Event) + # (...) + + The use of the prefix "SFDocuments." while calling the service is optional. + + + API;Duration + API;XComponent + API;ODatabaseDocument + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + CustomProperties (*) + + + No + + + Dictionary service + + + Returns a ScriptForge.Dictionary object instance. After update, can be passed again to the property for updating the document.
Individual items of the dictionary may be either strings, numbers, (Basic) dates or com.sun.star.util.Duration items. + + + + + Description (*) + + + No + + + String + + + Gives access to the Description property of the document (also known as "Comments") + + + + + DocumentProperties (*) + + + Yes + + + Dictionary service + + + Returns a ScriptForge.Dictionary object containing all the entries. Document statistics are included. Note that they are specific to the type of document. As an example, a Calc document includes a "CellCount" entry. Other documents do not. + + + + + DocumentType + + + Yes + + + String + + + String value with the document type ("Base", "Calc", "Writer", etc) + + + + + ExportFilters + + + Yes + + + String array + + + Returns a list with the export filter names applicable to the current document as a zero-based array of strings. Filters used for both import/export are also returned. + + + + + ImportFilters + + + Yes + + + String array + + + Returns a list with the import filter names applicable to the current document as a zero-based array of strings. Filters used for both import/export are also returned. + + + + + IsBase
IsCalc
IsDraw
IsImpress
IsMath
IsWriter + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + Exactly one of these properties is True for a given document. + + + + + Keywords (*) + + + No + + + String + + + Gives access to the Keywords property of the document. Represented as a comma-separated list of keywords + + + + + Readonly (*) + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + True if the document is actually in read-only mode + + + + + Subject (*) + + + No + + + String + + + Gives access to the Subject property of the document. + + + + + Title (*) + + + No + + + String + + + Gives access to the Title property of the document. + + + + + XComponent + + + Yes + + + UNO Object + + + The UNO object com.sun.star.lang.XComponent or com.sun.star.comp.dba.ODatabaseDocument representing the document + + +
+ + + + The example below prints all the properties of a document. Note that the oDoc object returned by the UI.OpenDocument method is a SFDocuments.Document object. + + Dim ui as Variant : Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Dim oDoc as Object + Set oDoc = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\MyFile.ods") + Dim propDict as Object + Set propDict = oDoc.DocumentProperties + Dim keys as Variant : propKeys = propDict.Keys + Dim k as String, strProp as String + For Each k In propKeys + strProp = strProp & k & ": " & propDict.Item(k) & CHR$(10) + Next k + MsgBox strProp + oDoc.CloseDocument() + + + To access document properties in a Python script the user needs to directly access them using their names, as shown below: + + doc = ui.GetDocument(r"C:\Documents\MyFile.ods") + msg = doc.Title + '\n' + doc.Description + '\n' + doc.Keywords + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(msg) + doc.CloseDocument() + + + + + List of Methods in the Document Service + + + + + Activate
+ CloseDocument
+ CreateMenu
+ ExportAsPDF
+ + + + + PrintOut
+ RemoveMenu
+ RunCommand
+ Save
+ + + + + SaveAs
+ SaveCopyAs
+ SetPrinter

+ + + +
+ +
+ Activate -------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;Activate + +

Activate

+ Returns True if the document could be activated. Otherwise, there is no change in the actual user interface. It is equivalent to the Activate method of the UI service. + This method is useful when one needs to give focus for a document that is minimized or hidden. + + + svc.Activate(): bool + + + The example below considers that the file "My_File.ods" is already open but not active. + + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document", "MyFile.ods") + oDoc.Activate() + + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Document", "MyFile.ods") + doc.Activate() + + Keep in mind that you can invoke the Document service by passing to CreateScriptService either "Document" or "SFDocuments.Document" +
+ +
+ CloseDocument ---------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;CloseDocument + +

CloseDocument

+ Closes the document. If the document is already closed, regardless of how the document was closed, this method has no effect and returns False. + The method will also return False if the user declines to close it. + Returns True if the document was successfully closed. + + + svc.CloseDocument(saveask: bool = True): bool + + + saveask : If True (default), the user is invited to confirm if the changes should be written on disk. This argument is ignored if the document was not modified. + + + + If oDoc.CloseDocument(True) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + if doc.CloseDocument(True): + # ... + +
+ +
+ CreateMenu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;CreateMenu + +

CreateMenu

+ Creates a new menu entry in the menubar of a given document window. + This method returns an instance of the SFWidgets.Menu service. + The menu created is only available during the current %PRODUCTNAME session and is not saved neither in the document nor in the global application settings. Hence closing the document window will make the menu disappear. It will only reappear when the macro that creates the menu is executed again. + + + svc.CreateMenu(menuheader: str, [before: any], submenuchar: str = ">"): svc + + + menuheader: The toplevel name of the new menu. + before: The name (as a string) or position (as an integer starting at 1) of an existing menu before which the new menu will be placed. If no value is defined for this argument, the menu will be created at the last position in the menubar. + submenuchar: The delimiter used to create menu trees when calling methods as AddItem from the Menu service. The default value is ">". + + + + Dim oDoc as Object, oMenu as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document") + Set oMenu = oDoc.CreateMenu("My Menu") + With oMenu + ' Add items to the menu + .AddItem("Item A") + .AddItem("Item B") + ' ... + ' After creating the menu, the service instance can be disposed of + .Dispose() + End With + + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Document") + menu = doc.CreateMenu("My Menu") + menu.AddItem("Item A") + menu.AddItem("Item B") + # ... + menu.Dispose() + + +
+ +
+ ExportAsPDF -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;ExportAsPDF + +

ExportAsPDF

+ Exports the document directly as a PDF file to the specified location. Returns True if the PDF file was successfully created. + The export options can be set either manually using the File - Export As - Export as PDF dialog or by calling the methods GetPDFExportOptions and SetPDFExportOptions from the Session service. + + + svc.ExportAsPDF(filename: str, overwrite: bool = False, opt pages: str, opt password: str, opt watermark: str): bool + + + filename: The full path and file name of the PDF to be created. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + overwrite: Specifies if the destination file can be overwritten (Default = False). An error will occur if overwrite is set to False and the destination file already exists. + pages: String specifying which pages will be exported. This argument uses the same notation as in the dialog File - Export As - Export as PDF. + password: Specifies a password to open the PDF file. + watermark: Text to be used as watermark in the PDF file, which will be drawn in every page of the resulting PDF. + + + The following example exports the current document as a PDF file, defines a password and overwrites the destination file if it already exists. + + oDoc.ExportAsPDF("C:\User\Documents\myFile.pdf", Password := "1234", Overwrite := True) + + The code snippet below gets the current PDF export options and uses them to create the PDF file. + + Dim exportSettings as Object, oSession as Object + oSession = CreateScriptService("Session") + exportSettings = oSession.GetPDFExportOptions() + ' Sets to True the option to export comments as PDF notes + exportSettings.ReplaceItem("ExportNotes", True) + oSession.SetPDFExportOptions(exportSettings) + oDoc.ExportAsPDF("C:\User\Documents\myFile.pdf") + + + + doc.ExportAsPDF(r"C:\User\Documents\myFile.pdf", password = "1234", overwrite = True) + + + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + exportSettings = oSession.GetPDFExportOptions() + exportSettings.ReplaceItem("ExportNotes", True) + session.SetPDFExportOptions(exportSettings) + doc.ExportAsPDF(r"C:\User\Documents\myFile.pdf") + +
+ +
+ PrintOut ---------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;PrintOut + +

PrintOut

+ This method sends the contents of the document to the default printer or to the printer defined by the SetPrinter method. + Returns True if the document was successfully printed. + + + svc.PrintOut(pages: str = "", copies: num = 1): bool + + + pages: The pages to print as a string, like in the user interface. Example: "1-4;10;15-18". Default is all pages. + copies: The number of copies. Default is 1. + + + + If oDoc.PrintOut("1-4;10;15-18", Copies := 2) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + if doc.PrintOut(copies=3, pages='45-88'): + # ... + +
+ +
+ RemoveMenu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;RemoveMenu + +

RemoveMenu

+ Removes a toplevel menu from the menubar of a given document window. + Returns True if the specified menu could be removed. If the specified menu does not exist, the method returns False. + This method can be used to remove any menu entry from the document window, including default menus. However, none of these changes in the menubar are saved to the document or to the application settings. To restore the menubar to the default settings, simply close and reopen the document window. + + + svc.RemoveMenu(menuheader: str): bool + + + menuheader: The toplevel name of the menu to be removed. + + + + Dim oDoc as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document") + oDoc.RemoveMenu("My Menu") + + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Document") + doc.RemoveMenu("My Menu") + + +
+ +
+ RunCommand --------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;RunCommand + +

RunCommand

+ Runs a UNO command on the document window associated with the service instance. A few typical commands are: Save, SaveAs, ExportToPDF, Undo, Copy, Paste, etc. + The document itself does not need to be active to be able to run commands. + Commands can be run with or without arguments. Arguments are not validated before running the command. If the command or its arguments are invalid, then nothing will happen. + For a complete list of UNO commands that can be run in %PRODUCTNAME, refer to the Wiki page Development/DispatchCommands. + + + svc.RunCommand(command: str, [args: any]) + + + command: Case-sensitive string containing the UNO command name. The inclusion of the prefix ".uno:" in the command is optional. The command itself is not checked for correctness. If nothing happens after the command call, then the command is probably wrong. + args: For each argument to be passed to the command, specify a pair containing the argument name and value. + + + The following example runs the SelectData command in a Calc file named "MyFile.ods", which will result in the selection of the data area based on the currently selected cell. Note that this command does not require any arguments. + + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document", "MyFile.ods") + oDoc.RunCommand("SelectData") + + Below is an example that runs the UNO command ReplaceAll and passes values for its arguments SearchString and ReplaceString. Running this command will replace all occurrence of the string "abc" by "ABC" in the current sheet. + + ' Arguments passed to the command: + ' SearchString = "abc" + ' ReplaceString = "ABC" + oDoc.RunCommand(".uno:ReplaceAll", "SearchString", "abc", "ReplaceString", "ABC") + + Note that calling the command ReplaceAll without arguments will open the Find and Replace dialog. + + + doc = CreateScriptService("Document", "MyFile.ods") + doc.RunCommand("SelectData") + + + doc.RunCommand(".uno:ReplaceAll", "SearchString", "abc", "ReplaceString", "ABC") + + In Python it is also possible to call RunCommand using keyword arguments: + + doc.RunCommand(".uno:ReplaceAll", SearchString = "abc", ReplaceString = "ABC") + + Each %PRODUCTNAME component has its own set of commands available. One easy way to learn commands is going to Tools - Customize - Keyboard. When you position your mouse over a function in the Function list, a tooltip will appear with the corresponding UNO command. +
+ +
+ Save ------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Document service;Save + +

Save

+ Stores the document to the file location from which it was loaded. The method is ignored if the document was not modified. + Returns False if the document could not be saved. An error is raised if the file is open as read-only, or if it is a new file that has not been saved yet. + The document itself does not need to be active to run this method. + + + svc.Save(): bool + + + + + If Not oDoc.Save() Then + ' ... + End If + + + + if not doc.Save(): + # ... + +
+ +
+ SaveAs --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;SaveAs + +

SaveAs

+ Stores the document to the given file location. The new location becomes the new file name on which simple Save method calls will be applied. + Returns False if the document could not be saved. An error is raised when overwriting the destination is rejected or when the destination has its read-only attribute set. + The document itself does not need to be active to run this method. + + + svc.SaveAs(filename: str, overwrite: bool = False, password: str = '', filtername: str = '', filteroptions: str = ''): bool + + + filename: A string containing the file name to be used. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + overwrite: If True, the destination file may be overwritten (default = False). + password (*): A non-space string to protect the document. + filtername (*): The name of a filter that should be used for saving the document. If this argument is passed, then the filter must exist. + filteroptions (*): An optional string of options associated with the filter. + + + + oDoc.SaveAs("C:\Documents\NewCopy.odt", overwrite := True) + + + + doc.SaveAs(r"C:\Documents\NewCopy.odt", overwrite = True) + +
+ +
+ SaveCopyAs ------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;SaveCopyAs + +

SaveCopyAs

+ Stores a copy of or export the document to the given file location. The actual location is unchanged. + Returns False if the document could not be saved. An error is raised when overwriting the destination is rejected or when the destination has its read-only attribute set. + The document itself does not need to be active to run this method. + + + svc.SaveCopyAs(filename: str, overwrite: bool = False, password: str = '', filtername: str = '', filteroptions: str = ''): bool + + + filename: A string containing the file name to be used. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + overwrite: If True, the destination file may be overwritten (default = False). + password (*): A non-space string to protect the document. + filtername (*): The name of a filter that should be used for saving the document. If this argument is passed, then the filter must exist. + filteroptions (*): An optional string of options associated with the filter. + + + + oDoc.SaveCopyAs("C:\Documents\Copy2.odt", Overwrite := True) + + + + doc.SaveCopyAs(r"C:\Documents\Copy2.odt", overwrite = True) + +
+ +
+ SetPrinter ------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;SetPrinter + +

SetPrinter

+ Defines the printer options for the document. + Returns True when successful. + + + svc.SetPrinter(opt printer: str, opt orientation: str, paperformat: str): bool + + +
+ printer: The name of the printer queue where to print to. When absent, the default printer is set. + orientation: Either PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. When absent, left unchanged with respect to the printer settings. + paperformat: Specifies the paper format as a string value that can be either A3, A4, A5, LETTER, LEGAL or TABLOID. Left unchanged when absent. +
+ + + + oDoc.SetPrinter(Orientation := "PORTRAIT") + + + + doc.SetPrinter(paperformat='TABLOID') + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..416c43457 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,459 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.Exception service (SF_Exception) + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_exception.xhp + + + +
+ + Exception service + +

ScriptForge.Exception service

+ The Exception service is a collection of methods to assist in code debugging in Basic and Python scripts and in error handling in Basic scripts. + In Basic scripts, when a run-time error occurs, the methods and properties of the Exception service help identify the error context and allow to handle it. +
+ + + The SF_Exception service is similar to the VBA Err object. + + + The Number property identifies the error. + + + Use the Raise method to interrupt processing. The RaiseWarning method can be used to trap an anomaly without interrupting the macro execution. + + + Errors and warnings raised with the Exception service are stored in memory and can be retrieved using the Console method. + + The Exception service console stores events, variable values and information about errors. Use the console when the Basic IDE is not easily accessible, for example in Calc user defined functions (UDF) or during events processing. + Use the DebugPrint method to add any relevant information to the console. Console entries can be dumped to a text file or visualized in a dialog window. + When an error occurs, an application macro may: + + Report the error in the Exception console + Inform the user about the error using either a standard message or a custom message + Optionally stop its execution + + In Python scripts the Exception service is mostly used for debugging purposes. Methods such as DebugPrint, Console and DebugDisplay are useful to quickly print messages, log data and open the console window from within a Python script. + Not all methods and properties are available for Python scripts since the Python language already has a comprehensive exception handling system. + +

Service invocation

+ + The following examples show three different approaches to call the method Raise. All other methods can be executed in a similar fashion. + + SF_Exception.Raise(...) + + + Dim exc : exc = SF_Exception + exc.Raise(...) + + + Dim exc : exc = CreateScriptService("Exception") + exc.Raise(...) + + + The code snippet below creates an instance of the Exception service, logs a message and displays the Console window. + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + exc = CreateScriptService("Exception") + someVar = 100 + exc.DebugPrint("Value of someVar", someVar) + exc.Console() + + +

Properties

+ The properties listed below are only available for Basic scripts. + + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Description + + + + + Description + + + No + + + The error message text. + Default value is "" or a string containing the Basic run-time error message. + + + + + Number + + + No + + + The code of the error. It can be a numeric value or text. + Default value is 0 or the numeric value corresponding to the Basic run-time error code. + + + + + Source + + + No + + + The location in the code where the error occurred. It can be a numeric value or text. + Default value is 0 or the code line number for a standard Basic run-time error. + + +
+ Raising or clearing an Exception resets its properties. + + + + + List of Methods in the Exception Service + + + + + Clear
+ Console
+ ConsoleClear + + + + + ConsoleToFile
+ DebugDisplay
+ DebugPrint

+ + + + + PythonPrint
+ PythonShell
+ Raise
+ RaiseWarning
+ + + +
+ +
+ Clear -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;Clear + +

Clear

+ Resets the current error status and clears the SF_Exception properties. + + + + SF_Exception.Clear() + + + The following example shows how to catch a division-by-zero exception, whose error code is 11. + + Sub Example_Clear() + Dim a, b, c + On Local Error GoTo Catch + Try: + a = 10 : b = 0 + c = a / b + '... + Exit Sub + Catch: + If SF_Exception.Number = 11 Then SF_Exception.Clear() + 'If division by zero, ignore the error + End Sub + + For a complete list of Basic run-time error codes, refer to Debugging a Basic Program. +
+ +
+ Console -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;Console + +

Console

+ Displays the console messages in a modal or non-modal dialog. In both modes, all the past messages issued by a DebugPrint() method or resulting from an exception are displayed. In non-modal mode, subsequent entries are added automatically. + If the console is already open, when non-modal, it is brought to the front. + A modal console can only be closed by the user. A non-modal console can either be closed by the user or upon macro termination. + + + exc.Console(modal: bool = True) + + + modal: Determine if the console window is modal (True) or non-modal (False). Default value is True. + + + + SF_Exception.Console(Modal := False) + + + + exc.Console(modal = False) + +
+ +
+ ConsoleClear -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;ConsoleClear + +

ConsoleClear

+ Clears the console keeping an optional number of recent messages. If the console is activated in non-modal mode, it is refreshed. + + + exc.ConsoleClear(keep: int = 0) + + + keep: The number of recent messages to be kept. Default value is 0. + + The following example clears the console keeping the 10 most recent messages. + + + SF_Exception.ConsoleClear(10) + + + + exc.ConsoleClear(10) + +
+ +
+ ConsoleToFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;ConsoleToFile + +

ConsoleToFile

+ Exports the contents of the console to a text file. If the file already exists and the console is not empty, it will be overwritten without warning. Returns True if successful. + + + exc.ConsoleToFile(filename: str): bool + + + filename: The name of the text file the console should be dumped into. The name is expressed according to the current FileNaming property of the SF_FileSystem service. By default, URL notation and the native operating system's format are both admitted. + + + + SF_Exception.ConsoleToFile("C:\Documents\myFile.txt") + + + + exc.ConsoleToFile(r"C:\Documents\myFile.txt") + +
+ +
+ DebugDisplay -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;DebugDisplay + +

DebugDisplay

+ Concatenates all the arguments into a single human-readable string and displays it in a MsgBox with an Information icon and an OK button. + The final string is also added to the Console. + + + exc.DebugDisplay(arg0: any, [arg1: any, ...]) + + + arg0[, arg1, ...]: Any number of arguments of any type. + + + + SF_Exception.DebugDisplay("Current Value", someVar) + + + + exc.DebugDisplay("Current Value", someVar) + +
+ +
+ DebugPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;DebugPrint + +

DebugPrint

+ Assembles all the given arguments into a single human-readable string and adds it as a new entry in the console. + + + exc.DebugPrint(arg0: any, [arg1: any, ...]) + + + arg0[, arg1, ...]: Any number of arguments of any type. + + + + SF_Exception.DebugPrint(Null, Array(1, 2, 3), "line1" & Chr(10) & "Line2", DateSerial(2020, 04, 09)) + ' [NULL] [ARRAY] (0:2) (1, 2, 3) line1\nLine2 2020-04-09 + + + + exc.DebugPrint(None, [1, 2, 3], "line1\nline2") + # None [1, 2, 3] line1\nline2 + +
+ +
+ PythonPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;PythonPrint + +

PythonPrint

+ Displays the list of arguments in a readable form in the Python shell (APSO) console. Arguments are separated by a TAB character (simulated by spaces). + The same string is added to the ScriptForge debug console. + + + + exc.PythonPrint(arg0: any, [arg1: any, ...]) + + + + arg0[, arg1, ...]: Any number of arguments of any type. The maximum length of each individual argument is 1024 characters. + + + exc.PythonPrint(a, Array(1, 2, 3), , "line1" & Chr(10) & "Line2", DateSerial(2020, 04, 09)) + + In python use simply the builtin print() statement. +
+ +
+ PythonShell -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;PythonShell + +

PythonShell

+ Opens an APSO Python shell as a non-modal window. The Python script keeps running after the shell is opened. The output from print statements inside the script are shown in the shell. + Only a single instance of the APSO Python shell can be opened at any time. Hence, if a Python shell is already open, then calling this method will have no effect. + + + + exc.PythonShell(variables: dict) + + + variables: a Python dictionary with variable names and values that will be passed on to the APSO Python shell. By default all local variables are passed using Python's builtin locals() function. + + The example below opens the APSO Python shell passing all global and local variables considering the context where the script is running. + + exc.PythonShell({**globals(), **locals()}) + + When the APSO Python shell is open, any subsequent output printed by the script will be shown in the shell. Hence, the string printed in the example below will be displayed in the Python shell. + + exc.PythonShell() + print("Hello world!") + +
+ +
+ Raise -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;Raise + +

Raise

+ Generates a run-time error. An error message is displayed to the user and reported in the console. The execution is stopped. The Raise() method can be placed inside the normal script flow or in a dedicated error-handling routine. + + + + SF_Exception.Raise([Number As Variant], [Source As Variant], [Description As String]) + + The code snippets presented next are equivalent. They show alternative ways to raise an exception with code 2100. + + SF_Exception.Raise(2100) + + + SF_Exception.Number = 2100 + SF_Exception.Raise() + + + SF_Exception.Raise Number := 2100 + + +
+ Number: The error code, as a number or as a string. Default value is that of Err Basic builtin function. + Source: The location of the error, as a number or as a string. Default value is that of Erl Basic builtin function. + Description: The message to display to the user and to report in the console. Default value is that of Error$ Basic builtin function. +
+ + + Sub Example_Raise() + Dim a, b, c + On Local Error GoTo Catch + Try: + a = 10 : b = 0 + c = a / b + '... + Exit Sub + Catch: + 'See variants below ... + End Sub + + To raise an exception with the standard values: + + Catch: + SF_Exception.Raise() + + To raise an exception with a specific code: + + Catch: + SF_Exception.Raise(11) + + To replace the usual message: + + Catch: + SF_Exception.Raise(, , "It is not a good idea to divide by zero.") + + To raise an application error: + + Catch: + SF_Exception.Raise("MyAppError", "Example_Raise()", "Something wrong happened !") + +
+ +
+ RaiseWarning -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Exception service;RaiseWarning + +

RaiseWarning

+ This method has exactly the same syntax, arguments and behavior as the Raise() method. + However, when a warning is raised, the macro execution is not stopped. + + + + SF_Exception.RaiseWarning([Number As Variant], [Source As Variant], [Description As String]) + + + + + + SF_Exception.RaiseWarning(Source:="Example_Raise()", _ + Description:="Something wrong happened !", _ + Number:="MyAppError") + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9461b7604 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1129 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.FileSystem service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_filesystem.xhp + + + + +
+ + FileSystem service + +
+ +
+

ScriptForge.FileSystem service

+ The FileSystem service includes routines to handle files and folders. Next are some examples of the features provided by this service: + + + Verify whether a file or folder exists. + + + Create and delete folders and files. + + + Launch dialog boxes to open/save files. + + + Access the list of files in a folder, etc. + + +
+ The methods in the FileSystem service are mostly based on the XSimpleFileAccess UNO interface. + +

Definitions

+ The table below lists the main parameters used by most of the methods in the FileSystem service. + + + + Parameter + + + Description + + + + + FileName + + + The full name of the file including the path without a path separator at the end. + + + + + FolderName + + + The full name of the folder including the path. It may or may not contain the ending path separator. + + + + + Name + + + The last component of the Folder Name or File Name including its extension. This parameter is always expressed using the native format of the operating system. + + + + + BaseName + + + The last component of the Folder Name or File Name without its extension. + + + + + NamePattern + + + Any of the above names containing wildcards in its last component. Admitted wildcards are: + + + "?" represents any single character + + + "*" represents zero, one, or multiple characters + + + + +
+ The FileSystem service allows to perform operations over multiple files at the same time. By using name patterns, user scripts can copy, move or delete multiple files. Conversely, Basic built-in methods can only handle single files. + +

File Naming Notation

+ The notation used to express file and folder names, both for arguments and returned values, is defined by the FileNaming property of the FileSystem service. + In short, the possible representation types are "URL" (URL file notation), "SYS" (operating system notation) and "ANY" (default). See more information below. + An example of the URL notation is file:///C:/Documents/my_file.odt. Whenever possible consider using the URL notation because it is a more portable alternative. + The use of the shortcut "~" (tilde), which is common in Linux-based operating systems, is not supported to express a path to a folder and file name. Instead of using "~/Documents/my_file.odt" use the full path "/home/user/Documents/my_file.odt". + +

Service invocation

+ The following code snippet invokes the FileSystem service. The method BuildPath was used as an example. + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim FSO As Object + Set FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + FSO.BuildPath(...) + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + fs.BuildPath(...) + + + + FileSystem service;FileNaming property + FileSystem service;ConfigFolder property + FileSystem service;ExtensionsFolder property + FileSystem service;HomeFolder property + FileSystem service;InstallFolder property + FileSystem service;TemplatesFolder property + FileSystem service;TemporaryFolder property + FileSystem service;UserTemplatesFolder property + +

Properties

+
+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + FileNaming + + + No + + + String + + + Sets or returns the current files and folders notation, either "ANY", "URL" or "SYS": + + + "ANY": (default) the methods of the FileSystem service accept both URL and current operating system's notation for input arguments but always return URL strings. + + + "URL": the methods of the FileSystem service expect URL notation for input arguments and return URL strings. + + + "SYS": the methods of the FileSystem service expect current operating system's notation for both input arguments and return strings. + + + Once set, the FileNaming property remains unchanged either until the end of the %PRODUCTNAME session or until it is set again. + + + + + ConfigFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the configuration folder of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + + ExtensionsFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the folder where extensions are installed. + + + + + HomeFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the user home folder. + + + + + InstallFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the installation folder of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + + TemplatesFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the folder containing the system templates files. + + + + + TemporaryFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the temporary files folder defined in the %PRODUCTNAME path settings. + + + + + UserTemplatesFolder + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the folder containing the user-defined template files. + + +
+
+ + + + List of Methods in the FileSystem Service + + + + + BuildPath
+ CompareFiles
+ CopyFile
+ CopyFolder
+ CreateFolder
+ CreateTextFile
+ DeleteFile
+ DeleteFolder
+ ExtensionFolder
+ + + + + FileExists
+ Files
+ FolderExists
+ GetBaseName
+ GetExtension
+ GetFileLen
+ GetFileModified
+ GetName
+ GetParentFolderName
+ + + + + GetTempName
+ HashFile
+ MoveFile
+ MoveFolder
+ OpenTextFile
+ PickFile
+ PickFolder
+ SubFolders

+ + + +
+ +
+ BuildPath ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;BuildPath + +

BuildPath

+ Joins a folder path and the name of a file and returns the full file name with a valid path separator. The path separator is added only if necessary. + + + svc.BuildPath(foldername: str, name: str): str + + + foldername: The path with which name will be combined. The specified path does not need to be an existing folder. + name: The name of the file to be appended to foldername. This parameter uses the notation of the current operating system. + + + + Dim FSO as Object + Set FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + Dim aFileName as String + FSO.FileNaming = "URL" + aFileName = FSO.BuildPath("file:///home/user", "sample file.odt") + ' file:///home/user/sample%20file.odt + + + + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + fs.FileNaming = "URL" + aFileName = fs.BuildPath("file:///home/user", "sample file.odt") + # file:///home/user/sample%20file.odt + +
+ +
+ CompareFiles ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;CompareFiles + +

CompareFiles

+ Compares two files and returns True when they seem identical. + Depending on the value of the comparecontents argument, the comparison between both files can be either based only on file attributes (such as the last modified date), or based on the file contents. + + + svc.CompareFiles(filename1: str, filename2: str, comparecontents: bool = False): bool + + + filename1, filename2: The files to compare. + comparecontents: When True, the contents of the files are compared (default = False). + + + + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + If FSO.CompareFiles("C:\myFile1.txt", "C:\myFile2.txt", CompareContents := False) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + if fs.CompareFiles(r"C:\myFile1.txt", r"C:\myFile2.txt", comparecontents = False): + # ... + +
+ +
+ CopyFile ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;CopyFile + +

CopyFile

+ Copies one or more files from one location to another. Returns True if at least one file has been copied or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the source parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any files. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.CopyFile(source: str, destination: str, overwrite: bool = True): bool + + + source: It can be a FileName or a NamePattern indicating one or more files to be copied. + destination: It can be either a FileName specifying where the single source file is to be copied, or a FolderName into which the multiple files from source are to be copied. + + + If destination does not exist, it is created. + + + Wildcard characters are not allowed in destination. + + + overwrite: If True (default), files may be overwritten. The method will fail if destination is readonly, regardless of the value specified in overwrite. + + In the examples below the first line copies a single file whereas the second line copies multiple files using wildcards. + + + FSO.CopyFile("C:\Documents\my_file.odt", "C:\Temp\copied_file.odt") + FSO.CopyFile("C:\Documents\*.*", "C:\Temp\", Overwrite := False) + + + + fs.CopyFile(r"C:\Documents\my_file.odt", r"C:\Temp\copied_file.odt") + fs.CopyFile(r"C:\Documents\*.*", r"C:\Temp", overwrite = False) + + Beware that subfolders and their contents are not copied when wildcards are used in the source argument. +
+ +
+ CopyFolder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;CopyFolder + +

CopyFolder

+ Copies one or more folders from one location to another. Returns True if at least one folder has been copied or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the source parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any folders. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.CopyFolder(source: str, destination: str, overwrite: bool = True): bool + + + source: It can be a FolderName or a NamePattern indicating one or more folders to be copied. + destination: Specifies the FolderName into which the single or multiple folders defined in source are to be copied. + + + If destination does not exist, it is created. + + + Wildcard characters are not allowed in destination. + + + overwrite: If True (default), files may be overwritten. The method will fail if destination is readonly, regardless of the value specified in overwrite. + + In the examples below all files, folders and subfolders are copied. + + ' Basic + FSO.CopyFolder("C:\Documents\*", "C:\Temp\", Overwrite := False) + + + # Python + fs.CopyFolder(r"C:\Documents\*", r"C:\Temp", overwrite = False) + +
+ +
+ CreateFolder -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;CreateFolder + +

CreateFolder

+ Creates the specified FolderName. Returns True if the folder could be successfully created. + If the specified folder has a parent folder that does not exist, it is created. + + + svc.CreateFolder(foldername: str): bool + + + foldername: A string representing the folder to be created. If the folder already exists, an exception will be raised. + + + ' Basic + FSO.CreateFolder("C:\NewFolder") + + + # Python + fs.CreateFolder(r"C:\NewFolder") + +
+ +
+ CreateTextFile ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + FolderSystem service;CreateTextFile + +

CreateTextFile

+ Creates a specified file and returns a TextStream service instance that can be used to write to the file. + The method returns a Null object if an error occurred. + + + svc.CreateTextFile(filename: str, overwrite: bool = True, encoding: str = 'UTF-8'): svc + + + filename: The name of the file to be created. + overwrite: Boolean value that determines if filename can be overwritten (default = True). + encoding: The character set to be used. The default encoding is "UTF-8". + + + + Dim myFile As Object + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + Set myFile = FSO.CreateTextFile("C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", Overwrite := True) + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + myFile = fs.CreateTextFile(r"C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", overwrite = True) + + To learn more about the names of character sets, visit IANA's Character Set page. Beware that %PRODUCTNAME does not implement all existing character sets. +
+ +
+ DeleteFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;DeleteFile + +

DeleteFile

+ Deletes one or more files. Returns True if at least one file has been deleted or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the filename parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any files. + The files to be deleted must not be readonly. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.DeleteFile(filename: str): bool + + + filename: It can be a FileName or a NamePattern indicating one or more files to be deleted. + + In the examples below only files are deleted, subfolders are not deleted. + + ' Basic + FSO.DeleteFile("C:\Temp\*.docx") + + + # Python + fs.DeleteFile(r"C:\Temp\*.docx") + +
+ +
+ DeleteFolder -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;DeleteFolder + +

DeleteFolder

+ Deletes one or more folders. Returns True if at least one folder has been deleted or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the foldername parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any folders. + The folders to be deleted must not be readonly. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.DeleteFolder(foldername: str): bool + + + foldername: It can be a FolderName or a NamePattern indicating one or more folders to be deleted. + + In the examples below only folders and their contents are deleted. Files in the parent folder "C:\Temp" are not deleted. + + ' Basic + FSO.DeleteFolder("C:\Temp\*") + + + # Python + fs.DeleteFolder(r"C:\Temp\*") + +
+ +
+ ExtensionFolder --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;ExtensionFolder + +

ExtensionFolder

+ Returns a string containing the folder where the specified extension package is installed. + The current value of the property SF_FileSystem.FileNaming is used to determine the notation of the returned string. + Use the property Extensions from the Platform service to get string array with the IDs of all installed extensions. + + + svc.ExtensionFolder(extension: str): str + + + extension: A string value with the ID of the extension. If the extension is not installed, an exception is raised. + + The examples below in Basic and Python return the folder where the APSO extension is installed. + + ' Basic + sFolder = FSO.ExtensionFolder("apso.python.script.organizer") + ' file:///home/username/.config/libreoffice/4/user/uno_packages/cache/uno_packages/lu10833wz3u2i.tmp_/apso_1_2_7.oxt + + + # Python + sFolder = fs.ExtensionFolder("apso.python.script.organizer") + +
+ +
+ FileExists --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;FileExists + +

FileExists

+ Returns True if a given file name is valid and exists, otherwise the method returns False. + If the filename parameter is actually an existing folder name, the method returns False. + + + svc.FileExists(filename: str): bool + + + filename: A string representing the file to be tested. + + + + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + If FSO.FileExists("C:\Documents\my_file.odt") Then + '... + End If + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + if fs.FileExists(r"C:\Documents\my_file.odt"): + # ... + +
+ +
+ Files ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + FileSystem service;Files + +

Files

+ Returns a zero-based array of the files stored in a given folder. Each entry in the array is a string containing the full path and file name. + If the argument foldername specifies a folder that does not exist, an exception is raised. + The resulting list may be filtered with wildcards. + + + svc.Files(foldername: str, filter: str = ''): str[0..*] + + + foldername: A string representing a folder. The folder must exist. This argument must not designate a file. + filter: A string containing wildcards ("?" and "*") that will be applied to the resulting list of files (default = ""). + + + + Dim filesList As Variant, file As String + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + filesList = FSO.Files("/home/user/", "*.txt") + For Each file In filesList + ' ... + Next file + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + filesList = fs.Files("/home/user/", "*.txt") + for file in fileList: + # ... + +
+ +
+ FolderExists -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;FolderExists + +

FolderExists

+ Returns True if the specified FolderName is valid and exists, otherwise the method returns False. + If the foldername parameter is actually an existing file name, the method returns False. + + + svc.FolderExists(foldername: str): bool + + + foldername: A string representing the folder to be tested. + + + + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + If FSO.FolderExists("C:\Documents\Thesis") Then + '... + End If + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + if fs.FolderExists(r"C:\Documents\Thesis") + # ... + +
+ +
+ GetBaseName --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetBaseName + +

GetBaseName

+ Returns the BaseName (equal to the last component) of a folder or file name, without its extension. + The method does not check if the specified file or folder exists. + + + svc.GetBaseName(filename: str): str + + + filename: A string representing the file name and its path. + + In the examples below, the first GetBaseName method call corresponds to a folder, so the function returns the last component of the path. The second call receives a file name as input, so the name of the file is returned without its extension. + + + MsgBox FSO.GetBaseName("/home/user/Documents") ' "Documents" + MsgBox FSO.GetBaseName("/home/user/Documents/my_file.ods") ' "my_file" + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(fs.GetBaseName("/home/user/Documents")) # "Documents" + bas.MsgBox(fs.GetBaseName("/home/user/Documents/my_file.ods")) # "my_file" + +
+ +
+ GetExtension ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + FileSystem service;GetExtension + +

GetExtension

+ Returns the extension part of a file or folder name without the dot "." character. + The method does not check for the existence of the specified file or folder. + If this method is applied to a folder name or to a file without an extension, then an empty string is returned. + + + svc.GetExtension(filename: str): str + + + filename: A string representing the file name and its path. + + + ' Basic + ext = FSO.GetExtension("C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") ' "exe" + + + # Python + ext = fs.GetExtension(r"C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") # "exe" + +
+ +
+ GetFileLen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetFileLen + +

GetFileLen

+ The builtin FileLen Basic function returns the number of bytes contained in a file as a Long value, i.e. up to 2GB. + The GetFileLen method can handle files with much larger sizes by returning a Currency value. + + + svc.GetFileLen(filename: str): num + + + filename: A string representing an existing file. + + + + Dim fLen As Currency + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + fLen = FSO.GetFileLen("C:\pagefile.sys") + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + fLen = fs.GetFileLen(r"C:\pagefile.sys") + +
+ +
+ GetFileModified -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetFileModified + +

GetFileModified

+ Returns the last modified date of a given file. + + + svc.GetFileModified(filename: str): datetime + + + filename: A string representing an existing file. + + + + Dim aDate As Date + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + aDate = FSO.GetFileModified("C:\Documents\my_file.odt") + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + aDate = FSO.GetFileModified(r"C:\Documents\my_file.odt") + +
+ +
+ GetName -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetName + +

GetName

+ Returns the last component of a file or folder name in native operating system format. + The method does not check if the specified file or folder exists. + + + svc.GetName(filename: str): str + + + filename: A string representing the file name and its path. + + + ' Basic + a = FSO.GetName("C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") ' Notepad.exe + + + # Python + a = fs.GetName(r"C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") # Notepad.exe + +
+ +
+ GetParentFolderName ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetParentFolderName + +

GetParentFolderName

+ Returns a string containing the name of the parent folder of a specified file or folder name. + The method does not check if the specified file or folder exists. + + + svc.GetParentFolderName(filename: str): str + + + filename: A string with the file or folder name to be analyzed. + + + ' Basic + a = FSO.GetParentFolderName("C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") ' C:\Windows\ + + + # Python + a = fs.GetParentFolderName(r"C:\Windows\Notepad.exe") # C:\Windows\ + +
+ +
+ GetTempName ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;GetTempName + +

GetTempName

+ Returns a randomly generated temporary file name that is useful for performing operations that require a temporary file. + The returned file name does not have any suffix. The folder part of the returned string is the system's temporary folder. + The method does not create the temporary file. + + + svc.GetTempName(): str + + + + + Dim fName As String + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + fName = FSO.GetTempName() & ".txt" + ' "/tmp/SF_574068.txt" + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + fName = FSO.GetTempName() + ".txt" + # "/tmp/SF_574068.txt" + +
+ +
+ HashFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;HashFile + +

HashFile

+ Hash functions are used by some cryptographic algorithms, in digital signatures, message authentication codes, fraud detection, fingerprints, checksums (message integrity check), hash tables, password storage and much more. + The HashFile method returns the result of a hash function, applied on a given file and using a specified algorithm. The returned value is a string of lower-case hexadecimal digits. + The hash algorithms supported are: MD5, SHA1, SHA224, SHA256, SHA384 and SHA512. + + + svc.HashFile(filename: str, algorithm: str): str + + + filename: A string representing an existing file. + algorithm: One of the supported algorithms. + + + ' Basic + sHash = FSO.HashFile("C:\pagefile.sys", "MD5") + + + # Python + sHash = FSO.HashFile(r"C:\pagefile.sys", "MD5") + +
+ +
+ MoveFile -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;MoveFile + +

MoveFile

+ Moves one or more files from one location to another. Returns True if at least one file has been moved or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the source parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any files. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.MoveFile(source: str, destination: str): bool + + + source: It can be a FileName or NamePattern to designate one or more files to be moved. + destination: If source is a FileName then this parameter indicates the new path and file name of the moved file. + If the move operation involves multiple files, then destination must be a folder name. If it does not exist, it is created. + If source and destination have the same parent folder, the method will rename the source. + Wildcard characters are not allowed in destination. + + In the following examples only files are moved, subfolders are not. + + ' Basic + FSO.MoveFile("C:\Temp1\*.*", "C:\Temp2") + + + # Python + fs.MoveFile(r"C:\Temp1\*.*", r"C:\Temp2") + +
+ +
+ MoveFolder --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FolderSystem service;MoveFolder + +

MoveFolder

+ Moves one or more folders from one location to another. Returns True if at least one folder has been moved or False if an error occurred. + An error will also occur if the source parameter uses wildcard characters and does not match any folders. + The method stops immediately after it encounters an error. The method does not roll back nor does it undo changes made before the error occurred. + + + svc.MoveFolder(source: str, destination: str): bool + + + source: It can be a FolderName or NamePattern to designate one or more folders to be moved. + destination: If the move operation involves a single folder, then destination is the name and path of the moved folder and it must not exist. + If multiple folders are being moved, then destination designates where the folders in source will be moved into. If destination does not exist, it is created. + Wildcard characters are not allowed in destination. + + + ' Basic + FSO.MoveFolder("C:\Temp1\*", "C:\Temp2") + + + # Python + fs.MoveFolder(r"C:\Temp1\*", r"C:\Temp2") + +
+ +
+ OpenTextFile ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FolderSystem service;OpenTextFile + +

OpenTextFile

+ Opens a file and returns a TextStream object that can be used to read from, write to, or append to the file. + Note that the method does not check if the given file is really a text file. + The method returns a Null object (in Basic) or None (in Python) if an error occurred. + + + svc.OpenTextFile(filename: str, iomode: int = 1, create: bool = False, encoding: str = 'UTF-8'): svc + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. + iomode: Indicates the input/output mode. It can be one of three constants: svc.ForReading (default), svc.ForWriting, or svc.ForAppending. + create: Boolean value that indicates whether a new file can be created if the specified filename doesn't exist: + + + If True a new file and its parent folders will be created if they do not exist; + + + If False then new files are not created (default). + + + encoding: The character set to be used. The default encoding is "UTF-8". + + + + Dim myFile As Object + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + Set myFile = FSO.OpenTextFile("C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", FSO.ForReading) + If Not IsNull(myFile) Then + ' ... + End If + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + myFile = fs.OpenTextFile(r"C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", fs.ForReading) + if myFile is not None: + # ... + +
+ +
+ PickFile --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;PickFile + +

PickFile

+ Opens a dialog box to open or save files. + If the SAVE mode is set and the picked file exists, a warning message will be displayed. + + + svc.PickFile(defaultfile: str ='', mode: str = 'OPEN', filter: str = ''): str + + + defaultfile: This argument is a string composed of a folder and file name: + + + The folder part indicates the folder that will be shown when the dialog opens (default = the last selected folder). + + + The file part designates the default file to open or save. + + + mode: A string value that can be either "OPEN" (for input files) or "SAVE" (for output files). The default value is "OPEN". + filter: The extension of the files displayed when the dialog is opened (default = no filter). + + The examples below open a file picker with the "txt" filter applied. + + ' Basic + aFile = FSO.PickFile("C:\Documents", "OPEN", "txt") + + + # Python + aFile = fs.PickFile(r"C:\Documents", "OPEN", "txt") + +
+ +
+ PickFolder ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;PickFolder + +

PickFolder

+ Opens a dialog box to select a folder. + + + svc.PickFolder(defaultfolder: str = '', freetext: str = ''): str + + + defaultfolder: A string containing the folder name that will be displayed when the dialog is opened (default = the last selected folder). + freetext: Text to display in the dialog (default = ""). + + + ' Basic + aFolder = FSO.PickFolder("C:\Documents", "Choose a folder or press Cancel") + + + # Python + aFolder = fs.PickFolder(r"C:\Documents", "Choose a folder or press Cancel") + +
+ +
+ SubFolders ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FileSystem service;Files + +

SubFolders

+ Returns a zero-based array of strings corresponding to the folders stored in a given foldername. + The list may be filtered with wildcards. + + + svc.SubFolders(foldername: str, filter: str = ''): str[0..*] + + + foldername: A string representing a folder. The folder must exist. foldername must not designate a file. + filter: A string containing wildcards ("?" and "*") that will be applied to the resulting list of folders (default = ""). + + + + Dim folderList As Variant, folder As String + FSO.FileNaming = "SYS" + folderList = FSO.SubFolders("/home/user/") + For Each folder In folderList + ' ... + Next folder + + + + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + folderList = fs.SubFolders("/home/user/") + for folder in folderList: + # ... + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9515a222 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,841 @@ + + + + + + SFDocuments.Form service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_form.xhp + + + +
+ + Form service + +
+
+

SFDocuments.Form service

+ The Form service provides methods and properties to manage forms in %PRODUCTNAME documents. This service supports forms in Base, Calc and Writer documents and allows to: + + + Open and activate forms. + + + Navigate through records shown by the form. + + + Get access to the controls inside the form. + + + Get access to subforms of a parent form. + + +
+ The SFDocuments.Form service is available from %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 onwards. + Forms are usually used in %PRODUCTNAME documents to create user interfaces connected to relational databases. Hence, the Form service provides quick access to the linked database through the SFDatabases.Database service. + The SFDocuments.Form service is closely related to the SFDocuments.FormControl service. +

Definitions

+

FormDocument

+ Forms are usually created in Base documents, but they can be added to Writer and Calc documents as well. + In Base, each form you create using the Insert - Form functionality or through the Form Wizard is actually a FormDocument that can be handled with the Form service. Base documents can contain an unlimited number of form documents. + Below is an example showing the hierarchy of all the elements involved in accessing forms and subforms in a Base document. Suppose you have a Base file named Employees.odb and inside it you created a form document to add new employees to the database. The form document contains a main form named EmployeeData that gives access to a table. There is also a subform WorksAtPlant that allows you to associate the new employee to one of the plants of the company. + + Employees.odb (Base document) + | + |-- AddEmployee (FormDocument) + | + |-- EmployeeData (Main Form) + | + |-- WorksAtPlant (SubForm) + + A FormDocument can be seen as a set of forms that provide access to datasets such as database tables and queries from within %PRODUCTNAME documents. The names of forms and subforms inside a FormDocument can be accessed using the Form Navigator. +

Forms and Subforms

+ A form document is composed of one or more forms which, in turn, may also contain any number of subforms. A Form is an abstract set of controls that are linked to a specified data source, which can be a database table, a query or a SQL SELECT statement. + In Calc and Writer documents, each form can be linked to datasets located in different databases. On the other hand, in Base documents the database contained in the document is common to all forms. + To invoke the SFDocuments.Form service refer to the methods Forms(), FormDocuments() and OpenFormDocument() of the SFDocuments.Document service +
+

Service invocation

+ Before using the Form service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + +

In Writer documents

+ The code snippet below shows how to access the form named Form1 that is inside a Writer file: + + Dim oDoc As Object, myForm As Object, ui as Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.OpenDocument("/home/user/Documents/MyForm.odt") + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms("Form1") + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + ui = CreateScriptService('UI') + doc = ui.OpenDocument('/home/user/Documents/MyForm.odt') + my_form = doc.Forms('Form1') + + Forms can be accessed by their names or by their indices, as shown below: + + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms(0) + + + + my_form = doc.Forms(0) + + If you try to access a FormDocument that is currently opened in Design Mode an exception will be raised. +

In Calc documents

+ A form in a Calc file must have a unique name inside its sheet. Hence, the Forms method requires two arguments, the first indicating the sheet name and the second specifying the form name. + + Dim oDoc As Object, myForm As Object, ui as Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.OpenDocument("/home/user/Documents/MyForms.ods") + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms("Sheet1", "Form1") + + This is achieved identically using Python: + + ui = CreateScriptService('UI') + doc = ui.OpenDocument('/home/user/Documents/MyForms.ods') + my_form = doc.Forms('Sheet1', 'Form1') + +

In Base documents

+ A FormDocument inside a Base document is accessed by its name. The following example opens the form document named thisFormDocument and accesses the form MainForm: + + Dim oDb As Object, myForm As Object + Set oDb = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", ThisDatabaseDocument) + ' The statement below is necessary only if the form hasn't been opened yet + oDb.OpenFormDocument("thisFormDocument") + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms("thisFormDocument", "MainForm") + ' Or, alternatively, to access the form by its index ... + Set myForm = oDb.Forms("thisFormDocument", 0) + + To perform any action on a form using the Form service, the FormDocument must have been opened either manually by the user or programmatically in a user script. The latter can be done by calling the OpenFormDocument method of the Base service. + To access a given subform of a form use the SubForms method. Note that in the example below mySubForm is a new instance of the Form service. + + Dim mySubForm As Object + Set mySubForm = myForm.SubForms("mySubForm") + + Previous examples translate in Python as: + + db = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.Document', XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument()) + # The statement below is necessary only if the form hasn't been opened yet + form_doc = db.OpenFormDocument('thisFormDocument') + form = form_doc.Forms('thisFormDocument', 'MainForm') + # Or, alternatively, to access the form by its index ... + form = form_doc.Forms('thisFormDocument', 0) + sub_form = form.SubForms('mySubForm') + +

In Form events

+ To invoke the Form service when a form event takes place: + + Sub OnEvent(ByRef poEvent As Object) + Dim myForm As Object + Set myForm = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.FormEvent", poEvent) + '(...) + End sub + + + + def OnEvent(event: uno): + form = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.FormEvent', event) + pass + + + It is recommended to free resources after use of the Form service. + + myForm.Dispose() ' Basic + + + form.Dispose() # Python + + This operation is done implicitly when a form document is closed with the CloseFormDocument() method described below. +
+

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + AllowDeletes + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Specifies if the form allows to delete records. + + + + + AllowInserts + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Specifies if the form allows to add records. + + + + + AllowUpdates + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Specifies if the form allows to update records. + + + + + BaseForm + + + Yes + + + String + + + Specifies the hierarchical name of the Base Form containing the actual form. + + + + + Bookmark + + + No + + + Variant + + + Specifies uniquely the current record of the form's underlying table, query or SQL statement. + + + + + CurrentRecord + + + No + + + Long + + + Identifies the current record in the dataset being viewed on a form. If the row number is positive, the cursor moves to the given row number with respect to the beginning of the result set. Row count starts at 1. If the given row number is negative, the cursor moves to an absolute row position with respect to the end of the result set. Row -1 refers to the last row in the result set. + + + + + Filter + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies a subset of records to be displayed as a SQL WHERE-clause without the WHERE keyword. + + + + + LinkChildFields + + + Yes + + + String + + + Specifies how records in a child subform are linked to records in its parent form. + + + + + LinkParentFields + + + Yes + + + String + + + Specifies how records in a child subform are linked to records in its parent form. + + + + + Name + + + Yes + + + String + + + The name of the current form. + + + + + OrderBy + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies in which order the records should be displayed as a SQL ORDER BY clause without the ORDER BY keywords. + + + + + Parent + + + Yes + + + Object + + + The parent of the current form. It can be either a SFDocuments.Form or a SFDocuments.Document object. + + + + + RecordSource + + + No + + + String + + + Specifies the source of the data, as a table name, a query name or a SQL statement. + + + + + XForm + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + The UNO object representing interactions with the form. Refer to XForm and DataForm in the API documentation for detailed information. + + +
+

Event properties

+ The properties below return or set URI strings that define the script triggered by the event. + + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Basic IDE Description + + + + + OnApproveCursorMove + + + No + + + Before record change + + + + + OnApproveParameter + + + No + + + Fill parameters + + + + + OnApproveReset + + + No + + + Prior to reset + + + + + OnApproveRowChange + + + No + + + Before record action + + + + + OnApproveSubmit + + + No + + + Before submitting + + + + + OnConfirmDelete + + + No + + + Confirm deletion + + + + + OnCursorMoved + + + No + + + After record change + + + + + OnErrorOccurred + + + No + + + Error occurred + + + + + OnLoaded + + + No + + + When loading + + + + + OnReloaded + + + No + + + When reloading + + + + + OnReloading + + + No + + + Before reloading + + + + + OnResetted + + + No + + + After resetting + + + + + OnRowChanged + + + No + + + After record action + + + + + OnUnloaded + + + No + + + When unloading + + + + + OnUnloading + + + No + + + Before unloading + + +
+ To learn more about URI strings, refer to the Scripting Framework URI Specification. + + + List of methods in the Form service + + + + Activate
+ CloseFormDocument
+ Controls
+ GetDatabase
+ + + MoveFirst
+ MoveLast
+ MoveNext
+ MoveNew
+ + + MovePrevious
+ Requery
+ SubForms

+ + +
+
+ Activate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;Activate + +

Activate

+ Sets the focus on the current Form instance. Returns True if focusing was successful. + The behavior of the Activate method depends on the type of document where the form is located: + + + In Writer documents: Sets the focus on that document. + + + In Calc documents: Sets the focus on the sheet to which the form belongs. + + + In Base documents: Sets the focus on the FormDocument the Form refers to. + + + + svc.Activate(): bool + + The following example assumes you want to activate the form named FormA located in Sheet1 of the currently open Calc file. It first gets access to the document using the Document service and ThisComponent and then activates the form. + + 'Gets hold of the form that will be activated + Dim oDoc as Object, myForm as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document", ThisComponent) + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms("Sheet1", "FormA") + 'Activates the form + myForm.Activate() + + + + doc = CreateScriptService('Document', XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument()) + form = doc.Forms('Sheet1', 'FormA') + form.Activate() + + ThisComponent applies to Calc and Writer documents. For Base documents use ThisDataBaseDocument. +
+
+ CloseFormDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;CloseFormDocument + +

CloseFormDocument

+ Closes the form document containing the actual Form instance. The Form instance is disposed. + + svc.CloseFormDocument(): bool + + + myForm.CloseFormDocument() ' Basic + + + + form.CloseFormDocument() # Python + + This method only closes form documents located in Base documents. If the form is stored in a Writer or Calc document, calling CloseFormDocument will have no effect. +
+
+ Controls -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;Controls + +

Controls

+ The value returned by the Controls method depends on the arguments provided: + + + If the method is called without arguments, then it returns the list of the controls contained in the form. Beware that the returned list does not contain any subform controls. + + + If the optional ControlName argument is provided, the method returns a FormControl class instance referring to the specified control. + + + + svc.Controls(opt controlname: str): any + + controlname : A valid control name as a case-sensitive string. If absent, the list of control names is returned as a zero-based array. + + + Dim myForm As Object, myList As Variant, myControl As Object + Set myForm = myDoc.Forms("myForm") + myList = myform.Controls() + Set myControl = myform.Controls("myTextBox") ' SFDocuments.FormControl + + + + form = doc.Forms('myForm') + form_names = form.Controls() + form_control = form.Controls('myTextBox') # SFDocuments.FormControl + +
+
+ GetDatabase -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;GetDatabase + +

GetDatabase

+ Return a SFDatabases.Database instance giving access to the execution of SQL commands on the database the current form is connected to and/or that is stored in the current Base document. + Each form has its own database connection, except in Base documents where they all share the same connection. + + svc.GetDatabase(opt user: str, opt password: str): svc + + user, password: The login optional parameters (Default = ""). + + + Dim myDb As Object ' SFDatabases.Database + Set myDb = oForm.GetDatabase() + + + + db = form.GetDatabase() # SFDatabases.Database + +
+
+ MoveFirst -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;MoveFirst + +

MoveFirst

+ The form cursor is positioned on the first record. Returns True if successful. + + svc.MoveFirst(): bool + + + myForm.MoveFirst() ' Basic + + + + form.MoveFirst() # Python + +
+
+ MoveLast -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;MoveLast + +

MoveLast

+ The form cursor is positioned on the last record. Returns True if successful. + + svc.MoveLast(): bool + + + myForm.MoveLast() ' Basic + + + + form.MoveLast() # Python + +
+
+ MoveNew -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;MoveNew + +

MoveNew

+ The form cursor is positioned on the new record area. Returns True if successful. + + svc.MoveNew(): bool + + + myForm.MoveNew() ' Basic + + + + form.MoveNew() # Python + +
+
+ MoveNext -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;MoveNext + +

MoveNext

+ The form cursor is positioned on the next record. Returns True if successful. + + svc.MoveNext(opt offset: int): bool + + offset: The number of records to go forward (Default = 1). + + + myForm.MoveNext() ' Basic + + + + form.MoveNext() # Python + +
+
+ MovePrevious -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;MovePrevious + +

MovePrevious

+ The form cursor is positioned on the previous record. Returns True if successful. + + svc.MovePrevious(opt offset: int): bool + + offset: The number of records to go backwards (Default = 1). + + + myForm.MovePrevious() ' Basic + + + form.MovePrevious() # Python + +
+
+ Requery -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;Requery + +

Requery

+ Reloads the current data from the database and refreshes the form. The cursor is positioned on the first record. Returns True if successful. + + svc.Requery(): bool + + + myForm.Requery() ' Basic + + + + form.Requery() # Python + +
+
+ Subforms -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Form service;Subforms + +

Subforms

+ The value returned by the Subforms method depends on the arguments provided: + + + If the method is called without any arguments, then it returns the list of subforms contained in the current form or subform instance. + + + If the optional subform argument is provided, the method returns a new SFDocuments.Form instance based on the specified form/subform name or index. + + + + svc.Subforms(): str[0..*] + svc.Subforms(subform: str): svc + svc.Subforms(subform: int): svc + + subform: A subform stored in the current Form class instance given by its name or index. + When this argument is absent, the method returns a list of available subforms as a zero-based array. If the form has a single subform, you can set subform = 0 to get access to it. + + + Dim myForm As Object, myList As Variant, mySubform As Object + myList = myform.Subforms() + Set mySubform = myForm.Subforms("mySubform") ' SFDocuments.Form + + + + subform_names = form.Subforms() + subform = form.Subforms('mySubform') # SFDocuments.Form + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bcfaf687 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1173 @@ + + + + + + SFDocuments.FormControl service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_formcontrol.xhp + + + +
+ + FormControl service + +
+
+

SFDocuments.FormControl service

+ The FormControl service provides access to the controls that belong to a form, a subform or a table control of a FormDocument. Each instance of the FormControl service refers to a single control in the form. This service allows users to: + + + Get and set the properties of the control represented by the FormControl instance. + + + Access the current value displayed by the control. + + + Set the focus on the desired control. + + +
+ To use the FormControl service in a particular form, subform or table control, all controls must have unique names. + Radio buttons that share the same group name must also have unique control names. + The main purpose of the FormControl service is setting and getting the properties and values displayed by the controls in a form. + All controls have a Value property. However, its contents will vary according to the control type. For more information, read The Value Property below. + It is also possible to format the controls via the XControlModel and XControlView properties. + The SFDocuments.FormControl service is closely related to the SFDocuments.Form service. + + API;awt.XControl + API;awt.XControlModel + + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the FormControl service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The FormControl service is invoked from an existing Form service instance through its Controls method. + + Dim oDoc as Object, myForm As Object, myControl As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", ThisDataBaseDocument) + Set myForm = oDoc.Forms("formDocumentName", "formName") ' SFDocuments.Form + Set myControl = myForm.Controls("myTextBox") ' SFDocuments.FormControl + myControl.Value = "Current time = " & Now() + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + from time import localtime, strftime + bas = CreateScriptService('ScriptForge.Basic') + doc = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.Document', bas.ThisDatabaseDocument) + form = doc.Forms('formDocumentName', 'formName') # SFDocuments.Form + control = form.Controls('myTextBox') # SFDocuments.FormControl + control.Value = 'Current Time = ' + strftime("%a, %d %b %Y %H:%M:%S", localtime()) + + To learn more about how to open a FormDocument and get access to its forms, refer to the SFDocuments.Form service help page. + Alternatively a FormControl instance can be retrieved via the SFDocuments.FormEvent service, which returns the SFDocuments.FormControl class instance that triggered the event. + + Sub OnEvent(ByRef poEvent As Object) + Dim oControl As Object + Set oControl = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.FormEvent", poEvent) + ' oControl now represents the instance of the FormControl class that triggered the current event + ' ... + End Sub + + + + def onEvent(event: uno): + control = CreateScriptService('SfDocuments.FormEvent', event) + + Note that in previous examples, the prefix "SFDocuments." may be omitted. + + FormEvent service + +
+ The FormEvent service is used exclusively to create instances of the SFDocuments.Form and SFDocuments.FormControl services when a form or control event takes place. +
+

Control types

+ The FormControl service is available for the following control types: + + + Button + + + CheckBox + + + ComboBox + + + CurrencyField + + + DateField + + + FileControl + + + FixedText + + + FormattedField + + + GroupBox + + + HiddenControl + + + ImageButton + + + ImageControl + + + ListBox + + + NavigationBar + + + NumericField + + + PatternField + + + RadioButton + + + ScrollBar + + + SpinButton + + + TableControl + + + TextField + + + TimeField + + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Applicable to + + + Description + + + + + Action + + + No + + + String + + + Button + + + Specifies the action triggered when the button is clicked. Accepted values are: none, submitForm, resetForm, refreshForm, moveToFirst, moveToLast, moveToNext, moveToPrev, saveRecord, moveToNew, deleteRecord, undoRecord. + + + + + Caption + + + No + + + String + + + Button, CheckBox, FixedText, GroupBox, RadioButton + + + Specifies the text displayed by the control. + + + + + ControlSource + + + Yes + + + String + + + CheckBox, ComboBox, CurrencyField, DateField, FormattedField, ImageControl, ListBox, NumericField, PatternField, RadioButton, TextField, TimeField + + + Specifies the rowset field mapped onto the current control. + + + + + ControlType + + + Yes + + + String + + + All + + + One of the control types listed above. + + + + + Default + + + No + + + Boolean + + + Button + + + Specifies whether a command button is the default OK button. + + + + + DefaultValue + + + No + + + Variant + + + CheckBox, ComboBox, CurrencyField, DateField, FileControl, FormattedField, ListBox, NumericField, PatternField, RadioButton, SpinButton, TextField, TimeField + + + Specifies the default value used to initialize a control in a new record. + + + + + Enabled + + + No + + + Boolean + + + All (except HiddenControl) + + + Specifies if the control is accessible with the cursor. + + + + + Format + + + No + + + String + + + DateField, TimeField, FormattedField (read-only) + + + Specifies the format used to display dates and times. It must be one of following strings: + For dates: "Standard (short)", "Standard (short YY)", "Standard (short YYYY)", "Standard (long)", "DD/MM/YY", "MM/DD/YY", "YY/MM/DD", "DD/MM/YYYY", "MM/DD/YYYY" , "YYYY/MM/DD", "YY-MM-DD", "YYYY-MM-DD". + For times: "24h short", "24h long", "12h short", "12h long". + + + + + ListCount + + + Yes + + + Long + + + ComboBox, ListBox + + + Returns the number of rows in a ListBox or a ComboBox. + + + + + ListIndex + + + No + + + Long + + + ComboBox, ListBox + + + Specifies which item is selected in a ListBox or ComboBox. In case of multiple selection, the index of the first item is returned or only one item is set. + + + + + ListSource + + + No + + + Variant + + + ComboBox, ListBox + + + Specifies the data contained in a ComboBox or a ListBox as a zero-based array of string values. + Combined with ListSourceType, may also contain the name of a table, a query or a complete SQL statement. + + + + + ListSourceType + + + No + + + Integer + + + ComboBox, ListBox + + + Specifies the type of data contained in a combobox or a listbox. + It must be one of the com.sun.star.form.ListSourceType.* constants. + + + + + Locked + + + No + + + Boolean + + + ComboBox, CurrencyField, DateField, FileControl, FileControl, FormattedField, ImageControl, ListBox, NumericField, PatternField, TextField, TimeField + + + Specifies if the control is read-only. + + + + + MultiSelect + + + No + + + Boolean + + + ListBox + + + Specifies whether the user can select multiple items in a listbox. + + + + + Name + + + Yes + + + String + + + All + + + The name of the control. + + + + + Parent + + + Yes + + + Object + + + All + + + Depending on the parent type, a form, a subform or a tablecontrol, returns the parent SFDocuments.Form or SFDocuments.FormControl class object instance. + + + + + Picture + + + No + + + String + + + Button, ImageButton, ImageControl + + + Specifies the file name containing a bitmap or other type of graphic to be displayed on the control. The filename must comply with the FileNaming attribute of the ScriptForge.FileSystem service. + + + + + Required + + + No + + + Boolean + + + CheckBox, ComboBox, CurrencyField, DateField, ListBox, NumericField, PatternField, RadioButton, SpinButton, TextField, TimeField + + + A control is said required when the underlying data must not contain a null value. + + + + + Text + + + Yes + + + String + + + ComboBox, DateField, FileControl, FormattedField, PatternField, TextField, TimeField + + + Gives access to the text being displayed by the control. + + + + + TipText + + + No + + + String + + + All (except HiddenControl) + + + Specifies the text that appears as a tooltip when you hover the mouse pointer over the control. + + + + + TripleState + + + No + + + Boolean + + + CheckBox + + + Specifies if the checkbox control may appear dimmed (grayed) or not. + + + + + Value + + + No + + + Variant + + + + This property depends on the current control type. Refer to The Value property for more information. + + + + + Visible + + + No + + + Boolean + + + All (except HiddenControl) + + + Specifies if the control is hidden or visible. + + + + + XControlModel + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + All + + + The UNO object representing the control model. Refer to XControlModel and UnoControlModel in the API documentation for more information. + + + + + XControlView + + + Yes + + + UNO
object + + + All + + + The UNO object representing the control view. Refer to XControl and UnoControl in the API documentation for more information. + + +
+

The Value property

+ + + + Control type + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Button + + + Boolean + + + Applicable to toggle buttons only. + + + + + CheckBox + + + Boolean or Integer + + + 0, False: not checked
1, True: checked
2: grayed out, don't know (applicable if TripleState is True) + + + + + ComboBox + + + String + + + The selected value, as a String. The ListIndex property is an alternate option to access the index of the selected value. + + + + + CurrencyField + + + Numeric + + + + + + + + DateField + + + Date + + + + + + + + FileControl + + + String + + + A file name formatted in accordance with the FileNaming property of the ScriptForge.FileSystem service + + + + + FormattedField + + + String or Numeric + + + + + + + + HiddenControl + + + String + + + + + + + + ListBox + + + String or array of strings + + + The selected row(s) as a single string or an array of strings. Only a single value can be set. If the box is linked to a database, this property gets or sets the underlying data. Otherwise it gets or sets the data being displayed. + + + + + NumericField + + + Numeric + + + + + + + + PatternField + + + String + + + + + + + + RadioButton + + + Boolean + + + Each button has its own name. Multiple RadioButton controls are linked together when they share the same group name. If a RadioButton is set to True, the other related buttons are automatically set to False + + + + + ScrollBar + + + Numeric + + + Must be within the predefined bounds + + + + + SpinButton + + + Numeric + + + Must be within the predefined bounds + + + + + TextField + + + String + + + The text appearing in the field + + + + + TimeField + + + Date + + + + + +
+

Event properties

+ The properties below return or set URI strings that define the script triggered by the event. + + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Description as labeled in the Basic IDE + + + + + OnActionPerformed + + + No + + + Execute action + + + + + OnAdjustmentValueChanged + + + No + + + While adjusting + + + + + OnApproveAction + + + No + + + Approve action + + + + + OnApproveReset + + + No + + + Prior to reset + + + + + OnApproveUpdate + + + No + + + Before updating + + + + + OnChanged + + + No + + + Changed + + + + + OnErrorOccurred + + + No + + + Error occurred + + + + + OnFocusGained + + + No + + + When receiving focus + + + + + OnFocusLost + + + No + + + When losing focus + + + + + OnItemStateChanged + + + No + + + Item status changed + + + + + OnKeyPressed + + + No + + + Key pressed + + + + + OnKeyReleased + + + No + + + Key released + + + + + OnMouseDragged + + + No + + + Mouse moved while key presses + + + + + OnMouseEntered + + + No + + + Mouse inside + + + + + OnMouseExited + + + No + + + Mouse outside + + + + + OnMouseMoved + + + No + + + Mouse moved + + + + + OnMousePressed + + + No + + + Mouse button pressed + + + + + OnMouseReleased + + + No + + + Mouse button released + + + + + OnResetted + + + No + + + After resetting + + + + + OnTextChanged + + + No + + + Text modified + + + + + OnUpdated + + + No + + + After updating + + +
+ To learn more about URI strings, refer to the Scripting Framework URI Specification. + + + List of Methods in the FormControl Service + + + + Controls
+ + + SetFocus
+ + +
+ +
+ Controls -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FormControl service;Controls + +

Controls

+ This method is applicable only to controls of the TableControl type. The returned value depends on the arguments provided. + If the optional argument controlname is absent, then a zero-based Array containing the names of all controls is returned. + On the other hand, if a controlname is provided, the method returns a FormControl class instance corresponding to the specified control. + + svc.Controls(): str[0..*] + svc.Controls(controlname: str): svc + + controlname: A valid control name as a case-sensitive string. If absent, the list of control names is returned as a zero-based array. + + + Dim myGrid As Object, myList As Variant, myControl As Object + Set myGrid = myForm.Controls("myTableControl") ' SFDocuments.FormControl + ' Returns an Array with the names of all controls in "myTableControl" + myList = myGrid.Controls() + ' Returns a FormControl class instance corresponding to "myCheckBox" + Set myControl = myGrid.Controls("myCheckBox") + + Using Python: + + grid = form.Controls('myTableControl') # SFDocuments.FormControl + control_names = form.Controls() + control = grid.Controls('myCheckBox') # SFDocuments.FormControl + +
+
+ SetFocus -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + FormControl service;SetFocus + +

SetFocus

+ Sets the focus on the control. Returns True if focusing was successful. + This method is often called from a form or control event. + + svc.SetFocus(): bool + + + Dim oDoc As Object, oForm As Object, oControl As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", ThisComponent) + Set oForm = oDoc.Forms(0) + Set oControl = oForm.Controls("thisControl") ' SFDocuments.FormControl + oControl.SetFocus() + + + + bas = CreateScriptService('ScriptForge.Basic') + doc = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.Document', bas.ThisComponent) + form = doc.Forms(0) + control = form.Controls('thisControl') # SFDocuments.FormControl + control.SetFocus() + +
+ Additional examples -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +

Additional examples

+ Below are two examples that illustrate the use of the FormControl service. + The first example reads the current value in a ComboBox containing city names and writes it to a FixedTest control in a Form: + + Dim oDoc as Object, myForm as Object, myControl as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", ThisDataBaseDocument) + myForm = oDoc.Forms("formDocumentName", "formName") + Dim lbCity : lbCity = myForm.Controls("labelCity") + Dim cbCity : cbCity = myForm.Controls("comboboxCity") + lbCity.Caption = "Selected City: " & cbCity.Value + + + + bas = CreateScriptService('ScriptForge.Basic') # Basic-like methods + doc = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.Document', bas.ThisDatabaseDocument) + form = doc.Forms('formDocumentName', 'formName') + lbl_city = form.Controls('labelCity') + combo_city = form.Controls('comboboxCity') + lbl_city.Caption = "Selected city: " + combo_city.Value + + The following code snippet can be used to process RadioButton controls that share the same group name. In this example, suppose there are three radio buttons with names optA, optB and optC and we wish to display the caption of the selected control. + + Dim oDoc as Object, myForm as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Document", ThisDataBaseDocument) + myForm = oDoc.Forms("formDocumentName", "formName") + Dim optNames As Object : optNames = Array("optA", "optB", "optC") + Dim optControl as Object, opt as Variant + For Each opt In optNames + optControl = myForm.Controls(opt) + If optControl.Value = True Then + MsgBox "Selected option: " & optControl.Caption + Exit For + End If + Next opt + + + + bas = CreateScriptService('ScriptForge.Basic') # Basic-like methods + doc = CreateScriptService('SFDocuments.Document', bas.ThisDatabaseDocument) + form = doc.Forms('formDocumentName', 'formName') + radio_buttons = ['optA', 'optB', 'optC'] + for name in radio_buttons: + control = form.controls(name) + if control.Value == True: + bas.MsgBox('Selected option: ' + control.Caption) + break + + +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..98081e545 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + + Creating Python Scripts with ScriptForge + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_intro.xhp + + + + + + Python scripts with ScriptForge + +

Creating Python Scripts with ScriptForge

+

Differences between Basic and Python

+ The ScriptForge library is available both for Basic and Python. Most services, methods and properties work identically in both programming languages. However, due to differences in how each language works, ScriptForge users must be aware of some characteristics of the library when using Python: + + + Methods and Property names: In Python, all methods and properties can be used in lowercased, ProperCased or camelCased formats. + + + Arguments: All keyword arguments passed on to methods are lowercased. + + + Dates: All date objects are passed and returned as datetime.datetime native Python objects. + + + Arrays: One-dimensional arrays are passed and returned as tuples (which is an immutable object). Two-dimensional arrays are passed and returned as tuples of tuples. + + + None: Python's None keyword is equivalent to Basic's Null, Empty or Nothing. + + + UNO objects: All UNO structures are exchanged between Basic and Python without any changes. + + + Debugging: Whenever an error occurs in Python scripts that use ScriptForge, the error message provided by the Python execution stack displays the line of code that triggered the error. In Basic error messages do not display this information. + + + Visit %PRODUCTNAME Python Scripts Help for more information on Python scripting using %PRODUCTNAME. +

Running Python scripts on %PRODUCTNAME

+ Depending on what you intend to achieve, you may choose one of the following approaches to running Python scripts in %PRODUCTNAME: + + + Run Scripts inside the current %PRODUCTNAME process: Python scripts are executed from within the %PRODUCTNAME process by using the Tools - Macros - Run Macro menu or the APSO extension to call user scripts stored in the Python scripts folder. You can also use the APSO Python shell to interactively run Python scripts. + + + Run Scripts separately from the %PRODUCTNAME process: Python scripts are executed from an external process that connects to an ongoing %PRODUCTNAME process using a socket. + + + If you plan to run scripts from inside the %PRODUCTNAME process, it is recommended to install the APSO (Alternative Script Organizer for Python) extension. However, to develop Python scripts from outside %PRODUCTNAME, you can choose your preferred Python IDE. + +

Running Scripts from inside the %PRODUCTNAME process

+

Using the APSO extension

+ The easiest way to get started with Python scripting in %PRODUCTNAME is by installing the APSO extension. After installing it, open any %PRODUCTNAME component and go to Tools - Macros - Organize Python Scripts. + In APSO's main window go to Menu - Python Shell. + Alternatively you can open APSO using the default shortcut Alt + Shift + F11. + Now you can start typing Python commands and the shell will print the corresponding output after each line of code is executed. + To start using the ScriptForge library, you need to import the CreateScriptService method, with which you will be able to access the services provided by the library. The example below uses the Basic service to display a message box. + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox("Hello!") + + To run the example above, enter each line in the Python shell, one by one, pressing the Enter key after you type each line of code. + Now you can start executing Python commands using any of the ScriptForge services. For example, the code snippet below uses the UI service to create a blank Writer document. + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + doc = ui.CreateDocument("Writer") + + +

Creating Python script files

+ You can create your own Python files and edit them with your preferred text editor. Later you can call them from within any %PRODUCTNAME component. + The first step is to locate where your user scripts are stored. For that, refer to Python Scripts Organization and Location help page. + Now you can create a text file inside your Python user scripts folder, for instance sf_test.py, and start typing your scripts. + Next is a simple example that gets the numeric value from a Calc cell and increments it by 1. Simply type the following code into the sf_test.py file. + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + + def increment_cell(args=None): + value = doc.GetValue("A1") + value += 1 + doc.SetValue("A1", value) + + g_exportedScripts = (increment_cell, ) + + This example creates the increment_cell function. Note that g_exportedScripts is a tuple that tells which functions will be displayed in %PRODUCTNAME as user scripts. + To run this script from within a Calc document: + + + Create or open a Calc file. + + + Enter some numeric value into cell "A1" in the current sheet. + + + Go to Tools - Macros - Run Macros . + + + Choose My Macros - sf_test in the library selector. Then choose the increment_cell function under the Macro Name list. + + + Click Run. Note that the value in cell "A1" was incremented by 1. + + + You can also use APSO to run Python scripts in a similar manner: + + + First open APSO by going to Tools - Macros - Organize Python Scripts. + + + In the macro list, navigate to My Macros - sf_test - increment_cell. + + + Click Execute. + + + +

Running Scripts separately from the %PRODUCTNAME process

+
+

Determining the Installation Path

+ The first step to run scripts from a separate process is to find the folder where %PRODUCTNAME is installed. There are several ways to do that, but ScriptForge provides a quick way to identify your installation path. For that, open APSO's Python shell and type: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + fs.FileNaming = "SYS" + inst_dir = fs.InstallFolder + print(inst_dir) + + The output from the code above is the base directory where %PRODUCTNAME is installed. Now you need to add the "program" subfolder to the resulting path. This is the base folder from which you will run Python scripts from a separate process. + For example, suppose you get /usr/lib/libreoffice/ as the result from running the Python code above. Then you need to consider /usr/lib/libreoffice/program as the path to run your Python scripts. +
+ +

Start %PRODUCTNAME with socket settings

+ To run Python scripts from a separate process, you need to start %PRODUCTNAME with a few additional options that specify the hostname and port through which the external process will communicate with the %PRODUCTNAME component process. + Open the your operating system's command prompt, navigate to the program folder of your %PRODUCTNAME installation directory and type: + ./soffice --accept='socket,host=localhost,port=2021;urp;' + The command above will start %PRODUCTNAME with a communication channel open so that other processes can exchange messages with it. + Note that the previous example opens %PRODUCTNAME start center. If you want to open a specific component, for instance Writer, you can add the --writer flag to the command, as follows. + ./soffice --writer --accept='socket,host=localhost,port=2021;urp;' + Take note of the host and port parameters, which in this example are localhost and 2021, respectively. + +

Running an External Python Shell

+ Start the Python shell from within the program folder inside your %PRODUCTNAME installation path. Follow the steps above to learn how to find your installation path. + On Linux / Mac OS: + $ cd /usr/lib/libreoffice/program + $ python + On Windows: + $ cd C:\Program Files\LibreOffice\program\ + $ python.exe + This will open the Python shell and now you can start typing commands that will be executed by %PRODUCTNAME. But first you need to set up the socket connection. + + from scriptforge import ScriptForge, CreateScriptService + ScriptForge(hostname='localhost', port=2021) + + The second line of code above defines the host and port settings so that the Python shell can communicate with an ongoing %PRODUCTNAME process opened with the same socket settings. + Now you can run other Python commands and they will be able to communicate with the %PRODUCTNAME process. For example: + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + doc = ui.OpenDocument("~/Documents/myFile.ods") + bas.MsgBox(doc.DocumentType) + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..453fe345a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,375 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.L10N service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_l10n.xhp + + + +
+ + L10N service + +
+ +
+

ScriptForge.L10N service

+ This service provides a number of methods related to the translation of strings with minimal impact on the program's source code. The methods provided by the L10N service can be used mainly to: + + + Create POT files that can be used as templates for translation of all strings in the program. + + + Get translated strings at runtime for the language defined in the Locale property. + + +
+ + The acronym L10N stands for Localization and refers to a set of procedures for translating software to a specific country or region. + PO files have long been promoted in the free software community as a means to providing multilingual user interfaces. This is accomplished through the use of human-readable text files with a well defined structure that specifies, for any given language, the source language string and the localized string. + The main advantage of the PO format is dissociation of the programmer and the translator. PO files are independent text files, so the programmer can send POT template files to translators, who will then translate their contents and return the translated PO files for each supported language. + The L10N service is based on the GNU implementation of PO (portable object) files. To learn more about this file format, visit GNU gettext Utilities: PO Files. + This service implements the methods listed below: + + + AddText: Used by the programmer to build a set of strings that will be translated later. + + + AddTextsFromDialog: Extracts all strings from a Dialog service instance. + + + ExportToPOTFile: Exports the strings added by the AddText method to a POT file. + + + GetText: Gets the translated strings at runtime. + + + Note that the first two methods are used to build a set of translatable strings and export them to a POT file. However, it is not mandatory to create POT files using these methods. Since they are text files, the programmer could have created them using any text editor. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the L10N service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + There are several ways to invoke the L10N service using up to five optional arguments that specify the folder where PO files are stored, the locale and encoding to be used, as well as a fallback PO file and its encoding. + + + CreateScriptService("L10N", opt foldername: str, opt locale: str, encoding: str = "UTF-8", opt locale2: str, encoding2: str = "UTF-8"): svc + + foldername: The folder containing the PO files. It must be expressed in the FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + locale: A string in the form "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY) or in the form "la" (language) only. + encoding: The character set to be used. The default encoding is "UTF-8". + locale2: A string specifying the fallback locale to be used in case the PO file corresponding to the locale defined the locale parameter does not exist. This parameter is expressed in the form "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY) or "la" (language) only. + encoding2: The character set of the fallback PO file corresponding to the locale2 argument. The default encoding is "UTF-8". + To learn more about the names of character sets, visit IANA's Character Set page. Beware that %PRODUCTNAME does not implement all existing character sets. + + + The following example instantiates the L10N service without any optional arguments. This will only enable the AddText and ExportToPOTFile methods, which is useful for creating POT files. + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myPO As Variant + Set myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N") + + The example below specifies the folder containing the PO files. Because the locale is not defined, the service instance will use the locale defined for the %PRODUCTNAME user interface, which is the same locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + Set myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "C:\myPOFiles") + + The example above will result in an runtime error if the PO file corresponding to the OfficeLocale locale does not exist in the specified folder. + In the example below, the locale is explicitly defined to be Belgian French ("fr-BE"), hence the service will load the file "fr-BE.po" from the folder "C:\myPOFiles". If the file does not exist, an error will occur. + + Set myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "C:\myPOFiles", "fr-BE", "UTF-8") + + To avoid errors, it is possible to specify a preferred and a fallback locale and encoding. The following example will first try to load the file "fr-BE.po" from the specified folder and if it does not exist, the file "en-US.po" will be loaded. + + Set myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "C:\myPOFiles", "fr-BE", "UTF-8", "en-US", "UTF-8") + + PO files must be named in the form "la-CO.po" or "la.po", where "la" refers to the language and "CO" is the country. Some examples are: "en-US.po", "fr-BE.po" or "fr.po". + It is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set myPO = myPO.Dispose() + + + The examples above can be translated to Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + myPO = CreateScriptService('L10N') + + + myPO = CreateScriptService('L10N', r'C:\myPOFiles') + + + myPO = CreateScriptService('L10N', r'C:\myPOFiles', 'fr-BE') + + + myPO = CreateScriptService('L10N', r'C:\myPOFiles', 'fr-BE', 'UTF-8', 'en-US', 'UTF-8') + myPO = myPO.Dispose() + + Several instances of the L10N service may coexist. However, each instance must use a separate directory for its PO files. + + + L10N service;Folder + L10N service;Languages + L10N service;Locale + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Folder + + + Yes + + + String + + + The folder containing the PO files (see the FileSystem.FileNaming property to learn about the notation used). + + + + + Languages + + + Yes + + + Array + + + A zero-based array listing all the base names (without the ".po" extension) of the PO-files found in the specified Folder. + + + + + Locale + + + Yes + + + String + + + The currently active language-COUNTRY combination. This property will be initially empty if the service was instantiated without any of the optional arguments. + + +
+ + + + + List of Methods in the L10N Service + + + + + + AddText
+ AddTextsFromDialog + + + + + ExportToPOTFile

+ + + + + GetText

+ + + +
+ + +
+ AddText ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + L10N service;AddText + +

AddText

+ Adds a new entry in the list of localizable strings. It must not exist yet. + The method returns True if successful. + + + svc.AddText(context: str = '', msgid: str = '', comment: str = ''): bool + + + context: The key to retrieve the translated string with the GetText method. This parameter has a default value of "". + msgid: The untranslated string, which is the text appearing in the program code. It must not be empty. The msgid becomes the key to retrieve the translated string via GetText method when context is empty. + The msgid string may contain any number of placeholders (%1 %2 %3 ...) for dynamically modifying the string at runtime. + comment: Optional comment to be added alongside the string to help translators. + + The example below creates a set of strings in English: + + + myPO.AddText(, "This is a string to be included in a POT file") + myPO.AddText("CTX1", "A string with a context") + myPO.AddText(, "Provide a String value", Comment := "Do not translate the word String") + + + + myPO.AddText(msgid = 'This is a string to be included in a POT file') + myPO.AddText('CTX1', 'A string with a context') + myPO.AddText(msgid = 'Provide a String value', comment = 'Do not translate the word String') + +
+ +
+ AddTextsFromDialog ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + L10N service;AddTextsFromDialog + +

AddTextsFromDialog

+ Automatically extracts strings from a dialog and adds them to the list of localizable text strings. The following strings are extracted: +
+ + + The title of the dialog. + + + The caption of the following control types: Button, CheckBox, FixedLine, FixedText, GroupBox and RadioButton. + + + Static strings in ListBoxes and ComboBoxes. + + + The tooltip or help text displayed when the mouse hovers over the control. + + +
+ The method returns True if successful. + The dialog from which strings will be extracted must not be open when the method is called. + When a L10N service instance is created from an existing PO file, use the GetTextsFromL10N method from the Dialog service to automatically load all translated strings into the dialog. + + + svc.AddTextsFromDialog(dialog: svc): bool + + + dialog: a Dialog service instance corresponding to the dialog from which strings will be extracted. + + The following example extracts all strings from the dialog "MyDialog" stored in the "Standard" library and exports them to a POT file: + + + oDlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "MyDialog") + myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N") + myPO.AddTextsFromDialog(oDlg) + myPO.ExportToPOTFile("en-US.pot") + + + + dlg = CreateScriptService("Dialog", "GlobalScope", "Standard", "Dialog1") + myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N") + myPO.AddTextsFromDialog(dlg) + myPO.ExportToPOTFile("en-US.pot") + +
+ +
+ ExportToPOTFile --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + L10N service;ExportToPOTFile + +

ExportToPOTFile

+ Exports a set of untranslated strings as a POT file. + To build a set of strings you can use either a succession of AddText method calls, or by a successful invocation of the L10N service with the foldername argument present. It is also possible to use a combination of both techniques. + The method returns True if successful. + + + svc.ExportToPOTFile(filename: str, header: str = '', encoding:str = 'UTF-8'): bool + + + filename: The output file in FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + header: Comments that will be added on top of the generated POT file. + Do not include any leading "#" characters. If you want the header to be broken into multiple lines, insert escape sequences (\n) where relevant. A standard header will be added alongside the text specified in the header argument. + encoding: The character set to be used (Default = "UTF-8"). + + + ' Basic + myPO.ExportToPOTFile("myFile.pot", Header := "First line of the header\nSecond line of the header") + + + # Python + myPO.ExportToPOTFile('myFile.pot', header = 'First line of the header\nSecond line of the header') + + The generated file should successfully pass the msgfmt --check GNU command. +
+ +
+ GetText ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + L10N service;GetText + +

GetText

+ Gets the translated string corresponding to the given msgid argument. + A list of arguments may be specified to replace the placeholders (%1, %2, ...) in the string. + If no translated string is found, the method returns the untranslated string after replacing the placeholders with the specified arguments. + + This method can be called either by the full name GetText or by the shortcut _ (a single underscore): + + svc.GetText(msgid: str, args: any[0..*]): str + + + svc._(msgid: str, args: any[0..*]): str + + In the ScriptForge library, all methods starting with the "_" character are reserved for internal use only. However, the shortcut _ used for GetText is the only exception to this rule, hence it can be safely used in Basic and Python scripts. + + msgid: The untranslated string, which is the text appearing in the program code. It must not be empty. It may contain any number of placeholders (%1 %2 %3 ...) that can be used to dynamically insert text at runtime. + Besides using a single msgid string, this method also accepts the following formats: + + + The context string with which the method will retrieve the msgid in the PO file, or; + + + A combination context|msgid, instructing the method to retrieve the msgid using specified context value. The second part of the argument is used to improve code readability. + + + args: Values to be inserted into the placeholders. Any variable type is allowed, however only strings, numbers and dates will be considered. + + + Consider the following code is running on a %PRODUCTNAME installation with locale set to "es-ES". Additionally, there is a file "es-ES.po" inside the specified folder that translates the string passed to the GetText method: + + myPO = CreateScriptService("L10N", "C:\myPOFiles\") + myPO.GetText("Welcome %1! Hope you enjoy this program", "John") + ' "¡Bienvenido John! Espero que disfrutes de este programa" + + + + myPO = CreateScriptService('L10N', r"C:\myPOFiles") + myPO.GetText('Welcome %1! Hope you enjoy this program', 'John') + # "¡Bienvenido John! Espero que disfrutes de este programa" + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..162c63083 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,324 @@ + + + + + + SFWidgets.Menu service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_menu.xhp + + + +
+ + Menu service + +
+
+

SFWidgets.Menu service

+ The Menu service can be used to create and remove menus from the menubar of a %PRODUCTNAME document window. Each menu entry can be associated with a script or with a UNO command. This service provides the following capabilities: + + + Creation of menus with custom entries, checkboxes, radio buttons and separators. + + + Decoration of menu items with icons and tooltips. + + +
+ Menus created with this service are available only for a specified document window. They are not saved into the document or as application settings. Closing and opening the document will restore the default menubar settings. + When OLE objects such as Math formulas or Calc charts are edited from within a document, %PRODUCTNAME reconfigures the menubar according to the object. When this happens, the menus created with the Menu service are removed and are not be restored after editing the OLE object. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Menu service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + The Menu service is instantiated by calling the CreateMenu method from the Document service. The code snippet below creates a menu named My Menu in the current document window with two entries Item A and Item B. + + Sub CreateMenu() + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim oDoc as Object, oMenu as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document") + Set oMenu = oDoc.CreateMenu("My Menu") + With oMenu + .AddItem("Item A", Command := "About") + .AddItem("Item B", Script := "vnd.sun.star.script:Standard.Module1.ItemB_Listener?language=Basic&location=application") + .Dispose() + End With + End Sub + + After creating the menu, it is recommended to call the Dispose method to free the resources used by the Menu service instance. + In the example above, Item A is associated with the UNO command .uno:About whereas Item B is associated with the script ItemB_Listener defined in Module1 of the Standard library of the My Macros container. + The following example defines ItemB_Listener that will be called when Item B is clicked. This listener simply splits the argument string passed to the Sub and shows them in a message box. + + Sub ItemB_Listener(args As String) + ' Process the argument string passed to the listener + Dim sArgs as Object + sArgs = Split(args, ",") + MsgBox "Menu name: " & sArgs(0) & Chr(13) & _ + "Menu item: " & sArgs(1) & Chr(13) & _ + "Item ID: " & sArgs(2) & Chr(13) & _ + "Item status: " & sArgs(3) + End Sub + + As shown in the example above, menu entries associated with a script receive a comma-separated string argument with the following values: + + + The toplevel name of the menu. + + + The string ID of the selected menu entry. + + + The numeric ID of the selected menu entry. + + + The current state of the menu item. This is useful for checkboxes and radio buttons. If the item is checked, the value "1" is returned, otherwise "0" is returned. + + + + + The examples above can be written in Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + + def create_menu(args=None): + oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document") + oMenu = oDoc.CreateMenu("My Menu") + oMenu.AddItem("Item A", command="About") + oMenu.AddItem("Item B", script="vnd.sun.star.script:my_macros.py$item_b_listener?language=Python&location=user") + oMenu.Dispose() + + + def item_b_listener(args): + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + s_args = args.split(",") + msg = f"Menu name: {s_args[0]}\n" + msg += f"Menu item: {s_args[1]}\n" + msg += f"Item ID: {s_args[2]}\n" + msg += f"Item status: {s_args[3]}" + bas.MsgBox(msg) + + + + PopupService service;ShortcutCharacter + PopupService service;SubmenuCharacter + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + ShortcutCharacter + + + No + + + String + + + Character used to define the access key of a menu item. The default character is "~". + + + + + SubmenuCharacter + + + No + + + String + + + Character or string that defines how menu items are nested. The default character is ">". + + +
+ +

Menu and Submenus

+ To create a menu with submenus, use the character defined in the SubmenuCharacter property while creating the menu entry to define where it will be placed. For instance, consider the following menu/submenu hierarchy. + + ' Item A + ' Item B > Item B.1 + ' Item B.2 + ' ------ (line separator) + ' Item C > Item C.1 > Item C.1.1 + ' Item C.1.2 + ' Item C > Item C.2 > Item C.2.1 + ' Item C.2.2 + ' ------ (line separator) + ' Item C.2.3 + ' Item C.2.4 + + The code below uses the default submenu character ">" to create the menu/submenu hierarchy defined above: + + oMenu.AddItem("Item A") + oMenu.AddItem("Item B>Item B.1") + oMenu.AddItem("Item B>Item B.2") + oMenu.AddItem("---") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.1>Item C.1.1") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.1>Item C.1.2") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.1") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.2") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>---") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.3") + oMenu.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.4") + + The string "---" is used to define line separators in menus or submenus. + + +

Methods

+ + + List of Methods in the Menu Service + + + + + AddCheckBox
+ + + + + AddItem
+ + + + + AddRadioButton
+ + + +
+ +
+ AddCheckBox ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Menu service;AddCheckBox + +

AddCheckBox

+ Inserts a check box in the menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddCheckBox(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt status: bool, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str, opt command: str, opt script: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value used to identify the menu item. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + status: Defines whether the item is selected when the menu is created (Default = False). + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + command: The name of a UNO command without the .uno: prefix. If the command name does not exist, nothing happens. + script: The URI for a Basic or Python script that will be executed when the item is clicked. + + + + + ' Menu entry associated with the .uno:Paste command + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item A", Status := True, ToolTip := "Paste values", Command := "Paste") + ' Runs the Basic script Standard.Module1.MyListener stored in the document + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item B", Status := False, Script := "vnd.sun.star.script:Standard.Module1.MyListener?language=Basic&location=document") + ' Runs the Python script MyListener located in file myScripts.py in the user scripts folder + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item C", Status := True, Script := "vnd.sun.star.script:myScripts.py$MyListener?language=Python&location=user") + + + + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item A", status=True, tooltip="Paste values", command="Paste") + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item B", status=False, script="vnd.sun.star.script:Standard.Module1.MyListener?language=Basic&location=document") + oMenu.AddCheckBox("Item C", Status=True, Script="vnd.sun.star.script:myScripts.py$MyListener?language=Python&location=user") + +
+ +
+ AddItem ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Menu service;AddItem + +

AddItem

+ Inserts a label entry in the menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddItem(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str, opt command: str, opt script: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value to be returned when the item is clicked. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + command: The name of a UNO command without the .uno: prefix. If the command name does not exist, nothing happens. + script: The URI for a Basic or Python script that will be executed when the item is clicked. + + + + + oMenu.AddItem("Item A", Tooltip := "A descriptive message") + + + + oMenu.AddItem("Item A", tooltip = "A descriptive message") + +
+ +
+ AddRadioButton --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Menu service;AddRadioButton + +

AddRadioButton

+ Inserts a radio button entry in the menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddRadioButton(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt status: str, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str, opt command: str, opt script: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value to be returned when the item is clicked. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + status: Defines whether the item is selected when the menu is created (Default = False). + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + command: The name of a UNO command without the .uno: prefix. If the command name does not exist, nothing happens. + script: The URI for a Basic or Python script that will be executed when the item is clicked. + + + + + oMenu.AddRadioButton("Item A", Name := "A", Status := True) + + + + oMenu.AddRadioButton("Item A", name="A", status=True) + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..219669b9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + ScriptForge Method Signatures + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_methods.xhp + + + +

ScriptForge Method Signatures

+ + ScriptForge; Method signatures + + ScriptForge libraries aggregate macro scripting resources for %PRODUCTNAME to be invoked from Basic macros or Python scripts. Its modules and classes are invoked from user scripts as "Services" that expose properties, methods and events. + + + Whenever service methods are proposed solely for %PRODUCTNAME Basic, their syntax presentation matches that of Basic subroutines, functions or properties. + + + Whenever service methods are proposed for Python and Basic, or solely for Python, their syntax and arguments use a specific textual layout. + + + +

Basic only service method

+ Typographical characters such as brackets, ellipsis or curly braces denote optional, repetitive or compulsory arguments: + +

+ + FSO.HashFile(FileName As String, _ + Algorithm As String = {MD5|SHA1|SHA224|SHA256|SHA384|SHA512}) As String + SF_Array.ImportFromCSVFile(FileName As String, _ + [Delimiter = ","], [DateFormat As String]) As Variant + SF_String.SplitNotQuoted(InputStr As String, _ + [Delimiter As String], [Occurrences As Long], [QuoteChar As String]) As Variant + + +

Python or Basic service methods

+ The following typographical rules are mixing the UML notation, the API documentation layout and the UNO object inspector user interface: + + + Optional parameters are indicated with either opt, '=' accompanying a default value, or '[ ]' brackets. + + + arguments are lowercased, in order to comply with Python PEP 8 while Basic is case-agnostic. + + + Collections arguments or API sequences are denoted using UML multiplicity. That applies also to return values. + + + Basic data types and Python annotations are syntactically transposed as: + + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME
Basic + + + Syntax + + + Python + + + + + Boolean + + + bool + + + bool + + + + + Date + + + datetime + + + datetime + + + + + Double + + + float + + + float + + + + + Integer + + + int + + + int + + + + + Long + + + int + + + int + + + + + Object + + + obj + + + + + + + + Single + + + float + + + float + + + + + String + + + str + + + str + + + + + Variant + + + any + + + + + + + + UNO Object + + + uno + + + + + + + + User Defined
Type (UDT) + + + obj + + + + + + + + ScriptForge
service + + + svc + + + + + +
+

+ svc.Forms( opt form: any ): svc[0..*] + svc.MsgBox( prompt: str, buttons = svc.MB_OK , opt title: str ): opt str + svc.InputBox( prompt: str, default = "", [ title: str ], [ xpostwips: int, ypostwips: int ] ): str + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9283925b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,412 @@ + + + + + + ScriptForge.Platform service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_platform.xhp + + + +
+ + Platform service + +
+
+

ScriptForge.Platform service

+ The Platform service provides a collection of properties about the current execution environment and context, such as: + + + The hardware platform (architecture, CPU count, machine type, etc) + + + Operating system information (OS type, release, version, etc) + + + The %PRODUCTNAME version + + + The current user name + + +
+ All properties of the Platform service are read-only. +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Platform service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The examples below in Basic and Python instantiate the Platform service and access the Architecture property. + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim platform As Variant + platform = CreateScriptService("Platform") + MsgBox platform.Architecture + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc = CreateScriptService("Platform") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.Architecture) + + + Platform service;Architecture + Platform service;ComputerName + Platform service;CPUCount + Platform service;CurrentUser + Platform service;Extensions + Platform service;Fonts + Platform service;FormatLocale + Platform service;Locale + Platform service;Machine + Platform service;OfficeLocale + Platform service;OfficeVersion + Platform service;OSName + Platform service;OSPlatform + Platform service;OSRelease + Platform service;OSVersion + Platform service;Printers + Platform service;Processor + Platform service;PythonVersion + Platform service;SystemLocale + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Architecture + + + Yes + + + String + + + The hardware bit architecture. Example: '32bit' or '64bit' + + + + + ComputerName + + + Yes + + + String + + + The computer's network name. + + + + + CPUCount + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + The number of central processing units. + + + + + CurrentUser + + + Yes + + + String + + + The name of the currently logged user. + + + + + Extensions + + + Yes + + + String array + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the internal IDs of all installed extensions. + + + + + FilterNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + Returns a zero-based unsorted array of strings containing the available document import and export filter names. + + + + + Fonts + + + Yes + + + String array + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the names of all available fonts. + + + + + FormatLocale + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the locale used for numbers and dates as a string in the format "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY). + + + + + Locale + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the locale of the operating system as a string in the format "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY). This is equivalent to the SystemLocale property. + + + + + Machine + + + Yes + + + String + + + The machine type. Examples are: 'i386' or 'x86_64'. + + + + + OfficeLocale + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the locale of the user interface as a string in the format "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY). + + + + + OfficeVersion + + + Yes + + + String + + + The actual %PRODUCTNAME version expressed as
' %PRODUCTNAME w.x.y.z (The Document Foundation)'. + Example: 'LibreOffice 7.4.1.2 (The Document Foundation, Debian and Ubuntu)' + + + + + OSName + + + Yes + + + String + + + The operating system type. Example: 'Darwin, Linux' or 'Windows'. + + + + + OSPlatform + + + Yes + + + String + + + A single string identifying the underlying platform with as much useful and human-readable information as possible. + Example: 'Linux-5.8.0-44-generic-x86_64-with-glibc2.32' + + + + + OSRelease + + + Yes + + + String + + + The operating system's release. Example: '5.8.0-44-generic' + + + + + OSVersion + + + Yes + + + String + + + The operating system's build or version. + Example: '#50-Ubuntu SMP Tue Feb 9 06:29:41 UTC 2021' + + + + + Printers + + + Yes + + + String
array + + + The list of available printers as a zero-based array. + The default printer is put in the first position of the list (index = 0). + + + + + Processor + + + Yes + + + String + + + The real processor name. Example: 'amdk6'. + This property may return the same value as the Machine property. + + + + + PythonVersion + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the version of the Python interpreter being used as a string in the format "Python major.minor.patchlevel" (ex: "Python 3.9.7"). + + + + + SystemLocale + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the locale of the operating system as a string in the format "la-CO" (language-COUNTRY). This is equivalent to the Locale property. + + +
+ + The following examples in Basic and Python illustrate how to use the Fonts property to write the names of all available fonts to the current Calc sheet starting at cell "A1": + + + Dim oDoc as Object + Dim allFonts as Object + Dim svcPlatform as Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + Set svcPlatform = CreateScriptService("Platform") + allFonts = svcPlatform.Fonts + oDoc.setArray("~.A1", allFonts) + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc_platform = CreateScriptService("Platform") + doc = CreateScriptService("Calc") + all_fonts = svc_platform.Fonts + doc.setArray("~.A1", all_fonts) + + +
+ + Platform information with INFO("system") Calc formula + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b36ebbda3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,348 @@ + + + + + + + SFWidgets.PopupMenu service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_popupmenu.xhp + + + +
+ + PopupMenu service + +
+
+

SFWidgets.PopupMenu service

+ The PopupMenu service can be used to create popup menus that can be associated with events or executed by scripts. This service provides the following capabilities: + + + Creation of popup menus with custom entries, checkboxes and radio buttons. + + + Decoration of menu items with icons and tooltips. + + +
+ +

Service invocation

+ Before using the PopupMenu service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + The PopupMenu service can be instantiated in multiple ways. The example below creates a popup menu without associating it with a mouse or application event. + + Sub ShowPopup + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myPopup As Object + Set myPopup = CreateScriptService("SFWidgets.PopupMenu", , 300, 300) + myPopup.AddItem("Item ~A") + myPopup.AddItem("Item ~B") + vResponse = myPopup.Execute() + MsgBox("Selected item ID: " & vResponse) + myPopup.Dispose() + End Sub + + Running the Sub defined above will create a popup menu with two entries in the position X=300 and Y=300 on the screen. + The prefix SFWidgets can be suppressed while invoking the PopupMenu service. + The following example defines a Sub that can be associated with a mouse event: + + Sub MyPopupClick(Optional poMouseEvent as Object) + Dim myPopup As Object + Set myPopup = CreateScriptService("PopupMenu", poMouseEvent) + ' Populate popupmenu with items + Dim vResponse As Variant + vResponse = myPopup.Execute(False) + ' Do something based on vResponse + ' ... + myPopup.Dispose() + End Sub + + Use the Dispose method to free resources after executing the popup menu. + It is also possible to associate a popup menu with events triggered by %PRODUCTNAME applications, form and dialog controls. Events such as "Mouse button pressed" and "Mouse button released" are commonly associated with popup menus. + + Sub MyPopupClick(Optional poEvent as Object) + Dim myPopup As Object + Set myPopup = CreateScriptService("PopupMenu", poEvent) + ' ... + End Sub + + + + The examples above can be written in Python as follows: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + + def show_popup(args=None): + my_popup = CreateScriptService("SFWidgets.PopupMenu", None, 300, 300) + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + my_popup.AddItem("Item ~A") + my_popup.AddItem("Item ~B") + response = my_popup.Execute() + bas.MsgBox(f"Selected item ID: {response}") + my_popup.Dispose() + + + def my_popup_click(poEvent=None): + my_popup = CreateScriptService("SFWidgets.PopupMenu", poEvent) + # Populate popupmenu with items + response = my_popup.Execute() + # Do something based on response + my_popup.Dispose() + + + + PopupService service;ShortcutCharacter + PopupService service;SubmenuCharacter + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + ShortcutCharacter + + + No + + + String + + + Character used to define the access key of a menu item. The default character is "~". + + + + + SubmenuCharacter + + + No + + + String + + + Character or string that defines how menu items are nested. The default character is ">". + + +
+ +

Menu and Submenus

+ To create a popup menu with submenus, use the character defined in the SubmenuCharacter property while creating the menu entry to define where it will be placed. For instance, consider the following menu/submenu hierarchy. + + ' Item A + ' Item B > Item B.1 + ' Item B.2 + ' ------ (line separator) + ' Item C > Item C.1 > Item C.1.1 + ' Item C.1.2 + ' Item C > Item C.2 > Item C.2.1 + ' Item C.2.2 + ' ------ (line separator) + ' Item C.2.3 + ' Item C.2.4 + + The code below uses the default submenu character ">" to create the menu/submenu hierarchy defined above: + + myPopup.AddItem("Item A") + myPopup.AddItem("Item B>Item B.1") + myPopup.AddItem("Item B>Item B.2") + myPopup.AddItem("---") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.1>Item C.1.1") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.1>Item C.1.2") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.1") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.2") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>---") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.3") + myPopup.AddItem("Item C>Item C.2>Item C.2.4") + + The string "---" is used to define line separators in menus or submenus.. +
+

Using icons

+ Items in the menu can have icons, which are specified as arguments in the AddCheckBox, AddItem and AddRadioButton methods. + All icons available in %PRODUCTNAME can be used by specifying their path relative to the folder where icon files are located in the installation folder. Icons are located in the following folder: + INSTALLDIR/share/config + Use the InstallFolder property of the FileSystem service to determine where %PRODUCTNAME is installed in your system. + This folder contains a series of ZIP files containing the image files of each available icon set. The images inside these ZIP files are organized into folders. To use an icon, specify the icon file with the path to its location inside the ZIP file. + The example below uses the icon "sc_newdoc.svg" that is located inside the "cmd" folder. The forward slash "/" character is used as the path separator regardless of the operating system. + + + myMenu.AddItem("Item A", Icon := "cmd/sc_newdoc.svg") + + + + myMenu.AddItem("Item A", icon="cmd/sc_newdoc.svg") + + All icon sets have the same internal structure. The actual icon displayed depends on the icon set currently in use. +
+ +

Methods

+ + + List of Methods in the PopupMenu Service + + + + + AddCheckBox
+ AddItem + + + + + AddRadioButton

+ + + + + Execute

+ + + +
+ +
+ AddCheckBox ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + PopupMenu service;AddCheckBox + +

AddCheckBox

+ Inserts a check box in the popup menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddCheckBox(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt status: bool = False, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value to be returned when the item is clicked. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + status: Defines whether the item is selected when the menu is created (Default = False). + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + + + + myPopup.AddCheckBox("Option A", Status := True) + + + + my_popup.AddCheckBox("Option A", status=True) + +
+ +
+ AddItem ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + PopupMenu service;AddItem + +

AddItem

+ Inserts a menu entry in the popup menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddItem(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value to be returned when the item is clicked. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + + + + myPopup.AddItem("Item A", Tooltip := "A descriptive message") + + + + my_popup.AddItem("Item A", tooltip = "A descriptive message") + +
+ +
+ AddRadioButton --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + PopupMenu service;AddRadioButton + +

AddRadioButton

+ Inserts a radio button entry in the popup menu. Returns an integer value that identifies the inserted item. + + + svc.AddRadioButton(menuitem: str, opt name: str, opt status: bool = False, opt icon: str, opt tooltip: str): int + + + menuitem: Defines the text to be displayed in the menu. This argument also defines the hierarchy of the item inside the menu by using the submenu character. + name: String value to be returned when the item is clicked. By default, the last component of the menu hierarchy is used. + status: Defines whether the item is selected when the menu is created (Default = False). + icon: Path and name of the icon to be displayed without the leading path separator. The actual icon shown depends on the icon set being used. + tooltip: Text to be displayed as tooltip. + + + + myPopup.AddRadioButton("Option A", Name := "A", Status := True) + + + + my_popup.AddRadioButton("Option A", name="A", status=True) + +
+ +
+ Execute --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + PopupMenu service;Execute + +

Execute

+ Displays the popup menu and waits for a user action. Returns the item clicked by the user. + If the user clicks outside the popup menu or presses the Esc key, then no item is selected. In such cases, the returned value depends on the returnid parameter. If returnid = True and no item is selected, then the value 0 (zero) is returned. Otherwise an empty string "" is returned. + + + svc.Execute(opt returnid: bool = True): any + + + returnid: If True the selected item ID is returned. If False the method returns the item's name (Default = True). + + In the examples below, a popup menu is created and the item's name is returned because the returnid argument is set to False. + + + myPopup.AddItem("Item A", Name := "A") + myPopup.AddItem("Item B", Name := "B") + Dim vResponse as Variant + vResponse = myPopup.Execute(False) + + + + my_popup.AddItem("Item A", name="A") + my_popup.AddItem("Item B", name="B") + response = my_popup.Execute(False) + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fee97f17 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,605 @@ + + + + + + ScriptForge.Region service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_region.xhp + + + +
+ + Region service + +
+
+

ScriptForge.Region service

+ The Region service provides a collection of properties and methods to handle locale and region-related aspects of programming, such as: + + + Accessing locale and region-dependent settings such as number formatting, currency and timezones. + + + Converting timezones and calculate Daylight Saving Time (DST) offsets. + + + Transforming numbers into text in any supported language. + + +
+ +

Definitions

+

Locale or Region

+ A string combining a language and a country in the format "la-CO". The language part is expressed with 2 or 3 lowercase characters followed by a dash and 2 uppercase characters representing the country. + For instance, "en-US" corresponds to the English language in the United States; "fr-BE" corresponds to the French language in Belgium, and so forth. + On some situations the full locale is not required and only the language or country may be specified. + Most properties and methods accept a locale as argument. If no locale is specified, then the user-interface locale is used, which is defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. +

Timezone

+ A string in the format "Region/City" such as "Europe/Berlin", or a timezone ID such as "UTC" or "GMT-8:00". Refer to the wiki page List of tz database and timezones for a list of possible timezone names and IDs. + Providing an invalid timezone string to any of the methods in the Region service will not result in a runtime error. Instead, methods as UTCDateTime and UTCNow will return the current operating system date and time. + The time offset between the timezone and the Greenwich Meridian Time (GMT) is expressed in minutes. + The Daylight Saving Time (DST) is an additional offset. + The timezone and DST offsets may be positive or negative. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Region service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + The examples below in Basic and Python instantiate the Region service and access the Country property. + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim oRegion As Variant + oRegion = CreateScriptService("Region") + MsgBox oRegion.Country("en-US") ' United States + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + oRregion = CreateScriptService("Region") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(oRegion.Country("en-US")) + + + + Region service;Country + Region service;Currency + Region service;DatePatterns + Region service;DateSeparator + Region service;DayAbbrevNames + Region service;DayNames + Region service;DayNarrowNames + Region service;DecimalPoint + Region service;Language + Region service;ListSeparator + Region service;MonthAbbrevNames + Region service;MonthNames + Region service;MonthNarrowNames + Region service;ThousandSeparator + Region service;TimeSeparator + + +

Properties

+ All properties listed below accept a locale argument, provided as a string. Some properties require this argument to be in the format "la-CO", whereas others may receive "la" or "CO" as input. + + + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Locale + + + Description + + + + + Country + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la‑CO"
"CO" + + + Returns the country name in English corresponding to a given region. + + + + + Currency + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO"
"CO" + + + Returns the ISO 4217 currency code of the specified region. + + + + + DatePatterns + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the date acceptance patterns for the specified region. + + + + + DateSeparator + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns the date separator used in the given region. + + + + + DayAbbrevNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of abbreviated weekday names in the specified language. + + + + + DayNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of weekday names in the specified language. + + + + + DayNarrowNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of the initials of weekday names in the specified language. + + + + + DecimalPoint + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns the decimal separator used in numbers in the specified region. + + + + + Language + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns the name of the language, in English, of the specified region. + + + + + ListSeparator + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns the list separator used in the specified region. + + + + + MonthAbbrevNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of abbreviated month names in the specified language. + + + + + MonthNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of month names in the specified language. + + + + + MonthNarrowNames + + + Yes + + + String array + + + "la-CO"
"la" + + + Returns a zero-based array of strings containing the list of the initials of month names in the specified language. + + + + + ThousandSeparator + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns the thousands separator used in numbers in the specified region. + + + + + TimeSeparator + + + Yes + + + String + + + "la-CO" + + + Returns the separator used to format times in the specified region. + + +
+ + + + List of Methods in the Region Service + + + + + DSTOffset
+ LocalDateTime
+ + + + + Number2Text
+ TimeZoneOffset
+ + + + + UTCDateTime
+ UTCNow
+ + + +
+ +
+ DSTOffset ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Region service;DSTOffset + +

DSTOffset

+ Computes the additional Daylight Saving Time (DST) offset, in minutes, that is applicable to a given region and timezone. + + + svc.DSTOffset(localdatetime: date, timezone: str, opt locale: str): int + + + localdatetime: the local date and time expressed as a date. + timezone: the timezone for which the offset will be calculated. + locale: the locale specifying the country for which the offset will be calculated, given either in "la-CO" or "CO" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + ' Calculates the offset applicable in the "America/Los_Angeles" timezone + Dim aDateTime As Date, offset As Integer + aDateTime = DateSerial(2022, 7, 1) + TimeSerial(16, 0, 0) + offset = oRegion.DSTOffset(aDateTime, "America/Los_Angeles", "US") ' 60 (minutes) + aDateTime = DateSerial(2022, 1, 1) + TimeSerial(16, 0, 0) + offset = oRegion.DSTOffset(aDateTime, "America/Los_Angeles", "US") ' 0 (minutes) + + + + import datetime + aDateTime = datetime.datetime(2022, 7, 1, 16, 0, 0) + offset = oRegion.DSTOffset(aDateTime, "America/Los_Angeles", "US") ' 60 (minutes) + aDateTime = datetime.datetime(2022, 1, 1, 16, 0, 0) + offset = oRegion.DSTOffset(aDateTime, "America/Los_Angeles", "US") ' 0 (minutes) + +
+ +
+ LocalDateTime ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Region service;LocalDateTime + +

LocalDateTime

+ Computes the local date and time from a UTC date and time. + + + svc.LocalDateTime(utcdatetime: date, timezone: str, opt locale: str): date + + + utcdatetime: the UTC date and time, expressed using a date object. + timezone: the timezone for which the local time will be calculated. + locale: the locale specifying the country for which the local time will be calculated, given either in "la-CO" or "CO" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + ' June 6th, 2022 at 10:30:45 (used here as UTC time) + Dim UTCTime As Date, localTime As Date + UTCTime = DateSerial(2022, 6, 23) + TimeSerial(10, 30, 45) + ' Calculates local time in Sao Paulo, Brazil + ' June 6th, 2022 at 07:30:45 + localTime = oRegion.LocalDateTime(UTCTime, "America/Sao_Paulo", "BR") + + + + import datetime + utcTime = datetime.datetime(2022, 6, 23, 10, 30, 45) + localTime = oRegion.LocalDateTime(utcTime, "America/Sao_Paulo", "BR") + +
+ +
+ Number2Text ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Region service;Number2Text + +

Number2Text

+ Converts numbers and monetary values into written text for any of the currently supported languages. + For a list of all supported languages visit the XNumberText Interface API reference. + + + svc.Number2Text(number: any, opt locale: str): str + + + number: the number to be converted into written text. It can be provided either as a numeric type or as a string. When a string is provided, it can be preceded by a prefix informing how the numbers should be written. It is also possible to include ISO 4217 currency codes. See examples below for more information. + locale: the locale defining the language into which the number will be converted to, given either in "la-CO" or "la" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + ' Returns "one hundred five" + Dim numText As String + numText = oRegion.Number2Text(105, "en-US") + ' Returns: "two point four two" + numText = oRegion.Number2Text(2.42, "en-US") + ' Returns: "twenty-five euro and ten cents" Notice the "EUR" currency symbol + numText = oRegion.Number2Text("EUR 25.10", "en-US") + ' Returns: "fifteenth"; Notice the "ordinal" prefix + numText = oRegion.Number2Text("ordinal 15", "en-US") + + + + numText = oRegion.Number2Text(105, "en-US") + numText = oRegion.Number2Text(2.42, "en-US") + numText = oRegion.Number2Text("EUR 25.10", "en-US") + numText = oRegion.Number2Text("ordinal 15", "en-US") + + To get a list of all supported prefixes in a given language, call Number2Text with the special "help" argument, as shown in the example below: + + prefixes = oRegion.Number2Text("help") + MsgBox prefixes + ' Considering the "en-US" locale the message box will show the following text + ' one, two, three + ' ordinal: first, second, third + ' ordinal-number: 1st, 2nd, 3rd + ' year: nineteen ninety-nine, two thousand, two thousand one + ' currency (for example, USD): two U.S. dollars and fifty cents + ' money USD: two and 50/100 U.S. dollars + + The first line in the message box does not have a prefix, which means that it is the standard format. The subsequent lines include the prefix and some examples of numbers using its format. + Each language has its own set of supported prefixes. +
+ +
+ TimeZoneOffset ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Region service;TimeZoneOffset + +

TimeZoneOffset

+ Returns the offset between GMT and the given timezone and locale, in minutes. + + + svc.TimeZoneOffset(timezone: str, opt locale: str): int + + + timezone: the timezone for which the offset to the GMT will be calculated. + locale: the locale specifying the country for which the offset will be calculated, given either in "la-CO" or "CO" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + Dim offset As Integer + offset = oRegion.TimeZoneOffset("America/New_York", "US") ' -300 + offset = oRegion.TimeZoneOffset("Europe/Berlin", "DE") ' 60 + + + + offset = oRegion.TimeZoneOffset("America/New_York", "US") # -300 + offset = oRegion.TimeZoneOffset("Europe/Berlin", "DE") # 60 + +
+ +
+ UTCDateTime ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Region service;UTCDateTime + +

UTCDateTime

+ Returns the UTC date and time considering a given local date and time in a timezone. + + + svc.UTCDateTime(localdatetime: date, timezone: str, opt locale: str): date + + + localdatetime: the local date and time in a specific timezone expressed as a date. + timezone: the timezone for which the localdatetime argument was given. + locale: the locale specifying the country for which the localdatetime argument was given, expressed either in "la-CO" or "CO" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + ' Date/Time in Berlin, June 23, 2022 at 14:30:00 + Dim localDT As Date, utcTime As Date + localDT = DateSerial(2022, 6, 23) + TimeSerial(14, 30, 0) + ' The UTC date/time is June 23, 2022 at 12:30:00 + utcTime = oRegion.UTCDateTime(localDT, "Europe/Berlin", "DE") + + + + import datetime + localDT = datetime.datetime(2022, 6, 23, 14, 30, 0) + utcTime = oRegion.UTCDateTime(localDT, "Europe/Berlin", "DE") + +
+ +
+ UTCNow ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Region service;UTCNow + +

UTCNow

+ Returns the current UTC date and time, given a timezone and locale. + This method uses the current date and time of your operating system to calculate the UTC time. + + + svc.UTCNow(timezone: str, opt locale: str): date + + + timezone: the timezone for which the current UTC time will be calculated. + locale: the locale specifying the country for which the current UTC time will be calculated, given either in "la-CO" or "CO" formats. The default value is the locale defined in the OfficeLocale property of the Platform service. + + + + ' Suppose the operating system time is June 23rd, 2022 at 10:42:00 + ' If the computer is in Europe/Berlin, then UTC time is June 23rd, 2022 at 08:42:00 + Dim utcTime As Date + utcTime = oRegion.UTCNow("Europe/Berlin", "DE") + + + + utcTime = oRegion.UTCNow("Europe/Berlin", "DE") + +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8462b426 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.Services service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_services.xhp + + + +
+ + Services service + +

ScriptForge.Services service

+ The main purpose of the Services module is to provide access to the CreateScriptService method, which can be called in user scripts to instantiate services that are implemented using the ScriptForge framework. +
+In ScriptForge terminology a service is a collection of methods and properties that can be used for a common purpose. For example, the String service provides methods for manipulating strings whereas the FileSystem service allows for the manipulation of files and folders. +The Services module of the ScriptForge library provides additional methods that are used either internally to register available services or by developers who are interested in extending ScriptForge by creating new services. The only method that is relevant for user scripts is CreateScriptService. + +
+ CreateScriptService ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Services service;CreateScriptService + +

CreateScriptService

+ This method is used to instantiate a ScriptForge service so it can be called in user scripts. + The returned value is a Basic object or Nothing if an error occurred. + + + svc.CreateScriptService(service: str, [arg0: any] ...): svc + + + service: The name of the service identified as a string in the format "library.service": + + + The library is a Basic library that must exist in the GlobalScope. The default value is "ScriptForge". + + + The service is one of the services registered by the ScriptForge library. + + + arg0, ...: A list of arguments required by the invoked service. + If the first argument refers to an event manager, then arg0 is mandatory and must be the UNO object representing the event provided as argument to the user macro. + + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + ' To be done once + Dim svc As Object + Set svc = CreateScriptService("Array") + ' Refers to the "ScriptForge.Array" service or SF_Array + Set svc = CreateScriptService("ScriptForge.Dictionary") + ' Returns a new empty dictionary class instance; "ScriptForge." is optional + Set svc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Calc") + ' Refers to the Calc service, implemented in the associated SFDocuments library + Set svc = CreateScriptService("Timer", True) + ' Returns a Timer class instance starting immediately + Set svc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.DocumentEvent", oEvent) + ' Refers to the DocumentEvent service implemented in the associated SFDocuments library + ' Returns the instance of the Document class that fired the event + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc = CreateScriptService("Array") + svc = CreateScriptService("ScriptForge.Dictionary") + svc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Calc") + svc = CreateScriptService("Timer", True) + svc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.DocumentEvent", oEvent) + + Python scripts support keyword arguments when calling CreateScriptService. The following example illustrates this concept by instantiating the Timer and Document services using keyword arguments. + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + # Timer + my_timer = CreateScriptService("Timer", start = True) + # Document + my_doc = CreateScriptService("Document", windowname = "some_file.ods") + + To make writing Python scripts more fluid, ScriptForge provides the Basic service which allows Python scripts to call a collection of methods with the same syntax and meaning as their homonymous native Basic functions. + The following example instantiates the Basic service and calls the MsgBox method, which is equivalent to the MsgBox function available in Basic: + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox("Hello World!") + + Beware that the Basic service has to be instantiated in Python scripts using the CreateScriptService method. +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff4124323 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.Session service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_session.xhp + + + +
+ + Session service + +

ScriptForge.Session service

+ The Session service gathers various general-purpose methods about: + + + the installation or execution environment + + + UNO introspection + + + the invocation of external scripts or programs + + +
+ +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Session service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim session As Variant + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + +

Constants

+ Below is a list of constants available to ease the designation of the library containing a Basic or Python script to invoke. Use them as session.CONSTANT. +
+ + + + CONSTANT + + + Value + + + Where to find the library? + + + Applicable + + + + + SCRIPTISEMBEDDED + + + "document" + + + in the document + + + Basic + Python + + + + + SCRIPTISAPPLICATION + + + "application" + + + in any shared library + + + Basic + + + + + SCRIPTISPERSONAL + + + "user" + + + in My Macros + + + Python + + + + + SCRIPTISPERSOXT + + + "user:uno_packages" + + + in an extension installed for the current user + + + Python + + + + + SCRIPTISSHARED + + + "share" + + + in %PRODUCTNAME macros + + + Python + + + + + SCRIPTISSHAROXT + + + "share:uno_packages" + + + in an extension installed for all users + + + Python + + + + + SCRIPTISOXT + + + "uno_packages" + + + in an extension but the installation parameters are unknown + + + Python + + +
+
+ + + + List of Methods in the Session Service + + + + + ExecuteBasicScript
+ ExecuteCalcFunction
+ ExecutePythonScript
+ GetPDFExportOptions
+ HasUnoMethod
+ + + + + HasUnoProperty
+ OpenURLInBrowser
+ RunApplication
+ SendMail
+ SetPDFExportOptions
+ + + + + UnoMethods
+ UnoProperties
+ UnoObjectType
+ WebService

+ + + +
+ + Execute... methods in Session service behave as follows: +
Arguments are passed by value. Changes made by the called function to the arguments do not update their values in the calling script. +
A single value or an array of values is returned to the calling script. + + +
+ ExecuteBasicScript ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;ExecuteBasicScript + +

ExecuteBasicScript

+ Execute the Basic script given its name and location and fetch its result if any. + If the script returns nothing, which is the case of procedures defined with Sub, the returned value is Empty. + + + session.ExecuteBasicScript(scope: str, script: str, args: any[0..*]): any + + + scope: String specifying where the script is stored. It can be either "document" (constant session.SCRIPTISEMBEDDED) or "application" (constant session.SCRIPTISAPPLICATION). + script: String specifying the script to be called in the format "library.module.method" as a case-sensitive string. + + + The library is loaded in memory if necessary. + + + The module must not be a class module. + + + The method may be a Sub or a Function. + + + args: The arguments to be passed to the called script. + + Consider the following Basic function named DummyFunction that is stored in "My Macros" in the "Standard" library inside a module named "Module1". + The function simply takes in two integer values v1 and v2 and return the sum of all values starting in v1 and ending in v2. + + Function DummyFunction(v1 as Integer, v2 as Integer) As Long + Dim result as Long, i as Integer + For i = v1 To v2 + result = result + i + Next i + DummyFunction = result + End Function + + The examples below show how to call DummyFunction from within Basic and Python scripts. + + + Dim session : session = CreateScriptService("Session") + Dim b_script as String, result as Long + b_script = "Standard.Module1.DummyFunction" + result = session.ExecuteBasicScript("application", b_script, 1, 10) + MsgBox result ' 55 + + + + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + b_script = 'Standard.Module1.DummyFunction' + result = session.ExecuteBasicScript('application', b_script, 1, 10) + bas.MsgBox(result) # 55 + +
+ +
+ ExecuteCalcFunction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;ExecuteCalcFunction + +

ExecuteCalcFunction

+ Execute a Calc function using its English name and based on the given arguments. +
If the arguments are arrays, the function is executed as an array formula. + + + session.ExecuteCalcFunction(calcfunction: str, args: any[0..*]): any + + + calcfunction: The name of the Calc function to be called, in English. + args: The arguments to be passed to the called Calc function. Each argument must be either a string, a numeric value or an array of arrays combining those types. + + + + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("AVERAGE", 1, 5, 3, 7) ' 4 + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("ABS", Array(Array(-1, 2, 3), Array(4, -5, 6), Array(7, 8, -9)))(2)(2) ' 9 + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("LN", -3) + ' Generates an error. + + + + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("AVERAGE", 1, 5, 3, 7) # 4 + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("ABS", ((-1, 2, 3), (4, -5, 6), (7, 8, -9)))[2][2] # 9 + session.ExecuteCalcFunction("LN", -3) + +
+ +
+ ExecutePythonScript ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;ExecutePythonScript + +

ExecutePythonScript

+ Execute the Python script given its location and name, fetch its result if any. Result can be a single value or an array of values. + If the script is not found, or if it returns nothing, the returned value is Empty. + + + + session.ExecutePythonScript(scope: str, script: str, args: any[0..*]): any + + + scope: One of the applicable constants listed above. The default value is session.SCRIPTISSHARED. + script: Either "library/module.py$method" or "module.py$method" or "myExtension.oxt|myScript|module.py$method" as a case-sensitive string. + + library: The folder path to the Python module. + myScript: The folder containing the Python module. + module.py: The Python module. + method: The Python function. + + args: The arguments to be passed to the called script. + + Consider the Python function odd_integers defined below that creates a list with odd integer values between v1 and v2. Suppose this function is stored in a file named my_macros.py in your user scripts folder. + + def odd_integers(v1, v2): + odd_list = [v for v in range(v1, v2 + 1) if v % 2 != 0] + return odd_list + + Read the help page Python Scripts Organization and Location to learn more about where Python scripts can be stored. + The following examples show how to call the function odd_integers from within Basic and Python scripts. + + + Dim script as String, session as Object + script = "my_macros.py$odd_integers" + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + Dim result as Variant + result = session.ExecutePythonScript(session.SCRIPTISPERSONAL, script, 1, 9) + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(result) + + + + session = CreateScriptService("Session") + script = "my_macros.py$odd_integers" + result = session.ExecutePythonScript(session.SCRIPTISPERSONAL, script, 1, 9) + bas.MsgBox(repr(result)) + +
+ +
+ GetPDFExportOptions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;GetPDFExportOptions + +

GetPDFExportOptions

+ Returns the current PDF export settings defined in the PDF Options dialog, which can be accessed by choosing File - Export as - Export as PDF. + Export options set with the PDF Options dialog are kept for future use. Hence GetPDFExportOptions returns the settings currently defined. In addition, use SetPDFExportOptions to change current PDF export options. + This method returns a Dictionary object wherein each key represent export options and the corresponding values are the current PDF export settings. + Read the PDF Export wiki page to learn more about all available options. + + + session.GetPDFExportOptions(): obj + + + + + Dim expSettings As Object, msg As String, key As String, optLabels As Variant + expSettings = session.GetPDFExportOptions() + optLabels = expSettings.Keys + For Each key in optLabels + msg = msg + key & ": " & expSettings.Item(key) & Chr(10) + Next key + MsgBox msg + ' Zoom: 100 + ' Changes: 4 + ' Quality: 90 + ' ... + + +
+ +
+ HasUnoMethod ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;HasUnoMethod + +

HasUnoMethod

+ Returns True if an UNO object contains the given method. Returns False when the method is not found or when an argument is invalid. + + + session.HasUnoMethod(unoobject: uno, methodname: str): bool + + + unoobject: The object to inspect. + methodname: the method as a case-sensitive string + + + + Dim a As Variant + a = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + MsgBox session.HasUnoMethod(a, "callFunction") ' True + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + a = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + result = session.HasUnoMethod(a, "callFunction") + bas.MsgBox(result) # True + +
+ +
+ HasUnoProperty ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;HasUnoProperty + +

HasUnoProperty

+ Returns True if a UNO object has the given property. Returns False when the property is not found or when an argument is invalid. + + + session.HasUnoProperty(unoobject: uno, propertyname: str): bool + + + unoobject: The object to inspect. + propertyname: the property as a case-sensitive string + + + + Dim svc As Variant + svc = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + MsgBox session.HasUnoProperty(svc, "Wildcards") + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + a = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + result = session.HasUnoProperty(a, "Wildcards") + bas.MsgBox(result) # True + +
+ +
+ OpenURLInBrowser --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;OpenURLInBrowser + +

OpenURLInBrowser

+ Open a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in the default browser. + + + session.OpenURLInBrowser(url: str) + + + url: The URL to open. + + + ' Basic + session.OpenURLInBrowser("help.libreoffice.org/") + + + # Python + session.OpenURLInBrowser("help.libreoffice.org/") + +
+ +
+ RunApplication ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;RunApplication + +

RunApplication

+ Executes an arbitrary system command and returns True if it was launched successfully. + + + session.RunApplication(command: str, parameters: str): bool + + + command: The command to execute. This may be an executable file or a document which is registered with an application so that the system knows what application to launch for that document. The command must be expressed in the current SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + parameters: A list of space separated parameters as a single string. The method does not validate the given parameters, but only passes them to the specified command. + + + + session.RunApplication("Notepad.exe") + session.RunApplication("C:\myFolder\myDocument.odt") + session.RunApplication("kate", "/home/user/install.txt") ' GNU/Linux + + + + session.RunApplication("Notepad.exe") + session.RunApplication(r"C:\myFolder\myDocument.odt") + session.RunApplication("kate", "/home/user/install.txt") # GNU/Linux + +
+ +
+ SendMail ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;SendMail + +

SendMail

+ Send a message - with optional attachments - to recipients from the user's mail client. The message may be edited by the user before sending or, alternatively, be sent immediately. + + + session.SendMail(recipient: str, cc: str = '', bcc: str = '', subject: str = '', body: str = '', filenames: str = '', editmessage: bool = True) + + + recipient: An email address (the "To" recipient). + cc: A comma-separated list of email addresses (the "carbon copy" recipients). + bcc: A comma-separated list of email addresses (the "blind carbon copy" recipients). + subject: the header of the message. + body: The contents of the message as an unformatted text. + filenames: a comma-separated list of file names. Each file name must respect the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + editmessage: When True (default), the message is edited before being sent. + + + + session.SendMail("someone@example.com" _ + , Cc := "b@other.fr, c@other.be" _ + , FileNames := "C:\myFile1.txt, C:\myFile2.txt") + + + + session.SendMail("someone@example.com", + cc="john@other.fr, mary@other.be" + filenames=r"C:\myFile1.txt, C:\myFile2.txt") + +
+ +
+ SetPDFExportOptions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;SetPDFExportOptions + +

SetPDFExportOptions

+ Modifies the PDF export settings defined in the PDF Options dialog, which can be accessed by choosing File - Export as - Export as PDF. + Calling this method changes the actual values set in the PDF Options dialog, which are used by the ExportAsPDF method from the Document service. + This method returns True when successful. + Read the PDF Export wiki page to learn more about all available options. + + + session.SetPDFExportOptions(pdfoptions: obj): bool + + + pdfoptions: Dictionary object that defines the PDF export settings to be changed. Each key-value pair represents an export option and the value that will be set in the dialog. + + + The following example changes the maximum image resolution to 150 dpi and exports the current document as a PDF file. + + Dim newSettings As Object, oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("Document") + Set newSettings = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + newSettings.Add("ReduceImageResolution", True) + newSettings.Add("MaxImageResolution", 150) + session.SetPDFExportOptions(newSettings) + oDoc.ExportAsPDF("C:\Documents\myFile.pdf", Overwrite := True) + + +
+ +
+ UnoMethods --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;UnoMethods + +

UnoMethods

+ Returns a list of the methods callable from an UNO object. The list is a zero-based array of strings and may be empty. + + + session.UnoMethods(unoobject: uno): str[0..*] + + + unoobject: The object to inspect. + + + + Dim svc : svc = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + Dim methods : methods = session.UnoMethods(svc) + Dim msg as String + For Each m in methods + msg = msg & m & Chr(13) + Next m + MsgBox msg + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + a = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + methods = session.UnoMethods(a) + msg = "\n".join(methods) + bas.MsgBox(msg) + +
+ +
+ UnoProperties ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;UnoProperties + +

UnoProperties

+ Returns a list of the properties of an UNO object. The list is a zero-based array of strings and may be empty. + + + session.UnoProperties(unoobject: uno): str[0..*] + + + unoobject: The object to inspect. + + + + Dim svc As Variant + svc = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + MsgBox SF_Array.Contains(session.UnoProperties(svc), "Wildcards") ' True + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + svc = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + properties = session.UnoProperties(a) + b = "Wildcards" in properties + bas.MsgBox(str(b)) # True + +
+ +
+ UnoObjectType ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Session service;UnoObjectType + +

UnoObjectType

+ Identify the type of a UNO object as a string. + + + session.UnoObjectType(unoobject: uno): str + + + unoobject: The object to identify. + + + + Dim svc As Variant, txt As String + svc = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.system.SystemShellExecute") + txt = session.UnoObjectType(svc) ' "com.sun.star.comp.system.SystemShellExecute" + svc = CreateUnoStruct("com.sun.star.beans.Property") + txt = session.UnoObjectType(svc) ' "com.sun.star.beans.Property" + + + + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + svc = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.system.SystemShellExecute") + txt = session.UnoObjectType(svc) # "com.sun.star.comp.system.SystemShellExecute" + svc = bas.createUnoService("com.sun.star.beans.Property") + txt = session.UnoObjectType(svc) # "com.sun.star.beans.Property" + +
+ +
+ WebService ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Session service;WebService + +

WebService

+ Get some web content from a URI. + + + session.WebService(uri: str): str + + + uri: URI address of the web service. + + + + session.WebService("wiki.documentfoundation.org/api.php?" _ + & "hidebots=1&days=7&limit=50&action=feedrecentchanges&feedformat=rss") + + + + session.WebService(("wiki.documentfoundation.org/api.php?" + "hidebots=1&days=7&limit=50&action=feedrecentchanges&feedformat=rss")) + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ca692c21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1501 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.String service (SF_String) + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_string.xhp + + + + +
+ + String service + +
+ +
+

ScriptForge.String service

+ The String service provides a collection of methods for string processing. These methods can be used to: + + + Validate the contents of strings + + + Format strings by trimming, justifying or wrapping their contents + + + Use regular expressions to search and replace substrings + + + Apply hash algorithms on strings, etc. + + +
+ +

Definitions

+ +

Line breaks

+ The String service recognizes the following line breaks: + + + + Symbolic name + + + ASCII number + + + + + + Line feed
+ Vertical tab
+ Carriage return
+ Line feed + Carriage return
+ File separator
+ Group separator
+ Record separator
+ Next line
+ Line separator
+ Paragraph separator + + + + + 10
12
13
10 + 13
28
29
30
133
8232
8233 + + + +
+ +

Whitespaces

+ The String service recognizes the following whitespaces: + + + + Symbolic name + + + ASCII number + + + + + + Space
+ Horizontal tab
+ Line feed
+ Vertical tab
+ Form feed
+ Carriage return
+ Next line
+ No-break space
+ Line separator
+ Paragraph separator + + + + + 32
9
10
11
12
13
133
160
8232
8233 + + + +
+ +

Escape sequences

+ Below is a list of escape sequences that can be used in strings. + + + + Escape Sequence + + + Symbolic name + + + ASCII number + + + + + + \n
\r
\t + + + + + Line feed
+ Carriage return
+ Horizontal tab + + + + + 10
13
9 + + + +
+ To have the escape sequence "\n" interpreted as an actual string, simply use "\\n" instead of "\" & Chr(10). + +

Non-printable characters:

+ Characters defined in the Unicode Character Database as “Other” or “Separator” are considered as non-printable characters. + Control characters (ascii code <= 0x1F) are also considered as non-printable. + +

Quotes inside strings:

+ To add quotes in strings use \' (single quote) or \" (double quote). For example: + + + The string [str\'i\'ng] is interpreted as [str'i'ng] + + + The string [str\"i\"ng] is interpreted as [str"i"ng] + + + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the ScriptForge.String service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded using: + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + + Loading the library will create the SF_String object that can be used to call the methods in the String service. + The following code snippets show the three ways to call methods from the String service (the Capitalize method is used as an example): + + Dim s as String : s = "abc def" + s = SF_String.Capitalize(s) ' Abc Def + + + Dim s as String : s = "abc def" + Dim svc : svc = SF_String + s = svc.Capitalize(s) ' Abc Def + + + Dim s as String : s = "abc def" + Dim svc : svc = CreateScriptService("String") + s = svc.Capitalize(s) ' Abc Def + + + The code snippet below illustrates how to invoke methods from the String service in Python scripts. The IsIPv4 method is used as an example. + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + ip_address = '192.168.0.14' + svc.IsIPv4(ip_address) # True + + +

Properties

+ The SF_String object provides the following properties for Basic scripts: + + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Description + + + + + sfCR + + + Yes + + + Carriage return: Chr(13) + + + + + sfCRLF + + + Yes + + + Carriage return + Linefeed: Chr(13) & Chr(10) + + + + + sfLF + + + Yes + + + Linefeed: Chr(10) + + + + + sfNEWLINE + + + Yes + + + Carriage return + Linefeed, which can be
1) Chr(13) & Chr(10) or +
2) Linefeed: Chr(10) +
depending on the operating system. + + + + + sfTAB + + + Yes + + + Horizontal tabulation: Chr(9) + + +
+ You can use the properties above to identify or insert the corresponding characters inside strings. For example, the Linefeed can be replaced by SF_String.sfLF. + + + + List of Methods in the String Service + + + + + Capitalize
+ Count
+ EndsWith
+ Escape
+ ExpandTabs
+ FilterNotPrintable
+ FindRegex
+ HashStr
+ HtmlEncode
+ IsADate
+ IsAlpha
+ IsAlphaNum
+ IsAscii
+ IsDigit
+ IsEmail
+ + + + + IsFileName
+ IsHexDigit
+ IsIBAN
+ IsIPv4
+ IsLike
+ IsLower
+ IsPrintable
+ IsRegex
+ IsSheetName
+ IsTitle
+ IsUpper
+ IsUrl
+ IsWhitespace
+ JustifyCenter
+ JustifyLeft
+ + + + + JustifyRight
+ Quote
+ ReplaceChar
+ ReplaceRegex
+ ReplaceStr
+ Represent
+ Reverse
+ SplitLines
+ SplitNotQuoted
+ StartsWith
+ TrimExt
+ Unescape
+ Unquote
+ Wrap

+ + + +
+ The first argument of most methods is the string to be considered. It is always passed by reference and left unchanged. Methods such as Capitalize, Escape, etc return a new string after their execution. + Because Python has comprehensive built-in string support, most of the methods in the String service are available for Basic scripts only. The methods available for Basic and Python are: HashStr, IsADate, IsEmail, IsFileName, IsIBAN, IsIPv4, IsLike, IsSheetName, IsUrl, SplitNotQuoted and Wrap. + +
+ Capitalize -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Capitalize + +

Capitalize

+ Capitalizes the first character from each word in the input string. + + + svc.Capitalize(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to be capitalized. + + + Dim sName as String : sName = "john smith" + Dim sCapitalizedName as String + sCapitalizedName = SF_String.Capitalize(sName) + MsgBox sCapitalizedName 'John Smith + +
+ +
+ Count ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Count + +

Count

+ Counts the number of occurrences of a substring or a regular expression within a string. + + + svc.Count(inputstr: str, substring: str, [isregex: bool], [casesensitive: bool]): int + + + inputstr: The input string to be examined + substring: The substring or the regular expression to be used during search + isregex: Use True if the substring is a regular expression (Default = False) + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + 'Counts the occurrences of the substring "or" inside the input string (returns 2) + MsgBox SF_String.Count("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit.", "or", CaseSensitive := False) + 'Counts the number of words with only lowercase letters (returns 7) + MsgBox SF_String.Count("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit.", "\b[a-z]+\b", IsRegex := True, CaseSensitive := True) + + To learn more about regular expressions, refer to the Python's documentation on Regular Expression Operations. +
+ +
+ EndsWith ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;EndsWith + +

EndsWith

+ Returns True if a string ends with a specified substring. + The function returns False when either the string or the substring have a length = 0 or when the substring is longer than the string. + + + svc.EndsWith(inputstr: str, substring: str, [casesensitive: bool]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be tested. + substring: The substring to be searched at the end of inputstr. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + 'Returns True because the method was called with the default CaseSensitive = False + MsgBox SF_String.EndsWith("abcdefg", "EFG") + 'Returns False due to the CaseSensitive parameter + MsgBox SF_String.EndsWith("abcdefg", "EFG", CaseSensitive := True) + +
+ +
+ Escape ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;Escape + +

Escape

+ Converts linebreaks and tabs contained in the input string to their equivalent escaped sequence (\\, \n, \r, \t). + + + svc.Escape(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to be converted. + + + 'Returns the string "abc\n\tdef\\n" + MsgBox SF_String.Escape("abc" & Chr(10) & Chr(9) & "def\n") + +
+ +
+ ExpandTabs -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;ExpandTabs + +

ExpandTabs

+ Replaces Tab characters Chr(9) by space characters to replicate the behavior of tab stops. + If a line break is found, a new line is started and the character counter is reset. + + + svc.ExpandTabs(inputstr: str, [tabsize: int]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be expanded + tabsize: This parameter is used to determine the Tab stops using the formula: TabSize + 1, 2 * TabSize + 1 , ... N * TabSize + 1 (Default = 8) + + + Dim myText as String + myText = "100" & SF_String.sfTAB & "200" & SF_String.sfTAB & "300" & SF_String.sfNEWLINE & _ + "X" & SF_String.sfTAB & "Y" & SF_String.sfTAB & "Z" + MsgBox SF_String.ExpandTabs(myText) + '100 200 300 + 'X Y Z + +
+ +
+ FilterNotPrintable ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;FilterNotPrintable + +

FilterNotPrintable

+ Replaces all non-printable characters in the input string by a given character. + + + svc.FilterNotPrintable(inputstr: str, [replacedby: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be searched + replacedby: Zero, one or more characters that will replace all non-printable characters in inputstr (Default = "") + + + Dim LF : LF = Chr(10) + Dim myText as String + myText = "àén ΣlPµ" & LF & " Русский" & "\n" + MsgBox SF_String.FilterNotPrintable(myText) + ' "àén ΣlPµ Русский\n" + +
+ +
+ FindRegex --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;FindRegex + +

FindRegex

+ Finds in a string a substring matching a given regular expression. + + + svc.FindRegex(inputstr: str, regex: str, [start: int], [casesensitive: bool], [forward: bool]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be searched + regex: The regular expression + start: The position in the string where the search will begin. This parameter is passed by reference, so after execution the value of start will point to the first character of the found substring. If no matching substring is found, start will be set to 0. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + forward: Determines the direction of the search. If True, search moves forward. If False search moves backwards (Default = True) + At the first iteration, if forward = True, then start should be equal to 1, whereas if forward = False then start should be equal to Len(inputstr) + + + Dim lStart As Long : lStart = 1 + Dim result as String + result = SF_String.FindRegex("abCcdefghHij", "C.*H", lStart, CaseSensitive := True) + MsgBox lStart & ": " & result + '3: CcdefghH + + In the example above, the new value of lStart can be used to keep searching the same input string by setting the Start parameter to lStart + Len(result) at the next iteration. +
+ +
+ HashStr ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;HashStr + +

HashStr

+ Hash functions are used inside some cryptographic algorithms, in digital signatures, message authentication codes, manipulation detection, fingerprints, checksums (message integrity check), hash tables, password storage and much more. + The HashStr method returns the result of a hash function applied on a given string and using a specified algorithm, as a string of lowercase hexadecimal digits. + The hash algorithms supported are: MD5, SHA1, SHA224, SHA256, SHA384 and SHA512. + + + svc.HashStr(inputstr: str, algorithm: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to hash. It is presumed to be encoded in UTF-8. The hashing algorithm will consider the string as a stream of bytes. + algorithm: One of the supported algorithms listed above, passed as a string. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.HashStr("œ∑¡™£¢∞§¶•ªº–≠œ∑´®†¥¨ˆøπ‘åß∂ƒ©˙∆˚¬", "MD5") + ' c740ccc2e201df4b2e2b4aa086f35d8a + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + a_string = "œ∑¡™£¢∞§¶•ªº–≠œ∑´®†¥¨ˆøπ‘åß∂ƒ©˙∆˚¬" + hash_value = svc.HashStr(a_string, "MD5") + bas.MsgBox(hash_value) + # c740ccc2e201df4b2e2b4aa086f35d8a + +
+ +
+ HtmlEncode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;HtmlEncode + +

HtmlEncode

+ Encodes the input string into the HTML character codes, replacing special characters by their & counterparts. + For example, the character é would be replaced by &eacute; or an equivalent numerical HTML code. + + + svc.HtmlEncode(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to encode. + + + MsgBox SF_String.HtmlEncode("<a href=""https://a.b.com"">From α to ω</a>") + ' "&lt;a href=&quot;https://a.b.com&quot;&gt;From &#945; to &#969;&lt;/a&gt;" + +
+ +
+ IsADate ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsADate + +

IsADate

+ Returns True if the input string is a valid date according to a specified date format. + + + svc.IsADate(inputstr: str, [dateformat: str]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False + dateformat: The date format, as a string. It can be either "YYYY-MM-DD" (default), "DD-MM-YYYY" or "MM-DD-YYYY" + The dash (-) may be replaced by a dot (.), a slash (/) or a space. + If the format is invalid, the method returns False. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsADate("2020-12-31", "YYYY-MM-DD") ' True + + This method checks the format of the input string without performing any calendar-specific checks. Hence it does not test the input string for leap years or months with 30 or 31 days. For that, refer to the IsDate built-in function. + The example below shows the difference between the methods IsADate (ScriptForge) and the IsDate (built-in) function. + + Dim myDate as String : myDate = "2020-02-30" + MsgBox SF_String.IsADate(myDate, "YYYY-MM-DD") 'True + MsgBox IsDate(myDate) ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + s_date = "2020-12-31" + result = svc.IsADate(s_date) # True + +
+ +
+ IsAlpha ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsAlpha + +

IsAlpha

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are alphabetic. + Alphabetic characters are those characters defined in the Unicode Character Database as Letter. + + + svc.IsAlpha(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsAlpha("àénΣlPµ") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsAlpha("myVar3") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsAlphaNum -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsAlphanum + +

IsAlphaNum

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are alphabetic, digits or "_" (underscore). The first character must not be a digit. + + + svc.IsAlphaNum(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsAlphaNum("_ABC_123456_abcàénΣlPµ") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsAlphaNum("123ABC") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsAscii ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsAscii + +

IsAscii

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are Ascii characters. + + + svc.IsAscii(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsAscii("a%?,25") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsAscii("abcàénΣlPµ") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsDigit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsDigit + +

IsDigit

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are digits. + + + svc.IsDigit(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsDigit("123456") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsDigit("_12a") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsEmail ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsEmail + +

IsEmail

+ Returns True if the string is a valid email address. + + + svc.IsEmail(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsEmail("first.last@something.org") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsEmail("first.last@something.com.br") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsEmail("first.last@something.123") ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsEmail("first.last@something.org")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsEmail("first.last@something.com.br")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsEmail("first.last@something.123")) # False + +
+ +
+ IsFileName -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsFileName + +

IsFileName

+ Returns True if the string is a valid filename in a given operating system. + + + svc.IsFileName(inputstr: str, [osname: str]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + osname: The operating system name, as a string. It can be "WINDOWS", "LINUX", "MACOSX" or "SOLARIS". + The default value is the current operating system on which the script is running. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsFileName("/home/user/Documents/a file name.odt", "LINUX") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsFileName("C:\home\a file name.odt", "LINUX") ' False + MsgBox SF_String.IsFileName("C:\home\a file name.odt", "WINDOWS") ' True + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsFileName("/home/user/Documents/a file name.odt", "LINUX")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsFileName(r"C:\home\a file name.odt", "LINUX")) # False + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsFileName(r"C:\home\a file name.odt", "WINDOWS")) # True + +
+ +
+ IsHexDigit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsHexDigit + +

IsHexDigit

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are hexadecimal digits. + + + svc.IsHexDigit(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + The hexadecimal digits may be prefixed with "0x" or "&H". + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsHexDigit("&H00FF") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsHexDigit("08AAFF10") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsHexDigit("0x18LA22") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsIBAN ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;IsIBAN + +

IsIBAN

+ Returns True if the string is a valid International Bank Account Number (IBAN). The comparison is not case-sensitive. + + + svc.IsIBAN(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + True if the string contains a valid IBAN number. + + + ' Basic + MsgBox SF_String.IsIBAN("BR15 0000 0000 0000 1093 2840 814 P2") ' True + + + # Python + result = svc.IsIBAN("BR15 0000 0000 0000 1093 2840 814 P2") # True + +
+ +
+ IsIPv4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;IsIPv4 + +

IsIPv4

+ Returns True if the string is a valid IP(v4) address. + + + svc.IsIPv4(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsIPv4("192.168.1.50") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsIPv4("192.168.50") ' False + MsgBox SF_String.IsIPv4("255.255.255.256") ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsIPv4("192.168.1.50")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsIPv4("192.168.50")) # False + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsIPv4("255.255.255.256")) # False + +
+ +
+ IsLike ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;IsLike + +

IsLike

+ Returns True if the whole input string matches a given pattern containing wildcards. + + + svc.IsLike(inputstr: str, pattern: str, [casesensitive: bool]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + pattern: The pattern as a string. Wildcards are: + + + "?" represents any single character; + + + "*" represents zero, one, or multiple characters. + + + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsLike("aAbB", "?A*") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsLike("C:\a\b\c\f.odb", "?:*.*") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsLike("name:host", "?*@?*") ' False + MsgBox SF_String.IsLike("@host", "?*@?*") ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsLike("aAbB", "?A*")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsLike(r"C:\a\b\c\f.odb", "?:*.*")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsLike("name:host", "?*@?*")) # False + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsLike("@host", "?*@?*")) # False + +
+ +
+ IsLower ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsLower + +

IsLower

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are in lowercase. Non-alphabetic characters are ignored. + + + svc.IsLower(inputstr: str): bool + + + InputStr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsLower("abc'(-xy4z") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsLower("1234") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsLower("abcDefg") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsPrintable ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsPrintable + +

IsPrintable

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are printable. + + + svc.IsPrintable(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsPrintable("àén ΣlPµ Русский") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsPrintable("First line." & Chr(10) & "Second Line.") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsRegex ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsRegex + +

IsRegex

+ Returns True if the whole input string matches a given regular expression. + + + svc.IsRegex(inputstr: str, regex: str, [casesensitive: bool]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + regex: The regular expression. If empty, the method returns False. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsRegex("aAbB", "[A-Za-z]+") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsRegex("John;100", "[A-Za-z]+;[0-9]+") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsRegex("John;100;150", "[A-Za-z]+;[0-9]+") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsSheetName ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsSheetName + +

IsSheetName

+ Returns True if the input string is a valid Calc sheet name. + + + svc.IsSheetName(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsSheetName("1àbc + ""déf""") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsSheetName("[MySheet]") ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsSheetName("1àbc + ""déf""")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsSheetName("[MySheet]")) # False + + A sheet name must not contain the characters [ ] * ? : / \ or the character ' (apostrophe) as first or last character. +
+ +
+ IsTitle ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsTitle + +

IsTitle

+ Returns True if the first character of every word is in uppercase and the other characters are in lowercase. + + + svc.IsTitle(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsTitle("This Is The Title Of My Book") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsTitle("This is the Title of my Book") ' False + MsgBox SF_String.IsTitle("Result Number 100") ' True + +
+ +
+ IsUpper ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsUpper + +

IsUpper

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are in uppercase. Non alphabetic characters are ignored. + + + svc.IsUpper(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsUpper("ABC'(-XYZ") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsUpper("A Title") ' False + +
+ +
+ IsUrl ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsUrl + +

IsUrl

+ Returns True if the string is a valid absolute URL (Uniform Resource Locator) address. Only the http, https and ftp protocols are supported. + + + svc.IsUrl(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsUrl("http://foo.bar/?q=Test%20URL-encoded%20stuff") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsUrl("www.somesite.org") ' False + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsUrl("http://foo.bar/?q=Test%20URL-encoded%20stuff")) # True + bas.MsgBox(svc.IsUrl("www.somesite.org")) # False + +
+ +
+ IsWhitespace ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;IsWhitespace + +

IsWhitespace

+ Returns True if all characters in the string are whitespaces + + + svc.IsWhitespace(inputstr: str): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be checked. If empty, the method returns False. + + + MsgBox SF_String.IsWhitespace(" ") ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsWhitespace(" " & Chr(9) & Chr(10)) ' True + MsgBox SF_String.IsWhitespace("") ' False + +
+ +
+ JustifyCenter ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;JustifyCenter + +

JustifyCenter

+ Returns the input string center-justified. + The leading and trailing white spaces are stripped and the remaining characters are completed left and right up to a specified total length with the character padding. + + + svc.JustifyCenter(inputstr: str, [length: int], [padding: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be center-justified. If empty, the method returns an empty string. + length: The length of the resulting string (default = the length of the input string). + If the specified length is shorter than the center-justified input string, then the returned string is truncated. + padding: The single character to be used as padding (default = the Ascii space " "). + + + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyCenter("Title", Length := 11) ' " Title " + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyCenter(" ABCDEF", Padding := "_") ' "__ABCDEF__" + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyCenter("A Long Title", Length := 5) ' "ong T" + +
+ +
+ JustifyLeft ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;JustifyLeft + +

JustifyLeft

+ Returns the input string left-justified. + The leading white spaces are stripped and the remaining characters are completed to the right up to a specified total length with the character padding. + + + svc.JustifyLeft(inputstr: str, [length: int], [padding: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be left-justified. If empty, the method returns an empty string. + length: The length of the resulting string (default = the length of the input string). + If the specified length is shorter than the left-justified input string, then the returned string is truncated. + padding: The single character to be used as padding (default = the Ascii space " "). + + + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyLeft("Title", Length := 10) ' "Title " + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyLeft(" ABCDEF", Padding := "_") ' "ABCDEF____" + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyLeft("A Long Title", Length := 5) ' "A Lon" + +
+ +
+ JustifyRight ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;JustifyRight + +

JustifyRight

+ Returns the input string right-justified. + The leading white spaces are stripped and the remaining characters are completed to the left up to a specified total length with the character padding. + + + svc.JustifyRight(inputstr: str, [length: int], [padding: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to be right-justified. If empty, the method returns an empty string. + length: The length of the resulting string (default = the length of the input string). + If the specified length is shorter than the right-justified input string, then the returned string is truncated. + padding: The single character to be used as padding (default = the Ascii space " "). + + + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyRight("Title", Length := 10) ' " Title" + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyRight(" ABCDEF ", Padding := "_") ' "____ABCDEF" + MsgBox SF_String.JustifyRight("A Long Title", Length := 5) ' "Title" + +
+ +
+ Quote ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Quote + +

Quote

+ Returns the input string enclosed in single or double quotes. Existing quotes are left unchanged, including leading and/or trailing quotes. + + + svc.Quote(inputstr: str, [quotechar: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to quote. + quotechar: Either the single (') or double (") quote (default). + + + MsgBox SF_String.Quote("Text Value") + ' "Text Value" + MsgBox SF_String.Quote("Book Title: ""The Arabian Nights""", "'") + ' 'Book Title: "The Arabian Nights"' + + This method can be useful while preparing a string field to be stored in a csv-like file, which requires that text values be enclosed with single or double quotes. +
+ +
+ ReplaceChar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;ReplaceChar + +

ReplaceChar

+ Replaces all occurrences of the characters specified in the Before parameter by the corresponding characters specified in After. + If the length of Before is greater than the length of After, the residual characters in Before are replaced by the last character in After. + + + svc.ReplaceChar(inputstr: str, before: str, after: str): str + + + inputstr: The input string on which replacements will occur. + before: A string with the characters that will be searched in the input string for replacement. + after: A string with the new characters that will replace those defined in before. + + + ' Replaces accented characters + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceChar("Protégez votre vie privée", "àâãçèéêëîïôöûüýÿ", "aaaceeeeiioouuyy") + ' "Protegez votre vie privee" + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceChar("Protégez votre vie privée", "àâãçèéêëîïôöûüýÿ", "") + ' "Protgez votre vie prive" + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceChar("àâãçèéêëîïôöûüýÿ", "àâãçèéêëîïôöûüýÿ", "aaaceeeeiioouuyy") + ' "aaaceeeeiioouuyy" + + The SF_String service provides useful public constants for the Latin character sets, as shown in the example below: + + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceChar("Protégez votre vie privée", SF_String.CHARSWITHACCENT, SF_String.CHARSWITHOUTACCENT) + ' "Protegez votre vie privee" + +
+ +
+ ReplaceRegex ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + String service;ReplaceRegex + +

ReplaceRegex

+ Replaces all occurrences of a given regular expression by a new string. + + + svc.ReplaceRegex(inputstr: str, regex: str, newstr: str, [casesensitive: bool]): str + + + inputstr: The input string on which replacements will occur. + regex: The regular expression. + newstr: The replacing string. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceRegex("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit.", "[a-z]", "x", CaseSensitive := True) + ' "Lxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxx, xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx xxxx." (each lowercase letter is replaced by "x") + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceRegex("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit.", "\b[a-z]+\b", "x", CaseSensitive := False) + ' "x x x x x, x x x." (each word is replaced by "x") + +
+ +
+ ReplaceStr -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;ReplaceStr + +

ReplaceStr

+ Replaces in a string some or all occurrences of an array of strings by an array of new strings. + + + svc.ReplaceStr(inputstr: str, oldstr: str, newstr: str, [occurrences: int], [casesensitive: bool]): str + + + inputstr: The input string on which replacements will occur. + oldstr: A single string or an array of strings. Zero-length strings are ignored. + newstr: The replacing string or the array of replacing strings. + If oldstr is an array, each occurrence of any of the items in oldstr is replaced by newstr. + If oldstr and newstr are arrays, replacements occur one by one up to the UBound(newstr). + If oldstr has more entries than newstr, then the residual elements in oldstr are replaced by the last element in newstr. + occurrences: The maximum number of replacements. The default value is 0, meaning that all occurrences will be replaced. + When oldstr is an array, the occurrence parameter is computed separately for each item in the array. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceStr("100 xxx 200 yyy", Array("xxx", "yyy"), Array("(1)", "(2)"), CaseSensitive := False) + ' "100 (1) 200 (2)" + MsgBox SF_String.ReplaceStr("abCcdefghHij", Array("c", "h"), Array("Y", "Z"), CaseSensitive := False) + ' "abYYdefgZZij" + +
+ +
+ Represent --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Represent + +

Represent

+ Returns a string with a readable representation of the argument, truncated at a given length. This is useful mainly for debugging or logging purposes. + If the anyvalue parameter is an object, it will be enclosed with square brackets "[" and "]". + In strings, tabs and line breaks are replaced by \t, \n or \r. + If the final length exceeds the maxlength parameter, the latter part of the string is replaced by " ... (N)" where N is the total length of the original string before truncation. + + + svc.Represent(anyvalue: any, [maxlength: int]): str + + + anyvalue: The input value to be represented. It can be any value, such as a string, an array, a Basic object, a UNO object, etc. + maxlength: The maximum length of the resulting string. The default value is 0, meaning there is no limit to the length of the resulting representation. + + + MsgBox SF_String.Represent("this is a usual string") ' "this is a usual string" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent("this is a usual string", 15) ' "this i ... (22)" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent("this is a" & Chr(10) & " 2-lines string") ' "this is a\n 2-lines string" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(Empty) ' "[EMPTY]" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(Null) ' "[NULL]" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(Pi) ' "3.142" + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.util.PathSettings")) ' "[com.sun.star.comp.framework.PathSettings]" + + Note that the representation of data types such as Arrays and ScriptForge.Dictionary object instances include both the data type and their values: + + ' An example with a Basic built-in Array + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(Array(1, 2, "Text" & Chr(9) & "here")) + ' "[ARRAY] (0:2) (1, 2, Text\there)" + ' An example with a ScriptForge Array + Dim aValues as Variant + aValues = SF_Array.RangeInit(1, 5) + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(aValues) + ' "[ARRAY] (0:4) (1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0)" + ' An example with a ScriptForge Dictionary + Dim myDict As Variant : myDict = CreateScriptService("Dictionary") + myDict.Add("A", 1) : myDict.Add("B", 2) + MsgBox SF_String.Represent(myDict) + ' "[Dictionary] ("A":1, "B":2)" + +
+ +
+ Reverse ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Reverse + +

Reverse

+ Returns the input string in reversed order. + This method is equivalent to the built-in StrReverse Basic function. + To use the StrReverse function, the statement Option VBASupport 1 must be present in the module. + + + svc.Reverse(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to be reversed. + + + MsgBox SF_String.Reverse("abcdefghij") ' "jihgfedcba" + +
+ +
+ SplitLines -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;SplitLines + +

SplitLines

+ Returns a zero-based array of strings with the lines in the input string. Each item in the array is obtained by splitting the input string at newline characters. + + + svc.SplitLines(inputstr: str, [keepbreaks: int]): str[0..*] + + + inputstr: The string to be split. + keepbreaks: When True, line breaks are preserved in the output array (default = False). + + + Dim a as Variant + a = SF_String.SplitLines("Line1" & Chr(10) & "Line2" & Chr(13) & "Line3") + ' a = Array("Line1", "Line2", "Line3") + a = SF_String.SplitLines("Line1" & Chr(10) & "Line2" & Chr(13) & "Line3" & Chr(10)) + ' a = Array("Line1", "Line2", "Line3", "") + a = SF_String.SplitLines("Line1" & Chr(10) & "Line2" & Chr(13) & "Line3" & Chr(10), KeepBreaks := True) + ' a = Array("Line1\n", "Line2\r", "Line3\n", "") + +
+ +
+ SplitNotQuoted ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;SplitNotQuoted + +

SplitNotQuoted

+ Splits a string into an array of elements using a specified delimiter. + If a quoted substring contains a delimiter, it is ignored. This is useful when parsing CSV-like records that contain quoted strings. + + + svc.SplitNotQuoted(inputstr: str, [delimiter: str], [occurrences: int], [quotechar: str]): str[0..*] + + + inputstr: The string to be split. + delimiter: A string of one or more characters that will be used as delimiter. The default delimiter is the Ascii space " " character. + occurrences: The maximum number of substrings to return. The default value is 0, meaning that there is no limit to the number of returned strings. + quotechar: Either the single (') or double (") quote. + + + + arr1 = SF_String.SplitNotQuoted("abc def ghi") + ' arr1 = Array("abc", "def", "ghi") + arr2 = SF_String.SplitNotQuoted("abc,""def,ghi""", ",") + ' arr2 = Array("abc", """def,ghi""") + arr3 = SF_String.SplitNotQuoted("abc,""def\"",ghi""", ",") + ' arr3 = Array("abc", """def\"",ghi""") + arr4 = SF_String.SplitNotQuoted("abc,""def\"",ghi"""",", ",") + ' arr4 = Array("abc", """def\"",ghi""", "") + + + + svc = CreateScriptService("String") + arr1 = svc.SplitNotQuoted('abc def ghi') + # arr1 = ('abc', 'def', 'ghi') + arr2 = svc.SplitNotQuoted('abc,"def,ghi"', ",") + # arr2 = ('abc', '"def,ghi"') + arr3 = svc.SplitNotQuoted(r'abc,"def\",ghi"', ",") + # arr3 = ('abc', '"def\\",ghi"') + arr4 = svc.SplitNotQuoted(r'abc,"def\",ghi"",', ",") + # arr4 = ('abc', '"def\\",ghi""', '') + + Beware of the differences between Basic and Python when representing strings. For example, in Basic two "" characters inside a string are interpreted as a single " character. In Python, strings enclosed with single quotes can contain " characters without having to double them. +
+ +
+ StartsWith -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;StartsWith + +

StartsWith

+ Returns True if the first characters of a string are identical to a given substring. + This method returns False if either the input string or the substring have a length = 0 or when the substring is longer than the input string. + + + svc.StartsWith(inputstr: str, substring: str, [casesensitive: bool]): bool + + + inputstr: The string to be tested. + substring: The substring to be searched at the start of inputstr. + casesensitive: The search can be case sensitive or not (Default = False). + + + MsgBox SF_String.StartsWith("abcdefg", "ABC") 'True + MsgBox SF_String.StartsWith("abcdefg", "ABC", CaseSensitive := True) 'False + +
+ +
+ TrimExt ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;TrimExt + +

TrimExt

+ Returns the input string without its leading and trailing whitespaces. + + + svc.TrimExt(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to trim. + + + MsgBox SF_String.TrimExt(" Some text. ") ' "Some text." + MsgBox SF_String.TrimExt(" ABCDEF" & Chr(9) & Chr(10) & Chr(13) & " ") ' "ABCDEF" + +
+ +
+ Unescape ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Unescape + +

Unescape

+ Converts any escaped sequence (\\, \n, \r, \t) in the input string to their corresponding Ascii character. + + + svc.Unescape(inputstr: str): str + + + inputstr: The string to be converted. + + + MsgBox SF_String.Unescape("abc\n\tdef\\n") + ' "abc" & Chr(10) & Chr(9) & "def\n" + +
+ +
+ Unquote ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Unquote + +

Unquote

+ Removes the single or double quotes enclosing the input string. + This is useful when parsing CSV-like records that contain quoted strings. + + + svc.Unquote(inputstr: str, [quotechar: str]): str + + + inputstr: The string to unquote. + quotechar: Either the single (') or double (") quote (default). + + + Dim s as String + ' s = "Some text" (without enclosing quotes) + s = SF_String.Unquote("""Some text""") + ' The string below does not have enclosing quotes, so it remains unchanged + ' s = "Some text" (unchanged) + s = SF_String.Unquote("Some text") + ' Quotes inside the string are not removed + ' s = "The ""true"" meaning" (unchanged) + s = SF_String.Unquote("The ""true"" meaning") + +
+ +
+ Wrap ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + String service;Wrap + +

Wrap

+ Converts the input string into an array of substrings so that each item in the array has at most a given number of characters. + In practice, this method returns a zero-based array of output lines, without newlines at the end, except for the pre-existing line-breaks. + Tabs are expanded using the same procedure performed by the ExpandTabs method. + Symbolic line breaks are replaced by their equivalent Ascii characters. + If the wrapped output has no content, the returned array is empty. + + + svc.Wrap(inputstr: str, [width: int], [tabsize: int]): str + + + inputstr: The string to wrap. + width: The maximum number of characters in each line (Default = 70). + tabsize: Before wrapping the text, the existing TAB Chr(9) characters are replaced with spaces. The argument tabsize defines the TAB stops at TabSize + 1, 2 * TabSize + 1 , ... N * TabSize + 1 (Default = 8). + + + + a = "Neque porro quisquam est qui dolorem ipsum quia dolor sit amet, consectetur, adipisci velit..." + b = SF_String.Wrap(a, 20) + ' Array("Neque porro ", "quisquam est qui ", "dolorem ipsum quia ", "dolor sit amet, ", "consectetur, ", "adipisci velit...") + + + + a = "Neque porro quisquam est qui dolorem ipsum quia dolor sit amet, consectetur, adipisci velit..." + b = svc.Wrap(a, 20) + # ('Neque porro ', 'quisquam est qui ', 'dolorem ipsum quia ', 'dolor sit amet, ', 'consectetur, ', 'adipisci velit...') + +
+ + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7505f09c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,376 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.TextStream service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_textstream.xhp + + + + + +
+ + TextStream service + +
+ +
+

ScriptForge.TextStream service

+ The TextStream service is used to sequentially read from and write to files opened or created using the ScriptForge.FileSystem service. + The methods OpenTextFile and CreateTextFile from the FileSystem service return an instance of the TextStream service. +
+ Line delimiters may be specified by the user. In input operations CR, LF or CR+LF are supported. In output operations, the default line delimiter is the one used by the operating system. + The line delimiter for the operating system where the macro is being executed can be accessed using the SF_String.sfNEWLINE property. + All operations needed to read from or write to a file (open, read/write and close) are presumed to happen during the same macro run. + +

Service invocation

+ The examples below in Basic and Python use the OpenTextFile method to create an instance of the TextStream Service. + + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim FSO As Variant + FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + Set myFile = FSO.OpenTextFile("C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", FSO.ForReading) + + The file must be closed with the CloseFile method after all read or write operations have been executed: + + myFile.CloseFile() + + Optionally, the resources used by the TextStream instance can be released using the Dispose method: + + Set myFile = myFile.Dispose() + + The methods in the TextStream service are mostly based on the XTextInputStream and XTextOutputStream UNO interfaces. + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + myFile = fs.OpenTextFile(r"C:\Temp\ThisFile.txt", fs.ForReading) + # ... + myFile.CloseFile() + myFile = myFile.Dispose() + + +

Properties

+ + TextStream service;AtEndOfStream + TextStream service;Encoding + TextStream service;FileName + TextStream service;IOMode + TextStream service;Line + TextStream service;NewLine + + + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + AtEndOfStream + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + Used in read mode. A True value indicates that the end of the file has been reached. A test using this property should precede calls to the ReadLine method. + + + + + Encoding + + + Yes + + + String + + + The character set to be used. The default encoding is "UTF-8". + + + + + FileName + + + Yes + + + String + + + Returns the name of the current file either in URL format or in the native operating system's format, depending on the current value of the FileNaming property of the FileSystem service. + + + + + IOMode + + + Yes + + + String + + + Indicates the input/output mode. Possible values are "READ", "WRITE" or "APPEND". + + + + + Line + + + Yes + + + Long + + + Returns the number of lines read or written so far. + + + + + NewLine + + + No + + + String + + + Sets or returns the current delimiter to be inserted between two successive written lines. The default value is the native line delimiter in the current operating system. + + +
+ To learn more about the names of character sets, visit IANA's Character Set page. Beware that %PRODUCTNAME does not implement all existing character sets. + + + List of Methods in the TextStream Service + + + + + CloseFile
+ ReadAll
+ + + + + ReadLine
+ SkipLine
+ + + + + WriteBlankLines
+ WriteLine
+ + + +
+ +
+ CloseFile ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + TextStream service;CloseFile + +

CloseFile

+ Closes the current input or output stream and empties the output buffer if relevant. Returns True if the file was successfully closed. + + + myFile.CloseFile(): bool + +
+ +
+ ReadAll -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + TextStream service;ReadAll + +

ReadAll

+ Returns all the remaining lines in the text stream as a single string. Line breaks are not removed. + The resulting string can be split in lines either by using the Split built-in Basic function if the line delimiter is known, or with the SF_String.SplitLines method. + For large files, using the ReadAll method wastes memory resources. In such cases it is recommended to read the file line by line using the ReadLine method. + + + myFile.ReadAll(): str + + + Consider the text file "Students.txt" with the following contents (a name in each line): + + Herbie Peggy + Hardy Jarrett + Edith Lorelle + Roderick Rosamund + Placid Everette + + The examples below in Basic and Python use the ReadAll and SplitLines methods to read the contents of the file into an array of strings: + + + 'Loads the FileSystem service + Dim FSO : FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + 'Opens the text file with the names to be read + Dim inputFile as Object + Set inputFile = FSO.OpenTextFile("/home/user/Documents/Students.txt") + 'Reads all the contents in the input file as a single string + Dim allData as String + allData = inputFile.ReadAll() + 'Splits the string into an array + Dim arrNames as Variant + arrNames = SF_String.SplitLines(allData) + ' (...) + inputFile.CloseFile() + + + + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + inputFile = fs.OpenTextFile("/home/user/Documents/Students.txt") + allData = inputFile.ReadAll() + arrNames = allData.split(inputFile.NewLine) + # ... + inputFile.CloseFile() + +
+ +
+ ReadLine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + TextStream service;ReadLine + +

ReadLine

+ Returns the next line in the text stream as a string. Line breaks are removed from the returned string. + The AtEndOfStream test should precede the ReadLine method like in the example below. + An error will be raised if the AtEndOfStream was reached during the previous ReadLine or SkipLine method call. + + + myFile.ReadLine(): str + + + + + Dim sLine As String + Do While Not myFile.AtEndOfStream + sLine = myFile.ReadLine() + ' (...) + Loop + + + + while not myFile.AtEndOfStream: + sLine = myFile.ReadLine() + # ... + +
+ +
+ SkipLine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + TextStream service;SkipLine + +

SkipLine

+ Skips the next line in the input stream when reading a TextStream file. + This method can result in AtEndOfStream being set to True. + + + myFile.SkipLine() + +
+ +
+ WriteBlankLines ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + TextStream service;WriteBlankLines + +

WriteBlankLines

+ Writes a specified number of empty lines to the output stream. + + + myFile.WriteBlankLines(lines: int) + + + lines: The number of empty lines to write to the file. +
+ +
+ WriteLine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + TextStream service;WriteLine + +

WriteLine

+ Writes the given string to the output stream as a single line. + The character defined in the NewLine property is used as the line delimiter. + + + myFile.WriteLine(line: str) + + + line: The line to write, may be empty. + + The examples below in Basic and Python create a text file in CSV format in which each line contains a value and its square until lastValue is reached. + + + Sub SquaredValuesFile(lastValue as Integer) + 'Instantiates the FileSystem Service + Dim FSO as Variant : FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + 'Creates a text file + Dim myFile as Variant : myFile = FSO.CreateTextFile("/home/user/Documents/squares.csv") + 'Writes the Value and Value squared, separated by ";" + Dim value as Integer + myFile.WriteLine("Value;Value Squared") + For value = 1 To lastValue + myFile.WriteLine(value & ";" & value ^ 2) + Next value + 'Closes the file and free resources + myFile.CloseFile() + Set myFile = myFile.Dispose() + End Sub + + + + def squared_values_file(lastValue): + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + myFile = fs.CreateTextFile("/home/user/Documents/squares.csv") + myFile.WriteLine("Value;Value Squared") + for value in range(1, lastValue + 1): + myFile.WriteLine("{};{}".format(value, value ** 2)) + myFile.CloseFile() + myFile = myFile.Dispose() + +
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3c2ea2dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.Timer service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_timer.xhp + + + + +
+ + Timer service + +
+ +
+

ScriptForge.Timer service

+ The Timer service measures the amount of time it takes to run user scripts. + A Timer measures durations. It can be: + + + Started, to indicate when to start measuring time. + + + Suspended, to pause measuring running time. + + + Resumed, to continue tracking running time after the Timer has been suspended. + + + Restarted, which will cancel previous measurements and start the Timer at zero. + + +
+ Durations are expressed in seconds with a precision of 3 decimal digits (milliseconds). A duration value of 12.345 means 12 seconds and 345 milliseconds + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Timer service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + The example below creates a Timer object named myTimer and starts it immediately. + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myTimer As Variant + myTimer = CreateScriptService("Timer", True) + 'The timer starts immediately when the second argument = True, default = False + + It is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set myTimer = myTimer.Dispose() + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + myTimer = CreateScriptService("Timer", start = True) + # ... + myTimer = myTimer.Dispose() + + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + Duration + + + Yes + + + Double + + + The actual running time elapsed since start or between start and stop (does not consider suspended time) + + + + + IsStarted + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + True when timer is started or suspended + + + + + IsSuspended + + + Yes + + + Boolean + + + True when timer is started and suspended + + + + + SuspendDuration + + + Yes + + + Double + + + The actual time elapsed while suspended since start or between start and stop + + + + + TotalDuration + + + Yes + + + Double + + + The actual time elapsed since start or between start and stop (including suspensions and running time) + + +
+ Note that the TotalDuration property is equivalent to summing the Duration and SuspendDuration properties. + +

Methods

+ All methods do not require arguments and return a Boolean value. + If the returned value is False, then nothing happened. + + Timer service;Continue + Timer service;Restart + Timer service;Start + Timer service;Suspend + Timer service;Terminate + + + + + Name + + + Description + + + Returned value + + + + + Continue + + + Resumes the Timer if it has been suspended + + + False if the timer is not suspended + + + + + Restart + + + Terminates the Timer and discards its current property values, restarting as a new clean Timer + + + False if the timer is inactive + + + + + Start + + + Starts a new clean timer + + + False if the timer is already started + + + + + Suspend + + + Suspends a running timer + + + False if the timer is not started or already suspended + + + + + Terminate + + + Stops a running timer + + + False if the timer is neither started nor suspended + + +
+ + + The examples below in Basic and Python illustrate the use of the methods and properties in the Timer service. + + + myTimer.Start() + Wait 500 + myTimer.Suspend() + 'The time elapsed while the Dialog box is open will be counted as suspended time + MsgBox myTimer.Duration & " " & myTimer.SuspendDuration & " " & myTimer.TotalDuration + myTimer.Continue() + Wait 500 + 'The time elapsed while the Dialog box is open will be counted as running time + MsgBox myTimer.Duration & " " & myTimer.SuspendDuration & " " & myTimer.TotalDuration + myTimer.Terminate() + 'Shows the final time measurements + MsgBox myTimer.Duration & " " & myTimer.SuspendDuration & " " & myTimer.TotalDuration + + If you call the Terminate method, subsequent calls for the Continue method will not resume time measurement. Similarly, after a Timer has been terminated, calling the Start method will restart it as if it were a clean new Timer. + + + from time import sleep + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + myTimer.Start() + sleep(0.5) + myTimer.Suspend() + bas.MsgBox("{} {} {}".format(myTimer.Duration, myTimer.SuspendDuration, myTimer.TotalDuration)) + myTimer.Continue() + sleep(0.5) + bas.MsgBox("{} {} {}".format(myTimer.Duration, myTimer.SuspendDuration, myTimer.TotalDuration)) + myTimer.Terminate() + bas.MsgBox("{} {} {}".format(myTimer.Duration, myTimer.SuspendDuration, myTimer.TotalDuration)) + + Beware that the Wait function in Basic takes in a duration argument in milliseconds whereas the sleep function in Python uses seconds in its argument. + +

Working with Multiple Timers

+ It is possible to instantiate multiple Timer services in parallel, which gives flexibility in measuring time in different parts of the code. + The following example illustrates how to create two Timer objects and start them separately. + + + Dim myTimerA as Variant, myTimerB as Variant + myTimerA = CreateScriptService("Timer") + myTimerB = CreateScriptService("Timer") + 'Starts myTimerA + myTimerA.Start() + Wait 1000 'Wait 1 second (1,000 milliseconds) + MsgBox myTimerA.Duration & " " & myTimerB.Duration + 'Starts myTimerB + myTimerB.Start() + Wait 1000 + MsgBox myTimerA.Duration & " " & myTimerB.Duration + 'Terminate both timers + myTimerA.Terminate() + myTimerB.Terminate() + + + + from time import sleep + myTimerA = CreateScriptService("Timer") + myTimerB = CreateScriptService("Timer") + myTimerA.Start() + sleep(1) + bas.MsgBox("{} {}".format(myTimerA.Duration, myTimerB.Duration)) + myTimerB.Start() + sleep(1) + bas.MsgBox("{} {}".format(myTimerA.Duration, myTimerB.Duration)) + myTimerA.Terminate() + myTimerB.Terminate() + + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..313577f48 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ + + + + + + + ScriptForge.UI service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_ui.xhp + + + +
+ + UI service + + +

ScriptForge.UI service

+ +The UI (User Interface) service simplifies the identification and the manipulation of the different windows composing the whole %PRODUCTNAME application: + + + Windows selection + + + Windows moving and resizing + + + Statusbar settings + + + Display of a floating progress bar + + + Creation of new windows + + + Access to the underlying "documents" + + +
+ +The UI service is the starting point to open, create or access to the content of new or existing documents from a user script. + +

Definitions

+ +
+

WindowName

+ A window can be designated using various ways: + + + a full path and file name + + + the last component of the full file name or even only the last component without its suffix + + + the title of the window + + + for new documents, something like "Untitled 1" + + + one of the special windows "BASICIDE" and "WELCOMESCREEN" + + + The window name is case-sensitive. +

Document object

+
+ The methods CreateDocument, CreateBaseDocument, GetDocument, OpenBaseDocument and OpenDocument, described below, generate document objects. When a window contains a document, an instance of the Document class represents that document. A counterexample the Basic IDE is not a document but is a window in our terminology. Additionally a document has a type: Calc, Impress, Writer, ... + The specific properties and methods applicable on documents are implemented in a document class. + The implementation of the document objects class is done in the SFDocuments associated library. See its "Document" service. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the UI service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + + + Dim ui As Variant + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + ReadOnly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + ActiveWindow + + + Yes + + + String + + + a valid and unique WindowName for the currently active window. When the window cannot be identified, a zero-length string is returned. + + + + + Documents + + + Yes + + + String array + + + The list of the currently open documents. Special windows are ignored. This list consists of a zero-based one dimensional array either of filenames (in SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation) or of window titles for unsaved documents. + + + + + Height + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Returns the height of the active window in pixels. + + + + + Width + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Returns the width of the active window in pixels. + + + + + X + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Returns the X coordinate of the active window, which is the distance to the left edge of the screen in pixels. + + + + + Y + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Returns the Y coordinate of the active window, which is the distance to the top edge of the screen in pixels. This value does not consider window decorations added by your operating system, so even when the window is maximized this value may not be zero. + + +
+ +
+

Constants

+ + + + Name + + + Value + + + Description + + + + + MACROEXECALWAYS + + + 2 + + + Macros are always executed + + + + + MACROEXECNEVER + + + 1 + + + Macros are never executed + + + + + MACROEXECNORMAL + + + 0 + + + Macro execution depends on user settings + + +
+
+ + + The examples below show a MsgBox with the names of all currently open documents. + + + Dim openDocs as Object, strDocs as String + Set openDocs = ui.Documents() + strDocs = openDocs(0) + For i = 1 to UBound(openDocs) + strDocs = strDocs & Chr(10) & openDocs(i) + Next i + MsgBox strDocs + + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + openDocs = ui.Documents() + strDocs = "\n".join(openDocs) + bas.MsgBox(strDocs) + + + + + List of Methods in the UI Service + + + + Activate
+ CreateBaseDocument
+ CreateDocument (*)
+ GetDocument
+ Maximize + + + Minimize
+ OpenBaseDocument
+ OpenDocument (*)
+ Resize

+ + + RunCommand
+ SetStatusBar (*)
+ ShowProgressBar
+ WindowExists

+ + +
+Note, as an exception, that the methods marked (*) are not applicable to Base documents. + +
+ Activate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;Activate + +

Activate

+ Make the specified window active. The method returns True if the given window is found and can be activated. There is no change in the actual user interface if no window matches the selection. + + + svc.Activate(windowname: str): bool + + + windowname: see the definitions above. + + + + ui.Activate("C:\Documents\My file.odt") + + + + ui.Activate(r"C:\Documents\My file.odt") + +
+ +
+ CreateBaseDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;CreateBaseDocument + +

CreateBaseDocument

+ Creates and stores a new %PRODUCTNAME Base document embedding an empty database of the given type. The method returns a Document service instance. + + + svc.CreateBaseDocument(filename: str, embeddeddatabase: str = 'HSQLDB', registrationname: str = '', opt calcfilename: str): svc + + + filename : Identifies the file to create. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. If the file already exists, it is overwritten without warning + embeddeddatabase : Either "HSQLDB" (default), "FIREBIRD" or "CALC". + registrationname : The name used to store the new database in the databases register. When = "" (default), no registration takes place. If the name already exists it is overwritten without warning. + calcfilename : Only when embeddeddatabase = "CALC", calcfilename represents the file containing the tables as Calc sheets. The file must exist or an error is raised. + + + + Dim myBase As Object, myCalcBase As Object + Set myBase = ui.CreateBaseDocument("C:\Databases\MyBaseFile.odb", "FIREBIRD") + Set myCalcBase = ui.CreateBaseDocument("C:\Databases\MyCalcBaseFile.odb", _ + "CALC", , "C:\Databases\MyCalcFile.ods") + + + + myBase = ui.CreateBaseDocument(r"C:\Databases\MyBaseFile.odb", "FIREBIRD") + myCalcBase = ui.CreateBaseDocument(r"C:\Databases\MyCalcBaseFile.odb", \ + "CALC", calcfilename = r"C:\Databases\MyCalcFile.ods") + +
+ +
+ CreateDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;CreateDocument + +

CreateDocument (*)

+ Create a new %PRODUCTNAME document of a given type or based on a given template. The method returns a document object. + + + svc.CreateDocument(documenttype: str = '', templatefile: str = '', hidden: bool = False): svc + + + documenttype : "Calc", "Writer", etc. If absent, the templatefile argument must be present. + templatefile : The full FileName of the template to build the new document on. If the file does not exist, the argument is ignored. The FileSystem service provides the TemplatesFolder and UserTemplatesFolder properties to help to build the argument. + hidden: if True, open the new document in the background (default = False). To use with caution: activation or closure afterwards can only happen programmatically. + + In both examples below, the first call to CreateDocument method creates a blank Calc document, whereas the second creates a document from a template file. + + + Dim myDoc1 As Object, myDoc2 As Object, FSO As Object + Set myDoc1 = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + Set FSO = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + Set myDoc2 = ui.CreateDocument(, FSO.BuildPath(FSO.TemplatesFolder, "personal/CV.ott")) + + + + myDoc1 = ui.CreateDocument("Calc") + fs = CreateScriptService("FileSystem") + myDoc2 = ui.CreateDocument(templatefile = fs.BuildPath(fs.TemplatesFolder, "personal/CV.ott")) + +
+ +
+ GetDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;GetDocument + +

GetDocument

+ Returns an open document object referring to either the active window, a given window or the active document. + + svc.GetDocument(windowname: str = ''): svc + svc.GetDocument(windowname: uno): svc + + windowname: See the definitions above. If this argument is absent, the active window is used. UNO objects of types com.sun.star.lang.XComponent or com.sun.star.comp.dba.ODatabaseDocument are also accepted. Thus passing ThisComponent or ThisDatabaseDocument as argument creates a new SFDocuments.Document, Base or Calc service. + + + + + Dim myDoc As Object + Set myDoc = ui.GetDocument("C:\Documents\My file.odt") + Set myBase = ui.GetDocument(ThisDatabaseDocument) + + + + from scriptforge import CreateScriptService + bas = CreateScriptService("Basic") + myDoc = ui.GetDocument(r"C:\Documents\My file.odt") + myDoc = ui.GetDocument(bas.ThisComponent) + + To access the name of the currently active window, refer to the ActiveWindow property. +
+ +
+ Maximize -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;Maximize + +

Maximize

+ Maximizes the active window or the given window. + + + svc.Maximize(windowname: str) + + + windowname: see the definitions above. If this argument is absent, the active window is maximized. + + + + ui.Maximize("Untitled 1") + + + + ui.Maximize("Untitled 1") + +
+ +
+ Minimize -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;Minimize + +

Minimize

+ Minimizes the active window or the given window. + + + svc.Minimize(windowname: str) + + + windowname: see the definitions above. If this argument is absent, the active window is minimized. + + + + ui.Minimize() + + + + ui.Minimize() + +
+ +
+ OpenBaseDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;OpenBaseDocument + +

OpenBaseDocument

+ Open an existing %PRODUCTNAME Base document. The method returns a document object. + + + svc.OpenBaseDocument(filename: str = '', registrationname: str = '', macroexecution: int = 0): svc + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. It must follow the SF_FileSystem.FileNaming notation. + registrationname: The name to use to find the database in the databases register. It is ignored if FileName <> "". + macroexecution: 0 = behaviour is defined by the user configuration, 1 = macros are not executable, 2 = macros are executable. + + + + Dim myBase As Object + Set myBase = ui.OpenBaseDocument("C:\Documents\myDB.odb", MacroExecution := ui.MACROEXECALWAYS) + + + + ui.OpenBaseDocument(r"C:\Documents\myDB.odb", macroexecution = ui.MACROEXECALWAYS) + + To improve code readability you can use predefined constants for the macroexecution argument, as in the examples above. +
+ +
+ OpenDocument -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;OpenDocument + +

OpenDocument (*)

+ Opens an existing %PRODUCTNAME document with the given options. Returns a document object or one of its subclasses. The method returns Nothing (in Basic) / None (in Python) if the opening failed, even when the failure is caused by a user decision. + + + svc.Opendocument(filename: str, password: str = '', readonly: bool = False, hidden: bool = False, macroexecution: int = 0, filtername: str = '', filteroptions: str = ''): svc + + + filename: Identifies the file to open. It must follow the FileNaming notation of the FileSystem service. + password: To use when the document is protected. If wrong or absent while the document is protected, the user will be prompted to enter a password. + readonly: Default = False. + hidden: if True, open the new document in the background (default = False). To use with caution: activation or closure afterwards can only happen programmatically. + macroexecution: 0 = behaviour is defined by the user configuration, 1 = macros are not executable, 2 = macros are executable. + filtername: The name of a filter that should be used for loading the document. If present, the filter must exist. + filteroptions: An optional string of options associated with the filter. + + + + Dim myDoc As Object, FSO As Object + Set myDoc = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Documents\myFile.odt", ReadOnly := True) + + + + ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\myFile.odt", readonly = True) + +
+ +
+ Resize -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;Resize + +

Resize

+ Resizes and/or moves the active window. Absent and negative arguments are ignored. If the window is minimized or maximized, calling Resize without arguments restores it. + + + svc.Resize(left: int = -1, top: int = -1, width: int = -1, height: int = -1) + + + left, top: Distances of the top-left corner from top and left edges of the screen, in pixels. + width, height: New dimensions of the window, in pixels. + + In the following examples, the width and height of the window are changed while top and left are left unchanged. + + + ui.Resize(, ,500, 500) + + + + ui.Resize(width = 500, height = 500) + + To resize a window that is not active, first activate it using the Activate method. +
+ +
+ RunCommand --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;RunCommand + +

RunCommand

+ Runs a UNO command on the current window. A few typical commands are: Save, SaveAs, ExportToPDF, Undo, Copy, Paste, etc. + Commands can be run with or without arguments. Arguments are not validated before running the command. If the command or its arguments are invalid, then nothing will happen. + For a complete list of UNO commands that can be run in %PRODUCTNAME, refer to the Wiki page Development/DispatchCommands. + + + svc.RunCommand(command: str, [args: any]) + + + command: Case-sensitive string containing the UNO command name. The inclusion of the prefix ".uno:" in the command is optional. The command itself is not checked for correctness. If nothing happens after the command call, then the command is probably wrong. + args: For each argument to be passed to the command, specify a pair containing the argument name and value. + + + The following example runs the .uno:About command in the current window. + + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + ui.RunCommand("About") + + Below is an example that runs the UNO command .uno:BasicIDEAppear and passes the arguments required to open the Basic IDE at a specific line of a module. + + ' Arguments passed to the command: + ' Document = "LibreOffice Macros & Dialogs" + ' LibName = "ScriptForge" + ' Name = "SF_Session" + ' Line = 600 + ui.RunCommand(".uno:BasicIDEAppear", "Document", "LibreOffice Macros & Dialogs", _ + "LibName", "ScriptForge", "Name", "SF_Session", "Line", 600) + + Note that calling the command BasicIDEAppear without arguments will simply open the Basic IDE. + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + ui.RunCommand("About") + + + ui.RunCommand(".uno:BasicIDEAppear", "Document", "LibreOffice Macros & Dialogs", \ + "LibName", "ScriptForge", "Name", "SF_Session", "Line", 600) + + In Python it is also possible to call RunCommand using keyword arguments: + + ui.RunCommand(".uno:BasicIDEAppear", Document = "LibreOffice Macros & Dialogs", \ + LibName = "ScriptForge", Name = "SF_Session", Line = 600) + + Each %PRODUCTNAME component has its own set of commands available. One easy way to learn commands is going to Tools - Customize - Keyboard. When you position your mouse over a function in the Function list, a tooltip will appear with the corresponding UNO command. +
+ +
+ SetStatusbar -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;SetStatusbar + +

SetStatusbar (*)

+ Display a text and a progressbar in the status bar of the active window. Any subsequent calls in the same macro run refer to the same status bar of the same window, even if the window is not visible anymore. A call without arguments resets the status bar to its normal state. + + + svc.SetStatusbar(text: str = '', percentage: int = -1) + + + text: An optional text to be displayed in front of the progress bar. + percentage: an optional degree of progress between 0 and 100. + + + + Dim i As Integer + For i = 0 To 100 + ui.SetStatusbar("Progress ...", i) + Wait 50 + Next i + ' Resets the statusbar + ui.SetStatusbar + + + + from time import sleep + for i in range(101): + ui.SetStatusbar("Test:", i) + sleep(0.05) + ui.SetStatusbar() + +
+ +
+ ShowProgressBar -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;ShowProgressBar + +

ShowProgressBar

+ Displays a non-modal dialog box. Specify its title, an explicatory text and a percentage of progress to be represented on a progressbar. The dialog will remain visible until a call to the method without arguments or until the user manually closes the dialog. + + + svc.ShowProgressBar(title: str = '', text: str = '', percentage: str = -1) + + + title : The title appearing on top of the dialog box. Default = "ScriptForge". + text: An optional text to be displayed above the progress bar. + percentage: an optional degree of progress between 0 and 100. + + + + Dim i As Integer + For i = 0 To 100 + ui.ShowProgressBar("Window Title", "Progress ..." & i & "/100", i) + Wait 50 + Next i + ' Closes the Progress Bar window + ui.ShowProgressBar + + + + from time import sleep + for i in range(101): + ui.ShowProgressBar("Window Title", "Progress ... " + str(i) + "/100", i) + sleep(0.05) + # Closes the Progress Bar window + ui.ShowProgressBar() + +
+ +
+ WindowExists -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UI service;WindowExists + +

WindowExists

+ Returns True if the given window could be identified. + + + svc.WindowExists(windowname: str): bool + + + windowname: see the definitions above. + + + + If ui.WindowExists("C:\Document\My file.odt") Then + ' ... + + + + if ui.WindowExists(r"C:\Document\My file.odt"): + # ... + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..80ce5c834 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,818 @@ + + + + + + SFUnitTests.UnitTest service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_unittest.xhp + + + +
+ + UnitTest service + +
+
+

SFUnitTests.UnitTest service

+ The UnitTest service provides a framework for automating unit tests using the Basic language, including the ability to: + + + Aggregate test cases into test suites and unit tests. + + + Share setup and shutdown code among test cases. + + + Report test results using the Console. + + +
+ Both the unit tests and the code to be tested must be written in Basic. The code being tested may call functions written in other languages. + The UnitTest service is not available for Python scripts. + +

Definitions

+

Test Case

+ A test case is the individual unit of testing. It checks for a specific response to a particular set of inputs. + In the UnitTest service, a test case is represented by a single Basic Sub whose name starts with a common prefix (the default is "Test_"). + The test case fails if one of the AssertX methods returns False. +

Test Suite

+ A test suite is a collection of test cases that should be executed together. + All test cases of a test suite are stored in a single Basic module. + A test suite may implement the SetUp and TearDown methods to prepare for test cases in its module. +

Unit Test

+ A full unit test consists of a set of test suites in the same Basic library. + +

Service invocation

+ Before using the UnitTest service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + +

Simple mode

+ Invoke the service in simple mode to call AssertX functions without having to build the full hierarchy of test suites and test cases. + In simple mode, the service is invoked inside the test case, as shown in the example below: + + Sub SimpleTest + On Local Error GoTo CatchError + Dim myTest As Variant + myTest = CreateScriptService("UnitTest") + ' A few dummy tests + myTest.AssertEqual(1 + 1, 2) + myTest.AssertEqual(1 - 1, 0) + MsgBox("All tests passed") + Exit Sub + CatchError: + myTest.ReportError("A test failed") + End Sub + + In this example, if any of the AssertEqual calls fail, the interpreter will go to the CatchError label and report the error by calling the ReportError method. +

Full mode

+ When invoked in full mode, the service creation is external to the test code and all tests are organized into test cases and test suites inside a single library. + The following example creates a UnitTest instance whose tests are located inside the current document (ThisComponent) in the "Tests" library. + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim myUnitTest As Variant + myUnitTest = CreateScriptService("UnitTest", ThisComponent, "Tests") + +

A minimalist example in full mode

+ Consider that a ODS file has a module named "MathUtils" in its "Standard" library with the following code: + + ' Code in module Standard.MathUtils + Function Sum(a, b) As Double + Sum = a + b + End Function + + Function Multiply(a, b) As Double + Multiply = a * b + End Function + + To create a full test suite, consider that a new library named "Tests" is created in the file with a single module "AllTests" containing the code below: + + ' Code in module Tests.AllTests + Sub Main() + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim test As Variant + test = CreateScriptService("UnitTest", ThisComponent, "Tests") + test.RunTest("AllTests") + test.Dispose() + End Sub + + Sub Setup(test) + ' Preparation code ran prior to the first test case + Dim exc As Variant + exc = CreateScriptService("Exception") + exc.Console(Modal := False) + End Sub + + Sub TearDown(test) + ' Optional cleanup code called after the last test case + End Sub + + Sub Test_Sum(test) + On Local Error GoTo CatchError + test.AssertEqual(Sum(1, 1), 2, "Sum two positive integers") + test.AssertEqual(Sum(-10, 20), 10, "Sum of negative and positive integers") + test.AssertEqual(Sum(1.5, 1), 2.5, "Sum of float and integer values") + Exit Sub + CatchError: + test.ReportError("Sum method is broken") + End Sub + + Sub Test_Multiply(test) + On Local Error GoTo CatchError + test.AssertEqual(Multiply(2, 2), 4, "Multiply two positive integers") + test.AssertEqual(Multiply(-4, 2), -8, "Multiply negative and positive integers") + test.AssertEqual(Multiply(1.5, 3), 4.5, "Multiply of float and integer values") + Exit Sub + CatchError: + test.ReportError("Multiply method is broken") + End Sub + + The test suite above consists of two test cases Test_Sum and Test_Multiply. To run all tests simply run the Main method from the "AllTests" module. + The Console from the Exception service is used as the default output to print test results. After running the example above, the following output will be displayed in the console: + + ' RUNTEST ENTER testsuite='Tests.AllTests', pattern='Test_*' + ' SETUP Tests.AllTests.Setup() ENTER + ' SETUP Tests.AllTests.Setup() EXIT + ' TESTCASE Tests.AllTests.Test_Multiply() ENTER + ' TESTCASE Tests.AllTests.Test_Multiply() EXIT (0,017 sec) + ' TESTCASE Tests.AllTests.Test_Sum() ENTER + ' TESTCASE Tests.AllTests.Test_Sum() EXIT (0,016 sec) + ' TEARDOWN Tests.AllTests.TearDown() ENTER + ' TEARDOWN Tests.AllTests.TearDown() EXIT + ' RUNTEST EXIT testsuite='Tests.AllTests' (0,223 sec) + + If any of the AssertEqual methods fails during these tests, an error message is added to the console. + + + Region service;LongMessage + Region service;ReturnCode + Region service;Verbose + Region service;WhenAssertionFails + + +

Properties

+ + + + Name + + + Readonly + + + Type + + + Description + + + + + LongMessage + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When set to True (default) the console shows the standard message appended to the message provided by the tester. When False, only the message defined by the tester is used. + + + + + ReturnCode + + + Yes + + + Integer + + + Value returned by RunTest after the unit test is finished. Next is a list of possible values: + 0 - Test finished without errors or test not started
+ 1 - An assertion within a test case returned False
+ 2 - A SkipTest was issued by the Setup method or by one of the test cases.
+ 3 - Abnormal end of test + + + + + Verbose + + + No + + + Boolean + + + When set to True, all assertions are reported in the console (failing or not). When False (default), only failing assertions are reported. + + + + + WhenAssertionFails + + + No + + + Integer + + + Defines what is done when an assertion fails. Next is a list of possible values: + 0 - Ignore the failure and continue running the test
+ 1 - The TearDown method in the module is executed in the current test suite and the next suite is started (default in full mode).
+ 2 - Stop immediately (default in simple mode) + + +
+ + + + List of Methods in the UnitTest Service + + + + + AssertAlmostEqual
+ AssertEqual
+ AssertFalse
+ AssertGreater
+ AssertGreaterEqual
+ AssertIn
+ AssertIsInstance
+ AssertIsNothing
+ AssertLike
+ + + + + AssertNotRegex
+ AssertIsNull
+ AssertLess
+ AssertLessEqual
+ AssertNotAlmostEqual
+ AssertNotEqual
+ AssertNotIn
+ AssertNotInstance
+ AssertNotLike
+ + + + + AssertNotNothing
+ AssertNotNull
+ AssertRegex
+ AssertTrue
+ Fail
+ Log
+ ReportError
+ RunTest
+ SkipTest
+ + + +
+ +

Arguments of the AssertX methods

+ All assertions test one or two expressions, referred in the remainder of this help page as A and B. They are always the first one or two arguments in the AssertX method. + All AssertX methods accept a message argument specifying a custom message to be reported in the console regarding the assertion. By default an empty string is used. This argument is always in the last position of the assertion. + Some AssertX methods also accept additional arguments, as described by their syntaxes below. + +
+ AssertAlmostEqual -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertAlmostEqual + +

AssertAlmostEqual

+ Returns True when A and B are numerical values and are considered to be close to each other, given a relative tolerance. + + + svc.AssertAlmostEqual(a: any, b: any, tolerance: double = 1E-09, message: str = ""): bool + + This assertion returns True if the two conditions below are met: + + + A and B can be converted to the Double type. + + + The absolute difference between A and B divided by the largest absolute value of A or B is lower than the value specified in tolerance. + + +
+ +
+ AssertEqual -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertEqual + +

AssertEqual

+ Returns True when A and B are considered to be equal. + + + svc.AssertEqual(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + When A and B are scalars, True is returned if: + + + Both expressions have the same VarType or are both numeric. + + + Booleans and numeric values are compared with the = operator. + + + Strings are compared with the builtin StrComp function. The comparison is case-sensitive. + + + Dates and times are compared up to the second. + + + Null, Empty and Nothing are not equal, but AssertEqual(Nothing, Nothing) returns True. + + + UNO objects are compared with the builtin EqualUnoObjects method. + + + Note that Basic objects are never equal. + + + When A and B are arrays, True is returned if: + + + Both arrays have the same number of dimensions (up to 2 dimensions) and their lower and upper bounds are identical for all dimensions. + + + All items in both arrays are equal, one by one. + + + Two empty arrays are considered to be equal. + + +
+ +
+ AssertFalse -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertFalse + +

AssertFalse

+ Returns True when the type of A is Boolean and its value is False. + + + svc.AssertFalse(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ AssertGreater ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + UnitTest service;AssertGreater + +

AssertGreater

+ Returns True when A is greater than B. + + + svc.AssertGreater(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison between A and B assumes the following: + + + Eligible data types are String, Date or numeric. + + + Both expressions must have the same VarType or both must be numeric. + + + String comparisons are case-sensitive. + + +
+ +
+ AssertGreaterEqual ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertGreaterEqual + +

AssertGreaterEqual

+ Returns True when A is greater than or equal to B. + + + svc.AssertGreaterEqual(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison between A and B assumes the following: + + + Eligible data types are String, Date or numeric. + + + Both expressions must have the same VarType or both must be numeric. + + + String comparisons are case-sensitive. + + +
+ +
+ AssertIn ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertIn + +

AssertIn

+ Returns True when A is found in B. + + + svc.AssertIn(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + This assertion assumes the following: + + + Expression B may be a 1D array, a ScriptForge Dictionary object or a string. + + + When expression B is a 1D array, expression A may be a date or a numeric value. + + + When expression B is a ScriptForge Dictionary object, then string A is searched for among the keys in B. + + + String comparisons are case-sensitive. + + +
+ +
+ AssertIsInstance --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertIsInstance + +

AssertIsInstance

+ Returns True when A is an instance of a specified object type, specified as a string containing the type name. + + + svc.AssertIsInstance(a: any, objecttype: str, message: str = ""): bool + + Expression A may be one of the following: + + + A ScriptForge object. In this case, the objecttype argument is a string such as "DICTIONARY", "calc", "Dialog", etc. + + + A UNO object. In this case, the objecttype argument must be a string identical to the value returned by the SF_Session.UnoObjectType() method. + + + An Array. In this case, the objecttype argument is expected to be "array". + + + Any other variable (neither an Object nor an Array). In this case, objecttype is a string matching the value returned by the builtin TypeName function. + + +
+ +
+ AssertIsNothing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertIsNothing + +

AssertIsNothing

+ Returns True when A is an object that has the Nothing value. + + + svc.AssertIsNothing(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ AssertIsNull ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertIsNull + +

AssertIsNull

+ Returns True when A has the Null value. + + + svc.AssertIsNull(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ AssertLess --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertLess + +

AssertLess

+ Returns True when A is less than B. + + + svc.AssertLess(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison between A and B assumes the following: + + + Eligible data types are String, Date or numeric. + + + Both expressions must have the same VarType or both must be numeric. + + + String comparisons are case-sensitive. + + +
+ +
+ AssertLessEqual ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertLessEqual + +

AssertLessEqual

+ Returns True when A is less than or equal to B. + + + svc.AssertLessEqual(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison between A and B assumes the following: + + + Eligible data types are String, Date or numeric. + + + Both expressions must have the same VarType or both must be numeric. + + + String comparisons are case-sensitive. + + +
+ +
+ AssertLike --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertLike + +

AssertLike

+ Returns True if string A matches a given pattern containing wildcards. + + + svc.AssertLike(a: any, pattern: str = "", message: str = ""): bool + + The following wildcards are accepted: + + + ? - Represents any single character. + + + * - Represents zero, one, or multiple characters. + + +
+ +
+ AssertNotAlmostEqual ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotAlmostEqual + +

AssertNotAlmostEqual

+ Returns True when A and B are numerical values and are not considered to be close to each other, given a relative tolerance. + + + svc.AssertNotAlmostEqual(a: any, b: any, tolerance: double = 1E-09, message: str = ""): bool + + This assertion returns True if the two conditions below are met: + + + A and B can be converted to the Double type. + + + The absolute difference between A and B divided by the largest absolute value of A or B is greater than the value specified in tolerance. + + +
+ +
+ AssertNotEqual ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotEqual + +

AssertNotEqual

+ Returns True when A and B are not considered to be equal. + + + svc.AssertNotEqual(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + This method works both for scalars and arrays. Read the instructions in AssertEqual for more information on what equality means in this assertion. +
+ +
+ AssertNotIn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotIn + +

AssertNotIn

+ Returns True when A (a string) is not found in B. + + + svc.AssertNotIn(a: any, b: any, message: str = ""): bool + + Read the instructions in AssertIn for more information on the assumptions of this method. +
+ +
+ AssertNotInstance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotInstance + +

AssertNotInstance

+ Returns True when A is not an instance of a specified object type. + + + svc.AssertNotInstance(a: any, objecttype: str, message: str = ""): bool + + Read the instructions in AssertIsInstance for more information on the assumptions of this method. +
+ +
+ AssertNotLike ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + UnitTest service;AssertNotLike + +

AssertNotLike

+ Returns True if string A does not match a given pattern containing wildcards. + + + svc.AssertNotLike(a: any, pattern: str = "", message: str = ""): bool + + Read the instructions in AssertLike for more information on the assumptions of this method. +
+ +
+ AssertNotNothing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotNothing + +

AssertNotNothing

+ Returns True except when A is an object that has the Nothing value. + + + svc.AssertNotNothing(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ AssertNotNull ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + UnitTest service;AssertNotNull + +

AssertNotNull

+ Returns True except when A has the Null value. + + + svc.AssertNotNull(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ AssertNotRegex ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertNotRegex + +

AssertNotRegex

+ Returns True when A is not a string or does not match the given regular expression. + + + svc.AssertNotRegex(a: any, regex: str = "", message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison is case-sensitive. +
+ +
+ AssertRegex -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertRegex + +

AssertRegex

+ Returns True when string A matches the given regular expression. + + + svc.AssertRegex(a: any, regex: str = "", message: str = ""): bool + + The comparison is case-sensitive. +
+ +
+ AssertTrue --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;AssertTrue + +

AssertTrue

+ Returns True when expression A is a Boolean and its value is True. + + + svc.AssertTrue(a: any, message: str = ""): bool + +
+ +
+ Fail --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;Fail + +

Fail

+ Forces a test case to fail. + + + svc.Fail(message: str = "") + + A message can be provided to be reported in the console. +
+ +
+ Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;Log + +

Log

+ Writes the specified message in the console. + + + svc.Log(message: str = "") + + A message can be provided to be reported in the console. +
+ +
+ ReportError -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;ReportError + +

ReportError

+ Displays a message box with a message and the current property values of the Exception service. + This method is commonly used in the exception handling section of the Sub containing the test case, which is reached when an assertion fails or when the Fail method is called. + + + svc.ReportError(message: str = "") + + Depending on the value of the property WhenAssertionFails, the test execution may continue or be interrupted. + When writing test cases it is recommended to include a call to the ReportError method in the exception handling section of the Sub. + If the property LongMessage is equal to True, the specified message is followed by the standard error message description. Otherwise only the message is displayed. +
+ +
+ RunTest ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + UnitTest service;RunTest + +

RunTest

+ Executes the complete test suite implemented in the specified module. Each test case is run independently from each other. + Running a test suite consists of: + + + Executing the optional Setup method present in the module. + + + Executing once each test case, in no specific order. + + + Executing the optional TearDown method present in the module. + + + + + svc.RunTest(testsuite: str, testcasepattern: str = "", message: str = ""): int + + The argument testcasepattern specifies a pattern composed of "?" and "*" wildcards to select which test cases will be run. The comparison is not case-sensitive. + If a message is provided, it is written to the console when the test starts. +
+ +
+ SkipTest ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + UnitTest service;SkipTest + +

SkipTest

+ Interrupts the running test suite without calling the TearDown method. + Skipping a test is usually meaningful during the Setup method when not all conditions to run the test are met. + It is up to the Setup method to exit the Sub shortly after the SkipTest call. + If SkipTest is called from within a test case, the execution of the test suite is interrupted and the remaining test cases are not run. Keep in mind that the order in which test cases are run is arbitrary within a test suite. + + + svc.SkipTest(message: str = "") + + If a message is provided, it is written to the console. +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4ea1bdfc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + SFDocuments.Writer service + /text/sbasic/shared/03/sf_writer.xhp + + + + +
+ + Writer service + +
+ +
+

SFDocuments.Writer service

+ The SFDocuments shared library provides a number of methods and properties to facilitate the management and handling of %PRODUCTNAME documents. + Some methods are generic for all types of documents and are inherited from the SF_Document module, whereas other methods that are specific for Writer documents are defined in the SF_Writer module. + To be done: list with the main features of the Writer service. +
+ +

Service invocation

+ Before using the Writer service the ScriptForge library needs to be loaded or imported: + + + The Writer service is closely related to the UI service of the ScriptForge library. Below are a few examples of how the Writer service can be invoked. + + The code snippet below creates a Writer service instance that corresponds to the currently active Writer document. + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Writer", "Untitled 1") ' Default = ActiveWindow + + Another way to create an instance of the Writer service is using the UI service. In the following example, a new Writer document is created and oDoc is a Writer service instance: + + Dim ui As Object, oDoc As Object + Set ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + Set oDoc = ui.CreateDocument("Writer") + + Or using the OpenDocument method from the UI service: + + Set oDoc = ui.OpenDocument("C:\Me\MyFile.odt") + + It is also possible to instantiate the Writer service using the CreateScriptService method: + + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Writer", "MyFile.odt") + + In the example above, "MyFile.odt" is the name of an open document window. If this argument is not provided, the active window is considered. + It is recommended to free resources after use: + + Set oDoc = oDoc.Dispose() + + However, if the document was closed using the CloseDocument method, it becomes unnecessary to free resources using the command described above. + + + myDoc = CreateScriptService("Writer") ' Default = ActiveWindow + + + ui = CreateScriptService("UI") + myDoc = ui.CreateDocument("Writer") + + + myDoc = ui.OpenDocument(r"C:\Documents\MyFile.odt") + + + myDoc = CreateScriptService("SFDocuments.Writer", "MyFile.odt") + myDoc.Dispose() + + The use of the prefix "SFDocuments." while calling the service is optional. + +

Definitions

+ TBD + +

Properties

+ +

Methods

+ + + List of Methods in the Writer Service + + + + + Forms
+ + + + + PrintOut
+ + + + + …
+ + + +
+ +
+ Forms --------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Document service;Forms + +

Forms

+ Depending on the parameters provided this method will return: + + + A zero-based Array (or a tuple in Python) with the names of all the forms contained in the document (if the form argument is absent) + + + A SFDocuments.Form service instance representing the form specified as argument. + + + This method is applicable only for Writer documents. Calc and Base documents have their own Forms method in the Calc and Base services, respectively. + + + svc.Forms(): str[0..*] + + + svc.Forms(form: str = ''): svc + + + svc.Forms(form: int): svc + + + form: The name or index corresponding to a form stored in the document. If this argument is absent, the method will return a list with the names of all forms available in the document. + + In the following examples, the first line gets the names of all forms in the document and the second line retrieves the Form object of the form named "Form_A". + + + Set FormNames = oDoc.Forms() + Set FormA = oDoc.Forms("Form_A") + + + + form_names = doc.Forms() + form_A = doc.Forms("Form_A") + +
+ +
+ PrintOut -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Writer service;PrintOut + +

PrintOut

+ Send the contents of the document to the printer. The printer may be previously defined by default, by the user or by the SetPrinter method of the Document service. Returns True when successful. + + + svc.PrintOut(opt pages: str = "", opt copies: num = 1, opt printbackground: bool = True, opt printblankpages: bool = False, opt printevenpages: bool = True, opt printoddpages: bool = True, opt printimages: bool = True): bool + + + pages: The pages to print as a string, like in the user interface. Example: "1-4;10;15-18". Default = all pages + copies: The number of copies, default is 1. + printbackground: Prints the background image when True (default). + printblankpages: When False (default), omits empty pages. + printevenpages: Prints even pages when True (default). + printoddpages: Print odd pages when True (default). + printimages: Print graphic objects when True (default). + + + + oDoc.PrintOut("1-4;10;15-18", Copies := 2, PrintImages := False) + + + + doc.PrintOut(printblankpages = True, copies = 3) + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9f2c0ad2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Run-Time Functions + /text/sbasic/shared/03000000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +

Run-Time Functions

+This section describes the Runtime Functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f885f1846 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Screen I/O Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Screen I/O Functions

+ This section describes the Runtime Functions used to call dialogs for the input and output of user entries. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..42f45eb1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Display Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Display Functions + This section describes Runtime functions used to output information to the screen display. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9eed147d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,227 @@ + + + + + + + MsgBox Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp + + + + +
+ + MsgBox statement + + +

MsgBox Statement

+Displays a dialog box containing a message. +
+ + + + MsgBox prompt As String [,buttons = MB_OK [,title As String]] + response = MsgBox( prompt As String [,buttons = MB_OK [,title As String]]) + + +
+ +
+ prompt: String expression displayed as a message in the dialog box. Line breaks can be inserted with Chr$(13). + title: String expression displayed in the title bar of the dialog. If omitted, the title bar displays the name of the respective application. + buttons: Any integer expression that specifies the dialog type, as well as the number and type of buttons to display, and the icon type. buttons represents a combination of bit patterns, that is, a combination of elements can be defined by adding their respective values: +
+ +
+ + + + Named constant + + + Integer value + + + Definition + + + + + MB_OK + + + 0 + + + Display OK button only. + + + + + MB_OKCANCEL + + + 1 + + + Display OK and Cancel buttons. + + + + + MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE + + + 2 + + + Display Abort, Retry, and Ignore buttons. + + + + + MB_YESNOCANCEL + + + 3 + + + Display Yes, No, and Cancel buttons. + + + + + MB_YESNO + + + 4 + + + Display Yes and No buttons. + + + + + MB_RETRYCANCEL + + + 5 + + + Display Retry and Cancel buttons. + + + + + MB_ICONSTOP + + + 16 + + + Add the Stop icon to the dialog. + + + + + MB_ICONQUESTION + + + 32 + + + Add the Question icon to the dialog. + + + + + MB_ICONEXCLAMATION + + + 48 + + + Add the Exclamation Point icon to the dialog. + + + + + MB_ICONINFORMATION + + + 64 + + + Add the Information icon to the dialog. + + + + + + + + 128 + + + First button in the dialog as default button. + + + + + MB_DEFBUTTON2 + + + 256 + + + Second button in the dialog as default button. + + + + + MB_DEFBUTTON3 + + + 512 + + + Third button in the dialog as default button. + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + +Sub ExampleMsgBox + Const sText1 = "An unexpected error occurred." + Const sText2 = "The program execution will continue, however." + Const sText3 = "Error" + MsgBox(sText1 + Chr(13) + sText2,16,sText3) + MsgBox(sText1 + Chr(13) + sText2, MB_ICONSTOP, sText3) +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3317c1192 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + + MsgBox Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + MsgBox function + + + +

MsgBox Function

+Displays a dialog box containing a message and returns a value. +
+ + + +MsgBox (Prompt As String [,Buttons = MB_OK [,Title As String]]) As Integer + + + + + +Integer + + + + Named constant + + + Integer value + + + Definition + + + + + IDOK + + + 1 + + + OK + + + + + IDCANCEL + + + 2 + + + Cancel + + + + + IDABORT + + + 3 + + + Abort + + + + + IDRETRY + + + 4 + + + Retry + + + + + IDIGNORE + + + 5 + + + Ignore + + + + + IDYES + + + 6 + + + Yes + + + + + IDNO + + + 7 + + + No + + +
+ + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleMsgBox +Dim sVar As Integer + sVar = MsgBox("Las Vegas") + sVar = MsgBox("Las Vegas",1) + sVar = MsgBox( "Las Vegas",256 + 16 + 2,"Dialog title") + sVar = MsgBox("Las Vegas", MB_DEFBUTTON2 + MB_ICONSTOP + MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE, "Dialog title") +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c60a4925f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Print# Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03010103.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Print statement + Print statement; Tab function + Print statement; Spc function + Spc function; in Print statement + Tab function; in Print statement + + +

Print# Statement

+Outputs the specified strings or numeric expressions to the screen or to a sequential file. +
+ +Use Put# statement to write data to a binary or a random file. Use Write# statement to write data to a sequential text file with delimiting characters. + + +Print syntax + +Print [#filenum,] expression1[{;|,} [Spc(number As Integer);] [Tab(pos As Integer);] [expression2[...]] + + + + filenum: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that was set by the Open statement for the respective file.see i61758 + expression: Any numeric or string expression to be printed. Multiple expressions can be separated by a semicolon. If separated by a comma, the expressions are indented to the next tab stop. The tab stops cannot be adjusted. + number: Number of spaces to be inserted by the Spc function. + pos: Spaces are inserted until the specified position. +If a semicolon or comma appears after the last expression to be printed, $[officename] Basic stores the text in an internal buffer and continues program execution without printing. When another Print statement without a semicolon or comma at the end is encountered, all text to be printed is printed at once. +Positive numeric expressions are printed with a leading space. Negative expressions are printed with a leading minus sign. If a certain range is exceeded for floating-point values, the respective numeric expression is printed in exponential notation. +If the expression to be printed exceeds a certain length, the display will automatically wrap to the next line. +You can insert the Tab function, enclosed by semicolons, between arguments to indent the output to a specific position, or you can use the Spc function to insert a specified number of spaces. + + + + + +Sub ExamplePrint + Print "ABC" + Print "ABC","123" + i = FreeFile() + Open "C:\Users\ThisUser\Temp.txt" For Output As i + Print #i, "ABC" + Close #i +End Sub + + + + +Sub ExamplePrint + Print "ABC" + Print "ABC","123" + i = FreeFile() + Open "~/temp.txt" For Output As i + Print #i, "ABC" + Close #i +End Sub + + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73ea6aca3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Functions for Screen Input +/text/sbasic/shared/03010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Functions for Screen Input + This section describes Runtime functions used to control screen input. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..598129fc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + InputBox Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010201.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + InputBox function + + +

InputBox Function

+Displays a prompt in a dialog at which the user can input text. The input is assigned to a variable. +
+The InputBox statement is a convenient method of entering text through a dialog. Confirm the input by clicking OK or pressing Return. The input is returned as the function return value. If you close the dialog with Cancel, InputBox returns a zero-length string (""). + + + +InputBox (Prompt As String[, Title As String[, Default As String[, xpostwips As Integer, ypostwips As Integer]]]) As String + + + +
+ prompt: String expression displayed as the message in the dialog box. + title: String expression displayed in the title bar of the dialog box. + default: String expression displayed in the text box as default if no other input is given. + xpostwips: Integer expression that specifies the horizontal position of the dialog. The position is an absolute coordinate and does not refer to the window of %PRODUCTNAME. + ypostwips: Integer expression that specifies the vertical position of the dialog. The position is an absolute coordinate and does not refer to the window of %PRODUCTNAME. +If xpostwips and ypostwips are omitted, the dialog is centered on the screen. The position is specified in twips. +
+ + +String + + + +Sub ExampleInputBox +Dim sText As String + sText = InputBox ("Please enter a phrase:","Dear User") + MsgBox ( sText , 64, "Confirmation of phrase") +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee93251cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Color Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Color Functions

+ This section describes Runtime functions used to define colors. +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7a824885 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Blue Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010301.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Blue function + + +

Blue Function

+Returns the blue component of the specified composite color code. +
+ + + +Blue (Color As Long) + + + +Integer + + + Color value: Long integer expression that specifies any composite color code for which to return the blue component. +Under VBA compatibility mode (Option VBASupport 1), the function Blue() is incompatible with VBA colors, when color from previous call to function RGB [VBA] is passed. + + + + + + + + +Sub ExampleColor +Dim lVar As Long + lVar = rgb(128,0,200) + MsgBox "The color " & lVar & " consists of:" & Chr(13) &_ + "red= " & Red(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "green= " & Green(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "blue= " & Blue(lVar) & Chr(13) , 64,"colors" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..752ffc517 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Green Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010302.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Green function + + + +

Green Function

+Returns the Green component of the given composite color code. +
+ + + +Green (Color As Long) + + + +Integer + + + Color: Long integer expression that specifies a composite color code for which to return the Green component. + + + + + + +Sub ExampleColor +Dim lVar As Long + lVar = rgb(128,0,200) + MsgBox "The color " & lVar & " contains the components:" & Chr(13) &_ + "red = " & red(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "green = " & green(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "blue = " & blue(lVar) & Chr(13) , 64,"colors" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..361a1e747 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Red Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010303.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Red function + + + +

Red Function

+Returns the Red component of the specified composite color code. +
+ + + +Red (ColorNumber As Long) + + + +Integer + + + ColorNumber: Long integer expression that specifies any composite color code for which to return the Red component. +Under VBA compatibility mode (Option VBASupport 1), the function Red() is incompatible with VBA colors, when color from previous call to function RGB [VBA] is passed. + + + + +
+ The color picker dialog details the red, green and blue components of a composite color code, as well as its hexadecimal expression. Changing the color of text and selecting Custom color displays the color picker dialog. +
+ + + +Sub ExampleColor +Dim lVar As Long + lVar = rgb(128,0,200) + MsgBox "The color " & lVar & " consists of:" & Chr(13) &_ + "red= " & red(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "green= " & green(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "blue= " & blue(lVar) & Chr(13) , 64,"colors" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78ad9233d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + QBColor Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010304.xhp + + + + + +
+ + QBColor function + + +

QBColor Function

+Returns the RGB color code of the color passed as a color value through an older MS-DOS based programming system. +
+ + +QBColor (ColorNumber As Integer) + + +Long + + + ColorNumber: Any integer expression that specifies the color value of the color passed from an older MS-DOS based programming system. + ColorNumber can be assigned the following values: +0 : Black +1 : Blue +2 : Green +3 : Cyan +4 : Red +5 : Magenta +6 : Yellow +7 : White +8 : Gray +9 : Light Blue +10 : Light Green +11 : Light Cyan +12 : Light Red +13 : Light Magenta +14 : Light Yellow +15 : Bright White +This function is used only to convert from older MS-DOS based BASIC applications that use the above color codes. The function returns a long integer value indicating the color to be used in the $[officename] IDE. + + + + + +Sub ExampleQBColor +Dim iColor As Integer +Dim sText As String + iColor = 7 + sText = "RGB= " & Red(QBColor( iColor) ) & ":" & Blue(QBColor( iColor) ) & ":" & Green(QBColor( iColor) ) + MsgBox stext,0,"Color " & iColor +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6978f49a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + RGB Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03010305.xhp + + + + +
+ + RGB function + + +

RGB Function

+ Returns a Long integer color value consisting of red, green, and blue components. +
+ + + +RGB (Red, Green, Blue) + + + +Long + + +
+
+ red: Any integer expression that represents the red component (0-255) of the composite color. + green: Any integer expression that represents the green component (0-255) of the composite color. + blue: Any integer expression that represents the blue component (0-255) of the composite color. +
+The resulting Long value is calculated with the following formula:
+Result = red×65536 + green×256 + blue. + +Under VBA compatibility mode (Option VBASupport 1), the Long value is calculated as +
+Result = red + green×256 + blue×65536
+See RGB Function [VBA] + + +The color picker dialog helps computing red, green and blue components of a composite color. Changing the color of text and selecting Custom color displays the color picker dialog. +
+ + + + + + +Sub ExampleColor +Dim lVar As Long + lVar = rgb(128,0,200) + MsgBox "The color " & lVar & " consists of:" & Chr(13) &_ + "red= " & red(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "green= " & green(lVar) & Chr(13)&_ + "blue= " & blue(lVar) & Chr(13) , 64,"colors" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dacef585 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + RGB Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03010306.xhp + + + + + +
+ + RGB function [VBA] + + +

RGB Function [VBA]

+Returns a Long integer color value consisting of red, green, and blue components, according to VBA color formula. +
+ + + +RGB (Red, Green, Blue) + + + +Long + + + +Because of the VBA compatibility mode (Option VBASupport 1), the Long value is calculated as
+Result = red + green×256 + blue×65536. + + + + + + + +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleRGBVBA +Dim lVar As Long + lVar = rgb(128,0,200) + Print lVar; ' returns 13107328 +End Sub + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e036d774f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + File I/O Functions + /text/sbasic/shared/03020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ File I/O Functions + Use File I/O functions to create and manage user-defined (data) files. +
+You can use these functions to support the creation of "relative" files, so that you can save and reload certain records by specifying their record number. File I/O functions can also help you manage your files by providing you with information such as file size, current path settings, or the creation date of a file or a directory. + + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..762a63e80 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Opening and Closing Files +/text/sbasic/shared/03020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Opening and Closing Files +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78cb1907f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Close Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020101.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Close statement + + + +

Close Statement

+Closes a specified file that was opened with the Open statement. +
+ + + + Close Statement diagram + + +Close [[#]fileNum [, [#]fileNum2 [,...]]] + + + + fileNum: Any integer expression that specifies the number of the data channel that was opened with the Open statement. + + + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d906b6319 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + FreeFile Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FreeFile function + + + +FreeFile Function +Returns the next available file number for opening a file. Use this function to open a file using a file number that is not already in use by a currently open file. +
+ + + +FreeFile + + + +Integer + + +This function can only be used immediately in front of an Open statement. FreeFile returns the next available file number, but does not reserve it. + + + + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddf55d217 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + Open Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Open statement + + +

Open Statement

+Opens a data channel. +
+ + + + Open Statement diagram + + + access fragment diagram + + + locking fragment diagram + + +Open pathname For mode [Access io] [locking] As [#]filenum [Len=recLen] + + + + pathname: Path and name of the file to open. If you try to read a file that does not exist (Access = Read), an error message appears. If you try to write to a file that does not exist (Access = Write), a new file is created. + mode: Keyword that specifies the file mode. Valid values: Append (append to sequential file), Binary (data can be accessed by bytes using Get and Put), Input (opens data channel for reading), Output (opens data channel for writing), and Random (edits relative files). + io: Keyword that defines the access type. Valid values: Read (read-only), Write (write-only), Read Write (both). + locking: Keyword that defines the security status of a file after opening. Valid values: Shared (file may be opened by other applications), Lock Read (file is protected against reading), Lock Write (file is protected against writing), Lock Read Write (denies file access). + filenum: Any integer expression from 0 to 511 to indicate the number of a free data channel. You can then pass commands through the data channel to access the file. The file number must be determined by the FreeFile function immediately before the Open statement. + recLen: For Random access files, set the length of the records.#61736 +You can only modify the contents of a file that was opened with the Open statement. If you try to open a file that is already open, an error message appears. + + +
+ + + + Sub ExampleWorkWithAFile + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim sLine As String + Dim aFile As String + Dim sMsg As String + aFile = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Output As #iNumber + Print #iNumber, "This is a line of text" + Print #iNumber, "This is another line of text" + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Input As iNumber + While Not eof(iNumber) + Line Input #iNumber, sLine + If sLine <>"" Then + sMsg = sMsg & sLine & chr(13) + End If + Wend + Close #iNumber + MsgBox sMsg + End Sub + + + + + Sub ExampleWorkWithAFile + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim sLine As String + Dim aFile As String + Dim sMsg As String + aFile = "~/data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Output As #iNumber + Print #iNumber, "This is a line of text" + Print #iNumber, "This is another line of text" + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Input As iNumber + While Not eof(iNumber) + Line Input #iNumber, sLine + If sLine <>"" Then + sMsg = sMsg & sLine & chr(13) + End If + Wend + Close #iNumber + MsgBox sMsg + End Sub + + + +
+If the Open statement tries to open a file to which the current user does not have read/write permissions, an I/O error will be raised. +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d09da144 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Reset Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020104.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Reset statement + + +

Reset Statement

+Closes all open files and writes the contents of all file buffers to the harddisk. +
+ + + + Reset Statement diagram + + +Reset + + + + +Sub ExampleReset +On Error GoTo ErrorHandler + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim iCount As Integer + Dim sLine As String + Dim aFile As String + aFile = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Output As #iNumber + Print #iNumber, "This is a new line of text" + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Input As iNumber + For iCount = 1 To 5 + Line Input #iNumber, sLine + If sLine <>"" Then + Rem + End If + Next iCount + Close #iNumber + Exit Sub +ErrorHandler: + Reset + MsgBox "All files will be closed", 0, "Error" +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ae72fee0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +File Input/Output Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+File Input/Output Functions +
+ + + + + + + + +see i61245 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..300451363 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + Get Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020201.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Get statement + + +

Get Statement

+Reads a record from a relative file, or a sequence of bytes from a binary file, into a variable. +
+See also: PUT Statement + + + + Get Statement diagram + + +Get [#]fileNum, [recordNum|filePos], variable + + + + fileNum: Any integer expression that determines the file number. + recordNum: For files opened in Random mode, recordNum is the number of the record that you want to read. +For files opened in Binary mode, filePos is the byte position in the file where the reading starts. +If recordNum and filePos are omitted, the current position or the current data record of the file is used. +variable: Name of the variable to be read. With the exception of object variables, you can use any variable type. + + +
+ + + + Sub ExampleRandomAccess + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim sText As Variant ' Must be a variant + Dim aFile As String + aFile = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 + Seek #iNumber,1 ' Position at beginning + Put #iNumber, , "This is the first line of text" ' Fill line with text + Put #iNumber, , "This is the second line of text" + Put #iNumber, , "This is the third line of text" + Seek #iNumber,2 + Get #iNumber, , sText + Print sText + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 + Get #iNumber, 2, sText + Put #iNumber, , "This is a new text" + Get #iNumber, 1, sText + Get #iNumber, 2, sText + Put #iNumber, 20, "This is the text in record 20" + Print Lof(#iNumber) + Close #iNumber + End Sub + + + + + Sub ExampleRandomAccess + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim sText As Variant ' Must be a variant + Dim aFile As String + aFile = "~/data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 + Seek #iNumber,1 ' Position at beginning + Put #iNumber, , "This is the first line of text" ' Fill line with text + Put #iNumber, , "This is the second line of text" + Put #iNumber, , "This is the third line of text" + Seek #iNumber,2 + Get #iNumber, , sText + Print sText + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Random As #iNumber Len=32 + Get #iNumber, 2, sText + Put #iNumber, , "This is a new text" + Get #iNumber, 1, sText + Get #iNumber, 2, sText + Put #iNumber, 20, "This is the text in record 20" + Print Lof(#iNumber) + Close #iNumber + End Sub + + + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63adaa36d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Input# Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020202.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Input statement + + +Input# Statement +Reads data from an open sequential file. +
+ + + + Input Statement diagram + + +Input #fileNum {,|;} var1 [, var2 [, ...]] + + + + fileNum: Number of the file that contains the data that you want to read. The file must be opened with the Open statement using the key word INPUT. + var: A numeric or string variable that you assign the values read from the opened file to. +The Input# statement reads numeric values or strings from an open file and assigns the data to one or more variables. A numeric variable is read up to the first carriage return (Asc=13), line feed (Asc=10), space, or comma. String variables are read to up to the first carriage return (Asc=13), line feed (Asc=10), or comma. +Data and data types in the opened file must appear in the same order as the variables that are passed in the "var" parameter. If you assign non-numeric values to a numeric variable, "var" is assigned a value of "0". +Records that are separated by commas cannot be assigned to a string variable. Quotation marks (") in the file are disregarded as well. If you want to read these characters from the file, use the Line Input# statement to read pure text files (files containing only printable characters) line by line. +If the end of the file is reached while reading a data element, an error occurs and the process is aborted. + + + +Sub ExampleWorkWithAFile + Dim iCount As Integer, sFileName As String + Dim sName As String, sValue As Integer + sFileName = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iCount = Freefile + ' Write data ( which we will read later with Input ) to file + Open sFileName For Output As iCount + sName = "Hamburg" : sValue = 200 + Write #iCount, sName, sValue + sName = "New York" : sValue = 300 + Write #iCount; sName, sValue + sName = "Miami" : sValue = 459 + Write #iCount, sName, sValue + Close #iCount + ' Read data file using Input + iCount = Freefile + Open sFileName For Input As iCount + Input #iCount, sName, sValue + MsgBox sName & " " & sValue + Input #iCount; sName, sValue + MsgBox sName & " " & sValue + Input #iCount, sName, sValue + MsgBox sName & " " & sValue + Close #iCount +End Sub + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..117186268 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Line Input# Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020203.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Line Input statement + + +

Line Input# Statement

+Reads a line from a sequential file into a variable. +
+ + + + Line Input Statement diagram + + +Line Input #fileNum, variable + + + + fileNum: Number of the file that contains the data that you want to read. The file must have been opened in advance with the Open statement using the key word INPUT. + variable: The name of the variable that stores the result. +With the Line Input# statement, you can read strings from an open file into a variable. String variables are read line-by-line up to the first carriage return (Asc=13) or linefeed (Asc=10). Line end marks are not included in the resulting string. + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8b6bd14f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Put# Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020204.xhp + + + + +
+ + Put statement + + +

Put# Statement

+Writes a record to a relative file or a sequence of bytes to a binary file. +
+ +Use Print# statement to print data to a sequential text file. Use Write# statement to write data to a sequential text file with delimiting characters. + + + + Put Statement diagram + + +Put [#]fileNum, [recordNum|filePos], variable + + + + fileNum: Any integer expression that defines the file that you want to write to. + recordNum, filePos: For relative files (random access files), the number of the record that you want to write. +For binary files (binary access), the position of the byte in the file where you want to start writing. + variable: Name of the variable that you want to write to the file. +Note for relative files: If the contents of this variable does not match the length of the record that is specified in the Len clause of the Open statement, the space between the end of the newly written record and the next record is padded with existing data from the file that you are writing to. +Note for binary files: The contents of the variables are written to the specified position, and the file pointer is inserted directly after the last byte. No space is left between the records. + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f97195397 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + Write Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020205.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Write statement + + +

Write# Statement

+Writes data to a sequential text file with delimiting characters. +
+ +Use Print# statement to print data to a sequential text file. Use Put# statement to write data to a binary or a random file. + + + + Write Statement diagram + + +Write [#fileNum] {,|;} expression [, …] + + + + fileNum: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that was set by the Open statement for the respective file. + expression list: Variables or expressions that you want to enter in a file, separated by commas. +If the expression list is omitted, the Write statement appends an empty line to the file. +To add an expression list to a new or an existing file, the file must be opened in the Output or Append mode. +Strings that you write are enclosed by quotation marks and separated by commas. You do not need to enter these delimiters in the expression list. +Each Write statement outputs a line end symbol as last entry. +Numbers with decimal delimiters are converted according to the locale settings. + + + + + + Sub ExampleWrite + Dim iCount As Integer + Dim sValue As String + iCount = Freefile + Open "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" For Output As iCount + sValue = "Hamburg" + Write #iCount,sValue,200 + sValue = "New York" + Write #iCount,sValue,300 + sValue = "Miami" + Write #iCount,sValue,450 + Close #iCount + End Sub + + + + + Sub ExampleWrite + Dim iCount As Integer + Dim sValue As String + iCount = Freefile + Open "~/data.txt" For Output As iCount + sValue = "Hamburg" + Write #iCount,sValue,200 + sValue = "New York" + Write #iCount,sValue,300 + sValue = "Miami" + Write #iCount,sValue,450 + Close #iCount + End Sub + + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c681a0aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Eof Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020301.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Eof function + + + +Eof Function +Determines if the file pointer has reached the end of a file. +
+ + + +Eof (intexpression As Integer) + + + +Bool + + + Intexpression: Any integer expression that evaluates to the number of an open file. +Use EOF to avoid errors when you attempt to get input past the end of a file. When you use the Input or Get statement to read from a file, the file pointer is advanced by the number of bytes read. When the end of a file is reached, EOF returns the value "True" (-1). + + + + + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cba83b1a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Loc Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03020302.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Loc function + +Loc Function +Returns the current position in an open file. +
+Syntax: + +Loc(FileNumber) + +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + +FileNumber: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that is set by the Open statement for the respective file. +If the Loc function is used for an open random access file, it returns the number of the last record that was last read or written. +For a sequential file, the Loc function returns the position in a file divided by 128. For binary files, the position of the last read or written byte is returned. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3741e50cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Lof Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03020303.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Lof function + +Lof Function +Returns the size of an open file in bytes. +
+ + +Lof (FileNumber) As Long + + +Long + + +FileNumber: Any numeric expression that contains the file number that is specified in the Open statement. +To obtain the length of a file that is not open, use the FileLen function. + + + + + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..464b09feb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Seek Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03020304.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Seek function + +Seek Function +Returns the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the open statement. +
+For random access files, the Seek function returns the number of the next record to be read. +For all other files, the function returns the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. +See also: Open, Seek. +Syntax: + +Seek (FileNumber) + +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + +FileNumber: The data channel number used in the Open statement. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ff8727fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Seek# Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03020305.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Seek statement + +

Seek Statement

+Sets the position for the next writing or reading in a file that was opened with the Open statement.see #61751 +For random access files, the Seek statement sets the number of the next record to be accessed. +For all other files, the Seek statement sets the byte position at which the next operation is to occur. + + + + Seek Statement diagram + + +Seek [#]filePos, {filePos|recordNum} + + +Parameters: + +fileNum: The data channel number used in the Open statement. + +filePos, recordNum: Position for the next writing or reading. Position can be a number between 1 and 2,147,483,647. According to the file type, the position indicates the number of the record (files in the Random mode) or the byte position (files in the Binary, Output, Append or Input mode). The first byte in a file is position 1, the second byte is position 2, and so on. + + + + +
+ + Seek function +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27592c63a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Managing Files +/text/sbasic/shared/03020400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Managing Files + The functions and statements for managing files are described here. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..42f721d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + ChDir Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020401.xhp + + + + + +
+ + ChDir statement + + +

ChDir Statement

+Changes the current directory or drive. +
+ +
+ Some DOS-specific file and directory functions are no longer provided in %PRODUCTNAME, or their function is only limited. For example, support for the ChDir, ChDrive and CurDir functions is not provided. Some DOS-specific properties are no longer used in functions that expect file properties as parameters (for example, to differentiate from concealed files and system files). This ensures the greatest possible level of platform independence for %PRODUCTNAME. Therefore this feature is subject to removal in a future release. +
+ +
+ The ScriptForge library in %PRODUCTNAME 7.1 introduces the FileSystem service with methods to handle files and folders in user scripts. +
+ + + +ChDir Text As String + + + + Text: Any string expression that specifies the directory path or drive. +If you only want to change the current drive, enter the drive letter followed by a colon. + + + + + + + Sub ExampleChDir + Dim sDir1 As String, sDir2 As String + sDir1 = "C:\Test" + sDir2 = "D:\Private" + ChDir( sDir1 ) + MsgBox CurDir + ChDir( sDir2 ) + MsgBox CurDir + End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..780f9e204 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + ChDrive Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020402.xhp + + + + + +
+ + ChDrive statement + + +

ChDrive Statement

+Changes the current drive. +
+ + + + + + ChDrive Text As String + + + + Text: Any string expression that contains the drive letter of the new drive. If you want, you can use URL notation. +The drive must be assigned a capital letter. Under Windows, the letter that you assign the drive is restricted by the settings in LASTDRV. If the drive argument is a multiple-character string, only the first letter is relevant. If you attempt to access a non-existent drive, an error occurs that you can respond to with the OnError statement. + + + + + + + + Sub ExampleChDrive + ChDrive "D" ' Only possible if a drive 'D' exists. + End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0929218d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + CurDir Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020403.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CurDir function + + +

CurDir Function

+Returns a variant string that represents the current path or that of the specified Windows drive. +
+ + + + + +CurDir [(Text As String)] + + +Return value: +String + + + Text: Any string expression that specifies an existing drive, for example "C" for the first partition of the first hard drive. This parameter is used solely under Windows. +If no drive is specified or if the drive is a zero-length string (""), CurDir returns the path for the current drive. %PRODUCTNAME Basic reports an error if the syntax of the drive description is incorrect or if the drive does not exist. + +This function is not case-sensitive. + + + + + + + + + Sub ExampleCurDir + Dim sDir1 As String, sDir2 As String + sDir1 = "C:\Test" + sDir2 = "D:\Private" + ChDir( sDir1 ) + MsgBox CurDir + ChDir( sDir2 ) + MsgBox CurDir + End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5416578ca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Dir Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Dir function + + +

Dir Function

+Returns the name of a file, a directory, or all of the files and the directories on a drive or in a directory that match the specified search path. +
+ + + +Dir [(Text As String [, Attrib As Integer])] + + +

Return value:

+String + + + Text: Any string expression that specifies the search path, directory or file. This argument can only be specified the first time that you call the Dir function. If you want, you can enter the path in URL notation. + Attrib: Any integer expression that specifies bitwise file attributes. The Dir function only returns files or directories that match the specified attributes. You can combine several attributes by adding the attribute values: +0 : Normal files. +16 : Returns the name of the directory only. +Use this attribute to check if a file or directory exists, or to determine all files and folders in a specific directory. +To check if a file exists, enter the complete path and name of the file. If the file or directory name does not exist, the Dir function returns a zero-length string (""). +To generate a list of all existing files in a specific directory, proceed as follows: The first time you call the Dir function, specify the complete search path for the files, for example, "D:\Files\*.ods". If the path is correct and the search finds at least one file, the Dir function returns the name of the first file that matches the search path. To return additional file names that match the path, call Dir again, but with no arguments. +To return directories only, use the attribute parameter. The same applies if you want to determine the name of a volume (for example, a hard drive partition). + + + + + + +Sub ExampleDir +' Displays all files and directories +Dim sPath As String +Dim sDir As String, sValue As String + sDir="Directories:" + sPath = CurDir + sValue = Dir$(sPath + getPathSeparator + "*",16) + Do + If sValue <> "." And sValue <> ".." Then + If (GetAttr( sPath + getPathSeparator + sValue) And 16) >0 Then + ' Get the directories + sDir = sDir & chr(13) & sValue + End If + End If + sValue = Dir$ + Loop Until sValue = "" + MsgBox sDir,0,sPath +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d19d30546 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + FileAttr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020405.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FileAttr function + + + +FileAttr Function +Returns the access mode or the file access number of a file that was opened with the Open statement. The file access number is dependent on the operating system (OSH = Operating System Handle). +
+If you use a 32-Bit operating system, you cannot use the FileAttr-Function to determine the file access number. +See also: Open + + + +FileAttr (FileNumber As Integer, Attribute As Integer) + + + +Integer + + + FileNumber: The number of the file that was opened with the Open statement. + Attribute: Integer expression that indicates the type of file information that you want to return. The following values are possible: +1: The FileAttr-Function indicates the access mode of the file. +2: The FileAttr-Function returns the file access number of the operating system. +If you specify a parameter attribute with a value of 1, the following return values apply: +1 - INPUT (file open for input) +2 - OUTPUT (file open for output) +4 - RANDOM (file open for random access) +8 - APPEND (file open for appending) +32 - BINARY (file open in binary mode). + + + + + + +Sub ExampleFileAttr + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim sLine As String + Dim aFile As String + aFile = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Output As #iNumber + Print #iNumber, "This is a line of text" + MsgBox FileAttr(#iNumber, 1), 0, "Access mode" + MsgBox FileAttr(#iNumber, 2), 0, "File attribute" + Close #iNumber +End Sub + + +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fb2923e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + FileCopy Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020406.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FileCopy statement + + + +FileCopy Statement +Copies a file. +
+ +Syntax: + +FileCopy TextFrom As String, TextTo As String + + +Parameters: + TextFrom: Any string expression that specifies the name of the file that you want to copy. The expression can contain optional path and drive information. If you want, you can enter a path in URL notation. + TextTo: Any string expression that specifies where you want to copy the source file to. The expression can contain the destination drive, the path, and file name, or the path in URL notation. +You can only use the FileCopy statement to copy files that are not opened. + + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleFileCopy + FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\Temp\Autoexec.sav" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d198d3407 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + FileDateTime Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020407.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FileDateTime function + + + +FileDateTime Function +Returns a string that contains the date and the time that a file was created or last modified. +
+ +Syntax: + +FileDateTime (Text As String) + + +Parameters: + Text: Any string expression that contains an unambiguous (no wildcards) file specification. You can also use URL notation. +This function determines the exact time of creation or last modification of a file, returned in the format "MM.DD.YYYY HH.MM.SS". + + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleFileDateTime + MsgBox FileDateTime("C:\autoexec.bat") +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb3a030f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + FileLen Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020408.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FileLen function + + + +FileLen Function +Returns the length of a file in bytes. +
+ + + +FileLen (Text As String) As Long + + + +Long +Use ScriptForge.FileSystem service GetFileLen() method when size is expected to be over 2 gigabytes. + + + Text: Any string expression that contains an unambiguous file specification. You can also use URL notation. +This function determines the length of a file. If the FileLen function is called for an open file, it returns the file length before it was opened. To determine the current file length of an open file, use the Lof function. + + + + + +Sub ExampleFileLen + MsgBox FileLen("C:\autoexec.bat") +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0eaf7067b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ + + + + + + + GetAttr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020409.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + GetAttr function + + + +GetAttr Function +Returns a bit pattern that identifies the file type or the name of a volume or a directory. +
+ +Syntax: + +GetAttr (Text As String) + + +Return value: +Integer + +Parameters: + Text: Any string expression that contains an unambiguous file specification. You can also use URL notation. +This function determines the attributes for a specified file and returns the bit pattern that can help you to identify the following file attributes: + + + + +Value + +
+ + + + Named constant + + + Value + + + Definition + + + + + ATTR_NORMAL + + + 0 + + + Normal files. + + + + + ATTR_READONLY + + + 1 + + + Read-only files. + + + + + ATTR_HIDDEN + + + 2 + + + Hidden file + + + + + ATTR_SYSTEM + + + 4 + + + System file + + + + + ATTR_VOLUME + + + 8 + + + Returns the name of the volume + + + + + ATTR_DIRECTORY + + + 16 + + + Returns the name of the directory only. + + + + + ATTR_ARCHIVE + + + 32 + + + File was changed since last backup (Archive bit). + + +
+
+ +If you want to know if a bit of the attribute byte is set, use the following query method: + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSetGetAttr +On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Define target for error handler + If Dir("C:\test",16)="" Then MkDir "C:\test" + If Dir("C:\test\autoexec.sav")="" Then FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\test\autoexec.sav" + SetAttr "c:\test\autoexec.sav" ,0 + FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\test\autoexec.sav" + SetAttr "c:\test\autoexec.sav" ,1 + Print GetAttr( "c:\test\autoexec.sav" ) + End +ErrorHandler: + Print Error + End +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c2214b17 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Kill Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020410.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Kill statement + + + +Kill Statement +Deletes a file from a disk. +
+ + + +Kill File As String + + + + File: Any string expression that contains an unambiguous file specification. You can also use URL notation. + + + + + + +Sub ExampleKill + Kill "C:\Users\ThisUser\datafile.dat" ' File must be created in advance +End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2051628f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + MkDir Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020411.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + MkDir statement + + + +

MkDir Statement

+ + MkDir Statement diagram + +Creates a new directory on a data medium. +
+ + + +MkDir path + + + + path: Any string expression that specifies the name and path of the directory to be created. You can also use URL notation. +If the path is not determined, the directory is created in the current directory. + + + + + + +Sub ExampleFileIO +' Example for functions of the file organization +Const sFile1 As String = "file://c|/autoexec.bat" +Const sDir1 As String = "file://c|/Temp" +Const sSubDir1 As String ="Test" +Const sFile2 As String = "Copied.tmp" +Const sFile3 As String = "Renamed.tmp" +Dim sFile As String + sFile = sDir1 + "/" + sSubDir1 + ChDir( sDir1 ) + If Dir(sSubDir1,16)="" Then ' Does the directory exist? + MkDir sSubDir1 + MsgBox sFile,0,"Create directory" + End If + sFile = sFile + "/" + sFile2 + FileCopy sFile1 , sFile + MsgBox fSysURL(CurDir()),0,"Current directory" + MsgBox sFile & Chr(13) & FileDateTime( sFile ),0,"Creation time" + MsgBox sFile & Chr(13)& FileLen( sFile ),0,"File length" + MsgBox sFile & Chr(13)& GetAttr( sFile ),0,"File attributes" + Name sFile As sDir1 + "/" + sSubDir1 + "/" + sFile3 + ' Rename in the same directory + sFile = sDir1 + "/" + sSubDir1 + "/" + sFile3 + SetAttr( sFile, 0 ) 'Delete all attributes + MsgBox sFile & Chr(13) & GetAttr( sFile ),0,"New file attributes" + Kill sFile + RmDir sDir1 + "/" + sSubDir1 +End Sub + +' Converts a system path in URL +Function fSysURL( fSysFp As String ) As String +Dim iPos As String + iPos = 1 + iPos = Instr(iPos,fSysFp, getPathSeparator()) + Do While iPos > 0 + Mid( fSysFp, iPos , 1,"/") + iPos = Instr(iPos+1,fSysFp, getPathSeparator()) + Loop + ' the colon with DOS + iPos = Instr(1,fSysFp,":") + If iPos > 0 Then Mid( fSysFp, iPos , 1,"|") + fSysURL = "file://" & fSysFp +End Function + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a754376d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Name Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020412.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Name statement + + + +Name Statement +Renames an existing file or directory. +
+ +Syntax: + +Name OldName As String As NewName As String + + +Parameters: + OldName, NewName: Any string expression that specifies the file name, including the path. You can also use URL notation.see #i61074 + +Example: + +Sub ExampleReName +On Error GoTo Error +FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\temp\autoexec.sav" +Name "c:\temp\autoexec.sav" As "c:\temp\autoexec.bat" +End +Error: +If err = 58 Then + MsgBox "File already exists" +End If +End +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d38f2cc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + RmDir Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020413.xhp + + + + + +
+ + RmDir statement + + +

RmDir Statement

+Deletes an existing directory from a data medium. +
+ + + + RmDir Statement diagram + + +RmDir Text As String + + + + Text: Any string expression that specifies the name and path of the directory that you want to delete. You can also use URL notation. +If the path is not determined, the RmDir Statement searches for the directory that you want to delete in the current path. If it is not found there, an error message appears. + + + + + + +Sub ExampleRmDir + MkDir "C:\Test2" + ChDir "C:\test2" + MsgBox Curdir + ChDir "\" + RmDir "C:\test2" +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4cd4814d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + SetAttr Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03020414.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + SetAttr statement + + + +SetAttr Statement +Sets the attribute information for a specified file. +
+ +Syntax: + +SetAttr FileName As String, Attribute As Integer + + +Parameters: +FileName: Name of the file, including the path, that you want to test attributes of. If you do not enter a path, SetAttr searches for the file in the current directory. You can also use URL notation. + Attribute: Bit pattern defining the attributes that you want to set or to clear: + Value + + + + + Named constant + + + Value + + + Definition + + + + + ATTR_NORMAL + + + 0 + + + Normal files. + + + + + ATTR_READONLY + + + 1 + + + Read-only files. + + + + + ATTR_HIDDEN + + + 2 + + + Hidden file + + +
+ +You can set multiple attributes by combining the respective values with a logic OR statement. + + + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSetGetAttr + On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Define target for error handler + If Dir("C:\test",16)="" Then MkDir "C:\test" + If Dir("C:\test\autoexec.sav")="" Then FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\test\autoexec.sav" + SetAttr "c:\test\autoexec.sav" ,0 + FileCopy "c:\autoexec.bat", "c:\test\autoexec.sav" + SetAttr "c:\test\autoexec.sav" , ATTR_READONLY + Print GetAttr( "c:\test\autoexec.sav" ) + End +ErrorHandler: + Print Error + End +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..162e1bf9b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + FileExists Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03020415.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FileExists function + + + +FileExists Function +Determines if a file or a directory is available on the data medium. +
+ +Syntax: + +FileExists(FileName As String | DirectoryName As String) + + +Return value: +Bool + +Parameters: +FileName | DirectoryName: Any string expression that contains an unambiguous file specification. You can also use URL notation. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleFileExists + MsgBox FileExists("C:\autoexec.bat") + MsgBox FileExists("file:///d|/bookmark.htm") + MsgBox FileExists("file:///d|/Private") +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9c3d5505 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + +Date and Time Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Date and Time Functions + Use the statements and functions described here to perform date and time calculations. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic lets you calculate time or date differences by converting the time and date values to continuous numeric values. After the difference is calculated, special functions are used to reconvert the values to the standard time or date formats. + You can combine date and time values into a single floating-decimal number. Dates are converted to integers, and times to decimal values. %PRODUCTNAME Basic also supports the variable type Date, which can contain a time specification consisting of both a date and time. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbc69eac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting Date Values +/text/sbasic/shared/03030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Converting Date Values +The following functions convert date values to calculable numbers and back. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ee2203c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +DateSerial Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03030101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+DateSerial function + +

DateSerial Function

+Returns a Date value for a specified year, month, or day. +
+ + +DateSerial (year, month, day) + + +Date + + +Year: Integer expression that indicates a year. All values between 0 and 99 are interpreted as the years 1900-1999. For years that fall outside this range, you must enter all four digits. + +Month: Integer expression that indicates the month of the specified year. The accepted range is from 1-12. + +Day: Integer expression that indicates the day of the specified month. The accepted range is from 1-31. No error is returned when you enter a non-existing day for a month shorter than 31 days.see i69463 +The DateSerial function returns the number of days between December 30,1899 and the given date. You can use this function to calculate the difference between two dates. +The DateSerial function returns the data type Variant with VarType 7 (Date). Internally, this value is stored as a Double value, so that when the given date is 1.1.1900, the returned value is 2. Negative values correspond to dates before December 30, 1899 (not inclusive). +If a date is defined that lies outside of the accepted range, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. +Whereas you define the DateValue function as a string that contains the date, the DateSerial function evaluates each of the parameters (year, month, day) as separate numeric expressions. + + + + + Sub ExampleDateSerial + Dim lDate As Long + Dim sDate As String + lDate = DateSerial(1964, 4, 9) + sDate = DateSerial(1964, 4, 9) + MsgBox lDate ' returns 23476 + MsgBox sDate ' returns 04/09/1964 + End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aea6339a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + DateValue Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030102.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ DateValue function + +

DateValue Function

+ Returns a Date object from a string representing a date. + The returned object is represented internally as a single numeric value corresponding to the specified date. This value can be used to calculate the number of days between two dates. +
+ + + + DateValue(date As String) + + +
+ date: A string that contains the date that will be converted to a Date object. + The string passed to DateValue must be expressed in one of the date formats defined by your locale setting (see %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages) or using the ISO date format "yyyy-mm-dd" (year, month and day separated by hyphens). +
+ +Date. + + + + + Sub ExampleDateValue + Dim aDate As Date + aDate = DateValue("2021-12-20") + ' Prints the localized date + MsgBox aDate + ' Extracts the year, month and day from the date object + MsgBox Year(aDate) + MsgBox Month(aDate) + MsgBox Day(aDate) + ' Prints the numeric value corresponding to the date (as Long type) + MsgBox CLng(aDate) + End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b39292b03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Day Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03030103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Day function + +Day Function +Returns a value that represents the day of the month based on a serial date number generated by DateSerial or DateValue. +
+Syntax: + +Day (Number) + +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + +Number: A numeric expression that contains a serial date number from which you can determine the day of the month. +This function is basically the opposite of the DateSerial function, returning the day of the month from a serial date number generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. For example, the expression + +Print Day (DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) + +returns the value 20. + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleDay + Print "Day " & Day(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) & " of the month" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90e7d4754 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Month Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03030104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Month function + +Month Function +Returns the month of a year from a serial date that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. +
+Syntax: + +Month (Number) + +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + +Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial date number that is used to determine the month of the year. +This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function. It returns the month in the year that corresponds to the serial date that is generated by DateSerial or DateValue. For example, the expression + +Print Month(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) + +returns the value 12. + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleMonth + MsgBox "" & Month(Now) ,64,"The current month" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2bd1dad4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + + WeekDay Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030105.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + WeekDay function + + +

WeekDay Function

+This function returns the number corresponding to the weekday represented by a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue functions. +
+This help page describes the WeekDay function used in Basic scripts. If you are interested in the WeekDay function used in %PRODUCTNAME Calc, refer to this help page. + + + WeekDay (SerialDate, [FirstDayOfWeek]) + + + +SerialDate: Integer expression that contains the serial date number that is used to calculate the day of the week. + +FirstDayOfWeek: Integer value indicating which weekday should be considered as the first day of the week. The default value is 0, meaning that the system locale settings are used to determine the first day of the week. +The parameter FirstDayOfWeek accepts values ranging from 0 to 7. The table below describes the meaning of each possible value: +
+ + + + Value + + + VBA Constant + + + Description + + + + + 0 + + + vbUseSystemDayOfWeek + + + Use system locale settings + + + + + 1 + + + vbSunday + + + Sunday (default) + + + + + 2 + + + vbMonday + + + Monday + + + + + 3 + + + vbTuesday + + + Tuesday + + + + + 4 + + + vbWednesday + + + Wednesday + + + + + 5 + + + vbThursday + + + Thursday + + + + + 6 + + + vbFriday + + + Friday + + + + + 7 + + + vbSaturday + + + Saturday + + +
+
+The VBA constants listed above are only available if VBA support has been enabled. For more information, read the VBASupport Statement help page. + + +Integer + + + +The following example uses the function Now() to determine the current weekday. + +Sub ExampleWeekDay + Dim sDay As String + ' Return And display the day of the week + Select Case WeekDay( Now ) + Case 1: sDay="Sunday" + Case 2: sDay="Monday" + Case 3: sDay="Tuesday" + Case 4: sDay="Wednesday" + Case 5: sDay="Thursday" + Case 6: sDay="Friday" + Case 7: sDay="Saturday" + End Select + MsgBox "" + sDay,64,"Today Is" +End Sub + +The following example illustrates the use FirstDayOfWeek parameter, assuming that Tuesday is the first day of the week. + + Dim someDay As Long + ' The date January 1st 2021 was a Friday + someDay = DateSerial(2021, 01, 01) + ' Prints "6" assuming Sunday is the first day of the week + MsgBox WeekDay(someDay) + ' Prints "4" assuming Tuesday is the first day of the week + MsgBox WeekDay(someDay, 3) + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d99a611a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Year Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03030106.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Year function + +Year Function +Returns the year from a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue function. +
+Syntax: + +Year (Number) + +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + +Number: Integer expression that contains the serial date number that is used to calculate the year. +This function is the opposite of the DateSerial function, and returns the year of a serial date. For example, the expression: + +Print Year(DateSerial(1994, 12, 20)) + +returns the value 1994. + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleYear + MsgBox "" & Year(Now) ,64,"Current year" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..947b738f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + CDateToIso Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030107.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CdateToIso function + + +CDateToIso Function +Returns the date in ISO format without separators (YYYYMMDD) from a serial date number that is generated by the DateSerial or the DateValue or the CDateFromIso function. +The year part consists of at least four digits, with leading zeros if the absolute value is less than 1000, it can be negative with a leading minus sign if the date passed denotes a year before the common era (BCE) and it can have more than four digits if the absolute value is greater than 9999. The formatted string returned can be in the range "-327680101" to "327671231". +Years less than 100 and greater than 9999 are supported since %PRODUCTNAME 5.4. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateToIso(Number) + + +Return value: +String + +Parameters: + Number: Integer that contains the serial date number. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateToIso + MsgBox "" & CDateToIso(Now) ,64,"ISO Date" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1662472af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +CDateFromIso Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03030108.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CdateFromIso function + +CDateFromIso Function +Returns the internal date number from a string that contains a date in ISO format (YYYYMMDD or YYYY-MM-DD). +The year part must consist of either two (supported only in YYMMDD format without separators for compatibility) or at least four digits. With four digits leading zeros must be given if the absolute value is less than 1000, it can be negative with a leading minus sign if the date passed denotes a year before the common era (BCE) and it can have more than four digits if the absolute value is greater than 9999. The formatted string can be in the range "-327680101" to "327671231", or "-32768-01-01" to "32767-12-31". +An invalid date results in an error. Year 0 is not accepted, the last day BCE is -0001-12-31 and the next day CE is 0001-01-01. Dates before 1582-10-15 are in the proleptic Gregorian calendar. +When converting a date serial number to a printable string, for example for the Print or MsgBox command, the locale's default calendar is used and at that 1582-10-15 cutover date may switch to the Julian calendar, which can result in a different date being displayed than expected. Use the CDateToIso Function to convert such date number to a string representation in the proleptic Gregorian calendar. +The YYYY-MM-DD format with separators is supported since %PRODUCTNAME 5.3.4. Years less than 100 or greater than 9999 are accepted since %PRODUCTNAME 5.4 if not in VBA compatibility mode. +
+Syntax: + +CDateFromIso(String) + +Return value: +Internal date number +Parameters: + +String: A string that contains a date in ISO format. + + +Example: + + dateval = CDateFromIso("20021231") + dateval = CDateFromIso("2002-12-31") + +return both 12/31/2002 in the date format of your system + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8768bd70 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + + DateAdd Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030110.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + DateAdd function + + + +

DateAdd Function

+Adds a date or time interval to a given date a number of times and returns the resulting date. +
+ + + +DateAdd (interval As String, number As Long, date As Date) As Date + + +Return value: +A Variant containing a date. + + + interval - A string expression from the following table, specifying the date or time interval. + +
+ + + + + interval (string value) + + + Explanation + + + + + yyyy + + + Year + + + + + q + + + Quarter + + + + + m + + + Month + + + + + y + + + Day of year + + + + + w + + + Weekday + + + + + ww + + + Week of year + + + + + d + + + Day + + + + + h + + + Hour + + + + + n + + + Minute + + + + + s + + + Second + + +
+ +
+number - A numerical expression specifying how many times the interval value will be added when positive or subtracted when negative. +date - A given date or the name of a Variant variable containing a date. The interval value will be added number times to this date. + + + +Sub example_dateadd + MsgBox DateAdd("m", 1, #1/31/2004#) &" - "& DateAdd(date:=#2005-01-31#, interval:="m", number:=1) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..748dfe0ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + CDateToUnoDate Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030111.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateToUnoDate function + + + +CDateToUnoDate Function +Returns the date as a UNO com.sun.star.util.Date struct. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateToUnoDate(aDate) + + +Return value: +com.sun.star.util.Date + +Parameters: + aDate: Date to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateToUnoDate + aDatabaseRow.updateDate(3, CDateToUnoDate(Now)) + aDateControl.Date = CDateToUnoDate(Now) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bc61338a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + CDateFromUnoDate Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030112.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateFromUnoDate function + + + +CDateFromUnoDate Function +Converts a UNO com.sun.star.util.Date struct to a Date value. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateFromUnoDate(aDate) + + +Return value: +Date + +Parameters: + aDate: Date to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateFromUnoDate + MsgBox(CDateFromUnoDate(aDatabaseRow.getDate(3))) + MsgBox(CDateFromUnoDate(aDateControl.Date)) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a19ab689 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + CDateToUnoTime Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030113.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateToUnoTime function + + + +CDateToUnoTime Function +Returns the time part of the date as a UNO com.sun.star.util.Time struct. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateToUnoTime(aDate) + + +Return value: +com.sun.star.util.Time + +Parameters: + aDate: Date value to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateToUnoTime + aDatabaseRow.updateTime(3, CDateToUnoTime(Now)) + aTimeControl.Time = CDateToUnoTime(Now) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c37d6778 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + CDateFromUnoTime Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030114.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateFromUnoTime function + + + +CDateFromUnoTime Function +Converts a UNO com.sun.star.util.Time struct to a Date value. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateFromUnoTime(aTime) + + +Return value: +Date + +Parameters: + aTime: Time to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateFromUnoTime + MsgBox(CDateFromUnoTime(aDatabaseRow.getTime(3))) + MsgBox(CDateFromUnoTime(aTimeControl.Time)) +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7523d3264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + CDateToUnoDateTime Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030115.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateToUnoDateTime function + + + +CDateToUnoDateTime Function +Returns the time part of the date as a UNO com.sun.star.util.DateTime struct. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateToUnoDateTime(aDate) + + +Return value: +com.sun.star.util.DateTime + +Parameters: + aDate: Date value to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateToUnoDateTime + aDatabaseRow.updateTimestamp(3, CDateToUnoDateTime(Now)) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f46887f53 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + CDateFromUnoDateTime Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030116.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CDateFromUnoDateTime function + + + +CDateFromUnoDateTime Function +Converts a UNO com.sun.star.util.DateTime struct to a Date value. +
+ +Syntax: + +CDateFromUnoDateTime(aDateTime) + + +Return value: +Date + +Parameters: + aDateTime: DateTime to convert + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCDateFromUnoDateTime + MsgBox(CDateFromUnoDateTime(aDatabaseRow.getTimestamp(3))) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04f6fd4de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + + DateDiff Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030120.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DateDiff function + + +

DateDiff Function

+Returns the number of date or time intervals between two given date values. +
+ + + +DateDiff (interval As String, date1 As Date, date2 As Date [, firstDayOfWeek As Integer [, firstWeekOfYear As Integer]]) As Double + + +Return value: +A number. + + + interval - A string expression from the following table, specifying the date or time interval. + + date1, date2 - The two date values to be compared. + + +
+ firstdayofweek: An optional parameter that specifies the starting day of a week. + + + + + firstdayofweek value + + + Explanation + + + + + 0 + + + Use system default value + + + + + 1 + + + Sunday (default) + + + + + 2 + + + Monday + + + + + 3 + + + Tuesday + + + + + 4 + + + Wednesday + + + + + 5 + + + Thursday + + + + + 6 + + + Friday + + + + + 7 + + + Saturday + + +
+ + firstweekofyear: An optional parameter that specifies the starting week of a year. + + + + + firstweekofyear value + + + Explanation + + + + + 0 + + + Use system default value + + + + + 1 + + + Week 1 is the week with January, 1st (default) + + + + + 2 + + + Week 1 is the first week containing four or more days of that year + + + + + 3 + + + Week 1 is the first week containing only days of the new year + + +
+ +
+ + + +Sub example_datediff + MsgBox DateDiff("d", #1/1/2005#, #2005-12-31#) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5934bb13b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + DatePart Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030130.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + DatePart function + + +

DatePart Function

+The DatePart function returns a specified part of a date. +
+ + + +DatePart (interval As String, date As Date [, firstDayOfWeek As Integer [, firstWeekOfYear As Integer]]) As Long + + +Return value: +The extracted part for the given date. + + + interval - A string expression from the following table, specifying the date interval. + + date - The date from which the result is calculated. + + + + +Sub example_datepart + MsgBox DatePart("ww", #12/31/2005#) + MsgBox DatePart(date:=#1999-12-30#, interval:="q") +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e12f26802 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting Time Values +/text/sbasic/shared/03030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Converting Time Values + The following functions convert time values to calculable numbers. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d246b8e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + Hour Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030201.xhp + + + +
+Hour function + +Hour Function + Returns the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. +
+ Syntax: + +Hour (Number) + + Return value: + Integer + Parameters: + + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial time value that is used to return the hour value. + This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns an integer value that represents the hour from a time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression + Print Hour(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) + returns the value 12. + + + Example: + + Sub ExampleHour + Print "The current hour is " & Hour( Now ) + End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..979e62808 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + Minute Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030202.xhp + + + +
+ Minute function + +

Minute Function (BASIC)

+ Returns the minute of the hour that corresponds to the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. +
+ + + Minute (Number) + + + Integer + + + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial time value that is used to return the minute value. + This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns the minute of the serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. For example, the expression: + + Print Minute(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) + + returns the value 30. + + + + + Sub ExampleMinute + MsgBox "The current minute is "& Minute(Now)& "." + End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a9d7c632 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Now Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030203.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Now function + + +

Now Function

+Returns the current system date and time as a Date value. +
+ + + +Now + + + +Date + + + + Sub ExampleNow + MsgBox "It is now " & Now + End Sub + + +The Now function measures time in seconds. To measure time in milliseconds use the Timer service. + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf11c82da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Second Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030204.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Second function + + + +Second Function +Returns an integer that represents the seconds of the serial time number that is generated by the TimeSerial or the TimeValue function. +
+ +Syntax: + +Second (Number) + + +Return value: +Integer + +Parameters: + Number: Numeric expression that contains the serial time number that is used to calculate the number of seconds. +This function is the opposite of the TimeSerial function. It returns the seconds of a serial time value that is generated by the TimeSerial or TimeValue functions. For example, the expression: +Print Second(TimeSerial(12,30,41)) +returns the value 41. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSecond + MsgBox "The exact second of the current time is "& Second( Now ) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c351bf9fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + TimeSerial Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030205.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + TimeSerial function + + + +TimeSerial Function +Calculates a serial time value for the specified hour, minute, and second parameters that are passed as numeric value. You can then use this value to calculate the difference between times. +
+ +Syntax: + +TimeSerial (hour, minute, second) + + +Return value: +Date + +Parameters: + hour: Any integer expression that indicates the hour of the time that is used to determine the serial time value. Valid values: 0-23. + minute: Any integer expression that indicates the minute of the time that is used to determine the serial time value. In general, use values between 0 and 59. However, you can also use values that lie outside of this range, where the number of minutes influence the hour value. + second: Any integer expression that indicates the second of the time that is used to determine the serial time value. In general, you can use values between 0 and 59. However, you can also use values that lie outside of this range, where the number seconds influences the minute value. + Examples: +12, -5, 45 corresponds to 11, 55, 45 +12, 61, 45 corresponds to 13, 2, 45 +12, 20, -2 corresponds to 12, 19, 58 +12, 20, 63 corresponds to 12, 21, 4 +You can use the TimeSerial function to convert any time into a single value that you can use to calculate time differences. +The TimeSerial function returns the type Variant with VarType 7 (Date). This value is stored internally as a double-precision number between 0 and 0.9999999999. As opposed to the DateSerial or DateValue function, where the serial date values are calculated as days relative to a fixed date, you can calculate with values returned by the TimeSerial function, but you cannot evaluate them. +In the TimeValue function, you can pass a string as a parameter containing the time. For the TimeSerial function, however, you can pass the individual parameters (hour, minute, second) as separate numeric expressions. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleTimeSerial +Dim dDate As Double, sDate As String + dDate = TimeSerial(8,30,15) + sDate = TimeSerial(8,30,15) + MsgBox dDate,64,"Time as a number" + MsgBox sDate,64,"Formatted time" +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..baf4ee9ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + TimeValue Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030206.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + TimeValue function + + + +TimeValue Function +Calculates a serial time value from the specified hour, minute, and second - parameters passed as strings - that represents the time in a single numeric value. This value can be used to calculate the difference between times. +
+ +Syntax: + +TimeValue (Text As String) + + +Return value: +Date + +Parameters: + Text: Any string expression that contains the time that you want to calculate in the format "HH:MM:SS". +Use the TimeValue function to convert any time into a single value, so that you can calculate time differences. +This TimeValue function returns the type Variant with VarType 7 (Date), and stores this value internally as a double-precision number between 0 and 0.9999999999. +As opposed to the DateSerial or the DateValue function, where serial date values result in days relative to a fixed date, you can calculate with the values that are returned by the TimeValue function, but you cannot evaluate them. +In the TimeSerial function, you can pass individual parameters (hour, minute, second) as separate numeric expressions. For the TimeValue function, however, you can pass a string as a parameter containing the time. + + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleTimerValue +Dim daDT As Date +Dim a1, b1, c1, a2, b2, c2 As String + a1 = "start time" + b1 = "end time" + c1 = "total time" + a2 = "8:34" + b2 = "18:12" + daDT = TimeValue(b2) - TimeValue(a2) + c2 = a1 & ": " & a2 & chr(13) + c2 = c2 & b1 & ": " & b2 & chr(13) + c2 = c2 & c1 & ": " & trim(Str(Hour(daDT))) & ":" & trim(Str(Minute(daDT))) & ":" & trim(Str(Second(daDT))) + MsgBox c2 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f64396e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +System Date and Time +/text/sbasic/shared/03030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ System Date and Time + The following functions and statements set or return the system date and time. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e561ac7d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Date Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030301.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Date function + + + +

Date Function

+Returns the current system date as a string, or date variant. +
+ + + +Date[$][()] + + + + +Sub ExampleDate + MsgBox "The date is " & Date +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d93aa166 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Time Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030302.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Time function + + +

Time Function

+This function returns the current system time as a string in the format "HH:MM:SS". +
+ + + +Time[$][()] + + + + +Sub ExampleTime + MsgBox Time,0,"The time is" +End Sub + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d82375bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Timer Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03030303.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Timer function + + +

Timer Function

+Returns a value that specifies the number of seconds that have elapsed since midnight. +
+You must first declare a variable to call the Timer function and assign it the "Long " data type, otherwise a Date value is returned. + + + + Timer + + + +Date + + + + Sub ExampleTimer + Dim lSec As Long,lMin As Long,lHour As Long + lSec = Timer + MsgBox lSec, 0, "Seconds since midnight" + lMin = lSec / 60 + lSec = lSec Mod 60 + lHour = lMin / 60 + lMin = lMin Mod 60 + MsgBox Right("00" & lHour , 2) & ":"& Right("00" & lMin , 2) & ":" & Right("00" & lSec , 2), 0, "The time is" +End Sub + + +The Timer function measures time in seconds. To measure time in milliseconds use the Timer service available in the ScriptForge library. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33dbd5af5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,618 @@ + + + + + + + Basic Constants + /text/sbasic/shared/03040000.xhp + + + + +
+ +Basic constants + +

Basic Constants

+ Constants used in Basic programs +
+ +
+ +Boolean Basic constants +Basic constant;False +Basic constant;True + +

Boolean constants

+ + + + + Name + + + Type + + + Value + + + + + True + + + Boolean + + + 1 + + + + + False + + + Boolean + + + 0 + + +
+ + + + Dim bPositive as Boolean + bPositive = True + +
+ +
+ +Basic Mathematical constants +Pi;Basic constant +Basic constant;Pi + + +

Mathematical constant

+ + + + + Name + + + Type + + + Value + + + + + Pi + + + Double + + + 3.14159265358979 + + +
+ + + + Function Rad2Deg( aRad as Double) As Double + Rad2Deg = aRad * 180.00 / Pi + End Function + +
+ +
+ +Basic Object constants +Empty;Basic constant +Null;Basic constant +Nothing;Basic constant +Basic constant;Nothing +Basic constant;Null +Basic constant;Empty + + +

Object Constants

+ + + + + Name + + + Type + + + Usage + + + + + Empty + + + Variant + + + The Empty value indicates that the variable is not initialized. + + + + + Null + + + null + + + Indicates that the variable does not contain data. + + + + + Nothing + + + Object + + + Assign the Nothing object to a variable to remove a previous assignment. + + +
+ + + + SubExampleEmpty + Dim sVar As Variant + sVar = Empty + Print IsEmpty(sVar) ' Returns True + End Sub + Sub ExampleNull + Dim vVar As Variant + MsgBox IsNull(vVar) + End Sub + Sub ExampleNothing + Dim oDoc As Object + Set oDoc = ThisComponent + Print oDoc.Title + oDoc = Nothing + Print oDoc ' Error + End Sub + +
+ +

MsgBox Named Constants

+ + +

GetAttr Named Constants

+ + +

VarType Named Constants

+ + +
+ +Visual Basic constants +VBA Exclusive constants + +

Additional VBA constants

+ The following constants are available when VBA compatibility mode is enabled + + +
+ +VBA Variable Type Named Constants + + + +
+ +

VBA Color Named Constants

+ + + + + Named constant + + + Red, Green, Blue
composition + + + + + vbBlack + + + RGB(0, 0, 0) + + + + + vbBlue + + + RGB(0, 0, 255) + + + + + vbCyan + + + RGB(0, 255, 255) + + + + + vbGreen + + + RGB(0, 255, 0) + + + + + vbMagenta + + + RGB(255, 0, 255) + + + + + vbRed + + + RGB(255, 0, 0) + + + + + vbYellow + + + RGB(255, 255, 0) + + + + + vbWhite + + + RGB(255, 255, 255) + + +
+ +

Variable Type Named Constants

+ + + + Named constant + + + Decimal value + + + + + vbArray + + + 8192 + + + + + vbBoolean + + + 11 + + + + + vbByte + + + 17 + + + + + vbCurrency + + + 6 + + + + + vbDataObject + + + 13 + + + + + vbDate + + + 7 + + + + + vbDecimal + + + 14 + + + + + vbDouble + + + 5 + + + + + vbEmpty + + + 0 + + + + + vbError + + + 10 + + + + + vbInteger + + + 2 + + + + + vbLong + + + 3 + + + + + vbNull + + + 1 + + + + + vbObject + + + 9 + + + + + vbSingle + + + 4 + + + + + vbString + + + 8 + + + + + vbUserDefinedType + + + 36 + + + + + vbVariant + + + 12 + + +
+ +

FormatDateTime VBA Named Constants

+ + +

StrConv VBA Named Constants

+ + +

WeekDayName VBA Named Constants

+ + +

Miscellaneous VBA Named Constants

+ + + + Named constant + + + Hexadecimal (decimal) value + + + Description + + + + + vbTrue + + + -1 + + + Part of vbTriState enumeration. + + + + + vbFalse + + + 0 + + + Part of vbTriState enumeration. + + + + + vbUseDefault + + + -2 + + + Part of vbTriState enumeration. + + + + + vbCr + + + \x0D (13) + + + CR - Carriage return + + + + + vbCrLf + + + \x0D\x0A (13 10) + + + CRLF - Carriage return and line feed + + + + + vbFormFeed + + + \x0c (12) + + + FF - Form feed + + + + + vbLf + + + \x0A (10) + + + LF - Line feed + + + + + vbNewLine + + + \x0D\x0A (13 10) for Windows + \x0A (10) for other systems + + + LF or CRLF + + + + + vbNullString + + + "" + + + Null string + + + + + vbTab + + + \x09 (9) + + + HT - Horizontal tab + + + + + vbVerticalTab + + + \x0B (11) + + + VT - Vertical tab + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..28820eec3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + Error-Handling Functions + /text/sbasic/shared/03050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Error-Handling Functions

+ Use the following statements and functions to define the way %PRODUCTNAME Basic reacts to run-time errors. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic offers several methods to prevent the termination of a program when a run-time error occurs. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e10ff2d81 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Erl Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03050100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Erl function + + +Erl Function +Returns the line number where an error occurred during program execution. +
+ +Syntax: + +Erl + + +Return value: +Integer + +Parameters: +The Erl function only returns a line number, and not a line label. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleError +On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Set up error handler +Dim iVar As Integer +Dim sVar As String +' Error caused by non-existent file + iVar = Freefile + Open "\file9879.txt" For Input As #iVar + Line Input #iVar, sVar + Close #iVar + Exit Sub +ErrorHandler: + MsgBox "Error " & err & ": " & Error$ + chr(13) + "In Line : " + Erl + chr(13) + Now , 16 ,"An error occurred" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6ee49f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Err Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03050200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Err function + +Err Function +Returns an error code that identifies the error that occurred during program execution. +
+Syntax: + +Err + +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: +The Err function is used in error-handling routines to determine the error and the corrective action. +Example: + +Sub ExampleError +On Error Goto ErrorHandler REM Set up error handler +Dim iVar as Integer +Dim sVar As String +REM Error occurs due to non-existent file + iVar = Freefile + Open "\file9879.txt" for Input as #iVar + Line Input #iVar, sVar + Close #iVar +Exit Sub +ErrorHandler: + MsgBox "Error " & Err & ": " & Error$ + chr(13) + "At line : " + Erl + chr(13) + Now , 16 ,"an error occurred" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3964172a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Error Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Error function + +Error Function +Returns the error message that corresponds to a value or raises a given error context. +
+Syntax: + +Error +Error(expression) +Error err_code + +Return value: +String or raised error context +Parameters: +If no argument is provided, the Error function returns the error message of the most recent error that occurred during program execution. + +expression: Any numeric expression whose error code can be mapped to an existing error message. An empty string is returned if the error code does not exist. +err_code: Any value that corresponds to an existing error code. + +fixed i60953 +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d1e71c39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + On Error GoTo ... Resume Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03050500.xhp + + + + +
+ + Resume Next parameter + On Error GoTo ... Resume statement + +On Error GoTo ... Resume Statement +Enables an error-handling routine after an error occurs, or resumes program execution. +
+ + + + On Error Statement diagram + + +On [Local] Error {GoTo Labelname | GoTo 0 | Resume Next} + + + +GoTo Labelname: If an error occurs, enables the error-handling routine that starts at the line "Labelname". +Resume Next: If an error occurs, program execution continues with the statement that follows the statement in which the error occurred. +GoTo 0: Disables the error handler in the current procedure. +Local: "On error" is global in scope, and remains active until canceled by another "On error" statement. "On Local error" is local to the routine which invokes it. Local error handling overrides any previous global setting. When the invoking routine exits, the local error handling is canceled automatically, and any previous global setting is restored. +The On Error GoTo statement is used to react to errors that occur in a macro.see i112231: The statement must be inserted at the start of a procedure (in a local error-handling routine) or at the start of a module. + + + +Sub ExampleReset +On Error GoTo ErrorHandler + Dim iNumber As Integer + Dim iCount As Integer + Dim sLine As String + Dim aFile As String + aFile = "C:\Users\ThisUser\data.txt" + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Output As #iNumber + Print #iNumber, "This is a line of text" + Close #iNumber + iNumber = Freefile + Open aFile For Input As iNumber + For iCount = 1 To 5 + Line Input #iNumber, sLine + If sLine <>"" Then + Rem + End If + Next iCount + Close #iNumber + Exit Sub +ErrorHandler: + Reset + MsgBox "All files will be closed", 0, "Error" +End Sub + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f67ded5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Logical Operators +/text/sbasic/shared/03060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Logical Operators

+ The following logical operators are supported by $[officename] Basic. +
+ + Logical operators combine (bitwise) the contents of two expressions or variables, for example, to test if specific bits are set or not. + + + + + + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c4bf0bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + AND Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + AND operator (logical) + + + +AND Operator +Logically combines two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 And Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that records the result of the combination. + Expression1, Expression2: Any expressions that you want to combine. +Boolean expressions combined with AND only return the value True if both expressions evaluate to True: + True AND True returns True; for all other combinations the result is False. +The AND operator also performs a bitwise comparison of identically positioned bits in two numeric expressions. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleAnd +Dim A As Variant, B As Variant, C As Variant, D As Variant +Dim vVarOut As Variant + A = 10: B = 8: C = 6: D = Null + vVarOut = A > B And B > C ' returns -1 + vVarOut = B > A And B > C ' returns 0 + vVarOut = A > B And B > D ' returns 0 + vVarOut = (B > D And B > A) ' returns 0 + vVarOut = B And A ' returns 8 due to the bitwise And combination of both arguments +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ba146ac9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Eqv Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060200.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Eqv operator (logical) + + + +Eqv Operator +Calculates the logical equivalence of two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 Eqv Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the comparison. + Expression1, Expression2: Any expressions that you want to compare. +When testing for equivalence between Boolean expressions, the result is True if both expressions are either True or False. +In a bit-wise comparison, the Eqv operator only sets the corresponding bit in the result if a bit is set in both expressions, or in neither expression. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleEqv +Dim A As Variant, B As Variant, C As Variant, D As Variantsee #i38265 +Dim vOut As Variant + A = 10: B = 8: C = 6: D = Null + vOut = A > B Eqv B > C ' returns -1 + vOut = B > A Eqv B > C ' returns 0 + vOut = A > B Eqv B > D ' returns 0 + vOut = (B > D Eqv B > A) ' returns -1 + vOut = B Eqv A ' returns -3 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..041eb2736 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Imp Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Imp operator (logical) + + + +Imp Operator +Performs a logical implication on two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 Imp Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the implication. + Expression1, Expression2: Any expressions that you want to evaluate with the Imp operator. +If you use the Imp operator in Boolean expressions, False is only returned if the first expression evaluates to True and the second expression to False. +If you use the Imp operator in bit expressions, a bit is deleted from the result if the corresponding bit is set in the first expression and the corresponding bit is deleted in the second expression. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleImp +Dim A As Variant, B As Variant, C As Variant, D As Variant +Dim vOut As Variant + A = 10: B = 8: C = 6: D = Null + vOut = A > B Imp B > C ' returns -1 + vOut = B > A Imp B > C ' returns -1 + vOut = A > B Imp B > D ' returns 0 + vOut = (B > D Imp B > A) ' returns -1 + vOut = B Imp A ' returns -1 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38bcd0123 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Not Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Not operator (logical) + + + +Not Operator +Negates an expression by inverting the bit values. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Not Expression + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the negation. + Expression: Any expression that you want to negate. +When a Boolean expression is negated, the value True changes to False, and the value False changes to True. +In a bitwise negation each individual bit is inverted. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleNot +Dim vA As Variant, vB As Variant, vC As Variant, vD As Variant +Dim vOut As Variant + vA = 10: vB = 8: vC = 6: vD = Null + vOut = Not vA ' Returns -11 + vOut = Not(vC > vD) ' Returns -1 + vOut = Not(vB > vA) ' Returns -1 + vOut = Not(vA > vB) ' Returns 0 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4652e7a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Or Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060500.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Or operator (logical) + + + +Or Operator +Performs a logical OR disjunction on two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 Or Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the disjunction. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numeric expressions that you want to compare. +A logical OR disjunction of two Boolean expressions returns the value True if at least one comparison expression is True. +A bit-wise comparison sets a bit in the result if the corresponding bit is set in at least one of the two expressions. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleOr +Dim vA As Variant, vB As Variant, vC As Variant, vD As Variant +Dim vOut As Variant + vA = 10: vB = 8: vC = 6: vD = Null + vOut = vA > vB Or vB > vC ' -1 + vOut = vB > vA Or vB > vC ' -1 + vOut = vA > vB Or vB > vD ' -1 + vOut = (vB > vD Or vB > vA) ' 0 + vOut = vB Or vA ' 10 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2fa594dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + XOR Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03060600.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + XOR operator (logical) + + + +XOR Operator +Performs a logical Exclusive-Or combination of two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 XOR Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the combination. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numeric expressions that you want to combine. +A logical Exclusive-Or conjunction of two Boolean expressions returns the value True only if both expressions are different from each other. +A bitwise Exclusive-Or conjunction returns a bit if the corresponding bit is set in only one of the two expressions. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleXOR +Dim vA As Variant, vB As Variant, vC As Variant, vD As Variant +Dim vOut As Variant + vA = 10: vB = 8: vC = 6: vD = Null + vOut = vA > vB XOR vB > vC ' returns 0 + vOut = vB > vA XOR vB > vC ' returns -1 + vOut = vA > vB XOR vB > vD ' returns -1 + vOut = (vB > vD XOR vB > vA) ' returns 0 + vOut = vB XOR vA ' returns 2 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b9919cb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mathematical Operators +/text/sbasic/shared/03070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Mathematical Operators

+ The following mathematical operators are supported in $[officename] Basic. +
+ This chapter provides a short overview of all of the arithmetical operators that you may need for calculations within a program. + + + + + + + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f54561edb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + "-" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + "-" operator (mathematical) + + + +"-" Operator +Subtracts two values. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 - Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numerical expression that contains the result of the subtraction. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numerical expressions that you want to subtract. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSubtraction1 + Print 5 - 5 +End Sub + +Sub ExampleSubtraction2 +Dim iValue1 As Integer +Dim iValue2 As Integer + iValue1 = 5 + iValue2 = 10 + Print iValue1 - iValue2 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f45997b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + "*" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070200.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + "*" operator (mathematical) + + + +"*" Operator +Multiplies two values. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 * Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numeric expression that records the result of a multiplication. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numeric expressions that you want to multiply. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleMultiplication1 + Print 5 * 5 +End Sub + +Sub ExampleMultiplication2 +Dim iValue1 As Integer +Dim iValue2 As Integer + iValue1 = 5 + iValue2 = 10 + Print iValue1 * iValue2 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecfaa55d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + "+" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + "+" operator (mathematical) + + + +"+" Operator +Adds or combines two expressions. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 + Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numerical expression that contains the result of the addition. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numerical expressions that you want to combine or to add. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleAddition1 + Print 5 + 5 +End Sub + +Sub ExampleAddition2 +Dim iValue1 As Integer +Dim iValue2 As Integer + iValue1 = 5 + iValue2 = 10 + Print iValue1 + iValue2 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e93644e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + "/" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + "/" operator (mathematical) + + + +"/" Operator +Divides two values. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression1 / Expression2 + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numerical value that contains the result of the division. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numerical expressions that you want to divide. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleDivision1 + Print 5 / 5 +End Sub + +Sub ExampleDivision2 +Dim iValue1 As Integer +Dim iValue2 As Integer + iValue1 = 5 + iValue2 = 10 + Print iValue1 / iValue2 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e69cee190 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + "^" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070500.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + "^" operator (mathematical) + + + +"^" Operator +Raises a number to a power. +
+ +Syntax: + +Result = Expression ^ Exponent + + +Parameters: + Result: Any numerical expression that contains the result of the number raised to a power. + Expression: Numerical value that you want to raise to a power. + Exponent: The value of the power that you want to raise the expression to. + +Example: + +Sub Example + Print ( 12.345 ^ 23 ) + Print Exp ( 23 * Log( 12.345 ) ) ' Raises by forming a logarithm +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed510a94c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Mod Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070600.xhp + + + + + +
+ + MOD operator (mathematical) + + +

Mod Operator

+The MOD operator takes in two numeric expressions and returns the remainder of the division. +
+For example, the result of 21 MOD 6 is 3 because after dividing 21 by 6, the remainder of the division is 3. +If the MOD operation involves non-integer values, both operands are rounded to the nearest integer values. Hence, the value returned by a MOD operation will always be an integer number. +For example, the expression 16.4 MOD 5.9 is evaluated as follows: + + + The value 16.4 is rounded to 16. + + + The value 5.9 is rounded to 6. + + + The operation 16 MOD 6 returns 4, which is the remainder after dividing 16 by 6. + + +Beware that Basic's MOD operator and Calc's MOD Function behave differently. In Calc, both operands can be decimal values and they're not rounded before division, thus the resulting remainder may be a decimal value. + + + +Result = Expression1 MOD Expression2 + + + +Integer + + + Result: Any numeric variable that contains the result of the MOD operation. + Expression1, Expression2: Any numeric expressions for which you want to calculate the remainder after the division of Expression1 by Expression2. + + + +Sub ExampleMod + Dim a As Double, b as Double + a = 10 : b = 4 + Print a Mod b 'Returns 2 + a = 18 : b = 3.2 + Print a Mod b 'Returns 0 + a = 16.4 : b = 5.9 + Print a Mod b 'Returns 4 +End Sub + + +
+ MOD Function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69a83b03c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + "\" Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/03070700.xhp + + + + + +
+

"\" Operator

+Performs the integer division on two numbers and returns the result. +
+ + Operators;Integer division (\\) + "\\" operator (mathematical) + + + + result = expression1 \ expression2 + + + + result: A numerical value that contains the result of the integer division. + expression1, expression2: Dividend and diviser operands of the integer division. +Before division both operands are rounded to whole numbers. The fractional part of the result is dropped. + + + +Sub IntegerDivision + Print 5 \ 4 , 5 / 4 ' 1 , 1.25 + Print 7 \ 4 , 7 / 4 ' 1 , 1.75 +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcadb6f25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Numeric Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Numeric Functions + The following numeric functions perform calculations. Mathematical and Boolean operators are described in a separate section. Functions differ from operators in that functions pass arguments and return a result, instead of operators that return a result by combining two numeric expressions. +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e50eae34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Trigonometric Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Trigonometric Functions + The following are the trigonometric functions that are supported in $[officename] Basic. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4188f8cca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Atn Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080101.xhp + + + + +
+ +Atn function + +

Atn Function

+ Trigonometric function that returns the arctangent of a numeric expression. The return value is in the range -Pi/2 to +Pi/2. +
+ The arctangent is the inverse of the tangent function. The Atn Function returns the angle "Alpha", expressed in radians, using the tangent of this angle. The function can also return the angle "Alpha" by comparing the ratio of the length of the side that is opposite of the angle to the length of the side that is adjacent to the angle in a right-angled triangle. + Atn(side opposite the angle/side adjacent to angle)= Alpha + + + + Atn (Number As Double) As Double + + + Double + + + Number: Any numerical expression that represents the ratio of two sides of a right triangle. The Atn function returns the corresponding angle in radians (arctangent). + To convert radians to degrees, multiply radians by 180/pi. + degree=(radian*180)/pi + radian=(degree*pi)/180 + Pi is here the fixed circle constant with the rounded value 3.14159. Pi is a Basic mathematical constant. + + + + + + ' The following example calculates for a right-angled triangle + ' the angle Alpha from the tangent of the angle Alpha: + Sub ExampleAtn + ' rounded Pi = 3.14159 Is a predefined constant + Dim d1 As Double + Dim d2 As Double + d1 = InputBox("Enter the length of the side adjacent to the angle: ","Adjacent") + d2 = InputBox("Enter the length of the side opposite the angle: ","Opposite") + Print "The Alpha angle is"; (atn (d2/d1) * 180 / Pi); " degrees" + End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f2e227ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Cos Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Cos function + + + +

Cos Function

+Calculates the cosine of an angle. The angle is specified in radians. The result lies between -1 and 1. +
+Using the angle Alpha, the Cos function calculates the ratio of the length of the side that is adjacent to the angle, divided by the length of the hypotenuse in a right-angled triangle. +Cos(Alpha) = Adjacent/Hypotenuse + + +Cos (Number As Double) As Double + + + +Double + + + Number: Numeric expression that specifies an angle in radians that you want to calculate the cosine for. +To convert degrees to radians, multiply degrees by pi/180. To convert radians to degrees, multiply radians by 180/pi. +degree=(radian*180)/pi +radian=(degree*pi)/180 +Pi is here the fixed circle constant with the rounded value 3.14159... + + + + + +' The following example allows for a right-angled triangle the input of +' secant and angle (in degrees) and calculates the length of the hypotenuse: +Sub ExampleCosinus +' rounded Pi = 3.14159 +Dim d1 As Double, dAngle As Double + d1 = InputBox("Enter the length of the adjacent side: ","Adjacent") + dAngle = InputBox("Enter the angle Alpha (in degrees): ","Alpha") + Print "The length of the hypothenuse is"; (d1 / cos (dAngle * Pi / 180)) +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f9f25a15 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Sin Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Sin function + + + +

Sin Function

+Returns the sine of an angle. The angle is specified in radians. The result lies between -1 and 1. +
+Using the angle Alpha, the Sin function returns the ratio of the length of the opposite side of an angle to the length of the hypotenuse in a right-angled triangle. +Sin(Alpha) = side opposite the angle/hypotenuse + + + +Sin (Number As Double) As Double + + + +Double + + + Number: Numeric expression that defines the angle in radians that you want to calculate the sine for. +To convert degrees to radians, multiply degrees by Pi/180, and to convert radians to degrees, multiply radians by 180/Pi. +degrees=(radians*180)/Pi +radians=(degrees*Pi)/180 +Pi is approximately 3.141593. + + + + + +' In this example, the following entry is possible for a right-angled triangle: +' The side opposite the angle and the angle (in degrees) to calculate the length of the hypotenuse: +Sub ExampleSine +' Pi = 3.1415926 is a predefined variable +Dim d1 As Double +Dim dAlpha As Double + d1 = InputBox("Enter the length of the opposite side: ","Opposite Side") + dAlpha = InputBox("Enter the angle Alpha (in degrees): ","Alpha") + Print "The length of the hypotenuse is"; (d1 / sin (dAlpha * Pi / 180)) +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa1978567 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Tan Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080104.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Tan function + + + +

Tan Function

+Determines the tangent of an angle. The angle is specified in radians.i71396 +
+Using the angle Alpha, the Tan function calculates the ratio of the length of the side opposite the angle to the length of the side adjacent to the angle in a right-angled triangle. +Tan(Alpha) = side opposite the angle/side adjacent to angle + + + +Tan (Number As Double) As Double + + + +Double + + + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to calculate the tangent for (in radians). +To convert degrees to radians, multiply by Pi/180. To convert radians to degrees, multiply by 180/Pi. +degrees=(radians*180)/Pi +radians=(degrees*Pi)/180 +Pi is approximately 3.141593. + + + + + +' In this example, the following entry is possible for a right-angled triangle: +' The side opposite the angle and the angle (in degrees) to calculate the length of the side adjacent to the angle: +Sub ExampleTangens +' Pi = 3.1415926 is a pre-defined variable +Dim d1 As Double +Dim dAlpha As Double + d1 = InputBox("Enter the length of the side opposite the angle: ","opposite") + dAlpha = InputBox("Enter the Alpha angle (in degrees): ","Alpha") + Print "the length of the side adjacent the angle is"; (d1 / tan (dAlpha * Pi / 180)) +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66b019353 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Exponential and Logarithmic Functions +/text/sbasic/shared/03080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Exponential and Logarithmic Functions + $[officename] Basic supports the following exponential and logarithmic functions. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf450847e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Exp Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080201.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Exp function + + +Exp Function +Returns the base of the natural logarithm (e = 2.718282) raised to a power. +
+ +Syntax: + +Exp (Number) + + +Return value: +Double + +Parameters: + Number: Any numeric expression that specifies the power that you want to raise "e" to (the base of natural logarithms). The power must be for both single-precision numbers less than or equal to 88.02969 and double-precision numbers less than or equal to 709.782712893, since $[officename] Basic returns an Overflow error for numbers exceeding these values. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleLogExp +Dim dValue As Double + Const b1=12.345e12 +Const b2=1.345e34 + dValue=Exp( Log(b1)+Log(b2) ) + MsgBox "" & dValue & chr(13) & (b1*b2) ,0,"Multiplication by logarithm" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1a312563 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Log Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080202.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Log function + + +

Log Function (BASIC)

+Returns the natural logarithm of a number. +
+ + + +Log (Number) + + + +Double + + + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to calculate the natural logarithm for. +The natural logarithm is the logarithm to the base e. Base e is a constant with an approximate value of 2.718282... +You can calculate logarithms to any base (n) for any number (x) by dividing the natural logarithm of x by the natural logarithm of n, as follows: +Logn(x) = Log(x) / Log(n) + + + + + +Sub ExampleLogExp +Dim a As Double +Dim Const b1=12.345e12 +Dim Const b2=1.345e34 + a=Exp( Log(b1)+Log(b2) ) + MsgBox "" & a & chr(13) & (b1*b2) ,0,"Multiplication by logarithm function" +End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0cad76a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Generating Random Numbers +/text/sbasic/shared/03080300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Generating Random Numbers + The following statements and functions generate random numbers. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c846b1501 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Randomize Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03080301.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Randomize statement + + + +Randomize Statement +Initializes the random-number generator used by the Rnd function. +
+ +Syntax: + +Randomize [Number] + +Parameters: + Number: Any integer value. Used as seed to initialize the random-number generator. Equal seeds result in equal random-number sequences by the Rnd function. If the parameter is omitted, the Randomize statement will be ignored. +Unless a predictable sequence of numbers is desired, there is no need to use the Randomize statement, as the random-number generator will be initialized automatically at first use – it will be seeded using a system-provided random-number generator that produces uniformly-distributed, non-deterministic random numbers. If no such generator is available on the system, the system time will be used as seed. +The Randomize statement affects BASIC's Rnd function only. Other random-number generators (for example the Calc's RAND() function, etc.) are not affected by it. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleRandomize +Dim iCount As Integer, iVar As Integer, sText As String +Dim iSpectral(10) As Integer + Randomize 2^14-1 + For iCount = 1 To 1000 + iVar = Int(10 * Rnd) ' Range from 0 to 9 + iSpectral(iVar) = iSpectral(iVar) +1 + Next iCount + sText = " | " + For iCount = 0 To 9 + sText = sText & iSpectral(iCount) & " | " + Next iCount + MsgBox sText,0,"Spectral Distribution" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..109723caf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Rnd Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080302.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Rnd function + + + +Rnd Function +Returns a random number between 0 and 1. +
+ +Syntax: + +Rnd [(Expression)] + +Return value: +Double + +Parameters: + Expression: Has no effect, is ignored if provided. +The Rnd function returns decimal fractions ranging from 0 (included) to 1 (excluded) according to a uniform distribution. It uses the Mersenne Twister 19937 random-number generator. To generate random integers in a given range, use a formula like in the example below. A Randomize statement with a defined seed value can be used beforehand, if a predictable sequence of numbers is desired. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleRandomSelect +Dim iVar As Integer + iVar = Int((15 * Rnd) -2) + Select Case iVar + Case 1 To 5 + Print "Number from 1 to 5" + Case 6, 7, 8 + Print "Number from 6 to 8" + Case Is > 8 And iVar < 11 + Print "Greater than 8" + Case Else + Print "Outside range 1 to 10" + End Select +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1c3eb18a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Square Root Calculation +/text/sbasic/shared/03080400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Square Root Calculation + Use this function to calculate square roots. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35a3c55e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Sqr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080401.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Sqr function + + + +Sqr Function +Calculates the square root of a numeric expression. +
+ +Syntax: + +Sqr (Number) + + +Return value: +Double + +Parameters: + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to calculate the square root for. +A square root is the number that you multiply by itself to produce another number, for example, the square root of 36 is 6. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSqr +Dim iVar As Single + iVar = 36 + MsgBox Sqr(iVar) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a8754efa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Integers +/text/sbasic/shared/03080500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Integers and Fractional + Functions to round values to integers, and to take the fractional part of a value. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc5f18e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Fix Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080501.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Fix function + +Fix Function +Returns the integer value of a numeric expression by removing the fractional part of the number. +
+ + +Fix (Expression) + + +Double + + + Expression: Numeric expression that you want to return the integer value for. + + + + + +Sub ExampleFix + Print Fix(3.14159) ' returns 3. + Print Fix(0) ' returns 0. + Print Fix(-3.14159) ' returns -3. +End Sub + +
+ Int Function + Frac Function +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b695125ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Int Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080502.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Int function + + + +Int Function +Returns the integer portion of a number. +
+ + +Int (Number) + + +Double + + + Number: Any valid numeric expression. + + + + + +Sub ExampleInt + Print Int(3.99) ' returns the value 3 + Print Int(0) ' returns the value 0 + Print Int(-3.14159) ' returns the value -4 +End Sub + +
+ Fix Function + Frac Function +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64e7fc9a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Frac Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080503.xhp + + + +
+ + Frac function + +

Frac Function

+ Returns the fractional portion of a number. +
+ + Frac (Number) + + Double + + Number: Any valid numeric expression. + + + + + Sub ExampleFrac + Print Frac(3.99) ' returns the value 0.99 + Print Frac(0) ' returns the value 0 + Print Frac(-3.14159) ' returns the value -0.14159 + End Sub + +
+ Fix Function + Int Function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec743146f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Absolute Values +/text/sbasic/shared/03080600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Absolute Values + This function returns absolute values. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..777db56b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Abs Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080601.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Abs function + + + +Abs Function +Returns the absolute value of a numeric expression. +
+ +Syntax: + +Abs (Number) + + +Return value: +Double + +Parameters: + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to return the absolute value for. Positive numbers, including 0, are returned unchanged, whereas negative numbers are converted to positive numbers. +The following example uses the Abs function to calculate the difference between two values. It does not matter which value you enter first. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleDifference +Dim siW1 As Single +Dim siW2 As Single + siW1 = Int(InputBox("Please enter the first amount","Value Input")) + siW2 = Int(InputBox("Please enter the second amount","Value Input")) + Print "The difference is "; Abs(siW1 - siW2) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d578e1cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Expression Signs +/text/sbasic/shared/03080700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Expression Signs + This function returns the algebraic sign of a numeric expression. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e90641510 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Sgn Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080701.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Sgn function + + + +Sgn Function +Returns an integer number between -1 and 1 that indicates if the number that is passed to the function is positive, negative, or zero. +
+ +Syntax: + +Sgn (Number) + + +Return value: +Integer + +Parameters: + Number: Numeric expression that determines the value that is returned by the function. + + + + + Number + + + Return value + + + + + negative + + + Sgn returns -1. + + + + + 0 + + + Sgn returns 0. + + + + + positive + + + Sgn returns 1. + + +
+ + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleSgn + Print sgn(-10) ' returns -1 + Print sgn(0) ' returns 0 + Print sgn(10) ' returns 1 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f340a1310 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting Numbers +/text/sbasic/shared/03080800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Converting Numbers + The following functions convert numbers from one number format to another. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82d5bb968 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Hex Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080801.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Hex function + + + +Hex Function +Returns a string that represents the hexadecimal value of a number. +
+ +Syntax: + +Hex (Number) + + +Return value: +String + +Parameters: + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to convert to a hexadecimal number. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleHex +' uses BasicFormulas in %PRODUCTNAME Calc +Dim a2, b2, c2 As String + a2 = "&H3E8" + b2 = Hex2Lng(a2) + MsgBox b2 + c2 = Lng2Hex(b2) + MsgBox c2 +End Sub + +Function Hex2Lng(sHex As String) As Long +' Returns a 32-bit signed integer number from an 8-digit hexadecimal value. + Hex2Lng = clng( sHex ) +End Function + +Function Lng2Hex(iLong As Long) As String +' Calculates the 8-digit hexadecimal value out of a 32-bit signed integer number. + Lng2Hex = "&H" & Hex( iLong ) +End Function + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14910c900 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Oct Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03080802.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Oct function + + + +Oct Function +Returns the octal value of a number. +
+ +Syntax: + +Oct (Number) + + +Return value: +String + +Parameters: + Number: Any numeric expression that you want to convert to an octal value. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleOct + MsgBox Oct(255) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d632a2a8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Controlling Program Execution +/text/sbasic/shared/03090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Controlling Program Execution + The following statements control the execution of a program. +
+ A program generally executes from the first line of code to the last line of code. You can also execute certain procedures within the program according to specific conditions, or repeat a section of the program within a sub-procedure or function. You can use loops to repeat parts of a program as many times as necessary, or until a certain condition is met. These type of control statements are classified as Condition, Loop, or Jump statements. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e34cf1f1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Condition Statements +/text/sbasic/shared/03090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Condition Statements + The following statements are based on conditions. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd9875630 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + If...Then...Else Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090101.xhp + + + + + +
+ + If statement + ElseIf; If statement + Else If;If statement + Else;If statement + Else;If statement + End If;If statement + EndIf;If statement + + +

If...Then...Else Statement

+Defines one or more statement blocks that you only want to execute if a given condition or expression is True. +
+ + +If...EndIf statement +ElseIf fragment +Else fragment + + + If condition Then + statements + [{ElseIf|Else If} expression Then + statements] + [Else + statements] + {EndIf|End If} + + Instead of Else If you can write ElseIf, instead of End If you can write EndIf. + If statements can be shortened to one line when using single statement blocks. + + If condition Then statement [Else statement] + + + + The If...Then statement executes program blocks depending on given conditions. When %PRODUCTNAME Basic encounters an If statement, the condition is tested. If the condition is True, all subsequent statements up to the next Else or ElseIf statement are executed. If the condition is False, and an ElseIf statement follows, %PRODUCTNAME Basic tests the next expression and executes the following statements if the condition is True. If False, the program continues either with the next ElseIf or Else statement. Statements following Else are executed only if none of the previously tested conditions were True. After all conditions are evaluated, and the corresponding statements executed, the program continues with the statement following EndIf. +You can nest multiple If...Then statements. + Else and ElseIf statements are optional. +You can use GoTo and GoSub to jump out of an If...Then block, but not to jump into an If...Then structure. + + +The following example enables you to enter the expiration date of a product, and determines if the expiration date has passed. + +Sub ExampleIfThenDate + Dim sDate As String + Dim sToday As String + sDate = InputBox("Enter the expiration date (MM.DD.YYYY)") + sDate = Right$(sDate, 4) + Mid$(sDate, 4, 2) + Left$(sDate, 2) + sToday = Date$ + sToday = Right$(sToday, 4)+ Mid$(sToday, 4, 2) + Left$(sToday, 2) + If sDate < sToday Then + MsgBox "The expiration date has passed" + ElseIf sDate > sToday Then + MsgBox "The expiration date has not yet passed" + Else + MsgBox "The expiration date is today" + End If +End Sub + + +
+ Select Case statement + Iif or Switch functions +
+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..571abc33d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Select...Case Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Select Case statement + Case keyword; in Select Case statement + + + +

Select...Case Statement

+Defines one or more statement blocks depending on the value of an expression. +
+ + +Select Case syntax + + Select Case expression + Case values + Statement Block + [ Case values2 + Statement Block] + [ Case Else + Statement Block] + End Select + + + + expression: Any expression that controls if the statement block that follows the respective Case clause is executed. + values: Any value list that is compatible with the expression. The statement block that follows the Case clause is executed if expression matches values. + + + +Sub ExampleRandomSelect +Dim iVar As Integer + iVar = Int((15 * Rnd) -2) + Select Case iVar + Case 1 To 5 + Print "Number from 1 to 5" + Case 6, 7, 8 + Print "Number from 6 to 8" + Case 8 To 10 + Print "Greater than 8" + Case Else + Print "Out of range 1 to 10" + End Select +End Sub + + +
+ + + If statement + Iif or Switch functions +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..07b6e453d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + +IIf Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03090103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+IIf function + +

IIf Function

+Returns one of two possible function results, depending on the logical value of the evaluated expression. +
+ + +IIf (Expression, ExpressionTrue, ExpressionFalse) + + + +Expression: Any expression that you want to evaluate. If the expression evaluates to True, the function returns the result of ExpressionTrue, otherwise it returns the result of ExpressionFalse. + +ExpressionTrue, ExpressionFalse: Any expression, one of which will be returned as the function result, depending on the logical evaluation. +IIf evaluates both ExpressionTrue and ExpressionFalse even if it returns only one of them. If one of the expressions results in error, the function returns the error. For example, do not use IIF to bypass a possible division by zero result. + + + + +REM Returns the maximum of 3 values +Function Max (A As Double, B As Double, C, As Double) As Double + Max = IIf( A >= B, A, B) + Max = IIf( C >= Max, C, Max) +End Function +REM Bad usage of function IIf +Function Inverse(A As Double) As Double + Inverse = IIf( A = 0, 0, 1/A ) +End Function + + +
+ If or Select Case statements + Switch function +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41c8aaedf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Loops +/text/sbasic/shared/03090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Loops + The following statements execute loops. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..696ffeecd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Do...Loop Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090201.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Do...Loop statement + While; Do loop + Until + loops + + + +Do...Loop Statement + Repeats the statements between the Do and the Loop statement while the condition is True or until the condition becomes True. +
+ + +Do statement + + Do {While | Until} condition = True + ' Do While: The statement block is repeated as long as the condition is true + ' Do Until: The statement block is repeated as long as the condition is false + statements + [Exit Do] + statements + Loop + + +Do...Loop statement + + Do + statements + [Exit Do] + statements + ' Loop While: The statement block repeats as long as the condition is true + ' Loop Until: The statement block repeats until the condition is true + Loop {While | Until} condition = True + + + +The Do...Loop statement executes a loop as long as, or until, a certain condition is True. The condition for exiting the loop must be entered following either the Do or the Loop statement. The above examples are valid combinations. + condition: A comparison, numeric or Basic expression, that evaluates to either True or False. + statements: Statements that you want to repeat while or until a condition is True. + +Use the Exit Do statement to unconditionally end the loop. You can add this statement anywhere in a Do...Loop statement. You can also define an exit condition using the If...Then structure as follows: + + Do... + statements + If condition = True Then Exit Do + statements + Loop... + + + + +Sub ExampleDoLoop + Dim sFile As String + Dim sPath As String + sPath = "c:\" + sFile = Dir$( sPath ,22) + If sFile <> "" Then + Do + MsgBox sFile + sFile = Dir$ + Loop Until sFile = "" + End If +End Sub + + +
+ For, Select Case or While statements + Iif or Switch functions +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eee101283 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + For...Next Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090202.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +For statement +For Each statement +In keyword +Next keyword +Step keyword +To keyword + + + +

For...Next Statement

+ Repeats the statements between the For...Next block a specified number of times. +
+ +

Syntax:

+ + For Statement diagram + + +For counter=start To end [Step step] + statement-block + [Exit For] + statement-block +Next [counter] + + + For Each Statement diagram + + + For Each item In list + statement-block + [Exit For] + statement-block + Next [item] + + +

Variables:

+ counter: Loop counter initially assigned the value to the right of the equal sign (start). Only numeric variables are valid. The loop counter increases or decreases according to the variable step until end is passed. + start: Numeric variable that defines the initial value at the beginning of the loop. + end: Numeric variable that defines the final value at the end of the loop. + step: Sets the value by which to increase or decrease the loop counter. If step is not specified, the loop counter is incremented by 1. In this case, end must be greater than start. If you want to decrease counter, end must be less than start, and step must be assigned a negative value. +The For...Next loop repeats all of the statements in the loop for the number of times that is specified by the parameters. +As the counter variable is decreased, %PRODUCTNAME Basic checks if the end value has been reached. As soon as the counter passes the end value, the loop automatically terminates. +It is possible to nest For...Next statements. If you do not specify a variable following the Next statement, Next automatically refers to the most recent For statement. +If you specify an increment of 0, the statements between For and Next are repeated continuously. +When counting down the counter variable, %PRODUCTNAME Basic checks for overflow or underflow. The loop ends when counter exceeds end (positive Step value) or is less than end (negative Step value). +Use the Exit For statement to exit the loop unconditionally. This statement must be within a For...Next loop. Use the If...Then statement to test the exit condition as follows: + + For... + statement-block + If condition = True Then Exit For + statement-block + Next + + +In nested For...Next loops, if you exit a loop unconditionally with Exit For, only one loop is exited. + +

Examples

+The following example uses two nested loops to sort a string array with 10 elements ( sEntry() ), that is filled with various contents: + +Sub ExampleSort +Dim sEntry(9) As String +Dim iCount As Integer, iCount2 As Integer +Dim sTemp As String + sEntry = Array("Jerry","Patty","Kurt","Thomas","Michael",_ + "David","Cathy","Susie","Edward","Christine") + For iCount = 0 To 9 + For iCount2 = iCount + 1 To 9 + If sEntry(iCount) > sEntry(iCount2) Then + sTemp = sEntry(iCount) + sEntry(iCount) = sEntry(iCount2) + sEntry(iCount2) = sTemp + End If + Next iCount2 + Next iCount + For iCount = 0 To 9 + Print sEntry(iCount) + Next iCount +End Sub + +This explores the content of an array to display each item it contains. + + Sub list_iteration + cutlery = Array("fork", "knife", "spoon") + For Each item in cutlery + Print item + Next ' item + End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dad29dca3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +While...Wend Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03090203.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + While;While...Wend loop + While;While Wend loop + + While...Wend Statement + When a program encounters a While statement, it tests the condition. If the condition is False, the program continues directly following the Wend statement. If the condition is True, the loop is executed until the program finds Wend and then jumps back to the While statement. If the condition is still True, the loop is executed again. +
+ Unlike the Do...Loop statement, you cannot cancel a While...Wend loop with Exit. Never exit a While...Wend loop with GoTo, since this can cause a run-time error. + A Do...Loop is more flexible than a While...Wend. + + + + While syntax + + + While Condition [statements] Wend + + + + Sub ExampleWhileWend + Dim stext As String + Dim iRun As Integer + sText ="This is a short text" + iRun = 1 + While iRun < Len(sText) + If Mid(sText,iRun,1 )<> " " Then Mid( sText ,iRun, 1) = Chr( 1 + Asc( Mid(sText,iRun,1 )) ) + iRun = iRun + 1 + Wend + MsgBox sText,0,"Text encoded" + End Sub + + +
+ Do...Until or Do...While statement + Exit statement +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4e2a5e62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Jumps +/text/sbasic/shared/03090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Jumps + The following statements execute jumps. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2331842b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + GoSub...Return Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090301.xhp + + + + + +
+ + GoSub...Return statement + label; in GoSub...Return statement + + +

GoSub...Return Statement

+ Calls a subroutine that is indicated by a label inside a Sub or a Function. The statements following the label are executed until the next Return statement. Afterwards, the program continues with the statement that follows the GoSub statement. +
+ + + +GoSub label[:] + + + +label: A line identifier indicating where to continue execution. The scope of a label in that of the routine it belongs to. +The GoSub statement calls a local subroutine indicated by a label from within a subroutine or a function. The name of the label must end with a colon (":"). + + Sub/Function foo + ' statements + GoSub label + ' statements + Exit Sub/Function + label: + ' statements + Return + End Sub/Function + + +If the program encounters a Return statement not preceded by GoSub, $[officename] Basic returns an error message. Use Exit Sub or Exit Function to ensure that the program leaves a Sub or Function before reaching the next Return statement. +The following example demonstrates the use of GoSub and Return. By executing a program section twice, the program calculates the square root of two numbers that are entered by the user. + + + +Sub ExampleGoSub +Dim iInputa As Single +Dim iInputb As Single +Dim iInputc As Single + iInputa = Int(InputBox("Enter the first number: ","NumberInput")) + iInputb = Int(InputBox("Enter the second number: ","NumberInput")) + iInputc=iInputa + GoSub SquareRoot + Print "The square root of";iInputa;" is";iInputc + iInputc=iInputb + GoSub SquareRoot + Print "The square root of";iInputb;" is";iInputc + Exit Sub +SquareRoot: + iInputc=sqr(iInputc) + Return +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9cd57f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + GoTo Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090302.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + GoTo statement + label; in GoTo statement + +GoTo Statement + Continues program execution within a Sub or Function at the procedure line indicated by a label. +
+Syntax: + +GoTo label[:] + + +Parameters: +label: A line identifier indicating where to continue execution. The scope of a label is that of the routine it belongs to. + Use the GoTo statement to instruct $[officename] Basic to continue program execution at another place within the procedure. The position must be indicated by a label. To set a label, assign a name, and end it with a colon (":"). + You cannot use the GoTo statement to jump out of a Sub or Function. +Example: + + Sub/Function + ' statement block + GoTo Label1 + Label2: + ' statement block + Exit Sub/Function + Label1: + ' statement block + GoTo Label2 + End Sub/Function + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cad7a574f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + On...GoSub Statement; On...GoTo Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090303.xhp + + + + + +
+ + On...GoSub statement + On...GoTo statement + label; in On...GoSub statement + label; in On...GoTo statement + + + +

On...GoSub Statement; On...GoTo Statement

+Branches to one of several specified lines in the program code, depending on the value of a numeric expression. +
+ + +On GoSub/GoTo syntax + +On expression GoSub Label1[, Label2[, Label3[,...]]] +On expression GoTo Label1[, Label2[, Label3[,...]]] + + + + expression: Any numeric expression between 0 and 255 that determines which of the lines the program branches to. If expression is 0, the statement is not executed. If expression is greater than 0, the program jumps to the label that has a position number that corresponds to the expression (1 = First label; 2 = Second label) + label: Target line according to GoTo or GoSub structure. +The GoTo or GoSub conventions are valid. + + + +Sub ExampleOnGosub +Dim iVar As Integer +Dim sVar As String + iVar = 2 + sVar ="" + On iVar GoSub Sub1, Sub2 + On iVar GoTo Line1, Line2 + Exit Sub +Sub1: + sVar =sVar & " From Sub 1 to" : Return +Sub2: + sVar =sVar & " From Sub 2 to" : Return +Line1: + sVar =sVar & " Label 1" : GoTo Ende +Line2: + sVar =sVar & " Label 2" +Ende: + MsgBox sVar,0,"On...GoSub" +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91ea068ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Further Statements +/text/sbasic/shared/03090400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ Further Statements + Statements that do not belong to any of the other categories are described here. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2737a682c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + +Call Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03090401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Call statement + +

Call Statement

+Transfers the control of the program to a subroutine, a function, or a procedure of a Dynamic Link Library (DLL). The keyword, type and number of parameters is dependent on the routine that is being called. +
+ + + Call Statement diagram + +[Call] name [(] [param :=] value, ... [)] + + + +name: Name of the subroutine, the function, or the DLL that you want to call + +param: Keyword parameter name to pass to the routine, followed by its value. The name must match the routine declaration. Keywords are optional and can be used in any order. +value: Positional parameter value. The type is dependent on the routine that is being called +When mixing positional and keyword parameters, make sure positional parameters are following the routine declaration order. +When a function is used as an expression, enclosing parameters with brackets becomes necessary. Using a Declare statement is compulsory prior to call a DLL. + + +Sub ExampleCall + Dim value As String + value = "LibreOffice" + Call aRoutine value + aRoutine text := value +End Sub + +Sub aRoutine (text as String) + Msgbox text +End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18d47e98c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Choose Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03090402.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Choose function + + + +

Choose Function

+Returns a selected value from a list of arguments. +
+ + + + Choose (Index As Integer, Expression1[, Expression2, ... [, Expression_n]]) As Variant + + +Variant. A value inferred from the Index parameter. + + + Index: Any numeric expression rounded to a whole number. Index accepts integer values starting at 1 that specify which of the possible choices to return. + Expression1, Expression2, …, Expression_n: Expressions representing each of the possible choices. +The Choose function returns a value from the list of expressions based on the index value. If Index = 1, the function returns the first expression in the list, if Index = 2, it returns the second expression, and so on. +If the index value is less than 1 or greater than the number of expressions listed, the function returns a Null value. +Error #5 occurs when parameters are omitted. Error #13 occurs if Index equals Null. + If expressions are omitted - e.g. Choose(5) - or Index=Null, Basic runtime raises error #13. If the chosen expression is not defined -e.g. Choose(2,"a",,45) - "Error 448" is returned !!. + + + + + + +The following example uses the or Choose function to select a string from several strings that form a menu: + + +Sub ExampleChoose + Print ChooseMenu(2) ' "Save Format" + MsgBox Choose(index := -5, 9, "Basic", PI) ' Null + MsgBox Choose(index := 3.14, 9, "Basic", PI) ' PI +End Sub + +Function ChooseMenu(Index As Integer) + ChooseMenu = Choose(Index, "Quick Format", "Save Format", "System Format") +End Function + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a4b3d519 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Declare Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090403.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Declare statement + + + +Declare Statement + + DLL (Dynamic Link Library) + + +Declares and defines a subroutine in a DLL file that you want to execute from $[officename] Basic. +
+See also: FreeLibrary + +Syntax: + +Declare {Sub | Function} Name Lib "Libname" [Alias "Aliasname"] [Parameter] [As Type] + + +Parameters: + Name: A different name than defined in the DLL, to call the subroutine from $[officename] Basic. + Aliasname: Name of the subroutine as defined in the DLL. + Libname: File or system name of the DLL. This library is automatically loaded the first time the function is used. + Argumentlist: List of parameters representing arguments that are passed to the procedure when it is called. The type and number of parameters is dependent on the executed procedure. + Type: Defines the data type of the value that is returned by a function procedure. You can exclude this parameter if a type-declaration character is entered after the name. +To pass a parameter to a subroutine as a value instead of as a reference, the parameter must be indicated by the keyword ByVal. + +Example: + +Declare Sub MyMessageBeep Lib "user32.dll" Alias "MessageBeep" ( Long ) +Sub ExampleDeclare +Dim lValue As Long + lValue = 5000 + MyMessageBeep( lValue ) + FreeLibrary("user32.dll" ) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ada8a37a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + End Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090404.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + End statement + + + +End Statement +Ends a procedure or block. +
+ +Syntax: + +End, End Enum, End Function, End If, End Property, End Select, End Sub, End With + + +Parameters: +Use the End statement as follows: + +Statement +End: Is not required, but can be entered anywhere within a procedure to end the program execution. +End Enum: Ends an Enum VBA statement +End Function: Ends a Function statement. +End If: Marks the end of a If...Then...Else block. +End Property: Marks the end of a Property statement. +End Select: Marks the end of a Select Case block. +End Sub: Ends a Sub statement. +End With: Ends a With statement + +Example: + +Sub ExampleRandomSelect +Dim iVar As Integer + iVar = Int((15 * Rnd) -2) + Select Case iVar + Case 1 To 5 + Print "Number from 1 to 5" + Case 6, 7, 8 + Print "Number from 6 to 8" + Case Is > 8 And iVar < 11 + Print "Greater than 8" + Case Else + Print "Outside range 1 to 10" + End Select +End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7297dd934 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + FreeLibrary Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03090405.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FreeLibrary function + + + +FreeLibrary Function +Releases DLLs that were loaded by a Declare statement. A released DLL is automatically reloaded if one of its functions is called. See also: Declare +
+ +Syntax: + +FreeLibrary (LibName As String) + + +Parameters: + LibName: String expression that specifies the name of the DLL. +FreeLibrary can only release DLLs that are loaded during Basic runtime. + + + +Example: + +Declare Sub MyMessageBeep Lib "user32.dll" Alias "MessageBeep" ( Long ) +Sub ExampleDeclare +Dim lValue As Long + lValue = 5000 + MyMessageBeep( lValue ) + FreeLibrary("user32.dll" ) +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ecfbe73c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + Function Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090406.xhp + + + +
+ + Function statement + +

Function Statement

+A function is a block of code which runs when it is called. A function is usually called in an expression. +You can pass data, known as parameters or arguments, into a function. You may pass a parameter by value or by reference. When by reference, modifications applied to the parameter in the function will be sent back to the calling code. +A function usually returns data as a result. +
+ + + + Function Statement diagram + + [Private | Public] Function Name[char] (argument1 [As Type][, argument2[char][,...]]) [As typename] + statements + [Exit Function] + statements + End Function + + +
+ scope: Function default scope is Public. A Private scope denotes a module internal routine, not intended to be used from other modules. +
+ name: Name of the subroutine to contain the value returned by the function. + arguments: Parameters to be passed to the subroutine. + + + +
+

Examples:

+ +Sub ExampleExit +Dim sReturn As String +Dim sListArray(10) As String +Dim siStep As Single + For siStep = 0 To 10 ' Fill array with test data + sListArray(siStep) = chr$(siStep + 65) + MsgBox sListArray(siStep) + Next siStep + sReturn = LinSearch(sListArray(), "B") + Print sReturn +End Sub + +Function LinSearch( sList(), sItem As String ) As Integer +Dim iCount As Integer +' Linsearch searches a TextArray:sList() for a TextEntry: +' Return value Is the index of the entry Or 0 (Null) + For iCount=1 To Ubound( sList() ) + If sList( iCount ) = sItem Then + Exit For ' sItem found + End If + Next iCount + If iCount = Ubound( sList() ) Then iCount = 0 + LinSearch = iCount +End Function + +
+ +
+ Subroutines basics + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e4239841 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Rem Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090407.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Rem statement + comments;Rem statement + + + +

Rem Statement

+Specifies that a program line is a comment. +
+ + +Rem Text + + + Text: Any text that serves as a comment. +You can use the single quotation mark instead of the Rem keyword to indicate that the text on a line is comments. This symbol can be inserted directly to the right of the program code, followed by a comment. +You can use a space followed by the underline character _ as the last two characters of a line to continue the logical line on the next line. To continue comment lines, you must enter "Option Compatible" in the same Basic module. + + + +Sub ExampleMid +Dim sVar As String + sVar = "Las Vegas" + Print Mid(sVar,3,5) ' Returns "s Veg" + ' Nothing occurs here +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8aefe030f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Stop Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090408.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Stop statement + + +

Stop Statement

+Stops the execution of the Basic program. +
+ + + + Stop Statement diagram + + +Stop + + + + +Sub ExampleStop +Dim iVar As Single + iVar = 36 + Stop + MsgBox Sqr(iVar) +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f10753bde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Sub Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090409.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Sub statement + + +

Sub Statement

+Defines a subroutine. +
+ + + + Sub Statement diagram + + +[Private | Public] Sub name[(argument1 [As typename][, argument2[char][,...]])] + ' statements + [Exit Sub] + ' statements +End Sub + + + + name: Name of the subroutine. + arguments: Optional parameters that you want to pass to the subroutine. + + + + + + +
+ Subroutines basics + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..acade098e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Switch Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03090410.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Switch function + + +

Switch Function

+Evaluates a list of arguments, consisting of an expression followed by a value. The Switch function returns a value that is associated with the expression that is passed by this function. +
+ + + +Switch (Expression1, Value1[, Expression2, Value2[..., Expression_n, Value_n]]) As Variant + + + +The Switch function evaluates the expressions from left to right, and then returns the value that is assigned to the function expression. If expression and value are not given as a pair, a runtime error occurs. + Expression: The expression that you want to evaluate. + Value: The value that you want to return if the expression is True. +In the following example, the Switch function assigns the appropriate gender to the name that is passed to the function: + + + + + +Sub ExampleSwitch +Dim sGender As String + sGender = GetGenderIndex( "John" ) + MsgBox sGender +End Sub + +Function GetGenderIndex (sName As String) As String + GetGenderIndex = Switch(sName = "Jane", "female", sName = "John", "male") +End Function + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa1740ba6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +With Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03090411.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+With statement + +

With Statement

+ Sets an object as the default object. Unless another object name is declared, all properties and methods refer to the default object until the End With statement is reached. +
+ + +With statement diagram + + With object + [statements] + End With + + +Use With and End With if you have several properties or methods for a single object or an extended data type definition. +Nesting With statements helps writing and reading Basic routines. + +
+ Type Statement +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..adad55212 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Exit Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090412.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Exit statement + + + +

Exit Statement

+Exits a Do...Loop, For...Next, a function, a property, or a subroutine. +
+ + + +Exit Do, Exit For, Exit Function, Exit Property, Exit Sub + + + + Exit Do +Only valid within a Do...Loop statement to exit the loop. Program execution continues with the statement that follows the Loop statement. If Do...Loop statements are nested, the control is transferred to the loop in the next higher level. + Exit For +Only valid within a For...Next loop to exit the loop. Program execution continues with the first statement that follows the Next statement. In nested statements, the control is transferred to the loop in the next higher level. + Exit Function +Exits the Function procedure immediately. Program execution continues with the statement that follows the Function call. + Exit Property +Exits the Property procedure immediately. Program execution continues with the statement that follows the Property call. + Exit Sub +Exits the subroutine immediately. Program execution continues with the statement that follows the Sub call. +The Exit statement does not define the end of a structure, and must not be confused with the End statement. + + + +Sub ExampleExit +Dim sReturn As String +Dim sListArray(10) As String +Dim siStep As Single + For siStep = 0 To 10 ' Fill array with test data + sListArray(siStep) = chr(siStep + 65) + MsgBox sListArray(siStep) + Next siStep + sReturn = LinSearch(sListArray(), "B") + Print sReturn +End Sub + +Function LinSearch( sList(), sItem As String ) As Integer +Dim iCount As Integer +' LinSearch searches a TextArray:sList() for a TextEntry: +' Returns the index of the entry or 0 (Null) + For iCount=1 To Ubound( sList() ) + If sList( iCount ) = sItem Then + Exit For ' sItem found + End If + Next iCount + If iCount = Ubound( sList() ) Then iCount = 0 + LinSearch = iCount +End Function + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38c6709ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Type Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03090413.xhp + + + + +
+ + Type statement + +

Type Statement

+ Define non-UNO data structures. +
+ A Type structure is an ordered collection of data fields, that can be manipulated as a single item. + + Type statement diagram + + Type struct_name + DataField1 As TypeName1 + DataField2 As TypeName2 + (...) + End Type ' struct_name + + + + Extended types such as Type statement structures, UNO objects or ClassModule objects are valid typenames. + + A Type structure scope is that of the module it belongs to. + + + Type Customer + Name1 As String + City As String + End Type ' Customer structure + Sub setCustomer + Dim oCustomer as New Customer + oCustomer.Name1 = "The Document Foundation" + oCustomer.City = "Berlin" + End Sub + + Enumerations can be created using Type statement definitions. Calling Python Scripts from Basic illustrates that mechanism. +
+ + CreateObject function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c06b40e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + +Variables +/text/sbasic/shared/03100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Variables +The following statements and functions are for working with variables. You can use these functions to declare or define variables, convert variables from one type to another, or determine the variable type. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37bb4d404 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +CCur Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03100050.xhp + + +CCur + + + +
+CCur function + +

CCur Function

+Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a currency expression. The locale settings are used for decimal separators and currency symbols. +
+ + +CCur(Expression As Variant) As Currency + + +Currency + + +Expression: Any string or a numeric expression that you want to convert to a number.
CCur(EMPTY) returns 0. + + + + + + + + Sub CCur_example + Print CCur( expression := 145.279 * "654" ) + Print CCur( -258.0421E+02 ) + End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f25a39b2a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +CDec Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03100060.xhp + + +CDec + + + +
+CDec function + +CDec Function +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a decimal expression. +
+Syntax: + +CDec(Expression) + +Return value: +Decimal number. +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..840a6eb66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +CVar Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03100070.xhp + + +CVar + + + +
+CVar function + +CVar Function +Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression. +
+Syntax: + +CVar(Expression) + +Return value: +Variant. +Parameter: +Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3107ba049 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + CVErr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100080.xhp + + + CVErr + + + +
+ CVErr function + +

CVErr Function

+ Converts a string expression or numeric expression to a variant expression of the sub type "Error". +
+

Syntax:

+ + CVErr(Expression) + +

Return value:

+ Variant. +

Parameter:

+ Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66dd198cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + CBool Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CBool function + + +

CBool Function

+Converts an expression or a set of expressions into a boolean. An expression is composed of strings, numbers and operators. Comparison, logical or mathematical operators are allowed inside expressions. +
+ + + + CBool (expression As Variant) As Boolean + +expression can be a number or a set of combined expressions. + + +Boolean + + +expression: A logical expression, a mathematical formula, a numeric expression or a set of expressions combined with operators. During expression evaluation logical operators take preceedence over comparison operators, which in turn take preceedence over mathematical operators. +The expression can be a number or mathematical formula. When equals to 0, False is returned, otherwise True is returned. +Multiple expressions such as expr1 [[{operator] expr2]..] can be combined. expr1 and expr2 can be any string or numeric expressions that you want to evaluate. CBool combines the expressions and returns either True or False. operator can be a mathematical operator, logical operator or comparison operator. + + + + + +In the following examples, the CBool function evaluates a logical expression, a mathematical formula and the value that is returned by the Instr function. The function checks if the character "a" is found in the sentence that was entered by the user. + +Sub ExampleCBool + Print CBool( 1>2 Xor 44 ) ' computes to True + Print CBool( expression := 15 /2 -7.5 ) ' displays False as expression equals 0 + txt = InputBox("Please enter a short sentence:") + ' Proof if the character "a" appears in the sentence. + ' Instead of the command line + ' If Instr(Input, "a")<>0 Then... + ' the CBool function is applied as follows: + If CBool(Instr(txt, "a")) Then + MsgBox "The character »a« appears in the sentence you entered!" + EndIf +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..adabbdc0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + CDate Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100300.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CDate function + +CDate Function +Converts any string or numeric expression to a date value. +
+ + + +CDate (Expression) + + +Return value: +Date + + + Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. +
+ When you convert a string expression, the date and time must be entered either in one of the date acceptance patterns defined for your locale setting (see %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages) or in ISO date format (momentarily, only the ISO format with hyphens, e.g. "2012-12-31" is accepted). In numeric expressions, values to the left of the decimal represent the date, beginning from December 31, 1899. Values to the right of the decimal represent the time. +
+ + + + + Sub ExampleCDate + MsgBox cDate(1000.25) ' 09.26.1902 06:00:00 + MsgBox cDate(1001.26) ' 09.27.1902 06:14:24 + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9546166c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + CDbl Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100400.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CDbl function + + +

CDbl Function

+Converts any numerical expression or string expression to a double type. +
+ + + +CDbl (Expression As Variant) As Double + + + +Double + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dda18512 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + CInt Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100500.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CInt function + + +

CInt Function

+Converts any string or numeric expression to an integer. +
+ + + +CInt (Expression As Variant) As Integer + + + +Integer + + + +If the argument is string, the function trims the leading white space; then it tries to recognize a number in following characters. The syntax below are recognized: + + + Decimal numbers (with optional leading sign) using decimal and group separators of locale configured in $[officename] (group separators are accepted in any position), with optional exponential notation like "-12e+1" (where an optionally signed whole decimal number after e or E or d or D defines power of 10); + + + Octal numbers like "&Onnn...", where "nnn..." after "&O" or "&o" is sequence no longer than 11 digits, from 0 to 7, up to the next non-alphanumeric character; + + + Hexadecimal numbers like "&Hnnn...", where "nnn..." after "&H" or "&h" is sequence of characters up to the next non-alphanumeric character, and must be no longer than 8 digits, from 0 to 9, A to F, or a to f. + + +The rest of the string is ignored. If the string is not recognized, e.g. when after trimming leading whitespace it doesn't start with plus, minus, a decimal digit, or "&", or when the sequence after "&O" is longer than 11 characters or contains an alphabetic character, the numeric value of expression is 0. +If the argument is an error, the error number is used as numeric value of the expression. +If the argument is a date, number of days since 1899-12-30 (serial date) is used as numeric value of the expression. Time is represented as fraction of a day. +After calculating the numeric value of the expression, it is rounded to the nearest integer (if needed), and if the result is not between -32768 and 32767, $[officename] Basic reports an overflow error. Otherwise, the result is returned. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8743a0b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + CLng Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100600.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CLng function + + +

CLng Function

+Converts any string or numeric expression to a long integer. +
+ + + +CLng (Expression As Variant) As Long + + + +Long + + + +If Expression lies outside the valid long integer range between -2.147.483.648 and 2.147.483.647, $[officename] Basic returns an overflow error. +This function always rounds the fractional part of a number to the nearest integer. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14d00c83b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Const Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03100700.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Const statement + + +Const Statement +Defines one or more identifiers as constants. +
+A constant is a variable that helps to improve the readability of a program. Constants are not defined as a specific type of variable, but rather are used as placeholders in the code. You can only define a constant once and it cannot be modified. + + + + Const syntax + + +[Global|Private|Public] Const name = expression[, ...] + + + + name: Any identifier that follows the standard variable naming conventions. +expression: Any literal expression. +The data type must be omitted. When a library gets loaded in memory, %PRODUCTNAME Basic converts the program code internally so that each time a constant is used, the defined expression replaces it. +

Scope

+By default constants are defined as private in modules and routines. Constants can be made public or global in order to be used from all modules, from all Basic libraries. +Global, Private and Public specifiers can only be used for module constants. + + + Const EARTH = "♁" ' module scope + Private Const MOON = "☾" ' module scope + Public Const VENUS="♀", MARS="♂" ' general scope + Global Const SUN = "☉", STAR = "☆" ' general scope + + Sub ExampleConst + Const SUN = 3 * 1.456 / 56 ' SUN is local + MsgBox SUN,, MOON ' SUN global constant is unchanged + Const Pgm = "Program", Var = 1.00 + MsgBox Pgm & " " & Var, , VENUS &" and "& MARS + End Sub + +
+ Enum statement + Type statement +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..649768f0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + CSng Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03100900.xhp + + + + + +
+ + CSng function + + +

CSng Function

+Converts any string or numeric expression to data type Single. +
+ + + +CSng (Expression As Variant) As Single + + + +Single + + +
+ Expression: Any string or numeric expression that you want to convert. To convert a string expression, the number must be entered using a dot "." as the decimal point and a comma "," as the thousands separator (for instance 123,456.78), which may differ from your %PRODUCTNAME language settings. +
+ + + + +
+Numeric expressions are displayed according %PRODUCTNAME language settings: + +Sub ExampleCountryConvert + MsgBox CDbl(1234.5678) ' 1234.5678 + MsgBox CInt(1234.5678) ' 1235 + MsgBox CLng(1234+5678) ' 6912 + MsgBox CSng(1234.5678) ' 1234.567749023 + + MsgBox CDbl(expression := 5678.1234) ' 5678.1234 + MsgBox CInt(expression := 5678.1234) ' 5678 + MsgBox CLng(expression := 5678+1234) ' 6912 + MsgBox CSng(expression := 5678.1234) ' 5678.123535156 +End Sub + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9745a463 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + CStr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03101000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CStr function + + + +CStr Function +Converts any numeric expression to a string expression. +
+ +Syntax: + +CStr (Expression) + + +Return value: +String + +Parameters: + Expression: Any valid string or numeric expression that you want to convert. + +Expression Types and Conversion Returns + + + + + Boolean : + + + String that evaluates to either True or False. + + + + + Date : + + + String that contains the date and time. + + + + + Null : + + + Run-time error. + + + + + Empty : + + + String without any characters. + + + + + Any : + + + Corresponding number as string. + + +
+ +Zeros at the end of a floating-point number are not included in the returned string. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleCSTR +Dim sVar As String + MsgBox CDbl(1234.5678) + MsgBox CInt(1234.5678) + MsgBox CLng(1234.5678) + MsgBox CSng(1234.5678) + sVar = CStr(1234.5678) + MsgBox sVar +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..811494ccb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + DefBool Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefBool statement + + +

DefBool Statement

+If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefBool statement sets the default data type for variables, according to a letter range. +
+ +
+ + + DefType statements diagram + + + {DefBool|DefCur|DefDate|DefDbl|DefErr|DefInt|DefLng|DefObj|DefStr|DefSng|DefVar} {char|char-char}[,...] + + + + + char: Letter prefix that specifies default data type for variables. + char-char: Letter range prefixes that specify default data type for variables. +
+ +
+ + + ' Prefix definitions for variable types: + DefBool b + DefCur c,l-m + DefDate t + DefDbl f + DefErr e + DefInt i-k,N + DefLng x-z, D + DefObj U, o-R + DefSng w,a + DefStr s + DefVar V,g + +
+ + Sub ExampleDefBool + Print TypeName(Boole), VarType(Babbage), bitcoin ' Displays: Boolean 11 False + bOK=True ' bOK is an implicit boolean variable + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9774f48c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +DefCur Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03101110.xhp + + +DefCur + + + +
+DefCur statement + +DefCur Statement +If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefCur statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefCur + Print liquid, Typename(coinbit), VarType(money) ' Result is: 0.0000 Currency 6 + cCur=Currency ' cCur is an implicit currency variable. + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35c1cbba7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefErr Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101120.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefErr statement + + +

DefErr Statement

+If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefErr statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +
+ + + + + +DefErr e +Sub ExampleDefErr + eErr=Error ' eErr is an implicit error variable +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fbd6cc98 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefSng Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101130.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefSng statement + + +

DefSng Statement

+If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefSng statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefSng + wSng=Single ' wSng is an implicit single variable + Print afloat, Typename(Word), VarType(anyNum) ' Result is : 0 single 4 + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22be17bbe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + DefStr Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101140.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefStr statement + + +

DefStr Statement

+If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefStr statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +
+ + + + + + + Sub ExampleDefStr + sStr=String ' sStr is an implicit string variable + Print VarType(slice), strng, TypeName(sheet) ' Result is: 8 "" String + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c84e6563 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefDate Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101300.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefDate statement + + +

DefDate Statement

+If no type-declaration character or keyword is specified, the DefDate statement sets the default variable type, according to a letter range. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefDate + tDate=Date ' tDate is an implicit date variable + Print VarType(tea), train, TypeName(timedate), IsDate(tick) ' Displays: 7 00:00:00 Date True + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee96efa7a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefDbl Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101400.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefDbl statement + + +

DefDbl Statement

+Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefDBL + fValue=1.23e43 ' fValue is an implicit double variable type + Print Typename(float), VarType(fire), factory ' Result is: Double 5 0 + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a371295b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefInt Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101500.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefInt statement + + +

DefInt Statement

+Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefInt + iCount=200 ' iCount is an implicit integer variable + Print kilos, Typename(number), VarType(Java) ' Result is: 0 Integer 2 + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f872bcdf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + DefLng Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03101600.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefLng statement + + +

DefLng Statement

+Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefLng + xCount=123456789 ' xCount is an implicit long integer variable + Print VarType(Yes), zinc, Typename(Max) ' Result is: 3 0 Long + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db099499c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +DefObj Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03101700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+DefObj statement + +

DefObj Statement

+Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +
+ + + + + + Sub DefObj_example + Print Typename(properties), VarType(ordinal), IsNull(unique), IsObject(org)' Result is: Object 9 True False + End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e7a31252 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + DefVar Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03102000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + DefVar statement + + +

DefVar Statement

+Sets the default variable type, according to a letter range, if no type-declaration character or keyword is specified. +
+ + + + + + Sub ExampleDefVar + vDiv=99 ' vDiv is an implicit variant + values="Hello world" + Print Typename(glob), VarType(values), IsEmpty(vOffer) ' Displays: Empty 8 True + End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b66acc580 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + Dim Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03102100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Dim statement + arrays; dimensioning + dimensioning arrays + + +

Dim Statement

+Declares variables or arrays. +
+ +If the variables are separated by commas - for example Dim v1, v2, v3 As String - first ones get defined as Variant variables. A new line, or colon sign (:), help separate variable definitions. + + Dim text As String + Dim pv As com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue, d As Date + Dim Units as Integer : Dim EULER As Double + +Dim declares local variables within subroutines. Global variables are declared with the Global, Public or the Private statement. + + + + Dim Statement diagram + + +Dim variable [(start To end)] [As typename][, variable2[char] [(start To end)] [,...]] + +
+New operator is optional when setting Option Compatible option. +
+ +
+ + variable: Any variable or array name. + + typename: Keyword that declares the data type of a variable. + + primitive data types fragment + + Byte: Byte variable (0-255) + Boolean: Boolean variable (True, False) + Currency: Currency variable (Currency with 4 Decimal places) + Date: Date variable + Double: Double-precision floating-point variable (1,79769313486232 x 10E308 - 4,94065645841247 x 10E-324) + Integer: Integer variable (-32768 - 32767) + Long: Long integer variable (-2.147.483.648 - 2.147.483.647) + Object: Object variable (Note: this variable can only subsequently be defined with Set!) + Single: Single-precision floating-point variable (3,402823 x 10E38 - 1,401298 x 10E-45). + String: String variable consisting of a maximum of 64,000 ASCII characters. + Variant: Variant variable type (contains all types, specified by definition). If a type name is not specified, variables are automatically defined as Variant Type, unless a statement from DefBool to DefVar is used. + object: Universal Network object (UNO) object or ClassModule object instance. +char: Special character that declares the data type of a variable. + Type declaration characters fragment + +In %PRODUCTNAME Basic, you do not need to declare variables explicitly. However, you need to declare arrays before you can use them. You can declare a variable with the Dim statement, using commas (,) to separate multiple declarations. To declare a variable type, enter a type-declaration character following the name or use a corresponding type keyword name. + + + Declaration character + Variable type name + + + % + Integer + + + & + Long + + + ! + Single + + + # + Double + + + $ + String + + + @ + Currency + +
+ + array: Array declaration. + + array fragment + + start, end: Numerical values or constants that define the number of elements (NumberElements=(end-start)+1) and the index range.see #i36558 + start and end can be numerical expressions if ReDim is applied at the procedure level. +$[officename] Basic supports single or multi-dimensional arrays that are defined by a specified variable type. Arrays are suitable if the program contains lists or tables that you want to edit. The advantage of arrays is that it is possible to address individual elements according to indexes, which can be formulated as numeric expressions or variables. + Arrays are declared with the Dim statement. There are multiple ways to define the index range: + + Dim text(20) As String ' 21 elements numbered from 0 to 20 + Dim value(5 to 25) As Integer ' 21 values numbered from 5 to 25 + Dim amount(-15 to 5) As Currency ' 21 amounts (including 0), numbered from -15 to 5 + REM Two-dimensional data field + Dim table$(20,2) ' 63 items; from 0 to 20 level 1, from 0 to 20 level 2 and from 0 to 20 level 3. + + +You can declare an array types as dynamic if a ReDim statement defines the number of dimensions in the subroutine or the function that contains the array. Generally, you can only define an array dimension once, and you cannot modify it. Within a subroutine, you can declare an array with ReDim. You can only define dimensions with numeric expressions. This ensures that the fields are only as large as necessary. +
+ + + +Sub ExampleDim1 +Dim sVar As String +Dim iVar As Integer + sVar = "Office" +End Sub + +Sub ExampleDim2 + ' Two-dimensional data field + Dim stext(20,2) As String + Const sDim As String = " Dimension:" + For i = 0 To 20 + For ii = 0 To 2 + stext(i,ii) = str(i) & sDim & str(ii) + Next ii + Next i + For i = 0 To 20 + For ii = 0 To 2 + MsgBox stext(i,ii) + Next ii + Next i +End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c71168a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + ReDim Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03102101.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + ReDim statement + + +

ReDim Statement

+Declares or redefines variables or arrays. +
+ + + + ReDim Statement diagram + + +ReDim [Preserve] variable [(start To end)] [As type-name][, variable2 [(start To end)] [As type-name][,...]] + +Optionally, add the Preserve keyword to preserve the contents of the array that is redimensioned. ReDim can only be used in subroutines. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleRedim + Dim iVar() As Integer, iCount As Byte + ReDim iVar(5) As Integer + For iCount = 1 To 5 + iVar(iCount) = iCount + Next iCount + ReDim iVar(10) As Integer + For iCount = 1 To 10 + iVar(iCount) = iCount + Next iCount +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..431fee1c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + IsArray Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102200.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IsArray function + + + +IsArray Function +Determines if a variable is a data field in an array. +
+ +Syntax: + +IsArray (Var) + + +Return value: +Boolean + +Parameters: + Var: Any variable that you want to test if it is declared as an array. If the variable is an array, then the function returns True, otherwise False is returned. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleIsArray +Dim sDatf(10) As String + Print isarray(sdatf()) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41976a79f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + IsDate Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IsDate function + + + +IsDate Function +Tests if a numeric or string expression can be converted to a Date variable. +
+ +Syntax: + +IsDate (Expression) + + +Return value: +Boolean + +Parameters: + Expression: Any numeric or string expression that you want to test. If the expression can be converted to a date, the function returns True, otherwise the function returns False. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleIsDate +Dim sDateVar As String + sDateVar = "12.12.1997" + Print IsDate(sDateVar) ' True + sDateVar = "12121997" + Print IsDate(sDateVar) ' False +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7343efb89 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + IsEmpty Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IsEmpty function + + + +IsEmpty Function +Tests if a Variant variable contains the Empty value. The Empty value indicates that the variable is not initialized. +
+ +Syntax: + +IsEmpty (Var) + + +Return value: +Boolean + +Parameters: + Var: Any variable that you want to test. If the Variant contains the Empty value, the function returns True, otherwise the function returns False. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleIsEmpty +Dim sVar As Variant + sVar = Empty + Print IsEmpty(sVar) ' True +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c08464407 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + IsError Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102450.xhp + + + IsError + + + +
+ IsError function + +

IsError Function

+ Tests if a variable contains an error value. +
+

Syntax:

+ + IsError (Var) + +

Return value:

+ Bool +

Parameters:

+ Var: Any variable that you want to test. If the variable contains an error value, the function returns True, otherwise the function returns False. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbad0b2b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + IsNull Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102600.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IsNull function + Null value + + + +IsNull Function +Tests if a Variant contains the special Null value, indicating that the variable does not contain data. +
+ +Syntax: + +IsNull (Var) + + +Return value: +Boolean + +Parameters: + Var: Any variable that you want to test. This function returns True if the Variant contains the Null value, or False if the Variant does not contain the Null value. + Null - This value is used for a variant data sub type without valid contents. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleIsNull +Dim vVar As Variant + MsgBox IsNull(vVar) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a868f0fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + IsNumeric Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102700.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IsNumeric function + + + +IsNumeric Function +Tests if an expression is a number. If the expression is a number, the function returns True, otherwise the function returns False. +
+ +Syntax: + +IsNumeric (Var) + + +Return value: +Boolean + +Parameters: + Var: Any expression that you want to test. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleIsNumeric +Dim vVar As Variant + vVar = "ABC" + Print IsNumeric(vVar) ' False + vVar = "123" + Print IsNumeric(vVar) ' True +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4655ee47f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + IsObject Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102800.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + IsObject function + +

IsObject Function

+ Tests if a variable is an object, as opposed to primitive data types such as dates, numbers, texts. The function returns True if the variable is an object, otherwise it returns False. +
+ This function returns True for the following object types: + + OLE objects or UNO objects + Class module object instances + Extended types or enumerations + Routines or variables when defined as Object. + %PRODUCTNAME Basic modules + + Data structures return True even when empty. Object defined variables return True even if uninitialized. + + + IsObject(var) + + + Boolean + + + var: The variable to be tested. + + + +
+ + Enum statement + + + + + + + Type statement + Using variables +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd12c7460 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + LBound Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03102900.xhp + + + + + +
+ + LBound function + + +

LBound Function

+Returns the lower boundary of an array. +
+ + + +LBound (ArrayName [, Dimension]) + + + +Long + + + ArrayName: Name of the array for which you want to return the upper (Ubound) or the lower (LBound) boundary of the array dimension. + [Dimension]: Integer that specifies which dimension to return the upper (Ubound) or the lower (LBound) boundary for. If a value is not specified, the first dimension is assumed. + + + + + + +Sub VectorBounds + Dim v(10 To 20) As String + Print LBound(v()) ' returns 10 + Print UBound(v) ' returns 20 +End Sub ' VectorBounds + +Sub TableBounds + Dim t(10 To 20,-5 To 70) As Currency + Print LBound(t), UBound(t()) ' returns 10 20 + Print LBound(t(),2) ' returns - 5 + Print UBound(t,2) ' returns 70 +End Sub ' TableBounds + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f87474f46 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + UBound Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03103000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + UBound function + + + +

UBound Function

+Returns the upper boundary of an array. +
+ + + +UBound (ArrayName [, Dimension]) + + + +Long + + + ArrayName: Name of the array for which you want to determine the upper (Ubound) or the lower (LBound) boundary. + [Dimension]: Integer that specifies which dimension to return the upper(Ubound) or lower (LBound) boundary for. If no value is specified, the boundary of the first dimension is returned. + + + + + + +Sub VectorBounds + Dim v(10 To 20) As String + Print LBound(v()) ' 10 + Print UBound(v) ' 20 +End Sub + +Sub TableBounds + Dim t(10 To 20,-5 To 70) As Currency + Print LBound(t), UBound(t()) ' 10 20 + Print LBound(t(),2) ' -5 + Print UBound(t,2) ' 70 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a03f8e04d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Let Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Let statement + + + +Let Statement +Assigns a value to a variable. +
+ +Syntax: + + Let Statement diagram + + +[Let] variable = expression + + +Parameters: + variable: Variable that you want to assign a value to. Value and variable type must be compatible. +As in most BASIC dialects, the keyword Let is optional. + +Example: + +Sub ExampleLet +Dim sText As String + Let sText = "Las Vegas" + MsgBox Len(sText) ' returns 9 +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7418435a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Option Base Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103200.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Option Base statement + + +

Option Base Statement

+Defines the default lower boundary for arrays as 0 or 1. +
+ + +Option Base { 0 | 1} + + +This statement must be added before the executable program code in a module. + + + +Option Base 1 +Sub ExampleOptionBase + Dim sVar(20) As String + MsgBox LBound(sVar()) +End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96c490d39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Option Explicit Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103300.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Option Explicit statement + + +

Option Explicit Statement

+Specifies that every variable in the program code must be explicitly declared with the Dim statement. +
+ + +Option Explicit + + + + + + +Option Explicit +Sub ExampleExplicit +Dim sVar As String + sVar = "Las Vegas" + For i% = 1 To 10 ' This results in a run-time error + Rem + Next i% +End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a0b9c522 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Option VBASupport Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103350.xhp + + + + +
+ + Microsoft Excel macros support;Enable + Microsoft Excel macros support;Option VBASupport statement + VBA Support;Option VBASupport statement + Option VBASupport statement + +

Option VBASupport Statement

+Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME Basic will support some VBA statements, functions and objects. +
+ +The support for VBA is not complete, but covers a large portion of the common usage patterns. +When VBA support is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME Basic function arguments and return values are the same as their VBA functions counterparts. When the support is disabled, %PRODUCTNAME Basic functions may accept arguments and return values different of their VBA counterparts. + +Option VBASupport {1|0} + + + +1: Enable VBA support in %PRODUCTNAME +0: Disable VBA support + + + +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleVBA + Dim sVar As Single + sVar = Worksheets("Sheet1").Range("A1") + Print sVar +End Sub + + +
+VBA Properties +VBA support in %PRODUCTNAME + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b56fe0d94 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Public Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Public statement + + + +Public Statement +Dimensions a variable or an array at the module level (that is, not within a subroutine or function), so that the variable and the array are valid in all libraries and modules. +
+ +Syntax: + +Public VarName[(start To end)] [As VarType][, VarName2[(start To end)] [As VarType][,...]] + + +Example: + +Public iPublicVar As Integer +Sub ExamplePublic + iPublicVar = iPublicVar + 1 + MsgBox iPublicVar +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2c0e5144 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Global Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103450.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Global keyword + + + +Global keyword +Dimensions a variable or an array at the global level (that is, not within a subroutine or function), so that the variable and the array are valid in all libraries and modules for the current session. +
+ +Syntax: + +Global VarName[(start To end)] [As VarType][, VarName2[(start To end)] [As VarType][,...]] + + +Example: + +Global iGlobalVar As Integer +Sub ExampleGlobal + iGlobalVar = iGlobalVar + 1 + MsgBox iGlobalVar +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..52a0261bb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Static Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103500.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Static statement + + + +Static Statement +Declares a variable or an array at the procedure level within a subroutine or a function, so that the values of the variable or the array are retained after exiting the subroutine or function. Dim statement conventions are also valid. +
+The Static statement cannot be used to define variable arrays. Arrays must be specified according to a fixed size. + +Syntax: + +Static VarName[(start To end)] [As VarType], VarName2[(start To end)] [As VarType], ... + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleStatic +Dim iCount As Integer, iResult As Integer + For iCount = 0 To 2 + iResult = InitVar() + Next iCount + MsgBox iResult,0,"The answer is" +End Sub + +' Function for initialization of the static variable +Function InitVar() As Integer + Static iInit As Integer + Const iMinimum As Integer = 40 ' minimum return value of this function + If iInit = 0 Then ' check if initialized + iInit = iMinimum + Else + iInit = iInit + 1 + End If + InitVar = iInit +End Function + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f4d3e345 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ + + + + + + + TypeName Function; VarType Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03103600.xhp + + + + +
+ +TypeName function +VarType function +Basic Variable Type constants + +

TypeName Function; VarType Function

+Returns a string (TypeName) or a numeric value (VarType) that contains information for a variable. +
+ + + +TypeName (Variable) / VarType (Variable) + + + +String; Integer + + + Variable: The variable that you want to determine the type of. You can use the following values: + +
+ + + + Keyword + + + Named constant + + + VarType + + + Variable type + + + + + Boolean + + + + + + 11 + + + Boolean variable + + + + Byte + + + + + + 17 + + + Byte variable + + + + + Date + + + V_DATE + + + 7 + + + Date variable + + + + + Currency + + + V_CURRENCY + + + 6 + + + Currency variable + + + + + Double + + + V_DOUBLE + + + 5 + + + Double floating point variable + + + + + Integer + + + V_INTEGER + + + 2 + + + Integer variable + + + + + Long + + + V_LONG + + + 3 + + + Long integer variable + + + + + Object + + + + + + 9 + + + Object variable + + + + + Single + + + V_SINGLE + + + 4 + + + Single floating-point variable + + + + + String + + + V_STRING + + + 8 + + + String variable + + + + + Variant + + + + + + 12 + + + Variant variable (can contain all types specified by the definition) + + + + + Empty + + + V_EMPTY + + + 0 + + + Variable is not initialized + + + + + Null + + + V_NULL + + + 1 + + + No valid data + + +
+
+ + + + + +Sub ExampleType +Dim iVar As Integer +Dim sVar As String +Dim siVar As Single +Dim dVar As Double +Dim bVar As Boolean +Dim lVar As Long +Dim cVar as Currency +Dim tVar as Date + MsgBox TypeName(iVar) & " " & VarType(iVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(sVar) & " " & VarType(sVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(siVar) & " " & VarType(siVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(dVar) & " " & VarType(dVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(bVar) & " " & VarType(bVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(cVar) & " " & VarType(cVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(tVar) & " " & VarType(tVar) & Chr(13) &_ + TypeName(lVar) & " " & VarType(lVar),0,"Some types In $[officename] Basic" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45f6ce0e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Set Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03103700.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Set statement + Nothing object + + + +

Set Statement

+Sets an object reference on a variable. +
+ + + + Set Statement diagram + + + [Set] variable = [New] object + + + + variable: a variable or a property that requires an object reference. + expression: A computable combination of terms such as a formula or an object property or method. + object: Object that the variable refers to. + Nothing - Assign Nothing to a variable to remove a previous assignment. +Set keyword is optional. Nothing is the default value for objects. + + +Sub ExampleSet + Dim obj As Object + Set obj = ThisComponent + Print obj.Title + + obj = New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue + With obj + .Name = "key" : .Value = 594.34 + Print .Name, .Value + End With +End Sub + +New creates UNO objects or class module objects, before assigning it to a variable. + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f77b77da8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +FindObject Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03103800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+FindObject function + +FindObject Function +Enables an object to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter through the object name. +
+
+For example, the following command: + +MyObj.Prop1.Command = 5 + +corresponds to the command block: + +Dim ObjVar as Object +Dim ObjProp as Object +ObjName As String = "MyObj" +ObjVar = FindObject( ObjName As String ) +PropName As String = "Prop1" +ObjProp = FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) +ObjProp.Command = 5 + +This allows names to be dynamically created at run-time. For example: +"TextEdit1" to "TextEdit5" in a loop to create five control names. +
+See also: FindPropertyObject +Syntax: + +FindObject( ObjName As String ) + +Parameters: + +ObjName: String that specifies the name of the object that you want to address at run-time. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75486f5bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +FindPropertyObject Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03103900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+FindPropertyObject function + +FindPropertyObject Function +Enables objects to be addressed at run-time as a string parameter using the object name. +
+ +See also: FindObject +Syntax: + +FindPropertyObject( ObjVar, PropName As String ) + +Parameters: + +ObjVar: Object variable that you want to dynamically define at run-time. + +PropName: String that specifies the name of the property that you want to address at run-time. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12213c9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +IsMissing function +/text/sbasic/shared/03104000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+IsMissing function + +IsMissing Function +Tests if a function is called with an optional parameter. +
+See also: Optional +Syntax: + +IsMissing( ArgumentName ) + +Parameters: + +ArgumentName: the name of an optional argument. +If the IsMissing function is called by the ArgumentName, then True is returned. +See also Examples. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26e9b2201 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Optional (in Function Statement) +/text/sbasic/shared/03104100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Optional function + +Optional (in Function Statement) +Allows you to define parameters that are passed to a function as optional. +
+See also: IsMissing +Syntax: + +Function MyFunction(Text1 As String, Optional Arg2, Optional Arg3) + +Examples: + + Result = MyFunction("Here", 1, "There") ' all arguments are passed. + Result = MyFunction("Test", ,1) ' second argument is missing. + +See also Examples. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ee1a8fff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Array Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03104200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + Array function + +

Array Function

+ Returns the type Variant with a data field. +
+ + + Array (ArgumentList) + + See also DimArray + + + ArgumentList: A list of any number of arguments that are separated by commas. + + + Dim A As Variant + A = Array("Fred","Tom","Bill") + Msgbox A(2) + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..177c75d38 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +DimArray Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03104300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+DimArray function + +DimArray Function +Returns a Variant array. +
+Syntax: + +DimArray (ArgumentList) + +See also Array +If no parameters are passed, an empty array is created (like Dim A() that is the same as a sequence of length 0 in Uno). If parameters are specified, a dimension is created for each parameter. +Parameters: + +ArgumentList: A list of any number of arguments that are separated by commas. + + +Example: + + a = DimArray( 2, 2, 4 ) ' is the same as DIM a( 2, 2, 4 ) + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..541ce535b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +HasUnoInterfaces Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03104400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+HasUnoInterfaces function + +HasUnoInterfaces Function +Tests if a Basic Uno object supports certain Uno interfaces. +
+Returns True, if all stated Uno interfaces are supported, otherwise False is returned. + +HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, Uno-Interface-Name 1 [, Uno-Interface-Name 2, ...]) + +Bool + + +oTest: the Basic Uno object that you want to test. + +Uno-Interface-Name: list of Uno interface names. + + + bHas = HasUnoInterfaces( oTest, "com.sun.star.beans.XIntrospection" ) + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..49cd4588a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + IsUnoStruct Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03104500.xhp + + + +
+ + IsUnoStruct function + +IsUnoStruct Function +Returns True if the given object is a Uno struct. +
+ + +IsUnoStruct( Uno type ) + +Boolean + + +Uno type : A UnoObject + + + +Sub Main +Dim bIsStruct +' Instantiate a service +Dim oSimpleFileAccess +oSimpleFileAccess = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.ucb.SimpleFileAccess" ) +bIsStruct = IsUnoStruct( oSimpleFileAccess ) +MsgBox bIsStruct ' Displays False because oSimpleFileAccess Is NO struct +' Instantiate a Property struct +Dim aProperty As New com.sun.star.beans.Property +bIsStruct = IsUnoStruct( aProperty ) +MsgBox bIsStruct ' Displays True because aProperty is a struct +bIsStruct = IsUnoStruct( 42 ) +MsgBox bIsStruct ' Displays False because 42 is NO struct +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..891421b50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + EqualUnoObjects Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03104600.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + EqualUnoObjects function + +

EqualUnoObjects Function

+ Returns True if the two specified Basic variables represent the same Uno object instance. +
+ + + EqualUnoObjects(oObj1, oObj2) + + + oObj1, oObj2: the variables to be tested. + + Bool + + The example below returns True because both oDoc and ThisComponent are references to the same object: + + Dim oDoc as Object + oDoc = ThisComponent + MsgBox EqualUnoObjects(oDoc, ThisComponent) ' True + + The example below returns False because the assignment creates a copy of the original object. Hence Struct1 and Struct2 refer to different object instances. + + Dim Struct1 as new com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue + Dim Struct2 as Variant + Struct1.Name = "John" + Struct2 = Struct1 + MsgBox EqualUnoObjects(Struct1, Struct2) ' False + Struct2.Name = "Judy" + MsgBox Struct1.Name ' John + MsgBox Struct2.Name ' Judy + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..968cac313 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + Erase Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03104700.xhp + + Erase + + + + +
+Erase statement + +Erase Statement +Erases the contents of array elements of fixed size arrays, and releases the memory used by arrays of variable size. +
+ + +Erase syntax + + Erase array1 [, array2 [,...]] + + + +array list - A comma delimited list of arrays to be erased. + + + + Sub Erase_Example + a = Array(1,2,3) : b= Array("z","y","x") : c=Array(a,b) + Erase a, c(Ubound(c)) ' b and c(0) are unchanged + Erase b, c(0) ' everything gets cleared + End Sub + + +
+ Dim or ReDim statements + Array or DimArray functions + Lbound and Ubound functions +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..801ba423a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Comparison Operators + /text/sbasic/shared/03110100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + comparison operators;%PRODUCTNAME Basic + Operators;comparison + Operators;equal sign (=) + Operators;greater than (>) + Operators;greater than or equal to (>=) + Operators;less than (<) + Operators;less than or equal to (<=) + Operators;not equal to (<>) + + +

Comparison Operators

+Comparison operators compare two expressions. The result is returned as a boolean expression that determines if the comparison is True (-1) or False (0). +
+ + + + result = expression1 { = | < | > | <= | >= } expression2 + + + + result: Boolean that specifies the result of the comparison (True, or False) + expression1, expression2: Any numeric values or strings that you want to compare. + +Comparison operators += : Equal to +< : Less than +> : Greater than +<= : Less than or equal to +>= : Greater than or equal to +<> : Not equal to + + + +Sub ExampleUnequal +Dim sFile As String +Dim sRoot As String ' Root directory for file in and output + sRoot = "c:\" + sFile = Dir$( sRoot ,22) + If sFile <> "" Then + Do + MsgBox sFile + sFile = Dir$ + Loop Until sFile = "" + End If +End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8709a9a24 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Strings +/text/sbasic/shared/03120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Strings + The following functions and statements validate and return strings. +
+ You can use strings to edit text within $[officename] Basic programs. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dccf9aeb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +ASCII/ANSI Conversion in Strings +/text/sbasic/shared/03120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ ASCII/ANSI Conversion in Strings + The following functions convert strings to and from ASCII or ANSI code. +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..deb1b1baf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Asc Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120101.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Asc function + + +

Asc Function (BASIC)

+Returns the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) value of the first character in a string expression. +
+ + + +Asc(string) As Long + + + +Long + + +string: Any valid string expression. Only the first character in the string is relevant. +Use the Asc function to replace keys with values. If the Asc function encounters a blank string, $[officename] Basic reports a run-time error. In addition to 7 bit ASCII characters (Codes 0-127), the ASCII function can also detect non-printable key codes in ASCII code. This function can also handle 16 bit unicode characters. + + + + + +Sub ExampleASC + Print ASC("A") ' returns 65 + Print ASC(string:="Z") ' returns 90 + Print ASC("Las Vegas") ' returns 76, since only the first character is taken into account +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0329d570 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Chr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120102.xhp + + + + +
+ + Chr function + +

Chr Function

+ Returns the character that corresponds to the specified character code. +
+ + + + Chr[$](charcode As Integer) As String + + + + String + + + charcode: a numeric expression that represents a valid 8-bit ASCII value (0-255) or a 16-bit Unicode value. (To support expressions with a nominally negative argument like Chr(&H8000) in a backwards-compatible way, values in the range −32768 to −1 are internally mapped to the range 32768 to 65535.) + + When VBA compatibility mode is enabled (Option VBASupport 1), charcode is a numeric expression that represents a valid 8-bit ASCII value (0-255) only. + + Use the Chr$ function to send special control sequences to a printer or to another output source. You can also use it to insert quotation marks in a string expression. + + + + An overflow error will occur when VBA compatibility mode is enabled and the expression value is greater than 255. + + + + Sub ExampleChr + ' This example inserts quotation marks (ASCII value 34) in a string. + MsgBox "A " + Chr$(34) + "short" + Chr(34) + " trip." + ' The printout appears in the dialog as: A "short" trip. + MsgBox Chr(charcode := 64) ' "@" sign + End Sub + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..976c53e7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Str Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120103.xhp + + + + +
+ + Str function + +

Str Function

+ The Str function converts the contents of variables into a string. It handles numeric values, dates, strings and currency values. + Positive numbers are preceded by a blank space. Negative numbers are preceded by a minus sign. + For numeric values the string returned by the Str function is locale-independent. Hence the dot is used as the decimal separator when needed. + If a string is passed as argument, it is returned without any changes. + Dates are converted into locale-dependent strings. +
+ + + Str (Value As Variant) + + + String + + Value: Any value to be converted into a string. + + + + Below are some numeric examples using the Str function. + + Sub ExampleStr_1 + ' Note the blank space at the beginning of the returned strings + MsgBox Str(10) ' " 10" + MsgBox Str(10.5) ' " 10.5" + MsgBox Str(-12345 + 1.3) ' " -12346.3" + MsgBox Str(10000 / 3) ' " 3333.33333333333" + ' Strings passed as arguments are left unchanged + MsgBox Str("A123") ' "A123" + End Sub + + Use the LTrim function to remove the blank space at the beginning of the returned string. + + Sub ExampleStr_2 + MsgBox Str(10.5) ' " 10.5" + MsgBox LTrim(Str(10.5)) ' "10.5" + End Sub + + The Str function can also handle Date variables. + + Sub ExampleStr_3 + Dim aDate as Date, aTime as Date + aDate = DateSerial(2021, 12, 20) + aTime = TimeSerial(10, 20, 45) + Print Str(aDate) ' "12/20/2021" + Print Str(aTime) ' "10:20:45" + End sub + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b83dc5625 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Val Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120104.xhp + + + + +
+ + Val function + +

Val Function

+ Use the Val function to convert a string that represents a number into numeric data type. + The string passed to the Val function is locale-independent. This means that commas are interpreted as thousands separators and a dot is used as the decimal separator. +
+ + + Val (Text As String) + + + Double + + Text: String that represents a number. + If only part of the string contains numbers, only the first appropriate characters of the string are converted. If the string does not contain any numbers then Val returns 0. + + + + + Sub ExampleVal + MsgBox Val("123.1") + 1 ' 124.1 + ' Below 123,1 is interpreted as 1231 since "," is the thousands separator + MsgBox Val("123,1") + 1 ' 1232 + ' All numbers are considered until a non-numeric character is reached + MsgBox Val("123.4A") ' 123.4 + ' The example below returns 0 (zero) since the string provided does not start with a number + MsgBox Val("A123.123") ' 0 + End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3f925c69 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +CByte Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03120105.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CByte function + +

CByte Function

+Converts a string or a numeric expression to the Byte type. +
+ + +Cbyte( expression As Variant) As Byte + + +Byte + + +Expression: Any string or a numeric expression that can be evaluated to a number. Decimal values are rounded to the nearest tenth. Valid values range from 0 to 256. + + + + + + + Sub CByte_example + Print CByte( expression := "17"/2 + 7.44), CByte(EMPTY), CByte(PI) + ' Above expressions are computed as 16, 0 and 3 + End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe6d22493 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + AscW Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120111.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + AscW function + + + +

AscW Function [VBA]

+Returns the Unicode value of the first character in a string expression. +
+ + + +AscW (string) As Long + + +Long + + string: Any valid string expression. Only the first character in the string is relevant. +Use the AscW function to replace keys with Unicode values. If the AscW function encounters a blank string, %PRODUCTNAME Basic reports a run-time error. Returned values are between 0 and 65535. + + + + +Sub ExampleAscW + Print AscW("A") ' returns 65 + Print AscW(string:="Ω") ' returns 937 + Print AscW("Αθήνα") ' returns 913, since only the first character (Alpha) is taken into account +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1eba0429 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + ChrW Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03120112.xhp + + + + + +
+ + ChrW function + + +

ChrW Function [VBA]

+Returns the Unicode character that corresponds to the specified character code. +
+ + + +ChrW(charcode As Integer) As String + + +String + + charcode: Numeric expression that represent a valid 16 bit Unicode value (0-65535). (To support expressions with a nominally negative argument like ChrW(&H8000) in a backwards-compatible way, values in the range −32768 to −1 are internally mapped to the range 32768 to 65535.) An empty value returns error code 5. A value out of the range [0 to 65535] returns error code 6. + + + + + +Sub ExampleChrW + ' This example inserts the Greek letters alpha and omega in a string. + MsgBox "From " + ChrW(913) + " to " + ChrW(937) + ' The printout appears in the dialog as: From Α to Ω + MsgBox ChrW(charcode := 116) ' "t" lowercase T letter +End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a432da70 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Repeating Contents +/text/sbasic/shared/03120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Repeating Contents + The following functions repeat the contents of strings. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b60756d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Space and Spc Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120201.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Space function + Spc function + + +

Space and Spc Functions

+Returns a string that consists of a specified amount of spaces. +
+The Spc function works the same as the Space function. + + +Space (n As Long)
 +Spc (n As Long) + + +String + + + n: Numeric expression that defines the number of spaces in the string. The maximum allowed value of n is 2,147,483,648. + + + + + +Sub ExampleSpace +Dim sText As String, sOut As String +Dim iLen As Integer + iLen = 10 + sText = "Las Vegas" + sOut = sText & Space(iLen) & sText & Chr(13) &_ + sText & Space(iLen*2) & sText & Chr(13) &_ + sText & Space(iLen*4) & sText & Chr(13) + MsgBox sOut,0,"Info:" +End Sub + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a09d81a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + String Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120202.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + String function + + + +

String Function

+Creates a string according to the specified character, or the first character of a string expression that is passed to the function. +
+ + + +String (n As Long, {expression As Integer | character As String}) + + + +String + + + n: Numeric expression that indicates the number of characters to return in the string. The maximum allowed value of n is 2,147,483,648. + Expression: Numeric expression that defines the ASCII code for the character. + Character: Any single character used to build the return string, or any string of which only the first character will be used. + + + + + +Sub ExampleString +Dim sText As String + sText = String(10,"A") + MsgBox sText + sText = String(10,65) + MsgBox sText +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc9697f29 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Editing String Contents +/text/sbasic/shared/03120300.xhp + + + +
+Editing String Contents +The following functions edit, format, and align the contents of strings. Use the & or + operators to concatenate strings. + + ampersand symbol; in string handling + Operators;concatenation (& or +) + "& or +" concatenation (strings) + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48f9e0b85 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + Format Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120301.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Format function + + + +

Format Function

+Converts a numeric expression to a string, and then formats it according to the format that you specify. +
+ + + +Format(expression [, format As String]) As String + + +
+ + expression: Numeric expression that you want to convert to a formatted string. + format: String that specifies the format code for the number. If format is omitted, the Format function works like the %PRODUCTNAME Basic Str() function. + + +Text string. +
+ +

Formatting Codes

+
+The following list describes the codes that you can use for formatting a numeric expression: + 0: If expression has a digit at the position of the 0 in the format code, the digit is displayed, otherwise a zero is displayed. +If expression has fewer digits than the number of zeros in the format code, (on either side of the decimal), leading or trailing zeros are displayed. If the expression has more digits to the left of the decimal separator than the amount of zeros in the format code, the additional digits are displayed without formatting. +Decimal places in the expression are rounded according to the number of zeros that appear after the decimal separator in the format code. + #: If expression contains a digit at the position of the # placeholder in the format code, the digit is displayed, otherwise nothing is displayed at this position. +This symbol works like the 0, except that leading or trailing zeroes are not displayed if there are more # characters in the format code than digits in the expression. Only the relevant digits of the expression are displayed. + .: The decimal placeholder determines the number of decimal places to the left and right of the decimal separator. +If the format code contains only # placeholders to the left of this symbol, numbers less than 1 begin with a decimal separator. To always display a leading zero with fractional numbers, use 0 as a placeholder for the first digit to the left of the decimal separator. + %: Multiplies the expressionby 100 and inserts the percent sign (%) where the expression appears in the format code. + E- E+ e- e+ : If the format code contains at least one digit placeholder (0 or #) to the right of the symbol E-, E+, e-, or e+, the expression is formatted in the scientific or exponential format. The letter E or e is inserted between the number and the exponent. The number of placeholders for digits to the right of the symbol determines the number of digits in the exponent. +If the exponent is negative, a minus sign is displayed directly before an exponent with E-, E+, e-, e+. If the exponent is positive, a plus sign is only displayed before exponents with E+ or e+. +The thousands delimiter is displayed if the format code contains the delimiter enclosed by digit placeholders (0 or #). +The use of a period as a thousands and decimal separator is dependent on the regional setting. When you enter a number directly in Basic source code, always use a period as decimal delimiter. The actual character displayed as a decimal separator depends on the number format in your system settings. + - + $ ( ) space: A plus (+), minus (-), dollar ($), space, or brackets entered directly in the format code is displayed as a literal character. +To display characters other than the ones listed here, you must precede it by a backslash (\), or enclose it in quotation marks (" "). + \ : The backslash displays the next character in the format code. +Characters in the format code that have a special meaning can only be displayed as literal characters if they are preceded by a backslash. The backslash itself is not displayed, unless you enter a double backslash (\\) in the format code. +Characters that must be preceded by a backslash in the format code in order to be displayed as literal characters are date- and time-formatting characters (a, c, d, h, m, n, p, q, s, t, w, y, /, :), numeric-formatting characters (#, 0, %, E, e, comma, period), and string-formatting characters (@, &, <, >, !). +You can also use the following predefined number formats. Except for "General Number", all of the predefined format codes return the number as a decimal number with two decimal places. +If you use predefined formats, the name of the format must be enclosed in quotation marks. +
+ +

Predefined format

+
+ General Number: Numbers are displayed as entered. + Currency: Inserts a dollar sign in front of the number and encloses negative numbers in brackets. + Fixed: Displays at least one digit in front of the decimal separator. + Standard: Displays numbers with a thousands separator. + Percent: Multiplies the number by 100 and appends a percent sign to the number. + Scientific: Displays numbers in scientific format (for example, 1.00E+03 for 1000). +A format code can be divided into three sections that are separated by semicolons. The first part defines the format for positive values, the second part for negative values, and the third part for zero. If you only specify one format code, it applies to all numbers. +
+ + + + + + + +Sub ExampleFormat + MsgBox Format(6328.2, "##,##0.00") + ' always use a period as decimal delimiter when you enter numbers in Basic source code. + ' displays for example 6,328.20 in English locale, 6.328,20 in German locale. +End Sub + +
+ Number format codes + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8664f24e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + LCase Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120302.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + LCase function + + + +

LCase Function

+Converts all uppercase letters in a string to lowercase. +
+See also: UCase Function + + +LCase (Text As String) + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression that you want to convert. + + + + + +Sub ExampleLUCase +Dim sVar As String + sVar = "Las Vegas" + Print LCase(sVar) ' "las vegas" + Print UCase(sVar) ' "LAS VEGAS" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..596b15faa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Left Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120303.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Left function + + + +

Left Function

+Returns the number of leftmost characters that you specify of a string expression. +
+ + + +Left (Text As String, n As Long) + + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression that you want to return the leftmost characters from. + n: Numeric expression that specifies the number of characters that you want to return. If n = 0, a zero-length string is returned. The maximum allowed value is 2,147,483,648. +The following example converts a date in YYYY.MM.DD format to MM/DD/YYYY format. + + + + + +Sub ExampleUSDate +Dim sInput As String +Dim sUS_date As String + sInput = InputBox("Please input a date in the international format 'YYYY-MM-DD'") + sUS_date = Mid(sInput, 6, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Right(sInput, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Left(sInput, 4) + MsgBox sUS_date +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54567d6a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + LSet Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03120304.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + LSet statement + + + +

LSet Statement

+Aligns a string to the left of a string variable, or copies a variable of a user-defined type to another variable of a different user-defined type. +
+ + + +LSet Var As String = Text or LSet Var1 = Var2 + + + + Var: Any String variable that contains the string that you want align to the left. + Text: String that you want to align to the left of the string variable. + Var1: Name of the user-defined type variable that you want to copy to. + Var2: Name of the user-defined type variable that you want to copy from. +If the string is shorter than the string variable, LSet left-aligns the string within the string variable. Any remaining positions in the string variable are replaced by spaces. If the string is longer than the string variable, only the leftmost characters up to the length of the string variable are copied. With the LSet statement, you can also copy a user-defined type variable to another variable of the same type. + + + +Sub ExampleRLSet +Dim sVar As String +Dim sExpr As String + sVar = String(40,"*") + sExpr = "SBX" + ' Align "SBX" within the 40-character reference string + ' Replace asterisks with spaces + RSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(5,"*") + sExpr = "123457896" + RSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(40,"*") + sExpr = "SBX" + ' Left-align "SBX" within the 40-character reference string + LSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(5,"*") + sExpr = "123456789" + LSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..730e3cbb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + LTrim Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120305.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + LTrim function + + + +

LTrim Function

+Removes all leading spaces at the start of a string expression. +
+ + + +LTrim (Text As String) + + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression. +Use this function to remove spaces at the beginning of a string expression. + + + + + +Sub ExampleSpaces +Dim sText2 As String,sText As String,sOut As String + sText2 = " <*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = "'"+sText2 +"'"+ Chr(13) + sText = Ltrim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = sOut + "'"+sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Rtrim(sText2) ' sText = " <*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Trim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + MsgBox sOut +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3f4efe7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Mid Function, Mid Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03120306.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Mid function + Mid statement + + + +

Mid Function, Mid Statement

+Returns the specified portion of a string expression (Mid function), or replaces the portion of a string expression with another string (Mid statement). +
+ + + +Mid (Text As String, Start As Long [, Length As Long]) or Mid (Text As String, Start As Long , Length As Long, Text As String) + + + +String (only by Function) + + + Text: Any string expression that you want to modify. + Start: Numeric expression that indicates the character position within the string where the string portion that you want to replace or to return begins. The minimum allowed value is 1. The maximum allowed value is 2,147,483,648.see i17928 + Length: Numeric expression that returns the number of characters that you want to replace or return. The maximum allowed value is 2,147,483,648. +If the Length parameter in the Mid function is omitted, all characters in the string expression from the start position to the end of the string are returned. +If the Length parameter in the Mid statement is less than the length of the text that you want to replace, the text is reduced to the specified length. + Text: The string to replace the string expression (Mid statement). + + + + + +Sub ExampleUSDate +Dim sInput As String +Dim sUS_date As String + sInput = InputBox("Please input a date in the international format 'YYYY-MM-DD'") + sUS_date = Mid(sInput, 6, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Right(sInput, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Left(sInput, 4) + MsgBox sUS_date +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e970b80a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Right Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120307.xhp + + + + + + + +See also: Left Function. + + + +Right (Text As String, n As Long) + + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression that you want to return the rightmost characters of. + n: Numeric expression that defines the number of characters that you want to return. If n = 0, a zero-length string is returned. The maximum allowed value is 2,147,483,648. +The following example converts a date in YYYY-MM-DD format to the US date format (MM/DD/YYYY). + + + + + +Sub ExampleUSDate +Dim sInput As String +Dim sUS_date As String + sInput = InputBox("Please input a date in the international format 'YYYY-MM-DD'") + sUS_date = Mid(sInput, 6, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Right(sInput, 2) + sUS_date = sUS_date & "/" + sUS_date = sUS_date & Left(sInput, 4) + MsgBox sUS_date +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e527399c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + RSet Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03120308.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + RSet statement + + + +

RSet Statement

+Right-aligns a string within a string variable, or copies a user-defined variable type into another. +
+ + + +RSet Text As String = Text or RSet Variable1 = Variable2 + + + + Text: Any string variable. + Text: String that you want to right-align in the string variable. + Variable1: User-defined variable that is the target for the copied variable. + Variable2: User-defined variable that you want to copy to another variable. +If the string is shorter than the string variable, RSet aligns the string to the right within the string variable. Any remaining characters in the string variable are replaced with spaces. If the string is longer than the string variable, characters exceeding the length of the variable are truncated, and only the remaining characters are right-aligned within the string variable. +You can also use the RSet statement to assign variables of one user-defined type to another. +The following example uses the RSet and LSet statements to modify the left and right alignment of a string. + + + +Sub ExampleRLSet +Dim sVar As String +Dim sExpr As String + sVar = String(40,"*") + sExpr = "SBX" + ' Right-align "SBX" in a 40-character string + ' Replace asterisks with spaces + RSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(5,"*") + sExpr = "123457896" + RSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(40,"*") + sExpr = "SBX" + ' Left-align "SBX" in a 40-character string + LSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" + sVar = String(5,"*") + sExpr = "123456789" + LSet sVar = sExpr + Print ">"; sVar; "<" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e6d160f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + RTrim Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120309.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + RTrim function + + + +

RTrim Function

+Deletes the spaces at the end of a string expression. +
+See also: LTrim Function + + + +RTrim (Text As String) + + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression. + + + + + +Sub ExampleSpaces +Dim sText2 As String,sText As String,sOut As String + sText2 = " <*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = "'"+sText2 +"'"+ Chr(13) + sText = Ltrim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = sOut + "'"+sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Rtrim(sText2) ' sText = " <*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Trim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + MsgBox sOut +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87c0de547 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + UCase Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120310.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + UCase function + + + +

UCase Function

+Converts lowercase characters in a string to uppercase. +
+See also: LCase Function + +UCase (Text As String) + +String + + + Text: Any string expression that you want to convert. + + + + + +Sub ExampleLUCase +Dim sVar As String + sVar = "Las Vegas" + Print LCase(sVar) ' "las vegas" + Print UCase(sVar) ' "LAS VEGAS" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d12ed80a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Trim Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120311.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Trim function + + + +

Trim Function

+Removes all leading and trailing spaces from a string expression. +
+ + + +Trim( Text As String ) + + + +String + + + Text: Any string expression. + + + + + +Sub ExampleSpaces +Dim sText2 As String,sText As String,sOut As String + sText2 = " <*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = "'"+sText2 +"'"+ Chr(13) + sText = Ltrim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*> " + sOut = sOut + "'"+sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Rtrim(sText2) ' sText = " <*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + Chr(13) + sText = Trim(sText2) ' sText = "<*Las Vegas*>" + sOut = sOut +"'"+ sText +"'" + MsgBox sOut +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c67769f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + +ConvertToURL Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03120312.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ConvertToURL function + +

ConvertToURL Function

+Converts a system file name to a file URL. +
+ + +ConvertToURL(filename) + + +String + +filename: A file name as string. + + +
+ + + systemFile$ = "c:\folder\mytext.txt" + url$ = ConvertToURL( systemFile$ ) + print url$ + systemFileAgain$ = ConvertFromURL( url$ ) + print systemFileAgain$ + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c4ab4ba8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +ConvertFromURL Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03120313.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ConvertFromURL function + +

ConvertFromURL Function

+Converts a file URL to a system file name. +
+ + +ConvertFromURL(filename) + + +String + +filename: A file name as a string. + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..059f5e95e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Split Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120314.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Split function + + + +

Split Function

+Returns an array of substrings from a string expression. +
+ + + +Split (Text As String, delimiter, number) + + + +With Option VBASupport 1: String, with Option VBASupport 0: Variant/String + + + Text: Any string expression. + delimiter (optional): A string of one or more characters length that is used to delimit the Text. The default is the space character. + number (optional): The number of substrings that you want to return. + + + +
+ +Dim a(3) +Sub main() + a(0) = "ABCDE" + a(1) = 42 + a(2) = "MN" + a(3) = "X Y Z" + JStr = Join1() + Call Show(JStr, Split1(JStr)) + JStr = Join2() + Call Show(JStr, Split1(JStr)) + JStr = Join3() + Call Show(JStr, Split1(JStr)) +End Sub + +Function Join1() + Join1 = Join(a(), "abc") +End Function + +Function Join2() + Join2 = Join(a(), ",") +End Function + +Function Join3() + Join3 = Join(a()) +End Function + +Function Split1(aStr) + Split1 = Split(aStr, "D") +End Function + +Sub Show(JoinStr, TheArray) + l = LBound(TheArray) + u = UBound(TheArray) + total$ = "=============================" + Chr$(13) + JoinStr + Chr$(13) + Chr$(13) + For i = l To u + total$ = total$ + TheArray(i) + Str(Len(TheArray(i))) + Chr$(13) + Next i + MsgBox total$ +End Sub + +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68e406f3b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Join Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03120315.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Join function + +

Join Function

+Returns a string from a number of substrings in a string array. +
+ + +Join (Text As String Array, delimiter) + + +String + +Text: A string array. +delimiter (optional): A string character that is used to separate the substrings in the resulting string. The default delimiter is the space character. If delimiter is a string of length zero "", the substrings are joined without separator. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3012ca68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing String Length +/text/sbasic/shared/03120400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Editing String Length + The following functions determine string lengths and compare strings. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae53e0d99 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + InStr Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + InStr function + + + +

InStr Function

+Returns the position of a string within another string. +
+The Instr function returns the position at which the match was found. If the string was not found, the function returns 0. + +

Syntax:

+ +InStr ([Start As Long,] Text1 As String, Text2 As String[, Compare]) + + +

Return value:

+Integer + +

Parameters:

+ Start: A numeric expression that marks the position in a string where the search for the specified substring starts. If you omit this parameter, the search starts at the first character of the string. The minimum allowed value is 1. The maximum allowed value is 2,147,483,648.see i17928 + Text1: The string expression that you want to search. + Text2: The string expression that you want to search for. + Compare: Optional numeric expression that defines the type of comparison. The value of this parameter can be 0 or 1. The default value of 1 specifies a text comparison that is not case-sensitive. The value of 0 specifies a binary comparison that is case-sensitive.fixes i17929 +To avoid a run-time error, do not set the Compare parameter if the first optional parameter is omitted. + + + +

Example:

+ +Sub ExamplePosition +Dim sInput As String +Dim iPos As Integer + sInput = "Office" + iPos = Instr(sInput,"c") + Print iPos +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e57cb67fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Len Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03120402.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Len function + +Len Function +Returns the number of characters in a string, or the number of bytes that are required to store a variable. +
+Syntax: + +Len (Text As String) + +Return value: +Long +Parameters: + +Text: Any string expression or a variable of another type. + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleLen +Dim sText as String + sText = "Las Vegas" + MsgBox Len(sText) ' 9 +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6551e263d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + StrComp Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03120403.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + StrComp function + + + +StrComp Function +Compares two strings and returns an integer value that represents the result of the comparison. +
+ +Syntax: + +StrComp (Text1 As String, Text2 As String[, Compare]) + + +Return value: +Integer + +Parameter: + Text1: Any string expression + Text2: Any string expression + Compare: This optional parameter sets the comparison method. If Compare = 1, the string comparison is case-sensitive. If Compare = 0, no distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase letters. + +Return value + + + + If Text1 < Text2 the function returns -1 + + + If Text1 = Text2 the function returns 0 + + + If Text1 > Text2 the function returns 1 + + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleStrComp +Dim iVar As Single +Dim sVar As String + iVar = 123.123 + sVar = Str$(iVar) + MsgBox strcomp(sVar , Str$(iVar),1) +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ba7cc315 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + InStrRev Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03120411.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + InStrRev function + + + +InStrRev Function [VBA] +Returns the position of a string within another string, starting from the right side of the string. +
+ +The InStrRev function returns the position at which the match was found, from the right. If the string was not found, the function returns 0. + + +InStrRev (Text1 As String, Text2 As String [,Start As Long] [, Compare As Integer]) + + +Long + + Text1: The string expression that you want to search. + Text2: The string expression that you want to search for. + Start: Optional numeric expression that marks the position from the left in a string where the search for the specified substring starts. If you omit this parameter, the search starts at the last character of the string. The maximum allowed value is 65535. + Compare: Optional numeric expression that defines the type of comparison. The value of this parameter can be +1: The default value of 1 specifies a text comparison that is not case-sensitive. +0: The value of 0 specifies a binary comparison that is case-sensitive. +To avoid a run-time error, do not set the Compare parameter if the first return parameter is omitted. + + + + +Sub ExamplePosition +Dim sInput As String +Dim iPos As Integer + sInput = "The book is on the table" + iPos = InStrRev(sInput,"the",10,1) ' Returns 1, search is case-insensitive + Print iPos + iPos = InStrRev(sInput,"the",10,0) ' Returns 0, search is case-sensitive + Print iPos +End Sub + + +
+InStr +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c743326c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + StrReverse Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03120412.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + StrReverse function + +StrReverse Function [VBA] +Returns the string with the character order reversed. +
+ + + +StrReverse (Text1 As String) + + +String + + Text1: The string expression that you want to reverse the character order. + + + + +Sub ExampleReverse + Print StrReverse("ABCdefGH") ' return "HGfedCBA" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c281ca33c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Other Commands +/text/sbasic/shared/03130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Other Commands +This is a list of the functions and the statements that are not included in the other categories. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8e90b2dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Beep Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03130100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Beep statement + +

Beep Statement

+Plays a tone through the computer's speaker. The tone is system-dependent and you cannot modify its volume or pitch. +
+ + + + Beep Statement diagram + + +Beep + + + + + + +Sub ExampleBeep + Beep + Beep + Beep +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6c6fb321 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + Shell Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03130500.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Shell function + + +

Shell Function

+Starts another application and defines the respective window style, if necessary. +
+ + +Shell (Pathname As String[, Windowstyle As Integer][, Param As String][, bSync]) + + + +

Pathname

+Complete path and program name of the program that you want to start. + +

Windowstyle

+Optional integer expression that specifies the style of the window that the program is executed in. The following values are possible: + + + + + + Windowstyle + + + Meaning + + + + + + 0 + + + The focus is on the hidden program window. + + + + + 1 + + + The focus is on the program window in standard size. + + + + + 2 + + + The focus is on the minimized program window. + + + + + 3 + + + focus is on the maximized program window. + + + + + 4 + + + Standard size program window, without focus. + + + + + 6 + + + Minimized program window, focus remains on the active window. + + + + + 10 + + + Full-screen display. + + +
+ +

Param

+Any string expression that specifies the command line that want to pass. + +

bSync

+If this value is set to true, the Shell command and all $[officename] tasks wait until the shell process completes. If the value is set to false, the shell returns directly. The default value is false. + + + + + + + +Sub ExampleShellForWin + Shell("c:\windows\calc.exe",2) +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..849f00c86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Wait Statement +/text/sbasic/shared/03130600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Wait statement + +Wait Statement +Interrupts the program execution for the amount of time that you specify in milliseconds. +
+ +Wait millisec + + +millisec: Numeric expression that contains the amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait before the program is executed. + + + + +Sub ExampleWait +Dim lTick As Long + lTick = GetSystemTicks() + Wait 2000 + lTick = (GetSystemTicks() - lTick) + MsgBox "" & lTick & " Ticks" ,0,"The pause lasted" +End Sub + +
+ WaitUntil statement +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc0edc5e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + WaitUntil Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/03130610.xhp + + + +
+ + WaitUntil statement + +

WaitUntil Statement

+ Interrupts the program execution until the time specified. +
+ + WaitUntil Time + + + Time: A Date and Time expression that contains the date and time to wait before the program is executed. + + + + + + REM Wait until 6:00 PM then call MyMacro. + REM If after 6:00 PM, exit. + Sub ExampleWaitUntil + Dim vTimeschedule As Double + vTimeSchedule = Date() + TimeValue("18:00:00") + If vTimeSchedule < Now() Then Exit Sub + WaitUntil vTimeSchedule + Call MyMacro + End Sub + +
+ Wait statement +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb7fe6cf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + GetSystemTicks Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03130700.xhp + + + + + +
+ + GetSystemTicks function + + +GetSystemTicks Function +Returns the number of system ticks provided by the operating system. You can use this function to optimize certain processes. +
+ +Syntax: + +GetSystemTicks() + + +Return value: +Long + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleWait +Dim lTick As Long + lTick = GetSystemTicks() + Wait 2000 + lTick = (GetSystemTicks() - lTick) + MsgBox "" & lTick & " Ticks" ,0,"The pause lasted" +End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5e84cd5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Environ Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03130800.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Environ function + + + +Environ Function +Returns the value of an environment variable as a string. Environment variables are dependent on the type of operating system that you have. +
+ +Syntax: + +Environ (Environment As String) + + +Return value: +String + +Parameters: +Environment: Environment variable that you want to return the value for. + + + +Example: + +Sub ExampleEnviron +Dim sTemp As String + sTemp=Environ ("TEMP") + If sTemp = "" Then sTemp=Environ("TMP") + MsgBox "'" & sTemp & "'" ,64,"Directory of temporary files:" +End Sub + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92a2a316f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + GetSolarVersion Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03131000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + GetSolarVersion function + + +GetSolarVersion Function +Returns the internal number of the current $[officename] version. +
+ +Syntax: + +s = GetSolarVersion + + +Return value: +String + +Example: + +Sub ExampleGetSolarVersion +Dim sSep As String + sSep = GetSolarVersion + MsgBox sSep,64,"Version number of the solar technology" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..264a5b644 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + TwipsPerPixelX Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03131300.xhp + + + + + +
+ + TwipsPerPixelX function + + +TwipsPerPixelX Function +Returns the number of twips that represent the width of a pixel. +
+ +Syntax: + +n = TwipsPerPixelX + + +Return value: +Integer + +Example: + +Sub ExamplePixelTwips + MsgBox "" & TwipsPerPixelX() & " Twips * " & TwipsPerPixelY() & " Twips",0,"Pixel size" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b4586b02 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + TwipsPerPixelY Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03131400.xhp + + + + + +
+ + TwipsPerPixelY function + + +TwipsPerPixelY Function +Returns the number of twips that represent the height of a pixel. +
+ +Syntax: + +n = TwipsPerPixelY + + +Return value: +Integer + +Example: + +Sub ExamplePixelTwips + MsgBox "" & TwipsPerPixelX() & " Twips * " & TwipsPerPixelY() & " Twips",0,"Pixel size" +End Sub + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a249debd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + CreateUnoStruct Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03131500.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ CreateUnoStruct function + +

CreateUnoStruct Function

+ Creates an instance of a Uno structure type. +
+ + oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( Uno type name ) + + + oStruct = CreateUnoStruct( "com.sun.star.beans.Property" ) + + Or use the following structure for your statement: + + Dim oStruct as new com.sun.star.beans.Property + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf62e3df4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + CreateUnoService Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp + + + +
+ + CreateUnoService function + API;FilePicker + API;SimpleFileAccess + +

CreateUnoService Function

+ Instantiates a Uno service with the ProcessServiceManager. +
+ + oService = CreateUnoService( UNO service name ) + For a list of available services, visit the com::sun::star Module reference page. + + The example below creates the function FileExists that uses the service com.sun.star.ucb.SimpleFileAccess to test if a given path is an existing file. + + Function FileExists(sPath as String) as Boolean + Dim svcSFA as Object + Set svcSFA = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.ucb.SimpleFileAccess") + Dim bExists as Boolean : bExists = svcSFA.exists(sPath) + Dim bIsFolder as Boolean : bIsFolder = svcSFA.IsFolder(sPath) + FileExists = bExists And Not bIsFolder + End Function + + UNO services have an extensive online documentation in the api.libreoffice.org website. Visit the SimpleFileAccess Service reference page to learn more about the methods provided by the service used in the example above. + + +filepicker;API service + +The following code uses the service com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker to show a file open dialog: + +Sub Main + fName = FileOpenDialog ("Please select a file") + Print "file chosen: "+fName +End Sub + +Function FileOpenDialog(title As String) As String + res = com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults + filepicker = createUnoService("com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker") + filepicker.Title = title + If res.OK = filepicker.execute() Then + files = filepicker.getSelectedFiles() + FileOpenDialog=files(0) + EndIf +End Function + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e04eac85d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +GetProcessServiceManager Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03131700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+GetProcessServiceManager function +ProcessServiceManager + +GetProcessServiceManager Function +Returns the ProcessServiceManager (central Uno ServiceManager). +
+This function is required when you want to instantiate a service using CreateInstanceWithArguments. + +oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() + + + oServiceManager = GetProcessServiceManager() + oIntrospection = oServiceManager.createInstance("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection"); + ' this is the same as the following statement: + oIntrospection = CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.beans.Introspection") + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26f71a677 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +CreateUnoDialog Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03131800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + CreateUnoDialog function + +CreateUnoDialog Function +Creates a Basic Uno object that represents a Uno dialog control during Basic runtime. +
+Dialogs are defined in the dialog libraries. To display a dialog, a "live" dialog must be created from the library. +See Examples. + +CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) + + + ' Get dialog description from the dialog library + oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 + ' Generate "live" dialog + oDlgControl = CreateUnoDialog( oDlgDesc ) + ' display "live" dialog + oDlgControl.execute + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e91105025 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +GlobalScope +/text/sbasic/shared/03131900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+GlobalScope specifier +library systems +Library container +GlobalScope +API; BasicLibraries +API; DialogLibraries +BasicLibraries; library container +DialogLibraries; library container + +

GlobalScope specifier

+To manage personal or shared library containers (Application Macros or My Macros) from within a document, use the GlobalScope specifier. +
+
+ Basic source code and dialogs are organized in library containers. Libraries can contain modules and dialogs. +
+

In Basic:

+Basic libraries and modules can be managed with the BasicLibraries object. Libraries can be searched, explored and loaded on request. Monitoring Documents Events illustrates %PRODUCTNAME library loading. +

In dialogs:

+Dialog libraries and dialogs can be managed with the DialogLibraries object. Opening a Dialog With Basic illustrates how to display %PRODUCTNAME shared dialogs. +BasicLibraries and DialogLibraries containers exist at application level and within every document. Document's library containers do not need the GlobalScope specifier to be managed. If you want to call a global library container (located in Application Macros or My Macros) from within a document, you must use the GlobalScope specifier. + +GlobalScope specifier + +Example in the document Basic + + ' calling Dialog1 in the document library Standard + oDlgDesc = DialogLibraries.Standard.Dialog1 + ' calling Dialog2 in the application library Library1 + oDlgDesc = GlobalScope.DialogLibraries.Library1.Dialog2 + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..475fd4333 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + CreateUnoListener Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + CreateUnoListener function + + + +CreateUnoListener Function +Creates a Listener instance. +
+Many Uno interfaces let you register listeners on a special listener interface. This allows you to listen for specific events and call up the appropriate listener method. The CreateUnoListener function waits for the called listener interface and then passes the interface an object that the interface supports. This object is then passed to the method to register the listener. + +oListener = CreateUnoListener( Prefixname, ListenerInterfaceName ) + +The following example is based on a Basic library object. + +Dim oListener +oListener = CreateUnoListener( "ContListener_","com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener" ) + +The CreateUnoListener method requires two parameters. The first is a prefix and is explained in detail below. The second parameter is the fully qualified name of the Listener interface that you want to use. +The Listener must then be added to the Broadcaster Object. This is done by calling the appropriate method for adding a Listener. These methods always follow the pattern "addFooListener", where "Foo" is the Listener Interface Type, without the 'X'. In this example, the addContainerListener method is called to register the XContainerListener: + +Dim oLib +oLib = BasicLibraries.Library1 ' Library1 must exist! +oLib.addContainerListener( oListener ) ' Register the listener + +The Listener is now registered. When an event occurs, the corresponding Listener calls the appropriate method from the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener Interface. +The prefix calls registered Listeners from Basic-subroutines. The Basic run-time system searches for Basic-subroutines or functions that have the name "PrefixListenerMethode" and calls them when found. Otherwise, a run-time error occurs. +In this example, the Listener-Interface uses the following methods: + + + + disposing: + + + Listener base interface (com.sun.star.lang.XEventListener): base interface for all Listener Interfaces + + + elementInserted: + + + Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + + + elementRemoved: + + + Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + + + elementReplaced: + + + Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + +In this example, the prefix is ContListener_. The following subroutines must therefore be implemented in Basic: + + + + ContListener_disposing + + + ContListener_elementInserted + + + ContListener_elementRemoved + + + ContListener_elementReplaced + +An event structure type that contains information about an event exists for every Listener type. When a Listener method is called, an instance of this event is passed to the method as a parameter. Basic Listener methods can also call these event objects, so long as the appropriate parameter is passed in the Sub declaration. For example: + +Sub ContListener_disposing( oEvent ) + MsgBox "disposing" + MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub + +Sub ContListener_elementInserted( oEvent ) + MsgBox "elementInserted" + MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub + +Sub ContListener_elementRemoved( oEvent ) + MsgBox "elementRemoved" + MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub + +Sub ContListener_elementReplaced( oEvent ) + MsgBox "elementReplaced" + MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub + +You do not need to include the parameter of an event object if the object is not used: + +' Minimal implementation of Sub disposing +Sub ContListener_disposing +End Sub + +Listener methods must always be implemented to avoid Basic run-time errors. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c95d845ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + GetGuiType Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03132100.xhp + + + +
+GetGuiType function + +

GetGuiType Function

+ Returns a numerical value that specifies the graphical user interface. +
+ This function is only provided for downward compatibility to previous versions. The return value is not defined in client-server environments. + Syntax: + +GetGUIType() + + Return value: + Integer + Return values: + 1: Windowsremoved 3: Mac OS, see i95717 +4: UNIX + Example: + + Sub ExampleEnvironment + MsgBox GetGUIType + End Sub + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b89a5d3cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + ThisComponent Object + /text/sbasic/shared/03132200.xhp + + + +
+ + ThisComponent object + components;addressing + + +

ThisComponent Object

+ThisComponent represents the current document in Basic macros. It addresses the active component whose properties can be read and set, and whose methods can be called. Properties and methods available through ThisComponent depend on the document type.see i60932 +
+ + + + ThisComponent + +When the active window is a Base form, query, report, table or view, ThisComponent returns the current Form information. +When active window is the Basic IDE, ThisComponent object returns the component owning the current script. + + + +Sub Main +' updates the "Table of Contents" in a text doc +Dim allindexes, index As Object + allindexes = ThisComponent.getDocumentIndexes() + index = allindexes.getByName("Table of Contents1") + ' use the default name for Table of Contents and a 1 + index.update() +End Sub + + +
+ com.sun.star.text.TextDocument API service + com.sun.star.sheet.SpreadsheetDocument API service + com.sun.star.presentation.PresentationDocument API service + com.sun.star.drawing.DrawingDocument API service + com.sun.star.formula.FormulaProperties API service + com.sun.star.sdb.OfficeDatabaseDocument API service + com.sun.star.document.OfficeDocument API service +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a490c7a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +CreateUnoValue Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03132300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CreateUnoValue function + +CreateUnoValue Function +Returns an object that represents a strictly typed value referring to the Uno type system. +
+This object is automatically converted to an Any of the corresponding type when passed to Uno. The type must be specified by its fully qualified Uno type name. +The $[officename] API frequently uses the Any type. It is the counterpart of the Variant type known from other environments. The Any type holds one arbitrary Uno type and is used in generic Uno interfaces. + +oUnoValue = CreateUnoValue( "[]byte", MyBasicValue ) ' to get a byte sequence. +If CreateUnoValue cannot be converted to the specified Uno type, and error occurs. For the conversion, the com.sun.star.script.Converter service is used. +This function is intended for use in situations where the default Basic to Uno type converting mechanism is insufficient. This can happen when you try to access generic Any based interfaces, such as XPropertySet::setPropertyValue( Name, Value ) or X???Container::insertBy???( ???, Value ), from $[officename] Basic. The Basic runtime does not recognize these types as they are only defined in the corresponding service. +In this type of situation, $[officename] Basic chooses the best matching type for the Basic type that you want to convert. However, if the wrong type is selected, an error occurs. You use the CreateUnoValue() function to create a value for the unknown Uno type. +You can also use this function to pass non-Any values, but this is not recommend. If Basic already knows the target type, using the CreateUnoValue() function will only lead to additional converting operations that slow down the Basic execution. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..665fe359d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + CreateObject Function + /text/sbasic/shared/03132400.xhp + + + +
+ + CreateObject function + +

CreateObject Function

+ Creates a UNO object. On Windows, can also create OLE objects.see i70942 + This method creates instances of the type that is passed as parameter. +
+ + + oObj = CreateObject(type) + + + type: the type of the object to be created, as a string. + + + Type address + Name1 As String + City As String + End Type + + Sub main + myaddress = CreateObject("address") + MsgBox IsObject(myaddress) + End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f67ad0589 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +GetDefaultContext Function +/text/sbasic/shared/03132500.xhp + + +GetDefaultContext function + + + +
+GetDefaultContext function + +GetDefaultContext Function +Returns the default context of the process service factory, if existent, else returns a null reference. +
+This function returns the default component context to be used, if instantiating services via XmultiServiceFactory. See the Professional UNO chapter in the Developer's Guide on api.libreoffice.org for more information. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b7426f53 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + DDB Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + DDB function + + + +DDB Function [VBA] +Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. +
+ + + +DDB(Cost As Double, Salvage As Double, Life as Double, Period as Double, [Factor as Variant]) + + +Double + +Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. +Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. +Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. +Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. +Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. +Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. + + + + +Sub ExampleDDB + Dim ddb_yr1 As Double + ddb_yr1 = DDB(75000,1,60,12,2) + Print ddb_yr1 ' returns 1,721.81 currency units. +End Sub + + +
+DDB function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1731bcc97 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + FV Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140001.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + FV function + + + +FV Function [VBA] +Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value). +
+ + + +FV(Rate as Double, NPer as Double, Pmt as Double, [PV as Variant], [Due as Variant]) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). +Pmt is the annuity paid regularly per period. +PV (optional) is the (present) cash value of an investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +Sub ExampleFV + Dim myFV As Double + myFV = =FV(0.04, 2, 750, 2500) + Print myFV ' returns 4234.00 currency units. The value at the end of the investment is 4234.00 currency units. +End Sub + + +
+FV function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b47710a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + IPmt Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140002.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IPmt function + + + +IPmt Function [VBA] +Calculates the periodic amortizement for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate. +
+ + + +IPmt(Rate as Double, Per as Double, NPer as Double, PV as Double, [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant]) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Per is the period, for which the compound interest is calculated. Period=NPER if compound interest for the last period is calculated. +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +PV is the present cash value in sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) at the end of the periods. +Due (optional) is the due date for the periodic payments. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +Sub ExampleIPmt + Dim myIPmt As Double + myIPmt = IPmt(0.05,5,7,15000) + Print myIPmt ' returns -352.97 currency units. The compound interest during the fifth period (year) is 352.97 currency units. +End Sub + + +
+IPMT function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b1707e22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + IRR Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140003.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + IRR function + + + +IRR Function [VBA] +Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. +
+ + + +IRR(Values() as Double , [Guess as Variant]) + + +Double + +Values(): The array of values of the cash-flow. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). +Guess An initial estimate at what the IRR will be. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleIRR + Dim cashFlow(0 to 3) As Double + cashFlow(0) = -10000 + cashFlow(1) = 3500 + cashFlow(2) = 7600 + cashFlow(3) = 1000 + irrValue = IRR(cashFlow) * 100 + Print irrValue ' returns 11.3321028236252 . The internal rate of return of the cash flow. +End Sub + + +
+IRR function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18d65dd5a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + MIRR Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140004.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + MIRR function + + + +MIRR Function [VBA] +Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments. +
+ + + +MIRR(Values() as Double, Investment as Double, ReinvestRate as Double) + + +Double + +Values(): An array of cash flows, representing a series of payments and income, where negative values are treated as payments and positive values are treated as income. This array must contain at least one negative and at least one positive value. +Investment: is the rate of interest of the investments (the negative values of the array). +ReinvestRate: the rate of interest of the reinvestment (the positive values of the array). + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleMIRR + Dim cashFlow(0 to 3) As Double + cashFlow(0) = -5 + cashFlow(1) = 10 + cashFlow(2) = 15 + cashFlow(3) = 8 + mirrValue = MIRR(cashFlow,0.5,0.1) * 100 + Print mirrValue ' returns 94.16. The modified internal rate of return of the cash flow. +End Sub + + +
+MIRR function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..488d46ec9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + NPer Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140005.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + NPer function + + + +NPer Function [VBA] +Calculates the number of periods for a loan or investment. +
+ + + +NPer (Rate as Double, Pmt as Double, PV as Double, [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant]) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Pmt is the annuity paid regularly per period. +PV is the (present) cash value of an investment. +FV (optional) is the future value of the loan / investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleNPer + Dim period As Double + period = NPer( 0.06, 153.75, 2600) + Print period ' returns -12,02. The payment period covers 12.02 periods. +End Sub + + +
+NPER function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94b4b9bbd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + NPV Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140006.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + NPV function + + + +NPV Function [VBA] +Calculates the Net Present Value of an investment, based on a supplied discount rate, and a series of deposits and withdrawals. +
+ + + +NPV (Rate as Double, Values() as Double) + + +Double + +Rate is the discount rate for a period. +Values() is an array that represent deposits (positive values) or withdrawals (negative values). + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleNPV + Dim r As Double + Dim pValues(5) as Double + pValues(0) = 100 + pValues(1) = 100 + pValues(2) = 100 + pValues(3) = -300 + pValues(4) = 100 + pValues(5) = 100 + r = 0.06 + p = NPV( r, pValues) + Print p ' returns 174,894967305331 +End Sub + + +
+NPV function in CALC + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d2e7001e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Pmt Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140007.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Pmt function + + + +Pmt Function [VBA] +Calculates the constant periodic payments for a loan or investment. +
+ + + +Pmt( Rate as Double, NPer as Double , PV as Double , [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant] ) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +PV is the (present) cash value of an investment. +FV (optional) is the future value of the loan / investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASUPPORT 1 +' Calculate the monthly payments to a loan that is to be paid in full over 6 years. +' Interest is 10% per year and payments are made at the end of the month. +Sub ExamplePmt + Dim myPmt As Double + myPmt = Pmt( 0.1/12, 72, 100000 ) + print MyPmt 'is calculated to be -1852,58377757705 +End Sub + + +
+PMT function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9694aa3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + PPmt Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140008.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + PPmt function + + + +PPmt Function [VBA] +Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate. +
+ + + +Pmt( Rate as Double, Per as Double, NPer as Double, PV as Double, [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant] ) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Per The period number for which you want to calculate the principal payment (must be an integer between 1 and Nper). +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +PV is the (present) cash value of an investment. +FV (optional) is the future value of the loan / investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExamplePPmt +' Calculate the principal payments during months 4 & 5, for a loan that is to be paid in full +' over 6 years. Interest is 10% per year and payments are made at the end of the month. +Dim ppMth4 As Double +Dim ppMth5 As Double +' Principal payment during month 4: +ppMth4 = PPmt( 0.1/12, 4, 72, 100000 ) +print ppMth4 ' ppMth4 is calculated to be -1044,94463903636. +' Principal payment during month 5: +ppMth5 = PPmt( 0.1/12, 5, 72, 100000 ) +print ppMth5' ppMth5 is calculated to be -1053,65251102833. +End Sub + + +
+PPMT function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e8620daa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + PV Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140009.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + PV function + + + +PV Function [VBA] +Returns the Present Value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. +
+ + + +Pmt( Rate as Double, NPer as Double, Pmt as Double, [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant] ) + + +Double + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +Pmt is the regular payment made per period. +FV (optional) is the future value of the loan / investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExamplePV +' Calculate the present value of an annuity that pays $1,000 per month over 6 years. +' Interest is 10% per year and each payment is made at the end of the month. +Dim pv1 As Double +pv1 = PV( 0.1/12, 72, -1000 ) +print pv1 ' pv1 is calculated to be 53978,6654781073. +End Sub + + +
+PV function in CALC + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f76bf540e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Rate Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140010.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Rate function + + + +Rate Function [VBA] +Returns the interest rate of a loan or an investment. +
+ + + +Rate( NPer as Double, Pmt as Double, PV as Double [FV as Variant], [Due as Variant], [Guess as Variant] ) + + +Double + +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +Pmt is the regular payment made per period. +PV is the present value of the loan / investment. +FV (optional) is the future value of the loan / investment. +Due (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. +0 - the payment is due at the end of the period; +1 - the payment is due at the beginning of the period. +Guess(optional) determines the estimated value of the interest with iterative calculation. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleRate +' Calculate the interest rate required to pay off a loan of $100,000 over +' 6 years, with payments of $1,500, due at the end of each month. + Dim mRate As Double + mRate = Rate( 72, -1500, 100000 ) + print mRate' mRate is calculated to be 0.00213778025343334 +End sub + + +
+RATE function in CALC + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6864384ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + SLN Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140011.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + SLN function + + + +SLN Function [VBA] +Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period. The amount of the depreciation is constant during the depreciation period. +
+ + + +SLN (Cost as Double, Salvage as Double, Life as Double) + + +Double + +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. +Life is the depreciation period determining the number of periods in the depreciation of the asset. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleSLN +REM Calculate the yearly depreciation of an asset that cost $10,000 at +REM the start of year 1, and has a salvage value of $1,000 after 5 years. +Dim y_dep As Double +y_dep = SLN( 10000, 1000, 6 ) +print y_dep ' returns 1500. +End Sub + + +
+SLN function in CALC + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ad42e26b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + SYD Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03140012.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + SYD function + + + +SYD Function [VBA] +Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. +
+ + + +SYD (Cost as Double, Salvage as Double, Life as Double, Period as Double) + + +Double + +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. +Life is the depreciation period determining the number of periods in the depreciation of the asset. +Period is the period number for which you want to calculate the depreciation. + + + + +REM ***** BASIC ***** +Option VBASupport 1 +Sub ExampleSYD +REM Calculate the yearly depreciation of an asset that cost $10,000 at +REM the start of year 1, and has a salvage value of $1,000 after 5 years. +Dim syd_yr1 As Double +REM Calculate the depreciation during year 1. +syd_yr1 = SYD( 10000, 1000, 5, 1 ) +print syd_yr1 ' syd_yr1 is now equal to 3000. +End Sub + + +
+SYD function in CALC + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01ed09073 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + FormatDateTime Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03150000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + FormatDateTime function + + + FormatDateTime Function [VBA] + Applies a date and/or time format to a date expression and returns the result as a string. +
+ + + + FormatDateTime (DateExpression as Date [, NamedFormat as Integer]) + + + String + + DateExpression: The date expression to be formatted. + NamedFormat: An optional vbDateTimeFormat enumeration specifying the format that is to be applied to the date and time expression. If omitted, the value vbGeneralDate is used. + Date and Time formats (vbDateTimeFormat enumeration) +
+ + + + Named Constant + + + Value + + + Description + + + + + vbGeneralDate + + + 0 + + + Displays a date and/or time as defined in your system's General Date setting. If a date only, no time is displayed; If a time only, no date is displayed. + + + + + vbLongDate + + + 1 + + + Display a date using the long date format specified in your computer's regional settings. + + + + + vbShortDate + + + 2 + + + Display a date using the short date format specified in your computer's regional settings. + + + + + vbLongTime + + + 3 + + + Displays a time as defined in your system's Long Time settings. + + + + + vbShortTime + + + 4 + + + Display a time using the 24-hour format (hh:mm). + + +
+
+ + + + + + REM ***** BASIC ***** + Option VBASupport 1 + Sub DateFormat + Dim d as Date + d = ("1958-01-29 00:25") + msgbox("General date format : " & FormatDateTime(d)) + msgbox("Long date format : " & FormatDateTime(d,vbLongDate)) + msgbox("Short date format : " & FormatDateTime(d,vbShortDate)) + msgbox("Long time format : " & FormatDateTime(d,3)) + msgbox("Short time format : " & FormatDateTime(d,vbShortTime)) + End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3e0e20c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + + + + + + + WeekdayName Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03150001.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + WeekdayName function + + + WeekdayName Function [VBA] + The WeekdayName function returns the weekday name of a specified day of the week. +
+ + + + WeekdayName(Weekday as Integer [,Abbreviate as Boolean [,FirstDayofWeek as Integer]]) + + + String + + Weekday: Value from 1 to 7, Mon­day to Sun­day, whose Week Day Name need to be calculated. + Abbreviate: Optional. A Boolean value that indicates if the weekday name is to be abbreviated. + FirstDayofWeek: Optional. Specifies the first day of the week. + First day of Week: + + + + Named constant + + + Value + + + Description + + + + + vbUseSystemDayOfWeek + + + 0 + + + Use National Language Support (NLS) API setting + + + + + vbSun­day + + + 1 + + + Sun­day (default) + + + + + vbMonday + + + 2 + + + Monday + + + + + vbTuesday + + + 3 + + + Tuesday + + + + + vbWednesday + + + 4 + + + Wednesday + + + + + vbThursday + + + 5 + + + Thursday + + + + + vbFriday + + + 6 + + + Friday + + + + + vbSaturday + + + 7 + + + Saturday + + +
+ + + + None + + + REM ***** BASIC ***** + Option VBASupport 1 + Sub Example_WeekdayName + Dim tgf as Integer + tgf = 6 + print tgf &" "& WeekdayName(tgf,False,vbSunday) + End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5516ab45c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + MonthName Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03150002.xhp + + + + +
+ + MonthName function + + + MonthName Function [VBA] + The MonthName function returns the localized month name of a specified month number. +
+ + + + MonthName(Month as Integer [,Abbreviate as Boolean]) + + + String + + Month: Value from 1 to 12, January to December, whose localized month name need to be returned. + Abbreviate: Optional. A Boolean value that indicates if the month name is to be abbreviated. + + + + + + REM ***** BASIC ***** + Option VBASupport 1 + Sub Example_MonthName + Dim mBirthday as Integer + mBirthday = 1 + print mBirthday &" "& MonthName(mBirthday,False) + End Sub + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa429b151 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Input Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03160000.xhp + + + + +
+ + Input function + +

Input Function [VBA]

+ Returns the open stream of an Input or Binary file (String). +
+ + + + Input( Number as Integer, [# ] FileNumber as Integer) + + + String + + Number: Required. Numeric expression specifying the number of characters to return. + #: Optional. + FileNumber: Required. Any valid file number. + + + + + + + + REM ***** BASIC ***** + Option VBASupport 1 + Sub Example_Input + Dim MyData + Open "MyDataFile.txt" For Input As #1 + Do While Not EOF(1) + MyData = Input(1, #1) + Print MyData + Loop + Close #1 + End Sub + + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f5d824fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Round Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03170000.xhp + + + + +
+ + Round function (VBA) + +

Round Function [VBA]

+ Rounds a numeric value to a specified number of decimal digits. +
+ + This function implements the rounding rule known as "round-to-even". With this rule, whenever the difference between the number to be rounded and its nearest integer is equal to 0.5, the number is rounded to the nearest even number. See the examples below to learn more about this rule. + Beware that VBA's Round function works differently than %PRODUCTNAME Calc's Round function. In Calc, if the difference between the number to be rounded and the nearest integer is exactly 0.5, then the number is rounded up. Hence, in Calc the number 2.5 is rounded to 3 whereas using VBA's Round function the value 2.5 is rounded to 2 due to the "round-to-even" rule. + + + Round(expression [,numdecimalplaces]) + + + Double + + expression: The numeric expression to be rounded. + numdecimalplaces: Optional argument that specifies the number of decimal digits in the resulting rounded value. The default value is 0. + + + + + Option VBASupport 1 + Sub Example_Round + Dim r + r = Pi + print r ' 3,14159265358979 + print Round(r, 5) ' 3,14159 + r = exp(1) + print r ' 2,71828182845904 + print Round(r) ' 3 + End Sub + +
+ The following examples illustrate the "round-to-even" rule: +
+ + ' Rounding to the nearest integer (decimalplaces = 0) + MsgBox Round(3.5) ' 4 + MsgBox Round(4.5) ' 4 + MsgBox Round(5.5) ' 6 + MsgBox Round(6.5) ' 6 + ' Rounding with 2 decimal digits (decimalplaces = 2) + MsgBox Round(1.555, 2) ' 1.56 + MsgBox Round(1.565, 2) ' 1.56 + MsgBox Round(1.575, 2) ' 1.58 + MsgBox Round(1.585, 2) ' 1.58 + + +
+ Calc ROUND function + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2202cd123 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + FormatNumber Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/03170010.xhp + + + +
+ + + FormatNumber function + + FormatNumber [VBA] + Returns a string with a number formatting applied to a numeric expression. +
+ + + FormatNumber( expression, numDigitsAfterDecimal as Integer, includeLeadingDigit as Integer,
useParensForNegativeNumbers as Integer, groupDigits as Integer ) + + String + + + + expression: Required. The numeric expression to be formatted. + + numDigitsAfterDecimal: Optional. A numeric value specifying the number of digits that should be displayed after the decimal. If omitted, it defaults to the value -1, meaning that the default settings for user interface locale should be used. + + includeLeadingDigit: Optional. A vbTriState enumeration value, specifying whether a leading zero should be displayed for fractional values. + + + + vbTrue or -1: Display a leading zero. + + + vbFalse or 0: Do not display leading zeros. + + + vbUseDefaults or -2: Use the user interface locale settings. This is the default when omitted. + + + useParensForNegativeNumbers: Optional. A vbTriState enumeration value specifying whether negative numbers should be encased in parenthesis. + + + vbTrue or -1: Use parenthesis for negative numbers. + + + vbFalse or 0: Do not display parenthesis. + + + vbUseDefaults or -2: Same as vbFalse. This is the default when omitted. + + + + groupDigits: Optional. A vbTriState enumeration value specifying the number should be grouped (into thousands, etc.), using the group delimiter that is specified on the system's regional settings. + + + + vbTrue or -1: Group digits. + + + vbFalse or 0: Do not group digits. + + + vbUseDefaults or -2: Same as vbFalse. This is the default when omitted. + + + + + + + Sub TestFormatNumber + testName = "Test 1: positive, 2 decimals" + str2 = "12.20" + str1 = FormatNumber("12.2", 2, vbFalse, vbFalse, vbFalse) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + + testName = "Test 2: negative, 20 decimals, use leading zero" + str2 = "-0.20000000000000000000" + str1 = FormatNumber("-.2", 20, vbTrue, vbFalse, vbFalse) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + + testName = "Test 3: negative, 20 decimals, no leading zero" + str2 = "-.20000000000000000000" + str1 = FormatNumber("-0.2", 20, vbFalse, vbFalse, vbFalse) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + + testName = "Test 4: negative, no leading zero, use parens" + str2 = "(.20)" + str1 = FormatNumber("-0.2", -1, vbFalse, vbTrue, vbFalse) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + + testName = "Test 5: negative, default leading zero, use parens" + str2 = "(0.20)" + str1 = FormatNumber("-0.2", -1, vbUseDefault, vbTrue, vbFalse) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + + testName = "Test 6: group digits" + str2 = "-12,345,678.00" + str1 = FormatNumber("-12345678", -1, vbUseDefault, vbUseDefault, vbTrue) + msgbox( "FormatNumber returned: " + str1 + ", Expected: " + str2) + End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f785cc03a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ + + + + + + + + +Macro +/text/sbasic/shared/05060700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+events;linked to objects + +Macro +Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected graphic, frame, or OLE object is selected. Depending on the object that is selected, the function is either found on the Macro tab of the Object dialog, or in the Assign Macro dialog. +
+Event +Lists the events that are relevant to the macros that are currently assigned to the selected object. +The following table describes the macros and the events that can by linked to objects in your document: + + + +Event + + +Event trigger + + +OLE object + + +Graphics + + +Frame + + +AutoText + + +ImageMap area + + +Hyperlink + + + + +Click object + + +Object is selected. + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Mouse over object + + +Mouse moves over the object. + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Trigger Hyperlink + + +Hyperlink assigned to the object is clicked. + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + +✓ + + + + +Mouse leaves object + + +Mouse moves off of the object. + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Graphics load successful + + +Graphics are loaded successfully. + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Graphics load terminated + + +Loading of graphics is stopped by the user (for example, when downloading the page). + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Graphics load faulty + + +Graphics not successfully loaded, for example, if a graphic was not found. + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Input of alpha characters + + +Text is entered from the keyboard. + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Input of non-alpha characters + + +Nonprinting characters are entered from the keyboard, for example, tabs and line breaks. + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Resize frame + + +Frame is resized with the mouse. + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Move frame + + +Frame is moved with the mouse. + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Before inserting AutoText + + +Before a text block is inserted. + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + +After inserting AutoText + + +After a text block is inserted. + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + +
+ +Macros +Choose the macro that you want to execute when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link events to a function, so that the function can determine if it processes the event or $[officename] Writer. +Category +Lists the open $[officename] documents and applications. Click the name of the location where you want to save the macros. +Macro name +Lists the available macros. Click the macro that you want to assign to the selected object. +Assign +Assigns the selected macro to the specified event. The assigned macro's entries are set after the event. +Remove +Removes the macro that is assigned to the selected item. + +Macro selection +Select the macro that you want to assign. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1933be217 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + CallByName Function + /text/sbasic/shared/CallByName.xhp + + + + + +
+

CallByName Function

+Invokes a subroutine by its string name. +
+ + CallByName function + API;OfficeFilePicker + + + + + CallByName(object As Object, ProcName As String, CallType As Integer [,arg0 [,arg1 …]]) + + + +result: An optional variable that contains the result of the called method or property. + + +object: A Basic module, ClassModule instance or UNO service holding properties or methods. +ProcName: The Function, Sub or Property that is being called. +CallType: The type of performed action such as Get, Let, Method and Set. +arg0, arg1 …: The Function optional parameters given as positional arguments. +Arguments are provided in the exact same order defined in the method signature. Keyword arguments are not possible. + + + Value + CallType Description + + + 1 + Method: Calls a procedure as a function or a subroutine. + + + 2 + Get: Reads a property or variable content. + + + 4 + Let: Assigns a content to a Property or variable. + + + 8 + Set: Assigns a reference value to an Object or Variant variable. + +
+ + + + + A Calc.Maths module contains a Multiply function expecting a varying list of numbers. + + + ScriptForge.Platform.Architecture information is retrieved. + + + DisplayDirectory property of com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker UNO service is set to the user home folder, its content is read twice. + + + + Sub CallByName_example + Const _Method = 1, _Get = 2, _Let = 4, _Set = 8 + + BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("Calc") ' Calc.Maths user library.module + Dim cm As Object : cm = Calc.Maths + MsgBox CallByName(cm, "Multiply", _Method, 3, 45, 1, 89) ' 12015 + MsgBox CallByName(cm, "Multiply", _Method, 1.85e15, 44, 10^8) ' 8.14E+24 + + GlobalScope.BasicLibraries.loadLibrary("ScriptForge") + Dim p As Object : p = CreateScriptService("ScriptForge.Platform") + MsgBox CallByName(p, "Architecture", _Get) ' 32bit/64bit + + Dim uno As Object : uno = CreateUNOService("com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.OfficeFilePicker") + Dim fs As Object : fs = CreateScriptService("ScriptForge.FileSystem") + CallByName(uno, "DisplayDirectory", _Let, fs.HomeFolder) + MsgBox CallByName(uno, "DisplayDirectory", _Get) + var = CallByName(uno, "getDisplayDirectory", _Get) + End Sub + + +

Calc.Maths module

+ + Option Compatible ' Calc.Maths module + Option Explicit + + Public Function Multiply(ParamArray args() As Double) As Variant + ''' Multiply a variable list of numbers ''' + Dim ndx As Integer + If UBound(args) >= 0 Then + Multiply = 1.0 + For ndx = 0 To UBound(args) + Multiply = Multiply * args(ndx) + Next ndx + End If + End Function 'Calc.Maths.Multiply() + + +
+ + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..675c1891c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + Compiler Options + /text/sbasic/shared/Compiler_options.xhp + + + + + Compiler Options + Runtime conditions + + +
+

Compiler Options, Runtime Conditions

+ Compiler options specified at the module level affect %PRODUCTNAME Basic compiler checks and error messages. Basic syntax as well as Basic set of instructions can be different according to the options that are in use. The less Option, the easiest and tolerant %PRODUCTNAME Basic language is. The more Option, the richer and controlled Basic language gets. +
+ Compiler options must be specified before the executable program code in a module. + + Option Statement diagram + + + + + + + +

Option Private Module

+ Specifies that the scope of the module is that of the Basic library it belongs to. + + Options specified at the module level also affect %PRODUCTNAME Basic runtime conditions. The behaviour of %PRODUCTNAME Basic instructions can differ. + +
+ Property statement + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1badcbf05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + Err VBA Object + /text/sbasic/shared/ErrVBA.xhp + + + +
+ + Err object + Error;raising + Error;handling + +

Err Object [VBA]

+ Use VBA Err object to raise or handle runtime errors. +
+ Err is a built-in VBA global object that allows: + + to raise predefined Basic errors + to throw user-defined exceptions + to name the routine originating the error + to describe the error and possible solutions + + + The VBA Err object has the following properties and methods: +

Properties

+ + Err.Description As String + + The Description property gives the nature of the error. Description details the various reasons that may be the cause of the error. Ideally, it provides the multiple course of actions to help solve the issue and prevent its reoccurrence. The Basic alias is the Error function for %PRODUCTNAME predefined errors. + + Err.Number As Long + + The error code associated with the error. Err object default property is Number. The %PRODUCTNAME Basic alias is the Err function. + + Err.Source As String + + Source indicates the name of the routine that produces the error. Source is an option for user-defined errors. +

Methods

+ + Err.Clear() + + Resets description, Erl, number and source properties of current error. The %PRODUCTNAME Basic alias is the Resume statement. + + Err.Raise(Number As Long, Optional source As String, Optional description As String) + + Throws user-defined errors or predefined errors. The %PRODUCTNAME Basic alias is the Error statement. +

Parameters

+ Number: A user-defined or predefined error code to be raised. +
+ Error code range 0-2000 is reserved for %PRODUCTNAME Basic. User-defined errors may start from higher values in order to prevent collision with %PRODUCTNAME Basic future developments. +
+ Source: The name of the routine raising the error. A name in the form of "myLibrary.myModule.myProc" is recommended. + Description: A description of the problem leading to stop the running process, accompanied with the various reasons that may cause it. A detailed list of the possible course of actions that may help solve the problem is recommended. + + + Option VBASupport 1 + + Sub ThrowErrors + Dim aDesc As String : aDesc = Space(80) + On Local Error GoTo AlertAndExecNext + Err.Raise(91, "ThrowErrors", Error(91)) + Err.Raise 2020, Description:="This is an intended user-defined error …" + Err.Raise(4096, "Standard.Module1.ThrowErrors", aDesc) + Exit Sub + AlertAndExecNext: + errTitle = "Error "& Err &" at line "& Erl &" in "& Err.Source + MsgBox Err.Description, MB_ICONEXCLAMATION, errTitle + Resume Next + End Sub + +

Exception ClassModule

+ A short ClassModule, that wraps VBA Err object, can distribute Err properties and methods for standard %PRODUCTNAME Basic modules. + + Option ClassModule + Option VBASupport 1 + + Public Property Get Description As String + Description = Err.Description + End Property + Public Property Get Number As Long + Number = Err.Number + End Property + Public Property Get Source As String + Source = Err.Source + End Property + Public Sub Clear + Err.Clear + End Sub + Public Sub Raise( number As Long, Optional Source As String, Optional Description As String) + Err.Raise number, Source, Description + End Sub + +

Example

+ + Function Exc As Object + Exc = New Exception + End Function + + Sub aRoutine + try: + On Local Error GoTo catch: + Exc.Raise(4096, "myLib.myModule.aRoutine", _ + "Any multi-line description for this user-defined exception") + ' your code goes here … + finally: + Exit Sub + catch: + errTitle = "Error "& Exc.Number &" at line "& Erl &" in "& Exc.Source + MsgBox Exc.Description, MB_ICONSTOP, errTitle + Resume finally + End Sub + + The Error statement or an Exception-like class module can be used interchangeably, while the latter adds extra features. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97b22e576 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + GetPathSeparator function + /text/sbasic/shared/GetPathSeparator.xhp + + + + + GetPathSeparator function + +
+ GetPathSeparator Function + Returns the operating system-dependent directory separator used to specify file paths. +
+ + GetPathSeparator() + + String + + + "\" Windows + + + "/" UNIX, including MacOS + + + + + None. + + + + + + Sub ExampleGetPathSeparator + MsgBox GetPathSeparator() + End Sub + +
+ + It is recommended to use: + + + ConvertFromURL function to convert a file URL to a system file name. + + + ConvertToURL function to convert a system file name to a file URL. + + + See also URL Notation + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa9e60dcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + Resume Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/Resume.xhp + + + + + Resume statement + +
+

Resume Statement

+ Resets error information and indicates what to execute next. +
+ + Resume Statement diagram + + Resume [ [0] | label | Next ] + + + 0: Resets error information and re-executes the instruction that caused the error. 0 is optional. + label: Resets error information and resumes execution at the specified label of the current subroutine. + Next: Resets error information and executes the instruction following the one that caused the error. + Error information is built with Erl, Err and Error$ functions. + + Erl: Module line number where error occurs. + Err: Error number. + Error[$]: Error description. + + Using Resume to reset error information prevents the propagation of the handled condition to calling routines. + + +

Examples:

+ Typical error handling routines are: alerting the user, fixing the error, logging error information or re-throwing custom errors that provide explanations with resolution instructions. Use Resume label when requiring such mechanisms. + + Sub Error_Handling + try: On Error GoTo catch + ' routine code goes here + Error 91 ' example error + finally: + ' routine cleanup code goes here + Exit Sub + catch: + Print Erl, Err, Error$ + Resume finally + End Sub ' Error_Handling + + Use Resume Next, for example, when reporting anomalies encountered for an iterating process that must not be interrupted. In which case multiple handling routines may be required. + + Sub Iteration + planets = Array("☿","♀","♁","♂","♃","♄","⛢","♆") + try: + On Error GoTo ReportAndProcessNext + For ndx = -3 To 11 Step 1 + MsgBox planets(ndx) + Next + On Error GoTo 0 ' Stop error catching + finally: + Exit Sub + ReportAndProcessNext: + Print "Error "& Err &" at line "& Erl &" - "& Error$ + Resume Next + End Sub ' Iteration + + Using Resume without parameters to re-execute the faulty instruction can fit certain situations. However that may cause a never ending loop. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa495681f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1037 @@ + + + + + + + Using Calc Functions in Macros + /text/sbasic/shared/calc_functions.xhp + + + + + calling Calc function;macros + setting Calc function;macros + macros;calling Calc function + macros;setting Calc function + createUNOservice function;calling Calc function + API;sheet.addin.Analysis + API;sheet.FunctionAccess + +

Using Calc Functions in Macros

+ In addition to the native BASIC functions, you can call Calc functions in your macros and scripts and set Calc functions in cell formulas. +

Calling Internal Calc functions in Basic

+ Use the CreateUNOService function to access the com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess service. + + The example below creates a function named MyVlook that calls the VLOOKUP Calc function over a data array passed as argument and returns the value found by the function. + + Function MyVlook(Lookup, DataArray As Object, Index As Integer, SortedRangeLookup as Byte) + Dim oService As Object + Set oService = createUnoService("com.sun.star.sheet.FunctionAccess") + ' Always use the function name in English + MyVlook = oService.callFunction("VLOOKUP", Array(Lookup, DataArray, Index, SortedRangeLookup)) + End Function + + The macro below presents an example of how the MyVlook function can be called. It first creates a 5-by-2 data array and then calls the function MyVlook and shows the returned value using MsgBox. + + Sub CallingMyVlook() + ' Creates a 5 by 2 array and fills it with data + Dim myData(1 to 5, 1 to 2) as Variant + myData(1, 1) = 1 : myData(1, 2) = "Strongly disagree" + myData(2, 1) = 3 : myData(2, 2) = "Disagree" + myData(3, 1) = 5 : myData(3, 2) = "Undecided" + myData(4, 1) = 7 : myData(4, 2) = "Agree" + myData(5, 1) = 9 : myData(5, 2) = "Strongly agree" + ' Looks up the data array + Dim result as String + result = MyVlook(4, myData, 2, 1) + ' Shows the message "Disagree" + MsgBox result + End Sub + +

Setting Cell Formulas Containing Internal Calc Functions

+ Use the formula text string to add a formula to a spreadsheet cell. + All Calc functions must be expressed with their English names. + + +Sub AssignFormulaToCell +REM Add a formula to cell A1. Function name must be in English. + oCell = ThisComponent.Sheets.getByIndex(0).getCellRangeByName("A1") + oCell.Formula = "=SUM(B1:B10)" +REM Cell A1 displays the localized function name +End Sub + + +

Calling Add-In Calc Functions in BASIC

+ The Calc Add-In functions are in the UNO services com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis, com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions and com.sun.star.sheet.addin.PricingFunctions. + + +REM Example calling Add-in function SQRTPI +Function MySQRTPI(arg as double) as double + Dim oService as Object + oService = createUNOService("com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis") + MySQRTPI = oService.getSqrtPi(arg) +End Function + + +

Setting Cell Formulas with Add-In Functions

+The Add-In function must be expressed by its UNO service name. + + +Sub AssignAddInFormulaToCell +REM Add an Add-In formula to cell A1. Function name is the UNO service name. + oCell = ThisComponent.Sheets.getByIndex(0).getCellRangeByName("A1") + oCell.Formula = "=com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBin2Dec(B1)" +REM Cell A1 displays the localized function name +End Sub + +
+

UNO Service Names for Analysis Add-In Functions

+The table below presents a list of all Calc Analysis Add-In functions and their respective UNO service names. + + + + Calc Function name + + + UNO service name + + + + + ACCRINT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getAccrint + + + + + ACCRINTM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getAccrintm + + + + + AMORDEGRC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getAmordegrc + + + + + AMORLINC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getAmorlinc + + + + + BESSELI + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBesseli + + + + + BESSELJ + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBesselj + + + + + BESSELK + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBesselk + + + + + BESSELY + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBessely + + + + + BIN2DEC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBin2Dec + + + + + BIN2HEX + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBin2Hex + + + + + BIN2OCT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getBin2Oct + + + + + COMPLEX + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getComplex + + + + + CONVERT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getConvert + + + + + COUPDAYBS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCoupdaybs + + + + + COUPDAYS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCoupdays + + + + + COUPDAYSNC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCoupdaysnc + + + + + COUPNCD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCoupncd + + + + + COUPNUM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCoupnum + + + + + COUPPCD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCouppcd + + + + + CUMIPMT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCumipmt + + + + + CUMPRINC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getCumprinc + + + + + DEC2BIN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDec2Bin + + + + + DEC2HEX + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDec2Hex + + + + + DEC2OCT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDec2Oct + + + + + DELTA + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDelta + + + + + DISC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDisc + + + + + DOLLARDE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDollarde + + + + + DOLLARFR + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDollarfr + + + + + DURATION + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getDuration + + + + + EDATE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getEdate + + + + + EFFECT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getEffect + + + + + EOMONTH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getEomonth + + + + + ERF + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getErf + + + + + ERFC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getErfc + + + + + FACTDOUBLE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getFactdouble + + + + + FVSCHEDULE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getFvschedule + + + + + GCD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getGcd + + + + + GESTEP + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getGestep + + + + + HEX2BIN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getHex2Bin + + + + + HEX2DEC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getHex2Dec + + + + + HEX2OCT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getHex2Oct + + + + + IMABS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImabs + + + + + IMAGINARY + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImaginary + + + + + IMARGUMENT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImargument + + + + + IMCONJUGATE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImconjugate + + + + + IMCOS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImcos + + + + + IMCOSH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImcosh + + + + + IMCOT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImcot + + + + + IMCSC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImcsc + + + + + IMCSCH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImcsch + + + + + IMDIV + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImdiv + + + + + IMEXP + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImexp + + + + + IMLN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImln + + + + + IMLOG10 + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImlog10 + + + + + IMLOG2 + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImlog2 + + + + + IMPOWER + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImpower + + + + + IMPRODUCT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImproduct + + + + + IMREAL + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImreal + + + + + IMSEC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsec + + + + + IMSECH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsech + + + + + IMSIN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsin + + + + + IMSINH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsinh + + + + + IMSQRT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsqrt + + + + + IMSUB + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsub + + + + + IMSUM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImsum + + + + + IMTAN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getImtan + + + + + INTRATE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getIntrate + + + + + ISEVEN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getIseven + + + + + ISODD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getIsodd + + + + + LCM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getLcm + + + + + MDURATION + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getMduration + + + + + MROUND + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getMround + + + + + MULTINOMIAL + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getMultinomial + + + + + NETWORKDAYS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getNetworkdays + + + + + NOMINAL + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getNominal + + + + + OCT2BIN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOct2Bin + + + + + OCT2DEC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOct2Dec + + + + + OCT2HEX + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOct2Hex + + + + + ODDFPRICE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOddfprice + + + + + ODDFYIELD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOddfyield + + + + + ODDLPRICE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOddlprice + + + + + ODDLYIELD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getOddlyield + + + + + PRICE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getPrice + + + + + PRICEDISC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getPricedisc + + + + + PRICEMAT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getPricemat + + + + + QUOTIENT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getQuotient + + + + + RANDBETWEEN + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getRandbetween + + + + + RECEIVED + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getReceived + + + + + SERIESSUM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getSeriessum + + + + + SQRTPI + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getSqrtpi + + + + + TBILLEQ + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getTbilleq + + + + + TBILLPRICE + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getTbillprice + + + + + TBILLYIELD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getTbillyield + + + + + WEEKNUM + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getWeeknum + + + + + WORKDAY + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getWorkday + + + + + XIRR + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getXirr + + + + + XNPV + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getXnpv + + + + + YEARFRAC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getYearfrac + + + + + YIELD + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getYield + + + + + YIELDDISC + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getYielddisc + + + + + YIELDMAT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis.getYieldmat + + +
+
+
+

UNO Service Names for Date Add-In Functions

+The table below presents a list of all Calc Date Add-In functions and their respective UNO service names. + + + + Calc Function name + + + UNO service name + + + + + DAYSINMONTH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getDaysInMonth + + + + + DAYSINYEAR + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getDaysInMonth + + + + + MONTHS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getDiffMonths + + + + + WEEKS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getDiffWeeks + + + + + YEARS + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getDiffYears + + + + + ROT13 + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getRot13 + + + + + WEEKSINYEAR + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.DateFunctions.getWeeksInYear + + +
+
+
+

UNO Service Names for Pricing Add-In Functions

+The table below presents a list of all Calc Pricing Add-In functions and their respective UNO service names. + + + + Calc Function name + + + UNO service name + + + + + OPT_BARRIER + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.PrincingFunctions.getOptBarrier + + + + + OPT_PROB_HIT + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.PrincingFunctions.getOptProbHit + + + + + OPT_PROB_INMONEY + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.PrincingFunctions.getOptProbInMoney + + + + + OPT_TOUCH + + + com.sun.star.sheet.addin.PrincingFunctions.getOptTouch + + +
+
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df14f9ad7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + Option ClassModule + /text/sbasic/shared/classmodule.xhp + + + + + Option ClassModule + + +
+

Option ClassModule Statement

+ Specifies that the module is a class module that contains members, properties, procedures and functions. +
+ + + This statement must be used jointly with Option Compatible statement or Option VBASupport 1, the former is enabling VBA compatibility mode, while the latter is enforcing VBA support on top of compatibility. + + Option ClassModule + + + Option Compatible + Option ClassModule + + ' Optional members go here + + Private Sub Class_Initialize() + ' Optional construction code goes here + End Sub ' Constructor + Private Sub Class_Terminate() + ' Optional destruction code goes here + End Sub ' Destructor + + ' Properties go here. + + ' Procedures & functions go here. + + +
+ + Refer to Identifying the Operating System and Getting Session Information for class module simple examples. + + + Multiple thorough class examples are available from Access2Base shared Basic library. + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53161098a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + BasicCodeStubs + /text/sbasic/shared/code-stubs.xhp + + + + +
+ + Dim aPicker As com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker + +
+
+ + aPicker.getDisplayDirectory() + +
+
+ + Dim intVar as Integer + +
+
+ + Sub Some_Calc_UNO_Types + REM A spreadsheet object + Dim oSheet As com.sun.star.sheet.XSpreadsheet + oSheet = ThisComponent.getSheets().getByIndex(0) + REM A cell object + Dim oCell As com.sun.star.table.XCell + oCell = oSheet.getCellByPosition(0,0) + End Sub + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6652dc52d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + + Collection Object + /text/sbasic/shared/collection.xhp + + + +
+ + Collection Object + + + Collection;Count + +

Collection Object

+ Collections can be used to store items of different types. Each item can be accessed by its index or by an optional key associated with it. +
+ A Collection object has the following methods: + + + Add: inserts a new item into the collection. Optionally a string value can be defined as the key to the item. + + + Count: returns the number of items in the collection. + + + Item: returns the item in the collection by passing its index or key. + + + Remove: removes the specified item from the collection by its index or key. + + + Items in a Collection can be accessed either by their indices (as in a 1-based single-dimensional Array) or by their associated keys. + The ScriptForge Dictionary service extends the Collection object by providing supplemental features as key retrieval and replacement, as well as import/export to Array objects and JSON strings. +

Creating a Collection

+ To create a Collection use the New keyword. The following example creates a Collection object and populates it with three items: + + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add("Some text") + myCollection.Add(100) + myCollection.Add(Array(1, 2, 3, 4)) + MsgBox myCollection.Count ' 3 + + +

Adding Items

+ + Collection;Add + + The Add method can be used to add new items into the Collection object. + + + oCollection.Add(item, [key], [before|after]) + + + item: the item to be added to the Collection. May be of any type. + key: string value used as the unique key used to identify this value. + before, after: optional keyword argument that indicates where the new item will be placed in the Collection. Only one of the arguments before or after can be specified to determine the index or key before which (or after which) the new item is to be placed. + + The example below adds two elements into a Collection. The first has a key associated with it, whereas the second does not. + + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add(100, "first") + myCollection.Add(101) + + The Add method also supports keyword arguments: + + myCollection.Add(item := 100, key := "first") + + Keys must be unique in a Collection object. Comparison between keys is case-insensitive. Adding duplicated keys will result in a runtime error. + The example below illustrates how to use the Before and After keyword arguments to determine the position of the item that is being added. + + Dim myCollection as Variant + myCollection = New Collection + myCollection.Add(item := 101, key := "first") + myCollection.Add(item := 103, key := "third") + myCollection.Add(item := 105, key := "fifth") + MsgBox myCollection.Item(2) ' 103 + myCollection.Add(item := 102, key := "second", before := "third") + MsgBox myCollection.Item(2) ' 102 + myCollection.Add(item := 104, key := "fourth", after := 3) + MsgBox myCollection.Item(4) ' 104 + + Items in a Collection object are assigned an integer index value that starts at 1 and corresponds to the order in which they were added. + +

Accessing Items

+ + Collection;Item + + Use the Item method to access a given item by its index or key. + + oCollection.Item(index) + + + oCollection.Item(key) + + + index: an integer value specifying the index of the item to be returned. + key: a string value specifying the key of the item to be returned. + + + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add(item := 101, key := "A") + myCollection.Add(item := 102, key := "B") + myCollection.Add(item := 103, key := "C") + MsgBox myCollection.Item("A") ' 101 + MsgBox myCollection.Item(3) ' 103 + + +

Removing Items

+ + Collection;Remove + + Use the Remove method to delete items from a Collection object. + + Items can be removed either by their indices or key values. + + oCollection.Remove(index) + + + oCollection.Remove(key) + + + index: an integer value specifying the index of the item to be removed. + key: a string value specifying the key of the item to be removed. + + + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add(item := 101, key := "first") + myCollection.Add(item := 102, key := "second") + myCollection.Add(item := 103, key := "third") + MsgBox myCollection.Count ' 3 + ' Removes the first value + myCollection.Remove(1) + ' Removes the value whose key is "third" + myCollection.Remove("third") + MsgBox myCollection.Count ' 1 + + +

Iterating Over all Items

+ It is possible to use a For Each ... Next statement to iterate over all items in a Collection. + + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add(item := 101, key := "A") + myCollection.Add(item := 102, key := "B") + myCollection.Add(item := 103, key := "C") + For Each value In myCollection + MsgBox value + Next value + + +

Clearing a Collection

+ To remove all items from a Collection object call the Remove method for each item, as illustrated in the example below: + + ' Create a sample Collection with two entries + Dim myCollection as New Collection + myCollection.Add(item := 10, key := "A") + myCollection.Add(item := 11, key := "B") + MsgBox myCollection.Count ' 2 + ' Removes all items in the collection + For i = myCollection.Count To 1 Step -1 + myCollection.Remove(i) + Next i + MsgBox myCollection.Count ' 0 + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f772f92c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + CompatibilityMode function + /text/sbasic/shared/compatibilitymode.xhp + + + + + CompatibilityMode + VBA compatibility mode + +
+

CompatibilityMode() Function

+ CompatibilityMode() function controls or queries runtime mode. It affects all code executed after setting or resetting the runtime mode. +
+ Use this feature with caution, limit it to document conversion for example. + + + + CompatibilityMode(Optional Enable As Boolean) As Boolean + + + + CompatibilityMode function always returns the mode that is active after its execution. That is if called with argument, it returns the new mode, if called without argument, it returns active mode without modifying it. + + + Enable: Sets or unsets new compatibility mode when the argument is present. + CompatibilityMode function relates to Option VBASupport 1, in which case it always returns True. It is unrelated to Option Compatible compiler directive. + + This function may affect or help in the following situations: + + Scoping of variables. + Running RmDir command in VBA mode. In VBA only empty directories are removed by RmDir while %PRODUCTNAME Basic removes a directory recursively. + Changing behavior of Basic Dir command. The directory flag (16) for the Dir command means that only directories are returned in %PRODUCTNAME Basic, while in VBA normal files and directories are returned. + + Color components calculation with the Red and Blue functions which are interchanged (The Green function is not affected). + + + + + Given a NOT empty directory at file:///home/me/Test + + Sub RemoveDir + MsgBox CompatibilityMode() ' False + + CompatibilityMode( True ) + RmDir( "file:///home/me/Test" ) + CompatibilityMode False + + MsgBox CompatibilityMode ' False + End Sub + + With CompatibilityMode( True ) the program raises an error, otherwise the Test directory and all its content is deleted. + + Modifying Dir behavior + + Sub VBADirCommand + CompatibilityMode( Enable := True ) ' Shows also normal files + Entry$ = Dir( "file:///home/me/Tmp/*.*", 16 ) + Total$ = "" + While Entry$ <> "" + Total$ = Total$ + Entry$ + Chr$(13) + Entry$ = Dir + Wend + MsgBox Total$ + CompatibilityMode Enable := False ' Shows only directories + End Sub + + +
+ + + + Variables scope modification in Using Procedures and Functions with CompatibilityMode() function. + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..271bd2511 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + Option Compatible + /text/sbasic/shared/compatible.xhp + + + + + Option Compatible + + +
+

Option Compatible Statement

+ Option Compatible extends %PRODUCTNAME Basic compiler and runtime, allowing supplemental language constructs to Basic. +
+ + This option may affect or assist in the following situations: + + Allow special characters as identifiers. all characters that are defined as + letter in the Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) character set, are accepted + as part of identifiers. + Create VBA constants including non-printable characters. + Allow the New operator to be optional in Dim statements. + Allow default values for optional parameters in procedures. + Use named arguments when multiple optional parameters exist. + Preload of %PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries + + Option Compatible is required when coding class modules. + + Option Compatible + +

Special characters as identifiers

+ + Option Compatible + ' With this option the code works, otherwise it causes a compiling error + Sub Main + ä = 10 + print ä + End Sub + + Statement Option VBAsupport 1 implies Option Compatible statement automatically. +
+ + + + + + + Variables scope modification in Using Procedures and Functions with CompatibilityMode() function. + Refer to Identifying the Operating System and Getting Session Information for class module examples, or Access2Base shared Basic library for other class examples making use of Option Compatible compiler mode. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..974db923a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + Syntax Diagrams + /text/sbasic/shared/conventions.xhp + + + + + Syntax diagrams; How to read + Statements syntax;How to read + Typographical conventions + +

How to Read Syntax Diagrams and Statements

+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic statements use syntax diagrams and textual conventions that follow these typographical rules: + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic keywords or functions use proper casing: Call, DimArray, InputBox, Property. + Lowercase characters indicate information to supply: end, expression, start, variable. + + The syntax of a %PRODUCTNAME Basic one line statement is illustrated herewith: + +

Diagram example

+ + Basic statement diagrams start and end with double vertical bars, + Loops indicate a possible repetition, an optional separator may be present, + Rectangles denote subsequent diagram fragments, + Diagram fragments extremities exhibit single vertical bars. + + syntax of a statement + A set of %PRODUCTNAME Basic statements - with optional labels - is using a colon : sign to separate them, it can be terminated with an optional comment. REM or an apostrophe sign introduce a comment. + diagram fragment + +

Textual example

+
+ + [opt1|opt2|opt3] Items inside brackets are optional, alternatives are indicated with a vertical bar, + case[[sep]…] An ellipsis indicates a possible repetition, an optional separator may be specified, + {choice1|choice2} Items inside curly braces are compulsory, alternatives are indicated with a vertical bar. + +
+ + [ [label:] statement [: …] ] [{REM|'} text] + + A set of %PRODUCTNAME Basic statements - with optional labels - is using a colon : sign to separate them, it can be terminated with an optional comment. REM or an apostrophe sign introduce a comment. + + + + Sub Main
 + GoTo there ' skip first statement + here: Print 1, : there: Print 2 REM explanatory text here + End Sub + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5781585ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + Enum Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/enum.xhp + + + + + Enum statement + constant groups + enumerations + +
+

Enum Statement [VBA]

+ Define enumerations or non UNO constant groups. An enumeration is a value list that facilitates programming and eases code logic review. +
+ + + + Enum syntax + + + Enum list_name
 + ' Object Statement block + End Enum ' list_name + +

Parameters:

+ Within a given enumeration, fit together values that logically relate to one another. + + + Option VBASupport 1
 + Private Enum _WindowManager + W1ND0WS = 1 ' Windows + OS2PM = 2 ' OS/2 Presentation Manager + MACINTOSH = 3 ' Macintosh + MOTIF = 4 ' Motif Window Manager / Unix-like + OPENLOOK = 5 ' Open Look / Unix-like + End Enum + Public Function WindowManager() As Object + WindowManager = _WindowManager + End Function ' <library>.<module>.WindowManager.XXX + + Enumerated values are rendered to Long datatype. Basic functions are public accessors to enumerations. Enumeration names and value names must be unique within a library and across modules. + +

Usage:

+ Display WindowManager grouped constant values: + + Dim winMgr As Object : winMgr = <library>.<module>.WindowManager + With winMgr + Print .MACINTOSH, .MOTIF, .OPENLOOK, .OS2PM, .W1ND0WS + End With + + Enumerations can be extended to other data types using Type statement definitions. Calling Python Scripts from Basic illustrates that mechanism. +
+ Const statement, constants + Option VBASupport statement + With statement +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9da8abd51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + Basic syntax diagrams fragments + /text/sbasic/shared/fragments.xhp + + + +
+

Syntax fragments

+ %PRODUCTNAME Basic syntax fragments. +
+ +
+

argument fragment

+ argument fragment + + {[Optional [ByRef|ByVal]]|ParamArray} argument {{As typename|char}[ = expression]|[()]As Variant} + +

Parameters

+ Optional: The argument is not mandatory. + ByRef: The argument is passed by reference. ByRef is the default. + ByVal: The argument is passed by value. Its value can be modified by the called routine. + char: Type declaration character. + typename: Primitive data type name. Library or module defined types can also be specified. + = expression: Specify a default value for the argument, matching its declared type. Optional is necessary for each argument specifying a default value. + ParamArray: Use ParamArray when the number of parameters is undetermined. A typical scenario is that of a Calc user-defined function. Using ParamArray should be limited to the last argument of a routine. + UsingParamArray or = expression require Option Compatible to be placed before the executable program code in a module. + When using Option VBASupport 1, Optional arguments with no default value (= expression) are initialized according to their data type, except if Variant. +
+ +
+

array fragment

+ array fragment + + ( [[start To] end], .. ) + +

Parameters

+ start: Lower bound of a dimension. + end: Upper bound of a dimension. + Multiple dimensions for an array are denoted using comma (,) sign. +
+ +
+

typename fragment

+ primitive data types fragment + + {Boolean|Byte|Currency|Date|Double|Integer|Long|Object|Single|String|Variant} + +
+ +
+

char fragment

+ type declaration characters + + { % | & | ! | # | $ | @ } + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0724cfe66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Is Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/is_keyword.xhp + + + +
+ + Is Operator + +

Is Operator

+ Tests if two Basic variables refer to the same object instance. +
+ + + result = oObj1 Is oObj2 + + If oObj1 and oObj2 are references to the same object instance, the result will be True. + + The example below first defines a new type Student. Calling TestObjects creates the object oStudent1 as a new object of this type. + The assignment oStudent2 = oStudent1 actually copies the reference to the same object. Hence the result of applying the Is operator is True. + + Type Student + FirstName as String + Program as String + End Type + + Sub TestObjects + Dim oStudent1 as new Student + Dim oStudent2 as Variant + oStudent2 = oStudent1 + MsgBox Student1 Is Student2 ' True + End Sub + + The example below returns False because oStudent1 and oStudent2 are references to two different object instances, each created with the New operator. + + Sub TestObjects_v2 + Dim oStudent1 as new Student + Dim oStudent2 as new Student + MsgBox oStudent1 Is oStudent2 ' False + End Sub + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5dfef6e6c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts in the Basic IDE +/text/sbasic/shared/keys.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+keyboard;in IDE +shortcut keys;Basic IDE +IDE;keyboard shortcuts + +Keyboard Shortcuts in the Basic IDE +
+In the Basic IDE you can use the following keyboard shortcuts: + + + +Action + + +Keyboard shortcut + + + + +Run code starting from the first line, or from the current breakpoint, if the program stopped there before. + + +F5 + + + + +Stop + + +Shift+F5 + + + + +Add watch for the variable at the cursor. + + +F7 + + + + +Single step through each statement, starting at the first line or at that statement where the program execution stopped before. + + +F8 + + + + +Single step as with F8, but a function call is considered to be only one statement. + + +Shift+F8 + + + + +Set or remove a breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection. + + +F9 + + + + +Enable/disable the breakpoint at the current line or all breakpoints in the current selection. + + +Shift+F9 + + +
+ +A running macro can be aborted with Shift+CommandCtrl+Q, also from outside of the Basic IDE. If you are inside the Basic IDE and the macro halts at a breakpoint, Shift+CommandCtrl+Q stops execution of the macro, but you can recognize this only after the next F5, F8, or Shift+F8. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab420627d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + +Macro Toolbar +/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ toolbars; Basic IDEmacro toolbarMacro Toolbar + The Macro Toolbar contains commands to create, edit, and run macros. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..569773563 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + $[officename] Basic Help + /text/sbasic/shared/main0601.xhp + + + + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Help

+ +
+%PRODUCTNAME provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that allows controlling the $[officename] components with different programming languages by using the $[officename] Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information about the $[officename] API and the Software Development Kit, visit https://api.libreoffice.org +This help section explains the most common functions of %PRODUCTNAME Basic. For more in-depth information please refer to the OpenOffice.org BASIC Programming Guide on the Wiki. +
+ +Working with %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + + + + + + + + + +Working with VBA Macros + + + +

Working with Macros in Python

+ + + + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME internal Basic macro libraries +%PRODUCTNAME installs a set of Basic macro libraries that can be accessed from your Basic macros. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6df340a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + New Operator + /text/sbasic/shared/new_keyword.xhp + + + +
+ + New Operator + +

New Operator

+ Use the New operator to instantiate objects of user-defined types, as well as Uno services, structs and enumerations. +
+ + + Dim oObj as New ObjectType + + + oObj = New ObjectType + + The New operator can be used either during variable declaration or in an assignment operation. + + The following example uses the New operator to create an instance of the PropertyValue Uno struct. + + ' Instantiating the object during variable declaration + Dim oProp1 as New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue + oProp1.Name = "Some name" + oProp1.Value = 100 + ' The same can be accomplished with an assignment + Dim oProp2 as Object + oProp2 = New com.sun.star.beans.PropertyValue + oProp2.Name = "Other name" + oProp2.Value = 200 + + + The example below creates a new type Student and instantiates an object of this type: + + Type Student + FirstName as String + Program as String + End Type + + Sub TestObjects + Dim oStudent1 as New Student + oStudent1.FirstName = "John" + oStudent2.Program = "Computer Science" + End Sub + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..617f0d806 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Partition Function + /text/sbasic/shared/partition.xhp + + + +
+ + Partition Function + +

Partition Function [VBA]

+ Returns a string indicating where a number occurs within a calculated series of ranges. +
+ + + Partition( Number, Start, End, Interval) + + String + + + Number: Required. The number to determine the partition. + Start: Required. An integer number defining the lower value of the range of numbers. + End: Required. An integer number defining the highest value of the range. + Interval: Required. An integer number that specifies the size of the partitions within the range of numbers (between Start and End). + + + + Option VBASupport 1 + Option Explicit + Sub Test_Partition + Dim retStr As String + retStr = Partition(20, 0, 98, 5) + print "20:24 the number 20 occurs in the range: " & retStr + retStr = Partition(20, 0, 99, 1) + print " 20: 20 the number 20 occurs in the range: " & retStr + retStr = Partition(120, 0, 99, 5) + print "100: the number 120 occurs in the range: " & retStr + retStr = Partition(-5, 0, 99, 5) + print " : -1 the number -5 occurs in the range: " & retStr + retStr = Partition(2, 0, 5, 2) + print " 2: 3 the number 2 occurs in the range: " & retStr + End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a72e417e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + Property Statement + /text/sbasic/shared/property.xhp + + + + + Property statement + + +

Property Statement

+ A property, also called field or attribute, characterizes a given object or piece of information. Properties can be used to control access to data. It is common use to include instructions at setting or reading time of properties. Code can vary from simple assignment to complex context dependent routines. Using Get, Let or Set accessors enforces properties' consistency when necessary. + This statement requires Option Compatible to be placed before the executable program code in a module. + + + + Property Get Statement diagram + + + [Private | Public] Property Get name[char | As typename] + End Property + + + + Property Set Statement diagram + + + [Private | Public] Property [Let | Set] name[char] [([Optional [ByRef | ByVal]]value[char | As typename])] [As typename] + End Property + + + + name: The property name. + + argument: Value to be passed to the Property setter routine. + Property setters often use a single argument. Multiple arguments are equally accepted. + + + + + +

Examples

+ + Option Compatible + Sub Main + ProductName = "Office" + Print ProductName ' displays "%PRODUCTNAME" + End Sub + + Private _office As String + Property Get ProductName As String + ProductName = _office + End Property + Property Let ProductName(value As String) + _office = "Libre"& value + End Property + + In the absence of Property Let or Property Set, Property Get helps define protected information, which can not be accidently altered by a foreign module: + + Option Compatible + Public Property Get PathDelimiter As String ' Read-only variable + Static this As String + If this = "" Then : Select Case GetGuiType() + Case 1 : this = ";" ' Windows + Case 4 : this = ":" ' Linux or macOS + Case Else : Error 423 ' Property or method not defined: PathDelimiter + End Select : End If + PathDelimiter = this + End Property ' read-only PathDelimiter + + Sub Main + PathDelimiter = "a sentence" ' does nothing + End Sub + + Use Let or Set when handling UNO services or class objects: + + Option Compatible + Sub Main + 'Set anObject = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.frame.Desktop" ) + anObject = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.frame.Desktop" ) + Print anObject.SupportedServiceNames(0) ' displays "com.sun.star.frame.Frame" + End Sub + + Property Get anObject As Object + Set anObject = _obj + End Property + + Private _obj As Object + + 'Property Set anObject(value As Object) + 'Set _obj = value.CurrentFrame + 'End Property + Property Let anObject(value As Object) + Set _obj = value.CurrentFrame + End Property + +
+ Subroutines basics + + + + End, Exit statements + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..091a2f082 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Replace Function + /text/sbasic/shared/replace.xhp + + + +
+ + Replace function + +

Replace Function

+ Replaces some string by another. +
+ + + + Replace (Expression As String, Find As String, Replace As String [, Start = 1 [, Count = -1 [, Compare = True]]]) As String + + + + String + + + Expression: Any string expression that you want to modify. + Find: Any string expression that shall be searched for. + Replace: Any string expression that shall replace the found search string. + Start: Optional numeric expression that indicates the character position where the search starts and also the start of the substring to be returned. + Count: Optional maximum number of times the replace shall be performed. When set to -1, all possible replacements are performed. + Compare: Optional boolean expression that defines the type of comparison. The value of this parameter can be True or False. The default value of True specifies a text comparison that is not case-sensitive. The value of False specifies a binary comparison that is case-sensitive. You can as well use 0 instead of False or 1 instead of True. + + + + + + + MsgBox Replace ("aBbcnnbnn", "b", "$", 1, 1, False) 'returns "aB$cnnbnn" + REM meaning: "b" should be replaced, but + REM * only when lowercase (compare=False), hence second occurrence of "b" + REM * only first (respecting case) occurrence (count=1) + MsgBox Replace ("ABCDEFGHI", "E", "*", 4) + REM returns D*FGHI because the search starts at position 4, which is also the start of the returned string. + MsgBox Replace("aBbcnnbnn", "b", "$£", compare:=False) 'returns "aB$£cnn$£nn" + REM Replace all (count = -1) "b" with "$£" respecting casing (compare=False) starting from first letter (start=1) + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92e88d44e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Exclusive VBA functions + /text/sbasic/shared/special_vba_func.xhp + + + + +
+ +VBA Functions;Introduction + + +

Exclusive VBA Functions and Statements

+%PRODUCTNAME Basic adds this set of functions when VBA support is enabled. +
+These exclusive VBA functions are enabled when the statement Option VBASupport 1 is placed before the first macro of a %PRODUCTNAME Basic module. + +
+ +VBA Statements + +

VBA Statements

+ Option Compatible is not a VBA statement, it extends LibreOffice Basic constructs. + + + +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;Text Functions + +

Text functions

+ + + + + +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;Financial Functions + +

Financial functions

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;Date and Time Functions + +

Date and time functions

+ + + +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;I/O Functions + + +

I/O Functions

+ +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;Mathematical Functions +VBA Functions;formatting numbers +VBA Functions;partitioning numbers + +

Mathematical Functions

+ + + +
+ +
+ +VBA Functions;Object Properties and Methods + +

Object Properties and Methods

+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fec1efd76 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + StarDesktop object + /text/sbasic/shared/stardesktop.xhp + + + + +
+ + StarDesktop + API; Desktop + + +

StarDesktop object

+ The StarDesktop object represents %PRODUCTNAME application. Some routines or user interface objects such as current window can be used via StarDesktop. +
+

Example:

+ + Dim docURL As String + Dim doc As Object, docProperties() + docURL = ConvertToURL("C:\My Documents\example.odt") + Rem com.sun.star.frame.Desktop + doc = StarDesktop.LoadComponentFromURL(docURL, "_blank", 0, docProperties) + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e00a005e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + StrConv Function [VBA] + /text/sbasic/shared/strconv.xhp + + + + +StrConv function + +
+

StrConv Function

+ Convert a string as specified by a conversion type. +
+ + +StrConv(Text, Conversion, [ LCID ]) + +String + +Text: Any valid string expression. +Conversion: The type of conversion to perform, as defined in the table below. +
+ + + + Conversion + + + Value + + + Description + + + + + vbUpperCase + + + 1 + + + Converts Text characters to uppercase. + + + + + vbLowerCase + + + 2 + + + Converts Text characters lowercase. + + + + + vbProperCase + + + 3 + + + Converts the first letter of every word in Text to uppercase. + + + + + vbWide + + + 4 + + + Converts narrow (half-width) characters in Text to wide (full-width) characters. + + + + + vbNarrow + + + 8 + + + Converts wide (full-width) characters in Text to narrow (half-width) characters. + + + + + vbKatakana + + + 16 + + + Converts Hiragana characters in Text to Katakana characters. + + + + + vbHiragana + + + 32 + + + Converts Katakana characters in Text to Hiragana characters. + + + + + vbUnicode + + + 64 + + + Converts Text characters to Unicode characters using the default code page of the system. + + + + + vbFromUnicode + + + 128 + + + Converts Text characters from Unicode to the default code page of the system. + + +
+
+LCID Optional. The Locale ID in decimal number. If this parameter is omitted, it assumes the system Locale ID. Refer to the file msi-encodinglist.txt for the available LCID values. + + +Option VBASupport 1 +Option Explicit +Sub Test_StrConv + Print StrConv("abc EFG hij", vbUpperCase) '= "ABC EFG HIJ" + Print StrConv("abc EFG hij", vbLowerCase) ' = "abc efg hij" + Print StrConv("abc EFG hij", vbProperCase) ' = "Abc Efg Hij" + + REM Converts narrow (single-byte) characters in string to wide + Print StrConv("ABCDEVB¥ì¥¹¥­¥å©", vbWide) ' = "ＡＢＣＤＥＶＢ￥ì￥¹￥­￥å©" + + REM Converts wide (double-byte) characters in string to narrow (single-byte) characters + Print StrConv("ＡＢＣＤ＠＄％２３＇？ＥＧ", vbNarrow) ' = "ABCD@$%23'?EG" + + REM Converts Hiragana characters in string to Katakana characters + Print StrConv("かたかな", vbKatakana) ' = "カタカナ" + + REM Converts Katakana characters in string to Hiragana characters + Print StrConv("カタカナ", vbHiragana) '= "かたかな" + + REM Assumes CP-1252 encoding associated with en-US locale used in unit tests. + Dim x() As Byte + x = StrConv("ÉϺ£ÊÐABC", vbFromUnicode) + Print UBound(x) ' 8 characters + Print x(2) ' = 186 + Print StrConv(x, vbUnicode)' = "ÉϺ£ÊÐABC" +End Sub + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f4a1c61c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + ThisDatabaseDocument object + /text/sbasic/shared/thisdbdoc.xhp + + + + +
+ + ThisDatabaseDocument + API; Database document + +

ThisDatabaseDocument object

+ ThisDatabaseDocument addresses the active Base document whose properties can be read and set, and whose methods can be called. + ThisDatabaseDocument returns an object of type com.sun.star.sdb.XOfficeDatabaseDocument. +
+ + + + ThisDatabaseDocument + + When the active window does not relate to a Base document, ThisDatabaseDocument returns Nothing. + When the active window is the Basic IDE, ThisDatabaseDocument object returns the database owning the current script. + + + Opening current database "formName" and maximizing it can be achieved as shown: + + Dim form As Object + ThisDatabaseDocument.CurrentController.connect("","") + form = ThisDatabaseDocument.FormDocuments.getByName("formName").open ) + form.currentController.frame.ContainerWindow.IsMaximized = True + + +
+ ThisComponent object + com.sun.star.sdb.OfficeDatabaseDocument API service + com.sun.star.document.OfficeDocument API service +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1916fa279 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + UNO Objects + /text/sbasic/shared/uno_objects.xhp + + + + + programming;UNO objects + UNO objects + UNO functions + +
+

UNO Objects, Functions and Services

+ Functions, objects and services of Unified Network Objects (UNO). +
+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Global Objects

+ + + + + +

Active document Objects

+ The following objects can be used from the active document. +

BasicLibraries Object

+

DialogLibraries Object

+ + + +

UNO Methods

+ Use the following methods to manage or query Unified Network Objects (UNO). + + + + + + + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME provides an Application Programming Interface (API) that allows controlling the $[officename] components with different programming languages by using the $[officename] Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information about the $[officename] API and the Software Development Kit, visit https://api.libreoffice.org + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e07bc4817 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Support for VBA Macros + /text/sbasic/shared/vbasupport.xhp + + + + + + +
+Working with VBA Macros +Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is an implementation of Microsoft's Visual Basic which is built into all Microsoft Office applications. +
+Support for VBA is not complete, but it covers a large portion of the common usage patterns. Most macros use a manageable subset of objects in the Excel API (such as the Range, Worksheet, Workbook, etc.) and the support include those objects, and the most commonly used method/properties of those objects. + +Loading Microsoft Office documents with executable VBA macros +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties and mark the Executable code checkbox. Then load or open your document. + + +Running VBA Macros +Run VBA macros in the same way as %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. +Since support for VBA is not complete, you may have to edit the VBA code and complete the missing support with %PRODUCTNAME Basic objects, statements and functions. + +Editing VBA Macros +VBA macros can be edited in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE. + +
+VBA Properties +%PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..640164de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + To access this function... + /text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp + + + +To access this function... +More explanations on top of this page. +In the %PRODUCTNAME Calc functions, parameters marked as "optional" can be left out only when no parameter follows. For example, in a function with four parameters, where the last two parameters are marked as "optional", you can leave out parameter 4 or parameters 3 and 4, but you cannot leave out parameter 3 alone.UFI: see #i43239# and #i3879# +Codes greater than 127 may depend on your system's character mapping (for example iso-8859-1, iso-8859-2, Windows-1252, Windows-1250), and hence may not be portable. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60b867523 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000402.xhp + + + +Edit Menu +Choose Insert - Headers and Footers. +Choose Insert - Headers and Footers - Header and Footer tabs. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Down. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Right. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Up. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Left. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Sheets. +Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Series. + +
+Choose Sheet - Clear Cells. +Backspace +
+Choose Sheet - Delete Cells. + +
+Choose Sheet - Delete Sheet. +Open context menu for a sheet tab. +
+ +
+Choose Sheet - Move or Copy Sheet. +Open context menu for a sheet tab. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Cell Protection to activate sheet protection with current cell protection settings. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66c4ce3c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + View Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000403.xhp + + + +View Menu +Choose View - Column & Row Headers. +Choose View - Value Highlighting. +Choose View - Formula Bar or View - Toolbars - Formula Bar. +Choose View - Page Break. +Choose View - Function List. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9873d31c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000404.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Insert Menu

+
+Choose Sheet - Insert Cells. +Choose View - Toolbars and select the Insert Cells toolbar: +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Insert Cells + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Insert Cells Down + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Insert Cells Right + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Insert Rows + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Insert Columns + + +
+ +
+Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet. +Choose Sheet - Insert Sheet from File. +
+Choose Insert - Function. +CommandCtrl+F2 + On the Formula bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Function Wizard + + +
+ +
+
+Insert - Function - Category Database + +Insert - Function - Category Date & Time + +Insert - Function - Category Financial + +Insert - Function - Category Information + +Insert - Function - Category Logical + +Insert - Function - Category Mathematical + +Insert - Function - Category Array + +Insert - Function - Category Statistical + +Insert - Function - Category Text + +Insert - Function - Category Spreadsheet + +Insert - Function - Category Add-In + +Insert - Function - Category Add-In + +Choose Insert - Named Range or Expression. +Choose Sheet - External Links. +
+Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. +CommandCtrl+F3 +
+Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Insert. +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create. +Choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Labels. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13ee92fbe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000405.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Format Menu

+
+ Choose Format - Cells. + Press CommandCtrl+1. +
+Choose Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab. +Choose Format - Rows. +Choose Format - Rows - Optimal Height. +
+Choose Format - Rows - Hide. +Choose Format - Columns - Hide. +Choose Sheet - Hide Sheet. +
+
+Choose Format - Rows - Show. +Choose Format - Columns - Show. +
+Choose Format - Columns. +
+Choose Format - Columns - Optimal Width. +Double-click right column separator in column headers. +
+Choose Sheet. +Choose Sheet - Rename Sheet. +Choose Sheet - Show Sheet. +Choose Format - Page. +Choose Format - Page - Sheet tab. +Choose Format - Print Ranges. +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear. +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. +
+Choose Format - AutoFormat Styles. + On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +AutoFormat Styles Icon + + +AutoFormat + + +
+
+
+Choose Format - Conditional. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64239b361 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000406.xhp + + + +

Tools Menu

+Choose Tools - Detective. + +
+Choose Tools - Detective - Trace Precedents. +Shift+F9 +
+Menu Tools - Language - Hyphenation. +Choose Tools - Detective - Remove Precedents. + +
+Choose Tools - Detective - Trace Dependents. +Shift+F5 +
+Choose Tools - Detective - Remove Dependents. +Choose Tools - Detective - Remove All Traces. +Choose Tools - Detective - Trace Error. +Choose Tools - Detective - Fill Mode. +Choose Tools - Detective - Mark Invalid Data. +Choose Tools - Detective - Refresh Traces. +Choose Tools - Detective - AutoRefresh. +Choose Tools - Goal Seek. +Choose Tools - Solver. +Choose Tools - Solver, click Options button. +Choose Tools - Scenarios. + +Choose Tools - Forms. + +Choose Tools - Share Spreadsheet + +Choose Tools - Protect Sheet. +Choose Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure. + +
+Choose Data - Calculate - Recalculate. +Press F9 +
+ +
+Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula. +
+ +
+ Choose Data - Calculate - Recalculate hard. + Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 +
+ +
+ Select a formula cell or a formula cell range and choose Data - Calculate - Formula to values +
+ +Choose Data - Calculate - AutoCalculate. +Choose Tools - AutoInput. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6ba07932 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + Window Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000407.xhp + + + +

Window Menu

+Choose View - Split Window. +Choose View - Freeze Rows and Columns. +Choose View - Freeze Cells - Freeze First Column +Choose View - Freeze Cells - Freeze First Row + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50de754f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + Data Menu + /text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp + + + +

Data Menu

+ Choose Data - Text to Columns. + Choose Data - Define Range. + Choose Data - Select Range. + Choose Data - Sort.... + Choose Data - Sort Ascending + Choose Data - Sort Descending +
+ Choose Data - Sort - Sort Criteria tab. + On Standard bar, click +
+
+ + + + + Icon Sort Ascending + + + + Sort Ascending + + +
+
+
+ + + + + Icon Sort Descending + + + + Sort Descending + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Data - Sort - Options tab. + Choose Data - More Filters. +
+ Choose Data - AutoFilter. + On Tools bar or Table Data bar, click +
+ + + + + Icon + + + AutoFilter + + +
+
+
+ Choose Data - More Filters - Advanced Filter... . +
+ Choose Data - More Filters - Standard Filter... - Options label. + Choose Data - More Filters - Advanced Filter... - Options label. +
+
+ Choose Data - More Filters - Reset Filter. + On Table Data bar, click Reset Filter/Sort. + + + + + Icon + + + Reset Filter/Sort + + +
+
+ Choose Data - More Filter - Hide AutoFilter. + Choose Data - Subtotals. + Choose Data - Subtotals - 1st, 2nd, 3rd Group tabs. + Choose Data - Subtotals - Options tab. + Choose Data - Validity. + Menu Data - Validity - Criteria tab. + Choose Data - Validity - Input Help tab. + Choose Data - Validity - Error Alert tab. + Choose Data - Multiple Operations. + Choose Data - Consolidate. + Choose Data - Group and Outline. + Choose Data - Group and Outline - Hide Details. + Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. +
+ Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group. + F12 + On Tools bar, click +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Group + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup. + CommandCtrl+F12 + On Tools bar, click +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Ungroup + + +
+
+
+ Choose Data - Group and Outline - AutoOutline. + Choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove Outline. + Choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details (for some pivot tables). + Choose Data - Pivot Table. + Choose Insert - Pivot Table. + Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename]. +
+ Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Current selection. + Choose Insert - Pivot Table, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename], click OK to see Select Data Source dialog. +
+ Choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. + Choose Data - Pivot Table - Delete. + Choose Data - Refresh Range. + Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75383ea1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Available since release + /text/scalc/00/avail_release.xhp + + + + +
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 3.3. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 3.4. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 3.5. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 3.6. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 4.0. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 4.1. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 4.2. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 4.3. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 4.4. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 5.0. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 5.1. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 5.2. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 5.3. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 5.4. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 6.0. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 6.1. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 6.2. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 6.3. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 6.4. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.0. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.1. +
+
+ This function is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.2. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..875b1b2c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Sheet Menu + /text/scalc/00/sheet_menu.xhp + + + +

Sheet Menu

+Choose Sheet - Insert Rows - Rows Above. +Choose Sheet - Insert Rows - Rows Below. +Choose Sheet - Insert Columns - Columns Before. +Choose Sheet - Insert Columns - Columns After. +Choose Sheet - Insert Page Break. +Choose Sheet - Insert Page Break - Row Break. +Choose Sheet - Insert Page Break - Column Break. +Choose Sheet - Delete Page Break. +Choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Row Break. +Choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Column Break. + +Choose Sheet - Cell Comments - Edit Comment +Choose Sheet - Cell Comments - Hide Comment +Choose Sheet - Cell Comments - Show Comment +Choose Sheet - Cell Comments - Delete Comment +Choose Sheet - Cell Comments - Delete All Comments + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..058adc0fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Print Preview +/text/scalc/01/01120000.xhp + + + +
+ +Print Preview +Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview. +
+
+ +
+Use the icons on the Print Preview Bar to scroll through the pages of the document or to print the document. +You can also press CommandCtrl+Page Up and CommandCtrl+Page Down keys to scroll through the pages. +You cannot edit your document while you are in the print preview. + +To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. +
+Page View Object Bar +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f566781ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + +Navigator +/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ +Choose View - Navigator to display the Navigator. + +

Column

+Enter the column letter. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified column in the same row. + +

Row

+Enter a row number. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified row in the same column. + +

Data Range

+Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor. + + + + +Icon + + + +Data Range + + +
+ + +

Start

+Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. + + + + +Icon Start + + + +Start + + +
+ + +

End

+Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. + + + + +Icon End + + +End + + +
+ +

Toggle

+Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed. Click the icon again to restore all elements for viewing. + + + + +Icon Toggle + + +Toggle + + +
+ + +

Scenarios

+Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario. The result is shown in the sheet. For more information, choose Tools - Scenarios. + + + + +Icon Scenarios + + +Scenarios + + +
+ +If the Navigator displays scenarios, you can access the following commands when you right-click a scenario entry: + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected scenario. + +

Properties

+Opens the Edit scenario dialog, where you can edit the scenario properties. + +

Drag Mode

+Opens a submenu for selecting the drag mode. You decide which action is performed when dragging and dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created. + + + + +Icon Drag Mode + + +Drag Mode + + +
+ + +

Insert as Hyperlink

+Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. You can later click the created hyperlink to set the cursor and the view to the respective object. +If you insert a hyperlink that links to an open document, you need to save the document before you can use the hyperlink. + +

Insert as Link

+Creates a link when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. + +

Insert as Copy

+Generates a copy when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. + +

Objects

+Displays all objects in your document. + +

Documents

+Displays the names of all open documents. To switch to another open document in the Navigator, click the document name. The status (active, inactive) of the document is shown in brackets after the name. You can switch the active document in the Window menu. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53214c215 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Headers & Footers + /text/scalc/01/02120000.xhp + + + +
+ +Headers & Footers +Allows you to define and format headers and footers. +
+The Headers/Footers dialog contains the tabs for defining headers and footers. There will be separate tabs for the left and right page headers and footers if the Same content left/right option was not marked in the Page Style dialog. +
+ +
+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ca98d272 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ + + + + + + + + Header/Footer + /text/scalc/01/02120100.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ +Left Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer. + +Center Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the center of the header or footer. + +Right Area + Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer. + +Header/Footer + Select a predefined header or footer from the list. + +Text attributes + Opens a dialog to assign formats to new or selected text. The Text Attributes dialog contains the tab pages Font, Font Effects and Font Position. + + + + +Icon + + + Text Attributes + + +
+ + +File Name + Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area. Click to insert the title. Long-click UFI: this is still a long-clickto select either title, file name or path/file name from the submenu. If a title has not be assigned (see File - Properties), the file name will be inserted instead. + + + + +Icon + + + File Name + + +
+ + +Sheet Name + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document. + + + + +Icon + + + Sheet Name + + +
+ + +Page + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document. + + + + +Icon + + + Page + + +
+ + +Pages + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document. + + + + +Icon + + + Pages + + +
+ + +Date + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document. + + + + +Icon + + + Date + + +
+ + +Time + Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document. + + + + +Icon + + + Time + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50893fb3b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fill + /text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp + + + +
+ +filling;selection lists + selection lists;filling cells +MW inserted 2 index entries +Fill + Automatically fills cells with content. +
+
+ +
+ The $[officename] Calc context menus have additional options for filling the cells. + + + + + Sheet + + Series + + +Filling cells using context menus: + + + + Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. + + + +A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed. The text is sorted alphabetically and multiple entries are listed only once. + + + Click one of the listed entries to copy it to the cell. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aef7a17d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Down +/text/scalc/01/02140100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Down + Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the top cell of the range. +
+
+ +
+ If a selected range has only one column, the contents of the top cell are copied to all others. If several columns are selected, the contents of the corresponding top cell will be copied down. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a05a478d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Right +/text/scalc/01/02140200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ If a range of only one row is selected, the contents of the far left cell are copied to all the other selected cells. If you have selected several rows, each of the far left cells is copied into those cells to the right. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5db87e3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Up +/text/scalc/01/02140300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Up + Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the bottom most cell. +
+
+ +
+ If a selected range has only one column, the content of the bottom most cell is copied into the selected cells. If several columns are selected, the contents of the bottom most cells are copied into those selected above. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a96720e8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Left +/text/scalc/01/02140400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Left + Fills a selected range of at least two columns with the contents of the far right cell. +
+
+ +
+ If a selected range has only one row, the content of the far right cell is copied into all other cells of the range. If several rows are selected, the far right cells are copied into the cells to the left. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3888d425 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + Fill Sheets + /text/scalc/01/02140500.xhp + + + + +

Fill Sheets

+Specifies the options for transferring sheets or ranges of a certain sheet to the same cells on other selected sheets. +
+ +
+This menu command is only active if you have selected at least two sheets in the document. +To select multiple sheets, click each sheet tab while pressing CommandCtrl or Shift. +In contrast to copying an area to the clipboard, you can filter certain information and calculate values. +

Filling a Sheet

+ + + Select the entire sheet by clicking the empty gray box in the upper left of the sheet. You can also select an area of the sheet to be copied. + + + Press CommandCtrl and click the tab of the sheet where you want to insert the contents. + + + Select the command Sheet - Fill Cells - Sheets. In the dialog which appears, the check box Numbers must be selected (or Paste All) if you want to combine operations with the values. You can also choose the desired operation here. + + + Click OK. + + + This dialog is similar to the Paste Special dialog, where you can find additional tips. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da3139a68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + Fill Series + /text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp + + + + + + + + + +Fill Series +Automatically generate series with the options in this dialog. Determine direction, increment, time unit and series type. +Before filling a series, first select the cell range. + +
+ +
+To automatically continue a series using the assumed completion rules, choose the AutoFill option after opening the Fill Series dialog. + +Direction +Determines the direction of series creation. + + +Down +Creates a downward series in the selected cell range for the column using the defined increment to the end value. + + +Right +Creates a series running from left to right within the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. + + +Up +Creates an upward series in the cell range of the column using the defined increment to the end value. + + +Left +Creates a series running from right to left in the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. + +Series Type +Defines the series type. Choose between Linear, Growth, Date and AutoFill. + + +Linear +Creates a linear number series using the defined increment and end value. + + +Growth +Creates a growth series using the defined increment and end value. + + +Date +Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date. + + +AutoFill +Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +AutoFill tries to complete a value series by using a defined pattern. The series 1,3,5 is automatically completed with 7,9,11,13, and so on. Date and time series are completed accordingly; for example, after 01.01.99 and 15.01.99, an interval of 14 days is used. + + +Unit of Time +In this area you can specify the desired unit of time. This area is only active if the Date option has been chosen in the Series type area. + + +Day +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series using all seven days of the week. Unit of Increment is day. + + +Weekday +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series only using the five weekdays. Unit of Increment is day. + + +Month +Use the Date series type and this option to form a series which unit of Increment is month. + + +Year +Use the Date series type and this option to create a series which unit of Increment is year. + + +Start Value +Determines the start value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. + + +End Value +Determines the end value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. + + +Increment +The term "increment" denotes the amount by which a given value increases. Determines the value by which the series of the selected type increases by each step. Entries can only be made if the linear, growth or date series types have been selected. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc5a8f191 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + + +Fill Random Numbers +/text/scalc/01/02140700.xhp + + + + + +Fill Random Numbers +Populate a cell range with automatically generated pseudo random numbers with the selected distribution function and its parameters. + +fill range;random numbers +random rumbers;fill range +random rumbers;distribution + +
+Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Random Number +
+Data +Cell Range + +Define the range of cells to fill with random numbers. If you have previously selected a range, it will be displayed here. +Random number generator +Distribution + +The distribution function for the random number generator. +Valid distributions function and their parameters are + + + + + +Distribution + + +Parameters + + + + +Uniform + + + + +Minimum: The minimum value of the sample. + + +Maximum: The maximum value of the sample. + + + + + +Uniform Integer + + + + +Minimum: The minimum value of the sample. + + +Maximum: The maximum value of the sample. + + + + + +Normal + + + + +Mean: The mean of the Normal distribution. + + +Standard Deviation: The standard deviation of the Normal distribution. + +The mean and standard deviation of the numbers generated may not equal the Mean and Standard Deviation inserted in the dialog. + + + + +Cauchy + + + + +Median: the median of the data or location parameter. + + +Sigma: the scale parameter. + +The median and sigma of the generated numbers may not equal the data inserted in the dialog. + + + + +Bernoulli + + + + +p Value: The probability of success. + + + + + +Binomial + + + + +p Value: The probability of success of each trial. + + +Number of trials: the number of trials of the experiment. + + + + + +Chi Squared + + + + +Nu Value: a positive integer that specifies the number of degrees of freedom. + + + + + +Geometric + + + + +p Value: The probability of success of each trial. + + + + + +Negative Binomial + + + + +p Value: The probability of success of each trial. + + +Number of trials: the number of trials of the experiment. + + + +
+Options +Enable custom seed + +Set the initial value of the random number generator to a known value Seed. +Seed + +Value set to initiate the random number generator algorithm. It is used to initialize (seed) the random number generator in order to reproduce the same sequence of pseudorandom numbers. Specify a positive integer number (1, 2, ...) to produce a specific sequence, or leave the field blank if you don't need this particular feature. +Enable rounding + +Truncate the number to a given number of Decimal Places. +Decimal places + +Number of decimal places of the numbers generated. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5721ab049 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Deleting Contents +/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp + + + +
+deleting; cell contents +cells; deleting contents +spreadsheets; deleting cell contents +cell contents; deleting + + + + +Deleting Contents +Specifies the contents to be deleted from the active cell or from a selected cell range. + If several sheets are selected, all selected sheets will be affected. +
+
+ +
+This dialog is also called by pressing Backspace after the cell cursor has been activated on the sheet. +Pressing Delete deletes content without calling the dialog or changing formats. +Use Cut on the Standard bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. +Selection +This area lists the options for deleting contents. +Delete All +Deletes all content from the selected cell range. +Texti50439 +Deletes text only. Formats, formulas, numbers and dates are not affected. +Numbers +Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulas remain unchanged. +Date & time +Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulas remain unchanged. +Formulas +Deletes formulas. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged. +Comments +Deletes comments added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged. +Formats +Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged. +Objects +Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd185bef7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Delete Cells +/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp + + + + +
+ +cells; deleting cells +columns; deleting +rows; deleting +spreadsheets; deleting cells +deleting;cells/rows/columns + + MW made one "deleting;" entry out of 3 + + + + + Delete Cells + Completely deletes selected cells, columns or rows. The cells below or to the right of the deleted cells will fill the space. + Note that the selected delete option is stored and reloaded when the dialog is next called. +
+
+ + + +
+ Delete cells dialog + Selection + This area contains options for specifying how sheets are displayed after deleting cells. + + + Shift cells up + Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it. + + + Shift cells left + Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells. + + + + Delete entire row(s) + After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet. + + + + Delete entire column(s) + After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet. +
+ + Deleting Contents + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..531253d84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Sheet +/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spreadsheets; deleting +sheets; deleting +deleting; spreadsheets + + + Delete Sheet +Deletes the current sheet after query confirmation. + +
+ +
+You cannot delete a sheet while Edit - Track Changes - Record is activated. +Yes +Deletes the current sheet. +No +Cancels the dialog. No delete is performed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d18b1e473 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Move or Copy a Sheet +/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spreadsheets; moving +spreadsheets; copying +moving; spreadsheets +copying; spreadsheets + + + + +Move or Copy a Sheet +Moves or copies a sheet to a new location in the document or to a different document. + +
+ +
+When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! + +To Document +Indicates where the current sheet is to be moved or copied to. Select - new document - if you want to create a new location for the sheet to be moved or copied. + +Insert Before +The current sheet is moved or copied in front of the selected sheet. The - move to end position - option places the current sheet at the end. + +Copy +Specifies that the sheet is to be copied. If the option is unmarked, the sheet is moved. Moving sheets is the default. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e42de1b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Delete Page Break + /text/scalc/01/02190000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +Delete Page Break +Choose the type of page break that you want to delete. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c62fa602 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row Break +/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+spreadsheets; deleting row breaks +deleting;manual row breaks +row breaks; deleting +MW deleted "removing;..." and changed "deleting;...! + +Row Break +Removes the manual row break above the active cell. +
+Position the cursor in a cell directly below the row break indicated by a horizontal line and choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Row Break. The manual row break is removed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eccab059f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Column Break +/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +spreadsheets;deleting column breaks +deleting;manual column breaks +column breaks;deleting + + MW deleted "removing;" and changed "deleting;" + + + + Column Break + Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell. + +
+ Position the cursor in the cell to the right of the column break indicated by a vertical line and choose Sheet - Delete Page Break - Column Break. The manual column break is removed. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8cb4735b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Sheet + /text/scalc/01/02200000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Sheet +Edit commands for entire sheets. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43f4cc522 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Sheets +/text/scalc/01/02210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Selecting Sheets + Selects multiple sheets. + +Selected Sheets + Lists the sheets in the current document. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. To add a sheet to the selection, hold down CommandCtrl while pressing the arrow keys and then press Spacebar. To select a range of sheets, hold down Shift and press the arrow keys. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d5ae097c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + +Go to Sheet +/text/scalc/01/02220000.xhp + + +LibreOffice + + + + + + + +Go to sheet +jump; to given sheet +sheet; go to directly +sheet; search and go to + +

Go to Sheet

+ Go to a specified sheet. + +

Type a sheet name

+ Type some characters contained in the searched sheet name. List of sheets will be limited to the sheet names containing these characters. +

Sheets

+ Lists the sheets in the current document. Hidden sheets are not listed. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. Double click on a name will directly jump to this sheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9ef012f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Column & Row Headers + /text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + spreadsheets; displaying headers of columns/rows + displaying; headers of columns/rows + + + + +Column & Row Headers +Shows column headers and row headers. +
+ + + + To hide the column and row headers, unmark this menu entry. + + +
+ +
+ + + + You can also set the view of the column and row headers in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e51a75913 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Value Highlighting + /text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + spreadsheets; value highlighting + values;highlighting + highlighting; values in sheets + colors;values + + + + +Value Highlighting +Displays cell contents in different colors, depending on type. +
+To remove the highlighting, unmark the menu entry. + +
+ +
+By default: +Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted. +These colors can be customized in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. +If this function is active, colors that you define in the document will not be displayed. When you deactivate the function, the user-defined colors are displayed again. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ced423ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Formula Bar + /text/scalc/01/03090000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + formula bar;spreadsheets + spreadsheets; formula bar + + + + +Formula Bar +Shows or hides the Formula Bar, which is used for entering and editing formulas. The Formula Bar is the most important tool when working with spreadsheets. +
+To hide the Formula Bar, unmark the menu item. + +
+ +
+If the Formula Bar is hidden, you can still edit cells by activating the edit mode with F2. After editing cells, accept the changes by pressing Enter, or discard entries by pressing Esc. Esc is also used to exit the edit mode. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8228e4b20 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Page Break View + /text/scalc/01/03100000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Page Break View +Display the page breaks and print ranges in the sheet. Choose View - Normal to switch this mode off. +
+ +
+ +
+ + +The context menu of the page break preview contains functions for editing page breaks, including the following options: + + +Delete Page Breaks +Deletes all manual breaks in the current sheet. + +Add Print Range +Adds the selected cells to print ranges. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00344263a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Page Break +/text/scalc/01/04010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+spreadsheets; inserting breaks in +inserting; breaks +page breaks; inserting in spreadsheets +mw changed "page breaks;..." + +Insert Page Break +This command inserts manual row or column breaks to ensure that your data prints properly. You can insert a horizontal page break above, or a vertical page break to the left of, the active cell. +
+Choose Sheet - Delete Page Break to remove breaks created manually. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6c8824b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row Break +/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sheets; inserting row breaks +row breaks; inserting +inserting; manual row breaks +manual row breaks + + +Row Break +Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell. +
+The manual row break is indicated by a dark blue horizontal line. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2f81fbd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column Break +/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+spreadsheets; inserting column breaks +column breaks; inserting +inserting; manual column breaks +manual column breaks + + +Column Break +Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell. +
+The manual column break is indicated by a dark blue vertical line. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d9ccd2dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Cells +/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp + + + +spreadsheets; inserting cells +cells; inserting +inserting; cells + + + + + Insert Cells +Opens the Insert Cells dialog, in which you can insert new cells according to the options that you specify. + You can delete cells by choosing Edit - Delete Cells. +
+ +
+Selection +This area contains the options available for inserting cells into a sheet. The cell quantity and position is defined by selecting a cell range in the sheet beforehand. + + +Shift cells down +Moves the contents of the selected range downward when cells are inserted. + + + + +Shift cells right +Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted. + + +Entire row +Inserts an entire row. The position of the row is determined by the selection on the sheet. + The number of rows inserted depends on how many rows are selected. The contents of the original rows are moved downward. + +Entire column +Inserts an entire column. The number of columns to be inserted is determined by the selected number of columns. + The contents of the original columns are shifted to the right. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..367ad26d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Rows + /text/scalc/01/04030000.xhp + + + + + + + + spreadsheets; inserting rows + rows; inserting + inserting; rows + + + + +Insert Rows +Insert rows above or below the active cell. The number of rows inserted corresponds to the number of rows selected. If no row is selected, one row is inserted. The existing rows are moved downward. + +Rows Above +Inserts a new row above the active cell. + +
+ +
+ + +Rows Below +Inserts a new row below the active cell. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f51d1311f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Columns + /text/scalc/01/04040000.xhp + + + + + + + + spreadsheets; inserting columns + inserting; columns + columns; inserting + + + + +Insert Columns +Inserts columns to the left or to the right of the active cell. The number of columns inserted corresponds to the number of columns selected. If no column is selected, one column is inserted. The existing columns are moved to the right. + +Columns Before +Inserts a new column before the active cell. + +
+ +
+ + +Columns After +Inserts a new column after the active cell. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f4eab60f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Sheet +/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp + + + +sheets;creating + + + + +Insert Sheet +Defines the options to be used to insert a new sheet. You can create a new sheet, or insert an existing sheet from a file. + +
+ +
+Position +Specifies where the new sheet is to be inserted into your document. + +Before current sheet +Inserts a new sheet directly before the current sheet. + +After current sheet +Inserts a new sheet directly after the current sheet. +Sheet +Specifies whether a new sheet or an existing sheet is inserted into the document. + +New sheet +Creates a new sheet. Enter a sheet name in the Name field. Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. + +No. of sheets +Specifies the number of sheets to be created. + +Name +Specifies the name of the new sheet. + + +From File +Inserts a sheet from an existing file into the current document. + +Browse +Opens a dialog for selecting a file. + +Available Sheets +If you selected a file by using the Browse button, the sheets contained in it are displayed in the list box. The file path is displayed below this box. Select the sheet to be inserted from the list box. + +Link +Select to insert the sheet as a link instead as a copy. The links can be updated to show the current contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d120c768 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Sheet from file +/text/scalc/01/04050100.xhp + + + +
+ +Sheet from file +Inserts a sheet from a different spreadsheet file. +
+
+ +
+ + +Use the File - Open dialog to locate the spreadsheet. + + +In the Insert Sheet dialog, select the sheet that you want to insert. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fad66a05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Function Wizard +/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp + + + + +inserting functions; Function Wizard +functions;Function Wizard +wizards; functions + + + + + +
+

Function

+Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to interactively create formulas. +
+Before you start the Wizard, select a cell or a range of cells from the current sheet, in order to determine the position at which the formula will be inserted. +
+ +
+You can download the complete ODFF (OpenDocument Format Formula) specification from the OASIS web site. +The Function Wizard has two tabs: Functions is used to create formulas, and Structure is used to check the formula build. +

Functions Tab

+ +

Search

+Search for a part of the function name. + +

Category

+Lists all the categories to which the different functions are assigned. Select a category to view the appropriate functions in the list field below. Select "All" to view all functions in alphabetical order, irrespective of category. "Last Used" lists the functions you have most recently used. + +You can browse the full List of Categories and Functions. + +

Function

+Displays the functions found under the selected category. Double-click to select a function. A single-click displays a short function description. + +

Array

+Specifies that the selected function is inserted into the selected cell range as an array formula. Array formulas operate on multiple cells. Each cell in the array contains the formula, not as a copy but as a common formula shared by all matrix cells. +The Array option is identical to the CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter command, which is used to enter and confirm formulas in the sheet. The formula is inserted as a matrix formula indicated by two braces: { }. +The maximum size of an array range is 128 by 128 cells. +

Argument Input Fields

+When you double-click a function, the argument input field(s) appear on the right side of the dialog. To select a cell reference as an argument, click directly into the cell, or drag across the required range on the sheet while holding down the mouse button. You can also enter numerical and other values or references directly into the corresponding fields in the dialog. When using date entries, make sure you use the correct format. Click OK to insert the result into the spreadsheet. + + +

Function Result

+As soon you enter arguments in the function, the result is calculated. This preview informs you if the calculation can be carried out with the arguments given. If the arguments result in an error, the corresponding error code is displayed. +The required arguments are indicated by names in bold print. + + + + +

f(x) (depending on the selected function)

+Allows you to access a subordinate level of the Function Wizard in order to nest another function within the function, instead of a value or reference. +

Argument/Parameter/Cell Reference (depending on the selected function)

+The number of visible text fields depends on the function. Enter arguments either directly into the argument fields or by clicking a cell in the table. + +

Result

+Displays the calculation result or an error message. + +

Formula

+Displays the created formula. Type your entries directly, or create the formula using the wizard. + +

Back

+Moves the focus back through the formula components, marking them as it does so. +To select a single function from a complex formula consisting of several functions, double-click the function in the formula window. + +

Next

+Moves forward through the formula components in the formula window. This button can also be used to assign functions to the formula. If you select a function and click the Next button, the selection appears in the formula window. +Double-click a function in the selection window to transfer it to the formula window. + +

OK

+Ends the Function Wizard, and transfers the formula to the selected cells. + +

Cancel

+Closes the dialog without implementing the formula. +

Structure tab

+On this page, you can view the structure of the function. +If you start the Function Wizard while the cell cursor is positioned in a cell that already contains a function, the Structure tab is opened and shows the composition of the current formula. + + +

Structure

+Displays a hierarchical representation of the current function. You can hide or show the arguments by a click on the plus or minus sign in front. +Blue dots denote correctly entered arguments. Red dots indicate incorrect data types. For example: if the SUM function has one argument entered as text, this is highlighted in red as SUM only permits number entries. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5aa76ba5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Functions by Category + /text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp + + + +functions;listed by category + categories of functions + list of functions +MW deleted "Calc functions" +

Functions by Category

+ This section describes the functions of $[officename] Calc. The various functions are divided into categories in the Function Wizard. +

Database

+ + Date & Time + + Financial + + Information + +

Logical

+ + Mathematical + + Array + + Statistical + + Spreadsheet + + Text + + Add-in + +
+ Operators +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..543c76bed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1022 @@ + + + + + + + + + Database Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp + + + + + Function Wizard; databases + functions; database functions + databases; functions in $[officename] Calc + + +

Database Functions

+

Overview

+ The twelve functions in the Database category help you to analyze a simple database that occupies a rectangular spreadsheet area comprising columns and rows, with the data organized as one row for each record. The header cell of each column displays the name of the column and that name usually reflects the contents of each cell in that column. + The functions in the Database category take three arguments as follows: + + + Database. The cell range of the database. + + + DatabaseField. The column containing the data to be used in the function’s calculations. + + + SearchCriteria. The cell range of a separate area of the spreadsheet containing search criteria. + + + These arguments are described more fully below. + All functions have the same outline concept of operation. The first logical step is to use the specified SearchCriteria to identify the subset of records in the Database that are to be used during subsequent calculations. The second step is to extract the data values and perform the calculations associated with the specific function (average, sum, product, and so on). The values processed are those in the DatabaseField column of the selected records. + Calc treats dates and logical values (TRUE and FALSE) as numeric when calculating with these functions. + +

Database Function Arguments

+ The following argument definitions apply for all functions in the Database category: + + + Database argument + Database specifies the range of cells occupied by the database table. The first row of the range contains the field names, and subsequent rows are records with corresponding field values. + One way of defining the range of cells is to enter the cell reference for the upper left-hand cell, followed by a colon (:), and then the lower right-hand cell reference. An example might be A1:E10. + The Database argument may also be specified by passing the name of a named range or database range. Using a meaningful name to define the cell range can enhance formula readability and document maintenance. If the name does not match the name of a defined range, Calc reports a #NAME? error. + Other errors that might be reported as a result of an invalid Database argument are #VALUE! and Err:504 (error in parameter list). + + + DatabaseField argument + DatabaseField specifies the column which the function will use for its calculations after the search criteria have been applied and the data rows have been selected. It is not related to the search criteria. + Specify the DatabaseField argument in any of the following ways: +
Dummy section inserted to nest unordered list within ordered list. + + + By entering a reference to a header cell within the Database area. Alternatively, if the cell has been given a meaningful name as a named range or database range, enter that name. If the name does not match the name of a defined range, Calc reports a #NAME? error. If the name is valid but does not correspond to one cell only, Calc reports Err:504 (error in parameter list). + + + By entering a number to specify the column within the Database area, starting with 1. For example, if a Database occupied the cell range D6:H123, then enter 3 to indicate the header cell at F6. Calc expects an integer value that lies between 1 and the number of columns defined within Database and ignores any digits after a decimal point. If the value is less than 1, Calc reports Err:504 (error in parameter list). If the value is greater than the number of columns in Database, Calc reports a #VALUE! error. + + + By entering the literal column header name from the first row of the Database range, placing quotation marks around the header name. For example, “Distance to School”. If the string does not match one of the Database area’s column headings, Calc reports Err:504 (error in parameter list). You can also provide a reference to an arbitrary cell (not within the Database and SearchCriteria areas) that contains the required string. + + +
+ The DatabaseField argument is optional for the DCOUNT and DCOUNTA functions but it is required for the other ten Database functions. + + + SearchCriteria argument + SearchCriteria specifies the range of cells containing search criteria. Like Database, its first row is also field names, and subsequent rows are conditions for related fields. The Database and SearchCriteria areas need not be adjacent, or even on the same sheet. + One way of defining the range of cells is to enter the cell reference for the upper left-hand cell, followed by a colon (:), and then the lower right-hand cell reference. For example, A13:B14. The cell range may also be specified by passing the name of a defined named range or database range. If the name does not match the name of a defined range, Calc reports a #NAME? error. + Err:504 (error in parameter list) may also be reported as a result of an invalid SearchCriteria argument. + The contents of the SearchCriteria area are described in more detail in the next section. + + + + +

Defining Search Criteria

+ The number of columns occupied by the SearchCriteria area need not be the same as the width of the Database area. All headings that appear in the first row of SearchCriteria must be identical to headings in the first row of Database. However, not all headings in Database need appear in the first row of SearchCriteria, while a heading in Database can appear multiple times in the first row of SearchCriteria. + Search criteria are entered into the cells of the second and subsequent rows of the SearchCriteria area, below the row containing headings. Blank cells within the SearchCriteria area are ignored. + Create criteria in the cells of the SearchCriteria area using the comparison operators <, <=, =, <>, >=, and >. = is assumed if a cell is not empty but does not start with a comparison operator. + If you write several criteria in one row, they are connected by AND. If you write several criteria in different rows, they are connected by OR. + Criteria can be created using wildcards, providing that wildcards have been enabled via the Enable wildcards in formulas option on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate dialog. When interoperability with Microsoft Excel is important for your spreadsheet, this option should be enabled. + Even more powerful criteria can be created using regular expressions, providing that regular expressions have been enabled via the Enable regular expressions in formulas option on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate dialog. + + + + Another setting that affects how the search criteria are handled is the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells option on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate dialog. This option controls whether the search criteria you set for the Database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When interoperability with Microsoft Excel is important for your spreadsheet, this option should be enabled. + +

Examples of Database Function Use

+ The following table provides an example database table that is utilized to demonstrate how to use the functions in the Database category. The cell range A1:E10 contains fictitious information about the guests invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each guest - name, school grade, age in years, distance to school in meters, and weight in kilograms. + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + + + 1 + + + Name + + + Grade + + + Age + + + Distance + + + Weight + + + + + 2 + + + Andy + + + 3 + + + 9 + + + 150 + + + 40 + + + + + 3 + + + Betty + + + 4 + + + 10 + + + 1000 + + + 42 + + + + + 4 + + + Charles + + + 3 + + + 10 + + + 300 + + + 51 + + + + + 5 + + + Daniel + + + 5 + + + 11 + + + 1200 + + + 48 + + + + + 6 + + + Eva + + + 2 + + + 8 + + + 650 + + + 33 + + + + + 7 + + + Frank + + + 2 + + + 7 + + + 300 + + + 42 + + + + + 8 + + + Greta + + + 1 + + + 7 + + + 200 + + + 36 + + + + + 9 + + + Harry + + + 3 + + + 9 + + + 1200 + + + 44 + + + + + 10 + + + Irene + + + 2 + + + 8 + + + 1000 + + + 42 + + + + + 11 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + The following six examples use the database table above, combined with different search criteria areas. + +

Example 1

+ + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + + + 12 + + + Name + + + Grade + + + Age + + + Distance + + + Weight + + + + + 13 + + + + + + + + + >600 + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + As in this simple example, it is sometimes desirable (but not essential) to place the search criteria area directly under the database table, with the columns of the two areas vertically aligned. Blank entries in the search criteria area are ignored. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;A12:E14) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests travel further than 600 meters to school. The value 5 is returned (counting Betty, Daniel, Eva, Harry, and Irene). + Note also that the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;D12:D13) returns exactly the same value, demonstrating that it is only necessary for the search criteria area to contain relevant column headings. +

Example 2

+ + + + + + +    A    + + +    B    + + +    C    + + +    D    + + +    E    + + + + + 12 + + + + + Age + + + Grade + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + + >7 + + + 2 + + + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + In this example the search criteria area contains only two headings and these are not vertically aligned with the corresponding headings in the example database table. Since there are two conditions in the same row, these are connected by AND. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;B12:C13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests are in grade 2 and greater than 7 years old. The value 2 is returned (counting Eva and Irene). + +

Example 3

+ + + + + + +    A    + + +    B    + + +    C    + + +    D    + + +    E    + + + + + 12 + + + + + Age + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + + 9 + + + + + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + 10 + + + + + + + + +
+ + In this example the search criteria area contains only one heading. Since there are two conditions in consecutive rows, these are connected by OR. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;B12:B14) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests are either 9 or 10 years old. The value 4 is returned (counting Andy, Betty, Charles, and Harry). + +

Example 4

+ + + + + +    A    + + +    B    + + +    C    + + +    D    + + +    E    + + + + + 12 + + + + + Age + + + Age + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + + >=8 + + + <=10 + + + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + In this example the search criteria area contains two occurrences of the same heading. Since there are two conditions in the same row, these are connected by AND. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;B12:C13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests are aged between 8 and 10 (inclusive). The value 6 is returned (counting Andy, Betty, Charles, Eva, Harry, and Irene). + +

Example 5

+ + + + + +    A    + + +    B    + + +    C    + + +    D    + + +    E    + + + + + 12 + + + Name + + + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + F* + + + + + + + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + This simple example shows the use of wildcards. For this example to work as intended, select to enable wildcards at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;A12:A13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests have names that begin with the letter “F”. The value 1 is returned (counting Frank). + + +

Example 6

+ + + + + +    A    + + +    B    + + +    C    + + +    D    + + +    E    + + + + + 12 + + + Name + + + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + [ABC].* + + + + + + + + + + + + + 14 + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + This simple example shows the use of regular expressions. For this example to work as intended, select to enable regular expressions at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. With the above example database table and this search criteria area, insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;;A12:A13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to count how many of Joe’s guests have names that begin with the letters “A”, “B”, or “C”. The value 3 is returned (counting Andy, Betty, and Charles). + + +
+ +DCOUNT function +counting rows;with numeric values +mw added "counting rows;" + +

DCOUNT

+ DCOUNT counts the number of cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. However, if no column is specified, DCOUNT returns the count of all records that match the specified search criteria irrespective of their contents. + + + DCOUNT(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">600" (this search criterion will match records in the database table that have a value greater than 600 in the Distance column). + Insert the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate how many of Joe’s party guests travel further than 600 meters to school. The value 5 is returned. + The same result is obtained if you use the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13), because all entries in the Distance column are numeric. However, if you use the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10; "Name"; A12:E13), the value 0 is returned because all entries in the Name column are non-numeric. +
+ +
+ +DCOUNTA function +records;counting in Calc databases +counting rows;with numeric or alphanumeric values +mw added "records;" and "counting rows;" + +

DCOUNTA

+ DCOUNTA counts the number of cells (fields) of the specified column that are not blank, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Blank cells of the specified column are not counted. However, if no column is specified, DCOUNTA returns the count of all records that match the specified search criteria irrespective of their contents. + + + DCOUNTA(Database; [DatabaseField]; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">600" (this search criterion will match records in the database table that have a value greater than 600 in the Distance column). + Insert the formula =DCOUNTA(A1:E10;; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate how many of Joe’s party guests travel further than 600 meters to school. The value 5 is returned. + The same result is obtained if you use the formula =DCOUNTA(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) or the formula =DCOUNTA(A1:E10; "Name"; A12:E13). The latter case reflects that in contrast to DCOUNT, DCOUNTA counts both numeric and alphanumeric values in the column indicated by the DatabaseField argument. +
+ +
+ +DGET function +cell contents;searching in Calc databases +searching;cell contents in Calc databases +mw added "cell contents;" and "searching;" + +

DGET

+ DGET returns the contents of the cell (field) of the specified column, for the single row (database record) that matches the specified search criteria. + Calc reports Err:502 (invalid argument) if multiple matches are found, or a #VALUE! error (wrong data type) if no matches are found. A #VALUE! error is also reported if a single match is found but the relevant cell is empty. + + + DGET(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell C13 which should contain "11" (this search criterion will match records in the database table that have a value of 11 in the Age column). + Insert the formula =DGET(A1:E10; "Name"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the name of Joe’s party guest who is age 11. The name Daniel is returned. + If you change the value in cell C13 to “10”, then the formula =DGET(A1:E10; "Name"; A12:E13) returns an invalid argument error (Err:502). The reflects that multiple records match the specified criterion (both Betty and Charles are age 10). +
+ +
+ +DMAX function +maximum values in Calc databases +searching;maximum values in columns +mw added "maximum..." and "searching;" + +

DMAX

+ DMAX calculates the maximum value across the cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Blank cells or cells containing non-numeric characters are not included. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no non-zero numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DMAX(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DMAX(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the maximum distance in meters that any of Joe’s party guests travel to school. The value 1200 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DMIN function +minimum values in Calc databases +searching;minimum values in columns +mw added "minimum..." and "searching;" + +

DMIN

+ DMIN calculates the minimum value across the cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Blank cells or cells containing non-numeric characters are not included. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no non-zero numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DMIN(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DMIN(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the minimum distance in meters that any of Joe’s party guests travel to school. The value 150 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DAVERAGE function +averages; in Calc databases +calculating;averages in Calc databases +mw added "averages;..." and "calculating;" + +

DAVERAGE

+ DAVERAGE calculates the average of the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Non-numeric values in those cells are ignored. + Returns a #DIV/0! error if no records match the specified search criteria, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DAVERAGE(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DAVERAGE(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate the average distance in meters travelled to school by Joe’s party guests. The value 666.67 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DPRODUCT function +multiplying;cell contents in Calc databases +mw added "multiplying..." + +

DPRODUCT

+ DPRODUCT calculates the product of all numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Blank cells or cells containing non-numeric characters are not included. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DPRODUCT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell C13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DPRODUCT(A1:E10; "Age"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate the product of the ages in years of Joe’s party guests. The value 279417600 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DSTDEV function +standard deviations in databases;based on a sample +mw added "standard deviations...;" + +

DSTDEV

+ DSTDEV calculates the sample standard deviation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Non-numeric values are ignored. + Returns a #NUM! error if exactly one record matches the specified search criteria, or if there is only one numeric value in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DSTDEV(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:D13 are blank and that cell E13 contains ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DSTDEV(A1:E10; "Weight"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate the sample standard deviation of the weights in kg of Joe’s party guests. The value 5.5 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DSTDEVP function +standard deviations in databases;based on populations +mw added "standard deviations...;" + +

DSTDEVP

+ DSTDEVP calculates the population standard deviation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Non-numeric values are ignored. + Returns a #NUM! error if no records match the specified search criteria, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DSTDEVP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:D13 are blank and that cell E13 contains ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DSTDEVP(A1:E10; "Weight"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to calculate the population standard deviation of the weights in kg of Joe’s party guests. The value 5.18545 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DSUM function +calculating;sums in Calc databases +sums;cells in Calc databases +mw added "calculating;" and "sums;" + +

DSUM

+ DSUM calculates the sum of all numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Blank cells or cells containing non-numeric characters are not included. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DSUM(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DSUM(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the total distance in meters that all of Joe’s party guests travel to school. The value 6000 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DVAR function +variances;based on samples +mw added "variances;" + +

DVAR

+ DVAR calculates the sample variance based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Non-numeric values are ignored. + Returns a #NUM! error if exactly one record matches the specified search criteria, or if there is only one numeric value in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + Returns 0 if no matches are found, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DVAR(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DVAR(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the sample variance of the distances in meters that Joe’s party guests travel to school. The value 193125 is returned. +
+ +
+ +DVARP function +variances;based on populations +mw added "variances;" + +

DVARP

+ DVARP calculates the population variation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. Non-numeric values are ignored. + Returns a #NUM! error if no records match the specified search criteria, or if there are no numeric values in the cells of the specified column for the matching records. + + + DVARP(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) + + + The example database table giving information about the guests invited to Joe’s birthday party (described above) should occupy cells A1:E10. The content of cells A12:E12 should be identical to the header labels for the database table in cells A1:E1. Make sure that cells A13:E13 are blank, except for cell D13 which should contain ">0" (this search criterion is intended to match all records in the database table). + Insert the formula =DVARP(A1:E10; "Distance"; A12:E13) into an empty cell elsewhere in the sheet to find the population variance of the distances in meters that Joe’s party guests travel to school. The value 171666.67 is returned. +
+ + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e1fd1799 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + Date & Time Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp + + + + + + date and time functions + functions; date & time + Function Wizard; date & time + +

Date & Time Functions

+These spreadsheet functions are used for inserting and editing dates and times. + +
+ +
+ +
+The functions whose names end with _ADD or _EXCEL2003 return the same results as the corresponding Microsoft Excel 2003 functions without the suffix. Use the functions without suffix to get results based on international standards. +
+$[officename] internally handles a date/time value as a numerical value. If you assign the numbering format "Number" to a date or time value, it is converted to a number. For example, 01/01/2000 12:00 PM, converts to 36526.5. The value preceding the decimal point corresponds to the date; the value following the decimal point corresponds to the time. If you do not want to see this type of numerical date or time representation, change the number format (date or time) accordingly. To do this, select the cell containing the date or time value, call its context menu and select Format Cells. The Numbers tab page contains the functions for defining the number format. + +
+

Date base for day zero

+Dates are calculated as offsets from a starting day zero. You can set the day zero to be one of the following: + + + + + Date base + + + Use + + + + + '12/30/1899' + + + (default) + + + + + '01/01/1900' + + + (used in former StarCalc 1.0) + + + + + '01/01/1904' + + + (used in Apple software) + + +
+
+Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to select the date base. +When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! + +

Two digits years

+In %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you find the area Year (two digits). This sets the period for which two-digit information applies. Note that changes made here have an effect on some of the following functions. +
+When entering dates as part of formulas, slashes or dashes used as date separators are interpreted as arithmetic operators. Therefore, dates entered in this format are not recognized as dates and result in erroneous calculations. To keep dates from being interpreted as parts of formulas use the DATE function, for example, DATE(1954;7;20), or place the date in quotation marks and use the ISO 8601 notation, for example, "1954-07-20". Avoid using locale dependent date formats such as "07/20/54", the calculation may produce errors if the document is loaded under different locale settings. +
+
+ Unambiguous conversion is possible for ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. If a #VALUE! error occurs, then unselect Generate #VALUE! error in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula, button Details... in section "Detailed Calculation Settings", Conversion from text to number list box. +
+ +Time zone information is not used in Date and Time functions and cells. + +

Functions

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b14bdc26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,737 @@ + + + + + + + Financial Functions Part One + /text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp + + + +financial functions + functions; financial functions + Function Wizard; financial + amortizations, see also depreciations +mw added one entry +

Financial Functions Part One

+ This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + + +
+AMORDEGRC function + depreciations;degressive amortizations +mw added one entry + +

AMORDEGRC

+ Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. + + AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate [; Basis]) + + Cost is the acquisition costs. + + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + + Period is the settlement period to be considered. + + Rate is the rate of depreciation. + + + An asset was acquired on 2020-02-01 at a cost of 2000 currency units. The end date of the first settlement period was 2020-12-31. The salvage value of the asset at the end of its depreciable life will be 10 currency units. The rate of depreciation is 0.1 (10%) and the year is calculated using the US method (Basis 0). Assuming degressive depreciation, what is the amount of depreciation in the fourth depreciation period? + + =AMORDEGRC(2000; "2020-02-01"; "2020-12-31"; 10; 4; 0.1; 0) returns a depreciation amount of 163 currency units. +
+ Beware that Basis 2 is not supported by Microsoft Excel. Hence, if you use Basis 2 and export your document to XLSX format, it will return an error when opened in Excel. +
+
+
+AMORLINC function + depreciations;linear amortizations +mw added "depreciations;..." + +

AMORLINC

+ Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. + + AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate [; Basis]) + + Cost means the acquisition costs. + + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + + Period is the settlement period to be considered. + + Rate is the rate of depreciation. + + + An asset was acquired on 2020-02-01 at a cost of 2000 currency units. The end date of the first settlement period was 2020-12-31. The salvage value of the asset at the end of its depreciable life will be 10 currency units. The rate of depreciation is 0.1 (10%) and the year is calculated using the US method (Basis 0). Assuming linear depreciation, what is the amount of depreciation in the fourth depreciation period? + + =AMORLINC(2000; "2020-02-01"; "2020-12-31"; 10; 4; 0.1; 0) returns a depreciation amount of 200 currency units. + +
+
+ACCRINT function + + +

ACCRINT

+accrued interests;periodic payments +mw changed "accrued interests" +Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. + + ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; [Par]; Frequency [; Basis]) + + Issue (required) is the issue date of the security. + + FirstInterest (required) is the first interest date of the security. + + Settlement (required) is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + + Rate (required) is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + + Par (optional) is the par value of the security. If omitted, a default value of 1000 is used. + We recommend that you always specify the value that you require for ACCRINT’s Par argument, rather than allowing Calc to apply an arbitrary default. This will make your formula easier to understand and easier to maintain. + + Frequency (required) is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + A security is issued on 2001-02-28. First interest is set for 2001-08-31. The settlement date is 2001-05-01. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? + + =ACCRINT("2001-02-28";"2001-08-31";"2001-05-01";0.1;1000;2;0) returns 16.94444. +
+
+ACCRINTM function + accrued interests;one-off payments +mw added one index entry + +

ACCRINTM

+ Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. + + ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate [; Par [; Basis]]) + + Issue (required) is the issue date of the security. + + Settlement (required) is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + + Rate (required) is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). + + Par (optional) is the par value of the security. If omitted, a default value of 1000 is used. + We recommend that you always specify the value that you require for ACCRINTM’s Par argument, rather than allowing Calc to apply an arbitrary default. This will make your formula easier to understand and easier to maintain. + + + A security is issued on 2001-04-01. The maturity date is set for 2001-06-15. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? + + =ACCRINTM("2001-04-01";"2001-06-15";0.1;1000;3) returns 20.54795. +
+
+RECEIVED function + amount received for fixed-interest securities +mw added one entry + +

RECEIVED

+ Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. + + RECEIVED(Settlement; Maturity; Investment; Discount [; Basis]) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Investment is the purchase sum. + + Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. + + + Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. + The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: + + =RECEIVED("1999-02-15";"1999-05-15";1000;0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266. +
+
+PV function + present values + calculating; present values + + +

PV

+ Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. + Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. + Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. + + PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt [; FV [; Type]]) + + Rate defines the interest rate per period. + + NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). + + Pmt is the regular payment made per period. + + FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. + + Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. + + + + + What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. + + =PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. + If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. +
+
+calculating; depreciations + SYD function + depreciations; arithmetic declining + arithmetic declining depreciations + + +

SYD

+ Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. + Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. + + SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) + + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. + + Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. + + Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. + + A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. + + =SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. + To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: + + + + + + + A + + + + + B + + + + + C + + + + + D + + + + + E + + + + + + 1 + + + + Initial Cost + + + + + Salvage Value + + + + + Useful Life + + + + + Time Period + + + + + Deprec. SYD + + + + + + 2 + + + + 50,000 currency units + + + + + 10,000 currency units + + + + + 5 + + + + + 1 + + + + + 13,333.33 currency units + + + + + + 3 + + + + + + + + + + 2 + + + + + 10,666.67 currency units + + + + + + 4 + + + + + + + + + + 3 + + + + + 8,000.00 currency units + + + + + + 5 + + + + + + + + + + 4 + + + + + 5,333.33 currency units + + + + + + 6 + + + + + + + + + + 5 + + + + + 2,666.67 currency units + + + + + + 7 + + + + + + + + + + 6 + + + + + 0.00 currency units + + + + + + 8 + + + + + + + + + + 7 + + + + + + + + 9 + + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + + + + + + 10 + + + + + + + + + + 9 + + + + + + + + 11 + + + + + + + + + + 10 + + + + + + + + 12 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + + >0 + + + + + + + + + Total + + + + + 40,000.00 currency units + + + +
+ + The formula in E2 is as follows: + + =SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) + + This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). + Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: + + =SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) + + Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. +
+
+DISC function + allowances + discounts +mw added "discounts" and "allowances" + +

DISC

+ Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. + + DISC(Settlement; Maturity; Price; Redemption [; Basis]) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + + Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + + + A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the maturity date is 2001-11-15. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? + + =DISC("2001-01-25";"2001-11-15";97;100;3) returns about 0.0372 or 3.72 per cent. +
+
+DURATION function + durations;fixed interest securities +mw added two entries + +

DURATION

+ Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. + + DURATION(Settlement; Maturity; Coupon; Yield; Frequency [; Basis]) + + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + + Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) + + Yield is the annual yield of the security. + + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? + =DURATION("2001-01-01";"2006-01-01";0.08;0.09;2;3) returns 4.2 years. +
+
+annual net interest rates + calculating; annual net interest rates + net annual interest rates + EFFECT function +mw added one entry + +

EFFECT

+ Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. + Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. + + EFFECT(Nom; P) + + Nom is the nominal interest. + + P is the number of interest payment periods per year. + + If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? + + =EFFECT(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. +
+
+effective interest rates + EFFECT_ADD function +mw changed "effective rates" + +

EFFECT_ADD

+ Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. + + + EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) + + NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. + + NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. + + What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. + + =EFFECT_ADD(0.0525;4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3543%. +
+
+calculating; arithmetic-degressive depreciations + arithmetic-degressive depreciations + depreciations;arithmetic-degressive + DDB function +mw corrected two typos and added "depreciations;..." + +

DDB

+ Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. + Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. + + DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period [; Factor]) + + Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. + + Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. + + Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. + + Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. + + A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. + + =DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation in the twelfth month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units. +
+
+calculating; geometric-degressive depreciations + geometric-degressive depreciations + depreciations;geometric-degressive + DB function +mw added "depreciations;.." + +

DB

+ Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method. + This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. + + DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period [; Month]) + + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + + Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. + + Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. + + Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. + + Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. + + A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three-year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. The first period of depreciation comprises 6 months. What is the fixed-declining balance depreciation of the computer system in the second period, which is a full year starting from the end of the first six-month period? + + =DB(25000; 1000; 3; 2; 6) returns 11,037.95 currency units. +
+
+IRR function + calculating;internal rates of return, regular payments + internal rates of return;regular payments + + +

IRR

+ Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). + If the payments take place at irregular intervals, use the XIRR function. + + IRR(Values [; Guess]) + + Values represents an array containing the values. + + Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. + + + Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 11,33%. + Because of the iterative method used, it is possible for IRR to fail and return Error 523, with "Error: Calculation does not converge" in the status bar. In that case, try another value for Guess. +
+
+calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments + interests for unchanged amortization installments + ISPMT function + + +

ISPMT

+ Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. + + ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) + + Rate sets the periodic interest rate. + + Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. + + TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. + + Invest is the amount of the investment. + + For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. + + =ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. +
+ +Financial Functions Part Two + Financial Functions Part Three + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2b2f0101 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,742 @@ + + + + + + Information Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp + + + + + information functions + Function Wizard; information + functions; information functions + +

Information Functions

+This category contains the Information functions. +
+ +
+The data in the following table serves as the basis for some of the examples in the function descriptions: + + + + + + C + + + D + + + + + 2 + + + x value + + + y value + + + + + 3 + + + -5 + + + -3 + + + + + 4 + + + -2 + + + 0 + + + + + 5 + + + -1 + + + 1 + + + + + 6 + + + 0 + + + 3 + + + + + 7 + + + 2 + + + 4 + + + + + 8 + + + 4 + + + 6 + + + + + 9 + + + 6 + + + 8 + + +
+ +
+ + INFO function + + +

INFO

+Returns specific information about the current working environment. The function receives a single text argument and returns data depending on that parameter. + + +INFO("Type") +The following table lists the values for the text parameter Type and the return values of the INFO function. + + + + Value for "Type"Do not translate the text values in this column below + + + Return value + + + + + "osversion" + + + Always "Windows (32-bit) NT 5.01", for compatibility reasons + + + + + "system" + + + The type of the operating system:
"AIX" for Advanced Interactive Executive IBM computer operating systems
"ANDROID" for Google mobile operating system
"DRAGONFLY" for DragonFly operating system forked from FreeBSD
"EMSCRIPTEN" for browser WebAssembly system
"FREEBSD", "OPENBSD" or "NETBSD" for operating systems based on the Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD)
"HAIKU" for BeOS compatible operating system
"iOS" for Apple mobile operating system
"LINUX" for GNU/Linux based operating systems
"MACOSX" for Apple Mac OS X
"SOLARIS" for Oracle Solaris operating system
"WNT" for Microsoft Windows + + + + + "release" + + + The product release identifier, for example "300m25(Build:9876)" + + + + + "numfile" + + + Always 1, for compatibility reasons + + + + + "recalc" + + + Current formula recalculation mode, either "Automatic" or "Manual" (localized into %PRODUCTNAME language) + + +
+Other spreadsheet applications may accept localized values for the Type parameter, but %PRODUCTNAME Calc will only accept the English values. + +=INFO("release") returns the product release number of the %PRODUCTNAME in use.Do not translate "release" +=INFO(D5) with cell D5 containing a text string system returns the operation system type.Do not translate the hlp_literal system +
+
+ + CURRENT function + + +

CURRENT

+This function returns the result to date of evaluating the formula of which it is a part (in other words the result as far as that evaluation has got). Its main use is together with the STYLE() function to apply selected styles to a cell depending on the cell contents. + +CURRENT() + +=1+2+CURRENT() +The example returns 6. The formula is calculated from left to right as: 1 + 2 equals 3, giving the result to date when CURRENT() is encountered; CURRENT() therefore yields 3, which is added to the original 3 to give 6. +=A2+B2+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>10;"Red";"Default")) +The example returns A2 + B2 (STYLE returns 0 here). If this sum is greater than 10, the style Red is applied to the cell. See the STYLE function for more explanation. +="choo"&CURRENT() +The example returns choochoo. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.CURRENT +
+
+ + FORMULA function + formula cells;displaying formulas in other cells + displaying;formulas at any position + +mw added "formula cells;" and "displaying;" + +

FORMULA

+Displays the formula of a formula cell as a text string. + + +FORMULA(Reference) +Reference is a reference to a cell containing a formula. +An invalid reference or a reference to a cell with no formula results in the error value #N/A. + +If cell A8 contains the formula =SUM(1;2;3) then +=FORMULA(A8) returns the text =SUM(1;2;3). +
+
+ + ISREF function + references;testing cell contents + cell contents;testing for references + +mw added "references;" and "cell contents;" + +

ISREF

+Tests if the argument is a reference. Returns TRUE if the argument is a reference, returns FALSE otherwise. When given a reference this function does not examine the value being referenced.i82565 + + +ISREF(Value) +Value is the value to be tested, to determine whether it is a reference. + +=ISREF(C5) returns the result TRUE because C5 is a valid reference. +=ISREF("abcdef") returns always FALSE because a text can never be a reference. +=ISREF(4) returns FALSE. +=ISREF(INDIRECT("A6")) returns TRUE, because INDIRECT is a function that returns a reference. +=ISREF(ADDRESS(1; 1; 2;"Sheet2")) returns FALSE, because ADDRESS is a function that returns a text, although it looks like a reference. +
+
+ + ISERR function + error codes;controlling + +mw added "error codes," + +

ISERR

+Tests for error conditions, except the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. + + +ISERR(Value) +Value is any value or expression which is tested to see whether an error value other than #N/A is present. + +=ISERR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. +=ISERR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns FALSE, because ISERR() ignores the #N/A error. +
+
+ + ISERROR function + recognizing;general errors + +mw added "recognizing;" + +

ISERROR

+Tests for error conditions, including the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. + + +ISERROR(Value) +Value is or refers to the value to be tested. ISERROR() returns TRUE if there is an error and FALSE if not. + +=ISERROR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. +=ISERROR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns TRUE. +
+
+ + IFERROR function + testing;general errors + + +

IFERROR

+Returns the value if the cell does not contains an error value, or the alternative value if it does. + + +IFERROR(Value; Alternate_value) +Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an error. +Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an error. + +=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns the value of C9, because 1/0 is an error. +=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains 13 returns 13, the value of C8, which is not an error. +
+
+ + ISFORMULA function + recognizing formula cells + formula cells;recognizing + +mw inserted "recognizing..." and "formula cells;" + +

ISFORMULA

+Returns TRUE if a cell is a formula cell. + + +ISFORMULA(Reference) +Reference indicates the reference to a cell in which a test will be performed to determine if it contains a formula. + +=ISFORMULA(C4) returns FALSE if the cell C4 contains the number 5. +
+
+ + ISEVEN function + even integers + + +

ISEVEN

+Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd. + +ISEVEN(Value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. + +=ISEVEN(48) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(33) returns FALSE +=ISEVEN(0) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(-2.1) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(3.999) returns FALSEsee also ISODD +
+
+ + ISEVEN_ADD function + + +

ISEVEN_ADD

+Tests for even numbers. Returns 1 if the number divided by 2 returns a whole number. + + +ISEVEN_ADD(Number) +Number is the number to be tested. + +=ISEVEN_ADD(5) returns 0. +=ISEVEN_ADD(A1) returns 1 if cell A1 contains the number 2. +
+
+ + ISNONTEXT function + cell contents;no text + +mw added "cell contents;" + +

ISNONTEXT

+Tests if the cell contents are text or numbers, and returns FALSE if the contents are text. +If an error occurs, the function returns TRUE. + +ISNONTEXT(Value) +Value is any value or expression where a test is performed to determine whether it is a text or numbers or a Boolean value. + +=ISNONTEXT(D2) returns FALSE if cell D2 contains the text abcdef. +=ISNONTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the number 8. +
+
+ + ISBLANK function + blank cell contents + empty cells; recognizing + +mw added "blank..." and "empty cells;" + +

ISBLANK

+Returns TRUE if the reference to a cell is blank. This function is used to determine if the content of a cell is empty. A cell with a formula inside is not empty. + + +ISBLANK(Value) +Value is the content to be tested. + +=ISBLANK(D2) returns FALSE as a result. +
+
+ + ISLOGICAL function + number formats;logical + logical number formats + +mw added "number formats;" and "logical..." + +

ISLOGICAL

+Tests for a logical value (TRUE or FALSE). +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +ISLOGICAL(Value) +Returns TRUE if Value is a logical value (TRUE or FALSE), and returns FALSE otherwise. + +=ISLOGICAL(99) returns FALSE, because 99 is a number, not a logical value. +=ISLOGICAL(ISNA(D4)) returns TRUE whatever the contents of cell D4, because ISNA() returns a logical value. +
+
+ + ISNA function + #N/A error;recognizing + +mw added "#N/A ..." + +

ISNA

+Returns TRUE if a cell contains the #N/A (value not available) error value. +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +ISNA(Value) +Value is the value or expression to be tested. + +=ISNA(D3) returns FALSE as a result. +
+
+ + IFNA function + #N/A error;testing + + +

IFNA

+Returns the value if the cell does not contains the #N/A (value not available) error value, or the alternative value if it does. + + +IFNA(Value; Alternate_value) +Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an #N/A error. +Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an #N/A error. + +=IFNA(D3;D4) returns the value of D3 if D3 does not result in an #N/A error, or D4 if it does. +
+
+ + ISTEXT function + cell contents;text + + +

ISTEXT

+Returns TRUE if the cell contents refer to text. +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +ISTEXT(Value) +Value is a value, number, Boolean value, or an error value to be tested. + +=ISTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the text abcdef. +=ISTEXT(C3) returns FALSE if cell C3 contains the number 3. +
+
+ + ISODD function + odd integers + + +

ISODD

+Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even. + +ISODD(value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. + +=ISODD(33) returns TRUE +=ISODD(48) returns FALSE +=ISODD(3.999) returns TRUE +=ISODD(-3.1) returns TRUEsee also ISEVEN +
+
+ + ISODD_ADD function + + +

ISODD_ADD

+Returns TRUE (1) if the number does not return a whole number when divided by 2. + + +ISODD_ADD(Number) +Number is the number to be tested. + +=ISODD_ADD(5) returns 1. +
+
+ + ISNUMBER function + cell contents;numbers + +mw added "cell contents;" + +

ISNUMBER

+Returns TRUE if the value refers to a number. + + +ISNUMBER(Value) +Value is any expression to be tested to determine whether it is a number or text. + +=ISNUMBER(C3) returns TRUE if the cell C3 contains the number 4. +=ISNUMBER(C2) returns FALSE if the cell C2 contains the text abcdef. +
+
+ + N function + + +

N

+Returns the numeric value of the given parameter. Returns 0 if parameter is text or FALSE. +If an error occurs the function returns the error value. + +N(Value) +Value is the parameter to be converted into a number. N() returns the numeric value if it can. It returns the logical values TRUE and FALSE as 1 and 0 respectively. It returns text as 0. + +=N(123) returns 123 +=N(TRUE()) returns 1 +=N(FALSE()) returns 0 +=N("abc") returns 0 +=N(1/0) returns #DIV/0! +
+
+ + NA function + #N/A error;assigning to a cell + +mw added "#N/A error;" + +

NA

+Returns the error value #N/A. + +NA() + +=NA() converts the contents of the cell into #N/A. +
+
+ + TYPE function + + +

TYPE

+Returns the type of value, where 1 = number, 2 = text, 4 = Boolean value, 8 = formula, 16 = error value, 64 = array. + + +TYPE(Value) +Value is a specific value for which the data type is determined. +

Example (see example table above)

+=TYPE(C2) returns 2 as a result. +=TYPE(D9) returns 1 as a result. +
+
+ + CELL function + cell information + information on cells + +mw added two entries + +

CELL

+Returns information on address, formatting or contents of a cell. + +CELL("InfoType" [; Reference]) +InfoType is the character string that specifies the type of information. The character string is always in English. Upper or lower case is optional. + + + + InfoType + + + Meaning + + + + + COL + + + Returns the number of the referenced column. + =CELL("COL";D2) returns 4. + + + + + ROW + + + Returns the number of the referenced row. + =CELL("ROW";D2) returns 2. + + + + + SHEET + + + Returns the number of the referenced sheet. + =CELL("Sheet";Sheet3.D2) returns 3. + + + + + ADDRESS + + + Returns the absolute address of the referenced cell. + =CELL("ADDRESS";D2) returns $D$2. + =CELL("ADDRESS";Sheet3.D2) returns $Sheet3.$D$2. + =CELL("ADDRESS";'X:\dr\test.ods'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.ods'#$Sheet1.$D$2. + + + + + FILENAME + + + Returns the file name and the sheet number of the referenced cell. + =CELL("FILENAME";D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/own.ods'#$Sheet1, if the formula in the current document X:\dr\own.ods is located in Sheet1. + =CELL("FILENAME";'X:\dr\test.ods'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.ods'#$Sheet1. + + + + + COORD + + + Returns the complete cell address in Lotus™ notation. + =CELL("COORD"; D2) returns $A:$D$2. + =CELL("COORD"; Sheet3.D2) returns $C:$D$2. + + + + + CONTENTS + + + Returns the contents of the referenced cell, without any formatting. + + + + + TYPE + + + Returns the type of cell contents. + b = blank. empty cell + l = label. Text, result of a formula as text + v = value. Value, result of a formula as a number + + + + + WIDTH + + + Returns the width of the referenced column. The unit is the number of zeros (0) that fit into the column in the default text and the default size. + + + + + PREFIX + + + Returns the alignment of the referenced cell. + ' = align left or left-justified + " = align right + ^ = centered + \ = repeating (currently inactive) + + + + + PROTECT + + + Returns the status of the cell protection for the cell. + 1 = cell is protected + 0 = cell is not protected + + + + + FORMAT + + + Returns a character string that indicates the number format. + , = number with thousands separator + F = number without thousands separator + C = currency format + S = exponential representation, for example, 1.234+E56 + P = percentage + In the above formats, the number of decimal places after the decimal separator is given as a number. Example: the number format #,##0.0 returns ,1 and the number format 00.000% returns P3 + D1 = MMM-D-YY, MM-D-YY and similar formats + D2 = DD-MM + D3 = MM-YY + D4 = DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS + D5 = MM-DD + D6 = HH:MM:SS AM/PM + D7 = HH:MM AM/PM + D8 = HH:MM:SS + D9 = HH:MM + G = All other formats + - (Minus) at the end = negative numbers are formatted in color + () (brackets) at the end = there is an opening bracket in the format code + + + + + COLOR + + + Returns 1, if negative values have been formatted in color, otherwise 0. + + + + + PARENTHESES + + + Returns 1 if the format code contains an opening bracket (, otherwise 0. + + +
+Reference (list of options) is the position of the cell to be examined. If Reference is a range, the cell moves to the top left of the range. If Reference is missing, $[officename] Calc uses the position of the cell in which this formula is located. Microsoft Excel uses the reference of the cell in which the cursor is positioned. +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24f8d9729 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ + + + + + + Logical Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060105.xhp + + + +logical functions + Function Wizard; logical + functions; logical functions + +

Logical Functions

+ This category contains the Logical functions. + +

Handling non-logical arguments in logical functions

+ + + Zero (0) is equivalent to FALSE and all other numbers are equivalent to TRUE. + + + Empty cells and text in cells are ignored. + + + A #VALUE error is raised if all arguments are ignored. + + + A #VALUE error is raised if one argument is direct text (not text in a cell). + + + Errors as argument lead to an error. + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+AND function + + +

AND

+ Returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE. If one of the elements is FALSE, this function returns the FALSE value. + The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. + + AND() + + + + The logical values of entries 12<13; 14>12, and 7<6 are to be checked: + + =AND(12<13;14>12;7<6) returns FALSE. + + =AND (FALSE;TRUE) returns FALSE. +
+
+FALSE function + + +

FALSE

+ Returns the logical value FALSE. The FALSE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value FALSE. + + FALSE() + + + =FALSE() returns FALSE + + =NOT(FALSE()) returns TRUE +
+
+IF function + + +

IF

+ Specifies a logical test to be performed. + + IF(Test [; [ThenValue] [; [OtherwiseValue]]]) + + Test is any value or expression that can be TRUE or FALSE. + + ThenValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is TRUE. + + OtherwiseValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is FALSE. + + + + + + =IF(A1>5;100;"too small") If the value in A1 is greater than 5, the value 100 is returned; otherwise, the text too small is returned. + + =IF(A1>5;;"too small") If the value in A1 is greater than 5, the value 0 is returned because empty parameters are considered to be 0; otherwise, the text too small is returned. + =IF(A1>5;100;) If the value in A1 is less than 5, the value 0 is returned because the empty OtherwiseValue is interpreted as 0; otherwise 100 is returned. +
+
+NOT function + + +

NOT

+ Complements (inverts) a logical value. + + NOT(LogicalValue) + + LogicalValue is any value to be complemented. + + + =NOT(A). If A=TRUE then NOT(A) will evaluate FALSE. +
+
+OR function + + +

OR

+ Returns TRUE if at least one argument is TRUE. This function returns the value FALSE, if all the arguments have the logical value FALSE. + The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. + + OR() + + + + The logical values of entries 12<11; 13>22, and 45=45 are to be checked. + + =OR(12<11;13>22;45=45) returns TRUE. + + =OR(FALSE;TRUE) returns TRUE. +
+
+TRUE function + + +

TRUE

+ The logical value is set to TRUE. The TRUE() function does not require any arguments, and always returns the logical value TRUE. + + TRUE() + + If A=TRUE and B=FALSE the following examples appear: + + =AND(A;B) returns FALSE + + =OR(A;B) returns TRUE + + =NOT(AND(A;B)) returns TRUE +
+
+XOR function + + +

XOR

+ Returns true if an odd number of arguments evaluates to TRUE. + The arguments are either logical expressions themselves (TRUE, 1<5, 2+3=7, B8<10) that return logical values, or arrays (A1:C3) containing logical values. + + + XOR() + + + + =XOR(TRUE;TRUE) returns FALSE + + =XOR(TRUE;TRUE;TRUE) returns TRUE + + =XOR(FALSE;TRUE) returns TRUE +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..753b9f131 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1554 @@ + + + + + + + Mathematical Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp + + + + + + + mathematical functions + Function Wizard; mathematical + functions; mathematical functions + trigonometric functions + + + +

Mathematical Functions

+This category contains the Mathematical functions for Calc. To open the Function Wizard, choose Insert - Function. + +
+ + ABS function + absolute values + values;absolute + +mw added two entries + + +

ABS

+Returns the absolute value of a number. + + +ABS(Number) +Number is the number whose absolute value is to be calculated. The absolute value of a number is its value without the +/- sign. + + +=ABS(-56) returns 56. +=ABS(12) returns 12. +=ABS(0) returns 0.see also SIGN +
+ +
+ + ACOS function + + + + +

ACOS

+Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of a number. + + +ACOS(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + + +=ACOS(-1) returns 3.14159265358979 (PI radians) +=DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60. The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + ACOSH function + + + + +

ACOSH

+Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. + + +ACOSH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cosine is Number. +Number must be greater than or equal to 1. + + +=ACOSH(1) returns 0. +=ACOSH(COSH(4)) returns 4.see also ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +
+ +
+ + ACOT function + + + + +

ACOT

+Returns the inverse cotangent (the arccotangent) of the given number. + + +ACOT(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cotangent is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + + +=ACOT(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). +=DEGREES(ACOT(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2 + +
+ +
+ + ACOTH function + + + + +

ACOTH

+Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number. + + +ACOTH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cotangent is Number. +An error results if Number is between -1 and 1 inclusive. + + +=ACOTH(1.1) returns inverse hyperbolic cotangent of 1.1, approximately 1.52226.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +
+ +
+ +

+ +
+ +
+ + ASIN function + + + + +

ASIN

+Returns the inverse trigonometric sine of a number. + + +ASIN(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric sine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose sine is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and +PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + + +=ASIN(0) returns 0. +=ASIN(1) returns 1.5707963267949 (PI/2 radians). +=DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30. The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + ASINH function + + + + +

ASINH

+Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. + + +ASINH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic sine is Number. + + +=ASINH(-90) returns approximately -5.1929877. +=ASINH(SINH(4)) returns 4.see also ACOSH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +
+ +
+ + ATAN function + + + + +

ATAN

+Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of a number. + + +ATAN(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + + +=ATAN(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). +=DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + ATAN2 function + + + + +

ATAN2

+Returns the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from the origin to the point (NumberX|NumberY). + + +ATAN2(NumberX; NumberY) +NumberX is the value of the x coordinate. +NumberY is the value of the y coordinate. +Programming languages have usually the opposite order of arguments for their atan2() function. +ATAN2 returns the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from the origin to the point (NumberX|NumberY) + + +=ATAN2(-5;9) returns 2.07789 radians. + +To get the angle in degrees apply the DEGREES function to the result. +=DEGREES(ATAN2(12.3;12.3)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ACOT +%PRODUCTNAME results 0 for ATAN2(0;0). + +The function can be used in converting cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates. +=DEGREES(ATAN2(-8;5)) returns φ = 147.9 degrees + +Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates example + + +
+ +
+ + ATANH function + + + + +

ATANH

+Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. + + +ATANH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic tangent is Number. +Number must obey the condition -1 < number < 1. + + +=ATANH(0) returns 0.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +
+ +
+ + COS function + + + + +

COS

+Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians). + + +COS(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cosine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cosine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + + +=COS(PI()*2) returns 1, the cosine of 2*PI radians. +=COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + COSH function + + + + +

COSH

+Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. + + +COSH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Number. + + +=COSH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic cosine of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+ + COT function + + + + +

COT

+Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians). + + +COT(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cotangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cotangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +The cotangent of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the tangent of that angle. + +

Examples:

+=COT(PI()/4) returns 1, the cotangent of PI/4 radians. +=COT(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the cotangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, TAN, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + COTH function + + + + +

COTH

+Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle). + + +COTH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Number. + + +=COTH(1) returns the hyperbolic cotangent of 1, approximately 1.3130.see also COSH, SINH, TANH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+ + CSC function + + + + +

CSC

+Returns the cosecant of the given angle (in radians). The cosecant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the sine of that angle + + +CSC(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cosecant of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cosecant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + + +=CSC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the sine of PI/4 radians. +=CSC(RADIANS(30)) returns 2, the cosecant of 30 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, SEC, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + CSCH function + + + + +

CSCH

+Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of a number. + + +CSCH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of Number. + + +=CSCH(1) returns approximately 0.8509181282, the hyperbolic cosecant of 1.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, SECH,ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+ + DEGREES function + converting;radians, into degrees + +mw added one entry + + +

DEGREES

+Converts radians into degrees. + + +DEGREES(Number) +Number is the angle in radians to be converted to degrees. + + +=DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 degrees.see also RADIANS +
+ +
+ + EXP function + + + + +

EXP

+Returns e raised to the power of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + + +EXP(Number) +Number is the power to which e is to be raised. + + +=EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845904, the mathematical constant e to Calc's accuracy.see also POWER, LN +
+ +
+ + FACT function + factorials;numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

FACT

+Returns the factorial of a number. + + +FACT(Number) +Returns Number!, the factorial of Number, calculated as 1*2*3*4* ... * Number. +=FACT(0) returns 1 by definition. +The factorial of a negative number returns the "invalid argument" error. + + +=FACT(3) returns 6. +=FACT(0) returns 1.see also FACTDOUBLE, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT +
+ +
+ + INT function + numbers;rounding down to next integer + rounding;down to next integer + +mw added two entries + + +

INT

+Rounds a number down to the nearest integer. + + +INT(Number) +Returns Number rounded down to the nearest integer. +Negative numbers round down to the integer below. + + +=INT(5.7) returns 5. +=INT(-1.3) returns -2.see also TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND +
+ +
+ + EVEN function + numbers;rounding up/down to even integers + rounding;up/down to even integers + +mw added two entries + + +

EVEN

+Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer. + + +EVEN(Number) +Returns Number rounded to the next even integer up, away from zero. + + +=EVEN(2.3) returns 4. +=EVEN(2) returns 2. +=EVEN(0) returns 0. +=EVEN(-0.5) returns -2.see also CEILING, FLOOR, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ + GCD function + greatest common divisor + +mw added one entry + + +

GCD

+Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. +The greatest common divisor is the positive largest integer which will divide, without remainder, each of the given integers. + + +GCD() + + + + +=GCD(16;32;24) gives the result 8, because 8 is the largest number that can divide 16, 24 and 32 without a remainder. +=GCD(B1:B3) where cells B1, B2, B3 contain 9, 12, 9 gives 3. +
+ +
+ + GCD_EXCEL2003 function + + +

GCD_EXCEL2003

+The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers. + + +GCD_EXCEL2003() + + +=GCD_EXCEL2003(5;15;25) returns 5. +
+ +
+ + LCM function + least common multiples + lowest common multiples + +mw added two entries + + +

LCM

+Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers. + + +LCM() + + + + +If you enter the numbers 512; 1024 and 2000 as Integer 1;2 and 3, then 128000 will be returned. +
+ +
+ + LCM_EXCEL2003 function + + +

LCM_EXCEL2003

+The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers. + + +LCM_EXCEL2003() + + +=LCM_EXCEL2003(5;15;25) returns 75. +
+ +
+ + COMBIN function + number of combinations + +mw added one entry +should be statistical-->add a link there + +

COMBIN

+Returns the number of combinations for elements without repetition. + + +COMBIN(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBIN returns the number of ordered ways to choose these items. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 3 different ways, namely AB, AC and BC. +COMBIN implements the formula: Count1!/(Count2!*(Count1-Count2)!) + + +=COMBIN(3;2) returns 3.see also COMBINA +
+ +
+ + COMBINA function + number of combinations with repetitions + +mw added one entry +should be statistical-->add a link there + +

COMBINA

+Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions. + + +COMBINA(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AA, AB, AC, BB, BC and CC. +COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 + + +=COMBINA(3;2) returns 6.see also COMBIN +
+ +
+

TRUNC

+ +
+ +
+ + LN function + natural logarithm + +mw added one entry + + +

LN

+Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + + +LN(Number) +Number is the value whose natural logarithm is to be calculated. + + +=LN(3) returns the natural logarithm of 3 (approximately 1.0986). +=LN(EXP(321)) returns 321.see also LOG, LOG10, EXP +
+ +
+ + LOG function + logarithms + +mw added one entry + + +

LOG

+Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base. + + +LOG(Number [; Base]) +Number is the value whose logarithm is to be calculated. +Base (optional) is the base for the logarithm calculation. If omitted, Base 10 is assumed. + + +=LOG(10;3) returns the logarithm to base 3 of 10 (approximately 2.0959). +=LOG(7^4;7) returns 4.see also LOG10, LN, POWER +
+ +
+ + LOG10 function + base-10 logarithm + +mw added one entry + + +

LOG10

+Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. + + +LOG10(Number) +Returns the logarithm to base 10 of Number. + + +=LOG10(5) returns the base-10 logarithm of 5 (approximately 0.69897).see also LOG, LN, POWER +
+ + +
+ + PI function + + + + +

PI

+Returns 3.14159265358979, the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places. + + +PI() + + +=PI() returns 3.14159265358979. +
+ +
+ + MULTINOMIAL function + + +

MULTINOMIAL

+Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments. + +MULTINOMIAL() + + + +=MULTINOMIAL(F11:H11) returns 1260, if F11 to H11 contain the values 2, 3 and 4. This corresponds to the formula =(2+3+4)! / (2!*3!*4!) +
+ +
+ + POWER function + + + + +

POWER

+Returns a number raised to another number. + + +POWER(Base; Exponent) +Returns Base raised to the power of Exponent. +The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: +Base^Exponent +=POWER(0,0) returns 1. + +=POWER(4;3) returns 64, which is 4 to the power of 3. +=4^3 also returns 4 to the power of 3.see also EXP, LOG, SQRT +
+ +
+ + SERIESSUM function + + + + +

SERIESSUM

+Sums the first terms of a power series. +SERIESSUM(x;n;m;c) = c1xn + c2xn+m + c3xn+2m + ... + cixn + (i-1)m. + + +SERIESSUM(X; N; M; Coefficients) +X is the input value for the power series. +N is the initial power +M is the increment to increase N +Coefficients is a series of coefficients. For each coefficient the series sum is extended by one section. + +=SERIESSUM(A1; 0; 1; {1; 2; 3}) calculates the value of 1+2x+3x2, where x is the value in cell A1. If A1 contains 1, the formula returns 6; if A1 contains 2, the formula returns 17; if A1 contains 3, the formula returns 34; and so on. +Refer to the SERIESSUM wiki page for more details about this function. +
+ +
+ + PRODUCT function + numbers;multiplying + multiplying;numbers + +mw added two entries + + +

PRODUCT

+Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product. + + +PRODUCT() + + + +=PRODUCT(2;3;4) returns 24.see also FACT, SUM +
+ +
+ + SUMSQ function + square number additions + sums;of square numbers + +mw added two entries + + +

SUMSQ

+Calculates the sum of the squares of a set of numbers. + +SUMSQ() + + + +If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 arguments, 29 is returned as the result. +
+ +
+ + MOD function + remainders of divisions + + + +

MOD

+Returns the remainder when one integer is divided by another. + + +MOD(Dividend; Divisor) +For integer arguments this function returns Dividend modulo Divisor, that is the remainder when Dividend is divided by Divisor. +This function is implemented as Dividend - Divisor * INT(Dividend/Divisor) , and this formula gives the result if the arguments are not integer. + + +=MOD(22;3) returns 1, the remainder when 22 is divided by 3. +=MOD(11.25;2.5) returns 1.25.see also QUOTIENT, INT +
+ +
+ + QUOTIENT function + divisions + +mw added one entry + + +

QUOTIENT

+Returns the integer part of a division operation. + + +QUOTIENT(Numerator; Denominator) +Returns the integer part of Numerator divided by Denominator. +QUOTIENT is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator) for same-sign numerator and denominator, except that it may report errors with different error codes. More generally, it is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator/SIGN(numerator/denominator))*SIGN(numerator/denominator). + + +=QUOTIENT(11;3) returns 3. The remainder of 2 is lost.see also MOD, INT +
+ +
+ + RADIANS function + converting;degrees, into radians + +mw added one entry + + +

RADIANS

+Converts degrees to radians. + + +RADIANS(Number) +Number is the angle in degrees to be converted to radians. + + +=RADIANS(90) returns 1.5707963267949, which is PI/2 to Calc's accuracy.see also DEGREES +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + ROUND function + + + + +

ROUND

+Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. + + +ROUND(Number [; Count]) +Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. + + +=ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 +=ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. +=ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. +=ROUND(2.5) returns 3. +=ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND +
+ +
+

ROUNDDOWN

+ +
+ +
+ + ROUNDUP function + + + + +

ROUNDUP

+Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision. + + +ROUNDUP(Number [; Count]) +Returns Number rounded up (away from zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds up to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds up to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds away from zero. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUND for alternatives. + + +=ROUNDUP(1.1111;2) returns 1.12. +=ROUNDUP(1.2345;1) returns 1.3. +=ROUNDUP(45.67;0) returns 46. +=ROUNDUP(-45.67) returns -46. +=ROUNDUP(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND +
+ +
+ + SEC function + + + + +

SEC

+Returns the secant of the given angle (in radians). The secant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the cosine of that angle + + +SEC(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) secant of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the secant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + + +=SEC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the cosine of PI/4 radians. +=SEC(RADIANS(60)) returns 2, the secant of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, CSC, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + SECH function + + + + +

SECH

+Returns the hyperbolic secant of a number. + + +SECH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic secant of Number. + + +=SECH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic secant of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, CSCH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+ + SIN function + + + + +

SIN

+Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians). + + +SIN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) sine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the sine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + + +=SIN(PI()/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians. +=SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees.see also COS, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + SINH function + + + + +

SINH

+Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number. + + +SINH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic sine of Number. + + +=SINH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic sine of 0.see also COSH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+

+ +
+ +
+ + SUMIF function + adding;specified numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

SUMIF

+Adds the cells specified by a given criterion. This function is used to sum a range when you search for a certain value. + + +SUMIF(Range; Criterion [; SumRange]) +Range is the range to which the criterion is to be applied. + +SumRange is the range from which values are summed. If this parameter has not been indicated, the values found in the Range are summed. +SUMIF supports the reference concatenation operator (~) only in the Criterion parameter, and only if the optional SumRange parameter is not given. + + +To sum up only negative numbers: =SUMIF(A1:A10;"<0") +=SUMIF(A1:A10;">0";B1:B10) - sums values from the range B1:B10 only if the corresponding values in the range A1:A10 are >0. +See COUNTIF() for some more syntax examples that can be used with SUMIF(). +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +

+ +
+ +
+ + TAN function + + + + +

TAN

+Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians). + + +TAN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) tangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the tangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + + +=TAN(PI()/4) returns 1, the tangent of PI/4 radians. +=TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the tangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +
+ +
+ + TANH function + + + + +

TANH

+Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. + + +TANH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Number. + + +=TANH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic tangent of 0.see also COSH, SINH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +
+ +
+ + AutoFilter function; subtotals + sums;of filtered data + filtered data; sums + SUBTOTAL function + + + +

SUBTOTAL

+Calculates subtotals. If a range already contains subtotals, these are not used for further calculations. Use this function with the AutoFilters to take only the filtered records into account. + + +SUBTOTAL(Function; Range) +Function is a number that stands for one of the following functions: + + + + + Function index + (includes hidden values) + + + Function index + (ignores hidden values) + + + Function + + + + + 1 + + + 101 + + + AVERAGE + + + + + 2 + + + 102 + + + COUNT + + + + + 3 + + + 103 + + + COUNTA + + + + + 4 + + + 104 + + + MAX + + + + + 5 + + + 105 + + + MIN + + + + + 6 + + + 106 + + + PRODUCT + + + + + 7 + + + 107 + + + STDEV + + + + + 8 + + + 108 + + + STDEVP + + + + + 9 + + + 109 + + + SUM + + + + + 10 + + + 110 + + + VAR + + + + + 11 + + + 111 + + + VARP + + +
+ +Use numbers 1-11 to include manually hidden rows or 101-111 to exclude them; filtered-out cells are always excluded. +Range is the range whose cells are included. + + + +You have a table in the cell range A1:B6 containing a bill of material for 10 students. Row 2 (Pen) is manually hidden. You want to see the sum of the figures that are displayed; that is, just the subtotal for the filtered rows. In this case the correct formula would be: + + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + ITEM + + + QUANTITY + + + + + 2 + + + Pen + + + 10 + + + + + 3 + + + Pencil + + + 10 + + + + + 4 + + + Notebook + + + 10 + + + + + 5 + + + Rubber + + + 10 + + + + + 6 + + + Sharpener + + + 10 + + +
+ +=SUBTOTAL(9;B2:B6) returns 50. +=SUBTOTAL(109;B2:B6) returns 40. +
+ +
+ + Euro; converting + EUROCONVERT function + + + + + +

EUROCONVERTinsert link in financial

+Converts between old European national currency and to and from Euros. + + +EUROCONVERT(Value; "From_currency"; "To_currency" [; full_precision [; triangulation_precision]]) +Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. +From_currency and To_currency are the currency units to convert from and to respectively. These must be text, the official abbreviation for the currency (for example, "EUR"). The rates (shown per Euro) were set by the European Commission. +Full_precision is optional. If omitted or False, the result is rounded according to the decimals of the To currency. If Full_precision is True, the result is not rounded. +Triangulation_precision is optional. If Triangulation_precision is given and >=3, the intermediate result of a triangular conversion (currency1,EUR,currency2) is rounded to that precision. If Triangulation_precision is omitted, the intermediate result is not rounded. Also if To currency is "EUR", Triangulation_precision is used as if triangulation was needed and conversion from EUR to EUR was applied. + +

Examples

+=EUROCONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") converts 100 Austrian Schillings into Euros. +=EUROCONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. +
+ +
+ + CONVERT_OOO function + + + + +

CONVERT_OOO

+Converts to euros a currency value expressed in one of the legacy currencies of 19 member states of the Eurozone, and vice versa. The conversion uses the fixed exchange rates at which the legacy currencies entered the euro. + +We recommend using the more flexible EUROCONVERT function for converting between these currencies. CONVERT_OOO is not a standardized function and is not portable. + + +CONVERT_OOO(Value; "Text1"; "Text2") +Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. +Text1 is a three-character string that specifies the currency to be converted from. +Text2 is a three-character string that specifies the currency to be converted to. +Text1 and Text2 must each take one of the following values: "ATS", "BEF", "CYP", "DEM", "EEK", "ESP", "EUR", "FIM", "FRF", "GRD", "IEP", "ITL", "LTL", "LUF", "LVL", "MTL", "NLG", "PTE", "SIT", and "SKK". +One, and only one, of Text1 or Text2 must be equal to "EUR". + + +=CONVERT_OOO(100;"ATS";"EUR") returns the euro value of 100 Austrian schillings. +=CONVERT_OOO(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 euros into German marks. +Refer to the CONVERT_OOO wiki page for more details about this function. +
+ +
+ + ODD function + rounding;up/down to nearest odd integer + +mw added one entry + + +

ODD

+Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer. + + +ODD(Number) +Returns Number rounded to the next odd integer up, away from zero. + + +=ODD(1.2) returns 3. +=ODD(1) returns 1. +=ODD(0) returns 1. +=ODD(-3.1) returns -5.see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ + SIGN function + algebraic signs + +mw added one entry + + +

SIGN

+Returns the sign of a number. Returns 1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero. + + +SIGN(Number) +Number is the number whose sign is to be determined. + + +=SIGN(3.4) returns 1. +=SIGN(-4.5) returns -1.see also ABS +
+ +
+ + MROUND function + nearest multiple + +mw added one entry + + +

MROUND

+Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number. + + +MROUND(Number; Multiple) +Returns Number rounded to the nearest multiple of Multiple. +An alternative implementation would be Multiple * ROUND(Number/Multiple). + + +=MROUND(15.5;3) returns 15, as 15.5 is closer to 15 (= 3*5) than to 18 (= 3*6). +=MROUND(1.4;0.5) returns 1.5 (= 0.5*3).see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ + SQRT function + square roots;positive numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

SQRT

+Returns the positive square root of a number. + + +SQRT(Number) +Returns the positive square root of Number. +Number must be positive. + + +=SQRT(16) returns 4. +=SQRT(-16) returns an invalid argument error.see also SQRTPI, POWER +
+ +
+ + SQRTPI function + square roots;products of Pi + +mw added one entry + + +

SQRTPI

+Returns the square root of (PI times a number). + + +SQRTPI(Number) +Returns the positive square root of (PI multiplied by Number). +This is equivalent to SQRT(PI()*Number). + + +=SQRTPI(2) returns the squareroot of (2PI), approximately 2.506628.see also SQRT +
+ +
+ +random numbers; between limits +RANDBETWEEN function + +mw changed "random numbers;" + + +

RANDBETWEEN

+Returns an integer random number in a specified range. + + +RANDBETWEEN(Bottom; Top) +Returns an integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press F9. +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells containing this function, and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). + + +=RANDBETWEEN(20;30) returns an integer of between 20 and 30.see also RAND +
+
+ +random numbers non-volatile; between limits +RANDBETWEEN.NV function + + +

RANDBETWEEN.NV

+Returns an non-volatile integer random number in a specified range. + +RANDBETWEEN.NV(Bottom; Top) +Returns an non-volatile integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). A non-volatile function is not recalculated at new input events or pressing F9. However, the function is recalculated when pressing F9 with the cursor on the cell containing the function, when opening the file, when using the Recalculate Hard command (Shift+CommandCtrl+F9) and when Top or Bottom are recalculated. + +=RANDBETWEEN.NV(20;30) returns a non-volatile integer between 20 and 30. +=RANDBETWEEN.NV(A1;30) returns a non-volatile integer between the value of cell A1 and 30. The function is recalculated when the contents of cell A1 change. + + + +ORG.LIBREOFFICE.RANDBETWEEN.NV +
+ +
+ +RAND function +random numbers;between 0 and 1 + +mw added one entry + + +

RAND

+Returns a random number between 0 and 1.The value of 0 can be returned, the value of 1 not.this is really true after issue 53642 will be fixed + + +RAND() +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press F9. +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, either: + + + Copy cells each containing =RAND(), and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). + + + Use the Fill Cell command with random numbers (Sheet - Fill Cells - Fill Random Numbers). + + + Use the RAND.NV() function for non-volatile random numbers. + + + +=RAND() returns a random number between 0 and 1.see also RANDBETWEEN +
+
+ +random numbers non-volatile;between 0 and 1 +RAND.NV function + + +

RAND.NV

+Returns a non-volatile random number between 0 and 1. + +RAND.NV() +This function produces a non-volatile random number on input. A non-volatile function is not recalculated at new input events. The function does not recalculate when pressing F9, except when the cursor is on the cell containing the function or using the Recalculate Hard command (Shift+CommandCtrl+F9). The function is recalculated when opening the file. + +=RAND.NV() returns a non-volatile random number between 0 and 1. + + + +ORG.LIBREOFFICE.RAND.NV +
+ + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86514c411 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1162 @@ + + + + + + + Array Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp + + + + +matrices; functions +Function Wizard; arrays +array formulas +inline array constants +formulas; arrays +functions; array functions +editing; array formulas +copying; array formulas +deleting; array formulas +adjusting array ranges +calculating; conditional calculations +matrices; calculations +conditional calculations with arrays +implicit array handling +forced array handling + +mw deleted "creating;" +

Array Functions

+ This category contains the array functions. +

What is an Array?

+ An array is a linked range of cells on a spreadsheet containing values. A square range of 3 rows and 3 columns is a 3 x 3 array: + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 7 + + + 31 + + + 33 + + + + + 2 + + + 95 + + + 17 + + + 2 + + + + + 3 + + + 5 + + + 10 + + + 50 + + +
+ The smallest possible array is a 1 x 2 or 2 x 1 array with two adjacent cells. +

What is an array formula?

+ A formula in which the individual values in a cell range are evaluated is referred to as an array formula. The difference between an array formula and other formulas is that the array formula deals with several values simultaneously instead of just one. + Not only can an array formula process several values, but it can also return several values. The results of an array formula is also an array. + To multiply the values in the individual cells by 10 in the above array, you do not need to apply a formula to each individual cell or value. Instead you just need to use a single array formula. Select a range of 3 x 3 cells on another part of the spreadsheet, enter the formula =10*A1:C3 and confirm this entry using the key combination CommandCtrl + Shift + Enter. The result is a 3 x 3 array in which the individual values in the cell range (A1:C3) are multiplied by a factor of 10. + In addition to multiplication, you can also use other operators on the reference range (an array). With $[officename] Calc, you can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), use exponents (^), concatenation (&) and comparisons (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=). The operators can be used on each individual value in the cell range and return the result as an array if the array formula was entered. + Comparison operators in an array formula treat empty cells in the same way as in a normal formula, that is, either as zero or as an empty string. For example, if cells A1 and A2 are empty the array formulas {=A1:A2=""} and {=A1:A2=0} will both return a 1 column 2 row array of cells containing TRUE. +

When do you use array formulas?

+ Use array formulas if you have to repeat calculations using different values. If you decide to change the calculation method later, you only have to update the array formula. To add an array formula, select the entire array range and then make the required change to the array formula. + Array formulas are also a space saving option when several values must be calculated, since they are not very memory-intensive. In addition, arrays are an essential tool for carrying out complex calculations, because you can have several cell ranges included in your calculations. $[officename] has different math functions for arrays, such as the MMULT function for multiplying two arrays or the SUMPRODUCT function for calculating the scalar products of two arrays. +

Using Array Formulas in $[officename] Calc

+ You can also create a "normal" formula in which the reference range, such as parameters, indicate an array formula. The result is obtained from the intersection of the reference range and the rows or columns in which the formula is found. If there is no intersection or if the range at the intersection covers several rows or columns, a #VALUE! error message appears. The following example illustrates this concept: +

Creating Array Formulas

+
+ If you create an array formula using the Function Wizard, you must mark the Array check box each time so that the results are returned in an array. Otherwise, only the value in the upper-left cell of the array being calculated is returned. + If you enter the array formula directly into the cell, you must use the key combination Shift + CommandCtrl + Enter instead of the Enter key. Only then does the formula become an array formula. + Array formulas appear in braces in $[officename] Calc. You cannot create array formulas by manually entering the braces. +
+ The cells in a results array are automatically protected against changes. However, you can edit, delete or copy the array formula by selecting the entire array cell range. +

Using Inline Array Constants in Formulas

+ Calc supports inline matrix/array constants in formulas. An inline array is surrounded by curly braces '{' and '}'. Elements can be each a number (including negatives), a logical constant (TRUE, FALSE), or a literal string. Non-constant expressions are not allowed. Arrays can be entered with one or more rows, and one or more columns. All rows must consist of the same number of elements, all columns must consist of the same number of elements. + The column separator (separating elements in one row) and the row separator are language and locale dependent. But in this help content, the ';' semicolon and '|' pipe symbol are used to indicate the column and row separators, respectively. For example, in the English locale, the ',' comma is used as the column separator, while the ';' semicolon is used as the row separator. + You can view and change the row and column separator in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Calc - Formula - Separators. + Arrays can not be nested. + Examples: + ={1;2;3} + An array with one row consisting of the three numbers 1, 2, and 3. + To enter this array constant, you select three cells in a row, then you type the formula ={1;2;3} using the curly braces and the semicolons, then press CommandCtrl + Shift + Enter. + ={1;2;3|4;5;6} + An array with two rows and three values in each row. + ={0;1;2|FALSE;TRUE;"two"} + A mixed data array. + =SIN({1;2;3}) + Entered as a matrix formula, delivers the result of three SIN calculations with the arguments 1, 2, and 3. +

Editing Array Formulas

+ + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. To select the whole array, position the cell cursor inside the array range, then press CommandCtrl + /, where / is the division key on the numeric keypad. + + + Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. Both of these actions let you edit the formula. + + + After you have made changes, press CommandCtrl + Shift + Enter. + + + You can format the separate parts of an array. For example, you can change the font color. Select a cell range and then change the attribute you want. + +

Deleting Array Formulae

+ + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. To select the whole array, position the cell cursor inside the array range, then press CommandCtrl + /, where / is the division key on the numeric keypad. + + + Press Delete to delete the array contents, including the array formula, or press Backspace and this brings up the Delete Contents dialog box. Select Formula or Delete All and click OK. + + + +

Copying Array Formulas

+ + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. + + + Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. + + + Copy the formula into the input line by pressing CommandCtrl + C. + + + Select a range of cells where you want to insert the array formula and either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. + + + Paste the formula by pressing CommandCtrl + V in the selected space and confirm it by pressing CommandCtrl + Shift + Enter. The selected range now contains the array formula. + + +

Adjusting an Array Range

+ If you want to edit the output array, do the following: + + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. + + + Below the selection, to the right, you will see a small icon with which you can zoom in or out on the range using your mouse. + + + When you adjust the array range, the array formula will not automatically be adjusted. You are only changing the range in which the result will appear. + By holding down the CommandCtrl key, you can create a copy of the array formula in the given range. +

Conditional Array Calculations

+ A conditional array calculation is an array or matrix formula that includes an IF() or CHOOSE() function. The condition argument in the formula is an area reference or a matrix result. + In the following example, the >0 test of the {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} formula is applied to each cell in the range A1:A3 and the result is copied to the corresponding cell. + + + + + + A + + + B (formula) + + + B (result) + + + + + 1 + + + 1 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + yes + + + + + 2 + + + 0 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + no + + + + + 3 + + + 1 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + yes + + +
+ The following functions provide forced array handling: CORREL, COVAR, FORECAST, FTEST, INTERCEPT, MDETERM, MINVERSE, MMULT, MODE, PEARSON, PROB, RSQ, SLOPE, STEYX, SUMPRODUCT, SUMX2MY2, SUMX2PY2, SUMXMY2, TTEST. If you use area references as arguments when you call one of these functions, the functions behave as array functions. The following table provides an example of forced array handling: + + + + + + A + + + B (formula) + + + B (result) + + + C (forced array formula) + + + C (result) + + + + + 1 + + + 1 + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + 2 + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + + + + + 2 + + + 2 + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + 3 + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + + + + + 3 + + + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + #VALUE! + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + + +
+ +
+ +MUNIT function + + +

MUNIT

+ Returns the unitary square array of a certain size. The unitary array is a square array where the main diagonal elements equal 1 and all other array elements are equal to 0. + + MUNIT(Dimensions) + Dimensions refers to the size of the array unit. + You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. + + Select a square range within the spreadsheet, for example, from A1 to E5. + Without deselecting the range, select the MUNIT function. Mark the Array check box. Enter the desired dimensions for the array unit, in this case 5, and click OK. + You can also enter the =MUNIT(5) formula in the last cell of the selected range (E5), and press Shift + Command + EnterShift + Ctrl + Enter. + You now see a unit array with a range of A1:E5. + +
+
+ +FREQUENCY function + + +

FREQUENCY

+ Indicates the frequency distribution in a one-column-array. The function counts the number of values in the Data array that are within the values given by the Classes array. + + FREQUENCY(Data; Classes) + Data represents the reference to the values to be counted. + Classes represents the array of the limit values. + + You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. + + In the following table, column A lists unsorted measurement values. Column B contains the upper limit you entered for the classes into which you want to divide the data in column A. According to the limit entered in B1, the FREQUENCY function returns the number of measured values less than or equal to 5. As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 and less than or equal to 10. The text you entered in B6, ">25", is only for reference purposes.i77461: replace old text: As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 or greater than or equal to 10.UFI: replace table by picture + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 12 + + + 5 + + + 1 + + + + + 2 + + + 8 + + + 10 + + + 3 + + + + + 3 + + + 24 + + + 15 + + + 2 + + + + + 4 + + + 11 + + + 20 + + + 3 + + + + + 5 + + + 5 + + + 25 + + + 1 + + + + + 6 + + + 20 + + + >25 + + + 1 + + + + + 7 + + + 16 + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + 9 + + + + + + + + + 9 + + + 7 + + + + + + + + + 10 + + + 16 + + + + + + + + + 11 + + + 33 + + + + + + +
+ Select a single column range in which to enter the frequency according to the class limits. You must select one field more than the class ceiling. In this example, select the range C1:C6. Call up the FREQUENCY function in the Function Wizard. Select the Data range in (A1:A11), and then the Classes range in which you entered the class limits (B1:B6). Select the Array check box and click OK. You will see the frequency count in the range C1:C6. + +
+
+ +MDETERM function +determinants + + +

MDETERM

+ Returns the array determinant of an array. This function returns a value in the current cell; it is not necessary to define a range for the results. + + MDETERM(Array) + Array represents a square array in which the determinants are defined. + You can find a general introduction to using Array functions on top of this page. + +
+
+ +MINVERSE function +inverse arrays + + +

MINVERSE

+ Returns the inverse array. + + MINVERSE(Array) + Array represents a square array that is to be inverted. + + + Select a square range and select MINVERSE. Select the output array, select the Array field and click OK. +
+
+ +MMULT function + + +

MMULT

+ Calculates the array product of two arrays. The number of columns for array 1 must match the number of rows for array 2. The square array has an equal number of rows and columns. + + MMULT(Array 1; Array 2) + Array 1 represents the first array used in the array product. + Array 2 represents the second array with the same number of rows. + + + Select a square range. Choose the MMULT function. Select Array 1, then select Array 2. Using the Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. Click OK. The output array will appear in the first selected range. +
+
+ +TRANSPOSE function + + +

TRANSPOSE

+ Transposes the rows and columns of an array. + + TRANSPOSE(Array) + Array represents the array in the spreadsheet that is to be transposed. + You can find a general introduction to using Array functions on top of this page. + + In the spreadsheet, select the range in which the transposed array can appear. If the original array has n rows and m columns, your selected range must have at least m rows and n columns. Then enter the formula directly, select the original array and press Shift + Command + EnterShift + Ctrl + Enter. Or, if you are using the Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. The transposed array appears in the selected target range and is protected automatically against changes. + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + + + 1 + + + 2 + + + 3 + + + 4 + + + 5 + + + + + 2 + + + 6 + + + 7 + + + 8 + + + 9 + + +
+ The above table is 2 rows, 4 columns. In order to transpose it, you must select 4 rows, 2 columns. Assuming you want to transpose the above table to the range A7:B10 (4 rows, 2 columns) you must select the entire range and then enter the following: + TRANSPOSE(A1:D2) + Then make sure to enter it as matrix formula with Shift + Command + EnterShift + Ctrl + Enter. The result will be as follows: + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 7 + + + 2 + + + 6 + + + + + 8 + + + 3 + + + 7 + + + + + 9 + + + 4 + + + 8 + + + + + 10 + + + 5 + + + 9 + + +
+
+
+ +LINEST function + + +

LINEST

+ Returns a table of statistics for a straight line that best fits a data set.changed based on https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_LINEST_function (issue 76142) + + LINEST(data_Y [; data_X [; linearType [; stats]]]) + data_Y is a single row or column range specifying the y coordinates in a set of data points. + data_X is a corresponding single row or column range specifying the x coordinates. If data_X is omitted it defaults to 1, 2, 3, ..., n. If there is more than one set of variables data_X may be a range with corresponding multiple rows or columns. + LINEST finds a straight line y = a + bx that best fits the data, using linear regression (the "least squares" method). With more than one set of variables the straight line is of the form y = a + b1x1 + b2x2 ... + bnxn. + If linearType is FALSE the straight line found is forced to pass through the origin (the constant a is zero; y = bx). If omitted, linearType defaults to TRUE (the line is not forced through the origin). + If stats is omitted or FALSE only the top line of the statistics table is returned. If TRUE the entire table is returned. + LINEST returns a table (array) of statistics as below and must be entered as an array formula (for example by using CommandCtrl + Shift + Return rather than just Return). + + + + This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range for the answers and then the function. Select data_Y. If you want, you can enter other parameters. Select Array and click OK. + The results returned by the system (if stats = 0), will at least show the slope of the regression line and its intersection with the Y axis. If stats does not equal 0, other results are to be displayed. +

Other LINEST Results:

+ Examine the following examples: + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + F + + + G + + + + + 1 + + + x1 + + + x2 + + + y + + + + + LINEST value + + + + + + + + + 2 + + + 4 + + + 7 + + + 100 + + + + + 4,17 + + + -3,48 + + + 82,33 + + + + + 3 + + + 5 + + + 9 + + + 105 + + + + + 5,46 + + + 10,96 + + + 9,35 + + + + + 4 + + + 6 + + + 11 + + + 104 + + + + + 0,87 + + + 5,06 + + + #NA + + + + + 5 + + + 7 + + + 12 + + + 108 + + + + + 13,21 + + + 4 + + + #NA + + + + + 6 + + + 8 + + + 15 + + + 111 + + + + + 675,45 + + + 102,26 + + + #NA + + + + + 7 + + + 9 + + + 17 + + + 120 + + + + + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + 10 + + + 19 + + + 133 + + + + + + + + + + +
+ Column A contains several X1 values, column B several X2 values and column C the Y values. You have already entered these values in your spreadsheet. You have now set up E2:G6 in the spreadsheet and activated the Function Wizard. For the LINEST function to work, you must have marked the Array check box in the Function Wizard. Next, select the following values in the spreadsheet (or enter them using the keyboard): + data_Y is C2:C8 + data_X is A2:B8 + linearType and stats are both set to 1. + As soon as you click OK, $[officename] Calc will fill the above example with the LINEST values as shown in the example. + The formula in the Formula bar corresponds to each cell of the LINEST array {=LINEST(C2:C8;A2:B8;1;1)}. + This represents the calculated LINEST values: + +slopes, see also regression lines +regression lines; LINEST function + +mw made "regression lines" a two level entry + E2 and F2: Slope m of the regression line y=b+m*x for the x1 and x2 values. The values are given in reverse order; that is, the slope for x2 in E2 and the slope for x1 in F2. + G2: Intersection b with the y axis. + +standard errors; array functions + +MW changed "standard errors" + E3 and F3: The standard error of the slope value. + G3: The standard error of the intercept + +RSQ calculations + + E4: RSQ + F4: The standard error of the regression calculated for the Y value. + E5: The F value from the variance analysis. + F5: The degrees of freedom from the variance analysis. + E6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y values from their linear mean. + F6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y value from the given Y values. + +
+
+ +LOGEST function + + +

LOGEST

+ This function calculates the adjustment of the entered data as an exponential regression curve (y=b*m^x).UFI: see http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?kbid=828528&product=xl2003 for bug #i31051# + + LOGEST(DataY [; DataX [; FunctionType [; Stats]]]) + DataY represents the Y Data array. + DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. + FunctionType (optional). If Function_Type = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. + Stats (optional). If Stats=0, only the regression coefficient is calculated. + + + + See LINEST. However, no square sum will be returned. +
+
+ +SUMPRODUCT function +scalar products +dot products +inner products + + +

SUMPRODUCT

+ Multiplies corresponding elements in the given arrays, and returns the sum of those products. + + SUMPRODUCT(Array 1[; Array 2;][...;[Array 255]]) + Array 1[; Array 2;][...;[Array 255]] represent arrays whose corresponding elements are to be multiplied. + At least one array must be part of the argument list. If only one array is given, all array elements are summed. If more than one array is given, they must all be the same size. + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + + + 1 + + + 2 + + + 3 + + + 4 + + + 5 + + + + + 2 + + + 6 + + + 7 + + + 8 + + + 9 + + + + + 3 + + + 10 + + + 11 + + + 12 + + + 13 + + +
+ =SUMPRODUCT(A1:B3;C1:D3) returns 397. + Calculation: A1*C1 + B1*D1 + A2*C2 + B2*D2 + A3*C3 + B3*D3 + You can use SUMPRODUCT to calculate the scalar product of two vectors. + SUMPRODUCT returns a single number, it is not necessary to enter the function as an array function. + +
+
+ +SUMX2MY2 function + + +

SUMX2MY2

+ Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. + + SUMX2MY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) + ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. + ArrayY represents the second array whose elements are to be squared and subtracted. + +
+
+ +SUMX2PY2 function + + +

SUMX2PY2

+ Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. + + SUMX2PY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) + ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. + ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be squared and added. + +
+
+ +SUMXMY2 function + + +

SUMXMY2

+ Adds the squares of the variance between corresponding values in two arrays. + + SUMXMY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) + ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. + ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. + +
+
+ +TREND function + + +

TREND

+ Returns values along a linear trend. + + TREND(DataY [; DataX [; NewDataX [; LinearType]]]) + DataY represents the Y Data array. + DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. + NewDataX (optional) represents the array of the X data, which are used for recalculating values. + LinearType (optional). If LinearType = 0, then lines will be calculated through the zero point. Otherwise, offset lines will also be calculated. The default is LinearType <> 0. + + + + Select a spreadsheet range in which the trend data will appear. Select the function. Enter the output data or select it with the mouse. Mark the Array field, click OK. The trend data calculated from the output data is displayed. +
+
+ +GROWTH function +exponential trends in arrays + + +

GROWTH

+ Calculates the points of an exponential trend in an array. + + GROWTH(DataY [; [ DataX ] [; [ NewDataX ] [; FunctionType ] ] ]) + DataY represents the Y Data array. + DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. + NewDataX (optional) represents the X data array, in which the values are recalculated. + FunctionType (optional). If FunctionType = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. + + + + This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range where you want the answers to appear and select the function. Select DataY. Enter any other parameters, mark Array and click OK. +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4246cc6be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + +Statistics Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp + + + +statistics functions +Function Wizard; statistics +functions; statistics functions + +

Statistics Functions

+This category contains the Statistics functions. + +
+ +
+Some of the examples use the following data table: + + + + + +C + + +D + + + + +2 + + +x value + + +y value + + + + +3 + + +-5 + + +-3 + + + + +4 + + +-2 + + +0 + + + + +5 + + +-1 + + +1 + + + + +6 + + +0 + + +3 + + + + +7 + + +2 + + +4 + + + + +8 + + +4 + + +6 + + + + +9 + + +6 + + +8 + + +
+ +The statistical functions are described in the following subsections. + + + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99e061ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,700 @@ + + + + + + + + + Spreadsheet Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp + + + +spreadsheets; functions + Function Wizard; spreadsheets + functions; spreadsheets + +

Spreadsheet Functions

+ This section contains descriptions of the Spreadsheet functions together with an example. +
+ +
+ +
+ADDRESS function + + +

ADDRESS

+ Returns a cell address (reference) as text, according to the specified row and column numbers. You can determine whether the address is interpreted as an absolute address (for example, $A$1) or as a relative address (as A1) or in a mixed form (A$1 or $A1). You can also specify the name of the sheet. +
+ For interoperability the ADDRESS and INDIRECT functions support an optional parameter to specify whether the R1C1 address notation instead of the usual A1 notation should be used. + In ADDRESS, the parameter is inserted as the fourth parameter, shifting the optional sheet name parameter to the fifth position. + In INDIRECT, the parameter is appended as the second parameter. + In both functions, if the argument is inserted with the value 0, then the R1C1 notation is used. If the argument is not given or has a value other than 0, then the A1 notation is used. + In case of R1C1 notation, ADDRESS returns address strings using the exclamation mark '!' as the sheet name separator, and INDIRECT expects the exclamation mark as sheet name separator. Both functions still use the dot '.' sheet name separator with A1 notation. + When opening documents from ODF 1.0/1.1 format, the ADDRESS functions that show a sheet name as the fourth parameter will shift that sheet name to become the fifth parameter. A new fourth parameter with the value 1 will be inserted. + When storing a document in ODF 1.0/1.1 format, if ADDRESS functions have a fourth parameter, that parameter will be removed. + Do not save a spreadsheet in the old ODF 1.0/1.1 format if the ADDRESS function's new fourth parameter was used with a value of 0. + The INDIRECT function is saved without conversion to ODF 1.0/1.1 format. If the second parameter was present, an older version of Calc will return an error for that function. +
+ + ADDRESS(Row; Column [; Abs [; A1 [; "Sheet"]]]) + + Row represents the row number for the cell reference + + Column represents the column number for the cell reference (the number, not the letter) + + Abs determines the type of reference: + 1: absolute ($A$1) + 2: row reference type is absolute; column reference is relative (A$1) + 3: row (relative); column (absolute) ($A1) + 4: relative (A1) + + A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. + + Sheet represents the name of the sheet. It must be placed in double quotes. +

Example:

+ + =ADDRESS(1;1;2;;"Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1i 101187 + If the formula above is in cell B2 of current sheet, and the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6. +
+
+AREAS function + + +

AREAS

+ Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. + The function expects a single argument. If you state multiple ranges, you must enclose them into additional parentheses. Multiple ranges can be entered using the semicolon (;) as divider, but this gets automatically converted to the tilde (~) operator. The tilde is used to join ranges. + + AREAS(Reference) + Reference represents the reference to a cell or cell range. + + + =AREAS((A1:B3;F2;G1)) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. After entry this gets converted to =AREAS((A1:B3~F2~G1)). + + =AREAS(All) returns 1 if you have defined an area named All under Data - Define Range. +
+
+DDE function + + +

DDE

+ Returns the result of a DDE-based link. If the contents of the linked range or section changes, the returned value will also change. You must reload the spreadsheet or choose Edit - Links to see the updated links. Cross-platform links, for example from a %PRODUCTNAME installation running on a Windows machine to a document created on a Linux machine, are not allowed. + + DDE("Server"; "File"; "Range" [; Mode]) + + Server is the name of a server application. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name "soffice". + + File is the complete file name, including path specification. + + Range is the area containing the data to be evaluated. + + Mode is an optional parameter that controls the method by which the DDE server converts its data into numbers. + + + + + Mode + + + + + Effect + + + + + + 0 or missing + + + Number format from the "Default" cell style + + + + + 1 + + + Data are always interpreted in the standard format for US English + + + + + 2 + + + Data are retrieved as text; no conversion to numbers + + +
+ + + + =DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\data1.ods";"sheet1.A1") reads the contents of cell A1 in sheet1 of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc spreadsheet data1.ods. + + =DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\motto.odt";"Today's motto") returns a motto in the cell containing this formula. First, you must enter a line in the motto.odt document containing the motto text and define it as the first line of a section named Today's Motto (in %PRODUCTNAME Writer under Insert - Section). If the motto is modified (and saved) in the %PRODUCTNAME Writer document, the motto is updated in all %PRODUCTNAME Calc cells in which this DDE link is defined. +
+
+ERRORTYPE function + + +

ERRORTYPE

+ Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell. With the aid of this number, you can generate an error message text. + + The Status Bar displays the predefined error code from %PRODUCTNAME if you click the cell containing the error. + + ERRORTYPE(Reference) + + Reference contains the address of the cell in which the error occurs. + + If cell A1 displays Err:518, the function =ERRORTYPE(A1) returns the number 518. + + + ORG.OPENOFFICE.ERRORTYPE +
+
+

+ +
+
+INDEX function + + +

INDEX

+ INDEX returns a sub range, specified by row and column number, or an optional range index. Depending on context, INDEX returns a reference or content.UFI: will change with i4904; see http://so-web.germany.sun.com/iBIS/servlet/edit.ControlPanel?tid=i57108changed by i83070 + + INDEX(Reference [; Row [; Column [; Range]]]) + + Reference is a reference, entered either directly or by specifying a range name. If the reference consists of multiple ranges, you must enclose the reference or range name in parentheses. + + Row (optional) represents the row index of the reference range, for which to return a value. In case of zero (no specific row) all referenced rows are returned. + + Column (optional) represents the column index of the reference range, for which to return a value. In case of zero (no specific column) all referenced columns are returned. + + Range (optional) represents the index of the subrange if referring to a multiple range. + + + =INDEX(Prices;4;1) returns the value from row 4 and column 1 of the database range defined in Data - Define as Prices. + + =INDEX(SumX;4;1) returns the value from the range SumX in row 4 and column 1 as defined in Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. + + =INDEX(A1:B6;1) returns a reference to the first row of A1:B6. + + =INDEX(A1:B6;0;1) returns a reference to the first column of A1:B6. + + =INDEX((multi);4;1) indicates the value contained in row 4 and column 1 of the (multiple) range, which you named under Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define as multi. The multiple range may consist of several rectangular ranges, each with a row 4 and column 1. If you now want to call the second block of this multiple range enter the number 2 as the range parameter. + + =INDEX(A1:B6;1;1) indicates the value in the upper-left of the A1:B6 range. + + =INDEX((multi);0;0;2) returns a reference to the second range of the multiple range. +
+
+INDIRECT function + + +

INDIRECT

+ Returns the reference specified by a text string. This function can also be used to return the area of a corresponding string. + + + + INDIRECT(Ref [; A1]) + + Ref represents a reference to a cell or an area (in text form) for which to return the contents. + + A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. + If you open an Excel spreadsheet that uses indirect addresses calculated from string functions, the sheet addresses will not be translated automatically. For example, the Excel address in INDIRECT("[filename]sheetname!"&B1) is not converted into the Calc address in INDIRECT("filename#sheetname."&B1).UFI: for #i34465# + + + =INDIRECT(A1) equals 100 if A1 contains C108 as a reference and cell C108 contains a value of 100. + + =SUM(INDIRECT("a1:" & ADDRESS(1;3))) totals the cells in the area of A1 up to the cell with the address defined by row 1 and column 3. This means that area A1:C1 is totaled. +
+
+COLUMN function + + +

COLUMN

+ Returns the column number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell the column number of the cell is returned; if the parameter is a cell area, the corresponding column numbers are returned in a single-row array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the COLUMN function with an area reference parameter is not used for an array formula, only the column number of the first cell within the area is determined. + + COLUMN([Reference]) + + Reference is the reference to a cell or cell area whose first column number is to be found. + If no reference is entered, the column number of the cell in which the formula is entered is found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. + + + =COLUMN(A1) equals 1. Column A is the first column in the table. + + =COLUMN(C3:E3) equals 3. Column C is the third column in the table. + + =COLUMN(D3:G10) returns 4 because column D is the fourth column in the table and the COLUMN function is not used as an array formula. (In this case, the first value of the array is always used as the result.) + + {=COLUMN(B2:B7)} and =COLUMN(B2:B7) both return 2 because the reference only contains column B as the second column in the table. Because single-column areas have only one column number, it does not make a difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula. + + =COLUMN() returns 3 if the formula was entered in column C. + + {=COLUMN(Rabbit)} returns the single-row array (3, 4) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). +
+
+COLUMNS function + + +

COLUMNS

+ Returns the number of columns in the given reference. + + COLUMNS(Array) + + Array is the reference to a cell range whose total number of columns is to be found. The argument can also be a single cell. + + + =COLUMNS(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one column. + + =COLUMNS(A1:C5) equals 3. The reference comprises three columns. + + =COLUMNS(Rabbit) returns 2 if Rabbit is the named range (C1:D3). +
+
+vertical search function + VLOOKUP function + + +

VLOOKUP

+Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right. This function checks if a specific value is contained in the first column of an array. The function then returns the value in the same row of the column named by Index. If the Sorted parameter is omitted or set to TRUE or one, it is assumed that the data is sorted in ascending order. In this case, if the exact Lookup is not found, the last value that is smaller than the criterion will be returned. If Sorted is set to FALSE or zero, an exact match must be found, otherwise the error Error: Value Not Available will be the result. Thus with a value of zero the data does not need to be sorted in ascending order. + + + =VLOOKUP(Lookup; Array; Index [; SortedRangeLookup]) + + Lookup is the value of any type looked for in the first column of the array. + + Array is the reference, which is to comprise at least as many columns as the number passed in Index argument. + + Index is the number of the column in the array that contains the value to be returned. The first column has the number 1. + + SortedRangeLookup is an optional parameter that indicates whether the first column in the array contains range boundaries instead of plain values. In this mode, the lookup returns the value in the row with first column having value equal to or less than Lookup. E.g., it could contain dates when some tax value had been changed, and so the values represent starting dates of a period when a specific tax value was effective. Thus, searching for a date that is absent in the first array column, but falls between some existing boundary dates, would give the lower of them, allowing to find out the data being effective to the searched date. Enter the Boolean value FALSE or zero if the first column is not a range boundary list. When this parameter is TRUE or not given, the first column in the array must be sorted in ascending order. Sorted columns can be searched much faster and the function always returns a value, even if the search value was not matched exactly, if it is greater than the lowest value of the sorted list. In unsorted lists, the search value must be matched exactly. Otherwise the function will return #N/A with message: Error: Value Not Available. + + + You want to enter the number of a dish on the menu in cell A1, and the name of the dish is to appear as text in the neighboring cell (B1) immediately. The Number to Name assignment is contained in the D1:E100 array. D1 contains 100, E1 contains the name Vegetable Soup, and so forth, for 100 menu items. The numbers in column D are sorted in ascending order; thus, the optional Sorted parameter is not necessary. + Enter the following formula in B1: + + =VLOOKUP(A1;D1:E100;2) + + As soon as you enter a number in A1 B1 will show the corresponding text contained in the second column of reference D1:E100. Entering a nonexistent number displays the text with the next number down. To prevent this, enter FALSE as the last parameter in the formula so that an error message is generated when a nonexistent number is entered. +
+
+sheet numbers; looking up + SHEET function + + +

SHEET

+ Returns the sheet number of either a reference or a string representing a sheet name. If you do not enter any parameters, the result is the sheet number of the spreadsheet containing the formula. + + SHEET([Reference]) + + Reference is optional and is the reference to a cell, an area, or a sheet name string. + + + =SHEET(Sheet2.A1) returns 2 if Sheet2 is the second sheet in the spreadsheet document. + + =SHEET("Sheet3") returns 3 if Sheet3 is the third sheet in the spreadsheet document. +
+
+number of sheets; function + SHEETS function + + +

SHEETS

+ Determines the number of sheets in a reference. If you do not enter any parameters, it returns the number of sheets in the current document. + + SHEETS([Reference]) + + Reference is the reference to a sheet or an area. This parameter is optional. + + + =SHEETS(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.G12) returns 3 if Sheet1, Sheet2, and Sheet3 exist in the sequence indicated. +
+
+MATCH function + + +

MATCH

+ Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value. The function returns the position of the value found in the lookup_array as a number. + + MATCH(Search; LookupArray [; Type]) + + Search is the value which is to be searched for in the single-row or single-column array. + + LookupArray is the reference searched. A lookup array can be a single row or column, or part of a single row or column. + + Type may take the values 1, 0, or -1. If Type = 1 or if this optional parameter is missing, it is assumed that the first column of the search array is sorted in ascending order. If Type = -1 it is assumed that the column in sorted in descending order. This corresponds to the same function in Microsoft Excel. + If Type = 0, only exact matches are found. If the search criterion is found more than once, the function returns the index of the first matching value. Only if Type = 0 can you search for regular expressions (if enabled in calculation options) or wildcards (if enabled in calculation options). + If Type = 1 or the third parameter is missing, the index of the last value that is smaller or equal to the search criterion is returned. For Type = -1, the index of the last value that is larger or equal is returned. + + + + =MATCH(200;D1:D100) searches the area D1:D100, which is sorted by column D, for the value 200. As soon as this value is reached, the number of the row in which it was found is returned. If a higher value is found during the search in the column, the number of the previous row is returned. +
+
+OFFSET function + + +

OFFSET

+ Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point. + + + OFFSET(Reference; Rows; Columns [; Height [; Width]]) + + Reference is the reference from which the function searches for the new reference. + + Rows is the number of rows by which the reference was corrected up (negative value) or down. Use 0 to stay in the same row. + + Columns is the number of columns by which the reference was corrected to the left (negative value) or to the right. Use 0 to stay in the same column + + Height (optional) is the vertical height for an area that starts at the new reference position. + + Width (optional) is the horizontal width for an area that starts at the new reference position. + Arguments Rows and Columns must not lead to zero or negative start row or column. + Arguments Height and Width must not lead to zero or negative count of rows or columns. + + + + + + =OFFSET(A1;2;2) returns the value in cell C3 (A1 moved by two rows and two columns down). If C3 contains the value 100 this function returns the value 100. + + =OFFSET(B2:C3;1;1) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved down by 1 row and one column to the right (C3:D4). + + =OFFSET(B2:C3;-1;-1) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved up by 1 row and one column to the left (A1:B2). + + =OFFSET(B2:C3;0;0;3;4) returns a reference to B2:C3 resized to 3 rows and 4 columns (B2:E4). + + =OFFSET(B2:C3;1;0;3;4) returns a reference to B2:C3 moved down by one row resized to 3 rows and 4 columns (B3:E5). + + =SUM(OFFSET(A1;2;2;5;6)) determines the total of the area that starts in cell C3 and has a height of 5 rows and a width of 6 columns (area=C3:H7). + If Width or Height are given, the OFFSET function returns a cell range reference. If Reference is a single cell reference and both Width and Height are omitted, a single cell reference is returned. +
+
+LOOKUP function + + +

LOOKUP

+ Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range. Optionally, the assigned value (of the same index) is returned in a different column and row. As opposed to VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP, search and result vector may be at different positions; they do not have to be adjacent. Additionally, the search vector for the LOOKUP must be sorted ascending, otherwise the search will not return any usable results. + If LOOKUP cannot find the search criterion, it matches the largest value in the search vector that is less than or equal to the search criterion. + + + LOOKUP(Lookup; SearchVector [; ResultVector]) + + Lookup is the value of any type to be looked for; entered either directly or as a reference. + + SearchVector is the single-row or single-column area to be searched. + + ResultVector is another single-row or single-column range from which the result of the function is taken. The result is the cell of the result vector with the same index as the instance found in the search vector. + + + + =LOOKUP(A1;D1:D100;F1:F100) searches the corresponding cell in range D1:D100 for the number you entered in A1. For the instance found, the index is determined, for example, the 12th cell in this range. Then, the contents of the 12th cell are returned as the value of the function (in the result vector). +
+
+STYLE function + + +

STYLE

+ Applies a style to the cell containing the formula. After a set amount of time, another style can be applied. This function always returns the value 0, allowing you to add it to another function without changing the value. Together with the CURRENT function you can apply a color to a cell depending on the value. For example: =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"red";"green")) applies the style "red" to the cell if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the style "green" is applied. Both cell formats, "red" and "green" have to be defined beforehand. + + STYLE("Style" [; Time [; "Style2"]]) + + Style is the name of a cell style assigned to the cell. Style names must be entered in quotation marks. + + Time is an optional time range in seconds. If this parameter is missing the style will not be changed after a certain amount of time has passed. + + Style2 is the optional name of a cell style assigned to the cell after a certain amount of time has passed. If this parameter is missing "Default" is assumed. + + + + + + =STYLE("Invisible";60;"Default") formats the cell in transparent format for 60 seconds after the document was recalculated or loaded, then the Default format is assigned. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. + Since STYLE() has a numeric return value of zero, this return value gets appended to a string. This can be avoided using T() as in the following example: + + ="Text"&T(STYLE("myStyle")) + + See also CURRENT() for another example. + + + ORG.OPENOFFICE.STYLE +
+
+CHOOSE function + + +

CHOOSE

+ Uses an index to return a value from a list of up to 30 values. + + CHOOSE(Index; Value 1 [; Value 2 [; ... [; Value 30]]]) + + Index is a reference or number between 1 and 30 indicating which value is to be taken from the list. + + Value 1, Value 2, ..., Value 30 is the list of values entered as a reference to a cell or as individual values. + + + =CHOOSE(A1;B1;B2;B3;"Today";"Yesterday";"Tomorrow"), for example, returns the contents of cell B2 for A1 = 2; for A1 = 4, the function returns the text "Today". +
+
+HLOOKUP function + + +

HLOOKUP

+ Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area. This function verifies if the first row of an array contains a certain value. The function returns then the value in a row of the array, named in the Index, in the same column. + + + HLOOKUP(Lookup; Array; Index [; SortedRangeLookup]) + For an explanation on the parameters, see: VLOOKUP (columns and rows are exchanged) + + + Suppose we have built a small database table occupying the cell range A1:DO4 and containing basic information about 118 chemical elements. The first column contains the row headings “Element”, “Symbol”, “Atomic Number”, and “Relative Atomic Mass”. Subsequent columns contain the relevant information for each of the elements, ordered left to right by atomic number. For example, cells B1:B4 contain “Hydrogen”, “H”, “1” and “1.008”, while cells DO1:DO4 contain “Oganesson”, “Og”, “118”, and “294”. + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + ... + + + DO + + + + + 1 + + + Element + + + Hydrogen + + + Helium + + + Lithium + + + ... + + + Oganesson + + + + + 2 + + + Symbol + + + H + + + He + + + Li + + + ... + + + Og + + + + + 3 + + + Atomic Number + + + 1 + + + 2 + + + 3 + + + ... + + + 118 + + + + + 4 + + + Relative Atomic Mass + + + 1.008 + + + 4.0026 + + + 6.94 + + + ... + + + 294 + + +
+ =HLOOKUP("Lead"; $A$1:$DO$4; 2; 0) returns “Pb”, the symbol for lead. + =HLOOKUP("Gold"; $A$1:$DO$4; 3; 0) returns 79, the atomic number for gold. + =HLOOKUP("Carbon"; $A$1:$DO$4; 4; 0) returns 12.011, the relative atomic mass of carbon. +
+
+ROW function + + +

ROW

+ Returns the row number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell, it returns the row number of the cell. If the reference is a cell range, it returns the corresponding row numbers in a one-column Array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the ROW function with a range reference is not used in an array formula, only the row number of the first range cell will be returned. + + ROW([Reference]) + + Reference is a cell, an area, or the name of an area. + If you do not indicate a reference, the row number of the cell in which the formula is entered will be found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. + + + =ROW(B3) returns 3 because the reference refers to the third row in the table. + + {=ROW(D5:D8)} returns the single-column array (5, 6, 7, 8) because the reference specified contains rows 5 through 8. + + =ROW(D5:D8) returns 5 because the ROW function is not used as array formula and only the number of the first row of the reference is returned. + + {=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first row in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) + + =ROW() returns 3 if the formula was entered in row 3. + + {=ROW(Rabbit)} returns the single-column array (1, 2, 3) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). +
+
+ROWS function + + +

ROWS

+ Returns the number of rows in a reference or array. + + ROWS(Array) + + Array is the reference or named area whose total number of rows is to be determined. + + + =Rows(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one row. + + =ROWS(A10:B12) returns 3. + + =ROWS(Rabbit) returns 3 if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). +
+
+ +HYPERLINK function + +

HYPERLINK

+ When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. + If you use the optional CellValue parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text or number. + To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. + + HYPERLINK("URL" [; CellValue]) + + URL specifies the link target. The optional CellValue parameter is the text or a number that is displayed in the cell and will be returned as the result. If the CellValue parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and will be returned as the result. + The number 0 is returned for empty cells and matrix elements. + + + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org") displays the text "http://www.example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";"Click here") displays the text "Click here" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";12345) displays the number 12345 and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + + =HYPERLINK($B4) where cell B4 contains http://www.example.org. The function adds http://www.example.org to the URL of the hyperlink cell and returns the same text which is used as formula result. + + =HYPERLINK("http://www.";"Click ") & "example.org" displays the text Click example.org in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + + =HYPERLINK("#Sheet1.A1";"Go to top") displays the text Go to top and jumps to cell Sheet1.A1 in this document. + + =HYPERLINK("file:///C:/writer.odt#Specification";"Go to Writer bookmark") displays the text "Go to Writer bookmark", loads the specified text document and jumps to bookmark "Specification". + + =HYPERLINK("file:///C:/Documents/";"Open Documents folder") displays the text "Open Documents folder" and shows the folder contents using the standard file manager in your operating system. +
+
+GETPIVOTDATA function + + +

GETPIVOTDATA

+ The GETPIVOTDATA function returns a result value from a pivot table. The value is addressed using field and item names, so it remains valid if the layout of the pivot table changes. + + Two different syntax definitions can be used: + GETPIVOTDATA(TargetField; pivot table[; Field 1; Item 1][; ... [Field 126; Item 126]]) + or + GETPIVOTDATA(pivot table; Constraints) + The second syntax is assumed if exactly two parameters are given, of which the first parameter is a cell or cell range reference. The first syntax is assumed in all other cases. The Function Wizard shows the first syntax. +

First Syntax

+ + TargetField is a string that selects one of the pivot table's data fields. The string can be the name of the source column, or the data field name as shown in the table (like "Sum - Sales"). + + pivot table is a reference to a cell or cell range that is positioned within a pivot table or contains a pivot table. If the cell range contains several pivot tables, the table that was created last is used. + If no Field n / Item n pairs are given, the grand total is returned. Otherwise, each pair adds a constraint that the result must satisfy. Field n is the name of a field from the pivot table. Item n is the name of an item from that field. + If the pivot table contains only a single result value that fulfills all of the constraints, or a subtotal result that summarizes all matching values, that result is returned. If there is no matching result, or several ones without a subtotal for them, an error is returned. These conditions apply to results that are included in the pivot table. + If the source data contains entries that are hidden by settings of the pivot table, they are ignored. The order of the Field/Item pairs is not significant. Field and item names are not case-sensitive. + If no constraint for a filter is given, the field's selected value is implicitly used. If a constraint for a filter is given, it must match the field's selected value, or an error is returned. Filters are the fields at the top left of a pivot table, populated using the "Filters" area of the pivot table layout dialog. From each filter, an item (value) can be selected, which means only that item is included in the calculation. + Subtotal values from the pivot table are only used if they use the function "auto" (except when specified in the constraint, see Second Syntax below). +

Second Syntax

+ pivot table has the same meaning as in the first syntax. + Constraints is a space-separated list. Entries can be quoted (single quotes). The whole string must be enclosed in quotes (double quotes), unless you reference the string from another cell. + One of the entries can be the data field name. The data field name can be left out if the pivot table contains only one data field, otherwise it must be present. + Each of the other entries specifies a constraint in the form Field[Item] (with literal characters [ and ]), or only Item if the item name is unique within all fields that are used in the pivot table.i82342 + A function name can be added in the form Field[Item;Function], which will cause the constraint to match only subtotal values which use that function. The possible function names are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count (Numbers only), StDev (Sample), StDevP (Population), Var (Sample), and VarP (Population), case-insensitive.UFI: Example from spec doc is quite difficult to localize. Try to find other one +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4a9c0016 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,759 @@ + + + + + + + Text Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp + + + + + + + text in cells; functions + functions; text functions + Function Wizard;text + + + +

Text Functions

+This section contains descriptions of the Text functions. + +
+ +
+ +
+ + using double quotation marks in formulas + formulas; using double quotation marks + + +

Using double quotation marks in formulas

+ +To include a text string in a formula, place the text string between two double quotation marks (") and Calc takes the characters in the string without attempting to interpret them. For example, the formula ="Hello world!" displays the text string Hello world! in the cell, with no surrounding double quotation marks. + +The more complex formula =CONCATENATE("Life is really simple, "; "but we insist on making it complicated "; "(Confucius).") concatenates three individual strings in double quotation marks, outputting Life is really simple, but we insist on making it complicated (Confucius). + +To place a literal double quotation mark within a string inside a formula, two methods can be used: + + + + You can "escape" the double quotation mark with an additional double quotation mark, and Calc treats the escaped double quotation mark as a literal value. For example, the formula ="My name is ""John Doe""." outputs the string My name is "John Doe". Another simple example is the formula =UNICODE("""") which returns 34, the decimal value of the Unicode quotation mark character (U+0022) — here the first and fourth double quotation marks indicate the beginning and end of the string, while the second double quotation mark escapes the third. + + + You can use the CHAR function or the UNICHAR function to insert a double quotation mark. For example, the formula =UNICHAR(34) & "The Catcher in the Rye" & UNICHAR(34) & " is a famous book by J. D. Salinger." displays the string "The Catcher in the Rye" is a famous book by J. D. Salinger. + + + +Beware that Calc's AutoCorrect function may modify double quotation marks. AutoCorrect should not change the double quotation marks within formula cells but may change those used in non-formula cells containing text. For example, if you copy a string that is surrounded by some other form of typographical double quotation marks, such as the left double quotation mark (U+201C) and the right double quotation mark (U+201D), and then paste into a formula cell, an error may result. Open the Double Quotes area of the Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Localized Options dialog to set the characters used to automatically correct the start and end typographical double quotation marks. Uncheck the Replace toggle button to disable the feature. + +
+ + + +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + BAHTTEXT function + +i66350 +

BAHTTEXT

+Converts a number to Thai text, including the Thai currency names. + + +BAHTTEXT(Number) + Number is any number. "Baht" is appended to the integral part of the number, and "Satang" is appended to the decimal part of the number. + + + =BAHTTEXT(12.65) returns a string in Thai characters with the meaning of "Twelve Baht and sixty five Satang". + + + COM.MICROSOFT.BAHTTEXT +
+ +
+ + BASE function + + + + + decimal system; converting to + +

BASE

+Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system. The digits 0-9 and the letters A-Z are used. + + +BASE(Number; Radix [; MinimumLength]) + Number is the positive integer to be converted. + Radix indicates the base of the numeral system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. + MinimumLength (optional) determines the minimum length of the character sequence that has been created. If the text is shorter than the indicated minimum length, zeros are added to the left of the string. + + + =BASE(17;10;4) returns 0017 in the decimal system. + + binary system; converting to + + + =BASE(17;2) returns 10001 in the binary system. + + hexadecimal system; converting to + + + =BASE(255;16;4) returns 00FF in the hexadecimal system. + + +DECIMAL +
+ +
+ + CHAR function + + + + +

CHAR

+Converts a number into a character according to the current code table. The number can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number. + + + +CHAR(Number) + Number is a number between 1 and 255 representing the code value for the character. + + + =CHAR(100) returns the character d. +="abc" & CHAR(10) & "def" inserts a newline character into the string. +
+ +
+ + CLEAN function + + + + +

CLEAN

+All non-printing characters are removed from the string. + + +CLEAN("Text") + Text refers to the text from which to remove all non-printable characters. + + +=LEN(CLEAN(CHAR(7) & "LibreOffice Calc" & CHAR(8))) returns 16, showing that the CLEAN function removes the non-printable Unicode U+0007 ("BEL") and U+0008 ("BS") characters at the beginning and end of the string argument. CLEAN does not remove spaces. + +
+ +
+ + CODE function + + + + +

CODE

+Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. + + +CODE("Text") + Text is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. + + + + =CODE("Hieronymus") returns 72, =CODE("hieroglyphic") returns 104. +The code used here does not refer to ASCII, but to the code table currently loaded. +
+ +
+ + CONCATENATE function + + +

CONCATENATE

+Combines several text strings into one string. + +CONCATENATE() +String 1[; String 2][; … ;[String 255]] are strings or references to cells containing strings. + + =CONCATENATE("Good ";"Morning ";"Mrs. ";"Doe") returns: Good Morning Mrs. Doe. +
+ +
+ + DECIMAL function + + + + +

DECIMAL

+Converts text that represents a number in a numeral system with the given base radix to a positive integer. The radix must be in the range 2 to 36. Spaces and tabs are ignored. The Text field is not case-sensitive. +If the radix is 16, a leading x or X or 0x or 0X, and an appended h or H, are disregarded. If the radix is 2, an appended b or B is disregarded. Other characters that do not belong to the numeral system generate an error. + + +DECIMAL("Text"; Radix) + Text is the text to be converted. + Radix indicates the base of the numeral system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. + + + =DECIMAL("17";10) returns 17. + =DECIMAL("FACE";16) returns 64206. + =DECIMAL("0101";2) returns 5. + +BASE +
+ +
+ + DOLLAR function + + + + +

DOLLAR

+Converts a number to a string representing the amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal places, using the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting. In the Value field enter the number to be converted. Optionally, you may enter the number of decimal places in the Decimals field. If no value is specified, all numbers in currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. +You set the currency format in your system settings. + + +DOLLAR(Value [; Decimals]) + Value is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula which returns a number. + Decimals is the optional number of decimal places. + + + =DOLLAR(255) returns $255.00 for the English (USA) locale and USD (dollar) currency; ￥255.00 for the Japanese locale and JPY (yen) currency; or 255,00 € for the German (Germany) locale and EUR (euro) currency. + =DOLLAR(367.456;2) returns $367.46. +
+ +
+ + EXACT function + + + + +

EXACT

+Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical. This function is case-sensitive. + + +EXACT("Text1"; "Text2") + Text1 refers to the first text to compare. + Text2 is the second text to compare. + + + =EXACT("microsystems";"Microsystems") returns FALSE. +
+ +
+ + FIND function + + + + +

FIND

+Returns the position of a string of text within another string.You can also define where to begin the search. The search term can be a number or any string of characters. The search is case-sensitive. + + +FIND("FindText"; "Text" [; Position]) + FindText refers to the text to be found. + Text is the text where the search takes place. + Position (optional) is the position in the text from which the search starts. + + + =FIND(76;998877665544) returns 6. +
+ +
+ + FIXED function + + + + +

FIXED

+Returns a number as text with a specified number of decimal places and optional thousands separators. + + +FIXED(Number; [Decimals = 2 [; NoThousandsSeparators = FALSE]]) + + Number is rounded to Decimals places (after the decimal separator) and the result formatted as text, using locale-specific settings. + Decimals (optional) refers to the number of decimal places to be displayed. If Decimals is negative, Number is rounded to ABS(Decimals) places to the left from the decimal point. If Decimals is a fraction, it is truncated actually ignoring what is the closest integer. + NoThousandsSeparators (optional) determines whether the thousands separator is used. If it is TRUE or non-zero, then group separators are omitted from the resulting string. If the parameter is equal to 0 or if it is missing altogether, the thousands separators of your current locale setting are displayed. + + + =FIXED(1234567.89;3) returns 1,234,567.890 as a text string. + =FIXED(123456.789;;TRUE) returns 123456.79 as a text string. + =FIXED(12345.6789;-2) returns 12,300 as a text string. + =FIXED(12134567.89;-3;1) returns 12135000 as a text string. + =FIXED(12345.789;3/4) returns 12,346 as a text string. + =FIXED(12345.789;8/5) returns 12,345.8 as a text string. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + LEFT function + + + + +

LEFT

+Returns the first character or characters of a text. + + +LEFT("Text" [; Number]) + Text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. + Number (optional) specifies the number of characters for the start text. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. + + + =LEFT("output";3) returns “out”. +
+ +
+ + LEFTB function + + + + +

LEFTB

+Returns the first characters of a DBCS text. + + +LEFTB("Text" [; Number_bytes]) +Text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. +Number_bytes (optional) specifies the number of characters you want LEFTB to extract, based on bytes. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. + + +=LEFTB("中国";1) returns " " (1 byte is only half a DBCS character and a space character is returned instead). +=LEFTB("中国";2) returns "中" (2 bytes constitute one complete DBCS character). +=LEFTB("中国";3) returns "中 " (3 bytes constitute one DBCS character and a half; the last character returned is therefore a space character). +=LEFTB("中国";4) returns "中国" (4 bytes constitute two complete DBCS characters). +=LEFTB("office";3) returns "off" (3 non-DBCS characters each consisting of 1 byte). +
+ +
+ + LEN function + + + + +

LEN

+Returns the length of a string including spaces. + + +LEN("Text") + Text is the text whose length is to be determined. + + + =LEN("Good Afternoon") returns 14. + =LEN(12345.67) returns 8. +
+ +
+ + LENB function + + + + +

LENB

+For double-byte character set (DBCS) languages, returns the number of bytes used to represent the characters in a text string. + + +LENB("Text") +Text is the text whose length is to be determined. + + +LENB("中") returns 2 (1 DBCS character consisting of 2 bytes). +LENB("中国") returns 4 (2 DBCS characters each consisting of 2 bytes). +LENB("office") returns 6 (6 non-DBCS characters each consisting of 1 byte). + =LENB("Good Afternoon") returns 14. + =LENB(12345.67) returns 8. +
+ +
+ + LOWER function + + + + +

LOWER

+Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. + + +LOWER("Text") + Text refers to the text to be converted. + + + =LOWER("Sun") returns sun. +
+ +
+ + MID function + + + + +

MID

+Returns a text string of a text. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. + + +MID("Text"; Start; Number) + Text is the text containing the characters to extract. + Start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. + Number specifies the number of characters in the part of the text. + + + =MID("office";2;2) returns ff. +
+ +
+ + MIDB function + + + + +

MIDB

+Returns a text string of a DBCS text. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. + + +MIDB("Text"; Start; Number_bytes) +Text is the text containing the characters to extract. +Start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. +Number_bytes specifies the number of characters MIDB will return from text, in bytes. + + +=MIDB("中国";1;0) returns "" (0 bytes is always an empty string). +=MIDB("中国";1;1) returns " " (1 byte is only half a DBCS character and therefore the result is a space character). +=MIDB("中国";1;2) returns "中" (2 bytes constitute one complete DBCS character). +=MIDB("中国";1;3) returns "中 " (3 bytes constitute one and a half DBCS character; the last byte results in a space character). +=MIDB("中国";1;4) returns "中国" (4 bytes constitute two complete DBCS characters). +=MIDB("中国";2;1) returns " " (byte position 2 is not at the beginning of a character in a DBCS string; 1 space character is returned). +=MIDB("中国";2;2) returns " " (byte position 2 points to the last half of the first character in the DBCS string; the 2 bytes asked for therefore constitutes the last half of the first character and the first half of the second character in the string; 2 space characters are therefore returned). +=MIDB("中国";2;3) returns " 国" (byte position 2 is not at the beginning of a character in a DBCS string; a space character is returned for byte position 2). +=MIDB("中国";3;1) returns " " (byte position 3 is at the beginning of a character in a DBCS string, but 1 byte is only half a DBCS character and a space character is therefore returned instead). +=MIDB("中国";3;2) returns "国" (byte position 3 is at the beginning of a character in a DBCS string, and 2 bytes constitute one DBCS character). +=MIDB("office";2;3) returns "ffi" (byte position 2 is at the beginning of a character in a non-DBCS string, and 3 bytes of a non-DBCS string constitute 3 characters). +
+ +
+ + PROPER function + + + + +

PROPER

+Capitalizes the first letter in all words of a text string. + + +PROPER("Text") + Text refers to the text to be converted. + + + =PROPER("the document foundation") returns The Document Foundation. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + REPLACE function + + + + +

REPLACE

+Replaces part of a text string with a different text string. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). The result of the function is always displayed as text. If you intend to perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text, you will need to convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. +Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks if you do not want it to be interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. + + +REPLACE("Text"; Position; Length; "NewText") + Text refers to text of which a part will be replaced. + Position refers to the position within the text where the replacement will begin. + Length is the number of characters in Text to be replaced. + NewText refers to the text which replaces Text. + + + =REPLACE("1234567";1;1;"444") returns "444234567". One character at position 1 is replaced by the complete NewText. +
+ +
+ + REPT function + + + + +

REPT

+Repeats a character string by the given number of copies. + + +REPT("Text"; Number) + Text is the text to be repeated. + Number is the number of repetitions. + + + =REPT("Good morning";2) returns Good morningGood morning. + +Refer to the REPT wiki page for more details about this function.
+ + + +
+ + RIGHTB function + + + + +

RIGHTB

+Returns the last character or characters of a text with double bytes characters sets (DBCS). + + +RIGHTB("Text" [; Number_bytes]) +Text is the text of which the right part is to be determined. +Number_bytes (optional) specifies the number of characters you want RIGHTB to extract, based on bytes. If this parameter is not defined, one byte is returned. + + +RIGHTB("中国";1) returns " " (1 byte is only half a DBCS character and a space character is returned instead). +RIGHTB("中国";2) returns "国" (2 bytes constitute one complete DBCS character). +RIGHTB("中国";3) returns " 国" (3 bytes constitute one half DBCS character and one whole DBCS character; a space is returned for the first half). +RIGHTB("中国";4) returns "中国" (4 bytes constitute two complete DBCS characters). +RIGHTB("office";3) returns "ice" (3 non-DBCS characters each consisting of 1 byte). +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + SUBSTITUTE function + + + + +

SUBSTITUTE

+Substitutes new text for old text in a string. + + +SUBSTITUTE("Text"; "SearchText"; "NewText" [; Occurrence]) + Text is the text in which text segments are to be exchanged. + SearchText is the text segment that is to be replaced (a number of times). + NewText is the text that is to replace the text segment. + Occurrence (optional) indicates which occurrence of the search text is to be replaced. If this parameter is missing the search text is replaced throughout. + + + =SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc") returns 12abc12abc12abc. + =SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc";2) returns 12312abc123. +
+ +
+ + T function + + + + +

T

+This function returns the target text, or a blank text string if the target is not text. + + +T(Value) +If Value is a text string or refers to a text string, T returns that text string; otherwise it returns a blank text string. + + + =T(12345) returns an empty string. + =T("12345") returns the string 12345. +
+ +
+ + TEXT function + + + + +

TEXT

+Converts a value into text according to a given format. + + +TEXT(Value; Format) + Value is the value (numerical or textual) to be converted. + Format is the text which defines the format. Use decimal and thousands separators according to the language set in the cell format. + + + =TEXT(12.34567;"###.##") returns the text 12.35 + =TEXT(12.34567;"000.00") returns the text 012.35 + =TEXT("xyz";"=== @ ===") returns the text === xyz === + +See also Number format codes: custom format codes defined by the user. +
+ +
+ + TRIM function + + + + +

TRIM

+Removes spaces from a string, leaving only a single space character between words. + + +TRIM("Text") + Text refers to text in which spaces are to be removed. + + + =TRIM(" hello world ") returns hello world without leading and trailing spaces and with single space between words. +
+ +
+ + + UNICHAR function + + + +

UNICHAR

+Converts a code number into a Unicode character or letter. + + +UNICHAR(number) + + +=UNICHAR(169) returns the Copyright character ©. +See also the UNICODE() function. +
+ +
+ + + UNICODE function + + + +

UNICODE

+Returns the numeric code for the first Unicode character in a text string. + + +UNICODE("Text") + + +=UNICODE("©") returns the Unicode number 169 for the Copyright character. +See also the UNICHAR() function. +
+ +
+ + UPPER function + + + + +

UPPER

+Converts the string specified in the text field to uppercase. + + +UPPER("Text") + Text refers to the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. + + + =UPPER("Good Morning") returns GOOD MORNING. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d50288c05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ + + + + + + + +Add-in Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp + + + +add-ins; functions +functions; add-in functions +Function Wizard; add-ins + +

Add-in Functions

+The following describes and lists some of the available add-in functions. + +Add-in concept +You will also find a description of the $[officename] Calc add-in interface in the Help. In addition, important functions and their parameters are described in the Help for the Shared Library +$[officename] Calc add-in DLL. +

Add-ins supplied

+$[officename] contains examples for the add-in interface of $[officename] Calc. +Analysis Functions Part One +Analysis Functions Part Two + +
+ISLEAPYEAR function +leap year determination +mw added one entry +

ISLEAPYEAR

+Determines whether a year is a leap year. If yes, the function will return the value 1 (TRUE); if not, it will return 0 (FALSE). + +ISLEAPYEAR(Date) + +Date specifies whether a given date falls within a leap year. The Date parameter must be a valid date. + +=ISLEAPYEAR(A1) returns 1, if A1 contains 1968-02-29, the valid date 29th of February 1968 in your locale setting. +You may also use =ISLEAPYEAR(DATE(1968;2;29)) or =ISLEAPYEAR("1968-02-29") giving the date string in the ISO 8601 notation. +Never use =ISLEAPYEAR(2/29/68), because this would first evaluate 2 divided by 29 divided by 68, and then calculate the ISLEAPYEAR function from this small number as a serial date number. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.ISLEAPYEAR +
+
+YEARS function +number of years between two dates +mw added one entry + +

YEARS

+Calculates the difference in years between two dates. + +YEARS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + +StartDate is the first date + +EndDate is the second date + +Type calculates the type of difference. Possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar years). + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.YEARS +
+
+MONTHS function +number of months between two dates +mw added one entry + +

MONTHS

+Calculates the difference in months between two dates. + +MONTHS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + +StartDate is the first date + +EndDate is the second date + +Type calculates the type of difference. Possible values include 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar months). + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.MONTHS +
+
+ROT13 function +encrypting text +mw added one entry + +

ROT13

+Encrypts a character string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet. After the letter Z, the alphabet begins again (Rotation). By applying the encryption function again to the resulting code, you can decrypt the text. + +ROT13(Text) + +Text is the character string to be encrypted. ROT13(ROT13(Text)) decrypts the code. + +=ROT13("Gur Qbphzrag Sbhaqngvba jnf sbhaqrq va Frcgrzore 2010.") returns the string "The Document Foundation was founded in September 2010.". Notice how spaces, digits, and full stops are unaffected by ROT13. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.ROT13 +Refer to the ROT13 wiki page for more details about this function. +
+
+DAYSINYEAR function +number of days; in a specific year +mw added one entry + +

DAYSINYEAR

+Calculates the number of days of the year in which the date entered occurs. + +DAYSINYEAR(Date) + +Date is any date in the respective year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. + +=DAYSINYEAR(A1) returns 366 days if A1 contains 1968-02-29, a valid date for the year 1968. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.DAYSINYEAR +
+
+DAYSINMONTH function +number of days;in a specific month of a year +mw added one entry + +

DAYSINMONTH

+Calculates the number of days of the month in which the date entered occurs. + +DAYSINMONTH(Date) + +Date is any date in the respective month of the desired year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. + +=DAYSINMONTH(A1) returns 29 days if A1 contains 1968-02-17, a valid date for February 1968. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.DAYSINMONTH +
+
+WEEKS function +number of weeks;between two dates + + +

WEEKS

+Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates. + +WEEKS(StartDate; EndDate; Type) + +StartDate is the start date in the interval. + +EndDate is the end date in the interval. The end date must be greater than the start date, or else an error is returned. + +Type specifies the type of difference to be calculated. Possible values are 0 (time interval) or 1 (calendar weeks). +If Type = 0 the function will assume that 7 days is equivalent to one week without considering any specific day to mark the beginning of a week. +If Type = 1 the function will consider Monday to be the first day of the week. Therefore, except for the start date, each occurrence of a Monday in the interval is counted as an additional week. +This function considers Monday to be the first day of the week regardless of the current locale settings. + +In the following examples, dates are passed as strings. However, they can also be stored in separate cells and be passed as references. +=WEEKS("01/12/2022","01/17/2022",0) returns 0 because Type was set to 0 and there are only 5 days in the interval. +=WEEKS("01/12/2022","01/19/2022",0) returns 1 because Type was set to 0 and there are 7 days in the interval. +=WEEKS("01/12/2022","01/17/2022",1) returns 1 because Type was set to 1 and the interval contains a Monday, since 01/12/2022 is a Wednesday and 01/17/2022 is a Monday. +=WEEKS("01/10/2022","01/15/2022",1) returns 0 because Type was set to 1 and the interval does not contain any Mondays, except for the start date. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.WEEKS +
+
+WEEKSINYEAR function +number of weeks;in a specific year +mw added one entry + +

WEEKSINYEAR

+Calculates the number of weeks of the year in which the date entered occurs. The number of weeks is defined as follows: a week that spans two years is added to the year in which most days of that week occur. + +WEEKSINYEAR(Date) + +Date is any date in the respective year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. + +WEEKSINYEAR(A1) returns 53 if A1 contains 1970-02-17, a valid date for the year 1970. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.WEEKSINYEAR +
+ +

Add-ins through %PRODUCTNAME API

+Add-ins can also be implemented through the %PRODUCTNAME API. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a80424b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,682 @@ + + + + + +Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +programming; add-ins +shared libraries; programming +external DLL functions +functions; $[officename] Calc add-in DLL +add-ins; for programming +mw made "external..." a one level entry and deleted one "functions;..." entry +

Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc

+The method of extending Calc by Add-Ins that is described in the following is outdated. The interfaces are still valid and supported, to ensure compatibility with existing Add-Ins, but for programming new Add-Ins you should use the new API functions. +$[officename] Calc can be expanded by Add-Ins, which are external programming modules providing additional functions for working with spreadsheets. These are listed in the Function Wizard in the Add-In category. If you would like to program an Add-In yourself, you can learn here which functions must be exported by the shared library +external DLL so that the Add-In can be successfully attached. +$[officename] searches the Add-in folder defined in the configuration for a suitable shared library +DLL. To be recognized by $[officename], the shared library +DLL must have certain properties, as explained in the following. This information allows you to program your own Add-In for Function Wizard of $[officename] Calc. +
+

The Add-In Concept

+Each Add-In library provides several functions. Some functions are used for administrative purposes. You can choose almost any name for your own functions. However, they must also follow certain rules regarding parameter passing. The exact naming and calling conventions vary for different platforms. +
+

Functions of Shared Library +AddIn DLL

+At a minimum, the administrative functions GetFunctionCount and GetFunctionData must exist. Using these, the functions as well as parameter types and return values can be determined. As return values, the Double and String types are supported. As parameters, additionally the cell areas Double Array, String Array, and Cell Array are supported. +Parameters are passed using references. Therefore, a change of these values is basically possible. However, this is not supported in $[officename] Calc because it does not make sense within spreadsheets. +Libraries can be reloaded during runtime and their contents can be analyzed by the administrative functions. For each function, information is available about count and type of parameters, internal and external function names and an administrative number. +The functions are called synchronously and return their results immediately. Real time functions (asynchronous functions) are also possible; however, they are not explained in detail because of their complexity. +

General information about the interface

+The maximum number of parameters in an Add-In function attached to $[officename] Calc is 16: one return value and a maximum of 15 function input parameters. +The data types are defined as follows: + + + + +Data types + + + + +Definition + + + + + + CALLTYPE + + +Under Windows: FAR PASCAL (_far _pascal) +Other: default (operating system specific default) + + + + + USHORT + + +2 Byte unsigned Integer + + + + + DOUBLE + + +8 byte platform-dependent format + + + + + Paramtype + + +Platform-dependent like int +PTR_DOUBLE =0 pointer to a double +PTR_STRING =1 pointer to a zero-terminated string +PTR_DOUBLE_ARR =2 pointer to a double array +PTR_STRING_ARR =3 pointer to a string array +PTR_CELL_ARR =4 pointer to a cell array +NONE =5 + + +
+ +

Shared Library +DLL functions

+Following you will find a description of those functions, which are called at the Shared Library +external DLL. +For all Shared Library +DLL functions, the following applies: +void CALLTYPE fn(out, in1, in2, ...) +Output: Resulting value +Input: Any number of types (double&, char*, double*, char**, Cell area), where the Cell area is an array of types double array, string array, or cell array. +

GetFunctionCount()

+Returns the number of functions without the management functions of the reference parameter. Each function has a unique number between 0 and nCount-1. This number will be needed for the GetFunctionData and GetParameterDescription functions later. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionCount(USHORT& nCount) + +Parameter + +USHORT &nCount: +Output: Reference to a variable, which is supposed to contain the number of Add-In functions. For example: If the Add-In provides 5 functions for $[officename] Calc, then nCount=5. +

GetFunctionData()

+Determines all the important information about an Add-In function. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionData(USHORT& nNo, char* pFuncName, USHORT& nParamCount, Paramtype* peType, char* pInternalName) + +Parameter + +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Function number between 0 and nCount-1, inclusively. +char* pFuncName: +Output: Function name as seen by the programmer, as it is named in the Shared Library +DLL. This name does not determine the name used in the Function Wizard. +USHORT& nParamCount: +Output: Number of parameters in AddIn function. This number must be greater than 0, because there is always a result value; the maximum value is 16. +Paramtype* peType: +Output: Pointer to an array of exactly 16 variables of type Paramtype. The first nParamCount entries are filled with the suitable type of parameter. +char* pInternalName: +Output: Function name as seen by the user, as it appears in the Function Wizard. May contain umlauts. +The pFuncName and pInternalName parameters are char arrays, which are implemented with size 256 in $[officename] Calc. +

GetParameterDescription()

+Provides a brief description of the Add-In function and its parameters. As an option, this function can be used to show a function and parameter description in the Function Wizard. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetParameterDescription(USHORT& nNo, USHORT& nParam, char* pName, char* pDesc) + +Parameter + +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Number of the function in the library; between 0 and nCount-1. +USHORT& nParam: +Input: Indicates, for which parameter the description is provided; parameters start at 1. If nParam is 0, the description itself is supposed to be provided in pDesc; in this case, pName does not have any meaning. +char* pName: +Output: Takes up the parameter name or type, for example, the word "Number" or "String" or "Date", and so on. Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +char* pDesc: +Output: Takes up the description of the parameter, for example, "Value, at which the universe is to be calculated." Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +pName and pDesc are char arrays; implemented in $[officename] Calc with size 256. Please note that the space available in the Function Wizard is limited and that the 256 characters cannot be fully used. +

Cell areas

+The following tables contain information about which data structures must be provided by an external program module in order to pass cell areas. $[officename] Calc distinguishes between three different arrays, depending on the data type. +

Double Array

+As a parameter, a cell area with values of the Number/Double type can be passed. A double array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + +Offset + + + Name + + + Description + + + + + 0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 4 + + +Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + + 14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + + 22 + + +Value + + +8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point + + + + + 30 + + + ... + + +Next element + + +
+ +

String Array

+A cell area, which contains values of data type Text and is passed as a string array. A string array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + +Offset + + + Name + + + Description + + + + + 0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 4 + + + Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + + 14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + + 22 + + +Len + + +Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). + + + + + 24 + + +String + + +String with closing zero byte + + + + + 24+Len + + + ... + + +Next element + + +
+ +

Cell Array

+Cell arrays are used to call cell areas containing text as well as numbers. A cell array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + +Offset + + +Name + + +Description + + + + + 0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 4 + + +Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + + 14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + + 20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + + 22 + + +Type + + +Type of cell content, 0 == Double, 1 == String + + + + + 24 + + +Value or Len + + +If type == 0: 8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point +If type == 1: Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). + + + + +26 if type==1 + + +String + + +If type == 1: String with closing zero byte + + + + +32 or 26+Len + + +... + + +Next element + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f62e4d2a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,428 @@ + + + + + + + Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One + /text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp + + + + + + + add-ins; analysis functions + analysis functions + + +

Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One

+The Add-in functions are supplied by the UNO com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis service. +
+ +
+ + +
+ + Bessel functions + BESSELI function + + + + +

BESSELI

+Calculates the modified Bessel function of the first kind In(x). + + +BESSELI(X; N) + X is the value on which the function will be calculated. + N is a positive integer (N >= 0) representing the order of the Bessel function In(x) + + +=BESSELI(3.45, 4), returns 0.651416873060081 +=BESSELI(3.45, 4.333), returns 0.651416873060081, same as above because the fractional part of N is ignored. +=BESSELI(-1, 3), returns -0.022168424924332 +
+ +
+ + BESSELJ function + + + +

BESSELJ

+Calculates the Bessel function of the first kind Jn(x) (cylinder function). + + +BESSELJ(X; N) + X is the value on which the function will be calculated. + N is a positive integer (N >= 0) representing the order of the Bessel function Jn(x) + + +=BESSELJ(3.45, 4), returns 0.196772639864984 +=BESSELJ(3.45, 4.333), returns 0.196772639864984, same as above because the fractional part of N is ignored. +=BESSELJ(-1, 3), returns -0.019563353982668 +
+ +
+ + BESSELK function + + + +

BESSELK

+Calculates the modified Bessel function of the second kind Kn(x). + + +BESSELK(X; N) + X is the strictly positive value (X > 0) on which the function will be calculated. + N is a positive integer (N >= 0) representing the order of the Bessel function Kn(x) + + +=BESSELK(3.45, 4), returns 0.144803466373734 +=BESSELK(3.45, 4.333), returns 0.144803466373734, same as above because the fractional part of N is ignored. +=BESSELK(0, 3), returns Err:502 – invalid argument (X=0) +
+ +
+ + BESSELY function + + + +

BESSELY

+Calculates the Bessel function of the second kind Yn(x). + + +BESSELY(X; N) + X is the strictly positive value (X > 0) on which the function will be calculated. + N is a positive integer (N >= 0) representing the order of the Bessel function Yn(x) + + +=BESSELY(3.45, 4), returns -0.679848116844476 +=BESSELY(3.45, 4.333), returns -0.679848116844476, same as above because the fractional part of N is ignored. +=BESSELY(0, 3), returns Err:502 – invalid argument (X=0) +
+ +
+ + BIN2DEC function + converting;binary numbers, into decimal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

BIN2DEC

+The result is the number for the binary (base-2) number string entered. + + +BIN2DEC(Number) + Number is a string representing a binary (base-2) number. It can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. + + +=BIN2DEC("1100100") returns 100. +
+ +
+ + BIN2HEX function + converting;binary numbers, into hexadecimal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

BIN2HEX

+The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the binary (base-2) number string entered. + + +BIN2HEX(Number [; Places]) +Number is a string representing a binary (base-2) number. It can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places means the number of places to be output. + + +=BIN2HEX("1100100";6) returns "000064". +
+ +
+ + BIN2OCT function + converting;binary numbers, into octal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

BIN2OCT

+The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the binary (base-2) number string entered. + + +BIN2OCT(Number [; Places]) +Number is a string representing a binary (base-2) number. It can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places means the number of places to be output. + + +=BIN2OCT("1100100";4) returns "0144". +
+ +
+ + DELTA function + recognizing;equal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

DELTA

+The result is TRUE (1) if both numbers, which are delivered as an argument, are equal, otherwise it is FALSE (0). + + +DELTA(Number1 [; Number2]) + + + =DELTA(1;2) returns 0. +
+ +
+ + DEC2BIN function + converting;decimal numbers, into binary numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

DEC2BIN

+The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the number entered. + + +DEC2BIN(Number [; Places]) +Number is a number between -512 and 511. If Number is negative, the function returns a binary number string with 10 characters. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 9 bits return the value. +Places means the number of places to be output. + + +=DEC2BIN(100;8) returns "01100100". +
+ +
+ + DEC2HEX function + converting;decimal numbers, into hexadecimal numbers + +mw added one entr + + +

DEC2HEX

+The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the number entered. + + +DEC2HEX(Number [; Places]) +Number is a number. If Number is negative, the function returns a hexadecimal number string with 10 characters (40 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 39 bits return the value. +Places means the number of places to be output. + + +=DEC2HEX(100;4) returns "0064". +
+ +
+ + DEC2OCT function + converting;decimal numbers, into octal numbers + +mw added one entr + + +

DEC2OCT

+The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the number entered. + + +DEC2OCT(Number [; Places]) +Number is a number. If Number is negative, the function returns an octal number string with 10 characters (30 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 29 bits return the value. +Places means the number of places to be output. + + +=DEC2OCT(100;4) returns "0144". +
+ +
+ + ERF function + Gaussian error integral + +mw added one entr + + +

ERF

+Returns values of the Gaussian error integral. + + +ERF(LowerLimit [; UpperLimit]) + LowerLimit is the lower limit of the integral. + UpperLimit is optional. It is the upper limit of the integral. If this value is missing, the calculation takes place between 0 and the lower limit. + + + =ERF(0;1) returns 0.842701. +
+ +
+ + ERF.PRECISE function + Gaussian error integral + + + + +

ERF.PRECISE

+Returns values of the Gaussian error integral between 0 and the given limit. + +ERF.PRECISE(LowerLimit) +LowerLimit is the limit of the integral. The calculation takes place between 0 and this limit. + + + =ERF.PRECISE(1) returns 0.842701. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.ERF.PRECISE +
+ +
+ + ERFC function + + + + +

ERFC

+Returns complementary values of the Gaussian error integral between x and infinity. + + +ERFC(LowerLimit) + LowerLimit is the lower limit of the integral + + + =ERFC(1) returns 0.157299. +
+ +
+ + ERFC.PRECISE function + + + + +

ERFC.PRECISE

+Returns complementary values of the Gaussian error integral between x and infinity. + +ERFC.PRECISE(LowerLimit) + LowerLimit is the lower limit of the integral + + + =ERFC.PRECISE(1) returns 0.157299. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.ERFC.PRECISE +
+ +
+ + GESTEP function + numbers;greater than or equal to + +mw added one entry + + +

GESTEP

+The result is 1 if Number is greater than or equal to Step. + + +GESTEP(Number [; Step]) + + + =GESTEP(5;1) returns 1. +
+ +
+ + HEX2BIN function + converting;hexadecimal numbers, into binary numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

HEX2BIN

+The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the hexadecimal number string entered. + + +HEX2BIN(Number [; Places]) +Number is a string that represents a hexadecimal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places is the number of places to be output. + + +=HEX2BIN("6a";8) returns "01101010". +
+ +
+ + HEX2DEC function + converting;hexadecimal numbers, into decimal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

HEX2DEC

+The result is the number for the hexadecimal number string entered. + + +HEX2DEC(Number) +Number is a string that represents a hexadecimal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. + + +=HEX2DEC("6a") returns 106. +
+ +
+ + HEX2OCT function + converting;hexadecimal numbers, into octal numbers + +mw added one entry + + +

HEX2OCT

+The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the hexadecimal number string entered. + + +HEX2OCT(Number [; Places]) +Number is a string that represents a hexadecimal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places is the number of places to be output. + + +=HEX2OCT("6a";4) returns "0152". +
+ + +
+ + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad42560a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,428 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part Two + /text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp + + + +imaginary numbers in analysis functions + complex numbers in analysis functions + +

Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part Two

+The Add-in functions are supplied by the UNO com.sun.star.sheet.addin.Analysis service. +
+ +
+ +
+ +IMABS function + + +

IMABS

+ The result is the absolute value of a complex number. + + IMABS("ComplexNumber") + ComplexNumber is a complex number that is entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". +no blanks allowed, see i82522 + + + =IMABS("5+12j") returns 13. +
+
+IMAGINARY function + + +

IMAGINARY

+ The result is the imaginary coefficient of a complex number. + + IMAGINARY("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMAGINARY("4+3j") returns 3. +
+
+IMPOWER function + + +

IMPOWER

+ The result is the ComplexNumber raised to the power of Number. + + IMPOWER("ComplexNumber"; Number) + + + Number is the exponent. + + + =IMPOWER("2+3i";2) returns -5+12i. +
+
+IMARGUMENT function + + +

IMARGUMENT

+ The result is the argument (the phi angle) of a complex number. + + IMARGUMENT("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMARGUMENT("3+4j") returns 0.927295. +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+IMDIV function + + +

IMDIV

+ The result is the division of two complex numbers. + + IMDIV("Numerator"; "Denominator") + + Numerator, Denominator are complex numbers that are entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". + + + =IMDIV("-238+240i";"10+24i") returns 5+12i. +
+
+IMEXP function + + +

IMEXP

+ The result is the power of e and the complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + + IMEXP("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMEXP("1+j") returns 1.47+2.29j (rounded). +
+
+IMCONJUGATE function + + +

IMCONJUGATE

+ The result is the conjugated complex complement to a complex number. + + IMCONJUGATE("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMCONJUGATE("1+j") returns 1-j. +
+
+IMLN function + + +

IMLN

+ The result is the natural logarithm (to the base e) of a complex number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + + IMLN("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMLN("1+j") returns 0.35+0.79j (rounded). +
+
+IMLOG10 function + + +

IMLOG10

+ The result is the common logarithm (to the base 10) of a complex number. + + IMLOG10("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMLOG10("1+j") returns 0.15+0.34j (rounded). +
+
+IMLOG2 function + + +

IMLOG2

+ The result is the binary logarithm of a complex number. + + IMLOG2("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMLOG2("1+j") returns 0.50+1.13j (rounded). +
+
+IMPRODUCT function + + +

IMPRODUCT

+ The result is the product of a set of complex numbers. + + IMPRODUCT() + + + + =IMPRODUCT("3+4j";"5-3j") returns 27+11j. +
+
+IMREAL function + + +

IMREAL

+ The result is the real coefficient of a complex number. + + IMREAL("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMREAL("1+3j") returns 1. +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+

+ +

+ + + +
+
+IMSUB function + + +

IMSUB

+ The result is the subtraction of two complex numbers. + + IMSUB("ComplexNumber1"; "ComplexNumber2") + + + + =IMSUB("13+4j";"5+3j") returns 8+j. +
+
+IMSUM function + + +

IMSUM

+ The result is the sum of a set of complex numbers. + + IMSUM() + + + + =IMSUM("13+4j";"5+3j") returns 18+7j. +
+
+IMSQRT function + + +

IMSQRT

+ The result is the square root of a complex number. + + IMSQRT("ComplexNumber") + + + + =IMSQRT("3+4i") returns 2+1i. +
+
+COMPLEX function + + +

COMPLEX

+ The result is a complex number which is returned from a real coefficient and an imaginary coefficient. + + COMPLEX(RealNum; INum [; Suffix]) + + RealNum is the real coefficient of the complex number. + + INum is the imaginary coefficient of the complex number. + + Suffix is a list of options, "i" or "j". + + + =COMPLEX(3;4;"j") returns 3+4j. +
+
+OCT2BIN function + converting;octal numbers, into binary numbers +mw added one entry + +

OCT2BIN

+ The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the octal number string entered. + + OCT2BIN(Number [; Places]) + + Number is a string that represents an octal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. + + Places is the number of places to be output. + + + =OCT2BIN("3";3) returns "011". +
+
+OCT2DEC function + converting;octal numbers, into decimal numbers +mw added one entry + +

OCT2DEC

+ The result is the number for the octal number string entered. + + OCT2DEC(Number) + + Number is a string that represents an octal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. + + + =OCT2DEC("144") returns 100. +
+
+OCT2HEX function + converting;octal numbers, into hexadecimal numbers +mw added one entry + +

OCT2HEX

+ The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the octal number string entered. + + OCT2HEX(Number [; Places]) + + Number is a string that represents an octal number. It can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. + + Places is the number of places to be output. + + + =OCT2HEX("144";4) returns "0064". +
+ +
+

+ +

+ + + +
+ +
+FACTDOUBLE function + factorials;numbers with increments of two +mw added one entry + +

FACTDOUBLE

+ Returns the double factorial of a number. + + FACTDOUBLE(Number) + Returns Number + !!, the double factorial of Number, where Number is an integer greater than or equal to zero. + For even numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: + 2*4*6*8* ... *n + For odd numbers FACTDOUBLE(n) returns: + 1*3*5*7* ... *n + FACTDOUBLE(0) returns 1 by definition. + + + =FACTDOUBLE(5) returns 15. + + =FACTDOUBLE(6) returns 48. + + =FACTDOUBLE(0) returns 1.see also FACT, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT +
+ +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2f89d146 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,606 @@ + + + + + + + Financial Functions Part Three + /text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp + + + + + + +

Financial Functions Part Three

+ + + +
+ + ODDFPRICE function + prices;securities with irregular first interest date + +mw added one entry + + +

ODDFPRICE

+Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the first interest date falls irregularly. + + +ODDFPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Issue is the date of issue of the security. +FirstCoupon is the first interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Yield is the annual yield of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +
+ +
+ + ODDFYIELD function + + + + +

ODDFYIELD

+Calculates the yield of a security if the first interest date falls irregularly. + + +ODDFYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Issue is the date of issue of the security. +FirstCoupon is the first interest period of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Price is the price of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +
+ +
+ + ODDLPRICE function + + + + +

ODDLPRICE

+Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the last interest date falls irregularly. + + +ODDLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Yield is the annual yield of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +Settlement date: February 7 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, yield: 4.05 per cent, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 +The price per 100 currency units per value of a security, which has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: +=ODDLPRICE("1999-02-07";"1999-06-15";"1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 0.0405;100;2;0) returns 99.87829. +
+ +
+ + ODDLYIELD function + + + + +

ODDLYIELD

+Calculates the yield of a security if the last interest date falls irregularly. + + +ODDLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Price is the price of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +Settlement date: April 20 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, price: 99.875 currency units, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 +The yield of the security, that has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: +=ODDLYIELD("1999-04-20";"1999-06-15"; "1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 99.875; 100;2;0) returns 0.044873 or 4.4873%. +
+ +
+ + calculating;variable declining depreciations + depreciations;variable declining + VDB function + + + + +

VDB

+Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a variable declining balance method. + + +VDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Start; End [; Factor [; NoSwitch]]) +Cost is the initial value of an asset. +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. +Life is the depreciation duration of the asset. +S is the start of the depreciation. A must be entered in the same date unit as the duration. +End is the end of the depreciation. +Factor (optional) is the depreciation factor. Factor = 2 is double rate depreciation. +NoSwitchis an optional parameter. NoSwitch = 0 (default) means a switch to linear depreciation. In NoSwitch = 1 no switch is made. + + + +What is the declining-balance double-rate depreciation for a period if the initial cost is 35,000 currency units and the value at the end of the depreciation is 7,500 currency units. The depreciation period is 3 years. The depreciation from the 10th to the 20th period is calculated. +=VDB(35000;7500;36;10;20;2) = 8603.80 currency units. The depreciation during the period between the 10th and the 20th period is 8,603.80 currency units. +
+ +
+ + calculating;internal rates of return, irregular payments + internal rates of return;irregular payments + XIRR function + +mw changed "calculating;..." and "internal rates of return" + + +

XIRR

+Calculates the internal rate of return for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. +If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the IRR function. + + +XIRR(Values; Dates [; Guess]) +Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits). +Guess (optional) is a guess that can be input for the internal rate of return. The default is 10%. + + +Calculation of the internal rate of return for the following five payments (dates are in ISO 8601 format): + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 2001-01-01 + + + -10000 + + + Received + + + + + 2 + + + 2001-02-01 + + + 2000 + + + Deposited + + + + + 3 + + + 2001-03-15 + + + 2500 + + + + + + + 4 + + + 2001-05-12 + + + 5000 + + + + + + + 5 + + + 2001-08-10 + + + 1000 + + + + +
+ +=XIRR(B1:B5; A1:A5; 0.1) returns 0.1828 or 18.28%. +
+ +
+ + XNPV function + + + + +

XNPV

+Calculates the capital value (net present value) for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. +If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the NPV function. + + +XNPV(Rate; Values; Dates) +Rate is the internal rate of return for the payments. +Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits) + + +Calculation of the net present value for the above-mentioned five payments for a national internal rate of return of 6%. +=XNPV(0.06;B1:B5;A1:A5) returns 323.02. +
+ +
+ + calculating;rates of return + RRI function + + + + +

RRI

+Calculates the interest rate resulting from the profit (return) of an investment. + + +RRI(P; PV; FV) +P is the number of periods needed for calculating the interest rate. +PV is the present (current) value. The cash value is the deposit of cash or the current cash value of an allowance in kind. As a deposit value a positive value must be entered; the deposit must not be 0 or <0. +FV determines what is desired as the cash value of the deposit. + + +For four periods (years) and a cash value of 7,500 currency units, the interest rate of the return is to be calculated if the future value is 10,000 currency units. +=RRI(4;7500;10000) = 7.46 % +The interest rate must be 7.46 % so that 7,500 currency units will become 10,000 currency units. +
+ +
+ + calculating;constant interest rates + constant interest rates + RATE function + + + + +

RATE

+Returns the constant interest rate per period of an annuity. + + +RATE(NPer; Pmt; PV [ ; [ FV ] [ ; [ Type ] [ ; Guess ] ] ]) +NPer is the total number of periods, during which payments are made (payment period). +Pmt is the constant payment (annuity) paid during each period. +PV is the cash value in the sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the periodic payments. +Type (optional) is the due date of the periodic payment, either at the beginning or at the end of a period. +Guess (optional) determines the estimated value of the interest with iterative calculation. + + + +What is the constant interest rate for a payment period of 3 periods if 10 currency units are paid regularly and the present cash value is 900 currency units. +=RATE(3;-10;900) = -75.63% The interest rate is therefore 75.63%. +
+ +
+ + INTRATE function + + + + +

INTRATE

+Calculates the annual interest rate that results when a security (or other item) is purchased at an investment value and sold at a redemption value. No interest is paid. + + +INTRATE(Settlement; Maturity; Investment; Redemption [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security is sold. +Investment is the purchase price. +Redemption is the selling price. + + + +A painting is bought on 1990-01-15 for 1 million and sold on 2002-05-05 for 2 million. The basis is daily balance calculation (basis = 3). What is the average annual level of interest? +=INTRATE("1990-01-15"; "2002-05-05"; 1000000; 2000000; 3) returns 8.12%. +
+ +
+ + COUPNCD function + + + + +

COUPNCD

+Returns the date of the first interest date after the settlement date. Format the result as a date. + + +COUPNCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) when is the next interest date? +=COUPNCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2001-05-15. +
+ +
+ + COUPDAYS function + + + + +

COUPDAYS

+Returns the number of days in the current interest period in which the settlement date falls. + + +COUPDAYS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there in the interest period in which the settlement date falls? +=COUPDAYS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 181. +
+ +
+ + COUPDAYSNC function + + + + +

COUPDAYSNC

+Returns the number of days from the settlement date until the next interest date. + + +COUPDAYSNC(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there until the next interest payment? +=COUPDAYSNC("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 110. +
+ +
+ + COUPDAYBS function + durations;first interest payment until settlement date + securities;first interest payment until settlement date + +mw added "durations;" and "securities;" + + +

COUPDAYBS

+Returns the number of days from the first day of interest payment on a security until the settlement date. + + +COUPDAYBS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days is this? +=COUPDAYBS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 71. +
+ +
+ + COUPPCD function + dates;interest date prior to settlement date + +mw added "dates;" + + +

COUPPCD

+Returns the date of the interest date prior to the settlement date. Format the result as a date. + + +COUPPCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) what was the interest date prior to purchase? +=COUPPCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2000-15-11. +
+ +
+ + COUPNUM function + number of coupons + +mw added "number..." + + +

COUPNUM

+Returns the number of coupons (interest payments) between the settlement date and the maturity date. + + +COUPNUM(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency [; Basis]) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many interest dates are there? +=COUPNUM("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2. +
+ +
+ + IPMT function + periodic amortizement rates + +mw added "periodic..." + + +

IPMT

+Calculates the periodic amortizement for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate. + + +IPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV [; FV [; Type]]) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Period is the period, for which the compound interest is calculated. Period=NPER if compound interest for the last period is calculated. +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +PV is the present cash value in sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) at the end of the periods. +Type is the due date for the periodic payments. + + +What is the interest rate during the fifth period (year) if the constant interest rate is 5% and the cash value is 15,000 currency units? The periodic payment is seven years. +=IPMT(5%;5;7;15000) = -352.97 currency units. The compound interest during the fifth period (year) is 352.97 currency units. +
+ +
+ + calculating;future values + future values;constant interest rates + FV function + +mw made "future values..." a two level entry + + +

FV

+Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value). + + +FV(Rate; NPer; Pmt [ ; [ PV ] [ ; Type ] ]) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). +Pmt is the annuity paid regularly per period. +PV (optional) is the (present) cash value of an investment. +Type (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. + + + +What is the value at the end of an investment if the interest rate is 4% and the payment period is two years, with a periodic payment of 750 currency units. The investment has a present value of 2,500 currency units. +=FV(4%;2;750;2500) = -4234.00 currency units. The value at the end of the investment is 4234.00 currency units. +
+ +
+ + FVSCHEDULE function + future values;varying interest rates + +mw added "future values" + + +

FVSCHEDULE

+Calculates the accumulated value of the starting capital for a series of periodically varying interest rates. + + +FVSCHEDULE(Principal; Schedule) +Principal is the starting capital. +Schedule is a series of interest rates, for example, as a range H3:H5 or as a (List) (see example). + + + +1000 currency units have been invested in for three years. The interest rates were 3%, 4% and 5% per annum. What is the value after three years? +=FVSCHEDULE(1000;{0.03;0.04;0.05}) returns 1124.76. +
+ +
+ + calculating;number of payment periods + payment periods;number of + number of payment periods + NPER function + + + + +

NPER

+Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate. + + +NPER(Rate; Pmt; PV [ ; [ FV ] [ ; Type ] ]) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Pmt is the constant annuity paid in each period. +PV is the present value (cash value) in a sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the last period. +Type (optional) is the due date of the payment at the beginning or at the end of the period. + + + +How many payment periods does a payment period cover with a periodic interest rate of 6%, a periodic payment of 153.75 currency units and a present cash value of 2.600 currency units. +=NPER(6%;153.75;2600) = -12,02. The payment period covers 12.02 periods. +
+ +Back to Financial Functions Part One +Back to Financial Functions Part Two + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccf3e35ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,611 @@ + + + + + + + + +Financial Functions Part Two +/text/scalc/01/04060119.xhp + + + +

Financial Functions Part Two

+
+ +
+Back to Financial Functions Part One +Forward to Financial Functions Part Three + +
+PPMT function + + +

PPMT

+Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate. + +PPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV [ ; FV [ ; Type ] ]) + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. + +Period is the amortizement period. P = 1 for the first and P = NPer for the last period. + +NPer is the total number of periods during which annuity is paid. + +PV is the present value in the sequence of payments. + +FV (optional) is the desired (future) value. + +Type (optional) defines the due date. F = 1 for payment at the beginning of a period and F = 0 for payment at the end of a period. + + + + +How high is the periodic monthly payment at an annual interest rate of 8.75% over a period of 3 years? The cash value is 5,000 currency units and is always paid at the beginning of a period. The future value is 8,000 currency units. + +=PPMT(8.75%/12;1;36;5000;8000;1) = -350.99 currency units. +
+
+calculating; total amortizement rates +total amortizement rates +amortization installment +repayment installment +CUMPRINC function +mw added two entries + +

CUMPRINC

+Returns the cumulative interest paid for an investment period with a constant interest rate. + +CUMPRINC(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. + +NPer is the payment period with the total number of periods. NPER can also be a non-integer value. + +PV is the current value in the sequence of payments. + +S is the first period. + +E is the last period. + +Type is the due date of the payment at the beginning or end of each period. + +What are the payoff amounts if the yearly interest rate is 5.5% for 36 months? The cash value is 15,000 currency units. The payoff amount is calculated between the 10th and 18th period. The due date is at the end of the period. + +=CUMPRINC(5.5%/12;36;15000;10;18;0) = -3669.74 currency units. The payoff amount between the 10th and 18th period is 3669.74 currency units. +
+
+CUMPRINC_ADD function + + +

CUMPRINC_ADD

+ Calculates the cumulative redemption of a loan in a period. + + +CUMPRINC_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) + +Rate is the interest rate for each period. + +NPer is the total number of payment periods. The rate and NPER must refer to the same unit, and thus both be calculated annually or monthly. + +PV is the current value. + +StartPeriod is the first payment period for the calculation. + +EndPeriod is the last payment period for the calculation. + +Type is the maturity of a payment at the end of each period (Type = 0) or at the start of the period (Type = 1). + +The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: +Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (payment periods = 30 * 12 = 360), NPV: 125000 currency units. +How much will you repay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? + +=CUMPRINC_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;13;24;0) returns -934.1071 +In the first month you will be repaying the following amount: + +=CUMPRINC_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;1;1;0) returns -68.27827 +
+
+calculating; accumulated interests +accumulated interests +CUMIPMT function + + +

CUMIPMT

+Calculates the cumulative interest payments, that is, the total interest, for an investment based on a constant interest rate. + +CUMIPMT(Rate; NPer; PV; S; E; Type) + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. + +NPer is the payment period with the total number of periods. NPER can also be a non-integer value. + +PV is the current value in the sequence of payments. + +S is the first period. + +E is the last period. + +Type is the due date of the payment at the beginning or end of each period. + +What are the interest payments at a yearly interest rate of 5.5 %, a payment period of monthly payments for 2 years and a current cash value of 5,000 currency units? The start period is the 4th and the end period is the 6th period. The payment is due at the beginning of each period. + +=CUMIPMT(5.5%/12;24;5000;4;6;1) = -57.54 currency units. The interest payments for between the 4th and 6th period are 57.54 currency units. +
+
+CUMIPMT_ADD function + + +

CUMIPMT_ADD

+Calculates the accumulated interest for a period. + + +CUMIPMT_ADD(Rate; NPer; PV; StartPeriod; EndPeriod; Type) + +Rate is the interest rate for each period. + +NPer is the total number of payment periods. The rate and NPER must refer to the same unit, and thus both be calculated annually or monthly. + +PV is the current value. + +StartPeriod is the first payment period for the calculation. + +EndPeriod is the last payment period for the calculation. + +Type is the maturity of a payment at the end of each period (Type = 0) or at the start of the period (Type = 1). + +The following mortgage loan is taken out on a house: +Rate: 9.00 per cent per annum (9% / 12 = 0.0075), Duration: 30 years (NPER = 30 * 12 = 360), Pv: 125000 currency units. +How much interest must you pay in the second year of the mortgage (thus from periods 13 to 24)? + +=CUMIPMT_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;13;24;0) returns -11135.23. +How much interest must you pay in the first month? + +=CUMIPMT_ADD(0.0075;360;125000;1;1;0) returns -937.50. +
+
+PRICE function +prices; fixed interest securities +sales values;fixed interest securities +mw added two entries + +

PRICE

+Calculates the market value of a fixed interest security with a par value of 100 currency units as a function of the forecast yield. + +PRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + +Yield is the annual yield of the security. + +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. + +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 2007-11-15. The nominal rate of interest is 5.75%. The yield is 6.5%. The redemption value is 100 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). With calculation on basis 0, the price is as follows: +=PRICE("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575; 0.065; 100; 2; 0) returns 95.04287. +
+
+PRICEDISC function +prices;non-interest-bearing securities +sales values;non-interest-bearing securities +mw added two entries + +

PRICEDISC

+Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a non-interest- bearing security. + +PRICEDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Discount; Redemption [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Discount is the discount of a security as a percentage. + +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. + + +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15; the maturity date is 1999-03-01. Discount in per cent is 5.25%. The redemption value is 100. When calculating on basis 2 the price discount is as follows: +=PRICEDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 0.0525; 100; 2) returns 99.79583. +
+
+PRICEMAT function +prices;interest-bearing securities +mw added one entry + +

PRICEMAT

+Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a security, that pays interest on the maturity date. + +PRICEMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Yield [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Issue is the date of issue of the security. + +Rate is the interest rate of the security on the issue date. + +Yield is the annual yield of the security. + + +Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: April 13 1999, issue date: November 11 1998. Interest rate: 6.1 per cent, yield: 6.1 per cent, basis: 30/360 = 0. +The price is calculated as follows: +=PRICEMAT("1999-02-15";"1999-04-13";"1998-11-11"; 0.061; 0.061;0) returns 99.98449888. +
+
+calculating; durations +durations;calculating +PDURATION function + + +

PDURATION

+Calculates the number of periods required by an investment to attain the desired value. + +PDURATION(Rate; PV; FV) + +Rate is a constant. The interest rate is to be calculated for the entire duration (duration period). The interest rate per period is calculated by dividing the interest rate by the calculated duration. The internal rate for an annuity is to be entered as Rate/12. + +PV is the present (current) value. The cash value is the deposit of cash or the current cash value of an allowance in kind. As a deposit value a positive value must be entered; the deposit must not be 0 or <0. + +FV is the expected value. The future value determines the desired (future) value of the deposit. + +At an interest rate of 4.75%, a cash value of 25,000 currency units and a future value of 1,000,000 currency units, a duration of 79.49 payment periods is returned. The periodic payment is the resulting quotient from the future value and the duration, in this case 1,000,000/79.49=12,850.20. +
+
+calculating;linear depreciations +depreciations;linear +linear depreciations +straight-line depreciations +SLN function +mw added one entry + +

SLN

+Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period. The amount of the depreciation is constant during the depreciation period. + +SLN(Cost; Salvage; Life) + +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. + +Life is the depreciation period determining the number of periods in the depreciation of the asset. + +Office equipment with an initial cost of 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated over 7 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 3,500 currency units. + +=SLN(50000;3,500;84) = 553.57 currency units. The periodic monthly depreciation of the office equipment is 553.57 currency units. +
+
+MDURATION function +Macauley duration +mw added one entry + +

MDURATION

+Calculates the modified Macauley duration of a fixed interest security in years. + +MDURATION(Settlement; Maturity; Coupon; Yield; Frequency [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Coupon is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + +Yield is the annual yield of the security. + +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + +A security is purchased on 2001-01-01; the maturity date is 2006-01-01. The nominal rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the modified duration? +=MDURATION("2001-01-01"; "2006-01-01"; 0.08; 0.09; 2; 3) returns 4.02 years. +
+
+calculating;net present values +net present values +NPV function + + +

NPV

+Returns the present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. To get the net present value, subtract the cost of the project (the initial cash flow at time zero) from the returned value. +If the payments take place at irregular intervals, use the XNPV function. + + + +NPV(Rate; ) +Rate is the discount rate for a period. + + + + +What is the net present value of periodic payments of 10, 20 and 30 currency units with a discount rate of 8.75%. At time zero the costs were paid as -40 currency units. + +=NPV(8.75%;10;20;30) = 49.43 currency units. The net present value is the returned value minus the initial costs of 40 currency units, therefore 9.43 currency units. +
+
+calculating;nominal interest rates +nominal interest rates +NOMINAL function +mw made "nominal interest rates;..." a one level entry + +

NOMINAL

+Calculates the yearly nominal interest rate, given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year. + +NOMINAL(EffectiveRate; NPerY) + +EffectiveRate is the effective interest rate + +NPerY is the number of periodic interest payments per year. + +What is the nominal interest per year for an effective interest rate of 13.5% if twelve payments are made per year. + +=NOMINAL(13.5%;12) = 12.73%. The nominal interest rate per year is 12.73%. +
+
+NOMINAL_ADD function + + +

NOMINAL_ADD

+Calculates the annual nominal rate of interest on the basis of the effective rate and the number of interest payments per annum. + + +NOMINAL_ADD(EffectiveRate; NPerY) + +EffectiveRate is the effective annual rate of interest. + +NPerY the number of interest payments per year. + +What is the nominal rate of interest for a 5.3543% effective rate of interest and quarterly payment. + +=NOMINAL_ADD(5.3543%;4) returns 0.0525 or 5.25%. +
+
+DOLLARFR function +converting;decimal fractions, into mixed decimal fractions +mw added one entry + +

DOLLARFR

+Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal number into a mixed decimal fraction. + +DOLLARFR(DecimalDollar; Fraction) + +DecimalDollar is a decimal number. + +Fraction is a whole number that is used as the denominator of the decimal fraction. + + +=DOLLARFR(1.125;16) converts into sixteenths. The result is 1.02 for 1 plus 2/16. + +=DOLLARFR(1.125;8) converts into eighths. The result is 1.1 for 1 plus 1/8. +
+
+fractions; converting +converting;decimal fractions, into decimal numbers +DOLLARDE function +mw added one entry + +

DOLLARDE

+Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal fraction into a decimal number. + +DOLLARDE(FractionalDollar; Fraction) + +FractionalDollar is a number given as a decimal fraction. + +Fraction is a whole number that is used as the denominator of the decimal fraction. + + +=DOLLARDE(1.02;16) stands for 1 and 2/16. This returns 1.125. + +=DOLLARDE(1.1;8) stands for 1 and 1/8. This returns 1.125. +
+
+calculating;modified internal rates of return +modified internal rates of return +MIRR function +internal rates of return;modified +mw added "internal rates of return;..." + +

MIRR

+Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments. + +MIRR(Values; Investment; ReinvestRate) + +Values corresponds to the array or the cell reference for cells whose content corresponds to the payments. + +Investment is the rate of interest of the investments (the negative values of the array) + +ReinvestRate:the rate of interest of the reinvestment (the positive values of the array) + +Assuming a cell content of A1 = -5, A2 = 10, A3 = 15, and A4 = 8, and an investment value of 0.5 and a reinvestment value of 0.1, the result is 94.16%. +
+
+YIELD function +rates of return;securities +yields, see also rates of return +mw added two entries + +

YIELD

+Calculates the yield of a security. + +YIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Rate is the annual rate of interest. + +Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. + +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + + +A security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 2007-11-15. The rate of interest is 5.75%. The price is 95.04287 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency = 2) and the basis is 0. How high is the yield? +=YIELD("1999-02-15"; "2007-11-15"; 0.0575 ;95.04287; 100; 2; 0) returns 0.065 or 6.50 per cent. +
+
+YIELDDISC function +rates of return;non-interest-bearing securities +mw added one entry + +

YIELDDISC

+Calculates the annual yield of a non-interest-bearing security. + +YIELDDISC(Settlement; Maturity; Price; Redemption [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. + + +A non-interest-bearing security is purchased on 1999-02-15. It matures on 1999-03-01. The price is 99.795 currency units per 100 units of par value, the redemption value is 100 units. The basis is 2. How high is the yield? +=YIELDDISC("1999-02-15"; "1999-03-01"; 99.795; 100; 2) returns 0.052823 or 5.2823 per cent. +
+
+YIELDMAT function +rates of return;securities with interest paid on maturity +mw added one entry + +

YIELDMAT

+Calculates the annual yield of a security, the interest of which is paid on the date of maturity. + +YIELDMAT(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; Rate; Price [; Basis]) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Issue is the date of issue of the security. + +Rate is the interest rate of the security on the issue date. + +Price is the price (purchase price) of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + + +A security is purchased on 1999-03-15. It matures on 1999-11-03. The issue date was 1998-11-08. The rate of interest is 6.25%, the price is 100.0123 units. The basis is 0. How high is the yield? +=YIELDMAT("1999-03-15"; "1999-11-03"; "1998-11-08"; 0.0625; 100.0123; 0) returns 0.060954 or 6.0954 per cent. +
+
+calculating;annuities +annuities +PMT function + + +

PMT

+Returns the periodic payment for an annuity with constant interest rates. + +PMT(Rate; NPer; PV [ ; [ FV ] [ ; Type ] ]) + +Rate is the periodic interest rate. + +NPer is the number of periods in which annuity is paid. + +PV is the present value (cash value) in a sequence of payments. + +FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) to be reached at the end of the periodic payments. + +Type (optional) is the due date for the periodic payments. Type=1 is payment at the beginning and Type=0 is payment at the end of each period. + + + + +What are the periodic payments at a yearly interest rate of 1.99% if the payment time is 3 years and the cash value is 25,000 currency units. There are 36 months as 36 payment periods, and the interest rate per payment period is 1.99%/12. + +=PMT(1.99%/12;36;25000) = -715.96 currency units. The periodic monthly payment is therefore 715.96 currency units. +
+
+TBILLEQ function +treasury bills;annual return +annual return on treasury bills +mw changed "treasury bills;..." and added one entry + +

TBILLEQ

+Calculates the annual return on a treasury bill. A treasury bill is purchased on the settlement date and sold at the full par value on the maturity date, that must fall within the same year. A discount is deducted from the purchase price. + +TBILLEQ(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. + +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9.14 per cent. +The return on the treasury bill corresponding to a security is worked out as follows: +=TBILLEQ("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.0914) returns 0.094151 or 9.4151 per cent. +
+
+TBILLPRICE function +treasury bills;prices +prices;treasury bills +mw added two entries + +

TBILLPRICE

+Calculates the price of a treasury bill per 100 currency units. + +TBILLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Discount) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Discount is the percentage discount upon acquisition of the security. + +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, discount: 9 per cent. +The price of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: +=TBILLPRICE("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 0.09) returns 98.45. +
+
+TBILLYIELD function +treasury bills;rates of return +rates of return of treasury bills +mw added two entries + +

TBILLYIELD

+Calculates the yield of a treasury bill. + +TBILLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Price) + +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Price is the price (purchase price) of the treasury bill per 100 currency units of par value. + +Settlement date: March 31 1999, maturity date: June 1 1999, price: 98.45 currency units. +The yield of the treasury bill is worked out as follows: +=TBILLYIELD("1999-03-31";"1999-06-01"; 98.45) returns 0.091417 or 9.1417 per cent. +
+ +Back to Financial Functions Part One +Forward to Financial Functions Part Three + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5e805053 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bit Operation Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060120.xhp + + + +

Bit Operation Functions

+
+ +
+ +
+BITAND function + + +

BITAND

+Returns a bitwise logical "and" of the parameters. + + +BITAND(number1; number2) + +Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). + + +=BITAND(6;10) returns 2 (0110 & 1010 = 0010). +
+
+BITOR function + + +

BITOR

+Returns a bitwise logical "or" of the parameters. + + +BITOR(number1; number2) + +Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). + +=BITOR(6;10) returns 14 (0110 | 1010 = 1110). +
+
+BITXOR function + + +

BITXOR

+Returns a bitwise logical "exclusive or" of the parameters. + + +BITXOR(number1; number2) + +Number1 and number2 are positive integers less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). + + +=BITXOR(6;10) returns 12 (0110 ^ 1010 = 1100) +
+
+BITLSHIFT function + + +

BITLSHIFT

+Shifts a number left by n bits. + + +BITLSHIFT(number; shift) + +Number is a positive integer less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). + +Shift is the number of positions the bits will be moved to the left. If shift is negative, it is synonymous with BITRSHIFT (number; -shift). + + +=BITLSHIFT(6;1) returns 12 (0110 << 1 = 1100). +
+
+BITRSHIFT function + + +

BITRSHIFT

+Shifts a number right by n bits. + + +BITRSHIFT(number; shift) + +Number is a positive integer less than 2 ^ 48 (281 474 976 710 656). + +Shift is the number of positions the bits will be moved to the right. If shift is negative, it is synonymous with BITLSHIFT (number; -shift). + + +=BITRSHIFT(6;1) returns 3 (0110 >> 1 = 0011). +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2c24850d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,714 @@ + + + + + + + Statistical Functions Part One + /text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp + + + + +

Statistical Functions Part One

+ + +
+ + INTERCEPT function + points of intersection + intersections + +mw added two entries + + +

INTERCEPT

+Calculates the point at which a line will intersect the y-values by using known x-values and y-values. + + +INTERCEPT(DataY; DataX) +DataY is the dependent set of observations or data. +DataX is the independent set of observations or data. +Names, arrays or references containing numbers must be used here. Numbers can also be entered directly. + + +To calculate the intercept, use cells D3:D9 as the y value and C3:C9 as the x value from the example spreadsheet. Input will be as follows: +=INTERCEPT(D3:D9;C3:C9) = 2.15. +
+ +
+ + COUNT function + numbers;counting + +mw added one entry + + +

COUNT

+Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments. Text entries are ignored. + + +COUNT() + + + +The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. +=COUNT(2;4;6;"eight") = 3. The count of numbers is therefore 3. +
+ +
+ + COUNTA function + number of entries + +mw added one entry + + +

COUNTA

+Counts how many values are in the list of arguments. Text entries are also counted, even when they contain an empty string of length 0. If an argument is an array or reference, empty cells within the array or reference are ignored.UFI: fix to #i35888# + +COUNTA() + + +The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. +=COUNTA(2;4;6;"eight") = 4. The count of values is therefore 4. +
+ +
+ + COUNTBLANK function + counting;empty cells + empty cells;counting + + + + +

COUNTBLANK

+Returns the number of empty cells. + + +COUNTBLANK(Range) +Returns the number of empty cells in the cell range Range. + + +=COUNTBLANK(A1:B2) returns 4 if cells A1, A2, B1, and B2 are all empty.see also COUNTIF +
+ +
+ + COUNTIF function + counting;specified cells + +mw added one entry + + +

COUNTIF

+Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. + +COUNTIF(Range; Criterion) +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. + + + +A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1. +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1. +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 4. +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6. +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006. +To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0") +
+ +
+ +

+ +
+ +
+ + B function + probabilities of samples with binomial distribution + +mw added one entry + + +

B

+Returns the probability of a sample with binomial distribution. + + +B(Trials; SP; T1 [; T2]) +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +T1 defines the lower limit for the number of trials. +T2 (optional) defines the upper limit for the number of trials. + + +What is the probability with ten throws of the dice, that a six will come up exactly twice? The probability of a six (or any other number) is 1/6. The following formula combines these factors: +=B(10;1/6;2) returns a probability of 29%. +
+ +
+ + RSQ function + determination coefficients + regression analysis + +mw added regression analysis + + +

RSQ

+Returns the square of the Pearson correlation coefficient based on the given values. RSQ (also called determination coefficient) is a measure for the accuracy of an adjustment and can be used to produce a regression analysis. + + +RSQ(DataY; DataX) +DataY is an array or range of data points. +DataX is an array or range of data points. + + +=RSQ(A1:A20;B1:B20) calculates the determination coefficient for both data sets in columns A and B. +
+ +
+ + BETAINV function + cumulative probability density function;inverse of + +mw added one entry + + +

BETAINV

+Returns the inverse of the cumulative Beta probability density function. + + +BETAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta [; Start [; End]]) +Number is the probability associated with the Beta distribution for the given arguments Alpha and Beta. +Alpha is a strictly positive parameter of the Beta distribution. +Beta is a strictly positive parameter of the Beta distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound of the output range of the function. If omitted, the default value is 0. +End (optional) is the upper bound of the output range of the function. If omitted, the default value is 1. + + +=BETAINV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.3257511553. +BETAINV Wiki page +
+ +
+ +BETA.INV function +cumulative probability density function;inverse of + +mw added one entry + + +

BETA.INV

+Returns the inverse of the cumulative Beta probability density function. + +BETA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta [; Start [; End]]) +Number is the probability associated with the Beta distribution for the given arguments Alpha and Beta. +Alpha is a strictly positive parameter of the Beta distribution. +Beta is a strictly positive parameter of the Beta distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound of the output range of the function. If omitted, the default value is 0. +End (optional) is the upper bound of the output range of the function. If omitted, the default value is 1. + + +=BETA.INV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.3257511553. +BETA.INV Wiki page + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.BETA.INV +
+ +
+ + BETADIST function + cumulative probability density function;calculating + +mw added one entry + + +

BETADIST

+Returns the beta function. + + +BETADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta [; Start [; End [; Cumulative]]]) +Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta is a parameter to the distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. +Cumulative (optional) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True or omitted to calculate the cumulative distribution function. + + + +=BETADIST(0.75;3;4) returns the value 0.96. +
+ +
+ + BETA.DIST function + cumulative probability density function;calculating + +mw added one entry + + +

BETA.DIST

+Returns the beta function. + + +BETA.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Cumulative [; Start [; End]]) +Number (required) is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha (required) is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta (required) is a parameter to the distribution. +Cumulative (required) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. + + + +=BETA.DIST(2;8;10;1;1;3) returns the value 0.6854706 +=BETA.DIST(2;8;10;0;1;3) returns the value 1.4837646 + + +COM.MICROSOFT.BETA.DIST +
+ +
+ + BINOMDIST function + + + + +

BINOMDIST

+Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. + + +BINOMDIST(X; Trials; SP; C) +X is the number of successes in a set of trials. +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. + + +=BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. +=BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR). +
+ +
+ + BINOM.DIST function + + + + +

BINOM.DIST

+Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. + +BINOM.DIST(X; Trials; SP; C) +X is the number of successes in a set of trials. +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. + + +=BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. +=BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR). + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.BINOM.DIST +
+ +
+ + BINOM.INV function + + + + +

BINOM.INV

+Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. + +BINOM.INV(Trials; SP; Alpha) +Trials The total number of trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +Alpha The border probability that is attained or exceeded. + + +=BINOM.INV(8;0.6;0.9) returns 7, the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.BINOM.INV +
+ +
+ + + CHISQINV function + + +

CHISQINV

+Returns the inverse of CHISQDIST. + +CHISQINV(Probability; Degrees of Freedom) +Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. +
+ +
+ + + CHISQ.INV function + + + +

CHISQ.INV

+Returns the inverse of the left-tailed probability of the chi-square distribution. + +CHISQ.INV(Probability; DegreesFreedom) +Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. + + +=CHISQ.INV(0,5;1) returns 0.4549364231. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CHISQ.INV +
+ +
+ + CHIINV function + + + + +

CHIINV

+Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. + + +CHIINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the value of the error probability. +DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + + +A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. +The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. +If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. +=CHIINV(0.05;5) returns 11.07. +=CHIINV(0.02;5) returns 13.39. +If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed. +
+ +
+ + CHISQ.INV.RT function + + + + +

CHISQ.INV.RT

+Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. + +CHISQ.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the value of the error probability. +DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + + +A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. +The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. +If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. +=CHISQ.INV.RT(0.05;5) returns 11.0704976935. +=CHISQ.INV.RT(0.02;5) returns 13.388222599. +If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CHISQ.INV.RT +
+ +
+ + CHITEST function + + + + +

CHITEST

+Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHITEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. +The probability determined by CHITEST can also be determined with CHIDIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. + + +CHITEST(DataB; DataE) +DataB is the array of the observations. +DataE is the range of the expected values. + + + + + +=CHITEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.02. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution. +
+ +
+ + CHISQ.TEST function + + + + +

CHISQ.TEST

+Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHISQ.TEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. +The probability determined by CHISQ.TEST can also be determined with CHISQ.DIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. + +CHISQ.TEST(DataB; DataE) +DataB is the array of the observations. +DataE is the range of the expected values. + + +
+ + + + + + Data_B (observed) + + + Data_E (expected) + + + + + 1 + + + 195 + + + 170 + + + + + 2 + + + 151 + + + 170 + + + + + 3 + + + 148 + + + 170 + + + + + 4 + + + 189 + + + 170 + + + + + 5 + + + 183 + + + 170 + + + + + 6 + + + 154 + + + 170 + + +
+
+=CHISQ.TEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.0209708029. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CHISQ.TEST +
+ +
+ + CHIDIST function + + + + +

CHIDIST

+Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHIDIST compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. +The probability determined by CHIDIST can also be determined by CHITEST. + + +CHIDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + + +=CHIDIST(13.27; 5) equals 0.02. +If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%. +
+ +
+ + CHISQ.DIST function + + + + +

CHISQ.DIST

+Returns the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. + +CHISQ.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. +Cumulative can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. + + +=CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 0) equals 0.1115650801, the probability density function with 2 degrees of freedom, at x = 3. +=CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 1) equals 0.7768698399, the cumulative chi-square distribution with 2 degrees of freedom, at the value x = 3. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CHISQ.DIST +
+ +
+ + CHISQ.DIST.RT function + + + + +

CHISQ.DIST.RT

+Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHISQ.DIST.RT compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. +The probability determined by CHISQ.DIST.RT can also be determined by CHITEST. + +CHISQ.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + + +=CHISQ.DIST.RT(13.27; 5) equals 0.0209757694. +If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CHISQ.DIST.RT +
+ +
+ + + CHISQDIST function + chi-square distribution + + + +

CHISQDIST

+Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. + + +CHISQDIST(Number; Degrees Of Freedom [; Cumulative]) +Number is the number for which the function is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. +Cumulative (optional): 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True or omitted calculates the cumulative distribution function. +
+ +
+ + EXPONDIST function + exponential distributions + + + + +

EXPONDIST

+Returns the exponential distribution. + + +EXPONDIST(Number; Lambda; C) +Number is the value of the function. +Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark +C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=EXPONDIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.78. +
+ +
+ + EXPON.DIST function + exponential distributions + + + + +

EXPON.DIST

+Returns the exponential distribution. + +EXPON.DIST(Number; Lambda; C) +Number is the value of the function. +Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark +C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=EXPON.DIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.7768698399. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.EXPON.DIST +
+ + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8591243a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,496 @@ + + + + + + + Statistical Functions Part Two + /text/scalc/01/04060182.xhp + + + +

Statistical Functions Part Two +

+ +
+FINV function + inverse F probability distribution +mw added one entry + +

FINV

+ Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. + + FINV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. + + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. + + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. + + + =FINV(0.5;5;10) yields 0.93. +
+
+ + F.INV function + Values of the inverse left tail of the F distribution + + mw added one entry + +

F.INV

+ Returns the inverse of the cumulative F distribution. The F distribution is used for F tests in order to set the relation between two differing data sets. + + F.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. + + =F.INV(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.F.INV +
+
+ + F.INV.RT function + Values of the inverse right tail of the F distribution + + mw added one entry + +

F.INV.RT

+ Returns the inverse right tail of the F distribution. + + F.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is probability value for which the inverse F distribution is to be calculated. + DegreesFreedom1 is the number of degrees of freedom in the numerator of the F distribution. + DegreesFreedom2 is the number of degrees of freedom in the denominator of the F distribution. + + =F.INV.RT(0.5;5;10) yields 0.9319331609. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.F.INV.RT +
+
+FISHER function + + +

FISHER

+ Returns the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. + + FISHER(Number) + + Number is the value to be transformed. + + + =FISHER(0.5) yields 0.55. +
+
+FISHERINV function + inverse of Fisher transformation +mw added one entry + +

FISHERINV

+ Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution. + + FISHERINV(Number) + + Number is the value that is to undergo reverse-transformation. + + + =FISHERINV(0.5) yields 0.46. +
+
+FTEST function + + +

FTEST

+ Returns the result of an F test. + + FTEST(Data1; Data2) + + Data1 is the first record array. + + Data2 is the second record array. + + + + =FTEST(A1:A30;B1:B12) calculates whether the two data sets are different in their variance and returns the probability that both sets could have come from the same total population. +
+
+ + F.TEST function + + +

F.TEST

+ Returns the result of an F test. + + F.TEST(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first record array. + Data2 is the second record array. + + =F.TEST(A1:A30;B1:B12) calculates whether the two data sets are different in their variance and returns the probability that both sets could have come from the same total population. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.F.TEST +
+
+FDIST function + + +

FDIST

+ Calculates the values of an F distribution. + + FDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. + + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. + + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. + + + =FDIST(0.8;8;12) yields 0.61. +
+
+ + F.DIST function + + +

F.DIST

+ Calculates the values of the left tail of the F distribution. + + F.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2 [; Cumulative]) + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. + Cumulative = 0 or False calculates the density function Cumulative = 1 or True calculates the distribution. + + =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;0) yields 0.7095282499. + =F.DIST(0.8;8;12;1) yields 0.3856603563. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.F.DIST +
+
+ + F.DIST.RT function + + +

F.DIST.RT

+ Calculates the values of the right tail of the F distribution. + + F.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom1; DegreesFreedom2) + Number is the value for which the F distribution is to be calculated. + degreesFreedom1 is the degrees of freedom in the numerator in the F distribution. + degreesFreedom2 is the degrees of freedom in the denominator in the F distribution. + + =F.DIST.RT(0.8;8;12) yields 0.6143396437. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.F.DIST.RT +
+
+ +GAMMA function + +

GAMMA

+ Returns the Gamma function value. Note that GAMMAINV is not the inverse of GAMMA, but of GAMMADIST. + + GAMMA(Number) + + Number is the number for which the Gamma function value is to be calculated. +
+
+GAMMAINV function + + +

GAMMAINV

+ Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. + + GAMMAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta) + + Number is the probability value for which the inverse Gamma distribution is to be calculated. + + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. + + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. + + + =GAMMAINV(0.8;1;1) yields 1.61. +
+
+GAMMA.INV function + + +

GAMMA.INV

+ Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST. This function allows you to search for variables with different distribution. + This function is identical to GAMMAINV and was introduced for interoperability with other office suites. + + GAMMA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta) + + Number is the probability value for which the inverse Gamma distribution is to be calculated. + + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. + + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. + + + =GAMMA.INV(0.8;1;1) yields 1.61. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.GAMMA.INV +
+
+GAMMALN function + natural logarithm of Gamma function +mw added one entry + +

GAMMALN

+ Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). + + GAMMALN(Number) + + Number is the value for which the natural logarithm of the Gamma function is to be calculated. + + + =GAMMALN(2) yields 0. +
+
+GAMMALN.PRECISE function + natural logarithm of Gamma function +mw added one entry + +

GAMMALN.PRECISE

+ Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x). + + GAMMALN.PRECISE(Number) + + Number is the value for which the natural logarithm of the Gamma function is to be calculated. + + + =GAMMALN.PRECISE(2) yields 0. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.GAMMALN.PRECISE +
+
+GAMMADIST function + + +

GAMMADIST

+ Returns the values of a Gamma distribution. + The inverse function is GAMMAINV. + + GAMMADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta [; C]) + + Number is the value for which the Gamma distribution is to be calculated. + + Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. + + Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. + + C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. + + + =GAMMADIST(2;1;1;1) yields 0.86. +
+
+ +GAMMA.DIST function + + +

GAMMA.DIST

+Returns the values of a Gamma distribution. +The inverse function is GAMMAINV or GAMMA.INV. +This function is similar to GAMMADIST and was introduced for interoperability with other office suites. + +GAMMA.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Cumulative) +Number is the value for which the Gamma distribution is to be calculated. +Alpha is the parameter Alpha of the Gamma distribution. +Beta is the parameter Beta of the Gamma distribution. +Cumulative = 0 or False calculates the probability density function; Cumulative = 1, True, or any other value calculates the cumulative distribution function. + +=GAMMA.DIST(2;1;1;1) yields 0.86. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.GAMMA.DIST +
+
+GAUSS function + normal distribution; standard +mw added one entry + +

GAUSS

+ Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. + It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 + + GAUSS(Number) + + Number is the value for which the value of the standard normal distribution is to be calculated. + + + =GAUSS(0.19) = 0.08 + + =GAUSS(0.0375) = 0.01 +
+
+GEOMEAN function + means;geometric +mw added one entry + +

GEOMEAN

+ Returns the geometric mean of a sample. + + GEOMEAN() + + + + + =GEOMEAN(23;46;69) = 41.79. The geometric mean value of this random sample is therefore 41.79. +
+
+TRIMMEAN function + means;of data set without margin data +mw added one entry + +

TRIMMEAN

+ Returns the mean of a data set without the Alpha percent of data at the margins. + + TRIMMEAN(Data; Alpha) + + Data is the array of data in the sample. + + Alpha is the percentage of the marginal data that will not be taken into consideration. + + + + =TRIMMEAN(A1:A50; 0.1) calculates the mean value of numbers in A1:A50, without taking into consideration the 5 percent of the values representing the highest values and the 5 percent of the values representing the lowest ones. The percentage numbers refer to the amount of the untrimmed mean value, not to the number of summands. +
+
+ZTEST function + + +

ZTEST

+ Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. + + ZTEST(Data; mu [; Sigma]) + + Data is the given sample, drawn from a normally distributed population. + + mu is the known mean of the population. + + Sigma (optional) is the known standard deviation of the population. If omitted, the standard deviation of the given sample is used. + See also the Wiki page. + +
+
+Z.TEST function + + +

Z.TEST

+Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample. + +Z.TEST(Data; mu [; Sigma]) +Data is the given sample, drawn from a normally distributed population. +mu is the known mean of the population. +Sigma (optional) is the known standard deviation of the population. If omitted, the standard deviation of the given sample is used. + +=Z.TEST(A2:A20; 9; 2) returns the result of a z-test on a sample A2:A20 drawn from a population with known mean 9 and known standard deviation 2. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.Z.TEST +
+
+HARMEAN function + means;harmonic +mw added one entry + +

HARMEAN

+ Returns the harmonic mean of a data set. + + HARMEAN() + + + + + =HARMEAN(23;46;69) = 37.64. The harmonic mean of this random sample is thus 37.64 +
+
+HYPGEOMDIST function + sampling without replacement +mw added one entry + +

HYPGEOMDIST

+ Returns the hypergeometric distribution. + + + HYPGEOMDIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation [; Cumulative]) + + X is the number of results achieved in the random sample. + + NSample is the size of the random sample. + + Successes is the number of possible results in the total population. + + NPopulation is the size of the total population. + Cumulative (optional) specifies whether to calculate the probability mass function (FALSE or 0) or the cumulative distribution function (any other value). The probability mass function is the default if no value is specified for this parameter. + + + =HYPGEOMDIST(2;2;90;100) yields 0.81. If 90 out of 100 pieces of buttered toast fall from the table and hit the floor with the buttered side first, then if 2 pieces of buttered toast are dropped from the table, the probability is 81%, that both will strike buttered side first. +
+
+ + HYPGEOM.DIST function + sampling without replacement + + mw added one entry + +

HYPGEOM.DIST

+ Returns the hypergeometric distribution. + + HYPGEOM.DIST(X; NSample; Successes; NPopulation; Cumulative) + X is the number of results achieved in the random sample. + NSample is the size of the random sample. + Successes is the number of possible results in the total population. + NPopulation is the size of the total population. + Cumulative : 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True calculates the cumulative distribution function. + + =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;0) yields 0.8090909091. If 90 out of 100 pieces of buttered toast fall from the table and hit the floor with the buttered side first, then if 2 pieces of buttered toast are dropped from the table, the probability is 81%, that both will strike buttered side first. + =HYPGEOM.DIST(2;2;90;100;1) yields 1. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.HYPGEOM.DIST +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41b9d69ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,326 @@ + + + + + + + +Statistical Functions Part Three +/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp + + + +

Statistical Functions Part Three +

+ +
+LARGE function + + +

LARGE

+Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set. + + +LARGE(Data; RankC) +Data is the cell range of data. +RankC is the ranking of the value. If RankC is an array, the function becomes an array function. + + +=LARGE(A1:C50;2) gives the second largest value in A1:C50. +=LARGE(A1:C50;B1:B5) entered as an array function gives an array of the c-th largest value in A1:C50 with ranks defined in B1:B5. +
+
+SMALL function + + +

SMALL

+Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set. + + +SMALL(Data; RankC) +Data is the cell range of data. +RankC is the rank of the value. If RankC is an array, the function becomes an array function. + + +=SMALL(A1:C50;2) gives the second smallest value in A1:C50. +=SMALL(A1:C50;B1:B5) entered as an array function gives an array of the c-th smallest value in A1:C50 with ranks defined in B1:B5. +
+
+CONFIDENCE function + + +

CONFIDENCE

+Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. + +CONFIDENCE(Alpha; StDev; Size) + +Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. + +StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. + +Size is the size of the total population. + + +=CONFIDENCE(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.29. +
+
+CONFIDENCE.T function + + +

CONFIDENCE.T

+ + Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a Student's t distribution. + +CONFIDENCE.T(Alpha; StDev; Size) + +Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. + +StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. + +Size is the size of the total population. + + +=CONFIDENCE.T(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.2976325427. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CONFIDENCE.T +
+
+CONFIDENCE.NORM function + + +

CONFIDENCE.NORM

+ + Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. + +CONFIDENCE.NORM(Alpha; StDev; Size) + +Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. + +StDev is the standard deviation for the total population. + +Size is the size of the total population. + + +=CONFIDENCE.NORM(0.05;1.5;100) gives 0.2939945977. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.CONFIDENCE.NORM +
+
+CORREL function +coefficient of correlation +mw added one entry + +

CORREL

+Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets. + +CORREL(Data1; Data2) + +Data1 is the first data set. + +Data2 is the second data set. + + +=CORREL(A1:A50;B1:B50) calculates the correlation coefficient as a measure of the linear correlation of the two data sets. +
+
+COVAR function + + +

COVAR

+Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations. + +COVAR(Data1; Data2) + +Data1 is the first data set. + +Data2 is the second data set. + + +=COVAR(A1:A30;B1:B30) + +
+
+ + COVARIANCE.P function + + +

COVARIANCE.P

+ Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for the entire population. + + COVARIANCE.P(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. + Data2 is the second data set. + + =COVARIANCE.P(A1:A30;B1:B30) + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.COVARIANCE.P +
+
+ + COVARIANCE.S function + + +

COVARIANCE.S

+ Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for a sample of the population. + + COVARIANCE.S(Data1; Data2) + Data1 is the first data set. + Data2 is the second data set. + + =COVARIANCE.S(A1:A30;B1:B30) + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.COVARIANCE.S +
+
+CRITBINOM function + + +

CRITBINOM

+Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. + +CRITBINOM(Trials; SP; Alpha) + +Trials is the total number of trials. + +SP is the probability of success for one trial. + +Alpha is the threshold probability to be reached or exceeded. + + +=CRITBINOM(100;0.5;0.1) yields 44. +
+
+KURT function + + +

KURT

+Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required). + +KURT() + +The parameters should specify at least four values. + + + +=KURT(A1;A2;A3;A4;A5;A6) + +
+
+LOGINV function +inverse of lognormal distribution +mw added one entry + +

LOGINV

+Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. + +LOGINV(Number [; Mean [; StDev]]) + +Number (required) is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean (optional) is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution (defaults to 0 if omitted). + +StDev (optional) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution (defaults to 1 if omitted). + + +=LOGINV(0.05;0;1) returns 0.1930408167. +
+
+LOGNORM.INV function +inverse of lognormal distribution +mw added one entry + +

LOGNORM.INV

+Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. +This function is identical to LOGINV and was introduced for interoperability with other office suites. + +LOGNORM.INV(Number ; Mean ; StDev) + +Number (required) is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean (required) is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +StDev (required) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. + + +=LOGNORM.INV(0.05;0;1) returns 0.1930408167. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.LOGNORM.INV +
+
+LOGNORMDIST function +lognormal distribution +mw added one entry + +

LOGNORMDIST

+Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. + +LOGNORMDIST(Number [; Mean [; StDev [; Cumulative]]]) + +Number is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean (optional) is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +StDev (optional) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +Cumulative (optional) = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=LOGNORMDIST(0.1;0;1) returns 0.01. +
+
+LOGNORM.DIST function +lognormal distribution +mw added one entry + +

LOGNORM.DIST

+Returns the values of a lognormal distribution. + +LOGNORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) + +Number (required) is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean (required) is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +StDev (required) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +Cumulative (required) = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=LOGNORM.DIST(0.1;0;1;1) returns 0.0106510993. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.LOGNORM.DIST +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3fb40e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ + + + + + + +Statistical Functions Part Four +/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp + + + +

Statistical Functions Part Four +

+ +
+MAX function + + +

MAX

+Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. + +MAX() + + + + +=MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. + +=MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
+
+MAXA function + + +

MAXA

+Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. + +MAXA() + + + +=MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. + +=MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
+
+MEDIAN function + + +

MEDIAN

+Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. + +MEDIAN() + + + +for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20;21) returns 9 as the median value. +for an even number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. +
+
+MIN function + + +

MIN

+Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. + +MIN() + + + + +=MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
+
+MINA function + + +

MINA

+Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. + +MINA() + + + +=MINA(1;"Text";20) returns 0. + +=MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
+
+AVEDEV function +averages;statistical functions +mw added "averages;" + +

AVEDEV

+Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. + +AVEDEV() + + + +=AVEDEV(A1:A50) +
+
+AVERAGE function + + +

AVERAGE

+Returns the average of the arguments. + +AVERAGE() + + + + +=AVERAGE(A1:A50) + +
+
+AVERAGEA function + + +

AVERAGEA

+Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. + +AVERAGEA() + + + +=AVERAGEA(A1:A50) + +
+
+

+ +
+
+

+ +
+
+MODE function +most common value +mw added one entry + +

MODE

+Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. + + +MODE() + + + + +=MODE(A1:A50) + +
+ +
+MODE.SNGL function +most common value +mw added one entry + +

MODE.SNGL

+Returns the most frequently occurring, or repetitive, value in an array or range of data. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. + +MODE.SNGL() + +If the data set contains no duplicate data points, MODE.SNGL returns the #VALUE! error value. + +=MODE.SNGL(A1:A50) + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.MODE.SNGL +
+
+MODE.MULT function +most common value +mw added one entry + +

MODE.MULT

+Returns a vertical array of the statistical modes (the most frequently occurring values) within a list of supplied numbers. + +MODE.MULT() + +As the MODE.MULT function returns an array of values, it must be entered as an array formula. If the function is not entered as an array formula, only the first mode is returned, which is the same as using the MODE.SNGL function. + +=MODE.MULT(A1:A50) + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.MODE.MULT +
+
+NEGBINOMDIST function +negative binomial distribution +mw added one entry + +

NEGBINOMDIST

+Returns the negative binomial distribution. + +NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. +R represents the value returned for successful tests. +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. + + +=NEGBINOMDIST(1;1;0.5) returns 0.25. +
+
+NEGBINOM.DIST function +negative binomial distribution +mw added one entry + +

NEGBINOM.DIST

+Returns the negative binomial density or distribution function. + +NEGBINOM.DIST(X; R; SP; Cumulative) +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. +R represents the value returned for successful tests. +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. +Cumulative = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. + +=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;0) returns 0.25. +=NEGBINOM.DIST(1;1;0.5;1) returns 0.75. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.NEGBINOM.DIST +
+
+NORMINV function +normal distribution;inverse of +mw added one entry + +

NORMINV

+Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. + +NORMINV(Number; Mean; StDev) +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. +StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. + + +=NORMINV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. +
+
+NORM.INV function +normal distribution;inverse of +mw added one entry + +

NORM.INV

+Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. + +NORM.INV(Number; Mean; StDev) +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. +StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. + + +=NORM.INV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.4077578277. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.NORM.INV +
+
+NORMDIST function +density function +mw added one entry + +

NORMDIST

+Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. + +NORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev [; C]) +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. +StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. +C is optional. C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=NORMDIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.03. + +=NORMDIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.92. +
+
+NORM.DIST function +density function +mw added one entry + +

NORM.DIST

+Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. + +NORM.DIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. +StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. +C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. + + +=NORM.DIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.029945493. + +=NORM.DIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.9192433408. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.NORM.DIST +
+
+PEARSON function + + +

PEARSON

+Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. + +PEARSON(Data1; Data2) +Data1 represents the array of the first data set. +Data2 represents the array of the second data set. + + +=PEARSON(A1:A30;B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets. +
+
+ + PHI function + + +

PHI

+ Returns the value of the probability density function for a given value considering the standard normal distribution. + + PHI(Number) + Number is the value for which the probability density function is calculated. + + + =PHI(2.25) returns 0.0317. + + + =PHI(-2.25) also returns 0.0317 because the normal distribution is symmetrical. + + + =PHI(0) returns 0.3989. + + Calling PHI(Number) is equivalent to calling NORMDIST(Number,0,1,FALSE()) or NORM.S.DIST(Number;FALSE()), hence using the standard normal distribution with mean equal to 0 and standard deviation equal to 1 with the Cumulative argument set to False. +
+
+POISSON function + + +

POISSON

+Returns the Poisson distribution. + +POISSON(Number; Mean [; C]) +Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. +Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. +C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. + + +=POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93. +
+
+ + POISSON.DIST function + + +

POISSON.DIST

+ Returns the Poisson distribution. + + POISSON.DIST(Number; Mean ; Cumulative) + Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. + Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. + Cumulative = 0 or False to calculate the probability mass function; Cumulative = 1, True, or any other non-zero value to calculate the cumulative distribution function. + + =POISSON.DIST(60;50;1) returns 0.9278398202. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.POISSON.DIST +
+
+PERCENTILE function + + +

PERCENTILE

+Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. + +PERCENTILE(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. + + + +=PERCENTILE(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. +
+
+PERCENTILE.EXC function + + +

PERCENTILE.EXC

+Returns the Alpha'th percentile of a supplied range of values for a given value of Alpha, within the range 0 to 1 (exclusive). A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (Alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +If Alpha is not a multiple of 1/(n+1), (where n is the number of values in the supplied array), the function interpolates between the values in the supplied array, to calculate the percentile value. However, if Alpha is less than 1/(n+1) or Alpha is greater than n/(n+1), the function is unable to interpolate, and so returns an error. +The difference between PERCENTILE.INC and PERCENTILE.EXC is that, in the PERCENTILE.INC function the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 inclusive, and in the PERCENTILE.EXC function, the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 exclusive. + +PERCENTILE.EXC(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. + +=PERCENTILE.EXC(A1:A50;10%) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.PERCENTILE.EXC +
+
+PERCENTILE.INC function + + +

PERCENTILE.INC

+Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +The difference between PERCENTILE.INC and PERCENTILE.EXC is that, in the PERCENTILE.INC function the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 inclusive, and in the PERCENTILE.EXC function, the value of alpha is within the range 0 to 1 exclusive. + +PERCENTILE.INC(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. + +=PERCENTILE.INC(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.PERCENTILE.INC +
+
+PERCENTRANK function + + +

PERCENTRANK

+Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. + +PERCENTRANK(Data; Value [; Significance]) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. If omitted, a value of 3 is used. + + + +=PERCENTRANK(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. +
+
+PERCENTRANK.EXC function + +

PERCENTRANK.EXC

+ Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (exclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. +The difference between PERCENTRANK.INC and PERCENTRANK.EXC is that PERCENTRANK.INC calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the PERCENTRANK.EXC function calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 exclusive. + +PERCENTRANK.EXC(Data; Value [; Significance]) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. + +=PERCENTRANK.EXC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.PERCENTRANK.EXC +
+
+PERCENTRANK.INC function + +

PERCENTRANK.INC

+Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (inclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array. +The difference between PERCENTRANK.INC and PERCENTRANK.EXC is that PERCENTRANK.INC calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the PERCENTRANK.EXC function calculates a value in the range 0 to 1 exclusive. + +PERCENTRANK.INC(Data; Value [; Significance]) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Significance An optional argument that specifies the number of significant digits that the returned percentage value is rounded to. + +=PERCENTRANK.INC(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.PERCENTRANK.INC +
+
+QUARTILE function + + +

QUARTILE

+Returns the quartile of a data set. + +QUARTILE(Data; Type) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) + + + +=QUARTILE(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. +
+
+QUARTILE.EXC function + + +

QUARTILE.EXC

+Returns a requested quartile of a supplied range of values, based on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. +The difference between QUARTILE.INC and QUARTILE.EXC is that the QUARTILE.INC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the QUARTILE.EXC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. + +QUARTILE.EXC(Data; Type) +Data represents the range of data values for which you want to calculate the specified quartile. +Type An integer between 1 and 3, representing the required quartile. (if type = 1 or 3, the supplied array must contain more than 2 values) + + +=QUARTILE.EXC(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.QUARTILE.EXC +
+
+QUARTILE.INC function + + +

QUARTILE.INC

+Returns the quartile of a data set. +The difference between QUARTILE.INC and QUARTILE.EXC is that the QUARTILE.INC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 inclusive, whereas the QUARTILE.EXC function bases its calculation on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive. + +QUARTILE.INC(Data; Type) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) + + +=QUARTILE.INC(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.QUARTILE.INC +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9223f4a2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,786 @@ + + + + + + + + + Statistical Functions Part Five + /text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp + + + +

Statistical Functions Part Five +

+ +
+RANK function + numbers;determining ranks + + +

RANK

+ Returns the rank of a number in a sample. + + RANK(Value; Data [; Type]) + + Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. + + Data is the array or range of data in the sample. + + Type (optional) is the sequence order. + Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), + Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. + + + + =RANK(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. +
+
+ + RANK.AVG function + numbers;determining ranks + + +

RANK.AVG

+Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, the average rank is returned. +The difference between RANK.AVG and RANK.EQ occurs when there are duplicates in the list of values. The RANK.EQ function returns the lower rank, whereas the RANK.AVG function returns the average rank. + +RANK.AVG(Value; Data [; Type]) +Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. +Type (optional) is the sequence order. +Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), +Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. + +=RANK.AVG(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.RANK.AVG +
+
+ + RANK.EQ function + numbers;determining ranks + + +

RANK.EQ

+Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values. If there are duplicate values in the list, these are given the same rank. +The difference between RANK.AVG and RANK.EQ occurs when there are duplicates in the list of values. The RANK.EQ function returns the lower rank, whereas the RANK.AVG function returns the average rank. + +RANK.EQ(Value; Data [; Type]) +Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. +Type (optional) is the sequence order. +Type = 0 means descending from the last item of the array to the first (this is the default), +Type = 1 means ascending from the first item of the range to the last. + +=RANK.EQ(A10;A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.RANK.EQ +
+
+SKEW function + + +

SKEW

+ Returns the skewness of a distribution. + + + SKEW() + + The parameters should specify at least three values. + + + + =SKEW(A1:A50) calculates the value of skew for the data referenced. +
+
+ +
+
+regression lines;FORECAST function + extrapolations + FORECAST function + +mw made "regression lines" a two level entry +

FORECAST

+ Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. + + FORECAST(Value; DataY; DataX) + + Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. + + DataY is the array or range of known y's. + + DataX is the array or range of known x's. + + + =FORECAST(50;A1:A50;B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend. +
+
+regression lines;FORECAST.LINEAR function + extrapolations + FORECAST.LINEAR function + + +

FORECAST.LINEAR

+ Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. + + FORECAST.LINEAR(Value; DataY; DataX) + + Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. + + DataY is the array or range of known y's. + + DataX is the array or range of known x's. + + + =FORECAST.LINEAR(50;A1:A50;B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend. + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FORECAST.LINEAR +
+
+STDEV function + standard deviations in statistics;based on a sample + + +

STDEV

+ Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample. + + STDEV() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. + + + =STDEV(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. +
+
+STDEVA function + + +

STDEVA

+ Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample. + + + STDEVA() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. Text has the value 0. + + + =STDEVA(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. +
+
+STDEVP function + standard deviations in statistics;based on a population + + +

STDEVP

+ Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + + + STDEVP() + + + + + =STDEVP(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. +
+
+ + STDEV.P function + standard deviations in statistics;based on a population + + +

STDEV.P

+ Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + + + STDEV.P() + + + =STDEV.P(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.STDEV.P +
+
+ + STDEV.S function + standard deviations in statistics;based on a sample + + +

STDEV.S

+ Calculates the standard deviation based on sample of the population. + + + STDEV.S() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. + + =STDEV.S(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.STDEV.S +
+
+STDEVPA function + + +

STDEVPA

+ Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. + + STDEVPA() + + Text has the value 0. + + + =STDEVPA(A1:A50) returns the standard deviation of the data referenced. +
+
+STANDARDIZE function + converting;random variables, into normalized values + + +

STANDARDIZE

+ Converts a random variable to a normalized value. + + STANDARDIZE(Number; Mean; StDev) + + Number is the value to be standardized. + + Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution. + + StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. + + + =STANDARDIZE(11;10;1) returns 1. The value 11 in a normal distribution with a mean of 10 and a standard deviation of 1 is as much above the mean of 10, as the value 1 is above the mean of the standard normal distribution. +
+
+NORMSINV function + normal distribution;inverse of standard + + +

NORMSINV

+ Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. + + NORMSINV(Number) + + Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. + + + =NORMSINV(0.908789) returns 1.3333. +
+
+NORM.S.INV function + normal distribution;inverse of standard + + +

NORM.S.INV

+ Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. + + NORM.S.INV(Number) + + Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. + + + =NORM.S.INV(0.908789) returns 1.333334673. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.NORM.S.INV +
+
+NORMSDIST function + normal distribution;statistics + + +

NORMSDIST

+ Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. + It is GAUSS(x)=NORMSDIST(x)-0.5 + + NORMSDIST(Number) + + Number is the value to which the standard normal cumulative distribution is calculated. + + + =NORMSDIST(1) returns 0.84. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area. +
+
+NORM.S.DIST function + normal distribution;statistics + + +

NORM.S.DIST

+ Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. + + NORM.S.DIST(Number; Cumulative) + + Number is the value to which the standard normal cumulative distribution is calculated. + + Cumulative 0 or FALSE calculates the probability density function. Any other value or TRUE calculates the cumulative distribution function. + + + =NORM.S.DIST(1;0) returns 0.2419707245. + + =NORM.S.DIST(1;1) returns 0.8413447461. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.NORM.S.DIST +
+
+SLOPE function + + +

SLOPE

+ Returns the slope of the linear regression line. The slope is adapted to the data points set in the y and x values. + + SLOPE(DataY; DataX) + + DataY is the array or matrix of Y data. + + DataX is the array or matrix of X data. + + + =SLOPE(A1:A50;B1:B50) + +
+
+STEYX function + standard errors;statistical functions +mw changed "standard errors" + +

STEYX

+ Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression. + + STEYX(DataY; DataX) + + DataY is the array or matrix of Y data. + + DataX is the array or matrix of X data. + + + =STEYX(A1:A50;B1:B50) + +
+
+DEVSQ function + sums;of squares of deviations + + +

DEVSQ

+ Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean. + + DEVSQ() + + + + + =DEVSQ(A1:A50) + +
+
+TINV function + inverse of t-distribution + + +

TINV

+ Returns the inverse of the t-distribution. + + TINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) + + Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. + + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + + =TINV(0.1;6) returns 1.94 +
+
+ + T.INV function + one tailed inverse of t-distribution + + +

T.INV

+ Returns the one tailed inverse of the t-distribution. + + T.INV(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the probability associated with the one-tailed t-distribution. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + =T.INV(0.1;6) returns -1.4397557473. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.INV +
+
+ + T.INV.2T function + inverse of two tailed t-distribution + + +

T.INV.2T

+ Calculates the inverse of the two-tailed Student's T Distribution , which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + + T.INV.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + =T.INV.2T(0.25; 10) returns 1.221255395. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.INV.2T +
+
+TTEST function + + +

TTEST

+ Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. + + TTEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) + + Data1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. + + Data2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. + + Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. + + Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). + + + =TTEST(A1:A50;B1:B50;2;2) + +
+
+ + T.TEST function + + +

T.TEST

+ Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. + + T.TEST(Data1; Data2; Mode; Type) + Data1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. + Data2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. + Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. + Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). + + =T.TEST(A1:A50;B1:B50;2;2) + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.TEST +
+
+TDIST function + t-distribution + + +

TDIST

+ Returns the t-distribution. + + TDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Mode) + + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + Mode = 1 returns the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 returns the two-tailed test. + + + =TDIST(12;5;1) + +
+
+ + T.DIST function + t-distribution + + +

T.DIST

+ Returns the t-distribution. + + T.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + Cumulative = 0 or FALSE returns the probability density function, 1 or TRUE returns the cumulative distribution function. + + =T.DIST(1; 10; TRUE) returns 0.8295534338 + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.DIST +
+
+ + T.DIST.2T function + two tailed t-distribution + + +

T.DIST.2T

+ Calculates the two-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + + T.DIST.2T(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + =T.DIST.2T(1; 10) returns 0.3408931323. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.DIST.2T +
+
+ + T.DIST.RT function + right tailed t-distribution + + +

T.DIST.RT

+ Calculates the right-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets. + + T.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) + Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + DegreesFreedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + + =T.DIST.RT(1; 10) returns 0.1704465662. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.T.DIST.RT +
+
+VAR function + variances + + +

VAR

+ Estimates the variance based on a sample. + + + VAR() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. + + + + =VAR(A1:A50) + +
+
+ + VAR.S function + variances + + +

VAR.S

+ Estimates the variance based on a sample. + + VAR.S() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. + + =VAR.S(A1:A50) + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.VAR.S +
+
+VARA function + + +

VARA

+ Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0. + + VARA() + + The parameters should specify at least two values. + + + =VARA(A1:A50) + +
+
+VARP function + + +

VARP

+ Calculates a variance based on the entire population. + + VARP() + + + + + =VARP(A1:A50) + +
+
+ + VAR.P function + + +

VAR.P

+ Calculates a variance based on the entire population. + + VAR.P() + + + =VAR.P(A1:A50) + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.VAR.P +
+
+VARPA function + + +

VARPA

+ Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0. + + VARPA() + + + + =VARPA(A1:A50) + +
+
+PERMUT function + number of permutations + + +

PERMUT

+ Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects. + + PERMUT(Count1; Count2) + + Count1 is the total number of objects. + + Count2 is the number of objects in each permutation. + + + =PERMUT(6;3) returns 120. There are 120 different possibilities, to pick a sequence of 3 playing cards out of 6 playing cards. +
+
+PERMUTATIONA function + + +

PERMUTATIONA

+ Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed). + + PERMUTATIONA(Count1; Count2) + + Count1 is the total number of objects. + + Count2 is the number of objects in each permutation. + + How often can 2 objects be selected from a total of 11 objects? + + =PERMUTATIONA(11;2) returns 121. + + =PERMUTATIONA(6;3) returns 216. There are 216 different possibilities to put a sequence of 3 playing cards together out of six playing cards if every card is returned before the next one is drawn. +
+
+PROB function + + +

PROB

+ Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If there is no End value, this function calculates the probability based on the principle that the Data values are equal to the value of Start. + + PROB(Data; Probability; Start [; End]) + + Data is the array or range of data in the sample. + + Probability is the array or range of the corresponding probabilities. + + Start is the start value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. + + End (optional) is the end value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. If this parameter is missing, the probability for the Start value is calculated. + + + =PROB(A1:A50;B1:B50;50;60) returns the probability with which a value within the range of A1:A50 is also within the limits between 50 and 60. Every value within the range of A1:A50 has a probability within the range of B1:B50. +
+
+WEIBULL function + + +

WEIBULL

+ Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. + The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). + If C is 0, WEIBULL calculates the probability density function. + If C is 1, WEIBULL calculates the cumulative distribution function. + + WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + + Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. + + Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. + + Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. + + C indicates the type of function. + + + =WEIBULL(2;1;1;1) returns 0.86. + See also the Wiki page. +
+
+ + WEIBULL.DIST function + + +

WEIBULL.DIST

+ Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. + The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). + If C is 0, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the probability density function. + If C is 1, WEIBULL.DIST calculates the cumulative distribution function. + + WEIBULL.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. + Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. + Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. + C indicates the type of function. + + =WEIBULL.DIST(2;1;1;1) returns 0.8646647168. + + + See also the Wiki page. + + COM.MICROSOFT.WEIBULL.DIST +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b30def43f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ + + + + + +Operators in $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp + + + +formulas; operators +operators; formula functions +division sign, see also operators +multiplication sign, see also operators +minus sign, see also operators +plus sign, see also operators +text operators +comparisons;operators in Calc +arithmetical operators +reference operators +mw added 7 new index entries

Operators in $[officename] Calc

+You can use the following operators in $[officename] Calc: +

Arithmetical Operators

+These operators return numerical results. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + + Example + + + + ++ (Plus) + + +Addition + + +1+1 + + + + +- (Minus) + + +Subtraction + + +2-1 + + + + +- (Minus) + + +Negation + + +-5 + + + + +* (asterisk) + + +Multiplication + + +2*2 + + + + +/ (Slash) + + +Division + + +9/3 + + + + +% (Percent) + + +Percent + + +15% + + + + +^ (Caret) + + +Exponentiation + + +3^2 + + +
+ +Prefix "-" (negation) has a higher precedence than "^" (exponentiation). For example -3^2 equals 9, which is the square of a negative number. + +

Comparative operators

+These operators return either true or false. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + + Example + + + + += (equal sign) + + +Equal + + +A1=B1 + + + + +> (Greater than) + + +Greater than + + +A1>B1 + + + + +< (Less than) + + +Less than + + +A1<B1 + + + + +>= (Greater than or equal to) + + +Greater than or equal to + + +A1>=B1 + + + + +<= (Less than or equal to) + + +Less than or equal to + + +A1<=B1 + + + + +<> (Inequality) + + +Inequality + + +A1<>B1 + + +
+

Text operators

+The operator combines separate texts into one text. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + +Example + + + + +& (And) + + +text concatenation AND + +text concatenation AND + + +"Sun" & "day" is "Sunday" + + +
+

Reference operators

+These operators return a cell range of zero, one or more cells. +Range has the highest precedence, then intersection, and then finally union. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + + Example + + + + +: (Colon) + + +Range + + +A1:C108 + + + + +! (Exclamation point) + + +intersection operator + +Intersection + + +SUM(A1:B6!B5:C12) +Calculates the sum of all cells in the intersection; in this example, the result yields the sum of cells B5 and B6. + + + + +~ (Tilde) + + +Concatenation or union + + +Takes two references and returns a reference list, which is a concatenation of the left reference followed by the right reference. Double entries are referenced twice. See note below this table. + + +
+Reference concatenation using a tilde character was implemented lately. When a formula with the tilde operator exists in a document that is opened in old versions of the software, an error is returned. A reference list is not allowed inside an array expression. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aed37738 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +Named Ranges and Expressions +/text/scalc/01/04070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Named Ranges and Expressions

+Allows you to name the different sections of your spreadsheet document. By naming the different sections, you can easily navigate through the spreadsheet documents and find specific information. +
+
+ +
+

Define

+ +

Insert

+ +

Apply

+ +

Labels

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca27918f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define Names +/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp + + + + + + + + +Define Names +Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a selected area or a name for a formula expression. + +Use the mouse to define ranges or type the reference into the Define Name dialog fields. +
+ +
+The Sheet Area box on the Formula bar contains a list of defined names for the ranges or formula expressions and their scope between parenthesis. Click a name from this box to highlight the corresponding reference on the spreadsheet. Names given formulas or parts of a formula are not listed here. + + +Name +Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference or a formula expression. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field above. If you click a name on the list, the corresponding reference in the document will be shown with a blue frame. If multiple cell ranges belong to the same area name, they are displayed with different colored frames. + + +Range or formula expression +The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. +To insert a new area reference, place the cursor in this field and use your mouse to select the desired area in any sheet of your spreadsheet document. To insert a new named formula, type the formula expression. + + + +Scope +Select the scope of the named range or named formula. Document (Global) means the name is valid for the whole document. Any other sheet name selected will restrict the scope of the named range or formula expression to that sheet. + + +Range options +Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. +Defines additional options related to the type of reference area. + + +Print range +Defines the area as a print range. + + +Filter +Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter. + + +Repeat column +Defines the area as a repeating column. + + +Repeat row +Defines the area as a repeating row. + + +Add +Click the Add button to add a new defined name. + + + +Select a named range or named formula from the list to modify its properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24dafe521 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Paste Names +/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +cell ranges; inserting named ranges +inserting; cell ranges pasting; cell ranges + + + + +Paste Names +Inserts a defined named cell range at the current cursor's position. + +You can only insert a cell area after having defined a name for the area. +
+ +
+ + +Table area +Lists all defined cell areas. Double-click an entry to insert the named area into the active sheet at the current cursor position. + + +Paste All +Inserts a list of all named areas and the corresponding cell references at the current cursor position. + + +Paste +Inserts the selected named area and the corresponding cell reference at the current cursor position. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f98549434 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating Names +/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +cell ranges;creating names automatically +names; for cell ranges + + + + +Creating Names +Allows you to automatically name multiple cell ranges. + +
+ +
+Select the area containing all the ranges that you want to name. Then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Create. This opens the Create Names dialog, from which you can select the naming options that you want. +Create names from +Defines which part of the spreadsheet is to be used for creating the name. + +Top row +Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. + +Left Column +Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. + +Bottom row +Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. + +Right Column +Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cc0ad738 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define Label Range +/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp + + + +sheets; defining label ranges +label ranges in sheets + + + + +Define Label Range + +Opens a dialog in which you can define a label range. + +
+ +
+ +The cell contents of a label range can be used like names in formulas - $[officename] recognizes these names in the same manner that it does the predefined names of the weekdays and months. These names are automatically completed when typed into a formula. In addition, the names defined by label ranges will have priority over names defined by automatically generated ranges. +You can set label ranges that contain the same labels on different sheets. $[officename] first searches the label ranges of the current sheet and, following a failed search, the ranges of other sheets. + + +Range +Displays the cell reference of each label range. In order to remove a label range from the list box, select it and then click Delete. + + +Contains column labels +Includes column labels in the current label range. + +Contains row labels +Includes row labels in the current label range. + +For data range +Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse. + + +Add +Adds the current label range to the list. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d9c5831f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Function List + /text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp + + + + + + + formula list window + function list window + inserting functions; function list window + + + + + +

Function List

+Opens the Function List deck of the Sidebar, which displays all functions that can be inserted into your document. The Function List deck is similar to the Functions tab page of the Function Wizard. The functions are inserted with placeholders to be replaced with your own values. + +
+ +
+The Function List window is a resizable dockable window. Use it to quickly enter functions in the spreadsheet. By double-clicking an entry in the functions list, the respective function is directly inserted with all parameters. + + +

Category List

+ + + +

Function List

+Displays the available functions. When you select a function, the area below the list box displays a short description. To insert the selected function double-click it or click the Insert Function into calculation sheet icon. + + +

Insert Function into calculation sheet

+ + + + + Icon Insert Function + + + Inserts the selected function into the document. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e78f7a721 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + External Links + /text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Open a file dialog to locate the file containing the data you want to insert. + + + +External Links + Inserts data from an HTML, Calc, CSV or Excel file into the current sheet as a link. The data must be located within a named range. +
+
+ +
+ +URL of external data source. +Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter. Alternatively, click Browse button to select the file name from a file dialog that opens. Only then will the URL be requested from the network or file system. +A dialog for CSV data import appears when linking to external CSV file. + +Available tables/ranges + Select the table or the data range that you want to insert. If the selected Calc or Excel document contains no named range, spreadsheet data cannot be inserted and OK button will remain inactive + + +Update every + Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed2b49968 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Format Cells +/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +cell attributes +attributes;cells +formatting;cells +cells;formatting dialog + + +

Format Cells

+Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..011b07e9c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cell Protection +/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Cell Protection +Defines protection options for selected cells. +
+
+ +
+Protection + +Hide all +Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells. + +Protected +Prevents the selected cells from being modified. +This cell protection only takes effect if you also protect the sheet (Tools - Protect Sheet). + +Hide formula +Hides formulas in the selected cells. +Print +Defines print options for the sheet. + +Hide when printing +Keeps the selected cells from being printed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fa978e17 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row +/text/scalc/01/05030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Row +Sets the row height and hides or shows selected rows. +
+
+ +
+Height + +Optimal Height + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbca42674 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Optimal Row Heights +/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sheets; optimal row heights +rows; optimal heights +optimal row heights + + + + +Optimal Row Heights +Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows. + The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row. You can use various units of measure. +
+ +
+ +Add +Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries. + +Default value +Restores the default value for the optimal row height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf465e4ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hide +/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+spreadsheets; hiding functions +hiding; rows +hiding; columns +hiding; sheets +sheets;hiding +columns;hiding +rows;hiding + + + + +Hide +Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets. +
+
+ +
+Select the rows or columns that you want to hide, and then choose Format - Rows - Hide or Format - Columns - Hide. +You can hide a sheet by selecting the sheet tab and then choosing Format - Sheet - Hide. Hidden sheets are not printed unless they occur within a print range. +A break in the row or column header indicates whether the row or column is hidden. +To display hidden rows, columns or sheets + + +Select the range that includes the hidden objects. You can also use the box in the corner above row 1 and beside column A. For sheets, this step is not necessary.UFI: fixes #i18582# + + +Choose Format - Rows/Columns - Show or Format - Sheet - Show. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02d47ef6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Show +/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+spreadsheets; showing columns +showing; columns +showing; rows + + + +Show +Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns. +
+
+ +
+To show a column or row, select the range of rows or columns containing the hidden elements, then choose Format - Rows - Show or Format - Columns - Show. +For example, to show the column B, click on the header of the column A, expand the selection to the column C, then chose Format - Columns - Show. To show the column A previously hidden, click on the header of the column B, keep the mouse button pressed and drag on the left. The selected range displayed in the name area changes from B1:B1048576 to A1:B1048576. Choose Format - Columns - Show. Proceed the same way with rows. +To show all hidden cells, first click in the field in the upper left corner. This selects all cells of the table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee3e1a861 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column +/text/scalc/01/05040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Column +Sets the column width and hides or shows selected columns. +
+
+ +
+Width + +Optimal Width + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..980f26279 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Optimal Column Width +/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spreadsheets; optimal column widths +columns; optimal widths +optimal column widths + + + + + +Optimal Column Width +Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. + The optimal column width depends on the longest entry within a column. You can choose from the available measurement units. +
+ +
+ +Add +Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders. + +Default value +Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column. The additional spacing for the optimal column width is preset to 2 mm. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..664ff6426 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sheet +/text/scalc/01/05050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CTL;right-to-left sheets +sheets;right-to-left +right-to-left text;spreadsheets +mw changed "right-to-left;..." + +Sheet +Sets the sheet name and hides or shows selected sheets. +
+
+ +
+Rename + + +Show + +If a sheet has been hidden, the Show Sheet dialog opens, which allows you to select a sheet to be shown again. + +Right-To-Left +Changes the orientation of the current sheet to Right-To-Left if CTL support is enabled. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..525d60862 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rename Sheet +/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp + + + +worksheet names +changing; sheet names +sheets; renaming + + + + + +Rename Sheet +This command opens a dialog where you can assign a different name to the current sheet. + +
+ +
+ + + +Name +Enter a new name for the sheet here. +You can also open the Rename Sheet dialog through the context menu by positioning the mouse pointer over a sheet tab at the bottom of the window and clicking while pressing Controlclicking the right mouse button. +Alternatively, click the sheet tab while pressing the CommandAlt key. Now you can change the name directly. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0628b62b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Show Sheet +/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + sheets; displayingdisplaying; sheets + +Show Sheet + Displays sheets that were previously hidden with the Hide Sheets command. Select one sheet only to call the command. The current sheet is always selected. If a sheet other than the current sheet is selected, you can deselect it by pressing Command Ctrl while clicking the corresponding sheet tab at the bottom of the window. +
+ +
+ + + Hidden sheets + Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document. To show a certain sheet, click the corresponding entry on the list and confirm with OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b01c72240 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + +Merge and Center Cells +/text/scalc/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + toggle merge and center cells + + + + +

Merge and Center Cells

+This is a toggleable control that joins all cells in a rectangular selection into a single cell, or returns merged cells to the original individual cells. When merging it will format the merged cell as center aligned. +The control is shown toggled-on whenever there are merged cells in the selection, indicating that clicking the control will unmerge those cells. +
+Merging cells can lead to calculation errors in formulas in the table. +
+
+Do one of the following: +In the Formatting toolbar, click: + + + + +Icon Merge and Center Cells + + +Merge and Center Cells + + +
+Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge and Center Cells. +
+
+Cells cannot be merged again without first unmerging them. +Merging a cell selection that partially includes merged cells is generally possible with Unmerge Cells followed by Merge Cells, without altering the initial selection. The result will be largely depend on previous choices when merging cells made with the Merge Cells Dialog options described below. +Multiple selection is not supported, that is, the selection must be rectangular. +The merged cell receives the name and content of the first cell of the selection. +If more than one cell to be merged has content the Merge Cells dialog opens. + + + +

Merge Cells Dialog Options

+Three options are available: + + + Move the contents of the hidden cells into the first cell: The actual contents of the hidden cells are concatenated to the first cell, and hidden cells are emptied; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells or the first cell will be updated. + + + Keep the contents of the hidden cells: The contents of the hidden cells are kept; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells will not change. + + + Empty the contents of the hidden cells: The contents of the hidden cells are removed; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells will be updated. + + +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4d81913a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Page Style +/text/scalc/01/05070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +style;page +page;style +format;page +formatting;page + + +
+

Page Style

+Opens a dialog where you can define the appearance of all pages in your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ef68735e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Sheet +/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp + + + +
+ + +pages; order when printing +printing; page order +mw deletes three "printing;..." entries and copies 4 index entries to Calc guide print_details.xhpSheet +Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale. +
+
+ +
+Print +Defines which elements of the spreadsheet are to be printed. +Column and row headers +Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. +Grid +Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. +Comments +Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. +Objects/images +Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document. +Charts +Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet. +Drawing Objects +Includes all drawing objects in the printed document. +Formulas +Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results. +Zero Values +Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. +Page Order +Defines the order in which data in a sheet is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one printed page. +Top to bottom, then right +Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet. +Left to right, then down +Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column. +First page number +Select this option if you want this style to restart page numbering. +Enter the number you want to restart at. +Scale +Defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. +Scaling mode +Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown below the list box. +Reduce/enlarge printout +Specifies a scaling factor to scale all printed pages. +Scaling factor +Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. +Fit print range(s) to width/height +Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. + + +The print ranges are always scaled proportionally, so the resulting number of pages may be less than specified. + + +You may disable one of the boxes, then the unspecified dimension will use as many pages as necessary. + + +If you disable both boxes, this will result in a scaling factor of 100%. + + +Width in pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across. +Height in pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. +Fit print range(s) on number of pages +Specifies the maximum number of pages on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. The scale will be reduced as necessary to fit the defined number of pages.UFI: fixes #112585# +Number of pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ee25b7ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print Ranges +/text/scalc/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+Print Ranges +Manages print ranges. Only cells within the print ranges will be printed. +
+
+ +
+If you do not define any print range manually, Calc assigns an automatic print range to include all the cells that are not empty. + + + +Edit + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7645a6c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define +/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Define +Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfd348d95 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Clear +/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Clear +Removes the defined print area. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73e4084c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Print Ranges +/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp + + + + + + +Edit Print Ranges +Opens a dialog where you can specify the print range. + You can also set the rows or columns which are to be repeated in every page. +
+ +
+ + + + + + +Print range +Allows you to modify a defined print range. +Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Define command. If you have given a name to a range using the Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. +In the right-hand text box, you can enter a print range by reference or by name. If the cursor is in the Print range text box, you can also select the print range in the spreadsheet with your mouse. + + + +Rows to repeat +Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. +You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. + + + +Columns to repeat +Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. +You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0068cf860 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add +/text/scalc/01/05080400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Add +Adds the current selection to the defined print areas. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c99bafcbe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ + + + + + + + Styles in Calc + /text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp + + + + + +
+ +Stylist, see Styles window +Styles window +formats; Styles window +formatting; Styles window +paint can for applying styles +styles in spreadsheets +styles; in Calc + + +

Styles

+Use the Styles deck of the Sidebar to assign styles to cells and pages. You can apply, update, and modify existing styles or create new styles. +
+The Styles dockable window can remain open while editing the document. + +
+ +
+ +

How to apply a cell style:

+ + + + Select the cell or cell range. + + + Double-click the style in the Styles window. + + + + +Displays the list of the available Cell Styles. + + + + Icon Cell Styles + + + Cell Styles + + +
+ + + +

Page Styles

+Displays the Page Styles available. + + + + + Icon Page Styles + + + Page Styles + + +
+ + + +

Fill Format Mode

+Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles window. + + + + + Icon Fill Format Mode + + + Fill Format Mode + + +
+ +

How to apply a new style with the paint can:

+ + + + Select the desired style from the Styles window. + + + Click the Fill Format Mode icon. + + + Click a cell to format it, or drag your mouse over a certain range to format the whole range. Repeat this action for other cells and ranges. + + + Click the Fill Format Mode icon again to exit this mode. + + + + +

New Style from Selection

+Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object. Assign a name for the style in the Create Style dialog. + + + + + Icon New Style from Selection + + + New Style from Selection + + +
+ + + +

Update Style

+Updates the Style selected in the Styles window with the current formatting of the selected object. + + + + + Icon Update Style + + + Update Style + + +
+ + + +

Style List

+Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category. +In the context menu you can choose commands to create a new style, delete a user-defined style, or change the selected style. + + +

Style GroupsUFI: use "groups" to be consistent with Writer

+Lists the available style groups. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe12c538 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + AutoFormat + /text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp + + + + + + + +

AutoFormat

+ Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats. +
+ +
+ The AutoFormat command is available only if a cell range with at least 3 columns and 3 rows are selected. Otherwise this command will appear grayed out in the menu. + +Format +Choose a predefined AutoFormat to apply to a selected area in your sheet. + + +Add +Allows you to add the current formatting of a range of at least 4 x 4 cells to the list of predefined AutoFormats. The Add AutoFormat dialog then appears. + +Enter a name and click OK. + + +Rename +Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected AutoFormat. + +The Rename AutoFormat dialog opens. Enter the new name of the AutoFormat here. + +Formatting +In this section you can select or deselect the available formatting options. If you want to keep any of the settings currently in your spreadsheet, deselect the corresponding option. + +Number format +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the number format of the selected format. + +Borders +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the border of the selected format. + +Font +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the font of the selected format. + +Pattern +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the pattern of the selected format. + +Alignment +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the alignment of the selected format. + +AutoFit width and height +When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9abe1ee3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ + + + + + + + + + Conditional Formatting + /text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp + + + + + + + +

Conditional Formatting

+ Use Conditional Formatting to define range-based conditions that determine which cell style will be applied to each cell in a given range based on its contents. The cell style corresponding to the first condition that evaluates to true is applied. Cell styles applied through Conditional Formatting override cell styles applied manually using the Formatting Bar or the Styles sidebar. +
+ +
+ You can enter several conditions that query the cell values or results of formulas. The conditions are evaluated from first to the last. If Condition 1 is true based on the current cell contents, the corresponding cell style is applied. Otherwise, Condition 2 is evaluated to determine if its corresponding style will be applied. If none of the conditions match cell contents, then no changes are made to the cell format. + Conditional formats do no overwrite cell styles and direct formatting applied manually. They remain saved as cell properties and are applied when the cell matches no conditions or when you remove all conditional formats. + To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Data - Calculate - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). +conditional formatting; conditions + + +

Condition list

+ List of the conditions defined for the cell range in order of evaluation. You can define as many conditions as you want. + +

Up

+Increase priority of the selected condition. +

Down

+ + Decrease priority of the selected condition. + +

Condition list entry

+ Specify if conditional formatting is dependent on one of the entry listed on the drop down box: + + + + + + If you select All cells, see Color Scale, Data Bar or Icon Set explanations below, depending on which visual representation the conditional formatting should be represented. + + + If you select Cell value is: + FIXME: Hack to get a nested list + + + Select a condition in the drop down list for the format to be applied to the selected cells and enter the value. + + + In front of Apply Styles, select the desired style in the list or chose New Style to create one. + + + Click the Add button to add another condition, click the Remove button to remove a condition. + + + In the Range field, define the range of cells concerned by the conditional formatting. Click on the Shrink button to minimize the dialog box. Click again on the button to come back to the dialog box once the range is selected. + + + + + + If you select Formula is as a reference, enter a cell reference. If the cell reference is a value other than zero, the condition matches. + + + If you select Date is, see below explanations for Date. + + + +

Color Scale

+ This is the same dialog box as if you select All cells in the first sub menu entry Condition. +Apply a color scale to a range consist of displaying a bicolor or tricolor gradient on this range depending on the value of each cell. A typical example might be an array of temperatures, lower blue colored, warmer red with a gradient nuances to the intermediate values. + You must choose the two "extreme" colors indicate the method of calculation. The calculation of the color applied will be made in relation to: Min - Max - Percentile - Value - Percent - Formula. + The choices Min and Max are sufficient to themselves as found in the range. Other options need to be specified by a value (Percentile, Value, Percentage) or a cell reference or formula (Formula). + For a detailed explanation and examples, please visit How to apply a Color Scale Conditional Formatting page in TDF Wiki. + +

Data Bar

+ Data bar option will fill the cell with solid or gradient color corresponding to the numeric value in the cell. Default is blue for positive and red for negative. + The calculation of the area of fill is based on Min - Max - Percentile - Value - Percent - Formula. + The choices Min and Max are sufficient to themselves as found in the range. Other options need to be specified by a value (Percentile, Value, Percentage) or a cell reference or formula (Formula). + More Options... opens a dialog to: + + + change colors + + + change position of vertical axis within the cell + + + the bar's minimum and maximum length in percentage + + + +

Icon Set

+ It is desired to plot the position of a value relative to the thresholds. The set of icons will help to indicate the thresholds and choose the type of icons. Available icon sets are: + + + 3, 4 or 5 - arrows + + + 3, 4 or 5 - gray arrows + + + 3 - flags + + + 3 - traffic lights 1 and 2 (two different designs) + + + 3 - symbols (square, triangle, circle) + + + 4 - circles from red to black + + + 4 or 5 - ratings + + + 5 - quarters + + + Conditions to display each icon can be specified relative to a value (Value), a percentage of the number of values in the range (Percentage) as a percentage of range values (Percentile) or formula (Formula). + For a detailed explanation and examples, please visit How to use Icon Set Conditional Formatting page in TDF Wiki. + +

Dates

+ This option will apply a defined style depending on a date that you choose in the drop down box: Today - Yesterday - Tomorrow - Last 7 days - This week - Last week. + + + In front of Apply Styles, select the desired style in the list or chose New Style to create one. + + + Click the Add button to add another condition, click the Remove button to remove a condition. + + + In the Range field, define the range of cells concerned by the conditional formatting. Click on the Shrink button to minimize the dialog box. Click again on the button to come back to the dialog box once the range is selected. + + + + + +

Manage Conditional Formatting

+This dialog allows you to see all the conditional formatting defined in the spreadsheet. + +
+ Choose Format - Conditional Formatting - Manage. +
+ + + +The Manage Conditional Formatting dialog box opens. Here you can add, edit or remove one or several conditional formattings. + + +The Conditional Formats list displays the active conditional formatting rules set in the current spreadsheet. Only the first rule for each cell range is listed, even if there are multiple rules defined for a given range. + +If you have defined a conditional formatting on a cell range and you try now to define a new conditional formatting on a part of this range, a warning message will be displayed, asking if you want to edit the existing conditional formatting (on the whole range) or define a new conditional formatting overlapping it (on the selected range). + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f63951511 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp + + + +automatic hyphenation in spreadsheets +hyphenation; in spreadsheets +syllables in spreadsheets +mw made "hyphenation..." a two level entry + +Hyphenation +The Hyphenation command calls the dialog for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc. + +
+ +
+You can only turn on the automatic hyphenation in $[officename] Calc when the row break feature is active. +Hyphenation for selected cells. + + +Select the cells for which you want to change the hyphenation. + + +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + + +The Format Cells dialog appears with the Alignment tab page open. + + +Mark the Wrap text automatically and Hyphenation active check boxes. + + +Hyphenation for Drawing Objects + + +Select a drawing object. + + +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + + +Each time you call the command you turn the hyphenation for the drawing object on or off. A check mark shows the current status. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c34d8ad4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Detective + /text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp + + + +
+cell links search + searching; links in cells + traces;precedents and dependents + Formula Auditing,see Detective + Detective +MW added "Detective" and a cross-reference +Detective + This command activates the Spreadsheet Detective. With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet. +
+
+ +
+ Once you have defined a trace, you can point with the mouse cursor to the trace. The mouse cursor will change its shape. Double-click the trace with this cursor to select the referenced cell at the end of the trace. If you define an icon in the spreadsheet, you can put your cursor on it. It will change into a magnifying glass with reference arrows. Double-click the visible icon to select the cell at the furthest end of the icon. + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a301cb6c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Trace Precedents +/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cells; tracing precedents +formula cells;tracing precedents + + +Trace Precedents +This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula. +
+Traces are displayed in the sheet with marking arrows. At the same time, the range of all the cells contained in the formula of the current cell is highlighted with a blue frame. +
+ +
+This function is based on a principle of layers. For example, if the precedent cell to a formula is already indicated with a tracer arrow, when you repeat this command, the tracer arrows are drawn to the precedent cells of this cell. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a11ac9c2a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Remove Precedents +/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cells; removing precedents +formula cells;removing precedents +mw changed "formula..." entry + +Remove Precedents +Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c26b4597 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Trace Dependents +/text/scalc/01/06030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; tracing dependents + +Trace Dependents + Draws tracer arrows to the active cell from formulas that depend on values in the active cell. +
+ The area of all cells that are used together with the active cell in a formula is highlighted by a blue frame. +
+ +
+ This function works per level. For instance, if one level of traces has already been activated to show the precedents (or dependents), then you would see the next dependency level by activating the Trace function again. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..345c24430 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Remove Dependents +/text/scalc/01/06030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; removing dependents + +Remove Dependents + Deletes one level of tracer arrows created with Trace Dependents. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bb1bf550 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Remove All Traces +/text/scalc/01/06030500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; removing traces + +Remove All Traces + Removes all tracer arrows from the spreadsheet. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b112100d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Trace Error +/text/scalc/01/06030600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; tracing errorstracing errorserror tracing + +Trace Error + Draws tracer arrows to all precedent cells which cause an error value in a selected cell. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1036bb500 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fill Mode +/text/scalc/01/06030700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cells; trace fill mode +traces; precedents for multiple cells + + +Fill Mode +Activates the Fill Mode in the Detective. The mouse pointer changes to a special symbol, and you can click any cell to see a trace to the precedent cell. To exit this mode, press Escape or click the End Fill Mode command in the context menu. +
+
+ +
+The Fill Mode function is identical to the Trace Precedent command if you call this mode for the first time. Use the context menu to select further options for the Fill Mode and to exit this mode. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9905b92 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mark Invalid Data +/text/scalc/01/06030800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; invalid datadata; showing invalid datainvalid data;marking + +Mark Invalid Data + Marks all cells in the sheet that contain values outside the validation rules. +
+
+ +
+ The validity rules restrict the input of numbers, dates, time values and text to certain values. However, it is possible to enter invalid values or copy invalid values into the cells if the Stop option is not selected. When you assign a validity rule, existing values in a cell will not be modified. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..495c0abff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Refresh Traces +/text/scalc/01/06030900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cells; refreshing traces +traces; refreshing +updating;traces +mw made "updating..." a two level entry + +Refresh Traces +Redraws all traces in the sheet. Formulas modified when traces are redrawn are taken into account. +
+
+ +
+
+Detective arrows in the document are updated under the following circumstances: + + +Starting Tools - Detective - Update Refresh Traces + + + +If Tools - Detective - AutoRefresh is turned on, every time formulas are changed in the document. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30bd550ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoRefresh +/text/scalc/01/06031000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ cells; autorefreshing tracestraces; autorefreshing + +AutoRefresh + Automatically refreshes all the traces in the sheet whenever you modify a formula. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d773a5ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Goal Seek +/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp + + + + + + +Goal Seek +Opens a dialog where you can solve an equation with a variable. + After a successful search, a dialog with the results opens, allowing you to apply the result and the target value directly to the cell. +
+ +
+Default +In this section, you can define the variables in your formula. + +Formula cell +In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference. Click another cell in the sheet to apply its reference to the text box. + +Target value +Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result. + +Variable cell +Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd5b9366f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create Scenario +/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Create Scenario +Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area. + +
+ +
+ + + + + +Name of scenario +Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario. You can also modify a scenario name in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. + + +Comment +Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. +Settings +This section is used to define some of the settings used in the scenario display. + + +Display borderUFI: #i38688# +Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option. The border will have a title bar displaying the name of the last scenario. The button on the right of the scenario border offers you an overview of all the scenarios in this area, if several have been defined. You can choose any of the scenarios from this list without restrictions. + +Copy back +Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. + +Copy entire sheet +Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet. + +Prevent changes +Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. + + +You can only change the scenario properties if the Prevent changes option is not selected and if the sheet is not protected. + + +You can only edit cell values if the Prevent changes option is selected, if the Copy back is option is not selected, and if the cells are not protected. + + +You can only change scenario cell values and write them back into the scenario if the Prevent changes option is not selected, if the Copy back option is selected, and if the cells are not protected. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae03dc323 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Protect Document +/text/scalc/01/06060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Protect Document +The Protect Sheet or Protect Spreadsheet Structure commands prevent changes from being made to cells in the sheets or to sheets in a document. As an option, you can define a password. If a password is defined, removal of the protection is only possible if the user enters the correct password. +
+
+ + +
+Sheets + +Documents + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ed52eec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + +Protecting Sheet +/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp + + + + + + + +insert rows;protected sheet +insert columns;protected sheet +delete columns;protected sheet +delete rows;protected sheet +protected sheet;insert columns +protected sheet;insert rows +protected sheet;delete rows +protected sheet;delete columns +protect;sheet +selection;in protected cells + +

Protecting Sheet

+Protects the cells in the current sheet from being modified. +Choose Tools - Protect Sheet to open the Protect Sheet dialog in which you then specify sheet protection with or without a password, and select the elements of the sheet to protect. +
+ + +
+To protect cells from further editing, the Protected check box must be checked on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page or on the Format Cells context menu. + +

Protect this sheet and contents of the protected cells

+Mark this checkbox to activate protection of sheet and cell contents. +

Password / Confirm

+Allows you to enter a password to protect the sheet from unauthorized changes. Confirm the password entered in the first box. +

Allow users of this sheet to

+Select the elements to protect from user actions: + + + Select protected cells: mark this checkbox to allow you to select protected cells. When the checkbox is unmarked, you cannot select protected cells, the cursor cannot enter in a protected range. + + + Select unprotected cells: mark this checkbox to allow user to select unprotected cells. When the checkbox is unmarked, user cannot select unprotected cells, the cursor cannot enter in a unprotected cell or range. + + + Insert columns: Allow column insertions even when the sheet is protected. Note that when column insertions is enabled, you can insert columns even when the range to insert the new columns into contains protected cells which will get shifted after the insertion. Cells of the newly inserted columns inherit the Protection property of the range it belongs: when the new cell is inside a protected range, the cell is protected, and when it is in an unprotected range, the cell is unprotected. + + + Insert rows: Allow row insertions even when the sheet is protected. Note that when row insertions is enabled, you can insert rows even when the range to insert the new rows into contains protected cells which will get shifted after the insertion. Cells of the newly inserted rows inherit the Protection property of the range it belongs: when the new cell is inside a protected range it is protected, and when it is in an unprotected range, the cell is unprotected. + + + Delete columns: Allow column deletions. Note that column deletions are only allowed on unprotected cells. + + + + Delete rows: Allow row deletions. Note that row deletions are only allowed on unprotected cells. + + + +Unprotected cells or cell ranges can be set up on a protected sheet by using the Tools - Protect Sheet and Format - Cells - Cell Protection menus: + + +Select the cells that will be unprotected + + +Select Format - Cells - Cell Protection. Unmark the Protected box and click OK. + + + On the Tools - Protect Sheet menu, activate protection for the sheet. Effective immediately, only the cell range you selected in step 1 can be edited. + + +To later change an unprotected area to a protected area: + + + Select the range of cells that will be protected. + + + On the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page, check the Protected box. + + + Choose the Tools - Protect Sheet menu. The previously editable range is now protected. + + +Sheet protection also affects the context menu of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. The Delete and Rename commands cannot be selected. +If a sheet is protected, you will not be able to modify or delete any Cell Styles. +A protected sheet or cell range can no longer be modified until this protection is disabled, with the exceptions of the settings for columns and row of the Tools - Protect Sheet dialog. To disable the protection, choose the Tools - Protect Sheet command. If no password was set, the sheet protection is immediately disabled. If the sheet was password protected, the Remove Protection dialog opens, where you must enter the password. +Once saved, protected sheets can only be saved again by using the File - Save As command. +Complete protection of your work can be achieved by combining the options Tools - Protect Sheet and Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure, including password protection. To prohibit opening the document altogether, in the Save dialog mark the Save with password box before you click the Save button. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20a68ae45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Protecting document +/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Protecting document +Protects the sheet structure of your document from modifications. It is impossible to insert, delete, rename, move or copy sheets. Open the Protect spreadsheet structure dialog with Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure. Optionally enter a password and click OK. +
+ +
+The structure of protected spreadsheet documents can be changed only if the Protect option is disabled. On the context menus for the spreadsheet tabs at the lower graphic border, only the menu item Select All Sheets can be activated. All other menu items are deactivated. To remove the protection, call up the command Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure again. If no password is assigned, protection is immediately removed. If you were assigned a password, the Remove Spreadsheet Protection dialog appears, in which you must enter the password. Only then can you remove the check mark specifying that protection is active. +A protected document, once saved, can only be saved again with the File - Save As menu command. + + +Password (optional) +You can create a password to protect your document against unauthorized or accidental modifications. + + +Re-enter the password. + +You can completely protect your work by combining the options Tools - Protect Sheet and Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure, including password entry. If you want to prevent the document from being opened by other users, select Save With Password and click the Save button. The Enter Password dialog appears. Consider carefully when choosing a password; if you forget it after you close a document you will be unable to access the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f35327a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +AutoCalculate +/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp + + + +
+calculating; auto calculating sheets +recalculate;auto calculating sheets +recalculating;auto calculating sheets +AutoCalculate function in sheets +correcting sheets automatically +formulas;AutoCalculate function +cell contents;AutoCalculate function +mw added "recalculating;..." + +

AutoCalculate

+Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document. +
+All cells are recalculated after a sheet cell has been modified. Any charts in the sheet will also be refreshed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd85adf92 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Recalculate +/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp + + + +
+recalculating;all formulas in sheets +recalculate;all formulas in sheets +formulas; recalculating manually +cell contents; recalculating +mw changed "recalculating;...", "formulas;..." and "cell..." entries and deleted "recalculating formulas" + +
+

Recalculate

+Recalculates formula cells. +
+
+ +
+If AutoCalculate is disabled, the Recalculate command recalculates all (so-called dirty) formula cells that depend on changed cell content and their dependents, and formula cells containing volatile functions such as RAND() or NOW() and formula cells that depend on them. +If AutoCalculate is enabled, the Recalculate command applies only to formula cells containing volatile functions like RAND() or NOW() and formula cells that depend on them. +In either mode, with formula cell(s) selected pressing F9 recalculates the currently selected cells and formula cells that depend on them. This can be useful after reading documents with recalculation disabled and individual cells need recalculation. +Press F9 to recalculate. Press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9 to recalculate all formulas in the document, including Add-In functions and non-volatile functions. +After the document has been recalculated, the display is refreshed. All charts are also refreshed. +
+
+ Recalculation options +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40462661a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoInput +/text/scalc/01/06130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +entering entries with AutoInput function +capital letters;AutoInput function +mw made "entering..." a one level entry + +AutoInput +Switches the AutoInput function on and off, which automatically completes entries, based on other entries in the same column. The column is scanned up to a maximum of 2000 cells or 200 different strings. + +
+ +
+The completion text is highlighted. + + +To accept the completion, press Enter or a cursor key. + + +To append text or to edit the completion, press F2. + + +To view more completions, press CommandCtrl+Tab to scroll forward, or CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab to scroll backward. + + + To see a list of all available AutoInput text items for the current column, press OptionAlt+Down Arrow. + + +When typing formulas using characters that match previous entries, a Help tip will appear listing the last ten functions used from Function Wizard, from all defined range names, from all database range names, and from the content of all label ranges. +AutoInput is case-sensitive. If, for example, you have written "Total" in a cell, you cannot enter "total" in another cell of the same column without first deactivating AutoInput. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e0beeae1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Split Window + /text/scalc/01/07080000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Split Window +Divides the current window at the top left corner of the active cell. +
+ +
+ +
+ +You can also use the mouse to split the window horizontally or vertically. To do this, drag the thick black line located directly above the vertical scrollbar or directly to the right of the horizontal scrollbar into the window. A thick black line will show where the window is split. +A split window has its own scrollbars in each partial section; by contrast, fixed window sections are not scrollable. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..07064520c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Freeze Rows and Columns + /text/scalc/01/07090000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Freeze Rows and Columns

+Divides the sheet at the top left corner of the active cell and the area to the top left is no longer scrollable. +
+ +
+ +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e7587324 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Freeze Cells + /text/scalc/01/07090100.xhp + + + + + freezing;first row + freezing;first column + freezing;cells + +
+

Freeze Cells

+Freezes the first column or the first row of the current spreadsheet. +
+
+ + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b655dee61 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define Database Range +/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Define Range

+Defines a database range based on the selected cells in your sheet. +
+ +You can only select a rectangular cell range. +
+ +
+ +

Name

+Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list. + +

Range

+Displays the selected cell range. + + +

Add/Modify

+Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range. + + +

More >>

+Shows additional options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57b2a0573 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Options +/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Options + Contains column labels + Selected cell ranges contains labels. + Insert or delete cells + Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database. To manually update the database range, choose Data - Refresh Range. + Keep formatting + Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range. + Don't save imported data + Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells. + Source: + Displays information about the current database source and any existing operators. + More << + Hides the additional options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50b18d46c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Select Database Range +/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +databases; selecting (Calc) + + + + + +
+

Select Range

+Selects a database range that you defined under Data - Define Range. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Ranges

+Lists the available database ranges. To select a database range, click its name, and then click OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5eddab9f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Sort +/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Sort

+Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify. + $[officename] automatically recognizes and selects database ranges. +
+You cannot sort data if the Record changes options is enabled. +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be87bba34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Sort Criteria +/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp + + + +
+sorting; sort criteria for database ranges + + + +

Sort Criteria

+Specify the sorting options for the selected range. +
+Ensure that you include any row and column titles in the selection. +
+ +
+ + + +

Sort by

+Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. +

Ascending

+Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +

Descending

+Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +

Then by

+Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. +

Ascending

+Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +

Descending

+Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. + + +

Sort Ascending/Descending

+Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Icons on the Standard toolbar + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2dbd0cb88 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Options +/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sorting; options for database ranges +sorting;Asian languages +Asian languages;sorting +phonebook sorting rules +natural sort algorithm + + + +

Options

+ Sets additional sorting options. +
+
+ +
+ +

Case sensitive

+Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. For Asian languages, special handling applies. +For Asian languages: Check Case Sensitive to apply multi-level collation. With multi-level collation, entries are first compared in their primitive forms with their cases and diacritics ignored. If they evaluate as the same, their diacritics are taken into account for the second-level comparison. If they still evaluate as the same, their cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana difference are considered for the third-level comparison.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + +

Range contains row/column labels

+ Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort. The Direction setting at the bottom of the dialog defines the name and function of this check box. + +

Include formats

+ Preserves the current cell formatting. + +

Enable natural sort

+Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number, instead of the traditional way of sorting them as ordinary strings. For instance, let's assume you have a series of values such as, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, ..., A19, A20, A21. When you put these values into a range of cells and run the sort, it will become A1, A11, A12, A13, ..., A19, A2, A20, A21, A3, A4, A5, ..., A9. While this sorting behavior may make sense to those who understand the underlying sorting mechanism, to the rest of the population it seems completely bizarre, if not outright inconvenient. With the natural sort feature enabled, values such as the ones in the above example get sorted "properly", which improves the convenience of sorting operations in general. + +

Include boundary column(s)/row(s) containing only comments

+Range boundary columns (for sorting rows) or boundary rows (for sorting columns) of a sorting range are not sorted by default if they are empty. Check this option if boundary columns or boundary rows containing comments are also to be sorted. + +

Include boundary column(s)/row(s) containing only images

+Border columns (for sorting rows) or border rows (for sorting columns) of a sorting area are not sorted by default if they are empty. Check this option if boundary columns or boundary rows containing images are also to be sorted. + +

Copy sort results to:

+ Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify. + +

Sort results (named ranges list)

+ Select a named cell range where you want to display the sorted list. + +

Sort results (input box)

+Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list. + +

Custom sort order

+ Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. + +

Custom sort order list

+ Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +

Language

+ +

Language

+ Select the language for the sorting rules. + +

Options

+ Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. +

Direction

+ +

Top to Bottom (Sort Rows)

+ Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range. + +

Left to Right (Sort Columns)

+ Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..158888ea5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + More Filters + /text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp + + + +
+ +

More Filters

+ Shows commands to filter your data. +
+
+ +
+ %PRODUCTNAME automatically recognizes predefined database ranges. + The following filtering options are available: +

Standard filter

+ +

Advanced filter

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..599def1e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + +AutoFilter +/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

AutoFilter

+Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Sort Ascending

+Displays the rows of the cell range in ascending order, based on the values in the cells of the current column. +

Sort Descending

+Displays the rows of the cell range in descending order, based on the values in the cells of the current column. +

Top 10

+Displays the 10 rows of the cell range that contain the largest values in the cells of the current column. If these values are unique then no more than 10 rows will be visible, but if the values are not unique then it is possible for more than 10 rows to be shown. +

Empty

+Displays only the rows of the cell range that have an empty cell in the current column. +

Not Empty

+Displays only the rows of the cell range that have a non-empty cell in the current column. +

Text color

+Displays only the rows of the cell range for which the text color of the cell in the current column matches the color selected. +

Background color

+Displays only the rows of the cell range for which the background color of the cell in the current column matches the color selected. +

Standard Filter

+Opens the Standard Filter dialog. +

Search text box

+Search for a specific entry in the list of values found in the current column. As characters are typed in the text box, this list is updated to show only matching entries. +

All

+Click once to select to show all rows and click again to select to hide all rows. +

Show only current

+Display only rows containing the value highlighted in the Value box. +

Hide only current

+Hide all rows containing the value highlighted in the Value box and display all other rows. +

Values

+List of unique values found in the current column. +
+ +Default filter +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be0a948e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + Options + /text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp + + + +

Options

+ + +Shows additional filter options. + +
+ +
+

Options

+ + +
+

Case sensitive

+ Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when filtering the data. + + +

Range contains column labels

+ Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range. + + + + + + +

Copy results to

+ Select the check box, and then select the cell range where you want to display the filter results. You can also select a named range from the list. +
+ +
+ + +

Regular expression

+ Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. For a list of the regular expressions that $[officename] supports, click here. + If the Regular Expressions check box is selected, you can use regular expressions in the Value field if the Condition list box is set to '=' EQUAL or '<>' UNEQUAL. This also applies to the respective cells that you reference for an advanced filter. + + +

No duplication

+ Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. + + +

Keep filter criteria

+ Select the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range where you want to display the filtered data. If this box is checked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range. Following this, you can reapply the defined filter at any time as follows: click into the source range, then choose Data - Refresh Range. +
+

Data range

+Displays the cell range or the name of the cell range that you want to filter. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e5573ead --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + Advanced Filter + /text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp + + + + + + +Advanced Filter +Defines an advanced filter. + +
+ +
+ + +Read filter criteria from +Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use. + +

Options

+ + + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..584b426f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Reset Filter +/text/scalc/01/12040400.xhp + + + +
+ +Reset Filter +Removes the filter from the selected cell range. To enable this command, click inside the cell area where the filter was applied. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc8f49a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hide AutoFilter +/text/scalc/01/12040500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ database ranges; hiding AutoFilter + +Hide AutoFilter + Hides the AutoFilter buttons in the selected cell range. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be438446d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Subtotals +/text/scalc/01/12050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Subtotals

+ Calculates subtotals for the columns that you select. $[officename] uses the SUM function to automatically calculate the subtotal and grand total values in a labeled range. You can also use other functions to perform the calculation. $[officename] automatically recognizes a defined database area when you place the cursor in it. +
+
+ +
+ For example, you can generate a sales summary for a certain postal code based on data from a client database. + + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the subtotal rows in the selected area. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe96b4548 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +1st, 2nd, 3rd Group +/text/scalc/01/12050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

1st, 2nd, 3rd Group

+Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout. +
+
+ +
+ +

Group by

+Select the column that you want to control the subtotal calculation process. If the contents of the selected column change, the subtotals are automatically recalculated. + +

Calculate subtotals for

+Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal. + +

Use function

+Select the mathematical function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e0713a21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +Options +/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp + + + +
+subtotals; sorting options + + + +

Options

+Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals. +
+
+ +
+

Page break between groups

+Inserts a new page after each group of subtotaled data. +

Case sensitive

+Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label. +

Pre-sort area according to groups

+Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected. +

Sort

+

Include formats

+Considers formatting attributes when sorting. + +

Custom sort order

+Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +

Ascending

+Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +

Descending

+Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff0a53980 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Multiple Operations +/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Multiple Operations

+Applies the same formula to different cells, but with different parameter values. +
+ +
+ +
+ +The Row or Column box must contain a reference to the first cell of the selected range. +If you export a spreadsheet containing multiple operations to Microsoft Excel, the location of the cells containing the formula must be fully defined relative to the data range. +

Defaults

+ +

Formulas

+Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulas that you want to use in the multiple operation. + +

Row

+Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table. + +

Column

+Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdf63f2d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Consolidate +/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp + + + + + + + +
+

Consolidate

+Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Function

+Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data. + +

Consolidation ranges

+Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate. + + +

Source data range

+Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list. + + + +

Copy results to

+Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed. + + +

Add

+Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box. + +

Options

+Shows additional options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef860a214 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Consolidate by +/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Consolidate by + Consolidate by + Use this section if the cell ranges that you want to consolidate contain labels. You only need to select these options if the consolidation ranges contain similar labels and the data arranged is arranged differently. + Row labels + Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data. + Column labels + Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data. + Options + Link to source data + Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed. + Options + Hides the additional options. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0497321b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group and Outline +/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sheets; outlines +outlines; sheets +hiding; sheet details +showing; sheet details +grouping;cells + +Group and Outline +You can create an outline of your data and group rows and columns together so that you can collapse and expand the groups with a single click. +
+
+ +
+ + +Group + +Ungroup + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..875d6109b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hide Details +/text/scalc/01/12080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ sheets; hiding details + +Hide Details + Hides the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To hide all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. +
+ To show all hidden groups, select the outlined table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline – Show Details. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ff0529cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Show Details +/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp + + + +
+tables; showing details + + +Show Details +Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. +
+To hide a selected group, choose Data - Group and Outline – Hide Details. +
+ +
+
+Show Details command in pivot tables +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf4872faa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group +/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + +Group +
+ Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns. +
+ +
+ When you group a cell range, and outline icon appears in the margins next to the group. To hide or show the group, click the icon. To ungroup the selection, choose Data – Group and Outline - Ungroup. + Include + Rows + Groups the selected rows. + Columns + Groups the selected columns. + Grouping and ungrouping is not tracked. Group is greyed out when track changes is on. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f34436406 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Ungroup +/text/scalc/01/12080400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Ungroup +
+ Ungroups the selection. In a nested group, the last rows or columns that were added are removed from the group. +
+ +
+ Deactivate for + Rows + Removes selected rows from a group. + Columns + Removes selected columns from a group. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35e0b4e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + +AutoOutline +/text/scalc/01/12080500.xhp + + + +
+ +

AutoOutline

+If the selected cell range contains formulas or references, $[officename] automatically outlines the selection. +
+
+ +
+For example, consider the following table: + + + +January + + +February + + +March + + +1st Quarter + + +April + + +May + + +June + + +2nd Quarter + + + + +100 + + +120 + + +130 + + +350 + + +100 + + +100 + + +200 + + +400 + + +
+The cells for the 1st and 2nd quarters each contain a sum formula for the three cells to their left. If you apply the AutoOutline command, the table is grouped into two quarters. +To remove the outline, select the table, and then choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..56cb208fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Remove +/text/scalc/01/12080600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Remove + Removes the outline from the selected cell range. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3ccd7df7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Show Details (Pivot Table) +/text/scalc/01/12080700.xhp + + + +
+Show Details (Pivot Table) +Inserts a new "drill-down" sheet with more information about the current pivot table cell. You can also double-click a pivot table cell to insert the "drill-down" sheet. The new sheet shows a subset of rows from the original data source that constitutes the result data displayed in the current cell. +
+
+ +
Hidden items are not evaluated, the rows for the hidden items are included. Show Details is available only for pivot tables that are based on cell ranges or database data. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8d6b564d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Pivot Table +/text/scalc/01/12090000.xhp + + + +
+

Pivot Table

+A pivot table provides a summary of large amounts of data. You can then rearrange the pivot table to view different summaries of the data. +
+
+ +
+ +

Create

+ + + +Pivot table dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a9d61c48 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Select Source +/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Pivot Table - Select Source

+
+Opens a dialog where you can select the source for your pivot table, and then create your table. +
+
+
+ +
+

Selection

+Select a data source for the pivot table. + +

Current Selection

+Uses the selected cells as the data source for the pivot table. +The data columns in the pivot table use the same number format as the first data row in the current selection. + +

Data source registered in $[officename]

+Uses a table or query in a database that is registered in $[officename] as the data source for the pivot table. + +

External source/interface

+Opens the External Source dialog where you can select the OLAP data source for the pivot table. +Pivot table dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..734309ac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Select Data Source +/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Select Data Source +Select the database and the table or query containing the data that you want to use. +
+ +
+Selection +You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + +Database +Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use. + +Data source +Select the data source that you want to use. + +Type +Click the source type of for the selected data source. You can choose from four source types: "Table", "Query" and "SQL" or SQL (Native). +
+Pivot table dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbef6e234 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Pivot Table + /text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp + + + +pivot table function;show details +pivot table function;drill down + + + + +Pivot Table + Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the pivot table. +
+ +
+ + The pivot table displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the pivot table. + + + + +UFI: changed help id from 59001 to dply_page +Layout + To define the layout of a pivot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Filters, Row Fields, Column Fields and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a pivot table. + $[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. + To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. + +More + Displays or hides additional options for defining the pivot table. + Result + Specify the settings for displaying the results of the pivot table. + + +Selection from + Select the area that contains the data for the current pivot table. + + +Results to + Select the area where you want to display the results of the pivot table. + + If the selected area contains data, the pivot table overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the pivot table automatically select the area to display the results. + +Ignore empty rows + Ignores empty fields in the data source. + +Identify categories + Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 + +Total columns + Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. + +Total rows + Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. + +Add filter + Adds a Filter button to pivot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. + +Opens the Filter dialog. + +Enable drill to details + Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. + To examine details inside a pivot table + Do one of the following: + + + Select a range of cells and choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. + + + Double-click a field in the table. + + + If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: + + + +Show Detail + Choose the field that you want to view the details for. +
+ Pivot table shortcut keys +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..950e1a3a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Filter +/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Filter + Set the filtering options for the data. + Filter Criteria + You can define a default filter for the data by filtering, for example, field names, using a combination of logical expressions arguments. + Operator + Select a logical operator for the filter. + Field name + Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed. + Condition + Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries. + The following operators are available: + + + + + + + Conditions: + + + + + + + + + = + + + equal + + + + + < + + + less than + + + + + > + + + greater than + + + + + <= + + + less than or equal to + + + + + >= + + + greater than or equal to + + + + + <> + + + not equal to + + +
+ Value + Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field. + Options + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1cb4888d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Options +/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Options + Displays or hides additional filtering options. + Options + Case sensitive + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. + Regular Expression + Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition. + If the Regular Expression check box is selected, you can use EQUAL (=) and NOT EQUAL (<>) also in comparisons. You can also use the following functions: DCOUNTA, DGET, MATCH, COUNTIF, SUMIF, LOOKUP, VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP. + No duplications + Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. + Data range + Displays the name of the filtered data range in the table. +
+ List of Regular Expressions +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdde49582 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + + +Data field +/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp + + + + + + + +calculating;pivot table + +Data field +The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the Pivot Table dialog. +Subtotals +Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate. +None +Does not calculate subtotals. +Automatic +Automatically calculates subtotals. +User-defined +Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list. + + +Function +Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected. + + +Show items without data +Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. +Name: +Lists the name of the selected data field. + +More +Expands or reduces the dialog. The More button is visible for data fields only. + +Options +Opens the Data Field Options dialog. The Options button is visible for filters and column or row fields only. +If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: +Displayed value +For each data field, you can select the type of display. For some types you can select additional information for a base field and a base item. + +Type +Select the type of calculating of the displayed value for the data field. + + + +Type + + +Displayed value + + + + +Normal + + +Results are shown unchanged + + + + +Difference from + + +From each result, its reference value (see below) is subtracted, and the difference is shown. Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + +Named item + +If a base item name is specified, the reference value for a combination of field items is the result where the item in the base field is replaced by the specified base item. + +Previous item or Next item + +If "previous item" or "next item" is specified as the base item, the reference value is the result for the next visible member of the base field, in the base field's sort order. + + + + +% Of + + +Each result is divided by its reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + + + + +% Difference from + + +From each result, its reference value is subtracted, and the difference is divided by the reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + + + + +Running total in + + +Each result is added to the sum of the results for preceding items in the base field, in the base field's sort order, and the total sum is shown. +Results are always summed, even if a different summary function was used to get each result. + + + + +% of row + + +Each result is divided by the total result for its row in the pivot table. If there are several data fields, the total for the result's data field is used. If there are subtotals with manually selected summary functions, the total with the data field's summary function is still used. + + + + +% of column + + +Same as "% of row", but the total for the result's column is used. + + + + +% of total + + +Same as "% of row", but the grand total for the result's data field is used. + + + + +Index + + +The row and column totals and the grand total, following the same rules as above, are used to calculate the following expression: +( original result * grand total ) / ( row total * column total ) + + +
+ + +Base field +Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. + +Base item +Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cde7124c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Data Field Options +/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp + + + +hiding;data fields, from calculations in pivot table +display options in pivot table +sorting;options in pivot table +data field options for pivot table +mw changed "hiding..." entry + +Data Field Options +You can specify additional options for column, row, and page data fields in the pivot table. +Sort by +Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by. +Ascending +Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. +Descending +Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. +Manual +Sorts values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. +Display options +You can specify the display options for all row fields except for the last, innermost row field. +Layout +Select the layout mode for the field in the list box. +Empty line after each item +Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the pivot table. +Show automatically +Displays the top or bottom nn items when you sort by a specified field. +Show +Turns on the automatic show feature. +items +Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically. +From +Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order. +Using field +Select the data field that you want to sort the data by. +Hide items +Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations. +Hierarchy +Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The pivot table must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies. + Calc does not provide multiple hierarchies for a single field and so this option is normally grayed. If you use a pivot table data source extension, that extension could define multiple hierarchies for some fields and then the option could become available. See the documentation supplied with that extension for more details. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..581dcdb4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Refresh +/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Refresh +Updates the pivot table. +
+After you import an Excel spreadsheet that contains a pivot table, click in the table, and then choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b030209e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/scalc/01/12090300.xhp + + + +
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected pivot table. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a4cfc4d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Grouping +/text/scalc/01/12090400.xhp + + + +Grouping +Grouping pivot tables displays the Grouping dialog for either values or dates. +
+ +
+Start +Specifies the start of the grouping. +Automatically +Specifies whether to start grouping at the smallest value. +Manually at +Specifies whether to enter the start value for grouping yourself. +End +Specifies the end of the grouping. +Automatically +Specifies whether to end grouping at the largest value. +Manually at +Specifies whether to enter the end value for grouping yourself. +Group by +Specifies the value range by which every group's limits are calculated. +Number of days +In the case of grouping date values, specifies the number of days to group by. +Intervals +In the case of grouping date values, specifies the intervals to group by. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5bf15765 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Refresh Range +/text/scalc/01/12100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + database ranges; refreshing + + +
+

Refresh Range

+ Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2c131042 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Validity +/text/scalc/01/12120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Validity

+Defines what data is valid for a selected cell or cell range. + +
+
+ +
+You can also insert a list box from the Controls toolbar and link the list box to a cell. This way you can specify the valid values on the Data page of the list box properties window. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ada387093 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + +Criteria +/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+selection lists;validity +UFI added index entry for new list feature. Guide needed. MW changed index entry + + +

Criteria

+Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s). +
+
+ +
+For example, you can define criteria such as: "Numbers between 1 and 10" or "Texts that are no more than 20 characters". + +

Allow

+Click a validation option for the selected cell(s). +The following conditions are available: + + + +Condition + + +Effect + + + + +All values + + +No limitation. + + + + +Whole numbers + + +Only whole numbers corresponding to the condition. + + + + +Decimal + + +All numbers corresponding to the condition. + + + + +Date + + +All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. + + + + +Time + + +All numbers corresponding to the condition. The entered values are formatted accordingly the next time the dialog is called up. + + + + +Cell range + + +Allow only values that are given in a cell range. The cell range can be specified explicitly, or as a named database range, or as a named range. The range may consist of one column or one row of cells. If you specify a range of columns and rows, only the first column is used. + + + + +List + + +Allow only values or strings specified in a list. Strings and values can be mixed. Numbers evaluate to their value, so if you enter the number 1 in the list, the entry 100% is also valid. Only up to 255 characters are saved, when using Excel format. + + + + +Text length + + +Entries whose length corresponds to the condition. + + + + +Custom + + +Only allow values that result in the formula entered in the Formula box to return TRUE, when the formula is calculated with the entered value. The formula can be any expression that evaluates to a boolean value of TRUE or FALSE, or returns a numerical value, where a nonzero value is interpreted as TRUE and 0 is interpreted as FALSE. +Formulas can use relative referencing. For example, if cells A1:A4 were selected, the cursor is in cell A1 and ISODD(A1) is entered into the Formula box, then only odd numbers could be entered into cells A1 through A4. + + +
+ + +

Allow blank cells

+In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled). + +

Show selection list

+Shows a list of all valid strings or values to select from. The list can also be opened by selecting the cell and pressing Command+DCtrl+D. + +

Sort entries ascending

+Sorts the selection list in ascending order and filters duplicates from the list. If not checked, the order from the data source is taken. +

Source

+Enter the cell range that contains the valid values or text. + +Entries +Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings. + +Data +Select the comparative operator that you want to use. The available operators depend on what you selected in the Allow box. If you select "between" or "not between", the Minimum and Maximum input boxes appear. Otherwise, only the Minimum, the Maximum, or the Value input boxes appear. +Value +Enter the value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. + +

Minimum

+Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. + +Maximum +Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f78ac4ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Input Help +/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Input Help +Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. +
+
+ +
+ +Show input help when cell is selected +Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. +If you enter text in the Contents box of this dialog, and then select and clear this check box, the text will be lost. +Contents + +Title +Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. + +Input help +Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b0079d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Error Alert + /text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + Error Alert + Defines the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell. +
+You can also start a macro with an error message. A sample macro is provided at the end of this page. +
+ +
+ +Show error message when invalid values are entered. +Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell. If enabled, the message is displayed to prevent an invalid entry. +In both cases, if you select "Stop", the invalid entry is deleted and the previous value is reentered in the cell. The same applies if you close the "Warning" and "Information" dialogs by clicking the Cancel button. If you close the dialogs with the OK button, the invalid entry is not deleted. +Contents + +Action +Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell. The "Stop" action rejects the invalid entry and displays a dialog that you have to close by clicking OK. The "Warning" and "Information" actions display a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK or Cancel. The invalid entry is only rejected when you click Cancel. + +Browse +Opens the Macro dialog where you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed. + +Title +Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. + +Error message +Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. +

Sample macro:

+ Below is a sample function that can be called when an error occurs. Note that the macro takes in two parameters that are passed on by %PRODUCTNAME when the function is called: + + + CellValue: The value entered by the user, as a String. + + + CellAddress: The address of the cell where the value was entered, as a String prefixed with the sheet name (e.g: "Sheet1.A1"). + + + The function must return a Boolean value. If it returns True, the entered value is kept. If the function returns False, the entered value is erased and the previous value is restored. + + Function ExampleValidity(CellValue as String, CellAddress as String) as Boolean + Dim msg as String + Dim iAnswer as Integer + Dim MB_FLAGS as Integer + msg = "Invalid value: " & "'" & CellValue & "'" + msg = msg & " in cell: " & "'" & CellAddress & "'" + msg = msg & Chr(10) & "Accept anyway?" + MB_FLAGS = MB_YESNO + MB_ICONEXCLAMATION + MB_DEFBUTTON2 + iAnswer = MsgBox (msg , MB_FLAGS, "Error message") + ExampleValidity = (iAnswer = IDYES) + End Function + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ef91d5fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + +ODFF +/text/scalc/01/ODFF.xhp + + + +
+This function is part of the Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) standard Version 1.2. (ISO/IEC 26300:2-2015) +
+
+This function is part of the Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) standard Version 1.3. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab06f421b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + Calculate + /text/scalc/01/calculate.xhp + + + +
+ +

Calculate

+ Commands to calculate formula cells. +
+
+ Choose Data - Calculate +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..297178db5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + Calculation Accuracy + /text/scalc/01/calculation_accuracy.xhp + + + + + calculation;accuracy + precision;calculation + +
+

%PRODUCTNAME Calculation Accuracy

+
+

Inherent Accuracy Problem

+ %PRODUCTNAME Calc, just like most other spreadsheet software, uses floating-point math capabilities available on hardware. Given that most contemporary hardware uses binary floating-point arithmetic with limited precision defined in IEEE 754 standard, many decimal numbers - including as simple as 0.1 - cannot be precisely represented in %PRODUCTNAME Calc (which uses 64-bit double-precision numbers internally). + Calculations with those numbers necessarily results in rounding errors, and those accumulate with every calculation. + + This is not a bug, but is expected and currently unavoidable without using complex calculations in software, which would incur inappropriate performance penalties, and thus is out of question. Users need to account for that, and use rounding and comparisons with machine epsilon (or unit roundoff) as necessary. + An example with numbers: + + + + + + A + + + + + 1 + + + 31000.99 + + + + + 2 + + + 32000.12 + + + + + 3 + + + =A1-A2 + + +
+ This will result in -999.129999999997 in A3, instead of expected -999.13 (you might need to increase shown decimal places in cell format to see this). +An example with dates and times: + Due to the specific of time representation in Calc, this also applies to all calculations involving times. For example, the cells A1 and A2 below show the date and time data as entered (in ISO 8601 format): + + + + + + A + + + + + 1 + + + 2020-04-13 12:18:00 + + + + + 2 + + + 2020-04-13 12:08:00 + + + + + 3 + + + =A1-A2 + + +
+ Cell A3 will show 00:10:00 if the default formatting [HH]:MM:SS is applied to the cell. However, cell A3 will show 00:09:59.999999 instead of expected 00:10:00.000000 if formatted using [HH]:MM:SS.000000 format string. This happens despite only whole numbers of hours and minutes were used, because internally, any time is a fraction of a day, 12:00 (noon) being represented as 0.5. + The data in A1 is represented internally as 43934.5125, and in A2 as 43934.5055555555591126903891563 (which is not exact representation of the entered datetime, which would be 43934.505555555555555555...). + Their subtraction results in 0.00694444443287037, a value slightly less than expected 0.00694444444444..., which is 10 minutes. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb5780668 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Cell Styles + /text/scalc/01/cell_styles.xhp + + + + +
+

Cell Styles

+
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ec6b8e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + Common Syntax and example + /text/scalc/01/common_func.xhp + + + +
+

Syntax

+
+
+

Example

+
+
+

Examples

+
+
+

Technical information

+
+
+

See also

+
+
+ This function is not part of the Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) Version 1.3. Part 4: Recalculated Formula (OpenFormula) Format standard. The name space is +
+
+ This function ignores any text or empty cell within a data range. If you suspect wrong results from this function, look for text in the data ranges. To highlight text contents in a data range, use the value highlighting feature. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc515b8e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + common workdays intl + /text/scalc/01/common_func_workdaysintl.xhp + + + + + + +
+Weekend is an optional parameter – a number or a string used to specify the days of the week that are weekend days and are not considered working days. Weekend is a weekend number or string that specifies when weekends occur. Weekend number values indicate the following weekend days: +Number 1 to 7 for two-day weekends and 11 to 17 for one-day weekends. + + + + + Number + + + Weekend + + + + + 1 or omitted + + + Saturday and Sunday + + + + + 2 + + + Sunday and Monday + + + + + 3 + + + Monday and Tuesday + + + + + 4 + + + Tuesday and Wednesday + + + + + 5 + + + Wednesday and Thursday + + + + + 6 + + + Thursday and Friday + + + + + 7 + + + Friday and Saturday + + + + + 11 + + + Sunday only + + + + + 12 + + + Monday only + + + + + 13 + + + Tuesday only + + + + + 14 + + + Wednesday only + + + + + 15 + + + Thursday only + + + + + 16 + + + Friday only + + + + + 17 + + + Saturday only + + +
+ +Weekend string provides another way to define the weekly non-working days. It must have seven (7) characters – zeros (0) for working day and ones (1) for non-working day. Each character represents a day of the week, starting with Monday. Only 1 and 0 are valid. “1111111” is an invalid string and should not be used. For example, the weekend string “0000011” defines Saturday and Sunday as non-working days. +Holidays is an optional list of dates that must be counted as non-working days. The list can be given in a cell range. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b65c81740 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Data Entry Form for Spreadsheet + /text/scalc/01/data_form.xhp + + + + + + + + data entry forms;for spreadsheets + data entry forms;insert data in spreadsheets + insert data;data entry forms for spreadsheets + spreadsheet;form for inserting data + +
+

Form

+ Data Entry Form is a tool to make table data entry easy in spreadsheets. With the Data Entry Form, you can enter, edit and delete records (or rows) of data and avoid horizontal scrolling when the table has many columns or when some columns are very wide. +
+ +
+ Choose Data – Form... +
+ +

Preparing the data entry form

+ To be effective, the Calc data table should have a header row, where each cell contents is the label of the column. The header cells contents become the label of each data field in the form. + +

Activating the form

+ + + Place the cursor in the header row of the table. + + + Choose Data - Form.... + + +

Filling the form with data

+ Enter the data in the text fields. Press Enter or click New to add it to the table. +

Form dialog buttons

+ New: fill the record (table row cells) with the form fields contents and jump to the next record or add a new record in the bottom of the table. + Delete: deletes the current record. + Restore: when a form field is edited, restore the record contents to its initial state. + Previous record: move to the previous record (table row). + Next record: move to the next record. + Close: close the form. + + + The form dialog box and header row cells as field labels + + + Use the Tab and Shift-Tab keys to jump forth and back between text boxes of the form dialog. + You also can use the form scroll bar to move between text boxes. +

Reopening the form dialog

+ To reopen the form dialog, place the cursor on the header row and open the form. The displayed record in the form dialog is the first data record. Move to the last record before entering new data otherwise the current record will be edited. +
+ Document Forms +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7714b2d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Data Provider for Spreadsheet + /text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp + + + + + + + + + +data provider;for spreadsheets + + +
+

Data Provider for Spreadsheets

+Data Provider for Spreadsheets +
+ +
+Menu Data – Data Provider... +
+ + +
+Data Provider +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97fee0d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Databar More Options + /text/scalc/01/databar_more_options.xhp + + + + + + +conditional formatting;data bar options +data bar formatting;data bar options +data bar options;conditional formatting + +

Databar More Options

+

Entry Values

+

Minimum:

Set the minimum value for which the data bar does not start filling. +

Maximum:

Set the maximum value for which the data bar gets completely filled. + The options for setting the minimum and maximum values are: + Automatic: Automatically sets the minimum and maximum value based on the values in the data set. + + + Minimum: Automatically sets the minimum value in the data set as minimum. + + + Maximum: Automatically sets the maximum value in the data set for maximum. + + + Percentile: Set the minimum and maximum as percentile value. + + + Value: Set the minimum and maximum as a specific value. + + + Formula: Set the minimum and maximum as a formula. + + +

Bar Colors

+

Positive:

Set the color for positive values. It is set to blue be default. +

Negative:

Set the color for negative values. It is set to red by default. +

Fill:

Choose between color and gradient for the fill. +

Axis

+

Position of vertical axis:

Set the position of vertical axis in the cell. + + + Automatic: Set the axis automatically + + + Middle: Set the vertical position to be in the middle of the cell. + + + None: Set the data bar to have no visible vertical axis + + +

Color of vertical axis:

Choose the color of the vertical axis. +

Bar Lengths

+

Minimum bar length (%):

Set the minimum length of the data bar in percentage with respect to the cell length. +

Maximum bar length (%):

Set the maximum length of the data bar in percentage with respect to the cell length. +

Display bar only

+ Only databar is shown. Value becomes hidden. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7981e9191 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + + Examples Dataset for Statistical Functions + /text/scalc/01/ex_data_stat_func.xhp + + + + +
+ +Consider the following table + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + Product Name + + + Sales + + + Revenue + + + + + 2 + + + pencil + + + 20 + + + 65 + + + + + 3 + + + pen + + + 35 + + + 85 + + + + + 4 + + + notebook + + + 20 + + + 190 + + + + + 5 + + + book + + + 17 + + + 180 + + + + + 6 + + + pencil-case + + + not + + + not + + +
+In all examples below, ranges for calculation contain the row #6, which is ignored because it contains text. +
+Func_Range; Range1; Criterion[; Range2; Criterion2][; … ; [Range127; Criterion127]] +
+ The logical relation between criteria can be defined as logical AND (conjunction). In other words, if and only if all given criteria are met, a value from the corresponding cell of the given Func_Range is taken into calculation. +
+
+ Func_Range and Range1, Range2... must have the same size, otherwise the function returns err:502 - Invalid argument. +
+
+ Range1 – required argument. It is a range of cells, a name of a named range, or a label of a column or a row, to which the corresponding criterion is to be applied. +
+ Criterion: A criterion is a single cell Reference, Number or Text. It is used in comparisons with cell contents. + A reference to an empty cell is interpreted as the numeric value 0. + A matching expression can be: + + + A Number or Logical value. A matching cell content equals the Number or Logical value. + + + A value beginning with a comparator (<, <=, =, >, >=, <>). + For =, if the value is empty it matches empty cells. + For <>, if the value is empty it matches non-empty cells. + For <>, if the value is not empty it matches any cell content except the value, including empty cells. + Note: "=0" does not match empty cells. + For = and <>, if the value is not empty and can not be interpreted as a Number type or one of its subtypes and the property Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is checked, comparison is against the entire cell contents, if unchecked, comparison is against any subpart of the field that matches the criteria. For = and <>, if the value is not empty and can not be interpreted as a Number type or one of its subtypes applies. + + + Other Text value. If the property Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is true, the comparison is against the entire cell contents, if false, comparison is against any subpart of the field that matches the criteria. The expression can contain text, numbers, regular expressions or wildcards (if enabled in calculation options). + + +
+ Range2 – Optional. Range2 and all the following mean the same as Range1. + Criterion2 – Optional. Criterion2 and all the following mean the same as Criterion. +
+
+ The function can have up to 255 arguments, meaning that you can specify 127 criteria ranges and criteria for them. + If a cell contains TRUE, it is treated as 1, if a cell contains FALSE – as 0 (zero). +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fe3927cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,386 @@ + + + + + + + embedded text for exponential smoothing + /text/scalc/01/exponsmooth_embd.xhp + + + +
+ Exponential Smoothing is a method to smooth real values in time series in order to forecast probable future values. + +Exponential Triple Smoothing (ETS) is a set of algorithms in which both trend and periodical (seasonal) influences are processed. Exponential Double Smoothing (EDS) is an algorithm like ETS, but without the periodical influences. EDS produces linear forecasts. + +See the Wikipedia on Exponential smoothing algorithms for more information. +
+ +
+target (mandatory): A date, time or numeric single value or range. The data point/range for which to calculate a forecast. +
+ +
+values (mandatory): A numeric array or range. values are the historical values, for which you want to forecast the next points. +
+ +
+timeline (mandatory): A numeric array or range. The timeline (x-value) range for the historical values. +The timeline does not have to be sorted, the functions will sort it for calculations.
The timeline values must have a consistent step between them.
If a constant step cannot be identified in the sorted timeline, the functions will return the #NUM! error.
If the ranges of both the timeline and the historical values are not the same size, the functions will return the #N/A error.
If the timeline contains fewer than 2 data periods, the functions will return the #VALUE! error. +
+ +
+data_completion (optional): a logical value TRUE or FALSE, a numeric 1 or 0, default is 1 (TRUE). A value of 0 (FALSE) will add missing data points with zero as historical value. A value of 1 (TRUE) will add missing data points by interpolating between the neighboring data points. +Although the time line requires a constant step between data points, the function support up to 30% missing data points, and will add these data points. +
+ +
+aggregation (optional): A numeric value from 1 to 7, with default 1. The aggregation parameter indicates which method will be used to aggregate identical time values: + + + + + Aggregation + + + Function + + + + + 1 + + + AVERAGE + + + + + 2 + + + COUNT + + + + + 3 + + + COUNTA + + + + + 4 + + + MAX + + + + + 5 + + + MEDIAN + + + + + 6 + + + MIN + + + + + 7 + + + SUM + + +
+ +Although the time line requires a constant step between data points, the functions will aggregate multiple points which have the same time stamp. +
+ +
+stat_type (mandatory): A numerical value from 1 to 9. A value indicating which statistic will be returned for the given values and x-range. +The following statistics can be returned: + + + + + stat_type + + + Statistics + + + + + 1 + + + Alpha smoothing parameter of ETS algorithm (base) + + + + + 2 + + + Gamma smoothing parameter of ETS algorithm (trend) + + + + + 3 + + + Beta smoothing parameter of ETS algorithm (periodic deviation) + + + + + 4 + + + Mean absolute scaled error (MASE) - a measure of the accuracy of forecasts. + + + + + 5 + + + Symmetric mean absolute percentage error (SMAPE) - an accuracy measure based on percentage errors. + + + + + 6 + + + Mean absolute error (MAE) – a measure of the accuracy of forecasts. + + + + + 7 + + + Root mean squared error (RMSE) - a measure of the differences between predicted and observed values. + + + + + 8 + + + Step size detected time line (x-range). When a stepsize in months/quarters/years is detected, the stepsize is in months, otherwise the stepsize is in days in case of date(time) timeline and numeric in other cases. + + + + + 9 + + + Number of samples in period – this is the same as argument period_length, or the calculated number in case of argument period_length being 1. + + +
+ +
+ +
+confidence_level (mandatory): A numeric value between 0 and 1 (exclusive), default is 0.95. A value indicating a confidence level for the calculated prediction interval. +With values <= 0 or >= 1, the functions will return the #NUM! Error. +
+ +
+period_length (optional): A numeric value >= 0, the default is 1. A positive integer indicating the number of samples in a period. +A value of 1 indicates that Calc is to determine the number of samples in a period automatically.
A value of 0 indicates no periodic effects, a forecast is calculated with EDS algorithms.
For all other positive values, forecasts are calculated with ETS algorithms.
For values that not being a positive whole number, the functions will return the #NUM! Error. +
+ +
+forecast = basevalue + trend * ∆x + periodical_aberration. +
+ +
+forecast = ( basevalue + trend * ∆x ) * periodical_aberration. +
+ +
+ + The table below contains a timeline and its associated values: + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + Timeline + + + Values + + + + + 2 + + + 01/2013 + + + 112 + + + + + 3 + + + 02/2013 + + + 118 + + + + + 4 + + + 03/2013 + + + 132 + + + + + 5 + + + 04/2013 + + + 100 + + + + + 6 + + + 05/2013 + + + 121 + + + + + 7 + + + 06/2013 + + + 135 + + + + + 8 + + + 07/2013 + + + 148 + + + + + 9 + + + 08/2013 + + + 148 + + + + + 10 + + + 09/2013 + + + 136 + + + + + 11 + + + 10/2013 + + + 119 + + + + + 12 + + + 11/2013 + + + 104 + + + + + 13 + + + 12/2013 + + + 118 + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01f17a2d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Graphic +/text/scalc/01/format_graphic.xhp + + +Format Graphic menu in Calc + + + +
+ +Graphic +Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object. +
+ + + +Define Text Attributes +Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +Points +Switches Edit Points mode for an inserted freeform line on and off. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b06a1c7d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + Formula to values + /text/scalc/01/formula2value.xhp + + + + + +convert;formula to values +replace formula with values +recalculate;formula to values +formula to values;convert +formula to values;recalculate + +
+

Formula to value

+ Replaces the formula cell with value calculated by the formula. The formula is lost. +
+
+ +
+ Use this command to convert formula cells into data cells. The converted cells contents becomes static and will not be recalculated. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a1f2a3a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + Frequently Used Lexemes + /text/scalc/01/ful_func.xhp + + + + Title in descriptions of functions +
+

Syntax

+
+
+

Examples

+
+
+

Returns

+
+ + Yes or No paragraphs to be used in description tables +
+ Yes +
+
+ No +
+ + Notes for functions + + A complex number is a string expression resulting in the form "a+bi" or "a+bj", where a and b are numbers. + + + If the complex number is actually a real number (b=0), then it can be either a string expression or a number value. + + + Warnings for functions + + The function always returns a string representing a complex number. + + + If the result is a complex number with one of its parts (a or b) equal to zero, that part is not displayed. + + + Other paragraphs + + The imaginary part is equal to zero, so it is not displayed in the result. + +
+ The result is presented in the string format and has the character "i" or "j" as an imaginary unit. +
+ + 255 arguments + String 1 [; String 2 [; … [; String 255]]] +
+ String 1, String 2, … , String 255 are strings, references to cells or to cell ranges of strings. +
+ Integer 1 [; Integer 2 [; … [; Integer 255]]] +
+ Integer 1, Integer 2, … , Integer 255 are integers, references to cells or to cell ranges of integers. +
+ Number 1 [; Number 2 [; … [; Number 254]]] +
+ Number 1, Number 2, … , Number 254 are numbers, references to cells or to cell ranges of numbers. +
+ Number 1 [; Number 2 [; … [; Number 255]]] +
+ Number 1, Number 2, … , Number 255 are numbers, references to cells or to cell ranges of numbers. +
+ Logical 1 [; Logical 2 [; … [; Logical 255]]] +
+ Logical 1, Logical 2, … , Logical 255 are boolean values, references to cells or to cell ranges of logical values. +
+ Complex 1 [; Complex 2 [; … [; Complex 255]]] +
+ Complex 1, Complex 2, … ,Complex 255 are complex numbers, references to cells or to cell ranges of complex numbers. Complex numbers are entered in the form "x+yi" or "x+yj". +
+ Reference 1 [; Reference 2 [; … [; Reference 255]]] +
+ Reference 1, Reference 2, … ,Reference 255 are references to cells. +
+
+ This function is always recalculated whenever a recalculation occurs. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c914b0073 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,441 @@ + + + + + + + AGGREGATE function + /text/scalc/01/func_aggregate.xhp + + + +
+ + + AGGREGATE function + +

AGGREGATE function

+This function returns an aggregate result of the calculations in the range. You can use different aggregate functions listed below. The Aggregate function enables you to omit hidden rows, errors, SUBTOTAL and other AGGREGATE function results in the calculation. +
+AGGREGATE function is applied to vertical ranges of data with activated AutoFilter. If AutoFilter is not activated, automatic recalculation of the function result does not work for newly hidden rows. It is not supposed to work with horizontal ranges, however it can be applied to them as well, but with limitations. In particular, the AGGREGATE function applied to a horizontal data range does not recognize hiding columns, however correctly omits errors and results of SUBTOTAL and other AGGREGATE functions embedded into the row. + +AGGREGATE(Function; Option; Number 1[; Number 2][; ... ;[Number 253]]) +or +AGGREGATE(Function; Option; Array[; k]) + +Function – obligatory argument. A function index or a reference to a cell with value from 1 to 19, in accordance with the following table. + + + + + Function index + + + Function applied + + + + + 1 + + + AVERAGE + + + + + 2 + + + COUNT + + + + + 3 + + + COUNTA + + + + + 4 + + + MAX + + + + + 5 + + + MIN + + + + + 6 + + + PRODUCT + + + + + 7 + + + STDEV.S + + + + + 8 + + + STDEV.P + + + + + 9 + + + SUM + + + + + 10 + + + VAR.S + + + + + 11 + + + VAR.P + + + + + 12 + + + MEDIAN + + + + + 13 + + + MODE.SNGL + + + + + 14 + + + LARGE + + + + + 15 + + + SMALL + + + + + 16 + + + PERCENTILE.INC + + + + + 17 + + + QUARTILE.INC + + + + + 18 + + + PERCENTILE.EXC + + + + + 19 + + + QUARTILE.EXC + + +
+ +Option – obligatory argument. An option index or reference to a cell with value from 0 to 7 determines what to ignore in the range for the function. + + + + + Option index + + + Option applied + + + + + 0 + + + Ignore only nested SUBTOTAL and AGGREGATE functions + + + + + 1 + + + Ignore only hidden rows, nested SUBTOTAL and AGGREGATE functions + + + + + 2 + + + Ignore only errors, nested SUBTOTAL and AGGREGATE functions + + + + + 3 + + + Ignore hidden rows, errors, nested SUBTOTAL and AGGREGATE functions + + + + + 4 + + + Ignore nothing + + + + + 5 + + + Ignore only hidden rows + + + + + 6 + + + Ignore only errors + + + + + 7 + + + Ignore only hidden rows and errors + + +
+ +Number1 – required argument. The first numeric argument (if the range is set by a list of values inside the function) or a reference to a cell that contains it. +Number2, 3, ... – optional. A numeric argument or a reference to a cell (up to 253 arguments), for which you need the aggregate value. +Array – required argument. The array can be specified by the boundaries of the range, the name of the named range or the column label. +For using column labels “Automatically find columns and rows labels” function needs to be enabled. +k – required argument for the following functions: LARGE, SMALL, PERCENTILE.INC, QUARTILE.INC, PERCENTILE.EXC, QUARTILE.EXC. It is a numeric argument, which must correspond to the second argument of these functions. + + + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + ColumnOne + + + ColumnTwo + + + ColumnThree + + + + + 2 + + + 34 + + + 11 + + + 12 + + + + + 3 + + + 10 + + + 56 + + + 35 + + + + + 4 + + + #DIV/0! + + + 5 + + + 3 + + + + + 5 + + + 20 + + + 8 + + + 1 + + + + + 6 + + + 0 + + + 8 + + + 9 + + + + + 7 + + + #VALUE! + + + 20 + + + 21 + + + + + 8 + + + 5 + + + 7 + + + 8 + + + + + 9 + + + 14 + + + 0 + + + 5 + + +
+ +=AGGREGATE(4;2;A2:A9)
Returns maximum value for the range A2:A9 = 34, whereas =MAX(A2:A9) returns the error Err:511. +=AGGREGATE(9;5;A5:C5)
Returns sum for the range A5:C5 = 29, even if some of the columns are hidden. +=AGGREGATE(9;5;B2:B9)
Returns sum of the column B = 115. If any row is hidden, the function omit its value, for example if the 7th row is hidden, the function returns 95. +If you need to apply the function with a 3D range, this example shows how to do it. +=AGGREGATE(13;3;Sheet1.B2:B9:Sheet3.B2:B9)
The function returns mode of the values of second columns through sheets 1:3 (that have the same data) = 8. +You can use reference to a cell or a range for every argument in the formula. The following example shows how it works. Besides, it shows that you can use column labels to specify an array. +=AGGREGATE(E3;E5;'ColumnOne')
If E3 = 13 and E5 = 5, the function returns mode of the first column = 10. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.AGGREGATE +
+AVERAGE, COUNT, COUNTA, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, STDEV.S, STDEV.P, SUM, VAR.S, VAR.P, MEDIAN, MODE.SNGL, LARGE, SMALL, PERCENTILE.INC , QUARTILE.INC, PERCENTILE.EXC, QUARTILE.EXC +Automatically find column and row labels +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b827428e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + ARABIC Function + /text/scalc/01/func_arabic.xhp + + + +
+ + + ARABIC function + text functions;convert roman numbers + +

ARABIC

+ Returns the numeric value corresponding to a Roman number expressed as text. +
+ The largest Roman number that can be converted is MMMCMXCIX (or one of its simplified versions), which is equivalent to 3999. + + ARABIC(Text) + Text: text representing a Roman number. + + =ARABIC("MXIV") returns the numeric value 1014. + =ARABIC("MMII") returns the numeric value 2002. + =ARABIC("") returns 0. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c828efb66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + ASC Function + /text/scalc/01/func_asc.xhp + + + +
+ + + ASC function + text functions;katakana characters + +

ASC

+ Converts double-byte (full-width) characters to single-byte (half-width) ASCII and katakana characters. +
+ See https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. + + ASC(Text) + Text: the text string that contains characters to be converted. + Applying the ASC function to a string composed of single-byte characters will return the input string without any modifications. + + =ASC("LibreOffice") returns the string "LibreOffice". No modifications were made because all characters are single-byte characters. + =ASC("ライト") returns the string "ﾗｲﾄ", which is composed of single-byte characters. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d41712cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + AVERAGEIF function + /text/scalc/01/func_averageif.xhp + + + + +
+ + + AVERAGEIF function + arithmetic mean;satisfying condition + +

AVERAGEIF function

+Returns the arithmetic mean of all cells in a range that satisfy a given condition. The AVERAGEIF function sums up all the results that match the logical test and divides this sum by the quantity of selected values. +
+ + +AVERAGEIF(Range; Criterion [; Average_Range ]) +Range – required argument. An array, a name of named range or a label of a column or a row containing numbers for averaging or numbers or text for the condition. + + +Average_Range – optional. It is a range of values for calculating the mean. +If the Average_Range is not specified, Range is used for both, the calculation of the mean and the search according to the condition. If Average_Range is specified, the Range is used only for the condition test, while Average_Range is used for the average calculation. + +If a cell in a range of values for calculating the mean is empty or contains text, function AVERAGEIF ignores this cell.
+If the whole range is empty, contains only text or all values of the range do not satisfy the condition (or any combination of those), the function returns the #DIV/0! error. + +

Simple usage

+=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;"<35") +Calculates the average for values of the range B2:B6 that are less than 35. Returns 19, because the second row does not participate in the calculation. +=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the average for values of the same range that are less than the maximum value of this range. Returns 19, because the largest value (the second row) does not participate in the calculation. +=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;">"&SMALL(B2:B6;1)) +Calculates the average for values of the same range that are greater than the first smallest value of this range. Returns 25, because the first smallest value (the fourth row) does not participate in the calculation. +

Using the Average_Range

+=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;"<35";C2:C6) +The function searches what values are less than 35 in the B2:B6 range, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the C2:C6 range. Returns 145, because the second row does not participate in the calculation. +=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);C2:C6) +The function searches what values from the range B2:B6 are greater than the least value in the B2:B6 range, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the C2:C6 range. Returns 113.3, because the fourth row (where there is the least value in the range B2:B6) does not participate in the calculation. +=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;"<"&LARGE(B2:B6;2);C2:C6) +The function searches what values from the range B2:B6 are less than the second large value in the B2:B6 range, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the C2:C6 range. Returns 180, because only the fourth row participates in the calculation. +

Using regular expressions

+=AVERAGEIF(A2:A6;"pen";B2:B6) +The function searches what cells from the range A2:A6 contain only the word “pen”, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the B2:B6 range. Returns 35, because only the second row participates in the calculation. The search is performed in the A2:A6 range, but the values are returned from the B2:B6 range. +=AVERAGEIF(A2:A6;"pen.*";B2:B6) +The function searches what cells from the range A2:A6 begin with “pen” ending with any quantity of other characters, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the B2:B6 range. Returns 27.5, because now also “pencil” satisfies the condition, and both, first and second rows participate in the calculation. +=AVERAGEIF(A2:A6;".*book.*";B2:B6) +The function searches what cells from the range A2:A6 contain “book” starting and ending with any quantity of other characters, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the B2:B6 range. Returns 18.5, because only third and fourth rows participate in the calculation. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of AVERAGEIF function. +=AVERAGEIF(A2:A6;".*"&E2&".*";B2:B6) +The function searches what cells from the range A2:A6 contain a combination of characters specified in E2 starting and ending with any quantity of other characters, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the B2:B6 range. If E2 = book, the function returns 18.5. +=AVERAGEIF(B2:B6;"<"&E2;C2:C6) +The function searches what cells from the range B2:B6 are less than the value specified in E2, and calculates the average of corresponding values from the C2:C6 range. If E2 = 35, the function returns 145. +
+ + , + , + + + + , + , + , + , + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e94dc7bea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + AVERAGEIFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_averageifs.xhp + + + + +
+ + + AVERAGEIFS function + arithmetic mean;satisfying conditions + +

AVERAGEIFS function

+Returns the arithmetic mean of all cells in a range that satisfy given multiple criteria. The AVERAGEIFS function sums up all the results that match the logical tests and divides this sum by the quantity of selected values. +
+ + +AVERAGEIFS() +Func_range – required argument. It is a range of cells, a name of a named range or a label of a column or a row containing values for calculating the mean. + + + + + + + + + +

Simple usage

+=AVERAGEIFS(B2:B6;B2:B6;">=20") +Calculates the average for values of the range B2:B6 that are greater than or equal to 20. Returns 25, because the fifth row does not meet the criterion. +=AVERAGEIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">=20";C2:C6;">70") +Calculates the average for values of the range C2:C6 that are greater than 70 and correspond to cells of B2:B6 with values greater than or equal to 20. Returns 137.5, because the second and fifth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +

Using regular expressions and nested functions

+=AVERAGEIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the average for values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all values of the range B2:B6 except its minimum and maximum. Returns 127.5, because the third and fifth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +=AVERAGEIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;"pen.*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the average for values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all cells of the A2:A6 range starting with "pen" and to all cells of the B2:B6 range except its maximum. Returns 65, because only second row meets all criteria. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of AVERAGEIFS function. For example, the above function can be rewritten as follows: +=AVERAGEIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;E2&".*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +If E2 = pen, the function returns 65, because the link to the cell is substituted with its content. + +
+ + , + , + , + + + + , + , + , + , + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e671f6093 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + Ceiling functions + /text/scalc/01/func_ceiling.xhp + + + +

Ceiling functions

+
+ +CEILING function +rounding;up to multiples of significance + + mw added one entry + +

CEILING

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number and a positive significance value, the function rounds up (away from zero). For a negative number and a negative significance value, the direction of rounding is determined by the value of a mode parameter. The function returns an error if the number and significance values have opposite signs. + If the spreadsheet is exported to Microsoft Excel, the CEILING function is exported as the equivalent CEILING.MATH function that has existed since Excel 2013. If you plan to use the spreadsheet with earlier Excel versions, use either CEILING.PRECISE that has existed since Excel 2010, or CEILING.XCL that is exported as the CEILING function compatible with all Excel versions. + + CEILING(Number [; Significance [; Mode]]) +
+ Number is the number that is to be rounded, or a reference to a cell containing the number. +
+ Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to +1 or -1 depending on the sign of Number. + Mode (optional) is a number, or a reference to a cell containing a number. The function only uses Mode if both Number and Significance are negative. Then if Mode is given and not equal to zero, numbers are rounded down (away from zero); if Mode is equal to zero or not given, negative numbers are rounded up (towards zero). + + =CEILING(3.45) returns 4. + =CEILING(3.45; 3) returns 6. + =CEILING(-1.234) returns -1. + =CEILING(-45.67; -2; 0) returns -44. + =CEILING(-45.67; -2; 1) returns -46. + see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ +CEILING.PRECISE function +rounding;up to multiples of significance + + mw added one entry + +

CEILING.PRECISE

+ Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number the function rounds up (away from zero). For a negative number, the function rounds up (towards zero). The sign of the significance value is ignored. + This function calculates identical results to the ISO.CEILING function. + + CEILING.PRECISE(Number [; Significance]) + + Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to 1. + + =CEILING.PRECISE(3.45) returns 4. + =CEILING.PRECISE(-45.67; 2) returns -44. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.CEILING.PRECISE + see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ +CEILING.MATH function + + +

CEILING.MATH

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number the function rounds up (away from zero). For a negative number, the direction of rounding is determined by the value of a mode parameter. The sign of the significance value is ignored. + This function exists for interoperability with Microsoft Excel 2013 or newer. + + CEILING.MATH(Number [; Significance [; Mode]]) + + Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to 1. + Mode (optional) is a number, or a reference to a cell containing a number. If Mode is given and not equal to zero, a negative Number is rounded down (away from zero). If Mode is equal to zero or is not given, a negative Number is rounded up (towards zero). + + =CEILING.MATH(3.45) returns 4. + =CEILING.MATH(3.45; -3) returns 6. + =CEILING.MATH(-1.234) returns -1. + =CEILING.MATH(-45.67; -2; 0) returns -44. + =CEILING.MATH(-45.67; +2; 1) returns -46. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.CEILING.MATH +
+
+ +CEILING.XCL function + + +

CEILING.XCL

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number and a positive significance value, the function rounds up (away from zero). For a negative number and a positive significance value, the function rounds up (towards zero). For a negative number and a negative significance value, the function rounds down (away from zero). The function returns an error if the number is positive and the significance value is negative. + This function exists for interoperability with Microsoft Excel 2007 or older. If a Calc spreadsheet is exported to Microsoft Excel, references to Calc’s CEILING.XCL function are exported as references to Excel’s CEILING function, which is compatible with all Excel versions. If a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet is imported into Calc, references to Excel’s CEILING function are imported as references to Calc’s CEILING.XCL function. + + CEILING.XCL(Number; Significance) + + Significance is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. + + =CEILING.XCL(3.45,2) returns 4. + =CEILING.XCL(-45.67; 2) returns -44. + =CEILING.XCL(-45.67; -2) returns -46. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.CEILING +
+
+ +ISO.CEILING function +rounding;up to multiples of significance + + mw added one entry + + +

ISO.CEILING

+ Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number the function rounds up (away from zero). For a negative number, the function rounds up (towards zero). The sign of the significance value is ignored. + This function calculates identical results to the CEILING.PRECISE function. + + ISO.CEILING(Number [; Significance]) + + Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to 1. + + =ISO.CEILING(3.45) returns 4. + =ISO.CEILING(-45.67; 2) returns -44. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.ISO.CEILING + see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26b6b6722 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + COLOR function + /text/scalc/01/func_color.xhp + + + +
+ + + colors;numerical values + colors;calculating in spreadsheets + COLOR function + +

COLOR

+ Return a numeric value calculated by a combination of three colors (red, green and blue) and the alpha channel, in the RGBA color system. The result depends on the color system used by your computer. +
+ + COLOR(Red; Green; Blue [; Alpha]) + Red, Green and Blue – required arguments. The value for the red, green and blue components of the color. The values must be between 0 and 255. Zero means no color component and 255 means full color component. + Alpha – optional argument. The value for the alpha channel or alpha composite. Alpha is a integer value between 0 and 255. The value of zero for alpha means the color is fully transparent, whereas a value of 255 in the alpha channel gives a fully opaque color. + + COLOR(255;255;255;1) returns 33554431 + COLOR(0;0;255;0) returns 255 + COLOR(0;0;255;255) returns 4278190335 + COLOR(0;0;400;0) returns Err:502 (Invalid argument) because the blue value is greater than 255. + + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.COLOR + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5063ac92a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + CONCAT function + /text/scalc/01/func_concat.xhp + + + +
+ + + CONCAT function + +

CONCAT

+ Concatenates one or more strings +
+ CONCAT is an enhancement of CONCATENATE, as CONCAT also accepts ranges as arguments, like B2:E5, K:K or K:M. + When ranges are used, the cells are traversed row by row (from top to bottom) to concatenate. + + CONCAT( ) + + + =CONCAT("Hello ", A1:C3) concatenates the string "Hello" with all strings in range A1:C3. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.CONCAT +
+ + CONCATENATE +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c422ba5bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1744 @@ + + + + + + CONVERT function + /text/scalc/01/func_convert.xhp + + + +
+ + + CONVERT function + +

+ + CONVERT + function +

+ + Converts a value from one unit of measurement to the corresponding value in another unit of measurement. Enter the units of measurement directly as text in quotation marks or as a reference. The units of measurement specified through the arguments must match the supported unit symbols, which are case-sensitive. For example, the symbol for the unit "newton" is the uppercase "N". + The measurement units recognized by CONVERT fall into 13 groups, which are listed below. CONVERT will perform conversions between any two units within one group but reject any request to convert between units in different groups. + You can also add binary and decimal prefixes to units of measurement that support them. The list of all prefixes and their corresponding multipliers are shown below. +
+ This function may not be compatible with other spreadsheet software. + + + + CONVERT(Number; FromUnit; ToUnit) + + + Number is the number to be converted. + + + FromUnit is the unit from which conversion is taking place. + + + ToUnit is the unit to which conversion is taking place. Both units must be of the same type. + + If FromUnit and ToUnit are not valid units from the same group, then CONVERT reports an invalid argument error (Err:502). + + + + =CONVERT(-10; "C"; "F") + Here the function converts -10 degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, returning the value 14. There is not a simple multiplicative relationship between temperature units, as different reference points are used. Hence, as in this case, an input negative number may be converted to a positive value. + + =CONVERT(3.5; "mi"; "yd") + Here the function converts 3.5 international miles to yards, returning the value 6160. Both units are in the Length and distance group. + + =CONVERT(256; "Gibit"; "Mibyte") + Here the function converts 256 gigibits to mebibytes, returning the value 32768. Both units (bit and byte) are in the Information group and support binary prefixes. + + =CONVERT(1; "dyn"; "e") + Here the function returns an invalid argument error (Err:502) because the two units (dyne and erg) are in different groups (Force and Energy respectively). + +
+

Units of measurement

+
+ Below are the unit measurement groups supported by the CONVERT function. Beware that conversions can only happen between units that belong to the same group. + The column Prefix indicates whether or not a given unit of measurement supports prefixes. + +

Area

+ Some measurement units have more than one accepted symbol. The accepted unit symbols are separated by semicolons in the Unit symbol column. + + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "ang2" ; "ang^2" + + + Square angstrom + + + + + + + + "ar" + + + Are + + + + + + + + "ft2" ; "ft^2" + + + Square foot + + + + + + + + "ha" + + + Hectare + + + + + + + + "in2" ; "in^2" + + + Square inch + + + + + + + + "ly2" ; "ly^2" + + + Square light-year + + + + + + + + "m2" ; "m^2" + + + Square meter + + + + + + + + "mi2" ; "mi^2" + + + Square international mile + + + + + + + + "Morgen" + + + Morgen + + + + + + + + "Nmi2" ; "Nmi^2" + + + Square nautical mile + + + + + + + + "Pica2" ; "Pica^2" ; "picapt2" ; "picapt^2" + + + Square pica point + + + + + + + + "pica2" ; "pica^2" + + + Square pica + + + + + + + + "uk_acre" ; "acre" + + + International acre + + + + + + + + "us_acre" + + + US survey acre + + + + + + + + "yd2" ; "yd^2" + + + Square yard + + + + + +
+ +

Energy

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "BTU" ; "btu" + + + British thermal unit + + + + + + + + "c" + + + Thermochemical calorie + + + + + + + + "cal" + + + International Steam Table calorie + + + + + + + + "e" + + + erg + + + + + + + + "eV" ; "ev" + + + Electron volt + + + + + + + + "flb" + + + Foot-pound + + + + + + + + "HPh" ; "hh" + + + Horsepower-hour + + + + + + + + "J" + + + Joule + + + + + + + + "Wh" ; "wh" + + + Watt-hour + + + + + +
+ +

Flux density

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "ga" + + + Gauss + + + + + + + + "T" + + + Tesla + + + + + +
+ +

Force

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "dyn" ; "dy" + + + Dyne + + + + + + + + "N" + + + Newton + + + + + + + + "lbf" + + + Pound-force + + + + + + + + "pond" + + + Pond + + + + + +
+ +

Information

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "bit" + + + Bit + + + + + + + + "byte" + + + Byte + + + + + +
+ +

Length and distance

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "ang" + + + Angstrom + + + + + + + + "ell" + + + Ell + + + + + + + + "ft" + + + Foot + + + + + + + + "in" + + + Inch + + + + + + + + "ly" ; "lightyear" + + + Light-year + + + + + + + + "m" + + + Meter + + + + + + + + "mi" + + + International mile + + + + + + + + "Nmi" + + + Nautical mile + + + + + + + + "parsec" ; "pc" + + + Parsec + + + + + + + + "Pica" ; "picapt" + + + Pica point + + + + + + + + "pica" + + + Pica + + + + + + + + "survey_mi" + + + US survey mile + + + + + + + + "yd" + + + Yard + + + + + +
+ +

Mass and weight

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "cwt" ; "shweight" + + + Short hundredweight + + + + + + + + "g" + + + Gram + + + + + + + + "grain" + + + Grain + + + + + + + + "lbm" + + + Pound + + + + + + + + "ozm" + + + Ounce + + + + + + + + "pweight" + + + Pennyweight + + + + + + + + "sg" + + + Slug + + + + + + + + "stone" + + + Stone + + + + + + + + "ton" + + + Short ton + + + + + + + + "u" + + + Unified atomic mass unit + + + + + + + + "uk_cwt" ; "lcwt" ; "hweight" + + + Long hundredweight + + + + + + + + "uk_ton" ; "LTON" ; "brton" + + + Long ton + + + + + +
+ +

Power

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "HP" ; "h" + + + Mechanical horsepower + + + + + + + + "PS" + + + Pferdestärke or metric horsepower + + + + + + + + "W" ; "w" + + + Watt + + + + + +
+ +

Pressure

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "atm" ; ("at")(1) + + + Standard atmosphere + + + + + + + + "mmHg" + + + Millimeter of mercury + + + + + + + + "Pa" + + + Pascal + + + + + + + + "psi" + + + Pound per square inch + + + + + + + + "Torr" + + + Torr + + + + + +
+ 1 - The "at" unit is deprecated. Use "atm" instead. + +

Speed

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "admkn" + + + Admiralty knot + + + + + + + + "kn" + + + International knot + + + + + + + + "m/h" ; "m/hr" + + + Meters per hour + + + + + + + + "m/s" ; "m/sec" + + + Meters per second + + + + + + + + "mph" + + + Miles per hour + + + + + +
+ +

Temperature

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "C" ; "cel" + + + Degree Celsius + + + + + + + + "F" ; "fah" + + + Degree Fahrenheit + + + + + + + + "K" ; "kel" + + + Kelvin + + + + + + + + "Rank" + + + Degree Rankine + + + + + + + + "Reau" + + + Degree Réaumur + + + + + +
+ +

Time

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "day" ; "d" + + + Day + + + + + + + + "hr" + + + Hour + + + + + + + + "mn" ; "min" + + + Minute + + + + + + + + "sec" ; "s" + + + Second + + + + + + + + "yr" + + + Year + + + + + +
+ +

Volume

+ + + + Unit symbol + + + Description + + + Prefix + + + + + "ang3" ; "ang^3" + + + Cubic angstrom + + + + + + + + "barrel" + + + Oil barrel + + + + + + + + "bushel" + + + US bushel + + + + + + + + "cup" + + + US cup + + + + + + + + "ft3" ; "ft^3" + + + Cubic foot + + + + + + + + "gal" + + + US gallon + + + + + + + + "Glass"(2) + + + Australian glass (200 milliliters) + + + + + + + + "GRT" ; "regton" + + + Gross register tonnage + + + + + + + + "Humpen"(2) + + + Humpen (500 milliliters) + + + + + + + + "in3" ; "in^3" + + + Cubic inch + + + + + + + + "l" ; "L" ; "lt" + + + Liter + + + + + + + + "ly3" ; "ly^3" + + + Cubic light-year + + + + + + + + "m3" ; "m^3" + + + Cubic meter + + + + + + + + "mi3" ; "mi^3" + + + Cubic international mile + + + + + + + + "Middy"(2) + + + Australian middy (285 milliliters) + + + + + + + + "MTON" + + + Measurement ton + + + + + + + + "Nmi3" ; "Nmi^3" + + + Cubic nautical mile + + + + + + + + "oz" + + + US fluid ounce + + + + + + + + "Pica3" ; "Pica^3" ; "picapt3" ; "picapt^3" + + + Cubic pica point + + + + + + + + "pica3" ; "pica^3" + + + Cubic pica + + + + + + + + "pt" ; "us_pt" + + + US pint + + + + + + + + "qt" + + + US quart + + + + + + + + "Schooner"(2) + + + Australian schooner (425 milliliters) + + + + + + + + "Sixpack"(2) + + + Six pack (2 liters) + + + + + + + + "tbs" + + + US tablespoon + + + + + + + + "tsp" + + + US teaspoon + + + + + + + + "tspm" + + + Metric teaspoon + + + + + + + + "uk_gal" + + + Imperial gallon + + + + + + + + "uk_pt" + + + Imperial pint + + + + + + + + "uk_qt" + + + Imperial quart + + + + + + + + "yd3" ; "yd^3" + + + Cubic yard + + + + + +
+ 2 - These units are not part of the Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) Version 1.3. Part 4: Recalculated Formula (OpenFormula) Format standard for the CONVERT function. They are preserved for backward compatibility. +
+

Prefixes

+
+

Decimal prefixes

+ + + + Prefix + + + Multiplier + + + + + Y (yotta) + + + 1024 + + + + + Z (zetta) + + + 1021 + + + + + E (exa) + + + 1018 + + + + + P (peta) + + + 1015 + + + + + T (tera) + + + 1012 + + + + + G (giga) + + + 109 + + + + + M (mega) + + + 106 + + + + + k (kilo) + + + 103 + + + + + h (hecto) + + + 102 + + + + + e (deca) + + + 101 + + + + + d (deci) + + + 10-1 + + + + + c (centi) + + + 10-2 + + + + + m (milli) + + + 10-3 + + + + + u (micro) + + + 10-6 + + + + + n (nano) + + + 10-9 + + + + + p (pico) + + + 10-12 + + + + + f (femto) + + + 10-15 + + + + + a (atto) + + + 10-18 + + + + + z (zepto) + + + 10-21 + + + + + y (yocto) + + + 10-24 + + +
+ +

Binary prefixes

+ + + + Prefix + + + Multiplier + + + + + Yi (yobi) + + + 280 + + + + + Zi (zebi) + + + 270 + + + + + Ei (exbi) + + + 260 + + + + + Pi (pebi) + + + 250 + + + + + Ti (tebi) + + + 240 + + + + + Gi (gibi) + + + 230 + + + + + Mi (mebi) + + + 220 + + + + + ki (kibi) + + + 210 + + +
+ + + ORG.OPENOFFICE.CONVERT +
+ CONVERT Wiki page +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2af44ba1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + COUNTIFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_countifs.xhp + + + + +
+ + + COUNTIFS function + counting row;satisfying criteria + counting column;satisfying criteria + +

COUNTIFS

+Returns the count of cells that meet criteria in multiple ranges. +
+ + + +COUNTIFS(Range; Criterion[; Range2; Criterion2][; ... ; [Range127; Criterion127]]) + + +Range, Range2, ... and Criterion, Criterion2, ... must have the same size, otherwise the function returns err:502 - Invalid argument. + + + + +

Simple usage

+=COUNTIFS(B2:B6;">=20") +Counts the amount of rows of the range B2:B6 with values greater than or equal to 20. Returns 3, because the fifth and the sixth rows do not meet the criterion. +=COUNTIFS(B2:B6;">=20";C2:C6;">70") +Counts the amount of rows that contain simultaneously values greater than 70 in the C2:C6 range and values greater than or equal to 20 in the B2:B6 range. Returns 2, because the second, the fifth and the sixth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +

Using regular expressions and nested functions

+For these examples to work as described, make sure that Enable regular expressions in formulas is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] Calc - Calculate. +=COUNTIFS(B2:B6;"[:alpha:]*") +Counts the amount of rows of the B2:B6 range that contain only alphabet symbols. Returns 1, because only sixth row meets the criterion. +=COUNTIFS(B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Counts the amount of rows of the B2:B6 range excluding rows with minimum and maximum values of this range. Returns 2, because the third, the fifth and the sixth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +=COUNTIFS(A2:A6;"pen.*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Counts the amount of rows that correspond to all cells of the A2:A6 range starting with "pen" and to all cells of the B2:B6 range with exception of its maximum. Returns 1, because only second row meets all criteria. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of the COUNTIFS function. For example, the above function can be rewritten as follows: +=COUNTIFS(A2:A6;E2&".*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +If E2 = pen, the function returns 1, because the link to the cell is substituted with its content and it works as a function above. + +
+ + , + , + , + + + + , + , + , + , + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb05e1f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +DATE +/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp + + + +DATE function + +

DATE +

+This function calculates a date specified by year, month, day and displays it in the cell's formatting. The default format of a cell containing the DATE function is the date format, but you can format the cells with any other number format. + + +DATE(Year; Month; Day) + +Year is an integer between 1583 and 9957 or between 0 and 99. +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. + +Month is an integer indicating the month. + +Day is an integer indicating the day of the month. +If the values for month and day are out of bounds, they are carried over to the next digit. If you enter =DATE(00;12;31) the result will be 2000-12-31. If, on the other hand, you enter =DATE(00;13;31) the result will be 2001-01-31. + + +=DATE(00;1;31) yields 1/31/00 if the cell format setting is MM/DD/YY. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8dae66be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + +DATEDIF +/text/scalc/01/func_datedif.xhp + + + +DATEDIF function + + +

DATEDIF

+This function returns the number of whole days, months or years between Start date and End date. + + + + + DATEDIF(Start date; End date; Interval) + + +Start date is the date from when the calculation is carried out. + +End date is the date until the calculation is carried out. End date must be later, than Start date. + +Interval is a string that determines how the difference will be calculated. Possible values are "d", "m", "y", "ym", "md" or "yd" regardless of the current language settings. + + + + + +Value for "Interval"Do not translate the text values in this column below + + +Return value + + + + +"d" + + +Number of whole days between Start date and End date. + + + + + "m" + + +Number of whole months between Start date and End date. + + + + + "y" + + +Number of whole years between Start date and End date. + + + + + "ym" + + +Number of whole months when subtracting years from the difference of Start date and End date. + + + + + "md" + + +Number of whole days when subtracting years and months from the difference of Start date and End date. + + + + + "yd" + + +Number of whole days when subtracting years from the difference of Start date and End date. + + +
+ + + +Birthday calculation. A man was born on 1974-04-17. Today is 2012-06-13. +=DATEDIF("1974-04-17";"2012-06-13";"y") yields 38. +=DATEDIF("1974-04-17";"2012-06-13";"ym") yields 1. +=DATEDIF("1974-04-17";"2012-06-13";"md") yields 27. +So he is 38 years, 1 month and 27 days old. + +=DATEDIF(DATE(1974,4,17);"2012-06-13";"m") yields 457, he has been living for 457 months. + +=DATEDIF("1974-04-17";"2012-06-13";"d") yields 13937, he has been living for 13937 days. + +=DATEDIF("1974-04-17";DATE(2012;06;13);"yd") yields 57, his birthday was 57 days ago. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..963c85926 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + DATEVALUE + /text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp + + + + + DATEVALUE function + + +

DATEVALUE

+ Returns the internal date number for text in quotes. + The internal date number is returned as a number. The number is determined by the date system that is used by $[officename] to calculate dates. + If the text string also includes a time value, DATEVALUE only returns the integer part of the conversion. + + + DATEVALUE("Text") + Text is a valid date expression and must be entered with quotation marks. + + + + + =DATEVALUE("1954-07-20") yields 19925. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33804020e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +DAY +/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp + + + +DAY function + +

DAY +

+Returns the day of given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 and 31. You can also enter a negative date/time value. + + +DAY(Number) +Number is the internal date number. + + + +=DAY(1) returns 31 (since $[officename] starts counting at zero from December 30, 1899) +=DAY(NOW()) returns the current day. +=DAY(C4) returns 5 if you enter 1901-08-05 in cell C4 (the date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb50701a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +DAYS +/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp + + + +DAYS function + +

DAYS +

+Calculates the difference between two date values. The result returns the number of days between the two days. + + +DAYS(Date2; Date1) + +Date1 is the start date, Date2 is the end date. If Date2 is an earlier date than Date1 the result is a negative number. + + + +=DAYS(NOW();"2010-01-01")) returns the number of days from January 1, 2010 until today. +=DAYS("1990-10-10";"1980-10-10") returns 3652 days. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..822d7f44f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +DAYS360 +/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp + + + +DAYS360 function + +

DAYS360 +

+Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations. + + +DAYS360(Date1; Date2[; Type]) +If Date2 is earlier than Date1, the function will return a negative number. +The optional argument Type determines the type of difference calculation. If Type = 0 or if the argument is missing, the US method (NASD, National Association of Securities Dealers) is used. If Type <> 0, the European method is used. + + + +=DAYS360("2000-01-01";NOW()) returns the number of interest days from January 1, 2000 until today. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8227311c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +EASTERSUNDAY +/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp + + + +EASTERSUNDAY function + +

EASTERSUNDAY +

+Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year. + +EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + +Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. You can also calculate other holidays by simple addition with this date. +Easter Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 1 +Good Friday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) - 2 +Pentecost Sunday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 49 +Pentecost Monday = EASTERSUNDAY(Year) + 50 + +=EASTERSUNDAY(2000) returns 2000-04-23. +=EASTERSUNDAY(2000)+49 returns the internal serial number 36688. The result is 2000-06-11. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD. + + +ORG.OPENOFFICE.EASTERSUNDAY +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14b050236 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +EDATE +/text/scalc/01/func_edate.xhp + + + +EDATE function + +

EDATE +

+The result is a date which is a number of months away from the start date. Only months are considered; days are not used for calculation. + + +EDATE(StartDate; Months) + +StartDate is a date. + +Months is the number of months before (negative) or after (positive) the start date. + + + +What date is one month prior to 2001-03-31? + +=EDATE("2001-03-31";-1) returns the serial number 36950. Formatted as a date, this is 2001-02-28. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74d3af592 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +EOMONTH +/text/scalc/01/func_eomonth.xhp + + + +EOMONTH function + +

EOMONTH +

+Returns the date of the last day of a month which falls months away from the start date. + + +EOMONTH(StartDate; Months) + +StartDate is a date (the starting point of the calculation). + +Months is the number of months before (negative) or after (positive) the start date. + +What is the last day of the month that falls 6 months after September 14 2001? + +=EOMONTH(DATE(2001;9;14);6) returns the serial number 37346. Formatted as a date, this is 2002-03-31. +=EOMONTH("2001-09-14";6) works as well. If you specify the date directly, we recommend using the standard ISO 8601 format because this should be independent of your selected locale settings. +
+ EOMONTH wiki page + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1e92361d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + ERROR.TYPE function + /text/scalc/01/func_error_type.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + ERROR.TYPE function + index of the Error type + + +ERROR.TYPE function +Returns a number representing a specific Error type, or the error value #N/A, if there is no error. +
+ + +ERROR.TYPE(Error_value) +Error_value – required argument. The error value or a reference to a cell, whose value needs to be processed. + + + + + Error value + + + Returns + + + + + Err:511 + + + 1 + + + + + #DIV/0! + + + 2 + + + + + #VALUE! + + + 3 + + + + + #REF! + + + 4 + + + + + #NAME? + + + 5 + + + + + #NUM! + + + 6 + + + + + #N/A + + + 7 + + + + + Anything else + + + #N/A + + +
+ + + +Simple usage +=ERROR.TYPE(#N/A) +Returns 7, because 7 is the index number of the error value #N/A. +=ERROR.TYPE(A3) +If A3 contains an expression equivalent to the division by zero, the function returns 2, because 2 is the index number of the error value #DIV/0! +More advanced way +If in division A1 by A2, A2 can turn to zero, you can handle the situation as follows: +=IF(ISERROR(A1/A2);IF(ERROR.TYPE(A1/A2)=2;"the denominator can't be equal to zero");A1/A2) +The ISERROR function returns TRUE or FALSE depending on whether there is an error or not. If the error takes place, the function IF addresses to the second argument, if there is no error, it returns the result of the division. The second argument checks the index number representing the specific Error type, and if it is equal to 2, it returns the specified text "the denominator can't be zero" or 0 otherwise. Thus, clear text would signify the division by zero, the result of the division would appear when the division is successful, or if there is, for example, an error of another type, zero would be returned. +If the ERROR.TYPE function is used as condition of the IF function and the ERROR.TYPE returns #N/A, the IF function returns #N/A as well. Use ISERROR to avoid it as shown in the example above. +
+ISERROR, NA, IF +Error codes +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e28e5e971 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + FINDB Function + /text/scalc/01/func_findb.xhp + + + +
+ + + FINDB Function + find text;FINDB Function + +

FINDB

+ Returns the starting position of a given text, using byte positions. FINDB is case sensitive. +
+ + + FINDB(Find Text ; Text [; Position]) + Find Text: The text or text expression to be found. + Text: the text in which the search is to be made. + Position: The position in the text where the search starts. + + =FINDB("ａ"; "LibreOffice Ｃａｌｃ") returns 15. The Find Text argument is a text string that comprises a full-width, double-byte "a" character, while the Text argument comprises 12 single-byte characters followed by four full-width, double-byte characters. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..044fee3e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + FLOOR Functions + /text/scalc/01/func_floor.xhp + + + +

FLOOR Functions

+
+ +FLOOR function +rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance + + mw added one entry + +

FLOOR

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number and a positive significance value, the function rounds down (towards zero). For a negative number and a negative significance value, the direction of rounding is determined by the value of a mode parameter. The function returns an error if the number and significance values have opposite signs. +
+ If the spreadsheet is exported to Microsoft Excel, the FLOOR function is exported as the equivalent FLOOR.MATH function that has existed since Excel 2013. If you plan to use the spreadsheet with earlier Excel versions, use either FLOOR.PRECISE that has existed since Excel 2010, or FLOOR.XCL that is exported as the FLOOR function compatible with all Excel versions. +
+ + + FLOOR(Number[; Significance[; Mode]]) +
+ Number is the number that is to be rounded, or a reference to a cell containing the number. +
+ Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to +1 or -1 depending on the sign of Number. + Mode (optional) is a number, or a reference to a cell containing a number. The function only uses Mode if both Number and Significance are negative. Then if Mode is given and not equal to zero, numbers are rounded up (towards zero); if Mode is equal to zero or not given, negative numbers are rounded down (away from zero). + + =FLOOR(3.45) returns 3. + =FLOOR(3.45, 3) returns 3. + =FLOOR(-1.234) returns -2. + =FLOOR(-45.67, -2, 0) returns -46. + =FLOOR(-45.67, -2, 1) returns -44. + see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ + +FLOOR.MATH function + +

FLOOR.MATH

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number the function rounds down (towards zero). For a negative number, the direction of rounding is determined by the value of a mode parameter. The sign of the significance value is ignored. + This function exists for interoperability with Microsoft Excel 2013 or newer. + + FLOOR.MATH(Number[; Significance[; Mode]]) + + Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to 1. + Mode (optional) is a number, or a reference to a cell containing a number. If Mode is given and not equal to zero, a negative Number is rounded up (towards zero). If Mode is equal to zero or is not given, a negative Number is rounded down (away from zero). + + =FLOOR.MATH(3.45) returns 3. + =FLOOR.MATH(3.45,-3) returns 3. + =FLOOR.MATH(-1.234) returns -2. + =FLOOR.MATH(-45.67,-2, 0) returns -46. + =FLOOR.MATH(-45.67,+2, 1) returns -44. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FLOOR.MATH +
+ +
+ +FLOOR.PRECISE function +rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance + + mw added one entry + + + +

FLOOR.PRECISE

+ Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number the function rounds down (towards zero). For a negative number, the function rounds down (away form zero). The sign of the significance value is ignored. + + + FLOOR.PRECISE(Number[; Significance]) + + Significance (optional) is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. It defaults to 1. + + + =FLOOR.PRECISE(3.45) returns 3. + =FLOOR.PRECISE(-45.67,2) returns -46. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FLOOR.PRECISE + see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND,INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP +
+ +
+ +FLOOR.XCL function + +

FLOOR.XCL

+ Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value. + For a positive number and a positive significance value, the function rounds down (towards zero). For a negative number and a positive significance value, the function rounds down (away from zero). For a negative number and a negative significance value, the function rounds up (towards zero). The function returns an error if the number is positive and the significance value is negative. + This function exists for interoperability with Microsoft Excel 2007 or older. If a Calc spreadsheet is exported to Microsoft Excel, references to Calc’s FLOOR.XCL function are exported as references to Excel’s FLOOR function, which is compatible with all Excel versions. If a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet is imported into Calc, references to Excel’s FLOOR function are imported as references to Calc’s FLOOR.XCL function. + + FLOOR.XCL(Number; Significance) + + Significance is the value, or a reference to a cell containing the value, to whose multiple Number is to be rounded. + + =FLOOR.XCL(3.45,2) returns 2. + =FLOOR.XCL(-45.67,2) returns -46. + =FLOOR.XCL(-45.67,-2) returns -44. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FLOOR +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc981239e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.ADD + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsadd.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.ADD function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.ADD function

+Calculates the additive forecast(s) (future values) based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms. EDS is used when argument period_length is 0, otherwise ETS is used. + +FORECAST.ETS.ADD calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.ADD(targets, values, timeline, [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + + + =FORECAST.ETS.ADD(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 157.166666666667, the additive forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.ADD(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;4;TRUE();7) + Returns 113.251442038722, the additive forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with period length of 4, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.FORECAST.ETS +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..49ea19fd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.MULT + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsmult.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.MULT function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.MULT Function

+ +Calculates the multiplicative forecast(s) (future values) based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms. EDS is used when argument period_length is 0, otherwise ETS is used. + +FORECAST.ETS.MULT calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.MULT(targets, values, timeline, [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + + + =FORECAST.ETS.MULT(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 131.71437427439, the multiplicative forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.MULT(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;4;TRUE();7) + Returns 120.747806144882, the multiplicative forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with period length of 4, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.FORECAST.ETS.MULT +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c3b6f0ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspiadd.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD function + +

FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD function

+ +Calculates the prediction interval(s) for additive forecast based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms. EDS is used when argument period_length is 0, otherwise ETS is used. + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD(target, values, timeline, [confidence_level], [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + +For example, with a 90% Confidence level, a 90% prediction interval will be computed (90% of future points are to fall within this radius from forecast). +Note on prediction intervals: there is no exact mathematical way to calculate this for forecasts, there are various approximations. Prediction intervals tend to be increasingly 'over-optimistic' when increasing distance of the forecast-X from the observation data set. +For ETS, Calc uses an approximation based on 1000 calculations with random variations within the standard deviation of the observation data set (the historical values). + + + =FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;0.9;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 18.8061295551355, the prediction interval for additive forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, 90% (=0.9) confidence level, with one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;0.8;4;TRUE();7) + Returns 23.4416821953741, the prediction interval for additive forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with confidence level of 0.8, period length of 4, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FORECAST.ETS.COFINT +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d5c1eb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetspimult.xhp + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT function

+ +Calculates the prediction interval(s) for multiplicative forecast based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms.. EDS is used when argument period_length is 0, otherwise ETS is used. + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT(target, values, timeline, [confidence_level], [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + +For example, with a 90% Confidence level, a 90% prediction interval will be computed (90% of future points are to fall within this radius from forecast). +Note on prediction intervals: there is no exact mathematical way to calculate this for forecasts, there are various approximations. Prediction intervals tend to be increasingly 'over-optimistic' when increasing distance of the forecast-X from the observation data set. +For ETS, Calc uses an approximation based on 1000 calculations with random variations within the standard deviation of the observation data set (the historical values). + + + =FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;0.9;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 20.1040952101013, the prediction interval for multiplicative forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, confidence level of 90% (=0.9) with one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT(DATE(2014;1;1);Values;Timeline;0.8;4;TRUE();7) + Returns 27.5285874381574, the prediction interval for multiplicative forecast for January 2014 based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with confidence level of 0.8, period length of 4, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6fead6db6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsseason.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY Function

+ +Returns the number of samples in period as calculated by Calc in case of FORECAST.ETS functions when argument period_length equals 1. + +The same result is returned with FORECAST.ETS.STAT functions when argument stat_type equals 9 (and period_length equals 1). + +FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY (values, timeline, [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + =FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY(Values;Timeline;TRUE();1) + Returns 6, the number of samples in period based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY +
+ +
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d7d62bb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatadd.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD Function

+ +Returns statistical value(s) that are results of the ETS/EDS algorithms. + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD (values, timeline, stat_type, [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + + + =FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD(Values;Timeline;3;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 0.9990234375, the additive statistics based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with beta smoothing, one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD(Values;Timeline;2;1;TRUE();7) + Returns 0.0615234375, the additive statistics based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with gamma smoothing, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FORECAST.ETS.STAT +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD , + FORECAST.ETS.MULT , + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT , + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD , + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c818cb67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT + /text/scalc/01/func_forecastetsstatmult.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT function + + +

FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT Function

+ +Returns statistical value(s) that are results of the ETS/EDS algorithms. + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT calculates with the model + + +FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT (values, timeline, stat_type, [period_length], [data_completion], [aggregation]) + + + + + + + + + =FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT(Values;Timeline;5;1;TRUE();1) + Returns 0.084073452803966, the multiplicative statistics based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with symmetric mean absolute percentage error (SMAPE), one sample per period, no missing data, and AVERAGE as aggregation. + =FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT(Values;Timeline;7;1;TRUE();7) + Returns 15.8372533480997, the multiplicative statistics based on Values and Timeline named ranges above, with root mean squared error, no missing data, and SUM as aggregation. + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.FORECAST.ETS.STAT.MULT +
+
+See also: + FORECAST.ETS.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.STAT.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.ADD, + FORECAST.ETS.PI.MULT, + FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY, + FORECAST, + FORECAST.LINEAR + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d34910924 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + FOURIER function + /text/scalc/01/func_fourier.xhp + + + +
+ + +FOURIER function + +

FOURIER

+ Computes the Discrete Fourier Transform [DFT] of an input array of complex numbers using a couple of Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithms. The function is an array formula. +
+ + + FOURIER(Array; GroupedByColumns [; Inverse [; Polar [; MinimumMagnitude]]]) + Array is a 2 x N or N x 2 range representing an array of complex number to be transformed, where N is the length of the array. The array represents the real and imaginary parts of the data. + + GroupedByColumns is a logical (TRUE or FALSE, 1 or 0) argument. When TRUE the array is grouped by columns where the first column contains the real part of the complex number and the second columns contains the imaginary part of the complex number. When FALSE, the first row contains the real part of the complex number and the second row contains the imaginary part of the complex number. If there is only 1 column (row), the input sequence is treated as purely real. + + Inverse is an optional logical (TRUE or FALSE, 1 or 0) argument. When TRUE, calculates the inverse Discrete Fourier Transform. The default value is FALSE. + + Polar: is an optional logical (TRUE or FALSE, 1 or 0) argument. Indicates whether the final output is in polar coordinates (magnitude, phase). This argument is optional and the default value is FALSE. + + MinimumMagnitude: used only if Polar=TRUE. All frequency components with magnitude less than MinimumMagnitude will be suppressed with a zero magnitude-phase entry. This is very useful when looking at the magnitude-phase spectrum of a signal because there is always some very tiny amount of rounding error when doing FFT algorithms and results in incorrect non-zero phase for non-existent frequencies. By providing a suitable value to this parameter, these non-existent frequency components can be suppressed. By default the value of MinimumMagnitude is 0.0, and no suppression is done by default. + + + + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.FOURIER +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9936d2914 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +HOUR +/text/scalc/01/func_hour.xhp + + + +HOUR function + +

HOUR +

+Returns the hour for a given time value. The hour is returned as an integer between 0 and 23. + + +HOUR(Number) + +Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the hour is to be returned. + + +=HOUR(NOW()) returns the current hour + +=HOUR(C4) returns 17 if the contents of C4 = 17:20:00. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26cd70093 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + IFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_ifs.xhp + + + +
+ + + IFS function + +

IFS

+ IFS is a multiple IF-function. +
+ + + IFS(expression1; result1[; expression2; result2][; ... ; [expression127; result127]]) + expression1, expression2, ... are any boolean values or expressions that can be TRUE or FALSE + result1, result2, ... are the values that are returned if the logical test is TRUE + IFS( expression1, result1, expression2, result2, expression3, result3 ) is executed as + IF expression1 is TRUE + THEN result1 + ELSE IF expression2 is TRUE + THEN result2 + ELSE IF expression3 is TRUE + THEN result3 + To get a default result should no expression be TRUE, add a last expression that is always TRUE, like TRUE or 1=1 followed by the default result. + If there is a result missing for an expression or is no expression is TRUE, a #N/A error is returned. + If expression is neither TRUE or FALSE, a #VALUE error is returned. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.IFS +
+ + IF +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2a4e7fdb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + IMCOS function + /text/scalc/01/func_imcos.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMCOS function + cosine;complex number + +

+ + IMCOS + function +

+ + + Returns the cosine of a complex number. The cosine of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMCOS equation + + + + + + IMCOS(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose cosine is to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMCOS("4-3i")
+ returns -6.58066304055116-7.58155274274654i. + + + =IMCOS(2)
+ returns -0.416146836547142 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..718b490db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMCOSH function + /text/scalc/01/func_imcosh.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMCOSH function + hyperbolic cosine;complex number + +

+ + IMCOSH + function +

+ + + Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a complex number. The hyperbolic cosine of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMCOSH equation + + + + + + + IMCOSH(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose hyperbolic cosine is to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMCOSH("4-3i")
+ returns -27.0349456030742-3.85115333481178i. + + + =IMCOSH(2)
+ returns 3.76219569108363 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..715540017 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + IMCOT function + /text/scalc/01/func_imcot.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMCOT function + cotangent;complex number + +

+ + IMCOT + function +

+ + + Returns the cotangent of a complex number. The cotangent of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMCOT equation + + + + + + + IMCOT(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose cotangent is to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMCOT("4-3i")
+ returns 0.00490118239430447+0.999266927805902i. + + + =IMCOT(2)
+ returns -0.457657554360286 as a string. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac1504080 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMCSC function + /text/scalc/01/func_imcsc.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMCSC function + cosecant;complex number + +

+ + IMCSC + function +

+ + + Returns the cosecant of a complex number. The cosecant of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMCSC equation + + + + + + + IMCSC(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose cosecant needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMCSC("4-3i")
+ returns -0.0754898329158637-0.0648774713706355i. + + + =IMCSC(2)
+ returns 1.09975017029462 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd854aae4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMCSCH function + /text/scalc/01/func_imcsch.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMCSCH function + hyperbolic cosecant;complex number + +

+ + IMCSCH + function +

+ + + Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of a complex number. The hyperbolic cosecant of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMCSCH equation + + + + + + + IMCSCH(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose hyperbolic cosecant needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMCSCH("4-3i")
+ returns -0.036275889628626+0.0051744731840194i. + + + =IMCSCH(2)
+ returns 0.275720564771783 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccf6b8f2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMSEC function + /text/scalc/01/func_imsec.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMSEC function + secant;complex number + +

+ + IMSEC + function +

+ + + Returns the secant of a complex number. The secant of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMSEC equation + + + + + + + IMSEC(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose secant needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMSEC("4-3i")
+ returns -0.0652940278579471+0.0752249603027732i. + + + =IMSEC(2)
+ returns -2.40299796172238 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc5155fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMSECH function + /text/scalc/01/func_imsech.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMSECH function + hyperbolic secant;complex number + +

+ + IMSECH + function +

+ + + Returns the hyperbolic secant of a complex number. The hyperbolic secant of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMSECH equation + + + + + + + IMSECH(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose hyperbolic secant needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMSECH("4-3i")
+ returns -0.0362534969158689+0.00516434460775318i. + + + =IMSECH(2)
+ returns 0.26580222883408 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fb20db2f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + IMSIN function + /text/scalc/01/func_imsin.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMSIN function + sine;complex number + +

+ + IMSIN + function +

+ + + Returns the sine of a complex number. The sine of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMSIN equation + + + + + + IMSIN(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose sine needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMSIN("4-3i")
+ returns -7.61923172032141+6.548120040911i. + + + =IMSIN(2)
+ returns 0.909297426825682 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..058c31927 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + IMSINH function + /text/scalc/01/func_imsinh.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMSINH function + hyperbolic sine;complex number + +

+ + IMSINH + function +

+ + + Returns the hyperbolic sine of a complex number. The hyperbolic sine of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMSINH equation + + + + + + + IMSINH(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose hyperbolic sine needs to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMSINH("4-3i")
+ returns -27.0168132580039-3.85373803791938i. + + + =IMSINH(2)
+ returns 3.62686040784702 as a string. + + +
+ + , + , + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..edabfe86c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + IMTAN function + /text/scalc/01/func_imtan.xhp + + + +
+ + + IMTAN function + tangent;complex number + +

+ + IMTAN + function +

+ + + Returns the tangent of a complex number. The tangent of a complex number can be expressed by: + + +
+ + IMTAN equation + + + + + + + IMTAN(Complex_number) + + + Complex_number is a complex number whose tangent is to be calculated. + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + =IMTAN("4-3i")
+ returns 0.00490825806749606-1.00070953606723i. + + + =IMTAN(2)
+ returns -2.18503986326152 as a string. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96f58c866 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +ISOWEEKNUM +/text/scalc/01/func_isoweeknum.xhp + + + +ISOWEEKNUM function + +

ISOWEEKNUM +

+ISOWEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. +The International Standard ISO 8601 has decreed that Monday shall be the first day of the week. A week that lies partly in one year and partly in another is assigned a number in the year in which most of its days lie. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains the January 4th. + + + +ISOWEEKNUM(Number) + +Number is the internal date number. + + + +=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1)) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. +=ISOWEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1)) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef94de403 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + JIS Function + /text/scalc/01/func_jis.xhp + + + +
+ + + JIS function + +

JIS

+ Converts single-byte (half-width) ASCII or katakana characters to double-byte (full-width) characters. +
+ See https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. + + JIS(Text) + Text: the text string that contains characters to be converted. + Applying the JIS function to a string composed of double-byte characters will return the input string without any modifications. + + =JIS("LibreOffice") returns the string "ＬｉｂｒｅＯｆｆｉｃｅ". Note that the returned string uses double-byte characters. + =JIS("ﾗｲﾄ") returns the string "ライト", which is composed of double-byte characters. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec778f57d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + MAXIFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_maxifs.xhp + + + + +
+ + + MAXIFS function + maximum;satisfying conditions + +

MAXIFS function

+Returns the maximum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges. +
+ +MAXIFS() + +Func_Range – required argument. A range of cells, a name of a named range or a label of a column or a row containing values for calculating the maximum. + + + + + + + + + +

Simple usage

+=MAXIFS(B2:B6;B2:B6;"<35") +Calculates the maximum of values of the range B2:B6 that are greater than or equal to 20. Returns 35. The fifth row does not meet the criterion. +=MAXIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">=20";C2:C6;"<90") +Calculates the maximum of values of the range C2:C6 that are lower than 90 and correspond to cells of the B2:B6 range with values greater than or equal to 20. Returns 85, because the fourth and fifth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +

Using regular expressions and nested functions

+=MAXIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the maximum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all values of the range B2:B6 except its minimum and maximum. Returns 190, because only the fourth row meet the criteria. +=MAXIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;"pen.*";B2:B6;"<="&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the maximum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all cells of the A2:A6 range starting with "pen" and to all cells of the B2:B6 range except its maximum. Returns 85, because only the third row meets all criteria. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of the MAXIFS function. For example, the above function can be rewritten as follows: +=MAXIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;E2&".*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +If E2 = "pen", the function returns 65, because the reference to the cell is substituted with its content. + + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.MAXIFS +
+ +, +, +, +, + + +, +, +, +, + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5ddde101 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + MINIFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_minifs.xhp + + + + +
+ + + MINIFS function + minimum;satisfying conditions + +

MINIFS function

+Returns the minimum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges. +
+ +MINIFS() + +Func_Range – required argument. A range of cells, a name of a named range or a label of a column or a row containing values for calculating the minimum. + + + + + + + + + +

Simple usage

+=MINIFS(B2:B6;B2:B6;"<35") +Calculates the minimum of values of the range B2:B6 that are lower than or equal to 20. Returns 17. +=MINIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">=20";C2:C6;">90") +Calculates the minimum of values of the range C2:C6 that are lower than 90 and correspond to cells of the B2:B6 range with values greater than or equal to 20. Returns 190. +

Using regular expressions and nested functions

+=MINIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the minimum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all values of the range B2:B6 except its minimum and maximum. Returns 65. +=MINIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;".*book";B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6)) +Calculates the minimum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all cells of the A2:A6 range ending with "book" and to all cells of the B2:B6 range except its minimum. Returns 190. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of the MINIFS function. For example, the above function can be rewritten as follows: +=MINIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;".*"&E2;B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +If E2 = "book", the function returns 180, because the reference to the cell is substituted with its content. + + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.MINIFS +
+ +, +, +, +, + + +, +, +, +, + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1bea6607f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +MINUTE +/text/scalc/01/func_minute.xhp + + + +MINUTE function + +

MINUTE +

+Calculates the minute for an internal time value. The minute is returned as a number between 0 and 59. + + +MINUTE(Number) + +Number, as a time value, is a decimal number where the number of the minute is to be returned. + + +=MINUTE(8.999) returns 58 + +=MINUTE(8.9999) returns 59 + +=MINUTE(NOW()) returns the current minute value. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ae8ce5f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +MONTH +/text/scalc/01/func_month.xhp + + + +MONTH function + +

MONTH +

+Returns the month for the given date value. The month is returned as an integer between 1 and 12. + + +MONTH(Number) + + Number is the internal date number. + + + +=MONTH(NOW()) returns the current month. +=MONTH(C4) returns 7 if you enter 2000-07-07 to cell C4 (that date value might get formatted differently after you press Enter). +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a5e6d7b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + NETWORKDAYS.INTL + /text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.intl.xhp + + + + +
+ + NETWORKDAYS.INTL function + + +

NETWORKDAYS.INTL

+Returns the number of workdays between a start date and an end date. There are options to define weekend days and holidays. The optional weekend parameter (or a string) can be used to define the weekend days (or the non-working days in each week). Also, optionally, the user can define a holiday list. The weekend days and user-defined holidays are not counted as working days. +
+ +NETWORKDAYS.INTL(StartDate; EndDate [; [ Weekend ] [; Holidays ] ]) +StartDate is the date from when the calculation is carried out. If the start date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. +EndDate is the date up until when the calculation is carried out. If the end date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. + + + + + +How many workdays fall between December 15, 2016 and January 14, 2017? Let the start date be located in C3 and the end date in D3. Cells F3 to J3 contain five (5) holidays for Christmas and New Year in date format: December 24, 2016; December 25, 2016; December 26, 2016; December 31, 2016; and January 1, 2017. +=NETWORKDAYS.INTL(C3;D3;;F3:J3) returns 21 workdays with default for weekend days. +=NETWORKDAYS.INTL(C3;D3;11;F3:J3) returns 24 workdays with Sunday only weekends. +Alternatively, use the weekend string “0000001” to define Sunday as the non-working day of every week. +=NETWORKDAYS.INTL(C3;D3;“0000001”;F3:J3) returns 24 workdays with Sunday only weekend. +The function can be used without the two optional parameters – weekday and holidays – by leaving them out: +=NETWORKDAYS.INTL(C3;D3) gives 22 working days. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.NETWORKDAYS.INTL +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc5681d14 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + NETWORKDAYS + /text/scalc/01/func_networkdays.xhp + + + + + + + NETWORKDAYS function + NETWORKDAYS_EXCEL2003 function + + + + +

NETWORKDAYS

+Returns the number of workdays between a start date and an end date. Holidays can be deducted. + + + +NETWORKDAYS(StartDate; EndDate [; [ Holidays ] [; Workdays ] ]) +StartDate is the date from when the calculation is carried out. If the start date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. +EndDate is the date up until when the calculation is carried out. If the end date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. +Holidays is an optional list of holidays. These are non-working days. Enter a cell range in which the holidays are listed individually. +Workdays is an optional list of number values defining standard work week. This list starts by Sunday, workdays are indicated by zero and non-working days by non-zero value. + + + + +How many workdays fall between 2001-12-15 and 2002-01-15? The start date is located in C3 and the end date in D3. Cells F3 to J3 contain the following Christmas and New Year holidays: "2001-12-24", "2001-12-25", "2001-12-26", "2001-12-31", "2002-01-01". +=NETWORKDAYS(C3;D3;F3:J3) returns 17 workdays. +How many workdays fall between September 12nd and 25th in 2016 if only Mondays, Tuesdays and Wednesdays are considered as workdays? +=NETWORKDAYS(DATE(2016;9;12); DATE(2016;9;25); ; {1;0;0;0;1;1;1}) returns 6 workdays. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45227d288 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +NOW +/text/scalc/01/func_now.xhp + + + +NOW function + +

NOW +

+Returns the computer system date and time. The value is updated when you recalculate the document or each time a cell value is modified. + + + +NOW() +NOW is a function without arguments. + + +=NOW()-A1 returns the difference between the date in A1 and now. Format the result as a number. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0c8f385e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + NUMBERVALUE + /text/scalc/01/func_numbervalue.xhp + + + + + NUMBERVALUE function + + +

NUMBERVALUE

+ + Converts the string representation of a number into a locale-independent numeric value. + + + The input text may be in a locale-dependent or other bespoke format. + The output number is formatted as a valid floating point value and shown using the current cell's number format. + Refer to the Numbers / Format help page to learn how to change the format of numbers in a cell. + + NUMBERVALUE(Text[; Decimal Separator[; Group Separator]]) + Text is a string that contains the number to be converted. + Decimal Separator is a single character that specifies the decimal separator in Text. It can be omitted if Text does not include any decimal or group separators. + Group Separator is a string that specifies the character(s) used as the group separator in Text. It can be omitted if Text does not include any group separators. The Decimal Separator character should not be used in Group Separator. + + + =NUMBERVALUE("1.234.567,89"; ","; ".") returns 1234567.89 (considering en-US locale). The function removes the two group separators and changes the decimal separator from a comma to a full stop. + + =NUMBERVALUE("123·4"; "·") returns 123.4 (considering en-US locale). The function changes the decimal separator from a "·" to a full stop. No group separator is used in the supplied number and so the Group Separator argument is omitted. + + =NUMBERVALUE("123e12") returns 1.23E+14 (considering en-US locale). No decimal or group separators are used in the supplied number and so the Decimal Separator and Group Separator arguments are omitted. + + =NUMBERVALUE("1#!234#!567"; "."; "#!") returns 1234567 (considering en-US locale). Note that in this case the group separator is specified as a two-character string. + Refer to the NUMBERVALUE wiki page for more details about this function. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c9b23401 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Function OPT_BARRIER + /text/scalc/01/func_opt_barrier.xhp + + + +
+ + OPT_BARRIER function + + +

OPT_BARRIER

+ Returns the pricing for a barrier option, calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. +
+ + + OPT_BARRIER(Spot; Volatility; Rate; Foreign Rate; Maturity; Strike; LowerBarrier; UpperBarrier; Rebate; PutCall; InOut; BarrierMonitoring [; Greek]) + + + + + + Strike is the strike price of the option and should be non-negative. + + + Rebate is the amount of money to be paid at maturity if the barrier is hit. + Put or Call is a string that defines whether the option is a put (“p”) or a call (“c”). + + + + + =OPT_BARRIER(30;0.2;0.06;0;1;40;25;0;0;"c";"o";"c") returns the value 0.4243. + =OPT_BARRIER(50;0.4;0.05;0;0.5;65;0;80;0;"p";"o";"c";"e") returns the value 10.1585. + + + + COM.SUN.STAR.SHEET.ADDIN.PRICINGFUNCTIONS.GETOPTBARRIER +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3737e6c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Function OPT_PROB_HIT + /text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_hit.xhp + + + +
+ + OPT_PROB_HIT function + + +

OPT_PROB_HIT

+ Returns the probability that an asset hits a predetermined barrier price, assuming that the stock price can be modeled as a process S that follows the stochastic differential equation, as follows. + + OPT_PROB_HIT equation + + µ is the asset’s percentage drift, vol is the percentage volatility of the stock, and dW is a random sample drawn from a normal distribution with a zero mean. W is a Wiener process or Brownian motion. +
+ + + OPT_PROB_HIT(Spot; Volatility; Drift; Maturity; LowerBarrier; UpperBarrier) + + + Drift is the annual stock price percentage drift rate (µ in the above formula). The value is expressed as a decimal (for example, enter 15% as 0.15). + + Strike is the strike price of the option and should be non-negative. + + + + =OPT_PROB_HIT(30;0.2;0.3;1;0;40) returns the value 0.6119. + =OPT_PROB_HIT(70;0.3;0.1;0.5;60;0) returns the value 0.4239. + + + + COM.SUN.STAR.SHEET.ADDIN.PRICINGFUNCTIONS.GETOPTPROBHIT +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5a6cab98 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Function OPT_PROB_INMONEY + /text/scalc/01/func_opt_prob_inmoney.xhp + + + +
+ + OPT_PROB_INMONEY function + + +

OPT_PROB_INMONEY

+ Returns the probability that an asset will end up between two barrier levels at maturity, assuming that the stock price can be modeled as a process S that follows the stochastic differential equation, as follows. + + OPT_PROB_INMONEY equation + + µ is the asset’s percentage drift, vol is the percentage volatility of the stock, and dW is a random sample drawn from a normal distribution with a zero mean. W is a Wiener process or Brownian motion. + If the optional Strike and PutCall arguments are included, then + + + For a call option, the function returns the probability that the asset will end up between Strike and UpperBarrier. + + + For a put option, the function returns the probability that the asset will end up between LowerBarrier and Strike. + + + The function ignores the possibility of knock-out before maturity. +
+ + + OPT_PROB_INMONEY(Spot; Volatility; Drift; Maturity; LowerBarrier; UpperBarrier [; Strike [; PutCall]]) + + + + + + + + =OPT_PROB_INMONEY(30;0.2;0.1;1;0;50) returns the value 0.9844. + =OPT_PROB_INMONEY(70;0.3;0.15;1;60;0;80;"p") returns the value 0.3440. + + + + COM.SUN.STAR.SHEET.ADDIN.PRICINGFUNCTIONS.GETOPTPROBINMONEY +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9abb0c37b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + OPT_TOUCH + /text/scalc/01/func_opt_touch.xhp + + + +
+ + OPT_TOUCH function + + +

OPT_TOUCH

+ Returns the pricing of a touch / no-touch option, calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. +
+
+ For relevant background information, visit the Options (finance) and Black-Scholes model Wikipedia pages. +
+ Further information about touch / no-touch options may be found on many financial websites. + + OPT_TOUCH(Spot; Volatility; Rate; ForeignRate; Maturity; LowerBarrier; UpperBarrier; ForeignDomestic; InOut; BarrierMonitoring [; Greek]) + + Spot is the price / value of the underlying asset and should be greater than 0.0. + Volatility is the annual percentage volatility of the underlying asset expressed as a decimal (for example, enter 30% as 0.3). The value should be greater than 0.0. + Rate is the continuously compounded interest rate. This is a percentage expressed as a decimal (for example, enter 40% as 0.4). + ForeignRate is the continuously compounded foreign interest rate. This is a percentage expressed as a decimal (for example, enter 50% as 0.5). + Maturity is the time to maturity of the option, in years, and should be non-negative. + LowerBarrier is the predetermined lower barrier price; set to zero for no lower barrier. + UpperBarrier is the predetermined upper barrier price; set to zero for no upper barrier. + ForeignDomestic is a string that defines whether the option pays domestic (“d”) or foreign (“f”) currency. + InOut is a string that defines whether the option is knock-in (“i”) or knock-out (“o”). + BarrierMonitoring is a string that defines whether the barrier is monitored continuously (“c”) or only at the end / maturity (“e”). +
+ Greek (optional) is a string argument. If omitted or set to “value”, “v”, “price”, or “p”, then the function simply returns the option price. If another valid string is entered, the function returns price sensitivities (Greeks) to one of the input parameters. The valid options in this case are as follows. + + + “delta” or “d”. + + + “gamma” or “g”. + + + “theta” or “t”. + + + “vega” or “e”. + + + “volga” or “o”. + + + “vanna” or “a”. + + + “rho” or “r”. + + + “rhof” or “f”. + + +
+ + =OPT_TOUCH(50;0.25;0.05;0;1;0;55;"d";"i";"c") returns the value 0.6876. + =OPT_TOUCH(80;0.2;0.05;0;0.5;60;0;"f";"o";"c";"r") returns the value 15.5516. + + + + COM.SUN.STAR.SHEET.ADDIN.PRICINGFUNCTIONS.GETOPTTOUCH +
+ + + + +
+ Financial Functions Part One + Financial Functions Part Two + Financial Functions Part Three +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d59f956f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + RAWSUBTRACT function + /text/scalc/01/func_rawsubtract.xhp + + + +
+ + + rawsubtract;subtraction + RAWSUBTRACT function + +
+

RAWSUBTRACT

+ Subtracts a set of numbers and gives the result without eliminating small roundoff errors. +
+ + RAWSUBTRACT(Minuend; Subtrahend 1[; Subtrahend 2][; … ;[ Subtrahend 254]]) + Minuend is a number or a reference to a cell containing a number. + Subtrahend 1[; Subtrahend 2][; ... ;[ Subtrahend 254]] are numbers or references to cells containing numbers. + The function should be called with at least two parameters. + RAWSUBTRACT() processes arguments from left to right. For example, RAWSUBTRACT(1;2;3;4) calculates 1-2-3-4 or ((1-2)-3)-4 in "natural" order. + + =RAWSUBTRACT(0.987654321098765, 0.9876543210987) returns 6.53921361504217E-14 + =RAWSUBTRACT(0.987654321098765) returns Err:511 (Missing variable) because RAWSUBTRACT requires a minimum of two numbers. + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.RAWSUBTRACT +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82119a3df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + REGEX Function + /text/scalc/01/func_regex.xhp + + + +
+ + + REGEX function + regular expressions;extracting in spreadsheets + regular expressions;REGEX function + +

REGEX

+ Matches and extracts or optionally replaces text using regular expressions. +
+ + REGEX( Text ; Expression [ ; [ Replacement ] [ ; Flags|Occurrence ] ] ) + Text: A text or reference to a cell where the regular expression is to be applied. + Expression: A text representing the regular expression, using ICU regular expressions. If there is no match and Replacement is not given, #N/A is returned. + Replacement: Optional. The replacement text and references to capture groups. If there is no match, Text is returned unmodified. + Flags: Optional. "g" replaces all matches of Expression in Text, not extracted. If there is no match, Text is returned unmodified. + Occurrence: Optional. Number to indicate which match of Expression in Text is to be extracted or replaced. If there is no match and Replacement is not given, #N/A is returned. If there is no match and Replacement is given, Text is returned unmodified. If Occurrence is 0, Text is returned unmodified. + + =REGEX("123456ABCDEF";"[:digit:]";"Z") returns "Z23456ABCDEF", where the first match of a digit is replaced by "Z". + =REGEX("123456ABCDEF";"[:digit:]";"Z";"g") returns "ZZZZZZABCDEF", where all digits were replaced by "Z". + =REGEX("123456ABCDEF";"[126]";"";"g") returns "345ABCDEF", where any occurrence of "1", "2" or "6" is replaced by the empty string, thus deleted. + =REGEX("axbxcxd";".x";;2) returns "bx", the second match of ".x". + =REGEX("axbxcxd";"(.)x";"$1y";2) returns "axbycxd", the second match of "(.)x" (i.e. "bx") replaced with the captured group of one character (i.e. "b") followed by "y". + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.REGEX +
+ List of regular expressions + ICU regular expressions +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a2e85b72c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + REPLACEB Function + /text/scalc/01/func_replaceb.xhp + + + +
+ + + REPLACEB Function + replace text;REPLACEB Function + +

REPLACEB

+ Returns text where an old text is replaced with a new text, using byte positions. +
+ + + REPLACEB( Text ; Position ; Length ; NewText ) + Text: A text expression or reference to a cell containing a text expression in which the bytes are to be replaced. + Position: the byte position from which text is to be replaced. + Length: the number of bytes to be replaced. + NewText: the text to be inserted. + + + =REPLACEB("ᄩᄔᄕᄜᄝᄞᄠᄢᄣᄫᄬᄭᄮᄯᄲᄶ";4;1;"ab") returns "ᄩ abᄕᄜᄝᄞᄠᄢᄣᄫᄬᄭᄮᄯᄲᄶ" . + + Refer to the REPLACEB wiki page for more details about this function. + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4600ab3fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + ROMAN Function + /text/scalc/01/func_roman.xhp + + + +
+ + + ROMAN function + text functions;convert to roman numbers + +

ROMAN

+ Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. A simplification mode can be specified in the range from 0 to 4. +
+ + ROMAN(Number [; Mode]) + Number: the number that is to be converted into a Roman numeral. + Mode: optional value ranging between 0 to 4 that indicates the degree of simplification to be used in the conversion. The higher the value, the greater is the simplification of the Roman number. + + =ROMAN(999) returns "CMXCIX" (uses simplification mode equal to zero, which is the default). + =ROMAN(999;0) returns "CMXCIX". + =ROMAN(999;1) returns "LMVLIV". + =ROMAN(999;2) returns "XMIX". + =ROMAN(999;3) returns "VMIV". + =ROMAN(999;4) returns "IM". + =ROMAN(0) returns "" (empty text). + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfe551627 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + ROUNDDOWN function + /text/scalc/01/func_rounddown.xhp + + + + + + ROUNDDOWN function + numbers;rounding down + + +

ROUNDDOWN function

+
+ Rounds down a number while keeping a specified number of decimal digits. +
+ This function is equivalent to the TRUNC function. + + + + ROUNDDOWN(Number [; Count]) + +
+ Number: The number to be rounded down. + Count: Optional parameter that defines the number of decimal places to be kept. The default value is 0 (zero). + Use negative values for Count to round the integer part of the original Number. For example, -1 will round down the first integer number before the decimal separator, -2 will round down the two integer numbers before the decimal separator, and so forth. +
+ In %PRODUCTNAME, the Count parameter is optional, whereas in Microsoft Excel this parameter is mandatory. When an ODS file contains a call to ROUNDDOWN without the Count parameter and the file is exported to XLS or XLSX formats, the missing argument will automatically be added with value zero to maintain compatibility. + + =ROUNDDOWN(21.89) returns 21. Note that this example uses the default value for Count which is 0. + =ROUNDDOWN(103.37,1) returns 103.3. + =ROUNDDOWN(0.664,2) returns 0.66. + =ROUNDDOWN(214.2,-1) returns 210. Note the negative value for Count, which causes the first integer value before the decimal separator to be rounded towards zero. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e96d0a58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + ROUNDSIG Function + /text/scalc/01/func_roundsig.xhp + + + +
+ + + ROUNDSIG Function + +

ROUNDSIG

+ Returns a number rounded to a specified number of significant decimal digits of its normalized floating point notation. +
+ + ROUNDSIG( Value; Digits ) + Value: the number to be rounded. + Digits: the number of decimal places to round. + + Digits must be an integer greater than 0. + + + + =ROUNDSIG(123.456789; 5) returns 123.46. + =ROUNDSIG(0.000123456789; 5) returns 0.00012346 + =ROUNDSIG(123456789012345; 2) returns 1.2E14 + =ROUNDSIG(123456789; 4) returns 123500000 or 123.5E6 + + + + ORG.LIBREOFFICE.ROUNDSIG +
+ See also ROUND, MROUND, ROUNDUP, ROUNDDOWN. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41262c571 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + SEARCHB Function + /text/scalc/01/func_searchb.xhp + + + +
+ + + SEARCHB Function + search text;SEARCHB Function + +

SEARCHB

+ Returns the starting position of a given text, using byte positions (not case sensitive). +
+ + + SEARCHB(Find Text; Text [; Position]) + Find Text: The text or text expression to be found. + Text: the text in which the search is to be made. + Position: The position in the text where the search starts. + + + =SEARCHB("ᄫᄬ";"ᄩᄔᄕᄜᄝᄞᄠgᄢᄣᄫᄬᄭᄮᄯᄲᄶ";17) returns 20. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0baee1eed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +SECOND +/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp + + + +SECOND function + +

SECOND +

+Returns the second for the given time value. The second is given as an integer between 0 and 59. + + +SECOND(Number) + +Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the second is to be returned. + + +=SECOND(NOW()) returns the current second + +=SECOND(C4) returns 17 if contents of C4 = 12:20:17. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a9cf51ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + SKEWP function + /text/scalc/01/func_skewp.xhp + + + +
+ + + skewness;population + SKEWP function + +

SKEWP

+Calculates the skewness of a distribution using the population of a random variable. + + + +SKEWP() + +The parameters should specify at least three values. + + + +SKEWP(2;3;1;6;8;5) returns 0.2329985562 +SKEWP(A1:A6) returns 0.2329985562, when the range A1:A6 contains {2;3;1;6;8;5} +
+
+SKEW +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04003fb75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + SUM Function + /text/scalc/01/func_sum.xhp + + + +
+ + + SUM function + adding;numbers in cell ranges + +

SUM

+ Adds a set of numbers. +
+ + + SUM() + + + + =SUM(2;3;4) returns 9. + =SUM(A1;A3;B5) calculates the sum of the three cells. + =SUM(A1:E10) calculates the sum of all cells in the A1 to E10 cell range. + A formula such as =SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40) may be entered as an array formula by pressing the Shift+Command+Ctrl+Enter keys instead of simply pressing the Enter key to finish entering the formula. The formula will then be shown in the Formula bar enclosed in braces and operates by multiplying corresponding elements of the arrays together and returning their sum. + Refer to the SUM wiki page for more details about this function. + +
+ + , + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..924fa85b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + SUMIFS function + /text/scalc/01/func_sumifs.xhp + + + + +
+ + + SUMIFS function + sum;satisfying conditions + +

SUMIFS

+Returns the sum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges. +
+ + +SUMIFS() + +Func_Range – required argument. It is a range of cells, a name of a named range or a label of a column or a row containing values for calculating the sum. + + + + + + + + + +

Simple usage

+=SUMIFS(B2:B6;B2:B6;">=20") +Calculates the sum of values of the range B2:B6 that are greater than or equal to 20. Returns 75, because the fifth row does not meet the criterion. +=SUMIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">=20";C2:C6;">70") +Calculates the sum of values of the range C2:C6 that are greater than 70 and correspond to cells of the B2:B6 range with values greater than or equal to 20. Returns 275, because the second and the fifth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +

Using regular expressions and nested functions

+=SUMIFS(C2:C6;B2:B6;">"&MIN(B2:B6);B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the sum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all values of the range B2:B6 except its minimum and maximum. Returns 255, because the third and the fifth rows do not meet at least one criterion. +=SUMIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;"pen.*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +Calculates the sum of values of the range C2:C6 that correspond to all cells of the A2:A6 range starting with "pen" and to all cells of the B2:B6 range except its maximum. Returns 65, because only second row meets all criteria. +

Reference to a cell as a criterion

+If you need to change a criterion easily, you may want to specify it in a separate cell and use a reference to this cell in the condition of the SUMIFS function. For example, the above function can be rewritten as follows: +=SUMIFS(C2:C6;A2:A6;E2&".*";B2:B6;"<"&MAX(B2:B6)) +If E2 = pen, the function returns 65, because the link to the cell is substituted with its content. + +
+ +, + + + +, +, +, +, + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18a7e65b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + SWITCH function + /text/scalc/01/func_switch.xhp + + + +
+ + + SWITCH function + +

SWITCH

+ SWITCH compares expression with value1 to valuen and returns the result belonging to the first value that equals expression. If there is no match and default_result is given, that will be returned. +
+ + + SWITCH(expression; value1; result1[; value2; result2][; ... ; [value127; result127][; default_result]]) + If you choose not to specify a default result, 127 value / result pairs may be entered as parameters. If you choose to include a default result at the end of the list of parameters, then only 126 value / result pairs may be entered. + expression is a text, numeric, logical or date input or reference to a cell. + value1, value2, ... is any value or reference to a cell. Each value must have a result given. + result1, result2, ... is any value or reference to a cell. + default_result: any value or reference to a cell that is returned when there is no match. + If no value equals expression and no default result is given, a #N/A error is returned. + + =SWITCH(MONTH(A3),1,"January",2,"February",3,"March","No match") returns "January" when A3 contains a date in January, "February" when A3 contains a date in February , etc... + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.SWITCH +
+ + IF +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4111c925 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + TEXTJOIN function + /text/scalc/01/func_textjoin.xhp + + + +
+ + + TEXTJOIN function + +

TEXTJOIN

+ Concatenates one or more strings, and uses delimiters between them. +
+ + TEXTJOIN( delimiter, skip_empty, String 1[; String 2][; … ;[String 253]] ) + delimiter is a text string and can be a range. + skip_empty is a logical argument. When set to FALSE or 0, empty strings will be taken into account and this may lead to adjacent delimiters in the returned string. When set to any other value (e.g. TRUE or 1), empty strings will be ignored. + String 1[; String 2][; … ;[String 253]] are strings, references to cells or to cell ranges of strings. + Ranges are traversed row by row (from top to bottom). + If delimiter is a range, the range need not be of the same size as the number of strings to be joined. + If there are more delimiters than strings to be joined, not all delimiters will be used. + If there are less delimiters than strings to be joined, the delimiters will be used again from the start. + + =TEXTJOIN(" "; 1; "Here"; "comes"; "the"; "sun") returns "Here comes the sun" with space character as delimiter and empty strings are ignored. + if A1:B2 contains "Here", "comes", "the", "sun" respectively, =TEXTJOIN("-";1;A1:B2) returns "Here-comes-the-sun" with dash character as delimiter and empty strings are ignored. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.TEXTJOIN +
+ + CONCATENATE +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1aac1737c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +TIME +/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp + + + +TIME function + +

TIME +

+TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds. This function can be used to convert a time based on these three elements to a decimal time value. + + +TIME(Hour; Minute; Second) +Use an integer to set the Hour. +Use an integer to set the Minute. +Use an integer to set the Second. + + +=TIME(0;0;0) returns 00:00:00 + +=TIME(4;20;4) returns 04:20:04 +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87bd8da08 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + TIMEVALUE + /text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp + + + + + TIMEVALUE function + + +

TIMEVALUE

+ TIMEVALUE returns the internal time number from a text enclosed by quotes and which may show a possible time entry format. + + The internal number indicated as a decimal is the result of the date system used under $[officename] to calculate date entries. + If the text string also includes a year, month, or day, TIMEVALUE only returns the fractional part of the conversion. + + TIMEVALUE("Text") + Text is a valid time expression and must be entered in quotation marks. + + =TIMEVALUE("4PM") returns 0.67. When formatting in time format HH:MM:SS, you then get 16:00:00. + =TIMEVALUE("24:00") returns 0. If you use the HH:MM:SS time format, the value is 00:00:00. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4214238d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +TODAY +/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp + + + +TODAY function + +

TODAY +

+Returns the current computer system date. The value is updated when you reopen the document or modify the values of the document. + + + +TODAY() + TODAY is a function without arguments. + + +TODAY() returns the current computer system date. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22b58a278 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + TRUNC function + /text/scalc/01/func_trunc.xhp + + + + + + TRUNC function + decimal places;cutting off + numbers;truncate + + +

TRUNC function

+
+ Truncates a number while keeping a specified number of decimal digits. +
+ This function is equivalent to the ROUNDDOWN function. +
+ The rounding method used by this function is known as rounding towards zero. The resulting number will always be smaller than or equal to the original number. +
+ + + TRUNC(Number [; Count]) + +
+ Number: The number to be truncated. + Count: Optional parameter that defines the number of decimal places to be kept. The default value is 0 (zero). + Use negative values for Count to round the integer part of the original Number. For example, -1 will round down the first integer number before the decimal separator, -2 will round down the two integer numbers before the decimal separator, and so forth. +
+ + =TRUNC(21.89) returns 21. Note that this example uses the default value for Count which is 0. + =TRUNC(103.37,1) returns 103.3. + =TRUNC(0.664,2) returns 0.66. + =TRUNC(214.2,-1) returns 210. Note the negative value for Count, which causes the first integer value before the decimal separator to be rounded towards zero. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2293c1a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + VALUE Function + /text/scalc/01/func_value.xhp + + + +
+ + + VALUE function + text functions;convert text to numeric value + +

VALUE

+ Converts the string representation of a number to numeric form. If the supplied string is a valid date, time, or date-time, the corresponding date-time serial number is returned. +
+ + VALUE(Text) + Text: A string (in quotation marks), a number, or a reference to a cell containing one of those types, that contains the value to be converted. + If the Text argument is a string representing a date, time, currency or a numeric value with decimal and thousands separators, the string must comply with current locale settings. + + =VALUE("1234") returns the numeric value 1234. + =VALUE("+1,234.567") returns 1234.567 (considering en-US locale). Note that the "+" sign could have been omitted. + =VALUE("$100") returns 100 (considering en-US locale). Note that the currency prefix must match the current locale settings. + =VALUE("50%") returns 0.5. Note that the character "%" causes the numeric part to be divided by 100. + =VALUE("07/30/2021") returns 44407 (considering en-US locale) which is the date-time sequence number corresponding to the specified date. + =VALUE("09:20:25") returns 0.389178240740741 which is the date-time sequence number corresponding to the specified time value. + Refer to the VALUE wiki page for more details about this function. + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd1df5c87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + URI Functions + /text/scalc/01/func_webservice.xhp + + + +
+ + WEBSERVICE function + + +
+

WEBSERVICE

+ Get some web content from a URI. +
+ + WEBSERVICE(URI) + URI: URI text of the web service. + + =WEBSERVICE("wiki.documentfoundation.org/api.php?hidebots=1&days=7&limit=50&action=feedrecentchanges&feedformat=rss") + Returns the web page content of "https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/api.php?hidebots=1&days=7&limit=50&action=feedrecentchanges&feedformat=rss". + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.WEBSERVICE +
+
+ + + FILTERXML function + +
+

FILTERXML

+ Apply a XPath expression to a XML document. +
+ + FILTERXML(XML Document; XPath expression) + XML Document (required): String containing a valid XML stream. + XPath expression (required): String containing a valid XPath expression. + + =FILTERXML(WEBSERVICE("wiki.documentfoundation.org/api.php?hidebots=1&days=7&limit=50&action=feedrecentchanges&feedformat=rss");"//lastBuildDate") + Returns information on the last build date of the wiki. + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.FILTERXML +
+
+ + + ENCODEURL function + +
+

ENCODEURL

+ Returns a URL-encoded string. +
+ Use this function to transform text with symbols of national alphabets (for example accented characters, non-ASCII alphabets or Asian words) to a string of URL-standard symbols. + + ENCODEURL(Text) + Text: String to encode to a sequence of URL-standard symbols. + + If cell A1 contains the Cyrillic text "автомобиль", =ENCODEURL(A1) returns %D0%B0%D0%B2%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%BC%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C (the word "автомобиль" means car in Russian). + If cell B1 contains the text "車", =ENCODEURL(B1) returns %E8%BB%8A ("車" means car in Japanese). + + + + COM.MICROSOFT.ENCODEURL +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f000d5fe7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + WEEKDAY + /text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp + + + + + + + WEEKDAY function + + + + +

WEEKDAY

+Returns the day of the week for the given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 (Sunday) and 7 (Saturday) if no type or type=1 is specified. For other types, see the table below. + + +WEEKDAY(Number [; Type]) + Number, as a date value, is a decimal for which the weekday is to be returned. + Type is optional and determines the type of calculation. + + + + + Type + + + Weekday number returned + + + + + 1 or omitted + + + 1 (Sunday) through 7 (Saturday). For compatibility with Microsoft Excel. + + + + + 2 + + + 1 (Monday) through 7 (Sunday). + + + + + 3 + + + 0 (Monday) through 6 (Sunday) + + + + + 11 + + + 1 (Monday) through 7 (Sunday). + + + + + 12 + + + 1 (Tuesday) through 7 (Monday). + + + + + 13 + + + 1 (Wednesday) through 7 (Tuesday). + + + + + 14 + + + 1 (Thursday) through 7 (Wednesday). + + + + + 15 + + + 1 (Friday) through 7 (Thursday). + + + + + 16 + + + 1 (Saturday) through 7 (Friday). + + + + + 17 + + + 1 (Sunday) through 7 (Saturday). + + +
+ +These values apply only to the standard date format that you select under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options- %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + + + +=WEEKDAY("2000-06-14") returns 4 (the Type parameter is missing, therefore the standard count is used. The standard count starts with Sunday as day number 1. June 14, 2000 was a Wednesday and therefore day number 4). +=WEEKDAY("1996-07-24";2) returns 3 (the Type parameter is 2, therefore Monday is day number 1. July 24, 1996 was a Wednesday and therefore day number 3). +=WEEKDAY("1996-07-24";1) returns 4 (the Type parameter is 1, therefore Sunday is day number 1. July 24, 1996 was a Wednesday and therefore day number 4). +=WEEKDAY("2017-05-02";14) returns 6 (the Type parameter is 14, therefore Thursday is day number 1. May 2, 2017 was a Tuesday and therefore day number 6) +=WEEKDAY(NOW()) returns the number of the current day. +To obtain a function indicating whether a day in A1 is a business day, use the IF and WEEKDAY functions as follows:
IF(WEEKDAY(A1;2)<6;"Business day";"Weekend") +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99a089af3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + +WEEKNUM +/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum.xhp + + + +WEEKNUM function + +

WEEKNUM +

+WEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value as defined in ODF OpenFormula and compatible with other spreadsheet applications. +Supported are two week numbering systems: + + + + System + + + Description + + + + + System 1 + + + The week containing January 1 is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. + + + + + System 2 + + + The week containing the first Thursday of the year is the first week of the year, and is numbered week 1. That means that week number 1 of any year is the week that contains January 4th. ISO 8601 defines this system and that the week starts on Monday. + + +
+ + +WEEKNUM(Number [; Mode]) + +Number is the internal date number. + +Mode sets the start of the week and the week numbering system. This parameter is optional, if omitted the default value is 1. + + + + System + + + Mode + + + Day of the week + + + + + System 1 + + + 1 + + + Sunday + + + + + 2 + + + Monday + + + + + 11 + + + Monday + + + + + 12 + + + Tuesday + + + + + 13 + + + Wednesday + + + + + 14 + + + Thursday + + + + + 15 + + + Friday + + + + + 16 + + + Saturday + + + + + 17 + + + Sunday + + + + + System 2 + + + 21 + + + Monday (ISO 8601) + + + + + 150 + + + (ISO 8601, for interoperability with Gnumeric) + + +
+ + + +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 1. Using System 1, the week containing January 1 is the first week of the year. +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1995;1;1);21) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. +=WEEKNUM(DATE(1999;1;1);21) returns 53. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1999-01-04. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..28519d22a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +WEEKNUM_OOO +/text/scalc/01/func_weeknum_ooo.xhp + + + +WEEKNUM_OOO function + +

WEEKNUM_OOO +

+WEEKNUM_OOO calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value. +This function exists for interoperability with %PRODUCTNAME releases older than 5.1.0 and OpenOffice.org. It calculates week numbers for a week numbering system in that week number 1 is the week that contains the January 4th. This function does not provide interoperability with other spreadsheet applications. For new documents use the WEEKNUM or ISOWEEKNUM function instead. + +WEEKNUM_OOO(Number; Mode) + +Number is the internal date number. + +Mode sets the start of the week and the calculation type. +1 = Sunday +2 = Monday (ISO 8601) +any other value = Monday (ISO 8601) + + + +=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);1) returns 1 +=WEEKNUM_OOO(DATE(1995;1;1);2) returns 52. Week 1 starts on Monday, 1995-01-02. + + + +ORG.LIBREOFFICE.WEEKNUM_OOO +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57f838d9a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 +/text/scalc/01/func_weeknumadd.xhp + + + +WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 function + +

WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 +

+The result indicates the number of the calendar week for a date. +The WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 function is designed to calculate week numbers exactly as Microsoft Excel 2003 did. Use the WEEKNUM function for ODF OpenFormula and Excel 2010 compatibility, or ISOWEEKNUM function when you just need ISO 8601 week numbers. In releases prior to $[officename] 5.1 WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003 was named WEEKNUM_ADD. + +WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003(Date; ReturnType) + +Date is the date within the calendar week. + +ReturnType is 1 for week beginning on a Sunday, 2 for week beginning on a Monday. + +In which week number does 2001-12-24 fall? + +=WEEKNUM_EXCEL2003(DATE(2001;12;24);1) returns 52. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f41a62d87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + WORKDAY.INTL + /text/scalc/01/func_workday.intl.xhp + + + +
+ + WORKDAY.INTL function + + + + +

WORKDAY.INTL

+Returns the date calculated from a start date with a specific number of work days, before or after the start date. The calculation can include week-ends and holidays as non-working days. +
+ +WORKDAY.INTL(StartDate; Days [; Weekend [; Holidays]]) +StartDate: is the date from when the calculation is carried out. +Days is the number of workdays. Positive value for a result after the start date, negative value for a result before the start date. + + + + +What date comes 20 workdays after December 13, 2016? Enter the start date in C3 and the number of workdays in D3. +The weekend parameter (number) may be left blank or defined as 1 for default weekend (non-working days) – Saturday and Sunday. +Cells F3 to J3 contain five (5) holidays for Christmas and New Year in date format: December 24, 2016; December 25, 2016; December 26, 2016; December 31, 2016; and January 1, 2017. +=WORKDAY.INTL(C3;D3;;F3:J3) returns January 11, 2017 in the result cell, say D6 (use date format for the cell). +To define Friday and Saturday as weekend days, use the weekend parameter 7. +=WORKDAY.INTL(C3;D3;7;F3:J3) returns January 15, 2017 with weekend parameter 7. +To define Sunday only the weekend day, use the weekend parameter 11. +=WORKDAY.INTL(C3;D3;11;F3:J3) returns January 9, 2017. +Alternatively, use the weekend string "0000001" for Sunday only weekend. +=WORKDAY.INTL(C3;D3;"0000001";F3:J3) returns January 9, 2017. +The function can be used without the two optional parameters – Weekday and Holidays – by leaving them out: +=WORKDAY.INTL(C3;D3) gives the result: January 10, 2017. + + + +COM.MICROSOFT.WORKDAY.INTL +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95b1f9510 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +WORKDAY +/text/scalc/01/func_workday.xhp + + + +WORKDAY function + + +

WORKDAY

+ The result is a date number that can be formatted as a date. You then see the date of a day that is a certain number of workdays away from the start date. + + +WORKDAY(StartDate; Days [; Holidays]) + +StartDate is the date from when the calculation is carried out. If the start date is a workday, the day is included in the calculation. + +Days is the number of workdays. Positive value for a result after the start date, negative value for a result before the start date. + +Holidays is a list of optional holidays. These are non-working days. Enter a cell range in which the holidays are listed individually. + + + + +What date came 17 workdays after 1 December 2001? Enter the start date "2001-12-01" in C3 and the number of workdays in D3. Cells F3 to J3 contain the following Christmas and New Year holidays: "2001-12-24", "2001-12-25", "2001-12-26", "2001-12-31", "2002-01-01". +=WORKDAY(C3;D3;F3:J3) returns 2001-12-28. Format the serial date number as a date, for example in the format YYYY-MM-DD.UFI: fixed #i30213# +
+ + + +Date functions +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2fe1b635 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +YEAR +/text/scalc/01/func_year.xhp + + + +YEAR function + +

YEAR +

+Returns the year as a number according to the internal calculation rules. + + +YEAR(Number) + +Number shows the internal date value for which the year is to be returned. + + +=YEAR(1) returns 1899 + +=YEAR(2) returns 1900 + +=YEAR(33333.33) returns 1991 +=YEAR(DATEVALUE('2010-09-28')) returns 2010. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..52cb40c5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + +YEARFRAC +/text/scalc/01/func_yearfrac.xhp + + + +YEARFRAC function + + +

YEARFRAC

+The result is the number of the years (including fractional part) between StartDate and EndDate. + + +YEARFRAC(StartDate; EndDate [; Basis]) + +StartDate and EndDate are two date values. +
+ +Basis (optional) is chosen from a list of options and indicates how the year is to be calculated. + + + +Basis + + +Calculation + + + + +0 or missing + + +US method (NASD), 12 months of 30 days each + + + + + 1 + + +Exact number of days in months, exact number of days in year + + + + + 2 + + +Exact number of days in month, year has 360 days + + + + + 3 + + +Exact number of days in month, year has 365 days + + + + + 4 + + +European method, 12 months of 30 days each + + +
+
+ + + +What fraction of the year 2008 lies between 2008-01-01 and 2008-07-01? +=YEARFRAC("2008-01-01"; "2008-07-01";0) returns 0.50. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..774ec4e0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + Live Data Stream + /text/scalc/01/live_data_stream.xhp + + + + + + + Data Stream;Live data stream + Data Stream;Streams + +
+

Live Data Stream

+ Create live data streams for spreadsheets. +
+
+ Choose Data – Streams +
+ + + Data streaming is the continuous flow of data generated by various sources. In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, data streams can be processed, stored, analyzed, and acted upon as it's generated in real-time. + Some real-life examples of streaming data include use cases in every industry, including real-time stock trades, up-to-the-minute retail inventory management, social media feeds, multiplayer game interactions, and ride-sharing apps. + +

Source stream

+

URL

+ URL of the source document in the local file system or internet. + +

Interpret stream data as

+ + + value1,value2,...,valueN, and fill into range: + + + address,value: + + +

Empty lines trigger UI refresh

+ +

When new data arrives

+ There are three features of this option: + + + Move existing data down: the existing data is moved down in index and the empty space is filled by arriving data. In short, we deal in fix range of indexes. + + + Move the range down: the arriving data is appended at the end of existing data and range of indexes to be processed is shifted. + + + Overwrite existing data: the arriving data overrides the existing data. + + +

Maximal Amount of Rows

+ Limit the maximum numbers of rows to a specified value or leave undefined, but limited to the %PRODUCTNAME Calc row limit. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..296a3fd1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Recalculate hard + /text/scalc/01/recalculate_hard.xhp + + + + + + calculate;recalculate hard + formulas;recalculate hard + calculate;force recalculation + formulas;force recalculation + non volatile functions;force recalculation + cell contents;force recalculation + +
+

Recalculate Hard

+ Recalculates all formulas in the document, including Add-In functions and non-volatile functions. +
+
+ +
+The Recalculate Hard command forces recalculation of all formula cells of the spreadsheet document, including explicit non-volatile functions, even if no new input event exist. Examples of explicit non-volatile functions are RAND.NV and RANDBETWEEN.NV. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c93c059d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Sharing Spreadsheets + /text/scalc/01/shared_spreadsheet.xhp + + + + + share spreadsheet + spreadsheet;collaboration + spreadsheet;share + +
+ +

Share Spreadsheet

+ Sharing a spreadsheet allows several users to open the same file for editing at the same time. +
+
+ +
+ The spreadsheet needs to be on a shared drive, server, website, or similar. Some conditions must be met on operating systems with user permission management: + + + The shared file needs to reside in a location which is accessible by all collaborators. + + + The file permissions for both the document and the corresponding lock file need to be set so that all collaborators can create, delete, and change the files. + + + In order to correctly identify the changes, each collaborator should enter their name in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data on the Menu bar. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1aa2fa6a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + Solver + /text/scalc/01/solver.xhp + + + + + +
+ + goal seeking;solver + what if operations;solver + back-solving + solver + mathematical programming;solver for Calc + mathematical optimization;solver for Calc + operations research;solver for Calc + + + + + + +

Solver

+Opens the Solver dialog. A solver allows you to solve mathematical problems with multiple unknown variables and a set of constraints on the variables by goal-seeking methods. +
+ +
+ +
+target cell +

Solver settings

+ +Solver settings are not saved to the file by %PRODUCTNAME Calc. Closing and reopening the file will reset the solver dialog to default settings. + + +

Target Cell

+Enter or click the cell reference of the target cell. This field takes the address of the cell whose value is to be optimized. + +

Optimize results to

+ + + + + + + Maximum: Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell. + + + Minimum: Try to solve the equation for a minimum value of the target cell. + + + Value of: Try to solve the equation to approach a given value of the target cell. + Enter the value or a cell reference in the text field. + + + +

By Changing Cells

+ +Enter the cell range that can be changed. These are the variables of the equations. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Limiting Conditions

+Add the set of constraints for the mathematical problem. Each constraint is represented by a cell reference (a variable), an operator, and a value. + + + Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable. + Click the Shrink button to shrink or restore the dialog. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box. + + + Operator: Select an operator from the list. Use Binary operator to restrict your variable to 0 or 1. Use the Integer operator to restrict your variable to take only integer values (no decimal part). + + + Value: Enter a value or a cell reference. This field is ignored when the operator is Binary or Integer. + + + Remove button: Click to remove the row from the list. Any rows from below this row move up. + + +You can set multiple conditions for a variable. For example, a variable in cell A1 that must be an integer less than 10. In that case, set two limiting conditions for A1. + +

Options

+ + +Opens the Solver Options dialog. +The Solver Options dialog let you select the different solver algorithms for either linear and non-linear problems and set their solving parameters. +

Solve

+solve button + +Click to solve the problem with the current settings. The dialog settings are retained until you close the current document. + +

To solve equations with the solver

+The goal of the solver process is to find those variable values of an equation that result in an optimized value in the target cell, also named the "objective". You can choose whether the value in the target cell should be a maximum, a minimum, or approaching a given value. +The initial variable values are inserted in a rectangular cell range that you enter in the By changing cells box. +You can define a series of limiting conditions that set constraints for some cells. For example, you can set the constraint that one of the variables or cells must not be bigger than another variable, or not bigger than a given value. You can also define the constraint that one or more variables must be integers (values without decimals), or binary values (where only 0 and 1 are allowed). +

Using Non-Linear solvers

+Regardless whether you use DEPS or SCO, you start by going to Tools - Solver and set the Cell to be optimized, the direction to go (minimization, maximization) and the cells to be modified to reach the goal. Then you go to the Options and specify the solver to be used and if necessary adjust the according parameters. +There is also a list of constraints you can use to restrict the possible range of solutions or to penalize certain conditions. However, in case of the evolutionary solvers DEPS and SCO, these constraints are also used to specify bounds on the variables of the problem. Due to the random nature of the algorithms, it is highly recommended to do so and give upper (and in case "Assume Non-Negative Variables" is turned off also lower) bounds for all variables. They don't have to be near the actual solution (which is probably unknown) but should give a rough indication of the expected size (0 ≤ var ≤ 1 or maybe -1000000 ≤ var ≤ 1000000). +Bounds are specified by selecting one or more variables (as range) on the left side and entering a numerical value (not a cell or a formula) on the right side. That way you can also choose one or more variables to be Integer or Binary only. +
+ + + Wiki page on solvers and theirs algorithms +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4e2291d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Solver Options + /text/scalc/01/solver_options.xhp + + + + + + + + + solver for Calc;options + +

Solver Options

+ +Use the Options dialog to configure the solver engine. + +
+ +
+ +Click OK to accept the changes and to go back to the Solver dialog. +

Solver engine

+ +Select a solver engine. The listbox is disabled if only one solver engine is installed. +You can install more solver engines as extensions, if available. Open Tools - Extension Manager and browse to the Extensions web site to search for extensions. + +

Settings

+Configure the current solver. In the Settings box, check all settings that you want to use for the current goal seeking operation. If the current option offers different values, the Edit button is enabled. Click Edit to open a dialog where you can change the value. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit

+ +If the current entry in the Settings listbox allows you to edit a value, you can click the Edit button. A dialog opens where you can change the value. +

Edit settings spin box

+ + + + +Enter or change the value of the selected setting. +
+ + + Wiki page on non-linear solvers and theirs algorithms +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..486212284 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,386 @@ + + + + + + + + Options + /text/scalc/01/solver_options_algo.xhp + + + + + Solver for Nonlinear Problems;Options + solver for Calc; DEPS evolutionary algorithm + solver for Calc; SCO evolutionary algorithm + solver for Calc; linear solver + solver for Calc; CoinMP linear solver + solver for Calc; swarm non-linear solver + + +

Solver Algorithms Options

+ +

DEPS Evolutionary Algorithm

+ DEPS consists of two independent algorithms: Differential Evolution and Particle Swarm Optimization. Both are especially suited for numerical problems, such as nonlinear optimization, and are complementary to each other in that they even out their others shortcomings. + + + + + + + + + + + + Agent Switch Rate + + + Specifies the probability for an individual to choose the Differential Evolution strategy. + + + + + + + + + + + + + DE: Crossover Probability + + + Defines the probability of the individual being combined with the globally best point. If crossover is not used, the point is assembled from the own memory of the individual. + + + + + DE: Scaling Factor + + + During crossover, the scaling factor decides about the “speed” of movement. + + + + + Learning Cycles + + + Defines the number of iterations, the algorithm should take. In each iteration, all individuals make a guess on the best solution and share their knowledge. + + + + + PS: Cognitive Constant + + + Sets the importance of the own memory (in particular the best reached point so far). + + + + + PS: Constriction Coefficient + + + Defines the speed at which the particles/individuals move towards each other. + + + + + PS: Mutation Probability + + + Defines the probability, that instead of moving a component of the particle towards the best point, it randomly chooses a new value from the valid range for that variable. + + + + + PS: Social Constant + + + Sets the importance of the global best point between all particles/individuals. + + + + + Show Enhanced Solver Status + + + If enabled, an additional dialog is shown during the solving process which gives information about the current progress, the level of stagnation, the currently best known solution as well as the possibility, to stop or resume the solver. + + + + + Size of Swarm + + + Defines the number of individuals to participate in the learning process. Each individual finds its own solutions and contributes to the overall knowledge. + + + + + Stagnation Limit + + + If this number of individuals found solutions within a close range, the iteration is stopped and the best of these values is chosen as optimal. + + + + + Stagnation Tolerance + + + Defines in what range solutions are considered “similar”. + + + + + Use ACR Comparator + + +
+ If disabled (default), the BCH Comparator is used. It compares two individuals by first looking at their constraint violations and only if those are equal, it measures their current solution. + If enabled, the ACR Comparator is used. It compares two individuals dependent on the current iteration and measures their goodness with knowledge about the libraries worst known solutions (in regard to their constraint violations). +
+ + + + + Use Random Starting Point + + + If enabled, the library is simply filled up with randomly chosen points. + If disabled, the currently present values (as given by the user) are inserted in the library as reference point. + + + + + Variable Bounds Guessing + + + If enabled (default), the algorithm tries to find variable bounds by looking at the starting values. + + + + + Variable Bounds Threshold + + + When guessing variable bounds, this threshold specifies, how the initial values are shifted to build the bounds. For an example how these values are calculated, please refer to the Manual in the Wiki. + + +
+ +

SCO Evolutionary Algorithm

+ Social Cognitive Optimization takes into account the human behavior of learning and sharing information. Each individual has access to a common library with knowledge shared between all individuals. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Learning Cycles + + + Defines the number of iterations, the algorithm should take. In each iteration, all individuals make a guess on the best solution and share their knowledge. + + + + + + + + + + + + + Size of Library + + + Defines the amount of information to store in the public library. Each individual stores knowledge there and asks for information. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

%PRODUCTNAME Linear Solver and CoinMP Linear solver

+ + + + Setting + + + Description + + + + + Assume variables as integers + + + Mark to force variables to be integers only. + + + + + Assume variables as non negative + + + Mark to force variables to be positive only. + + + + + Epsilon level + + + Epsilon level. Valid values are in range 0 (very tight) to 3 (very loose). Epsilon is the tolerance for rounding values to zero. + + + + + Limit branch-and-bound depth + + + Specifies the maximum branch-and-bound depth. A positive value means that the depth is absolute. A negative value means a relative branch-and-bound depth limit. + + + + + Solver time limit + + + Sets the maximum time for the algorithm to converge to a solution. + + +
+

%PRODUCTNAME Swarm Non-Linear Solver (Experimental)

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Swarm algorithm + + + Set the swarm algorithm. 0 for differential evolution and 1 for particle swarm optimization. Default is 0. + + +
+
+ + + Wiki page on non-linear solvers and theirs algorithms + lp_solve reference guide in sourceforge.net +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70d9c1b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Sparklines + /text/scalc/01/sparklines.xhp + + + + + + + +sparklines + +
+

Sparklines

+ Sparklines are small data charts displayed inside a cell. +
+ Sparklines are defined for one cell, but multiple sparklines can be joined together into a group. The group shares the same properties for rendering the sparkline. The unique data that is defined only for one sparkline is the data range, that a sparkline will use for rendering. +
+ Choose Insert – Sparklines +
+

Data

+ Input range: enter the cell range of the data. Use the shrink button to select the data range with the mouse. + Output range: select the cell range to receive the sparkline. Use the shrink button to select the cell range with the mouse. +

Properties

+ Type: select the sparkline type in the drop-down list. Choices are: + + + Line: draws a line between data values. + + + Column: draws a bar for each data value. + + + Stacked: also known as win/loss. Displays equally sized bars indicating positive and negative values. + + + Line width: enter the line width number manually or use the spin button. + Display empty cells as: choices are available in the drop-down list: + + + Gap: the missing data is not displayed. The line type discontinues in the gap and the column is not displayed. + + + Zero: the missing data is displayed as value zero. + + + Span: for line type only, draws a continuous line connecting the previous value to the next value. + + + Display hidden: check to show all columns or stacks in the range even when the data is in hidden cells. If unchecked, the hidden data is ignored. + Right-to-left: check to display the sparklines reverse order of the data. +

Colors

+ Series: select the main color for the sparklines. + Negative points: check and select the color for negative points. + High points: check and select the color for high points. + Low points: check and select the color for low points. + Marker: check and select the color for data points (line type only). + First point: check and select the color for first point. + Last point: check and select the color for last point. + +

Axes

+ Display X axis: check to show the X axis for sparklines. + Vertical minimum, Vertical maximum: check to set the minimum (maximum) value for the Y axis. Select one of following: + + + Individual: sets automatically the minimum (maximum) value for each sparkline based on the sparkline data range values. + + + Group: sets the minimum (maximum) value based on the lower and higher values found in the group of sparklines. + + + Custom: enter the minimum (maximum) value for the sparkline group. Enter the minimum (maximum) values or use the spin buttons. + + +
+ Developer blog post on sparklines +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7556d0d10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1337 @@ + + + + + + + Data + /text/scalc/01/stat_data.xhp + + + + + +
+

Data

+ Input Range: The reference of the range of the data to analyze. + Results to: The reference of the top left cell of the range where the results will be displayed. +
+ +
+

Grouped By

+ Select whether the input data has columns or rows layout. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + The following data will be used as example + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + Maths + + + Physics + + + Biology + + + + + 2 + + + 47 + + + 67 + + + 33 + + + + + 3 + + + 36 + + + 68 + + + 42 + + + + + 4 + + + 40 + + + 65 + + + 44 + + + + + 5 + + + 39 + + + 64 + + + 60 + + + + + 6 + + + + + 38 + + + 43 + + + + + 7 + + + 47 + + + 84 + + + 62 + + + + + 8 + + + 29 + + + 80 + + + 51 + + + + + 9 + + + 27 + + + 49 + + + 40 + + + + + 10 + + + 57 + + + 49 + + + 12 + + + + + 11 + + + 56 + + + 33 + + + 60 + + + + + 12 + + + 57 + + + + + + + + + 13 + + + 26 + + + + + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + The following table has two time series, one representing an impulse function at time t=0 and the other an impulse function at time t=2. + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + 1 + + + 0 + + + + + 2 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 3 + + + 0 + + + 1 + + + + + 4 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 5 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 6 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 7 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 8 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 9 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 10 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 11 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 12 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + 13 + + + 0 + + + 0 + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + The following table has two data sets. + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + 28 + + + 19 + + + + + 2 + + + 26 + + + 13 + + + + + 3 + + + 31 + + + 12 + + + + + 4 + + + 23 + + + 5 + + + + + 5 + + + 20 + + + 34 + + + + + 6 + + + 27 + + + 31 + + + + + 7 + + + 28 + + + 31 + + + + + 8 + + + 14 + + + 12 + + + + + 9 + + + 4 + + + 24 + + + + + 10 + + + 0 + + + 23 + + + + + 11 + + + 2 + + + 19 + + + + + 12 + + + 8 + + + 10 + + + + + 13 + + + 9 + + + 33 + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + The following table has samples of a physical phenomenon taken in 1 second interval. + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 1 + + + Time + + + Measurement + + + + + 2 + + + 1 + + + 2.7 + + + + + 3 + + + 2 + + + 4.0 + + + + + 4 + + + 3 + + + 4.4 + + + + + 5 + + + 4 + + + 7.1 + + + + + 6 + + + 5 + + + 4.9 + + + + + 7 + + + 6 + + + 3.6 + + + + + 8 + + + 7 + + + 4.0 + + + + + 9 + + + 8 + + + 0.6 + + + + + 10 + + + 9 + + + 1.0 + + + + + 11 + + + 10 + + + 4.3 + + +
+
+ +
+ + + + Group By Columns + + + TRUE + + + + + Polar + + + FALSE + + + + + Inverse + + + FALSE + + + + + Formula + + + {=FOURIER(B6:C40,B1,B2,B3,0)} + + + + + Source Array + + + + + Transformed Array + + + + + Real + + + Imaginary + + + + + Real + + + Imaginary + + + + + 0.392555411592569 + + + 0 + + + + + 17.1775578743134 + + + 3.88635177703826E-015 + + + + + 1.20843701681219 + + + + 0 + + + + + 3.428868795359 + + + 2.37164790000189 + + + + + 0.851477676762644 + + + 0 + + + + + -6.80271615433369 + + + -15.1345439297576 + + + + + 1.78534651907738 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.605447356601 + + + -5.08653060378972 + + + + + 1.77946506138316 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.395847917447356 + + + -2.41926785527625 + + + + + 1.51890060220168 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.49410383304833 + + + -2.39148041275 + + + + + 1.04694666137238 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.87223579298981 + + + -1.14394086206797 + + + + + 0.83110083951399 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.5332458505929 + + + 0.678159168870983 + + + + + 1.23006228455127 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.450563708411459 + + + 0.22911248792634 + + + + + 0.133409796396031 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.545106616940358 + + + 0.411028927740438 + + + + + 0.130471655802496 + + + 0 + + + + + 2.22685996425193 + + + -2.43092236748302 + + + + + 0.386478761838145 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.61522859107175 + + + -2.41682657284899 + + + + + -0.703398287742919 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.30245078290168 + + + 1.45443785733126 + + + + + -0.899115309693977 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.57930628561185 + + + -1.33862736591677 + + + + + -0.124045510064504 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.07572227365276 + + + -0.921557968003809 + + + + + -0.513553513012611 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.0557824179238028 + + + -1.81336029451831 + + + + + -0.613559196487517 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.577666040004067 + + + 1.38887243891951 + + + + + 0.32607259491689 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.826878282157686 + + + -0.186591000796403 + + + + + 0.0316297814625926 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.826878282157715 + + + 0.186591000796416 + + + + + 0.52298725899815 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.577666040004051 + + + -1.38887243891954 + + + + + 0.436798031445888 + + + 0 + + + + + -0.0557824179237846 + + + 1.81336029451832 + + + + + 0.846212627320418 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.07572227365276 + + + 0.921557968003802 + + + + + 0.913061096906024 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.57930628561187 + + + 1.33862736591678 + + + + + 1.2666287534781 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.3024507829017 + + + -1.45443785733125 + + + + + 1.6653650481107 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.61522859107176 + + + 2.416826572849 + + + + + 1.36582636202864 + + + 0 + + + + + 2.22685996425191 + + + 2.43092236748304 + + + + + 1.46722190894756 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.545106616940365 + + + -0.411028927740441 + + + + + 0.66120489728397 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.450563708411458 + + + -0.229112487926344 + + + + + 0.701534531762234 + + + 0 + + + + + 1.53324585059292 + + + -0.678159168870965 + + + + + 0.65869368245062 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.872235792989797 + + + 1.14394086206799 + + + + + 0.287522455580069 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.49410383304834 + + + 2.39148041275001 + + + + + -0.409911360506096 + + + 0 + + + + + 0.395847917447327 + + + 2.41926785527626 + + + + + -0.583168875679498 + + + 0 + + + + + -1.60544735660102 + + + 5.08653060378972 + + + + + -0.799684083650078 + + + 0 + + + + + -6.80271615433379 + + + 15.1345439297575 + + + + + -0.621417306845244 + + + 0 + + + + + 3.42886879535907 + + + -2.37164790000194 + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a81feab1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Data Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics.xhp + + + + +
+

Statistics

+Use the data statistics in Calc to perform complex data analysis +
+ +To work on a complex statistical or engineering analysis, you can save steps and time by using Calc Data Statistics. You provide the data and parameters for each analysis, and the set of tools uses the appropriate statistical or engineering functions to calculate and display the results in an output table. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8aed3da8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,271 @@ + + + + + + +ANOVA +/text/scalc/01/statistics_anova.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;analysis of variance +Analysis toolpack;ANOVA +analysis of variance;Analysis toolpack +ANOVA;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;analysis of variance +Data statistics;ANOVA + + + +
+

Analysis of Variance (ANOVA)

+Produces the analysis of variance (ANOVA) of a given data set +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) +
+ANOVA is the acronym for ANalysis Of VAriance. This tool produces the analysis of variance of a given data set +For more information on ANOVA, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + +

Type

+Select if the analysis is for a single factor or for two factor ANOVA. +

Parameters

+Alpha: the level of significance of the test. +Rows per sample: Define how many rows a sample has. + + + +The following table displays the results of the analysis of variance (ANOVA) of the sample data above. + + + +ANOVA - Single Factor + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Alpha + + +0.05 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Groups + + +Count + + +Sum + + +Mean + + +Variance + + + + + + +Column 1 + + +11 + + +461 + + +41.9090909091 + + +139.4909090909 + + + + + + +Column 2 + + +10 + + +597 + + +59.7 + + +287.1222222222 + + + + + + +Column 3 + + +10 + + +447 + + +44.7 + + +227.3444444444 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Source of Variation + + +SS + + +df + + +MS + + +F + + +P-value + + +F-critical + + + + +Between Groups + + +1876.5683284457 + + +2 + + +938.2841642229 + + +4.3604117704 + + +0.0224614952 + + +3.340385558 + + + + +Within Groups + + +6025.1090909091 + + +28 + + +215.1824675325 + + + + + + + + +Total + + +7901.6774193548 + + +30 + + + + + + + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43b1b5d5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + +Data Correlation in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_correlation.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;correlation +correlation;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;correlation + + + +
+

Correlation

+Calculates the correlation of two sets of numeric data. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Correlation +
+The correlation coefficient (a value between -1 and +1) means how strongly two variables are related to each other. You can use the CORREL function or the Data Statistics to find the correlation coefficient between two variables. +A correlation coefficient of +1 indicates a perfect positive correlation. +A correlation coefficient of -1 indicates a perfect negative correlation +For more information on statistical correlation, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + + +The following table displays the results of the correlation of the sample data above. + + + +Correlations + + +Column 1 + + +Column 2 + + +Column 3 + + + + +Column 1 + + +1 + + + + + + + + +Column 2 + + +-0.4029254917 + + +1 + + + + + + +Column 3 + + +-0.2107642836 + + +0.2309714048 + + +1 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2b4d1d96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Data Covariance in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_covariance.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;covariance +covariance;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;covariance + + + +
+

Covariance

+Calculates the covariance of two sets of numeric data. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Covariance +
+The covariance is a measure of how much two random variables change together. +For more information on statistical covariance, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + +The following table displays the results of the covariance of the sample data above. + + + +Covariances + + +Column 1 + + +Column 2 + + +Column 3 + + + + +Column 1 + + +126.8099173554 + + + + + + + + +Column 2 + + +-61.4444444444 + + +258.41 + + + + + + +Column 3 + + +-32 + + +53.11 + + +204.61 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d05d34e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ + + + + + + +Descriptive Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_descriptive.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;descriptive statistics +descriptive statistics;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;descriptive statistics + + + +
+

Descriptive Statistics

+Fill a table in the spreadsheet with the main statistical properties of the data set. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Descriptive Statistics +
+The Descriptive Statistics analysis tool generates a report of univariate statistics for data in the input range, providing information about the central tendency and variability of your data. +For more information on descriptive statistics, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + + +The following table displays the results of the descriptive statistics of the sample data above. + + + + + +Maths + + +Physics + + +Biology + + + + +Mean + + +41.9090909091 + + +59.7 + + +44.7 + + + + +Standard Error + + +3.5610380138 + + +5.3583786934 + + +4.7680650629 + + + + +Mode + + +47 + + +49 + + +60 + + + + +Median + + +40 + + +64.5 + + +43.5 + + + + +Variance + + +139.4909090909 + + +287.1222222222 + + +227.3444444444 + + + + +Standard Deviation + + +11.8106269559 + + +16.944681237 + + +15.0779456308 + + + + +Kurtosis + + +-1.4621677981 + + +-0.9415988746 + + +1.418052719 + + + + +Skewness + + +0.0152409533 + + +-0.2226426904 + + +-0.9766803373 + + + + +Range + + +31 + + +51 + + +50 + + + + +Minimum + + +26 + + +33 + + +12 + + + + +Maximum + + +57 + + +84 + + +62 + + + + +Sum + + +461 + + +597 + + +447 + + + + +Count + + +11 + + +10 + + +10 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ff6a3e1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ + + + + + + +Exponential Smoothing in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_exposmooth.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;exponential smoothing +exponential smoothing;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;exponential smoothing + + + +
+

Exponential Smoothing

+Results in a smoothed data series +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Exponential Smoothing +
+Exponential smoothing is a filtering technique that when applied to a data set, produces smoothed results. It is employed in many domains such as stock market, economics and in sampled measurements. +For more information on exponential smoothing, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Parameters

+Smoothing Factor: A parameter between 0 and 1 that represents the damping factor Alpha in the smoothing equation. +The resulting smoothing is below with smoothing factor as 0.5: + + + +Alpha + + + + + + +0.5 + + + + + + +Column 1 + + +Column 2 + + + + +1 + + +0 + + + + +1 + + +0 + + + + +0.5 + + +0 + + + + +0.25 + + +0.5 + + + + +0.125 + + +0.25 + + + + +0.0625 + + +0.125 + + + + +0.03125 + + +0.0625 + + + + +0.015625 + + +0.03125 + + + + +0.0078125 + + +0.015625 + + + + +0.00390625 + + +0.0078125 + + + + +0.001953125 + + +0.00390625 + + + + +0.0009765625 + + +0.001953125 + + + + +0.0004882813 + + +0.0009765625 + + + + +0.0002441406 + + +0.0004882813 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34d0b635d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,652 @@ + + + + + + + Fourier Analysis + /text/scalc/01/statistics_fourier.xhp + + + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;Fourier analysis +Fourier analysis;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;Fourier analysis + + +
+

Fourier Analysis

+ Produces the Fourier analysis of a data set by computing the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of an input array of complex numbers using a couple of Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithms. +
+
+ Choose Data - Statistics - Fourier Analysis +
+ For more information on Fourier analysis, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + + Input range has label: Mark when the first row or column of the input array is actually a label and not part of the data analysis. + Input Range is a 2 x N or N x 2 range representing an array of complex number to be transformed, where N is the length of the array. The array represents the real and imaginary parts of the data. + + +

Options:

+ Inverse: When checked, calculates the inverse Discrete Fourier Transform. + Polar: When checked, the results are in polar coordinates (magnitude, phase). + Minimum magnitude for polar form output (in dB): used only when output is in polar form. All frequency components with magnitude less than this value in decibels will be suppressed with a zero magnitude-phase entry. This is very useful when looking at the magnitude-phase spectrum of a signal because there is always some very tiny amount of rounding error when doing FFT algorithms and results in incorrect non-zero phase for non-existent frequencies. By providing a suitable value to this parameter, these non-existent frequency components can be suppressed. + + + + The source data for this example is the same of the FOURIER function page. + + + + Fourier Transform + + + + + Fourier Transform + + + + + Input data range : $B$6:$C$40 + + + + + Input data range : $B$6:$C$40 + + + + + Real + + + Imaginary + + + + + Magnitude + + + Phase + + + + + 17.1775578743134 + + + 3.88635177703826E-15 + + + + + 17.1775578743134 + + + 2.26245884628906E-16 + + + + + 3.428868795359 + + + 2.37164790000189 + + + + + 4.16915518748944 + + + 0.605113892937279 + + + + + -6.80271615433369 + + + -15.1345439297576 + + + + + 16.5931120359682 + + + -1.99322000923881 + + + + + -1.605447356601 + + + -5.08653060378972 + + + + + 5.33387802617444 + + + -1.87652762269615 + + + + + 0.395847917447356 + + + -2.41926785527625 + + + + + 2.45143886917874 + + + -1.40861048708919 + + + + + -1.49410383304833 + + + -2.39148041275 + + + + + 2.81984482347817 + + + -2.12922380028329 + + + + + 0.87223579298981 + + + -1.14394086206797 + + + + + 1.43853952829993 + + + -0.919353665468368 + + + + + 1.5332458505929 + + + 0.678159168870983 + + + + + 1.6765269746366 + + + 0.416434654153369 + + + + + 0.450563708411459 + + + 0.22911248792634 + + + + + 0.505470263676592 + + + 0.470425948779898 + + + + + 0.545106616940358 + + + 0.411028927740438 + + + + + 0.682704916689207 + + + 0.646077879418302 + + + + + 2.22685996425193 + + + -2.43092236748302 + + + + + 3.29670879167654 + + + -0.829181229907427 + + + + + -1.61522859107175 + + + -2.41682657284899 + + + + + 2.90689079338124 + + + -2.15994697868441 + + + + + 1.30245078290168 + + + 1.45443785733126 + + + + + 1.95237484175544 + + + 0.840472341525344 + + + + + 1.57930628561185 + + + -1.33862736591677 + + + + + 2.07029745895472 + + + -0.70310180067089 + + + + + -1.07572227365276 + + + -0.921557968003809 + + + + + 1.41649126309482 + + + -2.43322886402899 + + + + + -0.055782417923803 + + + -1.81336029451831 + + + + + 1.81421807837012 + + + -1.60154853447151 + + + + + -0.577666040004067 + + + 1.38887243891951 + + + + + 1.50421564456836 + + + 1.96495487990047 + + + + + -0.826878282157686 + + + -0.186591000796403 + + + + + 0.847669685126376 + + + -2.91965280961949 + + + + + -0.826878282157715 + + + 0.186591000796416 + + + + + 0.847669685126408 + + + 2.91965280961948 + + + + + -0.577666040004051 + + + -1.38887243891954 + + + + + 1.50421564456838 + + + -1.96495487990045 + + + + + -0.055782417923785 + + + 1.81336029451832 + + + + + 1.81421807837012 + + + 1.6015485344715 + + + + + -1.07572227365276 + + + 0.921557968003802 + + + + + 1.41649126309482 + + + 2.433228864029 + + + + + 1.57930628561187 + + + 1.33862736591678 + + + + + 2.07029745895474 + + + 0.703101800670888 + + + + + 1.3024507829017 + + + -1.45443785733125 + + + + + 1.95237484175543 + + + -0.840472341525331 + + + + + -1.61522859107176 + + + 2.416826572849 + + + + + 2.90689079338125 + + + 2.15994697868441 + + + + + 2.22685996425191 + + + 2.43092236748304 + + + + + 3.29670879167653 + + + 0.829181229907435 + + + + + 0.545106616940365 + + + -0.411028927740441 + + + + + 0.682704916689214 + + + -0.646077879418299 + + + + + 0.450563708411458 + + + -0.229112487926344 + + + + + 0.505470263676594 + + + -0.470425948779905 + + + + + 1.53324585059292 + + + -0.678159168870965 + + + + + 1.6765269746366 + + + -0.416434654153355 + + + + + 0.872235792989797 + + + 1.14394086206799 + + + + + 1.43853952829994 + + + 0.919353665468386 + + + + + -1.49410383304834 + + + 2.39148041275001 + + + + + 2.81984482347818 + + + 2.12922380028329 + + + + + 0.395847917447327 + + + 2.41926785527626 + + + + + 2.45143886917875 + + + 1.4086104870892 + + + + + -1.60544735660102 + + + 5.08653060378972 + + + + + 5.33387802617445 + + + 1.87652762269616 + + + + + -6.80271615433379 + + + 15.1345439297575 + + + + + 16.5931120359682 + + + 1.99322000923882 + + + + + 3.42886879535907 + + + -2.37164790000194 + + + + + 4.16915518748952 + + + -0.605113892937279 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a9faf27e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + +Moving Average in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_movingavg.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;moving average +moving average;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;moving average + + + +
+

Moving Average

+Calculates the moving average of a time series +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Moving Average +
+For more information on the moving average, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Parameters

+Interval: The number of samples used in the moving average calculation. +

Results of the moving average:

+ + + +Column 1 + + +Column 2 + + + + +#N/A + + +#N/A + + + + +0.3333333333 + + +0.3333333333 + + + + +0 + + +0.3333333333 + + + + +0 + + +0.3333333333 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +#N/A + + +#N/A + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..165ff3e31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Regression Analysis + /text/scalc/01/statistics_regression.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;regression analysis +regression analysis;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;regression analysis +Confidence level;regression analysis +regression analysis;linear +regression analysis;power +regression analysis;logarithmic + + + + +
+

Regression Analysis

+Performs linear, logarithmic, or power regression analysis of a data set comprising one dependent variable and multiple independent variables. +
+For example, a crop yield (dependent variable) may be related to rainfall, temperature conditions, sunshine, humidity, soil quality and more, all of them independent variables. +
+Choose Data - Statistics - Regression +
+For more information on regression analysis, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Data

+

Independent variable(s) (X) range:

+Enter a single range that contains multiple independent variable observations (along columns or rows). All X variable observations need to be entered adjacent to each other in the same table. +

Dependent variable (Y) range:

+Enter the range that contains the dependent variable whose regression is to be calculated. +

Both X and Y ranges have labels

+Check to use the first line (or column) of the data sets as variable names in the output range. +

Results to:

+The reference of the top left cell of the range where the results will be displayed. + + +

Output Regression Types

+Set the regression type. Three types are available: + + + + Linear Regression: finds a linear function in the form of y = b + a1.[x1] + a2.[x2] + a3.[x3] ..., where ai is the i-th slope, [xi] is the i-th independent variable, and b is the intercept that best fits the data. + + + Logarithmic regression: finds a logarithmic curve in the form of y = b + a1.ln[x1] + a2.ln[x2] + a3.ln[x3] ..., where ai is the i-th coefficient, b is the intercept and ln[xi] is the natural logarithm of the i-th independent variable, that best fits the data. + + + Power regression: finds a power curve in the form of y = exp( b + a1.ln[x1] + a2.ln[x2] + a3.ln[x3] ...), where ai is the i-th power, [xi] is the i-th independent variable, and b is intercept that best fits the data. + + +

Options

+

Confidence level

+ A numeric value between 0 and 1 (exclusive), default is 0.95. Calc uses this percentage to compute the corresponding confidence intervals for each of the estimates (namely the slopes and intercept). +

Calculate residuals

+ Select whether to opt in or out of computing the residuals, which may be beneficial in cases where you are interested only in the slopes and intercept estimates and their statistics. The residuals give information on how far the actual data points deviate from the predicted data points, based on the regression model. +

Force intercept to be zero

+ Calculates the regression model using zero as the intercept, thus forcing the model to pass through the origin. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..753f70cb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ + + + + + + +Data Sampling in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_sampling.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;sampling +sampling;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;sampling + + + +
+

Sampling

+Create a table with data sampled from another table. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Sampling +
+Sampling allows you to pick data from a source table (population) to fill a target table. The sampling can be random or in a periodic basis, as well as with or without sample replacement in the source table. +Sampling is done row-wise. That means, the sampled data will pick the whole line of the source table and copy into a line of the target table. +

Sampling Method

+

Random

+Picks exactly Sample Size lines of the source table in a random way. +

Sample size

+Number of lines sampled from the source table. The Sample size is limited to the population size for all sampling methods without replacement. +

With replacement

+When checked, put back samples in population (source table) after draw. A sample can be drawn more than once and therefore a larger sample size than population is possible. This option is mutually exclusive with Keep order. When unchecked, a sample drawn is not put back to the population and sample size is limited to population size. +

Keep order

+When checked, samples are drawn in order of population data. Samples are not put back to the population (exclusive with With replacement). This option is automatically checked for Periodic sampling. When unchecked, samples are drawn in random order. +

Periodic

+Picks lines in a pace defined by Period. +

Period

+The number of lines to skip periodically when sampling. The Period is limited to the population size. + +The following data will be used as example of source data table for sampling: + + + + + +A + + +B + + +C + + + + +1 + + +11 + + +21 + + +31 + + + + +2 + + +12 + + +22 + + +32 + + + + +3 + + +13 + + +23 + + +33 + + + + +4 + + +14 + + +24 + + +34 + + + + +5 + + +15 + + +25 + + +35 + + + + +6 + + +16 + + +26 + + +36 + + + + +7 + + +17 + + +27 + + +37 + + + + +8 + + +18 + + +28 + + +38 + + + + +9 + + +19 + + +29 + + +39 + + +
+ +Sampling with a period of 2 will result in the following table: + + + +12 + + +22 + + +32 + + + + +14 + + +24 + + +34 + + + + +16 + + +26 + + +36 + + + + +18 + + +28 + + +38 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04052f547 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + +Chi Square Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_chisqr.xhp + + + + +Analysis toolpack;Chi-square test +Chi-square test;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;Chi-square test + + + +
+

Chi-square test

+Calculates the Chi-square test of a data sample. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Chi-square Test +
+For more information on chi-square tests, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. + + + +

Results for Chi-square Test:

+ + + +Test of Independence (Chi-Square) + + + + + + +Alpha + + +0.05 + + + + +df + + +12 + + + + +P-value + + +2.32567054678584E-014 + + + + +Test Statistic + + +91.6870055842 + + + + +Critical Value + + +21.0260698175 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fdc54d46 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + +F Test Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_f.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;F-test +F-test;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;F-test + + + +
+

F-test

+Calculates the F-Test of two data samples. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - F-test +
+A F-test is any statistical test based on the F-distribution under the null hypothesis. +For more information on F-tests, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Data

+Variable 1 range: The reference of the range of the first data series to analyze. +Variable 2 range: The reference of the range of the second data series to analyze. +Results to: The reference of the top left cell of the range where the test will be displayed. +

Results for F-Test:

+The following table shows the F-Test for the data series above: + + + +Ftest + + + + + + + + +Alpha + + +0.05 + + + + + + + + +Variable 1 + + +Variable 2 + + + + +Mean + + +16.9230769231 + + +20.4615384615 + + + + +Variance + + +125.0769230769 + + +94.4358974359 + + + + +Observations + + +13 + + +13 + + + + +df + + +12 + + +12 + + + + +F + + +1.3244637524 + + + + + + +P (F<=f) right-tail + + +0.3170614146 + + + + + + +F Critical right-tail + + +2.6866371125 + + + + + + +P (F<=f) left-tail + + +0.6829385854 + + + + + + +F Critical left-tail + + +0.3722125312 + + + + + + +P two-tail + + +0.6341228293 + + + + + + +F Critical two-tail + + +0.3051313549 + + +3.277277094 + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a013e6a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + +T Test Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_t.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;t-test +Analysis toolpack;paired t-test +t-test;Analysis toolpack +paired t-test;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;paired t-test + + + +
+

Paired t-test

+Calculates the paired t-Test of two data samples. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Paired t-test +
+A paired t-test is any statistical hypothesis test that follows a Student's t distribution. +For more information on paired t-tests, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Data

+Variable 1 range: The reference of the range of the first data series to analyze. +Variable 2 range: The reference of the range of the second data series to analyze. +Results to: The reference of the top left cell of the range where the test will be displayed. +

Results for paired t-test:

+The following table shows the paired t-test for the data series above: + + + +paired t-test + + + + + + + + +Alpha + + +0.05 + + + + + + +Hypothesized Mean Difference + + +0 + + + + + + + + +Variable 1 + + +Variable 2 + + + + +Mean + + +16.9230769231 + + +20.4615384615 + + + + +Variance + + +125.0769230769 + + +94.4358974359 + + + + +Observations + + +13 + + +13 + + + + +Pearson Correlation + + +-0.0617539772 + + + + + + +Observed Mean Difference + + +-3.5384615385 + + + + + + +Variance of the Differences + + +232.9358974359 + + + + + + +df + + +12 + + + + + + +t Stat + + +-0.8359262137 + + + + + + +P (T<=t) one-tail + + +0.2097651442 + + + + + + +t Critical one-tail + + +1.7822875556 + + + + + + +P (T<=t) two-tail + + +0.4195302884 + + + + + + +t Critical two-tail + + +2.1788128297 + + + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b54ba44fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + +Z Test Statistics in Calc +/text/scalc/01/statistics_test_z.xhp + + + + + +Analysis toolpack;Z-test +Z-test;Analysis toolpack +Data statistics;Z-test + + + +
+

Z-test

+Calculates the z-Test of two data samples. +
+
+Choose Data - Statistics - Z-test +
+For more information on Z-tests, refer to the corresponding Wikipedia article. +

Data

+Variable 1 range: The reference of the range of the first data series to analyze. +Variable 2 range: The reference of the range of the second data series to analyze. +Results to: The reference of the top left cell of the range where the test will be displayed. +

Results for z-Test:

+The following table shows the z-Test for the data series above: + + + +z-test + + + + + + + + +Alpha + + +0.05 + + + + + + +Hypothesized Mean Difference + + +0 + + + + + + + + +Variable 1 + + +Variable 2 + + + + +Known Variance + + +0 + + +0 + + + + +Mean + + +16.9230769231 + + +20.4615384615 + + + + +Observations + + +13 + + +13 + + + + +Observed Mean Difference + + +-3.5384615385 + + + + + + +z + + +#DIV/0! + + + + + + +P (Z<=z) one-tail + + +#DIV/0! + + + + + + +z Critical one-tail + + +1.644853627 + + + + + + +P (Z<=z) two-tail + + +#DIV/0! + + + + + + +z Critical two-tail + + +1.9599639845 + + + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dec39b985 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Text to Columns + /text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp + + + +text to columns + + + +
+

Text to Columns

+Opens the Text to Columns dialog, where you enter settings to expand the contents of selected cells to multiple cells. +
+
+ +
+

To expand cell contents to multiple cells

+ You can expand cells that contain comma separated values (CSV) into multiple cells in the same row. + For example, cell A1 contains the comma separated values 1,2,3,4, and cell A2 contains the text A,B,C,D. + + + Select the cell or cells that you want to expand. + + + Choose Data - Text to Columns. + You see the Text to Columns dialog. + + + Select the separator options. The preview shows how the current cell contents will be transformed into multiple cells. + + + You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. + You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. + In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and A2 will be expanded to four columns each. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5fe8bfdf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + XML Data + /text/scalc/01/xml_source.xhp + + + + + + + + + XML Source;load XML data in spreadsheets + +
+

XML Source

+ Import XML data in a spreadsheet. +
+ The XML Source feature allows to import data from arbitrarily structured XML content into cells in an existing spreadsheet document. It allows XML content to be imported either partially or in full, depending on the structure of the XML content and the map definitions that the user defines. The user can specify multiple non-overlapping sub-structures to be mapped to different cell positions within the same document. The user can import either element contents, attribute values or both. + +
+ Choose Data - XML Source. +
+

XML Source Dialog

+ + + The dialog consists of four parts. + +

Source file

+ This lets you specify the path to the XML file that you wish to import into your document. + +

Map to Document

+ This pane shows the structure of the source XML content as a tree. This is initially empty, and gets populated when you specify the source file. + + Each element in the tree can be one of three types: + + + attribute, represented by the symbol @ + + + single non-recurring element, represented by the symbol </>, and + + + recurring element, represented by the symbol <//>. + + + + A non-recurring element is an element that can only occur once under the same parent. It is mapped to a single cell in the document. + + A recurring element is an element that can appear multiple times under the same parent. It serves as an enclosing parent of a single record entry of multiple record entries. These entries are imported into a range those height equals the number of entries plus one additional header row. + +

Mapped cell

+ This field specifies the position of a cell in the document that an element or an attribute is linked to. If it is a non-recurring element or an attribute, it simply points to the cell where the value of the linked element/attribute will get imported. If it is a recurring element, it points to the top-left cell of the range where the whole record entries plus header will get imported. +

Import

+ Pressing the Import button starts the import process based on the link definitions that the user has provided. Once the import finishes, the dialog will close. +
+ Wiki page on XML Source +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c3cd10c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Number format: Currency +/text/scalc/02/02130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Number format: Currency

+ Applies the default currency format to the selected cells. +
+
+ + + + Currency Number Format Icon + + + Number Format: Currency + + +
+
+
+ Format - Cells - Numbers. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20cfb1bde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + +Number format: Percent +/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Number format: Percent

+Applies the percentage format to the selected cells. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Number Format: Percent + + +
+ +
+percentage calculations + +You can also enter a percentage sign (%) after a number in a cell: +1% corresponds to 0.01 +1 + 16% corresponds to 116% or 1.16 +1%% corresponds to 0.0001 +
+Format - Cells - Numbers +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac6bb9fda --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Number format: Default +/text/scalc/02/02150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Number format: Default

+ Applies the default number format to the selected cells. +
+
+ + + + Icon Standard Format + + + Number Format: Standard + + +
+
+
+ Format - Cells - Numbers. +
+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05622e11b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Number Format: Add Decimal Place +/text/scalc/02/02160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
mw copied three index entries to Calc guide format_value.xhp + +

Number Format: Add Decimal Place

+Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Add Decimal Place + + +Number Format: Add Decimal Place + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2e2b59ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Number Format: Delete Decimal Place +/text/scalc/02/02170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
mw copied three index entries to Calc guide format_value.xhp + +

Number Format: Delete Decimal Place

+Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Delete Decimal Place + + +Number Format: Delete Decimal Place + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9399da39c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Name Box +/text/scalc/02/06010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+formula bar; sheet area names +sheet area names +showing; cell references +cell references; showing + + + +Name Box +Displays the reference for the current cell, the range of the selected cells, or the name of the area. You can also select a range of cells, and then type a name for that range into the Name Box.UFI: fixes #i28238# +
+
+ + + + +Combo box sheet area + + + +Name Box + + +
+ +
+To jump to a particular cell, or to select a cell range, type the cell reference, or cell range reference in this box, for example, F1, or A1:C4. You can also enter full name of a sheet; the tooltip then changes to "Go To Sheet", and pressing Enter switches to that sheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbc1f81b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Sum + /text/scalc/02/06030000.xhp + + + +
+functions;sum function icon + formula bar;sum function + sum icon + AutoSum button, see sum icon + +MW inserted a cross-reference +

Select Function

+ Insert a function of a cell range into the current cell. The function can be Sum, Average, Minimum, Maximum and Count. Click in a cell, click this icon, select the function in the drop down list and optionally adjust the cell range. Or select some cells into which the function value will be inserted, then click the icon. The function result is added at the bottom of the range. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Select Function + + + + Select Function + + +
+
+

Select Function applied with no selected range

+$[officename] automatically suggests a cell range, provided that the spreadsheet contains data. If the cell range already contains a function, you can combine it with the new one to yield the function applied to the range data. If the range contains filters, the Subtotal function is inserted instead of the selected function. + Click the Accept icon to use the formula displayed in the input line or Cancel. + + + + +Accept Icon + + + + Accept + + +
+ + + + +Icon Cancel + + + + Cancel + + +
+ +

Select Function applied on a selected range

+When the selected range has two or more rows, the function is calculated for each column. The results are placed in empty cells on the first available row below the range, one result per column. +When the selected range has one row, the function result is placed in the first available cell on the right of the selected range. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc96cf5f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Function +/text/scalc/02/06040000.xhp + + + +
+formula bar; functions +functions; formula bar icon + + +Function +Adds a formula to the current cell. Click this icon, and then enter the formula in the Input line. +
+This icon is only available when the Input line box is not active. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Function + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9f181f43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Input line +/text/scalc/02/06050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Input line +Enter the formula that you want to add to the current cell. You can also click the Function Wizard icon to insert a predefined function into the formula. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a12414c27 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel +/text/scalc/02/06060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+formula bar; canceling inputs +functions; canceling input icon + + +Cancel +Clears the contents of the Input line, or cancels the changes that you made to an existing formula. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Cancel + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc429343f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Accept +/text/scalc/02/06070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+formula bar; accepting inputs +functions; accepting input icon + + +Accept +Accepts the contents of the Input line, and then inserts the contents into the current cell. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Accept + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..651d6fdf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Theme Selection +/text/scalc/02/06080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Theme Selection +Applies a formatting style to the selected cells. + The styles include font, border, and background color information. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Choose Themes + + +
+ +
+ +Click the formatting theme that you want to apply, and then click OK. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39b648223 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Position in document +/text/scalc/02/08010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Position in document +Displays the number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b73bdfac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning +/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+formulas;status bar +MW changed index entry + +Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning +Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed. +
+To change the default formula that is displayed, right-click the field, and then choose the formula that you want. The available formulas are: Average, count of values (COUNTA), count of numbers (COUNT), Maximum, Minimum, Sum, or None. +
+Error codes +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6b9f0d58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom In +/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+page views; increasing scales +increasing scales in page view +zooming;enlarging page views +mw deleted "scaling;" + +Zoom In +Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. +
+The maximum zoom factor is 400%. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom In + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ed616c7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+page views;reducing scales +zooming;reducing page views +mw deleted "scaling;" + +Zoom Out +Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. +
+The minimum zoom factor is 20%. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Zooming Out + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6c5fb777 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert +/text/scalc/02/18010000.xhp + + + +
+inserting; objects, toolbar icon + + +Insert +Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert toolbar, where you can add graphics and special characters to the current sheet. +
+Tools bar icon: +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert + + +
+
+You can select the following icons: +Floating Frame + + +Special Character + + +From File + + + + +Formula + + +Chart + +OLE Object + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c930837f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Cells +/text/scalc/02/18020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserting; cells, toolbar icon + + +Insert Cells +Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert Cells toolbar, where you can insert cells, rows, and columns into the current sheet. +
+Tools bar icon: + +You can select the following icons: +Insert Cells Down + + +Insert Cells Right + + +Rows + + +Columns + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c5c6cf12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,859 @@ + + + + + + Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets + /text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+ + spreadsheets; shortcut keys in + shortcut keys; spreadsheets + sheet ranges; filling + + mw deleted "matrices;..." +

Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets

+ +
+ To fill a selected cell range with the formula that you entered on the Input line, press Option +Alt+Enter. + To create a matrix in which all the cells contain the same information as what you entered on the Input line, press Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. You cannot edit the components of the matrix. + To select multiple cells in different areas of a sheet, hold down CommandCtrl and drag in the different areas. + To select multiple sheets in a spreadsheet, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click the name tabs at the lower edge of the workspace. To select only one sheet in a selection, hold down Shift, and then click the name tab of the sheet. + To insert a manual line break in a cell, click in the cell, and then press CommandCtrl+Enter. + To delete the contents of selected cells, press Backspace. This opens the Delete Contents dialog, where you choose which contents of the cell you want to delete. To delete the contents of selected cells without a dialog, press the Delete key. +

Navigating in Spreadsheets

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Home + + + Moves the cursor to the first cell in the sheet (A1). + + + + + CommandCtrl+End + + + Moves the cursor to the last cell on the sheet that contains data. + + + + + Home + + + Moves the cursor to the first cell of the current row. + + + + + End + + + Moves the cursor to the last cell that contains values in the current row. + + + + + Shift+Home + + + Selects cells from the current cell to the first cell of the current row. + + + + + Shift+End + + + Selects all cells from the current cell to the last cell that contains values in the current row. + + + + + Shift+Page Up + + + Selects cells from the current cell up to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page up. + + + + + Shift+Page Down + + + Selects cells from the current cell down to one page in the current column or extends the existing selection one page down. + + + + + Shift+Space + + + Selects the current row or extends the existing selection to all respective rows. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Space + + + Selects the current column or extends the existing selection to all respective columns. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Space + + + Selects all cells in the sheet. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow + + + Moves the cursor leftward to the start and end of cell blocks with data. If the cell to the left of the cursor is empty or the cell with the cursor is empty, the cursor moves leftward in the current row until it reaches the next cell with contents. If all cells in the same row to the left of the cursor are empty, the cursor moves to the first cell in the row. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Right Arrow + + + Moves the cursor rightward to the start and end of cell blocks with data. If the cell to the right of the cursor is empty or the cell with the cursor is empty, the cursor moves rightward in the current row until it reaches the next cell with contents. If all cells in the same row to the right of the cursor are empty, the cursor moves to the last cell in the row. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Up Arrow + + + Moves the cursor upward to the start and end of cell blocks with data. If the cell above the cursor is empty or the cell with the cursor is empty, the cursor moves upward in the current column until it reaches the next cell with contents. If all cells in the same column above the cursor are empty, the cursor moves to the first cell in the column. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Down Arrow + + + Moves the cursor downward to the start and end of cell blocks with data. If the cell below the cursor is empty or the cell with the cursor is empty, the cursor moves downward in the current column until it reaches the next cell with contents. If all cells in the same column below the cursor are empty, the cursor moves to the last cell in the column. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Arrow + + + Selects all cells of the range created by the cursor movements using the CommandCtrl+Arrows key combinations. If used to select rows and columns together, a rectangular cell range is selected. If the cursor is in an empty cell, the selection will stretch from the current cell up to the first cell with value in the direction of the arrow pressed. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Up + + + Moves one sheet to the left. + In the print preview: Moves to the previous print page. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Down + + + Moves one sheet to the right. + In the print preview: Moves to the next print page. + + + + + Option +Alt+Page Up + + + Moves one screen to the left. + + + + + Option +Alt+Page Down + + + Moves one screen page to the right. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up + + + Adds the previous sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the previous sheet. Makes the previous sheet the current sheet. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Down + + + Adds the next sheet to the current selection of sheets. If all the sheets in a spreadsheet are selected, this shortcut key combination only selects the next sheet. Makes the next sheet the current sheet. + + + + + CommandCtrl+ * + + + where (*) is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad + Selects the data range that contains the cursor. A range is a contiguous cell range that contains data and is bounded by empty row and columns. + + + + + CommandCtrl+ / + + + where (/) is the division sign on the numeric key pad + Selects the matrix formula range that contains the cursor. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Plus key + + + Insert cells (as in menu Insert - Cells)[sc-features] of 8.June07 + + + + + CommandCtrl+Minus key + + + Delete cells (as in menu Edit - Delete Cells) + + + + + Enter (in a selected range)see i80051 + + + Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range. To specify the direction that the cursor moves, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General and change the option in Press Enter to move selection. + + + + + Enter (after copying cell contents) + + + If cell contents have just been copied to the clipboard and no additional editing has been done in the current file, then pressing Enter will paste clipboard contents to the current cursor position. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + If the clipboard contains cell contents and no editing has been done in the file, then Shift+Enter has the same behavior as Enter and pastes clipboard contents to the current cursor position. + If no cells are selected, Shift+Enter moves the cursor to the opposite direction defined in the option Press Enter to move selection found in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. + If a range of cells is selected, Shift+Enter moves the cursor inside the current selection to the opposite direction defined in the option Press Enter to move selection. + + + + + CommandCtrl+ ` (see note below this table) + + + Displays or hides the formulas instead of the values in all cells.i56202 + + +
+ The ` key is located next to the "1" key on most English keyboards. If your keyboard does not show this key, you can assign another key: Choose Tools - Customize, click the Keyboard tab. Select the "View" category and the "Toggle Formula" function. + + + spreadsheets; duplicate + spreadsheets; quick rename + +

Copying and Renaming Sheets

+ The sheet tabs used to navigate between sheets can be clicked in combination with keyboard keys to perform the following operations: + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl + Drag sheet tab + + + Creates a copy of the sheet whose tab was clicked. The copied sheet is placed at the position where the mouse button was released. + + + + + OptionAlt + Click sheet tab + + + Makes the sheet name editable. Edit the sheet name and press Enter when finished. + + +
+ +

Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + CommandCtrl+F1 + + + Displays the comment that is attached to the current cell + + + + + F2 + + + With a cell selected, press F2 to open cell contents for editing. If the cell contains a formula, use arrow keys to navigate the sheet to easily enter range addresses into the formula. + Press F2 again to enable the use of arrow keys to move the cursor in the formula text. + Each additional use of the F2 shortcut switches between the two states previously described. + Some dialog boxes have input fields with a Shrink button. Pressing F2 with the cursor inside such field causes the Shrink command to be executed. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F2 + + + Opens the Function Wizard. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+F2 + + + Moves the cursor to the Input line where you can enter a formula for the current cell. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F3 + + + Opens the Define Names dialog. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+F4 + + + Shows or Hides the Database explorer. + + + + + F4 + + + Rearranges the relative or absolute references (for example, A1, $A$1, $A1, A$1) in the input field. + + + + + F5 + + + Shows or hides the Navigator. + + + + + Shift+F5 + + + Traces dependents. + + + + + Shift+F9 + + + Traces precedents. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+F5 + + + Moves the cursor from the Input line to the Sheet area box. You can also use Shift+CommandCtrl+T. + + + + + F7 + + + Checks spelling in the current sheet. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F7 + + + Opens the Thesaurus if the current cell contains text. + + + + + F8 + + + Turns additional selection mode on or off. In this mode, you can use the arrow keys to extend the selection. You can also click in another cell to extend the selection. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F8 + + + Highlights cells containing values. + + + + + F9 + + + Recalculates changed formulas in the current sheet. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+F9 + + + Recalculates all formulas in all sheets. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F9 + + + Updates the selected chart. + + + + + + + Command+T + F11 + + + + + Opens the Styles window where you can apply a formatting style to the contents of the cell or to the current sheet. + + + + + Shift+F11 + + + Creates a document template. + + + + + Shift+Command+Ctrl+F11 + + + Updates the templates. + + + + + F12 + + + Groups the selected data range. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F12 + + + Ungroups the selected data range. + + + + + Option +Alt+Down Arrow + + + Increases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). + + + + + Option +Alt+Up Arrow + + + Decreases the height of current row (only in OpenOffice.org legacy compatibility mode). + + + + + Option +Alt+Right Arrow + + + Increases the width of the current column. + + + + + Option +Alt+Left Arrow + + + Decreases the width of the current column. + + + + + OptionAlt+Shift+Arrow Key + + + Optimizes the column width or row height based on the current cell. + + +
+

Formatting Cells Using Shortcut Keys

+ The following cell formats can be applied with the keyboard: + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + + Effect + + + + + + CommandCtrl+1 (not on the number pad) + + + Open Format Cells dialog + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+1 (not on the number pad) + + + Two decimal places, thousands separator + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+2 (not on the number pad) + + + Standard exponential format + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+3 (not on the number pad) + + + Standard date format + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+4 (not on the number pad) + + + Standard currency format + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+5 (not on the number pad) + + + Standard percentage format (two decimal places) + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+6 (not on the number pad) + + + Standard format + + +
+

Using the pivot table

+ The shortcut keys below are for the Pivot Table Layout dialog. + + + + Keys + + + Effect + + + + + + Tab + + + + Changes the focus by moving forwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. + + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + + Changes the focus by moving backwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog. + + + + + + Up Arrow + + + + Moves the focus up one item in the current dialog area. + + + + + + Down Arrow + + + + Moves the focus down one item in the current dialog area. + + + + + + Left Arrow + + + + Moves the focus one item to the left in the current dialog area. + + + + + + Right Arrow + + + + Moves the focus one item to the right in the current dialog area. + + + + + + Home + + + + Selects the first item in the current dialog area. + + + + + + End + + + + Selects the last item in the current dialog area. + + + + + OptionAlt and the underlined character in the label "Row Fields" + + + Copies or moves the current field into the "Row Fields" area. + + + + + OptionAlt and the underlined character in the label "Column Fields" + + + Copies or moves the current field into the "Column Fields" area. + + + + + OptionAlt and the underlined character in the label "Data Fields" + + + Copies or moves the current field into the "Data Fields" area. + + + + + OptionAlt and the underlined character in the label "Filters" + + + Copies or moves the current field into the "Filters" area. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Up Arrow + + + + Moves the current field up one place. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Down Arrow + + + + Moves the current field down one place. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow + + + + Moves the current field one place to the left. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Right Arrow + + + + Moves the current field one place to the right. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+Home + + + + Moves the current field to the first place. + + + + + + CommandCtrl+End + + + + Moves the current field to the last place. + + + + + + Delete + + + + Removes the current field from the area. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a54582a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,426 @@ + + + + + + + + + Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + /text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp + + + +error codes;list of +mw deleted "%PRODUCTNAME Calc;error codes" +Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + The following table is an overview of the error messages for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. If the error occurs in the cell that contains the cursor, the error message is displayed on the Status Bar. +### error message +invalid references; error messages + error messages;invalid references + #REF error message + +invalid names; error messages + #NAME error message + + + + + Error Code + + + Message + + + Explanation + + + + + ### + + +none + + + The cell is not wide enough to display the contents. + + + + + #FMT + + + none + + + This value is outside of limits valid for this format + + + + + 501 + + + Invalid character + + + Character in a formula is not valid. + + + + + 502 + + + Invalid argument + + + Function argument is not valid. For example, a negative number for the SQRT() function, for this please use IMSQRT(). + + + + + 503
#NUM! + + + Invalid floating point operation + + + A calculation results in an overflow of the defined value range. + + + + + 504 + + + Parameter list error + + + Function parameter is not valid, for example, text instead of a number, or a domain reference instead of cell reference. + + + + + 507, 508 + + + Error: Pair missing + + + Missing bracket, for example, closing brackets, but no opening brackets + + + + + 509 + + + Missing operator + + + Operator is missing, for example, "=2(3+4) * ", where the operator between "2" and "(" is missing. + + + + + 510 + + + Missing variable + + + Variable is missing, for example when two operators are together "=1+*2". + + + + + 511 + + + Missing variable + + + Function requires more variables than are provided, for example, AND() and OR(). + + + + + 512 + + + Formula overflow + + + + Compiler: the total number of internal tokens, (that is, operators, variables, brackets) in the formula exceeds 8192. + + + + + 513 + + + String overflow + + + + Compiler: an identifier in the formula exceeds 64 kB in size. Interpreter: a result of a string operation exceeds 64 kB in size. + + + + + 514 + + + Internal overflow + + + Sort operation attempted on too much numerical data (max. 100000) or a calculation stack overflow. + + + + + 515 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Unknown error. + + + + + 516 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Matrix is expected on the calculation stack, but is not available. + + + + + 517 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Unknown code, for example, a document with a newer function is loaded in an older version that does not contain the function. + + + + + 518 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Variable is not available + + + + + 519
#VALUE! + + + No value (instead of Err:519 cell displays #VALUE!) + + + The formula yields a value that does not correspond to the definition; or a cell that is referenced in the formula contains text instead of a number.i63264 + + + + + 520 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Compiler creates an unknown compiler code. + + + + + 521
#NULL! + + + Internal syntax error (instead of Err:521 cell displays #NULL!) + + + No code or no result. + + + + + 522 + + + Circular reference + + + Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# + + + + + 523 + + + The calculation procedure does not converge + + + Function missed a targeted value, or iterative references do not reach the minimum change within the maximum steps that are set.UFI: see #33769# + + + + + 524
#REF! + + +Not a valid reference (instead of Err:524 cell displays #REF!) + + + + Compiler: a column or row description name could not be resolved. Interpreter: in a formula, the column, row, or sheet that contains a referenced cell is missing. + + + + + 525
#NAME? + + +invalid names (instead of Err:525 cell displays #NAME?) + + + An identifier could not be evaluated, for example, no valid reference, no valid domain name, no column/row label, no macro, incorrect decimal divider, add-in not found. + + + + + 526 + + + Internal syntax error + + + Obsolete, no longer used, but could come from old documents if the result is a formula from a domain. + + + + + 527 + + + Internal overflow + + + + Interpreter: References, such as when a cell references a cell, are too encapsulated. + + + + + 530 + + + No AddIn + + + + Interpreter: AddIn not found. + + + + + 531 + + + No Macro + + + + Interpreter: Macro not found. + + + + + 532
#DIV/0! + + + Division by zero + + + Division operator / if the denominator is 0
Some more functions return this error, for example:
VARP with less than 1 argument
STDEVP with less than 1 argument
VAR with less than 2 arguments
STDEV with less than 2 arguments
STANDARDIZE with stdev=0
NORMDIST with stdev=0 + + + + + 533 + + + Nested arrays are not supported + + + For example, ={1;{2}} + + + + + 538 + + + Error: Array or matrix size + + + - + + + + + 539 + + + Unsupported inline array content + + + For example, ={1+2} + + + + + 540 + + + External content disabled + + + Happens if a function that requires (re)loading of external sources is encountered and the user hasn't confirmed reloading of external sources yet + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..56ccc19b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ + + + + + + + + +Handling of Empty Cells +/text/scalc/05/empty_cells.xhp + + + + + empty cells;handling of +i86303 +Handling of Empty Cells + +In older versions of the software, empty cells were forced to numeric 0 in some contexts and to empty string in others, except in direct comparison where =A1=0 and =A1="" both resulted in TRUE if A1 was empty. Emptiness now is inherited until used, so both =VLOOKUP(...)=0 and =VLOOKUP(...)="" give TRUE if the lookup resulted in an empty cell being returned. +A simple reference to an empty cell is still displayed as numeric 0 but is not necessarily of type numeric anymore, so also comparisons with the referencing cell work as expected. +For the following examples, A1 contains a number, B1 is empty, C1 contains the reference to B1: + + + + Case + + + Formula + + + Results and comments + + + + + A1: 1
B1: <Empty> + + + C1: =B1 + + + Displays 0 + + + + + =B1=0 + + + TRUE + + + + + =B1="" + + + + + + + + =C1=0 + + + + + + + + =C1="" + + + TRUE (previously was FALSE) + + + + + =ISNUMBER(B1) + + + FALSE + + + + + =ISNUMBER(C1) + + + FALSE (previously was TRUE) + + + + + =ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) + + + FALSE (B1) + + + + + =ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) + + + FALSE (C1, previously was TRUE) + + + + + =ISTEXT(B1) + + + + + + + + =ISTEXT(C1) + + + + + + + + =ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) + + + FALSE (B1, previously was TRUE) + + + + + =ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) + + + FALSE (C1) + + + + + =ISBLANK(B1) + + + + + + + + =ISBLANK(C1) + + + + + + + + =ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;2)) + + + TRUE (B1, previously was FALSE) + + + + + =ISBLANK(VLOOKUP(1;A1:C1;3)) + + + FALSE (C1) + + +
+Note that Microsoft Excel behaves different and always returns a number as the result of a reference to an empty cell or a formula cell with the result of an empty cell. For example: + + + + Case + + + Formula + + + Results and comments + + + + + A1: <Empty> + + + B1: =A1 + + + Displays 0, but is just a reference to an empty cell. + + + + + =ISNUMBER(A1) + + + + + + + + =ISTEXT(A1) + + + + + + + + =A1=0 + + + + + + + + =A1="" + + + + + + + + =ISNUMBER(B1) + + + FALSE (Microsoft Excel: TRUE) + + + + + =ISTEXT(B1) + + + + + + + + =B1=0 + + + + + + + + =B1="" + + + TRUE (Microsoft Excel: FALSE) + + + + + C1: =VLOOKUP(...) with empty cell result + + + displays empty (Microsoft Excel: displays 0) + + + + + =ISNUMBER(VLOOKUP(...)) + + + + + + + + =ISTEXT(VLOOKUP(...)) + + + + + + + + =ISNUMBER(C1) + + + FALSE (Microsoft Excel: TRUE) + + + + + =ISTEXT(C1) + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40dc41adc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + Calc Sample Files + /text/scalc/06/calcsamplefiles.xhp + + + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03a55b5ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Recognizing Names as Addressing + /text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp + + + + + + + automatic addressing in tables + natural language addressing + formulas; using row/column labels + text in cells; as addressing + addressing; automatic + name recognition on/off + row headers;using in formulas + column headers;using in formulas + columns; finding labels automatically + rows; finding labels automatically + recognizing; column and row labels + +mw changes "names;..." entry to "text in cells;..."mw inserted three index entries from text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp. Changed "finding;..." entry to "recognizing;..." entry. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. + +Recognizing Names as Addressing +You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells.removed table as a workaround for issue 108715 +Example spreadsheet +In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. +This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. +If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. + +
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ac4ebcaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Deactivating Automatic Changes + /text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp + + + + + + + deactivating; automatic changes + tables; deactivating automatic changes in + AutoInput function on/off + text in cells;AutoInput function + cells; AutoInput function of text + input support in spreadsheets + changing; input in cells + AutoCorrect function;cell contents + cell input;AutoInput function + lowercase letters;AutoInput function (in cells) + capital letters;AutoInput function (in cells) + date formats;avoiding conversion to + number completion on/off + text completion on/off + word completion on/off + +mw added one entry + +Deactivating Automatic Changes +By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. You can immediately undo any automatic changes with Command +Ctrl+Z. +The following shows you how to deactivate and reactivate the automatic changes in $[officename] Calc: + +Automatic Text or Number Completion +When making an entry in a cell, $[officename] Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column. This function is known as AutoInput. +To turn the AutoInput on and off, set or remove the check mark in front of Tools - AutoInput. + +Automatic Conversion to Date Format +$[officename] Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates. For example, the entry 1.1 may be interpreted as January 1 of the current year, according to the locale settings of your operating system, and then displayed according to the date format applied to the cell.for sure 1.1 will not be interpreted as a date in the USofA !! +To ensure that an entry is interpreted as text, add an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry. The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell. + +Quotation Marks Replaced by Custom Quotes +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Localized Options tab and unmark Replace. + +Cell Content Always Begins With Uppercase +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Options tab. Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence. + +Replace Word With Another Word +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Replace tab. Select the word pair and click Delete. + +
+Tools - AutoInput +Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d7f1b5a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + Applying AutoFilter + /text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp + + + +filters, see also AutoFilter function + AutoFilter function;applying + sheets; filter values + numbers; filter sheets + columns; AutoFilter function + drop-down menus in sheet columns + database ranges; AutoFilter function +mw made "drop-down..." a one level entry and added a "see also" reference +

Applying AutoFilter +

+ The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records (rows) to be displayed. +
+ + + Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. + + + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. + + + Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. + Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed. The other rows are filteredUFI: we must distinguish manually hidden cells from filtered cells, because they behave differently. So don't use the word "hidden" when a filter is applied.. You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers. The column that has been used for the filter is identified by a different color for the arrow button. + + + When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. + To display all records again, select the all entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose Standard, the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose "Top 10" to display the highest 10 values only. + To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. +
+ To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. +
+ The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account. +
+
+ + + + + Data - Filter - AutoFilter + SUBTOTAL +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59cea0c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Using AutoFormat for Tables + /text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp + + + + + + tables; AutoFormat + AutoFormat cell ranges + formats; automatically formatting spreadsheets + sheets;AutoFormat + +

Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range

+ Use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a selected cell range. +

Applying an AutoFormat to a Selected Cell Range

+ + + Select the range of cells to which the AutoFormat style is to be applied. The range must be at least 3 columns and 3 rows in size. + + + Go to Format - AutoFormat Styles to open the AutoFormat dialog. + + + In the Format list choose the AutoFormat style to apply. + + + In the Formatting section choose which properties from the AutoFormat style to apply to the selected cell range. + + + Click OK to apply the AutoFormat style and close the dialog. + + + In case the color of the cell contents does not change, make sure View - Value Highlighting is disabled. + + defining;AutoFormat styles + +

Defining a new AutoFormat style

+ + + In a Calc spreadsheet, format a cell range with at least 4 columns and 4 rows to serve as model to create the new AutoFormat style. + + + Select the cell range formatted in the previous step and go to Format - AutoFormat Styles. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the new AutoFormat style. + + + Click OK and close the dialog. + + + The new AutoFormat styles created using the steps above can be applied to any %PRODUCTNAME Calc file. Hence they are not limited to the file where the style was created. +
+ Format - AutoFormat Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..788fa0f6e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + /text/scalc/guide/background.xhp + + + + +spreadsheets; backgrounds +backgrounds;cell ranges +tables; backgrounds +cells; backgrounds +rows, see also cells +columns, see also cells + +

Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +

MW created this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp + You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for cell ranges in $[officename] Calc. +

Applying a Background Color to a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet

+ + + Select the cells. + + + Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color. + + +

Graphics in the Background of Cells

+ + + Choose Insert - Image - From File. + + + Select the graphic and click Open. + The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator. + + +
+ Watermarks + Background tab page + Formatting Spreadsheets +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..885aad22e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,227 @@ + + + + + + + User Defined Borders in Cells + /text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp + + + + + + cells;borders + line arrangements with cells + borders;cells + +User Defined Borders in Cells + + You can apply a variety of different lines to selected cells. + + + Select the cell or a block of cells. + + + Choose Format - Cells. + + + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + + + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + + + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + Selection of cells + Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. + + + + Selection + + + Line arrangement area + + + + + One cell + + + +borders with one cell selected + + + + + + Cells in a column + + + +borders with a column selected + + + + + + Cells in a row + + + +borders with a row selected + + + + + + Cells in a block of 2x2 or more + + + +borders with a block selected + + + +
+

Default Settings

+ Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + + + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + + + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + + + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + + + Examples + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + +default icon row of Borders tab page + + + + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders, all inner lines, and all diagonal lines. + + + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + + + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed, except the diagonal lines, which will be removed.is this a bug? + + + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. + User Defined Settings + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. + + + + Line types + + + Image + + + Meaning + + + + + A black line + + + +solid line for user defined border + + + + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + + + + + A gray line + + + +gray line for user defined border + + + + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + + + + + A white line + + + +white line for user defined border + + + + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + + +
+ Examples + Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. + +setting a thin lower border + + Choose a thicker line style and click the lower edge. This sets a thicker line as a lower border. + +setting a thick line as a border + + Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. + +removing lower border + + You can combine several line types and styles. The last image shows how to set thick outer borders (the thick black lines), while any diagonal lines inside the cell will not be touched (gray lines). + +advanced example for cell borders + + + adjacent cells;remove border + + + +

Adjacent Cells

+ This option becomes available when formatting a range of cells that already have borders and the new format defined for the range involves removing outer borders. + By default the option Remove border is disabled and the borders at the edges of the selected range are left unchanged. Check this option if the borders at the edge of the selection should be removed. + If the preset No Borders is chosen then the Remove border option is enabled. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e866ef00 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Calculating With Dates and Times + /text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp + + + + + + + dates; in cells + times; in cells + cells;date and time formats + current date and time values + + + +Calculating With Dates and Times +In $[officename] Calc, you can perform calculations with current date and time values. As an example, to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours, follow the following steps: + + + + In a spreadsheet, enter your birthday in cell A1. + + + Enter the following formula in cell A3: =NOW()-A1 + + + After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. + + + Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. + + + The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the "Number" category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. + + + The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. + + + Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. + + +The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Data menu, the menu item Calculate - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. + +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e89fff53 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Automatically Calculating Series + /text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp + + + +series; calculating + calculating; series + linear series + growth series + date series + powers of 2 calculations + cells; filling automatically + automatic cell filling + AutoFill function + filling;cells, automatically +mw made "powers of 2;..." a one level entry and changed "AutoFill" entryMW changed "auto filling cells" +Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells + + You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. + Using AutoFill + AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. + + + On a sheet, click in a cell, and type a number. + + + Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. + + + Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. + The cells are filled with ascending numbers. + + + To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter Monday in a cell, and drag the fill handle. + Hold down Command +Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. + If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. + Using a Defined Series + + + Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. + + + Choose Sheet - Fill Cells - Series. + + + Select the parameters for the series. + If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. + If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. + If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. + + +
+ + Sort lists +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e79700198 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Calculating Time Differences +/text/scalc/guide/calc_timevalues.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +calculating;time differences +time differences + +Calculating Time Differences + +If you want to calculate time differences, for example, the time between 23:30 and 01:10 in the same night, use the following formula: +=(B2<A2)+B2-A2 +The later time is B2 and the earlier time is A2. The result of the example is 01:40 or 1 hour and 40 minutes. +In the formula, an entire 24-hour day has a value of 1 and one hour has a value of 1/24. The logical value in parentheses is 0 or 1, corresponding to 0 or 24 hours. The result returned by the formula is automatically issued in time format due to the sequence of the operands. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1694c4134 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Calculating in Spreadsheets +/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp + + + + +spreadsheets; calculating +calculating; spreadsheets +formulas; calculating +mw changed "formulas;..." entry +Calculating in Spreadsheets +The following is an example of a calculation in $[officename] Calc. + + +Click in a cell, and type a number + + +Press Enter. +The cursor moves down to the next cell. + + +Enter another number. + + +Press the Tab key. +The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. + + +Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. + + + Press Enter. +The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. +When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..208653230 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Entering Values + /text/scalc/guide/cell_enter.xhp + + + +values; inserting in multiple cells + inserting;values + cell ranges;selecting for data entries + areas, see also cell ranges + +

Entering Values +

+ Calc can simplify entering data and values into multiple cells. You can change some settings to conform to your preferences. +

To Enter Values Into a Range of Cells Manually

+ There are two features that assist you when you enter a block of data manually. +

Area Detection for New Rows

+ In the row below a heading row, you can advance from one cell to the next with the Tab key. After you enter the value into the last cell in the current row, press Enter. Calc positions the cursor below the first cell of the current block. + +area detection + + In row 3, press Tab to advance from cell B3 to C3, D3, and E3. Then press Enter to advance to B4. +

Area Selection

+ Select the area where you want to input values. Now you can start to input values from the cursor position in the selected area. Press the Tab key to advance to the next cell or Shift + Tab to move backward. At the edges of the selected area the tab key jumps inside the selected area. You will not leave the selected area. + +area selection + + Select the area from B3 to E7. Now B3 is waiting for your input. Press Tab to advance to the next cell within the selected area. +

To Enter Values to a Range of Cells Automatically

+ See Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cb10c722 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Protecting Cells from Changes + /text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp + + + +protecting;cells and sheets + cells; protecting + cell protection; enabling + sheets; protecting + documents; protecting + cells; hiding for printing + changing; sheet protection + hiding;formulas + formulas;hiding + + +

Protecting Cells from Changes +

+ In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. + Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. + Note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole sheet. In the default condition, every cell has the Protected attribute. Therefore you must remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes. You then protect the whole sheet and save the document. + These protection features are just switches to prevent accidental action. The features are not intended to provide any secure protection. For example, by exporting a sheet to another file format, a user may be able to surpass the protection features. There is only one secure protection: the password that you can apply when saving an OpenDocument file. A file that has been saved with a password can be opened only with the same password. + + + Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. + + + Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. + + + Select the protection options that you want. All options will be applied only after you protect the sheet from the Tools menu - see below. + Uncheck Protected to allow the user to change the currently selected cells. + Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. + Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. + Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the protection options. + To protect the cells from being changed, viewed or printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Sheet. + To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure. + + + (Optional) Enter a password. + If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5039c927f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + Unprotecting Cells + /text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp + + + +cell protection; unprotecting + protecting; unprotecting cells + unprotecting cells + +Unprotecting Cells + + + + Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. + + + Select Tools - Protect Sheet or Tools - Protect Spreadsheet Structure to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. + + + If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. + + + The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23d1a612d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Only Copy Visible Cells + /text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp + + + +cells; copying/deleting/formatting/moving + rows;visible and invisible + copying; visible cells only + formatting;visible cells only + moving;visible cells only + deleting;visible cells only + invisible cells + filters;copying visible cells only + hidden cells +mw changed "cells;" +Only Copy Visible Cells + + Assume you have hidden a few rows in a cell range. Now you want to copy, delete, or format only the remaining visible rows. + $[officename] behavior depends on how the cells were made invisible, by a filter or manually. + + + + Method and Action + + + Result + + + + + Cells were filtered by AutoFilters, standard filters or advanced filters. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + + + Only the visible cells of the selection are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. + + + + + Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. + Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. + + + By default, all cells of the selection, including the hidden cells, are copied, deleted, moved, or formatted. Restrict the selection to visible rows choosing Edit - Select - Select Visible Rows Only or to visible columns choosing Edit - Select - Select Visible Columns Only. + + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f687d6da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop + /text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp + + + +drag and drop; referencing cells + cells; referencing by drag and drop + references;inserting by drag and drop + inserting;references, by drag and drop + +Referencing Cells by Drag-and-Drop + + With the help of the Navigator you can reference cells from one sheet to another sheet in the same document or in a different document. The cells can be inserted as a copy, link, or hyperlink. The range to be inserted must be defined with a name in the original file so that it can be inserted in the target file. + + + Open the document that contains the source cells. + + + To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. + + + Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. + + + Open the Navigator. In the lower box of the Navigator select the source file. + + + In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". + + + Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. + + + Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. + + + This method can also be used to insert a range from another sheet of the same document into the current sheet. Select the active document as source in step 4 above. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdd676bc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Referencing a Cell in Another Document + /text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp + + + +sheet references + references; to cells in other sheets/documents + cells; operating in another document + documents;references +mw made "sheet references;" a one level entryMW changed "references;" and added "documents;" +

Referencing Other Sheets +

+ In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet. + In the same way, a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file. +

To Reference a Cell in the Same Document

+ + + Open a new, empty spreadsheet. By default, it has only a single sheet named Sheet1. Add a second sheet clicking on + button to the left of the sheet tab in the bottom (it will be named Sheet2 by default). + + + By way of example, enter the following formula in cell A1 of Sheet1: + + =Sheet2.A1 + + + + Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. + + + If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. + + + When referencing a sheet with name containing spaces, use single quotes around the name: ='Sheet with spaces in name'.A1 + The example uses Calc formula syntax. It is also possible to use Excel A1 or R1C1 formula syntax; this is configured on Formula options page. +

To Reference a Cell in Another Document

+ + + Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. + + + Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. + + + Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. + + + Switch back to the new spreadsheet. In the input line you will now see how $[officename] Calc has added the reference to the formula for you. + The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas, then a hash #, then the name of the sheet of the other document, followed by a point and the name of the cell. + + + Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark. + + + If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells, $[officename] automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells. As a result, the sheet name is preceded with a "$" sign to designate it as an absolute reference. + + + If you examine the name of the other document in this formula, you will notice that it is written as a URL. This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de83a313c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +References to Other Sheets and Referencing URLs +/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp + + + +HTML; in sheet cells +references; URL in cells +cells; Internet references +URL; in Calc +mw deleted "sheet references;" +Referencing URLs + +For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: + + +In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. + + +Choose Sheet - External Links. The External Data dialog appears. + + +Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. +$[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. + + +Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" seconds and click OK. +The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. + + +Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. + + +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7c19604b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Assigning Formats by Formula + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp + + + + + + + formats; assigning by formulas + cell formats; assigning by formulas + STYLE function example + cell styles;assigning by formulas + formulas;assigning cell formats + +mw deleted "applying;" + +Assigning Formats by Formula +The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. +If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + Select all the desired cells. + + + Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. + + + For the Find term, enter: .* + ".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. + + + Enter the following formula in the Replace field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) + The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Find field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. + + + Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. + All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. + + + Click Replace all. + + + +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa738a32d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Conditional Formatting + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp + + + +conditional formatting; cells + cells; conditional formatting + formatting; conditional formatting + styles;conditional styles + cell formats; conditional + random numbers;examples + cell styles; copying + copying; cell styles + tables; copying cell styles +mw deleted "formats;" +Applying Conditional Formatting + + Using the menu command Format - Conditional - Condition, the dialog allows you to define conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. + To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Data - Calculate - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). + With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. + To Define the Conditions + + + Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. + + + Choose Format - Conditional - Condition. + + + Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: + + + Example of Conditional Formatting: Highlighting Totals Above/Under the Average Value + Step1: Generate Number Values + You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. + + + First of all, create a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: + In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). + + + Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. + + + In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. + + + Step 2: Define Cell Styles + The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles window is visible before proceeding. + + + Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. + + + In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, click the Color button and then select a background color. Click OK. + + + In the Styles deck of the Sidebar, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". + + + To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). + + + Step 3: Calculate Average + In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: + + + Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. + + + Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because the Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink icon. + + + Close the Function Wizard with OK. + + + Step 4: Apply Cell Styles + Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: + + + Select all cells with the random numbers. + + + Choose the Format - Conditional - Condition command to open the corresponding dialog. + + + Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". + + + Step 5: Copy Cell Style + To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: + + + Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. + + + Copy the cell to the clipboard. + + + Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. + + + Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. + + + In the Paste area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. Or you can click the Formats only button instead. + + +
+ + + Format - Conditional - Condition +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f158ca75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Highlighting Negative Numbers + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp + + + +negative numbers + numbers; highlighting negative numbers + highlighting;negative numbers + colors;negative numbers + number formats;colors for negative numbers +MW made "negative numbers;" a one level entryMW changed "numbers formats;" and "colors;" +Highlighting Negative Numbers + + You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. + + + Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. + + + On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. + + + The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of RED, enter YELLOW. If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7216360d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Image Anchor in Calc + /text/scalc/guide/change_image_anchor.xhp + + + + +anchor;image +image anchor;in Calc +image anchor in Calc;changing + +

Changing the Anchor of an Image +

+Images are inserted in a Calc spreadsheet anchored to cells by default and do not resize when the cell is moved. +Images can be anchored in three different ways: + + + To Cell: the image will move along with the cell, when copying, sorting or inserting and deleting cells above and on the left of the cell holding the anchor. + + To Cell (resize with cell): the image will move along with the cell. In addition, the image height and width will be resized if the cell holding the anchor is later resized. The aspect ratio of the image follows the later aspect ratio of the cell holding the anchor. + + To Page: the image position in the page is not affected by cells ordering or cells movements. + + +

To Change the anchor of an image

Select the image and choose Format - Anchor, or, on the context menu of the image choose Anchor + The original size of the image and cell is preserved while pasting the entire row or entire column for both To Cell and To Cell (resize with cell) options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d33d46485 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Consolidating Data + /text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp + + + +consolidating data + ranges; combining + combining;cell ranges + tables; combining + data; merging cell ranges + merging;data ranges +mw deleted "values;" +Consolidating Data + + During consolidation, the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place. + To Combine Cell Contents + + + Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. + + + Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. + + + From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. + If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. + + + Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. + + + Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. + + + Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. + If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. + + + Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. + + + Click OK to consolidate the ranges. + + + Additional Settings + Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: + + + Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. + The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. + + + + + Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. + To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. + The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. + + + The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document. If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined, this data will again be available. +
+ Data - Consolidate +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0cbd01f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + Importing and Exporting CSV Files +/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp + + + +number series import +data series import +exporting; tables as text +importing; tables as text +delimited values and files +comma separated files and values +text file import and export +csv files;importing and exporting +tables; importing/exporting as text +text documents; importing to spreadsheets +opening;text csv files +saving;as text csv +MW deleted "importing;text data bases" and copied 4 index entries from scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhpmw added "saving;" and "opening;" +

Opening and Saving Text CSV Files +

+Comma Separated Values (CSV) is a text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. +If the field or cell contains a comma, the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). +

To Open a Text CSV File in Calc

+ + +Choose File - Open. + + +Locate the CSV file that you want to open. +If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. +If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the Filter box + + +Click Open. +The Text Import dialog opens. + + +Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. +You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. +Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. +Check the text delimiter box that matches the character used as text delimiter in the file. In case of an unlisted delimiter, type the character into the input box. + + +Click OK. + + +

To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File

+When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. + + +Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. +Only the current sheet can be exported. + + +Choose File - Save as. + + +In the File name box, enter a name for the file. + + +In the Filter box, select "Text CSV". + + +(Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. +Select Edit filter settings. +In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. +Click OK. + + +Click Save. + + +
+ + +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +Export text files +Import text files +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70edc0b58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Importing and Exporting Text Files + /text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp + + + +csv files;formulas + formulas; importing/exporting as csv files + exporting;formulas as csv files + importing;csv files with formulas +mw deleted "inserting;", copied 4 index entries to scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp, changed "csv files;" and "formulas;" and added 2 index entries +Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas + + Comma separated values (CSV) files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet. Commas, semicolons, or other characters can be used as the field delimiters between the cells. Text strings are put in quotation marks, numbers are written without quotation marks. + To Import a CSV File + + + Choose File - Open. + + + In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. + + + You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. + + + If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. + To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files + + + Click the sheet to be written as a csv file. + + + If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. + If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. + + + Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + + + In the + File type field select the format "Text CSV". + + + Enter a name and click Save. + + + From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. + + + If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again. + + +
+ + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Export text files + Import text files +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0b2f0cb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cells in Currency Format +/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp + + + +currency formats; spreadsheets +cells; currency formats +international currency formats +formats; currency formats in cells +currencies; default currencies +defaults;currency formats +changing;currency formats +mw changed one index entry +Cells in Currency Format + +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon +Icon + in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. +You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select the currency symbol and its position. + + +For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. + + +If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". + + +
+ +Format - Cells - Numbers +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c4d8ffcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Database Ranges + /text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp + + + +tables; database ranges + database ranges; defining + ranges; defining database ranges + defining;database ranges + +Defining a Database Range + + You can define a range of cells in a spreadsheet to use as a database. Each row in this database range corresponds to a database record and each cell in a row corresponds to a database field. You can sort, group, search, and perform calculations on the range as you would in a database. + You can only edit and access a database range in the spreadsheet that contains the range. You cannot access the database range in the %PRODUCTNAME Data Sources view. + To define a database range + + + Select the range of cells that you want to define as a database range. + + + Choose Data - Define Range. + + + In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. + + + Click More. + + + Specify the options for the database range. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2da674b8f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Filtering Cell Ranges + /text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp + + + +cell ranges;applying/removing filters + filtering;cell ranges/database ranges + database ranges;applying/removing filters + removing;cell range filters +MW changed "cell ranges," added "removing;" and made one "database ranges;" entry out of two. Same for "filtering;" +Filtering Cell Ranges + + You can use several filters to filter cell ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. An advanced filter uses filter criteria from specified cells. + To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range + + + Click in a cell range. + + + Choose Data - More Filters - Standard Filter. + + + In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. + + + Click OK. + The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. + + + To Apply an AutoFilter to a Cell Range + + + Click in a cell range or a database range. + If you want to apply multiple AutoFilters to the same sheet, you must first define database ranges, then apply the AutoFilters to the database ranges. + + + Choose Data - AutoFilter. + An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. + + + Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. + + + Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. + The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. + + + To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range + + + Click in a filtered cell range. + + + Choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter. + + +
+ + + + + Wiki page about defining a data range +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e10dd45ca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + Sorting Data + /text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp + + + +database ranges; sorting + sorting; database ranges + data;sorting in databases + +Sorting Data + + + + Click in a database range. + If you select a range of cells, only these cells will get sorted. If you just click one cell without selecting, then the whole database range will get sorted. + + + Choose Data - Sort. + The range of cells that will get sorted is shown in inverted colors. + + + Select the sort options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + Wiki page about defining a data range +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6391a629e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Pivot Table +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp + + + +pivot table function; introduction +DataPilot, see pivot table function + +

Pivot Table +

+The pivot table (formerly known as DataPilot) allows you to combine, compare, and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, you can display the details of areas of interest, and you can create reports. +A table that has been created as a pivot table is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92a25abd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Pivot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp + + + +pivot tables + pivot table function; calling up and applying + +

Creating Pivot Tables +

+ + + Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. + + + Choose Insert - Pivot Table. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the Pivot Table dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Filters", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". + + + Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. + + + Drag a button to the Filters area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated pivot table to use another page field as a filter. + If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. + + + By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. + + + Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the CommandCtrl key while clicking the desired calculation. + + + + + The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. + + + Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. + + + To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. + + + Exit the Pivot Table dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Filters area. The pivot table is inserted further down. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29e849cb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting Pivot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp + + + +pivot table function; deleting tables + deleting;pivot tables + +

Deleting Pivot Tables +

+ In order to delete a pivot table, click any cell in the pivot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. + If you delete a pivot table linked to a pivot chart, the pivot chart is also deleted. A dialog box opens to confirm the pivot chart deletion. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab0385e56 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Pivot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp + + + +pivot table function; editing tables +editing;pivot tables + +

Editing Pivot Tables +

+ Click one of the buttons in the pivot table and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. + By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. + In the Pivot Table dialog, you can drag a button to the Filters area to create a button and a listbox on top of the pivot table. The listbox can be used to filter the pivot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the pivot table to use another page field as a filter. + To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the pivot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. + To edit the pivot table, click a cell inside the pivot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Properties, which displays the Pivot Table Layout dialog for the current pivot table. + In the pivot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. + You can assign custom display names to fields, field members, subtotals (with some restrictions), and grand totals inside pivot tables. A custom display name is assigned to an item by overwriting the original name with another name. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b39683ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + +Filtering Pivot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp + + + + +pivot table function; filtering tables +filtering;pivot tables + +

Filtering Pivot Tables

+You can use filters to remove unwanted data from a pivot table. +Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions. Alternatively, call up the context menu of the pivot table and select the Filter command. The Filter dialog appears. Here you can filter the pivot table. +You can also click the arrow on a button in the pivot table to show a pop-up window. In this pop-up window, you can edit the visibility settings of the associated field. + + +The pop-up window displays a list of field members associated with that field. A check box is placed to the left of each field member name. When a field has an alternative display name that differs from its original name, that name is displayed in the list. + + +Enable or disable a checkbox to show or hide the associated field member in the pivot table. + + +Enable or disable the All checkbox to show all or none of the field members. + + +Select a field member in the pop-up window and click the Show only the current item button to show only the selected field member. All other field members are hidden in the pivot table. + + +Select a field member in the pop-up window and click the Hide only the current item button to hide only the selected field member. All other field members are shown in the pivot table. + + +Commands enable you to sort the field members in ascending order, descending order, or using a custom sort list. + + +To edit the custom sort lists, open %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + + +The arrow to open the pop-up window is normally black. When the field contains one or more hidden field members, the arrow is blue and displays a tiny square at its lower-right corner. + + +You can also open the pop-up window by positioning the cell cursor at the button and pressing Command +Ctrl+D. + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..820623004 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Pivot Tables + /text/scalc/guide/datapilot_formatting.xhp + + + +
+ + formatting;pivot tables + +

Formatting Pivot Tables

+ You can format pivot tables cells using specific cell styles. +
+ Direct formatting of pivot tables cells is lost when updating or editing the table. + When creating a pivot table, six new cell styles are added to your document. Format each cell style as needed. The customization of the pivot cell styles will be preserved when updating the pivot table. + By using cell styles for pivot table formatting, all pivot tables cells in the spreadsheet document will have the same look. In other words, the pivot table cell styles apply to all pivot tables of the document. + The six cell styles are: + + + Pivot Table Categories + + + Pivot Table Corner + + + Pivot Table Field + + + Pivot Table Result + + + Pivot Table Value + + + Pivot Table Title + + + The number format of these cell styles cannot be changed in the cell style itself; you must format it in the data source. + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..174101cfe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Grouping Pivot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_grouping.xhp + + + +grouping; pivot tables +pivot table function;grouping table entries +ungrouping entries in pivot tables + +

Grouping Pivot Tables +

see http://specs.openoffice.org/calc/compatibility/grouping.sxwThe resulting pivot table can contain many different entries. By grouping the entries, you can improve the visible result. + + +Select a cell or range of cells in the pivot table. + + +Choose Data - Group and Outline - Group. + + +Depending on the format of the selected cells, either a new group field is added to the pivot table, or you see one of the two Grouping dialogs, either for numeric values, or for date values. +The pivot table must be organized in a way that grouping can be applied. + + +To remove a grouping, click inside the group, then choose Data - Group and Outline - Ungroup. + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9966532b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Selecting Pivot Table Output Ranges +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_tipps.xhp + + + +pivot table function; preventing data overwriting +output ranges of pivot tables + +

Selecting Pivot Table Output Ranges +

+Click the button More in the Pivot Table dialog. The dialog will be extended. +You can select a named range in which the pivot table is to be created, from the Results to box. If the results range does not have a name, enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the range into the field to the right of the Results to box. You can also click on the appropriate cell to have the coordinates entered accordingly. +If you mark the Ignore empty rows check box, they will not be taken into account when the pivot table is created. +If the Identify categories check box is marked, the categories will be identified by their headings and assigned accordingly when the pivot table is created. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d9beea68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Updating Pivot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_updatetable.xhp + + + +pivot table import +pivot table function; refreshing tables +recalculating;pivot tables +updating;pivot tables + +

Updating Pivot Tables +

+If the data of the source sheet has been changed, $[officename] recalculates the pivot table. To recalculate the table, choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. Do the same after you have imported an Excel pivot table into $[officename] Calc. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79f3c9802 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Importing and Exporting dBASE Files + /text/scalc/guide/dbase_files.xhp + + + +exporting;spreadsheets to dBASE + importing;dBASE files + dBASE import/export + spreadsheets; importing from/exporting to dBASE files + tables in databases;importing dBASE files +mw changed "database tables;" to "tables in databases;" and reduced "spreadsheets;" from two to one entry +Importing and Exporting dBASE Files + + You can open and save data in the dBASE file format (*.dbf file extension) in $[officename] Base or a spreadsheet. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, a dBASE database is a folder that contains files with the .dbf file extension. Each file corresponds to a table in the database. Formulas and formatting are lost when you open and save a dBASE file from %PRODUCTNAME. + To Import a dBASE File Into a Spreadsheet + + + Choose File - Open. + + + Locate the *.dbf file that you want to import. + + + Click Open. + The Import dBASE files dialog opens. + + + Click OK. + The dBASE file opens as a new Calc spreadsheet. + If you want to save the spreadsheet as a dBASE file, do not alter or delete the first row in the imported file. This row contains information that is required by a dBASE database. + + + To Import a dBASE File Into a Database Table + A %PRODUCTNAME Base database table is actually a link to an existing database. + + + Choose File - New - Database. + + + In the File name box of the Save As dialog, enter a name for the database. + + + Click Save. + + + In the Database type box of the Database Properties dialog, select "dBASE". + + + Click Next. + + + Click Browse. + + + Locate the directory that contains the dBASE file, and click OK. + + + Click Create. + + + To Save a Spreadsheet as a dBASE File + + + Choose File - Save As. + + + In the File format box, select "dBASE file". + + + In the File name box, type a name for the dBASE file. + + + Click Save. + + + Only the data on the current sheet is exported. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0674f5353 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Selecting Themes for Sheets +/text/scalc/guide/design.xhp + + + + + + +theme selection for sheets +layout;spreadsheets +cell styles; selecting +selecting;formatting themes +sheets;formatting themes +formats;themes for sheets +formatting;themes for sheets + + mw deleted "applying;" + Selecting Themes for Sheets + + $[officename] Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets. + It is not possible to add themes to Calc, and they cannot be modified. However, you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet. + Before you format a sheet with a theme, you have to apply at least one custom cell style to the cells on the sheet. You can then change the cell formatting by selecting and applying a theme in the Theme Selection dialog. + To apply a custom cell style to a cell, you can open the Styles window and, in its lower list box, set the Custom Styles view. A list of the existing custom defined cell styles will be displayed. Double click a name from the Styles window to apply this style to the selected cells. + To apply a theme to a spreadsheet: + + + Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools bar. + + The Theme Selection dialog appears. This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet and the Styles window lists the custom styles for specific cells. + + + In the Theme Selection dialog, select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet. + + + Click OK + As soon as you select another theme in the Theme Selection dialog, some of the properties of the custom style will be applied to the current spreadsheet. The modifications will be immediately visible in your spreadsheet. + + +
+ + + Theme selection + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e889dc392 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Copying to Multiple Sheets + /text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp + + + + +copying;values, to multiple sheets +pasting;values in multiple sheets +data;inserting in multiple sheets +sheets; simultaneous multiple filling + + mw moved "multiple sheets" and "selecting;" to multitables.xhp, transferred "sheets;" from there and deleted "sheets;transferring.." +Copying to Multiple Sheets + In $[officename] Calc, you can insert values, text or formulas that are simultaneously copied to other selected sheets of your document. + + + Select all desired sheets by holding down the CommandCtrl key and clicking the corresponding register tabs that are still gray at the bottom margin of the workspace. All selected register tabs are now white. + You can use Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. + + + Now when you insert values, text or formulas into the active sheet, they will also appear in the identical positions in the other selected sheets. For example, data entered in cell "A1" of the active sheet is automatically entered into cell "A1" of any other selected sheet. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb120422e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Filters + /text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp + + + +filters; applying/removing + rows;removing/redisplaying with filters + removing;filters + +Applying Filters + + Filters and advanced filters allow you to work on certain filtered rows (records) of a data range. In the spreadsheets in $[officename] there are various possibilities for applying filters. + + + One use for the AutoFilter function is to quickly restrict the display to records with identical entries in a data field. + + + In the Standard Filter dialog, you can also define ranges which contain the values in particular data fields. You can use the standard filter to connect the conditions with either a logical AND or a logical OR operator. + + + The Advanced filter allows up to a total of eight filter conditions. With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet. + + + To remove a filter, so that you see all cells again, click inside the area where the filter was applied, then choose Data - Filter - Reset Filter. + When you select multiple rows from an area where a filter was applied, then this selection can include rows that are visible and rows that are hidden by the filter. If you then apply formatting, or delete the selected rows, this action then applies only to the visible rows. The hidden rows are not affected. + This is the opposite to rows that you have hidden manually by the Format - Rows - Hide Rows command. Manually hidden rows are deleted when you delete a selection that contains them. +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc55cf5c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + +Finding and Replacing in Calc +/text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp + + + +
+searching, see also finding +finding;formulas/values/text/objects +replacing; cell contents +formatting;multiple cell texts +2. mw deleted 2 entries, changed "finding;" and added "formatting;"1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and changed then "finding," and "replacing;" +Finding and Replacing in Calc + +In spreadsheet documents you can find words, formulas, and styles. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all matching cells at once, then apply another format or replace the cell content by other content. +
+The Find & Replace dialog +Cells can contain text or numbers that were entered directly as in a text document. But cells can also contain text or numbers as the result of a calculation. For example, if a cell contains the formula =1+2 it displays the result 3. You must decide whether to search for the 1 respective 2, or to search the 3. +To find formulas or values +You can specify in the Find & Replace dialog either to find the parts of a formula or the results of a calculation. + + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + +Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + +Select "Formulas" or "Values" in the Search in list box. + + +With "Formulas" you will find all parts of the formulas. +With "Values" you will find the results of the calculations. +Cell contents can be formatted in different ways. For example, a number can be formatted as a currency, to be displayed with a currency symbol. These symbols are included in searches when the Formatted Display search option is activated. +Finding text + + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + +Enter the text to find in the Find text box. + + +Either click Find Next or Find All. + + +When you click Find Next, Calc will select the next cell that contains your text. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found cell. + + +If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (CommandCtrl+Shift+F) to find the next cell without opening the dialog. + + +By default, Calc searches the current sheet. Check the All sheets box to search through all sheets of the document. + + +When you click Find All, Calc selects all cells that contain your entry. Now you can for example set all found cells to bold, or apply a Cell Style to all at once. +The Navigator + + +Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + + +The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. +Use the Navigator for inserting objects and links within the same document or from other open documents. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d3892675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Formatting Spreadsheets +/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp + + + +text in cells; formatting +spreadsheets;formatting +backgrounds;cells and pages +borders;cells and pages +formatting;spreadsheets +numbers; formatting options for selected cells +cells; number formats +currencies;formats +mw transferred 2 entries from shared/01/05020300.xhp and added 2 new entriesmw deleted "defaults;" +Formatting Spreadsheets + +Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet + + +Select the text you want to format. + + +Choose the desired text attributes from the Formatting Bar. You can also choose Format - Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page. + + +Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet + + +Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format. + + +To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages, use the icons on the Formatting Bar. For other formats, choose Format - Cells. You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page. + + +Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages + + +You can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells (for multiple selection, hold down the CommandCtrl key when clicking), and then activating the Format Cells dialog in Format - Cells. In this dialog, you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds. + + +To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet, choose Format - Page. You can define headers and footers, for example, to appear on each printed page. + + +An image that you have loaded with Format - Page - Background is only visible in print or in the print preview. To display a background image on screen as well, insert the graphic image by choosing Insert - Image - From File and arrange the image behind the cells by choosing Format - Arrange - To Background. Use the Navigator to select the background image. +
+ +Number Formatting Options +Backgrounds for Cells +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..852f4b26a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + + Formatting Numbers With Decimals + /text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp + + + +numbers;formatting decimals + formats; numbers in tables + tables; number formats + defaults; number formats in spreadsheets + decimal places;formatting numbers + formatting;numbers with decimals + formatting;adding/deleting decimal places + number formats; adding/deleting decimal places in cells + deleting; decimal places + decimal places; adding/deleting +mw changed "numbers;" +Formatting Numbers With Decimals + + Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. + To format numbers with decimals: + + + Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. + + + On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. + + + + + + +Icon + + + + If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Formatting Bar. + + +
+ +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e3a94932 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + User-defined Number Formats + /text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp + + + +numbers;user-defined formatting + formatting; user-defined numbers + number formats; millions + format codes; user-defined number formats +mw changed "numbers;" +User-defined Number Formats + + You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: + + + Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. + + + Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. + + + In the Categories list box select "User-defined". + + + In the Format code text box enter the following code: + 0.0,, "Million" + + + Click OK. + + + The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. + + + + Number + + + .#,, "Million" + + + 0.0,, "Million" + + + #,, "Million" + + + + + 10200000 + + + 10.2 Million + + + 10.2 Million + + + 10 Million + + + + + 500000 + + + .5 Million + + + 0.5 Million + + + 1 Million + + + + + 100000000 + + + 100. Million + + + 100.0 Million + + + 100 Million + + +
+ +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a1fe693d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copying Formulas +/text/scalc/guide/formula_copy.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formulas; copying and pasting +copying; formulas +pasting;formulas +mw added "pasting;" and changed "formulas;" +Copying Formulas + +
+There are various ways to copy a formula. One suggested method is: + + +Select the cell containing the formula. + + +Choose Edit - Copy, or press CommandCtrl+C to copy it. + + +Select the cell into which you want the formula to be copied. + + +Choose Edit - Paste, or press CommandCtrl+V. The formula will be positioned in the new cell. + + +If you want to copy a formula into multiple cells, there is a quick and easy way to copy into adjacent cell areas: + + +Select the cell containing the formula. + + +Position the mouse on the bottom right of the highlighted border of the cell, and continue holding down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol. + + +With the mouse button pressed, drag it down or to the right over all the cells into which you want to copy the formula. + + +When you release the mouse button, the formula will be copied into the cells and automatically adjusted. + + +If you do not want values and texts to be automatically adjusted, then hold down the CommandCtrl key when dragging. Formulas, however, are always adjusted accordingly. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ea5acb80 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entering Formulas +/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp + + + +formula bar; input line +input line in formula bar +formulas; inputting +inserting;formulas + +Entering Formulas + +You can enter formulas in several ways: using the icons, or by typing on the keyboard, or by a mixture of both methods. + + +Click the cell in which you want to enter the formula. + + +Click the Function icon on the Formula Bar. +You will now see an equals sign in the input line and you can begin to input the formula. + + +After entering the required values, press Enter or click Accept to insert the result in the active cell. If you want to clear your entry in the input line, press Escape or click Cancel. + + +You can also enter the values and the formulas directly into the cells, even if you cannot see an input cursor. Formulas must always begin with an equals sign. +You can also press the + or - key on the numerical keyboard to start a formula. NumLock must be "on". For example, press the following keys in succession: ++ 5 0 - 8 Enter +You see the result 42 in the cell. The cell contains the formula =+50-8. +If you are editing a formula with references, the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color. You can now resize the reference border using the mouse, and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes. Show references in color can be deactivated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +If you would like to view the calculation of individual elements of a formula, select the respective elements and press F9. For example, in the formula =SUM(A1:B12)*SUM(C1:D12) select the section SUM(C1:D12) and press F9 to view the subtotal for this area. + +If an error occurs when creating the formula, an error message appears in the active cell. +
+ +Formula bar + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e125921f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Displaying Formulas or Values +/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formulas; displaying in cells +values; displaying in tables +tables; displaying formulas/values +results display vs. formulas display +displaying; formulas instead of results +mw inserted "displaying;..." entry from shared/optionen/01060100.xhp. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. mw made "results;..." a two level entry. +Displaying Formulas or Values + +If you want to display the formulas in the cells, for example in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + + +In the Display area mark the Formulas box. Click OK. + + +If you want to view the calculation results instead of the formula, do not mark the Formulas box. +
+%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..acc8ae6b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Calculating With Formulas +/text/scalc/guide/formulas.xhp + + + +formulas;calculating with +calculating; with formulas +examples;formula calculation +Calculating With Formulas + +All formulas begin with an equals sign. The formulas can contain numbers, text, arithmetic operators, logic operators, or functions. +Remember that the basic arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) can be used in formulas using the "Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction" rule. Instead of writing =SUM(A1:B1) you can write =A1+B1. +Parentheses can also be used. The result of the formula =(1+2)*3 produces a different result than =1+2*3. +Here are a few examples of $[officename] Calc formulas: + + + +=A1+10 + + +Displays the contents of cell A1 plus 10. + + + + +=A1*16% + + +Displays 16% of the contents of A1. + + + + +=A1 * A2 + + +Displays the result of the multiplication of A1 and A2. + + + + +=ROUND(A1;1) + + +Displays the contents of cell A1 rounded to one decimal place. + + + + +=EFFECTIVE(5%;12) + + +Calculates the effective interest for 5% annual nominal interest with 12 payments a year. + + + + +=B8-SUM(B10:B14) + + +Calculates B8 minus the sum of the cells B10 to B14. + + + + +=SUM(B8;SUM(B10:B14)) + + +Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8. + + +
+It is also possible to nest functions in formulas, as shown in the example. You can also nest functions within functions. The Function Wizard assists you with nested functions. +
+ +Functions list +Function Wizard +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3917bafb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entering Fractions +/text/scalc/guide/fraction_enter.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +fractions; entering +numbers; entering fractions +inserting;fractions + +Entering Fractions + +
+You can enter a fractional number in a cell and use it for calculation: + + +Enter "0 1/5" in a cell (without the quotation marks) and press the input key. In the input line above the spreadsheet you will see the value 0.2, which is used for the calculation. + + +If you enter “0 1/2” AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1, / and 2 to be replaced by a single character, ½. The same applies to 1/4 and 3/4. This replacement is defined in Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options tab. +If you want to see multi-digit fractions such as "1/10", you must change the cell format to the multi-digit fraction view. Open the context menu of the cell, and choose Format cells. Select "Fraction" from the Category field, and then select "-1234 10/81". You can then enter fractions such as 12/31 or 12/32 - the fractions are, however, automatically reduced, so that in the last example you would see 3/8. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69a77fb33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Applying Goal Seek +/text/scalc/guide/goalseek.xhp + + + +goal seeking;example +equations in goal seek +calculating;variables in equations +variables;calculating equations +examples;goal seek +mw changed "goal seek example" to "goal seeking;" +Applying Goal Seek + +With the help of Goal Seek you can calculate a value that, as part of a formula, leads to the result you specify for the formula. You thus define the formula with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula. +Goal Seek Example +To calculate annual interest (I), create a table with the values for the capital (C), number of years (n), and interest rate (i). The formula is: +I = C * n* i +Let us assume that the interest rate i of 7.5% and the number of years n (1) will remain constant. However, you want to know how much the investment capital C would have to be modified in order to attain a particular return I. For this example, calculate how much capital C would be required if you want an annual return of $15,000. +Enter each of the values for Capital C (an arbitrary value like $100,000), number of years n (1), and interest rate i (7.5%) in one cell each. Enter the formula to calculate the interest I in another cell. Instead of C, n, and i use the reference to the cell with the corresponding value. + + +Place the cursor in the cell containing the interest I, and choose Tools - Goal Seek. The Goal Seek dialog appears. + + +The correct cell is already entered in the field Formula Cell. + + +Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell. In the sheet, click in the cell that contains the value to be changed, in this example it is the cell with the capital value C. + + +Enter the expected result of the formula in the Target Value text box. In this example, the value is 15,000. Click OK. + + +A dialog appears informing you that the Goal Seek was successful. Click Yes to enter the result in the cell with the variable value. + + +
+Goal Seek +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a98b9e9e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML +/text/scalc/guide/html_doc.xhp + + + +HTML; sheets +sheets; HTML +saving; sheets in HTML +opening; sheets in HTML + +Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML + +Saving Sheets in HTML + +%PRODUCTNAME Calc saves all the sheets of a Calc document together as an HTML document. At the beginning of the HTML document, a heading and a list of hyperlinks are automatically added which lead to the individual sheets within the document. +Numbers are shown as written. In addition, in the <SDVAL> HTML tag, the exact internal number value is written so that after opening the HTML document with %PRODUCTNAME you know you have the exact values. + + +To save the current Calc document as HTML, choose File - Save As. + + +In the File type list box, in the area with the other %PRODUCTNAME Calc filters, choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)". + + +Enter a File name and click Save. + + +Opening Sheets in HTML + +%PRODUCTNAME offers various filters for opening HTML files, which you can select under File - Open in the Files of type list box: + + +Choose the file type "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Calc)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +All %PRODUCTNAME Calc options are now available to you. However, not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Calc offers for editing can be saved in HTML format. + + +
+ + + +File - Open +File - Save As +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8380d830b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + /text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp + + + + + + + zero values; entering leading zeros + numbers; with leading zeros + leading zeros + integers with leading zeros + cells; changing text/number formats + formats; changing text/number + text in cells; changing to numbers + converting;text with leading zeros, into numbers + +UFI: inserted "converting;text to numbers"mw changed "converting;" and deleted "numbers,changing..." + +Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + +
+There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero: + + + + Enter the number as text. The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe (for example, '0987). The apostrophe will not appear in the cell, and the number will be formatted as text. Because it is in text format, however, you cannot calculate with this number. + + + Format a cell with a number format such as \0000. This format can be assigned in the Format code field under the Format - Cells - Numbers tab, and defines the cell display as "always put a zero first and then the integer, having at least three places, and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits". + + +If you want to apply a numerical format to a column of numbers in text format (for example, text "000123" becomes number "123"), do the following: + + + + Select the column in which the digits are found in text format. Set the cell format in that column as "Number". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace + + + In the Find box, enter ^[0-9] + + + In the Replace box, enter & + + + Check Regular expressions + + + Check Current selection only + + + Click Replace All + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e827a77a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shortcut Keys (%PRODUCTNAME Calc Accessibility) +/text/scalc/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME Calc shortcuts +shortcut keys;%PRODUCTNAME Calc accessibility + +Shortcut Keys (%PRODUCTNAME Calc Accessibility) + +Refer also to the lists of shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME in general. + +Cell Selection Mode + + + + +Icon + + + +In a text box that has a button to minimize the dialog, press F2 to enter the cell selection mode. Select any number of cells, then press F2 again to show the dialog. + + +
+ +In the cell selection mode, you can use the common navigation keys to select cells. +Controlling the Outline +You can use the keyboard in Outline: + + +Press F6 or Shift+F6 until the vertical or horizontal outline window has the focus. + + + +Tab - cycle through all visible buttons from top to bottom or from left to right. + + + +Shift+Tab - cycle through all visible buttons in the opposite direction. + + + +Command+1 to Command+8Ctrl+1 to Ctrl+8 - show all levels up to the specified number; hide all higher levels. + + +Use + or - to show or hide the focused outline group. + + +Press Enter to activate the focused button. + + +Use Up, Down, Left, or Right arrow to cycle through all buttons in the current level. + + +Selecting a Drawing Object or a Graphic + + +Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. + + +Press F6 until the Drawing toolbar is selected. + + +If the selection tool is active, press CommandCtrl+Enter. This selects the first drawing object or graphic in the sheet. + + +With CommandCtrl+F6 you set the focus to the document. +Now you can use Tab to select the next drawing object or graphic and Shift+Tab to select the previous one. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..688669bad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers + /text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp + + + + + + + tables; freezing + title rows; freezing during table split + rows; freezing + columns; freezing + freezing rows or columns + headers; freezing during table split + scrolling prevention in tables + windows; splitting + tables; splitting windows + + + +

Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers

+If you have long rows or columns of data that extend beyond the viewable area of the sheet, you can freeze some rows or columns, which allows you to see the frozen columns or rows as you scroll through the rest of the data. + + + + Select the row below, or the column to the right of the row or column that you want to be in the frozen region. All rows above, or all columns to the left of the selection are frozen. + To freeze both horizontally and vertically, select the cell that is below the row and to the right of the column that you want to freeze. + + + Choose View - Freeze Rows and Columns. + To deactivate, choose View - Freeze Rows and Columns again. + + +If the area defined is to be scrollable, apply the View - Split Window command. +If you want to print a certain row on all pages of a document, choose Format - Print ranges - Edit. + +
+View - Freeze Rows and Columns +View - Split Window + +Format - Print ranges - Edit +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..771a35c2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp + + + +HowTos for Calc +instructions; $[officename] Calc +MWdeleted one entry and added oneInstructions for Using $[officename] Calc + + +Formatting Tables and Cells + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Entering Values and Formulas + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Entering Referencesmw deleted link to Calc guide address_byname.xhp + + + + + + + + +Database Ranges in Tables + + + +Advanced Calculations + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printing and Print Preview + + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Documents + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab777c706 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Selecting Multiple Cells + /text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp + + + +cells; selecting + marking cells + selecting;cells + multiple cells selection + selection modes in spreadsheets + tables; selecting ranges +mw changed "selection modes..." +Selecting Multiple Cells + + Select a rectangular range + With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. + Mark a single cell + Do one of the following: + + + Click, then Shift-click the cell. + + + Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. Release the mouse button. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. + + + Select various dispersed cells + Do one of the following: + + + Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing Command +Ctrl, click each of the additional cells. + + + Click the STD / EXT / ADD area in the status bar until it shows ADD. Now click all cells that you want to select. + + + Switch marking mode + On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: + + + + Field contents + + + Effect of clicking the mouse + + + + + STD + + + A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. + + + + + EXT + + + A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. Alternatively, Shift-click a cell. + + + + + ADD + + + A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Command +Ctrl-click the cells. + + +
+ +
+ Status bar +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8766483f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entering Matrix Formulas +/text/scalc/guide/matrixformula.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +matrices; entering matrix formulas +formulas; matrix formulas +inserting;matrix formulas + +Entering Matrix Formulas + +The following is an example of how you can enter a matrix formula, without going into the details of matrix functions. +Assume you have entered 10 numbers in Columns A and B (A1:A10 and B1:B10), and would like to calculate the sum of each row in Column C. + + +Using the mouse, select the range C1:C10, in which the results are to be displayed. + + +Press F2, or click in the input line of the Formula bar. + + +Enter an equal sign (=). + + +Select the range A1:A10, which contains the first values for the sum formula. + + +Press the (+) key from the numerical keypad. + + +Select the numbers in the second column in cells B1:B10. + + +End the input with the matrix key combination: Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. + + +The matrix area is automatically protected against modifications, such as deleting rows or columns. It is, however, possible to edit any formatting, such as the cell background. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a89af2096 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + +Moving Cells by Drag-and-Drop +/text/scalc/guide/move_dragdrop.xhp + + + +drag and drop; moving cells +cells; moving by drag and drop +rows;moving by drag and drop +columns;moving by drag and drop +moving;cells, rows and columns by drag and drop +inserting;cells, by drag and drop +mw added "columns;" +Moving Cells by Drag-and-Drop + +When you drag-and-drop a selection of cells, rows or columns on a Calc sheet, the cells (including the ones in selected rows or columns) normally overwrite the existing cells in the area where you drop. This is the normal overwrite mode. +Note that to drag-and-drop entire rows or columns, you must select the rows or columns you want to move (or copy) first, then start dragging from selected cells, not from the row or column headers (cells would be deselected by this). +When you hold down the OptionAlt key while releasing the mouse button, you enter the insert mode. + + +In insert mode, the existing cells where you drop will be shifted to the right or to the bottom, and the dropped cells are inserted into the now empty positions without overwriting. + + +The surrounding box of the moved cells looks different in insert mode. +In overwrite mode you see all four borders around the selected area. In insert mode you see only the left border when target cells will be shifted to the right. You see only the upper border when target cells will be shifted down. +Whether the target area will be shifted to the right or to the bottom depends on the distance between source and target cells, if you move within the same sheet. It depends on the number of horizontal or vertical cells in the moved area, if you move to a different sheet. + + +If you move cells in insert mode within the same row (only horizontally), then after insertion of the cells, all cells will be shifted to the left to fill the source area. + + +In both modes, you can hold down the CommandCtrl key, or CommandCtrl+Shift keys while you release the mouse button to insert a copy or a link, respectively. + + + +Keys pressed while releasing the mouse button + + +Result + + + + +No key + + +Cells are moved and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells are emptied. + + + + +CommandCtrl key + + +Cells are copied and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. + + + + +CommandCtrl+Shift keys + + +Links to the source cells are inserted and overwrite the cells in the target area. Source cells stay as they are. + + + + +OptionAlt key + + +Cells are moved and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells are emptied, except if you move within the same rows on the same sheet. +If you move within the same rows on the same sheet, the cells in the target area shift to the right, and then the whole row shifts to fill the source area. + + + + +Option+Command Alt+Ctrl keys + + +Cells are copied and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are. + + + + +Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Shift keys + + +Links to the source cells are inserted and shift the cells in the target area to the right or to the bottom. Source cells stay as they are. + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54efa74b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Navigating Through Sheets Tabs +/text/scalc/guide/multi_tables.xhp + + + + + + +sheets; showing multiple +sheet tabs;using +views;multiple sheets + + Navigating Through Sheet Tabs + + By default $[officename] displays three sheets "Sheet1" to "Sheet3", in each new spreadsheet. You can switch between sheets in a spreadsheet using the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. + +Sheet Tabs + + + + + + + +Icon + + + + Use the navigation buttons to display all the sheets belonging to your document. Clicking the button on the far left or the far right displays, respectively, the first or last sheet tab. The middle buttons allow the user to scroll forward and backward through all sheet tabs. To display the sheet itself click on the sheet tab. + + +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a4a8e0e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + +Applying Multiple Operations +/text/scalc/guide/multioperation.xhp + + + +multiple operations +what if operations;two variables +tables; multiple operations in +data tables; multiple operations in +cross-classified tables +mw made "what if operations" a two level entry +

Applying Multiple Operations +

+

Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows

+The Data - Multiple Operations command provides a planning tool for "what if" questions. In your spreadsheet, you enter a formula to calculate a result from values that are stored in other cells. Then, you set up a cell range where you enter some fixed values, and the Multiple Operations command will calculate the results depending on the formula. +In the Formulas field, enter the cell reference to the formula that applies to the data range. In the Column input cell/Row input cell field, enter the cell reference to the corresponding cell that is part of the formula. This can be explained best by examples: +

Examples

+You produce toys which you sell for $10 each. Each toy costs $2 to make, in addition to which you have fixed costs of $10,000 per year. How much profit will you make in a year if you sell a particular number of toys? + +what-if sheet area +

Calculating With One Formula and One Variable

+ + +To calculate the profit, first enter any number as the quantity (items sold) - in this example 2000. The profit is found from the formula Profit=Quantity * (Selling price - Direct costs) - Fixed costs. Enter this formula in B5. + + +In column D enter given annual sales, one below the other; for example, 500 to 5000, in steps of 500. + + +Select the range D2:E11, and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E. + + +Choose Data - Multiple operations. + + +With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. + + +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the variable in the formula, which is replaced by the selected column values. + + +Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different quantities in column E. + + +

Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously

+ + +Delete column E. + + +Enter the following formula in C5: = B5 / B4. You are now calculating the annual profit per item sold. + + +Select the range D2:F11, thus three columns. + + +Choose Data - Multiple Operations. + + +With the cursor in the Formulas field, select cells B5 thru C5. + + +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click cell B4. + + +Close the dialog with OK. You will now see the profits in column E and the annual profit per item in column F. + + +

Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns

+ +%PRODUCTNAME allows you to carry out joint multiple operations for columns and rows in so-called cross-tables. The formula cell has to refer to both the data range arranged in rows and the one arranged in columns. Select the range defined by both data ranges and call the multiple operation dialog. Enter the reference to the formula in the Formulas field. The Row input cell and the Column input cell fields are used to enter the reference to the corresponding cells of the formula. +

Calculating with Two Variables

+Consider columns A and B of the sample table above. You now want to vary not just the quantity produced annually, but also the selling price, and you are interested in the profit in each case. +Expand the table shown above. D2 thru D11 contain the numbers 500, 1000 and so on, up to 5000. In E1 through H1 enter the numbers 8, 10, 15 and 20. + + +Select the range D1:H11. + + +Choose Data - Multiple Operations. + + +With the cursor in the Formulas field, click cell B5. + + +Set the cursor in the Row input cell field and click cell B1. This means that B1, the selling price, is the horizontally entered variable (with the values 8, 10, 15 and 20). + + +Set the cursor in the Column input cell field and click in B4. This means that B4, the quantity, is the vertically entered variable. + + +Close the dialog with OK. You see the profits for the different selling prices in the range E2:H11. + + +
+Multiple operations + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7061c99dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Multiple Sheets + /text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp + + + +sheets; inserting + inserting; sheets + sheets; selecting multiple + appending sheets + selecting;multiple sheets + multiple sheets + calculating;multiple sheets +MW moved "sheets;simultaneous.." to edit_multitables.xhp, transferred 2 entries from there and added "calculating;" +Applying Multiple Sheets + + Inserting a Sheet + + + Choose Insert - Sheet to insert a new sheet or an existing sheet from another file. + + + +Sheet Events +Opens a dialog box where you can assign macros to sheet events. + +Tab Color + +Opens a window where you can assign a color to the sheet tab. + + +Click to select all sheets in the document. + +Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet. + Selecting Multiple Sheets + The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs. The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected. By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing CommandCtrl you can select multiple sheets. + You can use Shift+Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. + Undoing a Selection + To undo the selection of a sheet, click its sheet tab again while pressing the CommandCtrl key. The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection. + Calculating Across Multiple Sheets + You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range, for example, =SUM(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.A1) sums up all A1 cells on Sheet1 through Sheet3. + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca75f649c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting and Editing Comments + /text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp + + + +comments; on cells + cells;comments + remarks on cells + formatting;comments on cells + viewing;comments on cells + displaying; comments +MW deleted double index "comments;on cells" and copied "displaying;comments" from shared/optionen/01060100.xhp +Inserting and Editing Comments + +You can assign a comment to each cell by choosing Insert - Comment. The comment is indicated by a small red square, the comment indicator, in the cell. + + +The comment is visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell. + + +When you select the cell, you can choose Show Comment from the context menu of the cell. Doing so keeps the comment visible until you deactivate the Show Comment command from the same context menu. + + +To edit a permanently visible comment, just click in it. If you delete the entire text of the comment, the comment itself is deleted. + + +Move or resize each comment as you like. + + +Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. + + +To show or hide the comment indicator, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. + + +To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help. +
+Insert - Comment + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e63054fb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Converting Text to Numbers + /text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp + + + + + + formats; text as numbers + time format conversion + date formats;conversion + converting;text, into numbers + +

Converting Text to Numbers

+
+ Defaults settings in Calc converts text inside cells to the respective numeric values if an unambiguous conversion is possible. If no conversion is possible, Calc returns a #VALUE! error. + Only integer numbers including exponent are converted, and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Anything else, like fractional numbers with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601, is not converted, as the text string would be locale dependent. Leading and trailing blanks are ignored. + The following ISO 8601 formats are converted: + + + CCYY-MM-DD + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss,s + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.s + + + hh:mm + + + hh:mm:ss + + + hh:mm:ss,s + + + hh:mm:ss.s + + + The century code CC may not be omitted. Instead of the T date and time separator, exactly one space character may be used. + If a date is given, it must be a valid Gregorian calendar date. In this case the optional time must be in the range 00:00 to 23:59:59.99999... + If only a time string is given, it may have an hours value of more than 24, while minutes and seconds can have a maximum value of 59. + The conversion is done for single scalar values only, not within ranges. + The conversion is done for single scalar values, as in =A1+A2, or ="1E2"+1. Cell range arguments are not affected, so SUM(A1:A2) differs from A1+A2 if at least one of the two cells contain a convertible string. + Strings inside formulas are also converted, such as in ="1999-11-22"+42, which returns the date 42 days after November 22nd, 1999. Calculations involving localized dates as strings inside the formula return an error. For example, the localized date string "11/22/1999" or "22.11.1999" cannot be used for the automatic conversion. + +

Example

+ In A1 enter the text '1e2 (which is converted to the number 100 internally). + In A2 enter =A1+1 (which correctly results in 101). + The formula =SUM(A1:A2), returns 101 instead of 201 because the conversion does not occur in a range, only for single scalar values. Here, '1e2 is treated as string which is ignored for the SUM function. + =SUM("1E2";1) returns #VALUE! because SUM() and some others that iterate over number sequences explicitly check the argument type. +
+

Changing the default text to number conversion settings

+ The text to number conversion can be customized in the Detailed Calculation Settings option. +
+ + + + Format - Cells - Numbers + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..80dc442ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Pivot Chart + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart.xhp + + + + + chart;pivot chart + pivot table;pivot chart + +

Pivot Chart

+ + A pivot chart is a chart with data range and data series of a pivot table. + Different from static sized tables, where the number of rows and columns are constant, pivot tables can have varying dimensions, depending on the pivot table settings and its data source contents. + + Pivot charts track the changes in the data issued from a pivot table and adjust the data series and data range accordingly. + + +
+ + + + + + Technical details on %PRODUCTNAME pivot chart implementation. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4ff84dcf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Creating Pivot Charts + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_create.xhp + + + + + pivot chart;creating + + Creating Pivot Charts + To create a pivot chart proceed as below: + + + Click inside the pivot table that you want to present in your chart. + + + Choose Insert – Chart or click in the + Insert Chart Icon Insert Chart icon in the main toolbar. + + + %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically detects the pivot table and opens the pivot chart wizard. + + + Select the Chart type for the data in the chart wizard. + + + The data range and the data series pages of the chart wizard are not enabled. They are controlled by the pivot table. + + + Select the Chart Elements of the pivot chart in the wizard. + + + Click OK to close the wizard and create the pivot chart. + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..597730164 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + Deleting Pivot Charts + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_delete.xhp + + + + Deleting a Pivot Chart + + pivot chart;deleting + + To delete a pivot chart, select the chart and press Del. + When deleting a pivot chart, the linked pivot table is not affected. + If you delete a pivot table linked to a pivot chart, the pivot chart is also deleted. A dialog box opens to confirm the pivot chart deletion. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..428edacd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Editing Pivot Charts + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_edit.xhp + + + + + pivot chart;editing + + Editing Pivot Charts + Edit a pivot chart in the same way as normal charts. + To edit a pivot chart + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11ccabb53 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Filtering Pivot Charts + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_filter.xhp + + + + Filtering Pivot Charts + Filters are used to remove unwanted data from the pivot chart. You can use filters in the pivot chart or in the corresponding pivot table, since the resulting chart is exactly the same. + + Pivot chart field buttons + + Pivot chart buttons are unique to pivot charts, normal charts don't have them. The buttons shows the layout of the pivot table, which are the pivot table fields. If present, filters are displayed in the top. Row fields are displayed on the bottom of the chart next to each other and the legend shows the buttons from column fields stacked. + + + Pivot chart buttons + + + The buttons have a pop-up action attached to them. If there is some filtering applied, then the arrow turns blue (similar to the pivot table), so it is easier to see when a field has any filter applied. + + Existing filters shows what is filtered: when nothing is filtered "- all -" is shown, when some data is filtered, then "- multiple -" is shown and when only one value is not filtered, the value is shown. + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41cfed9cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Pivot Chart Update + /text/scalc/guide/pivotchart_update.xhp + + + + + pivot chart;update + + Updating Pivot Charts + If the data of the source sheet has been changed, you must refresh the pivot table and the pivot chart is updated accordingly. To refresh the pivot table (and thus the pivot chart): + + + Choose Data - Pivot Table - Refresh. + + + Choose Refresh... in the context menu of any cell in the pivot table. + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b419dfc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing Sheet Details +/text/scalc/guide/print_details.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +printing;sheet details +sheets; printing details +grids; printing sheet grids +formulas; printing, instead of results +comments; printing +charts;printing +sheet grids; printing +cells; printing grids +borders; printing cells +zero values; printing +null values; printing +draw objects;printing +mw inserted 4 index entries from text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp. Added "draw objects;..." entry and changed "formulas;..." entry +Printing Sheet Details + +When printing a sheet you can select which details are to be printed: + + +Row and column headers + + +Sheet grid + + +Comments + + +Objects and images + + +Charts + + +Drawing objects + + +Formulas + + +To choose the details proceed as follows: + + +Select the sheet you want to print. + + +Choose Format - Page. +The command is not visible if the sheet was opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard Bar. + + +Select the Sheet tab. In the Print area mark the details to be printed and click OK. + + +Print the document. + + +
+View - Page Break + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e6715cd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Defining Number of Pages for Printing +/text/scalc/guide/print_exact.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +printing; sheet counts +sheets; printing sheet counts +page breaks; spreadsheet preview +editing;print ranges +viewing;print ranges +previews;page breaks for printing + +Defining Number of Pages for Printing + +If a sheet is too large for a single printed page, $[officename] Calc will print the current sheet evenly divided over several pages. Since the automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position, you can define the page distribution yourself. + + +Go to the sheet to be printed. + + +Choose View - Page Break. + + +You will see the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages. The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines, and the user-defined ones by light blue lines. The page breaks (line breaks and column breaks) are marked as black lines. + + +You can move the blue lines with the mouse. You will find further options in the Context menu, including adding an additional print range, removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column breaks. + + +
+View - Page Break + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..542e2d9dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Sheets in Landscape Format + /text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp + + + +printing; sheet selections + sheets; printing in landscape + printing; landscape + landscape printing +mw corrected a typo in "printing; sheet..." +Printing Sheets in Landscape Format + + In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View - Page Break. Drag the delimiter lines to define the range of printed cells on each page. + To print in landscape format, proceed as follows: + + + Go to the sheet to be printed. + + + Choose Format - Page. + The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Standard bar. + + + Select the Page tab. Select the Landscape paper format and click OK. + + + Choose File - Print. You will see the Print dialog. + Depending on the printer driver and the operating system, it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there. + + + In the Print dialog in the General tab page, select the contents to be printed: + + All sheets - All sheets will be printed. + + Selected sheets - Only the selected sheets will be printed. All sheets whose names (at the bottom on the sheet tabs) are selected will be printed. By pressing Command +Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection. + + Selected cells - All selected cells are printed. + + + From all the paper pages that result from the above selection, you can select the range of paper pages to be printed: + + All pages - Print all resulting pages. + + Pages - Enter the pages to be printed. The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards. If you see in the Page Break Preview that Sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of Sheet2, enter 5-6 here. + + + If under Format - Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges, only the contents of these print ranges will be printed. +
+ View - Page Break + Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d399b383c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + +Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page +/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +printing; sheets on multiple pages +sheets; printing on multiple pages +rows; repeating when printing +columns; repeating when printing +repeating;columns/rows on printed pages +title rows; printing on all sheets +headers; printing on sheets +footers; printing on sheets +printing; rows/columns as table headings +headings;repeating rows/columns as +mw deleted one index entry ("fixed...") and added "headings;..." entry + +

Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page +

+If you have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed multiple pages, you can set up rows or columns to repeat on each printed page. +As an example, If you want to print the top two rows of the sheet as well as the first column (A) on all pages, do the following: + + +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. The Edit Print Ranges dialog appears. + + +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. +The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet. + + +Select the first two rows and, for this example, click cell A1 and drag to A2. +In the shrunk dialog you will see $1:$2. Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat. + + +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. The dialog is restored again. + + +If you also want column A as a column to repeat, click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. + + +Click column A (not in the column header). + + +Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. + + +Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet. You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this in Format - Page. +
+ + + +View - Page Break Preview + +Format - Print ranges - Edit +Format - Page - (Header / Footer) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54211ba36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using Print Ranges on a Spreadsheet +/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp + + + + + + +exporting;cells +printing; cells +ranges;print ranges +PDF export of print ranges +cell ranges; printing +cells; print ranges +print ranges +clearing, see also deleting/removing +defining;print ranges +extending print ranges +deleting;print ranges + + mw deleted "adding;" and corrected two typos in "defining;" and "extending.." + MW changed "clearing," + Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet + + You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print. + The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported. Sheets without a defined print range are not printed and not exported to a PDF file, unless the document uses the Excel file format. + For files opened in Excel format, all sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed. The same behavior occurs when you export the Excel formatted spreadsheet to a PDF file.UFI: New, see spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" + To Define a Print Range + + + Select the cells that you want to print. + + + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. + + + To Add Cells to a Print Range + + + Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range. + + + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. + + + To Clear a Print Range + + + Choose Format - Print Ranges - Clear. + + + Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges + In the Page Break Preview, print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray. Nonprinting areas have a gray background. + To define a new page break region, drag the border to a new location. When you define a new page break region, an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break. + To View and Edit Print Ranges + + + Choose View - Page Break Preview. + To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview, double click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a new zoom factor. + + + Edit the print range. + To change the size of a print range, drag a border of the range to a new location. + To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range, drag the border of the page break outside of the print range. + To clear a print range, drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range. + + + To exit the Page Break Preview, choose View - Normal. + + +
+ + + + Editing Print Ranges + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35d15b6a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative +/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +addressing; relative and absolute +references; absolute/relative +absolute addresses in spreadsheets +relative addresses +absolute references in spreadsheets +relative references +references; to cells +cells; references + +Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative + +Relative Addressing +The cell in column A, row 1 is addressed as A1. You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area, then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell. For example, the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1:B2. +By addressing an area in this way, you are making a relative reference to A1:B2. Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas. +Absolute Addressing +Absolute referencing is the opposite of relative addressing. A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference, for example, $A$1:$B$2. +$[officename] can convert the current reference, in which the cursor is positioned in the input line, from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing F4. If you start with a relative address such as A1, the first time you press this key combination, both row and column are set to absolute references ($A$1). The second time, only the row (A$1), and the third time, only the column ($A1). If you press the key combination once more, both column and row references are switched back to relative (A1) +$[officename] Calc shows the references to a formula. If, for example, you click the formula =SUM(A1:C5;D15:D24) in a cell, the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color. For example, the formula component "A1:C5" may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue. The next formula component "D15:D24" can be marked in red in the same way. +When to Use Relative and Absolute References +What distinguishes a relative reference? Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1:B2. The formula to enter into E1 would be: =SUM(A1:B2). If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A, the elements you want to add would then be in B1:C2 and the formula would be in F1, not in E1. After inserting the new column, you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet, and possibly in other sheets. +Fortunately, $[officename] does this work for you. After having inserted a new column A, the formula =SUM(A1:B2) will be automatically updated to =SUM(B1:C2). Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted. Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in $[officename] Calc whenever the referenced area is moved. But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted, not the absolute references. +Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet. If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell, the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute. +Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted, references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet. Assume you entered the formula =SUM(A1:A9) in row 10. If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right, simply copy this formula to the cell to the right. The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to =SUM(B1:B9). +
+mw changed link target from "address_byname" to "value_with_name" +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..812f26153 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Removing Duplicate Values + /text/scalc/guide/remove_duplicates.xhp + + + + + + filters; removing duplicates + filters; finding unique values + +

Removing Duplicate Values

+ Consider a single column with values where some may be duplicates. To remove duplicate values and obtain only the unique entries in the column: + + + Select the range of values from which duplicate values are to be removed. The values have to be arranged in a single column. + + + Go to Data - More Filters - Standard Filter. This opens the Standard Filter dialog. + + + In Field Name make sure that the selected column is the column where the values are stored. If a single column is selected this field will be set automatically. + + + In Condition choose the option = (equals sign), which is the default option. + + + In Value choose the option Not Empty. + + + Click Options and select No duplications. If the first value is the column header check Range contains column labels. + + + Check Copy results and use the input box below it to inform a cell address where the unique entries are to be entered. + + + Click OK. The unique values in the range will be entered starting with the cell selected in the previous step. + + + The No duplications option is case sensitive. Therefore, values "A" and "a" are each considered as unique values. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd03da71e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Renaming Sheets + /text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp + + + +renaming;sheets + sheet tabs;renaming + tables;renaming + names; sheets + +

Renaming Sheets +

+Setting sheet names is an important feature to produce readable and understandable spreadsheets documents. +The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet. You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file. +To rename a sheet in your document: + + + Double-click the sheet tab or open its context menu and choose Rename Sheet. A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name. + + + Enter a new name for the sheet and click OK. + + + Alternatively, hold down the Option key +Alt key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly. + + +The document can contain up to 10,000 individual sheets, which must have different names. +

Sheet Naming Restrictions

+ Sheet names can contain almost any character. Some naming restrictions apply, the following characters are not allowed in sheet names: + + + colon : + + + back slash \ + + + forward slash / + + + question mark ? + + + asterisk * + + + left square bracket [ + + + right square bracket ] + + + single quote ' as the first or last character of the name + + +The single quote is Unicode U+0027, also known as apostrophe. Other single-quote characters, similar to apostrophe, are allowed, such as ʼ ‛ and ‚. +

Using a Default Prefix for Sheet Names

+ You can set a prefix for the names of new sheets you create. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Defaults and enter the prefix name in Prefix name for new worksheet. +

Referencing Sheet Names with Special Characters

+ In cell references, a sheet name must be enclosed in single quotes ' when the name contains other characters than alphanumeric or underscore. A single quote contained within a name has to be escaped by doubling it (two single quotes). + For example, you want to reference the cell A1 on a sheet named This year's sheet. + + The reference must be enclosed in single quotes, and the one single quote inside the name must be doubled: 'This year''s sheet'.A1 +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9ebc4ac7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Rounded Off Numbers +/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +numbers; rounded off +rounded off numbers +exact numbers in $[officename] Calc +decimal places; showing +changing;number of decimal places +values;rounded in calculations +calculating;rounded off values +numbers; decimal places +precision as shown +rounding precision +spreadsheets; values as shown +mw reduced "tables in spreadsheets;" to "tables;" + +Using Rounded Off Numbers + +In $[officename] Calc, all decimal numbers are displayed rounded off to two decimal places. +To change this for selected cells + + +Mark all the cells you want to modify. + + +Choose Format - Cells and go to the Numbers tab page. + + +In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. + + +To change this everywhere + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + + +Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. + + +To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + + +Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK. + + +
+Numbers +Calculate +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0275f52dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing Row Height or Column Width +/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +heights of cells +cell heights +cell widths +cells; heights and widths +widths of cells +column widths +rows; heights +columns; widths +changing;row heights/column widths + +Changing Row Height or Column Width + +You can change the height of the rows with the mouse or through the dialog. +What is described here for rows and row height applies accordingly for columns and column width. +Using the mouse to change the row height or column width + + +Click the area of the headers on the separator below the current row, keep the mouse button pressed and drag up or down in order to change the row height. + + +Select the optimal row height by double-clicking the separator below the row. + + +Using the dialog to change the row height or column width + + +Click the row so that you achieve the focus. + + +Start the context menu on the header at the left-hand side. +You will see the commands Row Height and Optimal row height. Choosing either opens a dialog. + + +
+Row height +Optimal row height +Column width +Optimal column width +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6cdd2979 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using Scenarios +/text/scalc/guide/scenario.xhp + + + +scenarios; creating/editing/deleting +opening;scenarios +selecting;scenarios in Navigator +UFI: removed "sample" from index term: no sample in OOoMW changed "scenarios;"Using Scenarios + +A $[officename] Calc scenario is a set of cell values that can be used within your calculations. You assign a name to every scenario on your sheet. Define several scenarios on the same sheet, each with some different values in the cells. Then you can easily switch the sets of cell values by their name and immediately observe the results. Scenarios are a tool to test out "what-if" questions. +Creating Your Own Scenarios +To create a scenario, select all the cells that provide the data for the scenario. + + +Select the cells that contain the values that will change between scenarios. To select multiple cells, hold down the CommandCtrl key as you click each cell. + + +Choose Tools - Scenarios. The Create Scenario dialog appears. + + +Enter a name for the new scenario and leave the other fields unchanged with their default values. Close the dialog with OK. Your new scenario is automatically activated. + + +Using Scenariosremoved "commercial" switched contentsScenarios can be selected in the Navigator: + + +Open the Navigator with the Navigator icon +Navigator icon + on the Standard bar. + + +Click the Scenarios icon +Scenarios icon + in the Navigator. + + +In the Navigator, you see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created. + + +Double-click a scenario name in the Navigator to apply that scenario to the current sheet. + + +To delete a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Delete. + + +To edit a scenario, right-click the name in the Navigator and choose Properties. + + +To hide the border of a set of cells that are part of a scenario, open the Properties dialog for each scenario that affects the cells and clear the Display border checkbox. Hiding the border also removes the listbox on the sheet where you can choose the scenarios. + + +If you want to know which values in the scenario affect other values, choose Tools - Detective - Trace Dependents. You see arrows to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell. +
+Creating Scenarios + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a27df95 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Applying Sort Lists +/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp + + + + + + +filling;customized lists +sort lists;applying +defining;sort lists +geometric lists +arithmetic lists +series;sort lists +lists; user-defined +customized lists + + mw deleted "applying;" + Applying Sort Lists + + Sort lists allow you to type one piece of information in a cell, then drag it to fill in a consecutive list of items. + For example, enter the text "Jan" or "January" in an empty cell. Select the cell and click the mouse on the lower right corner of the cell border. Then drag the selected cell a few cells to the right or downwards. When you release the mouse button, the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months. + Hold down CommandCtrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. + The predefined series can be found under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can also create your own lists of text strings tailored to your needs, such as a list of your company's branch offices. When you use the information in these lists later (for example, as headings), just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse. +
+ + + Sort lists + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e20621436 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ + + + + + + + + Applying Advanced Filters + /text/scalc/guide/specialfilter.xhp + + + + +filters;defining advanced filters +advanced filters +defining; advanced filters +database ranges; advanced filters + +MW made "applying;advanced filters" a one level entry +
+

Applying Advanced Filters +

+ + + Copy the column headers of the sheet ranges to be filtered into an empty area of the sheet, and then enter the criteria for the filter in a row beneath the headers. Horizontally arranged data in a row will always be logically connected with AND, and vertically arranged data in a column will always be logically connected with OR. + + + Once you have created a filter matrix, select the sheet ranges to be filtered. Open the Advanced Filter dialog by choosing Data - More Filters - Advanced Filter, and define the filter conditions. + + + Then click OK, and you will see that only the rows from the original sheet whose contents have met the search criteria are still visible. All other rows are temporarily hidden and can be made to reappear with the Format - Rows - Show command. + + +

Example

+ Load a spreadsheet with a large number of records. We are using a fictional Turnover document, but you can just as easily use any other document. The document has the following layout: + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + + + 1 + + + Month + + + Standard + + + Business + + + Luxury + + + Suite + + + + + 2 + + + January + + + 125600 + + + 200500 + + + 240000 + + + 170000 + + + + + 3 + + + February + + + 160000 + + + 180300 + + + 362000 + + + 220000 + + + + + 4 + + + March + + + 170000 + + + + + and so on... + + +
+ Copy row 1 with the row headers (field names), to row 20, for example. Enter the filter conditions linked with OR in rows 21, 22, and so on. + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + + + 20 + + + Month + + + Standard + + + Business + + + Luxury + + + Suite + + + + + 21 + + + January + + + + + + + + + 22 + + + + <160000 + + + + + +
+ Specify that only rows which either have the value January in the Month cells OR a value of under 160000 in the Standardstandard not default, look at U59!!! cells will be displayed. + Choose Data - More Filters - Advanced Filter, and then select the range A20:E22. After you click OK, only the filtered rows will be displayed. The other rows will be hidden from view. +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ec316002 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Using Subtotals Tool + /text/scalc/guide/subtotaltool.xhp + + + + + subtotals;using subtotals tool + +
+

Using Subtotal Tool

+ Calc offers the Subtotals tool as a more comprehensive alternative to the SUBTOTAL function. In contrast to SUBTOTAL, which only works on a single array, the Subtotals tool can create subtotals for up to three arrays arranged in labeled columns. It also groups subtotals by category and sorts them automatically, thereby eliminating the need to apply AutoFilters and filter categories by hand. +
+
+ +
+

Using the Subtotals tool

+To insert subtotal values into a worksheet: + + + Select the cell range for the subtotals that you want to calculate, and remember to include the column heading labels. Alternatively, click on a single cell within your data to allow Calc to automatically identify the range. + + + Choose Data - Subtotals to open the Subtotals dialog. + + + In the Group by drop-down list on the First Group page, select a column by its label. Entries in the cell range from step 1 will be grouped and sorted by matching values in this column. + + + In the Calculate subtotals for box on the First Group page, select a column containing values to be subtotaled. If you later change values in this column, Calc will automatically recalculate the subtotals. + + + In the Use function box on the First Group page, select a function to calculate the subtotals for the column selected in step 4. + + + Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create subtotals for other columns on the First Group page. + + + You can create two more subtotal categories by using the Second Group and Third Group pages and repeating steps 3 to 6. If you do not want to add more groups, then leave the Group by list for each page set to “- none -”. + + + Click OK. Calc will add subtotal and grand total rows to your cell range. + + +

Subtotal outline

+ +When you use the Subtotals tool, Calc inserts an outline to the left of the row number column. This outline represents the hierarchical structure of your subtotals, and can be used to hide or show data at different levels in the hierarchy using the numbered column indicators at the top of the outline or the group indicators, denoted by plus (+) and minus (-) signs. +This feature is useful if you have many subtotals, as you can simply hide low-level details, such as individual entries, to produce a high-level summary of your data. +To turn off outlines, choose Data - Group and Outline - Remove Outline. To reinstate them, choose Data - Group and Outline - AutoOutline. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d70047639 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Superscript / Subscript +/text/scalc/guide/super_subscript.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +superscript text in cells +subscript text in cells +cells; text super/sub +characters;superscript/subscript + +Text Superscript / Subscript + + + +In the cell, select the character that you want to put in superscript or subscript. +If, for example, you want to write H20 with a subscript 2, select the 2 in the cell (not in the input line). + + +Open the context menu for the selected character and choose Character. You will see the Character dialog. + + +Click the Font Position tab. + + +Select the Subscript option and click OK. + + +
+Context menu - Character - Font Position + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe16ebb63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Merge and Unmerge Cells + /text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp + + + + + merge/merging cells + unmerge/unmerging cells + split/splitting cells + +
+ Merge and Unmerge Cells + You can select a range of cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a previously merged cell and divide it back into individual cells. +
+ When you copy cells into a target range containing merged cells, the target range gets unmerged first, then the copied cells are pasted in. If the copied cells are merged cells, they retain their merge state. + Merge Cells + + +
+ Click and drag to select the cells to be merged then do one of the following: + In the Formatting toolbar click: + + Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Merge Cells.
If Unmerge Cells is present instead then the cell selection contains merged cells and cannot be merged further. + Or, in the Properties sidebar mark the Merge Cells checkbox. + Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge Cells + Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge and Center Cells + The cells will be merged and the content will be centered in the merged cell. +
+ + Unmerge Cells +
+ Select the cell to be unmerged, or a selection that includes the cells to be unmerged then do one of the following: + In the Formatting toolbar, click: + + Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Unmerge Cells.
If Merge Cells is present instead then the selection does not contain any merged cells. + Or, in the Properties sidebar clear the Merge Cells checkbox. + Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Unmerge Cells. + Or, toggle Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge and Center Cells +
+ +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2593105f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rotating Tables (Transposing) +/text/scalc/guide/table_rotate.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tables; transposing +transposing tables +inverting tables +swapping tables +columns; swap with rows +rows; swapping with columns +tables; rotating +rotating; tables + +Rotating Tables (Transposing) + +In $[officename] Calc, there is a way to "rotate" a spreadsheet so that rows become columns and columns become rows. + + +Select the cell range that you want to transpose. + + +Choose Edit - Cut. + + +Click the cell that is to be the top left cell in the result. + + +Choose Edit - Paste Special. + + +In the dialog, mark Paste all and Transpose. +If you now click OK the columns and rows are transposed. + + +
+Paste Special +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b36cee5f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing Table Views +/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +row headers; hiding +column headers; hiding +tables; views +views; tables +grids;hiding lines in sheets +hiding;headers/grid lines +changing;table views + +Changing Table Views + +To hide column and line headers in a table: + + +Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. + + +To hide grid lines: + + +Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Choose Hide in the Grid lines dropdown. Confirm with OK. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..139ae3469 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + Formatting Numbers as Text + /text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp + + + +numbers;entering as text + text formats; for numbers + formats; numbers as text + cell formats; text/numbers + formatting;numbers as text +mw deleted "numbers; entering without..." and changed "numbers;as text" +Formatting Numbers as Text + +
+ You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. + If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. + If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. +
+
+ + + Format - Cells - Numbers + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c8b1bbaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Rotating Text + /text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + +cells; rotating text + rotating; text in cells + text in cells; writing vertically + +Rotating Text + + + + Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. + + + Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. + + + Click the Alignment tab. + + + In the Text orientation area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. + + removed a wrong para, i104207 +
+ Format - Cells + Format - Cells - Alignment +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bc0603e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Writing Multi-line Text +/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp + + + +text in cells; multi-line +cells; text breaks +breaks in cells +multi-line text in cells + +

Writing Multi-line Text +

+
+Pressing the CommandCtrl+Enter keys inserts a manual line break. This shortcut works directly in the cell or in the input line. The input line can be expanded to the multi-line by the Down arrow button on the right. +If you want the text to automatically break at the right border of the cell, proceed as follows: + + +Select all the cells where you want the text to break at the right border. + + + In Format - Cells - Alignment, mark the Wrap text automatically option and click OK. + + +
+For automatic wrapping in XLS files, the rows in question should be set to Optimal Height. +
+
+
+Format - Cells +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..80d4f2525 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + +User-Defined Functions +/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +functions; user-defined +user-defined functions +Basic IDE for user-defined functions +IDE; Basic IDE +programming;functions + +

User-Defined Functions +

+You can apply user-defined functions in $[officename] Calc in the following ways: + + +You can define your own functions using the Basic-IDE. This method requires a basic knowledge of programming. + + +You can program functions as add-ins. This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming. + + +

Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic

+ + + Choose Tools - Macros - Edit Macros. + + +You will now see the Basic IDE. + + +In the Object Catalog window, double-click on the module where you want to store your macro. + + +Enter the function code. In this example, we define a VOL(a; b; c) function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a, b and c: + + + + Function VOL(a, b, c) + VOL = a*b*c + End Function + + + +Close the Basic-IDE window. +Your function is automatically saved in the selected module and is now available. If you apply the function in a Calc document that is to be used on another computer, you can copy the function to the Calc document as described in the next section. + + +

Copying a Function To a Document

+In stage 2 of "Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic", in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit . As the default, in the Macro from field the My Macros - Standard - Module1 module is selected. The Standard library resides locally in your user directory. +If you want to copy the user-defined function to a Calc document: + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - Basic. + + +In the Macro from field select My Macros - Standard - Module1 and click Edit. + + +In the Basic-IDE, select the source of your user-defined function and copy it to the clipboard. + + +Close the Basic-IDE. + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - Basic . + + +In the Macro from field select (Name of the Calc document) - Standard - Module1. Click Edit. + + +Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic-IDE of the document. + + +

Applying a User-defined Function in $[officename] Calc

+Once you have defined the function VOL(a; b; c) in the Basic-IDE, you can apply it the same way as the built-in functions of $[officename] Calc. + + +Open a Calc document and enter numbers for the function parameters a, b and c in cells A1, B1, and C1. + + +Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following: +=VOL(A1;B1;C1) + + +The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76d5eb8ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Validity of Cell Contents +/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +values; limiting on input +limits; specifying value limits on input +permitted cell contents +data validity +validity +cells; validity +error messages; defining for incorrect input +actions in case of incorrect input +Help tips; defining text for cell input +comments;help text for cells +cells; defining input help +macros; running when incorrect input +data; validity check +mw changed "limit...;" +Validity of Cell Contents + +For each cell, you can define entries to be valid. Invalid entries to a cell will be rejected. +The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered. If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell, or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag-and-drop or by copying and pasting, the validity rule will not take effect. +You can choose Tools - Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values. +Using Cell Contents Validity + + +Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule. + + +Choose Data - Validity. + + +On the Criteria tab page, enter the conditions for new values entered into cells. + + +In the Allow field, select an option. + + +If you select "Whole Numbers", values such as "12.5" are not allowed. Choosing "Date" allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date. Similarly, the "Time" condition permits time values such as "12:00" or serial time numbers. "Text Length" stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only. +Select "List" to enter a list of valid entries. + + +Select the next condition under Data. According to what you choose, additional options will be selectable. + + +After you have determined the conditions for cell validity, you can use the other two tab pages to create message boxes: + + +On the Input Help tab page, enter the title and the text of the tip, which will then be displayed if the cell is selected. + + +On the Error Alert tab page, select the action to be carried out in the event of an error. +If you select "Stop" as the action, invalid entries are not accepted, and the previous cell contents are retained. +Select "Warning" or "Information" to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled or accepted. +If you select "Macro", then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error. + + +To display the error message, select Show error message when invalid values are entered. +After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK, you must first select another cell before the change takes effect. +
+Data - Validity +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a82195f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Naming Cells + /text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp + + + +cells; defining names + names; defining for cells + values; defining names + constants definition + variables; defining names + cell ranges; defining names + defining;names for cell ranges + formulas; defining names + addressing; by defined names + cell names; defining/addressing + references; by defined names + allowed cell names + renaming;cells +mw changed "names;...", "addressing;..." and "references,..." entries.mw added "renaming;" +Naming Cells + + Allowed names + Names in Calc can contain letters, numeric characters, and some special characters. Names must start with a letter or an underline character. + Allowed special characters: + + + underline (_) + + + period (.) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character + + + blank ( ) - allowed within a name, but not as first or last character, and not for a cell range + + + Names must not be the same as cell references. For example, the name A1 is invalid because A1 is a cell reference to the top left cell. + Names must not start with the letters C or R followed by a number; also single characters C and R are not allowed as names. See the ADDRESS function for more information. + Names for cell ranges must not include blanks. Blanks are allowed within names for single cells, sheets and documents. + Naming cells and formulas + A good way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulas legible is to give the ranges names. For example, you can name the range A1:B2 Start. You can then write a formula such as "=SUM(Start)". Even after you insert or delete rows or columns, $[officename] still correctly assigns the ranges identified by name. Range names must not contain any spaces. + For example, it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if you can write "= Amount * Tax_rate" instead of "= A5 * B12". In this case, you would name cell A5 "Amount" and cell B12 "Tax_rate." + Use the Define Names dialog to define names for formulas or parts of formulas you need more often. In order to specify range names, + + + Select a cell or range of cells, then choose Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define. The Define Names dialog appears. + + + Type the name of the selected area in the Name field. Click Add. The newly defined name appears in the list below. Click OK to close the dialog. + + + You can also name other cell ranges in this dialog by entering the name in the field and then selecting the respective cells. + If you type the name in a formula, after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as a tip. + + + Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip. + + + If more than one name starts with the same characters, you can scroll forward through all the names using the CommandCtrl + Tab keys and backward using the Shift + CommandCtrl + Tab keys.mw copied contents from Calc guide address_byname.xhp + + +
+ Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define + + + mw deleted one EMBED paragraph and copied two EMBED paragraphs from Calc guide address_byname.xhp +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c98461be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting External Data in Table (WebQuery) +/text/scalc/guide/webquery.xhp + + + +HTML WebQuery +ranges; inserting in tables +external data; inserting +tables; inserting external data +web pages; importing data +WebQuery filter +inserting; external data +data sources; external data +UFI: removed "external data;WebQuery" because both index entries "external data" led to this page. +Inserting External Data in Table (WebQuery) + +With the help of the Web Page Query ($[officename] Calc) import filter, you can insert tables from HTML documents in a Calc spreadsheet. +You can use the same method to insert ranges defined by name from a Calc or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. +The following insert methods are available: +Inserting by Dialog + + +Set the cell cursor at the cell where the new content will be inserted. + + +Choose Sheet - External Links. This opens the External Data dialog. + + +Enter the URL of the HTML document or the name of the spreadsheet. Press Enter when finished. Click the Browse button to open a file selection dialog.only after Enter the URL will be requested from the net. + + +In the large list box of the dialog, select the named ranges or tables you want to insert. + + +You can also specify that the ranges or tables are updated every n seconds. + + +The import filter can create names for cell ranges on the fly. As much formatting as possible is retained, while the filter intentionally does not load any images. +Inserting by Navigator + + +Open two documents: the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in which the external data is to be inserted (target document) and the document from which the external data derives (source document). + + +In the target document open the Navigator. + + +In the lower combo box of the Navigator select the source document. The Navigator now shows the range names and database ranges or the tables contained in the source document. + + +In the Navigator select the Insert as link drag mode +Icon + . + + +Drag the desired external data from the Navigator into the target document. + + +If you have loaded an HTML document with the Web Page Query filter as the source document, you will find the tables in the Navigator, named continuously from "HTML_table1" onwards, and also two range names that have been created: + + + +HTML_all - designates the entire document + + + +HTML_tables - designates all HTML tables in the document + + +Editing the external data + + +Open Edit - Links. Here you can edit the link to the external data. + + +
+External data dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f8c46fe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Using Wildcards in Formulas + /text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp + + + + + + wildcards in formulas + wildcards;examples + +

Using Wildcards in Formulas

+ Wildcards are special characters that can be used in search strings that are passed as arguments to some Calc functions. They can also be used to define search criteria in the Find & Replace dialog. The use of wildcards enables the definition of more advanced search parameters with a single search string. + %PRODUCTNAME Calc supports either wildcards or regular expressions as arguments depending on the current application settings. By default %PRODUCTNAME Calc is set to support wildcards instead of regular expressions. + To make sure wildcards are supported, go to %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - CalculateTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and check if the option Enable wildcards in formulas is selected. Note that you can use this dialog to switch to regular expressions by choosing Enable regular expressions in formulas or choose to support neither wildcards nor regular expressions. + The following wildcards are supported: + + + + Wildcard + + + Description + + + + + ? (question mark) + + + Matches any single character. For example, the search string "b?g" matches “bag” and “beg” but will not match "boog" or "mug". + Note that it will not match "bg" as well, since "?" must match exactly one character. The "?" wildcard does not correspond to a zero-character match. + + + + + * (asterisk) + + + Matches any sequence of characters, including an empty string. For example, the search string "*cast" will match “cast”, “forecast”, and “outcast”, but will not match "forecaster" using default %PRODUCTNAME settings. + If the option Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is disabled in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - CalculateTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate, then "forecaster" will be a match using the "*cast" search string. + + + + + ~ (tilde) + + + Escapes the special meaning of a question mark, asterisk, or tilde character that follows immediately after the tilde character. + For example, the search string "why~?" matches “why?” but will not match "whys" nor "why~s". + + +
+ Wildcards are supported in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and in Microsoft Excel. Therefore, if interoperability between both applications is needed, choose to work with wildcards instead of regular expressions. Conversely, if interoperability is not necessary, consider using regular expressions for more powerful search capabilities. +

Supported Spreadsheet Functions

+ Wildcards are supported by the following spreadsheet functions: + + + Database functions: DAVERAGE, DCOUNT, DCOUNTA, DGET, DMAX, DMIN, DPRODUCT, DSTDEV, DSTDEVP, DSUM, DVAR and DVARP. + + + Conditional functions: AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, MAXIFS, MINIFS, SUMIF and SUMIFS. + + + Lookup functions: HLOOKUP, LOOKUP and VLOOKUP. + + + Other functions: MATCH and SEARCH. + + +

Examples of Wildcards in Formulas

+ The following examples consider that the options Enable wildcards in formulas and Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells are enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - CalculateTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"Chi*") counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 containing strings that start with "Chi" followed by zero or more characters. + =SUMIF(A1:A5;"A??";B1:B5) sums the values in B1:B5 whose corresponding values in A1:A5 start with "A" followed by exactly two other characters. + Wildcard comparisons are not case sensitive, hence "A?" will match both "A1" and "a1". + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ff336c55 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +19xx/20xx Years +/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +years; 2-digits +dates; 19xx/20xx + +19xx/20xx Years + +
+The year in a date entry is often entered as two digits. Internally, the year is managed by $[officename] as four digits, so that in the calculation of the difference from 1/1/99 to 1/1/01, the result will correctly be two years. + + +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits. The default is 1930 to 2029. + + +This means that if you enter a date of 1/1/30 or higher, it will be treated internally as 1/1/1930 or higher. All lower two-digit years apply to the 20xx century. So, for example, 1/1/20 is converted into 1/1/2020. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41e14e8d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help +/text/scalc/main0000.xhp + + + + +

Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help

+ +

How to Work With $[officename] Calc

+ + +List of Functions by Category + +

$[officename] Calc Menus, Toolbars, and Keys

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0eced59e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +Menus +/text/scalc/main0100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd1517741 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + File + /text/scalc/main0101.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

File

+These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..338eb7378 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/scalc/main0102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit

+This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Links

+ + +

Object

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2df5fe2f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/scalc/main0103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

View

+This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ + +

Normal

+Displays the normal layout view of the sheet. + +

Page Break

+ + + + + + +

View Grid lines

+Toggle the visibility of grid lines for the current sheet. + + + +

Show Formula

+Display the cell formula expression instead of the calculated result. + +

Comments

+Display the cell comments for the current spreadsheet document. + + + + + + + +

Gallery

+ + + +

+ + + + +

Zoom

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48df92e44 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Insert + /text/scalc/main0104.xhp + + + +
+ +

Insert

+The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements, such as images, text boxes, object, media, cell names and much more into the current sheet. +
+ + + +

Chart

+Inserts a chart. + + + + + + + + + + +

+ + + +

Floating Frame

+ + + + +

Hyperlink

+ + +

Special Character

+ + + + +

Date

+Inserts the current date in the cell. + +

Time

+Inserts the current time in the cell. + +

Field

+Opens a submenu for selecting the date, sheet name or document title in the cell. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a51652e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Format + /text/scalc/main0105.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Format

+The Format menu contains commands for formatting selected cells, objects, and cell contents in your document. +
+ + + +

Cells

+ + + + + + + + + + +

Character

+ + +

Paragraph

+ + +

AutoFormat

+ + +

Conditional Formatting

+ + + + + + + + + +

Control

+ + +

Form

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..908491258 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Tools + /text/scalc/main0106.xhp + + + +
+ +

Tools

+The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling, to trace sheet references, to find mistakes and to define scenarios. +
+You can also create and assign macros and configure the look and feel of toolbars, menus, keyboard, and set the default options for $[officename] applications. + + + + + + +

AutoCorrect Options

+ + + + + +

ImageMap

+ + +

Goal Seek

+ + + + +

Scenarios

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f766eecd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Window + /text/scalc/main0107.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Window

+Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45006fe18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0112.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + Data + /text/scalc/main0112.xhp + + + +
+

Data

+ Use the Data menu commands to edit the data in the current sheet. You can define ranges, sort and filter the data, calculate results, outline data, and create a pivot table. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Streams

+ + + Data Provider temporarily removed. Feature and help file not finished yet. + Link is: href="text/scalc/01/data_provider.xhp#data_provider" + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0116.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0116.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84036c545 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0116.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Sheet + /text/scalc/main0116.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Sheet

+This menu contains commands to modify and manage a sheet and its elements. +
+

Insert Rows

+ +

Insert Columns

+ + + + + + + + +

Move or Copy Sheet

+ + +

Show Sheet

+ + +

Delete Sheet

+ + +

Sheet Tab Color

+ + +

Sheet Events

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7ed89cff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Toolbars + /text/scalc/main0200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Toolbars

+ This submenu lists the toolbars that are available in spreadsheets. This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bdab0b72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + +Formatting Bar +/text/scalc/main0202.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Formatting Bar

+The Formatting bar contains basic commands for applying manually formatting. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Font Color

+ + +

Align Left

+ + +

Align Center Horizontally

+ + +

Align Right

+ + +

Justify

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Align Top

+ + +

Align Center Vertically

+ + +

Align Bottom

+ + + +

Number Format : Date

+Applies the date format to the selected cells. + +

Number Format: Exponential

+Applies the exponential format to the selected cells. +

Additional icons

+If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. + +

Left-To-Right

+ + + + +left to right icon + + + +The text is entered from left to right. + + +
+ +

Right-To-Left

+ + + + +right to left icon + + + +The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left. + + +
+UFI: inserted .uno:Align... help ids here, had to be removed from shared/01/05340300.xhp + +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. + +Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. + +Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. + +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and right cell borders. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a401516d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + +Drawing Object Properties Bar +/text/scalc/main0203.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Drawing Object Properties Bar

+The Drawing Object Properties Bar for objects that you select in the sheet contains formatting and alignment commands. +
+ + + + +

Line Style

+ + +

Line Width

+ + +

Line Color

+ + + + +

Background Color

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bab10453a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0205.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + +Text Formatting Bar +/text/scalc/main0205.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Text Formatting Bar

+The Text Formatting Bar that is displayed when the cursor is in a text object, such as a text box or a drawing object, contains formatting and alignment commands. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +

Font Color

+ + +

Line Spacing: 1

+ + +

Line Spacing: 1.5

+ + +

Line Spacing: 2

+ + +

Align Left

+ + +

Centered

+ + +

Align Right

+ + +

Justify

+ + +

Superscript

+ + +

Subscript

+ + +

Character

+ + +

Paragraph

+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6844595db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Formula Bar +/text/scalc/main0206.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Formula Bar

+Use this bar to enter formulas. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..870ecdde1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + Status Bar + /text/scalc/main0208.xhp + + + +
+

Status Bar

+ The Status Bar displays information about the current sheet. +
+ + + + + + +

Digital Signature

+ See also Digital Signatures. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d8053d24 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Print Preview Bar + /text/scalc/main0210.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Full Screen

+Hides the menus and toolbars. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button. +

Format Page

+ +

Margins

+Shows or hides margins of the page. Margins can be dragged by the mouse, and also can be set on Page tab of Page Style dialog. +

Scaling Factor

+This slide defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. Scaling factor can be set on Sheet tab of Page Style dialog, too. +

Close Preview

+To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6aaa57760 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Image Bar +/text/scalc/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Image Bar

+The Image bar is displayed when you insert or select an image in a sheet. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2430fd6b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + +Tools Bar +/text/scalc/main0218.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Tools Bar

+Use the Tools bar to access commonly used commands. +
+ + + + + +

Controls

+ + + + + +

Choose Themes

+ + + + + + +

Advanced Filter

+ +

Start

+ +

Euro Converter

+ +

Define

+ +

Goal Seek

+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27e04b5f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +$[officename] Calc Features +/text/scalc/main0503.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

$[officename] Calc Features

+ $[officename] Calc is a spreadsheet application that you can use to calculate, analyze, and manage your data. You can also import and modify Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. +
+

Calculations

+ $[officename] Calc provides you with functions, including statistical and banking functions, that you can use to create formulas to perform complex calculations on your data. + You can also use the Function Wizard to help you create your formulas. +

What-If Calculations

+ An interesting feature is to be able to immediately view the results of changes made to one factor of calculations that are composed of several factors. For instance, you can see how changing the time period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts. Furthermore, you can manage larger tables by using different predefined scenarios. +

Database Functions

+ Use spreadsheets to arrange, store, and filter your data. + $[officename] Calc lets you drag-and-drop tables from databases, or lets you use a spreadsheet as a data source for creating form letters in $[officename] Writer. +

Arranging Data

+ With a few mouse-clicks, you can reorganize your spreadsheet to show or hide certain data ranges, or to format ranges according to special conditions, or to quickly calculate subtotals and totals. +

Dynamic Charts

+ $[officename] Calc lets you present spreadsheet data in dynamic charts that update automatically when the data changes. +

Opening and Saving Microsoft Files

+ Use the $[officename] filters to convert Excel files, or to open and save in a variety of other formats. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcd3f4960 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,227 @@ + + + + + + + + +To access this function... +/text/schart/00/00000004.xhp + + + +To access this function... + +
+Choose View - Chart Data Table (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click + + + + +Icon + + + +Chart Data + + +
+ +
+Choose Insert - Titles (Charts) + +
+Choose Insert - Legend (Charts) +Choose Format - Legend - Position tab (Charts) +
+
+Choose Insert - Data Labels (Charts) +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point/Data Series - Data Labels tab (for data series and data point) (Charts) +
+Choose Insert - Axes (Charts) + +
+Choose Insert - Grids (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click + + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal Grids + + + + + +Icon + + + +Vertical Grids + + +
+ +
+Choose Insert - X Error Bars, or Insert - Y Error Bars (Charts) + +Choose Insert - Trend Line (Charts) + +Choose Insert - Special Character (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Point dialog (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series dialog (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection - Data Series - Options tab (Charts) + +Choose Format - Title (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) + +Choose Format - Format Selection - Title dialog (Charts) + +Choose Format - Title (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis (Charts) + +Choose Format - Legend, or Format - Format Selection - Legend (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis - X Axis/Secondary X Axis/Z Axis/All Axes (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis/Secondary Y Axis (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Scale tab (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis - X Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) + +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Positioning tab (Charts) + +Choose Format - Grid (Charts) + +Choose Format - Grid - X, Y, Z Axis Major Grid/ X, Y, Z Minor Grid/ All Axis Grids (Charts) + +Choose Format - Chart Wall - Chart dialog (Charts) + +Choose Format - Chart Floor (Charts) + +Choose Format - Chart Area (Charts) + +Choose Format - Chart Type (Charts) +On Formatting bar, click + + + + +Icon + + + +Edit Chart Type + + +
+ +Choose Format - 3D View (Charts) + +
+Choose Format - Arrangement (Charts) +Open context menu - choose Arrangement (Charts) +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal Grids + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Show/Hide Axis Descriptions + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Vertical Grids + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + + Icon + + + + Insert Chart + + +
+
+
+ Choose Insert - Chart... + +
+
+ Choose Insert - Chart... + + Double-click a chart, then choose Format - Data Ranges +
+In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Smooth in the Lines type drop-down, then click the Properties button. +In the Chart Type dialog of a Line chart or XY chart that displays lines, choose Stepped in the Lines type drop-down, then click the Properties button. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..913028931 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Data Table +/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp + + + + + + +Data Table +Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. +The Data Table dialog is not available if you insert a chart that is based on a Calc sheet or on a Writer table.UFI: fixes #i31208# + +To update a chart manually when a Writer table got changedi81240 + +Some changes will become visible only after you close and reopen the dialog.UFI: fixes #i22854#still so? +
+ +
+ +To change chart data +When you create a chart that is based on default data, or when you copy a chart into your document, you can open the Data Table dialog to enter your own data. The chart responds to the data in a live preview. +Close the Chart Data dialog to apply all changes to the chart. Choose Edit - Undo to cancel the changes. + + +Insert or select a chart that is not based on existing cell data. + + +Choose View - Chart Data Table to open the Data Table dialog. +The data series are organized in columns. The role of the left most column is set to categories or data labels respectively. The contents of the left most column are always formatted as text. You can insert more text columns to be used as hierarchical labels. + + +Click a cell in the dialog and change the contents. Click another cell to see the changed contents in the preview. + + +Enter the name of the data series in the text box above the column. + + +Use the icons above the table to insert or delete rows and columns. For data series with multiple columns, only whole data series can be inserted or deleted. Regina: see issue 72901 + + +The order of the data series in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Series Right icon to switch the current column with its neighbor on the right.changed names, see i79863 + + +The order of the categories or data points in the chart is the same as in the data table. Use the Move Row Down icon to switch the current row with its neighbor below. + + +insert rowInserts a new row below the current row. +insert seriesInserts a new data series after the current column. +insert text columnInserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions. +delete rowDeletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row. +delete seriesDeletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column. +move series rightSwitches the current column with its neighbor at the right. +move series leftSwitches the current column with its neighbor at the left. +move row downSwitches the current row with its neighbor below.edit fields, see i72361 +move row upSwitches the current row with its neighbor above.edit fields, see i72361 +Enter names for the data series. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e43178701 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Titles +/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp + + + + + + +Titles +Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart. + You can define the text for the main title, subtitle and the axis labels, and specify if they are displayed. +
+ +
+ +Title +Enter the desired title for the chart. This will be displayed at the top of the chart. + +Subtitle +Enter the desired subtitle for the chart. This will be displayed under the title set in the Title field. + +Axes + +X axis +Enter the desired title for the X axis of the chart. + + +Y axis +Enter the desired title for the Y axis of the chart. + + +Z axis +Enter the desired title for the Z axis of the chart. This option is only available for 3-D charts. + +Secondary Axes +X axis + +Enter the desired secondary title for the X axis of the chart. This will appear on the opposite side of the chart as the X axis title. + +Y axis + +Enter the desired secondary title for the Y axis of the chart. This will appear on the opposite side of the chart as the Y axis title. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3837b670e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + +Legend +/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp + + + + + +chart legends; hiding +hiding;chart legends + + +Legend +Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed. + +
+ +
+ +To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Legend On/Off + + +
+ + +Display +Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. +Position +Select the position for the legend: + + +Left +Positions the legend at the left of the chart. + + +Top +Positions the legend at the top of the chart. + + +Right +Positions the legend at the right of the chart. + + +Bottom +Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. +Text Orientation +This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. + +Text Direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. + +Overlay +Specifies whether the legend should overlap the chart. Turning off this option is useful if you want to display the legend above an empty part of the chart area instead of beside it. This way the drawing area can fill the whole chart area, increasing its readability. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d56974b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Data Labels + /text/schart/01/04030000.xhp + + + +data labels in charts + labels; for charts + charts; data labels + data values in charts + chart legends; showing icons with labels + + + + + + +
+

Data Labels +

+ Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels. + +
+
+ If an element of a data series is selected, this command works on that data series only. If no element is selected, this command works on all data series. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Show value as number

+ Displays the absolute values of the data points. + + +

Number format

+ Opens a dialog to select the number format. + + +

Show value as percentage

+ Displays the percentage of the data points in each column. + + +

Percentage format

+ Opens a dialog to select the percentage format. + + +

Show category

+ Shows the data point text labels. + + +

Show legend key

+ Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. + + +

Separator

+ Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object. + + +

Placement

+ Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects. + + +

Text Direction

+ Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. + + +

Rotate Text

+ Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels. + + +Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..159f699c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Axes +/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp + + + + +axes; showing axes in charts +charts; showing axes +X axes; showing +Y axes; showing +Z axes; showing +axes; better scaling +secondary axes in charts +mw made "secondary axes;" a one level entry, deleted "charts; showing secondary axes" and generated one "axes;" entry out of two "axes;showing..." entries + + +Axes +Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart. + +
+ +
+Major axis +X axis +Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions. +Y axis +Displays the Y axis as a line with subdivisions. +Z axis +Displays the Z axis as a line with subdivisions. This axis can only be displayed in 3D charts. +Secondary axis +Use this area to assign a second axis to your chart. If a data series is already assigned to this axis, $[officename] automatically displays the axis and the label. You can turn off these settings later on. If no data has been assigned to this axis and you activate this area, the values of the primary Y axis are applied to the secondary axis. +X axis +Displays a secondary X axis in the chart. +Y axis +Displays a secondary Y axis in the chart. +The major axis and the secondary axis can have different scaling. For example, you can scale one axis to 2 in. and the other to 1.5 in. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..591be0c84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +X/Y Error Bars +/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp + + + + + + + + +X/Y Error Barsi85330 +Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts. + + +
+ +
+An error bar is an indicator line that spans over a range from x/y - NegativeErrorValue to x/y + PositiveErrorValue. In this term, x or y is the value of the data point. When "standard deviation" is selected, x or y is the mean value of the data series. NegativeErrorValue and PositiveErrorValue are the amounts calculated by the error bar function or given explicitly. +The Insert - X/Y Error Bars menu command is only available for 2D charts. +Error category +In the Error category area, you can choose different ways to display the error category. + + +None +Does not show any error bars. + + +Constant value +Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area. + + +Percentage +Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. + + + + +Functions +Select a function to calculate the error bars. +Standard Error: Displays the standard error. +Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values. +Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance). Unlike other functions, error bars are centered on the mean. +Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. + + + +Cell Range +Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values. + + + + +Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size. + + +From Data Table +For a chart with its own data, the error bar values can be entered in the chart data table. The Data Table dialog shows additional columns titled Positive X or Y-Error-Bars and Negative X or Y-Error-Bars. + +Positive (+) + + +Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value. + +Negative (-) + + +Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value. + +Positive (+) when Cell Range is selected + + +Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet. + +Negative (-) when Cell Range is selected + + +Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet. + + + +Same value for both +Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positive (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically. +Error Indicator +Specifies the error indicator. + + +Positive and Negative +Shows positive and negative error bars. + + +Positive +Shows only positive error bars. + + +Negative +Shows only negative error bars. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4569d9bc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + Trend Lines + /text/schart/01/04050100.xhp + + + + + + + calculating;regression curves + regression curves in charts + trend lines in charts + mean value lines in charts + +only use trend line, not regression curve: i89823 + + + + + Trend Lines + Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts. + +
+ +
Linear + +A linear trend line is shown.Logarithmic + +A logarithmic trend line is shown.Exponential + +An exponential trend line is shown.Power + +A power trend line is shown.Polynomial + +A polynomial trend line is shown with a given degree.Degree + + +Degree of polynomial trend line.Moving average + +A moving average trend line is shown with a given period.Period + + +Number of points to calculate average of moving average trend line.Trend line name + + +Name of trend line in legend.Extrapolate forward + + +Trend line is extrapolated for higher x-values.Extrapolate backward + + +Trend line is extrapolated for lower x-values.Force intercept + +For linear, polynomial and exponential trend lines, intercept value is forced to a given value.Intercept value + +Value of intercept if it is forced.Show equation + +Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.Show correlation coefficient (R2) + +Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.X name + + +Name of X variable in trend line equation.Y name + + +Name of Y variable in trend line equation. +If you insert a trend line to a chart type that uses categories, like Line or Column, then the numbers 1, 2, 3, … are used as x-values to calculate the trend line. For such charts the XY chart type might be more suitable. + + + + + To insert a trend line for a data series, first double-click the chart to enter edit mode and select the data series in the chart to which a trend line is to be created. + + + Choose Insert - Trend Line, or right-click the data series to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line. + + + Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series. + + + To delete a trend line or mean value line, click the line, then press the Del key. + + +The menu item Insert - Trend Line is only available when the chart is in edit mode. It will appear grayed out if the chart is in edit mode but no data series is selected. +The trend line has the same color as the corresponding data series. To change the line properties, select the trend line and choose Format - Format Selection - Line. +A trend line is shown in the legend automatically. Its name can be defined in options of the trend line. + + +Trend Line Equation and Coefficient of Determination + +When the chart is in edit mode, %PRODUCTNAME gives you the equation of the trend line and the coefficient of determination R2, even if they are not shown: click on the trend line to see the information in the status bar. +To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation. +To change format of values (use less significant digits or scientific notation), select the equation in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Format Trend Line Equation - Numbers. +Default equation uses x for abscissa variable, and f(x) for ordinate variable. To change these names, select the trend line, choose Format - Format Selection – Type and enter names in X Variable Name and Y Variable Name edit boxes. + +To show the coefficient of determination R2, select the equation in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert R2. +If intercept is forced, coefficient of determination R2 is not calculated in the same way as with free intercept. R2 values can not be compared with forced or free intercept. + +Trend Lines Curve Types +The following regression types are available: + + + + Linear trend line: regression through equation y=a∙x+b. Intercept b can be forced. + + + Polynomial trend line: regression through equation y=Σi(ai∙xi). Intercept a0 can be forced. Degree of polynomial must be given (at least 2). + + + Logarithmic trend line: regression through equation y=a∙ln(x)+b. + + + Exponential trend line: regression through equation y=b∙exp(a∙x).This equation is equivalent to y=b∙mx with m=exp(a). Intercept b can be forced. + + + Power trend line: regression through equation y=b∙xa. + + + Moving average trend line: simple moving average is calculated with the n previous y-values, n being the period. No equation is available for this trend line. + + +Constraints + The calculation of the trend line considers only data pairs with the following values: + + + + Logarithmic trend line: only positive x-values are considered. + + + Exponential trend line: only positive y-values are considered, except if all y-values are negative: regression will then follow equation y=-b∙exp(a∙x). + + + Power trend line: only positive x-values are considered; only positive y-values are considered, except if all y-values are negative: regression will then follow equation y=-b∙xa. + +You should transform your data accordingly; it is best to work on a copy of the original data and transform the copied data. + +Calculate Parameters in Calc +You can also calculate the parameters using Calc functions as follows. + +The linear regression equation +The linear regression follows the equation y=m*x+b. +m = SLOPE(Data_Y;Data_X) +b = INTERCEPT(Data_Y ;Data_X) +Calculate the coefficient of determination by +r2 = RSQ(Data_Y;Data_X) +Besides m, b and r2 the array function LINEST provides additional statistics for a regression analysis. + +The logarithmic regression equation +The logarithmic regression follows the equation y=a*ln(x)+b. +a = SLOPE(Data_Y;LN(Data_X)) +b = INTERCEPT(Data_Y ;LN(Data_X)) +r2 = RSQ(Data_Y;LN(Data_X)) + +The exponential regression equation + For exponential trend lines a transformation to a linear model takes place. The optimal curve fitting is related to the linear model and the results are interpreted accordingly. +The exponential regression follows the equation y=b*exp(a*x) or y=b*mx, which is transformed to ln(y)=ln(b)+a*x or ln(y)=ln(b)+ln(m)*x respectively. +a = SLOPE(LN(Data_Y);Data_X) +The variables for the second variation are calculated as follows: +m = EXP(SLOPE(LN(Data_Y);Data_X)) +b = EXP(INTERCEPT(LN(Data_Y);Data_X)) +Calculate the coefficient of determination by +r2 = RSQ(LN(Data_Y);Data_X) +Besides m, b and r2 the array function LOGEST provides additional statistics for a regression analysis. + +The power regression equation + For power regression curves a transformation to a linear model takes place. The power regression follows the equation y=b*xa, which is transformed to ln(y)=ln(b)+a*ln(x). +a = SLOPE(LN(Data_Y);LN(Data_X)) +b = EXP(INTERCEPT(LN(Data_Y);LN(Data_X)) +r2 = RSQ(LN(Data_Y);LN(Data_X)) + +The polynomial regression equation +For polynomial regression curves a transformation to a linear model takes place. +Create a table with the columns x, x2, x3, … , xn, y up to the desired degree n. +Use the formula =LINEST(Data_Y,Data_X) with the complete range x to xn (without headings) as Data_X. +The first row of the LINEST output contains the coefficients of the regression polynomial, with the coefficient of xn at the leftmost position. +The first element of the third row of the LINEST output is the value of r2. See the LINEST function for details on proper use and an explanation of the other output parameters. + +
+X/Y Error Bars +LINEST function +LOGEST function +SLOPE function +INTERCEPT function +RSQ function +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b014fcb84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Options + /text/schart/01/04060000.xhp + + + + + + +
+aligning; 2D charts + charts; aligning + pie charts;options + + +Options + Use this dialog to define some options that are available for specific chart types. The contents of the Options dialog vary with the chart type. +
+
+ +
+ Align data series to: + In this area you can choose between two Y axis scaling modes. The axes can only be scaled and given properties separately. + +Primary Y axis + This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary Y axis. + +Secondary Y axis + Changes the scaling of the Y axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active. + Settings + Define the settings for a bar chart in this area. Any changes apply to all data series of the chart, not to the selected data only. + +Spacing + Defines the spacing between the columns in percent. The maximal spacing is 600%. + +Overlap + Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series. You can choose between -100 and +100%. + +Connection Lines + For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines. + +Show bars side by side + If two axes are shown in a bar chart, and some data series are attached to the first axis, while some other data series are attached to the second axis, then both sets of data series are shown independently, overlapping each other. + As a result, bars attached to the first y-axis are partly or completely hidden by bars attached to the second y-axis. To avoid this, enable the option to display bars side by side. The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis. + +Clockwise direction + Available for pie and donut charts. The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction. + +Starting angle + Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position. + In 3D pie and donut charts that were created with older versions of the software, the starting angle is 0 degrees instead of 90 degrees. For old and new 2D charts the default starting angle is 90 degrees. + When you change the starting angle or the direction, only current versions of the software show the changed values. Older versions of the software display the same document using the default values: Always counterclockwise direction and a starting value of 90 degrees (2D pie charts) or 0 degrees (3D pie charts). + +Degrees + Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value. + Plot missing values + Sometimes values are missing in a data series that is shown in a chart. You can select from different options how to plot the missing values. The options are available for some chart types only. + +Leave gap + For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net. + +Assume zero + For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area. + +Continue line + For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY. + +Include values from hidden cells + Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range. + + +Hide legend entry + Do not show legend entry for the selected data series or data point. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..25e670927 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Grids + /text/schart/01/04070000.xhp + + + + + + + axes; inserting grids + grids; inserting in charts + + + + + + +Grids +You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts. The Y axis major grid is activated by default. + +
+ +
+ +Major grids +Defines the axis to be set as the major grid. + + +X axis +Adds gridlines to the X axis of the chart. + +The Vertical Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis. It switches between the three states: no grid, major grid and both major and minor grids displayed. The change will affect check boxes in Insert - Grids. + + + +Y axis +Adds gridlines to the Y axis of the chart. + +The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. It switches between the three states: no grid, major grid and both major and minor grids displayed. The change will affect check boxes in Insert - Grids. + + + +Z axis +Adds gridlines to the Z axis of the chart. This option is only available if you're working with 3D charts. + +Minor grids +Use this area to assign a minor grid for each axis. Assigning minor grids to the axis reduces the distance between the major grids. + + +X axis +Adds gridlines that subdivide the X axis into smaller sections. + + +Y axis +Adds gridlines that subdivide the Y axis into smaller sections. + + +Z axis +Adds gridlines that subdivide the Z axis into smaller sections. This option is only available if you're working with 3D charts. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..217bb479a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Format Selection +/text/schart/01/05010000.xhp + + + +objects;properties of charts +charts; properties +properties;charts +mw changed "properties;" + +Format Selection +Formats the selected object. + Depending on the object selected, the command opens dialogs that you can also open by choosing the following commands from the Format menu: +
+ +
+Chart Wall + +Chart Area + +Chart Floor + +Title + +Legend + +X Axis + +Y Axis + +Grid + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd3d9c576 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Data Point +/text/schart/01/05010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Data Point

+ This dialog allows you to change the properties of a selected data point. The dialog appears when there is only one data point selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts. +
+ Any changes made only affect this one data point. For example, if you edit the color of a bar, only the color of that bar will be different. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a30f576c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Data Series +/text/schart/01/05010200.xhp + + + +
+

Data Series

+Use this to change the properties of a selected data series. This dialog appears when one data series is selected when you choose Format - Format Selection. Some of the menu entries are only available for 2D or 3D charts. +
+Any changes made here affect the entire data series. For example, if you change the color, all elements belonging to this data series will change color. +
+ +
+ + + + + +

Y Error Bars

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7429313a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Title +/text/schart/01/05020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + titles; formatting chartsformatting; chart titlesTitle + The Title menu command opens a submenu for editing the properties of the titles in the chart. +
+ +
+ Main title + + Subtitle + + X-axis title + + Y-axis title + + Z-axis title + + All titles + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed7da3e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + Title + /text/schart/01/05020100.xhp + + + +editing; titles + + + + + + +moved the subtitle bookmark here from 0502020 +Title + Modifies the properties of the selected title. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc0bf588e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+aligning;titles in charts +titles;alignment (charts) + +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of the chart title. +
+Some of the options are not available for all types of labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. +
+ +
+ +Please note that problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8b2a0bb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Title +/text/schart/01/05020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Title

+Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7aec8a242 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +Alignmentnew name: Label +Modifies the alignment of axes or title labels. +
+Some of the options listed here are not available for all labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. +
+ +
+ +Show labels +Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels. + +The AxesTitle On/Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labeling of all axes on or off. + + +
+Rotate text +Defines the text direction of cell contents. Click one of the ABCD buttons to assign the required direction. + + +ABCD wheel +Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation. The letters "ABCD" on the button correspond to the new setting. + + +ABCD button +Assigns vertical text orientation for cell contents. +If you define a vertical x-axis label, the text may be cut off by the line of the x-axis. + + +Degrees +Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle. +
+Text flow +Determines the text flow of the data label. + +Overlap +Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells. This can be especially useful if there is a lack of space. This option is not available with different title directions. + +Break +Allows a text break. +The following options are not available for all chart types: +Order +The options on this tab are only available for a 2D chart, under Format - Axis - Y Axis or X Axis. In this area, you can define the alignment of the number labels on the X or Y axis. + +Tile +Arranges numbers on the axis side by side. + +Stagger odd +Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers. + +Stagger even +Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers. + +Automatic +Automatically arranges numbers on the axis. +Problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. + +need to create a new Equation dialog box main page with links to sub pages later. This page then contains only the Text Direction control. +Text Direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05cb1381d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Legend +/text/schart/01/05030000.xhp + + + +

Legend

+Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend. + +
+ +
+ + + + +

Display

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e91100622 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Axis +/text/schart/01/05040000.xhp + + + +Axis +This opens a submenu to edit axial properties. +The tabs in the dialogs depend on the chart type selected. +
+ +
+X axis + +Y axis + +Secondary X Axis +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary X axis. To insert a secondary X axis, choose Insert - Axes and select X axis. +Secondary Y Axis +Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of the secondary Y axis. To insert a secondary Y axis, choose Insert - Axes and select Y axis. +Z axis + +All axes + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9c1f17ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Axes +/text/schart/01/05040100.xhp + + + +axes;formatting +mw changed "X axes;" to "axes;" + + +

Axes

+Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis. + The name of the dialog depends on the selected axis. +
+ +
+The Y axis has an enhanced dialog. For X-Y charts, the X axis chart is also enhanced by the Scaling tab. +Scaling the X axis is only possible in the X-Y chart type. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16ecdded5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Y Axis +/text/schart/01/05040200.xhp + + + +Y axes; formatting + + +

Y Axis

+Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..411ec9837 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Scale +/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp + + + + +
+scaling; axes +logarithmic scaling along axes +charts;scaling axes +X axes;scaling +Y axes; scaling +mw changed "axes;scaling" to "Y axes, scaling" +Scale +Controls the scaling of the X or Y axis. +
+
+ +
+The axes are automatically scaled by $[officename] so that all values are optimally displayed. +To achieve specific results, you can manually change the axis scaling. For example, you can display only the top areas of the columns by shifting the zero line upwards. +Scale +You can enter values for subdividing axes in this area. You can automatically set the properties Minimum, Maximum, Major interval, Minor interval count and Reference value. + +Minimum +Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis. + +Maximum +Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis. + +Major interval +Defines the interval for the main division of the axes. The main interval cannot be larger than the value area. + +Minor interval count +Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes. + +Reference value +Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis. + + + + + + +Automatic +You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values. +Disable this feature if you are working with "fixed" values, as it does not permit automatic scaling. + +Logarithmic scale +Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically. +Use this feature if you are working with values that differ sharply from each other. You can use logarithmic scaling to make the grid lines of the axis equidistant but have values that may increase or decrease. + + +Reverse direction +Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction. That means for Cartesian coordinate systems that the x-axis shows the lower values on the left and the y-axis shows the lower values at the bottom. For polar coordinate systems the mathematical angle axis direction is counterclockwise and the radial axis is from inner to outer. + + +Type +For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically. For the axis type "Date" you can set the following options. +Minimum and maximum value to be shown on the ends of the scale. + +Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps. + + +Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. + + +Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5682bef57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Positioning +/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp + + + + +
+positioning; axes +charts;positioning axes +X axes;positioning +Y axes;positioning +axes;interval marks + +Positioning +Controls the positioning of the axis. +
+
+ +
+Axis line + +Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category. +value selected +Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis. +category selected +Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis. +Position Axis +On tick marks +Specifies that the axis is positioned on the first/last tickmarks. This makes the data points visual representation begin/end at the value axis. + +Between tick marks +Specifies that the axis is positioned between the tickmarks. This makes the data points visual representation begin/end at a distance from the value axis. +Labels + +Place labels +Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end. +Interval marks +Major: +Specifies whether the marks are to be on the inner or outer side of the axis. It is possible to combine both: you will then see marks on both sides. + +Inner +Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. + +Outer +Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. +Minor: +This area is used to define the marking dashes between the axis marks. It is possible to activate both fields. This will result in a marking line running from the outside to the inside. + +Inner +Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. + +Outer +Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. + +Place marks +Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a97d6bbab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Grid +/text/schart/01/05050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + grids; formatting axesaxes; formatting gridsGrid + Opens a submenu, where you select the grid you want to format. +
+ +
+ X Axis Major Grid + + Y Axis Major Grid + + Z Axis Major Grid + + X Axis Minor Grid + + Y Axis Minor Grid + + Z Axis minor Grid + + All Axis Grids + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..131f6ac04 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Grid +/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +X axes;grid formatting +Y axes;grid formatting +Z axes; grid formatting + + + + + + + + +Grid +Opens the Grid dialog for defining grid properties. + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7919761e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Wall +/text/schart/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + charts; formatting wallsformatting;chart wallsChart Wall + Opens the Chart Wall dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart. +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d4f94340 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Floor +/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; formatting floors +formatting; chart floors + + +Chart Floor +Opens the Chart Floor dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3D charts. This function is only available for 3D charts. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc3d3fec9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Area +/text/schart/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + charts; formatting areasformatting; chart areasChart Area + Opens the Chart Area dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart. +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd8f277ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Arrangement +/text/schart/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Arrangement +Allows you to modify the order of the data series already set in the chart. +
+The position of the data in the data table remains unchanged. You can only choose the commands after inserting a chart in $[officename] Calc. +
+ +
+This function is only available if you have data displayed in columns. It is not possible to switch to data display in rows. +Bring Forward +Brings the selected data series forward (to the right). +Send Backward +Sends the selected data series backward (to the left). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8833dff6f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + Choosing a Chart Type + /text/schart/01/choose_chart_type.xhp + + + + Choosing a Chart Type + + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+ The available chart types + Choose from the following chart types, depending on data type and intended presentation effect. + + + + +Icon + and +Icon + + + + Column or Bar + + + + + +Icon + + + + Pie + + + + + +Icon + + + + Area + + + + + +Icon + + + + Line + + + + + +Icon + + + + XY (scatter) + + + + + +Icon + + + + Bubble + + + + + +Icon + + + + Net + + + + + +Icon + + + + Stock + + + + + +Icon + + + + Column and Line + + +
+ +   +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05d04f126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Smooth Line Properties +/text/schart/01/smooth_line_properties.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +curves;properties in line charts/XY charts +properties;smooth lines in line charts/XY charts + +Smooth Line Properties +In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to show curves instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those curves.most possibly these curves are not Bezier curves. +
+ +
+ +To change line properties + + +Select Cubic Spline or B-Spline. +These are mathematical models that influence the display of the curves. The curves are created by joining together segments of polynomials. + + +Optionally set the resolution. A higher value leads to a smoother line. + + +For B-spline lines optionally set the degree of the polynomials. + + + +Apply a line curve model. + +Set the resolution. + +Set the degree of the polynomials. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..628cc61b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Smooth Line Properties +/text/schart/01/stepped_line_properties.xhp + + +Eric Seynaeve + + + + + +curves;properties in line charts/XY charts +properties;stepped lines in line charts/XY charts + +Stepped Line Properties +In a chart that displays lines (Line type or XY type), you can choose to connect the points with steps instead of straight lines. Some options control the properties of those steps. +
+ +
+Different step types + + +Start step icon +Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. + + +End step icon +Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. + + +Center X icon +Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. + + +Center Y icon +Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b303353e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ + + + + + + + + + 3D View + /text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp + + + + + + +3D charts + charts; 3D views + illumination; 3D charts + +mw made "3D charts;" a one level entry +3D View + + On the first page of the Chart Wizard or in the context menu of a chart you can choose a chart type. Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.must be AHID, see i80656 +
+ +
+ + The chart preview responds to the new settings that you enter in the dialog. + + + When you leave the dialog with OK, the settings are applied permanently. + + + When you leave the dialog with Cancel or Escape, the chart returns to the state when you opened the dialog. + + + For a 3D chart you can choose Format - 3D View to set perspective, appearance and illumination. + Perspective + + + Enter the values for rotation of the chart on the three axes and for a perspective view. + + + Set all angles to 0 for a front view of the chart. Pie charts and donut charts are shown as circles. + With Right-angled axes enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. + An x value of 90, with y and z set to 0, provides a view from top down to the chart. With x set to -90, you see the bottom of the chart. + The rotations are applied in the order first x, then y, last z. + When shading is enabled and you rotate a chart, the lights are rotated as if they are fixed to the chart. + The rotation axes always relate to the page, not to the chart's axes. This is different from some other chart programs. + Select the Perspective check box to view the chart in central perspective as through a camera lens instead of using a parallel projection. + Set the focus length with the spin button. 100% gives a perspective view where a far edge in the chart looks approximately half as big as a near edge. + Older versions of %PRODUCTNAME cannot display the percentage of perspective the same way as the current version.Right-angled axes + +If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.X rotation + +Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.Y rotation + +Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.z rotation + +Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.perspective + + +Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects. + Appearance + + + Select a scheme from the list box. + + + By selecting a scheme, the check boxes and the light sources are set accordingly. + + + If you mark or unmark a combination of check boxes that is not given by the Realistic or Simple scheme, you create a Custom scheme. + + + Mark Shading to use the Gouraud method for rendering the surface, otherwise a flat method is used. + The flat method sets a single color and brightness for each polygon. The edges are visible, soft gradients and spot lights are not possible. + The Gouraud method applies gradients for a smoother, more realistic look.Regina: Need an external article on web, which describes the 3D engine in detail. Till that, the user should get some information on Gouraud and Flat. + + + + + Mark Object Borders to draw lines along the edges. + + + Mark Rounded Edges to smooth the edges of box shapes. + + Scheme + +Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.Shading + +Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.Object borders + +Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.Rounded Edges + +Edges are rounded by 5%. + + Illumination + Set the light sources for the 3D view. + + + Click any of the eight buttons to switch a directed light source on or off. + By default, the second light source is switched on. It is the first of seven "normal", uniform light sources. The light source number one projects a specular light with highlights. + + + For the selected light source, you can then choose a color and intensity in the list box just below the eight buttons. The brightness values of all lights are added, so use dark colors when you enable multiple lights. + + + The small preview inside this tab page has two sliders to set the vertical and horizontal position of the selected light source. The light source always aims to the middle of the object. + + + The button in the corner of the small preview switches the internal illumination model between a sphere and a cube.Regina: Are you sure? I thought, that it only toggles the preview in the dialog. + + + Use the Ambient light list box to define the ambient light which shines with a uniform intensity from all directions. + + preview right bar + + +Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.preview bottom bar + + +Drag the bottom slider to set the horizontal position and direction of the selected light source.preview right bottom button + + +Click to switch between an illumination model of a sphere or a cube.Light source + +Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights. + + + + + + + +Click to enable or disable the uniform light source. + +Select a color for the selected light source. + +Select a color using the color dialog.Ambient light + +Select a color for the ambient light. + +Select a color using the color dialog. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e5406572 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Chart Type Area +/text/schart/01/type_area.xhp + + + +area charts +chart types;area + +Chart Type Area + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+Area +An area chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series are connected by a line. The area between each two lines is filled with a color. The area chart's focus is to emphasize the changes from one category to the next. +Normal - this subtype plots all values as absolute y values. It first plots the area of the last column in the data range, then the next to last, and so on, and finally the first column of data is drawn. Thus, if the values in the first column are higher than other values, the last drawn area will hide the other areas. +Stacked - this subtypes plots values cumulatively stacked on each other. It ensures that all values are visible, and no data set is hidden by others. However, the y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the last column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked areas. +Percent - this subtype plots values cumulatively stacked on each other and scaled as percentage of the category total. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4723ca34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + Chart Type Bubble + /text/schart/01/type_bubble.xhp + + + +bubble charts + chart types;bubble + +Chart Type Bubble + + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+ Bubble + A bubble chart shows the relations of three variables. Two variables are used for the position on the X-axis and Y-axis, while the third variable is shown as the relative size of each bubble. + The data series dialog for a bubble chart has an entry to define the data range for the Bubble Sizes. +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c854e779a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Type Column and Bar +/text/schart/01/type_column_bar.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +column charts +bar charts +chart types;column and bar +mw made one entry out of two "charts types;" +Chart Type Column and Bar + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+Column +This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with vertical bars. The height of each bar is proportional to its value. The x axis shows categories. The y axis shows the value for each category. +Normal - this subtype shows all data values belonging to a category next to each other. Main focus is on the individual absolute values, compared to every other value. +Stacked - this subtype shows the data values of each category on top of each other. Main focus is the overall category value and the individual contribution of each value within its category. +Percent - this subtype shows the relative percentage of each data value with regard to the total of its category. Main focus is the relative contribution of each value to the category's total. +You can enable a 3D view of the data values. The "realistic" scheme tries to give the best 3D look. The "simple" scheme tries to mimic the chart view of other Office products. +For 3D charts, you can select the shape of each data value from Box, Cylinder, Cone, and Pyramid. +Bar +This type shows a bar chart or bar graph with horizontal bars. The length of each bar is proportional to its value. The y axis shows categories. The x axis shows the value for each category. +The subtypes are the same as for the Column type. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d757b24eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Chart Type Column and Line +/text/schart/01/type_column_line.xhp + + + +column and line charts +chart types;column and line +combination charts + +Chart Type Column and Line + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+Column and Line +A Column and Line chart is a combination of a Column chart with a Line chart. +Select one of the variants + + +Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn side by side so that you can easily compare their values. + + +Stacked Columns and Lines. The rectangles of the column data series are drawn stacked above each other, so that the height of a column visualizes the sum of the data values. + + +You can insert a second y-axis with Insert - Axes after you finish the wizard. +To specify a data range +The leftmost columns (or the top rows) of the selected data range provide the data that are shown as Columns objects. The other columns or rows of the data range provide the data for the Lines objects. You can change this assignment in the Data Series dialog. + + +Select the data range. + + +Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + + +Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. + + +Organizing data series +In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. +The column data series are positioned at the top of the list, the line data series at the bottom of the list. + + +To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. + + +Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. + + +Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. + + +Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This way you can convert a Column data series to a List data series and back. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. + + +Editing data series + + +Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. +In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. + + +Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. +The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. + + +Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. + + +The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. +Editing categories or data labels + + +Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. + + +The values in the Categories range will be shown as labels on the x axis. +Inserting chart elements +Use the Chart Elements page of the Chart Wizard to insert any of the following elements: + + +Chart titles + + +Legend + + +Visible grid lines + + +For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: + + +Secondary axes + + +Minor grids + + +Data labels + + +Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines + + +To set different data labels for each data series, use the properties dialog of the data series. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39737c240 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Type Line +/text/schart/01/type_line.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +line charts +chart types;line + +Chart Type Line + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+Line +A line chart shows values as points on the y axis. The x axis shows categories. The y values of each data series can be connected by a line. +Points only - this subtype plots only points. +Points and lines - this subtype plots points and connects points of the same data series by a line. +Lines only - this subtype plots only lines. +3D lines - this subtype connects points of the same data series by a 3D line. +Mark Stack series to arrange the points' y values cumulative above each other. The y values no longer represent absolute values, except for the first column which is drawn at the bottom of the stacked points. If you select Percent, the y values are scaled as percentage of the category total. +Choose the Line type from the dropdown to select how the points will be connected. You can choose either Straight lines, Smooth lines to draw curves through the points or Stepped lines to draw lines which step from point to point. Click Properties to change the properties for the smooth or stepped lines. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff5411e75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Type Net +/text/schart/01/type_net.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +net charts +chart types;net +radar charts, see net charts + +Chart Type Net + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+Net +A Net chart displays data values as points connected by some lines, in a grid net that resembles a spider net or a radar tube display. +For each row of chart data, a radial is shown on which the data is plotted. All data values are shown with the same scale, so all data values should have about the same magnitude. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16b652a45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + Chart Type Pie + /text/schart/01/type_pie.xhp + + + +donut charts + pie charts;types + chart types;pie/donut +mw made one index entry out of two "chart types;"mw made "pie charts" a two level entry +Chart Type Pie + + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+ Pie + A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. The length of the arc, or the area of each sector, is proportional to its value. + Pie - this subtype shows sectors as colored areas of the total pie, for one data column only. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to separate that sector from the remaining pie or to join it back. + Exploded pie - this subtype shows the sectors already separated from each other. In the created chart, you can click and drag any sector to move it along a radial from the pie's center. + Donut - this subtype can show multiple data columns. Each data column is shown as one donut shape with a hole inside, where the next data column can be shown. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center. + Exploded donut - this subtype shows the outer sectors already separated from the remaining donut. In the created chart, you can click and drag an outer sector to move it along a radial from the donut's center. +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..760955498 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + + + + + + + Chart Type Stock + /text/schart/01/type_stock.xhp + + + +stock charts + chart types;stock + data sources;setting for stock charts +mw added one entry +Chart Type Stock + + On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+ Stock + A Stock chart illustrates the market trend given by opening price, bottom price, top price and closing price. The transaction volume can also be shown.UFI: should we show example charts for every type? + For a Stock chart the order of the data series is important. The data should be arranged as shown in the example table below. + + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + F + + + + + 1 + + + + + Transaction volume + + + Opening price + + + Low (bottom price) + + + High (top price) + + + Closing price + + + + + 2 + + + Monday + + + 2500 + + + 20 + + + 15 + + + 25 + + + 17 + + + + + 3 + + + Tuesday + + + 3500 + + + 32 + + + 22 + + + 37 + + + 30 + + + + + 4 + + + Wednesday + + + 1000 + + + 15 + + + 15 + + + 17 + + + 17 + + + + + 5 + + + Thursday + + + 2200 + + + 40 + + + 30 + + + 47 + + + 35 + + + + + 6 + + + Friday + + + 4600 + + + 27 + + + 20 + + + 32 + + + 31 + + +
+ + The open, low, high, and closing values of a row build together one data unit in the chart. A stock price data series consists of several rows containing such data units. The column containing the transaction volume builds an optional second data series. + Depending on the chosen variant, you do not need all columns. + Stock Chart Variants + Choose the Stock chart type on the first page of the Chart Wizard. Then select one of the four variants. + Type 1 + Based on low and high column the Type 1 shows the distance between bottom price (low) and top price (high) by a vertical line. + Based on low, high, and close column Type 1 shows an additional horizontal mark for the closing price. + Type 2 + Based on open, low, high, and close column Type 2 generates the traditional "candle stick" chart. Type 2 draws the vertical line between the bottom and top price and adds a rectangle in front, which visualizes the range between the opening and closing price. If you click on the rectangle you see more information in the status bar. %PRODUCTNAME uses different fill colors for rising values (the opening price is lower than the closing price) and falling values. + Type 3 + Based on volume, low, high, and close column chart Type 3 draws a chart like Type 1, with additional columns for the transaction volume.i80596 + Type 4 + Based on all five data columns volume, open, low, high, and close, Type 4 combines a chart of Type 2 with a column chart for the transaction volume. + Because measurement for transaction volume might be "units", a second y axis is introduced in chart Type 3 and Type 4. The price axis is shown on the right side and the volume axis on the left side. + Setting the Data Source + Charts based on its own data + To change the data series of a chart having its own data, choose Chart Data Table from the View menu or from the context menu of the chart in edit mode. + In an embedded chart data table, the data series are always organized in columns. + For a new stock chart first use a column chart. Add the columns you need and enter your data in the order which is shown in the example, omitting any columns not required for the desired variant. Use Move Series Right to change the column order. Close the chart data table. Now use the Chart Type dialog to change to the stock chart variant. + If you have already got a stock chart and you want to change the variant, then first change the chart type to a column chart, add or remove columns so that it fits to the variant, and then change the chart type back to a stock chart.Watch issue 72433 to see whether a change in the handling is done. + Do not write the name of a data series in a row. Write the name into the field above the role name. + The order of the rows determines how the categories are arranged in the chart. Use Move Row Down to change the order. + Charts based on Calc or Writer tables + You can choose or alter a data range on the second page of the Chart Wizard or in the Data Range dialog. For fine tuning use the Data Series dialog. + To specify a data range do one of the following: + + + Enter the data range in the text box. + In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". + As long as the syntax is not correct, %PRODUCTNAME shows the text in red. + + + + + In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag to select the data range. When you release the mouse, the data are entered. Click Select data range again to add a data range. In the input field of the minimized dialog, click after the entry and type a semicolon. Then drag to select the next range. + + + Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + Your stock chart data are "in columns", if the information in a row belongs to the same "candle stick".I don't know whether copying a table based chart to draw or impress needs chart data arranged in columns, and I cannot test it, because the clipboard is broken. + Fine Tuning the Data Ranges of Table Based Stock Charts + You can organize data series and edit the source for parts of single data series on the third page of the Chart Wizard or on the page Data Series in the Data Range dialog. + Organize Data Series + In the data series area on the left side of the dialog, you can organize the data series of the actual chart. A stock chart has at least one data series containing the prices. It might have a second data series for transaction volume. + If you have got more than one price data series, use the Up and Down arrow buttons to order them. The order determines the arrangement in the chart. Do the same for volume data series. You cannot switch price and volume data series. + To remove a data series, select the data series in the list and click Remove. + To add a data series, select one of the existing data series and click Add. You get an empty entry below the selected one, which has the same type. If you have no price data series or no volume data series, you must first select a range for these series in the Data Range dialog.Regina: The behavior is odd, but I don't know a better solution. Therefore I have not written an issue. + Setting Data Ranges + In the Data Ranges dialog you can set or change the data range of each component of the selected data series. + In the upper list you see the role name of the components and the current values. When you have selected a role, you can change the value in the text box below the list. The label shows the selected role.deleted a para, see i80596 +Enter the range into the text box or click on Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. + Select Open Values, Close Values, High Values, and Low Values in any order. Specify only the ranges for those roles which you need for the chosen variant of the stock chart. The ranges need not be next to each other in the table. + Legend + The legend displays the labels from the first row or column or from the special range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data.deleted 3 paras +The legend shows the value from the range, which you entered in the Range for Name field in the Data Range dialog. The default entry is the column header of the closing price column. + Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d720adb35 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Type XY +/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp + + + +scatter charts +XY charts +chart types;XY (scatter) +error indicators in charts +error bars in charts +averages in charts +statistics in charts +variances in charts +standard deviation in charts +mw changed xy to XY (2x) +Chart Type XY (Scatter) + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+XY (Scatter) +An XY chart in its basic form is based on one data series consisting of a name, a list of x‑values, and a list of y‑values. Each value pair (x|y) is shown as a point in a coordinate system. The name of the data series is associated with the y‑values and shown in the legend. +Choose an XY chart for the following example tasks: + + +scale the x‑axis + + +generate a parameter curve, for example a spiral + + +draw the graph of a function + + +explore the statistical association of quantitative variables + + +Your XY chart may have more than one data series. +XY Chart Variants +You can choose an XY chart variant on the first page of the Chart Wizard, or by choosing Format - Chart Type for a chart in edit mode. +The chart is created with default settings. After the chart is finished, you can edit its properties to change the appearance. Line styles and icons can be changed on the Line tab page of the data series properties dialog. +Double-click any data point to open the Data Series dialog. In this dialog, you can change many properties of the data series. +For 2D charts, you can choose Insert - Y Error Bars to enable the display of error bars. +You can enable the display of mean value lines and trend lines using commands on the Insert menu. +Points only +Each data point is shown by an icon. %PRODUCTNAME uses default icons with different forms and colors for each data series. The default colors are set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. +Lines Only +This variant draws straight lines from one data point to the next. The data points are not shown by icons. +The drawing order is the same as the order in the data series. Mark Sort by X Values to draw the lines in the order of the x values. This sorting applies only to the chart, not to the data in the table. +Points and Lines +This variant shows points and lines at the same time. +3D Lines +The lines are shown like tapes. The data points are not shown by icons. In the finished chart choose 3D View to set properties like illumination and angle of view. +Smooth Lines +Choose Smooth from the Line type dropdown to draw curves instead of straight line segments.i80587 +Click Properties to set details for the curves. + +Cubic Spline interpolates your data points with polynomials of degree 3. The transitions between the polynomial pieces are smooth, having the same slope and curvature. +The Resolution determines how many line segments are calculated to draw a piece of polynomial between two data points. You can see the intermediate points if you click any data point. + +B-Spline uses a parametric, interpolating B-spline curve. Those curves are built piecewise from polynomials. The Degree of polynomials sets the degree of these polynomials. +Stepped Lines +Choose Stepped from the Line type dropdown to draw lines which step from point to point instead of straight line segments. +Click Properties to set details for the curves. +There are 4 different step types: + + +Start step icon +Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end. + + +End step icon +Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line. + + +Center X icon +Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line. + + +Center Y icon +Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9588db8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Chart Wizard - Chart Elements + /text/schart/01/wiz_chart_elements.xhp + + + + Chart Wizard - Chart Elements + + On this page of the Chart Wizard you can choose the chart elements to be shown. +
+ +
+titles title +Enter a title for your chart. +subtitle +Enter a subtitle for your chart. +x axis +Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal). +y axisx axis +Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical). +z axis +Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +legend +Displays a legend in your chart. +legend left +Positions the legend to the left of the chart. +top +Positions the legend to the top of the chart. +right +Positions the legend to the right of the chart. +bottom +Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart. +grid x axis +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis. +y axis +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis. +z axis +Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts. +secondary x axis ("2nd x axis" in spec doc) +Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis. +secondary y axis ("2nd y axis" in spec doc) +Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis. + + To enter chart elements + Enter titles or click the elements that you want to be shown on the current chart. + Titles + If you enter text for a title, subtitle, or any axis, the necessary space will be reserved to display the text next to the chart. If you do not enter a text, no space will be reserved, leaving more space to display the chart. + It is not possible to link the title text to a cell. You must enter the text directly.Regina: See wishlist and issues 8099, 64825 + When the chart is finished, you can change the position and other properties by the Format menu. + Legend + The legend displays the labels from the first row or column, or from the range that you have set in the Data Series dialog. If your chart does not contain labels, the legend displays text like "Row 1, Row 2, ...", or "Column A, Column B, ..." according to the row number or column letter of the chart data. + You cannot enter the text directly, it is automatically generated from the Name cell range. + Select one of the position options. When the chart is finished, you can specify other positions using the Format menu. + Grids + The visible grid lines can help to estimate the data values in the chart. + The distance of the grid lines corresponds to the interval settings in the Scale tab of the axis properties. + Grid lines are not available for pie charts. + Additional elements + For additional elements use the Insert menu of the chart in edit mode. There you can define the following elements: + + + Secondary axes + + + Minor grids + + + Data labels + + + Statistics, for example mean values, y error bars and trend lines + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7b55adf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart Wizard - Chart Type +/text/schart/01/wiz_chart_type.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts;choosing chart types + + + +Chart Wizard - Chart Type + +On the first page of the Chart Wizard you can choose a chart type. +
+ +
+ +To choose a chart type + + +Choose a basic chart type: click any of the entries labeled Column, Bar, Pie, and so on. +The contents on the right side will change to offer more options depending on the basic chart type. + + +Optionally, click any of the options. While you change the settings in the wizard, watch the preview in the document to see how the chart will look. + + +Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to see an extended help text. +Click Finish on any wizard page to close the wizard and create the chart using the current settings. +Click Next to see the next wizard page, or click the entries on the left side of the wizard to go to that page. +Click Back to see the previous wizard page. +Click Cancel to close the wizard without creating a chart.63365 roadmap + +Click to go to the named wizard page.63293 basic chart types + +Select a basic chart type.63294 options + +Select a sub type of the basic chart type.551781378 3D look checkbox + +Enables a 3D look for the data values.551783937 3D dropdown + +Select the type of 3D look.63325 bar column shape listbox + +Select a shape from the list.551781379 stack series (for Line) + +Displays stacked series for Line charts.551780866 stack series on top + +Stack series display values on top of each other.551780867 stack series percent + +Stack series display values as percent.551781380 smooth lines + +Choose the type of line to draw.551784961 properties + +Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.551781381 sort by x values (for XY (scatter)) + +Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.63323 number of lines (Column + line) + +Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.Toolbar icon Chart Type + +Opens the Chart Type dialog. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70e0b86c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Chart Wizard - Data Range + /text/schart/01/wiz_data_range.xhp + + + + +data ranges in charts +mw added one entry +Chart Wizard - Data Range + + On this page of the Chart Wizard you can select one single source of data range. This range may consist of more than one rectangular range of cells.context menu Data Ranges + +Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series. + Use the Chart Wizard - Data Series page if you need more control over the data ranges. +
+ +
+ This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. + + To specify a data range + + + Select the data range. Do one of the following: + Enter the data range in the text box. + In Calc, an example data range would be "$Sheet1.$B$3:$B$14". Note that a data range may consist of more than one region in a spreadsheet, e.g. "$Sheet1.A1:A5;$Sheet1.D1:D5" is also a valid data range. In Writer, an example data range would be "Table1.A1:E4". + In Calc, click Select data range to minimize the dialog, then drag over a cell area to select the data range.Hold down the Ctrl key and drag to select multiple ranges. --- see issue 71894 + If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. + + + Click one of the options for data series in rows or in columns. + + + Check whether the data range has labels in the first row or in the first column or both. + + + In the preview you can see how the final chart will look.data range text box & shrinky + + +Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.data series in rows + +Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.data series in columns + +Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.first row as label + +For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.first column as label + +For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f64b0787 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Chart Wizard - Data Series +/text/schart/01/wiz_data_series.xhp + + + + +order of chart data +data series + +Chart Wizard - Data Series + +On this page of the Chart Wizard you can change the source range of all data series separately, including their labels. You can also change the range of the categories. You can first select the data range on the Data Range page and then remove unnecessary data series or add data series from other cells here. +If there seem to be too many options on this page, just define the data range on the Chart Wizard - Data Range page and skip this page. +
+ +
+This dialog is only available for charts based on a Calc or Writer table. + +Organizing data series +In the Data Series list box you see a list of all data series in the current chart. + + +To organize the data series, select an entry in the list. + + +Click Add to add another data series below the selected entry. The new data series has the same type as the selected entry. + + +Click Remove to remove the selected entry from the Data Series list. + + +Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move the selected entry in the list up or down. This does not change the order in the data source table, but changes only the arrangement in the chart. + + +Editing data series + + +Click an entry in the list to view and edit the properties for that entry. +In the Data Ranges list box you see the role names and cell ranges of the data series components. + + +Click an entry, then edit the contents in the text box below. +The label next to the text box states the currently selected role. + + +Enter the range or click Select data range to minimize the dialog and select the range with the mouse. +If you want a data range of multiple cell areas that are not next to each other, enter the first range, then manually add a semicolon at the end of the text box, then enter the other ranges. Use a semicolon as delimiter between ranges. + + +The range for a data role, like Y-Values, must not include a label cell. +Editing categories or data labels + + +Enter or select a cell range that will be used as text for categories or data labels. UFI: red text means what? + + + +Depending on the chart type, the texts are shown on the X axis or as data labels. Regina: If you enter a range here, the check box "First column as label" (assumed data series in columns) on the Data Range page of the dialog is marked automatically and if you erase the entry in the input field, it is unchecked automatically.data series list box +Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.data ranges list box +Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.range for ... & shrinky + +Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.categories & shrinky + +Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.add button +Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.Remove button +Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.^ up button +Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.v down button +Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74d172ee4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +Data in Rows +/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Data in Rows

+Changes the arrangement of the chart data. + + + + +Icon Data in Rows + + + +Data in Rows + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e481c4d9b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +Data in Columns +/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Data in Columns

+Changes the arrangement of the chart data. + + + + +Icon Data in Columns + + + +Data in Columns + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40ad368d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Scale Text +/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text scaling in charts +scaling; text in charts +charts;scaling text +mw made "text scaling;" a one level entry and added "charts," + +Scale Text +Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart. + + + + +Icon + + + +Scale Text + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a241b5ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Automatic Layout +/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +reorganizing charts +charts; reorganizing + + +Automatic Layout +Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements. + + + + +Icon + + + +Automatic Layout + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f28883737 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Current Chart Type +/text/schart/02/02020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Current Chart Type + Displays the name of the current chart type. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a97b85b77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shortcuts for Charts +/text/schart/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +shortcut keys; charts +charts; shortcuts + +Shortcuts for Charts + +You can use the following shortcut keys in charts. +You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. +
+Shortcuts in Charts +
+Shortcut Keys +Results +
+
+Tab +Select next object. +
+Shift+Tab +Select previous object. +
+Home +Select first object. +
+
+End +Select last object. +
+
+Esc +Cancel selection +
+
+up/down/left/right arrow +Move the object in the direction of the arrow. +
+
+up/down/left/right arrow in pie charts +Moves the selected pie segment in the direction of the arrow. +
+
+F2 in titles +Enter text input mode. +
+
+F3 +Open group so that you can edit the individual components (in legend and data series). +
+
+CommandCtrl+F3 +Exit group (in legend and data series). +
+
++/- +Reduce or enlarge the chart +
+
++/- in pie charts +Moves the selected pie segment off or into the pie chart. +
+
+
+ +
+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3aadef2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + + Charts in $[officename] + /text/schart/main0000.xhp + + + +charts; overview + HowTos for charts +MW added one entry +Using Charts in %PRODUCTNAME + + + $[officename] lets you present data graphically in a chart, so that you can visually compare data series and view trends in the data. You can insert charts into spreadsheets, text documents, drawings, and presentations. + + Chart Data + Charts can be based on the following data: + + + Spreadsheet values from Calc cell rangesalso Excel... + + + Cell values from a Writer table + + + Values that you enter in the Chart Data Table dialog (you can create these charts in Writer, Draw, or Impress, and you can copy and paste them also to Calc) + + command line Insert - (Object -) Chart, moved here from deleted shared/01/04160100.xhp + + + +Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells. + To insert a chart + + + To edit a chart +
+ + + Click a chart to edit the object properties: + Size and position on the current page. + Alignment, text wrap, outer borders, and more. + + + Double-click a chart to enter the chart edit mode: + Chart data values (for charts with own data). + Chart type, axes, titles, walls, grid, and more. + + + Double-click a chart element in chart edit mode: + Double-click an axis to edit the scale, type, color, and more. + Double-click a data point to select and edit the data series to which the data point belongs. + With a data series selected, click, then double-click a single data point to edit the properties of this data point (for example, a single bar in a bar chart). + Double-click the legend to select and edit the legend. Click, then double-click a symbol in the selected legend to edit the associated data series. + Double-click any other chart element, or click the element and open the Format menu, to edit the properties. + + + Click outside the chart to leave the current edit mode. + + + To print a chart in high quality, you can export the chart to a PDF file and print that file. + In chart edit mode, you see the Formatting Bar for charts near the upper border of the document. The Drawing Bar for charts appears near the lower border of the document. The Drawing Bar shows a subset of the icons from the Drawing toolbar of Draw and Impress. + You can right-click an element of a chart to open the context menu. The context menu offers many commands to format the selected element. +
+ +Formats the selected title. + +Formats the chart area. + +Formats the chart wall. + +Formats the chart floor. + +Formats the chart legend. + +Formats the selected axis. + +Formats the selected data point. + +Formats the major grid. + +Formats the minor grid. + +Formats the data series. + +Formats the stock loss indicators. + +Formats the stock gain indicators. + +Formats the data labels. + +Formats the Y error bars. + +Formats the mean value line. + +Formats the trendline. + +Formats the trendline equation. + +Formats the selected data label. + +Opens a dialog to insert chart titles. + +Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes. + +Opens a dialog to insert an axis. + +Opens a dialog to insert an axis title. + +Inserts a major grid. + +Inserts a minor grid. + +Inserts data labels. + +Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R². + +Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value. + +Inserts a single data label. + +Deletes the chart legend. + +Deletes the selected axis. + +Deletes the major grid. + +Deletes the minor grid. + +Deletes all data labels. + +Deletes the trendline equation. + +Deletes the R² value. + +Deletes the selected data label. + +Deletes the mean value line. + +Deletes the Y error bars. + +Resets the selected data point to default format. + +Resets all data points to default format.how to update chart data (drag&drop vs chart data dialog) + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2be804274 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Formatting Bar + /text/schart/main0202.xhp + + + +
+ Formatting Bar + The Formatting Bar is shown when a chart is set to edit mode. Double-click a chart to enter edit mode. Click outside the chart to leave edit mode. +
+ You can edit the formatting of a chart using the controls and icons on the Formatting Bar. + +Select Chart Element + Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element. + Format Selection + Opens the properties dialog for the selected element. + Chart Type + Opens the Chart Type dialog. + Chart Data Table + Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. + Horizontal Grids + The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. + Legend On/Off + To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. + Scale Text + Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart. + Automatic Layout + Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95002643e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Chart Features +/text/schart/main0503.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ $[officename] Chart Features + Charts allow you to present data so that it is easy to visualize. +
+ You can create a chart from source data in a Calc spreadsheet or a Writer table. When the chart is embedded in the same document as the data, it stays linked to the data, so that the chart automatically updates when you change the source data. + Chart Types + Choose from a variety of 3D charts and 2D charts, such as bar charts, line charts, stock charts. You can change chart types with a few clicks of the mouse. + Individual Formatting + You can customize individual chart elements, such as axes, data labels, and legends, by right-clicking them in the chart, or with toolbar icons and menu commands. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03917dfce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + +Queries +/text/sdatabase/02000000.xhp + + + +
+queries;overview (Base) +tables in databases; printing queries (Base) +printing; queries (Base) +queries; printing (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries

Queries

+A "query" is a special view of a table. A query can display chosen records or chosen fields within records; it can also sort those records. A query can apply to one table or to multiple tables, if they are linked by common data fields.i73680 +
+
+ +
+Use queries to find records from data tables based on certain criteria. All queries created for a database are listed under the Queries entry. Since this entry contains the database queries, it is also called the "query container". +

Printing Queries

+To print a query or table: + + +Open a text document (or a spreadsheet document if you prefer the specific printing functions of this type of document). + + +Open the database file and click the Table icon if you want to print a table, or click the Query icon if you want to print a query. + + +Drag the name of the table or query into the open text document or spreadsheet. The dialog Insert Database Columns opens. + + +Decide which columns = data fields you want to include. You can also click the AutoFormat button and select a corresponding formatting type. Close the dialog. +The query or table will be inserted into your document. + + +Print the document by choosing File - Print. + + +You can also open the data source view (Ctrl+Shift+F4), select the entire database table in the data source view (click on the top left corner of the table), and then drag the selection to a text document or spreadsheet. +

Sorting and Filtering Data

+Allows you to sort and filter the data in a query table. +

Query Design

+With the Query Design, you can create and edit a query or view. + +

Query Through Several Tables

+The query result can contain data from several tables if these are linked to each other by suitable data fields. +

Formulating Query Criteria

+You can find out which operators and commands can be used to formulate the filter conditions for a query. +

Executing Functions

+You can perform calculations with the data of a table and store the results as a query result. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99024ab9a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Missing Element +/text/sdatabase/02000002.xhp + + + +queries; missing elements (Base) +mw added "(Base)"

Missing Element

+If a query in which tables or fields no longer exist is opened, the Missing Element dialog appears. This dialog names the missing table or the field which cannot be interpreted and allows you to decide how to continue with the procedure. +
+ +
+

How to continue?

+There are three options available for answering this question: +

Do you really want to open the query in the graphic view?

+Allows you to open the query in the Design View in spite of missing elements. This option also allows you to specify if other errors need to be ignored. +The query is opened in the Design View (the graphical interface). Missing tables appear blank and invalid fields appear with their (invalid) names in the list of fields. This lets you work with exactly those fields that caused the error. +

Open the query in the SQL View

+Allows you to open the query design in the SQL Mode and to interpret the query as a Native SQL. You can only quit the native SQL mode when the $[officename] statement is completely interpreted (only possible if the used tables or fields in the query really exist). +

Do not open the query

+Allows you to cancel the procedure and specify that the query should not be opened. This option corresponds to the function of the Cancel dialog button. +

Also ignore similar errors

+If you selected the first option, but you still want to open the query in the graphics view in spite of missing elements, you can specify whether other errors are ignored. Therefore, in the current opening process, no error message will be displayed if the query can not be correctly interpreted. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39e2e60e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,855 @@ + + + + + + + Query Design + /text/sdatabase/02010100.xhp + + + + + + + views; creating database views (Base) + queries; creating in design view (Base) + designing; queries (Base) + design view; queries/views (Base) + joining;tables (Base) + tables in databases; joining for queries (Base) + queries; joining tables (Base) + tables in databases; relations (Base) + relations; joining tables (Base) + queries; deleting table links (Base) + criteria of query design (Base) + queries; formulating filter conditions (Base) + filter conditions;in queries (Base) + parameters; queries (Base) + queries; parameter queries (Base) + SQL; queries (Base) + native SQL (Base) + +mw added "(Base)" to all entries + + +

Query Design

+The Query Design View allows you to create and edit a database query. + +
+ +
+Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. +Selecting the Create View command from the Tables tab page of a database document, you see the View Design window that resembles the Query Design window described here. +The Query Design window layout is stored with a created query, but cannot be stored with a created view. + +

The Design View

+To create a query, click the Queries icon in a database document, then click Create Query in Design View. +The lower pane of the Design View is where you define the query. To define a query, specify the database field names to include and the criteria for displaying the fields. To rearrange the columns in the lower pane of the Design View, drag a column header to a new location, or select the column and press Command +Ctrl+arrow key. +In the top of the query Design View window, the icons of the Query Design Bar and the Design bar are displayed. +If you want to test a query, double-click the query name in the database document. The query result is displayed in a table similar to the Data Source View. Note: the table displayed is only temporary. + +

Keys in Query Design View

+ + + + + Key + + + Function + + + + + F4 + + + Preview + + + + + F5 + + + Run Query + + + + + F7 + + + Add Table or Query + + +
+ + +

Browse

+When you open the query design for the first time, you see a dialog in which you must first select the table or query that will be the basis for your new query. + +Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations. +While designing a query, you cannot modify the selected tables. + +

Remove tables

+To remove the table from Design View, click the upper border of the table window and display the context menu. You can use the Delete command to remove the table from the Design View. Another option is to press the Delete key. + +
+ +

Move table and modify table size

+You can resize and arrange the tables according to your preferences. To move tables, drag the upper border to the desired position. Enlarge or reduce the size in which the table is displayed by positioning the mouse cursor on a border or on a corner and dragging the table until it is the desired size. +
+ +

Table Relations

+If there are data relations between a field name in one table and a field name in another table, you can use these relations for your query. +If, for example, you have a spreadsheet for articles identified by an article number, and a spreadsheet for customers in which you record all articles that a customer orders using the corresponding article numbers, then there is a relationship between the two "article number" data fields. If you now want to create a query that returns all articles that a customer has ordered, you must retrieve data from two spreadsheets. To do this, you must inform $[officename] about the relationship which exists between the data in the two spreadsheets. +To do this, click a field name in a table (for example, the field name "Item-Number" from the Customer table), hold down the mouse button and then drag the field name to the field name of the other table ("Item-Number" from the Item table). When you release the mouse button, a line connecting the two fields between the two table windows appears. The corresponding condition that the content of the two field names must be identical is entered in the resulting SQL query. +The creation of a query that is based on several related sheets is only possible if you use $[officename] as the interface for a relational database. +You cannot access tables from different databases in a query. Queries involving multiple tables can only be created within one database. + +

Specifying the relation type

+If you double-click on the line connecting two linked fields or call the menu command Insert - New Relation, you can specify the type of relation in the Relations dialog. + +Edit Join Properties. Alternatively, press Tab until the line is selected, then press Shift+F10 to display the context menu and there choose the command Edit. Some databases support only a subset of the possible join types. + +

Deleting relations

+To delete a relation between two tables, click the connection line and then press the Delete key. +Alternatively, delete the respective entries in Fields involved in the Relations dialog. Or press Tab until the connecting vector is displayed highlighted, then press Shift+F10 to open the context menu and select Delete command. + + +

Defining the query

+Select conditions to define the query. Each column of the design table accepts a data field for the query. The conditions in one row are linked with a Boolean AND. + +

Specifying field names

+First, select all field names from the tables that you want to add to the query. You can do this either by drag-and-drop or by double-clicking a field name in the table window. With the drag-and-drop method, use the mouse to drag a field name from the table window into the lower area of the query design window. As you do this, you can decide which column in the query design window will receive the selected field. A field name can also be selected by double-clicking. It will then be added to the next free column in the query design window. + +

Deleting field names

+To remove a field name from the query, click the column header of the field and choose the Delete command on the context menu for the column. + +

Saving the query

+Use the Save icon on the Standard toolbar to save the query. You will see a dialog that asks you to enter a name for the query. If the database supports schemas, you can also enter a schema name. + + +

Schema

+Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view. + + +

Query name or table view name

+Enter the name of the query or table view. + +

Filtering data

+To filter data for the query, set the desired criteria in the lower area of the query design window. The following options are available: + + +

Field

+Enter the name of the data field that is referred to in the Query. All settings made in the filter option rows refer to this field. If you activate a cell here with a mouse click you'll see an arrow button, which enables you to select a field. The "Table name.*" option selects all data fields with the effect that the specified criteria will be applied to all table fields. + + +

Alias

+Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in the query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels. For example, if the data field is named PtNo and, instead of that name, you would like to have PartNum appear in the query, enter PartNum as the alias. +In a SQL statement, aliases are defined as follows: +SELECT column AS alias FROM table. +For example: + +SELECT "PtNo" AS "PartNum" FROM "Parts" + + + +

Table

+The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here. If you activate this cell with a mouse click, an arrow will appear which enables you to select a different table for the current query. + + +

Sort

+If you click on this cell, you can choose a sort option: ascending, descending and unsorted. Text fields will be sorted alphabetically and numerical fields numerically. For most databases, administrators can set the sorting options at the database level. + + +

Visible

+If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visibly displayed in the resulting query. If you are only using a data field to formulate a condition or make a calculation, you do not necessarily need to display it. + + +

Criteria

+Specifies a first criteria by which the content of the data field is to be filtered. + +

or

+Here you can enter one additional filter criterion for each line. Multiple criteria in a single column will be interpreted as boolean OR. +You can also use the context menu of the line headers in the lower area of the query design window to insert a filter based on a function: + + +

Functions

+Select a function to run in the query. The functions which are available here depend on those provided by the database engine. +If you are working with the embedded HSQL database, the list box in the Function row offers you the following options: + + + + + Option + + + SQL + + + Effect + + + + + No function + + + + + No function will be executed. + + + + + Average + + + AVG + + + Calculates the arithmetic mean of a field. + + + + + Count + + + COUNT + + + Determines the number of records in the table. Empty fields can either be counted (a) or excluded (b). + a) COUNT(*): Passing an asterisk as the argument counts all records in the table. + b) COUNT(column): Passing a field name as an argument counts only the records in which the specified field contains a value. Records in which the field has a Null value (i.e. contains no textual or numeric value) will not be counted. + + + + + Maximum + + + MAX + + + Determines the highest value of a record for that field. + + + + + Minimum + + + MIN + + + Determines the lowest value of a record for that field. + + + + + Sum + + + SUM + + + Calculates the sum of the values of records for the associated fields. + + + + + Group + + + GROUP BY + + + Groups query data according to the selected field name. Functions are executed according to the specified groups. In SQL, this option corresponds to the GROUP BY clause. If a criterion is added, this entry appears in the SQL HAVING sub-clause. + + +
+ +You can also enter function calls directly into the SQL statement. The syntax is: +SELECT FUNCTION(column) FROM table. +For example, the function call in SQL for calculating a sum is: + +SELECT SUM("Price") FROM "Article". + +Except for the Group function, the above functions are called Aggregate functions. These are functions that calculate data to create summaries from the results. Additional functions that are not listed in the list box might be also possible. These depend on the specific database engine in use and on the current functionality provided by the Base driver used to connect to that database engine. +To use other functions not listed in the list box, you must enter them manually under Field. +You can also assign aliases to function calls. If you do not want to display the query string in the column header, enter a desired substitute name under Alias. +The corresponding function in an SQL statement is: +SELECT FUNCTION() AS alias FROM table +
+Example: +
+ +SELECT COUNT(*) AS count FROM "Item" + +If you run such a function, you cannot insert any additional columns for the query other than as an argument in a "Group" function. + Examples +In the following example, a query is run through two tables: an "Item" table with the "Item_No" field and a "Suppliers" table with the "Supplier_Name" field. In addition, both tables have a common field name "Supplier_No." +The following steps are required to create a query containing all suppliers who deliver more than three items. + + + + Insert the "Item" and "Suppliers" tables into the query design. + + + Link the "Supplier_No" fields of the two tables if there is not already a relation of this type. + + + Double-click on the "Item_No" field from the "Item" table. Display the Function line using the context menu and select the Count function. + + + Enter >3 as a criterion and disable the Visible field. + + + Double-click the "Supplier_Name" field in the "Suppliers" table and choose the Group function. + + + Run the query. + + +If the "price" (for the individual price of an article) and "Supplier_No" (for the supplier of the article) fields exist in the "Item" table, you can obtain the average price of the item that a supplier provides with the following query: + + + + Insert the "Item" table into the query design. + + + Double-click the "Price" and "Supplier_No" fields. + + + Enable the Function line and select the Average function from the "Price" field. + + + You can also enter "Average" in the line for the alias name (without quotation marks). + + + Choose Group for the "Supplier_No" field. + + + Run the query. + + +The following context menu commands and symbols are available: + +

Functions

+Shows or hides a row for the selection of functions. + +

Table Name

+Shows or hides the row for the table name. + +

Alias Name

+Shows or hides the row for the alias name. + +

Distinct Values

+Retrieves only distinct values from the query. This applies to multiple records that might contain several repeating occurrences of data in the selected fields. If the Distinct Values command is active, you should only see one record in the query (DISTINCT). Otherwise, you will see all records corresponding to the query criteria (ALL). +For example, if the name "Smith" occurs several times in your address database, you can choose the Distinct Values command to specify in the query that the name "Smith" will occur only once. +For a query involving several fields, the combination of values from all fields must be unique so that the result can be formed from a specific record. For example, you have "Smith in Chicago" once in your address book and "Smith in London" twice. With the Distinct Values command, the query will use the two fields "last name" and "city" and return the query result "Smith in Chicago" once and "Smith in London" once. +In SQL, this command corresponds to the DISTINCT predicate. + +

Limit

+Allows you to limit the maximum number of records returned by a query. +If a Limit construction is added, you will get at most as many rows as the number you specify. Otherwise, you will see all records corresponding to the query criteria. + +

Formulating filter conditions

+ +
+When formulating filter conditions, various operators and commands are available to you. Apart from the relational operators, there are SQL-specific commands that query the content of database fields. If you use these commands in the $[officename] syntax, $[officename] automatically converts these into the corresponding SQL syntax via an internal parser. You can also enter the SQL command directly and bypass the internal parser. The following tables give an overview of the operators and commands: + + + + + Operator + + + Meaning + + + Condition is satisfied if... + + + + + = + + + equal to + + + ... the content of the field is identical to the indicated expression. + The operator = will not be displayed in the query fields. If you enter a value without any operator, the = operator is automatically assumed. + + + + + <> + + + not equal to + + + ... the content of the field does not correspond to the specified expression. + + + + + > + + + greater than + + + ... the content of the field is greater than the specified expression. + + + + + < + + + less than + + + ... the content of the field is less than the specified expression. + + + + + >= + + + greater than or equal to + + + ... the content of the field is greater than or equal to the specified expression. + + + + + <= + + + less than or equal to + + + ... the content of the field is less than or equal to the specified expression. + + +
+ + + + + + $[officename] command + + + SQL command + + + Meaning + + + Condition is satisfied if... + + + + + IS EMPTY + + + IS NULL + + + is null + + + ... the field contains no data. For Yes/No fields with three possible states, this command automatically queries the undetermined state (neither Yes nor No). + + + + + IS NOT EMPTY + + + IS NOT NULL + + + is not empty + + + ... the field is not empty, i.e it contains data. + + + + + LIKE + placeholder (*) for any number of characters + placeholder (?) for exactly one character + + + LIKE + + placeholders; in SQL queries + + + placeholder (%) for any number of characters + Placeholder (_) for exactly one character + + + is an element of + + + ... the data field contains the indicated expression. The (*) placeholder indicates whether the expression x occurs at the beginning of (x*), at the end of (*x) or inside the field content (*x*). You can enter as a placeholder in SQL queries either the SQL % character or the familiar (*) file system placeholder in the %PRODUCTNAME interface. + The (*) or (%) placeholder stands for any number of characters. The question mark (?) in the $[officename] interface or the underscore (_) in SQL queries is used to represent exactly one character. + + + + + NOT LIKE + + + NOT LIKE + + + Is not an element of + + + ... the field does not contain data having the specified expression. + + + + + BETWEEN x AND y + + + BETWEEN x AND y + + + falls within the interval [x,y] + + + ... the field contains a data value that lies between the two values x and y. + + + + + NOT BETWEEN x AND y + + + NOT BETWEEN x AND y + + + Does not fall within the interval [x,y] + + + ... the field contains a data value that does not lie between the two values x and y. + + + + + IN (a; b; c...) + Note that semicolons are used as separators in all value lists! + + + IN (a, b, c...) + + + contains a, b, c... + + + ... the field name contains one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... Any number of expressions can be specified, and the result of the query is determined by a boolean OR operator. The expressions a, b, c... can be either numbers or characters + + + + + NOT IN (a; b; c...) + + + NOT IN (a, b, c...) + + + does not contain a, b, c... + + + ... the field does not contain one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... + + + + + = TRUE + + + = TRUE + + + has the value True + + + ... the field name has the value True. + + + + + = FALSE + + + = FALSE + + + has the value false + + + ... the field data value is set to false. + + +
+ + +

Examples

+ + + + + ='Ms.' + + + returns field names with the field content "Ms." + + + + + <'2001-01-10' + + + returns dates that occurred before January 10, 2001 + + + + + LIKE 'g?ve' + + + returns records with field content such as "give" and "gave". + + + + + LIKE 'S*' + + + returns records with field contents such as "Sun". + + + + + BETWEEN 10 AND 20 + + + returns records with field content between the values 10 and 20. (The fields can be either text fields or number fields). + + + + + IN (1; 3; 5; 7) + + + returns records with the values 1, 3, 5, 7. If the field name contains an item number, for example, you can create a query that returns the item having the specified number. + + + + + NOT IN ('Smith') + + + returns records that do not contain "Smith". + + +
+ +
+ Like Escape Sequence: {escape 'escape-character'} + + +SELECT * FROM Item WHERE ItemName LIKE 'The *%' {escape '*'} + +The example will give you all of the entries where the item name begins with 'The *'. This means that you can also search for characters that would otherwise be interpreted as placeholders, such as *, ?, _, % or the period. + Outer Join Escape Sequence: {oj outer-join} + + +SELECT Article.* FROM {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} + +

Querying text fields

+To query the content of a text field, you must put the expression between single quotes. The distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters depends on the database in use. LIKE, by definition, is case-sensitive (though some databases don't interpret this strictly). + +

Querying date fields

+ Date fields are represented as #Date# to clearly identify them as dates. Date, time and date/time constants (literals) used in conditions can be of either the SQL Escape Syntax type, or default SQL2 syntax. + + + + + Date Type Element + + + SQL Escape syntax #1 - may be obsolete + + + SQL Escape syntax #2 + + + SQL2 syntax + + + + + Date + + + {D'YYYY-MM-DD'} + + + {d 'YYYY-MM-DD'} + + + 'YYYY-MM-DD' + + + + + Time + + + {D'HH:MM:SS'} + + + {t 'HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} + + + 'HH:MI:SS[.SS]' + + + + + DateTime + + + {D'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'} + + + {ts 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} + + + 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS[.SS]' + + +
+ + + +SELECT {d '1999-12-31'} FROM world.years + + + +SELECT * FROM mytable WHERE years='1999-12-31' + +All date expressions (date literals) must be enclosed with single quotation marks. (Consult the reference for the particular database and connector you are using for more details.) + +

Querying Yes/No fields

+To query Yes/No fields, use the following syntax for dBASE tables: + + + + + Status + + + Query criterion + + + Example + + + + + Yes + + + for dBASE tables: not equal to any given value + + + =1 returns all records where the Yes/No field has the status "Yes" or "On" (selected in black), + + + + + No + + + . + + + =0 returns all records for which the Yes/No field has the status "No" or "Off" (no selection). + + + + + Null + + + IS NULL + + + IS NULL returns all records for which the Yes/No field has neither of the states Yes or No (selected in gray). + + +
+ +The syntax depends on the database system used. You should also note that Yes/No fields can be defined differently (only 2 states instead of 3). + +

Parameter queries

+Parameter queries allow the user to input values at run-time. These values are used within the criteria for selecting the records to be displayed. Each such value has a parameter name associated with it, which is used to prompt the user when the query is run. +Parameter names are preceded by a colon in both the Design and SQL views of a query. This can be used wherever a value can appear. If the same value is to appear more than once in the query, the same parameter name is used. +In the simplest case, where the user enters a value which is matched for equality, the parameter name with its preceding colon is simply entered in the Criterion row. In SQL mode this should be typed as WHERE "Field" = :Parameter_name +Parameter names may not contain any of the characters <space>`!"$%^*()+={}[]@'~#<>?/,. They may not be the same as field names or SQL reserved words. They may be the same as aliases. +A useful construction for selecting records based on parts of a text field's content is to add a hidden column with "LIKE '%' || :Part_of_field || '%'" as the criterion. This will select records with an exact match. If a case-insensitive test is wanted, one solution is to use LOWER (Field_Name) as the field and LIKE LOWER ( '%' || :Part_of_field || '%' ) as the criterion. Note that the spaces in the criterion are important; if they are left out the SQL parser interprets the entire criterion as a string to be matched. In SQL mode this should be typed as LOWER ( "Field_Name" ) LIKE LOWER ( '%' || :Part_of_field || '%' ). +Parameter queries may be used as the data source for subforms, to allow the user to restrict the displayed records. + +

Parameter Input

+The Parameter Input dialog asks the user to enter the parameter values. Enter a value for each query parameter and confirm by clicking OK or typing Enter. +The values entered by the user may consist of any characters which are allowable for the SQL for the relevant criterion; this may depend on the underlying database system. +The user can use the SQL wild-card characters "%" (arbitrary string) or "_" (arbitrary single character) as part of the value to retrieve records with more complex criteria. + +
+

SQL Mode

+SQL stands for "Structured Query Language" and describes instructions for updating and administering relational databases. +In $[officename] you do not need any knowledge of SQL for most queries, since you do not have to enter the SQL code. If you create a query in the query designer, $[officename] automatically converts your instructions into the corresponding SQL syntax. If, with the help of the Switch Design View On/Off button, you change to the SQL view, you can see the SQL commands for a query that has already been created. +You can formulate your query directly in SQL code. Note, however, that the special syntax is dependent upon the database system that you use. +If you enter the SQL code manually, you can create SQL-specific queries that are not supported by the graphical interface in the Query designer. These queries must be executed in native SQL mode. +By clicking the Run SQL command directly icon in the SQL view, you can formulate a query that is not processed by $[officename] and sent directly to the database engine. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95d875097 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Join Properties + /text/sdatabase/02010101.xhp + + + +links;relational databases (Base) + inner joins (Base) + joins in databases (Base) + left joins (Base) + right joins (Base) + full joins (Base) +mw deleted "join properties" and changed "link properties..." to "links;" +

Join Properties

+ If you double-click a connection between two linked fields in the query design, or if you choose Insert - New Relation, the Join Properties dialog appears. These properties will be used in all queries created in the future. +
+ +
+ + +

Tables involved

+ Specifies two different tables that you want to join. +

Fields involved

+ Specifies two data fields that will be joined by a relation. +

Options

+ +

Type

+ Specifies the join type of the selected join. Some databases support only a subset of the various possible types. +

Inner Join

+ In an inner join, the results table contains only those records for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link is created by a corresponding WHERE clause. +

Left Join

+ In a left join, the results table contains all records of the queried fields from the left table and only those records of the queried fields from the right table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the LEFT OUTER JOIN command. +

Right Join

+ In a right join, the results table contains all records of the queried fields from the right table and only those records of the queried fields from the left table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the RIGHT OUTER JOIN command. +

Full Join

+ In a full join, the results table contains all records of the queried fields from the left and right tables. In the SQL of $[officename] this type of link corresponds to the FULL OUTER JOIN command. +

Natural

+ In a natural join, the keyword NATURAL is inserted into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..454f308d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Forms +/text/sdatabase/04000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Forms

+forms; general information (Base) +mw added "(Base)" +Forms can be used to enter or to edit existing database contents easily. +
+

FormWizard

+

Form Controls

+The Form Controls toolbar provides the tools required to create a form in a text, table, drawing, or presentation document. +

Form in Design Mode

+In design mode, the form is designed and the properties of the form and the controls contained in it are defined. + + +

Sorting and Filtering Data

+You will find the sorting and filter functions in the toolbar when you open a form in user mode. + + + + +

Subforms

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dba9ddaff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Form Design +/text/sdatabase/04030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +forms; designing (Base) +mw added "(Base)" +

Form Design +

+Any $[officename] document can be expanded into a form. Simply add one or more form controls. +Open the Form Controls toolbar. The Form Controls toolbar contains the functions needed to edit a form. More functions can be found in the Form Design bar and More Controls bar. +In form design mode you can include controls, apply properties to them, define Form properties, and define subforms. +The Form Navigator icon +Icon + on the Form Design bar opens the Form Navigator. +The Open in Design Mode icon +Icon + allows you to save a form document so that it always opens in form design mode. +If there is an error when assigning properties to the objects contained in the form (for example, when assigning a non-existent database table to an object), a corresponding error message appears. This error message may contain a More button. If you click on More, a dialog displaying more information about the current problem appears. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d42d38553 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Tables +/text/sdatabase/05000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Tables

+Table data edit mode allows you to see your data as rows of records, with optional filtering and sorting of that data. In this mode, you can also enter new records, make changes to, and delete existing records. +
+In the $[officename] Help, you will find further information on the following subjects: +

Create new or edit table design

+ + +

Sort and Filter Data

+

Relations, Primary and External Key

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..491c98ff2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Table Context Menus +/text/sdatabase/05000001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Table Context Menus

+The context menu of the table container offers various functions that apply to all database tables. To edit a particular table within the database, select the corresponding table and open its context menu. +
+
+ +
+Depending on the context, it is possible that not all the functions for your current database will be listed in the context menus. For example, the Relationships command for defining relationships between various tables is only available with relational databases. +Depending on the database system used, you will find the following entries on the context menus: + +If a table is open, there are several functions available to edit the data. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d41b96c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + +Enter / change password +/text/sdatabase/05000003.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Enter / change password

+Allows you to enter and confirm a new or changed password. If you have defined a new user, enter the user name in this dialog. + +

User

+Specifies the name of the new user. This field is only visible if you have defined a new user. + +

Old password

+Enter the old password here. This field is visible when you have opened the dialog via Change password. + +

Password

+Enter the new password.UFI: removed help id + +

Confirm (password)

+Enter the new password again. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15f61854d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + +Table Design +/text/sdatabase/05010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Table Design

+In the Table Design window you define new tables or edit the structure of an existing table. +
+
+ +
+ + +The window has its own menu bar. It also contains the following new command: Index Design + +

Table definition area

+This area is where you define the table structure. + +

Field Name

+Specifies the name of the data field. The database engine may impose restrictions on the length of the table name, and the use of special characters and spaces within the table name. + +

Field type

+Specifies the field type. The available field types are limited by the database engine being used. + +

Description

+Specifies an optional description for each field. +The row headers contain the following context menu commands: +

Cut

+Cuts the selected row to the clipboard. +

Copy

+Copies the selected row to the clipboard. +

Paste

+Pastes the content of the clipboard. +

Delete

+Deletes the selected row. + +

Insert Rows

+Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has already been saved. + +

Primary Key

+If this command has a check mark, the data field is defined as a primary key. By clicking the command you activate/deactivate the primary key definition of the field. The command is only visible if the data source supports primary keys. +

Field properties

+Defines the field properties of the currently selected field. +

Length

+Specifies the maximum number of characters allowed for data entry of the corresponding data field including any spaces or special characters. +

Decimal places

+Specifies the number of decimal places for a numerical field or decimal field. + +

Default value

+Specifies the value that is the default in new data records. + +

Format example

+Displays a sample of the format code of the field by applying it to the default value. Select the format code with the Format Field button. + +

Format Field

+This button opens the Format Field dialog. + +

Help area

+Displays a help string or hint defined by the database designer for the given field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5fff8308 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Index design +/text/sdatabase/05010100.xhp + + + +
+ +

Index design

+The Index Design dialog allows you to define and edit the indexes for the current table. +
+
+ +
+ +

Index list

+Displays a list of available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog. +

New Index

+Creates a new index. +

Delete Current Index

+Deletes the current index. +

Rename Current Index

+Renames the current index. +

Save Current Index

+Saves the current index in the data source. +

Reset Current Index

+Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started. +

Index details

+As soon as you change a detail of the current index and then select another index, the change is immediately passed on to the data source. You can only leave the dialog, or select another index, if the change has been successfully acknowledged by the data source. However, you can undo the change by clicking the Reset Current Index icon. +

Unique

+Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values. Checking the Unique option prevents duplicate data from being entered in the field and ensures data integrity. +

Fields

+The Fields area displays a list of fields in the current table. You can also select multiple fields. In order to remove a field from the selection, select the empty entry at the start of the list. +

Index field

+Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.i73718 +

Sort order

+Determines the sort order of the indexes. +

Close

+Closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8635006c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Relations +/text/sdatabase/05020000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Relations

+relational databases (Base) +mw added "(Base)" +This command opens the Relation Design window, which allows you to define relationships between various database tables. +
+Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields. Click the New Relation icon to create the relationships, or simply drag-and-drop with the mouse. +
+ +
+This function is only available if you are working with a relational database. +When you choose Tools - Relationships, a window opens in which all the existing relationships between the tables of the current database are shown. If no relationships have been defined, or if you want to relate other tables of the database to each other, then click on the Add Tables icon. The Add Tables dialog opens in which you can select the tables with which to create a relation. + +If the Relation Design window is open, the selected tables cannot be modified, even in Table Design mode. This ensures that tables are not changed while the relations are being created. +The selected tables are shown in the top area of the relation design view. You can close a table window through the context menu or with the Delete key. + +primary keys;inserting (Base) +keys;primary keys (Base) +external keys (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries +

Primary key and foreign keys

+If you want to define a relation among the various tables, you should enter a primary key that uniquely identifies a data field of an existing table. You can refer to the primary key from other tables to access the data of this table. All data fields referring to this primary key will be identified as a foreign key. +All data fields referring to a primary key will be identified in the table window by a small key symbol. +

Define relations

+relations; creating and deleting (Base) +mw added "(Base)" +All existing relations are shown in the relations windows by a line that connects the primary and foreign key fields. You can add a relation by using drag-and-drop to drop the field of one table onto the field of the other table. A relation is removed again by selecting it and pressing the Delete key. +Alternatively, you can also click the New Relation icon in the top area of the relation field and define the relation between two tables in the Relations dialog. + +If you use $[officename] as the front-end for a relational database, the creation and deletion of relationships is not placed in an intermediate memory by $[officename], but is forwarded directly to the database. +By double-clicking a connection line, you can assign certain properties to the relation. The Relations dialog opens. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..44bf6b05a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + +Relations +/text/sdatabase/05020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +relations; properties (Base) +key fields for relations (Base) +cascading update (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries +

Relations

+Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables. +
+ +
+The update and delete options are only available if they are supported by the database used. +

Tables involved

+This is where the two related tables are listed. If you create a new relation, you can select one table from each of the combo boxes in the top part of the dialog. +If you opened the Relations dialog for an existing relation by double-clicking the connection lines in the Relation window, then the tables involved in the relation cannot be modified. + +

Key fields

+Defines the key fields for the relation. + +The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names. If you click a field, you can use the arrow buttons to select a field from the table. Each relation is written in a row. +

Update options

+Here you can select options that take effect when there are changes to a primary key field. +

No action

+Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields. +

Updating cascade

+Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update). +

Set null

+ If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty. +

Set default

+ If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields. During the creation of the corresponding table, the default value of an external key field will be defined when you assign the field properties. +

Delete options

+Here you can select options that take effect when a primary key field is deleted. +

No action

+Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields. +

Delete cascade

+Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field. +When you delete a primary key field with the Delete cascade option, all records from other tables that have this key as their foreign key are also deleted. Use this option with great care; it is possible that a major portion of the database can be deleted. +

Set null

+If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields. +

Set Default

+If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca3b9a188 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Copy a Table by Drag-and-Drop +/text/sdatabase/05030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Copy Query or Table by Drag-and-Drop

+queries; copying (Base) +tables in databases; copying database tables (Base) +mw deleted "database tables;" +UFI: fix to #i18395#Dragging-and-dropping a query or table opens the Copy Table dialog, which allows you to define the options for copying a query or a table. +
+ +
+With the Copy Table dialog you can: + + +copy the data from the table into another table, + + +use the structure of the table as the basis for creating a new table. + + +You can copy within the same database or between different databases. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7151193e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Copy Table +/text/sdatabase/05030100.xhp + + + +
+ +

Copy Table

+You can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table area of a database file window. The Copy table dialog appears. +
+

Table name

+Specifies a name for the copy. Some databases only accept names containing eight or fewer characters. +

Options

+

Definition and data

+Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table. The table definition and the complete data are copied. The table definition includes the table structure and format from different data fields, including special field properties. The field contents supply the data. +

Definition

+Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data. +

As table view

+If the database supports Views and you selected this option, a query will be created in the table container as a table. This option allows you to view the query results as a normal table view. The table will be filtered in the view with a "Select" SQL statement. +

Append datasee #i63815

+Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table. +The table definition must be exactly the same so that data can be copied. Data cannot be copied if a data field in the target table has another format than the data field in the source table. +Match the data field names in the Copy Table dialog on the Apply Columns page. +If the data cannot be attached, you will see a list of fields in the Column Info dialog whose data cannot be copied. If you confirm this dialog with OK, only the data that does not appear in the list will be attached. +If the fields of the target table have a smaller field length than in the source table when data is being attached, the source data fields will automatically be truncated to match the field lengths in the target table. +primary keys; defining + +

Create primary key

+Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values. You should always use this field, since a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. +

Name

+Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional. +Next page + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d26f81524 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Apply columns +/text/sdatabase/05030200.xhp + + + +
+ +

Apply columns

+In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Apply columns dialog is the second window of the Copy table dialog. +
+

Existing columns

+

Left list box

+Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button. +

Right list box

+Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table. + + + +

Buttons

+Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button). +Next page + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..812cc215f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Type formatting +/text/sdatabase/05030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Type formatting

+In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Type formatting dialog is the third window of the Copy table dialog. +
+ +

List box

+Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table. +

Column information

+ +

Field name

+Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. + +

Field type

+Select a field type. + + +

Length

+Enter the number of characters for the data field. + +

Decimal places

+Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. + +

Default value

+Select the default value for a Yes/No field. +

Automatic type recognition

+$[officename] can automatically recognize field contents when you copy database tables by drag and drop. + +

(max.) lines

+Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition. + +

Auto

+Enables automatic type recognition. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3e6039f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Assign columns +/text/sdatabase/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Assign columns

+In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. If you select the Attach data check box on the first page of the Copy table dialog, the Assign columns dialog opens as the second window. You can use this dialog to map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table. +
+ +

Source table

+Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow. To include all of the source data fields in the destination table, click All. + +

Destination table

+Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table. + + +

up

+Moves the selected entry up one position in the list. + + +

down

+Moves the selected entry down one position in the list. + +

all

+Selects all of the data fields in the list. + +

none

+Clears all of the check boxes in the list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3f068e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + +General +/text/sdatabase/05040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

General

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..538820245 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + +General +/text/sdatabase/05040100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

General

+When you create a database table as an administrator, you can use this tab to determine user access, and to edit the data or the table structure. +
+access rights for database tables (Base) +tables in databases; access rights to (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries +If you are not the administrator, you can use the General tab to view your access rights for the selected table. +

Table name

+Displays the name of the selected database table. +

Type

+Displays the type of database. +

Location

+Displays the complete path of the database table. +

Read data

+Allows a user to read the data. +

Insert data

+Allows a user to insert new data. +

Change data

+Allows a user to change data. +

Delete data

+Allows a user to delete data. +

Change table structure

+Allows a user to change the table structure. +

Definition

+Allows the user to delete the table structure. +

Modify references

+Allows the user to modify the defined references, for example, to enter new relations for the table or to delete existing relations. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dfb61ef7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + +Description +/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Description

+
+

Table description

+Displays the description for the selected table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43107a4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Data sources in $[officename] +/text/sdatabase/05040200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +databases;drag and drop (Base) +mw added "(Base)" +

Data sources in $[officename]

+
+

Selecting the Address Book

+ +To select the address book that you want to use, choose Tools - Address Book Source. +
+

Opening a Data Source

+ + +To open the data source view, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F4 in a text, spreadsheet or form document. + + +To view the contents of a database, click the plus sign (+) in front of the name in the data source view. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e1f9484b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + +ODBC +/text/sdatabase/11020000.xhp + + + +
+

ODBCstill some Help IDs in this file. Else it can be removed

+Specifies the settings for ODBC databases. This includes your user access data, driver settings, and font definitions. +
+
+

User Name

+Type the user name for accessing the database. +
+
+

Password required

+Prevents an unauthorized user from accessing the database. You only need to enter the password once per session. +
+
+

Driver Settings

+Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary. +
+
+

Character Set

+Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. Choose "System" to use the default character set of your operating system. Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes. +
+
+

General

+

Retrieve generated values

+Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this check box if the database does not support the auto-increment feature in its SDBCX layer. In general, the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. +

Auto-increment statement

+Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, a typical SQL statement to create a data field is: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER) +To auto-increment the "id" data field in a MySQL database, change the statement to: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +In other words, enter AUTO_INCREMENT into Auto-increment statement box. +

Query of generated values

+Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: +SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); +
+
+

Use SQL92 naming constraints

+Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lower or upper case letter, or an underline ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, underlines, and numbers. +
+

Use Catalog for file-based databases

+Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d8d45794 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +dBASE +/text/sdatabase/11030000.xhp + + + +
ufi: removed remaining two index entriesmw added "(Base)" to all 4 entries and transferred 2 entries to sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp +

dBASEstill two Help IDs in this file. Else file can be removed

+Specify the settings for a dBASE database. +
+
+ +
+To be able to define relations between tables, use JDBC or ODBC from within $[officename]. + +

Display inactive records

+Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records. +In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. +To view any changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect the database. +UFI: deleted note about case sensitivity. Should be not other than for all other files. + +Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. + + + +

Indexes

+Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9eb5a8a73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Indexes +/text/sdatabase/11030100.xhp + + + + +

Indexes

+Lets you organize dBASE database indexes. An index allows you to access a database quickly, provided that you query the data in the selection that was defined through the index. When you design a table, you can define the indexes on the Indexes tab page. +
+ +
+

Table

+Select the database table that you want to index. +

Table Indexes

+Lists the current indexes for the selected database table. To remove an index from the list, click the index, and then click the right arrow. +

Free Indexes

+Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table. To assign an index to a selected table, click the left arrow icon. The left double arrow assigns all available indexes. +

<

+Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list. +

<<

+Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list. +

>

+Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list. +

>>

+Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11de16508 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + +Execute SQL statement +/text/sdatabase/11080000.xhp + + + + +SQL; executing SQL statements (Base) +databases; administration through SQL (Base) + + + + +

Execute SQL statement

+Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database. + +
+ +
+ +You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBASE can only run some of the SQL commands list here. +To run an SQL query for filtering data in the database, use the Query Design View. + +

Command to execute

+Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. +For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: +SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" +For more information on SQL commands, please consult the documentation that came with the database. + + +

Show output of "select" statements

+Show the result of the SQL SELECT command in the Output box. +

Execute

+Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. + + +

Previous commands

+Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Execute. + + +

Status

+Displays the status, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran. + +

Output

+Displays the results of the SQL command that you ran. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3b1db560 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + +Table Filter +/text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp + + + +
+

Table Filter

UFI: file remains as a help id container - no browsing
+Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table. + +

Sort Ascendingin View - Sort menu

+Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc008f5d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Advanced Properties +/text/sdatabase/dabaadvprop.xhp + + +Database advanced properties dialog + + + +
+

Advanced Properties

+Specifies advanced properties for the database. +
+
+In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfe2fa07b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + Special Settings + /text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropdat.xhp + + + + + + +database;special settings +database settings;SQL92 naming +database settings;keyword AS +database settings;outer join syntax +database settings;special SELECT statements +database settings;ODBC date/time +database settings;support primary keys +database settings;line ends +database settings;version columns + +
+

Special Settings

+ Specifies the way you can work with data in a database. +
+
+ In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Advanced Settings + +
+ The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +

Use SQL92 naming constraintsUFI: found this for dBase and for text file folder

+ Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. + + +

Append the table alias name in SELECT statements

+ Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. + + +

Use keyword AS before table alias names

+ Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.http://dba.openoffice.org/specifications/Data_Source_Property_Dialog.sxw + + +

Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }'

+ Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp + Example: + select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} + + +

Ignore the privileges from the database driver

+ Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. + + +

Replace named parameters with ?

+ Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). + + +

Display version columns (when available)

+ Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp + + +

Use the catalog name in SELECT statements

+ Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp + + +

Use the schema name in SELECT statements

+ Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.UFI: ??? + + +

Create index with ASC or DESC statement

+ Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.UFI: ??? + + +

End text lines with CR + LFUFI: found for dBase and text file folder

+ Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems). + + +

Ignore currency field information

+ Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. + + +

Form data input checks for required fieldsi82291

+ When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field. + If this control box is not enabled, then the forms in the current database will not be checked for required fields. + The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. + + +

Use ODBC conformant date/time literals

+ Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard. + + +

Supports primary keys

+ Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys. + When connecting to a database using a generic API like ODBC, JDBC, or ADO, Base currently applies heuristics to determine whether this database supports primary keys. None of those APIs has dedicated support to retrieve this information. + The heuristics sometimes fails. This tri-state check box by default is set to the undetermined state, which means "apply the heuristics". If the check box is enabled, primary key support is assumed. If the check box is disabled, no primary key support is assumed. + Note that if this option is just for overruling the heuristics. If you enable the check box for a database which actually does not support primary keys, you will see some errors. + + +

Respect the result set type from the database driver

+ OH: Could not find a clear definition of this setting, best so far is https://api.libreoffice.org/docs/idl/ref/namespacecom_1_1sun_1_1star_1_1sdbc_1_1ResultSetType.html + Use the database driver different scroll capabilities of a result set. Refer to ResultSetType Constant Group + + + +

Comparison of Boolean values

+ Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.UFI: ??? + + +

Rows to scan columns types

+ Select the number of rows to let the driver detect the data type. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9312dc5e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Generated Values +/text/sdatabase/dabaadvpropgen.xhp + + +Advanced Properties dialog Generated values tab page + + + + + database advanced properties;autoincrement values + database advanced properties;automatic generated values + database advanced properties;retrieve generated values + database advanced properties;query generated values + +
+

Generated Values

+Specifies the options for automatically generated values for new data records.UFI: all text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +
+how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp ??? I have no idea +The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +

Retrieve generated values

+Enables $[officename] support for auto-incremented data fields in the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this option if the auto-increment feature in the SDBCX layer of the database is not supported. In generalUFI: this does not mean that something is set by default, but "normally,", the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. +

Auto-increment statement

+Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. +

Query of generated values

+Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field. For example: +SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ed6c6b95 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + + Database File + /text/sdatabase/dabadoc.xhp + + + +
+

Database File

+ The database file window organizes the tables, views, queries, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+ Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8539d3008 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Database Properties +/text/sdatabase/dabaprop.xhp + + +UFI: Database Properties dialog + + + +
+

Database Properties

+Specifies the properties of a database. +
+
+In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..677f14a7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + +Additional Settings +/text/sdatabase/dabapropadd.xhp + + + +
+

Additional Settings

+Specifies additional options for a data source. +
+
+In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Additional Settings tab +
+The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +

Host name

+Enter the host name of the server that contains the database, for example ldap.server.com.used for multiple database formats +

Port number

+Enter the port number for the server that hosts the database.UFI: used for LDAP and MySQL, different default values +

MySQL JDBC driver class

+Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the MySQL database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) +

Character setUFI: seen for dBaseand for text file folder

+Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This setting does not affect the database. To use the default character set of your operating system, select "System". +Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +

Oracle JDBC driver class

+Enter the name of the JDBC driver for the Oracle database.UFI: copied from shared\explorer\database\11110000.xhp but that was changed before (??) +

Driver settings

+Specify additional driver options.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +

Use catalog for file-based databases

+Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.UFI. copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +

Base DN

+Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, dc=com.copied from shared\explorer\database\11190000.xhp +

Maximum number of records

+Enter the maximum number of records that you want to load when you access the LDAP server. +

Display deleted records as wellUFI: seen for dBase, but Help ID is somewhere else

+Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.copied from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp +In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. +To view changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect to the database. +

IndexesUFI: seen for dBase

+Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.UFI: removed link from extended help text +

Text contains headersUFI: the following found for a text file folder, but HELP Ids are somewhere else

+Select this check box if the first line of the text file contains field names.copied from shared\explorer\database\11040000.xhp +

Field separator

+Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. +

Text separator

+Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. +

Decimal separator

+Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). +

Thousands separator

+Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). +

File extension

+Select the format for the text file. The extension that you select affects some of the default settings in this dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14a79b016 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Connection Type Wizard +/text/sdatabase/dabapropcon.xhp + + +Connection Type Wizard + + + +
+

Connection Type Wizard

+Changes the type of connection for the current database. +
+
+In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type + +
+The Connection Type Wizard consists of three pages. You cannot transfer all settings from one database type to another.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? +For example, you can use the wizard to open a database file that is in a format that is usually not recognized by an installed database.UFI: what does this para mean? Who writes such &/()? + +

Database type

+Select the type of database that you want to connect to. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1f1f398d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + +Advanced Properties +/text/sdatabase/dabapropgen.xhp + + + +
+

Advanced Properties

+Specifies some options for a database. +
+
+In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Advanced Properties tab +
+The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: +

Path to dBASE filesUFI: found for dBase

+Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files. +Ensure that the *.dbf file name extension of the dBASE files is lowercase.moved from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp +

BrowseUFI: found for dBase

+Opens a dialog where you can select a file or a directory.which one? or depends? +

Test ConnectionUFI: found for dBaseand for Calc doc

+Tests the database connection with the current settings. +

Path to the text filesUFI: found for text file folder

+Enter the path to the folder of the text files. +

Path to the spreadsheet documentUFI: found for a Calc doc

+Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database. +

Name of the ODBC data source on your system

+Enter the name of the ODBC data source. +

User name

+Enter the user name that is required to access the database. +

Password requiredUFI: found for Calc doc

+If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database. +

Name of the databaseUFI: found for JDBC

+Enter the name of the database. +

Name of the MySQL database

+Enter the name of the MySQL database that you want to use as a data source. +

Name of the Oracle database

+Enter the name of the Oracle database that you want to use as a data source. +

Microsoft Access database file

+Enter the name of the Microsoft Access database file that you want to use as a data source. +

Host name

+Enter the host name for the LDAP data source. +

Data source URL

+Enter the location of the JDBC data source as a URL. + +

JDBC driver class

+Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source. + +

Test ClassUFI: found for JDBC

+Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class. +

Choose a database

+Select a database from the list or click Create to create a new database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3451a0b5a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database Wizard +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz00.xhp + + + +
+ +wizards;databases (Base) +Database Wizard (Base) +databases; formats (Base) +MySQL databases (Base) +MariaDB databases (Base) +dBASE; database settings (Base) +jdbc; database settings (Base) +odbc; database settings (Base) +spreadsheets;as databases (base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries + + +

Database Wizard

+The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database. +
+Depending on the type of operation and the type of database, the Database Wizard consists of a varying number of steps. +If you create a new database file, the wizard contains two steps. + + +If you open the Database Wizard to create a database file for an existing database connection, there may be more steps to specify paths, authentication information, and more. +Set up text file connection + + +Set up Microsoft Access connection +Set up ADO connection + + +Set up dBASE connection +Set up JDBC connection +Set up Oracle database connection + +ODBC settings +Set up Spreadsheet connection + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a8b98b8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database Selection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz01.xhp + + + +
+databases; connecting (Base) + +

Select Database

+Creates a new database, opens a database file, or connects to an existing database. +
+ +

Create a new database

+Select to create a new database. This option uses the HSQL database engine with default settings. The final page of the wizard appears next. +External web page about HSQL. + + +

Open an existing database file

+Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog. + + +

Recently used

+Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. + + +

Open

+Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. + +

Connect to an existing database

+Select to create a database document for an existing database connection. + +

Database type

+Select the database type for the existing database connection. +The Outlook, Evolution, KDE Address Book, and Seamonkey database types do not need additional information. For other database types, the wizard contains additional pages to specify the required information. +The next wizard page is one of the following pages: + +Set up text file connection +Set up Microsoft Access or Microsoft Access 2007 connection +Set up ADO connection +Set up JDBC connection +Set up Oracle database connection + + +ODBC settings +Set up Spreadsheet connection + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..368bf6a15 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Save and proceed +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02.xhp + + + +
+ +

Save and proceed

+Specifies whether you want to register the database, open the database for editing, or insert a new table. +
+

Yes, register the Database for me

+Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Field - More Fields) or in a mail merge. +

No, do not register the database

+Select to keep the database information only within the created database file. +

Open the database for editing

+Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure. +

Create tables using the table wizard

+Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c06c0d99 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + +Microsoft Access Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02access.xhp + + + +Access databases (base) +Microsoft Office;Access databases (base) +mw added 2 new index entries

Microsoft Access Connection +

+Specifies the settings for importing a database file in Microsoft Access or Access 2007 format. +See also the English Wiki page https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/MSA-Base_Faq. +

Microsoft Access database file

+Specifies the path to the database file. +

Browse

+Click to open a file selection dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40fe8812c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +ADO Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02ado.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard ADO page + + + +ADO databases (Base) +MS ADO interface (Base) +databases;ADO (Base) +mw copied 3 index entries from shared/explorer/database/1116000.xhp +

ADO Connection +

+Specifies the options for adding an ADO (Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects) database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11160000 +The ADO interface is a Microsoft Windows proprietary container for connecting to databases. +$[officename] requires the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) to use the ADO interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP include these components by default. + +

Data source URL

+Enter the data source URL.UFI: removed three lines in hcshared01 #58442 +

Example URLs

+To connect to an Access 2000 file, use the format: +PROVIDER=Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0;DATA SOURCE=c:\Access\nwind2000.mdb +To connect with a name to a catalog on a Microsoft SQL server that has a name turner, enter: +PROVIDER=sqloledb;DATA SOURCE=turner;INITIAL CATALOG=First +To access an ODBC driver as a provider: +DSN=SQLSERVER + +

Browse

+Click to open a database selection dialog. +A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters. +A password must contain 3 to 18 characters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4cd6b7ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +dBASE Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02dbase.xhp + + +** Expression is faulty ** +

dBASE Connection +

+ +

Path to the dBASE files

+Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files. + +

Browse

+Open a path selection dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45e9c8b6f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + +JDBC Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp + + + +JDBC; databases (Base) +databases; JDBC (Base) + + +

JDBC Connection +

+Specifies the options to access a JDBC database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 +

JDBC Examples

+ +You can use a JDBC driver class to connect to a JDBC database from %PRODUCTNAME. The driver class is provided by the database manufacturer. Two examples of JDBC databases are Oracle and MySQL. +The driver classes must be added to %PRODUCTNAME in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. +

Oracle database

+You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. + +On UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class for the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version from the Oracle web site. + + +In the Data source URL box, enter the location of the Oracle database server. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. +For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: +oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name + + +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + + +port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. + + +database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. + + +

MySQL database

+The driver for the MySQL database is available on the MySQL web site.removed link, see i54077 +The syntax for a MySQL database is: +mysql://hostname:port/database_name + + +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + + +port is the default port for MySQL databases, namely 3306. + + +database_name is the name of the database. + + + +

Data source URL

+Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver. + + +

JDBC Driver Class

+Enter the name of the JDBC driver. +
+ Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. +
+ +

Test Class

+Tests the connection with the current settings. +Authentication + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5910b6a97 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +MariaDB and MySQL Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02mysql.xhp + + +** Expression is faulty ** + +MariaDB settings (Base) +MySQL settings (Base) + + + + +

MariaDB and MySQL Connection

+Specifies the options for MariaDB and MySQL databases.text copied from shared\explorer\database\11120000 +

Direct Connection for MariaDB and MySQL databases

+ +

Database name

+Enter the name of the MariaDB or MySQL database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. + +

Server URL

+Enter the URL for the database server. This is the name of the machine that runs the MariaDB or MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + +

Port number

+Enter the port number for the database server. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. The default port number for MySQL or MariaDB databases is 3306. + + + + +

Named Pipe

+If the MariaDB or MySQL database is to be accessed by a named pipe, enter its name. + + +

Socket

+If the MariaDB or MySQL database is to be accessed by a socket, enter the socket ID. + + + +

Connect using ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)

+Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level. + +

Connect using JDBC (Java Database Connectivity)

+Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level. +The next wizard page depends on your choice of ODBC or JDBC: +ODBC Connection +JDBC Connection +Authentication + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a69034c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +ODBC Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02odbc.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard ODBC page + + + +ODBC;database (Base) +databases;ODBC (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries +

ODBC Connection +

+Specifies the settings for ODBC databases. +To edit or add records to a database table in $[officename], the table must have a unique index field. +On Solaris and Linux platforms, try to use a JDBC driver instead of an ODBC driver. See http://www.unixodbc.org for an ODBC implementation on Solaris or Linux. +To connect to a Microsoft Access database on Windows, use the ADO or Access database interface, rather than ODBC. +Drivers for ODBC are supplied and supported by the manufacturer of the database. $[officename] only supports the ODBC 3 standard. + +

Name of the ODBC database

+Enter the path to the database file. + +

Browse

+Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog: +

Choose a data source

+Select a data source to which you want to connect using ODBC. Then click OK. +Authentication + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..efe7aae2e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + +Oracle Database Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02oracle.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard Oracle page + + + + +Oracle databases (base) +mw added one index entry +

Oracle Database Connection

+Specifies the options to access an Oracle database.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 +

Oracle database

+You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. + + +On UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class for the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version of the driver from the Oracle web site. + + + +

Name of the Oracle database

+Enter the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. + +

Server URL

+Enter the URL for the database server. This is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + +

Port number

+Enter the port number for the database server. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. + +

Oracle JDBC Driver Class

+Enter the name of the JDBC driver. + +

Test Class

+Tests the connection with the current settings. +Authentication + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60bd1011e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + PostgreSQL Connection + /text/sdatabase/dabawiz02pgsql.xhp + + + + +PostgreSQL settings (Base) + + +
+

PostgreSQL Connection

+ Specifies the options for connecting to PostgreSQL databases. +
+

DBMS/driver-specific connection string

+ Enter the driver specific connection string. The connection string is sequence of keyword/value pairs separated by spaces. For example + dbname=MyDatabase host=myHost port=5432 + where + + + dbname: the name of the database hosted in the DBMS server. + + + host: the fully qualified name of the RDBMS server + + + port: the server port. The default port for PostgreSQL is 5432. + + + You can also enter the connection string as postgresql://myHost:port/MyDatabase. + + Refer to the database server administrator for the correct values of the keywords passed in the connection string. Values for user= and password= are ignored but will be requested at connection time. + The connection string is displayed in the %PRODUCTNAME Base status bar. +
+ List of all keyword/value pairs for PostgreSQL 13 connection string. Not every pair is handled by the %PRODUCTNAME driver manager. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3980a2632 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Spreadsheet Database Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02spreadsheet.xhp + + +** Expression is faulty ** + +

Set up Spreadsheet connection

+ +

Location and file name

+Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file. + +

Browse

+Click to open a file selection dialog. + +

Password required

+Select to request a password from the user of the database document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18b734d57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + +Text File Connection +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz02text.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard text file + + + +tables in databases;importing text formats (Base) +text databases (Base) + + +

Set up a connection to text files

+Specifies the settings for importing a database in text format.UFI: most text copied without editing from shared\explorer\database\11040000 +In a text format database, data is stored in an unformatted ASCII file, where each record comprises a row. The data fields are divided by separators. Text in the data fields is divided by quotation marks. + +

Path to text files

+Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database. + +

Browse

+Click to open a file selection dialog. + +

Plain text files (*.txt)

+Click to access txt files.UFI: sorry, this is not in the spec. + +

'Comma separated value' files (*.csv)

+Click to access csv files. + + +

Custom

+Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box. + +

Field separator

+Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file. + +

Text separator

+Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file. You cannot use the same character as the field separator. + +

Decimal separator

+Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5). + +

Thousands separator

+Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000). + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd91d9e15 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Set up user authentication +/text/sdatabase/dabawiz03auth.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard Authentication page + + + +

Set up user authentication

+Some databases require a user name and password. + +

User name

+Enter the user name to access the database. + +

Password required

+Select to prompt a user for a password to access the database. + +

Test Connection

+Check if the configured connection can be used to access the database. +Save and proceed + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f76bead79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Database +/text/sdatabase/main.xhp + + + +
+databases;main page (Base) +$[officename] Base data sources +data sources;$[officename] Base +mw changed "Base,..."

Using Databases in %PRODUCTNAME Base +

+ +In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you can access data that is stored in a wide variety of database file formats. %PRODUCTNAME Base natively supports some flat file database formats, such as the dBASE format. You can also use %PRODUCTNAME Base to connect to external relational databases, such as databases from MySQL or Oracle. +
+The following database types are read-only types in %PRODUCTNAME Base. From within %PRODUCTNAME Base it is not possible to change the database structure or to edit, insert, and delete database records for these database types: + + +Spreadsheet files + + +Text files + + +Address book data + + +

Using a Database in %PRODUCTNAME

+ + +To create a new database file, choose File - New - Database. + + +The Database Wizard helps you to create a database file and to register a new database within %PRODUCTNAME. +The database file contains queries, reports, and forms for the database as well as a link to the database where the records are stored. Formatting information is also stored in the database file. + + +To open a database file, choose File - Open. In the File type list box, select to view only "Database documents". Select a database document and click Open. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Wiki page about Base +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7542609df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +Menus +/text/sdatabase/menubar.xhp + + +UFI: Database Document Menu bar + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdb4046a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Edit +/text/sdatabase/menuedit.xhp + + +UFI: Edit menu of Database + + + +
+

Edit

+
+The Edit menu of a database window. +

Copy

+Copies the selected object to the clipboard. +

Paste

+Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. + +

Paste Special

+Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. +
+ +

Select All

+Selects all entries, including subfolders, in the lower part of the database window. + + +

Edit

+Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report. + + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report. +
+ +

Rename

+Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid. + +

Open

+Opens the selected object in the last saved state. + +

Create as View

+Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database. +Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. + +

Form Wizard

+Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. + +

Report Wizard

+Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. + +

Database

+Opens a submenu. + +

Properties

+Opens the Database Properties dialog. + +

Connection Type

+Opens the Connection Type Wizard.shortened the paragraph, see i58462 + +

Advanced Properties

+Opens the Advanced Properties dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf1f0a533 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +File +/text/sdatabase/menufile.xhp + + +UFI: File menu for Database + + + +
+

File

+
+The File menu of a database window. Only entries specific to databases are listed. +

Save

+Saves the current database file, query, form or report. For the database file, you see the file save dialog. For the other objects, you see the Save dialog. +

Save As

+Saves the current database file with another name. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. +

Export

+Exports the selected report or form to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +

Send

+Opens a submenu. +

Email Document

+Opens the default email application to send a new email. The current database file is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. + +

Report as Email

+Opens the default email application to send a new email. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. + +

Report to Text Document

+Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0347c9d43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Save +/text/sdatabase/menufilesave.xhp + + +save dialog in Base + + + + +

Save

+In this dialog, you can specify the position and name of a form UFI: spec says also for report, but reports can be created only by Wizard and are autosaved thereUFI: spec says also for query, cannot verifythat you save within a database file. The dialog opens automatically when you save a form the first time.UFI: no chance to open the dialog a second time + +

Create New Directory

+Click to create a new folder within the database file. + +

Up One Level

+Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy. + +

File name

+Enter the file name for the saved form. + +

Save

+Click to save the form to the database file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14be6017b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Insert +/text/sdatabase/menuinsert.xhp + + + +
+

Insert

+
+The Insert menu of a database window. +

Form

+Opens a new text document in form mode. +

Report

+Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query. +

Query (Design View)

+Opens a new query in design mode. +

Query (SQL View)

+Opens a new query in SQL mode. +

Table Design

+Opens the table design view. +

View Design

+Opens a new view in design mode. +

View (Simple)

+Opens a new view in SQL mode. +

Folder

+Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f008b6491 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Tools +/text/sdatabase/menutools.xhp + + +UFI: Tools menu of Database + + + +
+

Tools

+
+The Tools menu of a database window. + +

Relationships

+Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations. + +

User Administration

+Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.UFI: where is this specced? + + +

Table Filter

+Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.see text in shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Select the tables that you want to filter in the Filter list. +If you select the topmost table in a hierarchy, all of the tables in the hierarchy are selected. +If you select a table that is at a lower level in the hierarchy, the tables that occur above it in the hierarchy are not selected. + +

SQL

+Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.UFI: may be shared\02\14030000.xhp + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..899b789fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + +View +/text/sdatabase/menuview.xhp + + +UFI: View menu of Database + + + +
+

View

+
+The View menu of a database window. + +

Database Objects

+Opens a submenu. + +

Forms

+Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view. + +

Reports

+Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view. + +

Queries

+Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view. + +

Tables

+Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view. + +

Sort

+Opens a submenu. + +

Ascending

+Sorts the entries in the detail view in ascending order. + +

Descending

+Sorts the entries in the detail view in descending order. + +

Preview

+Opens a submenu. + +

None

+Disables the preview in the database window. + +

Document Information

+The preview window displays the document information of a form or report. + +

Document

+The preview displays the document of a form or report. + +

Refresh Tables

+Refreshes the tables. what happens? cool drinks? Icecream? + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0db2c0014 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Migrate Macros + /text/sdatabase/migrate_macros.xhp + + + +
+wizards;macros (Base) + Macro Wizard (Base) + macros;attaching new (Base) + migrating macros (Base) +MW added 2 index entries + + + + +

Migrate Macros

+ +The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area. +
+ +Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name. + +The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file. + Previously, macros have been allowed to reside only in the text sub-documents of forms and reports. Now macros can also be stored in the Base file itself. This means that macros in Base files can be called now from any of its sub-components: forms, reports, table design, query design, relation design, table data view. + However, it is technically not possible to store macros both in a Base file and in its sub-documents at the same time. So, if you want to attach some new macros to the Base file, while retaining any existing old macros that were stored in the sub-documents, you must move the existing old macros up to the Base file's macro storage area. + The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard can move the macros up into the Base file's storage area. You can then examine the macros and edit them as needed. + For example, it is possible that macros from the sub-documents had the same module names and macro names. After you moved the macros into one common macro storage area, you must edit the macros to make the names unique. The wizard cannot do this. + The wizard can backup the Base file to another folder of your choice. The wizard changes the original Base file. The backup remains unchanged. + + + + +
+ An in depth explanation by the developers (Wiki). +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/password.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/password.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..770fe6b7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/password.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + +User Name and Password Required +/text/sdatabase/password.xhp + + +Password dialog + + + +

User Name and Password Required

+ +

User name

+Enter the user name to connect to the data source. + +

Password

+Enter the password to connect to the data source. + +

Remember password till end of session

+Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..314f14c93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Query Wizard +/text/sdatabase/querywizard00.xhp + + + +
mw deleted 2 index entries + +

Query Wizard

+The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query. The saved query can be called later, either from the graphical user interface, or using the automatically created SQL language command. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +Query Wizard - Field selection + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7570c3daa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Query Wizard - Field Selection +/text/sdatabase/querywizard01.xhp + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Field Selection

+Specifies the table to create the query, and specifies which fields you wish to include in the query. +
+ +

Tables

+Specifies the table for which the query is to be created. + + + + + + + +

Fields in the Query

+Displays all fields that will be included in the new query. +Query Wizard - Sorting order + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..897d480e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Sorting Order +/text/sdatabase/querywizard02.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 2 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Sorting Order

+Specifies the sorting order for the data records in your query. +
+ +

Sort by

+Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted. + + + + +

Ascending

+Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order. + + + + +

Descending

+Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order. + + + +

And then by

+Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal. +Query Wizard - Search conditions + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8215fe7f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Search Conditions +/text/sdatabase/querywizard03.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 3 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Search Conditions

+Specifies the search conditions to filter the query. +
+ +

Match all of the following

+Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. + +

Match any of the following

+Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. + + + +

Field

+Select the field name for the filter condition. + + + +

Condition

+Select the condition for the filter. + + + +

Value

+Enter the value for the filter condition. +Query Wizard - Detail or summary + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75dfa4e0a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Detail or Summary +/text/sdatabase/querywizard04.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 4 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Detail or Summary

+Specifies whether to display all records of the query, or only the results of aggregate functions. +This page is only displayed when there are numerical fields in the query that allow the use of aggregate functions. +
+ +

Detailed query

+Select to show all records of the query. + +

Summary query

+Select to show only results of aggregate functions. +Select the aggregate function and the field name of the numeric field in the list box. You can enter as many aggregate functions as you want, one in each row of controls. + +

Aggregate function

+Select the aggregate function. + +

Field name

+Select the numeric field name. + +

+

+Appends a new row of controls. + +

−

+Removes the last row of controls. +Query Wizard - Grouping + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4c8a5a33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Query Wizard - Grouping +/text/sdatabase/querywizard05.xhp + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Grouping

+Specifies whether to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Group by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +
+ + + + + +

Group by

+Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query. +Query Wizard - Grouping conditions + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d76dcd9e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions +/text/sdatabase/querywizard06.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 6 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions

+Specifies the conditions to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Group by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +
+ +

Match all of the following

+Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. + +

Match any of the following

+Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. + + + +

Field name

+Select the field name for the grouping condition. + + + +

Condition

+Select the condition for the grouping. + + + +

Value

+Enter the value for the grouping condition. +Query Wizard - Aliases + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b62e10a0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Aliases +/text/sdatabase/querywizard07.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 7 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Aliases

+Assigns aliases to field names. Aliases are optional, and can provide more user-friendly names, which are displayed in place of field names. For example, an alias can be used when fields from different tables have the same name. +
+ +

Alias

+Enter the alias for the field name. +Query Wizard - Overview + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a511de4ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Query Wizard - Overview +/text/sdatabase/querywizard08.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 8 + + + +
+

Query Wizard - Overview

+Enter a name of the query, and specify whether you want to display or to modify the query after the Wizard is finished. +
+ +

Name of the query

+Enter the name of the query. + +

Display query

+Select to save and display the query. + +

Modify query

+Select to save the query and open it for editing. + +

Overview

+Displays a summary of the query. +Query Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72a8dbbb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Date and Time +/text/sdatabase/rep_datetime.xhp + + + + + + +

Date and Time +

+You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time. +Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. +Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed. + +Select a format to display the date. +Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed. + +Select a format to display the time. +Click OK to insert the field. +You can click the date or time field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..42a1d582b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Fields + /text/sdatabase/rep_insertfield.xhp + + + +
+ + + insert fields;in report design + add fields;in report design + report design;add fields to report + +

Add fields to report

+ The Add Field window helps you to insert the table entries in the report. +
+
+ The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. + Choose View - Add Field. + Click the Add Field icon on the toolbar. + + + + + Add Field icon + + + + Add Field icon on the toolbar. + + +
+
+ + + Select the field in the Add Field dialog and click Insert. You can select multiple fields pressing the CommandCtrl key while clicking on the fields name or using the Shift key while pressing the mouse button. Click Insert in the toolbar to add the fields to the report. + + + Drag and drop the field names one by one from the Add Field window into the Detail area of the report. Position the fields as you like. Use the icons in the toolbars to align the fields. + It is not possible to overlap the fields. If you drop a table field on the Detail area, then a label and a text box are inserted. + + + You can also insert text that should be the same on every page of the report. Click the Label Field icon, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area. Edit the Label property to show the text you want. + + + + + + + Icon + + + + Add Label Field icon on the toolbar. + + +
+

Sorting fields names

+ + + + + Sort Ascending icon + + + + Sort names ascending. + + + + + + Sort Descending icon + + + + Sort names descending, + + + + + + Undo sorting icon + + + + Restore original sorting + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d592286b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ + + + + + + + Report Builder + /text/sdatabase/rep_main.xhp + + + + + + Report Builder + Oracle Report Builder + +

Report Builder +

+ The Report Builder is a tool to create your own database reports. Unlike with the Report Wizard, using the Report Builder you can take control to design the report the way you want. The generated report is a Writer document that you can edit, too. + To use the Report Builder, the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) software must be installed, and this software must be selected in %PRODUCTNAME. +

To install the JRE software

+ The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. + + + Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. + If a recent JRE version is found on your system, you see an entry in the list. + + + Click the option button in front of the entry to enable this JRE version for use in %PRODUCTNAME. + + + Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. + + + If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced again. +

To open the Report Builder

+ + + Open a Base file or create a new database. The database must contain at least one table with at least one data field and a primary key field. + + + Click the Reports icon in the Base window, then choose Create Report in Design View. + The Report Builder window opens. + + + The Report Builder is divided into three parts. On the top you see the menu, with the toolbars below. + On the right you see the Properties window with the property values of the currently selected object. + The left part of the Report Builder window shows the Report Builder view. The Report Builder view is initially divided into three sections, from top to bottom: + + + + Page Header - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Header area + + + + Detail - drag and drop database fields into the Detail area + + + + Page Footer - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Footer area + + + To insert an additional Report Header and Report Footer area choose Edit - Insert Report Header/Footer. These areas contain text that appears at the start and end of the whole report.id="par_id2685323" If you want a multi-column report, choose Format - Page, click the Columns tab, and set the number of columns. Now you can also specify a Column Header and Column Footer in the Report Builder view.column header/footer +Click the "-" icon in front of an area name to collapse that area to one line in the Report Builder view. The "-" icon changes to a "+" icon, and you can click this to expand the area again. + You insert database fields by drag-and-drop into the Detail area. See the section "To insert fields into the report" below. + In addition, you can click the Label Field or Text Box icon in the toolbar, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area, to define a text that is the same on all pages. You enter the text in the Label box of the corresponding Properties window. You can also add graphics by using the Graphics icon. +

To connect the report to a database table

+ + + Move the mouse to the Properties view. You see two tab pages General and Data. + + + On the Data tab page, click Content to open the combo box. + + + Select the table for that you want to create the report. + + + After selecting the table, press the Tab key to leave the Content box. + + + The Add fields to report window opens automatically and shows all fields of the selected table. + + Align at Section toolbar + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.Object Resizing toolbar + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.Report Controls toolbar + +Inserts a horizontal line to the current area. + +Inserts a vertical line to the current area.Shrink toolbar + +Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space. + +Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space. + +Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space. + After inserting fields in the Detail view, the report is ready for execution. +

To execute a report

+ Click the Execute Report icon on the toolbar. +
+ + + + + Execute Report icon + + + + Execute Report icon + + +
+
+ A Writer document opens and shows the report you have created, which contains all values of the database table which you have insert. + If the database contents did change, execute the report again to update the result report.automatic? message? +

To edit a report

+ First decide if you want to edit the generated report, which is a static Writer document, or if you want to edit the Report Builder view and then generate a new report based on the new design. + The Writer document is opened read-only. To edit the Writer document, click Edit Document on the information bar, or choose Edit - Edit Mode.saved automatically with the Base file? + If you want to edit the Report Builder view, you can change some of its properties. + Click in the Details area. Then in the Properties window, change some properties, for example the background color. + After finishing, click the Execute Report icon + to create a new report. + + If you close the Report Builder, you will be asked if the report should be saved. Click Yes, give the report a name, and click OK.report part of Base file? +

Sorting the report

+ Without sorting or grouping, the records will be inserted into the report in the order in which they are retrieved from the database. + + + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. + + + + + + + Icon Sort and Grouping + + + + Icon Sort and Grouping + + +
+ + + In the Groups box, click the field which you want as the first sort field, and set the Sorting property.what meaning has the order of fields / move up down button? + + + Execute the report. + + +

Grouping

+ + + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. + + + In the Groups box, open the Group Header list box and select to show a group header. + + + Click the Add Field icon to open the Add Field window. + + + + + + + Icon Add Field + + + + Icon Add Field + + +
+ + + + Drag-and-drop the field entry that you want to group into the group header section. Then drag-and-drop the remaining fields into the Detail section. + + + Execute the report. The report shows the grouped records. + + + If you like to sort and group, open the Report Builder view, then open the Sorting and Grouping dialog. Select to show a Group Header for the fields that you want to group, and select to hide the Group Header for the fields that you want to be sorted. Close the Sorting and Grouping window and execute the report. +

Updating and printing your data

+ When you insert some new data or edit data in the table, a new report will show the updated data. + Click the Reports icon and double-click your last saved report. A new Writer document will be created which shows the new data. + + + + + Icon Reports + + + + Icon Reports + + +
+ + To print a report, choose File - Print from the Writer document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ab5bfaa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + +Report Navigator +/text/sdatabase/rep_navigator.xhp + + + +formulas in reports;editing +functions in reports;editing + +

Report Navigator +

+You can open the Report Navigator window of the Report Builder by choosing View - Report Navigator. +The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report. +Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu. +

To enter functions to the report

+In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them. +Functions can be entered using a syntax as specified by the OpenFormula proposal. +See Wiki page about Base for some more help regarding the functions in a report. +

To calculate a sum for each clientcopied from a mail by Ocke - did not test

+ + +Open the Report Navigator. + + +Open the Groups entry and the group where you want to calculate the cost. +The group has a sub entry called functions. + + +Open the context menu (right click) on the functions entry, choose to create a new function, and select it. +In the property browser you see the function. + + +Change the name to e.g. CostCalc and the formula to [CostCalc] + [enter your cost column name]. + + +In the initial value enter 0. + + +Now you can insert a text field and bind it to your [CostCalc] (appears in the data field list box). + + +Maybe you have to set the initial value to the value of the field like [field].these 3 paras copied from another mail by Ocke in users@dba.o.o +If there are blank fields in the cost column, use the following formula to replace the blank fields' content with zero: +[SumCost] + IF(ISBLANK([field]);0;[field])need some real working examples. See i81874Formula +Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.Initial value +Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.Deep traversing +If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.Pre evaluation +If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6a4cb6b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Page Numbers +/text/sdatabase/rep_pagenumbers.xhp + + + + + +

Page Numbers +

+You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers. +Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. +Page N +Page N of M +Top of Page (Header) +Bottom of Page (Footer) +Alignment + + +Select the format for the page numbers, either "Page N" or "Page N of M", where N stands for the current page number, and M for the total number of pages in the report. + + +Select to show the page numbers in the Page Header area or in the Page Footer area. + + +Select an alignment. By default the page numbers are centered between the left and right margins. You can align the field to the left or right. You can also select Inside to print page number on odd pages on the left side and even page numbers on the right side. Select Outside for the opposite alignment. + + +When you click OK, a data field for the page numbers is inserted. If no header or footer area exist, the area will be created as needed. +You can click the data field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83736e6ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Properties + /text/sdatabase/rep_prop.xhp + + + + +

Properties

+ The Properties window of the Report Builder always shows the properties of the currently selected object in the Report Builder view. + Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. + On first start of the Report Builder, the Properties window shows the Data tab page for the whole report. + Select a table from the Contents list, then press Tab or click outside the input box to leave the input box. + The Add fields to report window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field. + The General tab page can be used to change the name of the report, and to disable the Page Header or Page Footer areas, among others. + + To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select All - Select Report. + + Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.Page header + + Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.Page footer + + Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footerPrint repeated values + + Specifies to print repeated values. + If you click the Page Header or Page Footer area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. + You can edit some visual properties for the area.screen only or also in report?Background color + + Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.Visible + + An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.Height + + Defines the height of the selected object.Conditional Print Expression + + If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.id="par_id2386852" Conditions use the following form:Background transparent + + Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.just guessing + If you click the Detail area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. + You can specify some properties to fine-tune the way the records are printed.Force New Page + + Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.New Row Or Column + + New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.Keep together + + Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page. + Insert some data fields into the Detail area, or insert other control fields into any area. When you select an inserted field, you can set the properties in the Properties window. + For a Label field, you can change the displayed text in the Label input box. + + For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.Position x + + Set the X Position for the selected objectx in pixel or twips? or current measurement units? from origin as on ruler? from elsewhere?Position y + + Set the Y Position for the selected objectWidth + + Sets the width of the selected object.Font + + Select the font for the selected text object.Print when group change + + Print when group changeVert. Alignment + + Vert. Alignment + On the General tab page of a data field, you can set the Formatting properties, among others. + + On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..98af2ca39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Sorting and Grouping + /text/sdatabase/rep_sort.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Sorting and Grouping +

+ In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group. If you group your report by a certain field, all records with the same value of that field will be kept together in one group. +
+ The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. + The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. + +Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. + +Click to open a list from which you can select a field. + + +Moves the selected field up in the list. + + +Moves the selected field down in the list. + +Select the sorting order. + +Select to show or hide the Group Header. + +Select to show or hide the Group Footer. + +Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. + +Removes the selected field from the list. + By default a new group is created on every changed value of a record from the selected field. You can change this property depending on the type of field: + + + For fields of type Text, you can select Prefix Characters and enter a number n of characters in the text box below. The records which are identical in the first n characters will be grouped together. + + + For fields of type Date/Time, you can group the records by the same year, quarter, month, week, day, hour, or minute. You can additionally specify an interval for weeks and hours: 2 weeks groups data in biweekly groups, 12 hours groups data in half-day groups. + + + For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? + + + +Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. + +Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. + When you specify to keep together some records on the same page, you have three choices: + + + No - page boundaries are not taken into account. + + + Whole Group - prints the group header, detail section, and group footer on the same page. + + + With First Detail - prints the group header on a page only if the first detail record also can be printed on the same page. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd8c0b9eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Wizard +/text/sdatabase/tablewizard00.xhp + + + +
+wizards;database tables (Base) +Table Wizard (Base) +mw added "(Base)" to all entries + +

Table Wizard

+The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table. +
+ + + + + + + + +Table Wizard - Select fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d039a58e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Wizard - Select Fields +/text/sdatabase/tablewizard01.xhp + + + +
+

Table Wizard - Select Fields

+Select fields from the provided sample tables as a starting point to create your own table. +
+ +

Business

+Select the business category to see only business sample tables. + +

Private

+Select the private category to see only private sample tables. + +

Sample tables

+Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need. + + + + + + + +

Selected Fields

+Displays all fields that will be included in the new table. +Table Wizard - Set types and formats + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59f972f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Table Wizard - Set Types and Formats +/text/sdatabase/tablewizard02.xhp + + + +
+

Table Wizard - Set Types and Formats

+Specifies the field information for your selected fields. +
+

Selected fields

+Select a field in order to edit the field information. + +

−

+Remove the selected field from the list box. +

+

+Add a new data field to the list box. +

Field information

+

Field name

+Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name. + +

Field type

+Select a field type. +

AutoValue

+If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine. +

Entry required

+If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.not in spec doc + +

Length

+Specifies the number of characters for the data field. + +

Decimal places

+Specifies the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields. + +

Default value

+Specifies the default value for a Yes/No field. +

Auto-increment statement

+Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +For this example, you must enter AUTO_INCREMENT into the Auto-increment statement box. +Table Wizard - Set primary key + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2862ca439 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Table Wizard - Set Primary Key +/text/sdatabase/tablewizard03.xhp + + +UFI: new Table Wizard page 3 + + + +
+

Table Wizard - Set Primary Key

+Specifies a field in the table to be used as a primary key. +
+ +

Create a primary key

+Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables. + +

Automatically add a primary key

+Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field. + +

Use an existing field as a primary key

+Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key. + +

Field name

+Select the field name. + + +

Auto value

+Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature. + +

Define primary key by several fields

+Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields. + +

Available fields

+Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields. + + + +

Primary key fields

+Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom. +Table Wizard - Create table + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1144970c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Table Wizard - Create Table +/text/sdatabase/tablewizard04.xhp + + +UFI: new Table Wizard page 4 + + + +
+

Table Wizard - Create Table

+Enter a name for the table and specify whether you want to modify the table after the wizard is finished. +
+ +

Table name

+Specifies the table name. + +

Catalog of the table

+Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs) + +

Schema of the table

+Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas) + +

Modify the table design

+Select to save and edit the table design. + +

Insert data immediately

+Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data. + +

Create a form based on this table

+Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard. +Table Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a39c5287b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Database Form Toolbar + /text/sdatabase/toolbar_form.xhp + + + +

Database Form Toolbar

+ + +

New database form

+ + + + + Icon New Database Form + + + + Creates a new database form. + + +
+ +

Open database form

+ + + + + Icon Open Form + + + + Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records. + + +
+ + +

Edit

+ + + + + Icon Edit Form + + + + Opens the selected form so you can change the layout. + + +
+ + +

Delete

+ + + + + Icon Delete Form + + + + Deletes the selected form. + + +
+ + +

Rename

+ + + + + Icon Rename Form + + + + Renames the selected form. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..092e63631 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + Database Query Toolbar + /text/sdatabase/toolbar_query.xhp + + + +

Database Query Toolbar

+ + +

New database query

+ + + + + Icon New Database Query + + + + Creates a new database query. + + +
+

New Database Query (SQL View)

+ + + + + Icon New query (SQL view) + + + + Opens the SQL window to edit a query in SQL language. + + +
+ +

Open database query

+ + + + + Icon Open Query Object + + + + Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records. + + +
+ + +

Edit

+ + + + + Icon Edit Query + + + + Opens the selected query so you can change the structure. + + +
+ + +

Delete

+ + + + + Icon Delete Query + + + + Deletes the selected query. + + +
+ + +

Rename

+ + + + + + Icon Rename Query + + + + Renames the selected query. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7782a92ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + Database Report Toolbar + /text/sdatabase/toolbar_report.xhp + + + +

Database Report Toolbar

+ + +

New database report

+ + + + + Icon New Database Report + + + + Creates a new database report. + + +
+ +

Database report wizard

+ + + + + Icon Database report wizard + + + + Opens the database report wizard, to guide you in creating a database report. + + +
+ +

Open database report

+ + + + + Icon Open Report + + + + Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records. + + +
+ + +

Edit

+ + + + + Icon Edit Report + + + + Opens the selected report so you can change the layout. + + +
+ + +

Delete

+ + + + + Icon Delete Report + + + + Deletes the selected report. + + +
+ + +

Rename

+ + + + + Icon Rename Report + + + + Renames the selected report. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddfe9bcbc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + Database Table Toolbar + /text/sdatabase/toolbar_table.xhp + + + +

Database Table Toolbar

+
+

Open document

+ + + + + Icon Open Document + + + + Opens a %PRODUCTNAME document. + + +
+ +

Save document

+ + + + + Icon Save database file + + + + Saves current database file. + + +
+ +

Copy

+ + + + + Icon copy + + + + Copies the selection to the clipboard. + + +
+

Paste

+ + + + + Icon Paste + + + + Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. + + +
+

Sort ascending

+ + + + + Icon sort ascending + + + + Sorts the entries in the detail view in ascending order. + + +
+ +

Sort descending

+ + + + + Icon Sort descending + + + + Sorts the entries in the detail view in descending order. + + +
+

New database form

+ + + + + Icon New Database Form + + + + Creates a new database form (default). Use the drop-down toolbar to create a new database object directly. + + +
+
+ +

New table design

+ + + + + Icon New Table design + + + + Designs a new database table. + + +
+ +

Open database table

+ + + + + Icon Open Database Table + + + + Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records. + + +
+ +

Edit

+ + + + + + Icon Edit table + + + + Opens the selected table so you can change the structure. + + +
+ +

Delete

+ + + + + + Icon Delete Table + + + + Deletes the selected table. + + +
+ +

Rename

+ + + + + + Icon Rename Table + + + + Renames the selected table. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba1427033 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + Toolbars + /text/sdatabase/toolbars.xhp + + + database toolbars + + + +

Database Toolbars +

+ In a database file window, you can see the following toolbars. +

+

+

+

+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2852dd2b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +To access this command... +/text/sdraw/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + To access this command... + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0119a9e72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + Page Menu + /text/sdraw/00/page_menu.xhp + + + + Choose Page - Page Properties + + Choose Page - Page Properties and then click the Page tab + + Choose Page - Page Properties and then click the Background tab + + Choose Page - Master Page + + Choose Page - Master Page - Load +
+ Choose Page - New Page + On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + Icon New Page + + + New Page + + +
+
+
+ Choose Page - Rename Page + Right-click on the page thumbnail and choose Rename Page + Choose Page - Delete Page + Right-click on the page thumbnail and choose Delete Page + Choose Page - Duplicate Page + Choose Page - Navigate. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab7d09506 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + 3D-Settings + /text/sdraw/01/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp + + + +
+

3D-Settings

+ The 3D Settings toolbar controls properties of selected 3D objects. +
+ +

Extrusion On/Off

+ Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + + + + + Icon Extrusion On/Off + + + + Extrusion On/Off + + +
+ +

Tilt Down

+ Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees. + + + + + Icon Tilt Down + + + + Tilt Down + + +
+ +

Tilt Up

+ Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees. + + + + + Icon Tilt Up + + + + Tilt Up + + +
+ +

Tilt Left

+ Tilts the selected object left by five degrees. + + + + + Icon Tilt Left + + + + Tilt Left + + +
+ +

Tilt Right

+ Tilts the selected object right by five degrees. + + + + + Icon Tilt Right + + + + Tilt Right + + +
+ +

Depth

+ Opens the Extrusion Depth window. + Select an extrusion depth. + + + + + Icon Depth + + + + Depth + + +
+ + +Enter an extrusion depth. + +

Direction

+ Opens the Extrusion Direction window. + + + + + Icon Direction + + + + Direction + + +
+ +Select a direction.UFI: same ID for Direction and Lighting direction +Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method. + +

Lighting

+ Opens the Extrusion Lighting window. + + + + + Icon Lighting + + + + Lighting + + +
+ Select a lighting direction. + Select a lighting intensity. + +

Surface

+ Opens the Extrusion Surface window. + + + + + Icon Surface + + + + Surface + + +
+ Select a surface material or a wireframe display. + +

3D Color

+ Opens the Extrusion Color toolbar. + + + + + Icon Color + + + + Color + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87fddac21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + Consolidate Text Boxes + /text/sdraw/01/consolidatetext.xhp + + + + + +text box consolidation +join PDF lines;text box consolidation +combine text box;text box consolidation +combine text frames;text box consolidation + +
+

Text Box Consolidation

+Combine two or more selected text boxes into one. +
+
+Select two or more text boxes and either +Choose menu Shape - Consolidate Text. +Open context menu and choose Consolidate Text. +
+Text box consolidation joins several text boxes into a bigger text box, enabling text reflow inside the resulting box. +Consolidate text command is specially useful for editing PDF documents with %PRODUCTNAME Draw. +The function inspects the text fragments to see if they end in sentence-ending punctuation. If not, then the next text box's content is appended to it instead of starting a new paragraph. You must afterwards fix up paragraphing, and set paragraph properties. +

Remarks

+ + + The resulting text box is inserted into the current layer. + + + If the single text box objects are named, the resulting text box is unnamed. + + + Title and description of the single text boxes are lost. + + + The previous text box objects are deleted after consolidation. + + + Consolidation of lists requires attention to restore the list layout that has been affected by the position of the punctuation. This includes the case of numbering of style "1.", where the resulting list items are split after the dot. + + + For better results, combine adjacent text boxes with similar paragraph formatting. Character formatting inside the text boxes is preserved. Combining text boxes with different paragraph styles (headings, list and more) will require manual intervention to restore the original text layout. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c78bb9b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete Page + /text/sdraw/01/delete_page.xhp + + + +
+

Delete Page

+ Delete the current page. +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54a66f1fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + Duplicate Page + /text/sdraw/01/duplicate_page.xhp + + + +
+ +

Duplicate Page

+ Inserts a copy of the current page after the current page. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6fdb27de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + +Insert Layer +/text/sdraw/01/insert_layer.xhp + + + + + + +

Insert Layer

+Inserts a new layer in the document. Layers are only available in Draw, not in Impress. + +
+ +
+To select a layer, click the corresponding tab at the bottom of the workspace. + +

Name

+Enter a name for the new layer. + +

Title

+Enter the title of the layer. + +

Description

+Enter a description of the layer. +

Properties

+Set the properties for the new layer. +

Visible

+Show or hide the layer. +

Printable

+When printing, print or ignore this particular layer. +

Locked

+Prevent elements on the layer from being edited. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df0d19860 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Modify Layer +/text/sdraw/01/modify_layer.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +renaming layers +layers; renaming + + +Modify Layer +Changes the properties of the selected layer. + +
+ +
+Name +Enter a name for the selected layer. +You can only change the name of a layer you created. +Properties +Sets the properties of the selected layer. +Visible +Shows or hides the contents of the selected layer. +Printable +Prints the contents of the selected layer. +Protected +Locks the contents of the selected layer, so that they cannot be edited. + +Rename Layer +Renames the active layer. You can only change the name of a layer you created. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71dbe8860 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + Page Navigation + /text/sdraw/01/navigate_page.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c23c8c974 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Page +/text/sdraw/01/new_page.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

New Page

+Inserts a blank page after the selected page. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/page_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/page_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..257f4f3d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/page_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + Page + /text/simpress/01/page_properties.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + Page + Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options. +
+ +
+ + + + To change the background of all of the pages in the active file, select a background, click OK and click Yes in the Page Properties dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0798da22b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + + Rename Page + /text/sdraw/01/rename_page.xhp + + + +
+ +

Rename Page

+ Set a new name for the page. +
+
+ + +
+

Name

+ Enter the new name of the page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f59c47b5e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,463 @@ + + + + + + + + + Shortcut Keys for Drawings + /text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys;in drawings + drawings; shortcut keys + +Shortcut Keys for Drawings + + The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. + You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. + +
+ Function Keys for Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + + F2 + + + Add or edit text. + + + + + F3 + + + Opens group to edit individual objects. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F3 + + + Close group editor. + + + + + Shift+F3 + + + Opens the Duplicate dialog. + + + + + F4 + + + Opens the Position and Size dialog. + + + + + F5 + + + Opens the Navigator. + + + + + F7 + + + Checks spelling. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F7 + + + Opens the Thesaurus. + + + + + F8 + + + Edit points on/off. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + + Fits to frame. + + + + + Command+TF11 + + + Opens Styles window. + + +
+ +zooming;shortcut keys + drawings; zoom function in + +Shortcut Keys for Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + + Plus(+) Key + + + Zooms in. + + + + + Minus(-) Key + + + Zooms out. + + + + + Multiple(×) Key (number pad) + + + Zooms to fit entire page in screen. + + + + + Divide (÷) Key (number pad) + + + Zooms in on the current selection. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+G + + + Groups selected objects. + + + + + Shift+Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+A + + + Ungroups selected group. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+K + + + Combines selected objects. + + + + + Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K + + + Uncombines selected objects. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+ + + + + Bring to front. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+ + + + + Bring forward. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+ - + + + Send backward. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+ - + + + Send to back. + + +
+ + Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + + Page Up + + + Switch to previous page + + + + + Page Down + + + Switch to next page + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Page Up + + + Switch to previous layer + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Page Down + + + Switch to next layer + + + + + Arrow Key + + + Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Arrow Key + + + Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + + Command +Ctrl-click while dragging an object. Note: this shortcut key works only when the Copy when moving option in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General is enabled (it is enabled by default). + + + Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on a drawing object icon on Tools bar + + + Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu for the selected object. + + + + + F2 + + + Enters text mode. + + + + + Enter + + + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter + + + Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. + + + + + Option +Alt + + + Press the Option +Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. + + + + + Option +Alt+ click on an object + + + Selects the object behind the currently selected object. + + + + + Option +Alt+Shift+click an object + + + Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. + + + + + Shift key while selecting an object + + + Adds or removes object to or from the selection. + + + + + Shift+ drag while moving an object + + + The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. + + + + + Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object + + + Constrains the size to keep the object's aspect ratio. + + + + + Tab + + + Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. + + + + + Esc + + + Exits current mode. + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c0f5ebe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Arranging, Aligning and Distributing Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/align_arrange.xhp + + + +Arranging, Aligning and Distributing Objects + +arranging; objects (guide) +objects;aligning +distributing draw objects +aligning;draw objects + +Arranging Objects +Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. To re-arrange the stacking order of a selected object, proceed as follows. + + +Click the object whose position you want to change. + + +Choose Shape - Arrange to bring up the context menu and choose one of the arrange options: + +Bring to Front places the object on top of all other objects + +Bring Forward places the object one place forward in the stack of objects + +Send Backward places the object one place back in the stack of objects + +Send to Back places the object behind all other objects + +Behind Object places the object behind another object that you select + + +Arranging an Object Behind Another Object + + +Click the object whose position you want to change. + + +Choose Shape - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Behind Object. The mouse pointer changes to a hand. + + +Click the object behind which you want to place the selected object. + + +Reversing The Stacking Order of Two Objects + + +Shift-click both objects to select them. + + +Choose Shape - Arrange to open the context menu and choose Reverse. + + +Aligning Objects +The Alignment function enables you to align objects relative to each other or relative to the page. + + +Select an object to align it to the page or select multiple objects to align them relative to each other. + + +Choose Shape - Align Objects and select one of the alignment options. + + +Distributing Objects +If you select three or more objects in Draw, you can also use the Distribute selection command to distribute the vertical and horizontal spacing evenly between the objects. + + +Select three or more objects to be distributed. + + +Choose Shape - Distribution. + + +Select the horizontal and vertical distribution option and click OK. + + +Selected objects are distributed evenly along the horizontal or vertical axis. The two outermost objects are used as reference points and do not move when the Distribution command is applied. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..916805253 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Custom Colors + /text/sdraw/guide/color_define.xhp + + + + + colors; defining + user-defined colors + custom colors + + Defining Custom Colors + Define custom colors and add them to the Custom color palette. + To define a custom color + + + Choose Format - Area, click the Area tab and press the Color button. A table of the predefined palette colors is displayed. + Custom colors are saved in the Custom color palette. + + + Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to define. You can select the similar color from any of the available color palettes in the Colors area on the left or the Recent colors in the list below the color table. The color appears in the New preview box to the right of the dialog. + + + Click the Pick button to open the Pick a Color dialog. + %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The RGB values of the selected color are displayed below the preview boxes. + + + Press the Add button to add the custom color to the Custom color palette. A dialog box asking to enter a color name appears. Enter a unique name for the new color within all color names existing in the Custom color palette. + + + To remove a color from the Custom color palette, select the Custom color palette in the Colors area, select the color to be deleted and click Delete. +
+ + Color bar +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0577c3ace --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes +/text/sdraw/guide/combine_etc.xhp + + + + + + +combining; draw objects +merging; draw objects +connecting; draw objects +draw objects; combining +intersecting draw objects +polygons; intersecting/subtracting/merging +subtracting polygons +constructing shapes + + Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes + + Combined drawing objects act as grouped objects, except that you cannot enter the group to edit the individual objects. + You can only combine 2D objects. + To combine 2D objects: + + + Select two or more 2D objects. + + + Choose Shape - Combine. + + + Unlike groups, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost. + When you combine objects, holes appear where the objects overlap. + + + + + +Illustration for combining objects + + + +
+ In the illustration, the uncombined objects are on the left and the combined objects on the right. + Constructing Shapes + You can construct shapes by applying the Shapes - Merge, Subtract and Intersect commands to two or more drawing objects. + Shape commands only work on 2D objects. + Constructed shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + To construct a shape: + + + Select two or more 2D objects. + + + Choose Shape and one of the following: + + + + + Merge + + + Subtract + + + Intersect. + + + Shape Commands + In the following illustrations, the original objects are on the left and the modified shapes on the right. + Shapes - Merge + + + + + +Illustration for merging shapes + + + +
+ Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + Shapes - Subtract + + + + + +Illustration for subtracting shapes + + + +
+ Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + Shapes - Intersect + + + + + +Illustration for intersecting shapes + + + +
+ The overlapping area of the selected objects creates the new shape. + The area outside the overlap is removed. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6eba50910 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Cross-Fading Two Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/cross_fading.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +draw objects; cross-fading two objects +cross-fading; two draw objects + +Cross-Fading Two Objects + +Cross-fading creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. +The cross-fading command is only available in $[officename] Draw. You can, however, copy and paste cross-faded objects into $[officename] Impress. +To cross-fade two objects: + + +Hold down Shift and click each object. + + +Choose Shape - Cross-fading. + + +Enter a value to specify the number of objects between the start and end of the cross-fade in the Increments box. + + +Click OK. + + +A group containing the two original objects and the specified number (increments) of cross-faded objects is displayed. + + + + +Illustration for crossfading + + + +You can edit the individual objects of a group by selecting the group and pressing F3. Press CommandCtrl+F3 to exit the group editing mode. + + +
+
+ +Editing - Cross-fading +
+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a80eba152 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Drawing Sectors and Segments +/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sectors of circles/ellipses +segments of circles/ellipses +circle segments +ellipses; segments +drawing; sectors and segments + +Drawing Sectors and Segments + +The Ellipse toolbar contains tools for drawing ellipses and circles. You can also draw segments and sectors of circles and ellipses. +To draw a sector of a circle or an ellipse: + + +Open the Ellipses toolbar and click one of the Circle Pie or Ellipse Pie icons +Icon + . The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair with a small icon of a sector. + + +Position the pointer at the edge of the circle you want to draw and drag to create the circle. +To create a circle by dragging from the center, press OptionAlt while dragging. + + +Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the size you want. A line corresponding to the circle radius appears in the circle. + + +Position the pointer where you want to place the first boundary of the sector and click. +As the radius line that follows the pointer is constrained to the circle boundaries, you can click anywhere in the document. + + +Position the pointer where you want to place the second boundary of the sector and click. The completed sector is displayed. + + +To draw a segment of a circle or ellipse, follow the steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +To draw an arc based on an ellipse, choose one of the arc icons and follow the same steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b68b36347 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Duplicating Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +doubling draw objects +draw objects; duplicating +duplicating draw objects +multiplying draw objects + +Duplicating Objects + +You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object. The copies can be identical or can differ in size, color, orientation and location. +The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse. + + +Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse. + + +Select the ellipse and choose Edit - Duplicate. + + +Enter 12 as Number of copies. + + + +Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the stack. + + +To define a color transition for the coins, select different colors in the Start and End boxes. The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating. + + +Click OK to create the duplicates. + + +
+Edit - Duplicate + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..057503c26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Replacing Colors +/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp + + + +eyedropper tool +colors; replacing +replacing;colors in bitmaps +metafiles;replacing colors +bitmaps;replacing colors +GIF images;replacing colors + +Replacing Colors + +You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Color Replacer tool. +Up to four colors can be replaced at once. +You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color. +Similarly, you can use the Color Replacer to make a color on your image transparent. +To replace colors with the Color Replacer tool +Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap (for example, BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG) or a metafile (for example, WMF). + + +Choose Tools - Color Replacer. + + +Click the Color Replacer icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image. The color appears in the box next to the icon. + + +Click the color in the image. The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected. + + +In the Replace with box, select the new color. +This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image. + + + + +If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open, select the check box in front of Source color in the next row and repeat steps 3 to 5. + + +Click Replace. + + +If you want to expand or contract the color selection area, increase or decrease the tolerance of the Color Replacer tool and repeat your selection. +
+ +Color Replacer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9709abcd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Creating Gradient Fills +/text/sdraw/guide/gradient.xhp + + + + + + +gradients; applying and defining +editing;gradients +defining;gradients +custom gradients +transparency;adjusting + + mw deleted "applying;" + Creating Gradient Fills + + A gradient fill is an incremental blend of two different colors, or shades of the same color, that you can apply to a drawing object. + To apply a gradient: + + + Select a drawing object. + + + Choose Format - Area and select Gradient as the Fill type. + + + Select a gradient style from the list and click OK. + + + Creating Custom Gradients + You can define your own gradients and modify existing gradients, as well as save and load a list of gradient files. + To create a custom gradient: + + + Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. + + + Select a gradient from the list to use as the basis for your new gradient and click Add. + + + Type a name for the gradient in the text box and click OK. + The name appears at the end of the gradient list and is selected for editing. + + + Set the gradient properties and click Modify to save the gradient. + + + Click OK. + + + Using Gradients and Transparency + You can adjust the properties of a gradient as well as the transparency of a drawing object with your mouse. + To adjust the gradient of a drawing object: + + + Select a drawing object with the gradient that you want to modify. + + + Choose Format - Area and click the Gradients tab. + + + Adjust the values for the gradient to suit your needs and click OK. + + + To adjust the transparency of an object, select the object, choose Format - Area and click the Transparency tab. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e7e56e337 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics +/text/sdraw/guide/graphic_insert.xhp + + + +pictures; inserting +images; inserting +files; inserting pictures +inserting;pictures + +Inserting Pictures + + + +Choose Insert - Image. + + +Locate the image you want to insert. Select the Link check box to insert only a link to the image. If you want to see the image before you insert it, select Preview. +After you insert a linked image, do not change the name of the source image or move the source image to another directory. + + +Click Open to insert the image. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1f7ac3c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Grouping Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/groups.xhp + + + +grouping; draw objects +draw objects; grouping +mw deleted "groups;entering" and copied "selecting;group objects" to the new shared guide groups.xhp.Grouping Objects + +You can combine several objects into a group so that they act as a single object. You can move and transform all objects in a group as a single unit. You can also change the properties (for example, line size, fill color) of all objects in a group as a whole or for individual objects in a group. Groups can be temporary or assigned: + + +Temporary - group only lasts as long as all of the combined objects are selected. + + +Assigned - group lasts until it is ungrouped through a menu command. + + +Groups can also be grouped in other groups. Actions applied to a group do not affect the relative position of the individual objects to each other in the group. +To group objects: + + + + +Icon + + + +Select the objects you want to group and choose Shape - Group - Group. + + +
+For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. +After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. +Selecting Objects in a Group + + + + +Icon + + + +You can select single objects in a group by entering the group. Double-click a group to enter it and click on the object to select it. You can also add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. The objects that are not part of the group are grayed out. + + +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +To exit a group, double-click anywhere outside it. + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd81b4d69 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Connecting Lines +/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +draw objects; connecting lines to +connecting; lines +lines; connecting objects +areas; from connected lines + +Connecting Lines + +When you connect lines, lines are drawn between neighboring endpoints. +To connect lines: + + +Select two or more lines. + + +Right-click and choose Shape - Connect. + + +To create a closed object, right-click a line and choose Close Object. +You can only use the Close Object command on connected lines, Freeform Lines and unfilled Curves. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1fe37eaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Assembling 3D Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/join_objects3d.xhp + + + +3D objects; assembling +assembled objects in 3D +combining;3D objects +joining;3D objects + + +Assembling 3D Objects + +3D objects that each form a 3D scene can be combined into a single 3D scene. +To combine 3D objects: + + +Insert a 3D object from the 3D Objects toolbar (for example, a cube). + + +Insert a second slightly larger 3D object (for example, a sphere). + + +Select the second 3D object (sphere) and choose Edit - Cut. + + +Double-click the first object (cube) to enter its group. + + +Choose Edit - Paste. Both objects are now part of the same group. If you want, you can edit the individual objects or change their position within the group. + + +Double-click outside the group to exit the group. + + +You cannot intersect or subtract 3D objects. +
+Objects in 3D + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb162bbfb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME Draw +draw objects; text entry mode +text entry mode for draw objects + +Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects + +You can create and edit drawing objects using the keyboard. + +
+To Create and Edit a Drawing Object + + +Press F6 to navigate to the Drawing bar. + + +Press the Right arrow key until you reach the toolbar icon of a drawing tool. + + +If there is an arrow next to the icon, the drawing tool opens a sub toolbar. Press the Up or Down arrow key to open the sub toolbar, then press the Right or Left key to select an icon. + + +Press CommandCtrl+Enter. +The object is created at the center of the current document. + + +To return to the document, press CommandCtrl+F6. +You can use the arrow keys to position the object where you want. To choose a command from the context menu for the object, press Shift+F10. + + +To Select an Object + + +Press CommandCtrl+F6 to enter the document. + + +Press Tab until you reach the object you want to select. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6367baa2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Moving Objects to a Different Layer +/text/sdraw/guide/layer_move.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +objects; moving in layers +layers; moving objects +moving; between layers + +Moving Objects to a Different Layer + +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. + + +Click and hold the object until its edges flash. + + +Drag the object to the name tab of the layer you want to move it to. + + +Release the object. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..042cdc75d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Layers +/text/sdraw/guide/layer_new.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +layers; inserting and editing +inserting; layers +changing;layer properties +MW changed "modifying;..." to "changing;..." +Inserting Layers + +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. + + +Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom. + + +Choose Insert Layer. + + +Type a name for the layer in the Name box. + + +In the Properties area, set the options for the layer. + + +Click OK. The new layer automatically becomes the active layer. + + +To change the properties of a layer, click the name tab of the layer, and then choose Format - Layer. +You cannot change the name of or delete a predefined %PRODUCTNAME Draw layer. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3db00b810 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + +Working With Layers +/text/sdraw/guide/layer_tipps.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +layers;working with +locking layers +hiding;layers +unlocking layers +showing;hidden layers +selecting;layers + +Working With Layers + +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. +Selecting a layer +To select a layer, click the name tab of the layer at the bottom of the workspace. +To edit the properties of a layer, double-click a layer tab. +Hiding layers + + +Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. + + +In the Properties area, clear the Visible check box. + + +Click OK. + + +In the name tab of the layer, the text color of the name changes to blue. +You can make a layer visible or invisible by clicking on its tab while holding down the Shift key. +Showing hidden layers + + +Select a hidden layer, and then choose Format - Layer. + + +In the Properties area, select the Visible check box. + + +Click OK. + + +Locking layers + + +Select a layer, and then choose Format - Layer. + + +In the Properties area, select the Locked check box. + + +Click OK. + + +You cannot edit objects on a locked layer. +Unlocking layers + + +Select a locked layer, and then choose Format - Layer. + + +In the Properties area, clear the Locked check box. + + +Click OK. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46e0fd9dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +About Layers +/text/sdraw/guide/layers.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +layers; definition + +About Layers + +Layers allow you to assemble elements on a page that are related. Think of layers as individual workspaces that you can hide from view, hide from printing, or lock. +Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on your page, except for the Controls layer which is always in front of other layers. +The stacking order of objects on your page is determined by the sequence in which you add the objects. You can rearrange the stacking order by Shape - Arrange. +The areas on a layer that do not contain objects are transparent. +$[officename] Draw provides three default layers: + + +Layout + + +Controls + + +Dimension Lines + + +You cannot delete or rename the default layers. You can add your own layers by Insert - Layer. +The Layout layer is the default workspace. The Layout layer determines the location of title, text, and object placeholders on your page. +The Controls layer can be used for buttons that have been assigned an action, but that should not be printed. Set the layer's properties to not printable. Objects on the Controls layer are always in front of objects on other layers. +The Dimension Lines layer is where you draw, for example, the dimension lines. By switching the layer to show or hide, you can easily switch these lines on and off. +You can lock a layer to protect its contents, or hide a layer and its contents from view or from printing. When you add a new layer to a page, the layer is added to all of the pages in your document. However, when you add an object to a layer, it is only added to the current page. If you want the object to appear on all of the pages, add the object to the master page (View - Master). +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b7558edf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw +/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp + + + +Draw instructions +instructions; $[officename] Draw +Howtos for Draw +MW added an entry +Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw + + +Editing and Grouping Objects + + + + + + + + + +Editing Colors and Textures + + + +Editing Text + + +Working with Layers + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba2e54572 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rotating Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp + + + +rotating; draw objects +draw objects; rotating +pivot points of draw objects +skewing draw objects + +Rotating Objects + +You can rotate an object around its default pivot point (center point) or a pivot point that you designate. + + + + +Icon + + + +Select the object you want to rotate. On the Transformations toolbar in $[officename] Draw or on the Drawing bar in $[officename] Impress, click the Rotate icon. + + +
+ +Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol. Drag the handle to rotate the object. +Hold down the Shift key to restrict the rotation to multiples of 15 degrees. +Right-click the object to open the context menu. Choose Position and Size - Rotation to enter an exact rotation value. + + + + +Icon + + + +
+ +To change the pivot point, drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location. +To skew the object vertically or horizontally, drag one of the side handles. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ca2e7f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adding Text + /text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp + + + + +text box +inserting;text box +copying;text from other documents +pasting;text from other documents +legends; drawings +mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +

Adding Text +

+ There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: + + + Text in a text box + + + Text that changes character size to fill the frame size + + + Text that is added to any drawing object by double-clicking the object + + + Text that is copied from a Writer document + + + Text that is inserted from a text document or HTML document + + +

Adding a Text Box

+ + + Click the Text icon +Icon + and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text box. + + + Drag a text box to the size you want in your document. + + + Type or paste your text into the text box. + + + Double-click the text to edit it or to format text properties, such as font size or font color. Click the border of the text box to edit the object properties, such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects. +

Fitting Text to Frames

+ + + Create a text box as described in the steps above. + + + With the text object selected, choose Format - Text. The Text dialog opens. + + + On the Text tab page, clear the Fit height to text checkbox, then select the Fit to frame checkbox. Click OK. + + + Now you can resize the text box to change the size and shape of the text characters. + + +

Text Tied to a Graphic

+ You can add text to any graphic after double-clicking the graphic. + To determine the position of the text, use the settings in Format - Text.this is the Draw command. In Writer it is Format - Object - Text attributes. + + + For example, click the arrow next to the Callouts icon +Icon + to open the Callouts toolbar. + + + Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you want the callout to start. + + + Drag to draw the callout. + + + Enter the text. + + +

Copying Text

+ + + Select the text in your Writer document. + + + Copy the text to the clipboard (Edit - Copy). + + + Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text. + + + Paste the text using Edit - Paste or Edit - Paste special. + Using Paste special, you can choose the text format to be pasted. Depending on formats, you can copy different text attributes.UFI: added an emph tag, see #60923 + + +

Importing Text

+ + + Click the page or slide where you want to import the text. + + + Choose Insert - File. + + + Select a text file (*.txt) or an HTML file and click Insert. The Insert Text dialog opens. Click OK to insert the text. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..911d45ba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Draw Help +/text/sdraw/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Welcome to the $[officename] Draw Help + + How to Work With $[officename] Draw + + + $[officename] Draw Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b76daa8b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Menus +/text/sdraw/main0100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9187cfc6e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + File + /text/sdraw/main0101.xhp + + + +
+ File + This menu contains general commands for working with Draw documents, such as open, close and print. To close $[officename] Draw, click Exit. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bb129b57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + View (menu in Draw) + /text/sdraw/main0103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +

View

+Sets the display properties of Draw documents. +
+ +

Normal

+Switch to normal view of the page. +

Master

+Switch to the master view. +

User Interface

+Opens dialog box for selecting layout of user interface. + + + + + + +

Comments

+Show or hide annotations on the page. + + + + + + + +

Shift

+Use to shift the position of the page in the window. When enabled, the appearance of the mouse pointer changes. Click the page and drag to desired position. +

Zoom

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bc13c5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/sdraw/main0200.xhp + + + +
+

Toolbars +

+This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Draw. +
+ + +
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a0560d4c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Line and Filling Bar +/text/sdraw/main0202.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Line and Filling Bar +The Line and Filling bar contains commands for the current editing mode. +
+ + + + + + +Line Style + + +Line Width + + +Line Color + + + + +Area Style / Filling + + +ShadowUFI: inserted Shadow header and link + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b14b5c41 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Drawing Bar +/text/sdraw/main0210.xhp + + + +
+

Drawing Bar

+The Drawing bar holds the main drawing tools. +
+ + +

Rectangle

+Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + +

Ellipse

+Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + +

Text

+Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. + + + + +

Lines and Arrows

+Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Points

+Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +

Gluepoints

+Enables you to edit gluepoints on your drawing. + + + + + + + +

From File

+ + + + +

Form Controls

+ + +

Extrusion On/Off

+Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38f2ae5c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Options Bar +/text/sdraw/main0213.xhp + + + +
+

Options Bar

+The Options bar can be displayed by choosing View - Toolbars - Options. +
+
+ +
UFI: changed some links, see #i52549 + +

Display Grid

+ + + + +

Helplines While Moving

+ + +
+

Snap to Grid

+ + +

Snap to Snap Guides

+ + +
+
+

Snap to Page Margins

+ + +
+
+

Snap to Object Border

+ + +

Snap to Object Points

+ + +
+

Allow Quick Editing

+ + +

Select Text Area Only

+ + + + + +removed 4 icons, see i81634 + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be136d402 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Draw Features +/text/sdraw/main0503.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ $[officename] Draw Features + $[officename] Draw lets you create simple and complex drawings and export them in a number of common image formats. You can also insert tables, charts, formulas and other items created in $[officename] programs into your drawings. +
+ Vector Graphics + $[officename] Draw creates vector graphics using lines and curves defined by mathematical vectors. Vectors describe lines, ellipses, and polygons according to their geometry. + Creating 3D Objects + You can create simple 3D objects such as cubes, spheres, and cylinders in $[officename] Draw and even modify the light source of the objects. + Grids and Snap Lines + Grids and snap lines provide a visual cue to help you align objects in your drawing. You can also choose to snap an object to a grid line, snap line or to the edge of another object. + Connecting Objects to Show Relationships + You can connect objects in $[officename] Draw with special lines called "connectors" to show the relationship between objects. Connectors attach to gluepoints on drawing objects and remain attached when the connected objects are moved. Connectors are useful for creating organization charts and technical diagrams. + Displaying Dimensions + Technical diagrams often show the dimensions of objects in the drawing. In $[officename] Draw, you can use dimension lines to calculate and display linear dimensions. + Gallery + The Gallery contains images, animations, sounds and other items that you can insert and use in your drawings as well as other $[officename] programs. + Graphic File Formats + $[officename] Draw can export to many common graphic file formats, such as BMP, GIF, JPG, and PNG. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63e35c6af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit +/text/sdraw/main_edit.xhp + + + +
+

Edit

+The commands in this menu are used to edit Draw documents (for example, copying and pasting). +
+ + + + + + + +

Find & Replace

+ +

Points

+Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +

Gluepoints

+Enables you to edit gluepoints on your drawing. +

Duplicate

+ +

Cross-fading

+ +

Fields

+ +UFI removed Layer command (as I did in zillion CWSs before...) +

Links

+ + +

Hyperlink

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb14055b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Format +/text/sdraw/main_format.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Format +Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. +
+ + + +Character + +Paragraph + +Bullets and Numbering + +Position and Size + +Line + +Area + +Text Attributes + +

Layer

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcee2b629 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Insert + /text/sdraw/main_insert.xhp + + + +
+

Insert

+ This menu allows you to insert elements, such as graphics and guides, into Draw documents. +
+ + + +

Table

+ + + +

Insert Snap Point/Line

+ +

Layer

+ +

Text Box

+ Insert a text box +

Comment

+ +

Floating Frame

+ +

FontWork

+ +

Hyperlink

+ +

Special Character

+ + +

Page Number

+ Insert a text box with the current page number. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e33da0c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Page + /text/sdraw/main_page.xhp + + + + + +
+ +

Page

+This menu provides drawing page management and navigation commands. +
+ + + + + + + + +

Properties

+ + + +

New Master

+

Delete Master

+

Master background

+

Master Objects

+

Master Elements

+

Move

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..304a7da29 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + Shape + /text/sdraw/main_shape.xhp + + + +
+ +

Shape

+ This menu provides shape objects management. + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bd12cdbe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Tools +/text/sdraw/main_tools.xhp + + + +
+Tools +This menu provides tools for $[officename] Draw as well as access to language and system settings. +
+ + + +ImageMap + + + + + + +AutoCorrect Options + +Customize + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c98becce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + + + + + Frequently-Used Buttons + /text/shared/00/00000001.xhp + + + +

Frequently-Used Buttons

+
+ + + + + + + + + +

Cancel

+ Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made. +
+ +
+ + +

Finish

+ Applies all changes and closes the wizard. +
+ +
+

Toolbars

+ By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name). +
+
+

Spin button

+
+ + + In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. + + + In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. + + +You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the Up Arrow or Down Arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. +If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2". +
+
+
+

Convert

+ If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button. +
+
+

Context Menu

+To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the +left mouse button to select it, and then, while holding down the Ctrl key or the Command and Option keys, click the mouse button again + click the right mouse button. Some context menus can be called even if the object has not been selected. Context menus are found just about everywhere in $[officename]. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation. +
+
+ + + + + + + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. +
+

Metrics

+ You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1 cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value. +
+

Close

+ Closes the dialog and saves all changes. +
+
+

Close

+ Closes the dialog. +
+
+ +

Apply

+ Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style, Frame Style, and Page Style. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style and Character Style. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shrink / Expand

+ Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Expand icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. + The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. + + + + Icon shrink + + + Shrink + + + + + Icon Expand + + + Expand + + +
+
+
+ + + + + +

Preview Field

+ Displays a preview of the current selection. +
+
+

Preview

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +

Next

+ Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create. +
+
+ +

Dialog Buttons

+

Reset

+ Resets modified values back to the tab page previous values. + +
+

Cancel

+ Closes dialog and discards all changes. +
+ +
+

OK

+ Saves all changes and closes dialog. +
+
+
+ +

Resetin Tools - Options

+ Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. +
+
+ +

Resetall tab dialogs

+ Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog. +
+
+ + + +

StandardUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts

+ Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. + A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded. +
+
+

Cancel

+Closes dialog and discards changes on all tabs. If Apply was used, then changes after the last use of Apply are discarded. +
+
+

Reset

+Resets modified values on the current tab back to the values when the dialog was opened. If Apply is used before closing the dialog, then values are reset to those after the last use of Apply. +
+
+

Apply

+Applies modifications on all tabs without closing dialog. Cannot be reverted with Reset. +
+
+

Reset to Parent

+Values for the current tab are set to those found in the corresponding tab of the style specified in “Inherit from” in Organizer. In all cases, also when “Inherit from” is “- None -”, current tab values specified in “Contains” are removed. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style, Character Style, and Frame Style. +
+
+ + + + + + + + +

Back

+ View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on. +
+
+ +

Options

+ Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog. +
+See also the following functions: +
+ The search supports wildcards or regular expressions. With regular expressions enabled, you can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must either precede every character with a "\" character, or enclose the text into \Q...\E. You can switch the automatic evaluation of wildcards or regular expression on and off in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. +
+ When using functions where one or more arguments are search criteria strings that represents a regular expression, the first attempt is to convert the string criteria to numbers. For example, ".0" will convert to 0.0 and so on. If successful, the match will not be a regular expression match but a numeric match. However, when switching to a locale where the decimal separator is not the dot makes the regular expression conversion work. To force the evaluation of the regular expression instead of a numeric expression, use some expression that can not be misread as numeric, such as ".[0]" or ".\0" or "(?i).0". +
+
+If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. +(This command is only accessible through the context menu). +By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. +Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. +
+

Options dialog buttons

+

OK

+Save the changes in the page and close the Options dialog. +

Cancel

+Close the Options dialog and discard all changes done. +

Apply

+Applies the modified or selected values without closing the Options dialog. + +
+Some options cannot be reset once edited. Either edit back the changes manually or click Cancel and reopen the Options dialog. +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cfbc9b60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ + + + + + + + Glossary of Internet Terms + /text/shared/00/00000002.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Internet glossary + common terms;Internet glossary + glossaries;Internet terms + terminology;Internet glossary + +mw changed "Internet...". + +

Glossary of Internet Terms

+If you are a newcomer to the Internet, you will be confronted with unfamiliar terms: browser, bookmark, email, homepage, search engine, and many others. To make your first steps easier, this glossary explains some of the more important terminology you may find in the Internet, intranet, mail and news. +
+ + +
+ +

CMIS

+The Content Management Interoperability Services (CMIS) standard defines a domain model and Web Services and Restful AtomPub bindings that will enable greater interoperability of Enterprise Content Management (ECM) systems. CMIS uses Web services and Web 2.0 interfaces to enable rich information to be shared across Internet protocols in vendor-neutral formats, among document systems, publishers and repositories, within one enterprise and between companies. +
+ +
+

EPUB

+ EPUB is standard for electronic book files with the extension .epub that can be downloaded and read on devices like smartphones, tablets, computers, or e-readers. + EPUB is a technical standard published now by the Publishing group of W3C. EPUB is a popular format because it is open and is based on HTML. + An EPUB publication is delivered as a single file and is an unencrypted zipped archive containing a website. It includes HTML files, images, CSS style sheets, and other assets such as metadata, multimedia and interactivity. +
+ +
+ +

WebDAV

+Short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning, an IETF standard set of platform-independent extensions to HTTP that allows users to collaboratively edit and manage files on remote Web servers. WebDAV features XML properties on metadata, locking - which prevents authors from overwriting each other's changes - namespace manipulation and remote file management. WebDav is sometimes referred to as DAV. +
+ +
+ +

Frames

+Frames are useful for designing the layout of HTML pages. $[officename] uses floating frames into which you can place objects such as graphics, movie files and sound. The context menu of a frame shows the options for restoring or editing frame contents. Some of these commands are also listed in Edit - Object when the frame is selected. +
+ +
+ +

FTP

+FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol and is the standard transfer protocol for files in the Internet. An FTP server is a program on a computer connected to the Internet which stores files to be transmitted with the aid of FTP. While FTP is responsible for transmitting and downloading Internet files, HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) provides the connection setup and data transfer between WWW servers and clients. +
+ +
+ + HTML; definition + + + +

HTML

+HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is a document code language, which is used as the file format for WWW documents. It is derived from SGML and integrates text, graphics, videos and sound. +If you want to type HTML commands directly, for example when doing exercises from one of the many available HTML books, remember that HTML pages are pure text files. Save your document under the document type Text and give it the file name extension .HTML. Be sure there are no umlauts or other special characters of the extended character set. If you want to re-open this file in $[officename] and edit the HTML code, you must load it with the file type Text and not with the file type Web pages. +There are several references on the Internet providing an introduction to the HTML language. +
+ +
+ +

HTTP

+The Hypertext Transfer Protocol is a record of transmission of WWW documents between WWW servers (hosts) and browsers (clients). +
+ + + +
+ + ImageMap; definition + + + +

ImageMap

+An ImageMap is a reference-sensitive graphic or frame. You can click on defined areas of the graphic or frame to go to a target (URL), which is linked with the area. The reference areas, along with the linked URLs and corresponding text displayed when resting the mouse pointer on these areas, are defined in the ImageMap Editor. +There are two different types of ImageMaps. A Client Side ImageMap is evaluated on the client computer, which loaded the graphic from the Internet, while a Server Side ImageMap is evaluated on the server computer which provides the HTML page on the Internet. In server evaluation, clicking an ImageMap sends the relative coordinates of the cursor within the image to the server, and a dedicated program on the server responds. In the client evaluation, clicking a defined hotspot of the ImageMap activates the URL, as if it were a normal text link. The URL appears below the mouse pointer when passing across the ImageMap. +As ImageMaps can be used in different ways, they can be stored in different formats. + +

ImageMap Formats

+ImageMaps are basically divided between those that are analyzed on the server (i. e. your Internet provider) and those analyzed on the web browser of the reader's computer. +
+ +
+ + Server Side ImageMap + + + +

Server Side ImageMaps

+Server Side ImageMaps appear for the reader as a picture or frame on the page. Click on the ImageMap with the mouse, and the coordinates of the relative position are sent to the server. Aided by an extra program, the server then determines the next step to take. There are several incompatible methods to define this process, the two most common being: + + + + W3C (CERN) HTTP Server (Format type: MAP - CERN) + + + NCSA HTTP Server (Format type: MAP - NCSA) + +$[officename] creates ImageMaps for both methods. Select the format from the File type list in the Save As dialog in the ImageMap Editor. Separate Map Files are created which you must upload to the server. You will need to ask your provider or network administrator which type of ImageMaps are supported by the server and how to access the evaluation program. +
+ +
+ + Client Side ImageMap + + + +

Client Side ImageMap

+The area of the picture or frame where the reader can click is indicated by the appearance of the linked URL when the mouse passes over the area. The ImageMap is stored in a layer below the picture and contains information about the referenced regions. The only disadvantage of Client Side ImageMaps is that older Web browsers cannot read them; a disadvantage that will, however, resolve itself in time. +When saving the ImageMap, select the file type SIP - StarView ImageMap. This saves the ImageMap directly in a format which can be applied to every active picture or frame in your document. However, if you just want to use the ImageMap on the current picture or frame, you do not have to save it in any special format. After defining the regions, simply click Apply. Nothing more is necessary. Client Side ImageMaps saved in HTML format are inserted directly into the page in HTML code. +
+ +
+ + Java; definition + + + +

Java

+The Java programming language is a platform independent programming language that is especially suited for use in the Internet. Web pages and applications programmed with Java class files can be used on all modern operating systems. Programs using Java programming language are usually developed in a Java development environment and then compiled to a "byte code". +
+ +
+ +

Proxy

+A proxy is a computer in the network acting as a kind of clipboard for data transfer. Whenever you access the Internet from a company network and request a Web page that has already been read by a colleague, the proxy will be able to display the page much quicker, as long as it's still in the memory. All that has to be checked in this case is that the page stored in the proxy is the latest version. If this is the case, the page won't have to be downloaded from the much slower Internet but can be loaded directly from the proxy. +
+ +
+ + SGML; definition + + + +

SGML

+SGML stands for "Standard Generalized Markup Language". SGML is based on the idea that documents have structural and other semantic elements that can be described without reference to how such elements should be displayed. The actual display of such a document may vary, depending on the output medium and style preferences. In structured texts, SGML not only defines structures (in the DTD = Document Type Definition) but also ensures they are consistently used. +HTML is a specialized application of SGML. This means that most Web browsers support only a limited range of SGML standards and that almost all SGML-enabled systems can produce attractive HTML pages. +
+ +
+ + search engines; definition + + + +

Search Engines

+A search engine is a service in the Internet based on a software program used to explore a vast amount of information using key words. +
+ +
+ + tags; definition + + + +

Tags

+HTML pages contain certain structural and formatting instructions called tags. Tags are code words enclosed by brackets in the document description language HTML. Many tags contain text or hyperlink references between the opening and closing brackets. For example, titles are marked by the tags <h1> at the beginning and </h1> at the end of the title. Some tags only appear on their own such as <br> for a line break or <img ...> to link a graphic. +
+ +
+ + URL; definition + + + +

URL

+The Uniform Resource Locator (URL) displays the address of a document or a server in the Internet. The general structure of a URL varies according to type and is generally in the form Service://Hostname:Port/Path/Page#Mark although not all elements are always required. An URL can be a FTP address, a WWW (HTTP) address, a file address or an email address. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5dc2f71a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + +Conversion of measurement units +/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+measurement units; converting +units; converting +converting;metrics +metrics;converting + +Conversion of measurement units +In some dialogs, you can enter measurement values into input boxes. If you just enter a numerical value, the default measurement unit is used. +You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. +In input boxes for length units you can also add the unit abbreviation according to the following list: + + + +Unit abbreviation + + +Explanation + + + + +mm + + +Millimeter + + + + +cm + + +Centimeter + + + + +in or ″ + + +Inch + + + + +pi + + +Pica + + + + +pt + + +Point + + +
+ +The following formulas convert the units: + + +1 cm = 10 mm + + +1 inch = 2.54 cm + + +1 inch = 6 Pica = 72 Point + + +For example, in a text document, open Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. To indent the current paragraph by one inch, enter 1 in or 1" into the "Before text" box. To indent the paragraph by 1 cm, enter 1 cm into the input box. +To input the maximum or minimum allowed value respectively, click the current value and then press the Page Up or Page Down key. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..797e759ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ + + + + + +To access this command... +/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

To access this command... +

+ +

Open file with example:

+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Font Color + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 1 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 1.5 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 2 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Superscript + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Subscript + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Style + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Color + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Width + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Area Style / Filling + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Top + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Bottom + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Center Vertically + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Cancel + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Up One Level + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Create New Directory + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Up One Level + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Create New Folder + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Go to the previous comment + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Go to the next comment + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Open File + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Save As + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Export Directly as PDF + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb8367579 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + + + + + General Glossary + /text/shared/00/00000005.xhp + + + +
+common terms;glossaries +glossaries;common terms +terminology;general glossary + + mw changed "terminology;glossaries" and deleted one entry +

General Glossary

+ This glossary includes explanations of some of the most important terms you will come across in $[officename]. +
+ Use the glossary to look up unfamiliar terms found in any $[officename] application. + + + +
+ASCII; definition + +

ASCII

+ Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a character set for displaying fonts on personal computers. It consists of 128 characters including letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols. The extended ASCII character set contains 256 characters. Each character has been assigned a unique number, also referred to as ASCII Code. + In HTML pages, only characters from the 7 Bit ASCII character set should appear. Other characters, such as German umlauts, are distinguished by way of a separate code. You can input extended ASCII code characters: the $[officename] export filter performs the necessary conversion. +
+ +
+

Bézier Object

+ Developed by the French mathematician Pierre Bézier, a Bézier curve is a mathematically defined curve used in two-dimensional graphic applications. The curve is defined by four points: the initial position and the terminating position, and two separate middle points. Bézier objects can be modified by moving these points with the mouse. +
+
+ +CTL;definition +complex text layout;definition +complex text layout, see CTL + + MW added a cross reference +

Complex Text Layout (CTL)

+ Languages with complex text layout may have some or all of the following features: + + + The language is written with characters or glyphs that are composed of several parts + + + The text direction is from right to left. + + + Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. + Enable CTL support using %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + +
+
+ +
+
+ +DDE; definition + +

DDE

+ DDE stands for "Dynamic Data Exchange," which is a predecessor of OLE, "Object Linking and Embedding". With DDE, objects are linked through file reference, but not embedded. + You can create a DDE link using the following procedure: Select cells from a Calc spreadsheet, copy them into the clipboard and switch to another spreadsheet and select the Edit - Paste Special dialog. Select the Link option to insert the contents as a DDE link. When activating a link, the inserted cell area will be read from its original file. +
+
+

Direct and Style Formatting

+ A style is a set of formatting attributes, grouped and identified by a name (the style name). When you apply a style to an object, the object is formatted with the set of attributes of the style. Several objects of same nature can have the same style. As consequence, when you change the set of formatting attributes of the style, all objects associated with the style also change their formatting attributes accordingly. Use styles to uniformly format a large set of paragraphs, cells, and objects and better manage the formatting of documents. + When you do not use styles, and apply formatting attributes to parts of text directly, this is called Direct formatting (also called manual formatting). The formatting is applied only to the selected area of the document. If the document has several paragraphs, frames, or any other object, you apply direct formatting on each object. Direct formatting is available with the Format menu and with the Formatting toolbar. + A direct formatting attribute applied on a object overrides the corresponding attribute of the style applied to the object. +
+
+windows; docking definition +docking; definition + +

Docking

+ Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. + + To undock and re-dock, holding down the CommandCtrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the CommandCtrl key. + + +
+
+ +

Docking (AutoHide)

+ On any window edge where another window is docked you will see a button which allows you to show or hide the window.UFI: fix button removed, see spec "Window Splitter" + + + If you click the button on the window edge to show the window, the window will remain visible until you manually hide it again (with the same button). + + + If you show the window by clicking the window border, but not the button, you activate the AutoHide function. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. + + + +
+
+formatting; definition + +

Formatting

+ Formatting refers to the visual layout of text using a word-processing or DTP program. This includes defining the paper format, page borders, fonts and font effects, as well as indents and spacing. You can format text directly or with Styles provided by $[officename]. + +
+ +
+ + half-width;definition + halfwidth;definition + full-width;definition + fullwidth;definition + +

Half-width and Full-width Characters

+ Half-width and full-width are properties used to differentiate characters used by some East Asian languages and scripts, mainly Chinese, Japanese, and Korean (CJK). + The Han characters, Hiragana and Katakana characters, as well as Hangul characters used by these scripts are usually of square shape, and on fixed-width (monospace) display they occupy space of two Latin/ASCII characters. They are therefore called full-width characters, while the letters in Latin alphabet, digits, and punctuation marks included in ASCII character set are called half-width characters. + For historical reasons, a set of square-shaped Latin letters, digits, and punctuation marks are also defined and used in CJK typography, in addition to or in place of their half-width counterparts. They are called full-width forms. Similarly, there are also half-width forms of the usually full-width Katakanas and Hangul Jamos, and they have narrower shapes instead of square ones. A character's half-width and full-width forms are essentially two ways of writing the same character, just like uppercase and lowercase forms of Latin alphabet. $[officename] supports conversion between half-width and full-width, as well as ignoring width difference when matching text strings. +
+ +
+ +IME; definition + +

IME

+ IME stands for Input Method Editor. A program that allows the user to enter complex characters from non-western character sets using a standard keyboard. + +
+
+JDBC; definition +

JDBC

+ You can use the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API to connect to a database from %PRODUCTNAME. JDBC drivers are written in the Java programming language and are platform independent. + +
+
+ +kerning; definition + +

Kerning

+ Kerning means increasing or decreasing the amount of space between pairs of letters to improve the overall appearance of the text. + The kerning tables contain information on which pairs of letters require more spacing. These tables are generally a component of a font. + +
+ +
+ +

Numeral System

+ A numeral system is determined by the number of digits available for representing numbers. The decimal system, for instance is based on the ten digits (0..9), the binary system is based on the two digits 0 and 1, the hexadecimal system is based on 16 digits (0...9 and A...F). + +
+
+ +objects; definition + +

Object

+ An object is a screen element containing data. It can refer to application data, such as text or graphics. + Objects are independent and do not influence each other. Any object containing data can be assigned certain commands. For example, a graphic object has commands for image editing and a spreadsheet contains calculation commands. + +
+
+ +ODBC; definition + +

ODBC

+ Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a protocol norm with which applications can access database systems. The query language used is Structured Query Language (SQL). In $[officename], you can determine for each database whether to use SQL commands to run queries. Alternatively, you can use the interactive help to define your query by mouseclick and have it automatically translated into SQL by $[officename]. + The 32bit ODBC functions required here can be installed on your system at any time with the help of the setup program supplied with your database. You can then amend the properties through the Control Panel. + + +
+
+ +OLE; definition + +

OLE

+ Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects can be linked to a target document or may also be embedded. Embedding inserts a copy of the object and details of the source program in the target document. If you want to edit the object, simply activate the source program by double-clicking on the object. + If an OLE object is linked to a target document, then the target document must be available in the location specified in the link. Deleting or moving the target document will make it impossible to open the linked OLE object. You can use the Save URLs relative to file system option in the General section of Load/Save Options to configure your system to save links relative to your filesystem. + +
+
+ +OpenGL; definition + +

OpenGL

+ OpenGL represents a 3D graphics language, initially developed by SGI (Silicon Graphics Inc). Two dialects of this language are commonly used: Microsoft OpenGL, developed for use under Windows NT, and Cosmo OpenGL made by SGI. The latter represents an independent graphics language for all platforms and all kind of computers, even usable on machines without special 3-D graphics hardware. + +
+
+ +

PNG

+ Portable Network Graphics (PNG) is a graphic file format. The files are compressed with a selectable compression factor, and, as opposed to the JPG format, PNG files are always compressed without any information loss. + +
+
+ +

Primary key

+ A primary key serves as a unique identifier of database fields. The unique identification of database fields is used in relational databases, to access data in other tables. If reference is made to a primary key from another table, this is termed a foreign key. + In $[officename], you define the primary key in the design view of a table, by choosing the relevant command from the context menu of a row header for the selected field. +
+ +
+

Relational Database

+ A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. + A relational database management system (RDBMS) is a program that lets you create, update, and administer a relational database. An RDBMS takes Structured Query Language (SQL) statements entered by a user or contained in an application program and creates, updates, or provides access to the database. + A good example of a relational database can be given with a database containing Customer, Purchase, and Invoice tables. In the Invoice table, there is no actual customer or purchasing data; however, the table contains references through a relational link, or a relation, to the respective customer and purchasing table's fields (for example, the customer ID field from the customer table). +
+ +
+ +register-true; definition +page line-spacing; definition + +

Page line-spacing (register-true)

+ In %PRODUCTNAME, the register-true feature is called Page line-spacing. + Page line-spacing refers to the coincident imprint of the lines within a type area on the front and the back side of a page. The page line-spacing feature makes a page easier to read by preventing gray shadows from shining through between the lines of text. The page line-spacing term also refers to lines in adjacent text columns, where lines in different columns use the same vertical grid, thereby aligning them vertically with each other. + Page line-spacing printing is particularly useful for documents that will have two pages set next to each other (for example, in a book or brochure), for multi-column layouts, and for documents intended for double-sided printing. +
+ +
+

RTF

+ Rich Text Format (RTF) is a file format developed for the exchange of text files. A special feature is that the formatting is converted into directly readable text information. Unfortunately, in comparison to other file formats, this creates relatively large files. +
+ +
+

Saving Relatively and Absolutely

+ In various dialogs (for example, Tools - AutoText) you can select whether you want to save files relatively or absolutely. + If you choose to save relatively, the references to embedded graphics or other objects in your document will be saved relative to the location in the file system. In this case, it does not matter where the referenced directory structure is recorded. The files will be found regardless of location, as long as the reference remains on the same drive or volume. This is important if you want to make the document available to other computers that may have a completely different directory structure, drive or volume names. It is also recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server. + If you prefer absolute saving, all references to other files will also be defined as absolute, based on the respective drive, volume or root directory. The advantage is that the document containing the references can be moved to other directories or folders, and the references remain valid. +
+
+

Focus

+ In a form document, a control must receive focus from the user in order to become active and perform its tasks. For example, users must give focus to a text box in order to enter text into it. + There are several ways to give focus to a control: + + + Designate the control with a mouse or any pointing device. + + + Navigate from one control to the next with the keyboard. The document's author may define a tabbing order that specifies the order in which controls will receive focus if the user navigates the document with the keyboard. Once selected, a control may be activated by some other key sequence. + + + Select a control through an access key (sometimes called "keyboard shortcut" or "keyboard accelerator"). + + +
+
+

Spin button

+ +
+
+SQL;definition + +

SQL

+ Structured Query Language (SQL) is a language used for database queries. In $[officename] you can formulate queries either in SQL or interactively with the mouse. + +
+
+ +

SQL Database / SQL Server

+ An SQL database is a database system which offers an SQL interface. SQL databases are often used in client/server networks in which different clients access a central server (for example, an SQL server), hence they are also called SQL server databases, or SQL servers for short. + In $[officename], you can integrate external SQL databases. These may be located on your local hard disk as well as on the network. Access is achieved through ODBC, JDBC, or a native driver integrated into $[officename]. + +
+
+

Widows and Orphans

+ Widows and orphans are historical typography terms, which have been in use for many years. A widow refers to a short line at the end of a paragraph, which when printed, appears alone at the top of the next page. An orphan is, in contrast, the first line of a paragraph printed alone at the bottom of the previous page. In a $[officename] text document you can automatically prevent such occurrences in the desired Paragraph Style. When doing so, you can determine the minimum amount of lines to be kept together on a page. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d657f88ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Toolbars +Icon on the Tools bar: + +Icon on the Formatting Bar: + +Icon on the Formatting Bar: + +Icon on the Slide View Bar: + +This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for $[officename]. + +
+Asian Language Support +
+These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47887d582 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Context Menus +/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Context Menus

+
+

Cut

+ Cuts out the selected object and stores it on the clipboard. The object can be reinserted from the clipboard by using Paste. +
+
+

Paste

+ Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document. This command can only be called if the contents of the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position. +
+
+

Insert

+ Opens a submenu in the Gallery where you can choose between Copy and Link. The selected Gallery object is either copied into the current document or a link is created. + If you have selected an object in your document, then a new insertion will replace the selected object. +
+

Background

+ Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic. Use the submenu commands Page or Paragraph to define whether the graphic should cover the entire page or only the current paragraph. +
+

Copy

+ Copies the selected element to the clipboard. +
+
+

Delete

+ Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a confirmation question appears before objects are deleted. + The object is either physically deleted from the data carrier or the object display is removed, depending on context. +
+
+ If you choose Delete while in the Gallery, the entry will be deleted from the Gallery, but the file itself will remain untouched. +
+
+

Open

+ Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task. +
+
+

Rename

+ Enables a selected object to be renamed. After selecting Rename the name is selected and a new one can be entered directly. Use the arrow keys to set the cursor at the beginning or end of the name to delete or add to part of the name or to reposition the cursor. +
+
+ + +

Update

+ Updates the view in the window or in the selected object. +
+
+

Preview

+ The element selected is displayed in the Gallery at maximum size. Double-click the preview to switch back to the normal Gallery view. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfc7e4c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Menu Commands +/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp + + + +Menu Commands +
+The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use the menu commands. Similarly, you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object. +The menus are context sensitive. This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out. If the cursor is located in a text, then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text. If you have selected graphics in a document, then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics.removed a para +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fa112daa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +About Import and Export Filters +/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp + + + +import filters +export filters +filters; for import and export +files; filters and formats +formats; on opening and saving +importing; HTML and text documents +exporting;HTML and text documents +text documents; importing/exporting +HTML documents; importing/exporting +UTF-8/UCS2 support +HTML; export character set +PostScript; creating files +exporting;to PostScript format + +

About Import and Export Filters

+In $[officename], apart from its own XML formats you can also open and save many foreign XML formats. +In UNIX, certain file formats cannot be recognized automatically. +$[officename] normally recognizes the correct file type automatically on opening a file. There may be cases where you have to select the file type yourself in the Open dialog. For example, if you have a database table in text format that you want to open as a database table, you need to specify the file type "Text CSV" after selecting the file. +

BASIC Macros in Microsoft Office Documents

+In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. +

Notes regarding external formats and file types

+Even if they are not installed, some filters can be selected in the Open and Save dialogs. If you select such a filter, a message will appear saying that you can still install the filter if you require. +If you want to install additional filters or remove individual filters from the installation, close %PRODUCTNAME, start the Setup program and select the Modify option. Then you will see a dialog in which you can add or remove individual components of %PRODUCTNAME. Graphic filters can be found in "Optional Components". + +

+ + +Importing and Exporting Text Documents

+ + + +$[officename] Writer can read various versions of the Microsoft Word text format. You also can save your own texts in Word format. However, not everything available with $[officename] Writer can be transferred to Word, and not everything can be imported. + + + +Importing is normally not problematic. Even redlining information and controls are imported (and exported) so that $[officename] recognizes inserted or deleted text in Word documents as well as font attributes that have been modified. Different coloring for each author and the time of such changes is also included. When graphic text boxes and labels are imported from templates, most of the attributes are also imported as direct paragraph and drawing attributes. However, some of the attributes may be lost during the import procedure. + + + +It is also possible to import and export RTF files. This file format can be used to exchange formatted texts across various applications and platforms. In this way, many formats read by most programs will be transferred without a problem. The clipboard uses RTF format when you insert part of a spreadsheet from $[officename] Calc through DDE into $[officename] Writer. +The filter Text Encoded helps you open and save text documents with another encoding font. The filter opens a dialog that enables you to select character set, default fonts, language and paragraph break. +

Importing and Exporting in HTML Format

+With $[officename] Writer, you can insert footnotes and endnotes in your HTML document. They are exported as meta tags. The footnote and endnote characters are exported as hyperlinks. +Comments are used to include unknown characters in an HTML document. Every note that begins with "HTML:..." and ends with ">" is treated as an HTML code, but is exported without these designations. Several tags around text can be included after "HTML:..." Accented characters are converted into the ANSI character set. Comments are created during import (for example, for meta tags that have no room in the file properties or unknown tags). +The HTML import of $[officename] Writer is able to read files that have UTF-8 or UCS2 character coding. All characters that are contained in the ANSI character set or in the system's character set can be displayed. +When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. + + If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Mozilla Firefox or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. + + +The "font" property corresponds to Mozilla Firefox; that is, before the font size you can specify optional values for "font-style" (italic, none), "font-variant" (normal, small-caps) and "font-weight" (normal, bold). + + +For example, "Font: bold italic small-caps 12pt/200% Arial, Helvetica" switches to bold, italic, small caps, double-space with the font family Arial or Helvetica, if Arial doesn't exist. + + + + +"Font: 10pt" switches to a 10pt font, with bold, italic, small caps off. + + +If $[officename] Writer are set as the export option, the sizes of the control field and their internal margins are exported as styles (print formats). CSS1 size properties are based on "width" and "height" values. The "Margin" property is used to set equal margins on all sides of the page. To allow different margins, the "Margin-Left", "Margin-Right", "Margin-Top" and "Margin-Bottom" properties are used. +The distances of graphics and Plug-Ins to the content can be set individually for export to $[officename] Writer. If the top/bottom or right/left margin is set differently, the distances are exported in a "STYLE" option for the corresponding tag as CSS1 size properties "Margin-Top", "Margin-Bottom", "Margin-Left" and "Margin-Right". +Frames are supported with the use of CSS1 extensions for absolute positioned objects. This applies only to the export options Mozilla Firefox and $[officename] Writer. Frames can be aligned as graphics, Plug-Ins, +and Floating Frames, but character-linked frames are not possible. +Frames are exported as "<SPAN>" or "<DIV>" tags if they do not contain columns. If they do contain columns then they are exported as "<MULTICOL>". +The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit. + + + +Measurement Unit + + +Measurement Unit Name in CSS1 + + +Maximum Number of Decimal Places + + + + +Millimeter + + +mm + + +2 + + + + +Centimeter + + +cm + + +2 + + + + +Inch + + +in + + +2 + + + + +Pica + + +pc + + +2 + + + + +Point + + +pt + + +1 + + +
+The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. +

Importing and Exporting Numbering

+If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. +A left paragraph indent in numbering is indicated as "margin-left" CSS1 property. First-line indents are ignored in numbering and not exported. +Importing and Exporting Spreadsheet Files +$[officename] imports and exports references to deleted sections such as, for example, a referenced column. The whole formula can be viewed during the export process and the deleted reference contains an indication (#REF!) to the reference. A #REF! will be correspondingly created for the reference during the import. +

Importing and Exporting Graphics Files

+As with HTML documents, you can choose to use a filter with or without the element ($[officename] Impress) in the name to open a $[officename] graphics file. If without, the file will be opened as a $[officename] Draw document. Otherwise, the file saved by an old program version is now opened in $[officename] Impress. +When you import an EPS file, a preview of the graphic is displayed in the document. If a preview is not available, a placeholder corresponding to the size of the graphic is displayed in the document. Under Unix and Microsoft Windows you can print the imported file by using a PostScript printer. +If a different printer is used the preview will be printed. When exporting EPS graphics, a preview is created and has the TIFF or EPSI format. If an EPS graphic together with other graphics is exported in the EPS format then this file will be embedded unchanged in the new file. +Multipage-TIFFs are allowed when graphics are imported or exported in TIFF format. The graphics are retrieved as a set of individual pictures in a single file, for example, the individual pages of a fax. +Some $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress options can be accessed through File - Export. See Graphics Export Options for more information. +

PostScript

+To export a document or graphic in PostScript format: + + +If you have not yet done so, install a PostScript printer driver, such as the Apple LaserWriter driver. + + +Print the document with the File - Print menu command. + + +Select the PostScript printer in the dialog and mark the Print to file check box. A PostScript file will be created. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00d462289 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ + + + + + + + + + XML File Formats + /text/shared/00/00000021.xhp + + + +exporting; XML files + XML file formats + extensions; file formats + suffixes in file formats + document types in $[officename] + file formats; changing $[officename] defaults + defaults;file formats in $[officename] + file formats;OpenDocument/XML + OpenDocument file formats + ODF file formats +mw changed "file formats;OpenDocument." entry and deleted "file formats;XML". MW made "document types;..." a one level entrymw changed "defaults;..." + +XML File Formats + + By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format. + The OpenDocument file format (ODF) is a standardized file format used by many software applications. You can find more information at the Wikipedia site: wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument. + OpenDocument file format names + %PRODUCTNAME uses the following file formats: + + + + Document format + + + File extension + + + + + ODF Text + + + *.odt + + + + + ODF Text Template + + + *.ott + + + + + ODF Master Document + + + *.odm + + + + + ODF Master Document Template + + + *.otm + + + + + HTML Document + + + *.html + + + + + HTML Document Template + + + *.oth + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet + + + *.ods + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet Template + + + *.ots + + + + + ODF Drawing + + + *.odg + + + + + ODF Drawing Template + + + *.otg + + + + + ODF Presentation + + + *.odp + + + + + ODF Presentation Template + + + *.otp + + + + + ODF Formula + + + *.odf + + + + + ODF Database + + + *.odb + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME Extension + + + *.oxt + + +
+ + The HTML format is not an OpenDocument format. + ODF Chart is the name of the file format for stand alone charts. This format with the extension *.odc is currently not in use. + Evolution of the OpenDocument format + The OpenDocument format evolves over time. + + + + ODF version + + + Date of standard approval by OASISintl. community wants intl iso standard date formats + + + First supporting version of the software + + + + + ODF 1.0 + + + 2005-05-01 + + + OpenOffice.org 1.1.5 or StarOffice 7 + + + + + ODF 1.1 + + + 2007-02-02 + + + OpenOffice.org 2.2 or StarOffice 8 Update 4 + + + + + ODF 1.2 + + + 2011-09-30 + + + OpenOffice.org 3, StarOffice 9, Oracle Open Office + + + + + ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode) + + + — + + + LibreOffice 3.5 + + + + + ODF 1.2 Extended + + + — + + + OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 + + + + + ODF 1.3 + + + TBD + + + LibreOffice 7.0 + + + + + ODF 1.3 Extended + + + — + + + LibreOffice 7.0 + + +
+ In current versions, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +XML file structure +Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: + + +The text content of the document is located in content.xml. +By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. The use of indentations and line breaks can be activated in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/Save/Document PrettyPrinting to true. + + +The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. +If you save a document with a password, meta.xml will not be encrypted. + + +The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. + + +In styles.xml, you find the styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles window. + + +The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. + + +Additional files and folders can be contained in the packed file format. +Definition of the XML formats +The schema for the OpenDocument formats can be found on the www.oasis-open.org web site. +
+ + + +Document Converter Wizard +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..047e3c20d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +See also... +/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +See also... + + + +Tools Menu - Scenarios + + + +
+On the help page for $[officename] general you can find instructions that are applicable to all modules, such as working with windows and menus, customizing $[officename], data sources, Gallery, and drag and drop. +If you want help with another module, switch to the help for that module with the combo box in the navigation area. +
+The availability of this function depends on your X Window Manager. + + +Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents. + +Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer. +
+Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system. Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to %PRODUCTNAME. Try to assign different keys either for %PRODUCTNAME, in Tools - Customize - Keyboard, or in your desktop system. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c270af62f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Graphics Export Options +/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp + + + + +Graphics Export Options +Defines graphics export options. +
+ +
+When you export graphical elements to a file, you can select the file type. For most supported file types a dialog opens where you can setup export options. +The following file types do not show an options dialog: RAS, SVG, TIFF, XPM. +The other file types show options dialogs where you can set the width and height of the exported image. +Depending on the file type, you can specify some more options. Press Shift+F1 and hover over the control to see an extended help text. + +Common controls + + +Specifies the measurement units. +Width +Specifies the width. +Height +Specifies the height. + +Resolution controls + + +Resolution +Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box. + +More options +JPEG controls +For JPEG files you can set the color depth and the quality. + + +Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color. + + +Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image. + + +Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size + +BMP controls +For BMP files you can set the compression and the RLE encoding. + +Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics. + +PBM PGM PPM controls +For PBM, PGM, and PPM files you can set the encoding. + + +Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file. + +Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file. + +PNG controls +For PNG files you can set the compression and the interlaced mode. + + +Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode. + +GIF controls +For GIF files you can set the transparency and the interlaced mode. + + +Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture. + +EPS controls +For EPS files you can set the preview, the color format, the compression, and the version. + +You must print an EPS file with a PostScript printer. Other printers will only print the embedded preview. + + +Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file. + +Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code. + +Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2. + +Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics. + +Exports the file in color. + +Exports the file in grayscale tones. + +LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm. + +Specifies that you do not wish to use compression. + +See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f118801da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import +/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp + + + +Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import +Defines the options for import/export. These dialogs will be automatically shown if the corresponding file type is selected. +Character set +Select the character set from the options used for import/export. +For further information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3afaac677 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Export text files +/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp + + + + + +Export text files +The Export text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. +Field options +Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. +Character set +Specifies the character set for text export. +Field delimiter +Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. +Text delimiter +Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. + +Quote all text cells +Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character. + +Save cell content as shown +Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software. +Depending on the number format, saving cell content as shown may write values that during an import cannot be interpreted as numerical values anymore. +Fixed column width +Exports all data fields with a fixed width. + + +The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. + + +Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. + + +If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. + + +If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. + + +The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..756cc6634 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + Text Import + /text/shared/00/00000208.xhp + + + + + + + + +Text Import +Sets the import options for delimited data. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Import + + +Character Set +Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file. + + +Language +Determines how the number strings are imported. +If Language is set to Default (for CSV import) or Automatic (for HTML import), Calc will use the globally set language. If Language is set to a specific language, that language will be used when importing numbers. +When importing an HTML document, the Language selection can conflict with the global HTML option Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers. The global HTML option is effective only when the Automatic language option is selected. If you select a specific language in the HTML Import Options dialog, the global HTML option is ignored. + + +From Row +Specifies the row where you want to start the import. The rows are visible in the preview window at the bottom of the dialog. + +Separator Options +Specifies whether your data uses separators or fixed widths as delimiters. + + +Fixed width +Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns. Click on the ruler in the preview window to set the width. + + +Separated by +Select the separator used in your data. + + +Tab +Separates data delimited by tabs into columns. + + +Semicolon +Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns. + + +Comma +Separates data delimited by commas into columns. + + +Space +Separates data delimited by spaces into columns. + + + +Other +Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data. + + +Merge delimiters +Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields. + + + +Trim spaces +Removes starting and trailing spaces from data fields. + + + +String delimiter +Select a character to delimit text data. You can also enter a character in the text box. + +Other options +Sets some other import options. + + +Format quoted field as text +When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text. + + +Detect special numbers +When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation. +The selected language influences how such special numbers are detected, since different languages and regions many have different conventions for such special numbers. +When this option is disabled, Calc will detect and convert only decimal numbers. The rest, including numbers formatted in scientific notation, will be imported as text. A decimal number string can have digits 0-9, thousands separators, and a decimal separator. Thousands separators and decimal separators may vary with the selected language and region. + + +Skip empty cells +When this option is enabled, Calc preserves previous content of cells when pasting empty ones. Otherwise, Calc deletes content of previous cells. +In Text to Columns conversion, if cell content begins with a separator and this option is disabled, then first column will be emptied. + +Fields +Shows how your data will look when it is separated into columns. + + +Column type +Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data. You can select one of the following options: + + + + + Type + + + Function + + + + + Standard + + + $[officename] determines the type. + + + + + Text + + + Imported data are treated as text. + + + + + Date (DMY) + + + Applies a date format (Day, Month, Year) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + Date (MDY) + + + Applies a date format (Month, Day, Year) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + Date (YMD) + + + Applies a date format (Year, Month, Day) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + US English + + + Numbers formatted in US English are searched for and included regardless of the system language. A number format is not applied. If there are no US English entries, the Standard format is applied. + + + + + Hide + + + The data in the column are not imported. + + +
+ +If you selected one of the date formats (DMY), (MDY), or (YMD) and you enter numbers without date delimiters, the numbers are interpreted as follows: + + + + + Number of characters + + + Date format + + + + + 6 + + + Two characters each are taken for day, month, and year in the selected order. + + + + + 8 + + + Four characters are taken for the year, two each for month and day, in the selected order. + + + + + 5 or 7 + + + As with 6 or 8 characters, but the first part of the sequence has one character less. This will suppress a leading zero for month and day. + + +
+ +If you want to include the leading zero in the data you import, in telephone numbers for example, apply the "Text" format to the column. + + +Preview +Shows how the imported text will look after it is separated into columns. To apply a format to a column when it is imported, click a column and select a Column type. When you select a Column type, the column heading displays the applied format. +If you want to use a fixed width to separate the imported data into columns, click in the ruler to set the width boundaries. +Navigating Without the Mouse +For more information, see Information about Import and Export Filters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebfd52b05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + +ASCII Filter Options +/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

ASCII Filter Options

+You can specify which options, such as basic font, language, character set, or break, are imported or exported with a text document. The dialog appears when you load an ASCII file with the filter "Text Encoded" or when you save the document the first time, or when you "save as" with another name. +
+ +
+

Properties

+Defines the settings for importing or exporting your file. When exporting, only the character set and paragraph break can be defined. + +

Character set

+Specifies the character set of the file for export or import. +

Include byte-order mark

+For Unicode character set only, a byte order mark (BOM) is a sequence of bytes used to indicate Unicode encoding of a text file. The presence of the UTF-8 BOM is optional and may cause problems with some software, especially legacy software not designed to handle UTF-8. + +

Default fonts

+By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing. + +

Language

+Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing. +

Paragraph break

+Defines the type of paragraph break for a text line. + +

CR & LF

+Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default. + +

CR

+Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break. + +

LF

+Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5db89a06f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ + + + + + + + + +File Menu +/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp + + + +

File Menu

+Choose File - Preview in Web Browser. +
+Choose File - New. + +New icon on the Standard bar (the icon shows the type of the new document). +
+ + + + +Icon New + + +New + + +
+ +
+Key CommandCtrl+N +
+Menu File - New - Templates. +Key Shift+CommandCtrl+N +Choose File - New - Labels. +Choose File - New - Labels - Labels tab. +
+Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab. +
+
+Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab. +
+Choose File - New - Business Cards. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Medium tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business Cards tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Private tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business tab. +
+Choose File - Open. +CommandCtrl+O +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Open + + +Open File + + +
+ +
+
+
+Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected. +Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected. +
+Choose File - Wizards. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Letterhead Layout. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Printed Items. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Recipient and Sender. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Footer. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Name and Location. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Items to include. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Sender and Recipient. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Footer. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Name and Location. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - General information. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Headings to include. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Names. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Agenda items. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Name and Location. +Click Use Wizard to Create Form in a database file window. +Click Use Wizard to Create Report in a database file window. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 1. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 2. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 3. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 4, there must be a database connection. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Last page of wizards. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Euro Converter. +
+Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source. +
+Address Data Source Wizards - Additional settings +Address Data Source Wizards - Table selection +Address Data Source Wizards - Data source title +Address Data Source Wizards - Field assignment +Choose File - Close. +
+Choose File - Save. +CommandCtrl+S + Open Standard or Table Data bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Save + + +Save + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Save as + + +Save As + + +
+ +
+$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML Document file type. The dialog opens automatically. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 1 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 2 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 3 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 4 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 5 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 6 of the wizard. +Choose File - Export, select a graphics file type. The dialog opens after you click Save. +Choose File - Save All. +Choose File - Save As. +
+Choose File - Reload. +
+Choose File - Properties. +Choose File - Properties - General tab. +
+Choose File - Digital Signatures - Sign Existing PDF. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security and, in the Certificate Path area, click Certificate. +
+
+Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. +Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. +Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button. +Double-click or right-click the Signature field on the Status bar. +
+Choose File - Properties - General tab, press Digital Signatures button, then click Sign Document button. +Choose File - Properties - Description tab. +Choose File - Properties - Custom Properties tab. +Choose File - Properties - Statistics tab. +Choose File - Properties - Security tab. +Choose File - Properties - CMIS Properties tab. +Choose File - Properties - Font tab. +
+Menu File - Print Preview. +
+ + + + +Icon Print preview + + +Print Preview + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose File - Printer Settings. +
+Menu File - Send. +
+Choose File - Send - Email Document. +
+ + + + +Icon Email Document + + +Email Document + + +
+ +
+
+Choose File - Export. + +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as EPUB. + + + + + Icon Export as EPUB + + + + Export Directly as EPUB + + +
+
+ +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Digital Signatures tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Security tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - General tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Initial View tab. +
+ +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - User Interface tab. +
+
+Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Export Directly as PDF + + +Export Directly as PDF + + +
+
+
+Choose File - Send - Email as PDF. +
+Choose File - Send - Create Master Document. +
+Choose File - Print. +CommandCtrl+P + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Print Icon + + +Print + + +
+ +
+ + +On the Print Preview bar of a text document, click + + + + +Icon Print Page Preview + + +Print Page Preview + + +
+ + + +
+
+Choose File - Exit %PRODUCTNAME. +CommandCtrl+Q +
+Choose File - New - Master Document. +
+Choose File - Open - File type, select Text CSV. +Choose Data - Text to Columns (Calc). +
+Choose File - Export, if EPS is selected as file type, this dialog opens automatically. +Choose File - Export, if PBM, PPM or PGM is selected as file type, the dialog opens automatically. +Choose File - Versions. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12d29036 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + +View Menu +/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

View Menu

+
+Choose View - Zoom - Zoom. +Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad +Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad. +Click or right-click the field on the Status bar. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars. +
+Choose View - Toolbars - Standard. +Choose View - Toolbars - Tools. +Choose View - Status Bar. +Choose View - Color Bar. +
+Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Internet. +Choose Insert - Hyperlink. +
+Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Mail. +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Document. +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click New Document. +
+Choose View - Full Screen. +Shift+CommandCtrl+J + + +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Full Screen (in Print Preview) + + +
+ +
+ + +
+
+If a text document or spreadsheet is open: +Menu View - Data Sources. +CommandCtrl+Shift+F4 keys +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Data Sources + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose View - HTML Source. +Open context menu in an HTML document. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +HTML Source + + +
+ +
+
+Choose View - Grid and Helplines. +Choose View - Snap Guides (Impress or Draw). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53a765055 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ + + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp + + + +

Insert Menu

+Choose Insert - Comment. +Press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C. +
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan. +
+
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Select Source. +
+
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Request. +
+
+Choose Insert - Special Character. +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button. + +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button. + +On the Standard or the Insert bar, clickbar or toolbar here? +
+ + + + +Icon Special character + + +Special Character + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. + Choose Insert - Audio or Video. +
+ + + +Audio or Video + + +
+
+
+Choose Insert - OLE Object. +
+Choose Insert - OLE Object - OLE Object. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon OLE object + + +OLE Object + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Insert - OLE Object - QR and Barcode. +
+
+Choose Insert - OLE Object - Formula Object. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Formula + + +Formula + + +
+
+
+Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert - Chart . +Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert Chart. +Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert - Chart. +
+Choose Insert - Chart. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Chart + + +Chart + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Insert - Image. +On the Standard bar, click bar or toolbar? +
+ + + +Icon Image + + +Image + + +
+
+
+
+ + +Choose Insert - Frame - Floating Frame + + +Choose Insert - Floating Frame. + + +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Floating frame + + +Floating Frame + + +
+
+
+Open a file of a type that is unknown to %PRODUCTNAME and that is no text file. + +
+On the Fontwork bar, click + + + + +Icon Fontwork + + + Fontwork Gallery + + +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Fontwork +
+
+ + + + +Icon Basic shapes + + +Basic Shapes + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Symbol Shapes + + +Symbol Shapes + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Block arrows + + +Block Arrows + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Flowcharts + + +Flowcharts + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Callouts + + +Callouts + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Stars + + +Stars + + +
+
+
+ Choose Insert - Signature Line +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6903a822 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Menu + /text/shared/00/00000406.xhp + + + +

Tools Menu

+ + Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard bar -
New Theme button - Files tab. +
+ Choose Tools - Spelling. + F7 key + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Spelling + + +
+
+
+ Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion - Edit terms button. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Spelling. + Choose Tools - Spelling, then click Options. +
+ Choose Tools - Thesaurus. + CommandCtrl+F7 +
+
+ Choose Tools - Color Replacer ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress). +
+ Choose Tools - Media Player. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press OptionAlt+F11 (if not assigned by your system). + Choose Tools - Macros - Run Macro. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - Python. +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic,
click the Organizer button,
click the Libraries tab,
and then click the Password button. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic,
click the Organizer button. + Choose Tools - Extension Manager. + Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Check for Updates button. + Choose Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings. + Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit. + Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs. + Choose Tools - Customize. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click the gear Icon gear menu dropdown menu and choose Add. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click the gear Icon gear menu dropdown menu and choose Move. + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab. A document must be opened. + Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab. + Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Smart Tags tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Exceptions tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Localized Options tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion tab. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General. +
+ Path selection button in various wizards. + Click Edit button for a few entries under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + Choose Tools - AutoText - Path. (autotext only) +
+ Choose Tools - ImageMap. + Choose Tools - ImageMap, then select a section of the ImageMap and click Properties - Description. +
+ Choose Format - Area - Colors tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Area - Area, press the Color button and click the Pick button. +
+ + + + + Icon + + + + Press the Color Dialog button in the Illumination tab of the 3D Effects dialog. + + +
+
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Security. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - OpenCL. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Basic IDE. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors. + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids,
in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid. +
+ Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western). + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian). Asian language support must be enabled. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes. + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Compatibility. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Defaults. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print. + Open a drawing document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw. + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math. + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f1365faf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Window Menu +/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + Window Menu + Choose Window - New Window. + Choose Window - List of open documents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..705c3ccbb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Help Menu +/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help Menu +Choose Help - %PRODUCTNAME Help. +Choose Help - About %PRODUCTNAME. +
+Automatically after %PRODUCTNAME is first started. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c72f152bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Toolbars

+
+ Choose Data - More Filters - Standard Filter. + Database table view: Standard Filter icon in the Database toolbar. + Form view: Standard Filter icon in the Form bar. + + + + + Icon Standard Filter + + + Standard Filter + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ead7d9e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Database +/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp + + + +

Database

+In a database file window, choose Tools - Table Filter. +View - Database Objects - Queries + +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties - Advanced Settings tab. +In a database file window of type ODBC or Address book,
choose Edit - Database - Connection Type. +Path selection button in various wizards / Edit buttons for some entries in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +In a database file window of type ODBC, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type.see #i56356 +In a database file window of type Address book - LDAP, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type JDBC, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type MySQL, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Indexes. +In a database file window of type Text, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type MS ADO, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window, choose Tools - SQL. +In a database file window, click the Queries icon. +In a database file window, click the Tables icon. +
+In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit. +
+In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit.UFI: was: "... , then Tools - Index Design or Index Design button" + (don't know where that is now) +In a database file window, choose Insert - Query (Design view).Please have a look of correctness +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit. +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit.
If the referenced fields no longer exist, you see this dialog. +Open query design and choose Insert - New Relation, or double-click on a connection line between two tables. + +
+ + + + + Add Table Icon + + +Insert Tables + + +
+
+
+ + + + +New Relation Icon + + +New Relation + + +
+
+
+Find Record icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar. +
+ + + + +Find Record Icon + + +Find Record + + +
+
+
+
+Sort Order icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar. +
+ + + + +Sort Order Icon + + +Sort Order + + +
+
+
+In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +Drag and drop a table or a query into the table part of another database file window. +In a database file window, choose Insert - Form. +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window, choose Tools - Relationships. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21fba358d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040500.xhp + + + +This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. +
+Choose Format - Character. +On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click +
+ + + + Icon Character + + + Character + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Format - Character - Font tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font tab. +Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format - Font tab. +Choose Format - Title - Character tab (Chart documents). +Choose Format - Legend - Character tab (Chart documents). +Choose Format - Axis - Character tab (Chart documents). + + +Choose Format - Cells - Font tab (spreadsheets). +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Font Effects tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font Effects tab. + + +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Position tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Alignment tab. + + +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Asian Layout tab +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Layout tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Asian Typography tab (not in HTML). +Choose Format - Cells - Asian Typography tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Typography tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph. +On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click +
+ + + + Icon Paragraph + + + Paragraph + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Alignment tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Alignment tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Indents & Spacing tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Tabs tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Tabs tab. +Double-click the ruler +
+
+(all options only in Writer or Calc) +Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Page - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Character - Borders tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Page - Header - More button. +Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button. +Choose Format - Cells - Borders tab. +
+
+ + + Menu Format - Paragraph - Border tab - Padding. + + + Menu Format - Page - Border - Padding. + + +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Background tab. +Choose Format - Character - Highlighting tab. +Choose Format - Image - Background tab. +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Area tab. +Choose Format - Page - Background tab. +Choose Format - Page - Header - More button. +Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Background tab. +Choose Insert/Edit - Section - Background tab +Choose Format - Cells - Background tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Page Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Edit Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Page - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Styles - Edit Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Slide - Properties - Page tab. +
+
+Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+ + +Choose Slide - Properties - Slide tab + + +Choose Page - Properties - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page - Page tab. +Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of a page style entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab. +Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of a page style entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab (Writer). + + +
+ + +
+ Command+TF11 +Choose View - Styles. + + + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles. + On Formatting bar, click + + + + Icon Styles + + + Styles + + +
+ + +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + On the Drawing bar, click + + +
+ + + + Icon 3d window + + + 3D Effects + + +
+
+
+Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Geometry tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Shading tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Illumination tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Textures tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Material tab. +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. +Right-click a paragraph, choose List - Bullets and Numbering. +On Formatting bar, click +
+ + + + Bullets and Numbering dialog Icon + + + Bullets and Numbering + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Customize tab page. + + + Open Styles - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify. + + + Open Styles - List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify. + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Bullets tab. + + + Open Styles - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify. + + + Open Styles - List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify. + + +
+
+ + + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a Presentation Style (except Background) - choose New/Modify - Numbering tab. + + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Ordered tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a List Style - choose New/Modify - Ordered tab. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles - context menu of a List Style - choose New/Modify - Ordered tab. + + +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Image tab. +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Outline tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a List Style entry - choose New/Modify. +
+
+ + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify - Position tab. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles - choose List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify - Position tab. + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering - Position tab. + + +
+
+ + + Menu Format - Image - Properties - Crop tab. + + + Icon on the Image toolbar: + + + + + + + + + + Icon Crop + + + Crop + + +
+ + +
+
+Choose Format - Text. +
+ +
+Menu Format - Asian phonetic guide. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df82926e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,445 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040501.xhp + + + + This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+ Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. No database connection in current form is allowed. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 1. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 2. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. + Open Toolbox bar in Basic dialog editor, click + + + + Icon Properties + + + Properties + + +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Form + + + Form + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - General tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - General tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected control on an XML Form document, choose Control Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Controls toolbar of an XML Form document, click Control icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - Events tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - Events tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Control + + + Control + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - General tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - General tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - Events tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control Properties icon - Events tab. +
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Activation Order + + + Activation Order + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Add Field + + + Add Field + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Form Navigator + + + Form Navigator + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Controls toolbar or Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Design Mode + + + Design Mode On/Off + + +
+
+
+
+ Open Form Navigator - select form - open context menu - choose Open in Design Mode. + On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Open in Design Mode + + + Open in Design Mode + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Control toolbar, click + + + + Icon Wizard + + + Wizards On/Off + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Open context menu - choose Arrange ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + Choose Shape - Arrange ($[officename] Draw). + + + + Icon Arrange + + + Arrange + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Draw). + Shift+CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + + + Icon Bring to Front + + + Bring to Front + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Draw). + CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Impress). + + + + Icon Bring Forward + + + Bring Forward + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Draw). + CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Impress). + + + + Icon Send Backward + + + Send Backward + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Draw). + Shift+CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + + + Icon Send to Back + + + Send to Back + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - To Foreground. +
+ + + + Icon To Foreground + + + To Foreground + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - To Background. +
+ + + + Icon To Background + + + To Background + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). +
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Left ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Left (selected objects) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Left (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Left + + + Left + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Centered + + +
+
+
+ +
+ Choose Format - Align - Top ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Top + + + Top + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Centered + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Bottom ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Bottom (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Bottom + + + Bottom + + +
+
+
+
+ For a selected object, choose Format - Anchor. + Right-click on a selected object - choose Anchor. +
+ On Drawing Object Properties bar, Image bar, Frame bar, OLE Objects bar or Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Anchor + + + Anchor + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Anchor - To Page. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Paragraph. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Character. + Choose Format - Anchor - As Character. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Frame. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Cell. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43ba42ec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,543 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040502.xhp + + + + This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+
+ Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw).i64150 + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line (Writer). + Choose Format - Object - Line (Calc). + On Line and Filling bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Line + + + Line + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line - Line tab. + + + Choose Format - Object - Line - Line tab. + + + Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts). + Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts). + + + Choose View - Styles - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Line tab (presentation documents). + + +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Line - Line Styles tab. + +
+ + + Choose Format - Line + + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line - Arrow Styles tab. + + + Right-click a selected object - choose Line - Arrow Styles tab. + + + On the Drawing Object Properties bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + On the Drawing Object Properties bar or Image bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + On the Image bar or Line and Filling bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + +
+ +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area. + On Line and Filling bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Area + + + Area + + +
+
+
+
+ + +
+ Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Paragraph, Frame or Page style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Background tab. Select the table object - Cell, Row or Table - which background area is to be filled. + Choose Format - Page Style - Area tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Area - Area +
+ + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Cell or Page style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Background tab. + Choose Format - Page - Background tab + Choose Format - Cells - Background tab + Choose Format - Object - Area - Area tab. + + + Choose Format - Style - Edit Style - Area tab + Choose Slide - Properties - Background tab + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11), choose Drawing or Presentation style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Format - Object and Shape - Area - Area tab + + + Choose Format - Style - Edit Style - Area tab + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11), choose Drawing style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Page - Properties - Background tab. + Choose Format - Area - Area tab + + + Choose Format - Title - Area tab. + Choose Format - Legend - Area tab. + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab. + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area. + Choose Format - Chart Area - Area. + + + When editing a form: + + When editing a report: + Choose Format - Page - Background tab. + + + + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents). + Choose Format - Object and Shape - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents). + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents). +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Transparency tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Transparency tab. +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Shadow tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Gradients tab. + + Choose Format - + + Text Box and Shape - + Object - + Object and Shape - + + Area - Hatch tab. + + + + + + Choose Format - Page Style - Area + Choose Page - Properties - Background + Choose Slide - Properties - Background + + - Hatch tab. + + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Image tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - Text - Text. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - TextObject and ShapeText - Text tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - TextText - Text Animation tab. +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size. + F4 keyF4 key +
+
+ + + + Icon Position and Size + + + Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar + + +
+
+
+ Open the context menu for the object - choose Name. +
+
+ Right-click on a selected image, frame, or OLE object - choose Properties - Options tab. + For a selected object, choose Format - Description +
+
+Click on textbox or shape to select, then... +Choose Format - + Text Box and Shape - + Object - + Object and Shape - + Position and Size - Position and Size tab. + +Open context menu for selected object - choose Position and Size - Position and Size tab. + + + + +Icon Position and Size + + + + Position and Size menu icon + + + +
+ + + + +Press F4 after selection to open the tab directly. + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Rotation tab. + + + + Icon Rotate + + + Rotate + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Slant & Corner Radius tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Callout tab. This is only available for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts. +
+ Choose Edit - Points. + Open context menu - choose Edit Points. + Open context menu - choose Edit Points. + F8 keyF8 key + + + + Icon Edit Points + + + Edit Points + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Character (drawing functions). + Open context menu - choose Character. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Size. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Bold. +
+ + + + Icon Bold + + + Bold + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Italic. +
+ + + + Icon Italic + + + Italic + + +
+
+
+
+ Open the menu Format - Text and choose Single Underline or Double Underline. +
+ + + + Icon Underline + + + Underline + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Contour. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 1. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 1.5. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 2. +
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Left. + Open context menu - choose Align - Left. +
+ + + + Icon Align Left + + + Align Left + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Right. + Open context menu - choose Align - Right. +
+ + + + Icon Align Right + + + Align Right + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Centered. + Open context menu - choose Align - Center. +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Align Center HorizontallyCentered + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Justified. + Open context menu - choose Align - Justified. +
+ + + + Icon Justified + + + Justified + + +
+
+
+ Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar. +
+ Choose Format - Group. + Open context menu - choose Group. +
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Group + + + Choose Format - Group - Group + + + Open context menu - choose Group (for text box and shapes). +
+ + + + Icon Group + + + Group + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Ungroup. + + + Choose Format - Group - Ungroup. + + + Open context menu - choose Ungroup. +
+ + + + Icon Ungroup + + + Ungroup + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Exit Group. + + + Choose Format - Group - Exit Group. + + + Open context menu - choose Exit Group. +
+ + + + Icon Exit Group + + + Exit Group + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Enter Group. + + + Choose Format - Group - Enter Group. + + + Open context menu - choose Enter Group. +
+ + + + Icon Enter Group + + + Enter Group + + +
+
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7db2a6a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040503.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+
+Choose Format - Rows - Height. +Open context menu of a row header in an open database table - choose Row Height. +
+
+Choose Format - Columns - Width. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Width. +
+
+ + + Choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11) - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Numbers tab. + + + Open context menu for a column header in an open database table - choose Column Format - Format tab. + + + Choose Table - Number Format (for tables). + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab and select Additional formats in the Format list (for variables). + + +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Numbers tab (chart documents). +
+
+Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Alignment tab.Choose Format - Cells - Alignment tab. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format - Alignment tab. +
+Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format. +Context menu for a row header in an open database table - Delete Rows. +
+Choose Shape - Flip ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +Open context menu - choose Flip (presentation documents). +
+
+Choose Shape - Flip - Vertically ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +Open context menu - choose Flip - Vertically (presentation documents). +
+
+Choose Shape - Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties, and then click the Image tab. +Choose Format - Flip - Horizontally. +Right-click a selected object - choose Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Impress). +
+
+Select three or more objects and +Choose Shape - Distribute Selection ($[officename] Draw). +Open context menu - choose Distribute Selection ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..510f1270e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +Every docked window has an icon to control the display properties of the window. +
+To show or hide a docked window, click the icon. +
+AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows +You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. +The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. +Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. +Drag and Drop +If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f155e3e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Gallery context menu +/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Gallery context menu + +Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document. + +Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document. + +Inserts the selected graphic as a link. + +The Preview command displays the selected graphic. + + + +Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object. + +Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..892ab1c07 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode +/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode + +Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics. + +Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard. + +Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard. + +If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible. + +Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible. + +Allows you to save the background of a Web page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4fc5004c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp + + + +
+ + +GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else +The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme. +
+ +Name +Displays the name of the theme. If no name has been assigned, you can type a new name in the text box. +Type +Specifies the object type. +Location +Specifies the complete object path. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4d4bc4088 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + + + + + + +Edit Menu +/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp + + + +

Edit Menu

+
+Choose Edit - Undo. +CommandCtrl+Z +On the Standard bar or Table Data bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Undo + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Redo. +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Redo + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Repeat. +
+Choose Edit - Cut. +CommandCtrl+X +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Cut + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Copy. +CommandCtrl+C +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Copy + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Paste. +CommandCtrl+V +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Paste + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Special. +CommandCtrl + Shift + V. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Unformatted Text. + Right-click to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Unformatted Text. + CommandCtrl + Alt + Shift + V. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Nested Table. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Nested Table. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste as Rows above. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Rows Above. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste as Columns Before. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Columns Before. +
+ +
+Choose Edit - Select All. +CommandCtrl+A +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Select All + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Track Changes. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Record. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Show. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage. +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - List tab. +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. The AutoCorrect dialog appears.
Click the Edit Changes button and navigate to the List tab. +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - Filter tab. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document. + +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect + +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Comment. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - List tab.
Click an entry in the list and open the context menu.
Choose Edit Comment. +
+ + +
+Choose Edit - Find. +CommandCtrl+F +
+
+Choose Edit - Find & Replace. +CommandCtrl+H + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Find & Replace + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Attributes. +Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format button. +
+ + + + + + Search Icon or CommandCtrl+F + + + On the Table Data bar, click Find icon, then Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button (database table view). + + +
+ + + + Search Icon9.oct.2020 Ctrl+F is not configured for Database Form view + + + On the Form Navigation bar, click Record Search icon, then Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button (database form view). + + +
+ + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button. + + +
+ +Choose Tools - Bibliography Database. +Choose Edit - Links to External Files. +Choose Edit - Links to External Files - Modify (DDE links only). +
+Select a frame, then choose Edit - OLE Object - Properties. +Open context menu of selected frame, choose Properties. +
+Choose Edit - OLE Object. +Choose Edit - OLE Object - Edit, also in the context menu of selected object. +Choose Edit - OLE Object - Open. +Choose Edit - Reference. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7307df7fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Standard Icons Alt Texts to be Embedded +/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp + + +Standard Icon Alt Text + + + +Standard Icons Alt Texts to be Embedded +Icon + +Warning Icon + +Tip Icon + +Note Icon + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29bb9bf52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Keyboard Shortcuts + /text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts (to embed)

+ + + + + Command+T + F11 + + + + + + + + Command+F8 + Ctrl+F8 + + + + + + + + Command+F9 + Ctrl+F9 + + + + + + + + Command+Enter + Ctrl+Enter + + + + + + + + Option+Enter + Alt+Enter + + + + + + + + Command+Option+Shift+V + Crtl+Alt+Shift+V + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae3aac364 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ + + + + + + + New + /text/shared/01/01010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

New

+ Creates a new $[officename] document. +
+ +Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type. +
+ +
+ +If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates. +A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. + + + + Icon + + + Name + + + Function + + + + + Icon + + + Text Document + + + Creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Spreadsheet + + + Creates a new spreadsheet document in $[officename] Calc. + + + + + Icon + + + Presentation + + + Creates a new presentation document in $[officename] Impress. + + + + + Icon + + + Drawing + + + Creates a new drawing document in $[officename] Draw. + + + + + Icon + + + Database + + + Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. + + + + + Icon + + + HTML Document + + + Creates a new HTML document. + + + + + Icon + + + XML Form Document + + + Creates a new XForms document. + + + + + Icon + + + Master Document + + + Creates a new master document. + + + + + Icon + + + Formula + + + Creates a new formula document in $[officename] Math. + + + + + Icon + + + Labels + + + Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Business Cards + + + Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Templates + + + Creates a new document using an existing template. + + +
+
+ Opening documents +
+ + Creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + Creates a new spreadsheet document in $[officename] Calc. + + Creates a new presentation document in $[officename] Impress. + + Creates a new drawing document in $[officename] Draw. + + +Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. + +Creates a new HTML document. + + Creates a new XForms document. + + Creates a new master document. + + Creates a new formula document in $[officename] Math. + + Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels in $[officename] Writer. + + Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b71ad5297 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Master Document + /text/shared/01/01010001.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Master Document + Use a master document to organize complex projects, such as a book. A master document can contain the individual files for each chapter of a book, as well as a table of contents, and an index. +
+ +
+
+ + +
+ + Navigator for Master Documents +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..460914a6e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Labels + /text/shared/01/01010200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Labels + Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document. You can print labels using a predefined or a custom paper format. + You can also print a single label or an entire sheet of labels. +
+ +
+ + + + +New Document + Creates a new document for editing. + +
+ Creating labels + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0994cc9c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Labels + /text/shared/01/01010201.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Labels + Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label. +
+
+ +
+Inscription + Enter or insert the text that you want to appear on the label(s). + +Label text + Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field. + +Address + Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. + To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. + +Database + Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. + +Table + Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label. + + +Database field + Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box. + The name of the database field is bounded by brackets in the Label text box. If you want, you can separate database fields with spaces. Press Enter to insert a database field on a new line. +Format + You can select a predefined size format for your label or a size format that you specify on the Format tab. + +Continuous + Prints labels on continuous paper. + +Sheet + Prints labels on individual sheets. + +Brand + Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. + +Type + Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. +Info + The paper type and the dimensions of the label are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df00cdcb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Format + /text/shared/01/01010202.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Format + Set paper formatting options. +
+
+ +
+ +Horizontal pitch + Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Vertical pitch + Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Width + Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Height + Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Left margin + Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Upper margin + Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Columns + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page. + +Rows + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page. + +Save + Saves the current label or business card format. + + +Save Label Format + +Brand + Enter or select the desired brand. + +Type + Enter or select a label type. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e347ced5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Options + /text/shared/01/01010203.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Options + Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings. +
+
+ +
+ +Entire Page + Creates a full page of labels or business cards. + +Single Label + Prints a single label or business card on a page. + +Column + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page. + +Row + Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page. + +Synchronize contents + Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button. + + +Synchronize Labels + The Synchronize labels button only appears in your document if you have selected the Synchronize contents on the Options tab when you created the labels or business cards. + Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page. +Printer + Displays the name of the currently selected printer. + +Setup + Opens the Printer Setup dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34060e871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Business cards +/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Business cards +Design and create your own business cards. You can choose from a number of pre-defined size formats or create your own. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f6ef1485 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Medium + /text/shared/01/01010301.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ Medium + Select the size of your business card from a number of predefined size formats, or a size format that you specify on the Format tab. +
+
+ +
+Format + Select a size format for your business card. + +Continuous + Prints business cards on continuous paper. + +Sheet + Prints business cards on individual sheets. + +Brand + Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. + +Type + Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. + +Info + The paper type and the dimensions of the business card are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..55c7005bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Business Cards + /text/shared/01/01010302.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Business Cards + Define the appearance of your business cards. +
+
+ +
+ +Content + Select a design layout for your business card. + Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list. + +AutoText - Section + Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92262fcb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Private + /text/shared/01/01010303.xhp + + + +
+ + +Private + Contains personal contact information for business cards. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.removed switched note about autotext not supplied with OOo
+
+ +
+Private data + Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + + +First name 2 + Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + +Last name 2 + Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + +Initials 2 + Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + + +Country + Enter the name of the country in which you live. + + +Profession + Enter the title of your profession. + +Phone + Enter your home telephone number. + +Mobile + Enter your mobile telephone number. + + +Homepage + Enter the address of your internet homepage. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a01307ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Business + /text/shared/01/01010304.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Business + Contains contact information for business cards that use a layout from a 'Business Card, Work' category. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab. +
+
+ +
+Business data + Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. + If you want to include your name on a business card, enter your name on the Private tab. Then choose a layout on the Business Cards tab that includes a name placeholder. + + +Company 2nd line + Enter additional company details. + +Slogan + Enter the slogan of your company. + + +Country + Enter the name of the country where your business is located. + + +Phone + Enter your business telephone number. + +Mobile + Enter your mobile telephone number. + + +Homepage + Enter the address of your company's internet homepage. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e23446f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Open + /text/shared/01/01020000.xhp + + + + + directories; creating new + folder creation + My Documents folder; opening + multiple documents; opening + opening; several files + selecting; several files + opening; files, with placeholders + placeholders;on opening files + documents; opening with templates + templates; opening documents with + documents; styles changed + styles; changed message + + mw replaced "wildcards" by "regular expressions"mw deleted "regular expressions;" and "files;" +
+ + + + + +

Open

+ Opens a local or remote file, or imports one. +
+
+ +
+ %PRODUCTNAME uses the native file picker dialog of the window manager of your operating system for the Open command. + + If the file that you want to open contains styles, special rules apply. + +

Display area

+ Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. + To open more than one document at the same time, each in an own window, hold CommandCtrl while you click the files, and then click Open. + + + + Modern system file dialogs present many features for file handling. Most allows you to rename, delete, create files, sort list of files, display files and folders in icons, tree or list views, traverse the file system folder tree and much more. Use the mouse right button to get a list of commands on the selected files in the display area. + + + + Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. + + Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. + + Click to delete all selected files. + + + +

File name

+ Enter a file name or a path for the file. + The following features are available in the dialog: + + +

Version

+ If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. + +

File type

+ Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the folder. +

Open

+ Opens the selected document(s). + +

Insert

+ If you opened the dialog by choosing Insert - Document, the Open button is labeled Insert. Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position. + +

Read-only

+ Opens the file in read-only mode. + + + +

Play

+ Plays the selected sound file. Click again to stop playing the sound file. + + + +
+ +

Opening Documents With Templates

+ When you open a document created from a template, %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed, a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. + + + To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Update Styles. + + + To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click Keep Old Styles. + + + %PRODUCTNAME recognizes templates located in any directory defined for Templates in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. + If a document was created using a template that cannot be found, a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. + To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. + When you use File - Save As and select a template filter to save a template in a directory that is not specified in the Templates path, then the documents based on that template will not be checked. +
+
+ Opening Documents + Import and Export Filters +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdfa8ae21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Open Remote... + /text/shared/01/01020001.xhp + + + +
+ + +remote file; open +open; remote file + +Open Remote + Opens a document located in a remote file service. +
+
+ Choose File - Open Remote. + Click the Remote Files button in the Start Center. + Long-click the Open icon and select Open Remote File. + +
+ A remote file server is a web service that stores documents with or without checkin, checkout, version controls and backups. +
+ Opening and saving files in remote servers +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..627d84353 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Select Path + /text/shared/01/01020101.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Select Path + Sets file paths. +
+ +
+ +Select + Selects the indicated path. + +Path: + Enter or select the path from the list. +
+ Open dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f8a611a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Filter Selection + /text/shared/01/01020103.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Filter Selection +Allows you to select an import filter. +
+ +
+ + + +Filter list + Select the import filter for the file that you want to open. + If $[officename] does not recognize the file type of the document that your want to open, try any of the following: + + + Select the import filter from the list. + + + Ensure that the file extension corresponds to the file type of the document. For example, a Microsoft Word document must have a *.doc or *.docx extension for $[officename] to use the appropriate filter. + + + + + + + Install a missing import filter with the $[officename] Setup program. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f51a544bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Close + /text/shared/01/01050000.xhp + + + +
+documents; closing +closing;documents +mw deleted "backing window" + +

Close

+Closes the current document without exiting the program. +
+
+ +
+The Close command closes all open windows of the current document. +If you have made changes to the current document, you are prompted if you want to save your changes. +no longer the default: id="par_id3159399" If you open a document for printing, and do not make any changes, you are still prompted to save your changes when you close the document. This is because $[officename] keeps track of when a document is printed. +When you close the last open document window, you see the Start Center. +
+ Close the current window + Exit $[officename] +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4497a57cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Save + /text/shared/01/01060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Save + Saves the current document. +
+
+ +
+ When you edit an AutoText entry, this command changes to Save AutoText. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaf8edfd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save Remote... + /text/shared/01/01060001.xhp + + + +
+ +remote file; save +save; remote file + +Save Remote... + Saves a document located in a remote file service. +
+
+ Choose File - Save Remote... .How to proper deal with ellipses? + Long-click on the Save icon and select Save Remote File... . + +
+A remote file server is a web service that stores documents with or without checkin, checkout, version controls and backups. +
+ Opening and saving files in remote servers +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..deac0208d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save a Copy + /text/shared/01/01060002.xhp + + + +
+ +save; save a copy +save a copy + +Save a Copy + Saves a copy of the actual document with another name or location. +
+
+ Choose File - Save a Copy. +
+Creates another file with same contents of the current file. The current file is kept open for editing. +
+ Save + Save as + Export +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..854259683 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Save As +/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp + + + +
+saving as command; precautions + + + +Save As +Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type. + +
+
+ +
+%PRODUCTNAME uses the native file picker dialog of the window manager of your operating system for the Save as command. + +To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save As Template. + + +File name +
+Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL +
+ + + +File type +
+Select the file format for the document that you are saving. In the display area, only the documents with this file type are displayed. File types are described in Information on Import and Export Filters. +
+ + + +Always save your document in a %PRODUCTNAME file type before saving it to an external file type. When you export to an external file type, some formatting features may be lost. + + + + +Save +
+Saves the file. +
+Save with password +
+Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file. +Only documents using the %PRODUCTNAME XML-based format can be saved with a password. +
removed autoextension, i82752 + +

Encrypt with GPG key

+Use OpenPGP public keys to encrypt documents. + +Edit filter settings +Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.UFI: had to change text and remove Calc switch because switch did not work correctly + +Selection +Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported. +If you are exporting to any document file type, the entire document is exported. + +
+ +Export of Text Files +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2064b7d47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Export + /text/shared/01/01070001.xhp + + + +
+ +documents; exporting +converting; $[officename] documents +exporting;to foreign formats +MW deleted "document types;..." + +Export +Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify. +
+
+ +
+Unlike Save As, the Export command writes a copy of the current document in a new file with the chosen format, but keeps the current document and format open in your session. +The Export command opens the system file picker, where you can enter the name and format of the exported file. +

File Name

+Enter a file name or a path for the file. +

File Type

+ +

Save

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c8cb6f40 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Export As + /text/shared/01/01070002.xhp + + + +
+ + +Export as; PDF +Export as; EPUB + +

Export As

+ Export the document in PDF or EPUB formats. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As. +
+ +

Export Directly as PDF

+ Export the entire document using your default PDF settings. + +

Export Directly as EPUB

+ Export the entire document using your default EPUB settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6190e023b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Properties +/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Properties +

+Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created. +UFI: removed a note +
+
+ +
+The Properties dialog contains the following tab pages: + + + + + + + + + + + +Depending on your access rights to the file, you might not see all of the tabs in the Properties dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9022d3ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Description (File Properties) + /text/shared/01/01100100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Description

+ Contains descriptive information about the document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Title

+ Enter a title for the document. + +

Subject

+ Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents. + +

Keywords

+ Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. + +

Comments

+ Enter comments to help identify the document. +Title, Subject, and Keywords are exported to PDF files as PDF Document Properties. Entered values are exported and will appear in the corresponding fields in the PDF Document Properties Description. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..698047c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + General (File properties) + /text/shared/01/01100200.xhp + + + +
+ +version numbers of documents +documents; version numbers +files; version numbers +editing time of documents +documents; editing time + + + + +

General

+ Contains basic information about the current file. +
+
+ +
+ +

File

+ Displays the file name. +

Type

+ Displays the file type for the current document. +

Location

+ Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. +

Size

+ Displays the size of the current document in bytes. +

Created

+ Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. +

Modified

+ Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. +

Template

+ Displays the template that was used to create the file. + +

Digitally signed

+ Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. +

Digital Signatures

+ Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. +

Last printed

+ Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. + After printing, a document must be saved to preserve its Last printed data. No warning message is given about this, if an unsaved document is closed. +

Total editing time

+ Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. +

Revision number

+ Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. + +

Apply User Data

+ Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + +

Reset Properties

+ Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. +

Save preview image with this document

+ Saves a thumbnail preview .png inside the document. This image may be used by a file manager under certain conditions. + To disable generating thumbnails in general, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. Click the Open Expert Configuration button, and search for GenerateThumbnail. If this property has the value true, then double-click on it to set its value to false. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09f48ae41 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Custom Properties + /text/shared/01/01100300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Custom Properties + Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document. +
+
+ +
+ +Properties + Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats. + +Add + Click to add a new row to the Properties list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d38ae235a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Statistics + /text/shared/01/01100400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+number of pages +documents;number of pages/tables/sheets +number of tables +number of sheets +cells;number of +pictures;number of +OLE objects;number of + + + + + +

Statistics

+Displays statistics for the current file. +
+
+ +
+Some statistic values can be used as variables in formulas. +

Pages:

+Number of pages in the file. +

Tables:Sheets:

+Number of tables in the file.Number of sheets in the file. This statistic does not include tables that were inserted as OLE objects. + + + +

Cells:

+ Number of cells with content in the file. +

Formula groups:

+ Number of contiguous ranges in a column with same formula. + + +

Images:

+ Number of images in the file. This statistic does not include images that were inserted as OLE objects. +

OLE Objects:

+ Number of OLE objects in the file, including tables and graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. +

Paragraphs:

+ Number of paragraphs, including blank paragraphs, in the file. +

Words:

+ Number of words, including words consisting of a single character, in the file. +

Characters:

+ Number of characters, including spaces, in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. +

Characters excluding spaces:

+ Number of characters, excluding spaces, in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. +

Lines:

+ Number of lines in the file. +

Update

+ Updates the statistics. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef09eda2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Security +/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp + + + +
+password as document property +file sharing options for current document +read-only documents;opening documents as +saving;with password by default +user data;removing when saving + + + + +Security +Sets password options for the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + +Open file read-only +Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only. +This file sharing option protects the document against accidental changes. It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original. + + +Record changes +Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record. +To protect the recording state with a password, click Protect and enter a password. Other users of this document can apply their changes, but they cannot disable change recording without knowing the password. + + +Protect / Unprotect +Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a64aa4422 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Templates + /text/shared/01/01110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Templates

+ Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template. +
+
+ Select File - Templates. +
+ + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5985e4408 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + Address Book Assignment + /text/shared/01/01110101.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +

Address Book Assignment

+
+ Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book. +
+
+ Choose Tools - Address Book Source. +
+

Address Book Source

+ Set the data source and data table for your address book. + +

Data Source

+ Select the data source for your address book. + +

Table

+ Select the data table for your address book. + +

Assign

+ Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list. +

Field assignment

+ Define the field assignments for your address book. + +

(Field name)

+ Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..132d6209f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Save as Template + /text/shared/01/01110300.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Save as Template

+ Saves the current document as a template. +
+
+ Choose File - Templates - Save as Template. +
+ +

Enter Template Name

+ Enter a name for the template. + +

Select Template Category

+ Select a category in which to save the new template. + +

Set as default template

+ The new template will be used as the default template. +Templates added with this command appear automatically in the Template Manager. You can also use the Template Manager to import templates. Both methods are recommended for adding templates. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a658c2ff4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Template + /text/shared/01/01110400.xhp + + + +
+ +

Edit Template

+ Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing. +
+
+ Choose File - Templates - Edit Template. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a2846d8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ + + + + + + + Print + /text/shared/01/01130000.xhp + + + +
+ printing; documents +documents; printing +text documents; printing +spreadsheets; printing +presentations; print menu +drawings; printing +choosing printers +printers; choosing +print area selection +selecting; print areas +pages; selecting one to print +printing; selections +printing; copies +copies; printing +spoolfiles with Xprinter + + + + +

Print

+ Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document. + The printing options can vary according to the printer and the operating system that you use. +
+
+ +
+ The Print dialog consists of three main parts: A preview with navigation buttons, tab pages with control elements specific to the current document type, and the Print, Cancel and Help buttons. + If you just want to know how to print your document, click any of the following links. + + + Printing text documents: + + + + + + + + + Printing spreadsheets: + + + + + + + + Printing presentations: + + + + + General printing: + + + + The settings that you define in the Print dialog are valid only for the current print job that you start by clicking the Print button. is this true for Printer Settings, too?If you want to change some options permanently, open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME (application name) - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. + Press Shift+F1 or choose Help - What's This? and point to any control element in the Print dialog to see an extended help text. + + +

Preview

+ The preview shows how each sheet of paper will look. You can browse through all sheets of paper with the buttons below the preview. + +

Preview checkbox

+ Turn on or off display of the print preview. +

Preview navigation box

+ + Enter the number of page to be shown in the preview in the box or use the arrow buttons to display pages in the preview. + + 🡆 Shows preview of the next page. + ⯮ Shows preview of the last page. + + 🡄 Shows preview of the previous page. + ⯬ Shows preview of the first page. +

General

+ On the General tab page, you find the most important control elements for printing. You can define which contents of your document are to be printed. You can select the printer and open the Printer Settings dialog. + +

Printer

+ + The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. + + +

Status

+ Shows the availability of the selected printer. + +

Properties

+ + Opens the Printer Properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select. + + +

Range and copies

+ +

All pages

+ Prints the entire document. + +

Pages

+ + + + + + Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box. + +

Selection

+ + Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document. + + + To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. +

Include

+ Select the subset of pages to print. Possible values are: + + + + + + + Even pages: + Prints only even numbered pages or slides. + + + + + + + + + Odd pages: + Prints only odd numbered pages or slides. + + + + + Odd and even pages: + Prints the entire document. + + + + + + +

From which

+ Select the source of sheet content to be printed. Possible values are Print all sheets and Print selected sheets. + + + +

Paper sides

+ If the printer is capable of duplex printing it's possible to choose between using only one side of the paper or both. + +

Number of copies

+ + Enter the number of copies that you want to print. + + +

Collate

+ Preserves the page order of the original document. + + +

Create separated prints jobs for collated output

+ Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead. + + +

Print in reverse order

+ Check to print pages in reverse order. + +

Page Layout

+ The Page Layout section can be used to save some sheets of paper by printing several pages onto each sheet of paper. You define the arrangement and size of output pages on the physical paper. + + Change the arrangement of pages to be printed on every sheet of paper. The preview shows how every final sheet of paper will look. + For some document types, you can choose to print a brochure. + + +

Paper size

+ Set the paper size you would like to use. The preview will show how the document would look on a paper of the given size. + +

Orientation

+ Select the orientation of the paper. Possible values are Portrait and Landscape. + + + +

Pages per sheet

+ Print multiple pages per sheet of paper. + Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper. When the number of pages is set to Custom, then the following settings shows: + +

Pages

+ Select number of rows. + +

By

+ Select number of columns. + +

Margin

+ Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge. + +

Distance

+ Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper. + + +

Order

+ Select order in which pages are to be printed. + + +

Draw a border on each page

+ Check to draw a border around each page. + + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer

+

Contents

+ +

Page Background

+ Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page, which you have specified under Format - Page - Background. + +

Images and other graphic objects

+ Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed. + +

Hidden text

+ Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. + +

Text placeholders

+ Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout. + +

Form controls

+ Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. +

Comments

+ + + Specify where to print comments (if any). +

Color

+ +

Print text in black

+ Specifies whether to always print text in black. +

Pages

+ +

Print automatically inserted blank pages

+ If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Calc

+

Pages

+ +

Suppress output of empty pages

+ If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Impress

+

Document

+ +

Type

+ Select which parts of the document should be printed. + +

Slides per page

+ Select how many slides to print per page. + +

Order

+ Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page. +

Contents

+ +

Slide name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. + +

Date and time

+ Specifies whether to print the current date and time. + +

Hidden pages

+ Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden. +
+

Color

+ +

Original colors

+ Specifies to print in original colors. + +

Grayscale

+ Specifies to print colors as grayscale. + +

Black and white

+ Specifies to print colors as black and white. + +

Size

+ Specify how to scale slides in the printout. + +

Original size

+ Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. + +

Fit to printable page

+ Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer. +

Distribute on multiple sheets of paper

+ Prints a large format document, such as a poster or banner, by distributing the document page across multiple sheets of paper. The distribution option calculates how many sheets of paper are needed. You can then piece together the sheets. + +

Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides

+ Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, repeat the pages or slides on one sheet of paper. +
+ + +

%PRODUCTNAME Draw

+

Contents

+ +

Page name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. + +

Date and time

+ Specifies whether to print the current date and time. + + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Math

+

Contents

+

Title

+ + Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. + +

Formula text

+ Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. + +

Borders

+ Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. +

Size

+ +

Original size

+ Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. + +

Fit to page

+ Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. + + +

Scaling

+ Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. + Enter the scale factor for scaling the formula. + + + +

Unix hints

+ You can also use the Printer Settings to specify additional printer options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73eab3b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Printer Setup + /text/shared/01/01140000.xhp + + + +
+ + printers; properties + settings; printers + properties; printers + default printer; setting up + printers; default printer + page formats; restriction + + + + +Printer Settings + Select the default printer for the current document. +
+
+ +
+You might experience a slight delay when you change the default printer for a document that contains embedded $[officename] OLE objects. +Printer + Lists the information that applies to the selected printer. + If the list is empty, you need to install a default printer for your operating system. Refer to the online help for your operating system for instructions on how to install and setup a default printer. + +Name + Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list. +Status + Describes the current status of the selected printer. +Type + Displays the type of printer that you selected. +Location + Displays the port for the selected printer. +Comments + Displays additional information for the printer. + +Properties + Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document. + Ensure that the Landscape or Portrait layout option set in the Printer Properties dialog matches the page format that you set by choosing Slide - PropertiesPage - PropertiesFormat - Page. + +Options + Opens the Printer Options dialog where you can override the global printer options set on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME + +Writer +Calc +Writer/Web - Print panel for the current document. + The Options button is only available in %PRODUCTNAME Writer and Calc. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66c7a327b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Send + /text/shared/01/01160000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Send +Sends a copy of the current document to different applications. +
+
+ +
+Email Document +New menu commands, see #i46895 and #i63793UFI: New commands all have the same Help IDs, but different names + +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. + +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Spreadsheet + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft Excel + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Excel file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Presentation +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft PowerPoint file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Text +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft Word +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Word file format is used. + + + + + +UFI: removed 2 help ids +Create Master Document + +Create HTML Document + + + +Create AutoAbstract + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e41d29ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Email Document + /text/shared/01/01160200.xhp + + + +
+ +Email Document + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General is used. +
+
+ +
+If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the email. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48d9efd28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Create Master Document + /text/shared/01/01160300.xhp + + + + + +

Create Master Document

+ Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document. +
+ +
+The Navigator appears after you create a master document. To edit a sub-document, double-click the name of a sub-document in the Navigator. +

File name

+ + + +

separated by

+ Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents. By default a new document is created for every outline level 1. +

File type

+ +

Save

+removed autoextension + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1cb9ae68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Exit + /text/shared/01/01170000.xhp + + + +
+exiting;$[officename] +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry + +

Exit %PRODUCTNAME

+ Closes all %PRODUCTNAME programs and prompts you to save your changes. This command does not exist on macOS systems. +
+
+ +
+
+Close the current document +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6ba96dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Save All + /text/shared/01/01180000.xhp + + + +
+ +Save All + Saves all modified $[officename] documents. +
+
+ +
+If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d178b3cf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Versions + /text/shared/01/01190000.xhp + + + + + +
+versions;file saving as, restriction + + + +Versions + Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete and compare previous versions. +
+
+ +
+If you save a copy of a file that contains version information (by choosing File - Save As), the version information is not saved with the file. +New versions + Set the options for saving a new version of the document. + +Save New Version + Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version. + +Insert Version Comment + Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment. + +Always save version when closing + If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document. + If you save the document manually, do not change the document after saving, and then close, no new version will be created.issue 12653 + +Existing versions + Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments. + + +Open + Opens the selected version in a read-only window. + +Show + Displays the entire comment for the selected version. + +Delete + Deletes the selected version. + +Compare + Compare the changes that were made in each version. If you want, you can Manage Changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4575f387 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Recent Documents +/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp + + + +
+
+ +Recent Documents + +Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name. +
+
+The number of files that are listed can be changed in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/History PickListSize. +The file is opened by the %PRODUCTNAME module that saved it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ed657d0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Undo + /text/shared/01/02010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+undoing;editing +editing;undoing + + + +

Undo

+ Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+To change the number of commands that you can undo, go to the Expert configuration and set a new value of the property "/org.openoffice.Office.Common/Undo Steps". +Some commands (for example, editing Styles) cannot be undone. +You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo. +

About the Undo command in database tables

+ When you are working with database tables, you can only undo the last command. + If you change the content of a record in a database table that has not been saved, and then use the Undo command, the record is erased. +

About the Undo command in presentations

+ The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5794607ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Redo + /text/shared/01/02020000.xhp + + + +
+restoring;editing +redo command +mw made "restoring..." a two level entry + + +Redo + Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e9dcb4b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Repeat + /text/shared/01/02030000.xhp + + + +
+repeating; commands +commands; repeating + + + +Repeat + Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc. +
+UFI: had to remove switch construct because help-ids don't work any more inside switches, see i47727 +although this invalidates the fix of i34949 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c52d1222 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Cut + /text/shared/01/02040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cutting +clipboard; cutting + + +Cut + Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da25d06a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Copy + /text/shared/01/02050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+clipboard; Unix +copying; in Unix + + +Copy + Copies the selection to the clipboard. +
+Each time you copy, the existing content of the clipboard is overwritten. +
+ +
+ + +$[officename] also supports the clipboard under Unix; however, you must use the $[officename] commands, such as Ctrl+C. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27993e859 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Paste + /text/shared/01/02060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +pasting; cell ranges +clipboard; pasting +cells; pasting +pasting; Enter key +pasting; Ctrl+V shortcut + +mw deleted "cell ranges,pasting" + + + + +overwrite dialog in Calc if target is not empty + + + +Paste + Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.UFI: text used for icon and menu +
+
+ + + + Press the Enter key. + + +
+ + +In a spreadsheet, when you paste a range of cells from the clipboard, the result depends on the current selection: If only one cell is selected, the cell range will be pasted started from that cell. If you mark a cell range wider than the cell range in the clipboard, the cell range will be pasted repeatedly to fill the selected cell range. +Pasting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + When copying a cell or a range in %PRODUCTNAME Calc the selection is marked with blinking dashes around the range (the "marching ants") to indicate what was being selected during the clipboard operation. + Marching ants mark for Calc clipboard + There are two ways to paste the clipboard contents in a spreadsheet document: + + + Using CommandCtrl+V shortcut, the Paste icon in the toolbar or choose Edit - Paste: The contents of the clipboard is pasted in the target location and the clipboard keeps the contents for more paste operations. The copied selection mark stays active. + + + Using Enter key: the clipboard contents is pasted once and cleared. No further paste is possible with the clipboard contents. The copied selection mark is disabled. + + +To deactivate the copied selection mark press the Esc key. The clipboard contents is not cleared. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..802711c84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Special + /text/shared/01/02070000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Paste Special

+ Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. +
+ + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + +

Source

+ Displays the source of the clipboard contents. + +

Selection

+ Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. The available format depends on the copied or cut source format. + + + When you paste HTML data into a text document, you can choose "HTML format" or "HTML format without comments". The second choice is the default; it pastes all HTML data, but no comments. + + + + + + + +

Paste Special

+ This dialog appears in Calc if the clipboard contains spreadsheet cells. +

Presets

+ Choose one of the presets to quickly load commonly used settings for Paste Special. +

Values Only

+ Pastes only cell contents including text, numbers and dates. +

Values & Formats

+ Pastes cell contents and formats applied to cells. +

Formats Only

+ Pastes only formats applied to cells. +

Transpose All

+ Pastes all cell contents with their positions transposed. +

Run immediately

+ Check this option to load the preset and immediately apply it. When unchecked, choosing a preset will only load the corresponding options in the dialog without pasting anything. + Uncheck Run immediately to load the options from the preset and change its settings in the Paste Special dialog before applying them by clicking OK. +

Selection

+ Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. + +

Paste all

+ Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document. + +

Texti50436

+ Inserts cells containing text. + +

Numbers

+ Inserts cells containing numbers. + +

Date & Time

+ Inserts cells containing date and time values. + +

Formulas

+ Inserts cells containing formulae. + +

Comments

+ Inserts comments that are attached to cells. If you want to add the comments to the existing cell content, select the "Add" operation. + +

Formats

+ Inserts cell format attributes. + +

Objects

+ Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects. +

Operations

+ Select the operation to apply when you paste cells into your sheet. + +

None

+ Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents. + +

Add

+ Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells. + +

Subtract

+ Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells. + +

Multiply

+ Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells. + +

Divide

+ Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells.UFI: fixes #i14796# +

Options

+ Sets the paste options for the clipboard contents. + +

Skip empty cells

+ Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the "Multiply" or the "Divide" operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard. + + If you select a mathematical operation and clear the Skip empty cells box, empty cells in the clipboard are treated as zeroes. For example, if you apply the Multiply operation, the target cells are filled with zeroes. + +

Transpose

+ The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows.i59261 + +

Link

+ Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the "Paste All" option is also selected. +You can also link sheets within the same spreadsheet. When you link to other files, a DDE link is automatically created. A DDE link is inserted as a matrix formula and can only be modified as a whole. +

Shift Cells

+ Set the shift options for the target cells when the clipboard content is inserted. + +

Don't shift

+ Inserted cells replace the target cells. + +

Down

+ Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard. + +

Right

+ Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af99cede0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Select All + /text/shared/01/02090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Select All + Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object. +
+To select all of the cells on a sheet, click the button at the intersection of the column and row header in the top left corner of the sheet. +
+ +
+ +To select all of the sheets in a spreadsheet file, right-click the name tab of a sheet, and then choose Select All Sheets. Selects all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46acfe4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,411 @@ + + + + + + Find & Replace + /text/shared/01/02100000.xhp + + + +
+ + Find & Replace dialog + + + + + +

+ + Find & Replace + +

+ + + Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document. + + +
+
+ +
+ Find Toolbar + + + Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text. + + + + Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction. + + + + Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction. + + + +

Find

+ + Enter the text that you want to find, or select a previous search from the list. + + Search options are listed under the Find box and in the Other options area of the dialog. + +

Match case

+ + case sensitivity;searching + + + + Matches the exact character provided in the Find box without considering any alternative case matches. + + + Disable this option to consider all possible case matches. For example, entering "a" in the Find box matches both "a" and "A". + Beware that some characters may have more than one match when Match case is disabled. For instance, "s" matches "s", "S" and "ß" (sharp S used in the German language). + + + searching;formatted numbers + searching;formatted display + finding;formatted numbers + finding;formatted display + + + +

Formatted display

+ + Includes number formatting characters in the search. + + + + +

+ + Entire Cells + Whole words only + +

+ + + Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text. + + + + searching; all sheets + finding; in all sheets + sheets; searching all + + +

+ + All sheets + +

+ + + Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. + + + + Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. + + + +

Replace

+ + Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. + + Replacement options are listed under the Find box and in the Other options area of the dialog. + + + + +

Find All

+ Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). + + + copied text as hidden help, see issue 115137 + + + Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). + + +

Find Previous

+ + Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. + + +

Find Next

+ + Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. + + +

Replace

+ + Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. + + +

Replace All

+ + Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace. + + Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. + + +

Other options

+ + + Shows more or fewer search options. Click this label again to hide the extended search options. + + + finding; selections + + +

Current selection only

+ + Searches only the selected text or cells. + + +

Replace backwards

+ + Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. + + + + +

Comments

+ + In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches. + + + + + +

+ + + + Regular expressions + +

+ + + + + Allows you to use regular expressions in your search. + + + i72448 +Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal display, add hidden help text as "fall through". + + Allows you to use regular expressions in your search. + + + + + + + + + had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 + + + Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. + + +

+ + Paragraph Styles / Including Styles + Cell Styles + +

+ + Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. + + + + +

+ Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) +

+ + + Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. + + + + +

+ Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) +

+ + + Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Sounds button to specify the search options. + + + + + + + Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. + + + + Searching in Japanese + +

Diacritic-sensitive

+ Searches exact match, does not include Unicode combining marks in search. For example, searching for كتب will not match كَتَبَ or كُتُب or كتِب and so on. +

Kashida-sensitive

+ Searches exact match, does not include Arabic Tatweel mark U+0640 (also known as Kashida) in search. For example, searching for كتاب will not match كـتاب or كتــــاب and so on. +

+ + + Attributes + + +

+ + + + + + +

+ + + Format + + +

+ + + Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. + After you select format and attributes that you want to search for, the Paragraph Styles checkbox in the Other options area changes to Including Styles. Select this checkbox if you want to include search for formatting and attributes set by styles. + + + +

+ + No Format + +

+ + + Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats. + + + + Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats. + + + + The search and replace criteria selected for Format and Attributes are displayed under the Find and Replace boxes. + + +

+ + Direction + +

+ + + Determines the order for searching the cells. + + + +

+ + Rows + +

+ + + Searches from left to right across the rows. + + + + Searches from left to right across the rows. + + +

+ + Columns + +

+ + + Searches from top to bottom through the columns. + + + + Searches from top to bottom through the columns. + +

+ + Search in + +

+ +

+ + Formulas + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. + +

+ + Values + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + +

+ + Comments + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + + + After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+CommandCtrl+F. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7caadd4a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ + + + + + + + List of Regular Expressions + /text/shared/01/02100001.xhp + + + + +regular expressions; list of +regular expressions; new line +regular expressions; empty paragraph +regular expressions; begin of word +regular expressions; begin of paragraph +regular expressions; end of paragraph +lists; regular expressions +replacing; tab stops (regular expressions) +tab stops; regular expressions +concatenation, see ampersand symbol +ampersand symbol, see also operators +mw added "replacing;" and "tab stops;" +

List of Regular Expressions

+ + + + Term + + + Representation/Use + + + + + Any character + + + The given character, unless it is a regular expression meta character. The list of meta characters follows in this table. + + + + + . + + + Any single character except a line break or a paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" matches both "shirt" and "short". + + + + + ^ + + + The beginning of a paragraph or cell. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter" matches the word "Peter" only when it is the first word of a paragraph. + + + + + + $ + + + The end of a paragraph or cell. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$" matches only when the word "Peter" is the last word of a paragraph, note "Peter" cannot be followed by a period. + $ on its own matches the end of a paragraph. This way it is possible to search and replace paragraph breaks. + + + + + * + + + Zero or more of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "Ab*c" matches "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. + + + + + + + + + + One or more of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". + The longest possible string that matches this regular expression in a paragraph is always matched. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. + + + + + ? + + + Zero or one of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "Texts?" matches "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". + + + + + \ + + + The special character that follows it is interpreted as a normal character and not as a regular expression meta character (except for the combinations "\n", "\t", "\b", "\>" and "\<"). For example, "tree\." matches "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". + + + + + \n + + + A line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination when in the Find text box. + A paragraph break that can be entered with the Enter or Return key when in the Replace text box in Writer. Has no special meaning in Calc, and is treated literally there. + To change line breaks into paragraph breaks, enter \n in both the Find and Replace boxes, and then perform a search and replace. + + + + + \t + + + A tab character. Can also be used in the Replace box. + + + + + + \b + + + A word boundary. For example, "\bbook" matches "bookmark" and "book" but not "checkbook" whereas "book\b" matches "checkbook" and "book" but not "bookmark". + Note, this form replaces the obsolete (although they still work for now) forms "\>" (match end of word) and "\<" (match start of word). + + + + + ^$ + + + Finds an empty paragraph. + + + + + ^. + + + Finds the first character of a paragraph. + + + + + & or $0 + + + Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Find box to the term in the Replace box when you make a replacement. + For example, if you enter "window" in the Find box and "&frame" in the Replace box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". + You can also enter an "&" in the Replace box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. + + + + + [...] + + + Any single occurrence of any one of the characters that are between the brackets. For example: "[abc123]" matches the characters ‘a’, ‘b’, ’c’, ‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’. "[a-e]" matches single occurrences of the characters a through e, inclusive (the range must be specified with the character having the smallest Unicode code number first). "[a-eh-x]" matches any single occurrence of the characters that are in the ranges ‘a’ through ‘e’ and ‘h’ through ‘x’. + + + + + [^...] + + + Any single occurrence of a character, including Tab, Space and Line Break characters, that is not in the list of characters specified inclusive ranges are permitted. For example "[^a-syz]" matches all characters not in the inclusive range ‘a’ through ‘s’ or the characters ‘y’ and ‘z’. + + + + + \uXXXX + \UXXXXXXXX + + + The character represented by the four-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXX). + The character represented by the eight-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXXXXXX). + For certain symbol fonts the symbol (glyph) that you see on screen may look related to a different Unicode code than what is actually used for it in the font. The Unicode codes can be viewed by choosing Insert - Special Character, or by using Unicode conversion shortcut. + + + + + | + + + The infix operator delimiting alternatives. Matches the term preceding the "|" or the term following the "|". For example, "this|that" matches occurrences of both "this" and "that". + + + + + {N} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies an exact number of occurrences ("N") of the regular expression term immediately preceding it must be present for a match to occur. For example, "tre{2}" matches "tree". + + + + + {N,M} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies a range (minimum of "N" to a maximum of "M") of occurrences of the regular expression term immediately preceding it that can be present for a match to occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" matches "tre" and "tree". + + + + + {N,} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies a range (minimum "N" to an unspecified maximum) of occurrences of the regular expression term immediately preceding it that can be present for a match to occur. (The maximum number of occurrences is limited only by the size of the document). For example, "tre{2,}" matches "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". + + + + + (...) + + + The grouping construct that serves three purposes. + + + To enclose a set of ‘|’ alternatives. For example, the regular expression "b(oo|ac)k" matches both "book" and "back". + + + To group terms in a complex expression to be operated on by the post-fix operators: "*", "+" and "?" along with the post-fix repetition operators. For example, the regular expression "a(bc)?d" matches both "ad" and "abcd" in a search.; the regular expression "M(iss){2}ippi" matches "Mississippi". + + + To record the matched sub string inside the parentheses as a reference for later use in the Find box using the "\n" construct or in the Replace box using the "$n" construct. The reference to the first match is represented by "\1" in the Find box and by "$1" in the Replace box. The reference to the second matched sub string by "\2" and "$2" respectively, and so on. + + + For example, the regular expression "(890)7\1\1" matches "8907890890". + With the regular expression "\b(fruit|truth)\b" in the Find box and the regular expression "$1ful" in the Replace box occurrences of the words "fruit" and "truth" can be replaced with the words "fruitful" and "truthful" respectively without affecting the words "fruitfully" and "truthfully" + + + + + [:alpha:] + + + Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:digit:] + + + Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:alnum:] + + + Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). + + + + + [:space:] + + + Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# + + + + + [:print:] + + + Represents a printable character. + + + + + [:cntrl:] + + + Represents a nonprinting character. + + + + + [:lower:] + + + Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + + + [:upper:] + + + Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + +
+For a full list of supported metacharacters and syntax, see ICU Regular Expressions documentation +Regular expression terms can be combined to form complex and sophisticated regular expressions for searches as show in the following examples. +

Examples

+ + + + + Expression + + + Meaning + + + + + ^$ + + + An empty paragraph. + ^ specifies that the match must be at the start of a paragraph, + $ specifies that a paragraph mark or the end of a cell must follow the matched string. + + + + + ^. + + + The first character of a paragraph. + + . specifies any single character. + + + + + e([:digit:])? + + + Matches "e" by itself or an "e" followed by one digit. + e specifies the character "e", + [:digit:] specifies any decimal digit, + ? specifies zero or one occurrences of [:digit:]. + + + + + ^([:digit:])$ + + + Matches a paragraph or cells containing exactly one digit. + + + + + + + + ^[:digit:]{3}$ + + + Matches a paragraph or cell containing only three digit numbers + + + {3} specifies that [:digit:] must occur three times, + + + + + + \bconst(itu|ruc)tion\b + + + Matches the words "constitution" and "construction" but not the word "constitutional." + \b specifies that the match must begin at a word boundary, + const specifies the characters "const", + ( starts the group, + itu specifies the characters "itu", + | specifies the alternative, + ruc specifies the characters "ruc", + ) ends the group, + tion specifies the characters "tion", + \b specifies that the match must end at a word boundary. + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + +Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer +Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..512659999 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Similarity Search +/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+For example, a similarity search can find words that differ from the Find text by two characters. + +Set the options for the similarity search. +

Settings

+Define the criteria for determining if a word is similar to the search term. + +

Exchange characters

+Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged. For example, if you specify 2 exchanged characters, "sweep" and "creep" are considered similar. + +

Add characters

+Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term. + +

Remove characters

+Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term. + +

Combine

+Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings. +Using Combine better meets a user's expectations from looking at the settings, but may return false positives. Not using Combine may match less than expected, but does not return false positives. +A Weighted Levenshtein Distance (WLD) algorithm is used. If Combine is not checked, then settings are treated as an exclusive-OR (strict WLD). +If Combine is checked, then settings are treated as an inclusive-OR (relaxed WLD). + +Be careful when using Replace All with Similarity Search. Best to be certain first about what will be found. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da757b8d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + + + + + + + Attributes + /text/shared/01/02100200.xhp + + + + + +

Attributes

+ Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you select the Outline attribute, then all characters formatted manually with an Outline effect are found. If you also want to find characters with an Outline effect as part of a style, then select Including styles in the Other Options section, before searching. + +

Options

+ Select the attributes that you want to search for. + +
+

Keep with Next Paragraph

+ Finds the Keep With Next Paragraph attribute. +
+
+

Do not split paragraph

+ Finds paragraphs with the Do not split paragraph attribute enabled. +
+
+

Spacing

+ Finds the Spacing (top, bottom) attribute. +
+
+

Alignment

+ Finds the Alignment (left, right, centered, justified) attribute. +
+
+

Effects

+ Finds characters that use a Case effect (Uppercase, Lowercase, Capitalize every word, or Small capitals). +
+
+

Blinking

+ Finds characters use the Blinking attribute. +
+
+

Strikethrough

+ Finds characters formatted with the Strikethrough attribute. +
+
+

Indent

+ Finds the Indent (from left, from right, first line) attribute. +
+
+

Widows

+ Finds the Widow Control attribute. +
+
+

Kerning

+ Finds Spacing (standard, expanded, condensed) attributes and pair kerning. +
+
+

Outline

+ Finds characters formatted with the Outline attribute. +
+
+

Position

+ Finds characters using the Normal, Superscript or Subscript attributes. +
+
+

Page line-spacing

+ Finds paragraphs with the Activate page line-spacing attribute enabled. +
+
+

Relief

+ Finds characters formatted with the Relief attribute. +
+
+

Rotation

+ Finds the Rotation attribute. +
+
+

Shadowed

+ Finds characters formatted with the Shadowed attribute. +
+
+

Font

+ Finds any instance where the default font was changed. +
+
+

Font Color

+ Finds any instance where the default font color was changed. +
+
+

Font Size

+ Finds the Font size/Font height attribute. +
+
+

Font Weight

+ Finds the Bold or the Bold and Italic attribute. +
+
+

Font Posture

+ Finds the Italic or the Bold and Italic attribute. +
+
+

Orphans

+ Finds the Orphan Control attribute. +
+
+

Page Style

+ Finds the Break With Page Style attribute. +
+
+

Hyphenation

+ Finds the Hyphenation attribute. +
+
+

Character scaling

+ Finds characters formatted with Scale width. +
+
+

Language

+ Finds the Language attribute (for spelling). +
+
+

Tab Stops

+ Finds paragraphs that use an additional tab set. +
+
+

Underline

+ Finds characters formatted with Underlining. +
+
+

Vertical text alignment

+ Finds the Vertical text alignment attribute. +
+
+

Individual Words

+ Finds characters formatted with Underlining or Strikethrough as Individual words. +
+
+

Character background

+ Finds characters that use the Background attribute. +
+
+

Line Spacing

+ Finds the Line spacing (single line, 1.5 lines, double, proportional, at least, lead) attribute. +
+
+

Overline

+ Finds characters formatted with Overlining. +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04d1c03dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Text Format (Search) + /text/shared/01/02100300.xhp + + + + +

Text Format (Search)

+ Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. +
+ +
+The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. +You do not need to specify a search text in the Find box when you search and replace formatting. +To define a replacement format, click in the Replace box, and then click the Format button. +Use the Text Format (Search) or the Text Format (Replace) to define your formatting search criteria. These dialogs contain the following tab pages: + + + + + + + + + + +
+Attributes +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f157cbf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator for Master Documents + /text/shared/01/02110000.xhp + + + +

Navigator for Master Documents

+In a Master document, you can switch the Navigator between normal view and master view. + +The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed. +The master view in the Navigator displays the following icons: +

Toggle Master View

+ Switches between master view and normal view. + + + + Icon + + + Toggle Master View + + +
+ + +

Edit

+ Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the Index dialog is opened. + + + + Icon + + + Edit + + +
+ + +

Update

+ Click and choose the contents that you want to update. + + + + Icon + + + Update + + +
+ +

Selection

+ Updates the contents of the selection. + +

Indexes

+ Updates all indexes. + +

Links

+ Updates all links. + +

All

+ Updates all contents. + +

Edit link

+ This command is found by right-clicking an inserted file in the Navigator. Changes the link properties for the selected file. + + +

Insert

+ Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document. + You can also insert files into the master document by dragging a file from your desktop and dropping on the master view of the Navigator. + + + + Icon + + + Insert + + +
+ +

Index

+ Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document. + +

File

+ Inserts one or more existing files into the master document. + +

New Document

+ Creates and inserts a new sub-document. When you create a new document, you are prompted to enter the file name and the location where you want to save the document. + +

Text

+ Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + +

Save Contents as well

+ Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed. + + + + Icon + + + Save Contents as well + + +
+ +

Move Up

+ Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. + + + + Icon + + + Move Up + + +
+ +

Move Down

+ Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. + + + + Icon + + + Move Down + + +
+ +

Delete

+This command is found by right-clicking an item in the Navigator. Deletes the selection from the Navigator list and the master document, but does not delete the subdocument file. +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31e3b4d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Links to External Files + /text/shared/01/02180000.xhp + + + + + + + + opening;documents with links + links; updating specific links + updating; links, on opening + links; opening files with + + + +

Edit Links to External Files

+ You can change or remove each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files. +This command can be used with external file links to sections (place cursor outside of the section), master documents,sheets linked with Sheet - Insert Sheet from File or Sheet - External Links, Function WEBSERVICE, images and OLE objects (when inserted with a link to an external file). + +
+ +
+ + + +

Source file

+ Lists the path to the source file. If the path defines a DDE link, relative paths must be preceded with "file:". +Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link. +

Element

+ Lists the application (if known) that last saved the source file. +

Type

+ Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. +

Status

+ Lists additional information about the source file. + +

Automatic

+ Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. + The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere + +

Manual

+ Only updates the link when you click the Update button. + +

Modify

+ Change the source file for the selected link. + +

Break Link

+ Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. + +

Update

+Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. + +When you open a file that contains links, you are prompted to update the links. Depending on where the linked files are stored, the update process can take several minutes to complete. +If you are loading a file that contains DDE links, you are prompted to update the links. Decline the update if you do not want to establish a connection to the DDE server. +Links to remote locations can be constructed that transmit local data to the remote server. Decline the prompt to update if you do not trust the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d833132b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Modify DDE Links + /text/shared/01/02180100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + DDE links; modifying +changing; DDE links + +Modify DDE Links + Change the properties for the selected DDE link. +
+ +
+Modify Link + Lets you set the properties for the selected link. + +Application +Lists the application that last saved the source file. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name soffice. + +File +Path to the source file. Relative paths must be expressed by full URI, for example, with file://. + +Category + Lists the section or object that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section or object here. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7f4622fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + OLE Object (Edit) + /text/shared/01/02200000.xhp + + + +
+ +

OLE Object

+Lets you edit a selected OLE object that you inserted from the Insert - OLE Object submenu. +
+
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+ +Resizes the object to the original size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6eff7e2d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/shared/01/02200100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; editingediting; objects +

Edit

+ Lets you edit a selected OLE object that you inserted with the Insert – OLE Object command. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb3721397 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Open + /text/shared/01/02200200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; opening +opening; objects + +

Open

+ Opens the selected OLE object with the program that the object was created in. +
+
+ +
+This menu command is inserted into Edit – Objects submenu by the application that created the linked object. Depending on the application, the Open command for the OLE object might have a different name. +After you have completed your changes, close the source file for the OLE object. The OLE object is then updated in the container document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee52fea7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Floating Frame Properties + /text/shared/01/02210101.xhp + + + + + +

Floating Frame Properties

+ Changes the properties of the selected floating frame. Floating frames work best when they contain an html document, and when they are inserted in another html document. +
+ +
+ +Name + Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore (_). + +

Contents

+ Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the Browse button and locate the file that you want to display. For example, you can enter: + + + https://www.example.com + + + file:///C:/Documents/Readme.txtAdolfo: Is the "|" character after the "file:///c" correct? And a user file should *never* be in a root directory anyway.SophiaS: agreed, changed + + + +Browse + Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open. +Scroll Bar + Add or remove a scrollbar from the selected floating frame. + +On + Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame. + +Off + Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame. + +Automatic + Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed. +Border + Displays or hides the border of the floating frame. + +On + Displays the border of the floating frame. + +Off + Hides the border of the floating frame. +Padding + Define the amount of space that is left between the border of the floating frame and the contents of the floating frame provided that both documents inside and outside the floating frame are HTML documents. + +Width + Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. + +Default + Applies the default horizontal spacing. + +Height + Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. + +Default + Applies the default vertical spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0e8d6ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,249 @@ + + + + + + + ImageMap Editor + /text/shared/01/02220000.xhp + + + + + + +

ImageMap Editor

+ Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. +
+ +
+ +You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. + +

Apply

+ Applies the changes that you made to the image map. + + + + Icon Apply + + + Apply + + +
+ +

Open

+ Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format. + + + + Icon Open + + + Open + + +
+ +

Save

+ Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format. + + + + Icon Save + + + Save + + +
+ +

Select

+ Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing. + + + + Icon Select + + + Select + + +
+ +

Rectangle

+ Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open. + + + + Icon Rectangle + + + Rectangle + + +
+ +

Ellipse

+ Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. + + + + Icon Ellipse + + + Ellipse + + +
+ +

Polygon

+ Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. + + + + Icon Polygon + + + Polygon + + +
+ +

Freeform Polygon

+ Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. + + + + Icon Freeform Polygon + + + Freeform Polygon + + +
+ +

Edit Points

+ Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points. + + + + Icon Edit points + + + Edit points + + +
+ +

Move Points

+ Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot. + + + + Icon Move Points + + + Move Points + + +
+ +

Insert Points

+ Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot. + + + + Icon Insert Points + + + Insert Points + + +
+ +

Delete Points

+ Deletes the selected anchor point. + + + + Icon Delete Points + + + Delete Points + + +
+ +

Active

+ Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent. + + + + Icon Active + + + + + +
+ +

Macro

+ Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser. + + + + Icon Macro + + + Macro + + +
+ +

Properties

+ Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot. + + + + Icon PropertiesUFI: see #60783 + + + Properties + + +
+ +

Address:

+ Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to an anchor within the document, the address should be of the form "file:///C:/Documents/document_name#anchor_name"This needs a rework as the document address example seems to be windows only and uses forbidden root directory again.. + +

Text Alternative

+ Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. +

Frame:

+ Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name from the list. + List of frame types + +

Graphic View

+ don't hide the imagemap if extended tips are onDisplays the image map, so that you can click and edit the hotspots. +
+ Controlling the ImageMap Editor With the Keyboard +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..270f99f7a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Description + /text/shared/01/02220100.xhp + + + + +hotspots; properties +properties; hotspots +ImageMap; hotspot properties +MW inserted index entries + + +

Description

+ Lists the properties for the selected hotspot. +
+ +
+

Hyperlink

+ Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. + +URL: + Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C:/Documents/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". + +

Text Alternative

+ Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. + +

Frame:

+ Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list. + +

Name:

+ Enter a name for the image. + +

Description

+ Enter a description for the hotspot. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33d242492 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Track Changes + /text/shared/01/02230000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Track Changes

+Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + +

Manage

+ + +

Comment

+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac239901f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + Record Changes + /text/shared/01/02230100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Record Changes

+Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ +If you choose Edit - Track Changes - Show, the lines containing changed text passages are indicated by a vertical line in the left page margin. You can set the properties of the vertical line and the other markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box. + +You can set the properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. +The following changes are tracked when the record changes command is active: + + + + + Paste and delete text. + + + + + Move paragraphs. + + + Sort text. + + + Find and replace text. + + + Insert attributes that are one character wide, for example, fields and footnotes. + + + Insert sheets, ranges. + + + Insert document. + + + Insert AutoText. + + + Insert from clipboard. + + + + + + + Change cell contents by insertions and deletions. + + + Insert or delete columns and rows. + + + Insert sheets. + + + Cut, copy and paste through the clipboard. + + + Move by dragging and dropping. + + + + + + +When the record changes command is active, you cannot delete, move, merge, split, or copy cells or delete sheets. + + +removed the note about no-tables-comparing in Writer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b004d63e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Protect Changes + /text/shared/01/02230150.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Protect Changes

+Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a1815654 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Show Changes + /text/shared/01/02230200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +changes; showing +hiding;changes +showing; changes + + + + + +
+

Show Track Changes

+Shows or hides recorded changes. + +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. + +When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. + + + + +

Show changes in spreadsheet

+ Shows or hides recorded changes. + + +

Show accepted changes

+ Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. + +

Show rejected changes

+ Shows or hides the changes that were rejected. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17781eec2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Comment + /text/shared/01/02230300.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + +
+

Insert Track Change Comment

+Enter a comment for the recorded change. + +
+ +
+ +
+You can attach a comment when the cursor is in a changed text passagethe changed cell is selected +, or in the Manage Changes dialog. +Comments are displayed as callouts in the sheet when you rest your mouse pointer over a cell with a recorded change. You can also view comments that are attached to a changed cell in the changes list in the Manage Changes dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74c01210d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Manage changes + /text/shared/01/02230400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + +
+

Manage changes

+ Accept or reject recorded changes. +
+ +
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a14aeca21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + List + /text/shared/01/02230401.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

List

+Accept or reject individual changes. +
+
+ +
+The List tab displays all of the changes that were recorded in the current document. If you want to filter this list, click the Filter tab, and then select your filter criteria. If the list contains nested changes, the dependencies are shown regardless of the filter. + +Nested changes occur where changes made by different authors overlap. + +Click the plus sign beside an entry in the list to view all of the changes that were recorded for a cell. + +If one of the nested changes for a cell matches a filter criterion, all of the changes for the cell are displayed. When you filter the change list, the entries in the list appear in different colors according to the following table: + + + + + +Color + + +Meaning + + + + +black + + +The entry matches a filter criterion. + + + + +blue + + +One or more subentries matches a filter criterion. + + + + +gray + + +The subentry does not match a filter criterion. + + + + +green + + +The subentry matches a filter criterion. + + +
+ + + +

Selection field

+Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading. Hold down CommandCtrl while you click to select multiple entries in the list. +To edit the comment for an entry in the list, right-click the entry, and then choose Edit - Comment. +After you accept or reject a change, the entries of the list are re-ordered according to "Accepted" or "Rejected" status. + + +

Action

+Lists the changes that were made in the document. +

Position.

+Lists the cells with contents that were changed. + +

Author

+ Lists the user who made the change. + +

Date

+ Lists the date and time that the change was made. + +

Comment

+ Lists the comments that are attached to the change. + + +

Accept

+ Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. + + +

Reject

+ Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. + +

Accept All

+ Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. + +

Reject All

+ Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. + + +To reverse the acceptance or rejection of a change, choose Undo on the Edit menu. + + + +

Undo +

+If you made changes by choosing Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes, the Undo button appears in the dialog. Reverse the last Accept or Reject command. + There are additional commands in the context menu of the list: + + +

Edit comment

+ Edit the comment for the selected change. +

Sort

+ Sorts the list according to the column headings. + +

Action

+ Sorts the list according to the type of change. + +

Author

+ Sorts the list according to the author. + +

Date

+ Sorts the list according to the date and time. + +

Comment

+ Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes. + +

Document Position

+ Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81ea076aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Filter + /text/shared/01/02230402.xhp + + + +
+

Filter

+Set the criteria for filtering the list of changes on the List tab. + + + +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +

Date

+Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify. + + +

Set Date/Time

+ + + + +Icon Set Date/Time + + +Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes. + + +
+ + +

Author

+Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list. + + + + + + + +

Range

+ Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...). +

Shrink/Max

+ + + + +Icon Shrink/Max + + + Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter, and then click this button to return to the filter list. + + +
+ + + + +

Action

+ Filters the list of changes according to the type of change that you select in the Action box. + + + + + +

Comment

+Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter. +You can also use regular expressions (wildcards) when you filter the comments. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dccf43d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Merge Document + /text/shared/01/02230500.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Merge Document

+Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. Identical changes are merged automatically. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fef7ab09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Compare Document + /text/shared/01/02240000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Compare Document

+ +Compares the current document with a document that you select. + The contents of the selected document are marked as deletions in the dialog that opens. If you want, you can insert the contents of the selected file into the current document by selecting the relevant deleted entries, clicking Reject, and then clicking Insert. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + + +The contents of footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f5ab8924 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Bibliography Database + /text/shared/01/02250000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + +Bibliography Database +
+ Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database. +
+ +
+ If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. + The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. + Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. + +Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text + +Go to the first record in the table. + +Go to the previous record in the table. + +Go to the next record in the table. + +Go to the last record in the table. + +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. + +Inserting a New Record + Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + +Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. + +Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. + Finding and Filtering Records + You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. + +Entering Search key + Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. + +AutoFilter + Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. + The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. + +Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. + + +To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon. + +Deleting a Record + To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. + Changing the data source + +Data Source + Select the data source for the bibliography database. + + + + +Column Arrangement + Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record's Object bar. +Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. + +Deletes the current record. + Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. + +Inserts a new record into the current table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69725b9d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + Zoom & View Layout + /text/shared/01/03010000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + zooming;page views + views; scaling + screen; scaling + pages; scaling + +mw deleted "scaling;" + + + + + +

Zoom & View Layout

+Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME. The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar. +
+ +
+ +
+Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A document saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor on Unix/Linux platforms. To change the zoom factor, double-click or right-click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select the zoom factor that you want. + +

Zoom factor

+Set the zoom factor at which to display the current document and all documents of the same type that you open thereafter. + + + +

Optimal

+Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at the moment the command is started. + + + +

Fit width and height

+Resizes the display to fit the width and height of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.Displays the entire page on your screen. + + + +

Fit width

+Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible. + +
+ + + + +

100 %

+Displays the document at its actual size. +
+ + + +

Variable

+Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box. + +

View layout

+For text documents, you can set the view layout. Reduce the zoom factor to see the effects of different view layout settings.for this doc or all docs? answer: it's the same as before for the zoom factor. + + +

Automatic

+The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows. + + +

Single page

+The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side. + + + +

Columns

+In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns. + + +

Book mode

+In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba97469d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Standard Bar + /text/shared/01/03020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+standard bar on/off +mw made "standard bar;..." a one level entry + +Standard Bar + Shows or hides the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..915910a56 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Bar + /text/shared/01/03050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tools bar + + +Tools Bar + Shows or hides the Tools bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08f8bd1b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Status Bar + /text/shared/01/03060000.xhp + + + +
+ + status bar on/off + + + +

Status Bar

+ Shows or hides the Status bar at the bottom edge of the window. +
+
+ +
+ +can remove this switch when there are related topics for BASE and DRAW + + + +
+ + + + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc5c2a17e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Full Screen + /text/shared/01/03110000.xhp + + + +
+ + full screen view + screen; full screen views + complete screen view + views;full screen + + +Full Screen + Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button or press the Esc key. +
+
+ +
+ +In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode. +You can still use shortcut keys in Full Screen mode, even though the menus are unavailable. To open the View menu, press Alt+V. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..566b40274 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Color Bar + /text/shared/01/03170000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+color bar +paint box + + +

Color Bar

+
+ Show or hide the Color bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab. +
+
+ +
+ +To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color. +You can also drag a color from the Color bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide to change the fill color. +To detach the Color bar, click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag. To reattach the Color bar, double click on an gray area of the color bar while pressing the CommandCtrl key. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e111c6ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Toolbars + /text/shared/01/03990000.xhp + + + +
+ +Toolbars + Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars. A toolbar contains icons and options that let you quickly access $[officename] commands. +
+Customize + Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. + +Reset + Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.UFI: #i63811 +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bff0ada0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + Comments + /text/shared/01/04050000.xhp + + + + + comments;inserting/editing/deleting/printing/resolving + comments;hide resolved + comments;resolve in text documents + inserting; comments + editing; comments + deleting;comments + Navigator;comments + printing;comments + resolving;comments + records; inserting comments + remarks, see also comments + + mw changed "notes;" and added 3 entries +
+ + +

Comment

+ Inserts a comment around the selected text, presentation slide, drawing page or at the current spreadsheet cursor position. +
+
+ + +
+ + The comments by different authors get different colors. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data to enter your name so that it can show up as the comment author. + + +

Comments in spreadsheets

+ When you attach a comment to a cell, a callout appears where you can enter your text. A small square in the upper right corner of a cell marks the position of a comment. To display the comment permanently, right-click the cell, and choose Show Comment. + + Cell with comment displayed + + To change the object properties of a comment, for example the background color, choose Show Comment as above, then right-click the comment. Do not double-click the text! + To edit a shown comment, double-click the comment text. To edit a comment that is not shown permanently, right-click in the cell that contains the comment, and then choose Edit Comment. To specify the formatting of the comment text, right-click the comment text in edit mode. + To change the position or size of a comment, drag a border or corner of the comment box. + To delete a comment, right-click the cell, then choose Delete Comment. + + You can also right-click a comment name in the Navigator window to choose some editing commands. + + To set the printing options for comments in your spreadsheet, choose Format - Page, and then click the Sheet tab. + + +

Inserting Comments in Presentations

+
+ Use the command Insert - Comment or the key combination above to insert a comment anchor to the current slidepage. A colored comment box is shown at the top left corner, to enter the text of the comment. A small colored box - the anchor - in the top left of the slidepage contains the initials of the author name, followed by a sequential number. Click on the anchor to open or close the corresponding comment. + +
+ + Comments in Presentations + + + +

Inserting Comments in Drawings

+ + + Comments in Drawings + + + +

Inserting Comments in Text Documents

issue 113019 112000 + Use the command Insert - Comment or the Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C key combination to insert a comment anchor at the current cursor position. A colored comment box is shown at the page margin, to enter the text of the comment. A line connects the anchor to the comment box. If a text range is selected, the comment is attached to the text range. The commented text range is shadowed. + + Comments in text documents + +

Editing comments

+ Every user with write permission to the document can edit and delete comments of all authors. You can use the Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C key combination to edit a comment at the current cursor position. + + + In the Find & Replace dialog of text documents, you can select to include the comments texts in your searches. +

Replying to comments

+ If the comment in a text document was written by another author, there is a Reply command in the context menu. This command inserts a new comment adjacent to the comment to which you want to reply. The comment anchor is the same for both comments. Type your reply text in the new comment. Save and send your document to other authors, then those authors can add replies, too.View - Comments command +
+

Marking comments as resolved

+ When the document has been reviewed and commented and requires your action in its contents, you can mark the comment Resolved or Unresolved. Open the comment context menu or click on the comment dropdown list to mark the Resolved checkbox. When you mark the comment resolved, the word Resolved is inserted under the date in the comment box. When marking unresolved, the word Resolved is removed. + You can toggle the display of all resolved comments in the document. Hidden resolved comments are not displayed in the page margin but are not deleted. You can display back all hidden comments. Choose and mark View - Resolved comments to display the resolved comments. Unmark to hide resolved comments. The default is to display all resolved comments. +
+ +

Navigating from comment to comment in text documents

+ + When the cursor is inside a comment, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Page Down to jump to the next comment, or press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Page Up to jump to the previous comment. + + When the cursor is inside the normal text, press the above mentioned keys to jump to the next or previous comment anchor. + + You can also open the Navigator to see a list of all comments. Right-click a comment name in the Navigator to edit or delete the comment. + + + + + + + + Delete the current comment. + + + Delete all comments by this author in the current document. + + + Delete all comments in the current document. + +

Viewing Comments

+ + + + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments in spreadsheets. + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all anchor comments on the top of the page. + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all anchor comments on the top of the slide. + + + Use View - Comments or click on the Comment button on the right of the horizontal ruler to show or hide all comments. + + + +

Printing comments

+ + + You cannot print the comments of the slides. + You can choose to use the Notes view to write a page of notes for every slide. + + + You cannot print the comments of the drawing pages. + + + Comments are printed when they are made visible. + + + To change the printing option for comments for all your text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c1d98a5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Scan +/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Scan

+Inserts a scanned image into your document. + +
+To insert a scanned image, the driver for your scanner must be installed. Under UNIX systems, install the SANE package found at http://www.sane-project.org. The SANE package must use the same libc as $[officename]. + +
+ +
+

Select Source

+ +

Request

+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e9a71461 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Select Source + /text/shared/01/04060100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Select Source

+ Selects the scanner that you want to use. + + + + The dialog displays settings for the selected scanner and the scan job. + + +
+ +
+ + +

Sources

+ Displays a list of available scanners detected in your system. Click on a scanner in the list and press Select to open the scanner configuration dialog. The configuration dialog depends on the scanner driver installed. + + +

Scan Area

+

Left, right, top, bottom

+Set the margins of the scan area. +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the scanned image. The preview area contains eight handles. Drag the handles to adjust the scan area or enter a value in the corresponding margin spin box. +

Device used

+Select the scanner device in the list of devices detected by your system. +

Resolution [DPI]

+Select the resolution in dots per inch for the scan job. The available resolutions depends on the scanner driver. +

Show advanced options

+Mark this checkbox to display more configuration options for the scanner device. The set of options is displayed in the Options box and depends on the scanner driver. +

Options

+Displays the list of available scanner driver advanced options. Double click an option to display its contents just below. The option and its values depends on the scanner driver. +

About Device

+Displays a popup window with information obtained from the scanner driver: device address, vendor, scanner model and type of scanner. +

Create preview

+Scans and displays the document in the preview area. Use the Create Preview command to view a sample of the scanned document and set the scan job properties. +

Scan

+Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document and closes the dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7bb66ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Request + /text/shared/01/04060200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Request

+ Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner. For an explanation of the dialog please refer to the documentation on your scanner. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cafbf0a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Special Character + /text/shared/01/04100000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Special Character

+ Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts. +
+
+ +
+When you click a character in the Special Characters dialog, a preview and the corresponding numerical code for the character is displayed. + +

Search

+ Enter the UTF-8 name or part of the name of the character to display the UTF-8 character in the top left square of the grid. The name of the character cannot be translated. For example, enter tilde to display ~ and enter latin capital letter O with circumflex to display Ô. +

Font

+ Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it. + +

Character block

+Select a Unicode block for the current font. The special characters for the selected Unicode block are displayed in the character table. + +

Character Table

+ Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click Insert. +

Recent Characters

+ Displays the special characters that were inserted recently. +

Favorite Characters

+ Displays the special characters that were chosen with the Add to Favorites button. Up to 16 special characters can be saved as a favorite. + + Double-click on a special character will insert it into the document. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27f19fea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Pictures + /text/shared/01/04140000.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Image

+Opens a file selection dialog to insert an image into the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + +

Style

+Select the frame style for the graphic. + + +

Anchor

+ Select the anchor type for the image at the current cell position. + + + + + +

Link

+Inserts the selected graphic file as a link. + + + +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the selected graphic file. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6aa60e3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + OLE Object (Insert Menu) + /text/shared/01/04150000.xhp + + + +
+ +

OLE Object

+ Inserts an embedded or linked object into your document, including formulas, QR codes, and OLE objects. +
+
+ +
+

Formula Object

+ + +

OLE Object

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e5a031aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Insert OLE Object + /text/shared/01/04150100.xhp + + + +OLE objects; inserting +inserting; OLE objects +objects; inserting OLE objects + + + + +

Insert OLE Object

+ Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object. +
+ +
+You cannot use the clipboard or drag and drop to move OLE objects to other files. +Empty and inactive OLE objects are transparent. +

Create new

+ Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select. +

Object type

+ Select the type of document that you want to create. +

Create from file

+ Creates an OLE object from an existing file. +

File

+ Choose the file that you want to insert as an OLE object. +

File

+ Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search to locate the file. +

Search...

+ Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open. + +

Link to file

+ Enable this checkbox to insert the OLE object as a link to the original file. If this checkbox is not enabled, the OLE object will be embedded into your document.which consequences? cannot find featuremail or spec doc + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..246d42a8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Formula + /text/shared/01/04160300.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formulas; starting formula editor +$[officename] Math start +Math formula editor +equations in formula editor +editors;formula editor + + + +Formula + Inserts a formula into the current document. For more information open the $[officename] Math Help. +
+ +
+ + +
+ Formulas +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7cc60a5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Insert Floating Frame +/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +floating frames in HTML documents +inserting; floating frames + + +

Insert Floating Frame

+Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file. +
+ +
+If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags. +
+Floating frame properties +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60f92c07b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data Sources + /text/shared/01/04180100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Data Sources +Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases. +
+ +
+ +
+ +The Data sources command is only available when a text document or a spreadsheet is open. +You can insert fields from a database into your file or you can create forms to access the database. + +
+Table Data bar + +Forms +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..510f4451e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Media + /text/shared/01/04990000.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Media

+The submenu presents various sources that an image, audio or video can be insert from. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..924933b2a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Clear Direct Formatting +/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp + + + +
+ +formatting; undoing when writing +paragraph;clear direct formatting +format;clear direct formatting +direct formatting;clear +hyperlinks; deleting +deleting; hyperlinks +cells;resetting formats + + MW changed "formats;" to "formatting;" + + + + +

Clear Direct Formatting

+Removes direct formatting from the selection. +
+ +Direct formatting is formatting that you applied without using styles, such as setting bold typeface by clicking the Bold icon. +
+ +
+ + + + + + Applied styles (paragraph, character, and other types) are not affected by Clear Direct Formatting, only direct formatting applied on top of the styles. To remove formatting applied by a character or paragraph style, reapply the corresponding Default style. + To stop applying a direct format, such as underlining, while you type new text at the end of a line, press Shift+Ctrl+X. + +Bullets and numbering are properties of lists. Clear Direct Formatting does not clear directly formatted bullets and numbering found in a paragraph. To remove the bullet and numbering applied directly to a paragraph, use the Toggle Unordered List, the Toggle Ordered List or the No List icons on the Formatting toolbar. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..130bce205 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Character + /text/shared/01/05020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Character

+ Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hyperlink

+ + + + + + + +
+Character Style +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..521c85517 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Font + /text/shared/01/05020100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +formats; fonts +characters;fonts and formats +fonts; formats +text; fonts and formats +typefaces; formats +font sizes; relative changes +languages; spellchecking and formatting +languages; spelling +characters; enabling CTL and Asian characters + + + +
+

CharactersFont

+Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply. +
+
+ +
+
+The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type. +
+Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: + + +Western text font - Latin character sets. + + +Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets + + +Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction + + +To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. + + + + +Font dialog +

Font

+Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. + + + + + + + +

Typeface

+Select the formatting that you want to apply. + + + + + + + +

Size

+Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. +If you are creating a style that is based on another style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). + + + + + + +

Language

+Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. +If the language list consists of an editable combo box, you can enter a valid BCP 47 language tag if the language you want to assign is not available from the selectable list. +For language tag details please see the For users section on the langtag.net web site. + + +You can also change the locale setting for cells (choose Format - Cells - Numbers). + + + + + + + + + + +The following buttons appear only for Paragraph Style and Character Style. + + + + +
+Asian languages support +Complex text layout support +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e714aaf96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + Font Effects + /text/shared/01/05020200.xhp + + + +
+ +fonts; effects +formatting; font effects +characters; font effects +text; font effects +effects; fonts +underlining; text +capital letters; font effects +lowercase letters; font effects +titles; font effects +small capitals +strikethrough; font effects +fonts; strikethrough +outlines; font effects +fonts; outlines +shadows; characters +fonts; shadows +fonts; color ignored +ignored font colors +colors; ignored text color +ufi inserted "fonts;colors"MW copied two entries about font colors to text/shared/guide/text_colormw added 3 index entries about ignored font colors + + +

Font Effects

+ Specify the font effects that you want to use. +
+
+ +
+ + + +
+

Font Color

+ Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. + + + To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + + If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + + To undo the last change, right-click. + + + To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Esc key. + + +
+ + +The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print text in black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. + + +The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. + + +Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. + + +

Transparency

+Sets the transparency of the character text. The value 100% means entirely transparent, while 0% means not transparent at all. + + + Transparency cannot be set for Paragraph Style and Character Style. + + +

Text Decoration

+ +Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. + +

Overlining

+ Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + +

Overline color

+ Select the color for the overlining. + +

Strikethrough

+ Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. + If you save your document in Microsoft Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. + +

Underlining

+ Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. + + + +

Underline color

+ Select the color for the underlining. + +

Individual words

+ Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. + +

Effects

+Select the font effects that you want to apply. + + Calc has no case control + +
+

Case

+ The following capitalization effects are available: + + + Without - No effect is applied. + + + UPPERCASE - Changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters. + + + lowercase - Changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters. + + + Capitalize Every Word - Changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character. + + + Small capitals - Changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size. + + +
+ +

Hidden

+ Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Formatting Marks is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden characters. + + + copies the definitions from previous section + + + +

Relief

+ Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. + +

Outline

+
+ Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. + +
+

Shadow

+
+ Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. +
+ + +

Emphasis mark

+ Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. + +

Position

+ Specify where to display the emphasis marks. + + +Only Writer has Apply button + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3ad87522 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + Numbers / Format + /text/shared/01/05020300.xhp + + + + +formats; number and currency formats +number formats; formats +currencies;format codes +defaults; number formats + + mw transferred "format codes;" to Calc guide Format_value_userdef.xhp and "numbers;" and "cells;" to Calc guide Format_table.xhp. Changed "currencies;" + + + + +
+ + +

Numbers

+Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s). + + +

Numbers / Format

+Specify the formatting option for the selected variable. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Category

+ Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box. + + + The default currency format for a cell is determined by the regional settings of your operating system. + + + +

Format

+ Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) field to be displayed. The code for the selected option is displayed in the Format code box. + +

Currency category list boxes

+ Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency. +
+ The format code for currencies uses the form [$xxx-nnn], where xxx is the currency symbol, and nnn the country code. Special banking symbols, such as EUR (for Euro), do not require the country code. The currency format is not dependent on the language that you select in the Language box. +
+ +

Language

+ + + + + Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Default, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. + + + Specifies the language setting for the selected cells. + + Specifies the language setting for the selected field. + + + + + The language setting ensures that date and currency formats, as well as decimal and thousands separators, are preserved even when the document is opened in an operating system that uses a different default language setting. + + + +

Source format

+ Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart. + + +

Options

+ Specify the options for the selected format. + +

Decimal places

+ Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display. + +

Denominator places

+ With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display. + +

Leading zeroes

+ Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point. + +

Negative numbers red

+ Changes the font color of negative numbers to red. + +

Thousands separator

+ Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings. + +

Engineering notation

+ With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3. + +

Format code

+ Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format. The following options are only available for user-defined number formats. + +

Add

+ Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category. + +

Edit Comment

+ Adds a comment to the selected number format. + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected number format. The changes are effective after you restart $[officename]. + +

Name line

+ Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box. + +
+ Number format codes: custom format codes defined by user. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfb83564 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,2583 @@ + + + + + + + Number Format Codes + /text/shared/01/05020301.xhp + + + + + + + format codes; numbers + conditions; in number formats + number formats; codes + currency formats + formats;of currencies/date/time + numbers; date, time and currency formats + Euro; currency formats + date formats + times, formats + percentages, formats + scientific notation, formats + engineering notation, formats + fraction, formats + native numeral + LCID, extended + +mw made "time formats" a two level entry and deleted 2x "formats;" + +Number Format Codes +Number format codes can consist of up to four sections separated by a semicolon (;). + + + + In a number format code with two sections, the first section applies to positive values and zero, and the second section applies to negative values. + + + In a number format code with three sections, the first section applies to positive values, the second section to negative values, and the third section to the value zero. + + + You can also assign conditions to the three sections, so that the format is only applied if a condition is met. + + + Fourth section applies if the content is not a value, but some text. Content is represented by an at sign (@). + + + +Decimal Places and Significant Digits + Use zero (0), the number sign (#) or the question mark (?) as placeholders in your number format code to represent numbers. The # only displays significant digits, while the 0 displays zeroes if there are fewer digits in the number than in the number format. The ? works as the # but adds a space character to keep decimal alignment if there is a hidden non-significant zero. + Use question marks (?), zeroes (0) or number signs (#) to represent the number of digits to include in the numerator and the denominator of a fraction. Fractions that do not fit the pattern that you define are displayed as floating point numbers. +If a number contains more digits to the right of the decimal delimiter than there are placeholders in the format, the number is rounded accordingly. If a number contains more digits to the left of the decimal delimiter than there are placeholders in the format, the entire number is displayed. Use the following list as a guide for using placeholders when you create a number format code: + + + + + Placeholders + + + Explanation + + + + + # + + + Does not display extra zeros. + + + + + ? + + + Displays space characters instead of extra zeros. + + + + + 0 (Zero) + + + Displays extra zeros if the number has less places than zeros in the format. + + +
+ + +Examples + + + + + Number Format + + + Format Code + + + + + 3456.78 as 3456.8 + + + ####.# + + + + + 9.9 as 9.900 + + + #.000 + + + + + 13 as 13.0 and 1234.567 as 1234.57 + + + #.0# + + + + + 5.75 as 5 3/4 and 6.3 as 6 3/10 + + + # ???/??? + + + + + .5 as 0.5 + + + 0.## + + + + + .5 as 0.5   (with two extra spaces at the end) + + + 0.??? + + +
+ + +Thousands Separator +Depending on your language setting, you can use a comma, a period or a blank as a thousands separator. You can also use the separator to reduce the size of the number that is displayed by a multiple of 1000 for each separator. The examples below use comma as thousands separator: + + + + + Number Format + + + Format Code + + + + + 15000 as 15,000 + + + #,### + + + + + 16000 as 16 + + + #, + + +
+ + +Including Text in Number Format Codes + +Text and Numbers +To include text in a number format that is applied to a cell containing numbers, place a double quotation mark (") in front of and behind the text, or a backslash (\) before a single character. For example, enter #.# "meters" to display "3.5 meters" or #.# \m to display "3.5 m". If you use space as thousands separator, you need to insert spaces between quotes in the previous examples: #.#" meters" or #.#\ \m to get the correct result. + +Text and Text +To include text in a number format that is applied to a cell that might contain text, enclose the text by double quotation marks (" "), and then add an at sign (@). For example, enter "Total for "@ to display "Total for December". + +Spaces +To use a character to define the width of a space in a number format, type an underscore (_) followed by the character. The width of the space varies according to the width of the character that you choose. For example, _M creates a wider space than _i. +To fill free space with a given character, use an asterisk (*) followed by this character. For instance: +*\0 +will display integer value (0) preceded by as many as needed backslash characters (\) to fill column width. For accounting representation, you may left align currency symbol with a format similar to: +$_-* 0.--;$-* 0.--;$_-* - + +Color +To set the color of a section of a number format code, insert one of the following color names in square brackets [ ]: + + + + + CYAN + + + GREEN + + + + + BLACK + + + BLUE + + + + + MAGENTA + + + RED + + + + + WHITE + + + YELLOW + + +
+ + +Conditions + +Conditional Brackets +You can define a number format so that it only applies when the condition that you specify is met. Conditions are enclosed by square brackets [ ]. +You can use any combination of numbers and the <, <=, >, >=, = and <> operators. +For example, if you want to apply different colors to different temperature data, enter: +[BLUE][<0]#.0 "°C";[RED][>30]#.0 "°C";[BLACK]#.0 "°C" +All temperatures below zero are blue, temperatures between 0 and 30 °C are black, and temperatures higher than 30 °C are red. + +Positive and Negative Numbers +To define a number format that adds a different text to a number depending on if the number is positive, negative, or equal to zero, use the following format: +"plus" 0;"minus" 0;"null" 0 + +Percentages, Scientific Notation and Fraction Representation + +Percentages +To display numbers as percentages, add the percent sign (%) to the number format. + +Scientific Notation +Scientific notation lets you write very large numbers or very small fractions in a compact form. For example, in scientific notation, 650000 is written as 6.5 x 105, and 0.000065 as 6.5 x 10-5. Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc.In %PRODUCTNAME, these numbers are written as 6.5E+5 and 6.5E-5, respectively. To create a number format that displays numbers using scientific notation, enter a # or 0, and then one of the following codes E-, E+, e- or e+. If sign is omitted after E or e, it won't appear for positive value of exponent. To get engineering notation, enter 3 digits (0 or #) in the integer part: ###.##E+00 for instance. + +Fraction Representation +To represent a value as a fraction, format consists of two or three parts: integer optional part, numerator and denominator. Integer and numerator are separated by a blank or any quoted text. Numerator and denominator are separated by a slash character. Each part can consist of a combination of #, ? and 0 as placeholders. +Denominator is calculated to get the nearest value of the fraction with respect to the number of placeholders. For example, PI value is represented as 3 16/113 with format: +# ?/??? +Denominator value can also be forced to the value replacing placeholders. For example, to get PI value as a multiple of 1/16th (i.e. 50/16), use format: +?/16 + +Number Format Codes of Currency Formats +The default currency format for the cells in your spreadsheet is determined by the regional setting of your operating system. If you want, you can apply a custom currency symbol to a cell. For example, enter #,##0.00 € to display 4.50 € (Euros).Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. +You can also specify the locale setting for the currency by entering the locale code for the country after the symbol. For example, [$€-407] represents Euros in Germany. To view the locale code for a country, select the country in the Language list on the Numbers tab of the Format Cells dialog. + + +Date and Time Formats + +Date Formats +To display days, months and years, use the following number format codes. +Not all format codes give meaningful results for all languages. + + + + + Format + + + Format Code + + + + + Month as 3. + + + M + + + + + Month as 03. + + + MM + + + + + Month as Jan-Dec + + + MMM + + + + + Month as January-December + + + MMMM + + + + + First letter of Name of Month + + + MMMMM + + + + + Day as 2 + + + D + + + + + Day as 02 + + + DD + + + + + Day as Sun-Sat + + + NN or DDD or AAA + + + + + Day as Sunday to Saturday + + + NNN or DDDD or AAAA + + + + + Day followed by comma, as in "Sunday," + + + NNNN + + + + + Year as 00-99 + + + YY + + + + + Year as 1900-2078 + + + YYYY + + + + + Calendar week + + + WW + + + + + Quarterly as Q1 to Q4 + + + Q + + + + + Quarterly as 1st quarter to 4th quarter + + + QQ + + + + + Era, abbreviation. On the Japanese Gengou calendar, single character (possible values are: M, T, S, H) + + + G + + + + + Era, abbreviation + + + GG + + + + + Era, full name + + + GGG + + + + + Number of the year within an era, short format + + + E + + + + + Number of the year within an era, long format + + + EE or R + + + + + Era, full name and year + + + RR or GGGEE + + +
+ +The above listed formatting codes work with your language version of %PRODUCTNAME. However, when you need to switch the locale of %PRODUCTNAME to another locale, you need to know the formatting codes used in that other locale. +For example, if your software is set to an English locale, and you want to format a year with four digits, you enter YYYY as a formatting code. When you switch to a German locale, you must use JJJJ instead. The following table lists only the localized differences. + + + + + Locale + + + Year + + + Month + + + Day + + + Hour + + + Day Of Week + + + Era + + + + + English - en + and all not listed locales + + + Y + + + M + + + D + + + H + + + A + + + G + + + + + German - de + + + J + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + + + Netherlands - nl + + + J + + + + + + + U + + + + + + + + + French - fr + + + A + + + + + J + + + + + O + + + + + + + Italian - it + + + A + + + + + G + + + + + O + + + X + + + + + Portuguese - pt + + + A + + + + + + + + + O + + + + + + + Spanish - es + + + A + + + + + + + + + O + + + + + + + Danish - da + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Norwegian - no, nb, nn + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Swedish - sv + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Finnish - fi + + + V + + + K + + + P + + + T + + + + + + +
+ + +Entering Dates +To enter a date in a cell, use the Gregorian calendar format. For example, in an English locale, enter 1/2/2002 for Jan 2, 2002. +All date formats are dependent on the locale that is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. For example, if your locale is set to 'Japanese', then the Gengou calendar is used. The default date format in %PRODUCTNAME uses the Gregorian Calendar. +To specify a calendar format that is independent of the locale, add a modifier in front of the date format. For example, to display a date using the Jewish calendar format in a non-Hebrew locale, enter: [~jewish]DD/MM/YYYY. +The specified calendar is exported to Microsoft Excel using extended LCID. Extended LCID can also be used in the format string. It will be converted to a calendar modifier if it is supported. See Extended LCID section below. + + + + + Modifier + + + Calendar + + + + + [~buddhist] + + + Thai Buddhist Calendar + + + + + [~gengou] + + + Japanese Gengou Calendar + + + + + [~gregorian] + + + Gregorian Calendar + + + + + [~hanja] or [~hanja_yoil] + + + Korean Calendar + + + + + [~hijri] + + + Arabic Islamic Calendar + + + + + [~jewish] + + + Jewish Calendar + + + + + [~ROC] + + + Republic Of China Calendar + + +
+ +If you perform a calculation that involves one or more cells using a date format, the result is formatted according to the following mappings: + + + + + + + Initial Format + + + Result Format + + + + + Date + Date + + + Number (Days) + + + + + Date + Number + + + Date + + + + + Date + Time + + + Date&Time + + + + + Date + Date&Time + + + Number + + + + + Time + Time + + + Time + + + + + Time + Number + + + Time + + + + + Time + Date&Time + + + Date&Time + + + + + Date&Time + Date&Time + + + Time + + + + + Date&Time + Number + + + Date&Time + + + + + Number + Number + + + Number + + +
+ + + +The Date & Time format displays the date and time that an entry was made to a cell with this format. + + + +By default in %PRODUCTNAME, a date with the value "0" corresponds to Dec 30, 1899. + + + +Time Formats +To display hours, minutes and seconds use the following number format codes: + + + + + Format + + + Format Code + + + + + Hours as 0-23 + + + H + + + + + Hours as 00-23 + + + HH + + + + + Hours as 00 up to more than 23 + + + [HH] + + + + + Minutes as 0-59 + + + M + + + + + Minutes as 00-59 + + + MM + + + + + Minutes as 00 up to more than 59 + + + [MM] + + + + + Seconds as 0-59 + + + S + + + + + Seconds as 00-59 + + + SS + + + + + Seconds as 00 up to more than 59 + + + [SS] + + +
+ +To display seconds as fractions, add the decimal delimiter to your number format code. For example, enter HH:MM:SS.00 to display the time as "01:02:03.45".Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. +Minute time formats M and MM must be used in combination with hour or second time formats to avoid confusion with month date format. +If a time is entered in the form 02:03.45 or 01:02:03.45 or 25:01:02, the following formats are assigned if no other time format has been specified: MM:SS.00 or [HH]:MM:SS.00 or [HH]:MM:SSTranslators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. + +Displaying Numbers Using Native Characters + +NatNum modifiers +To display numbers using native number characters, use a [NatNum1], [NatNum2], ..., [NatNum11] modifier at the beginning of a number format codes.this will be extended with the libnumbertext work +To spell out numbers in various number, currency and date formats, use a [NatNum12] modifier with the chosen arguments at the beginning of a number format code. See NatNum12 section below. +The [NatNum1] modifier always uses a one to one character mapping to convert numbers to a string that matches the native number format code of the corresponding locale. The other modifiers produce different results if they are used with different locales. A locale can be the language and the territory for which the format code is defined, or a modifier such as [$-yyy] that follows the native number modifier. In this case, yyy is the hexadecimal MS-LCID that is also used in currency format codes. For example, to display a number using Japanese short Kanji characters in an English US locale, use the following number format code: +[NatNum1][$-411]0 +In the following list, the Microsoft Excel [DBNumX] modifier that corresponds to %PRODUCTNAME [NatNum] modifier is shown. If you want, you can use a [DBNumX] modifier instead of [NatNum] modifier for your locale. Whenever possible, %PRODUCTNAME internally maps [DBNumX] modifiers to [NatNumN] modifiers. +Displaying dates using [NatNum] modifiers can have a different effect than displaying other types of numbers. Such effects are indicated by 'CAL: '. For example, 'CAL: 1/4/4' indicates that the year is displayed using the [NatNum1] modifier, while the day and month are displayed using the [NatNum4] modifier. If 'CAL' is not specified, the date formats for that particular modifier are not supported. +[NatNum0] +Try to convert any native number string to ASCII Arabic digits. If already ASCII, it remains ASCII. +[NatNum1] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese lower case characters + + + + + CAL: 1/7/7 [DBNum1] + + + + + Japanese + + + short Kanji characters + + + [DBNum1] + + + CAL: 1/4/4 [DBNum1] + + + + + Korean + + + Korean lower case characters + + + [DBNum1] + + + CAL: 1/7/7 [DBNum1] + + + + + Hebrew + + + Hebrew characters + + + + + + + + + Arabic + + + Arabic-Indic characters + + + + + + + + + Thai + + + Thai characters + + + + + + + + + Hindi + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Odia + + + Odia (Oriya) characters + + + + + + + + + Marathi + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Bengali + + + Bengali characters + + + + + + + + + Punjabi + + + Punjabi (Gurmukhi) characters + + + + + + + + + Gujarati + + + Gujarati characters + + + + + + + + + Tamil + + + Tamil characters + + + + + + + + + Telugu + + + Telugu characters + + + + + + + + + Kannada + + + Kannada characters + + + + + + + + + Malayalam + + + Malayalam characters + + + + + + + + + Lao + + + Lao characters + + + + + + + + + Tibetan + + + Tibetan characters + + + + + + + + + Burmese + + + Burmese (Myanmar) characters + + + + + + + + + Khmer + + + Khmer (Cambodian) characters + + + + + + + + + Mongolian + + + Mongolian characters + + + + + + + + + Nepali + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Dzongkha + + + Tibetan characters + + + + + + + + + Farsi + + + East Arabic-Indic characters + + + + + + + + + Church Slavic + + + Cyrillic characters + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum2] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese upper case characters + + + + + CAL 2/8/8 [DBNum2] + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional Kanji characters + + + + + CAL 2/5/5 [DBNum2] + + + + + Korean + + + Korean upper case characters + + + [DBNum2] + + + CAL 2/8/8 [DBNum2] + + + + + Hebrew + + + Hebrew numbering + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum3] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + + + + Japanese + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + + + + Korean + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + [DBNum3] + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + +
+ +[NatNum4] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + lower case text + + + [DBNum1] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + modern long Kanji text + + + [DBNum2] + + + + + + + Korean + + + formal lower case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum5] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese upper case text + + + [DBNum2] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional long Kanji text + + + [DBNum3] + + + + + + + Korean + + + formal upper case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum6] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + fullwidth text + + + [DBNum3] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + fullwidth text + + + + + + + + + Korean + + + fullwidth text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum7] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + short lower case text + + + + + + + + + Japanese + + + modern short Kanji text + + + + + + + + + Korean + + + informal lower case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum8] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + short upper case text + + + + + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional short Kanji text + + + [DBNum4] + + + + + + + Korean + + + informal upper case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum9] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + Hangul characters + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum10] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + formal Hangul text + + + [DBNum4] + + + CAL 9/11/11 [DBNum4] + + +
+ +[NatNum11] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + informal Hangul text + + + + + + +
+ + +
+ +Extended LCID +If compatible, native numbering and calendar are exported to Microsoft Excel using extended LCID. Extended LCID can also be used in string format instead of NatNum modifier. +Extended LCID consists of 8 hexadecimal digits: [$-NNCCLLLL], with 2 first digits NN for native numerals, CC for calendar and LLLL for LCID code. For instance, [$-0D0741E] will be converted to [NatNum1][$-41E][~buddhist]: Thai numerals (0D) with Buddhist calendar (07) in Thai locale (041E). +Native Numerals +Two first digits NN represents native numerals: + + + + + NN + + + Numeral + + + Representation + + + Compatible LCID + + + + + 01 + + + Arabic + + + 1234567890 + + + all + + + + + 02 + + + Eastern Arabic + + + ١٢٣٤٥٦٧٨٩٠ + + + 401 + 1401, 3c01, 0c01, 801, 2c01, 3401, 3001, 1001, 1801, 2001, 4001, 2801, 1c01, 3801, 2401 + + + + + 03 + + + Persian + + + ۱۲۳۴۵۶۷۸۹۰ + + + 429 + + + + + 04 + + + Devanagari + + + १२३४५६७८९० + + + 439 + 44E, 461, 861 + + + + + 05 + + + Bengali + + + ১২৩৪৫৬৭৮৯০ + + + 445 + 845 + + + + + 06 + + + Punjabi + + + ੧੨੩੪੫੬੭੮੯੦ + + + 446 + + + + + 07 + + + Gujarati + + + ૧૨૩૪૫૬૭૮૯૦ + + + 447 + + + + + 08 + + + Oriya + + + ୧୨୩୪୫୬୭୮୯୦ + + + 448 + + + + + 09 + + + Tamil + + + ௧௨௩௪௫௬௭௮௯0 + + + 449 + 849 + + + + + 0A + + + Telugu + + + ౧౨౩౪౫౬౭౮౯౦ + + + 44A + + + + + 0B + + + Kannada + + + ೧೨೩೪೫೬೭೮೯೦ + + + 44B + + + + + 0C + + + Malayalam + + + ൧൨൩൪൫൬൭൮൯൦ + + + 44C + + + + + 0D + + + Thai + + + ๑๒๓๔๕๖๗๘๙๐ + + + 41E + + + + + 0E + + + Lao + + + ໑໒໓໔໕໖໗໘໙໐ + + + 454 + + + + + 0F + + + Tibetan + + + ༡༢༣༤༥༦༧༨༩༠ + + + 851 + + + + + 10 + + + Burmese + + + ၁၂၃၄၅၆၇၈၉၀ + + + 455 + + + + + 11 + + + Tigrina + + + ፩፪፫፬፭፮፯፰፱0 + + + 473 + 873 + + + + + 12 + + + Khmer + + + ១២៣៤៥៦៧៨៩០ + + + 453 + + + + + 13 + + + Mongolian + + + ᠑᠒᠓᠔᠕᠖᠗᠘᠙᠐ + + + C50 + 850 + + + + + 1B + + + Japanese + + + 一二三四五六七八九〇 + + + 411 + + + + + 1C + + + (financial) + + + 壱弐参四伍六七八九〇 + + + + + + + 1D + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 1E + + + Chinese - simplified + + + 一二三四五六七八九○ + + + 804 + 1004, 7804 + + + + + 1F + + + (financial) + + + 壹贰叁肆伍陆柒捌玖零 + + + + + + + 20 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 21 + + + Chinese - traditional + + + 一二三四五六七八九○ + + + C04 + 1404 + + + + + 22 + + + (financial) + + + 壹貳參肆伍陸柒捌玖零 + + + + + + + 23 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 24 + + + Korean + + + 一二三四五六七八九０ + + + 812 + + + + + 25 + + + (financial) + + + 壹貳參四伍六七八九零 + + + + + + + 26 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 27 + + + Korean - Hangul + + + 일이삼사오육칠팔구영 + + + + +
+ +Calendar +Two next digits CC are for calendar code. Each calendar is only valid for some LCID. + + + + + CC + + + Calendar + + + Example (YYYY-MM-DD) + + + Supported LCID + + + + + 00 + + + Gregorian + + + 2016-08-31 + + + All + + + + + 03 + + + Gengou + + + 28-08-31 + + + 411 (Japanese) + + + + + 05 + + + Unknown + + + 4349-08-31 + + + Unsupported + + + + + 06 or 17 + + + Hijri + + + 1437-11-28 + + + 401 (Arabic - Saudi Arabia), 1401 (Arabic - Algeria), 3c01 (Arabic - Bahrain), 0c01 (Arabic - Egypt), 801 (Arabic - Iraq), 2c01 (Arabic - Jordan), 3401 (Arabic - Kuwait), 3001 (Arabic - Lebanon), 1001 (Arabic - Libya), 1801 (Arabic - Morocco), 2001 (Arabic - Oman), 4001 (Arabic - Qatar), 2801 (Arabic - Syria), 1c01 (Arabic - Tunisia), 3801 (Arabic - U.A.E.), 2401 (Arabic - Yemen) and 429 (Farsi) + + + + + 07 + + + Buddhist + + + 2559-08-31 + + + 454 (Lao), 41E (Thai) + + + + + 08 + + + Jewish + + + 5776-05-27 + + + 40D (Hebrew) + + + + + 10 + + + Indian + + + 1938-06-09 + + + Unsupported + + + + + 0E, 0F, 11, 12 or 13 + + + Unknown + + + 2016-07-29 + + + Unsupported + + + + + Unsupported + + + Hanja + + + + + 412 (Korean) + + + + + Unsupported + + + ROC + + + 0105-08-31 + + + 404 (Chinese - Taiwan) + + +
+
+ +
+ +NatNum12 modifier + +To spell out numbers in various number, currency and date formats, use a [NatNum12] modifier with the chosen arguments at the beginning of a number format code. + +Common NatNum12 formatting examples + + + + + Formatting code + + + Explanation + + + + + [NatNum12] + + + Spell out as cardinal number: 1 → one + + + + + [NatNum12 ordinal] + + + Spell out as ordinal number: 1 → first + + + + + [NatNum12 ordinal-number] + + + Spell out as ordinal indicator: 1 → 1st + + + + + [NatNum12 capitalize] + + + Spell out with capitalization, as cardinal number: 1 → One + + + + + [NatNum12 upper ordinal] + + + Spell out in upper case, as ordinal number: 1 → FIRST + + + + + [NatNum12 title] + + + Spell out in title case, as cardinal number: 101 → Hundred One + + + + + [NatNum12 USD] + + + Spell out as a money amount of a given currency specified by 3-letter ISO code: 1 → one U.S. dollar + + + + + [NatNum12 D=ordinal-number]D" of "MMMM + + + Spell out as a date in format "1st of May" + + + + + [NatNum12 YYYY=title year,D=capitalize ordinal]D" of "MMMM, YYYY + + + Spell out as a date in format "First of May, Nineteen Ninety-nine" + + + + + [NatNum12 MMM=upper]MMM-DD + + + Display upper case abbreviated month name in format "JAN-01" + + + + + [NatNum12 MMMM=lower]MMMM + + + Display lower case month name in format "january" + + +
+ +Other possible arguments: "money" before 3-letter currency codes, for example [NatNum12 capitalize money USD]0.00 will format number "1.99" as "One and 99/100 U.S. Dollars". + +
+ +
+ +Error Codes + +If the value is outside the limits for the selected format the following error code is shown: + +#FMT + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1887d0e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + Hyperlink + /text/shared/01/05020400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formatting; hyperlinks +characters; hyperlinks +hyperlinks; character formats +text;hyperlinks +links; character formats + + + + +Hyperlink +Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink. + A hyperlink is a link to a file on the Internet or on your local system. + + +You can also assign or edit a named HTML anchor, or Bookmark, that refers to a specific place in a document. + + +
+ +
+Hyperlink +Specify the properties for the hyperlink. + +URL +Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. + + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open. + +Reference +Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink. + +Events +Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink. + +Name +
+Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink: +<A HREF="http://www.example.com/" NAME="Nametext" TARGET="_blank">Note</A> +
+ +Frame +
+Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. + +
+
+ + + +Name of Frame + + +Definition + + + + +Named entries + + +File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. + + + + +_self + + +File opens in the current frame. + + + + +_blank + + +File opens in a new page. + + + + +_parent + + +File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. + + + + +_top + + +File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy. + + +
+
+Character Styles +Specify the formatting options for the hyperlink. + +Visited links +Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar. + +Unvisited links +Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar. +
+Hyperlink dialog +Assign macro +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..357a6ab63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + Font Position + /text/shared/01/05020500.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+positioning; fonts +formats; positions +effects;font positions +fonts; positions in text +spacing; font effects +characters; spacing +pair kerning +kerning; in characters +text; kerning + + + +Font Position +Position +Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +Position +Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. + + +Superscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. + + +Normal +Removes superscript or subscript formatting. + + +Subscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. + + +Raise/lower by +Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. + +Relative font size +Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. + +Automatic +Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. +Rotation/scaling + + +Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. + +0 degrees +Does not rotate the selected text. + +90 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. + +270 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. + +Fit to line +Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. + + + +Scale width +Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. +Spacing +Specify the spacing between individual characters. + + +Spacing +Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the text in the spin button. +To increase the spacing, set a positive value; to reduce it, set a negative value. + +Pair kerning +Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. +Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4ed7f281 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Asian Layout + /text/shared/01/05020600.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+double-line writing in Asian layout +formats; Asian layout +characters; Asian layout +text; Asian layout + + + +Asian Layout +Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command. +
+ +
+ +
+Double-lined +Set the double-line options for the selected text. + +Write in double lines +Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document. +Enclosing characters +Specify the characters to enclose the double-lined area. + +Initial character +Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. + +Final character +Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4455f638f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Asian Typography + /text/shared/01/05020700.xhp + + + +
+Asian typography +formatting; Asian typography +paragraphs; Asian typography +typography; Asian + + + +Asian Typography +Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. +
+
+ +
+Line change +Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. +Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line +Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. +Allow hanging punctuation +Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. +Apply spacing between Asian and non-Asian text +Inserts a space between ideographic and alphabetic text. +
+Enabling Asian language support +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81156dc74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Paragraph +/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Paragraph

+Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment. + To modify the font of the current paragraph, select the entire paragraph, choose Format - Character, and then click on the Font tab. +
+ +
+The paragraph style for the current paragraph is displayed at the Formatting toolbar, and is highlighted in the Styles window. +UFI: changed name of bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9375088d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ + + + + + + + Indents and Spacing + /text/shared/01/05030100.xhp + + + +
+spacing; between paragraphs in footnotes + line spacing; paragraph + spacing; lines and paragraphs + single-line spacing in text + one and a half line spacing in text + double-line spacing in paragraphs + leading between paragraphs + paragraphs;spacing +mw deleted "footnote spacings" and added "paragraphs;spacing" + + +

Indents and Spacing

+ Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph. +
+ To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General , and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + + +You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. + + +
+ +
+

Indent

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. + +

Before text

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. + +

After text

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. + +

First line

+ Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". + +

Automatic

+ Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. +

Spacing

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. + +

Above paragraph

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Below paragraph

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). + +

Do not add space between paragraphs of the same style

+ Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style. + +

Line spacing

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. +
+

Single

+ Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1 + + + + Line Spacing 1 + + +
+
+
+

1.15 lines

+ Sets the line spacing to 1.15 lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1.15 + + + + Line Spacing 1.15 + + +
+
+
+

1.5 lines

+ Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1.5 + + + + Line Spacing 1.5 + + +
+
+
+

Double

+ Sets the line spacing to two lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 2 + + + + Line Spacing 2 + + +
+
+

Proportional

+ Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. +

At Least

+ Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. + If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. +

Leading

+ Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. +

Fixed

+ Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. + + +

of

+ Enter the value to use for the line spacing. + + +

Activate page line-spacing

+ Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Use page line-spacing option for the current page style. Choose Format - Page Style, click on the Page tab, and then select the Use page line-spacing box in the Layout settings section. + + + + + +
+ + Printing with Page line-spacing +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..557b654f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + +Tabs +/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp + + + +
+formats; tabulators +fill characters with tabulators +tab stops;settings + + + +Tabs +Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph. +
+If you want, you can also use the ruler to set the tab positions. +
+ +
+ +Position +Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed. +Type +Select the type of tab stop that you want to modify. + + +Left +The name of this tab stop is Left/Top if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. + + +Right +This name of this tab stop is Right/Bottom if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop. + +Center +Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop. + +Decimal +Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab. +The character that is used as a decimal separator depends on the regional setting of your operating system. + + +Character +Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator. +Fill Character +Specify the characters to use as leader to the left of the tab stop. + +None +Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop. + +....... +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots. + +------ +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes. + +______ +Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. + + +Character +Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. + +New +Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph. + +Delete all +Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8053f617d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + Borders + /text/shared/01/05030500.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Borders

+ Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc. +
+ +You can specify the border position, size, and style in Writer or Calc. In $[officename] Writer, you can add borders to pages, frames, graphics, tables, paragraphs, characters and to embedded objects. + +
+ +
+ + To modify the border of an entire table, place the cursor in a table cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. To modify the border of a table cell, select the cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. + + + +

Line arrangement

+ Select a predefined border style to apply. + Alternatively, use the Borders button on the toolbar to apply predefined border formats. + + + + + The Remove border option in the Adjacent Cells section determines if borders in the edges of the selected range are to be removed. Leave this option unchecked if edge borders should be left unchanged. + Read the help page User Defined Borders in Cells to learn more on how to define custom line arrangements. + + +Line +Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview. + + +Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). +

Padding

+Specify the amount of space that you want to leave between the border and the contents of the selection. +Left +Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection. +Right +Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection. +Top +Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection. +Bottom +Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection. +Synchronize +Applies the same padding setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance. +shadows; borders +borders; shadows +margins; shadows + +Shadow style +You can also apply a shadow effect to borders. For the best results, only apply this effect when all four borders are visible. +Graphics or objects that are anchored to a frame in the document cannot exceed the size of the frame. If you apply a shadow to the borders of an object that fills an entire frame, the size of the object is reduced to display the shadows. +Position +Click a shadow style for the selected borders. +Distance +Enter the width of the shadow. +Color +Select a color for the shadow. + +Properties +Specifies the properties for the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +Merge with next paragraph +Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph. These styles are only merged if the indent, border, and shadow styles of the next paragraph are the same as the current paragraph. This option is also available for Paragraph Styles.UFI: see spec "spec-merge-borders-and-shadow" +Merge adjacent line styles +Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document. +The rules can be condensed to the statement that the stronger attribute wins. If, for example, one cell has a red border of 2 point width, and the adjacent cell has a blue border of 3 point width, then the common border between these two cells will be blue with 3 point width.UFI: see spec "collapsing_table_borders" + + + +Calc does not have an Apply button + + +
+ + + UFI: moved border_object into Writer switch + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e62370ddc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp + + + +
+aligning; paragraphs +paragraphs; alignment +lines of text; alignment +left alignment of paragraphs +right alignment of paragraphs +centered text +justifying text +MW deleted "text;" + + +

Alignment

+Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page. +
+
+ +
+Options +Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. + +Left +Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. + + + +Right +Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. + + + +Centered +Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. + + + + +Justify +Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. + + + + +Last Line + +Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. + + +Expand single word + +If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. + + +UFI: asian enabled + + +Snap to text grid (if active) +Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. + +

Text-to-text

+

Alignment

+Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph. +
+

Properties

+ + + +
+

Text direction

+Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +
+
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..303287ff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Crop +/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cropping pictures +pictures; cropping and zooming +zooming; pictures +scaling;pictures +sizes; pictures +original size;restoring after cropping + + + +Crop +Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size. +
+
+ +
+
+Crop +Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. + +Keep scale +Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. + +Keep image size +Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. + +Left +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. + +Right +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. + +Top +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. + +Bottom +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. +Scale +Changes the scale of the selected graphic. + +Width +Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. + +Height +Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. +Image size +Changes the size of the selected graphic. + +Width +Enter a width for the selected graphic. + +Height +Enter a height for the selected graphic. + + +Original Size +Returns the selected graphic to its original size. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccfe8b328 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Organizer + /text/shared/01/05040100.xhp + + + + +organizing; styles +styles; organizing + + + +
+

Organizer

+Set the options for the selected style. +
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ +

Name

+ Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. + + + + +

AutoUpdate

+Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. +Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. + + +

Next Style

+Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to an empty paragraph that is created when you press Enter at the end of an existing paragraph. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. + + + + +

Inherit from

+ Select an existing style (or - None -) to provide its definitions to the current style. Use the other tabs to modify the inherited style. + You cannot use this option with a page style or a list style. + +

Edit Style

+Edit the properties of the parent style. +

Category

+ Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. + You cannot change the category for a predefined style. + +

Contains

+ Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ Update Style +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..473fa35f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + +Page +/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp + + + +
+pages;formatting and numbering +formatting;pages +paper formats +paper trays +printers;paper trays +layout;pages +binding space +margins;pages +gutter +changing;page size +changing;page margins +page margins +margins;defining +page size;defining +mw made "binding space;" a one level entry and added "gutter" and "margins;pages" + + +

Page

+Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Paper format

+Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. + +

Format

+Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. + +

Width

+Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. + +

Height

+Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. +

Orientation

+Select paper orientation for display and print. + +

Portrait

+Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. + +

Landscape

+Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. + +

Text direction

+Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. + +Text direction only appears if Asian or Complex text layout is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Setting - Languages. + + +

Paper tray

+Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# +

Margins

+Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. + +

Left / Inner

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. + +

Right / Outer

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. + + + + + +

Gutter

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left margin. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner page margin and the inner edge of the page. + + + + +

Top

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. + +

Bottom

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. + + +

Layout settings

+ + + + +

Page layout

+ Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages. +

Right and left

+ The current page style shows both odd and even pages with left and right margins as specified. +

Mirrored

+ The current page style shows both odd and even pages with inner and outer margins as specified. Use this layout if you want to bind the printed pages like a book. Enter the binding space as the "Inner" margin. +

Only right

+ The current page style shows only odd (right) pages. Even pages are shown as blank pages. +

Only left

+ The current page style shows only even (left) pages. Odd pages are shown as blank pages. + + + + + +

Slide Numbers

+ Select the slide numbering format that you want to use for the current slide style. + + +

Page Numbers

+ Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. + + + + + + + +

Reference Style

+ Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. +

Use page line-spacing

+ Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. + Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. + +

Gutter position

+ Allows choosing if the current document's gutter shall be positioned at the left of the document's pages (default) or at top of the document's pages when the document is displayed. + + + + + + + +

Table alignment

+ Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. + Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. +

Horizontal

+ Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. + Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. +

Vertical

+ Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. + + + + + + + + +

Fit object to paper format

+ Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. + + + +
+Changing measurement units + + +Printing with Page line-spacing (register-true) + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b6543241 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Header + /text/shared/01/05040300.xhp + + + + + If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header. + + + + +
+ +
+ To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. + + If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. + + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + + +

Header

+ Set the properties of the header. + +

Header on

+ Adds a header to the current page style. + +

Same content left/righti80087

+ Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. + + +

Same content on first page

+First and even/odd pages share the same content. + +

Left margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin and the left edge of the header. + +

Right margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right page margin and the right edge of the header. + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. + +

Use dynamic spacing

+ Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. + +

Height

+ Enter the height that you want for the header. + +

AutoFit height

+ Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. + + +

More

+ Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. + +

Edit +

+ Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text. + +
+ Headers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Area +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1c89a7d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Footer + /text/shared/01/05040400.xhp + + + + +If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer. + + + + +
+ +
+To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. + +If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. + + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + + +

Footer

+Set the properties of the footer. + + +

Footer on

+Adds a footer to the current page style. + + +

Same content left/right

+Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. + + + +

Same content on first page

+First and even/odd pages share the same content. + + +

Left margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. + + +

Right margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. + + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. + + +

Use dynamic spacing

+ Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. + + +

Height

+ Enter the height you want for the footer. + + +

AutoFit height

+ Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. + + + + +

More

+ Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. + + +

Edit +

+ Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text. + +
+ Footers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Area +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6e7055e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Asian Phonetic Guide +/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp + + + +
+Asian Phonetic Guide +phonetic guide + + + + +Asian Phonetic Guide +Allows you to add comments next to Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide. + +
+
+ +
+ + +Select one or more words in the document. + + +Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. + + +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. + + + + + +Base text +Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. + + + +Ruby text +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. +Alignment +Select the horizontal alignment for the ruby text. +Position +Select where you want to place the ruby text. +Character Style for ruby text +Select a character style for the ruby text. +Styles +Opens the Styles deck of the Sidebar +Styles deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab4757d77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Align Objects +/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp + + + +
+aligning; objects +positioning; objects +ordering; objects + + +

Align Objects

+Aligns selected objects with respect to one another. +
+If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work. +
+ +
+Not all types of objects can be selected together. Not all modules (Writer, Calc, Impress, Draw) support all types of alignment. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..781329f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Left +/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Left +Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.UFI: this help id .uno:alignleft is also called from Calc, where it has a different function +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the left edge of the leftmost object in the selection. +To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group +double-click to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feac83fce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Center Horizontal + /text/shared/01/05070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Center Horizontal

+ Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page. +
+
+ +
+ The vertical position of the selected objects is not affected by this command. + + + To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + To align the individual objects in a group, double-click to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67ee6afd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Right +/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the right edge of the rightmost object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2009480ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Top +/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Top +Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin. +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the top edge of the topmost object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0abeb02d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Vertical Center +/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Vertical Center +Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b51adde5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Bottom +/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Bottom +Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin. +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the bottom edge of the bottom most object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11d2fa015 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment (Text Objects) +/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+aligning; text objects +text objects; alignment + +Alignment (Text Objects) +Set the alignment options for the current selection. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e1a70137 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Left +/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Left + Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24a8c6d90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Right +/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24aae3145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Center +/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Center + Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4464934ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Justify +/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp + + + +
+ +Justify +Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment. +removed link, see i62789 +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45aef3cc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Font +/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ fonts; text objectstext objects; fontsFont + Set the font options for the selected text. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47f35b5e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Size +/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; font sizes +font sizes; text + +Size +Set the font size for the selected text. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5598fc26e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merge Cells +/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp + + + +moved from scalc/01/05100100.xhp and updated for tdf#33749 +
+ + merge/merging cells + + +

Merge Cells

+Combines the contents of the selected cells into a single cell, retaining the formatting of the first cell in the selection.moved from swriter/01/05100100.xhp, see i86644 +
+ + + +
+
+Select the cells to be merged then do one of the following: +In the Formatting toolbar, click: + +Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Merge Cells. If Unmerge Cells is present instead then the cell selection contains merged cells and cannot be merged further. +Or, in the Properties sidebar mark the Merge Cells checkbox. +Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge Cells. +
+ +
+ + +
+
+Choose Table - Merge Cells.
 +Or, on the Table toolbar click: + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13c8281e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Split Cells +/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp + + + +
+ +unmerge/unmerging cells +split/splitting cells + + + + + + +
+This section moved from /text/calc/01/05100200.xhp and updated for tdf#33749 +

Unmerge Cells

+Divides previously merged cells back to the original cells. If the original cells had content that was kept when merged that content is restored. +
+
+Select the cells to be unmerged then do one of the following: +In the Formatting toolbar click: + +Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Unmerge Cells. If Merge Cells is present instead then the cell selection does not contain any merged cells. +Or, in the Properties sidebar clear the Merge Cells checkbox. +Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Unmerge Cells +
+ + +
+

Split Cells

+Displays the Split Cells Dialog where the split can be defined as either horizontally or vertically and the number the each cell will be split into. +
+
+Do one of the following: +Choose Table - Split Cells. +Or, on the Table toolbar click: + +
+

Split Cells Dialog

+Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into. +

Direction

+

Horizontally

+Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box. + +

Into equal proportions

+Splits cells into rows of equal height. + +

Vertically

+Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box. + + +
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68d0095db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Top +/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp + + + +
+ +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Top + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75ef4719e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Center (vertical) +/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp + + + +
+ +Center (vertical) +Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Center + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e247a6b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bottom +/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp + + + +
+ +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Bottom + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d37c45d39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Style +/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; font styles +fonts; styles + +Style +Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection. +
+
+ +
+If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e596362e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bold +/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; bold +bold; text +characters; bold + + +

Bold

+Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed. +
+If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b41ca1ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Italic +/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; italics +italic text +characters; italics + + +

Italic

+Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed. +
+If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..528dc23fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Underline +/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+characters;underliningunderlining;characters +

Underline

+Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text. +
+
+ +
+If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is underlined. +
+

Single Underline

+ +Underlines the selected text with a single line. +
+
+

Double Underline

+ +Underlines the selected text with two lines. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba165143c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Strikethrough +/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ strikethrough;characters + +

Strikethrough

+ Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..854d5c5fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Shadows +/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; shadowed +characters; shadowed +shadows;characters, using context menu + + +Shadows +Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..244217567 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Distribute Rows Evenly +/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp + + + +
+ + + table rows;distribute height equally + row height;distribute equally + +Distribute Rows Evenly +Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection. + +
+
+ + +Choose Table - Size - Distribute Rows Evenly + + + +Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Distribute Rows Evenly + + +
+ +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f984f536 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Superscript +/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
UFI. removed 2 help ids +

Superscript

+Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a162b880 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Subscript +/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Subscript

+Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1d988d36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Line Spacing +/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+line spacing; context menu in paragraphs +text; line spacing + + +

Line Spacing

+Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. +
+
+ +
+ + + +
+Indents and Spacing +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91d039beb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Single Line +/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Single Line

+ Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..958d738c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +1.5 Lines +/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

1.5 Lines

+Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10af87546 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Double (Line) +/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Double (Line)

+Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cba018296 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Distribute Columns Equally +/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp + + + +
+ + + table columns;distribute columns equally + column width;distribute equally + +Distribute Columns Equally +Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page. + +
+
+ + +Choose Table - Size - Distribute Columns Equally + + + +Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Distribute Columns Equally + + +
+ +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdfb4fead --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +New Style from Selection +/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

New Style from Selection

+ + +Create new paragraph, character, frame, page, list, and table styles from objects that are formatted manually to the new style that you want to create. +Create new cell and page styles from manually modified cell or page formatting. +Create new graphic styles from objects that you have formatted manually to the new style that you want to create. + + +
+ + +For paragraphs only: + Press Shift+F11 + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection. + On the Formatting bar, click the New Style from Selection icon. +For all style categories: + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, select the desired style category at the top of Styles deck, then click the Styles action menu icon at the top right corner, and choose New Style from Selection. + + + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection. (cell styles only) + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, select the desired style category at the top of Styles deck, then click the New Style from Selection icon. + + + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, then click the New Style from Selection icon at the top of the Styles deck. + + + + + + +New Style from Selection Icon + + + + New Style from Selection Icon + + +
+
+ +

Enter New Style Name

+ Enter a name for the new Style. +

Custom Styles for Current Document

+ Lists all custom styles in the selected style category forin the selected style category forin the current document. These styles can be overwritten with a new style selection if you want. +
+ + + + + + + + Styles in Calc + + + + Styles in Impress + + + Styles + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..919035861 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Name + /text/shared/01/05190000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +objects; naming +groups;naming +names;objects +ufi: changed names;for groups of objects to names;objects, in cws aw038 + + +
+

Name

+Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator. +UFI: #i63800 +
+
+ +
+ +The name is also displayed in the Status Bar when you select the object. + + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator. +Names must be unique between images, OLE objects and frames in the same document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43d7898f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Description + /text/shared/01/05190100.xhp + + + +objects;text alternative and description + descriptions for objects + text alternative;objects + + + + +
+

Description

+Assigns a text alternative and a description to the selected object. These texts are available as alternative tags in your document for use by accessibility tools. They are also available as tags for images when you export the document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Text Alternative

+
+Enter a short description of the essential details of the selected object for a person who cannot see the object. This text is available for use by assistive technologies. +
+ +
+

Description

+Enter a longer description of the object, especially if the object is too complex or contains too much detail to be described adequately with the short Text Alternative. Use Description to add additional information to the short description found in Text Alternative. This text is available for use by assistive technologies. + For images, Text Alternative and Description are exported with an appropriate tag in HTML and PDF format (remember to enable the Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA) option in PDF export). +
+
+Options in Object Properties +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96d936732 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Line +/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Line + +Sets the formatting options for the selected line. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e16b9c75b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + +Line +/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Line

+Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols. +
+
+ +
+

Line properties

+ + +

Styles

+Select the line style that you want to use. + + + + +

Colors

+Select a color for the line. + + + + +

Widths

+Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. + + + +

Transparency

+Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque. + + + +The Line tab of the Data Series dialog is only available if you select an XY Chart type. +

Icon

+Set the options for the data point symbols in your chart. + +

Select

+Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart. If you select Automatic, $[officename] uses the default symbols for the selected chart type. + +

Width

+Enter a width for the symbol. + +

Height

+Enter a height for the symbol. + +

Keep ratio

+Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value. +

Arrow styles

+You can add arrowheads to one end, or both ends of the selected line. To add a custom arrow style to the list, select the arrow in your document, and then click on the Arrow Styles tab of this dialog. + + +

Style

+Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line. + + +

Width

+Enter a width for the arrowhead. + + +

Center

+Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line. + +

Synchronize ends

+Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead. +

Corner and cap styles

+ +

Corner style

+Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape. + +

Cap style

+Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6ad692c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + +Line Styles +/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Line Styles

+Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles. +
+
+ +
+

Properties

+ +

Line style

+Select the style of line that you want to create. + + +

Type

+Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want. + + +

Number

+Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence. + + +

Length

+Enter the length of the dash. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes. + +

Fit to line width

+Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line. + +

Add

+Creates a new line style using the current settings. Enter a name for the new line style. + +

Modify

+Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted. + + +

Load line style table

+Imports a list of line styles. + +

Save line style table

+Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f30b1f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +Arrow Styles +/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Arrow Styles

+Edit or create arrow styles. +
+You can add arrow styles to the start or end of a line using the Line tab of the Line dialog. +
+ +
+

Manage Arrow Styles

+Lets you add, rename, delete, save and load arrow styles. + +

Style name

+Displays the name of the selected arrow style. + +

Arrow style

+Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. + +

Add

+To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here. + +

Rename

+Changes the name of the selected arrow style. + + +

Load Arrow Styles

+Imports a list of arrow styles. + +

Save Arrow Styles

+Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac2ad7f18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Area window +/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +Area + +Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ba99f6b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + +Area tab +/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp + + + +
+ +areas; styles +fill patterns for areas +fill colors for areas +invisible areas +frames; backgrounds +backgrounds; frames/sections/indexes +sections; backgrounds +indexes; backgrounds +footers;backgrounds +headers;backgrounds + + + + +

+BackgroundArea

+Set the fill options for the selected drawing object or document element. +This is not only for drawing objects, but pages, paragraphs and others too. Need better wording +
+You can add custom colors, gradients, hatchings, two color patterns and image patterns to the default lists for later use. +
+ +
+ +

None

+Do not fill the selected object. + + + + + + + + +

Gradient

+Fills the object with a gradient selected on this page. + + + + + + + +

Hatch

+Fills the object with a hatching pattern selected on this page. + +You can quickly select fill options from the list boxes on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + +TODO: This para doesn't belong here anymore, but as several places include it, can't remove yet. Find a better place for it in a later commit. + + + +Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object. + + +Chart does not have an Apply button + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..108aa9b62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Colors + /text/shared/01/05210200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +colors;palette +palette;document colors +colors;adding +colors;delete +document colors;palette + +
+

Colors

+ Select a color to apply, save the current color list, or load a different color list. +
+
+ Press the Color button in one of the situations below: + +
+ +

Colors

+

Palette

+ Select the color palette in the list box to pick the color for the selected object. The palette color set displays below. + The Theme colors palette shows the theme colors from the current theme, if the document has any. + The Document colors palette shows the colors used in the current document. +

Recent colors

+ Displays the recent selected colors. +

Custom Palette

+ Click Add to open a dialog to set a name for the custom color. The palette changes to "custom". + Click Delete to delete the color from the custom palette. + You cannot add or delete colors of the palettes provided by your installation. + +

Active

+ Displays the current active color for the object. Red, blue and green components values and the color value in hexadecimal notation are displayed just below. +

New

+ Displays the new color for the object that will be applied when you click OK. +

R, G and B

+ The values of the red, blue and green components of the new color. You can define the new color by entering the red, green and blue values in the respective R, G and B spin boxes. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +

Hex

+ The color value in hexadecimal notation. You can enter the hexadecimal value in the Hex text box. +

Pick

+ Opens the color picker dialog for a graphical selection of the desired color. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc3ffdb49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Gradient + /text/shared/01/05210300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Gradients

+ Select a gradient, modify the properties of a gradient, or save a new gradient. +
+
+ +
+

Gradient

+Lists the available gradients. You can also modify or create your own gradients. + +

Add

+ Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button + +

Modify

+ Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. +To rename a gradient, select the gradient, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a gradient, select the gradient, right-click and choose Delete. +

Options

+Use the options to define or modify a gradient. + +

Type

+Select the gradient that you want to apply. + +

Center X

+ Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. + +

Center Y

+ Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. + +

Angle

+ Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. + +

Border

+ Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. +

From Color

+ +Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. + +Enter the intensity for the color in the From Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. +

To Color

+ +Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. + +Enter the intensity for the color in the To Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6df6d0e57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Hatch +/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp + + + +
+hatching +areas; hatched/dotted +dotted areas + + + +

Hatch

+Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save a new hatching pattern. +
+
+ + +
+

Hatch

+Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. + +To rename a hatching pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a hatching pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Delete. +

Add

+Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. + +

Modify

+Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. +

Options

+Define or modify a hatching pattern. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. + +

Angle

+Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. + +

Line type

+Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. + +

Line color

+Select the color of the hatch lines. +

Background Color

+To apply a background color, select the Background color box, then select a color. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..772cdbde2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + +Image +/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp + + + +
+ +images; areas +areas; image + + + +

Image

+Select an image that you want to use as a fill image, or add your own image pattern. +
+
+ +
+

Image

+Lists the available images. You can also import images. +To rename an image, select the image, right-click and choose Rename. To delete an image, select the image, right-click and choose Delete. + +

Add/Import

+Locate the image that you want to import, and then click Open. The image is added to the end of the list of available images. + +Imported images are saved in your user profile and can be used in other documents. + +

Options

+ +

Style

+ + + Tiled: Fill the area with the image as tiles. + + + Stretched: Stretch the image to fit the object area. + + + Custom position/size: Set a custom size and position of the image in the object area. + + + + + +

Size

+Size of the tiles and the custom size. + + + Width: Set the width of the tile or custom size. + + + Height: Set the height of the tile or custom size. + + + Scale: Mark to turn the height and width settings relative to original size. + + + +

Position

+Select the anchoring position of the image inside the object area. + + +

Tiling Position

+ + + X-Offset: Set the horizontal image offset value with respect to the anchoring position. + + + Y-Offset: Set the vertical image offset value with respect to the anchoring position. + + + + +

Tiling Offset

+Select the tiles offset in rows or columns. Use the spin button to specify the offset value. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da8d71c12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + +Shadow +/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+areas; shadows +shadows; areas + + + +

Shadow

+Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow. +
+
+ +
+

Properties

+Set the properties of the shadow that you want to apply. + +

Use shadow

+Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object. + +

Position

+Click where you want to cast the shadow. + +

Distance

+Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object. + +

Color

+Select a color for the shadow. + +

Transparency

+Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow. + + + +
+

Shadow

+Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw. + + + + +Icon Add Shadow + + +Shadow + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34f1007a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Transparency +/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+transparency;areas +areas; transparency + + + +

Transparency

+Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object. +
+
+ + +
+

Transparency mode

+Specify the type of transparency that you want to apply. + +

No transparency

+Turns off color transparency. This is the default setting. + +

Transparency

+Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. + +

Transparency spin button

+Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent). + +

Gradient

+Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties. + +

Type

+Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply. + +

Center X

+Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient. + +

Center Y

+Enter the vertical offset for the gradient. + +

Angle

+Enter a rotation angle for the gradient. + +

Border

+Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%. + +

Start value

+Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. + +

End value

+Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. +

Preview

+Use the preview to view your changes before you apply the transparency effect to the color fill of the selected object. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bfdc50bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Pattern + /text/shared/01/05210800.xhp + + + +
+ +pattern;area +pattern;background +background;pattern +background;area + + + +

Pattern

+Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page. +
+

Pattern

+Lists the available patterns. You can also modify or create your own pattern. + +To rename a pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Delete. +

Add

+Adds a custom pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your pattern, and then click this button. + + +

Modify

+Applies the current pattern properties to the selected pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. + +

Options

+Draw or modify a pattern. + + +

Pattern Editor

+ +Draw the pattern in the 8 x 8 pixel board. Click on a pattern pixel to activate it, click again to deactivate it. + + +

Foreground Color

+Set the color of the activated pattern pixels. + + +

Background Color

+Set the color of the deactivated pattern pixels. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32d64678b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Text (Formatting) + /text/shared/01/05220000.xhp + + + +
+text; text/draw objects + draw objects; text in + frames; text fitting to frames + + + + +

Text

+ Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +
+
+ +
+ The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. +

Drawing Object Text

+ +

Fit width to text

+ Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit height to text

+ Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit to frame

+ Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. This control is available only when the other "fit" controls are not selected. + +

Adjust to contour

+ Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. +

Custom Shape Text

+ +

Word wrap text in shape

+ Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. + +

Resize shape to fit text

+ Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. +

Spacing to borders

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. + +

Left

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. + +

Right

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. + +

Top

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. + +

Bottom

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. +

Text anchor

+ Set the anchor type and the anchor position. + +

Graphic field

+ Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. + +

Full width

+ Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99596483d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Position and Size +/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Position and Size +Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8085a1218 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ + + + + + + + Position and Size (Text Box and Shape) + /text/shared/01/05230100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + positioning;draw objects and controls + draw objects;positioning and resizing + controls; positions and sizes + sizes;draw objects + anchors;types/positions for draw objects + draw objects; anchoring + + + + + + +

Position and Size

+ Resizes or moves the selected object. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Position

+Specify the location of the selected object on the page. + + + + + +Coordinate axes start at column A - row 1. +X-coordinates are negative in a "right-to-left" table. + + DRAW/IMPRESS +Coordinates are relative to the origin. Left/top corner of the page content area is the initial default. + + + + + + +

Position X

+Enter the horizontal coordinate where the selected base point should be placed. + +

Position Y

+Enter the vertical coordinate where the selected base point should be placed. + +

Base point

+The selected base point will be moved to the specified Position Y and Position X. +The base point always returns to the left/top corner on reopening the dialog. + + +

Size

+ + +Specify the size of the selected object. + + +Resize the selected object to the chosen width and height relative to the selected base point. + + + + +

Width

+Enter a width for the selected object. + + +

Height

+Enter a height for the selected object. + + +

Keep ratio

+Maintains the width and height ratio when changing the width or height setting in the dialog box. + + + +Only for shapes. + + + + + + + + + + +

To frame

+Anchors the selection to the surrounding frame. + + + +

Base point

+Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. +The selected base point remains fixed in the grid. The object is resized relative to that point. + + + +

Protect

+ + +

Position

+Prevents changes to the position and size of the selected object. + + +

Size

+Prevents you from resizing the object. + + + + + + + + + + + + + 2022-05-01: Following two options are not in Image (Type tab for Writer), so not part of sections embedded here. + + + Below page text area: the bottom edge of the page text area to the bottom edge of the page. + + + Above page text area: the top edge of the page to the top of the page text area. + + + + + + +

Adapt

+Specifies, if the size of a drawing object should be adjusted to fit the size of entered text. + +

Fit width to text

+Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit height to text

+Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + + + + + Adapt is only available for Text Boxes. To adapt Shapes to text, use Format - Object - Text. + + + Adapt is only available for Text Boxes. To adapt Shapes to text, use Format - Text. + + +
+ + +Positioning Objects + + + +Rotating Objects + + +Rotation +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f3720ac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Rotation +/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Rotation

+Rotates the selected object. +
+
+ +
+

Pivot Point

+The selected object is rotated around a pivot point that you specify. The default pivot point is at the center of the object. +If you set a pivot point too far outside of the object boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. + + +

Position X

+Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point. + +

Position Y

+Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point. + +

Default settings

+Click where you want to place the pivot point. +

Rotation Angle

+Specify the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object, or click in the rotation grid. + +

Angle

+Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object. + +

Default settings

+Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7868ccb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Slant & Corner Radius +/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+slanting draw objects +draw objects; slanting +areas; slanting +shapes; control points +draw objects; control points +mw made "slanting;..." a one level entry + + +

Slant & Corner Radius

+Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object. +
+
+ +
+ +

Corner Radius

+You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. + +

Radius

+Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. +

Slant

+Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. + +

Angle

+Enter the angle of the slant axis.. The slant angle relates to how much an object inclines or slants from its normal vertical position. +

Control points 1 and 2

+Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. The control points refers to the X and Y coordinates of the position of these handles. When the object has no handle, the values in these boxes are zero. When the shape has one control point, the coordinates of the other control point are zero. +Enter a value to set the X and Y coordinates of the control points of the object. + + Control points in a shape + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78061b664 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Callout +/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+legends; draw objects +draw objects; legends +labels;for draw objects +labels, see also names/callouts +captions, see also labels/callouts +names, see also labels/callouts +mw made "labeling..." a two level entry and added 3 "see also" references +Callout +Specify the properties of the selected callout. +
+
+ +
+ + +These callouts are a legacy of the first versions of %PRODUCTNAME. You must customize a toolbar or menu to insert these callouts. The newer custom shape callouts offer more features, for example a Callouts toolbar +Icon + where you can select the shape. + +Callout Styles +Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout. + +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box. + + + +Extension +Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box. + +Length +Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line. +The Length box is only available if you select the Angled connector line callout style, and leave the Optimal checkbox cleared. + +Optimal +Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eda40485f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Flip +/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+draw objects; flipping +flipping draw objects + + +Flip +Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically. +
+
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..526544824 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Vertically +/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp + + + +
+ + +Vertically +Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79070464e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Horizontally +/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Horizontally +Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f380e709 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Arrange +/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp + + + +
+objects; arranging within stacks +arranging; objects +borders; arranging +pictures; arranging within stacks +draw objects; arranging within stacks +controls; arranging within stacks +OLE objects; arranging within stacks +charts; arranging within stacks +layer arrangement +levels; depth stagger +depth stagger +mw made "layers;..." a one level entry + + + +Arrange +Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s). +
+
+ +
+Layer for text and graphics +Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. Use the arrange commands to change the stacking order of objects in your document. You cannot change the stacking order of text. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a4163d9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bring to Front +/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Bring to Front + Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects. +
+
+ +
+
+ Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cee57d77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bring Forward +/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Bring Forward +Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd9028183 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Send Backward +/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Send Backward +Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8af4f5e36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Send to Back +/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Send to Back + Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects. +
+
+ +
+
+ Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0b4a5bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Foreground +/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +To Foreground + +Moves the selected object in front of text. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bebbd2dc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Background +/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +To Background + +Moves the selected object behind text. +
+
+ +
+
+ +Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18b1377cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Anchor +/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Anchor

+Shows anchoring options for the selected object. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +If the selected object is in a frame, you can also anchor the object to the frame. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed03e717d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +To Page +/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp + + + +
+ +

To Page

+Anchors the selected object so that it always remains on the current page. +
+
+ +
+Objects with this anchor can be positioned in relation to the entire page or in relation to the page’s text area. +The position of the anchored object on the current page does not change as content and pages are added or removed from the document. + The current page remains in the document, with its current position in the sequence of pages, as long as the object is anchored to that page. +The anchor icon is displayed at the top left corner of the page. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef2b1429b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +To Paragraph +/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Paragraph

+ Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph. +
+
+ +
+ Objects with this anchor can be positioned in relation to the page or its text area, as well as the paragraph or its text area. + The anchor icon is displayed at the left page margin at the beginning of the paragraph. +When a paragraph is used for positioning and the paragraph extends over more than one page or column, then positioning options that refer to a paragraph area or paragraph text area are applied only to the portion of the paragraph in the page or column where the anchor is located. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca836d1ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + To Character + /text/shared/01/05260300.xhp + + + + + +
+ +

To Character

+Anchors the selected object to a character. Use the mouse to drag the anchor to the desired character. +
+
+ +
+The character immediately before the anchor position is used for positioning in relation to the Character region and the Line of text reference line. + +To align an image, frame, or OLE object relative to the anchored character, right-click the object, and choose Properties. Click the Position and Size tab, and in the Position area, select Character in the to boxes. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96fa1584d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +To Cell +/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Cell

+ Anchors the selected item to a cell. The anchor icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the cell. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69dd84054 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +To Frame +/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Frame

+Anchors the selected object to a surrounding frame. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..027eadb2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +As Character +/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp + + + +
+ + +

As Character

+Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. The height of the current line of text is extended, if the object is above (and/or below) the border for the highest character or object in the current line of text. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7555ae02f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Points +/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object. +
+
+ +
+To edit the shape of a selected drawing object, click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar, and then drag one of the points on the object. +
+ +Edit Points Bar +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bbae57ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,335 @@ + + + + + +Fontwork +/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +

Fontwork Dialog (for putting text along a curve)

+Simple tool for putting text along a curve without any fancy effects.UFI: see "Fontwork_ui" spec doc. +This Fontwork dialog is meant for making text follow a curve. Draw a curve, double-click it and type text into it. With the curve selected, you can now activate the Fontwork command. Access the dialog by choosing Format - Text Box and Shape - FontworkFirst call Tools - Customize to add a menu command or a toolbar button to open the dialog. The Fontwork command is found in the Format category of the Customize dialog. +
+

Alignment icons

+You can make text follow any shape. Most of the custom shapes available in the Drawing toolbar need to be converted to a different type before you can use them with Fontwork. In Impress or Draw, right-click the shape and select Convert - To Curve/Polygon/Contour. If you wish, you can now copy and paste the converted shape into Writer for use with Fontwork. Shapes in the Legacy Circles and Ovals and Legacy Rectangles toolbars do not need to be converted. The Arc included in the basic shapes is also a legacy shape. + +Removes baseline formatting. + + + + +Icon + + + +Off + + +
+ + +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rotate + + +
+ + +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters. + + + + +Icon + + + +Upright + + +
+ + +Horizontally slants the characters in the text object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant Horizontal + + +
+ + +Vertically slants the characters in the text object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant Vertical + + +
+ + +Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Orientation + + +
+ + +Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Align Left + + +
+ + +Centers the text on the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Center + + +
+ + +Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Align Right + + +
+ + +Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +AutoSize Text + + +
+ + +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters. + + + + +Icon + + + +Distance + + +
+ + +Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Indent + + +
+ + +Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Contour + + +
+ + +Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Text Contour + + +
+ + +Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +No Shadow + + +
+ + +Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. + + + + +Icon + + + +Vertical + + +
+ + +Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant + + +
+ + +

Horizontal Distance

+Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. + + + + +Icon + + + +X Distance + + +
+ + +

Vertical Distance

+Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. + + + + +Icon + + + +Y Distance + + +
+ + +

Shadow Color

+Select a color for the text shadow. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6500cf74a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group +/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Group +Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object. +
+
+ +
+Working with groups +To edit the individual objects of a group, select the group, right-click, and then choose Enter Group + +Group - Enter Group +When you are editing a group, the objects that are not part of the group are faded. +Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move forwards and backwards through the objects in a group. +To exit a group, right-click, and then choose Exit Group + +Group - Exit Group +Group + +Ungroup + +Enter Group + +Exit Group + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f6c13b66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group +/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Group + Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object. +
+ +
+ The properties of individual objects are maintained even after you group the objects. You can nest groups, that is, you can have a group within a group. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa760d4b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Ungroup +/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Ungroup + Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects. +
+ +
+ To break apart the nested groups within a group, you must repeat this command on each subgroup. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c819247d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Group +/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Enter Group + Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups. This command does not permanently ungroup the objects. +
+ +
+ To select an individual object in a group, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click the object. +
+ Groups + Exit Group +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc00af87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Exit Group +/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Exit Group + Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group. If you are in a nested group, only the nested group is closed. +
+ +
+
+ Groups + Enter Group +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ade7f9e73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Text Animation +/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Text Animation +Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object. +
+
+ +
+Text animation effects +Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. +Effects +Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. +To the Left +Scrolls text from right to left. + + + + +Icon + + + +Left arrow + + +
+To the Right +Scrolls text from left to right. + + + + +Icon + + + +Right arrow + + +
+To the Top +Scrolls text from bottom to top. + + + + +Icon + + + +Up arrow + + +
+To the Bottom +Scrolls text from top to bottom. + + + + +Icon + + + +Down arrow + + +
+Properties +Start Inside +Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. +Text visible when exitingi60202 +Text remains visible after the effect is applied. +Animation effects +Set the looping options for the animation effect. +Continuous +Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. +Continuous box +Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. +Increment +Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. +Pixels +Measures increment value in pixels. +Increment box +Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. +Delay +Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. +Automatic +$[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. +Automatic box +Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c83de7eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + +Text Columns +/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp + + + +
+ + +Text Columns +Adds columns to the text in the selected drawing object. +
+Number of columns +Specifies how many columns to use to lay out the drawing object's text. +Spacing +Specifies the amount of space between the columns. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92f010043 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Theme +/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp + + + +
+ + +Theme +Adds colors to the selected master page. +
+General +Name +Specifies a name for this master page theme. +Color Set +Name +Specifies a name for this set of colors. +Background - Dark 1 +Specifies the first dark color to be used as dark background, typically black. +Text - Light 1 +Specifies the first light color to be used as light text, typically white. +Background - Dark 2 +Specifies the second dark color to be used as dark background. This is typically dark, but not exactly black. +Text - Light 2 +Specifies the second light color to be used as light text. This is typically light, but not exactly white. +Accent 1 +First custom color. This is typically dark enough that light text is readable when the custom color is used as a background color. +Accent 2 +Second custom color. +Accent 3 +Third custom color. +Accent 4 +Fourth custom color. +Accent 5 +Fifth custom color. +Accent 6 +Sixth custom color. +Hyperlink +Color used for non-followed hyperlinks. +Followed Hyperlink +Color used for followed hyperlinks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e3cb966d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + Row Height + /text/shared/01/05340100.xhp + + + + + + + +Row Height + Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. + + You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + +
+ +
+ + +Height + Enter the row height that you want to use. + + +Default value + Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f6d90000 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column width +/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +Column width + Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns. +
+ +
+ You can also change the width of a column by dragging the divider beside the column header. To fit the column width to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + Width + Enter the column width that you want to use. + Default value Automatic + Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9f1c6bcb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp + + + +
+aligning; cells +cells; aligning + + + +Alignment +Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells. +
+
+ +
+ +Horizontal +Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. +If the Default option is selected, numbers will be aligned to the right and text will be left-justified.UFI: removed two help idsUFI: reason: Help IDs .uno:AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignBlock, AlignHorizontalCenter are the same for Objects in Draw/Impress and for text alignment in Calc. Unfortunately both sets of files are located in shared folder... Must create a special file in scalc or add those as hidden texts to a file in scalc. +Left +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Right +Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Center +Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Justified +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders. + + + +Filled +Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. +Distributed +Aligns contents evenly across the whole cell. Unlike Justified, it justifies the very last line of text, too. + +Indent +Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. + +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.UFI: removed two help ids +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell. + + + + + + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Middle +Vertically centers the contents of the cell. + + + +Justified +Aligns the contents of the cell to the top and to the bottom cell borders. +Distributed +Same as Justified, unless the text orientation is vertical. Then it behaves similarly, than horizontal Distributed setting, i.e. the very last line is justified, too. +Text orientation +Sets the text orientation of the cell contents. + + + + + +Click in the dial to set the text orientation. + +Degrees +Enter the rotation angle from 0 to 360 for the text in the selected cell(s). + +Reference edge +Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. + + + +Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the bottom cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. + + + +Vertically stacked +Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" + + +Asian layout mode +This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. +Properties +Determine the text flow in a cell. + +Wrap text automatically +Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command +Ctrl+Enter in the cell.conditional switches inside AVIS do not work + + +Hyphenation active +Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. + +Shrink to fit cell size +Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89a9afd30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ + + + + + +Data Sources +/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp + + + +
+data source browser +tables in databases;browsing and editing +databases; editing tables +editing; database tables and queries +queries; editing in data source view +mw deleted "database tables," and changed "tables in databases;" +

Data Sources

+This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables. +
+ +You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. +

Data source browser

+The commands for the data source browser are found on the Table Data bar and in context menus. +

Selecting records

+To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. +Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields. +The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: + + + +Selection + + +Action + + + + +Record + + +Click the row header + + + + +Several records or removing a selection + + +Hold down CommandCtrl and click the row header + + + + +Column + + +Click the column header + + + + +Data field + + +Click in the data field + + + + +Entire table + + +Click the row header of the column headings + + +
+

Table Data toolbar (editing table data)

+ + + + +Icon + + + +Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table.removed 3 ancient paras + + +
+

Cutting, copying and pasting data

+You can cut, copy, and paste records in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of records, or text and numbers from other $[officename] files. +You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. +Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. + +

Navigating in the Data Source Browser

+Use the Form Navigation bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. +

First record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the first record in the table. + + +
+

Previous record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the previous record in the table. + + +
+

Record number

+ +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. +

Next record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the next record in the table. + + +
+

Last record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the last record in the table. + + +
+

New record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + + +
+

Number of records

+ +Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. +

Organizing tables

+To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. +

Table Format

+ +

Row Height

+ + +

Column Format

+ +

Column Width

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e30751e93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table format +/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Table format + Formats the selected row(s). +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7890d5597 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Rows +/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Delete Rows +Deletes the selected row(s). +
+
+ +
+This command can be activated only when you select the Edit icon on the Table Data bar or Standard bar. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..187be12c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Column format +/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Column format

+ Formats the selected column(s). +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e80ee7691 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Hide Columns +/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Hide Columns +Hides the selected column(s). To display hidden columns, right-click any column header, and then choose Show Columns. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..721316944 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Show Columns +/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Show Columns +Displays hidden columns. Choose the column that you want to display from the list, or click All to display all of the hidden columns. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3e2599f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + +3D Effects +/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + 3D Effects + + +
+ + + +

3D Effects

+Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document or converts a 2D object to 3D. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +
+ +

Apply

+Click here to apply the properties shown in the dialog to the selected object. + + + + + Apply icon + + + + Apply + + +
+ +

Update

+Click here to view in the dialog all the properties of the selected object. + + + + + Update Icon + + + + Update + + +
+ + +

Convert to 3-D

+Use this icon to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D object. You can also select several 2D objects and convert them to one single 3D object. To convert a group of 2D objects to 3D, you must first ungroup the selected objects. + + + + + Icon Convert to 3-D + + + + Convert to 3-D + + +
+ +

Convert to Rotation Object

+Click here to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D rotation object. You can also select several 2D objects and convert them to one single 3D rotation object. To convert a group of 2D objects to 3D, you must first ungroup the selected objects. + + + + + + Icon Convert to Rotation Object + + + + Convert to Rotation Object + + +
+

Perspective On/Off

+Click here to turn the perspective view on or off. + + + + + Icon Perspective On/Off + + + + Perspective On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed822cb08 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + +Geometry +/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp + + + +
+

Geometry

+Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. + + + + + Geometry Icon + + + + Geometry + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Geometry

+Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. +

Rounded edges

+Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. +

Scaled depth

+Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. +

Rotation angle

+Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object. +

Depth

+Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. +

Segments

+You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. +

Horizontal

+Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. +

Vertical

+Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object +

Normals

+Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. +

Object-Specific

+Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. + + + + +Icon + + + +Object-Specific + + +
+

Flat

+Renders the 3D surface as polygons. + + + + +Icon + + + +Flat + + +
+

Spherical

+Renders a smooth 3D surface. + + + + +Icon + + + +Spherical + + +
+

Invert Normals

+Inverts the light source. + + + + +Icon + + + +Invert Normals + + +
+

Double-sided Illumination

+Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. + + + + +Icon + + + +Double-sided illumination + + +
+

Double-Sided

+Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). + + + + +Icon + + +Double-Sided + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d83dd1698 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Shading +/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Shading

+Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Shading + + + + Shading + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Shading

+Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. + +

Mode

+Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. + +

Shadow

+Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. + + + + +Icon + + +3D Shadowing On/Off + + +
+ + +

Surface angle

+Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. +

Camera

+Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. + +

Distance

+Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. + +

Focal length

+Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a158cde61 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + +Illumination +/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Illumination

+Define the light source for the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Illumination + + + + Illumination + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Illumination

+Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. + + + + + + + + +

Light source

+Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. + + + + +Icon Light is on + + + +Light is on + + +
+ + + + + +Icon Light is off + + + +Light is off + + +
+ + +

Color Selection

+Select a color for the current light source. + +

Select Color in the color dialog

+ + +

Ambient light

+ +

Color Selection

+Select a color for the ambient light. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the light source changes. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c174db79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ + + + + + +Textures +/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Textures

+Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+CommandCtrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Textures + + + + Textures + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Textures

+Sets the texture properties. +

Type

+Set the color properties of the texture. + +

Black & White

+Converts the texture to black and white. + + + + +Icon Black & White + + + +Black & White + + +
+ + +

Color

+Converts the texture to color. + + + + +Icon Color + + + +Color + + +
+ +

Mode

+Show or hide shading. + +

Only Texture

+Applies the texture without shading. + + + + +Icon Only Texture + + + +Only Texture + + +
+ + +

Texture and Shading

+Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. + + + + +Icon Texture and Shading + + + +Texture and Shading + + +
+ +

Projection X

+Set the options for displaying the texture. + +

Object-specific

+Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. + + + + +Icon Object-specific + + + +Object-specific + + +
+ + +

Parallel

+Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. + + + + +Icon + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + +

Circular

+Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. + + + + +Icon Circular + + + +Circular + + +
+ +

Projection Y

+Click the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. + +

Object-specific

+Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. + + + + +Icon Object-Specific + + + +Object-specific + + +
+ + +

Parallel

+Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. + + + + +Icon Parallel + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + +

Circular

+Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. + + + + +Icon Circular + + + +Circular + + +
+ +

Filter

+Filters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. + +

Filtering On/Off

+Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. + + + + +Icon Filtering On/Off + + + +Filtering On/Off + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4c96fc9b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Material +/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Material

+Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Material + + + + Material + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Material

+Assigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. + +

Favorites

+Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. + +

Object color

+Select the color that you want to apply to the object. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + + +

Illumination color

+Select the color to illuminate the object. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + +

Specular

+Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. + +

Color

+Select the color that you want the object to reflect. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + + +

Intensity

+Enter the intensity of the specular effect. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af9f8d314 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + +Distribute +/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +drawing objects;distribute +drawing objects;distribute evenly +distribute objects in drawings +distribute objects vertically +distribute objects;vertically evenly +distribute objects horizontally +distribute objects;horizontally evenly + + +
+

Distribute Selection

+ +Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects. +
+
+ +
+Objects are distributed with respect to the outermost objects in the selection. + + Original object distribution + +

Horizontally

+Specify the horizontal distribution for the selected objects. + +

Horizontally Left

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally left + + +

Horizontally Center

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally center + + +

Horizontally Spacing

+Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally spaced evenly + + +

Horizontally Right

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally right + +

Vertically

+Specify the vertical distribution for the selected objects. + +

Vertically Top

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically top + + +

Vertically Center

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically center + + +

Vertically Spacing

+Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally spaced evenly + + +

Vertically Bottom

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically bottom + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15aae70bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Text Attributes +/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp + + + +
UFI: removed 2 help ids +

Text Attributes

+Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. + +
+
+ +
+This command is only available for drawing objects that can contain text, for example for rectangles, but not for lines. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62d5e2b84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Spelling + /text/shared/01/06010000.xhp + + + +
+dictionaries; spellcheck + spellcheck; dialog + dictionaries; spelling + spelling; dialog + languages; spellcheck + languages; spelling + + + + + +

Spelling

+ Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors. + +
+
+ +
+ The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document. + Spelling looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary. When the first misspelled word is found, the Spelling dialog opens. + Spelling errors are underlined in red, grammar errors in blue. + + +

Text Language

+ Specifies the language to use to check the spelling. + + +

Not in Dictionary

+ Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below. + +

Ignore Once

+ Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck. + This label of this button changes to Resume if you leave the Spelling dialog open when you return to your document. To continue the spellcheck from the current position of the cursor, click Resume. + +

Ignore All

+ Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck. + +While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error. +

Ignore Rule

+ Appears when checking grammar. Click to ignore the suggested grammatical change. + +

Add to Dictionary

+ Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary. + + To add a new dictionary, press Options, then press New. After %PRODUCTNAME is restarted, multiple user-defined dictionaries are shown when Add to Dictionary is pressed. Select which dictionary should receive the added word. +

Suggestions

+ Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All. + +

Correct

+ Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced. + +

Correct All

+ Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion. + +

Add to AutoCorrect

+ Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the selected replacement suggestion to the AutoCorrect replacement table, but does not make any change in the document. + + +

Check grammar

+ Enable to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors. + +

Options

+ Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking. + +

Undo

+ Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence. +
+ + Spelling Options + AutoCorrect Commands + Thesaurus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..352c99108 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Writing aids +/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Writing aids + Select the user-defined dictionaries and set the rules for the spellchecking. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2092271b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Language +/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp + + + +
+ +Language +Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands. +
+ +Writer menu commands, i80434 + +For Selection +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text.
Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + +For Paragraph +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the current paragraph.
Choose None to exclude the current paragraph from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + +For all Text +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for all text.
Choose None to exclude all text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +Opens the Format - Cells - Alignment tab page. + + +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. + + +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. + + + +More Dictionaries Online +Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be6f78a9e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chinese Conversion +/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp + + +UFI: former Chinese Translation dialog, issue 58212 + + + +
+Chinese writing systems +simplified Chinese;conversion to traditional Chinese +traditional Chinese;conversion to simplified Chinese + + + + +Chinese Conversion +Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ +
+Conversion Direction +Select the conversion direction. + +Traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese text characters to simplified Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. + +Simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese text characters to traditional Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. +Common Terms +Common terms are words that have the same meaning in traditional and simplified Chinese but are written with different characters. + +Translate common terms +Converts words with two or more characters that are in the list of common terms. After the list is scanned, the remaining text is converted character by character. + +Edit terms +Opens the Edit Dictionary dialog where you can edit the list of conversion terms. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c55cce97 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Dictionary +/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp + + +UFI: Edit Dictionary of Chinese Translation dialog + + + +common terms;Chinese dictionary +dictionaries;common terms in simplified and traditional chinese + + + +Edit Dictionary +Edit the Chinese conversion terms. +
+ +
+You can use this dialog to edit, to add, or to delete entries from the conversion dictionary. The file path name for the conversion dictionary is user/wordbook/commonterms.ctd. You cannot delete the default entries in this file. + +Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese. + +Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese. + +Reverse Mapping +Automatically adds the reverse mapping direction to the list for each modification that you enter. + +Term +Enter the text that you want to replace with the Mapping term. + +Mapping +Enter the text that you want to replace the Term with. + +Property +Defines the class of the selected term. + +Add +Adds the term to the conversion dictionary. If the term is already in the dictionary, the new term receives precedence. + +Modify +Saves the modified entry to the database file. + +Delete +Removes the selected user-defined entry from the dictionary. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab0549fd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Thesaurus +/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Thesaurus

+Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term. +
+
+ +
+ +Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. + +

Current word

+ Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text. + +

Arrow left

+ Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box. + +

Alternatives

+ Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term. + +

Replace with

+ The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box. + +

Language

+Select a language for the thesaurus. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page. + + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dbcd9b8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + +Color Replacer +/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Color Replacer +Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics. +
+You can replace up to four different colors at one time. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + +Icon + + + +Color Replacer + + +
+ + +Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace. + +Color Replacer color +Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected. + +Replace +Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes. +Colors +Lists the source colors and the replacement colors. + + + + +Source color checkbox +Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box. + +Source color +Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image. + + + + +Tolerance +Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value. + + + + +Replace with +Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. + +Transparency +Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select. + +Transparency +Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b05d02879 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + AutoCorrect + /text/shared/01/06040000.xhp + + + + + + AutoCorrect function;switching on and off + AutoComplete, see also AutoCorrect/AutoInput + + + AutoCorrect + Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type. +
+ +
+ To apply an AutoCorrect rule, enter the predefined text in the document and press the Spacebar. + + + To turn off AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Writer choose Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. Refer to the help page Turning Off AutoCorrect to learn more about deactivating AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To apply AutoCorrect to an entire text document, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + + + + To turn off AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to Tools - AutoCorrect Options and uncheck all items in the Options and Localized Options tabs. Refer to the help page Turning Off AutoCorrect to learn more about deactivating AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ AutoCorrect +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca1b2a2ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ + + + + + + + Options (AutoCorrect) + /text/shared/01/06040100.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function; options + replacement options + words; automatically replacing + abbreviation replacement + capital letters; AutoCorrect function + spaces; ignoring double + numbering; using automatically + paragraphs; numbering automatically + tables in text; creating automatically + titles; formatting automatically + empty paragraph removal + paragraphs; removing blank ones + styles; replacing automatically + user-defined styles; automatically replacing + bullets; replacing + paragraphs; joining + joining; paragraphs +removed two bookmarks "automatic..." and two more entries about quotes and 1/2 replacement + + + + +

Options

+ Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK. +
+
+ +
+ + +In text documents, you can choose to apply [T] AutoCorrect options while you type. Enable this feature by using Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. +You can also apply [M] AutoCorrect options to a selection or a whole document of existing text by using Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. In general, [M] options are applied only to paragraphs with Default Paragraph Style. + All non-empty paragraphs with "Default Paragraph Style" are converted to "Text Body" paragraph style when Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply is used. see i72339Don't use inline switches for notes, tips and warnings. The icon will still show up. + + +

[M] and [T] options

+

Use replacement table

+ If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the letter combination is replaced with the replacement text. +

Correct TWo INitial CApitals

+ If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. + No corrections are made to entries found in an applicable spelling dictionary. +

Capitalize first letter of every sentence.

+ Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence + + +The first letter in a Calc cell will never be capitalized automatically.see i78661 + + + +bold; AutoFormat function +bold; using * when typing +underlining; AutoFormat function +underlining; using _ when typing +italic; AutoFormat function +italic; using / when typing +strikeout; AutoFormat function +strikeout; using - when typing + +

Automatic *bold*, /italic/, -strikeout- and _underline_

+ Automatically applies bold, italic, strikethrough or underline formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), slashes (/), hyphens (-), and underscores (_), respectively. These characters disappear after the formatting is applied. + This feature does not work if the formatting characters * / - _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. +

URL Recognition

+ Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. +UFI: moved "replace 1st" to Localized Options tab page, cws cbosdo01 +

Replace DashesUFI: changed switches, added table, #61325#

UFI: see i73558 for name: not the dashes are replaced but the hyphens (or even better the minus signs) +Replaces one or two hyphens with a long dash (see the following table). + Text will be replaced after you type a trailing white space (space, tab, or return). In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to z or digits 0 to 9. N represents digits only. + + + + Text that you type: + + + Result that you get: + + + + + A - B (A, space, minus, space, B) + + + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + + + + + A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B) + + + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + + + + + A--B (A, minus, minus, B) + + + A—B (A, em-dash, B)
(see note below the table) + + + + + N--N (N, minus, minus, N) + + + N–N (N, en-dash, N) + + + + + A-B (A, minus, B) + + + A-B (unchanged) + + + + + A -B (A, space, minus, B) + + + A -B (unchanged) + + + + + A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B) + + + A –B (A, space, en-dash, B) + + +
+ + If the text has the Hungarian or Finnish language attribute, then two hyphens in the sequence A--B are replaced by an en-dash instead of an em-dash.i71908 +

Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph +

+ Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of a paragraph. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + +

Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line

+ Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of each line. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + +

[T] options only

+

Ignore double spaces

+ Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. +

Correct accidental use of cAPS LOCK key

+ Inverts a capitalized word entered with the Caps Lock key enabled, after a space is entered, and disables the Caps Lock key. For example, entering Libre with Caps Lock enabled appears as lIBRE, which is converted automatically to Libre. +

Bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet symbol:

+ Automatically creates a numbered list when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a number followed by a period, a space, and text. If a line starts with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*), followed by a space, and text, a bulleted list is created when you press Enter. + + To cancel automatic numbering when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a numbering symbol, press Enter again. + + + +The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + + + + +

Apply border

+ Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. + + + To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores (_), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. + + + The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: + + + + --- + + + 0.05pt single underline + + + + + ___ + + + 1.0pt single underline + + + + + === + + + 1.0pt double underline + + + + + *** + + + 4.0pt thick-thin double underline + + + + + ~~~ + + + 4.0pt thin-thick double underline + + + + + ### + + + 2.5pt double underline + + +
+ + + To modify attributes of a predefined border, such as color, style, width and shadow, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab. + + + To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. + + + To remove a line created with Apply Border, place the cursor above the line, press CommandCtrl+M. + + + +

Create table +

+ Creates a table when you press Enter after typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs, that is, +------+---+. Plus signs indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column. + + +-----------------+---------------+------+ + + + +

Apply Styles

+ Automatically apply a Heading 1 to Heading 8 paragraph style to a text that starts with an uppercase letter and does not end with a period. + To get a Heading 1 paragraph style, type the text that you want to use as a heading, then press Enter twice. + For other Heading N styles, press the Tab key N-1 times before typing the text to get the desired level. For example, to get a "Heading 4" paragraph style press the Tab key three times, type something, then press Enter twice. + This feature works only with "Default Paragraph Style", "Text Body" and "Text Body Indent" paragraph styles, and there must be one empty paragraph before the text, if the text is not at the top of a page. + + +

[M] options only

+

Remove blank paragraphs +

+Removes empty paragraphs and paragraphs that contain only spaces or tabs from the current document. This option works for any paragraph style. +

Replace Custom Styles +

+ Replaces custom paragraph styles applied in the current document to "Text Body", "Text Body Indent", "First Line Indent" or "Hanging Indent" paragraph style. + +

Replace bullets with +

+ Converts paragraphs that start with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*) directly followed by a space or a tab, to bulleted lists. This option only works on paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default Paragraph Style". To change the bullet style that is used, select this option, and then click Edit. + +removed "replace standard quotes..." cws cbosdo01 +

Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than... +

+ Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. + + +Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. +

Edit +

+ Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. + + + + +
+ AutoCorrect Commands +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..009be7749 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Replace +/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function; replacement table +replacement table +replacing; AutoCorrect function +text; replacing with format +frames; AutoCorrect function +pictures; inserting automatically +AutoCorrect function; pictures and frames + + + +

Replace

+Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document. +
+To enable the replacement table, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select Use replacement table. To use the replacement table while you type, check Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + +
+ +
+ + +

Replacement table

+Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. +You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word, abbreviation or a word part. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. +You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. + + +

Replace

+Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. +The wildcard character sequence .* can match anything before or after the replace string. For example: + + + Having the replace pattern i18n.* and the with pattern international, the following corrections are made: + + + + + + Enter + + + Autocorrected Result + + + + + i18ns + + + internationals + + + + + i18nization + + + internationalization + + + + + i18nized + + + internationalized + + +
+ + +The replace pattern ....* with the replacement text … finds and replaces the three dots in ...word with …word. + + +To enter time values using the number pad, use the replace pattern .*...* and : as the replacement text. Now 10..30 is replaced automatically with 10:30. + +

With:

+Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. + +

Text only

+Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. + + +

New

+Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..154becdcf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Exceptions +/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Exceptions

+Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically. +
+The exceptions that you define depend on the current language setting. If you want, you can change the language setting by selecting a different language in the Replacements and exceptions for language box. +
+ +
+
+ +

Replacements and exceptions for language:

+Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules. $[officename] first searches for exceptions that are defined for the language at the current cursor position in the document, and then searches the remaining languages. +
+ +

Abbreviations (no subsequent capital)

+Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation. + +Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. + +

Words with TWo INitial CApitals or sMALL iNITIAL

+Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters or a small initial that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. Enter eBook to prevent an automatic change to Ebook. + +Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals or small initial that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters or small initial are listed in the field. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. + + + +

New

+Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions. + + + +

AutoInclude

+Adds autocorrected abbreviations or autocorrected words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions, if the autocorrection is immediately undone by pressing CommandCtrl+Z. +This feature is relevant when the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option or the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option are selected in the [T] column on the Options tab of this dialog, and Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing is enabled. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfcb465c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + +Localized Options +/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp + + + +
+quotes; custom +custom quotes +AutoCorrect function; quotes +replacing;ordinal numbers +ordinal numbers;replacing + + + +Localized Options +Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text. +
+
+ +
+ + +Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M]. + +new feature, cws cbosdo01. https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Non_Breaking_Spaces_Before_Punctuation_In_French_(espaces_ins%C3%A9cables) +Add non-breaking space before specific punctuation marks in French text +Inserts a non breaking space before ";", "!", "?", ":" and "%" when the character language is set to French (France, Belgium, Luxembourg, Monaco, or Switzerland) and before ":" only when the character language is set to French (Canada). + +moved two paras from 06040100.xhp, cws cbosdo01 +Format ordinal number suffixes (1st ... 1st) +Formats the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. For example, in English text, 1st will be converted to 1st. +Note that this only applies to languages that have the convention of formatting ordinal numbers as superscript. +Transliterate to Old Hungarian if the text direction is from right to left +Words and numbers are transliterated to Old Hungarian script, if the text direction is from right to left using complex text layout. + +Replace << and >> with angle quotesHungarian translators: use the order >> and <<, according to the orthography of quotations. +Automatically replaces double less-than and greater-than signs with double angle quotes « and » in several languages, and with single angle quotes ‹ and › in Swiss French. + +Single Quotes / Double Quotes +Specify the replacement characters to use for single or double quotation marks. + + +Replace +Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify. + + +Start quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +End quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +Default +Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54be0e695 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect context menu +/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; context menu +spellcheck; context menus +spelling; context menus + +AutoCorrect context menu +To access this menu, right-click a misspelled word in your document. To view the misspelled words in your document, choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. + +<Replacement Suggestions> +Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.UFI: see i60431 + + + + +

Spelling

+Opens the Spelling dialog. + + + + +Add +Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary. + + +Ignore all +Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document. + + + + +AutoCorrect +To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace. + +Word is <name of language> +Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. + +Paragraph is <name of language> +Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3a792c44 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Word Completion + /text/shared/01/06040600.xhp + + + +
+ Word Completion + Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Enable word completion + Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. + +Append space + If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. + +Show as tip + Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. + +Collect words + Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. + +When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list + When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + +Accept with + Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. + Press Esc to decline the word completion. + +Min. word length + Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. + +Max. entries + Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. + +Word Completion list + Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list". + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + +Delete Entry + Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67d6bc126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Smart Tags +/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp + + + +
+ + +smart tag configuration +MW moved 2 index entries to the Writer guide smarttags.xhp and added a new oneSmart Tags +When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page. +
+
+ +
+ +Label text with smart tags +Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document. +Currently installed smart tags +Displays all installed Smart Tags. To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. +Properties +To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bb8d8d21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Bullets and Numbering +/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Bullets and Numbering

+Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets. + +
+
+ +
+The Bullets and Numbering dialog has the following tabs: + + + + + + + + + +

Remove

+Removes the numbering or bullets from the current paragraph or from the selected paragraphs. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d912826a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + Unordered (Lists) + /text/shared/01/06050100.xhp + + + +
+bullets;paragraphs + paragraphs; inserting bullets + inserting; paragraph bullets + unordered list + + + +

Unordered

+ Displays different bullet types that you can apply to a list. +
+
+ +
+ Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. + +

Selection

+ Click the bullet type that you want to use. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Customize tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a9e9cd91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Ordered + /text/shared/01/06050200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Ordered

+ Displays different numbering schemes that you can apply. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+ Click the numbering that you want to use. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Customize tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6e021336 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Outline (Bullets and Numbering) +/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +

Outline

+Displays the different formats that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+Click the outline format that you want to use. +
+Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be7c326cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + Image + /text/shared/01/06050400.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Image

+ Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in an unordered list. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+ Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. + +

Link graphics

+ If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..25460f675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ + + + + + + + Customize (Bullets and Numbering) + /text/shared/01/06050500.xhp + + + +
+numbering;options + bullet lists; formatting options + font sizes;bullets + + + +

Customize

+ Sets the formatting options for ordered or unordered lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. +
+
+ +
+ Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. + +

Level

+ Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. +

Numbering

+ +

Number

+ Select a numbering scheme for the selected levels. + + + + Selection + + + Description + + + + + 1, 2, 3, ... + + + Arabic numerals + + + + + A, B, C, ... + + + Capital letters + + + + + a, b, c, ... + + + Lowercase letters + + + + + I, II, III, ... + + + Roman numerals (uppercase) + + + + + i, ii, iii, ... + + + Roman numerals (lowercase) + + + + + 1st, 2nd, 3rd, ... + + + Ordinal numerals + + + + + One, Two, Three, ... + + + Cardinal numerals + + + + + A,... AA,... AAA,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters + + + + + a,... aa,... aaa,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters + + + + + Bullet + + + Adds a character bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, use the Character style drop-down menu to choose the bullet character style, and then press the Select button to open the Special Characters dialog to choose the bullet character. + Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. + + + + + + Graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets embedded into the document. + + + + + Linked graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets inserted as a link to the image file. + + + + + None + + + Does not apply a numbering scheme. + + +
+ + The availability of the following fields depends on the numbering scheme that you select in the Number box. + +

Start at

+ Enter a new starting number for the current level. + +

Character Style +

+ Select the Character Style that you want to use in an ordered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. + + +

Show sublevels +

+ Enter the number of previous levels to include in the outline format. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering scheme, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". + + +

Before

+ Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. + +

After

+ Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create an ordered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. + +

Color +Color +

+ + + +Select a color for the current numbering scheme. + +

Relative size +Relative size +

+ + + +Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. + +

Options for graphics:

+ +

Graphics

+ Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. + +

Width

+ Enter a width for the graphic. + +

Height

+ Enter a height for the graphic. + +

Keep ratio

+ Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. + +

Alignment

+ Select the alignment option for the graphic. +

All levels +

+ Set the numbering options for all of the levels. + + +

Consecutive numbering +

+ Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bcf41679 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + +Position (Lists) +/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Position

+Set indent, spacing, and alignment options for numbering symbols, such as numbers or bullets, to ordered and unordered lists. +
+do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one +
+ +
+
+ + +

Level

+Select the level(s) that you want to modify. To apply the options to all the levels, select “1-10”. + + +
+
+

Position and Spacing

+
+This page shows the position controls used in all versions of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. Some documents (produced by other applications) use another method for positioning and spacing. Opening such documents will show the position controls documented in Position for List styles (legacy).see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt + +

Aligned at

+Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned. +
+ + + +
+

Numbering alignment

+
+Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position. +
+The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. +
+
+

Numbering followed by

+Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, a line break, or nothing. + +

Tab stop at

+If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position. + + +

Indent at

+Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line. + +
+ + +

Default

+Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + This control appears only when modifying a List style. +
+ + +
+Position for List styles (legacy) +Paragraph alignment +Indenting Paragraphs +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f3d82a03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Macros +/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp + + + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Macros

+Opens a dialog to organize macros. +UFI: it is not the dialog to run a macro +
+ +
+ +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. + +Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list. + +

Macro from / Save macro in

+Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. + +

Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID

+Runs or saves the current macro. + +

Assign

+Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. + + +

Edit

+Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. + +

New / Delete

+Creates a new macro, creates a new module or deletes the selected macro or selected module. +To create a new macro in your document, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. +To create a new module in a library of the My Macros container, select the proper library and press New. The $[officename] Basic editor opens. +To delete a macro or module, select it, and then click Delete. + +

New Library

+Saves the recorded macro in a new library. + +

New Module

+Saves the recorded macro in a new module. + +

Organizer

+Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9731426c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Macros +/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Macros

+Lets you record or organize and edit macros. +
+ + +

Run Macro

+Opens the Macro Selector dialog where you can start a macro. +

Edit Macros

+ + + +

Digital Signature

+Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. + +

Organize Dialogs

+Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..efc1e878c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Record Macro +/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp + + + +
+ +Record Macro +Records a new macro. Only available, if macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. +
+
+ +
+ +Stop Recording +Stops recording a macro. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab6052138 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Basic Macro Selector + /text/shared/01/06130020.xhp + + + + + macro;select macro to run + run macro;select + + + + +
+

Basic Macro selector

+ Selects the Basic macro to run. Locate the macro by selecting the container, library, module and macro name. +
+
+ +
+ +

Library

+ Lists the existing macro containers, Basic macro libraries and Basic modules for the current application and any open documents. + +

Macro name

+ Lists the Basic macros for the selected module. Select a macro and click Run. + +

Description

+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..761acae4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Scripts +/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp + + + + + javascript scripts;run + beanshell scripts;run + java scripts;run + run scripts;java + run scripts;javascript + run scripts;beanshell + +

Scripts

+
+ + +
+ + +

Macros

+Select a macro or script from My Macros, Application Macros, or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. + +

Run

+To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. + +

Create

+Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. +Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename + +

Edit

+Opens the default script editor for your operating system. + +

Rename

+Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. + +

Delete

+Prompts you to delete the selected script. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c1587246 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Password +/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Change Password +Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. +
+ +
+Old password + +Password +Enter the current password for the selected library. +New password + +Password +Enter a new password for the selected library. + +Confirm +Reenter the new password for the selected library. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cffc1827 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Organize Macros +/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp + + +UFI: new menu structure in Tools menu + + + +
+ +macros;organizing +organizing;macros and scripts +script organization + + +

Organize Macros

+Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts. +
+

%PRODUCTNAME Basic

+Opens a dialog where you can organize %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. + +

JavaScript

+Opens a dialog where you can organize Javascript scripts. + +

BeanShell

+Opens a dialog where you can organize Java scripts. + +

Python

+Opens a dialog where you can run Python scripts. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..44d2ef09e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Organizer +/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp + + + + + Basic macros;organize in libraries + Basic modules;organize in libraries + Basic dialogs;organize in libraries + +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Library Organizer

+The dialog let you organize %PRODUCTNAME modules and dialogs into libraries. You can also import and export Basic libraries into files or extensions. +
+ +
+

Module and Dialog tab pages

+Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes. + + + + + + +

Module or Dialog

+Lists the existing modules or dialogs. + + +

Edit

+Opens the selected module or dialog for editing. + +

New (module)UFI: i40875

+Opens the editor and creates a new module. +

New (dialog)

+Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. +

Libraries tab page

the three tab pages have no Help button, so no need to have three help pages +Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. + + + +

Location

+Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. + +

Library

+Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. + +

Edit

+Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. + +

Password

+Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. + +

New

+Creates a new library. + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the new library or module. + +

Importchanged in #i64102

+Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. +

Export

+Opens a dialog to export the selected library either as an extension or as a Basic library. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a967463d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Append libraries +/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Append libraries +Locate the %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. + + +File name: +Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. +Options + +Insert as reference (read-only) +Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. + +Replace existing libraries +Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26e07b5ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Customize +/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp + + + + + +Customize +Customizes $[officename] menus, context menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events. + +
+ +
+You can customize shortcut keys and macro assignments for the current application, or for all $[officename] applications. +You can also save and load individual menu, shortcut key, and toolbar custom settings. + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..201758a87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + Menus (Customizing) + /text/shared/01/06140100.xhp + + + + + You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the menu items. You can also add commands executed by macros and apply all kind of styles directly from the menu. +
+ Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab. +
+ +

Search

+ Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. + +

Category

+ Select the menu command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. + +
+

Available Commands

+ Displays the results of the combination of the search string and category of the desired command. +
+ +

Description

+ The text box contains a short description of the selected command. + +

Scope

+ Select the location where the menu is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the menu is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the menu will be available only when that file is opened and active. + +

Target

+ Select the menu where the customization is to be applied. + +

Add

+ Click on the gear icon and then choose Add to add a new menu. + + + + +Gear Icon + + + + Gear icon + + +
+ + +

Remove

+ Click on the gear icon and then choose Delete to delete the menu. + You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. + +
+

Assigned Commands

+Displays the commands that will be shown in the target menu. + +
+
+

Right Arrow button

+ Click on the right arrow button to select a command on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the command to the selected menu. +
+

Left Arrow button

+ Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current menu. +
+ + +

Up and Down arrow buttons

+ Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed menu commands. + You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +
+

Customize

+ +

Insert

+ + + Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve menu readability and to group commands by subject. + + + Insert Submenu: Insert a submenu entry. Enter a name for the new submenu in the dialog box that follows. The new submenu is automatically available in the menu list for edition. + + + +

Modify

+ + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + + +

Defaults

+ Deletes all changes previously made to this menu. +
+ Customizing %PRODUCTNAME context menus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08113ad67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Menu +/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp + + + +

New Menu

+
+ +
+ +

Menu name

+Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter. + +

Menu position

+Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca2b0d29c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Move Menu +/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp + + + +

Move Menu

+
+ +
+ + + + +

Menu position

+Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d86b23f8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Keyboard +/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp + + + +
+keyboard;assigning/editing shortcut keys +customizing;keyboard +editing;shortcut keys +styles;keyboard shortcuts +MW deleted "modifying;..." + + +

Keyboard

+Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros. +
+
+ +
+You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications. To assign a key for all applications, choose the %PRODUCTNAME radio button in the top right corner. +To assign or modify a shortcut key: select a command in the Function list, select the key combination to be assigned in the Shortcut Keys list, then click Modify. +If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. It is possible to assign the same function to more than one key. +A shortcut key assigned to a particular application overrides the shortcut key setting made in %PRODUCTNAME for all applications. +
+Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system. +
+ +

Shortcut keys

+Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. +

Functions

+Lists the function categories and the $[officename] functions that you can assign shortcut keys to. + +

Category

+Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category. + +

Function

+Lists functions that can be assigned to a shortcut key. +

Keys

+Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. + + +

$[officename]

+Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. + +

+ + Writer + Calc + Impress + Draw + Math + +

+Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application. +

Modify

+Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. + +

Load

+Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. + +

Save

+Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b336a58e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Context Menus (Customizing) + /text/shared/01/06140300.xhp + + + +
+ + context menus;customizing + customizing;context menus + editing;context menus + +

Context Menus

+ Lets you customize %PRODUCTNAME context menus for all modules. +
+ You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the context menu items. You can also add commands executed by macros and apply all kind of styles directly from the context menu. +
+ Choose Tools - Customize - Context Menus tab. +
+ Search + Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. + Category + Select the menu command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. + + Description + The text box contains a short description of the selected command. + Scope + Select the location where the context menu is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the context menu is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the context menu will be available only when that file is opened and active. + Target + Select the Context Menu where the customization is to be applied. + + + Left Arrow button + Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current context menu. + Up and Down arrow buttons + Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed context menus commands. + You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +

Customize

+

Insert

+ + + Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve menu readability and to group commands by subject. + + + Insert Submenu: Insert a submenu entry. Enter a name for the new submenu in the dialog box that follows. The new submenu is automatically available in the menu list for edition. + + +

Modify

+ + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + +

Defaults

+ Deletes all changes previously made to this context menu. +
+ Customizing %PRODUCTNAME menus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfb6eff03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp + + + +
+ +Toolbars +Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars. +
+
+ +
+ +Search +Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. +Category +Select the command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. +Function +Displays the results of the combination of the search string and category of the desired function. +Description +The text box contains a short description of the selected command. +Scope +Select the location where the toolbar is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the toolbar is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the toolbar will be available only when that file is opened and active. +Target +Select the toolbar where the customization is to be applied. The current set of functions is displayed in the box below. +Add +Click on the gear icon and then choose Add to add a new toolbar. +Delete +Click on the gear icon and then choose Delete to delete the toolbar. +You can only delete custom toolbar and custom toolbar entries. +Right Arrow button +Click on the right arrow button to select a function on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the function to the selected toolbar. +Left Arrow button +Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current toolbar. +Up and Down Arrow buttons +Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed toolbar commands. +You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +Insert +Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve toolbar readability and to group commands by subject. +Modify + + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + + Change Icon: Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. + + + Reset Icon: Resets the icon to the default icon. + + + Restore Default Command: Restores the default command. + + +Defaults +Deletes all changes previously made to this toolbar. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5337733de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Icon +/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp + + + + + +Change Icon +Icons +Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. + +Import +Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME. +You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16 × 16 or 24 × 24 pixels in size. + +Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0135c464d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Events + /text/shared/01/06140500.xhp + + + +
+ customizing; events + events; customizing + + + + + + + + Events + Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs. +
+
+ + +
+ + + The dialog box has reduced functionality when called from the Edit-Sheet menu of a spreadsheet. + + +Save In +Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. +A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. + + + +The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. + + +Assign Macro +Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. +Assign Component... +Opens the Assign Component dialog to set a custom UNO command for the selected event. +Component assignment is proposed for controls in the Dialog Editor. + + +Remove Macro +Deletes the macro or component assignment for the selected event. +
+List of events + + Creating a Dialog Handler +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06e6fc574 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +XML Filter Settings +/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp + + + +filters; XML filter settings +XML filters; settings +mw deleted "XSLT based filters;" + + + +
+

XML Filter Settings

+Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files. +
+
+ +
+ +MAC does not have installation options + +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. + + +The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. + + + +Term + + +Description + + + + +XML + + +Extensible Markup Language + + + + +XSL + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language + + + + +XSLT + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets. + + +
+The XHTML export filter produces valid "XHTML 1.0 Strict" output for Writer, Calc, Draw, and Impress documents. + +Filter list +Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. +The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. + + +Click a filter to select it. + + +Shift-click or CommandCtrl-click to select several filters. + + +Double-click a name to edit the filter. + + + + + +New +Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter. + +Edit +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. + +Test XSLTs +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. + +Delete +Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows. + +Save as Package +Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar). + +Open Package +Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar). + +Help +Displays the help page for this dialog. + +Close +Closes the dialog. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..864128d69 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +XML Filter +/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +XML Filter + +View and edit the settings of an XML filter. +
+ +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54110f9cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +General + +Enter or edit general information for an XML filter. +
+ +
+ +Filter name +Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog. You must enter a unique name. + +Application +Select the application that you want to use with the filter. + +Name of file type +Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs. You must enter a unique name. For import filters, the name appears in the File type box of Open dialogs. For export filters, the name appears in the File format box of Export dialogs. + +File extension +Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use. + +Comments +Enter a comment (optional). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcf4cbdef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Transformation +/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Transformation + Enter or edit file information for an XML filter. +
+ +
+ DocType + Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file. + The public identifier is used to detect the filter when you open a file without specifying a filter. + + + +Browse + Opens a file selection dialog. + XSLT for export + If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting. + XSLT for import + If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing. + Template for import + Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags. + The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..270092f1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Test XML Filter +/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Test XML Filter + + + +Tests the XSLT stylesheets used by the selected XML filter. + +
+ +
+Export + +XSLT for export +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. + +Transform document +Displays the file name of the document that you want to use to test the XSLT filter. + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation. + +Current Document +The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window. +Import + +XSLT for import +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. + +Template for import +Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page. +Transform file + +Display source +Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing. + +Browse +Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter. + + +Recent File +Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72f7452ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +XML Filter output +/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + XML Filter output + Lists the test results of an XML filter. +
+ +
+ The test results of an import or export XSLT stylesheet are displayed in the XML Filter output window. If you want, you can also validate the filter output. + Validate + Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window. + The window splits into two areas and the results of the validation are displayed in the lower area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..934e2e247 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+converting;Hangul/Hanja +Hangul/Hanja + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. +
+
+ +
+ +Original +Displays the current selection. + +Word +Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. + +Find +Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. + + +Suggestions +Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. +Format +Click the format to display the replacements. + +Hangul/Hanja +The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. + +Hanja (Hangul) +The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. + +Hangul (Hanja) +The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. + +Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. + +Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. + +Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. + +Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. +Conversion +Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. + +Hangul only +Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. + +Hanja only +Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. + +Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. + +Always Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of ignored text is valid for the current $[officename] session. + +Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. + +Always Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. + +Replace by character +Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. + +Options +Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..61d1d7789 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options +/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp + + +UFI: new Hangul/Hanja Options dialog + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options +Define options for the Hangul/Hanja conversion. + +User-defined dictionaries +Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. + +New +Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. + +Name +Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. + +Edit +Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. + +Delete +Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. +Options +Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. + +Ignore post-positional word +Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. + +Show entries recently used first +Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. + +Replace all unique entries automatically +Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23e0c22a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary +/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp + + + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary +Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. +Book +Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. +Original +Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. + + + +Suggestions (max. 8) +Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters. +New +Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. +Delete +Deletes the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc608eafa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Spelling +/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Spelling

+Checks spelling manually. +
+
+ +
+
+Spelling dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..626196bf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Window +/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+new windows +windows;new + + +New Window +Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time. +
+
+ +
+Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..384190e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Document List +/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Document List + Lists the currently open documents. Select the name of a document in the list to switch to that document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e1544f60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML import and export +/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp + + + +importing; HTML with META tags +exporting; to HTML +HTML; importing META tags +HTML documents; META tags in +META tags +tags; META tags + +

HTML import and export

+When you export a file to an HTML document, the description and the user-defined file properties are included as META tags between the HEAD tags of the exported document. META tags are not displayed in a Web browser, and are used to include information, such as keywords for search engines on your Web page. To set the properties of the current document, choose File - Properties, click the Description or Custom Properties tabs, and then type the information you want. +The following file properties are converted to META tags when you export a file as an HTML document: + + + + ODF Property + + + HTML Tags + + + + +Title + + +<TITLE> + + + + +Subject + + +<META NAME="CLASSIFICATION" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Keywords + + +<META NAME="KEYWORDS" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Description + + +<META NAME="DESCRIPTION" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Custom Properties + + +<META NAME="Custom field name" CONTENT="Custom field content"> + + +
+ +When you import an HTML containing these META tags, the contents of the tags are added to the corresponding $[officename] file property box. +Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. +

Import Tips

+When you import an HTML document, following META tags are automatically converted to $[officename] fields: <META HTTP-EQUIV="REFRESH"...> and <META NAME="..." ...> , where NAME equals to AUTHOR, CREATED, CHANGED, CHANGEDBY, DESCRIPTION, KEYWORDS or CLASSIFICATION. +Scripts, comments, and META tags that are positioned directly before a TABLE tag are inserted in the first cell of the table. +Scripts and META tags in the header of an HTML document are imported and anchored to the first paragraph in the document. +To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. +

Export Tips

+Comments and script fields at the beginning of the first paragraph in a document are exported to the header of an HTML document. If the document begins with a table, the first paragraph in the first cell of the table is exported to the header of the HTML document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9682ae87e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Signature Line in Documents + /text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp + + + + + + + digital signature;add signature linesignature line;adding + +
+

Signature Line

+ Insert a graphic box representing a signature line of the document. +
+ + + Signature Line Box + + + The signature line displays an horizontal line, a location mark, the name, title and email of signer. +
+ +
+ +

Name

+ Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box. + +

Title

+ Enter the title of the signer. The title is displayed in the signature line graphic box. + +

Email

+ Enter the email of the signer. The email is not displayed in the signature line graphic box, but is used for the digital signature. + +

Signer can add comments

+ Enable signer to insert comments in the Sign Signature Line dialog at time of signature. + +

Show sign date in signature line

+ Mark this checkbox to display the date of the signature, at the time when the document is digitally signed. + +

Instructions to the signer

+ Insert instructions for the signer. The instructions appears in the Sign Signature Line dialog box, at the time of signature. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364f41a4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Certificate Paths + /text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp + + + + + + + + digital signatures;certificate path + certificate path + +
+

Certificate

+ Select or add the correct Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Available Certificate Paths

+Shows the list of Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures. + + +

Select NSS path

+Opens a file picker dialog to add a new Network Security Services Certificate directory to the list. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e05fd9396 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Classification Bar + /text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp + + + + + + + classification toolbar;display + +
+

Classification Toolbar

+The Classification bar contains tools to help secure document handling. +The Classification toolbar contains listboxes to help in selecting the security of the document, according to the BAF category policy and BAILS levels. %PRODUCTNAME will add custom fields in the document properties (File - Properties, Custom Properties tab) to store the classification policy as document metadata. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars - TSCP Classification +
+ +

Levels

+ + + +
+

Manage Document Classification

+Opens the Classification dialog for document classification. +
+

Manage Paragraph Classification

+Opens the Classification dialog for paragraph classification. + + + + + +
+ + +Wiki page on document classification +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa4c71079 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Classification Dialog + /text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp + + + + + + + classification;contents + classification;licenses + classification;part numbers + classification;markings + classification;paragraph + paragraph;classification + +
+

Document and Paragraph Classification Dialog

+
+ +Applies classification policy to the current document or paragraph. The dialog helps to assemble the classification policy terms of the document or paragraph by using predefined classification terms or by entering custom classification terms. The dialog display several lists of predefined items, which are loaded from the BAILS-xml TSCP policy file. +
+ Enable the TSCP Classification toolbar in View - Toolbars - TSCP Classification and click on the Manage Document Classification or Manage Paragraph Classification buttons. +
+

Content

+The Content text box displays the classification text created by the dialog and displays the existing document or paragraph classification terms. You can add your own terms in addition to the existing text in the box and the classification terms from the classification policy configuration file. +

Bold icon (document classification only)

+ Apply bold character formatting to the document or paragraph classification terms. +

Sign Paragraph (paragraph classification only)

+ Opens the Select Certification dialog box to choose the certificate to use to sign the paragraph. +

Recently used

+List the recently used classification terms. +

Classification

+The Classification list contains the translated elements of the Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS). The %PRODUCTNAME defaults are: + +

International

+The International list are the elements of the BAILS, not localized. The default is: + + + Non-Business + + + General Business + + + Confidential + + + Internal use only + + The Classification and International drop-down lists are actually the same list. A change in one list changes the other. +

Marking

+Display a list of pre-existing markings available to be added to the Contents text box. Double click one entry to have it added to the contents text box at the cursor location. The markings are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

License

+ Displays the existing intellectual property licenses. Double click the license to have it displayed in the Part text box below. Click the Add button to place the license text in the Content box.The licenses are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

Part number

+ Displays the existing intellectual property part numbers. Double click the part number to have it displayed in the Part text box below and click the Add button to place the part number in the Content text box. The part numbers are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

Part text:

+Use this box to enter contents to be added to the Content text box. +

Add

+Click to add the contents of the Part text box to the Content box. +Settings of the Classification dialog are part of the document custom properties. +
+ + +Wiki page on document classification +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c677701b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Digital Signatures + /text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp + + + + + +
+ +

Digital Signatures

+ Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. +
+
+ +
+ +You must save a file before you can apply a digital signature to the file. +You must save a file in OpenDocument format before you can apply a digital signature to the file. + +

List

+ Lists the digital signatures for the current document. + The Signed icon +Icon + indicates a valid digital signature, while the Exclamation mark icon +Icon + indicates an invalid digital signature. + See also Digital Signatures. + +

Use AdES-compliant signature when there is a choice

+ Prefers creating XAdES signatures for ODF and OOXML, PAdES signatures for PDF. + +

View Certificate

+ Opens the View Certificate dialog. + +

Sign Document

+ Opens the Select Certificate dialog. + +

Remove

+ Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF. + +

Start Certificate Manager

+Opens the installed certificate manager of your system. + + On macOS, the default certificate manager is Keychain Access. + On Windows systems, the default certificate manager is Certmgr.msc, a Microsoft Management Console snap-in using Certmgr.exe, and does not manage OpenPGP certificates. To manage both X509 and OpenPGP certificates install the gpg4win tool. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..992423c9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + Digital Signature in PDF Export + /text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp + + + +

Signing Exported PDF

+
+ +
+ +
+ About Digital Signatures +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8efcf5afc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Extension Update +/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp + + + + + + +Extension Update +Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update. +
+
insert hidden text for Exclude from this update/from all updates/include again, see i115834 - not needed because no Help ID assigned +When you click the Check for Updates button or choose the Update command, the Extension Update dialog is displayed and the check for availability of updates starts immediately. + +While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check. +If no updates are available, the message in the dialog tells you there are no updates. Close the dialog. +If updates are available, the updates can either be installed automatically, or you must respond with some action: +The Extension Update dialog may contain entries which are not selectable and hence no automatic update can be performed. + + +Dependencies are not fulfilled (the update needs some more or newer files to be installed). + + +Insufficient user rights (the Extension Manager was started from the menu, but shared extensions can only be modified when %PRODUCTNAME does not run, and only by a user with appropriate rights). See Extension Manager for details. + + +A manual update is necessary. + + +When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed. +All extensions which can be directly downloaded are downloaded now. The progress is shown in the Download and Installation dialog. If an extension cannot be downloaded, a message is displayed. The operation continues for the remaining extensions. +Some extensions may be marked with the phrase "browser based update". These extensions cannot be downloaded by the Extension Manager. A web browser must be opened to download the extension update from a particular web site. That site may require several more user interaction to download the extension. After downloading you must install the extension manually, for example by double-clicking the extension's icon in a file browser. +For extensions marked as "browser based update", the Extension Manager will open your web browser on the respective web site. This happens when you close the dialog, after downloading any other extension updates. If there are no extensions which can be directly downloaded then the web browser is started immediately. +After the last extension has been downloaded, the installation begins. First all installed extensions for which an update could be downloaded successfully, are removed. Then the updated extensions are installed. If an error occurs, a message that the installation failed is displayed, but the operation proceeds. +If all updates have been processed the Download and Installation dialog shows that it has finished. You can abort the download and installation process by clicking the Abort Update button. + +Show all Updates +By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages. +
+Extension Manager +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..101d7eade --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + OpenType Font Features + /text/shared/01/font_features.xhp + + + + + font features + font features;OpenType + OpenType;font features + +
+ + + Font Features + Select and apply font typographical features to characters. +
+
+ + Then press Features... +
+ %PRODUCTNAME supports OpenType font format. The two main benefits of the OpenType format are its cross-platform compatibility, and its ability to support widely expanded character sets and layout features, which provide richer linguistic support and advanced typographic control. + The features displayed in the Font Features dialog depends on the selected font. + Font features box + The font features box contains the configurable features available for the font. + Font feature visualization window + The feature visualization window displays a default text where the selected features can be inspected. +
+ Wikipedia on OpenType +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8e62f95e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Mark + /text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + CTL;(not) wrapping words + words;wrapping in CTL + +MW added 2 index entries because of issue 86750tried to fix i86464 by creating a new file, copy everything over, then save & overwrite as formatting_mark.xhpbut this did not help + +

Formatting Mark

+Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks like non-breaking space, soft hyphen, and optional break. +
+ + +

Non-breaking space

+Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks. + + +

Non-breaking hyphen

+Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks. + + +

Soft hyphen

+Inserts an invisible optional hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. + + +

No-width optional break

+Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Word Joiner

+Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Left-to-right mark

+Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Right-to-left mark

+Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f3dd1d3b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Gallery + /text/shared/01/gallery.xhp + + + + + + +Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons. + +Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information. + + +You can display the contents of the Gallery as icons, or icons with titles and path information. +To zoom in or zoom out on a single object in the Gallery, double-click the object, or select the object, and then press the Spacebar. + +
+ +
+ +Themes are listed on the left side of the Gallery.Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme. + +To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document. + + + + +

Adding a New File to the Gallery

+To add a file to the Gallery, right-click a theme, choose Properties, click the Files tab, and then click Add. You can also click an object in the current document, hold, and then drag it to the Gallery window. + + +

New theme

+Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme. +To access the following commands, right-click a theme in the Gallery: + + + + + +

Properties

+The Properties of (Theme) dialog contains the following tabs: + + +

Files

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95d69d8e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Files +/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Files +Adds new files to the selected theme. + +
+ +
+ +File Type +Select the type of file that you want to add. + +Files found +Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All. + +Find files +Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK. + +Add +Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme. + +Add all +Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme. + +Preview +Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.UFI: removed help id +Preview box +Displays a preview of the selected file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..978628751 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/01/grid.xhp + + + + + +
+ + grids;display options (Impress/Draw) + + + + +

Grid

+Sets the display properties of a grid. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+

Display Grid

+Displays or hides grid lines that you can use to align objects such as graphics on a page. +
+ +

Snap to Grid

issue 112000 for new key +Automatically aligns objects to vertical and horizontal grid lines. To override this feature, hold down the Option key +Alt key when you drag an object.UFI: copied from shared\optionen\01050100.xhp +UFI removed GridFront help id + +
+

Grid to Front

+Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page. +
+ +
+Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f50c18ebd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Grid and Help Lines + /text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Grid and Help Lines

+Toggle the visibility of grid points and guide lines to help object moving and precise position in the current sheet. +
+ + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b7fb01bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Snap Guides + /text/shared/01/guides.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + guides;display options (Impress/Draw) + + + + +

Snap Guides

+Specifies the display options for snap guides. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Display Snap Guides

+Displays or hides snap guides that you can use to align objects on a page. + + +

Snap Guides to Front

+Displays the snap guides in front of the objects on the pageslidepage. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc1fbeb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + Compress Image + /text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp + + + + + image;compression + image;reduce image size + image;size reduction + image;resize + image;change resolution + +
+ + + Compress Image + Compress the selected image to reduce its data size and resize the image in the document. +
+ + Image compression is a type of data compression applied to digital images, to reduce storage size or transmission time. Compression may take advantage of visual perception and the statistical properties of image data to preserve information quality. + Image compression can be lossless or lossy. Lossless compression allows the original image to be perfectly reconstructed from the compressed data. In contrast, lossy compression permits reconstruction only of an approximation of the original image, therefore with some loss of quality, though usually with improved compression rates (and therefore reduced file sizes). +
+ Select the image, choose Format - Image - Compress. + Select the image, open the context menu and choose Compress. +
+ + + Compression + JPEG Quality + Use the slider to adjust the level of quality of the JPEG compression, from 0 to 100. A value of 100 means no quality loss and a value of 0 may result in a very poor image. The default value of 90 produces very good results and significant image data size reduction. + The compression values are not standardized between different JPEG image compression software. + + PNG Compression + Since PNG compression is lossless, the main reason to use a compression factor less than 9 is when there is absolute need to reduce the size of the document when saving in a slow computer. The uncompress operation does not depend on the compression level. + + Resolution + Reduce image resolution + Check to change the dimensions of the compressed image. + Width, Height + Use the spin buttons to set the new width and height of the compressed image. + Resolution + Select the pixel density (dot per inch - DPI) of the image from the dropdown list. + + Interpolation + Select the algorithm to calculate the interpolated pixels. + + Image Information + Calculate New Size + Click to calculate the size of the image data, based on the settings of the dialog box. +
+ Wikipedia on image file formats. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a65ca5d1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Media Player + /text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp + + + +
+Media Player window + + +Media Player + + Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document. +
+
+ +
+ The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document. + +Open + Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. + + Apply + Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. + + Play + Plays the current file. + + Pause + Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. + + Stop + Stops the playback of the current file. + + Repeat + Plays the file repeatedly. + + Mute + Turns sound off and on. + + Volume slider + Adjusts the volume. + + View + Adjusts the size of the movie playback. + Position slider + Moves to a different position in the file. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eef02d971 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Find + /text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Find +Toggle the visibility of the Find toolbar to search for text or navigate a document by element. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9a8e5187 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Sidebar + /text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp + + + + + + + +The sidebar is docked on the right or left side of the document view area and contains a tab bar with tab buttons, that when clicked show a different tab deck. + +
+Choose View - Sidebar +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8f3ac5db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Audio or Video + /text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp + + + +
+ +inserting; movies/sounds +sound files +playing movies and sound files +videos +movies +audio +music +UFI: added "music;inserting"MW made "sounds;", "audio;", "music;" one level entries and added "movies" + +Audio or Video + Inserts a video or audio file into your document. +
+
+ + +
+To insert a movie or sound file into your document + + + Click where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. For %PRODUCTNAME Impress, choose Insert - Audio or Video. + + + In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. + The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. + + + Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. If it is not checked, the media file will be embedded (not supported with all file formats). + + + Click Open. + + + Alternatively, you can choose Tools - Media Player to open the Media Player. Use the Media Player to preview all supported media files. Click the Apply button in the Media Player window to insert the current media file into your document. +To play a movie or sound file + + + Click the object icon for the movie or sound file in your document. + If the icon is arranged on the background, hold down CommandCtrl while you click. + The Media Playback toolbar is shown. + + + Click Play on the Media Playback toolbar. + + + When you show an Impress presentation, the embedded sound or video on the current slide plays automatically until it's over or until you leave the slide. + You can also use the Media Playback bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback. +Supported media formats + %PRODUCTNAME relies on the operating system's installed media support. + + + For Microsoft Windows: %PRODUCTNAME can open anything for which DirectShow filters are installed (list of default formats). + + + For GNU/Linux: %PRODUCTNAME uses gstreamer, so whatever you can play using gstreamer can be used with %PRODUCTNAME (list of defined types). + + + For Apple macOS: %PRODUCTNAME uses QuickTime supported media formats (list of media formats). + + +
+ + List of default formats for Microsoft Windows DirectShow. + List of defined types for gstreamer in GNU/Linux. + List of media formats for Apple macOS QuickTime. + “What video formats does Impress support?” on Ask +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70bbf12de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Rename object + /text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp + + + + + + navigator; rename + rename;objects + + + + + + + +

Rename object

+ Renames the object selected in the Navigator. +
+ Open the context menu for the object - Choose Rename. +
+

New name

+ Enter the new name of the selected object. + Names of objects must be unique in the same document. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d82c7b0f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Using the notebook bar + /text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp + + + + + + + + notebook bar;contextual single toolbar + notebook bar;contextual groups + notebook bar;tabbed mode + notebook bar;single toolbar + notebook bar;default layout + notebook bar;layouts + notebook bar;toolbar + notebook bar;sidebar + sidebar;notebook bar + toolbar;notebook bar + + +
+

User Interface

+Opens the Select Your Preferred User Interface dialog to let you choose the user interface layout for %PRODUCTNAME. +
+ +The notebook bar shows a different way to organize controls and icons than a collection of straight rows of icons, displaying contextual groups of commands and contents for a quicker usage and better user experience. + +
+Choose menu View - User Interface +
+ +

User interface layouts

+The User Interface entry defines which user interface elements are visible. + +

Standard toolbar

+Classic mode with two visible toolbars – standard and formatting. The sidebar is partially collapsed and shows only tabs. Intended for users who are familiar with the classic interface. + +

Tabbed

+In this mode, the bar is divided into tabs, where each tab displays a set of icons grouped by context. The context can also change depending on the object selected in the document, for example a table or an image. The Tabbed user interface is the most similar to the Ribbons used in Microsoft Office. It organizes functions in tabs and makes the main menu obsolete. + +

Tabbed compact

+The Tabbed Compact variant aims to be familiar with the Microsoft Office interface, yet occupying less space for smaller screens. + +

Groupedbar compact

+The Groupedbar Compact interface provides access to functions in groups, with icons for most-frequently used features, and dropdown menus for others. This compact variant favors vertical space. + +

Contextual single

+The Contextual Single interface shows functions in a single-line toolbar with context-dependent content. + +

Single toolbar

+Standard user interface but with single-line toolbar. Intended for use on small screens. The sidebar is collapsed. + +

Sidebar

+Standard user interface with expanded sidebar. Expert users who want to quickly change many different properties are advised to use this user interface. + +When user activates additional toolbars, they will be saved in the user profile. Therefore, on returning from the notebook bar mode, all toolbars set visible before will show again. + +The Tabbed and Groupedbar modes are also available as compact variants. +The notebook bar icon size is adjustable in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View - Notebookbar icon size listbox. +The notebook bar cannot be customized. +The current implementation (%PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION) of the notebook bar is common to Writer, Calc, Draw and Impress modules. A change in the notebook bar in one module will affect the notebook bar of the other modules. + +
+Toolbars +View options +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93c9d2b32 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check for Updates + /text/shared/01/online_update.xhp + + + +updates;checking manually + online updates;checking manually + +Check for Updates +UFI: changed name of page, see i76016Next time start download automatically +You can check for updates manually or automatically. + Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. + Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. + You can disable or enable the automatic check in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. + + + If an update is available, an icon + Update Icon + on the menu bar will notify you of the update. Click the icon to open a dialog with more information. + + + You will see the Check for Updates dialog with some information about the online update of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. + If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + + + Choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. + + + If a newer version is available and %PRODUCTNAME is not set up for automatic downloading, then you can select any of the following actions: + + + Download the new version. + + + Install the downloaded files. + + + Abort this check for updates for now. + + + If %PRODUCTNAME is configured to download the files automatically, the download starts immediately. A download continues even when you minimize the dialog. + If automatic downloads are disabled, start the download manually. + If no update was found, you can close the dialog. + You need Administrator rights to update %PRODUCTNAME. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0bd298a4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Check for Updates +/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp + + + + +Check for UpdatesUFI: this is the dialogChecks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update. +Once the download starts, you see a progress bar and three buttons on the dialog. You can pause and resume the download by clicking the Pause and Resume buttons. Click Cancel to abort the download and delete the partly downloaded file. +By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. +After the download is complete, you can click Install to start the installation of the update. You see a confirmation dialog, where you can choose to close %PRODUCTNAME. +Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. +After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download + +Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.Install +Installs the downloaded update.Pause +Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.Resume +Continues a paused download.Cancel +Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file. +
+Starting online updates +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0287f3e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ + + + + + + +Extension Manager +/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp + + + +
+ +UNO components;Extension Manager +extensions;Extension Manager +packages, see extensions + + + + +

Extension Manager

+The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions. +
+For security reasons, the installation and removal of extensions are controlled by settings in the Expert Configuration. By default, installation and removal are enabled. +
+
+The following are examples of %PRODUCTNAME extensions: + + +UNO components (compiled software modules) + + +Configuration data (for menu commands) + + +%PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries + + +%PRODUCTNAME dialog libraries + + +Extension files (*.oxt files containing one or more extensions of the above listed types) + + +
+

Extension Scope

+
+Users with administrator or root privileges will see a dialog where they can choose to install extensions "for all users" or "only for me". Normal users without those privileges can install, remove, or modify extensions only for their own use. + + +A user with root or administrator privileges can install an extension as a shared extension that is available to all users. After selecting an extension, a dialog opens and asks whether to install for the current user or all users. + + +A user without root privileges can only install an extension for own usage. This is called a user extension. + +UFI: Extension Guide needed. Until we have that guide, I'll add some more info in this file. +

To install an extension

+An extension is available as a file with the file extension .oxt. + +You can find a collection of extensions on the Web. Click the "Get more extensions online" link in the Extension Manager to open your Web browser and see the https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ page. +

To install a user extension

+Do any of the following: + + +Double-click the .oxt file in your system's file browser. + + +On a web page, click a hyperlink to an *.oxt file (if your web browser can be configured to start the Extension Manager for this file type). + + +Choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add. + + +

To install a shared extension in text mode (for system administrators)

+ + +As an administrator, open a terminal or command shell. + + +Change to the \ +/program folder in your installation. + + +Enter the following command, using the path and file name of your extension: +unopkg add --shared path_filename.oxt + + + + +Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog. + + +

Add

+Click Add to add an extension. +A file dialog opens where you can select the extension that you want to add. To copy and to register the selected extension, click Open. + + + +An extension can show a license dialog. Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.insert hidden text for Show License + + +

Remove

+Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove. + + +

Enable

+Select the extension that you want to enable, and then click Enable. + + +

Disable

+Select the extension that you want to disable, and then click Disable. + + +

Update

+Click to check for online updates of all installed extensions. To check for updates of the selected extension only, choose the Update command from the context menu. The check for availability of updates starts immediately. You will see the Extension Update dialog. + + +

Options

+Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension. + +

Display Extensions

+You can filter the list of displayed extensions by their scope. + + +

Bundled with %PRODUCTNAME

+Bundled extensions are installed by the system administrator using the operating system specific installer packages. These can not be installed, updated or removed here. + + +

Installed for all users

+Filter extensions available for all users of this computer. These can be updated or removed only with administrator or root privileges. + + +

Installed for current user

+Filter extensions only available for the currently logged in user. + +Some additional commands can appear in the context menu of an extension in the Extension Manager window, depending on the selected extension. You can choose to show the license text again. You can choose to exclude the extension from checking for updates or to include an excluded extension. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feeccb25c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Password + /text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + Password + Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. + + + The open password must be entered to open the file. + The permission password must be entered to edit the document. + + + + + + Password + Type a password. A password is case sensitive. + + + + + Confirm + Re-enter the password. + Undoing password protection + To remove a password, open the document, then save without password. + + Click to show or hide the file sharing password options. + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17c9b26f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Master Password + /text/shared/01/password_main.xhp + + + +
+ + + Set Master Password + Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password. +
+ You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 + You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session. +
+
+ You should only use passwords that are hard to find by other persons or programs. A password should follow these rules: + + + Length of eight or more characters. + + + Contains a mix of lower case and upper case letters, numbers, and special characters. + + + Cannot be found in any wordbook or encyclopedia. + + + Has no direct relation to your personal data, e.g., date of birth or car plate. + + +
+Master password + Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. +Confirm master password + Re-enter the master password. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0809b6634 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + Paste as Column Before + /text/shared/01/pastecolumleft.xhp + + + +
+ +

Paste as Column Before

+ Insert clipboard table data in a table as new columns before instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87f4de613 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Nested Table + /text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp + + + + + + paste;nested table + paste special;nested table + paste nested table + +
+

Paste Nested Table

+ Paste clipboard content (including native tables or tables copied from Calc or other spreadsheets) as nested tables in empty cells and at cell starting cursor position. +
+
+ +
+ + Pasting table data in Writer tables overwrites the contents of the existing cells, when the cursor is in an empty cell or at the beginning of the first paragraph of a table cell. + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df55e3112 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + Paste as Row Above + /text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp + + + +
+ +

Paste as Row Above

+ Insert clipboard table data in a table as new rows instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93c4b8edf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Special + /text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp + + + +
+

Paste Special

+ Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. +
+ + + + + + + +paste special;only text (spreadsheet) +paste special;only numbers (spreadsheet) +paste special;only formula (spreadsheet) + + + +

Paste Only Text

+ Paste clipboard text contents only. Numeric and formula values are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. +

Paste Only Numbers

+ Paste clipboard numeric contents only. Text and formulas are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. +

Paste Only Formula

+ Paste clipboard formula contents only. Text and numeric values are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cb601129 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Unformatted Text + /text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp + + + + + +paste;unformatted text +paste special;unformatted text +unformatted text;paste special + +
+

Paste Unformatted Text

+ Paste only the text contents, without any formatting. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6abb949a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Safe Mode + /text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + + profile;safe mode + + + Safe Mode + Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance. + +
+ +
+ Choose Help - Restart in Safe Mode. + Start %PRODUCTNAME from command line with --safe-mode option + Start %PRODUCTNAME from %PRODUCTNAME (Safe Mode) start menu entry (Windows only) +
+ +What can I do in safe mode? +Once in safe mode, you will be shown a dialog offering three user profile restoration options + + +Continue in Safe Mode +This option will let you work with %PRODUCTNAME as you are used to, but using a temporary user profile. It also means that all configuration changes made to the temporary user profile will be lost after restart. + + +Restart in Normal Mode +Choosing Restart in Normal Mode will discard all changes, terminate safe mode and start %PRODUCTNAME again in normal mode. Use this option if you got here by accident. + + +Apply Changes and Restart +The dialog offers multiple changes to the user profile that can be made to help restoring %PRODUCTNAME to working state. They get more radical from top down so you should try them successively one after another. Choosing this option applies selected changes + + +Restore from backup +%PRODUCTNAME keeps backups of previous configurations and activated extensions. Use this option to return to the previous state if your problems are likely to be caused by recent changes to configuration or extensions. + + +Configure +You can disable all extensions installed by the user. You can also disable hardware acceleration. Activate this option if you experience startup crashes or visual glitches, they are often related to hardware acceleration. + + +Uninstall extensions +Sometimes %PRODUCTNAME cannot be started due to extensions blocking or crashing. This option allows you to disable all extensions installed by the user as well as shared and bundled extensions. Uninstalling shared and bundled extensions should be used with caution. It will only work if you have the necessary system access rights. + + +Reset to factory settings +If all else fails, you can reset your user profile to the factory default. The first option Reset settings and user customizations resets all configuration and UI changes, but keeps things like your personal dictionary, templates etc. The second option will reset your entire profile to the state when you first installed %PRODUCTNAME. + + +If you could not resolve your problem by using safe mode, click on Advanced expander. You will find instructions how to get further help there. +If you want to report a problem with your user profile, by clicking on Create Zip Archive from User Profile you can generate a zip file which can be uploaded to the bug tracking system to be investigated by the developers. +Be aware that the uploaded profile might contain sensitive information, such as your personal dictionary, settings and installed extensions. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90cf95a59 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + Embedding Fonts + /text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp + + + +
+ +embedding fonts in document file +documents; embedding fonts +font embedding; in documents +fonts; embedding +fonts; licensing for embedding +embedding; fonts +embedding licensed fonts + + + +

Font

+ Embed document fonts in the current file. +
+
+ +
+ +

Font embedding

+ Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems. The document with embedded fonts has a larger size and the fonts are used on the target computer for better rendering of the document layout. + Consider embedding fonts when your document use rare or custom fonts not generally available in other computers. + Font licenses may restrict embedding fonts in documents. Font files contain flags that indicate if and how they can be embedded within a document file. %PRODUCTNAME parses these flags and determines if and how it may be embedded in a document file, and when you open a document containing embedded fonts, it will also look at these flags to determine if and how a document can be viewed or edited. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdfed4828 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + Export as EPUB + /text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp + + + + + +
+ + EPUB;export + electronic publication + exporting;to EPUB + + + + + +

Export as EPUB

+Export the current file to EPUB. + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + +

General

+ + +

Version

+Sets the version of the resulting EPUB file. + + +

Split method

+Select the type of start of the next EPUB section. + + + Heading: Starts the next section on headings, according to the document outline numbering. + + + Page break: Starts the new section on a page break. + + + + +

Layout method

+Determines if a reflowable or a fixed layout EPUB will be generated. + + + Reflowable: The content flows, or reflows, to fit the screen and to fit the needs of the user. This also means that page style information (for example page size or header/footer content) is not exported. + + + Fixed: Gives greater control over presentation when a reflowable EPUB is not suitable for the content. + + + + +

Custom cover image

+Enter the full path of the custom cover image file. If the entry is empty, the exporter takes the cover image in the media directory (see below) when the name is one of the following: cover.gif, cover.jpg, cover.png or cover.svg. +The custom cover image is embedded in the EPUB file. + + +

Custom media directory

+ +Enter the custom media directory for the EPUB file. The media directory may contain a cover image as seen above, custom metadata and image links. + +By default, the exporter looks for custom media and custom metadata in the current document directory inside a folder with the same name of the document file name. For example, if the document name is MyText.odt, the default media folder for cover and metadata is MyText in the current directory. + +For custom metadata, you must provide a file with same name as the original filename and with extension as ".xmp". The provided metadata will override the internal document metadata. In the example above, the custom metadata must exist in the MyText directory as MyText.xmp. + +Image links mean that if you create relative links on images or text and they link an image that's available in the media directory, then this media will be available in the EPUB export result as a popup. + + +

Metadata

+Enter the custom metadata to override the document default metadata. These text fields can be left empty. + + +

Identifier

+Enter a unique identifier for the publication. + + +

Title

+Enter the title of the publication. + + +

Author

+Enter the Author of the publication. + + +

Language

+Language of the publication (see RFC4646 and ISO 639 for possible values). + + +

Date

+Last modification date for the publication. The value of this property must be an XML Schema dateTime conformant date in the form: CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ. Default is the date and time when the export dialog opened. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08cca8e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Export as PDF + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +PDF;export +portable document format +exporting;to PDF + +MW made "PDF export a two level entry"UFI: write guide and move bookmarks there + + +

Export as PDF

+Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4. A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact, provided that supporting software is installed. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +

Export button

+Exports the current file in PDF format. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fff630a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Digital Signature + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp + + + + +PDF export;digital signature +PDF export;sign PDF document +PDF export;time stamp + +
+ + +

Digital Signatures

+ This tab contains the options related to exporting to a digitally signed PDF. +
+ +
+ +
+ Digital signatures are used to ensure that the PDF was really created by the original author (i.e. you), and that the document has not been modified since it was signed. + The signed PDF export uses the keys and X.509 certificates already stored in your default key store location or on a smartcard. + + + + The key store to be used can be selected under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Certificate Path. + + + When using a smartcard, it must already be configured for use by your key store. This is usually done during installation of the smartcard software. + + + + +

Certificate

+ +

Use this certificate to digitally sign PDF documents

+ Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export. + + +

Select

+ Opens the Select Certificate dialog. + All certificates found in your selected key store are displayed. If the key store is protected by a password, you are prompted for it. When using a smartcard that is protected by a PIN, you are also prompted for that. + Select the certificate to use for digitally signing the exported PDF by clicking on the corresponding line, then click OK. + All other fields on the Digital Signatures tab will be accessible only after a certificate has been selected. + + +

Certificate password

+ Enter the password used for protecting the private key associated with the selected certificate. Usually this is the key store password. + If the key store password has already been entered in the Select Certificate dialog, the key store may already be unlocked and not require the password again. But to be on the safe side, enter it nevertheless. + When using a smartcard, enter the PIN here. Some smartcard software will prompt you for the PIN again before signing. This is cumbersome, but that's how smartcards work. + + + + +

Location, Contact information, Reason

+ These three fields allow you to optionally enter additional information about the digital signature that will be applied to the PDF (Where, by whom and why it was made). It will be embedded in the appropriate PDF fields and will be visible to anyone viewing the PDF. Each or all of the three fields may be left blank. + + +

+ During the PDF signing process, the TSA will be used to obtain a digitally signed timestamp that is then embedded in the signature. This (RFC 3161) timestamp will allow anyone viewing the PDF to verify when the document was signed. + If no TSA URL is selected (the default), the signature will not be timestamped, but will use the current time from your local computer. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08ff8827c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export General + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp + + + + +PDF export;general options +hybrid PDF +PDF forms + +
+ + +

General

+ Sets the general options for exporting your document to a PDF file. Range, images, watermark, forms and other parameters. +
+
+ +
+ +

Range

+ Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. + + +

All

+ Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. + + + +

Pages

+ Exports the pages you type in the box. + To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. + + +

Selection

+ Exports the current selection. + + +

View PDF after export

+ Open the exported document in the system default PDF viewer. + +

Images

+ Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. + + + +

Lossless compression

+ Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. + + +

JPEG compression

+ Select a JPEG compression level. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels are lost and artifacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. + + +

Quality

+ Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. + + +

Reduce image resolution

+ Select to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. + + Select the target resolution for the images. + + EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. + +

Watermark

+ Add a centered, vertical, light green watermark text to the page background. The watermark is not part of the source document. +

Sign with watermark

+ Check to enable the watermark signature. +

Text

+ Insert the text for the watermark signature. + You cannot adjust the position, orientation and size of the watermark. The watermark is not stored in the source document. +

General

+ Sets general PDF export options. + + +

Hybrid PDF (embed ODF file)

+ This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. In PDF viewers it behaves like a normal .pdf file and it remains fully editable in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +

Archive (PDF/A, ISO 19005)

+ Converts to the PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2b, or PDF/A-3b format. All fonts used in the source document are embedded in the generated PDF file, and PDF tags are written. The primary purpose is to create an electronic document whose appearance is device and application independent, making it suitable for long term preservation. + PDF/A-2b is recommended for most users, because it allows for layers and transparency with shapes and images. It also compresses better (JPEG 2000) than PDF/A-1b, usually producing smaller files. PDF/A-3b is identical to PDF/A-2b, but also accepts embedding of other file formats. + + + + + +

Tagged PDF (add document structure)

+ Select to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. + Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. + + +

Create PDF form

+ Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. + + +

Submit format

+ Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. + Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. + This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. + + +

Allow duplicate field names

+ Allows you to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names. +

Structure

+Sets options for diverse features such as bookmarks, comments, page layout. + +

Export outlines

+ Select to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Chapter Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. + Only paragraphs with Outline level 1 - 10 will be exported. The name of the Paragraph Style is irrelevant. For example, the default version of Paragraph Style Title is not exported when its Outline level is Text Body. To see a paragraph’s Outline level, choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & Numbering tab. + + + +

Export Placeholders

+ Export the placeholders fields visual markings only. The exported placeholder is ineffective. + + + + +

Comments as PDF annotations

+ Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF annotations. + To export comments of Writer documents as they are shown in %PRODUCTNAME, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print and select the In margins option in the Comments area. The exported pages will be scaled down and the comments will be placed into their margins. + + + + +

Export Notes Page

+ Export also the Notes pages view at the end of the exported PDF presentation document. + + +

Export only notes page

+ Exports only the Notes page views. + + +

Export hidden pages

+ Exports the document’s hidden slides. + + + + + +

Whole sheet export

+ Ignores each sheet’s paper size, print ranges and shown/hidden status and puts every sheet (even hidden sheets) on exactly one page, which is exactly as small or large as needed to fit the whole contents of the sheet. + + + + +

Export automatically inserted blank pages

+ If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. + + +

Use reference XObjects

+ This option affects how PDF images are exported back to PDF. When this option is disabled, then the first page of the PDF data is included in the output. The PDF export merges the used images, fonts and other resources during export. This is a complex operation, but the result can be viewed in various viewers. When the option is enabled, then the reference XObject markup is used: this is a simple operation, but viewers have to support this markup to show vector images. Otherwise a fallback bitmap is shown in the viewer. +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0240ba70 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Initial View + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp + + + + +PDF export;initial document view + +
+ + +

Initial View

+ Sets the options for the initial view of the PDF file in the external PDF viewer. +
+
+ +
+ +

Panes

+ + +

Page only

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. + + +

Outline and page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" + + +

Thumbnails and page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. + + +

Open on page

+ Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. + +

Magnification

+ + +

Default

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. + + +

Fit in window

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. + + +

Fit width

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. + + +

Fit visible

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. + + + +

Zoom factor

+ Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. + +

Page layout

+ + +

Default

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. + + +

Single page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. + + +

Continuous

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. + + +

Continuous facing

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. + + +

First page is left

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fcafe8f33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Links + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp + + + + +PDF export;links + + +
+ +
+ +

General

+

Export outlines as named destinations

+ The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents. + + +

Convert document references to PDF targets

+ Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. + + +

Export URLs relative to file system

+ Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. + +

Cross-document links

+ Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. + + +

Default mode

+ Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. + + +

Open with PDF reader application

+ Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. + + +

Open with Internet browser

+ Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50bbaedff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Security + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp + + + + +PDF export;security + +
+ + +

Security

+ Specifies the security options of the exported PDF file. +
+
+ +
+ + + The document permission restrictions set by password will be observed only by PDF readers compliant with the version 1.5 of the format. Thus, in older PDF readers, the restrictions may have no effect. +

Set passwords

+ Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords. + You can specify a password needed to view the PDF. You can enter an optional password that allows the person viewing the PDF to edit and/or print the document. + +

Printing

+ + +

Not permitted

+ Printing the document is not permitted. + + +

Low resolution (150 dpi)

+ The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. + + +

High resolution

+ The document can be printed in high resolution. + +

Changes

+ + +

Not permitted

+ No changes of the content are permitted. + + +

Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages

+ Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. + + +

Filling in form fields

+ Only filling in form fields is permitted. + + +

Commenting, filling in form fields

+ Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. + + +

Any except extracting pages

+ All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. + + +

Contents

+ +

Enable copying of content

+ Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. + + +

Enable text access for accessibility tools

+ Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73dd4560b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Universal Accessibility (PDF Export) + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp + + + + +PDF export;Universal Accessibility + +
+

Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA)

+Creates a universal accessibility-complying PDF file that follows the requirements of PDF/UA (ISO 14289) specifications. +
+ +
+ +then choose Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA). +
+ +The specification defines the required structure and formatting of a document and PDF features that are better suited for accessibility. This specification can also be used to produce documents that achieve W3C's Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 (WCAG 2.0). + +The present implementation (January 2020) checks the following: + + + + The document title is set. + + + The document language is set, or all styles in use have the language property set. + + + All images, graphics, OLE objects have an alternate (alt) text or a title. + + + Tables do not contain split or merged cells. + + + Only integrated numbering is used, no manual numbering. For example, do not type "1.", "2.", "3." at the beginning of paragraphs. + + + Hyperlink texts without the underlying hyperlinks. + + + The contrast between text and the background meets the WCAG specification. + + + No blinking text. + + + No footnotes or endnotes. + + + Headings must increase sequentially with no skips, for example, you cannot have Heading 1, Heading 3, and no Heading 2. + + + Text does not convey additional meaning with (direct) formatting. + + +You can check the document accessibility compliance before exporting with Tools - Check Accessibility + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc83f27d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export User Interface + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp + + + + +PDF export;user interface + +
+ + +

User Interface

+ Specifies the options for the external PDF viewer user interface. +
+
+ +
+ +

Window options

+ + +

Resize window to initial page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page. + + +

Center window on screen

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. + + +

Open in full screen mode

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. + + +

Display document title

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. + +

User interface options

+ + +

Hide menu bar

+ Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. + + +

Hide toolbar

+ Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. + + +

Hide window controls

+ Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. + +

Transitions

+ + +

Use transition effects

+ Select to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. + +

Collapse Outlines

+ + +

Show All

+ Select to show all outline levels as bookmarks when the reader opens the PDF file. + + + +

Visible levels

+ Select to show bookmarks down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79aa0678c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Email as PDF +/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Email as PDF +UFI: name changed with #i46895 +Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an email sending window with the PDF as an attachment. +see i70482 +
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ce927cd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Security Warning +/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp + + +UFI: Security Warning dialog on loading untrusted macro + + + +security;warning dialogs with macros +macros;security warning dialog + + + + +Security Warning + +When you open a document that contains an unsigned macro, or a signed macro from an unknown source, the Security Warning dialog opens. +Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options. +View Signature +Opens a dialog where you can view the signature. +Always trust macros from this source +Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources. +Enable Macros +Allows macros in the document to run. +Disable Macros +Does not allow macros in the document to run. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b9951e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Select Certificate +/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp + + + + + +

Select Certificate

+Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. +
+ + +
+ + +

List

+Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. + +

View Certificate

+Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate. + +

Description

+Type a purpose for the signature. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1570d30e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + Signing Existing PDF + /text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp + + + + + digital signature;signing existing PDF + + Signing Existing PDF files + %PRODUCTNAME can digitally sign an existing PDF document. +
+ +
+ The file opens in %PRODUCTNAME Draw in read only mode. + Sign the PDF document as usual. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06663c442 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Signing the Signature Line + /text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp + + + + + + + digital signature;sign signature linesignature line;signing + +

Digitally Signing the Signature Line

+ %PRODUCTNAME lets you sign digitally a signature line in your document. + On signing a signature line, %PRODUCTNAME fills the line with the name of signer, adds the digital certificate issuer information and optionally insert the date of signature. +
+ Select the signature line graphic object context menu. Choose Sign Signature Line. +
+ +

Your Name

+ Enter your name as signer of the document. Your name will be inserted above the signature horizontal line. + +

Certificate

+ Click on the Select Certificate button to open the Select Certificate dialog box, where your certificates are listed. Select the certificate suitable for signing the document. + The information of the certificate issuer is inserted in the bottom of the Signature Line object. +

Instructions from the document creator

+ + This area displays the instructions entered by the document creator when adding the signature line. + +

Add comments

+ Enter comments about the signature. The comments are displayed in the Description field of the certificate. + If enabled when the signature line was created, the date of signature is inserted on the top right of the signature line object. + + Signed Signature Line + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..905680abd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Time Stamp Authorities for Digital Signatures + /text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp + + + + + time stamp;digital signature + digital signature;time stamp + time stamp authority + TSA + time stamp for PDF digital signature + + +
+ +

Time Stamp Authority

+ Time Stamp Authorities (TSA) issue digitally signed timestamps (RFC 3161) that are optionally used during signed PDF export. +
+Adding a trusted timestamp to an electronic signature provides a digital seal of data integrity and a trusted date and time of when the transaction took place. Recipients of documents with a trusted timestamp can verify when the document was digitally or electronically signed, as well as verify that the document was not altered after the date the timestamp vouches for. +
+Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - TSAs +
+ +

List of Time Stamp Authorities

+Display the list of existing TSAs. + +

Add

+Opens the Name dialog to enter a new Time Stamping Authority URL. + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected entry in the list. Deletion is immediate and does not display a confirmation dialog. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5f55e678 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Preview in Web Browser +/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp + + + +
+
+Preview in Web Browser +Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser. +
+
+
+ +
+The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. +You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5a3d3e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Data Navigator + /text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp + + + +
+data structure of XForms + deleting;models/instances + models in XForms + Data Navigator;display options +MW made "Data Navigator.." a two level entry + + + + + +Data Navigator + + Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document. +
+ +Model name + Selects the XForms model that you want to use. + +Models + Adds, renames, and removes XForms models. + + +Add + Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model. + +Enter the name. + +Model data updates change document's modification status + When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified". + +Remove + Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model. + +Rename + Renames the selected Xform model. + +Show Details + Switches the display to show or hide details.UFI: not explained in spec +Instance + Lists the items that belong to the current instance. +Submissions + Lists the submissions.UFI. it's not in the spec + Bindings + Lists the bindings for the XForm.UFI. it's not in the spec + +Instances + This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances. + +Add + Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance. + +Edit + Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance. + +Remove + Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance. + Show data types + Switches the display to show more or less details.UFI: not explained in spec + + + + + + +Add + Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item. + + +Edit + Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). + + +Delete + Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18d488204 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Add / Edit +/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp + + + + + + + + +read-only items in Data Navigator +Data Navigator;adding/editing items + + MW added a new entry and deleted "editing;" and "adding;" + Add / Edit + Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator. Items can be elements, attributes, submissions, or bindings. + %PRODUCTNAME inserts a new item directly after the currently selected item in the Data Navigator. A new attribute is added to the currently selected element. + + + Name + Enter the name of the item. + The attribute names must be unique within the same group. + + + Default value + Enter a default value for the selected item. + Settings + Specifies the properties of the selected item. + + + Data type + Select the data type for the selected item. + + + + Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. + + +
+ The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. +
+ + + + Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. + + + + + + + Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. + + + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition. + + + + Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. + + + + + + + Calculate + Declares that the item is calculated. + + + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..706be0bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Add Condition +/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp + + + + + + +conditions;items in Data Navigator +XForms;conditions + + + + Add Condition + Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator. + + + Condition + Enter a condition.examples? + + Result + Displays a preview of the result. + + + Edit Namespaces + Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58ce03d0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Data Binding +/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp + + + +editing;data binding of XForms +data binding change in XForms +MW deleted "changing;"Change Data Binding +Edit the data binding in the XForms Data Navigator.UFI: called from the control's context menuUFI: cannot find it in m145 +Model +Select the name of the XForms model.UFI: ?? not in spec +Item list +Displays the data binding for the selected form control. To change the data binding, select another item in the list click OK. To access the Add and Properties commands for an item, right-click the item. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06cf4d69b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Form Namespaces +/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp + + + + + + +deleting;namespaces in XForms +organizing;namespaces in XForms +namespace organization in XForms +XForms;adding/editing/deleting/organizing namespaces + + MW deleted "editing;" and "adding;" and added "XForms;" + Form Namespaces + Use this dialog to organize namespaces. You can access this dialog through the Add Condition dialog of the Data Navigator. + + + Namespaces + Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form. + + + Add + Adds a new namespace to the list. + Use the Add Namespace dialog to enter the Prefix and URL. + + + Edit + Edits the selected namespace. + Use the Edit Namespace dialog to edit the Prefix and URL. + + + Delete + Deletes the selected namespace. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9718a620f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Data (for XML Form Documents) + /text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp + + + +
+ Data (for XML Form Documents) + The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings. +
+
+ +
+ The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: + +XML data model + Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. + +Binding + Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. + +Binding expression + Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. + +Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. + +Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. + +Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. + +Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. + +Calculation + Declares that the item is calculated. + +Data type + Select a data type which the control should be validated against. + +x + Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. + ++ + Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. + The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. + +Whitespaces + Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are "Preserve", "Replace", and "Collapse". The semantics follow the definition at https://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. + +Pattern + Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elsewhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. + +Digits (total) + Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. + +Digits (fraction) + Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. + +Max. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. + +Max. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. + +Min. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. + +Min. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. + +Length + Specifies the number of characters for a string. + +Length (at least) + Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. + +Length (at most) + Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df313347a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Print File Directly + /text/shared/02/01110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +If you select text or a graphic and click the Print File Direct icon, you are prompted to print the selection or the document. +
+ + + + +Print File Directly Icon + + + + Print File Directly + + +
+
+ + +If the current document uses a printer that is not the default printer for your operating system, the Print File Direct icon opens the Print dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8842c8ba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,284 @@ + + + + + + + Show Draw Functions + /text/shared/02/01140000.xhp + + + + +Drawing bar +lines; draw functions +polygon drawing +freeform lines; draw functions +text boxes; positioning +headings; entering as text box +text objects; draw functions +ticker text +text; animating +vertical callouts +vertical text boxes +cube drawing +triangle drawing +ellipse drawing +rectangle drawing +shapes +MW moved "frames;" and "selecting;" to the shared guide groups.xhpMW added 5 entries + +
+ +

Show Draw Functions

+Click to open or close the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document. +
+You can switch on and off the Drawing toolbar of Writer and Calc documents using an icon on the Standard toolbar. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Show Draw Functions + + +
+
+You can change which buttons are visible in the toolbars. Right-click a toolbar to access the Visible Buttons command. +

Selection

+ + + + Icon + + + Lets you select objects in the current document. To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. + + +
+ +

Line

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+To enter text on a line, double-click the line and type or paste your text. The text direction corresponds to the direction you dragged to draw the line. To hide the line, select Invisible in the Line Style box on the Drawing Object Properties bar. + +

Rectangle

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Ellipse

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Polygon

+
+ + + + Icon + + +
+ Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. + Hold the Shift key while drawing a polygon to position new points at 45 degree angles. + The Edit Points mode enables you to interactively modify the individual points of the polygon. +
+ + +
+
+ +

Curve

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a smooth Bezier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double click the starting point of the curve. The arc of the curve is determined by the distance you drag. + + +
+ +

Freeform Line

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line. + + +
+ +

Arc

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Ellipse Pie

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Circle Segment

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ + +

Text Box

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text. + + +
+ + +

Text Animation

+ + + + Icon + + + Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation. Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. + + +
+ +

Callouts

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Points

+Enables you to edit points on your drawing. + + +

From File

+ + +

Extrusion On/Off

+Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + +
+ +

Vertical Callouts

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + + +
+
+
+ +

Vertical Text

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + + +
+
+
+Tips for working with the Drawing bar. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..442bd3e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,565 @@ + + + + + + + Form Controls + /text/shared/02/01170000.xhp + + + + +form controls;toolbars +inserting; form fields +form fields +command button creation +buttons; form functions +controls; inserting +push buttons;creating +radio button creation +check box creation +labels; form functions +fixed text; form functions +text boxes;form functions +list box creation +picklist creation +drop-down lists in form functions +combo box creation +selecting;controls +controls; select mode +MW deleted "option field creation", changed "option button" to "push button" and "selections;" to "selecting;" + +
+

Form Controls

+The Form Controls toolbar or sub-menu contains tools that you need to create an interactive form. You can use the toolbar or sub-menu to add controls to a form in a text, drawing, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML document, for example a button that runs a macro. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. +Icon on the Insert toolbar (you may need to enable this initially invisible icon): +
+ + + + Icon Select + + + Form Controls + + +
+
+
+XML Form documents (XForms) use the same controls. +To create a form, open a document and use the Form Controls toolbar to add and define the form controls. If you want, you can also link the form to a database, so that you can use the controls to manipulate a database. +When you create a form in an HTML document, you can use the form to send data over the Internet. +

To add a control to a document

+ + + On the Form Controls toolbar, click the icon of the control that you want to add. + + + Then click in the document, and drag to create the control. + To create a square control, hold down the Shift key while you drag. + + +To add a field from the field list of a table or query to a form, drag a cell into the form. In a text document, you can also drag a column header to add a field to a form. To include a label for the field, hold down CommandCtrl+Shift when you drag a column head. +

Modifying a Control

+ + + Right-click the control and choose Control Properties. A dialog opens where you can define the properties of the control. + + + To specify a accelerator key for a control, add a tilde (~) in front of the character in the label for the control. + + + You can drag and drop controls from one document to another document. You can also copy and paste controls between documents. When you insert a control from another document, $[officename] analyzes the data source, content type, and content properties of the control so that the control fits the logical structure in the target document. For example, a control that displays contents from an address book continues to display the same contents after you copy the control to a different document. You can view these properties on the Data tab page of the Form properties dialog. + + +
+

Selectcontrols and design bars

+ + + + Icon Select + + + This icon switches the mouse pointer to the select mode, or deactivates this mode. The select mode is used to select the controls of the current form. + + +
+ + + +
+ +
+

Wizards On/OffControls bar

+ + + + Icon Toggle Form Control Wizards + + + Turns on and turns off the automatic form controls wizards. + These wizards help you to enter the properties of list boxes, table controls, and other controls. + + +
+
+ + +

Form DesignControls bar

+ + + + + Icon Form Design Tools + + + + Opens the Form Design toolbar. + + +
+ +
+ +

Label Fieldcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Label Field + + + Creates a field for displaying text. These labels are only for displaying predefined text. Entries cannot be made in these fields. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Text Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Text Box + + + Creates a text box. Text boxes are fields in which the user can enter text. In a form, text boxes display data or allow for new data input. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Check Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Check Box + + + Creates a check box. Check boxes allow you to activate or deactivate a function in a form. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Option Buttoncontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Option Button + + + Creates an option button. Option buttons enable the user to choose one of several options. Option buttons with the same functionality are given the same name (Name property). Normally, they are given a group box. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

List Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon List Box + + + Creates a list box. A list box lets users select an entry from a list. If the form is linked to a database and the database connection is active, the List Box Wizard will automatically appear after the list box is inserted in the document. This wizard helps you create the list box. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Combo Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Combo Box + + + Creates a combo box. A combo box is a single-line list box with a drop-down list from which users choose an option. You can assign the "read-only" property to the combo box so that users cannot enter other entries than those found in the list. If the form is bound to a database and the database connection is active, the Combo Box Wizard will automatically appear after you insert the combo box in the document. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Push Buttoncontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Push Button + + + Creates a push button. This function can be used to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. + You can apply text and graphics to these buttons. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Image Buttonmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon image button + + + Creates a button displayed as an image. Aside from the graphic representation, an image button has the same properties as a "normal" button. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Formatted Fieldcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Formatted Field + + + Creates a formatted field. A formatted field is a text box in which you can define how the inputs and outputs are formatted, and which limiting values apply. + A formatted field has special control properties (choose Format - Control). + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Date Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Date Field + + + Creates a date field. If the form is linked to a database, the date values can be adopted from the database. + If you assign the "Dropdown" property to the date field, the user can open a calendar to select a date under the date field. This also applies to a date field within a Table Control field. + Date fields can be easily edited by the user with the up arrow and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the day, month, or the year is can be increased or decreased using the arrow keys. + Specific Remarks on Date Fields. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Numerical Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Numerical Field + + + Creates a numerical field. If the form is linked to a database, the numerical values in the form can be adopted from the database. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Group Boxmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Group Box + + + Creates a frame to visually group several controls. Group boxes allow you to group option buttons in a frame. + If you insert a group frame into the document, the Group Element Wizard starts, which allows you to easily create an option group. +Note: When you drag a group box over already existing controls and then want to select a control, you have to first open the context menu of the group box and choose Arrange - Send to Back. Then select the control while pressing CommandCtrl. +Group boxes are used only for a visual effect. A functional grouping of option fields can be made through the name definition: under the Name properties of all option fields, enter the same name in order to group them. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Time Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Time Field + + + Creates a time field. If the form is linked to a database, the time values for the form can be adopted from the database. + Time fields can be easily edited by the user with the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the hours, minutes, or the seconds are increased or decreased using the arrow keys. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Currency Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Currency Field + + + Creates a currency field. If the form is linked to a database, the currency field contents for in the form can be adopted from the database. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Pattern Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Pattern Field + + + Creates a pattern field. Pattern fields consist of an edit mask and a literal mask. The edit mask determines which data can be entered. The literal mask determines the contents of the pattern field when loading the form. + Please note that pattern fields are not exported into HTML format. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Table Controlmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Table Control + + + Creates a table control to display a database table. If you create a new table control, the Table Element Wizard appears. + Special information about Table Controls. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ +

Image Controlmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Image Control + + + Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database. In the form document, double-click one of these controls to open the Insert Graphic dialog to insert the image. There is also a context menu (not in design mode) with commands for inserting and deleting the image. + Images from a database can be displayed in a form, and new images can be inserted in the database as long as the image control is not write-protected. The control must refer to a database field of the image type. Therefore, enter the data field into the properties window on the Data tab page. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

File Selectionmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon File Selection + + + Creates a button that enables file selection. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Spin Buttonmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Spin Button + + + Creates a spin button. + + +
+If you add a spin button to a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between the spin button and a cell. As a result, when you change the contents of a cell, the contents of the spin button are updated. Conversely, if you change the value of the spin button, the contents of the cell are updated.UFI: see spec doc spinbutton_form_control.sxw +
+ +
+ +

Scrollbarmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Scrollbar + + + Creates a scrollbar. + + +
+You can specify the following properties for a scrollbar: + + + + UI name + + + Semantics + + + + + Scroll value min + + + Specifies the minimum height or the minimum width of a scrollbar. + + + + + Scroll value max + + + Specifies the maximum height or the maximum width of a scrollbar. + + + + + Default scroll value + + + Specifies the default value of a scrollbar, used when the form is reset. + + + + + Orientation + + + Specifies the orientation of a scrollbar, that is, horizontal or vertical. + + + + + Small change + + + Specifies the minimum amount by which you can scroll a scrollbar, for example, by clicking an arrow. + + + + + Large change + + + Specifies the amount that a large step scrolls a scrollbar, for example, when you click between the scrollbar thumb and a scrollbar arrow. + + + + + Delay + + + Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. For example, the delay that occurs when you click an arrow button on the scrollbar and hold down the mouse button. + + + + + Symbol color + + + Specifies the color of the arrows on the scrollbar. + + + + + Visible Size + + + Specifies the size of the scrollbar thumb in "value units". For example, a value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min.") / 2 results in a scrollbar thumb that occupies half of the scrollbar. + To make the width of the scrollbar equal to the height of the scrollbar, set the Visible Size to zero. + + +
+In a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between a scrollbar and a cell.UFI: see spec doc scrollbar_form_control.sxw +
+
+ Context Menu Commands +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5dd71eb31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Context Menu of a Control Field + /text/shared/02/01170001.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Context Menu of a Control Field +The context menu of a control field has the following commands. + +Replace with +Calls a submenu where you can select a control type to replace the control selected in the document. As many properties as possible are adopted. + +Text box +The selected control is transformed into a text box. + +Button +The selected control is transformed into a button. + +Label field +The selected control is transformed into a label. + +List Box +The selected control is transformed into a list box. + +Check Box +The selected control is transformed into a check box. + +Radio Button +The selected control is transformed into an option button. + +Combo Box +The selected control is transformed into a combo box. + +Image Button +The selected control is transformed into an image button. + +File Selection +The selected control is transformed into a file selection. + +Date Field +The selected control is transformed into a date field. + +Time Field +The selected control is transformed into a time field. + +Numerical Field +The selected control is transformed into a numerical field. + +Currency Field +The selected control is transformed into a currency field. + +Pattern Field +The selected control is transformed into a pattern field. + +Image Control +The selected control is transformed into an image control. + +Formatted Field +The selected control is transformed into a formatted field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e43002ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Special properties of a formatted field + /text/shared/02/01170002.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formatted fields; properties +fields; formatted fields +controls; formatted fields + +Special properties of a formatted field + +Formatting: You can set the Formatting property by clicking the ... button in the Formatting line of the Properties: Formatted Field dialog. The Number Format dialog appears. +If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. + +Min. value and Max. value: You can enter the minimum and maximum numeric value for a formatted field. The min and max values determine the output of existing data (Example: Min. value is 5, the connected database field contains the integer value 3. The output is 5, but the value in the database is not modified) and the input of new data (Example: Max. value is 10 and you enter 20. The input is corrected and 10 is written in the database). If the fields are not filled in for Min. value and Max. value, no limits will be applied. For formatted fields that are connected to a database text field, these two values and the Default value do not apply. + +Default value: This value is set for new records as the default value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ad9fe89d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + Special Tips for Date Fields + /text/shared/02/01170003.xhp + + + +date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields +When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. +The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e97eef837 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Special Tips for Table Controls + /text/shared/02/01170004.xhp + + + +table controls; properties +controls; properties of table controls +table controls;keyboard-only edit mode + +Special Tips for Table Controls +You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. +The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined date/time fields, two columns are created automatically. +The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. +To insert columns into the table control, click in the column heads and bring up the context menu. The following commands are available: +Insert Column +Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. +Configure the table control using drag and drop: Open the data source browser and drag the desired fields out of the data source browser and on to the column heads of the table control. A pre-configured column is created. +Replace with +Opens a submenu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control. +Delete Column +Deletes the currently selected column. +Column +Opens the properties dialog of the selected column. +Hide Columns +Hides the selected column. Its properties are not changed. +Show columns +Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. +More +Calls the Show Columns dialog. + + +In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or CommandCtrl key to select multiple entries. +All +Click All if you want to show all columns. +Keyboard-only control of Table Controls +If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the previous control. +To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: +The form document must be in Design mode. + + + Press CommandCtrl+F6 to select the document. + + + Press Shift+F4 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. + + + Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. + + + In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. + + + If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with CommandCtrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. + + + Press the Esc key to exit the edit mode. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..415a7cf34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Control Properties + /text/shared/02/01170100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+controls; properties of form controls +properties; form controls + + + +

Control Properties

+ Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control. +
+
+ +
+You can only call the Properties dialog when in the Design mode with a control selected. +
+If you enter data in the Properties dialog, note that multiline input is possible for certain drop-down combo boxes. This concerns all fields in which an SQL statement can be entered, as well as the properties of text boxes or label fields. You can open these fields and enter text in the opened list. The following shortcut keys are valid: + + + + Keys + + + Effect + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow: + + + Opens the combo box. + + + + + OptionAlt+Up Arrow: + + + Closes the combo box. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Inserts a new line. + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Places the cursor into the previous line. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Places the cursor into the next line. + + + + + Enter + + + Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. + + +
+As with list boxes or combo boxes, you can open or close the list with a mouse click at the arrow on the right end of the field. However, the input here can be entered either in the opened list or in the top text field. An exception is the properties that expect a list representation, for example, the property "List Entries", which can be set for the control fields List Box and Combo Box. Here, you can only edit the entries when the field is opened. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b316f2fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,821 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/02/01170101.xhp + + + +
+

General

UFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them all + This General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control. +
+
+ +
+If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes). + +
+ +

Enabled

+ If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user can use the control field. Otherwise (No), it is disabled and greyed out. +
+
+ +

Line count

+ Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the Dropdown option. For combo boxes with the "Dropdown" property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size. +
+
+ +

ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons

+ The "Action" property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button. You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. +The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button: + + + + Action + + + Description + + + + + None + + + No action occurs. + + + + + Submit form + + + Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. + Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# + + + + + Reset form + + + Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults: Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value. + + + + + Open document / web page + + + Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. + + + + + First record + + + Moves the current form to the first record. + + + + + Previous record + + + Moves the current form to the previous record. + + + + + Next record + + + Moves the current form to the next record. + + + + + Last record + + + Moves the current form to the last record. + + + + + Save record + + + Saves the current record, if necessary. + + + + + Undo data entry + + + Reverses the changes in the current record. + + + + + New record + + + Moves the current form to the insert row. + + + + + Delete record + + + Deletes the current record. + + + + + Refresh form + + + Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form. + + +
+
+
+ +

Dropdown

+ Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No). A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. + Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default. +
+
+ + +

Alignment / Graphics alignment

+Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control. The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: + + + Title of Label fields, + + + Content of text fields, + + + Content of table fields in the columns of a table control, + + + Graphics or text that are used in buttons. + The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment. + + +
+
+ +

AutoFill

+ Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box. The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS) +
+
+ +

Label field

+ Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. + To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. + Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. + If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. + Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field. +
+
+ +

Width

+ Sets the column width in the table control field. Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +

RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw

+ Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down. +
+
+ +

Delay

+ Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +
+
+ +

Record marker

+ Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow. +
+
+ +

Date format

+ Here you can determine the format you want for the date readout. With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. + All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input. +
+
+ +

Spin Button

+ The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added. Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form. +
+
+ +

Tristate

+ Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. + The "Tristate" property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms. +
+
+ +

Printable

+ Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout. +
+
+ +

PositionX

+ Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +

PositionY

+ Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +

Anchor

+ Defines where the control will be anchored. +
+
+ +

Width

+ Defines the width of the control. +
+
+ +

Height

+ Defines the height of the control. +
+
+ +

Edit mask

+ Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field. By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. + The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: + + + + Character + + + Meaning + + + + + L + + + A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. + + + + + a + + + The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + A + + + The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + + + + c + + + The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + C + + + The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + + + + N + + + Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. + + + + + x + + + All printable characters can be entered. + + + + + X + + + All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + +
+For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date. +
+
+ +

Strict format

+ You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored. +
+
+ +

Frame

+ Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action. You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned to the "Open document or web page" action. +
+If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: + + + + Entry + + + Meaning + + + + + _blank + + + The next document is created in a new empty frame. + + + + + _parent + + + The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _self + + + The next document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _top + + + The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame. + + +
+
+ The "Frame" property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms. +
+
+ +

Graphics

+ An image button has a "Graphics" property. The "Graphics" property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box. +
+
+ +

Help text

+ Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. + For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL. +
+
+ +

Help URL

+ Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1. +
+
+ +

Background color

+ Sets the background color of the control field. A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog. +
+
+ + + +

Scrollbar

+ Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +
+
+ +

Incr./decrement value

+ Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control. +
+
+ +

Value step

+ Determines spin button intervals. You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value. +
+
+ +

List entries

+ Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. + The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. + Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. + If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. + For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag. +
+
+ +

Date max

+ Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +

Max text length

+ Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. + If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state). +
+
+ + + +

Value max

+ Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter. +
+
+ +

Time max

+ Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +

Multiselection

+ Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. +
+
+ +rich text control +controls; rich text control + + + +

Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw

+ Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. + If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. + This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control. +
+
+ +

Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press Enter. +
+
+ +

ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies if a Push button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the Spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in". +
+
+ +

Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ If you set this option to "Yes", the Push button receives the focus when you click the button. +
+
+ +

Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text. +
+
+ +

StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look. +
+
+ +

Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies the border color for controls that have the "Border" property set to "flat". +
+
+ +

Symbol color

+ Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Date min

+ Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. +
+
+ + + +

Value min

+ You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. +
+
+ +

Time min

+ Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. +
+
+ +

Decimal accuracy

+ Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. +
+
+ +

Name

+ On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form. Each control field and each form has a "Name" property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. +If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. + +controls; grouping +groups; of controls +forms; grouping controls +mw changed "grouping;" to "groups;" +The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box. +
+
+ +

Navigation bar

+ Specifies whether to display the Navigation bar on the lower border of the table control. +
+
+ +

Read-only

+ Determines if the control is read-only ("Yes") or if it can be edited ("No"). The "Read-only" property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database. +
+
+ +

Border

+ Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat". With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the "Border" property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options. +
+
+ +

Tab order

+ The "Tab order" property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under "Tab order". + The "Tab order" property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. + When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused ("Tabstop = No") are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. + You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog. +
+
+ +

Mouse wheel scroll

+ Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus. +
+
+ +

Default status

+ Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. + For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. + For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the "Default Status" property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence. +
+
+ +

Default selection

+ Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. + For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. + For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. + In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box. +
+
+ + +

Default value

+ Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. + For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. +
+
+ +

Default scroll value

+ Sets the default value for the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Scroll value max.

+ Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +

Scroll value min.

+ Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +

Small change

+ Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the Arrow icon on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Large change

+ Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Default time

+ Sets the default time. +
+
+ +

Default date

+ Sets the default date. +
+
+ +

Default text

+ Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box. +
+
+ +

Default button

+ The "Default button" property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. + This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. + When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search. +
+
+ +

Prefix symbol

+ Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed. +
+
+ +

Tabstop

+ The "Tabstop" property determines if a control field can be selected with the Tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table + + + + No + + + When using the Tab key, focusing skips the control. + + + + + Yes + + + The control can be selected with the Tab key. + + +
+
+
+ +

Thousands separator

+ Inserts a thousands separator. With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used. +
+
+ +

Label

+ The "Label" property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. + When you create a new control, the description predefined in the "Name" property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the "Title" property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. + +multi-line titles in forms +names; multi-line titles +controls; multi-line titles + +To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the Arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. +The "Title" property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the "Name" property. +
+
+ +

URL

+ Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an Open document / web page button. Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. + If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered. +
+
+ +

Currency symbol

+ You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol. In a currency field, you can predefine the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the "Currency symbol" property. +
+
+ +

Value

+ You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control. In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form. +
+
+ +

Password characters

+ If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password. If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. +The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character). +
+
+ +

Literal mask

+ Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form. With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. +The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask. +
+
+ +

FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font"

+ Select the font for the text that is in the control field. For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields. +
+
+ +

Row height

+ Specifies the row height of a table control field. In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +

Text lines end with

+ For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with" +
+
+ +

Time format

+ You can define the desired format for the time display. +
+
+ +

Help text

+ Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters. +
+
+ +

Formatting

+ Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code. +
+
+ +

Scale

+ Resizes the image to fit the size of the control. +
+
+ +

Acting on a record

+ Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh. +
+
+ +

Positioning

+ Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count. +
+
+ +

Navigation

+ Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record. +
+
+ +

Filtering/Sorting

+ Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Reset filter/sort. +
+
+ +

Icon Size

+ Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation bar should be small or large. +
+
+ +

Visible

+ Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible. + Note that if this property is set to "Yes" (the default), this does not necessarily mean the control will really appear on the screen. Additional constraints are applied when calculating a control's effective visibility. For instance, a control placed in a hidden section in Writer will never be visible at all, until at least the section itself becomes visible. + If the property is set to "No", then the control will always be hidden in live mode. + Older OpenOffice.org versions up to 3.1 will silently ignore this property when reading documents which make use of it. +
+
+ +

Visible size

+ Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. + If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height. +
+
+ +

Orientation

+ Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65a442d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,694 @@ + + + + + + + Data + /text/shared/02/01170102.xhp + + + +
+controls; reference by SQL +bound fields; controls +controls; bound fields/list contents/linked cells +lists;data assigned to controls +cells;linked to controls +links;between cells and controls +controls;assigning data sources +MW made "cells..." a two level entry, changed "linked cells;" to "links;" and "list contents" to "lists;" +

Data

+The Data tab page allows you to assign a data source to the selected control. +
+
+ +
+For forms with database links, the associated database is defined in the Form Properties. You will find the functions for this on the Data tab page. +The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context.
The following fields are available: + +
+ +

Reference value (off)

+ Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell. +
+
+ +

Reference value (on)UFI: moved section from 01170101, changed name

+ You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field. You can assign a reference value to option buttons and check boxes. The reference value will be remitted to a server when sending the web form. With database forms the value entered here will be written in the database assigned to the control field. + Reference values for web forms + Reference values are useful if you design a web form and the information on the status of the control is to be transmitted to a server. If the control is clicked by the user, the corresponding reference value is sent to the server. + For example, if you have two control fields for the options "feminine" and "masculine", and assign a reference value of 1 to the field "feminine" and the value 2 to the "masculine" field, the value 1 is transmitted to the server if a user clicks the "feminine" field and value 2 is sent if the "masculine" field is clicked. + Reference values for database forms + For database forms, you can also characterize the status of an option or a check box by a reference value, storing it in the database. If you have a set of three options, for example "in progress", "completed", and "resubmission", with the respective reference values, "ToDo", "OK", and "RS", these reference values appear in the database if the respective option is clicked. +
+
+ +

Data field

+ Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers. With database forms, you can link controls with the data fields. + You have several possibilities: + + + First case: There is only one table in the form. + Under Data field, specify the field of the data source table whose contents you want to be displayed. + + + Second case: The control belongs to a subform that is created by an SQL query. + Under Data field, specify the field of the SQL statement whose contents you want to be displayed. + + + + + Third case: Combo Boxes + For combo boxes, the field of the data source table in which the values entered or selected by the user should be stored is specified under Data field. The values displayed in the list of the combo box are based on an SQL statement, which is entered under List content. + + + Fourth case: List Boxes + The data source table does not contain the data to be displayed, but rather a table linked to the data source table through a common data field. + If you want a list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current data source table, under Data field specify the field of the data source table to which the content of the list box refers. Or you can specify the database field that controls the display of the data in the form. This data field provides the link to the other table if both tables can be linked through a common data field. It is usually a data field in which unique identification numbers are stored. The data field whose contents are displayed in the form is specified by an SQL statement under List content. + + +List boxes work with references. They can either be implemented with linked tables by SQL statements (fourth case) or through value lists: +References through linked tables (SQL statements) +If you want a list box to display data from a database table that is linked by a common data field to the table on which the form is based, the link field of the form table is specified under Data field. +The link is created with an SQL Select, which, if you selected "SQL" or "Native SQL", is specified under Type of list contents in the field List content. As an example, a table "Orders" is linked to the current form control, and in the database a table "Customers" is linked to the "Orders" table. You can use an SQL statement as follows: +SELECT CustomerName, CustomerNo FROM Customers, +where "CustomerName" is the data field from the linked table "Customers", and "CustomerNo" is the field of the table "Customers" that is linked to a field of the form table "Orders" specified under Data field. +References Using Value Lists +For list boxes, you can use value lists. Value lists are lists that define reference values. In this way, the control in the form does not directly display the content of a database field, but rather values assigned in the value list. +If you work with reference values of a value list, the contents of the data field that you specified under Data Field in the form are not visible, but rather the assigned values. If you chose "Valuelist" on the Data tab under Type of list contents and assigned a reference value to the visible list entries in the form under List entries (entered in the General tab), then the reference values are compared with the data content of the given data field. If a reference value corresponds to the content of a data field, the associated list entries are displayed in the form. +
+
+ +

Bound field

+ Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.UFI: issue #i32749# + If you delete the contents of the Bound field cell in the property browser, the first field of the result set is used to display and to exchange data.UFI: issue #i32749# + This property for list boxes defines which data field of a linked table is displayed in the form. + If a list box in the form is to display contents of a table linked to the form table, then define in the Type of list contents field if the display is determined by an SQL command or the (linked) table is accessed. With the Bound field property, you use an index to specify to which data field of the query or of the table the list field is linked. + The property Bound field is only for forms that are used to access more than one table. If the form is based on only one table, the field to be displayed in the form is specified directly under Data field. However, if you want the list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current table over a common data field, the linked data field is defined by the property Bound field. + If you selected "SQL" under Type of list contents, the SQL command determines the index to be specified. Example: If you specify an SQL command such as "SELECT Field1, Field2 FROM tablename" under List content, refer to the following table: + + + + Bound field + + + Link + + + + + -1since LibreOffice 4.1 + + + The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + {empty} or 0 + + + The database field "Field1" is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 1 + + + The database field "Field2" is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + +
+If you selected "Table" under Type of list contents, the table structure defines the index to be specified. Example: If a database table is selected under List content, refer to the following table: + + + + Bound field + + + Link + + + + + -1since LibreOffice 4.1 + + + The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + {empty} or 0 + + + The 1st column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 1 + + + The 2nd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 2 + + + The 3rd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + +
+
+
+ +

Type of list contents

+ Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. + With the "Valuelist" option, all entries entered in the List entries field of the General tab appear in the control. For database forms, you can use reference values (see the References Using Value Lists section). + If the content of the control is read from a database, you can determine the type of the data source with the other options. For example, you can choose between tables and queries. +
+
+ +

List content

+ With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection. + In the case of database forms, the data source determines the entries of the list or combo box. Depending on the selected type, you have a choice between different data sources under List content, provided that these objects exist in your database. All available database objects of the type selected under Type of list contents are offered here. If you have selected the "Value List" option as the type, you can use references for database forms. If the display of the control is controlled by an SQL command, the SQL statement is entered here. + Examples of SQL statements: + For list boxes, an SQL statement may have the following form: + SELECT field1, field2 FROM table, + Here "table" is the table whose data is displayed in the list of the control (list table). "field1" is the data field that defines the visible entries in the form; its content is displayed in the list box. "field2" is the field of the list table that is linked to the form table (value table) through the field specified under Data field if Bound field = 1 was selected. + For combo boxes, an SQL statement may take the following form: + SELECT DISTINCT field FROM table, + Here "field" is a data field from the list table "table" whose content is displayed in the list of the combo box. + Value lists for HTML documents + For HTML forms, you can enter a value list under List content. Select the option "Valuelist" under Type of list contents. The values entered here will not be visible in the form, and are used to assign values to the visible entries. The entries made under List content correspond to the HTML tag <OPTION VALUE=...>. + In the data transfer of a selected entry from a list box or a combo box, both the list of the values displayed in the form, which was entered on the General tab under List entries, and the value list entered on the Data tab under List content, are taken into consideration: If a (non-empty) text is at the selected position in the value list (<OPTION VALUE=...>), it will be transmitted. Otherwise, the text displayed in the (<OPTION>) control is sent. + If the value list is to contain an empty string, enter the value "$$$empty$$$" under List content at the corresponding position (note uppercase/lowercase). $[officename] interprets this input as an empty string and assigns it to the respective list entry. + The following table shows the connections between HTML, JavaScript, and the $[officename] field List content using an example list box named "ListBox1". In this case, "Item" designates a list entry visible in the form: + + + + HTML Tag + + + JavaScript + + + Entry in value list of the control (List content) + + + Transmitted data + + + + + <OPTION>Item + + + Not possible + + + "" + + + the visible list entry ("ListBox1=Item") + + + + + <OPTION VALUE="Value">Item + + + ListBox1.options[0].value="Value" + + + "Value" + + + The value assigned to the list entry ("ListBox1=Value") + + + + + <OPTION VALUE="">Item + + + ListBox1.options[0].value="" + + + "$$$empty$$$" + + + An empty string ("ListBox1=") + + +
+
+
+ +

Empty string is NULL

+ Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to "Yes", an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to "No", any input will be treated as-is without any conversion. + An empty string is a string of length zero (""). Normally, a value NULL is not the same as an empty string. In general, a term NULL is used to denote an undefined value, an unknown value, or "no value has been entered yet." + Database systems vary and they might handle a value NULL differently. Refer to documentations of the database that you are using. +
+
+ +

Filter proposal

+ While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields. The field content can then be selected using the AutoComplete function. Note, however, that this function requires a greater amount of memory space and time, especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly. +
+
+ +

Linked cell

+ Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents. The following tables list the controls and their corresponding link type: +

Check box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select the check box: + + + TRUE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Deselect the check box: + + + FALSE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Tri-state check box is set to "undetermined" state: + + + #NV is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Check box is selected.
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Check box is deselected. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Check box is set to "undetermined" state if it is a tri-state check box, else check box is deselected. + + + + + Select the box. The Reference value box contains text:UFI: sc.features "eforms2 option buttons check boxes now also exchanging text" + + + The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. + + + + + Deselect the box. The Reference value box contains text: + + + An empty string is copied to the cell. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell: + + + The check box is selected. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell: + + + The check box is deselected. + + +
+

Option button (radio button) with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select the option button: + + + TRUE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Option button is deselected by selecting another option button: + + + FALSE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Option button is selected.
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Option button is deselected. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Option button is deselected. + + + + + Click the option button. The Reference value box contains text: + + + The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. + + + + + Click another option button of the same group. The Reference value box contains text: + + + An empty string is copied to the cell. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell: + + + The option button is selected. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell: + + + The option button is cleared. + + +
+

Text box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter text into the text box: + + + Text is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the text box: + + + Linked cell is cleared. + + + + + Enter text or a number in the linked cell: + + + Text or number is copied into the text box. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Formula result is copied into the text box. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Text box is cleared. + + +
+

Numerical field and formatted field with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter a number into the field: + + + Number is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the field: + + + Value 0 is set in the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + Number is copied into the field. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Value 0 is set in the field. + + +
+

List box with linked cell

+ List boxes support two different linking modes, see the property "Contents of the linked cell". + + + Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. + + + Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. + + + + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select a single list item: + + + Contents are linked: Text of the item is copied into the linked cell. + Selection is linked: Position of the selected item is copied into the linked cell.
For example, if the third item is selected, the number 3 will be copied. + + + + + Select several list items: + + + #NV is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Deselect all list items: + + + Contents are linked: Linked cell is cleared. + Selection is linked: Value 0 is entered in the linked cell. + + + + + Enter text or a number into the linked cell: + + + Contents are linked: Find and select an equal list item. + Selection is linked: The list item at the specified position (starting with 1 for the first item) is selected. If not found, all items are deselected. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Find and select a list item that matches the formula result and link mode. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Deselect all items in the list box. + + + + + Change the contents of the list source range: + + + List box items are updated according to the change. The selection is preserved. This may cause an update to the linked cell. + + +
+

Combo box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter text into the edit field of the combo box, or select an entry from the drop-down list: + + + Text is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the edit field of the combo box: + + + Linked cell is cleared. + + + + + Enter text or a number into the linked cell: + + + Text or number is copied into the edit field of the combo box. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Formula result is copied into the edit field of the combo box. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Edit field of the combo box is cleared. + + + + + Change the contents of the list source range: + + + Drop-down list items are updated according to the change. The edit field of the combo box and the linked cell are not changed. + + +
+
+
+ +

Contents of the linked cell

+ Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet. + + + Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. Select "The selected entry". + + + Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. Select "Position of the selected entry". + + +
+
+ +

Source cell rangeUFI: in the spec, this is "Source range of the list". Named it as seen in 680m38

+ Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet. If you enter a multi-column range, only the contents of the leftmost column are used to fill the control. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..366b987ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Events + /text/shared/02/01170103.xhp + + + +
+ +controls; events +events; controls +macros; assigning to events in forms + +

Events

+ On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields. +
+When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. The Assign Action dialog opens. +
+ +
+Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page.
The following events are defined: + + + +

Approve actionrenamed from Before commencing, issue 97356

+ This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Approve action event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. + +

Execute actionrenamed from When initiated, issue 97356

+ The Execute action event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. + +

Changed

+The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. + +

Text modified

+ The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. + +

Item status changed

+ The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed, for example, from checked to unchecked. + +

When receiving focus

+ The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. + +

When losing focus

+ The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus. + +

Key pressed

+ The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. + +

Key released

+ The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. + +

Mouse inside

+ The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. + +

Mouse moved while key pressed

+ The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). + +

Mouse moved

+ The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. + +

Mouse button pressed

+ The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. + Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. + +

Mouse button released

+ The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. + +

Mouse outside

+ The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e00c97ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Form Properties +/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ forms; propertiesproperties; forms + +Form Properties + In this dialog you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17a2dcf1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+submitting forms +get method for form transmissions +post method for form transmissions + +General +
+
+ +
+A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. +Name +Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. +URL +Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. +Frame +Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. + + +Type of submission +Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. +Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. +Using the "Post" method, a document is created from the content of the form that is sent to the specified URL. + +Submission encoding +Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. +Data transfer of control information +When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. +Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. +How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. +In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: + + + +Control + + +Value Pair + + + + +Numeric field, currency field + + +A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. + + + + +Date field + + +The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Time field + + +The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Pattern field + + +The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. + + + + +Table control + + +From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13a93e6c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ + + + + + + + + + Database Form Events + /text/shared/02/01170202.xhp + + + +
+ forms; events + events;in database forms + forms;database events + + Database Form Events + The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a database form. +
+
+ +
+ To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. + The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: + + + Displaying an error message, + + + Confirming a delete process (for data records), + + + Querying parameters, + + + Checking input when saving a data record. + + + For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. + + The events that are shown in the Events dialog cannot be edited directly. You can remove an event from the list by pressing the Del key. + + The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro: + + + +
+ + + API;XUpdateListener + +

Before update

+ The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning FALSE. + +

After update

+ The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. + + + API;XResetListener + +

Prior to reset

+ The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. Returning True approves the reset, returning False cancels the operation. + A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: + + + The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. + + + A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. + + + +

After resetting

+ The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset. +
+ +
+ + + API;XSubmitListener + API;XSubmissionVetoListener + +

Before submitting

+ The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent. Returning True approves the submission, False stops it. +
+
+ + + API;XLoadListener + +

When loading

+ The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded. +
+
+ +

Before reloading

+ The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed. +
+
+ +

When reloading

+ The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed. +
+
+ +

Before unloading

+ The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
+ +

When unloading

+ The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
+ + + API;XConfirmDeleteListener + +

Confirm deletion

+ The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. Return True to allow row deletion, False otherwise. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
+ + + API;XRowSetApproveListener + +

Before record action

+ The Before record action event occurs before the current record or record set are changed. Return True when changing is allowed, otherwise False. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
+ + + API;XRowSetListener + +

After record action

+ The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed. +
+
+ +

Before record change

+ The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer - SQL cursor - is changed. Return True when moving is allowed, otherwise False. +
+
+ +

After record change

+ The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed. +
+
+ + + API;XDatabaseParameterListener + +

Fill parameters

+ The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: + SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name + Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter. Return True when the execution of the parametrized statement should continue, False otherwise. +
+
+ + + API;XSQLErrorListener + +

Error occurred

+ The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes. +
+ + +

Vetoable events

+Macros can interrupt event execution when they return a boolean value: True allows the execution of the event to continue and False stops the event execution. + + The following events are interruptable by returning False: + + Before record action + Before record change + Before submitting + Before update + Fill parameters + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5df43b4fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + +Data +/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp + + + +
+forms; data +data; forms and subforms +forms; subforms +subforms; description + +

Data

+The Data tab page defines the form properties that refer to the database that is linked to the form. +
+Defines the data source on which the form is based, or specifies whether the data can be edited by the user. Apart from the sort and filter functions, you will also find all the necessary properties to create a subform. +
+ +
+ +
+

Data sourceUFI: was Database

+Defines the data source to which the form should refer. If you click the ... button, you call the Open dialog, where you can choose a data source. +
+
+

ContentUFI: was Data source

+Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type. +If you have selected either "Table" or "Query" in Content type, the box lists all the tables and queries set up in the selected database. +
+
+

Content type

+Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement. +If you choose "Table" or "Query", the form will refer to the table or query that you specify under Content. If you want to create a new query or a subform, then you have to choose the "SQL" option. You can then enter the statement for the SQL query or the subform directly in the List content box on the Control properties Data tab page. +
+
+

Analyze SQL command

+Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME. If set to Yes, you can click the ... button next to the Content list box. This will open a window where you can graphically create a database query. When you close that window, the SQL statement for the created query will be inserted in the Content list box. +
+
+ +

Filter

+Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause. For example, if you want to display all records with the "Mike" forename, type into the data field: Forename = 'Mike'. You can also combine conditions: Forename = 'Mike' OR Forename = 'Peter'. All records matching either of these two conditions will be displayed. +The filter function is available in user mode through the AutoFilter and Default Filter icons on the Form Navigation Bar. +
+
+

Sort

+Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause. For example, if you want all records of a database to be sorted in one field in an ascending order and in another field in a descending order, enter Forename ASC, Name DESC (presuming Forename and Name are the names of the data fields). +The appropriate icons on the Form Navigation Bar can be used in User mode to sort: Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, Sort. +
+
+

Add data only

+Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No). +If Add data only is set to "Yes", changing or deleting data is not possible. +
+
+

Navigation bar

+Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used. +The "Parent Form" option is used for subforms. If you choose this option for a subform, you can navigate using the records of the main form if the cursor is placed in the subform. A subform is linked to the parent form by a 1:1 relationship, so navigation is always performed in the parent form. +
+
+

Cycle

+Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key. Using the tab key, you can move forward in the form. If you simultaneously press the Shift key, the navigation will follow the opposite direction. If you reach the last (or the first) field and press the tab key again, it can have various effects. Define the key control with the following options: + + + +Option + + +Meaning + + + + +Default + + +This setting automatically defines a cycle which follows an existing database link: If the form contains a database link, the Tab key will, by default, initiate a change to the next or previous record on exit from the last field (see All Records). If there is no database link the next/previous form is shown (see Current Page). + + + + +All records + + +This option applies to database forms only and is used to navigate through all records. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. + + + + +Active record + + +This option applies to database forms only, and is used to navigate within the current record. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. + + + + +Current page + + +On exit from the last field of a form, the cursor skips to the first field in the next form. This is standard for HTML forms; therefore, this option is especially relevant for HTML forms. + + +
+
+
+

Allow additions

+Determines if data can be added. +
+
+

Allow modifications

+ Determines if the data can be modified. +
+
+

Allow deletions

+Determines if the data can be deleted. +
+
+

Link master fields

+If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform. To enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter after each input line.UFI: fixes #i22439# +The subform is based on an SQL query; more specifically, on a Parameter Query. If a field name is entered in the Link master fields box, the data contained in that field in the main form is read to a variable that you must enter in Link slave fields. In an appropriate SQL statement, this variable is compared to the table data that the subform refers to. Alternatively, you can enter the column name in the Link master fields box. +Consider the following example: +The database table on which the form is based is, for example, a customer database ("Customer"), where every customer has been given a unique number in a data field named "Cust_ID". A customer's orders are maintained in another database table. You now want to see each customer's orders after entering them into the form. In order to do this you should create a subform. Under Link master fields enter the data field from the customer database which clearly identifies the customer, that is, Cust_ID. Under Link slave fields enter the name of a variable which is to accept the data of the field Cust_ID, for example, x. +The subform should show the appropriate data from the orders table ("Orders") for each customer ID (Customer_ID -> x). This is only possible if each order is uniquely assigned to one customer in the orders table. Alternatively, you can use another field called Customer_ID; however, to make sure that this field is not confused with the same field from the main form, the field is called Customer_Number. +Now compare the Customer_Number in the "Orders" table with the Customer_ID from the "Customers" table, which can be done, for example, using the x variable with the following SQL statement: +SELECT * FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform to show all data from the orders table) +or: +SELECT Item FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform from the orders table to show only the data contained in the "Item" field) +The SQL statement can either be entered in the Data source field, or you can create an appropriate parameter query, which can be used to create the subform. +
+
+

Link slave fields

+If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored. If a subform is based on a query, enter the variable that you defined in the query. If you create a form using an SQL statement entered in the Data source field, enter the variable you used in the statement. You can choose any variable name. If you want to enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter. +If, for example, you specified the Customer_ID database field as a parent field under Link master fields, then you can define under Link slave fields the name of the variable in which the values of the Customer_ID database field are to be stored. If you now specify an SQL statement in the Data source box using this variable, the relevant values are displayed in the subform. +
+ +

What is a subform?

+Forms are created based on a database table or database query. They display the data in a visually pleasant fashion and can be used to enter data or edit data. +If you require a form that can refer to the data in a table or query and can additionally display data from another table, you should create a subform. + For example, this subform can be a text box that displays the data of another database table. +A subform is an additional component of the main form. The main form can be called the "parent form" or "master". Subforms are needed as soon as you want to access more than one table from a form. Each additional table requires its own subform. +After creating a form, it can be changed into a subform. To do this, enter Design Mode, and open the Form Navigator. In the Form Navigator, drag a form (that will become a subform) onto any other form (that will become a master). +The user of your document will not see that a form has subforms. The user only sees a document in which data is entered or where existing data is displayed. +Specify the Link master field from the data fields in the master form. In the subform, the Link slave field can be set as a field which will be matched to the contents of the Link master field. +When the user navigates through the data, the form always displays the current data record. If there are subforms defined, the contents of the subforms will be displayed after a short delay of approximate 200 ms. This delay enables you to quickly browse through the data records of the master form. If you navigate to the next master data record within the delay limit, the subform data need not be retrieved and displayed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2824f0bd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Activation Order +/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Activation Order

+Opens the Tab Order dialog so you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key. +the button Activation Order on Form Design toolbar opens the Tab Order dialog +
+
+ +
+If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. +You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. +A radio button inside a group can only be accessed by the Tab key when one of the radio buttons is set to "selected". If you have designed a group of radio buttons where no button is set to "selected", then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. +

Controls

+Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. +

Move Up

+Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. +

Move Down

+Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. +

Automatic Sort

+Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6df2946e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Add Field +/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp + + + + + +database field;add to form +forms;add database field +database field;add to report +report;add database field + +
+

Add Field

+ Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.same help id used for forms and reports +
+
+ +
+ +The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties. +You can insert a field into the current document by dragging and dropping. A field is then inserted which contains a link to the database. +If you add fields to a form and you switch off the Design Mode, you can see that $[officename] adds a labeled input field for every inserted database field.may be different for reports + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23029402e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Design Mode On/Off +/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Design Mode On/Off +Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls. +
+
+ +
+Please note the Open in Design Mode function. If Open in Design Mode is activated, the document is always opened in Design mode, regardless of the state in which it is saved. +If your form is linked to a database and you turn off the Design mode, the Form Bar is displayed at the lower margin of the document window. You can edit the link to the database in the Form Properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f74cf75ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + +Form Navigator +/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp + + + +
+controls;arranging in forms +forms;Navigator +Form Navigator +subforms; creating +controls; hidden +hidden controls in Form Navigator + + +

Form Navigator

+Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls. +
+When using several forms, the Form Navigator gives an overview of all forms, and also provides various functions for editing them. +
+ +
+The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields. You can see whether a form contains control fields by the plus sign displayed before the entry. Click the plus sign to open the list of the form elements. +You can change how the different controls are arranged by dragging and dropping them in the Form Navigator. Select one or more controls and drag them into another form. Alternatively use CommandCtrl+X or the context menu command Cut to move a control to the clipboard and CommandCtrl+V or the command Insert to insert the control into another position. +To edit the name in the Form Navigator, click on the name and enter a new name, or use the command in the context menu. +If you select a control in the Form Navigator, the corresponding element is selected in the document. +If you call the context menu of a selected entry, the Form Navigator offers the following functions: +

New

+Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator. +

Form

+Creates a new form in the document. To create a subform, add the new form under the desired parent form. +

Hidden Control

+Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form. It contains additional information or clarifying text that you can specify when creating the form through the Special Properties of the control. Select the entry of the hidden control in the Form Navigator and select the Properties command. +You can copy controls in the document through the clipboard (shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C for copying and CommandCtrl+V for inserting). You can copy hidden controls in the Form Navigator by using drag-and-drop while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. +Drag and drop to copy controls within the same document or between documents. Open another form document and drag the hidden control from the Form Navigator into the Form Navigator of the target document. Click a visible control directly in the document, rest the mouse for a moment so that a copy of the control is added to the drag-and-drop clipboard, then drag the copy into the other document. If you want a copy in the same document, press CommandCtrl while dragging. + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected entry. This allows you to delete individual form components as well as whole forms with one mouse click. +
+

Tab order

+When a form is selected, it opens the Tab Order dialog, where the indices for focusing the control elements on the Tab key are defined. + +
+

Rename

+Renames the selected object. + +

Properties

+Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry. If a form is selected, the Form Properties dialog opens. If a control is selected, the Control Properties dialog opens. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c988d37c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Filters and Forms +/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp + + + +forms; HTML filters + +HTML Filters and Forms +You can use all control elements and form events in HTML documents. There have been numerous events to date (for example, focus events), which have not been changed. They will continue to be imported and exported as ONFOCUS, ONBLUR, and so on for JavaScript and as SDONFOCUS, SDONBLUR, and so on for $[officename] Basic. +Generic names that consist of the Listener interface and the method name of the event are used for all other events: An event registered as XListener::method is exported as +SDEvent-XListener-method = "/* event-code */" +Note that the XListener- and method components of this option are case sensitive. +Event handling of controls is performed using the $[officename] API. If you assign an event to a control, an object registers itself internally as a "Listener" for a specific control event. To do this, the object must use a specific interface, for example the XFocusListener Interface, so that it can react to focus events. When the event occurs, the control then invokes a special method of the Listener interface when the control receives the focus. The internally registered object then invokes the JavaScript or $[officename] Basic code, which was assigned to the event. +The HTML filter now uses precisely these listener interfaces and method names so that it can import and export events as desired. You can register a focus event through +<INPUT TYPE=text ONFOCUS="/* code */" +rather than through the +<INPUT TYPE=text SDEvent-XFocusListener-focusGained="/* code */" +register. Events can therefore be registered as desired, including those not offered in the list boxes. To define the script language of events, you can write the following line in the document header: +<META HTTP-EQUIV="content-script-type" CONTENT="..."> +As CONTENT you can, for example, use "text/x-StarBasic" for $[officename] Basic or a "text/JavaScript" for JavaScript. If no entry is made, JavaScript is assumed. +During exporting, the default script language will be defined based on the first module found in macro management. For events, only one language can be used per document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a37aec435 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element Wizard +/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Table Element Wizard +If you insert a table control in a document, the Table Element Wizard starts automatically. In this wizard, you can interactively specify which information is displayed in the table control. +
+ +
+You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1552fc49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data +/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data +Select the data source and table to which the form field corresponds. If you insert the form field in a document that is already linked to a data source, this page becomes invisible. +
+
+ +
+Data source +Specifies the data source that contains the desired table. +Table +Specifies the desired table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2061563d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element Wizard: Field Selection +/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp + + + +
+ + +Table Element Wizard: Field Selection +Specifies which fields in the table control field should be displayed. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +Selected Fields +Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e39f2106d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box/List Box Wizard +/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp + + + +forms; Combo Box/List Box Wizard + +Combo Box/List Box Wizard +If you insert a combo box or a list box in a document, a wizard starts automatically. This wizard allows you to interactively specify which information is shown. +
+ +
+You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. +The wizards for combo boxes and list boxes differ from each other in their final step. This is because the nature of control fields: + +List Boxes + +In the case of a list box, the user selects one entry from a list of entries. These entries are saved in a database table and cannot be modified through the list box. +As a general rule, the database table that contains the visible list entries in the form is not the table on which the form is based. The list boxes in a form work by using references; that is, references to the visible list entries are located in the form table (values table) and are also entered as such in the values table if the user selects an entry from the list and saves it. Through reference values, list boxes can display data from a table linked to the current form table. Thus the List Box Wizard allows two tables of a database to be linked, so that the control field can display a detailed list of a database field that is located in a different table from the one to which the form refers. +In the other tables the required field is searched for by using the field names (ControlSource) and then the fields will be completed accordingly. If the field name is not found, the list will remain empty. When list fields contain linked columns, the first column of the other table will be used without a query being shown first. +If an article table contains, for example, the number of a supplier, the list box can use the "Supplier number" link to display the name of the supplier from the supplier table. On the Field links page the Wizard will ask you about all the settings required for this link. + +Combo Boxes + +In the case of combo boxes, users can select one entry from the list entries or enter text themselves. The entries, which are offered as a list from which users can select, may originate from any database table. The entries that users select or enter so that they can be saved can be saved either in the form only, or in a database. If they are saved in a database, they will be written to the database table on which the form is based. +Combo boxes can display the data of any table. A direct link between the current form table and the table whose values are to be displayed in the combo box (list table) is not required. Combo boxes do not work with references. If the user enters or selects a value and saves it, the value actually displayed will be entered in the form table. As there is no link between the form table and the list table, the Field Link table does not appear here. +In the case of a list box, you select entries from the list, and these are saved in the list table. In the case of a combo box, you can add additional text that can be written to the current database table of the form (values table) and stored there as desired. For this function, the Combo Box Wizard has the Data Processing page as the last page, whereas in the case of list boxes this page does not exist. Here you can enter whether and where text that has been entered is to be saved in the values table. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9b42495e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection +/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection +Specifies a table from the available database tables that contains the data field whose content should be displayed as a list entry. +
+
+ +
+For list boxes, a table that can be linked with the current form table is indicated. The link table must have at least one field in common with the table of the current form. This makes it possible to establish an unambiguous reference. +For combo boxes, there must be a relationship between the form table and the table containing the data to be displayed in the combo box. +Table +In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field. +The table given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b21fc31a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection +/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp + + + +
+Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection +Select the data field specified in the table on the previous page, whose contents should be displayed in the list or combo box. +
+
+ +
+Available Fields +Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page. +Display Field +Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes. +The field name given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95a5515a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +List Box Wizard: Field Link +/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp + + + +
+ + +List Box Wizard: Field Link +Indicates through which fields tables of values and list tables are linked. +
+The value table is the table of the current form where the list field is inserted. The list table is the table whose data is to be shown in the list field. Both tables must be linked over a mutual data field. These links are to be entered on this page of the wizard. The field names must not necessarily be the same (this depends upon how the field names are defined in both tables), but both fields must have the same field type. +
+ +
+Value table field +Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table. In addition, click the desired data field in the list field below. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List table field +Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field. In addition, click the data field in the lower list field. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear in the Data tab page of a SQL statement under List Contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf171216a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box Wizard: Database Field +/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Combo Box Wizard: Database Field +With the combination fields, you can either save the value of a field in a database or display this value in a form. +
+The user values entered in the combination field or selected in the list can be saved in the database table that is accessed in the form. Note that the saving of values in another table is not possible. If the values are not to be saved in a database, they will be saved only in the form. This is especially helpful in HTML forms, where the user's entered or selected values are to be assigned to a server. +
+ +
+Do you want to save the value in a database field? +Two options are available for this question: +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field +Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field. Several database table fields are offered which can be accessed in the current form. +In Control - Properties the selected field appears as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List field +Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form +Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4929cfaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Open in Design Mode +/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+forms; opening in design mode +controls; activating in forms +design mode after saving +documents; opening in design mode +edit mode; after opening + + +

Open in Design Mode

+Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited. +
+You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode. +
+ +
+After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. +If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c171e9b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wizards On/Off +/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Wizards On/Off +Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control. This setting applies globally to all documents. +
+
+ +
+There are wizards for inserting a list box or combo box, a table element and group boxes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5fb9cfa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Display Grid +/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + +UFI: removed help ids +

Display Grid

+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + +Icon Display Grid + + +Display Grid + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e68601db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Snap to Grid +/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp + + + +

Snap to Grid

+Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. +
+ + + + +Icon Snap to Grid + + +Snap to Grid + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14e63f228 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Helplines While Moving + /text/shared/02/01171400.xhp + + + + +UFI: removed help ids + +
+ +

Helplines While Moving

+ + + +
+ + + + Icon Helplines While Moving + + + Helplines While Moving + + +
+
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1f31b170 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator + /text/shared/02/01220000.xhp + + + + +You can also call the Navigator by selecting +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Navigator On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a61d21a1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (icon) + /text/shared/02/01230000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

StylesStylesStyles

+Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles window, which is where you can assign and organize styles. +
+Each $[officename] application has its own Styles window. Hence there are separate windows for text documents +text documents, for spreadsheets +spreadsheets and for presentations/drawing documents +presentations/drawing documents +presentations/drawing documents. +
+ + + + Icon Styles + + + Styles + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e73dbd1ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Set Paragraph Style + /text/shared/02/02010000.xhp + + + + + + +
+Set Paragraph Style +Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object. +
+To reset the selected objects to the default paragraph style, select Clear formatting. Select More Styles to open the Styles window. +Clicking on the Down Arrow button on the right of a style name shows a pop-up menu that allows you to update the style from the current selection or to edit the style. +
+ + + + Set Paragraph Style + + + Set Paragraph Style + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ee25b43f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Font Name + /text/shared/02/02020000.xhp + + + +
+fonts; specifying several +alternative fonts +characters; alternative fonts + + + +Font Name +Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. +You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available. +
+Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. +The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Font Name + + +
+
+In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. +You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Show preview of fonts field in $[officename] - View in the Options dialog box. + + +If you receive an error message that states that certain fonts have not been found, you can install them with $[officename] Setup in the Repair mode if it is a $[officename] font. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9965554f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Font Size + /text/shared/02/02030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Font Size +Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually. +
+
+ + + + + Icon + + + Font Size + + +
+ + + + + + Icon + + + Font Size + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9be679f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Text running from left to right + /text/shared/02/02040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Text running from left to right

+Specifies the horizontal direction of the text. +
+
+ + + + Icon Text direction from left to right + + + Text direction from left to right + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f7316d4a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Text running from top to bottom + /text/shared/02/02050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Text running from top to bottom

+Specifies the vertical direction of the text. +
+
+ + + + Icon Text direction from top to bottom + + + Text direction from top to bottom + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e001110c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Decrease Indent + /text/shared/02/02130000.xhp + + + +
+ + +paragraphs;decreasing indents of +decrease indent of paragraph + +

Decrease Indent

+ Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position. +
+ If you previously increased the indentation for several collectively selected paragraphs, this command can decrease the indentation for all of the selected paragraphs.The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cells - Alignment. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Decrease Indent + + +
+
+ If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3de6d3bb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Increase Indent + /text/shared/02/02140000.xhp + + + +
+ +paragraphs; increasing indents of +increase indent of paragraph + + +

Increase Indent

+ Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position. +
+ If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. + The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cells - Alignment tab. + +
+ + + + Icon + + + Increase Indent + + +
+
+ Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. + Example: + The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: + + + + + + Original indent + + + Indent increased + + + Indent increased by the amount with the CommandCtrl key. + + + + + 0.25 cm + + + 2 cm + + + 2.25 cm + + + + + 0.5 cm + + + 2 cm + + + 2.5 cm + + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..411189d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + Character Highlighting Color + /text/shared/02/02160000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Highlighting

+Applies current highlighting color to the character style or text selection. +
+
+ + + +Choose Format - Character - Highlighting tab. + + + + +When editing a character style, choose Highlighting tab. + + +Click the Character Highlighting Color icon on the Formatting bar, Text Object bar or Character section of Properties Sidebar.Text Formatting bar. +
+ + + + Character Highlighting Color Icon + + + Character Highlighting Color icon + + +
+
+
+To change the highlighting color, click the arrow next to the Character Highlighting Color icon, and then click the color that you want. +

Apply Highlighting

+

To a Text Selection

+ + + Select the text that you want to highlight. + + + Click the Character Highlighting Color icon on the Formatting or Text ObjectText Formatting bar. + + + To type after the selection without highlighting, click CommandCtrl+M. + + + + +

For Multiple Selections

UFI: see #112387# + + + Start with no text selected. + + + On the Formatting bar, click the Character Highlighting Color icon. + + + The mouse cursor changes to the Apply Highlighting cursor. + + + + + Apply Highlighting Icon + + + Apply Highlighting cursor + + +
+ + + Use the Apply Highlighting cursor to select text that you want to highlight. + + + To turn off highlighting cursor, click the Character Highlighting Color icon again, or press Esc. + + + + +To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word; for a sentence use triple-click, and quadruple-click for a paragraph. +

To Remove Highlighting

+ + + Select the highlighted text. + + + On the Text Formatting bar, click the arrow next to the Character Highlighting Color icon, and then click No Fill. + + + + + + + For multiple selections, click the Character Highlighting Color icon with No Fill, select highlighting to remove, then finish by clicking the icon again or pressing Esc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c6655d6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Background color/Paragraph background + /text/shared/02/02170000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Background Color

+Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +
+ +
+ + + + Icon Background color + + + Background Color + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f620fd361 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Increase Spacing + /text/shared/02/03110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Increase Spacing +Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Increase Spacing + + +
+
+You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..597837199 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Decrease Spacing + /text/shared/02/03120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Decrease Spacing +Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Decrease Spacing + + +
+
+You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35e74c129 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Borders + /text/shared/02/03130000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Borders +Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object. +
+ +This object can be the border of a frame, a graphic or a table. The icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, object or frame has been selected. +To apply a particular type of border to a single cell, position the cursor in the cell, open the Border toolbar and select a border. + Whenever you insert graphics or tables, they already have a complete border. To remove that border, select the graphic object or the entire table and click the no border icon on the Border toolbar. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Borders + + +
+
+Further information can be found in the Help in Borders. You can also find information on how to format a text table with the Borders icon. +
+ +UFI: moved border_object into Writer switch + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b824ac19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Line Style + /text/shared/02/03140000.xhp + + + +
+ +Line Style +Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style. +
+This border can be the border of a frame, graphic or table. The Line Style icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, chart object or frame has been selected. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Line Style + + +
+
+For more information, see the Borders section of the Help. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f54a3ea30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Border Color + /text/shared/02/03150000.xhp + + + +
+ +Border Color +Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Line Color (of the border) + + +
+
+For more information, see the Borders section in the Help. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f0e1b37b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Anchor (menu) + /text/shared/02/03200000.xhp + + + +
+anchors; changing + + +

Anchor

+
+Allows you to switch between anchoring options. + The Anchor icon is only visible when an object such as a graphic or control field or frame is selected. +Further information about the anchoring is contained in the Anchoring help section. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33f6771fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Optimize Size + /text/shared/02/04210000.xhp + + + +
+ +Optimize Size +Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Optimize Size + + +
+
+You can select from the following functions: + + + + + + +Optimal Height + + +Optimal Column Width + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0530ff4ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Arrow Style + /text/shared/02/05020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Arrow Style

+Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line. +
+The Arrow Style icon is only displayed when you create a drawing with the drawing functions. For more information, see the Line Styles section of the Help. +
+ + + + Icon Line Ends + + + Arrow Style + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4d0c79b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Rotate + /text/shared/02/05090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Rotate +Rotates the selected object. +
+Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Rotate + + +
+
+
+Format - Position and Size - Rotate. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..28ba50594 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Alignment + /text/shared/02/05110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of selected objects. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Alignment + + +
+
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70941518a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Demote Outline Level + /text/shared/02/06050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Demote Outline Level

+Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located, or selected chapter headings, down one outline level. Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, down one list level.UFI: need two files for numbering and outline, also for 06060000.xhp +
+The Demote Outline Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbered chapter heading or a list paragraph. +The Demote icon is on the Outline bar, which appears when working in the outline view. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Right Arrow. +
+ + + + Icon Demote + + + Demote Outline LevelDemote + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45b26e90f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Promote Outline Level + /text/shared/02/06060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Promote Outline Level

+Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located, or selected chapter headings, up one outline level. Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, up one list level. +
+The Promote Outline Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbered chapter heading or a list paragraph.The Promote icon is on the Outline bar, which appears when working in the outline view. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Left Arrow. +
+ + + + Icon Promote + + + Promote Outline LevelPromote + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec2ad6835 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Move Up + /text/shared/02/06100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Move Item UpMove Up

+Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to before the previous paragraph. +
+ + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use the Move Item Up command, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Item Up icon appears on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +The Move Item Up command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow. + + + If you have numbered paragraphs and use the Move Up command, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Up icon appears on the Outline bar. +The Move Up command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Up Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. + + +No shortcut keys or toolbars for CALC and DRAW + + +
+ + + + Icon Move Up + + + Move Item UpMove Up + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d99053de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Move Down + /text/shared/02/06110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Move Item DownMove Down

+Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to after the next paragraph. +
+ + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Item Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Item Down icon appears on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +The Move Item Down command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Down icon appears on the Outline bar. +The Move Down command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Down Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. + + +No shortcut keys or toolbars for CALC and DRAW. + + +
+ + + + Icon Move Down + + + Move Item DownMove Down + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09826d05e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Toggle Unordered List + /text/shared/02/06120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Toggle Unordered List

+Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs. +
+Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Text Formatting bar. +In the Web Layout, some numbering/bullet options are not available. +The distance between the text and the left text box and the position of the bullets can be determined in the dialog under Format - Paragraph by entering the left indent and the first-line indent. +
+ + + + Icon Unordered List + + + Toggle Unordered List + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6921a10dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Load URL + /text/shared/02/07010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Load URL +Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document. +Enable Load URL with the Visible Buttons command (right-click the toolbar).i73505 +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08d64a67a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Reload + /text/shared/02/07060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+reloading; documentsdocuments; reloadingloading; reloading + +Reload +Replaces the current document with the last saved version. +
+Any changes made after the last save will be lost. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f486e28ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Edit File + /text/shared/02/07070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+write protection on/off +protected documents +documents; read-only +read-only documents; editing +cursor;in read-only text +read-only documents;cursor +Edit Mode icon +mw inserted "Edit File icon" entry + +

Edit Mode

+Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table. Use the Edit Mode icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode. +
+
+ + + + Edit Mode Icon + + + Edit Mode + + +
+
+
+ + +You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..338cb3548 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Data + /text/shared/02/07070100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Edit Data +read-only documents; database tables on/off +protected database tables +data; read-only + +Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Edit Data + + +
+
+Editing Databases in Networks +To make changes in a database used by more than one person, you must have the appropriate access rights. When you edit an external database, there is no intermediate storage by $[officename] of the changes made. They are sent directly to the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06ca1721f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Save Record + /text/shared/02/07070200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Save Record +records; saving + +Saves the current database table record. The Save Record icon is found on the Table Data bar. +
+ +Changes to the contents of a record are automatically saved as soon as you select another record. To save changes without selecting another record, click the Save Record icon. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3004adbe1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Stop Loading + /text/shared/02/07080000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Stop Loading +Click to interrupt the current loading process, CommandCtrl+click to interrupt all loading processes. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6f9728c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Export Directly as PDF + /text/shared/02/07090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Export Directly as PDF +Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown. +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9813017a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Document Information + /text/shared/02/08010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Document Information +Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The names of the document, the library, and the module are displayed, separated by dots. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c58048d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Position in Document + /text/shared/02/08020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Position in Document +Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71c4605c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Hyperlink Dialog + /text/shared/02/09070000.xhp + + + + +
+Choose Insert - Hyperlink. +Choose Edit - Hyperlink, when the cursor is placed in a hyperlink. +On Standard bar, click +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Hyperlink Dialog + + +
+
+ +Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted. + +Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser. + +Opens the Hyperlink dialog. + +Copies the URL to the clipboard. + +Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text. + + + + + +

Apply

+Applies the data to your document. + +

Close

+Closes the dialog without saving. +

Help

+Opens the Help. + +

Reset

+Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1ac31d90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Internet + /text/shared/02/09070100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Internet

+Use the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog to edit hyperlinks with WWW or FTP addresses. +
+
+ +
+ +The fields for the login name, password and anonymous user are only available for FTP addresses. +

Type of hyperlink

+

Web

+Creates an "http://" hyperlink. +

FTP

+Creates an "FTP://" hyperlink. +

URL

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.see i48946 + + +Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to. +Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog. +Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog. +

Login name

+Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses. +

Password

+Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses. +

Anonymous user

+Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user. +
+

Further settings

+ + + +

Frame

+Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. + + + +

Form

+Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button. + + + +

Events

+Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes. + + + +

Text

+Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink. + + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink. +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9858b5574 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Mail + /text/shared/02/09070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Mail

+On the Mail page in the Hyperlink dialog you can edit hyperlinks for email addresses. +
+
+ +
+ +

Mail

+

Recipient

+Assigns the specified email address to the hyperlink. Clicking the new hyperlink in the document will open a new message document, addressed to the receiver specified in the Recipient field. +

Data Sources

+Hides or shows the data source browser. Drag the receiver's Email data field from the data source browser into the Recipient text field. +

Subject

+Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29de0ff1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Document + /text/shared/02/09070300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Document

+Hyperlinks to any document or targets in documents can be edited using the Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog. +
+
+ +
+ +

Document

+ + hyperlinks;to files + hyperlinks;to folders + +

Path

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. +If the URL refers to a folder, the standard file manager in your operating system opens showing the contents of the specified folder. +

Open File

+Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file. +

Target in document

+

Target

+Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path. +

Target in Document

+Opens the Target in Document dialog. +

URL

+Specifies the URL, which results from the entries in Path and Target. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d51548670 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + New Document + /text/shared/02/09070400.xhp + + + +
+ + +

New Document

+Use the New Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog to set up a hyperlink to a new document and create the new document simultaneously. +
+
+ +
+ +

New Document

+Specifies the name, path and type of the new document in this area. +

Edit now

+Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing. +

Edit later

+Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened. +

File

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. +

Select Path

+Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path. +

File type

+Specifies the file type for the new document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5b03db67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Previous Page + /text/shared/02/10010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Previous Page

+Moves back to the previous page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Previous Page + + + Previous Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd5fa882a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Next Page + /text/shared/02/10020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Next Page

+Moves forward to the next page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Next Page + + + Next Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce4ba3f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + To Document Begin/First Page + /text/shared/02/10030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

To Document Begin First Page

+Moves to the first page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon First Page + + + To Document Begin First Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc570578e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + To Document End/Last Page + /text/shared/02/10040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

To Document EndLast Page

+Moves to the last page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Last Page + + + To Document EndLast Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e86f5b7e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Close Window + /text/shared/02/10100000.xhp + + + +
+ +Close Window +Closes the current window. Choose Window - Close Window, or press CommandCtrl+F4. In the print preview of $[officename] Writer and Calc, you can close the current window by clicking the Close Preview button. +
+If additional views of the current document were opened by Window - New Window, this command will close only the current view. +
+Close the current document +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6546d6f5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Explorer On/Off +/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp + + + +
+ +Explorer On/Off +Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Explorer On/Off + + +
+ +
+ +In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their queries and tables. + +Establishing a connection - As soon as you select an individual table or query, a connection to the data source is established. Once the connection is opened, the name of the data source, the Queries or Tables entry, and the name of the query or table selected is shown in bold type. + +Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. + +To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. + +Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" + +Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2f045429 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Sort Ascending +/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp + + + +
+

Sort Ascending

+Sorts the data of the selected field in ascending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, numerical fields are sorted by number.UFI: Help ID .uno:Sortup is found in text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp so I deleted it here +
+
+ + + + + +
+Data of the currently selected field are always sorted. A field is always selected as soon as you place the cursor in the field. To sort within tables, you can also click the corresponding column header. + +To sort more than one data field, choose Data - Sort, then choose the Sort Criteria tab, where you can combine several sort criteria. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e15cf5871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Sort Descending +/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Sort Descending

+Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, number fields are sorted by number. +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5faf2c589 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +AutoFilter +/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp + + + +
+ +

AutoFilter

+Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field. +
+
+ + + + +Icon AutoFilter + + +AutoFilter + + +
+
+Place the cursor in a field name whose content you want to filter and then click the AutoFilter icon. Only those records with content identical to the selected field name are visible. +For example, to view all the customers from New York, click a field name with the entry "New York". AutoFilter then filters all customers from New York from the database. +You can remove the current AutoFilter with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon or with Data - Filter - Reset Filter. +To filter with several field names simultaneously, click the Default Filter icon. The Default Filter dialog appears, in which you can combine several filter criteria. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2ca975cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reset Filter/Sorting +/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Reset Filter/Sorting + Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Reset Filter/Sorting + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e7955917 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + +Refresh +/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Refresh

+Refreshes the displayed data. In a multi-user environment, refreshing the data ensures that it remains current. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Refresh + + +Refresh + + +
+ +
+Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon to open a submenu with the following commands: + + + + +Refresh - Displays the refreshed contents of the database table. + + + +Rebuild - Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..738ee5f8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Database Columns +/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Insert Database Columns +Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. + The icon is only visible if the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Data to Text + + +
+ +
+In the data source browser, select the record that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon. The record is inserted in the document at the cursor position, with the contents of each individual field of the record copied to a table column. You can also select multiple records and transfer them into the document by clicking the Data to Text icon. Each individual record is then written to a new row. + +In the data source browser, select the records that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon, or drag-and-drop data from the data source browser into the document. This opens the Insert Database Columns dialog. Select whether the data should be inserted as a table, as fields or as text. + +The preferences you set in the Insert Database Columns dialog are saved and will be active the next time the dialog is called. This save process is independent of the database and can record the preferences for a maximum of 5 databases. + +If data is inserted into the document as a table, the table properties are not saved along with the data in the document. If you select the AutoFormat function for formatting the table, $[officename] will note the name of the format template. This template will then be used automatically if you insert data as a table again, unless the preferences have been changed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..002d84302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Table +/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp + + + + + +Table +database contents; inserting as tables + +Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Table option to insert the selected data into the document as a table. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text table is formatted. +Table +In the Table area, use the arrow keys to select the columns of the database table that you want to apply to the text table. +Database columns +Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table. All database table columns that have not been accepted in the Table column(s) list box are listed here. The entries are sorted alphabetically. +Table column(s) +Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document. A column will be assigned to each corresponding entry in the table. The entry order in the Table column(s) list box determines the data order in the text table. +>> +Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +> +Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box. You can also double click an entry to move it to the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +< +Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box The removed field is not inserted into the document. +<< +Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box. +
+Format +Specifies the format for inserting the database fields into the document. +From database +Accepts the database formats. + +Select +Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted. The formats supplied here are only available for certain database fields, such as numeric or Boolean fields. If you select a database field in text format, you will not be able to select any format from the selection list, since the text format will be automatically maintained. +If the format you want is not listed, select "Other Formats..." and define the desired format in the Number Format dialog. +The number format assigned using the selection list always refers to the database field selected in the Database columns list box. +
+To insert the data into the document in the form of a table, the correct Table option must be active. You can then select a database field from the Table column(s) list box to define the formatting of the database field. The changes to the number formats will be applied to the last selection. It does not matter whether the database field was selected from the Database columns list box or from the Table column(s) list box. +Insert table heading +Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table. +Apply column name +Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns. +Create row only +Inserts an empty heading line into the text table. Using the Create row only option, you can define headings in the document, which do not correspond to the database field names. +Properties +Opens the Table Format + +Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width. +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat + +AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa7d7ffd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Fields +/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Fields + database contents; inserting as fieldsInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Fields to insert the selected data into the document as fields. These database fields work as wildcards for the individual database columns and can be used for form letters. Click the Data to Fields icon to match the contents of the fields to the currently selected record. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Also, a field command such as "Next record" will be inserted automatically between individual field command blocks. + The Insert Database Columns dialog lets you define which database fields to insert into the document and how to format the paragraphs. + Fields + In the Fields area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. +
+ Database columns + Lists all columns of the database table, which can be accepted in the selection list box to insert them into the document. Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document. + > + Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field. You can also double-click the entry to select it. + Select + Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document. The entries' order in the selection field corresponds to the data order in the document. + + Paragraph Style + By default, the inserted paragraphs are formatted with the current Paragraph Styles. This format corresponds to the "none" entry in the Paragraph Style list box. This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document. The list box displays the available Paragraph Styles defined in %PRODUCTNAME and managed in the Style Catalog. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3338e0b90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text +/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Text + database contents; inserting as textInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text. If you select the Text option in the Insert Database Columns dialog, the content of the data selected in the data source browser is inserted into the document as text. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text is formatted. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. + Text + In the Text area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fcf4e72b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Data to Fields +/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Data to Fields +Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records. The Data to Fields icon is only available if the current document is a text document. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Data to Fields + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff7eaf6c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Standard Filter + /text/shared/02/12090000.xhp + + + +
+default filters, see standard filters + databases; standard filters + standard filters;databases +mw converted "standard filters..." into a two level entry and "default filters;" into a cross reference + + +Standard Filter + Allows you to set the filtering options. + +
+ Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Standard Filter + + +
+ +
+
+ $[officename] saves the current filter settings for the next time that you open this dialog. +
+ To remove the current filter, click Reset Filter/Sorting icon. +
+ AutoFilter +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8830deef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Standard Filter + /text/shared/02/12090100.xhp + + + + + + + + +

Standard Filter

+ Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is available for spreadsheet documents, database tables and database forms. The dialog for databases does not contain the More Options button. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Filter criteria + You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. + + + + +Operator + For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. + + + + + + +Field name + Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. + + + + + + +Condition + Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. + + + + + + +Value + Specifies a value to filter the field. + The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. + If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. + + +Options + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be3438209 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Comparison Operators + /text/shared/02/12090101.xhp + + + +comparisons;operators in standard filter dialog + operators;standard filters + standard filters;comparison operators + filters; comparison operators + equal sign, see also operators +mw added "equal sign,..."MW changed "default filters;" into "standard filters;"mw changed "comparisons;" and "operators;" +

Comparison Operators

+ The following comparative operators can be set under Condition in the Standard Filter dialog. + + + + + Comparative operator + + + + + Effect + + + + + + Equal (=) + + + Shows values equal to the condition. + + + + + Less than (<) + + + Shows values less than the condition. + + + + + Greater than (>) + + + Shows values greater than the condition. + + + + + Less than or equal to (< =) + + + Shows values that are less than or equal to the condition. + + + + + Greater than or equal to (> =) + + + Shows values that are greater than or equal to the condition. + + + + + Not equal (< >) + + + Shows the values not equal to the condition. + + + + + Largest + + + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) largest values. + + + + + Smallest + + + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) smallest values. + + + + + Largest % + + + Shows the largest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the total values. + + + + + Smallest % + + + Shows the smallest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the entire values. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58f48d45e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Sort Order + /text/shared/02/12100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Sort Order

+ + + + Icon Sort Order + + + Sort Order + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9bb2ad344 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Sort Order + /text/shared/02/12100100.xhp + + + +sorting; databases +databases; sorting + + + + +
+

Sort Order

+Specifies the sort criteria for the data display. +
+
+ +
+While the functions Sort in Ascending Order and Sort in Descending Order sort by one criterion only, you can combine several criteria in the Sort Order dialog. +You can remove a sorting that has been performed with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon. +

Sorting

+Use this area to enter sorting criteria. If you enter additional sorting criteria under and then, the data matching the content of the higher-order criterion is ordered according to the next criterion. +If you sort the field name "First name" in ascending order and the field name "Last name" in descending order, all records will be sorted in ascending order by first name, and then within the first names, in descending order by last name. +

Field name

+Specifies the data field name whose content will determine the sort order. +

Order

+Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending). +

and then

+Specifies additional subordinate sort criteria from the other fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..250f0a538 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ + + + + + + + Find Record + /text/shared/02/12100200.xhp + + + + +tables in databases; searching +forms; browsing +records; searching in databases +searching; databases +databases; searching records +mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;" + + +
+

Find Record

+Searches database tables and forms. In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values. +
+
+ +
+When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. +The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form bar. +The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. +

Search for

+Specifies the type of search. + + +

Text:

+Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. +Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the form document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. + +

Field content is NULL

+Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. + +

Field content is not NULL

+Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. +

Where to search

+Specifies the fields for the search. + +

Form

+Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. +The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. +Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. +The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. + +

All Fields

+Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. +Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. + + +

Single field

+Searches through a specified data field. +

Settings

+Defines settings to control the search. + +

Position

+Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: + + + + anywhere in the field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. + + + + + beginning of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. + + + + + end of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. + + + + + entire field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field. + + +
+If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. + +

Apply field format

+Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: + + + in table design mode for field properties, + + + in data source view on column formatting, + + + in forms on control properties. + + +If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. +Example: +You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: + + + + Apply field format + + + Search pattern + + + + + on + + + "Feb" is returned, but not "2". + + + + + off + + + "2" is returned, but not "Feb". + + +
+It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. +The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: + + + + Search results + + + Cause + + + + + "5" returns "14:00:00" as a time. + + + Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a "5" is necessary. + + + + + "00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field. + + + The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. + + + + + "45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. + + + The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value "45.789" is stored in the database as a field of type "Number/Double" and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting. + + +
+In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. +However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. +If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". +If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. + +

Match case

+Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. + +

Search backwards

+Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. + +

From top / From bottom

+Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. + +

Wildcard expression

+Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: + + + + Wildcards + + + Meaning + + + Example + + + + + ? + + + for exactly one arbitrary character + + + "?loppy" returns "Floppy" + "M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller + + + + + * + + + for 0 or more arbitrary characters + + + "*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" + "M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather) + + +
+If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, precede them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. + +

Regular expression

+Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAME Find & Replace dialog. +Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: + + + + Search with wildcard expression + + + Search with regular expressions + + + + + ? + + + . + + + + + * + + + .* + + +
+ + + + + + + +

State

+The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. +In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. + +

Search/Cancel

+Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. + +

Close

+Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. +If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46f7932f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Form-based Filters + /text/shared/02/12110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Form-based Filters

+Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria. +
+Unlike the normal search, which is activated by the Find Record icon on the Form bar, you can search more quickly by using the form-based filter. Usually a quick database server is charged with the search. Also, you can enter more complex search conditions. +
+ + + + Icon Form Filter + + + Form-based Filters + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364410a83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Apply Filter + /text/shared/02/12120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Apply Filter

+Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table. +
+
+ + + + Icon Form Filter + + + Apply Filter + + +
+
+The Apply Filter function retains form-based filters that have been set. You do not need to redefine them. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..655d18521 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data source as table + /text/shared/02/12130000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data sources; as tables + + +

Data source as table

+Activates an additional table view when in the form view. When the Data source as table function is activated, you see the table in an area above the form. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Data source as table + + +
+
+The Table view and Form view reflect the same data. Changes made in the table are also visible in the form, and changes to the form are visible in the table. +If there are several logical forms in a document, the table is only able to show one at a time.UFI removed two paras, see #60894 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4af6c441a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data Source of Current Document + /text/shared/02/12140000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data sources; displaying current + + + +Data Source of Current Document +Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Data Source of Current Document + + +
+
+Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcb170ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Tabs + /text/shared/02/13010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Setting Tabs +On the ruler, set the tabs for the current paragraph, or all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. +
+Initially the default tabs are shown on the horizontal ruler. Once you set a tab, only the default tabs to the right of the tab that you have set are available. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03d38f6d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns + /text/shared/02/13020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+margins; setting with the mouse +columns; setting with the mouse +paragraphs; indents, margins and columns + + + + +cell widths; using ruler +cell widths; using mouse + + + +

Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns

+You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. +
+If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. + + + + Icon + + + These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). + + + + + Icon + + + This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph. + + +
+ + + + Task + + + Procedure + + + + + Set left indent + + + Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button. + + + + + Set left indent of first line + + + Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button. + + + + + Set right indent + + + Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button. + + +
+In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. +Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826e223ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Run + /text/shared/02/14010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Run Query

+Runs the SQL query and displays the query result. The Run Query function does not save the query. +
+The Run Query function allows you to check the query. When you save the query, it is stored in the Query tab page. +Choose View - Preview to run the query from the menu bar of a query design window.UFI: see dba-features "Querydesign: Close preview has moved" +
+ + + + Run Query Icon + + + Run Query + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36fd6d826 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Clear query + /text/shared/02/14020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Clear query

+Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window. +
+
+ + + + Clear Query Icon + + + Clear query + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfd8116d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Add Tables + /text/shared/02/14020100.xhp + + + +tables in databases; adding to queries + + + +Add Tables +Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window. In the Add Tables dialog, select the tables you need for your current task. + When creating a query or a new table presentation, select the corresponding table to which the query or table presentation should refer. When working with relational databases, select the tables between which you want to build relationships. +The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window. +
+ +
+Table + +Shows only tables. + +Shows only queries. +Table name +Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. + +Add +Inserts the currently selected table. + +Close +Closes the Add Tables dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9d93dace --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Switch Design View On/Off + /text/shared/02/14020200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Switch Design View On/Off

+Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query. +
+
+ + + + Switch Design View On/Off Icon + + + Switch Design View On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd15006c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Run SQL command directly + /text/shared/02/14030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Run SQL command directly

+In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source. If you do not display these changes in the design view, you cannot change back to the design view. +
+For native SQL, the SQL string is forwarded directly to the connected database system without a previous evaluation by $[officename]. For example, if you access a database through an ODBC interface, the SQL string is passed to the ODBC driver and processed by it. +
+ + + + Run SQL command directly Icon + + + Run SQL command directly + + +
+
+Click the icon again to return to normal mode, in which the changes in the New Query Design are synchronized with the permitted changes through SQL. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b8b1ca31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Functions + /text/shared/02/14040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Functions

+Displays the Function row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window. +
+
+ + + + Functions Icon + + + Functions + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..220e432ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Table Name + /text/shared/02/14050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Table Name +Displays the Table row in the lower part of the Query Design. +
+
+ + + + Table Name Icon + + + Table Name + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db7ef69a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Alias + /text/shared/02/14060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Alias

+Displays the Alias row in the lower part of the Query Design. +
+
+ + + + Alias Icon + + + Alias + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fe2ee672 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Distinct Values + /text/shared/02/14070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+SQL; DISTINCT parameter +distinct values in SQL queries + + +

Distinct Values

+Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once. +
+
+ + + + Distinct Values Icon + + + Distinct Values + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e8d7e2da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Selection + /text/shared/02/18010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Selection +Allows you to select objects in the current document. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Selection + + +
+
+To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. + + + +The objects selected together can then be defined as a group, turning them into a single group object. + + + + +You can edit individual elements of a group. You can also delete elements from a group with Command +Shift+click. + + + + +You can select single objects from a group by double-clicking, if you first disable the Double-click to edit Text icon on the Option bar. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1557389b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + /text/shared/02/18030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Automatic Spell Checking On/Off

+ +
+
+ + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7aebad0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + HTML Source + /text/shared/02/19090000.xhp + + + +
+ + HTML documents;source text + + + +HTML Source +Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one. +
+
+ +
+In HTML Source mode, you can view and edit the tags of HTML. Save the document as a plain text document. Assign an .html or .htm extension to designate the document as HTML.UFI: is this so? test it + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9f606950 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Current Page Style + /text/shared/02/20020000.xhp + + + +
+page styles;editing/applying with statusbar + + + + +Current Page Style +Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style. +
+Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a page style. +Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. +Double-click this field to open the Available Master Slides dialog in which you can select the style for the current slide. You can select a different paper format or background. +Double-click this field to open the Available Master Slides dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b07ac037 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Zoom + /text/shared/02/20030000.xhp + + + +
+
+zooming; status bar +mw deleted "scaling;" + +

Zoom

+Specifies the current page display zoom factor. +
+Click this field to open the Zoom dialog, where you can change the current zoom factor. +Right-click to open the context menu on this field to see a selection of available zoom factors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b927bdf7c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Mode + /text/shared/02/20040000.xhp + + + +
+ +Insert Mode +Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite. This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell. +
+Click in the field to toggle the modes (except in the $[officename] Basic IDE, where only the Insert mode is active). If the cursor is positioned in a text document, you may also use the Insert key (if available on your keyboard) to toggle the modes. + + + + Mode + + + Result + + + + + INSRT + + + In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. + + + + + OVER + + + In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53911bb64 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Selection Mode + /text/shared/02/20050000.xhp + + + + +
+ + selection modes in text + text; selection modes + extending selection mode + adding selection mode + block selection mode + + + +

Selection Mode

+ Switches between different selection modes. +
+Click this field to open a popup menu with the following options: + + + + Mode + + + Effect + + + + + Standard selection + + + This is the default selection mode for text documents. With the keyboard, selections can be performed by Shift+navigation key (arrows, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down). With the mouse, click in the text where the selection is to start, hold the left mouse button and move to the end of the selection. Release the mouse key to end selection. + + + + + Extending selection + + + Use the mouse, arrow keys or the Home and End keys to extend or crop the current selection. Clicking anywhere in the text selects the region between the current cursor position and the click position. + Hold the Shift key to temporarily activate the Extending selection mode. + + + + + Adding selection (Shift+F8) + + + Use this mode to select multiple ranges of text. Each new selection using the mouse or keyboard is added as a new selection. + Hold the Ctrl key to temporarily activate the Adding selection mode. + + + + + Block selection (CommandCtrl+Shift+F8) + + + Use this mode to select a non-contiguous block of text. + Hold the Alt key to temporarily activate the Block selection mode. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b3e69291 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Document Modification + /text/shared/02/20060000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Document Modification +If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ac22ff87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Time + /text/shared/02/20090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Time +Displays the current time. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88f8baebe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Date + /text/shared/02/20100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Date +Displays the current date. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..965277e20 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + + + + + + + Image Filter Bar + /text/shared/02/24010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Image Filter Bar +This icon on the Image bar opens the Image Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Filter + + +
+
+ +Invert +Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect. + + + + Icon + + + Invert + + +
+ + + +Smooth +Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.low pass filter with a kernel of: 1-2-1, 2-5-2, 1-2-1 + + + + Icon + + + Smooth + + +
+ +Sharpen +Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.high pass filter with a kernel of: -1/-1/-1, -1/16/-1, -1/-1/-1 + + + + Icon + + + Sharpen + + +
+ +Remove Noise +Removes noise by applying a median filter.See i70055 + + + + Icon + + + Remove Noise + + +
+ + + +Solarization +Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. + + + + Icon + + + Solarization + + +
+Parameters +Specifies the degree and type of solarization. + +Threshold Value +Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. + +Invert +Specifies to also invert all pixels. + + + +Aging +All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed. + + + + Icon + + + Aging + + +
+ +Aging Degree +Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.ufi: cannot see any difference between 0% and 100% aging here... + + + +Posterize +Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. + + + + Icon + + + Posterize + + +
+ +Poster Colors +Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. + +Pop Art +Converts an image to a pop-art format. + + + + Icon + + + Pop Art + + +
+ +Charcoal Sketch +Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. + + + + Icon + + + Charcoal Sketch + + +
+ + + +Relief +Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. + + + + Icon + + + Relief + + +
+Light Source +Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source. + + + +Mosaic +Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. + + + + Icon + + + Mosaic + + +
+Element resolution +Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. + +Width +Defines the width of the individual tiles. + +Height +Defines the height of the individual tiles. + +Enhance edges +Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba30d1f36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Graphics Mode + /text/shared/02/24020000.xhp + + + +
+ +Graphics Mode +Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object. +
+
+ + + + Cell Styles + + + Graphics mode + + +
+
+Default +The view of the graphic object is not changed. +Grayscale +The graphic object is shown in grayscale. A color graphic object can become monochrome in grayscale. You can also use the color sliders to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object. +Black and White +The graphic object is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% will appear black, all over 50% will appear white. +Watermark +The graphic object is raised in brightness and reduced in contrast so that it can be used in the background as a watermark.UFI: #i45972# + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2deff09e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Red + /text/shared/02/24030000.xhp + + + +
+ +Red +Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Red + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5fa8fbf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Green + /text/shared/02/24040000.xhp + + + +
+ +Green +Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Green + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37eaec6d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Blue + /text/shared/02/24050000.xhp + + + +
+ +Blue +Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Blue + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90a2dd254 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Brightness + /text/shared/02/24060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Brightness

+Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon Brightness + + + Brightness + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbe6c0b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Contrast + /text/shared/02/24070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Contrast

+Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Contrast + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..012f7a6ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Gamma + /text/shared/02/24080000.xhp + + + +
+ +Gamma +Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum Gamma) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Gamma + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb73e2670 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Transparency + /text/shared/02/24090000.xhp + + + +
+ +Transparency +Specifies the transparency in the graphic object. Values from 0% (fully opaque) to +100% (fully transparent) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Transparency + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd401518e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Crop + /text/shared/02/24100000.xhp + + + +
+ +Crop +Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed. A picture must be selected to enable cropping. + +In Impress and Draw no dialog is shown when you click the icon, but you see eight cropping handles. Open the context menu of a selected picture and choose Crop Image, if you want to use the dialog for cropping. +Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture. +
+
+ + + + icon + + + Crop + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8f11ae5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Basic Shapes +/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp + + + +
+ +Basic Shapes +Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54df440bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Block Arrows +/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp + + + +
+ +Block Arrows +Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96763d917 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Callouts +/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp + + + +
+callouts; drawings +speech bubbles +mw moved "legends;drawings" to draw guide text_enter.xhp + +Callouts +Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + +Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aada8ab18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Color +/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp + + +Color toolbar from Image bar + + + +
+ +Color +With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object. +
+To open the Color toolbar, click the Color icon on the Image toolbar. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e96b25db0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Flowchart +/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp + + + +
+ +Flowchart +Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f75ce5e79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Fontwork + /text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Fontwork

+Opens the Fontwork dialog from which you can insert styled text not possible through standard font formatting into your document. +
+ +
+ + +
+ +

Fontwork Gallery

+The Fontwork Gallery displays previews of Fontwork objects. To insert an object into your document, select the object, and then click OK. + +
+ +Fontwork toolbar +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9378df9ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ + + + + + + + + Limit + /text/shared/02/limit.xhp + + + +SQL; LIMIT clause + +Limit + +Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause. This can be used to limit your SQL Query results to those that fall within the first X number of it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bb6b0438 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + + Enter Name + /text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Enter Name Dialog

+Enter a name or any requested text on the label. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3029a80f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +Clone Formatting +/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp + + + +
+
+ +

Clone Formatting

+First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.i93691 +
+
+Click the Clone Formatting icon Icon on the Standard toolbar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Clone Formatting + + +
+ +
+
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd87ca7ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + Query Properties Dialog + /text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp + + + +queries; set properties + + + +Query Properties Dialog + In the Query Properties dialog you can set two properties of the SQL Query, i.e. whether to return distinct values, and whether to limit the result set. +
+ In the Query Design View, choose Edit - Query Properties. + +
+ Distinct Values + +Use distinct values in query. + +Not use distinct values in query. + Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once. + + +Limit + Adds a Limit to set the maximum number of records to return. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..006da45ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Stars and Banners +/text/shared/02/stars.xhp + + + +
+ +Stars and Banners +Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a5576c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +Symbol Shapes +/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp + + + +
+ +

Symbol Shapes

+Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + Control points in a shape + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bcbd011c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,989 @@ + + + + + + + General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] + /text/shared/04/01010000.xhp + + + +
+ +keyboard; general commands +shortcut keys; general +text input fields +AutoComplete function in text and list boxes +macros; interrupting +Unicode; input with keyboard +Unicode; shortcut keys +shortcut keys; Unicode + +

General Shortcut Keys in $[officename]

+
+ +

Using Shortcut Keys

+ A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O +Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command +Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. + When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. + + + + +

Calling Menus with Mnemonics

+ Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the Alt key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. + + +
+

Entering Unicode Characters

+You can enter arbitrary Unicode characters in the document typing the Unicode hexadecimal code point and then pressing Command+Option+XAlt+X (default). Type the Unicode hexadecimal notation and press Command+Option+XAlt+X to toggle between the Unicode character and its hexadecimal notation. Selection is not necessary but the conversion will apply to the selected characters. Toggling occurs on the characters prior to the cursor position when these characters form a valid Unicode hexadecimal point. Hexadecimal code points with value in the range U+0000 to U+0020 are not converted. +The default Unicode conversion shortcut is Command+Option+XAlt+X and Command+Option+CAlt+C in some locales where the default Unicode shortcut interferes with the main menu shortcut. To reassign the shortcut, choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard and select Category:Options with Function:Toggle Unicode Notation. +
+

Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs

+ There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the Spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift+Tab to go in the reverse direction. + Pressing Esc closes the dialog without saving changes. +If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. +

Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions

+ If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command +Ctrl and occasionally Option +Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. + +

Practical Text Input Fields

+ + + You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. + + + Use CommandCtrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. + + + Double-click a word to select it. + + + A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. + + + Use CommandCtrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. + + + By using CommandCtrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. + + + INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. + + + Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. + + + The CommandCtrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. + + +
+ + + $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter +c:\a~/a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive +in your home folder that starts with the letter "a". + + + Use the Down Arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the Right Arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter. + + +
+

Interrupting Macros

+If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Q. +

List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename]

+ The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on macOS.) +

Shortcut keys for controlling dialogs

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Enter key + + + Activates the focused button in a dialog. + + + + + Esc + + + Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. + + + + + Arrow keys + + + Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. + + + + + Tab + + + Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Esc key. + + +
+

Shortcut keys for controlling documents and windows

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+O + + + Opens a document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+S + + + Saves the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+N + + + Creates a new document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+N + + + Opens the Templates dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+P + + + Prints document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F + + + Activates the Find toolbar. + + + + + CommandCtrl+H + + + Calls the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+F + + + Searches for the last entered search term. + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+J + + + Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+R + + + Redraws the document view. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+I + + + Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. + + + + + F1 + + + Starts the $[officename] Help. + In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. + + + + + Shift+F1 + + + Context Help + + + + + Shift+F2 + + + Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + + + + + F6 + + + Sets focus in next visible subwindow, including menu bar, toolbars, windows such as Sidebar and Navigator, and document canvas/data source. + + + + + Shift+F6 + + + Sets focus in previous subwindow. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F6 + + + Sets focus in the document canvas/data source. + + + + + F10 + + + Activates the first menu (File menu). + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+F10 + + + Docks and undocks floating subwindows such as unlocked toolbars, Sidebar and Navigator. + + + + + Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Home + + + Shows/hides main menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F4 or OptionAlt+F4 + + + Closes the current document. Closes $[officename] when the last open document is closed. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Q + + + Exits application. + + +
+

Shortcut keys for editing or formatting documents

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted. + + + + + Enter (if an OLE object is selected) + + + Activates the selected OLE object. + + + + + Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) + + + Activates text input mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+X + + + Cuts out the selected elements. + + + + + CommandCtrl+C + + + Copies the selected items. + + + + + CommandCtrl+V + + + Pastes from the clipboard. + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + + + Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard. The text is pasted using the format that exists at the insertion point. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+V + + + Opens the Paste Special dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+A + + + Selects all. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Z + + + Undoes last action. + + + + + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + + + Redoes last action. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Y + + + Repeats last command. + + + + + CommandCtrl+I + + + The "Italic" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. + + + + + CommandCtrl+B + + + The "Bold" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. + + + + + CommandCtrl+U + + + The "Underlined" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. + + + + + CommandCtrl+M + + + Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Clear Direct Formatting). + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the Gallery

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Tab + + + Moves between areas. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Moves backwards between areas. + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery:

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Moves the selection up one. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Moves the selection down. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + Opens the Properties dialog. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens a context menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+U + + + Refreshes the selected theme. + + + + + CommandCtrl+R + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+D + + + Deletes the selected theme. + + + + + Insert + + + Inserts a new theme. + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the Gallery Preview area:

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Home + + + Jumps to the first entry. + + + + + End + + + Jumps to the last entry. + + + + + Left Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the left. + + + + + Right Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the right. + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element above. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element below. + + + + + Page Up + + + Scrolls up one screen. + + + + + Page Down + + + Scrolls down one screen. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Insert + + + Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+I + + + Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+T + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+P + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Enter + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Step backward (only in object view). + + + Switches back to main overview. + + +
+
+

Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by CommandCtrl+Shift+F4 keys)

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Spacebar + + + Toggles row selection. + + + + + Shift+Spacebar + + + Selects the current column. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Up + + + Moves pointer to the first row. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Down + + + Moves pointer to the last row. + + +
+
+
+

Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow keys to select the desired toolbar icon and press CommandCtrl+Enter. + + + Inserts a Drawing Object. + + + + + Select the document with CommandCtrl+F6 and press Tab. + + + Selects a Drawing Object. + + + + + Tab + + + Selects the next Drawing Object. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Selects the previous Drawing Object. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Home + + + Selects the first Drawing Object. + + + + + CommandCtrl+End + + + Selects the last Drawing Object. + + + + + Esc + + + Ends Drawing Object selection. + + + + + Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) + + + Exits Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. + + + + + Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + + + Moves the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). + + + + + OptionAlt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + + + Moves the selected drawing object one pixel (in Selection Mode). + Resizes a drawing object (in Handle Selection Mode). + Rotates a drawing object (in Rotation Mode). + Opens the properties dialog for a drawing object. + Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Selects a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. + The selected point blinks once per second. + + + + + Shift+Spacebar + + + Selects an additional point in Point Selection mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + Selects the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode). + In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab + + + Selects the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter at the Selection icon + + + Activates the first drawing object in the document. + + + + + Esc + + + Leaves the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. + Edits a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode). + + + + + Any text or numerical key + + + If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. + + + + + OptionAlt key while creating or scaling a graphic object + + + The position of the object's center is fixed. + + + + + Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object + + + The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed. + + +
+
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85c5e41af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ + + + + + + + Database Shortcut Keys + /text/shared/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys; in databases +databases; shortcut keys + +Database Shortcut Keys + The following is a list of shortcut keys available within databases. + The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. + +
+
+Shortcut keys for databases +In the query design + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + F6 + + + Jump between the query design areas. + + + + + Delete + + + Deletes a table from the query design. + + + + + Tab + + + Selects the connection line. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu. + + + + + F4 + + + Shows a Preview. + + + + + F5 + + + Runs query. + + + + + F7 + + + Adds table or query. + + +
+Control Properties Window + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + Opens the combo box. + + + + + OptionAlt+Up Arrow + + + Closes the combo box. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Inserts a new line. + + + + + Up arrow + + + Positions the cursor in the previous line. + + + + + Down arrow + + + Puts the cursor into the next line. + + + + + Enter + + + Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F6 + + + Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator. + + +
+Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+PgUp + + + Jumps between tabs. + + + + + CommandCtrl+PgDn + + + Jumps between tabs. + + + + + F6 + + + Jumps between windows. + + + + + Tab + + + Selection of the control fields. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + Inserts the selected control. + + + + + Arrow key + CommandCtrl+arrow key + + + Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab + + + In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. + + + + + Esc + + + Leaves the current selection. + + +
+
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cf89e9a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Getting Support + /text/shared/05/00000001.xhp + + + +
+ +support on the Web +getting support +forums and support +Web support + +Getting Support + You can find support on the %PRODUCTNAME website. + For a summary of the current support services refer to the Readme file in the %PRODUCTNAME folder. +Local language support pages + The %PRODUCTNAME localization projects offer support pages in various languages. Find an overview of the native language projects at the %PRODUCTNAME website. You can find English-language help and support on the %PRODUCTNAME website as well. +Mailing lists + Ask about %PRODUCTNAME, find help by volunteers, and discuss topics on the public mailing lists. You can find many general and specialized mailing lists on the %PRODUCTNAME website at www.libreoffice.org. +Forum + You can access web forums to ask and answer questions about %PRODUCTNAME. Choose Help – Get Help Online to access the forum in your language. +Security + In case you are concerned about any security issue with using this software, you can contact the developers on the public mailing list. If you want to discuss any issue with other users, send an email to the public mailing list users@global.libreoffice.org. +Downloads + You can download the latest version of %PRODUCTNAME at www.libreoffice.org/download/. +Documentation + You can download documentation as PDF files, how-tos, and guides from the %PRODUCTNAME documentation website at documentation.libreoffice.org. You can also access the documentation website choosing the menu Help – User Guides. +Participate and give back + If you want to take an active role in the worldwide %PRODUCTNAME community, you are very welcome to give feedback, discuss features, propose enhancements, write your own article in an FAQ, how-to, manual, create a video tutorial, etc. + Visit the Get involved page on the website and follow the links for contributors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4d697c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Icons in the Documentation + /text/shared/05/00000002.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Icons in the Documentation +
+Icons in the Documentation + There are three icons used to call your attention to additional helpful information. + The Important! icon points out important information regarding data and system security. + The Note icon points out extra information: for example, alternative ways to reach a certain goal. + The Tip icon points out tips for working with the program in a more efficient manner. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ae3c7298 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + + <filename>/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> +<section id="help"><comment>this section is displayed on all module main pages above the other "Help about Help" links.</comment> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150699" xml-lang="en-US">The Help references the default settings of the program on a system that is set to defaults. Descriptions of colors, mouse actions, or other configurable items can be different for your program and system.</paragraph> +</section> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150618" xml-lang="en-US">The <emph>$[officename] Help system</emph> provides easy access to information and support. There are several ways to find what you are looking for in the <link href="text/shared/05/00000110.xhp" name="Help environment"><emph>Help environment</emph></link>: You can search for a specific keyword in the <link href="text/shared/05/00000130.xhp" name="Index"><emph>Index</emph></link>, carry out a full-text search under <link href="text/shared/05/00000140.xhp" name="Find"><emph>Find</emph></link>, or look through a hierarchical list of the <link href="text/shared/05/00000160.xhp" name="Topics"><emph>Topics</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32fb87dde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textshared0500000110xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + /text/shared/05/00000110.xhp + + + + + + +The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. + Provides an overview of the Help system. The Help window shows the currently selected Help page. + + The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: + + + + Icon + + + + Hides and shows the navigation pane. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves back to the previous page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves forward to the next page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves to the first page of the current Help topic. + + + + + Icon + + + + Prints the current page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Adds this page to your bookmarks. + + + + + Search icon + + + + Opens the Find on this page dialog. + + +
+These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. +Help Page + You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + + + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + + + Press CommandCtrl+C. + + +To search the current Help page: + + + Click the Find on this Page icon. + The Find on this Page dialog opens. + You can also click in the Help page and press CommandCtrl+F. + + + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + + + Select the search options that you want to use. + + + Click Find. + To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. + + + +Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. + +Finds complete words only. + +Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. + +Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. + +Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. + +Finds the next occurrence of the search term. +Navigation Pane + +The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. + +The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + Contents + + + Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + + + + + Index + + + Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Find + + + Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Bookmarks + + + Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages. + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..313a9e510 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Tips and Extended Tips + /text/shared/05/00000120.xhp + + + +Help; Help tipstooltips; help + + +Tips and Extended Tips + Tips and Extended Tips provide help while you work. +Tips + Tips provide you with the names of toolbar buttons. To display a tip, rest the pointer over a toolbar button until the name of the button appears. + Tips are also displayed for some elements in a document, such as chapter names when you scroll through a long document. + Tips are always enabled. +Extended Tips + Extended Tips provide a brief description about buttons and commands. To display an extended tip, press Shift+F1, then point to a button or command. + If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7448f64f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Index - Keyword Search in the Help + /text/shared/05/00000130.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index tab in Help +Help; keywords + + +Index - Keyword Search in the Help + +Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index. + +Click to display the selected topic. +You can search for a specific topic by typing a word into the Search term text box. The window contains an alphabetical list of index terms. +If the cursor is in the index list when you type the search term, the display will jump directly to the next match. When you type a word in the Search term text box, the focus will jump to the best match in the index list. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8364126d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Find - The Full-Text Search + /text/shared/05/00000140.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Find tab in Help +Help; full-text search +full-text search in Help + + +Find - The Full-Text Search + +Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive. + +Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered. + +Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry. + +Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found. + +Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term. + +Displays the entry selected in the list. +The full text search function in $[officename] Help allows you to find Help documents that contain any combination of search terms. To do this, type one or more words into the Search term text field. +The Search term text field stores the words you entered last. To repeat a previous search, click the arrow icon and select the term from the list. +After the search has been carried out, the document headings of the results appear in a list. Either double-click an entry, or select it and click Display to load the corresponding Help document. +Use the check box Find in headings only to limit the search to document headings. +The Complete words only check box allows you to perform an exact search. If this box is marked, incomplete words will not be found. Do not mark this check box if the search term you enter should also be found as part of a longer word. +You can enter any combination of search terms, separated by spaces. Searching is not case-sensitive. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85e9c9843 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Managing Bookmarks + /text/shared/05/00000150.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + Help; bookmarksbookmarks; Help + +

Managing Bookmarks

+ + + Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. + + + + Icon + + + Use the Add to Bookmarks icon to set a bookmark for the current page shown in the Help. + + +
+ You can find the bookmarks on the Bookmarks tab page. + + + + Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. + + + Use the Del key to delete a selected bookmark. + + + The following commands are on the context menu of a bookmark: + + + + + + Display - displays the selected help subject. + + + Rename - opens a dialog for entering another name for the bookmark. + + + Delete - deletes the selected bookmark. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8a77d958 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Contents - The Main Help Topics + /text/shared/05/00000160.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; topics +tree view of Help + + + +Contents - The Main Help Topics + Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. + + + + Icon + + + Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + + Icon + + + Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + + Icon + + + Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page. + + +
+ Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8a9fd295 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Help Page Not Found + /text/shared/05/err_html.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Could not find Help page (404).

+ That is an error. Possible causes are: + + + The page does not exist and must be created. + + + The page exists, but the Help ID is wrong or missing. + + +Use the Module, Contents, Index and Search selectors to find the right page. + +The following data could be helpful in locating the error: +Help ID: + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca21fd884 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + /text/shared/05/new_help.xhp + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME Help + Help pages;Index + Help pages;search in index + search;Help index + Help pages;contents + + + +

The %PRODUCTNAME Help

+ + + %PRODUCTNAME Help pages are displayed in your system default web browser. + + The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. + Provides an overview of the Help system. + Help pages of %PRODUCTNAME Extensions still use the old Help system. The old Help system help pages are available from here. +

The %PRODUCTNAME Help pages features

+

The Module List

+ Located on the top of the page, click to open the drop-down list and select the %PRODUCTNAME module to display the module Help main entry page. +

The Language List (Help online only).

+ Available only in the online version, select the language to display the current help page. + +
+

The Help Index

+ The Help Index displays a list of keywords for all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Click on any keyword in the list to open the linked Help page. +

Searching the Help Index

+ Type the keyword in the Search text box. The search is performed immediately, while you type the keyword. + The search results are displayed as a filtered list of matches grouped by module name. The search results also include near matches. The matching parts of the search term are highlighted in each result. + The GLOBAL heading indicates a match for keywords relevant to more than one %PRODUCTNAME module. For example, cell borders applies to spreadsheets cells as well as text and presentation table cells or frames. + Use the arrow icons on the bottom of the Index to scroll forward or backward the Index entries or filtered result list. +
+ +
+

Contents - The Main Help Topics

+ Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + + + Click a closed folder (⊞) to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. + + + Click an open folder (⊟) to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. + + + Click a link to display the corresponding Help page. + + +
+

Using the browser for %PRODUCTNAME Help

+

Navigating in Help pages

+ Use the Back and Forward buttons of the browser to navigate between pages. In most browsers, a long click on the Back button displays a dropdown list of previously visited pages and a long click on the Forward button display a list of visited pages after the current one. + +
+

Bookmarking Help pages

+ Use the bookmark feature of the browser for quick access to relevant Help pages. To bookmark a page in most browsers: + + + Open the Bookmark menu of the browser, + + + select Add bookmark, or + Press + CommandCtrl+D on most browsers. + + + Enter the name, folder and meaningful tags for the bookmark. + + + Close the bookmark dialog of the web browser. + + +
+ +

Help Pages Navigation History

+ Each Help page visited is recorded in the web browser history. To open the navigation history: + + + Choose the History menu of the web browser, + + + Select Show History. + + + Click on any entry of the history main window to open the corresponding help page. + + + +

Copying Help contents to clipboard

+ You can copy contents from the Help page to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + + + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + + + Press CommandCtrl+C. + + + Some contents in help pages can be copied to the system clipboard with only one mouse click. In these cases a tooltip appears when hovering the mouse on the copy-enabled contents. For example, the following line is copy-enabled: + =SUM(A1:A10) +

Searching in current page

+ To search in the current Help page: + + + Open the View menu of your default web browser and choose Find on this Page entry. + You can also press CommandCtrl+F. + + + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + + + Select the search options that you want to use. + + + Press Enter. + + + To find the previous occurrence of the search term on the page, click on the Up arrow. To find the next occurrence, click on the Down arrow. +

Contents general information

+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c16471aa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Filter screenshots + /text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + PDF Export General Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Links Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export View Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export User Interface Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Digital Signature Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Security Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + EPUB dialog box + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d280db38 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Options Screenshots + /text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Options View Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Load/Save Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options HTML Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Accessibility Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Save Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Advanced Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Asian Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options CTL Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Security Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Language Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options General Dialog Image + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0505be0e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + Calc Screenshots + /text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + XML Source Dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a677a3252 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Shared CUI Screenshots + /text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Font Effects Page Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Doc Page Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Internet Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Mail Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink New Document Dialog Image + +
+
+ + The Pick a Color window + +
+
+ Color page dialog +
+
+ Page format tab page +
+
+ Slant and Corner Radius tab page +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ab3ac12d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Impress Screenshots + /text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Impress General Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress View Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress Print Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress Photo Album Dialog + +
+
+ + Presentation Dialog + +
+
+ + Slide Design Dialog + +
+
+ + Header Footer Dialog + +
+
+ + Master Layout Dialog + +
+
+ Custom Slide Shows Dialog +
+
+ Define Custom Slide Show Dialog +
+
+ Enhanced Animation Effects Dialog +
+
+ Text Animation Dialog +
+
+ Custom Animation Timing Dialog +
+
+ + Alternate mode: all slide thumbnails for direct selection or jumping. The current slide has a red selection cursor + +
+
+ + Impress Remote: initial thumbnail shown + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1966d126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + SVX Screenshots + /text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Compress Image Dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..298682104 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + + + YouTube Videos + /text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a3630f2e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Web Pages + /text/shared/07/09000000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Web Pages + To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New. +
+A tool for creating new web pages is the Web Layout mode, which you enable with View - Web. +Creating a New Web Page + + + Switch to the web layout mode by choosing View - Web or by opening a new HTML document. + + + To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types. + +deleted remaining outdated content, see #i62014 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d03b20666 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +TWo INitial CApitals have been corrected +Typing errors such as "WOrd" have been corrected and replaced by the AutoCorrect function to "Word". +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4359cbc9c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Start each sentence with a capital letter +Your text was corrected with AutoCorrect so that the current word began with a capital letter. AutoCorrect changes words at the beginning of a paragraph, and words after the character at the end of a sentence (period, exclamation point, question mark). +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3fc8e4a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Two capital letters at the beginning of a word and a sentence have been corrected to one capital letter +AutoCorrect has modified your text so that a word beginning with two capital letters at the beginning of a sentence now starts with one capital letter. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4cb9277da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +A replacement has been carried out +AutoCorrect has replaced a word. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d849041cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement. The beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement, and the beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b41b75119 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double quotation marks (") have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that double quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26b8a8b05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Single quotes have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that single quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96350addb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +An URL has been detected and a hyperlink attribute has been set +AutoCorrect has modified your text. A string has been detected as an URL and is now shown as a hyperlink. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27b7c2e64 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double spaces have been ignored +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that the multiple spaces you have entered have now been reduced to one single space. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..383f9300b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Bold and underline attributes have been recognized and applied +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and the bold and/or underline text attributes have been automatically applied. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8728b8886 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Minus signs have been replacedi73558 +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and minus signs have been replaced with dashes. +
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05fc50950 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +1st ... has been replaced with 1st ... +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that ordinal number suffixes have been superscripted. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da445c909 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+wizards; overview +AutoPilots, see wizards + + +Wizards +Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more. +
+
+
+ +
+Letter + +Fax + +Agenda + +Document Converter + +Euro Converter + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6fa08d1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp + + + +wizards; letters +Letter Wizard +templates;letters +mw made "letters;..." a one level entry + + +Letter Wizard +Starts the wizard for a letter template. + You can use this template for both business and personal correspondence. +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with sample templates for personal or business letters, which you can customize to your own needs with the help of the wizard. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template and offers numerous layout and design options. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished letter will appear according to the settings you choose. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries and options at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. + +If you are creating a business letter, you can select a variety of elements to include in your document, which usually do not apply to personal letters, such as a subject line. If you choose the Personal letter option, some pages which contain elements specific to business letters will not be included in the wizard dialog. + + + + + +
+ + + +Back +Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps. The current settings will be saved. +
+
+ + + +Next +Saves the current settings and continues to the next page. +
+ +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk. $[officename] creates a new document based on the existing templates with the "Untitled X" name (X stands for the consecutive numbering) and displays it on the work area. +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the chosen template. These settings are used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a7a9b33f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page design +/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Page design +Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice. +
+
+ +
+Please choose the type of letter and page design +Specify whether you want to create a business or personal letter template. + +Business letter +Specifies that you want to create a business letter template. + +Formal personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter. + +Personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a personal letter. + + + +Page design +Select the design for your letter template. + +Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements +Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. +Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdf4a3386 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer. +
+
+ +
+Specify items already on your letterhead paper + +Logo +Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo. + + +Height +Defines the height of the object. + + +Width +Defines the width of the object. + + +Spacing to left margin +Sets the object distance from the left page margin. + + +Spacing to top margin +Sets the object distance from the top page margin. + +Own address +Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address. + +Return address in envelope window +Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size. + +Footer +Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer. + +Height +Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area. +Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a59471116 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Printed items +/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Printed items +Defines the items to be included in the letter template. +
+
+ +
+ +Logo +Includes a logo on the letter template. + +Return address in envelope window +Includes a small size return address on the letter template. + +Letter signs +Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template. + +Subject line +Includes a subject line on the letter template. + + +Salutation +Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box. + +Fold marks +Includes fold marks on the letter template. + + +Complimentary close +Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box. + +Footer +Includes a footer on the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..deb1c7172 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +Specifies the sender and recipient information. +
+
+ +
+Sender's address +Specifies your address information. + +Use user data for return address +Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box. + +New sender address +Use the address data from the following text boxes. + +Name +Specifies the name of the sender. + +Street +Specifies the street address of the sender. + + + +Postcode/State/City +Specifies the address data of the sender. +Recipient's address +Specifies the recipient's address information. + +Use placeholders for recipient's address +Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template. + +Use address database for mail merge +Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Footer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33cff460e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Footer +/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Footer +Specifies the information to include in the footer space. +
+
+ +
+ +Footer +Enter the text for the footer lines. + +Include only on second and following pages +Select to suppress the footer on the first page. + +Include page numbers +Includes page numbers in your letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..643a83564 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template. +
+
+ +
+ +Template name +Specifies the title of the document template. + + +Path +Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name. + +Create a letter from this template +Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template. + +Make manual changes to this letter template +Saves the template and keeps it open for editing. +Letter Wizard overview + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5ca71ce8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp + + + +wizards;faxes +faxes;wizards +templates;faxes + + + +Fax Wizard +Opens the wizard for faxes. The wizard can help you create document templates for fax documents. You can then print the fax documents to a printer or to a fax machine, if fax driver software is available. + +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with a template for fax documents, which you can modify with the wizard to suit your own needs. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template, and offers numerous layout and design options. The document preview gives you an impression of how the finished fax will appear. +Within the dialog you can modify your entries and options at any time. You can also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. + + + + + + +Back +Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards. + +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page. + +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX". + +Dialog ID must be below any <avis> tag + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826368905 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Page Design +/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Page Design +Defines the style of your fax document. +
+
+ +
+ +Business Fax +Creates a fax template for a business-style fax. + +Style +Specifies the predefined style. + +Private Fax +Creates a fax template for a private fax. + +Style +Specifies the predefined style. +Go to Fax Wizard - Items to include + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4330db9a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Items to include +/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Items to include +Specifies the fax elements to be printed. +
+
+ +
+ +Logo +Includes a company logo. + +Date +Includes a date field. +Type of message + + +Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box. + +Subject line +Includes a subject line. + + +Salutation +Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box. + + +Complimentary close +Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box. + +Footer +Includes a footer. +Go to Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11fca6781 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax. +
+
+ +
+ +Use user data for return address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. + +New return address +Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document. + + + + + + +(Address data fields) +Enter the sender address data. + +Use placeholders as receiver address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. + +Use address database for mail merge +Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document. +Go to Fax Wizard - Footer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21fc708df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Footer +/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Footer +Specifies the footer data. +
+
+ +
+ +Footer +Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area. + +Include only on second and following pages +Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document. + +Include page number +Prints a page number in the footer area. +Go to Fax Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35ef9685d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Name and location +/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Name and location +Defines the template name and location. +
+
+ +
+ +Template name +Enter the name of the fax template. + +... +Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template. + +Create a fax from this template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template. + +Make manual changes to this fax template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Fax Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d7c1a50f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp + + + +wizards;agendas +Agenda Wizard +templates;agendas + + +Agenda Wizard +Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template. + You can use an agenda to specify discussion topics for conferences and meetings. +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with a sample template for agendas that you can modify to suit your own needs. The wizard offers numerous layout and design options for creating document templates. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished agenda will appear. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the pages, in which case the current (or default) settings remain in effect. + + + + + + +Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain in effect. This button only becomes active after the first page. +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. Once you reach the last page, this button will become inactive. +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it on your hard disk. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX" (X stands for an automatic number). + +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the selected document template. These will be used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. +Dialog ID here, below any <avis> tags (else the tagged text will be shown on the buttons) + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b57d44c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Page Design +/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Page Design +Specifies a page design for the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Page design +Select the page design from the list box. +Include form for recording minutes +Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - General information + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4f9cddcf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - General Information +/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - General Information +Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting. +
+
+ +
+ +Date +Specifies the date of the meeting. + +Time +Specifies the time of the meeting. + +Title +Specifies the title of the meeting. + +Location +Specifies the location of the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Headings to include + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62fd0e3df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Type of meeting +Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line. +Please read +Specifies whether to print a Please read line. +Please bring +Specifies whether to print a Please bring line. +Notes +Specifies whether to print a Notes line. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Names + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00fe3dc1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Names +/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Names +Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Meeting called by +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. +Chairperson +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the chairperson. +Minute keeper +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the minute keeper. +Moderator +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the moderator. +Attendees +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees. +Observers +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers. +Facility personnel +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facility personnel. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a1c8b8f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template. +
+
+ +
+ + +Topics +Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. +Insert +Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row. +Remove +Removes the current topic row. +Move up +Moves the current topic row up. +Move down +Moves the current topic row down. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b17dc1b33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Name and Location +/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Name and Location +Choose the title and location for the agenda template. +
+
+ +
+Template title +Specifies the name of the agenda template. + +Path +Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template. +Create an agenda from this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template. +Make manual changes to this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Agenda Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38c5ab213 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp + + + + +forms;wizards +wizards;forms + +Form Wizard +Activates the Wizard for creating forms. + +
+ +
+Select the form properties using the following steps: + + + + + + + + + + + +Click to create the form without answering further pages. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3930c2947 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp + + + +
+Form Wizard - Field Selection +On this page of the Form Wizard, you can specify the table or query that you need to create the form as well as the fields that you want to include in the form. +
+
+ +
+ + +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for. +
+ + + + + + +Available fields +Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or hold down the Shift or the CommandCtrl key while you click to select more than one field. +
+
+ + + + + + + +> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.i73704 +
+
+ + + + + +>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + +< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + +<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +^ +Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list. + + + + + + + + + +v +Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list. +
+ + +Fields in the form +Displays the fields that are in the new form. +Form Wizard - Set up a subform + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..248d5f2c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 2 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form. +
+
+ +
+ +Add subform +Select to add a subform. + +Sub form based on existing relation +Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. + +Which relation do you want to add? +Select the relation on which the subform is based. + +Sub form based on manual selection of fields +Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. +Form Wizard - Add subform fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c66108e03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp + + + +
+Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform. +
+
+ +
+ +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. + + + + + + + +Fields in my subform +Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. +Form Wizard - Get joined fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70c10b19c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 4 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +If you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this wizard page. +
+
+ +
+ +First joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +First joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Second joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Second joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Third joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Third joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Fourth joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Fourth joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Form Wizard - Arrange controls + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3e8e38a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +On this page of the Wizard, you can select the layout of the created form. +
+
+ +
+Label placement + +Align left +The labels are left-aligned. + +Align right +The labels are right-aligned. +Arrangement of the main form + +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. + +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. + +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. + +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Arrangement of the subform + +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. + +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. + +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. + +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Form Wizard - Set data entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87da06426 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +Specifies the data handling mode for the new form. +
+
+ +
+ +The form is to be used for entering new data only. Existing data will not be displayed +Creates a form that is only used for entering new data. + +The form is to display all data +Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. + +Do not allow modification of existing data +Select to disallow editing data. + +Do not allow deletion of existing data +Select to disallow deleting data. + +Do not allow addition of new data +Select to disallow adding new data. +Form Wizard - Apply styles + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7d5efb93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Apply Styles +/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 7 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Apply Styles +Specifies the form style. +
+
+ +
+ +Apply styles +Specifies the page style for the form. + +Field border +Specifies the field border style. + +No border +Specifies that the fields have no border. + +3D look +Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look. + +Flat +Specifies that the field borders look flat. +Form Wizard - Set name + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c18f2a8a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set Name +/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 8 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set Name +Specifies the name of the form and how to proceed. +
+
+ +
+ +Name of the form +Specifies the name of the form. + +Work with the form +Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data. + +Modify the form +Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout. +Form Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe9ca5e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp + + + + +Report Wizard +Activates the wizard for creating reports. + +
+ +
+UFI: added Help ID, see #i61571 + +Select the report properties. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10795d1a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp + + + +
+Report Wizard - Field Selection +Specifies the table or query for which you are creating the report, and which fields you wish to include in the report. +
+
+ +
+Tables or queries +Select the table or query for which the report is to be created. +
+Available fields +Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or press the Shift or CommandCtrl key while clicking to select multiple fields. +
+Fields in report +Displays all fields that are included in the new report. +
+> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+More about Report Wizard - Labeling Fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f370eb8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +Specifies how you want to label the fields. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + +Field list +Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report. +More about Report Wizard - Grouping + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3c0a4a22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Grouping +/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp + + + +
+Report Wizard - Grouping +You can group records in a report based on the values in one or more fields. Select the fields by which the resulting report will be grouped. You can group up to four fields in a report. When you group more than one field, $[officename] nests the groups according to their group level. +
+
+ +
+Fields +Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +Groupings +Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +> +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +< +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +More about Report Wizard - Sort Options + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd4be63ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Sort Options +/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Sort Options +Select the fields by which to sort the report. Fields can be sorted by up to four levels, each either ascending or descending. Grouped fields can only be sorted within each group. +
+
+ +
+ +Sort by +Select the first field by which to sort the report. + + + +Then by +Select an additional field by which to sort the report. + + + + +Ascending +Sorts the field contents in ascending order. + + + + +Descending +Sorts the field contents in descending order. +More about Report Wizard - Choose Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc315d00 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Choose Layout +/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Choose Layout +Choose the layout from different templates and styles, and choose landscape or portrait page orientation. +
+
+ +
+ +Layout of data +Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more. + +Layout of headers and footers +Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background. +Orientation +Choose the page orientation for the report. + +Landscape +Selects a landscape page orientation for the report. + +Portrait +Selects a portrait page orientation for the report. +More about Report Wizard - Create Report + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..128d13dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Create Report +/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Create Report +You can create the report as a static or dynamic report. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. When you open a static report, it will always display the same data from the time when the static report was created. +
+
+ +
+ +Title of report +Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page. + +Static report +Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created. + +Dynamic report +Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. + +Modify report layout +When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit. + +Create report now +When you click Finish, the report will be saved. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32cbb514b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export +/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp + + + + +HTML Export +Determines the settings for publishing $[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress documents in HTML format. +
+ +
+The pages displayed differ depending on what you select on the second page of the Wizard. + + + + + + +< Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain saved. You can select this button once you are in the second editing step. +Next > +Saves the current settings and moves to the next page. This button becomes inactive on the last page of the dialog. + +Create +Creates new documents according to your selections and saves the documents. +$[officename] saves the current Wizard settings and uses them as default the next time that you open the Wizard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7b38dbf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 1 +On the first page you can select an existing design or create a new one. +
+The settings you select for the export will be automatically saved as a design for other exports. You can enter the design name after clicking Create. +
+ +
+Assign design +In this area, you can choose to create a new design and select or delete an existing design. +If you delete a design, you will only delete the design information in the Wizard. An export file will not be deleted by this action. + +New design +Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard. + +Existing Design +Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard. + +Design list +Displays all existing designs. + +Delete Selected Design +Deletes the selected design from the design list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec17292ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 2 +/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp + + + +
+kiosk export +HTML; live presentations +live presentations on the Internet +showing;live presentations on the Internet +presentations; live on the Internet +Internet; presentations +WebCast export +changed "in the Internet" to "on the Internet", see i73714 +inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 2 +Determines the type of publication. +
+You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes. +
+ +
+Publication type +Defines the basic settings for the intended export. +Standard HTML format +Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. +Standard HTML with frames +Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. +Create title page +Creates a title page for your document. +Show notes + +Specifies that your notes are also displayed. +Automatic +Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. +As stated in document +The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. +Automatic +The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. +Slide view time +Defines the amount of time for each slide display. +Endless +Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. +WebCast +In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show on the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. +Active Server Pages (ASP) +When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. +Perl +Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. +URL for listeners +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. +URL for presentation +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. +URL for Perl scripts +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. +More Information on WebCast Export +There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. +In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. +WebCast in ASP +Exporting + + +To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Export. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. + + +The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. + + +Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. + + +Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. + + +In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. + + +Using ASP WebCast +You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. + +Example: +Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". + + +You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. + + +The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. +WebCast over Perl +Exporting + + +To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. + + + + +The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. + + +In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. + + +In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. + + +In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. + + +Using Perl WebCast +The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. + + +You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. + + + + +Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. + + +All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. + + +On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. + + +Now you should be able to use WebCast. + +Example: +In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. + + +Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. + + +Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. + + +Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4f7e133c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 3 +/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 3 +Specifies the graphics type and the target screen resolution. +
+
+ +
+Save images as +Determines the image format. You can also define the compression value for the export. +PNG - Portable Network Graphics format +The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors. +GIF - Graphics Interchange Format +The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors. +JPG - Compressed file format +The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors. +Quality +Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality. +Monitor resolution +Defines the resolution for the target screen. Depending on the selected resolution, the image will be displayed in a reduced size. You can specify a reduction of up to 80% from the original size. +Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. +Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) +Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation. +High resolution (1024x768 pixels) +Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display. +Export +Export sounds when slide advances +Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8978a1814 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 4 +/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 4 +Specifies the information to be displayed on the title page of the publication. +
+You can skip this page if you unmark the Create title page option, or if you select Automatic or WebCast, in previous pages of the Wizard. +
+ +
+Information for the title page + +Author +Specifies the name of the publication's author. + +Email address +Specifies the email address. + +Your homepage +Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication. + +Additional information +Specifies additional text to appear on the title page. + +Link to a copy of the original presentation + +Inserts a hyperlink to download a copy of the presentation file. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c26fc30c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 5 +/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 5 +Defines a button style for navigation through the presentation slides. +
+This page is not visible if you have unmarked the Create title page check box, or if you have selected either automatic or WebCast export. +
+ +
+Select button style +Specifies whether you want to insert navigation buttons in your presentation. You can also select the style of the buttons. + +Text only +Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons. +Selection field +Displays the available button styles. Click on a button style to select it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04f39f95c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 6 +/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 6 +Defines the colors for the publication. +
+Text formatting is obtained from the drawing or presentation. This page is skipped if you unmark the Create title page check box or if you select automatic or WebCast export. +
+ +
+Select color scheme +Determines the color scheme and the colors for text and background. + +Apply color scheme from document +Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document. + +Use browser colors +Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser. + +Use custom color scheme +Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects. + +Text +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation. + +Hyperlink +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation. + +Active Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation. + +Visited Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation. + +Background +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83d876e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp + + + +Group Element Wizard +The Group Element Wizard starts automatically when you insert a Group Box into a document. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Create +Creates the object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0deab228 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Data +/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Group Element Wizard: Data + Specifies which option fields are contained inside the group box. +
+
+ +
+ Which names do you want to give the option fields? + Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form. This entry corresponds to the Label property of the option field. + Accept + + + + + + + >> + + + Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list. + + + +
+ Enter the label for each option field of the group that you want to create and copy the label to the list by clicking the arrow button. Repeat this procedure until all the option fields are defined. + Option fields + Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box. + Remove + + + + + + + << + + + Removes the selected option fields from the list. + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ddd319f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection + Determines that you want one option field to be selected as the default choice. +
+ The default settings will be accepted if you open the form in the user mode. With these settings you determine the control property Default Status. +
+ +
+ Should one option field be selected as a default? + Specifies whether you want to set default settings for the option box. + Yes, the following: + Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form. Choose the option field from the box. + List box + Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form. + No, one particular field is not going to be selected + Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d65e0d74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Field Values +/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Group Element Wizard: Field Values + Assigns a reference value to each option field. +
+ Select a field from the option fields list and enter the corresponding reference value. +
+ +
+ Which value do you want to assign to each option? + Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field. + Option fields + Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..511b5b0b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Database Field +/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Group Element Wizard: Database Field +This page is only visible if the document is linked to a database. It specifies whether the reference values should be saved in the database. +
+Indicate where to save the reference values. A reference value can represent the current state of the group box in a database. +
+ +
+This page is only displayed if the document is already linked to a database. +Do you want to save the value in a database field?UFI: removed three help ids +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field: +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database. The values are written in the data field selected in the list box. The list box displays all the field names from the database table that the form is linked to. +List box +Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form. +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b432bc851 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group +/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group + Specifies a label for the option group. +
+
+ +
+ Which caption is to be given to your option group? + Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form. The text you enter here will correspond to the Label property of the group box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c395ee580 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Document Converter +/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp + + +mw deleted all index entries because of guide import_ms.xhp + + + + +Document Converter +Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename]. + +
+ +
+The wizard converts documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. +The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: + + +Document Converter Summary +Displays a summary which shows what will be converted when you click Convert. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ac1e3758 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Document Converter Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp + + + +
+Document Converter Page 1 +Specifies the type of Microsoft Office documents that will be converted. +
+
+ +
+Microsoft Office +Converts Microsoft Office documents into the OpenDocument format. +Word documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents. +Excel documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents. +PowerPoint documents +Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents. +Create Log file +Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted. +Continue to the next page of the Document Converter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f98e128a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Document converter continuation pages +/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp + + + +
+Document converter continuation pages +Specifies, for each template type and document type, the directory to be read from and the directory to be written to. +
+
+ +
+Templates +Determines whether templates are to be converted, and how they are converted. +Text templates +Note that the "Text templates" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word templates". +Specifies that templates are to be converted. +
+ +Including subdirectories +Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files. + +Import from +Specifies the directory containing the source files. + +Save to +Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written. + +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired path. +
+Documents +Determines whether and how documents are converted. +Text documents +Note that the "Text documents" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word documents". +Indicates that the documents are to be converted. + +Here you can return to the main page of the Document Converter Wizard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..419edf9df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Euro Converter Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp + + + +Euro; Euro Converter Wizard +wizards; Euro Converter +converters; Euro converter +currencies; converters + + + + +Euro Converter Wizard +Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros. + +Only closed files are converted. It is possible, however, to use the Euro Converter in an open $[officename] Calc document. In this case, a separate dialog opens. This dialog is described at the end of this section. +
+ +
+Only the currencies of the countries participating in the European Monetary Union are converted. +Extent +Single $[officename] Calc document +Converts a single $[officename] Calc file. To convert fields and tables in $[officename] Writer, first mark the Also convert fields and tables in text documents check box. +Complete Directory +Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.Currencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Source directory / Source Document +Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted. +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document. +Including Subfolders +Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included. +Also convert fields and tables in text documents +Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents. +Values in the text document that are not in fields or tables are not converted. +Temporarily unprotect sheet without query +Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password. +Target Directory +Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved. + +... + +Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files. +Cancel +Closes the Euro Converter. +Help +Activates the help for the dialog. +Convert +Starts the conversion. +During conversion, a page showing the progress status is displayed. +Back +Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter. +
+If the current document is a $[officename] Calc document or template, you can call up the Euro Converter using the corresponding icon in the Tools bar. This icon is hidden by default. To display the Euro Converter icon, click the arrow at the end of the Tools bar, select the Visible Buttons command and activate the Euro Converter icon. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Euro Converter + + +
+
+The Euro Converter dialog contains the following functions: +Entire document +Converts the entire document. +Currencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Selection +Select the cells you want to convert in this range, if you did not mark the Entire document check box. Select an option and then click the desired entries in the Templates / Currency ranges field. The selected range will be visible as such in the document. Click Convert to carry out the conversion. +Cell Styles +All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted. +Currency cells in the current sheet +All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted. +Currency cells in the entire document +All currency cells in the active document will be converted. +Selected range +All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted. All cells must have the same format so that they can be recognized as a selected range. +Templates / Currency ranges +Displays the ranges to be converted from the list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02d0f29f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Address Data Source +/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + + +

Address Data Source

+This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+You can register address data and other data sources in $[officename] at any time: + +

Please select the type of your external address book

+Not all types are available on all systems. + +

Thunderbird

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove. + +

KDE Address book

+Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book. + +

macOS Address book

+Select this option if you already use an address book in macOS Address book. + +

Evolution

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution. + +

Evolution LDAP

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP. + +

Groupwise

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise. + +

Other external data source

+Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename]. + +

Cancel

+Exits the wizard without implementing any changes. + +Go to previous step. + +Go to next step. + +

Create

+Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a28c06cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Additional Settings +/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Additional Settings

+Allows you to enter additional settings for other external data sources. +
+
+ +
+ +

Settings

+Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..959ad6b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Table +/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Select Table +Specifies a table from the Seamonkey / Netscape address book source that is used as the address book in $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+All tables from the first user profile will be registered for this data source in $[officename]. You must specify one as the table that will be used in the $[officename] templates. + +List box +Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates. +You can make changes to the templates and documents at a later time by choosing Edit - Exchange Database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b8420960 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Data Source Title +/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Data Source Title +Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer. +
+
+ +
+ +Location +Specifies the location of the database file. + +Browse +Specifies the location using a file dialog. +Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME +Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the Data sources pane (CommandCtrl+Shift+F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file. +Address book name +Specifies the data source name. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2829f24fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Field Assignment +/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Field Assignment +Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the field assignment. +
+
+ +
+ +Field Assignment +Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f42674ce3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Find Bar + /text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp + + + + + + Find toolbar + + + + +
+

Find Bar

+ The Find toolbar can be used to quickly search the contents of %PRODUCTNAME documents. +
+ Use the shortcut CommandCtrl + F to quickly open the Find toolbar. + +

Find Text

+ Enter the text to be searched in the document. Press Enter to perform the search. + +

Find Previous

+ Moves the cursor and selects the previous match of the search text. + + + + +Find Previous Icon + + + + Find Previous Icon + + +
+ +

Find Next

+ Moves the cursor and selects the next match of the search text. + + + + +Find Next Icon + + + + Find Next Icon + + +
+ +

Find All

+ Highlights all matches in the document. + +

Match Case

+ Choose this option to perform case-sensitive search. + + + +

Formatted Display

+ Performs the search considering the formatted value in a cell. + + + +

Find and Replace

+ Opens the Find and Replace dialog, which provides more options for searching the document. + + + + +Find and Replace Icon + + + + Find and Replace Icon + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f816685b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fontwork + /text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp + + + +
+

Fontwork

+ The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object. +
+

Fontwork Gallery

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Gallery + + + + Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview. Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Shape

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Shape + + + + Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Same Letter Heights

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Same Letter Height + + + + Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Alignment

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Alignment + + + + Opens the Fontwork Alignment window. + Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Character Spacing

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Character Spacing + + + + Select the character spacing values to apply to the Fontwork object. + Custom: Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value. + + + Value: enter the Fontwork character spacing value. + + +
+

Toggle Extrusion

+ + + + + Icon Toggle Extrusion + + + + Switches the 3D effects on and off for the Fontwork objects. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eda6b989d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +First Steps +/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp + + + +samples and templates +templates; new documents from templates +business cards; using templates + +

First Steps

+

How to simplify your work using samples and templates

+ +%PRODUCTNAME includes many sample documents and ready-to-use templates. You can access these by choosing File - New - Templates, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+N. +When you open one of the templates, a new document is created based on this template. +Click the Browse online templates button in the dialog to select and download more templates. +You can also use the various wizards (under the File - Wizards menu) to create your own templates, which you can use as a basis for further documents. +
+Working with %PRODUCTNAME +Working with Templates + +Working with Text Documents + +Working with Spreadsheets + +Working with Presentations + +Working with Drawings + +Working with Formulas + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..248de3bae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +Accessibility in %PRODUCTNAME +/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp + + + + +accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME features + +

Accessibility in %PRODUCTNAME

+ The following accessibility features are part of %PRODUCTNAME: + + + Support of external devices and applications + + + Access to all functions by keyboard. The keys that replace the mouse actions are listed in the %PRODUCTNAME Help + + + Improved readability of screen contents + + + Zooming of on-screen user interface for menus, icons, and documents + The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. + + + Please note that accessibility support relies on Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well. +
+ + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b047530f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Turning Extended Tips On and Off +/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; extended tips on/off +extended tips in Help +tips;extended tips in Help +tooltips;extended tips +activating;extended help tips + +Turning Extended Tips On and Off + + +Extended tips provide a brief description of the function of a particular icon, text box or menu command when you rest your cursor on that item. +To turn Extended Tips on and off: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. +A check mark indicates that the extended tips are activated. + + +To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: + + +Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. +A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8505f56fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer +/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp + + + +ActiveX control +installing;ActiveX control +Internet; Internet Explorer for displaying $[officename] documents +$[officename] documents;viewing and editing in Internet Explorer +viewing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer +editing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer + +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer + +Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. +Installing the ActiveX control + + +Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. + + +Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar. Choose Settings. + + +In Settings, click Apps. + + +In the Apps & features list, click %PRODUCTNAME, then click Change. + + +In the Installation Wizard, select Modify. + + +Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. Open the sub menu of the icon and select to install the feature. + + +Click Next and Install. + + +Viewing $[officename] documents + + +In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer document, for example. + + +Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. +You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. + + +Editing $[officename] documents +The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. + + +Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. + + +Edit the copy of the document. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..710b79fb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Assistive Tools in $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp + + + +accessibility; $[officename] assistive technology +assistive technology in $[officename] +screen readers +screen magnifiers +magnifiers + +Assistive Tools in $[officename] + +$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. +A current list of supported assistive tools can be found on the Wiki at https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Accessibility. +Supported Input Devices +$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. + + +Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. + + +On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. + + +Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays. + + +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b61e109a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + Automatic Redaction + /text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp + + + + + spreadsheet; auto-redact + presentations; auto-redact + text documents; auto-redact contents + automatic redaction + + +
+ + +

Auto-Redact

+ Use automatic redaction to define words and patterns that are automatically marked for redaction. +
+ Automatic redaction makes it easier to redact %PRODUCTNAME documents that have multiple portions of text that need to be hidden due to sensitivity or privacy issues. +
+ Choose Tools - Auto-Redact +
+ This feature comes in handy in documents that have multiple occurrences of names and other personal information (e.g. credit cards, phone numbers, etc). Redacting all these portions of the document manually would required significant effort, but with Automatic Redaction this task can be automated in a more efficient manner. +

Creating Targets

+ Targets are rules and patterns used by Automatic Redaction to find portions of the document to be automatically marked for redaction. + To create a new target, click the Add Target button. + The Add Target dialog appears, to let you define a Name for the new target, as well as to choose its Type and Content. There are three types of targets to choose from in the Type dropdown list: + + + Text: Automatic Redaction will look for all occurrences of the specified text and mark them for redaction. + + + Regular expression: Define a regular expression to use to search the document. All matches will be marked for redaction. + + + Predefined: Choose predefined regular expressions to automatically redact contents, such as credit card numbers, email addresses and so on. + + + + Add all targets that you want to apply to your document and click OK. This opens the document as a drawing in %PRODUCTNAME Draw with all targets automatically redacted with the Rectangle Redaction tool. + Continue redacting other portions of the generated document and then print or export it to PDF. + Refer to the help page List of Regular Expressions to learn more about how to use regular expressions in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Exporting and Importing Targets

+ Click the Save Targets button to save all defined targets in the document as a JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) file. + Click the Load Targets button to import and apply the targets defined in a JSON file to another %PRODUCTNAME document. + The document automatic redaction targets are saved alongside the document. Hence, they are available in the document after you save and close it. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..630010dfc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + Turning off Automatic URL Recognition + /text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; URL recognition + recognizing URLs automatically + automatic hyperlink formatting + URL;turning off URL recognition + hyperlinks;turning off automatic recognition + links;turning off automatic recognition + predictive text, see also AutoCorrect function/AutoFill function/AutoInput function/word completion/text completion + +

Turning off Automatic URL Recognition +

+ When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. + +The following texts are changed to hyperlinks: + +Empty tablecells used for formatting + + + + Text + + + Autocorrected hyperlink + + + + + Email addresses + + + x@x, mailto:x + + + + + Web addresses + + + http://x, https://x, www.x.x + + + + + File addresses + + file://x, ftp://x, smb://x + + +
+where x is one or more characters. + + If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. +

Undo URL Recognition

+ + + When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink, press Command +Ctrl+Z to undo this formatting. + + + If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink, open the context menu and choose Remove Hyperlink. + + +

Turn off URL Recognition

+ + + Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. + If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + + + In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. + + + If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. + In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20c0e1264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows +/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp + + + +Gallery; hiding/showing +data source view; showing +Navigator; docking +Styles window; docking +windows; hiding/showing/docking +docking; windows +undocking windows +showing;docked windows +hiding;docked windows + + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows + +Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator window. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. +Docking and Undocking Windows +To dock a window, do one of the following: + + +Drag the window by its title bar to the side, or + + +Double-click inside a vacant area of the window while holding down the CommandCtrl key. In the Styles window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons while holding down the CommandCtrl key. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. + + +These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows + + + + +Icon + + + +Click the button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..730a8c763 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +/text/shared/guide/background.xhp + + + +backgrounds; defining colors/pictures +colors; backgrounds +pictures; backgrounds +pages; backgrounds in all applications +watermarks +text, see also text documents, paragraphs and characters + + MW deleted 6 entries and changed "pages;" +

Defining Graphics or Colors in the Background of Pages (Watermark) +

+ + + Choose Format - Page Style. + + + On the Area tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. + + + In spreadsheets this background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere. +
+ + + + + + Area tab page + Backgrounds in Text + Backgrounds in Spreadsheets +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e349d64a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Defining Borders for Paragraphs +/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp + + + + + + +borders, see also frames +paragraphs; defining borders +borders; for paragraphs +frames; around paragraphs +inserting;paragraph borders +defining;paragraph borders + + mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Defining Borders for Paragraphs + + Setting a Predefined Border Style + + + Place the cursor in the paragraph for which you want to define a border. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + Setting a Customized Border Style + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..178ea9457 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells +/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp + + + + +tables in text; defining borders +tables in spreadsheets;defining borders +borders; for tables +frames; around tables +defining;table borders + + mw deleted "adding;" +

Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells +

+

Setting a Predefined Border Style

+ + + Select the table cells that you want to modify. + + + Click the Borders icon on the Table toolbar (Writer) or on the Line and Filling bar to open the Borders window. + + + Click one of the predefined border styles. + This adds the selected style to the current border style of the table cells. Select the blank border style at the top left of the Borders window to clear all border styles. + + +

Setting a Customized Border Style

+ + + Select the table cells that you want to modify. + + + Choose Table - Properties - Borders (Writer) or Format - Cells - Borders (Calc). + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + If you select more than one row or column, you can change the middle lines between rows or columns. Select the middle markers in the User-defined area. + + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e98110b42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Line Breaks in Cells + /text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp + + + +line breaks; in cells + cells; line breaks + text flow; in cells + text breaks in cells + wrapping text; in cells + words; wrapping in cells + automatic line breaks + new lines in cells + inserting;line breaks in cells + tables;inserting line breaks + +

Inserting Line Breaks in Cells +

+

Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells

+To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the CommandCtrl+Enter keys. +This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. +You can search for a newline character in the Find & Replace dialog by searching for \n as a regular expression. You can use the text function CHAR(10) to insert a newline character into a text formula. +

Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping

+ + + Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. + + + Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. + + + Select Wrap text automatically. + + + +

Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables

+ To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. + An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. +
+ Alignment +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5bfcf881 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Title of a Document +/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+titles; changing +changing;document titles +documents; changing titles + +Changing the Title of a Document + +You can specify a title for your document. Some file manager utilities can display the titles next to the filenames of your documents. +How to change the title of the current document + + +Choose File - Properties. This opens the Document Properties dialog. + + +Select the Description tab. + + +Type the new title in the Title box and click OK. + + +
+
+Document Properties +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6b6c48eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Axes +/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing axes +axes in charts +editing; chart axes +formatting; axes in charts + +Editing Chart Axes + +To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. + + +Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). + + +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. + + +
+Format - Object properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b421d441 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Adding Texture to Chart Bars +/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp + + + + + + +charts; bars with textures +textures;on chart bars +inserting;textures on chart bars + + MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Adding Texture to Chart Bars + + You can add texture to the bars in a graph or chart (instead of the default colors) via graphics: + + + Enter edit mode by double-clicking on the chart. + + + Click on any bar of the bar series you want to edit. All bars of this series are now selected. + If you want to edit only one bar, click again on that bar. + + + In the context menu choose Object Properties. Then choose the Area tab. + + + Click on Image. In the list box select an image as a texture for the currently selected bars. Click OK to accept the setting. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b2e07f10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Charts +/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; inserting +plotting data as charts +inserting; charts +spreadsheets; inserting charts +charts; editing data +editing; chart data +moved many index entries to new schart/01 files +Inserting Charts + +Different methods exist to start a chart: + + +Insert a chart based on data from cells in Calc or Writer. +These charts update automatically when the source data changes.currently only in Calc. Writer: bug? + + +Insert a chart with a default data set, and then use the Data Table dialog to enter your own data for that chart. +These charts can be created in Writer, Impress and Draw. is this "not in Calc" a bug or a design philosophy thing? + + +Copy a chart from Calc or Writer into another document. +These charts are snapshots of the data at the time of copying. They do not change when the source data changes. + + +In Calc, a chart is an object on a sheet that can be copied and pasted on another sheet of the same document, the data series will stay linked to the range on the other sheet. If it is pasted on another Calc document, it has its own chart data table and is no more linked to the original range. +Chart in a Calc spreadsheet + + +Click inside the cell range that you want to present in your chart. + + +Click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard. + + +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. + + +Chart in a Writer text document +In a Writer document, you can insert a chart based on the values in a Writer table. + + +Click inside the Writer table. + + +Choose Insert - Chart. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard.no live preview - is this a bug? + + +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. + + +Chart based on values of its own + + +In Writer, Draw or Impress, choose Insert - Chart to insert a chart based on default data. + + +You can change the default data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing View - Chart Data Table. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6c95d76e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Legends +/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing legends +legends; charts +editing; chart legends +formatting; chart legends + +Editing Chart Legends + +To edit a chart legend: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Choose Format - Legend or double-click on the legend. This opens the Legend dialog. + + +Choose from the available tabs to make modifications, then click OK. + + +To select the legend, first double-click on the chart (see step 1), then click on the legend. You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse.ufi: removed an obsolete note +
+Format - Object Properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3bf5d588 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Titles +/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing titles +editing; chart titles +titles; editing in charts + +Editing Chart Titles + +To edit a chart title that you have inserted into a $[officename] document: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Double-click on an existing title text. A gray border appears around the text and you can now make changes. Press Enter to create a new line. +If no title text exists, choose Insert - Titles to enter the text in a dialog. + + +A single-click on the title allows you to move it with the mouse. + + +If you want to change the formatting of the main title, choose Format - Title - Main Title. This opens the Title dialog. + + +Select one of the available tabs in the dialog to make modifications. + + +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. + + +
+Format - Object properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e90ec8875 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + Document Classification + /text/shared/guide/classification.xhp + + + + + +

Document Classification

+ + classification;BAILS levels + classification;BAF category + classification;security levels + classification;document + classification;classification bar + document;classification + + +Document classification and security is an important issue for businesses and governments. +Information is exchanged between users and organizations that collaborate to pursue a business goal. Where sensitive information is involved, it is assumed that the parties will have agreed what information is sensitive and how such information will be identified and handled. Any recipient of a resource will rely upon the provider of the information to follow the agreed procedures to identify the sensitivity of the information. +%PRODUCTNAME provides standardized means for such sensitivity information to be expressed and may be used between parties if interoperable systems are to be implemented. It provides a set of standard “fields” that can be used to hold sensitivity information. It does not attempt to define what the contents of these “fields” should be. This approach is an improvement upon the only alternative that exists at the moment, which is for the provider to use an arbitrary means to express sensitivity that may not be useful to a recipient. +While this standard has been developed with the intent that it would be applicable in any domain of activity, %PRODUCTNAME retained the aerospace and defense industry nomenclature and categories, where sensitivity marking results from national security, export control and intellectual property policies. +%PRODUCTNAME implemented the open standards produced by TSCP (Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation, Inc.) independent of a specific vendor. Two of them are interesting: + + + + Business Authentication Framework (BAF) specifies how to describe the existing policy (which is probably some legal text) in a machine-readable format. + + + Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS) specifies how to refer to such a BAF policy in a document. The concepts in BAILS are so generic that they can be applied to any format that supports document-level user-defined properties. + + +

BAF Categories

+ + classification;displayed in user interface + classification;headers and footers + classification;watermark + classification;categories + + +The default BAF categories for %PRODUCTNAME are listed below. +Only the "Intellectual Properties" category will modify the layout of the document with a watermark, fields in the header and footer and an information bar on top of the document area. Each item inserted in the document is controlled by the classification configuration file. +

Intellectual Property

+Intellectual property is a generic term for the nature of the contents of the document. Select this category for general purpose document classification. +

National Security

+Selects the category of this document for the national security policy type. The selected category is saved together with the document as BAILS metadata in the file properties and no modifications is carried in the document layout or the user interface. +

Export Control

+Selects the category of this document for the export control policy type. The selected category is saved together with the document as BAILS metadata in the file properties and no modifications is carried in the document layout or the user interface. +Refer to your corporate data security policy and information security officers for support in document classification. + +
+

Default levels of classification

+ + classification levels;Internal use only + classification levels;Confidential + classification levels;General Business + classification levels;Non-Business + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides default levels of document classification (BAILS) shown below, sorted by increasing level of business sensitivity: +
+ + + Non-Business: Information in document has no impact in business, if made public. + + + General Business: Minor impact. Information has impact in business, can generate embarrassments, minor damage in brand image, if made public. + + + Confidential: Modest impact. Information disclosed can damage business brand, can generate negative media coverage and loss of revenue. + + + Internal use only: Major damage. Negative national media, lawsuits, fines, long term brand damages. + +
+
+
+

Customizing classification levels.

+ + custom;classification levels + classification levels;customizing + + +%PRODUCTNAME allows customization of the levels of classification for your business. To customize the number and the name of the levels, copy the file example.xml located in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths - Classification into a local folder and edit the contents. +Use the file with your %PRODUCTNAME locale in the name as example. +Save the file and make the adequate changes to the classification path above to access the file. +Your system administrator can place the file in a network folder and make all users access the classification settings file. +
+

Pasting contents in documents with different levels of classification.

+ + document classification;pasting contents + +To prevent a breach in the security policy, contents with high classification level pasted to documents with lower classification level are not allowed. %PRODUCTNAME will display a warning message wherever it detects that the contents of the clipboard have higher security classification than the target document. + +
+ + + TSCP (Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation, Inc.) website. + + + Business Authentication Framework (BAF) document (PDF) + + + Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS) document (PDF) + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88dbcc40a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + Using Remote Files + /text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + remote file service;setup + + +

Setting up a remote file service connection

+
+ +
+To enable a remote server connection, use one of these methods: + + + + Click on the Remote Files button in the Start Center. + + + Select File - Open Remote + + + Select File - Save Remote + + Then press Add Service button in the dialog to open the File Services dialog. +
+ + WebDAV;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;WebDAV + + +

Connecting to a WebDAV server

+In the File Services dialog, set: + + + + Type: WebDAV + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Port: port number (usually 80) + + + Select Secure Connection checkbox to access the service through https protocol and port 443 + + + Label: give a name for this connection. This name will show in the Service listbox of the Open or Save remote files dialog. + + + Root: enter the path to the root URL of your account. + +Note: the root of the file service is provided by the file service administrator and may consists of scripts files, parameters and paths. +Once the connection is defined, click OK to connect. The dialog will dim until the connection is established with the server. A dialog asking for the user name and the password may pop up to let you log in the server. Proceed entering the right user name and password. + + SSH;remote file service setup + FTP;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;FTP + remote file service setup;SSH + + +

Connecting to FTP and SSH servers

+ + + + + Type: FTP or SSH + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Port: port number (usually 21 for FTP and 22 for SSH). + + + User, Password: the username and password of the FTP service. + + + Remember password: Check to store the password in %PRODUCTNAME’s user profile. The password will be secured by the master password in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Internet passwords. + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to a Windows share

+ + remote file service;Windows share + Windows share;remote file service + Windows share;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;Windows share + + + + + + + Type: Windows Share + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Share: The Windows share. + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to Google Drive

+ + remote file service;Google Drive + Google Drive;remote file service + Google Drive;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;Google Drive + + + + + + + Type: Google Drive. + + + User, Password: the username and password of the Google account. + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to a CMIS server

+ + remote file service setup;other file services + remote file service setup;Lotus + remote file service setup;SharePoint + remote file service setup;IBM + remote file service setup;Nuxeo + remote file service setup;Alfresco + remote file service setup;CMIS server + + + + + + + Type: Select the type of server in the list. + + + Host: the server URL. A URL default template is provided according to the server type. Set data accordingly. + + + User, Password: the username and password of the CMIS service. + + + + + + Repository: select the files repository in the drop-down list. + + + Refresh button: click to refresh the contents of the repository list. + + + + + + + + +
+ +Opening and saving documents in remote file servers +Checking-in and checking-out documents +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3be11e54 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + Using Remote Files + /text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Opening and saving files on remote servers

+Remote Files Service User Guide +%PRODUCTNAME can open and save files stored on remote servers. Keeping files on remote servers allows to work with the documents using different computers. For example, you can work on a document in the office during the day and edit it at home for last-minute changes. Storing files on a remote server also protects them from computer loss or hard disk failure. Some servers are also able to check in and check out files, thus controlling their usage and access. +%PRODUCTNAME supports many document servers that use well known network protocols such as FTP, WebDAV, Windows share, and SSH. It also supports popular services like Google Drive as well as commercial and open source servers that implement the OASIS CMIS standard. +To work with a remote file service you must first setup a remote file connection. +
+ + + opening;CMIS remote file + opening;remote file + remote file service;opening file + opening remote file + + +

To open a file in a remote file service

+ + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Choose File - Open Remote in any %PRODUCTNAME module + + + Click the Remote Files button the Start Center + + + The Remote Files dialog appears. + + + + Select the file and click Open or press Enter. + + +The Remote Files dialog which then appears has many parts. The upper list box contains the list of remote servers you have previously defined. The line below the list box shows the path to access the folder. On the left is the folder structure of the user space in the server. The main pane displays the files in the remote folder. + +
+ + remote file service;file lock + remote file service;version control + remote file service;working copy + remote file service;checkout + remote file service;checkin + + +

Checking out and checking in files

+The Check Out and Check In actions control updates to the document and prevent unwanted overwrites in a CMIS remote service. +Checking out a document locks it, preventing other users from writing changes to it. Only one user can have a particular document checked out (locked) at any time. Checking in a document or canceling the checkout unlocks the document. +There are no checkin/checkout controls for remote files in Windows Shares, WebDAV, FTP and SSH services. +When a file is open from a CMIS remote file service, %PRODUCTNAME displays a Check Out button on the top message area. Click the Check Out button to lock the file in the server to prevent edition by another user. Alternatively choose File - Check Out. +%PRODUCTNAME creates a working copy of the file in the server (and inserts the string (Working Copy) in the file name) when a file is checked out. Every edition and save operation is done in the working copy. You can save your file as many times you want. When you finished your changes, check in the file. +To check in the file, choose File - Check In. A dialog opens to insert comments about the last edition. These comments are recorded in the CMIS server for version control. The working copy replaces the existing file and its version number is updated. +To cancel a checkout, choose File - Cancel Checkout. A warning message will inform that the latest edition will be discarded. If confirmed, no version updates occurs. +Remember to check in the file when finishing using it. Not doing so will lock the file and no other user will be allowed to modify it. +
+ + remote file service;saving to remote server + remote file service;saving + + +

To save a file in a remote file server

+ + + + Do one of the following + + + + + + If the file was opened from a CMIS server, choose File - Save, click on the Save button or hit Ctrl + S. + + + If the file is not stored in a CMIS server, choose File - Save Remote or long-click the Save icon and select Save Remote File. + + + The Remote files dialog appears. Select the remote file server. + + + + In the Filter list box, select the desired format. + + + Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. + + + When you finish working with the file, check it in. To do so, choose File - Check In. + + + + remote file service;CMIS properties + remote file service;file properties + + +

Properties of files stored in CMIS servers

+Files stored in CMIS server have properties and metadata not available in a local storage. These metadata are important for controls and debugging of the CMIS connection and server implementation. All parameters displayed are read-only. +Choose File - Properties, CMIS tab. + +
+Setting up a remote file service +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d9515b35 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + +Collaboration +/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp + + + + +sharing documents +collaboration +file locking with collaboration +locked documents +MW changed the index entries to one level entries.MW added two index entries with "lock" +

Collaboration

+In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, Impress, and Draw, only one user at a time can open any document for writing. In Calc, many users can open the same spreadsheet for writing at the same time.Tools - Share Document menu + + + +Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.Share Document dialog - Share this spreadsheet with other users + +Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document. +

Collaboration in Calc

+In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, document sharing allows simultaneous write access for many users. Every user who wants to collaborate should enter a name on the %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data tab page. +Some commands are not available (grayed out) when change tracking or document sharing is activated. For a new spreadsheet you cannot apply or insert the grayed out elements. Spec Doc owner told me that this is work in progress and may change any time +

Creating a new spreadsheet

+User A creates a new spreadsheet document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The user does not want to share the spreadsheet for collaboration. +User A opens, edits, and saves the document as described above for Writer, Impress, and Draw document. + + +The user wants to share the document for collaboration. +The user chooses Tools - Share Document to activate the collaboration features for this document. A dialog opens where the user can choose to enable or disable sharing. If the user enables sharing, the document will be saved in shared mode, which is also shown on the title bar. + +The Tools - Share Document command can be used to switch the mode for the current document from unshared mode to shared mode. If you want to use a shared document in unshared mode, you would save the shared document using another name or path. This creates a copy of the spreadsheet that is not shared. +

Opening a spreadsheet

+User A opens a spreadsheet document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The spreadsheet document is not in shared mode. +The user can open, edit, and save the document as described above for Writer, Impress, and Draw documents. + + +The spreadsheet document is in shared mode. +The user sees a message that the document is in shared mode and that some features are not available in this mode. The user can disable this message for the future. After clicking OK, the document is opened in shared mode. +Resolve Conflicts dialog + + +If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.Keep Mine + +Keeps your change, voids the other change.Keep Other + +Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.Keep All Mine + +Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.Keep All Others + +Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes. +

Saving a shared spreadsheet document

+User A saves a shared document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The document was not modified and saved by another user since user A opened the document. +The document is saved. + + +The document was modified and saved by another user since user A opened the document. +If the changes do not conflict, the document is saved. +If the changes conflict, the Resolve Conflicts dialog will be shown. User A must decide for the conflicts which version to keep, "Keep Mine" or "Keep Other". When all conflicts are resolved, the document is saved. While user A resolves the conflicts, no other user is able to save the shared document. + + +Another user tries to save the shared document and resolves conflicts in this moment. +User A sees a message that a merge-in is in progress. User A can choose to cancel the save command for now, or retry saving some time later. + +When a user successfully saves a shared spreadsheet, the document will be reloaded after the save command, so that the spreadsheet shows the latest version of all changes that got saved by all users. A message shows that "foreign changes have been added" when another user did change some contents. +

Collaboration in Writer, Impress, and Draw

+For all modules Writer, Impress, Draw, and for Calc when document sharing is not enabled, a file locking is possible. This file locking is available even when accessing the same document from different operating systems: +User A opens a document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The document is not locked by any other user. +This document will be opened for read and write access by user A. The document will be locked for other users until user A closes the document. + + +The document is marked as "read-only" by the file system. +This document will be opened in read-only mode. Editing is not allowed. User A can save the document using another document name or another path. User A can edit this copy. + + +The document is locked by another user. +User A sees a dialog that tells the user the document is locked. The dialog offers to open the document in read-only mode, or to open a copy for editing, or to cancel the Open command. + +

User access permissions and sharing documents

+Some conditions must be met on operating systems with a user permission management. + + +The shared file needs to reside in a location which is accessible by all collaborators. + + +The file permissions for both the document and the corresponding lock file need to be set so that all collaborators can create, delete, and change the files. + +Write access also enables other users to (accidentally or deliberately) delete or change a file. +
+Save As +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7293d8094 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Configuring $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp + + + +configuring; $[officename] +customizing; $[officename] + +Configuring $[officename] + +
+You can customize your $[officename] to suit your needs. + + +You are free to change the items on the menu bar. You can delete items, add new ones, copy items from one menu to another, rename them, and so on. + + +The toolbars may be freely configured. + + +You can change the shortcut keys. + + +To change these, choose Tools - Customize to open the Customize dialog. +
+
+Tools - Customize +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e072fee62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using Context Menus +/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +context menus +menus;activating context menus +opening; context menus +activating;context menus + +Using Context Menus + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7008777c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,2002 @@ + + + + + + File Conversion Filters Tables + /text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp + + + +
+ + filters;document conversion + document conversion;filters + convert-to;filters + command line document conversion;filters + module file filters + +

+ File Conversion Filter Names +

+ + + Tables with filter names for command line document conversion. + + +
+

Usage

+Filter names are used when importing and exporting files in alien formats and converting files formats through the command line. +soffice --convert-to OutputFileExtension[:OutputFilterName[:OutputFilterParams[,param]]] [--outdir output_dir] + +soffice --infilter="InputFilterName[:InputFilterParams[,param]]" +--infilter="Text (encoded):UTF8,LF,Liberation Mono,en-US". + + + + Filter Name + API Name + Media Type (Extension) + + +
+ + command line document conversion; filters for WRITER + +

Filters for WRITER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + HTML Document (Writer) + + + "HTML (StarWriter)" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + Microsoft WinWord 1/2/5 + + + "MS WinWord 5" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 6.0 + + + "MS WinWord 6.0" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 95 + + + "MS Word 95" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 95 Template + + + "MS Word 95 Vorlage" + + + application/msword (dot) + + + + + Word 97–2003 + + + "MS Word 97" + + + application/msword (doc wps) + + + + + Word 97–2003 Template + + + "MS Word 97 Vorlage" + + + application/msword (dot wpt) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Text Document + + + "OpenDocument Text Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text-flat-xml (fodt odt xml) + + + + + Rich Text + + + "Rich Text Format" + + + application/rtf (rtf) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Text Document + + + "StarOffice XML (Writer)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.writer (sxw) + + + + + WordPerfect Document + + + "WordPerfect" + + + application/vnd.wordperfect (wpd) + + + + + Microsoft Works Document + + + "MS_Works" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + Microsoft Write + + + "MS_Write" + + + application/x-mswrite (wri) + + + + + Microsoft Word for DOS + + + "DosWord" + + + None (doc) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Text Document + + + "ClarisWorks" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Microsoft Word for Mac (v1 - v5) + + + "Mac_Word" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Works for Mac Text Document (v1 - v4) + + + "Mac_Works" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + MacWrite Document + + + "MacWrite" + + + application/macwriteii (mw mcw) + + + + + Mariner Write Mac Classic v1.6 - v3.5 + + + "Mariner_Write" + + + (mwd) + + + + + WriteNow Document + + + "WriteNow" + + + (wn nx^d) + + + + + AbiWord Document + + + "AbiWord" + + + application/x-abiword (abw zabw) + + + + + T602 Document + + + "T602Document" + + + application/x-t602 (602) + + + + + Lotus WordPro Document + + + "LotusWordPro" + + + application/vnd.lotus-wordpro (lwp) + + + + + Text + + + "Text" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Text - Choose Encoding + + + "Text (encoded)" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Hangul WP 97 + + + "writer_MIZI_Hwp_97" + + + application/x-hwp (hwp) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Text Document Template + + + "writer_StarOffice_XML_Writer_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.writer.template (stw) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "writer_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Text Document + + + "writer8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text (odt) + + + + + ODF Text Document Template + + + "writer8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text-template (ott) + + + + + Word 2007–365 + + + "MS Word 2007 XML" + + + application/msword (docx) + + + + + Word 2007–365 Template + + + "MS Word 2007 XML Template" + + + application/msword (dotx dotm) + + + + + Word 2007–365 VBA + + + "MS Word 2007 XML VBA" + + + application/msword (docm) + + + + + Office Open XML Text (Transitional) + + + "Office Open XML Text" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.document (docx docm) + + + + + Office Open XML Text Template (Transitional) + + + "Office Open XML Text Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.template (dotx dotm) + + + + + Writer Layout XML + + + "writer_layout_dump" + + + None (xml) + + + + + Writer Indexing Export XML + + + "writer_indexing_export" + + + None (xml) + + + + + BroadBand eBook + + + "BroadBand eBook" + + + application/x-sony-bbeb (lrf) + + + + + FictionBook 2.0 + + + "FictionBook 2" + + + application/x-fictionbook+xml (fb2 zip) + + + + + PalmDoc eBook + + + "PalmDoc" + + + application/x-aportisdoc (pdb) + + + + + Plucker eBook + + + "Plucker eBook" + + + application/prs.plucker (pdb) + + + + + Apple Pages + + + "Apple Pages" + + + application/x-iwork-pages-sffpages (pages) + + + + + Legacy Mac Text Document + + + "MWAW_Text_Document" + + + None (*) + + + + + Palm Text Document + + + "Palm_Text_Document" + + + application/vnd.palm (pdb) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Text Document + + + "StarOffice_Writer" + + + None (sdw) + + + + + EPUB Document + + + "EPUB" + + + application/epub+zip (epub) + + + + + Pocket Word + + + "PocketWord File" + + + application/x-pocket-word (psw) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for CALC + +

Filters for CALC

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Data Interchange Format + + + "DIF" + + + None (dif) + + + + + HTML Document (Calc) + + + "HTML (StarCalc)" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Spreadsheet + + + "OpenDocument Spreadsheet Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet-flat-xml (fods ods xml) + + + + + Lotus 1-2-3 + + + "Lotus" + + + application/vnd.lotus-1-2-3 (wk1 wks 123) + + + + + Quattro Pro 6.0 + + + "Quattro Pro 6.0" + + + None (wb2) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 4.0 + + + "MS Excel 4.0" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlw xlc xlm) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 4.0 Template + + + "MS Excel 4.0 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 5.0 + + + "MS Excel 5.0/95" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 5.0 Template + + + "MS Excel 5.0/95 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 95 + + + "MS Excel 95" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 95 Template + + + "MS Excel 95 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Excel 97–2003 + + + "MS Excel 97" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw xlk et) + + + + + Excel 97–2003 Template + + + "MS Excel 97 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt ett) + + + + + Rich Text Format (Calc) + + + "Rich Text Format (StarCalc)" + + + application/rtf (rtf) + + + + + SYLK + + + "SYLK" + + + text/spreadsheet (slk sylk) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Spreadsheet + + + "StarOffice XML (Calc)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.calc (sxc) + + + + + Text CSV + + + "Text - txt - csv (StarCalc)" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Web Page Query (Calc) + + + "calc_HTML_WebQuery" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Spreadsheet Template + + + "calc_StarOffice_XML_Calc_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.calc.template (stc) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "calc_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + dBASE + + + "dBase" + + + None (dbf) + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet + + + "calc8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet (ods) + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet Template + + + "calc8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet-template (ots) + + + + + Gnumeric Spreadsheet + + + "Gnumeric Spreadsheet" + + + application/x-gnumeric (gnumeric gnm) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet (xlsx) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 (macro-enabled) + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 VBA XML" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.macroEnabled.12 (xlsm) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 Template + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.template (xltx xltm) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 2007 Binary + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 Binary" + + + None (xlsb) + + + + + Office Open XML Spreadsheet + + + "Calc Office Open XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet (xlsx xlsm) + + + + + Office Open XML Spreadsheet Template + + + "Calc Office Open XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.template (xltx xltm) + + + + + Microsoft Works Document + + + "MS_Works_Calc" + + + None (wks wdb) + + + + + Lotus Document + + + "WPS_Lotus_Calc" + + + None (wk1 wk3 wk4 123) + + + + + QuattroPro Document + + + "WPS_QPro_Calc" + + + None (wb1 wb2 wq1 wq2) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Spreadsheet + + + "ClarisWorks_Calc" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + ClarisResolve Document + + + "Claris_Resolve_Calc" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Microsoft Works for Mac Spreadsheet (v1 - v4) + + + "Mac_Works_Calc" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + Apple Numbers + + + "Apple Numbers" + + + application/x-iwork-numbers-sffnumbers (numbers) + + + + + Legacy Mac Database + + + "MWAW_Database" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy Mac Spreadsheet + + + "MWAW_Spreadsheet" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Spreadsheet + + + "StarOffice_Spreadsheet" + + + None (sdc) + + + + + Microsoft Multiplan + + + "Microsoft Multiplan" + + + None (mp) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for IMPRESS + +

Filters for IMPRESS

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Apple Keynote + + + "Apple Keynote" + + + application/x-iwork-keynote-sffkey (key) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 + + + "MS PowerPoint 97" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (ppt dps) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 AutoPlay + + + "MS PowerPoint 97 AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (pps) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 Template + + + "MS PowerPoint 97 Vorlage" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (pot dpt) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing (Impress) + + + "impress_StarOffice_XML_Draw" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw (sxd) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Presentation + + + "OpenDocument Presentation Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation-flat-xml (fodp odp xml) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Presentation + + + "StarOffice XML (Impress)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.impress (sxi) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Presentation Template + + + "impress_StarOffice_XML_Impress_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.impress.template (sti) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "impress_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Presentation + + + "impress8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation (odp) + + + + + ODF Presentation Template + + + "impress8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation-template (otp) + + + + + ODF Drawing (Impress) + + + "impress8_draw" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics (odg) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.presentation (pptx) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 AutoPlay + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.slideshow (ppsx) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 Template + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.template (potx potm) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 VBA + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML VBA" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint.presentation.macroEnabled.main+xml (pptm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation + + + "Impress Office Open XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.presentation (pptx pptm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation Template + + + "Impress Office Open XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.template (potx potm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation AutoPlay + + + "Impress Office Open XML AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.slideshow (ppsx) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Presentation + + + "ClarisWorks_Impress" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Presentation + + + "StarOffice_Presentation" + + + None (sdd) + + + + + Legacy Mac Presentation + + + "MWAW_Presentation" + + + None (*) + + + + + Microsoft PowerPoint 1-4 and 95's + + + "PowerPoint 3" + + + None (ppt pot) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for DRAW + +

Filters for DRAW

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Flat XML ODF Drawing + + + "OpenDocument Drawing Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics-flat-xml (fodg odg xml) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing + + + "StarOffice XML (Draw)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw (sxd) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing Template + + + "draw_StarOffice_XML_Draw_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw.template (std) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "draw_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Drawing + + + "draw8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics (odg) + + + + + ODF Drawing Template + + + "draw8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics-template (otg) + + + + + WordPerfect Graphics + + + "WordPerfect Graphics" + + + image/x-wpg (wpg) + + + + + Microsoft Visio 2000-2013 + + + "Visio Document" + + + application/vnd.visio (vdx vsd vsdm vsdx) + + + + + Microsoft Publisher 98-2010 + + + "Publisher Document" + + + application/x-mspublisher (pub) + + + + + Corel Draw + + + "Corel Draw Document" + + + application/vnd.corel-draw (cdr) + + + + + Corel Presentation Exchange + + + "Corel Presentation Exchange" + + + image/x-cmx (cmx) + + + + + Adobe/Macromedia Freehand + + + "Freehand Document" + + + image/x-freehand (fh fh1 fh2 fh3 fh4 fh5 fh6 fh7 fh8 fh9 fh10 fh11) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Drawing + + + "ClarisWorks_Draw" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Adobe PageMaker + + + "PageMaker Document" + + + application/x-pagemaker (p65 pm pm6 pmd) + + + + + QuarkXPress + + + "QXP Document" + + + None (qxd qxt) + + + + + Zoner Callisto/Draw + + + "ZMF Document" + + + None (zmf) + + + + + Legacy Mac Bitmap + + + "MWAW_Bitmap" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy Mac Drawing + + + "MWAW_Drawing" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Drawing + + + "StarOffice_Drawing" + + + None (sda) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for MATH + +

Filters for MATH

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + MathML 2.0 + + + "MathML XML (Math)" + + + application/mathml+xml (mml) + + + + + MathType3.x + + + "MathType 3.x" + + + None (xxx) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Formula + + + "StarOffice XML (Math)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.math (sxm) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "math_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Formula + + + "math8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.formula (odf) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for BASE + +

Filters for BASE

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ODF Database + + + "StarOffice XML (Base)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.base (odb) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for GRAPHICFILTER + +

Filters for GRAPHICFILTER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + JPEG - Joint Photographic Experts Group + + + "writer_jpg_Export" + + + image/jpeg (jpg jpeg jfif jif jpe) + + + + + PNG - Portable Network Graphics + + + "writer_png_Export" + + + image/png (png) + + + + + SVG - Scalable Vector Graphics + + + "writer_svg_Export" + + + image/svg+xml (svg svgz) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for PDFIMPORT + +

Filters for PDFIMPORT

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Draw) + + + "draw_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Impress) + + + "impress_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Writer) + + + "writer_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "writer_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "impress_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "draw_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "calc_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for XSLTFILTER + +

Filters for XSLTFILTER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ADO Rowset XML + + + "ADO Rowset XML" + + + None (xml) + + + + + DocBook + + + "DocBook File" + + + application/docbook+xml (xml) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 2003 XML + + + "MS Excel 2003 XML" + + + None (xml xls) + + + + + Word 2003 XML + + + "MS Word 2003 XML" + + + None (xml doc) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Calc File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Draw File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Impress File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Writer File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + Unified Office Format text + + + "UOF text" + + + None (uot;uof) + + + + + Unified Office Format spreadsheet + + + "UOF spreadsheet" + + + None (uos;uof) + + + + + Unified Office Format presentation + + + "UOF presentation" + + + None (uop;uof) + + +
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cac529d16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents +/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +draw objects; copying between documents +copying; draw objects between documents +pasting;draw objects from other documents +mw added "pasting;" +Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents + +In $[officename] it is possible to copy drawing objects between text, spreadsheets and presentation documents. + + +Select the drawing object or objects. + + +Copy the drawing object to the clipboard, for example, by using CommandCtrl+C. + + +Switch to the other document and place the cursor where the drawing object is to be inserted. + + +Insert the drawing object, for example, by using CommandCtrl+V. + + +Inserting into a text document +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current paragraph. You can change the anchor by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon on the OLE Object toolbar or the Frame toolbar. This opens a popup menu where you can select the anchor type. +Inserting into a spreadsheet +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current cell. You can change the anchor between cell and page by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon +Icon + . +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a036be8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Data From Spreadsheets +/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts;copying with link to source cell range +inserting; cell ranges from spreadsheets +pasting;cell ranges from spreadsheets +presentations;inserting spreadsheet cells +text documents;inserting spreadsheet cells +tables in spreadsheets;copying data to other applications +mw deleted "tables;" and added "charts;" and "tables in spreadsheets;" +Inserting Data From Spreadsheets + + + +Use the clipboard to copy the contents of a single cell. You can also copy a formula from a cell into the clipboard (for example, from the input line of the formula bar) so that the formula can be inserted into a text. + + +To copy a cell range into a text document, select the cell range in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag-and-drop to insert the cells into the text document. You will then find an OLE object in the text document, which you can edit further. + + +If you drag cells to the normal view of a presentation document, the cells will be inserted there as an OLE object. If you drag cells into the outline view, each cell will form a line of the outline view. + + +When you copy a cell range from $[officename] Calc to the clipboard, the drawing objects, OLE objects and charts within this range are also copied. + + +If you insert a cell range with an enclosed chart, the chart will keep its link to the source cell range only if you copied the chart and the source cell range together. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cd158c08 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Data From Text Documents +/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sending; AutoAbstract function in presentations +AutoAbstract function for sending text to presentations +outlines; sending to presentations +text; copying by drag and drop +drag and drop; copying and pasting text +inserting;data from text documents +copying;data from text documents +pasting;data from text documents +mw added "pasting; and changed "drag and drop;"" +Inserting Data From Text Documents + +You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. + + +If you copy text to the clipboard, you can paste it with or without text attributes. Use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C to copy and CommandCtrl+V to paste. + + + + + + +Icon + + + +To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format. + + +
+ + +If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. + + +If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. + + +Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop + + +If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. + + +If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. + + +If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc49b5ba7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,287 @@ + + + + + + + CSV Filter parameters + /text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp + + + + + CSV;filter options + CSV;separator specification line + CSV;import options + CSV;export options + CSV;command line filter options + +
+

CSV Filter Options

+ The CSV filter accepts an option string containing five to thirteen tokens, separated by commas. Tokens 6 to 13 are optional. +
+ + Import from UTF-8, Language German, Comma separated, Text delimiter ", Quoted field as text. CSV file has columns formatted as date, number, number, number: + soffice --infilter="Text - txt - csv (StarCalc):44,34,76,1,1/5/2/1/3/1/4/1,1031,true,true" test.csv + Export to Windows-1252, Field delimiter : comma, Text delimiter : quote, Save cell contents as shown: + soffice --convert-to "Text - txt - csv (StarCalc):44,34,ANSI,1,,0,false,true,true" --outdir=/home/user test.ods + + + + Token Position + + + Definition + + + Meaning and Example of Token + + + + + 1 + + + Field Separator + + + Field separator(s) as ASCII values. Multiple values are separated by the slash sign ("/"), that is, if the values are separated by semicolons and horizontal tabulators, the token would be 59/9. To treat several consecutive separators as one, then append '/MRG' to the token. If the file contains fixed width fields, then use 'FIX'. Example: 44 (,) + + + + + 2 + + + Text Delimiter + + + The text delimiter as ASCII value, like 34 for double quotes and 39 for single quotes. Example: 34 ("). + + + + + 3 + + + Character Set + + + The character set code used in the file as described in the table below. Example: 0 (System). + + + + + 4 + + + CSV Import + + + + + N Line number to start reading. Example: 3 (start from third line). + + + + + + + 5 + + + Cell Format Codes for Each Column + + + A sequence of column/formatting code, where the formatting code is given in the table below. Example: "1/5/2/1/3/1/4/1". + If value separators are used, the form of this token is column/format[/column/format/…] where column is the number of the column, with 1 being the leftmost column. The format code is detailed below. + If the first token is FIX it has the form start/format[/start/format/…], where start is the number of the first character for this field, with 0 being the leftmost character in a line. The format is explained below. + + + + + 6 + + + Language identifier + + + String expressed in decimal notation. This token is the equivalent of the "Language" listbox in the user interface for CSV import. If the value is 0 or omitted, the language identifier of the user interface is used. The language identifier is based on the Microsoft language identifiers. + + + + + 7 + + + CSV Import, CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Quoted field as text". + + + + + 8 + + + CSV Import, CSV Export + + + Import: String, either false or true. Default value: false. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Detect special numbers". + Export: String, either false or true. Default value: true. This token has no UI equivalent. If true, the number cells are stored as numbers. If false, the numbers are stored as text, with text delimiters. + + + + + 9 + + + CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value:true. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Save cell contents as shown". + + + + + 10 + + + CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Export cell formulas. + + + + + 11 + + + CSV Import + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Remove spaces. Trim leading and trailing spaces, when reading the file. + + + + + 12 + + + CSV Export + + + Export the entire document to individual sheets .csv files or a specified sheet. + + + 0 or absent means the default behaviour, first sheet from command line, or current sheet in macro filter options, exported to sample.csv + + + -1 for all sheets, each sheet is exported to an individual file of the base file name concatenated with the sheet name, for example sample-Sheet1.csv, sample-Sheet2.csv and sample-Sheet3.csv + + + N export the N-th sheet within the range of number of sheets. Example: to export the second sheet, set 2 here to get sample-Sheet2.csv + + + + + + + 13 + + + CSV Import + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Determines whether formula expressions starting with a = equal sign character are to be evaluated as formulas or imported as textual data. If true evaluate formulas on input. If false formulas are input as text. If omitted (not present at all), the default value is true to keep the behaviour of old versions' options string that didn't have this token at all. If present and empty (or any other value than true) the default value is false. + + +
+

Special case of CSV files with separator defined in the first line

+ + CSV import and export support a sep= and "sep=" field separator setting. When reading a CSV document, the separator is taken from the initial sep= or "sep=" single field, if that is the only line content. + + When reading a CSV file, the quoted form is preserved as (unquoted) cell content. You see sep=| when | is the separator in the first line. In the unquoted form, the separator is discarded because it is a real field separator in the context. You see sep= in the first line. + + When writing a CSV file, the existing single top left cell's content such as sep=| is adapted to the current separator with the quoted form of "sep=|" (if quotes / text delimiters aren't set empty and | is the separator) and always uses the ASCII " double quote character. + + If the line containing the sep=| is not to be imported as data, remember to set the From row number in the dialog to 2. Note that this line will not be preserved when re-saving. + + + + + sep=| + "LETTER"|"ANIMAL" + "a"|"aardvark" + "b"|"bear" + "c"|"cow" + + +

Formatting Codes for Token 5

+ + + + Meaning + + + Code + + + + Standard + 1 + + + Text + 2 + + + MM/DD/YY + 3 + + + DD/MM/YY + 4 + + + YY/MM/DD + 5 + + + - + 6 + + + - + 7 + + + - + 8 + + + Ignore field (do not import) + 9 + + + US-English + 10 + +
+

Character Set Codes for Token 3

+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..099ce00ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Languages Using Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp + + + +CTL;complex text layout languages +languages;complex text layout +text;CTL languages +text layout for special languages +right-to-left text +entering text from right to left +bi-directional writing +Hindi;entering text +Hebrew;entering text +Arabic;entering text +Thai;entering text +mw made "text layout;" a one level entry +Languages Using Complex Text Layout + +Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. +If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". +You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: + + +CommandCtrl+Shift+D or CommandCtrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry + + +CommandCtrl+Shift+A or CommandCtrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry + + +The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. + + +In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. +In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: + + +In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. + + +Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. + + +Use the Right or Left Arrow key to jump to the next or previous whole composite character. To position the cursor into a composite character, use OptionAlt+Arrow key. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6d4b0381 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Registering an Address Book +/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +data sources; registering address books +address books; registering +system address book registration +registering; address books + + +Registering an Address Book + +
+In %PRODUCTNAME you can register different data sources. The contents of the data fields are then available to you for use in various fields and controls. Your system address book is such a data source. + +%PRODUCTNAME templates and wizards use fields for the contents of the address book. When activated, the general fields in the templates are automatically replaced with the fields from the data source of your address book. +
+In order for the replacement to take place, you must tell %PRODUCTNAME which address book you use. The wizard asking for this information appears automatically the first time you activate, for example, a business letter template. You can also call the wizard by following the steps listed below. +The address book data is read-only in %PRODUCTNAME Base. It is not possible to add, edit, or delete address data from within Base. +Address Data Source Wizard +To call the Address Data Source wizard, choose File - Wizards - Address Data Source. +Registering An Existing Address Book Manually + + +Choose Tools - Address Book Source. The Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog appears. + + +In the Data source combo box, select the system address book or the data source you want to use as an address book. + + +If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Address Data Source ... button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +In the Table combo box, select the database table you want to use as the address book. + + +Under Field assignment, match the fields for first name, company, department, and so on to the actual field names used in your address book. + + +When finished, close the dialog with OK. + + +Now your data source is registered in %PRODUCTNAME as the address book. If you now open a template from the Business Correspondence category, %PRODUCTNAME can automatically insert the correct fields for a form letter. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a352b229f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format +/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp + + + +databases; text formats +text formats; databases +importing; tables in text format +exporting; spreadsheets to text format + +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format + +If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBASE import and export, you can use a common text format. +Importing Data into $[officename] +To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. + + +Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. + + +Choose File - Open and click the file to import. + + +Select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Click Open. + + +The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. + + +Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. Save the data as a $[officename] data source: + + +Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBASE format in the folder of a dBASE database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBASE" and the folder of the dBASE database. + + +Exporting in CSV Text Format +You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. + + +Choose File - Save as. + + +In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. + + +This opens the Export of text files dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7268b251 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Executing SQL Commands + /text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp + + + +SQL; executing SQL commands + queries;creating in SQL view + commands;SQL + executing SQL commands +mw changed "SQL;executing commands"mw made "executing;" a one level entry +Executing SQL Commands + + With the help of SQL commands you can control the database directly, and can also create and edit tables and queries. + Not all database types support all SQL instructions. If necessary, find out which SQL commands are supported by your database system. + To execute an SQL statement directly + + + Choose File - Open to open a database file. + + + Choose Tools - SQL. + + + Click the Create Query in SQL View icon +Icon + or + Select an existing query from the list and click the Edit icon +Icon + . + + + In the Query window, choose View - Switch Design View On/Off. Edit the SQL command. + + + Click the Run icon +Icon + . The result of the query is displayed in the upper window. + + + Click the Save or Save As icon +Icon + to save the query. + + +
+ Query Design + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..217017994 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Forms +/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp + + + +opening;forms +forms;creating +design view;creating forms + +Working with Forms + +Using forms, you can define how to present the data. Open a text document or a spreadsheet and insert the controls such as push buttons and list boxes. In the properties dialogs of the controls, you can define what data the forms should display. +Creating a New Form With the Form Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME, you can create a new form using the Form Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Form. + + +Creating a New Form Manually + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. + + +Click Create Form in Design View. + + +A new text document opens. Use the Form Controls to insert form controls. +Click the Forms icon to access all forms that were created from within the current database window. In addition, you can use the Form Controls icons to add database form controls to any Writer or Calc document, but these documents will not be listed in the database window. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c610286d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Data in Base +/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp + + + +databases;importing/exporting +importing;databases +copying; datasource records in spreadsheets +inserting; datasource records in spreadsheets +spreadsheets;inserting database records +data sources;copying records to spreadsheets +pasting;from data sources to %PRODUCTNAME Calc +MW reduced "databases;" entries into one entry and deleted "exporting;from.."

Importing and Exporting Data in Base +

+An easy method to import and export database tables uses Calc as a "helper application". +

Exporting data from Base

+You copy a table from Base to a new Calc sheet, then you can save or export the data to any file format that Calc supports. + + +Open the database file that contains the database table to be exported. Click Tables to view the tables, or click Queries to view the queries. + + +Choose File - New - Spreadsheet. + + +In the Base window, right-click the name of the table to export. Choose Copy from the context menu. + + +Click cell A1 in the new Calc window, then choose Edit - Paste. + + +Now you can save or export the data to many file types. +

Importing data to Base

+You can import text files, spreadsheet files, and your system address book in read-only mode only. +When you import from a text or spreadsheet file, the file must have a first row of header information. The second row of the file is the first valid data row. The format of every field in the second row determines the format for the entire column. Any format information from a spreadsheet file gets lost when importing to Base. +For example, to ensure the first column has a text format, you must make sure that the first field of the first valid data row contains text. If a field in the first valid data row contains a number, the whole column is set to number format, and only numbers, no text, will be shown in that column. + + +Open a Base file of the database type that you want. +Either create a new Base file using the Database Wizard, or open any existing Base file that is not read-only. + + +Open the Calc file that contains the data to be imported to Base. You can open a *.dbf dBASE file or many other file types. + + +Select the data to be copied to Base. +You can enter a range reference like A1:X500 in the Name Box if you don't want to scroll. +If you copy a dBASE sheet, include the top row that contains the header data. + + +Choose Edit - Copy. + + +In the Base window, click Tables to view the tables. + + +In the Base window, choose Edit - Paste. + + +You see the Copy Table dialog. Most databases need a primary key, so you may want to check the Create primary key box. + + +On Windows systems, you can also use drag-and-drop instead of Copy and Paste. Also, for registered databases, you can open the datasource browser (press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys) instead of opening the Base window. +
+ + + + + +ufi: removed switches for calc + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c334ced60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Creating a New Database +/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp + + +create a new database + + + +databases;creating +new databases +mw deleted "creating;" +

Creating a New Database +

+ + +Choose File - New - Database. +This opens the Database Wizard, where you create a new database file. + + +In the Database Wizard, select the type of database, and select the option to open the Table Wizard as the next wizard. +The Table Wizard helps you to add a table to the new database file. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82ab19059 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Working with Queries +/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp + + +Working with Queries + + + +databases;creating queries +filtering;data in databases +queries;defining (Base) +defining;queries (Base) +wizards;database queries +Query Wizard (Base) +MW added (Base) to 3 entries +Working with Queries + +If you often want to access only a subset of your data that can be well defined by a filter condition, you can define a query. This is basically a name for the new view at the filtered data. You open the query and see the current data in the table layout that you defined. +Creating a New Query With the Query Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new query using the Query Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Query. + + +Creating a New Query With the Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. + + +Click Create Query in Design View. + + +You see the Query Design window. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbeaf9cb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Registering and Deleting a Database +/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp + + + +databases;registering (Base) +registering;databases (Base) +deleting;databases (Base) +databases;deleting (Base) +lists;registered databases (Base) +mw deleted "removing;...". New entry "lists;" from shared/optionen/01160200.xhpRegistering and Deleting a Database + +Data from any database file can be registered to the installed instance of %PRODUCTNAME. To register means to tell %PRODUCTNAME where the data is located, how it is organized, how to get that data, and more. Once the database is registered, you can use the menu command View - Data source to access the data records from your text documents and spreadsheets. +To register an existing database file: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + +Click New and select the database file.i60224 + + +To remove a registered database from %PRODUCTNAME + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + +Select the database file and click Delete. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91389473c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using and Editing Database Reports +/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp + + + +database reports +data sources;reports +reports;opening and editing +editing;reports +opening;reports +templates;database reports +reports;templates + + +Using and Editing Database Reports + +Using a Report +%PRODUCTNAME stores the information about the created reports in the database file. + + +Choose File - Open and select the database file. + + +In the database file window, click the Reports icon. + + +Double-click one of the report names to open the report. +These links are added automatically when you create a new report by the Report Wizard or in the Report Builder window. + + +Editing a Report Created in the Report Builder Window + + +Right-click the name of a report in the database file window, then choose Edit. + + +The Report Builder window opens with the report's information loaded. +Use the toolbars and menu commands and drag-and-drop to edit the report as stated in the Report Builder guide. +Execute the report to see the resulting report document. +Editing a Report Created by the Report Wizard + + +On the last dialog page of the Report Wizard, you can choose to edit the report template before you use the report. + + +You can edit the page styles for the first page and the following pages of the report as well as the paragraph styles, the number formats, the printed field labels, and more. +Unless you have a thorough understanding of the database the report accesses, do not edit the SQL statement, database name, the hidden form controls, or the related information on the report. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92dd0b9ce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Creating Reports +/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp + + + +databases;creating reports +reports;creating +wizards;reports + +Creating Reports + +A report is a Writer text document that can show your data in an organized order and formatting. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you have a choice to create a report either manually using drag-and-drop in the Report Builder window, or semi-automatic by following a series of dialogs in the Report Wizard. +The following list gives you some information to decide which method to use for your data: + + + +Report Builder + + +Report Wizard + + + + +Started by "Create Report in Design View" command. + + +Started by "Use Wizard to Create Report" command. + + + + +Full flexibility to use report headers and footers, page headers and footers, multi-column reports. + + +Uses a Writer template to generate a report document. + + + + +Use drag-and-drop to position the record fields or other design elements like pictures or lines. + + +Select from several given choices to arrange the data records. + + + + +Generates a one-time snapshot of the data. To see an updated report, execute the same report again to create a Writer document with the updated data. + + +You can choose to generate a one-time snapshot with fixed data, or a "live" report with links to the current data at the time when you open the Base file. + + + + +Saves the report as a Writer text document. Stores the information how to create the report inside the Base file. + + +Saves the report and the information how to create the report inside the Base file. + + + + +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to create a new report with the current data. + + +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to either see again the static snapshot of the data from first creation time, or to create a new report with the current data. This depends on your choice on the last page of the wizard. + + + + +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to open the Report Builder window, with the report's information loaded. + + +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to edit the Writer template file that was used to create the report. + + +
+Creating a New Report Manually In Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. + + +Click Create Report in Design View. + + +Follow the instructions in the Report Builder guide. + + +Creating a New Report With the Report Wizard + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Report. + + +Follow the steps of the Report Wizard to create the report. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9356b22a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Searching Tables and Form Documents +/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +finding;records in form documents +forms;finding records +searching;tables and forms + +Searching Tables and Form Documents + + + + + +Icon + + + +In spreadsheets and documents in which form controls are used, you can click the Find Record icon on the form bar to open a dialog to find any text and values. + + +
+ +You can search in one or in all data fields. You can select whether the text must be at the beginning, end or any location of the data field. You also can use the ? and * wildcards, as in the Find & Replace dialog. You can find additional information about the database search function in the $[officename] Help. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcfbe5d5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Searching With a Form Filter +/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp + + + +form filters +databases;form filters +searching; form filters +removing;form filters +filtering; data in forms +data;filtering in forms +forms; filtering data +data, see also values +MW inserted a cross-referenceSearching With a Form Filter + + + +Open a form document that contains database fields. +As an example, open an empty text document and press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys. Open the bibliography database table biblio in the data source view. While pressing Shift+CommandCtrl, drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created. + + +On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Design Mode On/Off icon +Icon + to turn off the design mode. + + +On the Form Navigation toolbar, click the Form-Based Filters icon +Icon + . The current document is displayed with its form controls as an empty edit mask. The Form Filter toolbar appears. + + +Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields. Note that if you enter filter conditions into several fields, all of the entered conditions must match (Boolean AND). + + +More information about wildcards and operators can be found in Query Design. + +If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied. You see the Form Navigation toolbar and can browse through the found records. + +If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter. +Click the Apply Filter icon +Icon + on the Form Navigation toolbar to change to the filtered view. +The filter that has been set can be removed by clicking Reset Filter/Sort icon +Icon + . + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1f0f1656 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Table Design + /text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp + + + +tables in databases; creating in design view (manually) + designing; database tables + properties;fields in databases + fields;database tables + AutoValue (Base) + primary keys;design view +MW deleted "database tables;" and changed "tables in databases;"UFI added AutoValue and Primary Key entry - i48831MW changed Tables in databases, AutoValue and Primary Key entries + + Table Design + + This section contains information about how to create a new database table in the design view. + Open the database file of the database where you want a new table. Click the Tables icon. Choose Create Table in Design View to create a new table. + In the Design view, you can now create the fields for your table. + + + Enter new fields in rows from top to bottom. Click the Field Name cell and enter a field name for each data field. + + + Include a "primary key" data field. Base needs a primary key to be able to edit the table contents. A primary key has unique contents for each data record. For example, insert a numerical field, right-click the first column, and choose Primary Key from the context menu. Set AutoValue to "Yes", so Base can automatically increment the value for each new record. + + + In the next cell to the right, define the Field Type. When you click in the cell, you can select a field type in the combo box. + + + Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type. For example, it is not possible to enter text in a number field. Memo fields in dBASE III format are references to internally-managed text files which can hold up to 64 kB text. + You can enter an optional Description for each field. The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view. + Field Properties + Enter properties for each selected data field. Depending on the database type, some input facilities may not be available. + In the Default value box, enter the default contents for every new record. This contents can be edited later. + In the Entry required box, specify whether or not the field may remain empty. + For the Length box, a combo box may be shown that provides the available choices. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76e92039b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Working with Tables +/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp + + +Working with Tables + + + +tables in databases;creating +databases;creating tables +table views of databases +mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;" +Working with Tables + +Data is stored in tables. As an example, your system address book that you use for your email addresses is a table of the address book database. Each address is a data record, presented as a row in that table. The data records consist of data fields, for example the first and the last name fields and the email field. +Creating a New Table With the Table Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new table using the Table Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Table. + + +Creating a New Table With the Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Create Table in Design View. + + +You see the Table Design window. +Creating a New Table View +Some database types support table views. A table view is a query that is stored with the database. For most database operations, a view can be used as you would use a table. + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table view. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Create Table View. + + +You see the View Design window, which is almost the same as the Query Design window. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3572ac9f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Viewing a Database +/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp + + +viewing a database + + + +opening;database files +viewing; databases +data sources;viewing +databases;viewing + +Viewing a Database + +There are two different methods of viewing a database in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +Choose File - Open to open the database file. +The database file gives you full access to tables, queries, reports, and forms. You can edit the structure of your tables and change the contents of the data records. + + +Choose View - Data source to view the registered databases. +The data source view can be used to drag-and-drop table fields from registered databases into your documents and to produce mail merges. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec874dc4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + +Database Overview +/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +databases; overview +data source view; overview +data source explorer +explorer of data sources + + +

Database Overview +remove this file when all links are resolved

+Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +

Data Source View

+Choose View - Data Sources or press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys to call the data source view from a text document or spreadsheet. +On the left you can see the Data source explorer. If you select a table or query there, you see the contents of this table or query on the right. At the top margin is the Table Data bar. +

Data Sources

+Address book as data source +View data source contents +Menu bar of a database file +

Forms and Reports

+Create new form document, edit form controls, Form Wizard +Entering data versus editing form +Report Wizard + +

Queries

+Create new query or table view, edit query structure +Query Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records +

Tables

+Create new table, edit table structure, index, relations +Table Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5463a7312 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + Development Tools + /text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp + + + + + development tools + object inspector + + + +
+

Development Tools

+ Inspects objects in %PRODUCTNAME documents and shows supported UNO services, as well as available methods, properties and implemented interfaces. +
+ This feature also allows to explore the document structure using the Document Object Model (DOM). +
+ Choose Tools - Development Tools + + + + + Icon Development Tools + + + + Development Tools + + +
+
+ The Development Tools are visible in all documents of %PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. The display is persistent and remain visible until deselected. + When Development Tools is enabled, a dockable window is shown at the bottom of the screen. This window has two sections: + + + Document Object Model tree view: Displays document portions according to the Document Object Model (DOM). Use this section to choose the object to inspect. + + + Object inspection panel: Displays the available services, methods, properties and interfaces of the selected object. + + + This feature is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 for Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. +

Document Model Tree View

+ The left side of the window contains a Current Selection toggle button, a Refresh button and a tree view that displays all objects in the document. + The behavior of the tree view depends on the status of the Current Selection toggle button: + + + Click on Current Selection to display the properties of the object currently selected in the document. Hence, clicking any item in the tree view have no effect. + + + Click on Current Selection again to display any item in the tree view and update the contents of the Object Inspection Panel. + + + The types of objects displayed by the Document Model Tree View depend on the %PRODUCTNAME application being used: + + + + %PRODUCTNAME application + + + Supported objects + + + + + Writer + + + Paragraphs
Text Portions in a Paragraph
Shapes
Tables
Frames
Graphic Objects
Embedded Objects (OLE)
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Calc + + + Sheets
Shapes per sheet
Charts per sheet
Pivot tables per sheet
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Impress + + + Slides
Shapes per slide
Master slides
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Draw + + + Pages
Shapes per page
Style Families and Styles + + +
+

Object Inspection Panel

+ The right side of the window is the Object Inspection Panel that displays information about the object being inspected. + Class Name: is the name of the object class. + Use the class name to search more information in the API documentation. For example, the top-level object in a Writer document is an instance of the class SwXTextDocument, which is documented at SwXTextDocument Class Reference. + You can inspect the object further by using the four tabs available that display its Interfaces, Services, Properties and Methods. + The information about the object is organized in columns in each tab. The set of columns displayed depend on the selected tab. +

Interfaces tab

+ Contains a single column presenting the list of interfaces implemented by the object. +

Services tab

+ Contains a single column presenting the list of services supported by the object. +

Properties tab

+ Contains four columns that describe the properties of the object: + + + Property: Shows the names of the object properties. + + + Value: Displays a textual representation of the current property value. + + + Type: Shows the property type. + + + Info: display relevant information about the property. For example, a read-only property displays "read-only" in this column. + + + The Properties tab also includes a text box on the bottom to display the full textual representation of the property value. +

Methods tab

+ Contains four columns that describe the combined list of methods that can be called by the current object: + + + Method: Shows the names of all methods of the object. + + + Return type: Displays the return type of the object methods. Methods that do not return any value are marked as "void" in this column. + + + Parameters: Shows the list of parameters that are required by the method as well as their respective types. + + + Implementation class: Displays the name of the class where the method is implemented. + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c57804bb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + About Digital Signatures + /text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp + + + +certificates + digital signatures;overview + security;digital signatures +mw moved 1 entry to digitalsign_send.xhp and made "digital signatures" a two level entry and added a new entry +

About Digital Signatures +

+ In %PRODUCTNAME, you can digitally sign your documents and macros. +

Certificates

+ To sign a document digitally, you need a personal key, the certificate. A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key, which must be kept secret, and a public key, which you add to your documents when you sign them. +

Save and sign the document

+ When you apply a digital signature to a document, a kind of checksum is computed from the document's content plus your personal key. The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document. +

Open a signed document

+ When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of %PRODUCTNAME, the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum. If both are the same, the program will signal that you see the original, unchanged document. In addition, the program can show you the public key information from the certificate. + You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority. + Whenever someone changes something in the document, this change breaks the digital signature. After the change, there will be no sign that you see the original document. + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. + You can see any of the following icons and messages when you open a signed document. + + + + Icon in Status bar + + + Signature status + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is valid. + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is OK, but the certificates could not be validated. + The signature and the certificate are OK, but not all parts of the document are signed. (For documents that were signed with old versions of the software, see note below.) + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is invalid. + + +
+ +

Signatures and software versions

+ The signing of contents got changed with OpenOffice.org 3.2 and StarOffice 9.2. Now all contents of the files, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml) are signed. + When you sign a document with OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 or a later version, and you open that document in an older version of the software, the signature will be displayed as "invalid". Signatures created with older versions of the software will be marked with "only parts of the document are signed" when loaded in the newer software. + When you sign an OOXML document, then the signature will be always marked with "only parts of the document are signed". Metadata of OOXML files are never signed, to be compatible with Microsoft Office. + When you sign a PDF document, then this marking is not used. Signing only parts of the document is simply an invalid signature. + Signing other document formats is not supported at the moment. + When you load an ODF document, you might see an icon in the status bar and the status field in the dialog that indicates that the document is only partially signed. This status will appear when the signature and certificate are valid, but they were created with a version of OpenOffice.org before 3.2 or StarOffice before 9.2. In versions of OpenOffice.org before 3.0 or StarOffice before 9.0, the document signature was applied to the main contents, pictures and embedded objects only and some contents, like macros, were not signed. In OpenOffice.org 3.0 and StarOffice 9.0 the document signature was applied to most content, including macros. However, the mimetype and the content of the META-INF folder were not signed. And in OpenOffice.org 3.2, StarOffice 9.2, and all versions of LibreOffice all contents, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml), are signed. +

Security Warnings

+ When you receive a signed document, and the software reports that the signature is valid, this does not mean that you can be absolutely sure that the document is the same that the sender has sent. Signing documents with software certificates is not a perfectly secure method. Numerous ways are possible to circumvent the security features. + Example: Think about someone who wants to camouflage his identity to be a sender from your bank. He can easily get a certificate using a false name, then send you any signed email pretending he is working for your bank. You will get that email, and the email or the document within has the "valid signed" icon. + Do not trust the icon. Inspect and verify the certificates. + The validation of a signature is not a legally binding guarantee of any kind. + On Windows operating systems, the Windows features of validating a signature are used. On Solaris and Linux systems, files that are supplied by Thunderbird, Mozilla or Firefox are used. You must ensure that the files that are in use within your system are really the original files that were supplied by the original developers. For malevolent intruders, there are numerous ways to replace original files with other files that they supply. + The messages about validation of a signature that you see in %PRODUCTNAME are the messages that the validation files return. The %PRODUCTNAME software has no way to ensure that the messages reflect the true status of any certificate. The %PRODUCTNAME software only displays the messages that other files that are not under control of %PRODUCTNAME report. There is no legal responsibility of %PRODUCTNAME that the displayed messages reflect the true status of a digital signature. +
+ + English Wiki page on digital signatures + + Opening a document using WebDAV over HTTPS +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae690d7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS +/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp + + + + + + +opening;documents on WebDAV server +WebDAV over HTTPS +digital signatures;WebDAV over HTTPS + + mw added 3 index entries + Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS + + MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp + In %PRODUCTNAME, you can open and save documents that are stored on a WebDAV server, using the secure HTTPS protocol. + You must use the %PRODUCTNAME file dialogs to use WebDAV over HTTPS. + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog box. + + + Choose File - Open. + + + In the File name box, enter the path to the WebDAV folder. For example, enter https://192.168.1.1/webfolder to open a secure connection to the WebDAV server at the IP address 192.168.1.1, and to list the contents of the webfolder folder. + + + The first time you connect to a WebDAV server, you see the "Website Certified by an Unknown Authority" dialog. + You should click the Examine Certificate button and examine the certificate. + If you accept the certificate, choose "Accept this certificate temporarily for this session" and click OK. Now you can open and save files from the WebDAV server without further questions, until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + If you do not trust the certificate, click Cancel. + + + If you did accept the certificate, you can now select the file name or file names you want to open and click Open. + + + If there is a mismatch of the domain name given in the certificate and the domain name you entered in the file dialog, then you see a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the following options: + + + View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. + + + Continue - If you are sure both domains are the same, click the Continue button. + Cancel Connection - Cancels the connection. + If you click Continue, you may see a dialog that asks you to enter your user name and password. + user name + + + Enter your user name to log on to the WebDAV server. + password + + + Enter your password. + remember password till end of session + + + If you enable Remember password till end of session, your password will be remembered for subsequent WebDAV connections until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. +
+ + English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..998faee4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Digital Signatures + /text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp + + + +signing documents with digital signatures + digital signatures;getting/managing/applying +mw transferred one entry from digital_signatures.xhp and added a new entry +

Applying Digital Signatures +

MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp +

Getting a Certificate

+You can get a certificate from a certification authority. No matter if you choose a governmental institution or a private company it is common to be charged for this service, for example when they certify your identity. Few other authorities issue certificates free of costs, like the Open Source Project CAcert which is based on the well-known and reliable Web of Trust model and is of growing popularity. +

Managing your Certificates

+ + + If you are using Linux, macOS or Solaris, you must install a recent version of Thunderbird or Firefox. %PRODUCTNAME will then access their certificate storage. + If you have created different profiles in Thunderbird or Firefox and you want to use certificates from one specific user profile, select the profile in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Security - Certificate Path. Alternatively, you can set the environment variable MOZILLA_CERTIFICATE_FOLDER to point to the folder containing that profile. + + + Open your web browser’s preferences, select the Advanced section, click on the Certificates tab, and then choose View Certificates. The Certificate Manager dialog will appear. + + + Import your new root certificate, then select and edit the certificate. Enable the root certificate to be trusted at least for web and email access. This ensures that the certificate can sign your documents. You may edit any intermediate certificate in the same way, but it is not mandatory for signing documents. + + + When you have edited the new certificates, restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + + On Windows systems, %PRODUCTNAME will access the system certificate storage. + Your private key for the digital signature will usually be generated and securely stored by Windows as part of the signature-issuance process. Once the issuing Certificate Authority is satisfied that your computer produced the private key and you have satisfied any other identification requirements, the corresponding public key is signed by the Certificate Authority. For personal keys obtained over the Internet, the private key is generated by your browser and it is not shared with the Certificate Authority. + If a private key is received by other means or you transfer it from another computer, you can install it on your Windows PC by double-clicking on the private key certificate and providing any required password. This private key may be known to others (such as an organizational or governmental security administration) depending on how it was issued to you. + Public keys of other people used to verify document digital signatures, or encrypt documents for their eyes only, are usually stored in your system with digital certificate-management applications. In some cases you will need to manage those public-key certificates yourself. + The general management of public and private keys on your PC will vary depending on the version of Windows you are operating. For more information, use the "Help and Support" topic of your Windows version and search for "digital signature". + + +

Signing a document

+ + + Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. + + + A message box advises you to save the document. Click Yes to save the file. + + + After saving, you see the Digital Signatures dialog. Click Add to add a public key to the document. + + + In the Select Certificate dialog, select your certificate and click OK. + + + You see again the Digital Signatures dialog, where you can add more certificates if you want. Click OK to add the public key to the saved file. + + + A signed document shows an icon +Icon in the status bar. You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate. + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. +

Signing the macros inside a document

+ Normally, macros are part of a document. If you sign a document, the macros inside the document are signed automatically. If you want to sign only the macros, but not the document, proceed as follows: + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. + + + Apply the signature as described above for documents. + + + When you open the Basic IDE that contains signed macros, you see an icon +Icon in the status bar.
You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate.WebDAV see issue 32935main dialog IDs are here to lead the user initially to this help pageExamine certificate button + +Click to open the View Certificate dialog.Accept this certificate temporarily for this session radio button + +Choose this setting to accept the certificate until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site radio button + +Choose this setting to cancel the connection. +
+ English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b00429e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents Automatically +/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+documents; saving automatically +saving;documents, automatically +automatic saving +backups;automatic +files; saving automatically +text documents; saving automatically +spreadsheets; saving automatically +drawings; saving automatically +presentations; saving automatically + + +Saving Documents Automatically + +To create a backup file every time you save a document + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark Always create backup copy. + + +If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever you save the current version of the file. + + +You can change the backup directory by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. + + +The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. + + +To save recovery information automatically every n minutes + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. + + +This command saves the information necessary to restore the current document in case of a crash. Additionally, in case of a crash %PRODUCTNAME tries automatically to save AutoRecovery information for all open documents, if possible. +
+
+ + +Save As +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +Error Report Tool +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7161b37ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Opening Documents + /text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp + + + + + + + opening; documents + documents; opening + files; opening + loading; documents + spreadsheets;creating/opening + presentations;creating/opening + new documents + empty documents + text documents;creating/opening + drawings; creating/opening + HTML documents; new + formulas; new + + mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw made one entry out of two for "spreadsheets;", "presentations;" and "text (documents);" + + Opening Documents + + Opening an existing document + + Do one of the following: + + + Choose File – Open + + + Choose File – Open Remote + + + Do a long click in the Open icon on the standard toolbar and select Open Remote File in the bottom of the list. + + + Select the file you want to open and click Open. + + Restrict Files to Display + To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files to display all files. + + Cursor Position + In general, all documents open with the cursor at the start of the document. + One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. + + Press Shift+F5 to set the cursor to the last saved position. + + Opening an Empty Document + Click the New icon on the Standard bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. + If you click the arrow next to the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. + +
+ + File - Open + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c0a6cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents +/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp + + + +documents; saving +saving; documents +backups; documents +files; saving +text documents; saving +spreadsheets; saving +drawings; saving +presentations; saving +FTP; saving documents +mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"Saving Documents + + + +Click the Save icon or press the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+S. + + + + + + +This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. + + +The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. + + +
+When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. +You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Automatic extension to the file name +When saving a file, %PRODUCTNAME always appends an extension to the file name, except when the file name already has an extension that matches the file type. See the list of ODF extensions. +Some examples for the automatic extensions are listed in the following table: + + + +You enter this file name + + +You select this file type + + +File is saved with this name + + + + +my file + + +ODF Text + + +my file.odt + + + + +my file.odt + + +ODF Text + + +my file.odt + + + + +my file.txt + + +ODF Text + + +my file.txt.odt + + + + +my file.txt + + +Text (.txt) + + +my file.txt + + +
+
+ + + +Save As + +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..edc25b968 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop;overview +mouse; pointers when using drag and drop +links;by drag and drop +copying;by drag and drop + + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document + +There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form controls, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. +Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. + + + +Mouse Pointer + + +Description + + + + + +Mouse pointer moving data + + + +Moving + + + + + +Mouse pointer copying data + + + +Copying + + + + + +Mouse pointer inserting link + + + +Creating a link + + +
+ +If you press CommandCtrl or Shift+CommandCtrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. + + + + +Icon + + + +If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink. + + +
+ +You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2ef53609 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop; data source view +data source view; drag and drop +copying;from data source view +pasting;from data source view +mw added "pasting;" +Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View + +A fast way of copying from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document, or of creating forms based on a data source, is by drag-and-drop. + + + + +Mouse pointer copying data + + + +Copying with Drag-and-Drop + + +
+ +If you want to reverse a drag-and-drop, position the cursor in your document and choose Edit - Undo. +It is also possible to copy by drag-and-drop from a document into a data source: +A text table or the selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag-and-drop to a table container in the data source explorer. +Plain text can be copied using drag-and-drop from one document to a data field in the data source view. +Using data in a text document +You can insert a database field in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document. This is especially useful when designing form letters. Simply drag the desired fields - home address, form of address, and so on - into your document. +To insert a complete record, select the corresponding header and drag it into the document. When you release the mouse button, the Insert database columns dialog appears, in which you can decide whether to use all database fields, and whether to copy the data into the document as text, a table or fields. All currently selected records will be inserted. +Applying data to a table document +You can insert one or more records into the current sheet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet. The data is inserted at the place where you release the mouse button. +Inserting controls in a text form +When you create a text form linked to a database, you can generate controls by drag-and-drop from the data source view. +When you drag a database column into the text document, you insert a field. If you hold down Shift+CommandCtrl while dragging, a text field is inserted, grouped with an appropriate label field. The text field already contains all the database information that you need for the form. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60b2828d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Graphics From the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Gallery;dragging pictures to draw objects +draw objects;dropping Gallery pictures +drag and drop;from Gallery to draw objects +mw deleted "Gallery;copying..." and copied "copying;..." to Shared guide gallery_insert.xhp. +Copying Graphics From the Gallery + +If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text, spreadsheet or presentation document, the graphic will be inserted there. +
+
+If you release the graphic directly on a draw object, please note the following: + + +If you move the graphic (drag it without pressing any key, in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer), only the attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button. + + +If you copy the graphic (drag it while holding down the CommandCtrl key, in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer), the graphic will be inserted as an object. + + +If you create a hyperlink (drag while holding down Shift and CommandCtrl, in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer), the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery, but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained. + + +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0eba5bee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Adding Graphics to the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp + + + + + + +drag and drop;to Gallery +copying;to Gallery +Gallery; adding pictures +pictures;adding to Gallery +inserting;pictures in Gallery +pasting;to Gallery + + mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Adding Graphics to the Gallery + + You can place a graphic from a document such as an HTML page in the Gallery by drag-and-drop. + + + Display the Gallery theme to which you want to add the graphic. + + + Position the mouse pointer above the graphic, without clicking. + + + If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol, the graphic refers to a hyperlink. In this case, click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key to select it without executing the respective link. + If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol, you can simply click the graphic to select it. + + + Once the graphic is selected, release the mouse button. Click again on the graphic image, keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds. The graphic image is copied to the internal memory. + + + Without releasing the mouse button, drag the graphic into the Gallery. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca3136cae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Graphics Between Documents +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop; pictures +pictures; drag and drop between documents +copying;pictures, between documents +pasting;pictures from other documents +mw added "pasting;" +Copying Graphics Between Documents + +You can copy a graphic from one document to another by drag-and-drop. If you plan to publish your document, please observe copyright laws and obtain the consent of the authors. + + +Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object. + + +Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic. + + +Click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key, to select it without executing any hyperlinks it may refer to. + + +Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to an internal memory. + + +Drag the graphic into the other document. If the documents are not visible side by side, first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document while keeping the mouse button pressed. The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document. + + + +Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor indicates the position where you want to insert a copy of the picture. + + +If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink, the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b6375d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spreadsheets; copying areas to text documents +copying; sheet areas, to text documents +pasting;sheet areas in text documents +mw added "pasting;" +

Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents

+ + +Open both the text document and the spreadsheet. + + +Select the sheet area you want to copy. + + +Point to the selected area and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment, then drag the area into the text document. +If the documents are not visible next to each other, first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button. Continue to hold down the mouse button. The document is displayed, and you can move the mouse pointer within the document. + + + +Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area, release the mouse button. The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object. + + +You can select and edit the OLE object at any time. + + +To edit the OLE object, double-click on it. +Alternatively, select the object and choose Edit - OLE Object - Edit or choose Edit from the context menu. You edit the object in its own frame within the text document, but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets. + + +Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71c649e01 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Adding Buttons to Toolbars +/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp + + + +customizing; toolbars +buttons;toolbars +toolbars;adding buttons +configuring; toolbars +editing; toolbars +inserting;buttons in toolbars + + + +

Adding Buttons to Toolbars

+
+

To make a button visible on a toolbar

+Open the context menu of the toolbar (right click) and choose Visible Buttons and then select the button you want to display. +
+Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. +

To add a button to a toolbar

+ + +Choose Tools - Customize, and click on the Toolbars tab. + + +In the Target box, select the toolbar you want to change. + + +Select the command to be added in the Available Commands box. (Use the Category and/or Search boxes to restrict possibilities.) + + +Click the Right Arrow icon to add the selected command. + + +The check box in the Assigned Commands list controls whether the command is visible on the toolbar. + + +You can rearrange the Assigned Commands list by selecting a command name and clicking Move Up and Move Down. + + +Click OK. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c7907f49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Sending Documents as Email +/text/shared/guide/email.xhp + + + +
+documents; sending as email +sending; documents as email +email attachments +files; sending as email +text documents;sending as email +spreadsheets; sending as email +drawings; sending as email +presentations; sending as email +attachments in emails + +Sending Documents as Email +Working in $[officename], you can send the current document as an email attachment. + + +Choose File - Send - Email Document. +$[officename] opens your default email program. If you want to send the current document with another email program, you can select the program to use with Internet - Email in the Options dialog box. + + +In your email program, enter the recipient, subject and any text you want to add, then send the email. + + +In case you want to send the email to a recipient who only has software that cannot read the OpenDocument format, you can send the current document in an often used proprietary format.
For a text document, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft Word. For a spreadsheet, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft Excel. And for a presentation, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft PowerPoint.
If you want to send the document as a read-only file, choose File - Send - Email as PDF.
These commands do not change your current document. Only a temporary copy is created and sent. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6574a0d13 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Crash Report Tool + /text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp + + + + + + + Crash Report Tool + reports;crash reports + crash reports + activating;Crash Report Tool + + +

Crash Report Tool

+The Crash Report Tool starts automatically after a program crash occurs. +The Crash Report Tool gathers necessary information that can help the program developers to improve the code, so that in later versions this error can possibly be avoided. Please help us to improve the software and send the generated crash report. + +

Starting the Crash Report Tool

+With most program crashes the Crash Report Tool will start automatically. + +

Sending the Crash Report

+Select the checkbox if you want to restart %PRODUCTNAME in safe mode. Then click the Send Crash Report button. +If a crash report is sent successfully, then a dialog box will provide a URL for the report. To see the report, copy the URL and paste into a webbrowser. + +You will not get an answer to your crash report. If you need support, please visit Community Assistance for an overview of different possibilities. + +

What Data are Sent?

+The crash report sends information about the error type that caused the crash and the process memory contents at the time of the crash. The memory contents include: a list of loaded libraries and their version number; a list of the current threads with the contents of their stack memory and processor register states. The memory trace is gathered locally by standard system tools: dbghelp.dll on Windows systems; clone(), ptrace() and /proc directory on Linux systems; Apple's Crash Reporter on Mac systems. + +Information is also sent about the %PRODUCTNAME version, the operating system name and version, and the computing hardware (CPU type and features; total RAM memory size; graphics device and driver). + +The crash report is anonymous. No identification information is sent and no document content is sent. The report data are sent as a multipart HTTP POST request. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1474a5751 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents in Other Formats +/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp + + + +
+documents; saving in other formats +saving; documents in other formats +files; saving in other formats +text documents;saving in other formats +spreadsheets; saving in other formats +drawings; saving in other formats +presentations; saving in other formats +exporting; to Microsoft Office formats +Word documents; saving as +Excel; saving as +PowerPoint export +mw made "PowerPoint;..." a one level entry +Saving Documents in Other Formats + + + +Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + + +In the Save as type or File type list box, select the desired format. + + +Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. + + +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. +
+ + +Save As + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..768bdeeff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing +/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +faxes; sending +faxes;configuring $[officename] +sending; documents as faxes +configuring;fax icon + +Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing + +To send a fax directly from $[officename], you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem. +Sending a Fax Through the Print Dialog + + +Open the Print dialog by choosing File - Print and select the fax driver in the Name list box. + + +Clicking OK opens the dialog for your fax driver, where you can select the fax recipient. + + +Configuring $[officename] a Fax Icon +You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + +Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. + + +Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard bar. In the drop-down menu, choose Customize. +The Toolbars tab page of the Customize dialog appears. + + +Click Add Commands. + + +Select the "Documents" category, then select the "Send Default Fax" command. + + +Click Add and then Close. + + +On the Toolbars tab page, click the down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it. Click OK. +Your Standard bar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af587350d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using the Filter Navigator +/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp + + +UFI: Filter navigator from Filter bar in Forms documents + + + +filters; Navigator +filter conditions;connecting + +Using the Filter Navigator + + +To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar. The Filter navigator window appears. + +The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions. +The context menu can be called for each entry in the Filter navigator. You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null"). It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu. +You can move filter conditions in the Filter navigator by dragging and dropping, or use the keys CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow or CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. To copy filter conditions, drag them while holding down the CommandCtrl key. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51b640cc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + +Searching for Attributes +/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp + + +UFI: Attributes dialog of Find and Replace dialog + + + + +fonts;finding +font attributes;finding +text attributes;finding +attributes; finding +Find & Replace;attributes +finding; attributes +resetting;Find & Replace mode + +

Searching for Attributes +

+Searching for attributes is available in the Find & Replace dialog for text documents. +You can search for text with attributes that are applied either by direct formatting or by styles. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. +If you want to find text with any font by name, click the Format button in the Find & Replace dialog of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Paragraph Styles box in the Other options area of the %PRODUCTNAME Writer Find & Replace dialog changes to Including Styles. +If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. +The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. +

To search for all font changes

+ + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + +Clear the Find text box if necessary. + + +Click Attributes. + + +In the Attributes dialog, select the Font check box, and click OK. +In the Find & Replace dialog, you now can read "Font" below the Find text box. + + +Click Find Next. + + +All places where a font change was applied, either directly or by assigning an appropriate style, are found. +

To reset the Find & Replace mode

+To stop searching for the current attributes, reset the Find & Replace dialog to normal mode. + + +Click No Format. + + +
+Find & Replace dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef4eaeca4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Changing Icon Views +/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +buttons; big/small +views; icons +icon sizes +changing;icon sizes +large icons +small icons + +Changing Icon Size + +You can change the icon view between small and large icons. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. + + +On the View tab page, select the Toolbar icon size. + + +Click OK. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a4dfb82f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Using Toolbars + /text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + toolbars;docking/undocking + toolbars;viewing/closing + toolbars;locking/unlocking + closing;toolbars + docking;toolbars + fixing toolbars + detaching toolbars + placing toolbars + positioning;toolbars + moving;toolbars + attaching toolbars + floating toolbars + windows;docking + viewing;toolbars + showing;toolbars + icon bars, see toolbars + button bars, see toolbars + + +

Using Toolbars

+Toolbars in %PRODUCTNAME can be either docked as part of the main window, or floating as a separate window. By default, the visible toolbars and the ones you open with View – Toolbars are docked, and their positions are locked. +Some toolbar icons, for example the Font Color icon, can open another toolbar. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar containing further icons. +You now have a choice: either click the icon that you want to activate, or seize the toolbar by its title bar and drag it while holding down the mouse button. + +

Context of Toolbars

+Some toolbars open automatically depending on the context. For example, when you click inside a table in a text document, the Table toolbar opens. When you click inside a numbered paragraph, the Bullets and Numbering toolbar opens. +Toolbars are hidden by default when the Notebook bar is active. + +

To Close a Toolbar Temporarily

+Click the icon in the toolbar's title bar, or choose Close Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar will be shown automatically again when the context becomes active again. + +

To Close a Toolbar Permanently

+While the toolbar is visible, choose View – Toolbars and click the name of the toolbar to remove the check mark. + +

To Show a Closed Toolbar

+ + + + Choose View – Toolbars and click the name of the toolbar. + + + Choose View – Toolbars – Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context. + + +

To Unlock a Docked Toolbar

+Right-click the toolbar and choose Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu so that it is unchecked. A small vertical handle appears at the start of an unlocked toolbar, which you can use to move the toolbar. + +

To Lock a Docked Toolbar

+You can lock the position of a toolbar by choosing Lock Toolbar Position again from the context menu, so that it is checked. + +

To Make a Toolbar a Floating Toolbar

+Click the toolbar handle and drag the toolbar into the document. + +

To Reattach a Floating Toolbar

+ + + + Drag the title bar of the toolbar to an edge of the document window. + + + To reattach a floating window, drag-and-drop the window's title bar to an edge of the document window. The mouse pointer should be very close to the document window's edge when you release the mouse button. + + + Depending on your system's window manager settings, you may also double-click an empty place on the toolbar or window, while holding down the Command +Ctrl key. Or double-click the title bar of the floating toolbar or window. + + +
+Docking toolbars and windows by drag-and-drop depends on your system's window manager settings. You must enable your system to show the full window contents when you move a window, instead of showing just the outer frame. +
+
+ +
+ +Notebook bar +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70fe8f9ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fontwork For Graphical Text Art + /text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp + + + +graphical text art + designing; fonts + TextArt, see Fontwork + WordArt, see Fontwork + Fontwork + text effects + effects; Fontwork icons + text; Fontwork icons + 3D text creation + rotating;3D text + editing;Fontwork objects + inserting;Fontwork objects + + + +Fontwork For Graphical Text Art + +You can use Fontwork to create graphical text art objects. + To create a Fontwork object + + + If you don't see the Drawing toolbar or the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars to enable the toolbar. + + + On the Drawing toolbar or on the Fontwork toolbar, click the Fontwork Gallery icon. +Icon + + + + + +Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or CommandCtrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text. + + In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. + The Fontwork object is inserted into your document. Fontwork objects are Custom Shapes. Using the 3D Settings toolbar, you can switch the view at any time from 2D to 3D and back. + + + Double-click the object to enter text edit mode. + + + Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text. + + + Press Esc to exit text edit mode. + + + To edit a Fontwork object + + + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you click. + The Fontwork toolbar is displayed. If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars - Fontwork. + + + Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar. + The following icons are available: + + + + + Fontwork Gallery - adds another Fontwork object + + + Fontwork Shape - edits the shape + + + Fontwork Same Letter Heights - changes the height of characters + + + Fontwork Alignment - aligns the text + + + Fontwork Character Spacing - changes the character spacing and kerning + + + To edit more Fontwork attributes + + + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you click. + + + Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. You can change the line width, line color, fill color, fill style, and more. + + +
+ Fontwork toolbar + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e249e6cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting and Editing Buttons + /text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp + + + +command buttons, see push buttons + controls;adding to documents + inserting;push buttons + keys;adding push buttons + buttons;adding push buttons + press buttons, see push buttons + push buttons;adding to documents +MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding a Command Button to a Document + + You can use the Form Controls toolbar to add checkboxes, buttons, tables showing data records, and other controls to a document. + To Add a Button to a Document + + + Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. + + + + + + + Push Button Icon + + + + On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon. + + +
+ The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair. + + + In the document, drag to draw the button. + + + Right-click the button and choose Control Properties. + + + Specify the properties of the button. + + + To change the button label, click the General tab, and edit the text in the Label box. + + + To attach a macro to the button, click the Events tab, and click the ... button beside the button action that you want to run the macro. In the Assign Macro dialog, locate the macro that you want to use, and then click OK.UFI: see #i34509# + + + Close the Properties dialog. + + + (Optional) Specify the properties of the form that the button belongs to. + + + Right-click the button and choose Form Properties. + + + The Form Properties dialog opens. + + + Specify the properties for the form and then close the dialog. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaa8cebb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Objects From the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp + + + + + + +Gallery; inserting pictures from +pictures; inserting from Gallery +objects; inserting from Gallery +patterns for objects +textures;inserting from Gallery +backgrounds;inserting from Gallery +inserting;objects from Gallery +copying;from Gallery + + mw deleted "adding;" + Inserting Objects From the Gallery + + You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link. A copy of an object is independent of the original object. Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy. A link remains dependent on the original object. Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link. + Inserting an object as a copy + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object using a single click. + + + Drag the object into the document, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy. + + + Inserting an object as a link + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by choosing Insert - Media - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and CommandCtrl keys, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link. + + + Inserting an object as a background graphic + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Open the context menu and choose Insert - Background - Page or Paragraph. + + + Inserting an object as a texture (pattern) for another object + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing CommandCtrl. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11e48dc55 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Groups +/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp + + + + + + +groups;entering/exiting/ungrouping +frames; selection frames +selecting;objects +exiting;groups +entering groups +ungrouping groups +selection frames +multiple selection +marking, see selecting + + mw copied "frames;" and "selecting;" from shared/02/01140000.xhp; and deleted "selecting;group objects"; added 2 new entries and a see-reference + Working with Groups + + You can combine several graphic objects into a group so that you can use them like a single object. + You can move, transform, resize, distort, or convert all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group any time to change the individual objects. + You can change the properties (line size, fill color, and more) of all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group and change the individual objects. + Groups can also be nested to form groups within other groups. + To group objects + + + Select the objects together that you want to group. Hold down Shift while you click the individual objects. + + + Right-click any of the selected objects to open the context menu. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Group. + To select the objects, you can also drag a selection frame around the objects. + + + For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. + After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. + To enter a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Enter Group. + + + Now you can select and edit a single object in the group. + + + You can add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. + The objects that are not part of the group are shown with dimmed colors. + To exit a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Exit Group. + + + To exit a group in Draw or Impress, you can also double-click anywhere outside the group. + To ungroup a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Ungroup. + + + Now you can select and edit all objects as individual objects. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..720d3b0c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Editing Hyperlinks +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp + + + +hyperlinks; editing +links; editing hyperlinks +editing; hyperlinks +text attributes; hyperlinks +buttons;editing hyperlink buttons +URL;changing hyperlink URLs +MW deleted "changing;" +

Editing Hyperlinks

+When you CommandCtrl-click a hyperlink in a Writer document, your web browser opens with the requested web address. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the hyperlink and open the context menu by Shift+F10, then choose Open Hyperlink. +

Changing the text of a hyperlink

+ +In Writer documents, you can click anywhere into a hyperlink and edit the visible text. +If you leave the hyperlink by positioning the cursor elsewhere, only the visible text changes. +If you leave the hyperlink by entering a space character directly following the last character, the AutoCorrect - if enabled - will change the target URL to be the same as the visible text. +In all document types, you can open the Hyperlink dialog to edit a hyperlink. First set the cursor into the hyperlink or directly in front of the hyperlink, then click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard bar. +

Changing the URL of a hyperlink

+ + +As described above, open Hyperlink Dialog. + + +

Changing the attribute of all hyperlinks

+ + +Open the Styles window. + + +Click the Character Styles icon. + + +Right-click the "Internet Link" or "Visited Internet Link" character style, and choose Modify. + + +In the dialog, select the new attributes, and click OK. + + + +

Editing a hyperlink button

+Hyperlink buttons must be edited in Form design mode. + + + Select menu Form - Design mode or choose View - Toolbars and enable the Form Controls toolbar, click on the Design Mode icon and click on the button. The button handles shows. + + + Open context menu and select Control Properties. + + + Edit the property in the control dialog box. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f243a177a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Hyperlinks +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp + + + +hyperlinks; inserting +links; inserting +inserting; hyperlinks + +Inserting Hyperlinks + +You can insert hyperlinks in two ways: as text or as a button. In both cases, the visible text can be different from the URL. +Place the text cursor in the document at the point where you want to insert the hyperlink or select the text that you want to put the hyperlink on. Select Hyperlink command from the Insert menu. Alternatively click on the Icon Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar. The Hyperlink dialog appears. + + +To jump to a specific line in a text document, first enter a bookmark at that position (Insert - Bookmark). + + +To jump to a cell in a spreadsheet, first enter a name for the cell (Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define). + + +Hyperlinks can also be inserted by drag-and-drop from the Navigator. Hyperlinks can refer to references, headings, graphics, tables, objects, directories or bookmarks. +If you wish to insert in a text a hyperlink that refers to Table 1, drag the entry Table 1 from the Navigator and drop it in the text. To do this, the Insert as Hyperlink drag mode must be selected in the Navigator. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32503d609 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Relative and Absolute Links +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp + + + +absolute hyperlinks +relative hyperlinks +hyperlinks; relative and absolute +hyperlinks, see also links + +Relative and Absolute Links + +When you include hyperlinks, two factors must be taken into account: whether they are set as relative or absolute on saving, and whether or not the file is present. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. + + +You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local images to Internet under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. + + +An absolute path such as "C:\homepage\graphics\picture.gif" would no longer function on the provider server. Neither a server nor the computer of a reader needs to have a C hard drive: operating systems such as Unix or macOS do not recognize drive letters, and even if the folder homepage\graphics existed, your picture would not be available. It is better to use relative addressing for file links. + + +A link to a web page, for example, "www.example.com" or "www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html" is an absolute link. + + +$[officename] also reacts differently, depending on whether the file referred to in the link exists, and where it is located. $[officename] checks every new link and sets a target and protocol automatically. The result can be seen in the generated HTML code after saving the source document. + + +The following rules apply: A relative reference ("graphic/picture.gif") is only possible when both files exist on the same drive. If the files are on different drives in your local file system, the absolute reference follows the "file:" protocol ("file:///data1/xyz/picture.gif"). If the files are on different servers or if the target of the link is not available, the absolute reference uses the "http:" protocol ("http://data2/abc/picture.gif"). + + +Be sure to organize all files for your homepage on the same drive as the start file of the homepage. In this way, $[officename] can set the protocol and target so that the reference on the server is always correct. + + +When you rest your mouse on a hyperlink, a help tip displays the absolute reference, since $[officename] uses absolute path names internally. The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export, by loading the HTML file as "Text" or opening it with a text editor. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f3f4611c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images + /text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp + + + +ImageMap; editor + editors; ImageMap editor + images; ImageMap + pictures; ImageMap + hotspots;adding to images + URL;in pictures +mw added 2 index entriesMW made "hotspots" a two level entry +Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images + + An ImageMap allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a picture in your document. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. + You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. + To add a clickable hotspot to an image + + + Position the cursor where you want the ImageMap in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Image, select and insert a bitmap image. + + + With the image selected, choose Edit - ImageMap in Writer and Calc or Tools - ImageMap in Impress and Draw. You see the ImageMap Editor, which displays the image at the background. + + + Use the icons in the ImageMap Editor to draw a hotspot shape, for example a rectangle, over the image at the background. + You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. + + + Enter the "Address" URL that will be shown in a Web browser when the user clicks the hotspot. + + + Optionally, enter the "Text" that will be shown as a tip when the user points the mouse to the hotspot. + + + Click the Apply button to apply your changes, and close the ImageMap Editor. + + + Save the document in the %PRODUCTNAME or HTML format. + + + You may save the ImageMap as a file and upload that file to a Web server, for example. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48056d273 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Opening documents saved in other formats + /text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp + + + +
+Microsoft Office;opening Microsoft documents + documents; importing + importing; documents in other formats + opening; documents from other formats + loading; documents from other formats + converting;Microsoft documents + saving; default file formats + defaults;document formats in file dialogs + file formats; saving always in other formats + Microsoft Office; as default file format + files;importing + XML converters + converters; XML + Document Converter Wizard + wizards; document converter + converters; document converter + files, see also documents +MW inserted cross-reference "files, see also documents"MW changed "defaults;..."ufi added "converters;document converter" +Opening documents saved in other formats + +You can open a document saved in another format by using the following procedure: + + +Choose File - Open. + + +Select a format from the Files of type list. + + +Select a file name and click Open. + + +If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. +Converting all documents of a folder +Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. + + +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. + + + + +Opening HTML files in Writer + + + Choose the file type "HTML Document" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. This is the default for HTML documents in %PRODUCTNAME. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web are now available to you, such as Show HTML source. + + + Choose "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Writer)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer are now available to you. Not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format. + + + + +
+
+ + + + + Working with VBA code + Setting the default file format + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d40579549 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps +/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp + + + +graphics, see also pictures +images, see also pictures +images; inserting and editing bitmaps +illustrations, see pictures +bitmaps; inserting and editing +pixel graphics; inserting and editing +exporting; bitmaps +importing; bitmaps +pictures; editing +editing; pictures +invert filter +smoothing filter +sharpening filter +remove noise filter +solarization filter +aging filter +posterizing filter +pop-art filter +charcoal sketches filter +mosaic filter +pictures;filters +filters;pictures +mw made "illustrations,..." a see-reference +

Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps Images +

+

Inserting Bitmaps

+A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. + +
+ + +Choose Insert - Image. + + +Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. + + +Select the frame style for the image.Select the anchor type for the image at the current cell position.Check below. + + +Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. +If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. +If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. +To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. + + +Click Open to insert the image. + + +
+

Editing Bitmaps

+

Icons on the Image bar

+When you select the bitmap image, the Image Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. +The Image Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using. +A number of filters are located on the Image Filter toolbar, which you can open with the icon on the Image Bar. +The original image file will not be changed by the filters. Filters are applied to an image only inside the document. +Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. Most filters can be applied multiple times to increase the filter effect. +In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. +

The Image dialog

+ + +Right-click the image and choose Image from the submenu to open a properties dialog. + + +Change the properties of the selected image, then click OK. + + +

Saving Bitmaps

+If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. +To export a bitmap in Draw or Impress: + + +Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. + + +Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. +The Export command writes the image with all applied filter effects to a file. The Save Image command in the context menu saves the image without any filter effects, if the image was inserted as a linked image. An embedded image will always be saved or exported with filters applied.see i70055 + + +In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. + + +If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. +If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. + + +Enter a name for the file and click Export. + + + +To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type. +
+ + + +Image Filter Bar from the Image Bar + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5953a3966 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Graphic Objects + /text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp + + + +resizing, see also scaling/zooming + scaling, see also zooming + drawings, see also draw objects + graphic objects, see draw objects + text; drawing pictures + inserting; drawings + pictures; drawing + objects; copying when moving in presentations + draw objects; adding/editing/copying + circle drawings + square drawings + handles; scaling + scaling; objects + objects;moving and resizing with mouse + resizing;objects, by mouse + copying; draw objects + pasting;draw objects + editing;draw objects + pictures;scaling/resizing +MW added "graphic objects, see also..." +Editing Graphic Objects + + Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar, if it is not already open. + Drawing objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing objects created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. + To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. + + + To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. +To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. +Draw multiple objects of the same type. Click the document without moving the mouse to stop drawing objects. + + + If you want to open up draw objects from the center instead of dragging from one corner to the other, hold down the Option +Alt key while dragging. With some window managers, you may need to hold down also the meta key. + + + + Holding down the Shift key while dragging restricts the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle you get a square, instead of an ellipse you get a circle. When you drag a handle of an existing object with Shift held down, the aspect ratio of the object is retained. + + + To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. + + + To scale a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press Command +Ctrl+Tab repeatedly to highlight one of the handles. Then press an arrow key. To scale in smaller steps, hold down the Option +Alt key while pressing an arrow key. Press Esc to leave the point edit mode. + + + To move draw objects, first select them. To select more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. + + + To move a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press an arrow key. To move in smaller steps, hold down the Option +Alt key while pressing an arrow key. + + + To enter text to be a part of a graphics object, select the object and start typing your text. Click outside the object to end entering text. Double-click text inside an object to edit the text. + + + To revert to normal mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no objects. If you see a drawing cursor, first exit this mode by clicking the Select icon. +
+ Information about the individual icons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59d385b4c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Special Characters +/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp + + + +characters; special +inserting; special characters +special characters +text; inserting special characters +accents +compose key to insert special characters + +Inserting Special Characters + +This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. + + +To view a repertoire of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. + + +In the large selection field double-click on the desired character, which is inserted in the current document. + + +In any text input field (such as the input fields in the Find & Replace dialog) you can press Shift+CommandCtrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog. + + +At present there are three ways of entering letters with accents directly from the keyboard. + +Solaris: Using a Sun keyboard. First press the Compose key to the right of the space bar, then enter the first and second modifiers. + +Linux / NetBSD: Using the dead-keys. In an xterm window first press the (´) or (`) key. The character should not appear on the screen. Now press a letter, such as "e". The e is given an accent, é or è. If not, then check in the XF86Config file if a "nodeadkeys" XkbdVariant has been loaded there and replace it. You may also have set the environment variable SAL_NO_DEADKEYS, which deactivates the dead-keys. + +All Unix systems: (Alt Graph) as additional compose key. The (Alt Graph) key can work in $[officename] like the Compose key, if you set the environment variable SAL_ALTGR_COMPOSE. The (Alt Graph) key must trigger a mode_switch, so, for example, xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_R = Mode_switch" must be set. First press (Alt Graph), then the first modifier, then the second modifier. The characters are combined as described on a Solaris system in the file /usr/openwin/include/X11/Suncompose.h. + + +Special Characters +AutoCorrect + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a709a6c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Integrating new UNO components +/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +add-ons, see UNO components +UNO components;integrating new +installing;UNO components + +Integrating new UNO components + +Programmers can write and integrate their own UNO (Universal Network Objects) components to $[officename]. Those new components can be added to the $[officename] menus and toolbars; we call them "Add-Ons". +The integration of new components is supported by some tools and services. Details can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. The three main steps are as follows: + + +Register the new components within $[officename]. This can be accomplished using the tool unopkg, which can be found in {installpath}/ +\program. + + +Integrate the new components as services. The ProtocolHandler and JobDispatch services assist you; more information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + +Change the user interface (menus or toolbars). This can be done almost automatically by writing an XML text file that describes the changes. More information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + +The Add-Ons can extend the functionality of $[officename]. They are not related to the Add-Ins +Add-Ins that provide new functions for $[officename] Calc. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..253aea1aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,408 @@ + + + + + + + + + Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) + /text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + +accessibility;general shortcuts + shortcut keys; %PRODUCTNAME accessibility + +Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) + + You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. + On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. + In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. + + Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse + Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document + Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: + + + menu bar, + + + every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, + + + every free window from left to right, + + + document + + +Press Shift+F6 to switch through objects in the opposite direction. + Press Command +Ctrl+F6 to switch to the document. + Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. + Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. + Calling a menu command + Press Option +Alt or F6 or F10 to select the first menu (the File menu). With right arrow, the next menu to the right is selected; with left arrow, the previous menu. + Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. + Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. + Executing an icon command + Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. + Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press Command +Ctrl+Enter. + + + Pressing Command +Ctrl+Enter on an icon for creating a draw object. A draw object will be placed into the middle of the view, with a predefined size. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Enter on the Selection tool to select the first draw object in the document. If you want to edit, size, or move the selected draw object, first use Command +Ctrl+F6 to set the focus into the document. + + + If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. + Special hints for toolbars + Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. + Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. + Selection from a combo box + + + + +Combo box + + + + Select the combo box. Press Enter. + Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. + Press Enter to execute the selected entry. + + +
+ + Selection in Tables + In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: + + + Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. + + + Command +Ctrl+spacebar: switches between selection of the current row and cancellation of this selection. + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+spacebar: switches between selection of the current column and cancellation of this selection. + + + Option +Alt+Up Arrow or Option +Alt+Down Arrow: moves the window separator between table and form, for instance in the bibliography database. + + + In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press Command +Ctrl+Tab. To move to the previous control, press Shift+Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs + + + First press Option +Alt+spacebar. + A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. + + + Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). + + + Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. + + + Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. + + + Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars + + + Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Shift+F10. + + + Selecting objects + Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. + Edit Objects + A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. + Edit Position and Size of Objects + + + Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Set the grid resolution unit with %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + + + Use the Option +Alt and arrow keys to move the selected object by one pixel. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to enter the handle edit mode. The upper left handle is the active handle, it starts blinking. Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to select the next handle. Press Escape to exit the handle edit mode. + + + In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. + + + Edit the Anchors of Objects + You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. + + + Select the object. + + + Enter the handle edit mode with Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + The upper left handle starts blinking. Press Command +Ctrl+Tab several times, until no handle blinks. This signals that now the anchor of the object is activated. In text documents you can press Shift+Command +Ctrl+A to activate the anchor directly. + + + + Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. + + + You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. + + + If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. + + + If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. + + + If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. + + + Controlling the Dividing Lines + Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. + + + Shift+Command +Ctrl+F6: shows the dividing lines at default positions and focus a line. + + + Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. + + + Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. + + + Delete: deletes the current dividing line + + + Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines + + + Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines + + + Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position + + +
+ Controlling the Data Source View + CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 opens and closes the data source view. + F6: switches between document and toolbars. + + (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. + - (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+E: switches between data source explorer and table. + Shortcuts in the Query Design Window + F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. + Option +Alt+Up arrow or Option +Alt+Down arrow: moves the border between table view and selection area up or down. + Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window + Command +Ctrl+Arrow key: moves the selected table in the direction of the arrow. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key: resizes the selected table in the table view. + Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. + Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. + Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. + Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. + Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) + Command +Ctrl+Left Arrow or Right Arrow: moves the selected column to the left or to the right. + Keys in the Table Design Window + F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area. +
+
+ Controlling the ImageMap Editor + + + Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press Command + Ctrl+Enter, an object of the selected type is created in default size. + + + If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. + + + If the Select icon is selected and you press CommandCtrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. + + + Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. + + + Use CommandCtrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to select the previous point. + + + Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object. + + +
+ Controlling the Help + Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + Navigating the main help pages + + + In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. + + + Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. + + + Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. + + + Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) + Ruler + + + Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right + + + Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position + + + CommandCtrl+Home or CommandCtrl+End: jump to the first or the last split + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Home or Shift+CommandCtrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position + + + Space key: insert or remove a split + + + Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) + + + Delete key: delete a split + + + Shift+Delete: delete all splits + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position + + + Preview + + + Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) + + + Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) + + + Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or CommandCtrl as with cursor keys) + + + Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) + + + CommandCtrl+A: select all columns + + + Shift+F10: open a context menu + + + CommandCtrl+1 ... CommandCtrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + CommandCtrl+Home or CommandCtrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table + + + Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog + + + Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. + + + Option +Alt+Down Arrow opens a combo box. Enter selects the current entry in the combo box. + + + Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2faefa486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards +/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +labels; creating and synchronizing +business cards; creating and synchronizing +synchronizing;labels and business cards +mw made "synchronizing..." a two level entry +Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards + +Designing Business Cards Through a Dialog +Choose File - New - Business Cards to open the Business Cards dialog, which allows you to choose how your business cards will look. +Designing Labels and Business Cards +You can design both labels and business cards through the Labels dialog. + + +Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. + + +On the Labels tab, under Format, define the label format. +$[officename] Writer contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels, badges, and business cards. You can also add other, user-defined formats. + + +On the Labels tab, under Inscription, you can choose what you want written on the labels. +This often involves database fields, so that the labels can be printed with varying content, when sending "Form Letters" for example. It is also possible to have the same text printed on every label. +Use the Database and Table list boxes to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained. Click on the arrow button to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area. Press Enter to insert a line break. You can also enter spaces and any other fixed text. +On the Format tab you can define your own label formats, not covered by the predefined formats. To do this, select "User" from the Type list box. On the Options tab, you can specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created. + + +On the Options tab page, make sure that the Synchronize contents box is selected. If this is selected, a label only has to be entered (on the top left label) and edited once. + + +Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings you have entered. + + +As soon as you click on New Document, you will see a small window with the Synchronize Labels button. Enter the first label. When you click on the Synchronize Labels button, the current individual label is copied to all the other labels on the sheet. + + + + + +Business Cards + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6102fa582 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Address Labels + /text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp + + + +address labels from databases + labels; from databases + stickers + databases;creating labels +mw deleted "creating;" +Printing Address Labels + + + + Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. + + + On the Labels tab page, select the format of the label sheets you want to print on. + + + Choose the database and table from which to get the data. + + + Select a database field of which you want to print the contents. Click the button that shows a left arrow to insert the database field into the Label Text box. + Continue to select and insert database fields if you want more fields on every label. You can press Enter to insert a new line, and you can type any character to insert fixed text. + + + Optionally, if you want to type more text, apply formatting, or insert images and line art, you should enable Synchronize contents on the Options tab. If you enable this, once you leave the Labels dialog box a small window opens with a Synchronize button. Now you only need to work on the first label on the labels document, then click the Synchronize button to copy your work to every label of the document. + + + Click New Document. + + + When you see the label document, you might want to temporarily enable View - Field Names. This displays the fields in a more visible manner, so that you can arrange and edit label contents more easily. + + + You can save and/or print the label document. + + + When you choose to print the document, you will be asked if you want to print a form letter. Answer Yes to open the Mail Merge dialog. In the Mail Merge dialog, you can select the records for which you want to print labels. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83f1827ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting the Document Language + /text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp + + + +languages; selecting for text + documents; languages + characters; language selection + character styles;language selection + text; language selection + paragraph styles; languages + drawings; languages + defaults;languages + spellcheck; default languages + spelling; default languages + dictionaries, see also languages +mw deleted "applying;" and changed "languages;" +Selecting the Document Language + + The language you select for your document determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation, the decimal and thousands delimiter used and the default currency format. + + + The language you select applies to the whole document. + + + Within the document, you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This has priority over the language of the whole document. + + + You can assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, either by direct formatting or with a character style. This assignment has priority over the paragraph style and document language. + + + Selecting a language for the whole document + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. + + + Under Default languages for documents, select the document language for all newly created documents. If you mark For the current document only, your choice will only apply to the current document. Close the dialog with OK. + + + Selecting a language for a Paragraph Style + + + Place the cursor in the paragraph whose paragraph style you want to edit. + + + Open the context menu and select Edit Paragraph Style. This opens the Paragraph Style dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + All paragraphs formatted with the current paragraph style will have the selected language. + + + Applying a language directly to selected text + + + Select the text to which you want to apply a language. + + + Choose Format - Character. This opens the Character dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, choose Format - Cells and proceed accordingly. + Selecting a language for a Character Style + + + Open the Styles window and click on the Character Styles icon. + + + Click on the name of the character style to which you want to apply a different language. + + + Then open the context menu in the Styles window and select Modify. This opens the Character Style dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + Now you can apply the character style to your selected text. + + UFI: see i76182 +Adding More Text Languages + + + Dictionaries are supplied and installed as extensions. Choose Tools - Language - More Dictionaries Online to open the dictionaries page in your default web browser. + + + Select a dictionary in the list of descriptions. Click the heading in a dictionary description that you want to get. + + + In the next page, click the Get It icon to download the dictionary extension. Note the folder name to which your browser downloads the file. Download additional dictionaries as you like. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME, choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add to install the downloaded extensions. + + + After you installed the extensions, you should close %PRODUCTNAME (including the Quickstarter), and restart. + + + Setting UI Language + A standard installation of %PRODUCTNAME software will give you a user interface (UI) of your chosen language. + Most users download the American English version, which gives you English menu commands and English application help. If you want another language for the menus (and for the application help, if available in that language), change the UI language as follows. + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + + + Select another UI language in the "User interface" listbox. + + + Click OK and restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + If the listbox doesn't list the language that you want, see "Adding More UI Languages". + + + Adding More UI Languages + + + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Run %PRODUCTNAME installer, choose Modify, then select the language that you would like to install from the Additional user interface languages group. + + + + + If you use %PRODUCTNAME packages maintained by your Linux distribution, follow the steps below. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Open your favourite package manager, look for %PRODUCTNAME language packs, and install the languages that you would like to use. + + + If you downloaded %PRODUCTNAME packages from the main %PRODUCTNAME Web site, follow the steps below. + + + Open your web browser and enter https://www.libreoffice.org/download/. + + + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Install the language pack. Unpack tar.gz file and install the packages according to standard practice on your platform. + + + + + + + Open your web browser and enter https://www.libreoffice.org/download/. + + + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Install the language pack by double-clicking the dmg file. + + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Format - Character - Font + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06575b389 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Lines in Text +/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp + + + +arrows; drawing in text +indicator lines in text +lines; drawing in text +lines; removing automatic lines +deleting; lines in text +drawing lines in text +automatic lines/borders in text + +Drawing Lines in Text + +You can incorporate lines into your text with custom angles, width, color, and other attributes. +To define the line attributes and direction, use the Line drawing object as follows: + + + + +Icon + + +Icon + + + +1. + + +On the Standard bar, click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Drawing toolbar, and click the Line icon. The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol with a line beside it. + + + + + + +2. + + +In your document, click where the line should begin. Hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where you want the line to end. If you also hold down the Shift key, you can draw only horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines. + + + + + +Icon + + + +3. + + +Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length. You can then draw more lines. End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Select icon from the Drawing bar. + + + + + + +4. + + +After clicking the Select icon, you can select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key. This multiple selection enables you to assign all of them a common color, width or other attribute. + + +
+ + + +Create a horizontal line by applying the preset Paragraph Style Horizontal Line. Click into an empty paragraph, and double-click the Horizontal Line Style in the Styles window. If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles, select "All Styles" in the lower listbox. + + +You can draw a line above, beside or below a paragraph in a Writer text document by choosing Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + +Automatic lines in Writer + + +If you start a new line in a Writer text document by typing three or more hyphen characters and press the Enter key, the characters are removed and the previous paragraph gets a line as a bottom border. +To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores (_), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. + + +To remove an automatically drawn border, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders and select no border. + + +To undo an automatic border replacement once, choose Edit - Undo. + + +To disable the automatic borders, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options and clear Apply border. + + +The lines and other drawing objects that you insert in text are not defined in HTML, and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format. Instead, they are exported as graphics. +When you enter a line width, you can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. + +Format - Paragraph - Borders + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..791e02aa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Defining Arrow Styles +/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp + + + +defining; arrowheads and other line ends +arrows; defining arrow heads +lines;defining ends + +

Defining Arrow Styles

+You can define any shape to be included in the list of available arrow styles. Only the form of the shape is added as a black filled arrowhead. + + +Use the draw functions to create the shape to be used as an arrow style. + + +Select the shape and choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line. + + +In the dialog, click the Arrow Styles tab. + + +Click Add and assign a name to the new arrow style. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..834b3e654 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Defining Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp + + + +line styles;defining +defining;line styles + +Defining Line Styles + + + +Select a line drawing object in a document. + + +Choose Format - Drawing Object - Graphic - Line and click the Line Styles tab. + + +Specify the line options that you want. +To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. + + +Click Add. + + +Enter a name for the line style and click OK. +To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. + + +Click Close to close the dialog. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c24942c2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Applying Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +separator lines; defining +reference lines +arrows; defining arrow lines +line styles; applying + +Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar + +The Drawing Object Properties toolbar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes. + + +Click the Line icon +Icon + to open the Line dialog. + + +Click the Arrow Styles icon +Icon + to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line. + + +Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. + + +Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d23eb1356 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + Lotus, dBase and Diff filter parameters + /text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp + + + + source: https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/DevGuide/Spreadsheet_Documents#Filter_Options + +Lotus;command line filter options +dBase;command line filter options +Diff;command line filter options + +
+

Lotus, dBase and Diff filter parameters

+ The Lotus, dBase and Diff filters accept a string containing the numerical index of the used character set for single-byte characters, that is, 0 for the system character set. The numerical indexes assigned to the character sets are in the table below. +
+ + To import file myLotus.wk3 with DOS/OS2-850/International (Western) character set. + soffice --infilter="Lotus:4" myLotus.wk3 +
+ + + + Character set + + + Index + + + Unknown 0 + Windows-1252/WinLatin 1 (Western) 1 + Apple Macintosh (Western) 2 + DOS/OS2-437/US (Western) 3 + DOS/OS2-850/International (Western) 4 + DOS/OS2-860/Portuguese (Western) 5 + DOS/OS2-861/Icelandic (Western) 6 + DOS/OS2-863/Canadian-French (Western) 7 + DOS/OS2-865/Nordic (Western) 8 + System default 9 + Symbol 10 + ASCII/US (Western) 11 + ISO-8859-1 (Western) 12 + ISO-8859-2 (Central European) 13 + ISO-8859-3 (Latin 3) 14 + ISO-8859-4 (Baltic) 15 + ISO-8859-5 (Cyrillic) 16 + ISO-8859-6 (Arabic) 17 + ISO-8859-7 (Greek) 18 + ISO-8859-8 (Hebrew) 19 + ISO-8859-9 (Turkish) 20 + ISO-8859-14 (Western) 21 + ISO-8859-15/EURO (Western) 22 + DOS/OS2-737 (Greek) 23 + DOS/OS2-775 (Baltic) 24 + DOS/OS2-852 (Central European) 25 + DOS/OS2-855 (Cyrillic) 26 + DOS/OS2-857 (Turkish) 27 + DOS/OS2-862 (Hebrew) 28 + DOS/OS2-864 (Arabic) 29 + DOS/OS2-866/Russian (Cyrillic) 30 + DOS/OS2-869/Modern (Greek) 31 + DOS/Windows-874 (Thai) 32 + Windows-1250/WinLatin 2 (Central European) 33 + Windows-1251 (Cyrillic) 34 + Windows-1253 (Greek) 35 + Windows-1254 (Turkish) 36 + Windows-1255 (Hebrew) 37 + Windows-1256 (Arabic) 38 + Windows-1257 (Baltic) 39 + Windows-1258 (Vietnamese) 40 + Apple Macintosh (Arabic) 41 + Apple Macintosh (Central European) 42 + Apple Macintosh/Croatian (Central European) 43 + Apple Macintosh (Cyrillic) 44 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Devanagari) 45 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Farsi) 46 + Apple Macintosh (Greek) 47 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Gujarati) 48 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Gurmukhi) 49 + Apple Macintosh (Hebrew) 50 + Apple Macintosh/Icelandic (Western) 51 + Apple Macintosh/Romanian (Central European) 52 + Apple Macintosh (Thai) 53 + Apple Macintosh (Turkish) 54 + Apple Macintosh/Ukrainian (Cyrillic) 55 + Apple Macintosh (Chinese Simplified) 56 + Apple Macintosh (Chinese Traditional) 57 + Apple Macintosh (Japanese) 58 + Apple Macintosh (Korean) 59 + Windows-932 (Japanese) 60 + Windows-936 (Chinese Simplified) 61 + Windows-Wansung-949 (Korean) 62 + Windows-950 (Chinese Traditional) 63 + Shift-JIS (Japanese) 64 + GB-2312 (Chinese Simplified) 65 + GBT-12345 (Chinese Traditional) 66 + GBK/GB-2312-80 (Chinese Simplified) 67 + BIG5 (Chinese Traditional) 68 + EUC-JP (Japanese) 69 + EUC-CN (Chinese Simplified) 70 + EUC-TW (Chinese Traditional) 71 + ISO-2022-JP (Japanese) 72 + ISO-2022-CN (Chinese Simplified) 73 + KOI8-R (Cyrillic) 74 + Unicode (UTF-7) 75 + Unicode (UTF-8) 76 + ISO-8859-10 (Central European) 77 + ISO-8859-13 (Central European) 78 + EUC-KR (Korean) 79 + ISO-2022-KR (Korean) 80 + JIS 0201 (Japanese) 81 + JIS 0208 (Japanese) 82 + JIS 0212 (Japanese) 83 + Windows-Johab-1361 (Korean) 84 + GB-18030 (Chinese Simplified) 85 + BIG5-HKSCS (Chinese Traditional) 86 + TIS 620 (Thai) 87 + KOI8-U (Cyrillic) 88 + ISCII Devanagari (Indian) 89 + Unicode (Java's modified UTF-8) 90 + Adobe Standard 91 + Adobe Symbol 92 + PT 154 (Windows Cyrillic Asian codepage developed in ParaType) 93 + Unicode UCS4 65534 + Unicode UCS2 65535 +
+
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe2c4ea56 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Recording a Macro + /text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp + + + + + macros; recording + recording; macros + Basic; recording macros + + Recording a Macro + + %PRODUCTNAME can record commands executed with the keyboard and mouse in Writer and Calc + + + Open the document for which you want to record a macro. + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. + If Tools - Macros - Record Macro menu item is missing, make sure that macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. + You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. + + + Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. + Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. + + + Click Stop Recording. + The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. + If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. + + + To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. + + + If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. + + + Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. Do not use Basic keywords as a name. + + + Click Save. + + + + macro recording;limitations + + Limitations of the macro recorder + The following actions are not recorded: + + + Opening of windows is not recorded. + + + Actions carried out in another window than where the recorder was started are not recorded. + + + Window switching is not recorded. + + + Actions that are not related to the document contents are not recorded. For example, changes made in the Options dialog, macro organizer, customizing. + + + Selections are recorded only if they are done by using the keyboard (cursor traveling), but not when the mouse is used. + + + The macro recorder works only in Calc and Writer. + + +
+ Macro +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3f45acf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + + General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/main.xhp + + + + + + + instructions; general + + +

General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME

+ +

Opening and Saving Documents and Templates

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Windows, Menus and Icons

+ + + + + + + + + +

Accessibility

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Sources

+Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +Table Wizard +Query Wizard +Forms Wizard +Report Wizard + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recording Changes (Revision Marking)

+ + + + + + + + +

Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charts

+ + + + + + +

Miscellaneous

+General Terminology +Internet Terminology + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cf2239c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Working with Templates in Template Manager + /text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp + + + + +paths;template files +categories;in templates +file extensions;in templates + + +

Templates in the Template Manager

+The recommended method for working with templates is to use the Template Manager and the commands in the File - Templates submenu, Edit Template and Save as Template. These commands are sufficient for basic management of templates in %PRODUCTNAME. +This guide explains how the file system interacts with the Template Manager. This information is particularly useful if you want to manage directories directly, but still be coordinated with the Template Manager. + +

Working with Template Files

+The Template Manager recognizes template files by their file extension. The following extensions are recognized: + + + + Application + + + Extensions + + + + + Writer + + + .ott .otm .oth .stw .dot .dotx + + + + + Calc + + + .ots .stc .xlt .xltm .xltx + + + + + Impress + + + .otp .pot .potm .potx .sti + + + + + Draw + + + .otg .std + + +
+For information about the meaning of the extensions see Filter Conversion. +

Working with Template Names

+The Template Manager shows the Title field of a document as the Template Name. As long as the Title field is not empty, the filename has no consequences for the Template Name shown in the Template Manager. If the Title field is empty, the filename, without extension, is shown as the Template Name. +If two templates have the exact same entry in the Title field and belong to the same Category, then only one template appears in the Template Manager. +Titles are case-sensitive. For example, if one template in category My Templates has the title a4 and another has the title A4, then both templates appear in the Template Manager. If both templates have the title A4, then only one appears. +If templates have the same title, but belong to different categories, then all appear in the Template Manager. For example, if three templates have the title A4, and each template belongs to a different category, then all three templates appear with the Template Name A4. +You can edit the Title field by choosing File - Properties - Description. If you change the Title field, then the new title also appears as the Template Name in the Template Manager. Alternatively, if you use the Rename command in the context menu for a template, then the Title field of the template is changed to the new Template Name. +If you use the File - Save as Template dialog, then the name entered in that dialog is used as the filename and entered into the Title field. If you change the filename later, the template will still appear in the Template Manager according to the entry in the Title field. + +The Title field of a template is included in the Title field of new documents created from the template. + +

Controlling which Files Appear in the Template Manager

+The Template Manager displays templates located in the directories defined in the Paths dialog for Templates. The dialog is found by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, selecting Templates, and clicking Edit. + + +

Internal Paths

+ +The Internal Paths directories cannot be changed. They identify the location of the predefined templates. These templates are always shown in the Template Manager. + +
+

User Paths

+The default setting for User Path is the template subdirectory in the user profile directory. +Templates in the directories specified in User Path and its subdirectories are shown in the Template Manager. Subdirectories within subdirectories are not recognized. +You can add additional directories to the User Path. There has to be at least one directory in User Path, but there are no limits on where it is located. +It is not a good idea to add a root Document directory, or other high-level directory, to your template User Path. All subdirectories in a User Path directory appear in the Template Manager as Categories. +If you have more than one directory in the User Path, then you must select which directory will be used to save a document as a template when the File - Save as Template command is used. +The Default button resets User Path to the initial setting when %PRODUCTNAME was installed. +
+ +
+

Working with Categories

+The names of subdirectories in the user-defined directories appear as Category names in the Template Manager. If you rename a category, the subdirectory continues to be used, with the new category name stored in groupuinames.xml in the selected Default Path. + +When a Category is selected, then all templates in that subdirectory are shown in the Template Manager, if All Applications is the Filter selection. + A category can only show templates in its own subdirectory, with two exceptions. + + + All Categories shows all templates, relative to the Filter selection. + + + My Templates shows all templates in the directories specified in User Path, relative to the Filter selection. + + +Categories within a Category are not possible, because subdirectories within subdirectories are not recognized. +You can only rename and delete categories in the Default Path selected in the Edit Paths dialog. + If you delete a Category whose subdirectory is in the selected Default Path, then the subdirectory associated with the Category name and any files in the subdirectory are deleted. +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..156859f35 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Measurement Units +/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents;measurement units in +measurement units;selecting +units;measurement units +centimeters +inches +distances +selecting;measurement units + +Selecting Measurement Units + +You can select separate measurement units for $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Writer/Web, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. + + +Open a document of the type for which you want to change the measurement units. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. + + +In the left pane of the dialog, double-click the application for which you want to select the measurement unit. +Double-click %PRODUCTNAME Writer if you want to select the measurement units for text documents. + + +Click on General. + + +On the General tab page, select the measurement unit. Close the dialog with OK. + + + +Entering measurement units directly +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ac9cb0de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + + +Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms +/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;feature comparisons + +Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms + +The following table lists Microsoft Office features and their $[officename] equivalents. + + + +Microsoft Office XP + + +$[officename] + + + + +AutoShapes + + +Gallery Objects
Shapes are on the Drawing toolbar (menu View - Toolbars - Drawing) + + + + +Change Case + + +Case/Characters + + + + +Click and Type + + +Direct Cursor + + + + +Compare and Merge Documents + + +Compare + + + + +Document Map + + +Navigator + + + + +Formula Auditing + + +Detective + + + + +Lines and Page Breaks + + +Text Flow + + + + +Page setup + + +Format - Page +For spreadsheets see also View - Page Break Preview + + + + +Markup + + +Track Changes - Show + + + + +Refresh Data (in Excel) + + +Refresh Range + + + + +Replace text as you type + + +AutoCorrect + + + + +Show/Hide + + +Nonprinting Characters, Hidden Paragraphs + + + + +Spelling and Grammar + + +Spelling + + + + +Track changes + + +Changes - Record + + + + +Validation + + +Validity + + + + +Workbook + + +Spreadsheet + + + + +Worksheet + + +Sheet + + + + +Shared Workbooks + + +Collaboration + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06d277b27 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types +/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;reassigning document types +file associations for Microsoft Office +changing;file associations in Setup program + +Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types + +To change the association of Microsoft Office file name extensions to open the files either in $[officename] or in Microsoft Office, using Microsoft Windows: +
+ + +In Windows’ File Explorer, right-click a file of the type that you want to assign to another application. + + +In the context menu, choose Open with - Choose another app. + + +In the list of applications that appears, select the program that should open the current type of files. Make sure that “Always use this app” is checked. +If these steps do not apply to your brand of Microsoft Windows, search your Microsoft Windows Help for instructions how to change the file associations. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3be46e308 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + + + About Converting Microsoft Office Documents + /text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;document import restrictions + import restrictions for Microsoft Office + Microsoft Office;importing password protected files +MW moved "Microsoft Office;" from shared/guide/protection.xhp + +About Converting Microsoft Office Documents +$[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load and save the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. +Microsoft Word + + +AutoShapes + + +Revision marks + + +OLE objects + + +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + +Indexes + + +Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting + + +Hyperlinks and bookmarks + + +Microsoft WordArt graphics + + +Animated characters/text + + +Microsoft PowerPoint + + +AutoShapes + + +Tab, line, and paragraph spacing + + +Master background graphics + + +Grouped objects + + +Certain multimedia effects + + +Microsoft Excel + + +AutoShapes + + +OLE objects + + +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + +Pivot tables + + +New chart types + + +Conditional formatting + + +Some functions/formulas (see below) + + +One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. + + +In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. + + +In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German + + +For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. +Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password +%PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. + + + +Microsoft Office format + + +Supported encryption method + + + + +Word 6.0, Word 95 + + +Weak XOR encryption + + + + +Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 + + +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + +Word XP, Word 2003 + + +Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions + + + + +Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 + + +Weak XOR encryption + + + + +Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + +Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + +Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions + + +
+Microsoft Office files that are encrypted by AES128 can be opened. Other encryption methods are not supported. +
+ + + Setting the default file format +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc9cffe50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp + + + +Office;Microsoft Office and $[officename] +Microsoft Office;new users information +opening;Microsoft Office files +saving;in Microsoft Office file format +macros; in MS Office documents + +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] + +$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats, including Microsoft Office Open XML formats. +Opening a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. + + + + + +MS Office file... + + +...will open in $[officename] module + + + + +Microsoft Word, *.doc, *.docx + + +$[officename] Writer + + + + +Microsoft Excel, *.xls, *.xlsx + + +$[officename] Calc + + + + +Microsoft PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps, *.pptx + + +$[officename] Impress + + +
+ +Saving as a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Save As. + + +In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. + + +Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +In the Default file format and ODF settings area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. + + +From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. + + +Opening Microsoft Office Files by Default + + + +Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into OpenDocument Format +The Document Converter Wizard will copy and convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents in the OpenDocument file format. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. + + +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter to start the wizard. + + +Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] +With a few exceptions, Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses Basic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. +You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros +Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. +You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..467dd52b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Navigator for Document Overview +/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; contents as lists +Navigator; contents as lists + +

Navigator for Document Overview +

+All contents of the Navigator window are referred to here as "categories," whether headings, sheets, tables, frames, graphics, OLE objects, sections, hyperlinks, references, indexes, comments, or drawing objects. +The Navigator displays types of objects contained in a document. If a plus sign appears next to a category, this indicates that at least one object of this kind exists. If you rest the mouse pointer on the category name, the number of objects is displayed in an extended tip. +Open a category by clicking on the plus sign. If you only want to view the entries in a certain category, select the category and click the Content Navigation View icon. Until you click the icon again, only the objects of this category will be displayed. +You may dock the Navigator to any document border or turn it back into a free window (double click on the gray area). You can change the size of the Navigator when it is a free window. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2d70a769 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects +/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Document Map, see Navigator +cursor;quickly moving to an object +objects;quickly moving to +navigating;in documents +Navigator;working with + +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects + +This is a common use of the Navigator. + + +Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. + + +You can use the Navigation toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. + + + + +Open the toolbar using the Navigation icon below the vertical scroll bar of a text document, or in the Navigator window. + + +On the Navigation toolbar, you first select the category, then click on one of the buttons, Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..659ce4c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Showing Navigation Pane of the Help +/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; navigation pane showing/hiding +hiding;navigation pane in Help window +indexes;showing/hiding Help index tab + + +Showing Navigation Pane of the Help + +In the Help window, you can show or hide the navigation pane as needed. + + + + +Icon + + + +On the toolbar of the Help window, click the left icon to show or hide the navigation pane. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1b1f62ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs + /text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp + + + +numbering; turning off +bullets; turning off +removing, see also deleting +removing;bullets and numbering +keyboard;removing numbering + +

Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs

+ + no bullets for Calc + Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. + + no bullets for Mathdon't care for Math by now. Issue 98726 + + + For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the No List icon in the Formatting bar. The list indenting is also removed. + + + + + No List icon + + + No List icon + + +
+ + Impress, Draw + If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Toggle Unordered List icon on the Text Formatting bar. + + + + + Toggle Unordered List icon + + + + Toggle Unordered List icon + + +
+ + + + + To remove a number or bullet from a paragraph while preserving the list indenting: + + + Place the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph in a list and press the Backspace key. + + + The numbering of the paragraph disappears and is removed from the numbering sequence. Numbering resumes in the following paragraph. + + + Press Shift+Backspace at the beginning of a list paragraph to return the number or bullet. + Press the Enter key in an empty numbered paragraph to stop the numbering. +
+ Format - Bullets and Numbering + + + + + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f53e4e772 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + OpenPGP + /text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp + + + + + OpenPGP;document encryption + file encryption;OpenPGP + public key;file encryption + private key;file encryption + file encryption;symmetric keys + +
+

Encrypting Documents with OpenPGP

+ %PRODUCTNAME can encrypt documents using OpenPGP public key cryptography. The document is encrypted using a symmetric encryption algorithm. +
+ According to https://bugs.documentfoundation.org/show_bug.cgi?id=125636#c16 , only ODF files can be signed with GPG + GPG signing only works for ODF documents. +
+ Choose menu File - Save as, select Encrypt with GPG key, Click Save. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME can encrypt documents confidentially using OpenPGP. The document is encrypted using a symmetric encryption algorithm, which requires a symmetric key. Each symmetric key is used only once and is also called a session key. The document and its session key are sent to the recipient. The session key must be sent to the recipients so they know how to decrypt the document, but to protect it during transmission it is encrypted with the recipient's public key. Only the private key belonging to the recipient can decrypt the session key. + + %PRODUCTNAME uses the OpenPGP software installed in your computer. If no OpenPGP software is available you must download and install one suitable for your operating system, likely from your application store or software distribution channel. + Here are some external GPG applications known to work with %PRODUCTNAME: + + + gpg4win on Windows + + + GPGTools on MacOS + + + On Linux, usually already installed: + gnupg - a command line utility for signing, encrypting and key management. + Graphical applications for gnupg such as Seahorse (gnome), Kleopatra and KGpg (KDE). + gpgme - an application program interface (API) to develop applications with GPG. + + + You must define a personal pair of cryptography keys with the OpenPGP application. Refer to the OpenPGP software installed on how to create a pair of keys, it is usually the first step to execute after the software installation. +

%PRODUCTNAME Encryption Setup

+ + Choose menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options – User Data. In the Cryptography area: + +

Encrypting documents

+ OpenPGP encryption requires the use of the public key of the recipient and this key must be available in the OpenPGP key chain stored in your computer. To encrypt a document: + + + Choose File – Save As, + + + Enter a name for the file. + + + Mark the Encrypt with GPG key checkbox. + + + Click Save. %PRODUCTNAME opens the OpenPGP public key selection dialog. + + + Choose the public key of the recipient. You can select multiple keys at the time. + + + Click OK to close the dialog and save the file. + + + The file is saved encrypted with the selected public keys. + Only the private key belonging to the recipient can decrypt the document, unless you also encrypt for yourself. +

Decrypting documents

+ You can only decrypt documents that have been encrypted with your public key. To decrypt a document: + + + Open the document. An Enter password prompt shows. + + + Enter the password of the OpenPGP private key. The document is decrypted and the contents is available. + + +

Difference between document encryption with OpenPGP and Save with password

+ + Both commands address confidentiality, but in different ways. + + When you save a document with a password, you must remember the password inserted to open the document later. Anyone else that needs to open the document must also know the password used at save time. Therefore, the Save password must be transmitted to be known by other users. + + Files encrypted with the save password cannot be decrypted unless the save password is supplied. + + With document OpenPGP encryption, you define the set of users that can decrypt the document and you don’t need to send passwords through channels which security is unknown. Besides, the OpenPGP application manages the key chain of public keys more efficiently. +
+ + Wikipedia on OpenPGP +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c8349f37 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page +/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp + + + +page formats; maximizing +formats; maximizing page formats +printers; maximum page formats + +Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page + +Not all printers can print a paper up to its edges. Most of them leave an unprinted margin. +$[officename] offers a semi-automatic feature that enables you to print as close to the paper's edge as is possible. + + +Make sure that your printer has been setup under File - Printer Settings. + + +Make sure that the Web in the View menu is not selected. + + +Select the Format - Page command, and go to the Page tab. + + +Under Margins you can define the maximum or minimum possible value for the page margins (left, right, top, and bottom). Click into the respective control, then press the Page Up or Page Down key. The preview displays a dashed line around the printable range. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + + + + + + + +Printing + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8131e9888 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + Copying Attributes With the Clone Formatting Tool + /text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp + + + + +
+ Format Paintbrush + clone formatting + formatting;copying + copying;formatting + Paintbrush + + Copying Formatting With the Clone Formatting Tool +
+ Use the Clone Formatting tool to copy formatting from a text selection or from an object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. + + + Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. + + + On the Standard Bar, click the Clone Formatting icon. The mouse cursor will change to a paint bucket. + + + Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. + + + If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Clone Formatting icon Icon. After you apply all the formatting, click the icon again. + By default only the character formatting is copied ; to include paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl when you click. To copy only the paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl+Shift when you click. + In Calc, the Clone Formatting tool only copies formatting applied using the Format - Cells dialog or other equivalent methods. Therefore, any formatting applied directly to characters by selecting text inside a cell and then going to the Format - Character dialog will not be copied using the Clone Formatting tool. + The paragraph formats are the formats applied to the whole paragraph. The character formats are those applied to a portion of the paragraph. For example, if you apply the bold format to a whole paragraph the bold format is a paragraph format. Then if you unbold a portion of this paragraph, the bold format is still a paragraph format but the portion you unbold has a "not bold" character format. + The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Clone Formatting tool can copy: + + + + Type of Selection + + + Comment + + + + + Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage + + + Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. + + + + + Text is selected + + + Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. + + + + + Frame is selected + + + Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format - Frame and Object - Properties dialog. The contents, size, position, linking, hyperlinks, and macros in the frame are not copied. + + + + + Object is selected + + + Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Drawing Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. + + + + + Form control is selected + + + Not supported + + + + + Drawing object is selected + + + Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. + + + + + Text within Calc cells is selected + + + Not supported + + + + + Writer table or cells are selected + + + Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. + + + + + Calc table or cells are selected + + + Copies cell formatting specified using the Format - Cells dialog. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..144382fe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Palettes + /text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +colors;loading lists +gradients;loading lists +hatching;loading lists +loading;colors/gradients/hatchings + +

Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Palettes

+ You can use %PRODUCTNAME extensions to add colors palettes, gradients lists, or hatching patterns lists. +

To load a color palette:

+
+

Directly from the Extension Manager

+ If you have a custom palette available as an extension, use the Extension Manager to load the palette in %PRODUCTNAME: + + + Open the Extension Manager. + + + Click Add + + + Select the extension file (usually a file with oxt file extension) + + + Click OK. You will be asked to restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + +
+ +

From the Area dialog box

+ Loading color palettes from the Area dialog box brings a dialog with all color palettes available in the %PRODUCTNAME Extension Website. + + + Choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. + + + Click the Add color palette via extensions button. A dialog with all available color palettes in the %PRODUCTNAME extension site will appear. + + + Locate the color list that you want to load, and then click Install. + + + Close the Extension dialog.You will be asked to restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + +colors; default colors +colors; %PRODUCTNAME colors +%PRODUCTNAME colors +colors; HLC colors +Material Design colors +colors; web +colors; freieFarbe + +

About the Default Color palettes:

+ The freieFarbe HLC color list is based on the CIELAB model and is optimized for professional CMYK printing. + The colors in the Compatibility and HTML palettes are optimized for displays using a resolution of 256 colors. + The palettes “LibreOffice” and “Material” contain the official %PRODUCTNAME and Material Design palettes respectively. + The "tonal" palette provides a set of colors organized by luminance contrast that work across different hardware. +

To load a gradient and hatching palette:

+ +
+ Extensions Website. + Format - Area + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2e4e3a13 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +Pasting Contents in Special Formats +/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp + + + +clipboard;pasting formatted/unformatted text +inserting;clipboard options +pasting;formatted/unformatted text +text formats;pasting +formats;pasting in special formats +mw changed "pasting;..." and "clipboard;..." and added two index entries +Pasting Contents in Special Formats + +Contents that are stored on the clipboard can be pasted into your document using different formats. In %PRODUCTNAME you can choose how to paste the contents using a dialog or a drop-down icon. +The available options depend on the contents of the clipboard. + +In Writer text documents, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V to paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. + +Pasting clipboard contents using an icon menu + + +Click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard Bar to open the menu. + + +Select one of the options. + + +If you do not like the result, click the Undo icon and then paste again with another option. + +Pasting clipboard contents using a dialog + + +Choose Edit - Paste special. + + +Select one of the options and click OK. + + +If you are in a spreadsheet and the contents of the clipboard are spreadsheet cells, then a different Paste Special dialog appears. Use the Paste Special dialog to copy cells using basic or advanced options. + + + +Transpose: swaps the rows and the columns of the cell range to be pasted. + + + +Link: pastes the cell range as a link. If the source file changes, the pasted cells change also. + + +The other options are explained in the help, when you call the Paste Special dialog from within %PRODUCTNAME Calc.UFI: the text is switched to "Calc" there. + + +
+Paste Special +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8eadbb21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing in Black and White + /text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp + + + +printing; black and white + black and white printing + colors; not printing + text; printing in black + +Printing in Black and White + + Printing Text and Images in Black and White + + + Choose File - Print. The General tab page of the dialog opens. + + + Click on Properties. This opens the Properties dialog for your printer. + + + Select the option to print in black and white. For further information, refer to the user's manual of your printer. + + + Confirm the Properties dialog and click Print. + The current document will be printed in black and white. + + + Printing in Black and White in %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw, as appropriate. + + + Then choose Print. + + + Under Quality, select either Grayscale or Black & white and click OK. + When either of these options is selected, all presentations or drawings will be printed without color. If you only want to print in black for the current print job, select the option in File - Print - %PRODUCTNAME Draw/Impress. + + Grayscale converts all colors to a maximum of 256 gradations from black to white. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. + + Black & white converts all colors into the two values black and white. All borders around objects are printed black. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. + + + Printing Only Text in Black and White + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer you can choose to print color-formatted text in black and white. You can specify this either for all subsequent text documents to be printed, or only for the current printing process. + Printing All Text Documents with Black and White Text + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. + + + Then choose Print. + + + Under Contents, mark Print black and click OK. + All text documents or HTML documents will be printed with black text. + + + Printing the Current Text Document with Black and White Text + + + Choose File - Print. Then click the %PRODUCTNAME Writer tab. + + + Choose Print text in black and click Print. + + + + + + Printing dialogs + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..032f4b056 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Printing with Reduced Data +/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp + + +UFI: on request of some users + + + +gradients off for faster printing +bitmaps;off for faster printing +resolution when printing bitmaps +transparency;off for faster printing +reduced printing +speed of printing +printing speed +printing;transparencies +printing;faster +faster printing +mw made "reduced printing;..." and "speed of printing;..." a one level entry +Printing faster with Reduced Data + +You can decide to reduce the data necessary to print your document. The settings can be defined differently for printing directly to the printer or for printing to a file. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. + + +Click one of the following settings options: +Printer - to define options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer +Print to file - to define options for reducing data while printing to a file + + +Select any combination of the four options, then click OK. +All documents that you print from now on will use the changed options. + + +Print your document. + + +You can reduce data for transparency, for gradients, or for bitmaps. When you reduce the data, on many printers you will not see a reduction of printing quality. But the printing time is substantially shorter, and when you print to a file, the file size is much smaller. +
+Print options + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb8a3f5eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/protection.xhp + + + + + protecting; contents + protected contents + contents protection + encryption of contents + passwords for protecting contents + security;protecting contents + form controls; protecting + draw objects;protecting + OLE objects;protecting + graphics;protecting + frames;protecting + +

Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME +

+ The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. +

Protecting Documents With Passwords When Saving

+ All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box. + + +
+ It is possible to use OpenPGP to define private and public keys to be used to encrypt %PRODUCTNAME documents. Read Encrypting Documents with OpenPGP to learn more on how to set up OpenPGP encryption keys. +

Protecting Revision Marking

+ With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. Enter and confirm a password of at least one character. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. Enter the correct password. + + +
+

Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects

+ You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate. + + +
+

Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects

+ The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box. + + +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9864ab8fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + QR and Barcode + /text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp + + + + + QR code;barcode + +
+

QR and Barcode

+ + + Generate linear and matrix codes for any text or URL. +
+ The QR and Barcode generation feature allows you to encode any text string or URL as a barcode or a QR code and insert it as a graphical object in a document for scanning. +
+ +
+

URL or text

+ + The text from which to generate the code. +

Error correction

+ The error correction value for the QR Code that is to be created. The error correction of a QR code is a measure that helps a QR code to recover if it is damaged. + There are four standard error correction values. + + + + + + + Low: 7% of codewords can be restored. + + + Medium: 15% of codewords can be restored. + + + Quartile: 25% of codewords can be restored. + + + High: 30% of codewords can be restored. + + +

Margin

+ + The width of the margin surrounding the code. +

Example

+ The QR code below was generated for the text www.libreoffice.org: + + QR code example + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..851834bd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + Redaction + /text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp + + + + + spreadsheet; redacting contents + presentations; redacting contents + text documents; redacting contents + redaction + +
+ +

Redaction

+ Redacting documents blocks out words or portions of a document for authorized use or viewing. +
+ Redaction protects sensitive information and helps enterprises and organizations to comply with regulations on confidentiality or privacy. +
+ Choose Tools - Redact +
+

How redaction works in %PRODUCTNAME?

+ The current document is exported to a drawing document edited in %PRODUCTNAME Draw. The redacted text or contents is removed from the drawing document and replaced by the redaction block of pixels, preventing any attempt to restore or copy the original contents. The redacted drawing document is often exported to PDF for publication or sharing. + When redacting, the redaction shapes are transparent and in gray so the user can see what is being redacted. + The source document (text, spreadsheet or presentation) is not affected by redaction and can continue to be edited. + Save and share the in-redaction copies of the document with peers either in the modifiable (drawing) or the verbatim (PDF) format at your option. +

The redaction toolbar

+ The redaction toolbar consist of four tools + + + + + Rectangle Redaction tool icon + + + + The Rectangle Redaction tool is used to mark the content for redaction by drawing transparent rectangles covering the content. Use the handles to resize the redaction rectangle. + + +
+ + + + + Freeform Redaction tool icon + + + + The Freeform Redaction tool allows the user to mark the content for redaction by drawing free-form lines or polygons covering the content. + + +
+ + + + + White Redacted Export tool icon + Black Redacted Export tool icon + + + + The Redacted Export button box has two options: + + + Redacted Export (Black): finalize your document by converting the semitransparent redaction shapes to opaque black and export as pixels in the PDF file. + + + Redacted Export (White): finalize your document by converting the semitransparent redaction shapes to opaque white shapes, and export as pixels in the PDF file. + + + + +
+ + + + + Direct Export to PDF icon + + + + Direct Export to PDF: Makes an in-redaction copy of the document in PDF to share as a verbatim copy for review + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..724029a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + Recording and Displaying Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp + + + +marking changes + highlighting changes + changes; review function + review function; recording changes example + Track Changes, see review function + +

Recording and Displaying Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. + For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. + The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. + Let's say you also emailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by email with your colleague's suggestions. + As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2d59ac30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Accepting or Rejecting Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp + + + + + + changes; accepting or rejecting + review function;accepting or rejecting changes + +

Accepting or Rejecting Changes

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + + +In Writer text documents you can also accept or reject changes by choosing commands from the context menu. + + +When you edit a document in which others have made changes, you can accept or reject the changes individually or all together. + + +If you have put multiple copies of the document in circulation, first merge these into one document (see Merging Versions). + + +Open the document and choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage. The Manage Changes dialog appears. + + +Select a change on the List tab. The change is selected and displayed in the document and you can now enter your decision with one of the buttons. + + +If one author has modified another author's change, you will see the changes hierarchically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy. +If the list of changes is too long, you can switch to the Filter tab in the dialog and specify that you only want to see the changes of certain authors, or only the changes of the last day, or that you want the list to be restricted in some other way. +Color-coded entries display the result of the filter that is set. Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria. Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria, but have subentries that are included by the filter. Gray entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion. Green entries do match the filter but cannot be accepted or rejected. + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f9161a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + +Comparing Versions of a Document +/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; comparing +comparisons;document versions +versions; comparing documents +changes;comparing to original +review function; comparing documents +mw made "comparing..." a two level entry +

Comparing Versions of a Document +

+The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +Imagine you have some co-authors or reviewers who collaborate with you writing your original document. One day you send out copies of your document to all reviewers. You ask them to edit the copy and send it back. +Normally, the reviewers enable change tracking by Edit - Track Changes - Record and you can easily see the changes. +If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. + + +Open the reviewer's document and then choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document.changed workflow, see i72652 +You should always start with opening the newer document and compare it with the older document. + + +A file selection dialog appears. Select your older original document and confirm the dialog. + +%PRODUCTNAME combines both documents into the reviewer's document. All text passages that occur in the reviewer's document but not in the original are identified as having been inserted, and all text passages that got deleted by the reviewer are identified as deletions. + + +You can now accept or reject the insertions and deletions. At the end you may save the reviewer's document as a new original with a new name. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a31a80dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Merging Versions +/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; merging +merging; documents +versions;merging document versions + +

Merging Versions +

+The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +When a document has been edited by more than one person, it is possible to merge the edited copies into the original. The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes - all other original text must be identical. + + +Open the original document into which you want to merge all copies. + + +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. A file selection dialog appears. + + +Select the copy of the document from the dialog. If there have been no subsequent changes to the original document, the copy is merged into the original. +If changes have been made to the original document, an error dialog appears that informs you that the merge is unsuccessful. + + +After you merge the documents you will see the recorded changes from the copy in the original document. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc8a94a03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Recording Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp + + + +changes; recording + recording; changes + comments; on changes + review function;tracking changes +UFI: deleted index review function;recording changesMW changed "settings;tracking changes" +

Recording Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. + + + To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Track Changes and then choose Record. + + + Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. + + + If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled, you will also see any available comments on this change. + + + +Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tip. +You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Track Changes - Comment. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Manage Changes dialog. +To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. +In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. +To change the settings for tracking changes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..455005b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + Navigating Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp + + + Muhammad Haggag. + + + + + changes; navigating + review function; navigating changes + +

Navigating Changes

+ This feature is Writer-specific. + There are two available commands to navigate changes in a Writer document: + + + + + Edit - Track Changes - Next: Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any. + + + Edit - Track Changes - Previous: Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any. + + + Using these commands in conjunction with the Accept and Reject commands allows navigating, accepting and rejecting changes without invoking the Edit - Track Changes - Manage dialog. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..014357029 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + +Protecting Records +/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp + + + + + + +changes; protecting +protecting; recorded changes +records; protecting +review function;protecting records + + mw added an index entry +

Protecting Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + To protect the changes made in a document during editing, choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. To turn off the function or to accept or reject changes it is necessary to enter the correct password first. + + + Choose Protect. This opens the Password dialog. + + + Enter a password consisting of at least one character and confirm it. Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b86ac495 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Version Management +/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp + + + +versions; of a document +documents; version management +version management + +

Version Management +

+The File menu contains a Versions command that enables you to save multiple versions of a document in the same file. +You can choose to view individual versions of a document, or you can display the differences between versions with color markings. +In the dialog to open a document, you can select from a combo box which version of this document you want to open. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3efdffd88 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Creating Round Corners +/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +corner roundings +rectangles with round corners +legends;rounding corners +round corners +customizing;round corners +mw made "rectangles;..." a one level entry +Creating Round Corners + +When you insert a rectangle or a callout box using the drawing functions and activate the Points icon on the Drawing toolbar, you see a small frame at the upper left corner of the object. The frame indicates the amount by which the corners are rounded. When the frame is positioned at the top left corner, no rounding occurs. When the frame is positioned on the handle centered at the top of the object, the corners are rounded as much as possible. You adjust the degree of rounding by moving the frame between these two positions. + + + + +Mouse pointer as hand + + + +If you place the cursor on the box it changes to a hand symbol. You can now drag the box to change the amount of rounding. An outline shows a preview of the result. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac9b091ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + + Scripting %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp + + + +assigning scripts + programming;scripting + form controls;assigning macros + pictures;assigning macros + hyperlinks;assigning macros + shortcut keys;assigning macros + controls;assigning macros (Basic) + menus;assigning macros + events;assigning scripts +MW deleted "programming;...", "scripting in programming", "BeanShell scripting", "Basic;..." and "java;..."MW added "controls;..", "menus;..." and "events;..." +Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME + + You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. + %PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: + + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + + JavaScript + + + BeanShell + + + Python + + + In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. The API reference is online at api.libreoffice.org. + To assign a script to a new menu entry + + + Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. + + + A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. + + + Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. + + + To assign a script to a key combination + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. + + + Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). + Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. + + + To assign a script to an event + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Events. + + + Click Macro button. + + + In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. + + + Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. + This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to an event for an embedded object + + + Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro. + + + In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. + + + You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to a hyperlink + + + Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. + + + Choose Insert - Hyperlink. + + + Click the Events button. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a graphic + + + Select the graphic in your document. + + + Choose Format - Image - Properties - Macro. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a form control + + + Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. + + + With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog + + + Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. + + + Right-click the control, then choose Properties. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e415a6f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens +/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp + + + +protected spaces;inserting +non-breaking spaces;inserting +spaces; inserting protected spaces +soft hyphens;inserting +hyphens;inserting custom +conditional separators +separators; conditional +dashes +non-breaking hyphens +replacing;dashes +protected hyphens +exchanging, see also replacing + +Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens + +Non-breaking spaces +To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line, hold down the Command key +Ctrl key and the Shift key when you type a space between the words. +In Calc, you cannot insert non-breaking spaces. +Non-breaking hyphen +An example of a non-breaking hyphen is a company name such as A-Z. Obviously you would not want A- to appear at the end of a line and Z at the beginning of the next line. To solve this problem, press Shift+CommandCtrl+ minus sign. In other words, hold down the Shift and CommandCtrl keys and press the minus key. +Replacing hyphens by dashes +In order to enter dashes, you can find under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options the Replace dashes option. This option replaces one or two hyphens under certain conditions with an en-dash or an em-dash (see AutoCorrect Options). +For additional replacements see the replacements table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options +- Replace. Here you can, among other things, replace a shortcut automatically by a dash, even in another font. +Soft hyphen +To support automatic hyphenation by entering a soft hyphen inside a word yourself, use the keys Command +Ctrl+minus sign. The word is separated at this position when it is at the end of the line, even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off. + +Special characters + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12275cf25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configuring Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms +/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp + + + +
+ +printers; adding, UNIX +default printer; UNIX +standard printer under UNIX +faxes; fax programs/fax printers under UNIX +printers; faxes under UNIX + + +Setting up Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms + +
+%PRODUCTNAME uses the installed fonts of your system. In a text document you can select from all printable fonts. In an HTML document or in Web layout, only fonts that are visible on screen are offered. In spreadsheets and drawings you can select from all installed fonts. + +Changing Printer Settings +In the Print dialog or the Printer Settings dialog, select the printer from the printers list box and click Properties. The Properties dialog appears containing several tab pages. This is where you can make settings that are used according to the PPD file of the selected printer. + + +On the Paper tab page, you can define the paper format and paper tray to be used as the default settings for this printer. + + +On the Device tab page, you can activate the special options for your printer. If your printer can only print in black and white, choose "grayscale" under Color, otherwise choose "color". If switching to grayscale leads to unfavorable results, you can also select "color" under Color and see how the printer or PostScript emulator applies it. Furthermore, on this tab page you can set the precision with which colors are described as well as the PostScript level. + + +Selecting a Default Printer + + +To make the printer selected from the Installed printers list box the default printer, double-click its name or click the Default button. + + + +Using Fax Functionality +If you have installed fax4CUPS on your computer you can send faxes with the $[officename] software. +A dialog prompting you for the phone numbers to send the fax to will appear after the printout when printing to a fax4CUPS printer. Multiple numbers can be entered separated by ; +In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Remember to create one separate print job for each fax, otherwise, the first recipient will receive all the faxes. In the Tools - Mail Merge dialog select the Printer option and then select the Single print jobs check box. + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74a7f95f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + +Creating and Changing Default and Custom Templates +/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp + + + +modifying, see changing +changing, see also editing and replacing +default templates; changing +default templates; creating +defaults;documents +custom templates +updating; templates +editing;templates +templates;editing and saving +saving;templates +resetting;templates + +

Creating and Changing Default and Custom Templates +

+
+When you open a new document with File - New, a blank document appears based on a $[officename] template. You can edit, modify, or replace this template so that the new document contains your customized Styles or other contents. +You can define document templates for each $[officename] application. +

Creating a Default Template

+ + +First, open either an existing $[officename] template and modify it, or open a new document and edit it as necessary to create the desired template. + + +Save the document by choosing File - Templates - Save as Template, then enter the template name, click the Set as default template checkbox, and save in the My Templates category. + + +The next time you open a new text document, the new document will be based on this new default template. + + +

Modifying a Default Template

+ + +Choose File - Templates - Manage Templates. + + + +Use Filter to select the type of document. + + + +The default template is marked with a green check mark. Right-click that template and choose Edit. + + +Make desired changes, choose File - Save, and close the document. + + + When you open a new document, the modified default template will be used. + + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides built-in presentation templates, which cannot be edited, renamed, or deleted. To modify a built-in presentation template, open a document using the template, modify, then save as a new template. + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides built-in templates for Writer, which cannot be edited, renamed, or deleted. To modify a built-in template, open a document using the template, modify, then save as a new template. + + + + +

Setting a Template as Default

+ + + + + + Right-click on template to be made default, choose Set as Default. + + + +

Creating a Custom Template

+ + + + + + Choose File - Templates - Save As Template, then enter the template name, choose a Template category, and save. + + + +

Modifying a Custom Template

+ + + + + + Right-click on the template to be modified, and choose Edit. + + + + + + + +

Saving a Template in the Template Folder

+You can save any document as a template by selecting "Template" file type in the Save dialog. To access the template from the Template Manager, save the template in the User Paths directory specified for Templates in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. It is often easier to save a document with File - Templates - Save As Template, because it automatically places the template in the appropriate directory. + +The Template Manager is the preferred method for working with templates. File - New - Templates and File - Templates - Manage Templates are equivalent for opening the Template Manager. CommandCtrl+Shift+N is the predefined shortcut key. +
+
+ + + + + +Templates +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfe595e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,640 @@ + + + + + + Starting $[officename] Software With Parameters + /text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp + + + +
+ + start parameters + command line parameters + parameters;command line + arguments in command line + +

Starting $[officename] Software With Parameters

+ By starting $[officename] software from the command line you can assign various parameters, with which you can influence the performance. The use of command line parameters is only recommended for experienced users. + For normal handling, the use of command line parameters is not necessary. A few of the parameters require a deeper knowledge of the technical background of $[officename] software technology. +

Starting $[officename] Software From the Command Line

+ + + + + Search for Run in the Windows Start menu. + + + Type the following text in the Open text field and click OK. + + + "{install}\program\soffice.com" {parameter} + Replace {install} with the path to your installation of %PRODUCTNAME software (for example, C:\Program Files\%PRODUCTNAME). Use soffice.exe instead of soffice.com, when you do not need console (e.g., you do not use command-line interface for headless operations). + + + + + + + Open a shell under Linux, *BSD, or macOS platforms. + + + Type the following line of text, then press Return: + {install}/program/soffice {parameter} + Replace {install} with the path to your installation of %PRODUCTNAME software (for example, /opt/%PRODUCTNAME in UNIX) + + + + +

Valid Command Line Parameters

+

Using without special arguments

+ Using without any arguments opens the start center. + + + + {file} + + + Tries to open the file (files) in the components suitable for them. + + + + + {file} macro:///[Library.Module.MacroName] + + + Opens the file and applies specified macros from the file. + + +
+

Getting help and information

+ + + + Parameter + + + Meaning + + + + + --help / -h / -? + + + Lists the available command line parameters to the console. + + + + + --helpwriter + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Writer. + + + + + --helpcalc + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Calc. + + + + + --helpdraw + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Draw. + + + + + --helpimpress + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Impress. + + + + + --helpbase + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Base. + + + + + --helpbasic + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Basic scripting language. + + + + + --helpmath + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Math. + + + + + --version + + + Shows $[officename] version and quits. + + + + + --nstemporarydirectory + + + (macOS sandbox only) Returns path of the temporary directory for the current user and exits. Overrides all other arguments. + + +
+ +

General arguments

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --quickstart[=no] + + + Activates[Deactivates] the Quickstarter service. It can take only one parameter no which deactivates the Quickstarter service. Without parameters this service is activated. + + + + + --nolockcheck + + + Disables check for remote instances using the installation. + + + + + --infilter=InputFilterName
[:InputFilterParam[,param]] + + + Forces an input filter type, if possible. For example: + --infilter="Calc Office Open XML" + --infilter="Text (encoded):UTF8,LF,Liberation Mono,en-US". + + + + + + + --pidfile={file} + + + Store soffice.bin pid to {file}. + + + + + --display {display} + + + Sets the DISPLAY environment variable on UNIX-like platforms to the value {display}. This parameter is only supported by the start script for $[officename] software on UNIX-like platforms. + + +
+ +

User/programmatic interface control

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --nologo + + + Disables the splash screen at program start. + + + + + --minimized + + + Starts minimized. The splash screen is not displayed. + + + + + --nodefault + + + Starts without displaying anything except the splash screen. + + + + + --invisible + + + Starts in invisible mode. + Neither the start-up logo nor the initial program window will be visible. $[officename] software can be controlled, and documents and dialogs can be controlled and opened via the API. + Using the parameter, $[officename] can only be ended using the taskmanager (Windows) or the kill command (UNIX-like systems). + It cannot be used in conjunction with --quickstart. + More information is found in $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + + --headless + + + Starts in "headless mode" which allows using the application without user interface. + This special mode can be used when the application is controlled by external clients via the API. + + + + + --norestore + + + Disables restart and file recovery after a system crash. + + + + + --safe-mode + + + Starts in a safe mode, i.e. starts temporarily with a fresh user profile and helps to restore a broken configuration. + + + + + --accept={UNO} + + + Notifies $[officename] software that upon the creation of "UNO Acceptor Threads", a "UNO Accept String" will be used. + UNO-URL is string the such kind uno:connection-type,params;protocol-name,params;ObjectName. + More information is found in $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + + --unaccept={UNO-URL} + + + Closes an acceptor that was created with --accept={UNO-URL}. Use --unaccept=all to close all open acceptors. + + + + + --language={lang} + + + Uses specified language, if language is not selected yet for UI. The lang is a tag of the language in IETF language tag. + + +
+ +

Developer arguments

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --terminate_after_init + + + Exit after initialization complete (no documents loaded). + + + + + --eventtesting + + + Exit after loading documents. + + +
+ + + Unix and Linux user can invoke %PRODUCTNAME with these additional parameters for debugging purposes. + + + + Parameter + + + Meaning + + + + + --record + + + An enhanced debugger. + + + + + --backtrace + + + Prints the backtrace of the entire stack. + + + + + --strace + + + strace is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. + + + + + --valgrind + + + Automatically detect many memory management and threading bugs, and profile the program in detail. + + +
+ The debug options --record, --backtrace, --strace and --valgrind cannot be used together. Please use them one by one. + + + +

New document creation arguments

+ The arguments create an empty document of specified kind. Only one of them may be used in one command line. If filenames are specified after an argument, then it tries to open those files in the specified component. + + + + + + + + + + + + --writer + + + Starts with an empty Writer document. + + + + + --calc + + + Starts with an empty Calc document. + + + + + --draw + + + Starts with an empty Draw document. + + + + + --impress + + + Starts with an empty Impress document. + + + + + --math + + + Starts with an empty Math document. + + + + + --global + + + Starts with an empty Writer master document. + + + + + --web + + + Starts with an empty HTML document. + + +
+

File open arguments

+ The arguments define how following filenames are treated. New treatment begins after the argument and ends at the next argument. The default treatment is to open documents for editing, and create new documents from document templates. + + + + + + + + + + + + -n + + + Treats following files as templates for creation of new documents. + + + + + -o + + + Opens following files for editing, regardless whether they are templates or not. + + + + + --pt {Printername} + + + Prints the following files to the printer {Printername} and ends. The splash screen does not appear. + If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. + If used multiple times, only last {Printername} is effective for all documents of all --pt runs. + Also, --printer-name argument of --print-to-file switch interferes with {Printername}. + + + + + -p + + + Prints following files to the default printer, after which those files are closed. The splash screen does not appear. + If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. + + + + + --view + + + Opens following files in viewer mode (read-only). + + + + + --show + + + Opens and starts the following presentation documents of each immediately. Files are closed after the showing. Files other than Impress documents are opened in default mode , regardless of previous mode. + + + + + --convert-to OutputFileExtension
[:OutputFilterName
[:OutputFilterParams[,param]]]
[--outdir output_dir] + + +
+ If --convert-to is used more than once, last value of OutputFileExtension[:OutputFilterName[:OutputFilterParams]] is effective. If --outdir is used more than once, only its last value is effective. For example: + --convert-to pdf *.doc + --convert-to pdf:writer_pdf_Export --outdir /home/user *.doc + --convert-to "html:XHTML Writer File:UTF8" *.doc + --convert-to "txt:Text (encoded):UTF8" *.doc +
+
+ See the list of document filters for file conversion. + The list of filter options for Lotus, dBase and Diff files. + The list of filter options for CSV files. +
+ + + + + --print-to-file [--printer-name printer_name] [--outdir output_dir] + + + Batch print files to file. If --outdir is not specified, then current working directory is used as output_dir. + If --printer-name or --outdir used multiple times, only last value of each is effective. Also, {Printername} of --pt switch interferes with --printer-name. For example: + --print-to-file *.doc + --print-to-file --printer-name nasty_lowres_printer --outdir /home/user *.doc + + + + + --cat + + + Applies filter "txt:Text" to the following text documents and dump text content to console (implies --headless). Cannot be used with --convert-to. + + + + + -env:VAR[=VALUE] + + + Set a bootstrap variable. For example, to set a non-default user profile path: + + + soffice.com -env:UserInstallation=file:///c:/my-test-profile + open LibreOffice.app -env:UserInstallation=file:///tmp/test + soffice -env:UserInstallation=file:///tmp/test + + + + +
+

Ignored switches

+ + + + + + + + + + + + -psn + + + Ignored (macOS only) + + + + + -Embedding + + + Ignored (COM+ related; Windows only) + + + + + --nofirststartwizard + + + Does nothing, accepted only for backward compatibility. + + + + + --protector {arg1} {arg2} + + + Used only in unit tests and should have two arguments. + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..747a2b92f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Start Center + /text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp + + + +backing window + start center + + + + + +

Start Center

+Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. Thank you for using the %PRODUCTNAME application help. Press F1 whenever you need help using %PRODUCTNAME. +You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. It is divided into two panes. Click a button on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog. +

Open existing files

+ +The Open File button presents a file open dialog. + +The Remote Files button presents a Remote files dialog to open files stored on remote servers. + + + +Click the Recent Documents button to show thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened in the right side of the window. Hover your mouse over the thumbnail to highlight the document, display a tip about the document location and display an icon on the top right to delete the thumbnail from the pane and from the recent files list. Click on the thumbnail to open the document underneath. +You can remove an item from the Recent Documents list by clicking the button in the upper-right corner of the icon. The document itself is not deleted. You can remove all items on the Recent Documents list by pressing the Recent Documents dropdown button and selecting Clear Recent Documents. + +

Working with Templates

+Click the Templates button to display templates for all applications in the right side of the window. +Click the down arrow after the Templates button to open a menu where you can select a filter to display templates by application type or open the Template Manager dialog. +Right click on a template in the right pane to open a menu where you can either open the template to create a new document based on the template or edit the template itself. +

Create:

+ + + + + + +The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type. + + + + Writer Document opens %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + + Calc Spreadsheet opens %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + + + Impress Presentation opens %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + + Draw Drawing opens %PRODUCTNAME Draw + + + + Math Formula opens %PRODUCTNAME Math + + + + Base Database opens %PRODUCTNAME Base + + + + +The Extensions button opens the https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ page, where you can download templates and additional features for %PRODUCTNAME. + +Encrypted files will not display a thumbnail image of its content. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ae535ee7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops +/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tab stops; inserting and editing +paragraphs; tab stops +defaults;tab stops in text +editing; tab stops +inserting;tab stops +decimal tab stops +deleting;tab stops +moving;tab stops on ruler +rulers; default settings +rulers; measurement units +measurement units; changing on rulers +MW deleted "text;" +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops + + + + + +On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: + + + Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. + + +Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. + + +Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. + + +In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. +You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. +Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. +To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. + + + +Selection + + +Description: + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting left tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting right tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting decimal tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting centered tabs + + +
+ +Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. +Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. +Moving Tabs on the Ruler + + +Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. + + +To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. + + +Press Command +Ctrl when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it. This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin. + + +Changing the Properties of Tabs +To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. +Deleting Tabs +To delete a tab, hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler. + + +Changing the Defaults +If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +%PRODUCTNAME Calc - General +%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General +%PRODUCTNAME Impress - General +(module name) - General in the Options dialog box. + + + + + The context menu of the ruler allows you to change the displayed units of measurement. These changes are only valid until you exit $[officename], and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change. If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - [Document type] - View and change the measurement unit there. + + + + +
+Ruler +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6eef9ae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ + + + + + + + Template Manager + /text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + + template manager;filter + template manager;category + template manager;set as default + template manager;import + template manager;export + template manager;settings + templates;template manager + + +

Manage Templates

+The Template Manager dialog makes it easy to manage templates and allows you to start new documents using templates. +
+ +
+Choose menu File - New – Templates. +Choose menu File – Template – Manage Templates. +Enter CommandCtrl+Shift+N in any %PRODUCTNAME module. +Press the Templates button in the Start Center. +Select any template type from the Templates button of the Start Center. +
+ +Templates save editing time by starting new documents with pre-filled contents and formatting. The Template Manager allows you to access and organize templates in %PRODUCTNAME. +%PRODUCTNAME comes with a set of built-in templates that can be used to create documents, presentations, spreadsheets or drawings. You may use templates available in the template manager, create your own templates or browse online for additional templates. + +Make use of categories to organize your templates. Create new templates or download templates and organize in the Template Manager. Use templates to save time for repetitive documents. + +

Main Window – Template Choices

+Previews of available templates show up in the main window based on your search and filtering choices. Double-click on any template icon to open a new document with the contents and formatting of the template. +Choose Thumbnail View or List View, at the bottom left, to change how the templates are displayed. + + + + +Thumbnail View Icon + + + + Thumbnail View + + +
+ + + + +List View Icon + + + + Listview + + +
+ +To show templates from another folder in the My Templates category, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences - Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select Templates, press Edit, then press Add to open the file dialog for selecting the folder to add. + + +

Search

+You may search for a template by entering text in the search box at the top left. The Main window shows the templates found. + + +

Filter

+You may filter for: All Applications, Text Documents, Spreadsheets, Presentations or Drawings by choosing an option from the dropdown box at the top-center. The main window displays the filtered templates. + + +

Categories

+Categories are folders where you place your templates. All templates are placed in a category, and can only be placed in one category. You may choose from the default categories: All Categories, My Templates, Business Correspondence, MediaWiki, Other Business Documents, Personal Correspondence and Documents, Presentations or Styles. You may also create new categories for your personal use. Press Manage at the top right corner of the Template Manager, then select New Category to create a new category. +It is possible to move user-defined templates and copy built-in templates to another category. Use the Move option, found by right-clicking an individual template. +Categories inside a category are not allowed. + + +

Manage

+Press Manage at the top right corner to open the Manage menu. The options are: New Category, Import, and Extensions. If a template is set as default, then the option Reset Default appears. If a user-defined category is selected, then Rename Category and Delete Category also appear. + +

New Category

+If you want to create a new category to place a template, then select this option. + + + + + +New Category Icon + + + + New Category + + +
+ +

Reset Default

+This option appears only if you have set a template as default. Use this command to remove that setting. Use Filter to specify which application template will be reset. Select All Applications in Filter to reset templates for all applications. + + +

Import

+If you want to import one or more templates into the Template Manager, then select Import, choose the Category where the imported templates should be placed, then select the files to be imported. + + + + +Import Icon + + + + Import + + +
+ + +

Extensions

+To browse for more templates online, choose Extensions to open a search window. You can also search for templates at https://extensions.libreoffice.org. + + + + +Extensions Icon + + + + Extensions + + +
+ +

Actions with Individual Templates

+ +

Open

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Open, press Enter or double click to open a new document using that template. +You can also use the Open button on the bottom right to open a new document using the selected template. + + + + +Open Icon + + + + Open + + +
+ +

Edit

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Edit to edit the template. For built-in templates, it is possible to edit a copy. + + + + + +Edit Icon + + + + Edit + + +
+ +

Set as Default

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Set as Default to set the template as the default template. This will cause a green tick to appear next to the selected template and the template will automatically load when a new document is created using the matching application. + + + + +Set as Default Icon + + + + Set as Default + + +
+ +

Rename

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Rename to rename the template. This will cause a dialog box to appear where a new name may be chosen for the template. Type in the name and then choose OK or choose Cancel to revert to the name that is already set. + + + + + +Rename Icon + + + + Rename + + +
+ +

Delete

+Select one or more templates to delete in the main window and press the Delete key, or right-click then choose Delete to delete the selected template(s). A dialog box will appear requesting confirmation. Choose Yes to delete or No to cancel. + + + + + +Delete Icon + + + + Delete + + +
+ +Built-in templates cannot be edited, renamed or deleted. + + +

Move

+If you want to move templates to a different category, then choose a template, or use CommandCtrl+click to select additional templates, then right-click and choose Move to open a dialog box, where you can choose to move your selection to a different category or to a new category. Built-in templates cannot be moved, but copies can be created in other categories. + + + + + +Move Icon + + + + Move + + +
+ + +

Export

+Choose a template in the main window, or use CommandCtrl+click to select additional templates, and then right-click and select Export to export your selection to a folder on your computer. + + + + +Export Icon + + + + Export + + +
+To move or export all templates in a Category, press CommandCtrl+A, then choose Move or Export. + +

Examples

+ +

Example 1 – Creating a Business Letter

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + Press CommandCtrl+Shift+N or choose File - New - Templates to open the Template Manager + + + Type “business letter” into the search box + + + Choose one of the templates from the main window by double-clicking on it or select and press Enter. + + + A new document using that template is created in a new instance of %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + Change text and logo as needed + + + +

Example 2 – Import Template – Personal Budget Spreadsheet

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + + Press CommandCtrl+Shift+N or choose File - New - Templates to open the Template Manager + + + Click on Manage and choose Extensions to browse for online templates. + + + Search for the Personal Budget Template, then download it + + + Open Template Manager and choose the Import button + + + Select a category to save the new template in, for example, My Templates, and press OK. + + + Browse to the folder where you downloaded the template, select it and press Open + + + The Template is now available in the category you chose. + + + +

Example 3 – %PRODUCTNAME Impress – Presentation Template

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + The Template Manager opens automatically when you open %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + Choose a template for your presentation, filter by categories or search + + + You may also use the context menu, import a template, or search online for a template. + + + A few features in the Template Manager are not available when first opened automatically. After starting %PRODUCTNAME Impress you may run the Template Manager again to access all features. + + + +
+Refer to https://extensions.libreoffice.org for templates to download. +See Chapter 3 – Using Styles and Templates in the Getting Started Guide. +See Creating a Document Template for related information. +See Templates and Styles for related information. + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f21424b18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing the Color of Text + /text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp + + + +text; coloring + characters; coloring + colors; fonts + fonts;colors +MW added two entries from text/shared/01/05020200.xhp and deleted "colors;fill format" +Changing the Color of Text + + Click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to activate a toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors. + + + + +Icon + + + + Font Color + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +paint can symbol + +The following only applies to %PRODUCTNAME Writer: If you click the icon with a short-click while no text is selected, then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a paint can. Use this paint can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area. This text area takes the selected color. The function remains active for as long as the icon is pressed, or until you click without dragging, or until you press the Escape key. + + +
+ + The following applies to all modules (%PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Draw, Impress): Select the text that is to take another color, then click the color you want on the toolbar. + + + Font color + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a15381b89 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode + /text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + text; overwriting or inserting + overwrite mode + insert mode for entering text + +

+ + Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode + +

+ + + +

With the keyboard:

+ Press Insert to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode. The current mode is displayed on the Status Bar. + The text cursor must be enabled in the cell or in the input line. + + + +

With the mouse:

+ On the Status Bar, click on the area indicating the current mode in order to switch to the other mode: + + + + Insert + + + + Insert mode is active. + The area in the status bar is blank, when Insert mode is active. + The text cursor is a blinking vertical line. Click on the area to activate the overwrite mode. + + + + + + + Overwrite + + The overwrite mode is active. The text cursor is a blinking block. Click on the area to activate insert mode. + + + + + Keyboard commands + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..927f18f76 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Tip of the day + /text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp + + + + + +tip of the day + +
+ +

Tip of the Day

+ The Tip of the Day dialog displays useful tips for the user. +
+
+Choose Help - Show Tip of the day. +
+ +The set of tips is collected from several %PRODUCTNAME community web pages, and is updated on each new release of the software. +The tip of the day is not specific to the current module. +

Show tips on startup

+Displays a dialog with a random tip on %PRODUCTNAME startup. + +

Next Tip

+Displays another tip of the day in the same dialog. + +

OK

+Close the Tip of the Day dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c295dd1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Undoing Direct Formatting for a Document +/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp + + +undoing direct formatting in the whole document + + + +undoing;direct formatting +direct formatting;undoing all +deleting;all direct formatting +text attributes;undoing +formatting;undoing +restoring;default formatting +MW deleted "removing;..." +Undoing Direct Formatting for a Document + +You can undo all formatting that has not been made by styles in a few steps. + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Writer Document + + + Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet + + +While pressing the Shift key click the first and then the last sheet tab to select all sheets. + + +Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Presentation + + +Click the Outline tab to open outline view. + + +Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaa75da29 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Versions and Build Numbers + /text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp + + + + +versions; $[officename] +build numbers of $[officename] +copyright for $[officename] + +Versions and Build Numbers + + + Choose Help - About $[officename]. This opens a dialog containing information about the program. + + + See lists of code and Wiki contributors on the LibreOffice website. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bc8d566b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Viewing File Properties +/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+properties;files +files;properties +viewing;file properties + +Viewing File Properties + + +File properties, such as author name, subject, and keywords, help you manage and identify your documents. $[officename] also tracks file statistics, including the number of words and the number of pages in a document, and automatically adds the statistics as part of the file property. +You can view file properties for the current document or for a document in the Windows File Open dialog +. +To view file properties for the current document: + + +Choose File - Properties. + + + + +To view file properties for a document listed in the Windows File Open dialog + + +Choose File - Open. + + +Select a file in the list. + + +Right-click and choose Properties. + + + + +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e83e2768e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing Your Working Directory + /text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp + + + +
+working directory change + My Documents folder;changing work directory + paths; changing work directory + pictures; changing paths + changing;work directory +work --> working, i85615 +Changing Your Working Directory + + When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + + + Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. + + + In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. + + + You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Images, then follow step 3. +
+ + Paths + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b0520242 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +XML Form Documents (XForms) +/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +web documents;XForms +forms;XForms +XML Forms, see XForms +XForms;opening/editing +editing;XForms +opening;XForms + + MW made a cross-reference of "XML Forms" and made a two level entry of "XForms" + XML Form Documents (XForms) + XForms are a new type of web form that was developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. The XForm model is defined in Extensible Markup Language (XML). The model uses separate sections to describe what a form does and what a form looks like. You can view the specification for XForms at: https://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/. + +
+ Working with XForms + In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is a special type of Writer document. The Design Mode for an XForm document has additional toolbars and panes. + After you create and save an XForms document, you can open the document, fill out the form, and submit the changes to a server. + What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT + To Create a New XForms Document + + + Choose File - New - XML Form Document. + The XForms design window opens in an empty Writer document. + + + Design your form. + + + + + Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. + + + In the Data Navigator, add an element to the instance. + + + Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. + + + To Open an XForms Document + + + Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. An XForm document has the same extension as a Writer text document (*.odt). + + + To Edit an XForms Document + Open the XForms document and use the following toolbars and windows: + + + Form Design toolbar + + + Form Controls toolbar + + + Data Navigator + + + Form Navigator + + + UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72d536859 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Working With %PRODUCTNAME XML Filters +/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp + + + + + + +saving;to XML loading;XML files importing;from XML exporting;to XML file filters;XML +XSLT filters, see also XML filters + + mw moved 2 index entries to the new file xsltfilter_distribute.xhp and 2 entries to new file xsltfilter_create.xhp + About XML Filters + + %PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native OpenDocument XML file format used by %PRODUCTNAME into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. + To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. + An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the OpenDocument file format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: + + + Import Filters - load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the OpenDocument XML file format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. + + + Export Filters - transform OpenDocument XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. + + + Import/Export Filters - load and save OpenDocument XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog. + + +
+ + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) + + Distributing XML filters + Creating and Testing XML filters + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c789d1f31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Creating XML Filters + /text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp + + + + +testing XML filters +XML filters; creating/testing + + mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp, then changed "XML filters;" +Creating XML Filters +Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME + When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the OpenDocument XML file format. + For more information about the OpenDocument XML format, go to https://www.openoffice.org/xml/. + If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. +To Create an XML Filter + + + Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the OpenDocument XML file format and back again. + + + Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Click New. + + + In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. + + + + + In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. + This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. + + + In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. + + + In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. + This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. + + + In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. + To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. + + + + + On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. + + + + + (Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. + This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. + + + In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from OpenDocument format to the external format. + + + In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to OpenDocument format. + + + (Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. + The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. + + + + + Click OK. + + +To Test an XML Filter + You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. + The document is not altered by these tests. + + + Create or open a text document. + + + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Test XSLTs. + + + To test an Export filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: + + + + + Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. + + + To test the current document, click Current Document. + + + + + To test an Import filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open. + + +
+ About XML Filters + Distributing XML filters +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c9eb425 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Distributing an XML filter as package +/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp + + + + + + +distributing XML filters +deleting;XML filters +XML filters;saving as package/installing/deleting +installing;XML filters + + mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp and added 2 entries + Distributing An XML Filter As Package + + You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. + To Save an XML Filter as a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is open. + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. + + + To Install an XML Filter from a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. + + + To Delete an Installed XML Filter + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete. + + +
+ + About XML Filters + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c14ea4a62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Help Page Strings + /text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp + + + + Module + Language + Contents + Index + Search in all modules + Search in chosen module + + %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION Help + Click on text to copy to clipboard + Select Module + Select Language + Search help contents + Enable JavaScript in the browser to display %PRODUCTNAME Help pages. + + + English (USA) + Amharic + Arabic + Asturian + Bulgarian + Bengali + Bengali (India) + Tibetan + Bosnian + Catalan + Valencian Catalan + Czech + Danish + German + Dzongkha + Greek + English (UK) + English (SA) + Esperanto + Spanish + Estonian + Basque + Finnish + French + Galician + Gujarati + Hebrew + Hindi + Croatian + Hungarian + Indonesian + Icelandic + Italian + Japanese + Georgian + Khmer + Korean + Lao + Lithuanian + Latvian + Macedonian + Norwegian Bokmål + Nepali + Dutch + Norwegian Nynorsk + Oromo + Polish + Portuguese + Brazilian Portuguese + Romanian + Russian + Sinhala + Sidama + Slovak + Slovenian + Albanian + Swedish + Tamil + Tajik + Turkish + Uyghur + Ukrainian + Vietnamese + Chinese (Simplified) + Chinese (Traditional) + + Next + Previous + Modified: + Searching $nice{$dbsize} documents + All $nice{$msize} matches + Search took $time seconds + No documents match your query + Matching all words + Matching any words + of about $nice{$msize} matches + of exactly $nice{$msize} matches + Term frequencies: + matching: + Mark this document as relevant + Did you mean: +

External video

+ Please accept this video. By accepting you will be accessing content from YouTube, a service provided by an external third party. + + Accept YouTube Content + YouTube Privacy Policy + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef54e2ff9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Help + /text/shared/main0108.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Help

+The Help menu allows you to start and control the $[officename] Help system. +
+ +
+ +

$[officename] Help

+Opens the main page of the $[officename] Help for the current application. You can scroll through the Help pages and you can search for index terms or any text. +
+ +
+ + + + Icon Help + + + %PRODUCTNAME Help + + +
+
+ + + + +

User Guides

+Opens the documentation page in the web browser, where users can download, read or purchase %PRODUCTNAME user guides, written by the community. + + +

Get Help Online

+Opens the community support page in the web browser. Use this page to ask questions on using %PRODUCTNAME. For professional support with service level agreement, refer to the page of professional %PRODUCTNAME support. + + + +

Send Feedback

+Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs. + + +

Restart in Safe Mode

+ Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance. + + +

Get Involved

+ Opens the community Get Involved page in the web browser. The page describe areas of interest where you can collaborate with the %PRODUCTNAME community. + +

Donate to %PRODUCTNAME

+%PRODUCTNAME is Free Software and is made available free of charge. +Your donation, which is purely optional, supports our worldwide community. +If you like the software, please consider a donation. + + +

License Information

+Displays the Licensing and Legal information dialog. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Credits

+Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into %PRODUCTNAME) or %PRODUCTNAME since 2010-09-28. + + +

Check for Updates

+Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. + + +

About $[officename]

+Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights. +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10dfacdb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + +Standard Bar +/text/shared/main0201.xhp + + + +
+ +

Standard Bar

+The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application. +
+ + +

Open File

+ + + + +

Save As

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Spelling

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Insert Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + +

Sort Descending / Sort Ascending

+Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor. + + + +

Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + + + +

Display Grid

+ + + + +

Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Icon + + +Zoom + + +
+ + +
+ +

What’s This?

+Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer until the next click. +
+ + + + +Icon “What’s This?” + + +What’s This? + + +
+
+
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e06961ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + +Table Bar +/text/shared/main0204.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Bar

+The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +
+ + + + + + + + +

Area Style / Filling

+ +

Merge Cells

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Row

+ + +

Delete Column

+ + +following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row + +

Table Design

+Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Table Design + + +
+
+

Table Properties

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be505447d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents +/text/shared/main0208.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents +The Status Bar displays information about the current $[officename] Basic document. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..506d56dbb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Table Data Bar + /text/shared/main0212.xhp + + + +
+ Table Data Bar + Use the Table Data bar to control the data view. +
+ The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. + + + + + +Icon + + + + Save Record + + +
+ + + + + + + +Icon + + + + Undo: Data Input + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Data to Text + Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. + + + +Help ID is here because we need it in shared since the F4 browser has another context "sdatabase" so I had to move the Help ID from the swriter folder +Mail Merge + Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c8e2370c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ + + + + + + Form Navigation Bar + /text/shared/main0213.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +toolbars; Form Navigation bar +Navigation bar;forms +sorting; data in forms +data; sorting in forms +forms;sorting data +MW changed "toolbars;..." +

Form Navigation Bar

+ The Form Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database. + You can use the Form Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Form Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. + You can use the Navigation bar icon on the More Controls bar to add a Navigation bar to a form. + The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Table Data bar. + You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. + The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). + If an SQL statement is the basis for a form (see Form Properties - tab Data - Data Source), then the filter and sort functions are only available when the SQL statement refers to only one table and is not written in the native SQL mode. + +

Find Record

+ + + + +

Absolute Record

+ Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. + + +

First Record

+ + + + Icon First Record + + + Takes you to the first record. + + +
+ + +

Previous Record

+ + + + + Icon Previous Record + + + + Takes you to the previous record. + + +
+ + +

Next Record

+ + + + + Icon Next Record + + + Takes you to the next record. + + +
+ + +

Last Record

+ + + + + Icon Last Record + + + Takes you to the last record. + + +
+ + +

New Record

+ + + + + Icon New Record + + + Creates a new record. + + +
+ + +

Save Record

+ + + + + Icon + + + Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database. + + +
+ + +

Undo: Data entry

+ + + + + Icon Undo Data Entry + + + Allows you to undo a data entry. + + +
+ + +

Delete Record

+ + + + + Icon Delete Record + + + Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting. + + +
+ + + + +

Refresh Control

+ + + + Icon Refresh Control + + + Refresh current control + + +
+ +

Sort

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8261b30db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Query Design Bar +/text/shared/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Query Design Bar

+When creating or editing an SQL query, use the icons in the Query Design Bar to control the display of data. +
+Depending on whether you have created the query or view in the Design or SQL tab page, the following icons appear: + + + + + + +Add Tables + + + + + + + + + + +The following icon is on the SQL tab page: + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a57050d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + +Form Design Toolbar +/text/shared/main0226.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Form Design Toolbar

+The Form Design toolbar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Field

+ + + + + + + + + +
+ +

Automatic Control Focusdesign bar

+ + + + Icon + + + If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control. + + +
+
+ + + + +

Display Grid

+ + + + +

Snap to Grid

+Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points. + + +

Helplines While Moving

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8dc5a252a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Points Bar +/text/shared/main0227.xhp + + + +
+lines; editing points +curves; editing points +Edit Points bar +mw deleted "points;editing" +Edit Points Bar +The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points. +
+ + + + + + +The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve. The following icons are available: +Edit Points +The Edit Points icon allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for Bézier objects. In the edit mode, individual points of the drawing object can be selected. + + + + +Icon + + + +Edit Points + + +
+ +Move Points +Activates a mode in which you can move points. The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point. Drag that point to another location. The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement; the section of the curve between the next points changes shape. +Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form. + + + + +Icon + + + +Move Points + + +
+ +Insert Points +Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points. You can also move points, just as in the move mode. If, however, you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding down the mouse button you insert a new point. The point is a smooth point, and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved. +If you wish to create a corner point you must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Points + + +
+ +Delete Points +Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key. +First select the points to be deleted, and then click this icon, or press Del. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Points + + +
+ +Split Curve +The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points where you want to split the curve, then click the icon. + + + + +Icon + + + +Split Curve + + +
+ +Convert To Curve +Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve. If you select a single point, the curve before the point will be converted. If two points are selected, the curve between both points will be converted. If you select more than two points, each time you click this icon, a different portion of the curve will be converted. If necessary, round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points. +If a certain section of the curve is straight, the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve. + + + + +Icon + + + +Convert To Curve + + +
+ +Corner Point +Converts the selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line, therefore, does not go straight through a corner point, but forms a corner. + + + + +Icon + + + +Corner Point + + +
+ +Smooth Transition +Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel, and can only be moved simultaneously. The control points may differentiate in length, allowing you to vary the degree of curvature. + + + + +Icon + + + +Smooth Transition + + +
+ +Symmetric Transition +This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length. They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions. + + + + +Icon + + + +Symmetric Transition + + +
+ +Close Bézier +Closes a line or a curve. A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point, indicated by an enlarged square. + + + + +Icon + + + +Close Bézier + + +
+ +Eliminate Points +Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid in the Options dialog boxcan be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog boxis 15° by default. + + + + +Icon + + + +Eliminate Points + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9de8d025b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shortcut Keys +/text/shared/main0400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Shortcut Keys

+ This section contains descriptions of frequently used shortcut keys in $[officename]. +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2f7c9488 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Glossaries +/text/shared/main0500.xhp + + + + + + Glossaries + This section provides a general glossary of technical terms used in $[officename], along with a list of Internet terms. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c50c21440 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Java Platform Support +/text/shared/main0650.xhp + + + +
+Java Platform Support +$[officename] supports the Java platform for running applications and components based on the JavaBeans architecture. +
+For $[officename] to support the Java platform, you must install the Java 2 Runtime Environment software. When you installed $[officename], you automatically received the option to install these files if they were not yet installed. You can also install these files now if required. +The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. + + +Enable Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. + + +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. +Your modifications at the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) has been started already. After any modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the boxes "HTTP Proxy" and "FTP Proxy" and their ports do not require a restart—they will be evaluated when you click OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ffe79351a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] and the Internet +/text/shared/main0800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+$[officename] and the Internet +This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dfb906c58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Forms submenu + /text/shared/menu/forms.xhp + + + +
+ +

Forms Submenu

+ +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..007be8f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Chart + /text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Chart +Inserts a chart based on data from a cell or table range or with default data. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68a85f329 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Form Control Menu + /text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Form Control

+ This submenu contains form controls like a textbox, checkbox, option button, and listbox that can be inserted into the document. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d3e8fd52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Shape + /text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Shape

+This submenu contains common shapes like a line, circle, triangle, and square, or a symbol shape like a smiley face, heart, and flower that can be inserted into the document. +
+ + +

Line

+This submenu contains straight, freeform, curved and polygon line shapes. + +

Line

+ + +

Basic

+This submenu contains basic shapes like rectangles, circles, triangles, pentagon, hexagon, octagon, cylinder, and cube. + +

Symbol

+This submenu contains symbols shapes like smiley face, heart, sun, moon, flower, puzzle, beveled shapes, and brackets. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dae5465fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save Image + /text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp + + + + + page;save background image + slide;save background image + page background image;save + slide background image;save + +
+ +

Save Background Image

+ Saves the background image of the current slidepage. + +
+
+ Choose SlidePage - Save Background Image. +
+ Opens the Export Image dialog to save the background image of the current slidepage. Select the image file format in the Filter box, enter a file name for the image and click Save. + Depending on the file format chosen, a dialog appears to set the image format properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..812e69a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Set Image Background + /text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp + + + + +page;set background image +slide;set background image +page background image;set +slide background image;set + +
+ +

Set Background Image

+ Set the image background of the slidepage. +
+
+ Choose SlidePage - Set Background Image. +
+ Opens the Set Image Background dialog to set the background image of the current slidepage. Select image file and press Open. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f245319b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + + + We Need Your Help + /text/shared/need_help.xhp + + + + +
+ This help page needs further work for correctness and completion. Please join the LibreOffice project and help us out to write the missing information. Visit our web page on writing Help contents. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e60ae3bc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Options + /text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp + + + +
+options; tools + defaults; program configuration + settings; program configuration +mw changed "settings;options" and "defaults;..." + +

Options

+ This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. +
+ All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. + You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. + +Select an entry to edit. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options +
+ +

Help

+ Opens the help contents for the Options page displayed. +

%PRODUCTNAME

+ +

Load/Save

+ +

Language Settings

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Calc

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Impress

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Draw

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Math

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Base

+ +

Charts

+ +

Internet

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f88bbcaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + $[officename] + /text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp + + + +$[officename] + Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories. These settings are saved automatically. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35ed809b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + +User Data +/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data; user data +user data; input +personal data input + + + +User Data +Use this tab page to enter or edit user data. Some of the data may have already been entered by the user or system administrator when installing $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+User data is used by templates and Wizards in $[officename]. For example, the "First name" and "Last name" data fields are used to automatically insert your name as the author of a new document. You can see this under File - Properties. +Some of the user data is included automatically in an internal dictionary so that it is recognized by the spellchecker. If typing errors are made, the program can use this data to suggest replacements. Note that changes to data take effect only after $[officename] is restarted. +User data is also used when commenting and in tracking changes mode, to identify comments/edits author; and to mark last edit position in document, so that when author opens the document later, it opens at the last edit position. +Address +Use the Address field to enter and edit your personal user data. +
+ + +Company +Type the name of your company in this field. +
+
+ + + + +First name +Type your first name. + + + + +Last name +Type your last name. + + + + +Initials +Type your initials. +
+
+ + + +Street +Type the name of your street in this field. + + + + +ZIP +Type your ZIP in this field. + + + + +City +Type the city where you live. + + + + +State +Type your state. +
+
+ + +Title +Type your title in this field. +
+
+ + +Position +Type your position in the company in this field. +
+ +Tel. (Home) +Type your private telephone number in this field. + +Tel. (Work) +Type your work number in this field. +
+ + + +Fax +Type your fax number in this field. +
+
+ + + +Email +Type your email address. For example, my.name@my.provider.com +
+

Cryptography

+
+Set the preferred public key for OpenPGP encryption and digital signature. These preferred keys will be pre-selected in key selection dialog every time you sign or encrypt a document, so you don't have to select it yourself when signing with one specific key frequently. +
+
+ +

OpenPGP signing key

+ Select your OpenPGP key from the drop-down list for signing ODF documents. + +

OpenPGP encryption key

+ Select your OpenPGP key from the drop-down list for encrypting ODF documents. + +

When encrypting documents, always encrypt to self

+ Mark this checkbox to also encrypt the file with your public key, so you can open the document with your private key. + Keep this option selected, if you ever want to be able to decrypt documents you've encrypted for other people. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c709475bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp + + + +
+ +saving; options +defaults;of saving +URL; saving absolute/relative paths +relative saving of URLs +absolute saving of URLs + + + + +

General

+ In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Load

+ +

Load user-specific settings with the document

+ Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document. + If Load user-specific settings with the document is not selected, the following user-specific settings still apply: + + + Settings available in File - Print - Options, + + + Name of Fax, + + + Spacing options for paragraphs before text tables, + + + Information about automatic updating for links, field functions and charts, + + + Information about working with Asian character formats. + + + The following settings are always loaded with a document, whether or not this option is marked: + + + Data source linked to the document and its view. + + + +

Load printer settings with the document

+ If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked. +

Save

+ + +

Edit document properties before saving

+ Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command. + +

Always create backup copy

+ Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. + To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. + +

Save AutoRecovery information every

+ Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval. + +

Minutes

+ Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option. + +

Automatically save the document too

+ Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does. +

Save URLs relative to file system

+ This option allows you to select the default for relative addressing of URLs in the file system and on the Internet. Relative addressing is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive. + A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located. In contrast, absolute addressing always starts from a root directory. The following table demonstrates the difference in syntax between relative and absolute referencing: + + + + Examples + + + File system + + + Internet + + + + + relative + + + ../images/img.jpg + + + ../images/img.jpg + + + + + absolute + + + file:///C:/work/images/img.jpg + + + https://myserver.com/work/images/img.jpg + + +
+ The Help tip always displays an absolute path. However, if a document is saved in HTML format, %PRODUCTNAME will enter a relative path if the appropriate check box is selected. + +Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system. + +

Save URLs relative to internet

+ Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet. +

Default file format and ODF settings

+ +

ODF format version

+ LibreOffice 7.0 supports the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.3. The prior versions of LibreOffice support the file format ODF 1.2. Prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. + OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 introduced new features which have to be saved using the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.2. The prior versions of OpenOffice.org 2 and StarOffice 8 support the file formats ODF 1.0/1.1. Those prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. + Current %PRODUCTNAME versions can open documents in ODF formats 1.0/1.1, 1.2, and 1.3. + When you save a document, you can select whether to save the document in the format ODF 1.3, ODF 1.3 Extended, ODF 1.2, ODF 1.2 Extended, ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode), or in the prior format ODF 1.0/1.1. + Currently, the ODF 1.2 (Extended) or newer formats enable files of Draw and Impress to contain comments. Those comments can be inserted by Insert - Comment in the latest software version. The comments get lost when loading files into prior software versions that were saved by the latest software version. + Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1, or ODF 1.2 format. You can select these format to save in the listbox. These older formats cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.3 (Extended) is recommended where possible. + The ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode) is a more backward-compatible ODF 1.2 extended mode. It uses features that are deprecated in ODF 1.2 and/or it is 'bug-compatible' to older OpenOffice.org versions. It may be useful if you need to interchange ODF documents with users who use pre-ODF 1.2 or ODF 1.2-only legacy applications. + + +

Warn when not saving in ODF or default format

+ You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. + You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. + +

Document type

+ Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format. + +

Always save as

+ Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86f01a108 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + +Paths +/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp + + + +
+paths; defaults +variables; for paths +directories;directory structure +files and folders in $[officename] + + + +

Paths

+This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user. +
+
+ +
+

Paths used by %PRODUCTNAME

+To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry. +

Default

+The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries. +

Edit

+Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog. +You can change the sequence of entries by clicking the bar in the Type column. The column width can be changed by moving the separator between the columns with the mouse. +The {user profile} directory and its subdirectories contain user data.The location of the {user profile} directory is determined when %PRODUCTNAME is installed. See the Default location section in the Wiki page about LibreOffice user profile for more information about typical locations of the user profile in different operating systems. + The following list shows the default predefined paths for storing user data, and explains what type of user data is stored in each path. Use the Edit dialog to change, add, or delete paths for the different types. + + + + +Type + + +Default Path + + +Description + + + + +AutoCorrect + + +{user profile}/user/autocorr +{user profile}/user/autocorr +{user profile}\user\autocorr + + +This folder stores your own AutoCorrect texts. + + + + +AutoText + + +{user profile}/user/autotext +{user profile}/user/autotext +{user profile}\user\autotext + + +This folder stores your own AutoText texts. + + + + +Backups + + +{user profile}/user/backup + +{user profile}/user/backup +{user profile}\user\backup + + +Automatic backup copies of documents are stored here. + + + + +Dictionaries + + +{user profile}/user/wordbook +{user profile}/user/wordbook +{user profile}\user\wordbook + + +This folder stores files with words in your custom dictionaries. + + + + +Gallery + + +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}\user\gallery + + +New Gallery themes are stored in this folder. + + + + +Images + + +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}\user\gallery + + +This folder is displayed when you first call the dialog for opening or saving a graphic object. + + + + +Templates + + +{user profile}/user/template +{user profile}/user/template +{user profile}\user\template + + +In this folder you can store your own templates. + + + + +Temporary files + + +{user profile}/user/temp +{user profile}/user/temp +{user profile}\user\temp + + +This is where $[officename] puts its temporary files. + + + + +My Documents + + +Default document folder of your system + + +You can see this folder when you first call the Open or Save dialog. + + + + +Classification + + +{install}/share/classification/example.xml{install}/share/classification/example.xml{install}\share\classification\example.xml + + +$[officename] reads the TSCP BAF policy from this file. + + +
+Internal Paths shows the paths where predefined content for %PRODUCTNAME is installed. These paths cannot be edited in this dialog box. +The paths refer to subdirectories in {install}\/share. These subdirectories are read-only and contain content shown to all users. The location of the {install} directory is determined when %PRODUCTNAME is installed. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fae9c3c61 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Edit Paths +/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp + + + +

Edit Paths

+In the Edit Paths dialog, you can select some folders that are available in $[officename]. +
+ +
+ + + + +

Paths

+Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files. + + +

Add

+Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b0193e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + +Writing Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp + + + +
+writing aids options +custom dictionaries; editing +user-defined dictionaries; editing +dictionaries; editing user-defined +exceptions; user-defined dictionaries +user-defined dictionaries; dictionary of exceptions +spellcheck; dictionary of exceptions +ignore list for spellcheck +spellcheck; ignore list +spelling; dictionary of exceptions +ignore list for spelling +spelling; ignore list +hyphenation; minimal number of characters + + + +removed "german" references, i78879 +

Writing Aids

+Specifies the properties of the spelling, thesaurus and hyphenation. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Available Language Modules

+Contains the installed language modules. +A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spelling, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. +The configuration allows two different directories: one folder where the user has write permissions, and one without write permissions. The user can only edit and delete the user dictionaries that are located in the writable path. Other dictionaries can be read only. + +

Edit

+To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears. +
+ +

User-defined dictionaries

+Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spelling and hyphenation. + +

New

+Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. + + +

New Dictionary

+In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. + +

Name

+Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. + +

Language

+By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. + +

Exceptions (-)

+Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. In this way, you can create a custom dictionary of all the words to be avoided. If this exception dictionary is activated, during spellchecking you receive a corresponding note about any words which should be avoided. + +

Edit

+Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. + + +In the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. +When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. + +

Book

+Specifies the book to be edited. +The List of Ignored Words (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck. This list is valid only for the current spellcheck. +The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. + +

Language

+Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. + +

Word

+You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with a trailing = character, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is never automatically hyphenated and no hyphenation is suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" results in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, where you insert the = sign. +You can use a [] block instead of the = sign to specify character changes before the hyphenation break. Possible character changes: (1) Extra characters, for example tug[g]gumi results the correct hyphenation “tugg- gummi” of the Swedish word “tuggummi”. (2) Character removing specified by a digit, for example paral·[1]lel results correct hyphenation “paral- lel” of the Catalan word “paral·lel”, removing one character before the break point. (3) Both removed and extra characters, for example cafee[2é]tje results correct hyphenation “café- tje” of the Dutch word “cafeetje”, removing two characters before the break point, and adding an extra one. + +

Replace By or Grammar By

+This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary or a language-dependent custom dictionary. In exception dictionaries, the field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. In language-dependent custom dictionaries, the field contains a known root word, as a model of affixation of the new word or its usage in compound words. For example, in a German custom dictionary, the new word “Litschi” (lychee) with the model word “Gummi” (gum) will result recognition of “Litschis” (lychees), “Litschibaum” (lychee tree), “Litschifrucht” (lychee fruit) etc. + +

New

+Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. + +Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. + +Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected. +
+
+ +

Options

+Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. + +

Edit

+If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. +

Check uppercase words

+Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. +

Check words with numbers.

+Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. +

Check special regions

+Specifies that special regions, such as drawing text, are checked during spellcheck.UFI: doesn't work in versions up to OOo 2.4 + +

Check spelling as you type

+Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors. + +
+Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections. Select a correction to replace the word. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be marked as an error again.UFI: changed para, removed note, see i60431 +To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table. +
+ +

Minimal number of characters for hyphenation

+Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. + +

Characters before line break

+Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. + +

Characters after line break

+Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. +

Hyphenate without inquiry

+Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. +

Hyphenate special regions

+Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b27f0a16b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + +Edit module +/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spellcheck; activating for a language +spelling; activating for a language +hyphenation; activating for a language +thesaurus; activating for a language +languages; activating modules +dictionaries;creating +user-defined dictionaries;creating + + +
+

Edit module

+
+
+ +
+ +

Options

+Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. + + +Select the language from the Language list. + + +Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. + + +As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. + + +Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. + + + +

Language

+Specifies the language of the module. +For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: +A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. + + +

Move up

+Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. + +

Move down

+Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. + +

Back

+Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba083d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting a new color + /text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp + + + + + +pick color +color selector + + + +

Selecting a new color

+%PRODUCTNAME lets you define custom colors using a two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart of the Pick a Color dialog. + +
+ +
+ +

The Pick a Color Window

+ +The Pick a Color dialog consists of four main areas. + + + + The radio buttons select the color component of the color. This color component can be expressed in either RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSB (Hue, Saturation, Brightness) color models. The CMYK color model is not selectable and is provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + + + The spin buttons are for entering the numerical value of the color component. + + + With the vertical color component slider you can modify the value of each component of the color. With the large colored square you can select the color component approximately. + + + The horizontal bottom color bar shows the current color and the new color, side by side. + + +Click in the big color area on the left to select a new color. Using this selector area you can modify two components of the color as represented in the RGB or HSB color models. Note that these are the two components not selected with the radio buttons on the right side of the dialog. + +In the right part of the bottom bar, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. + +In the left part of the bottom bar, the current result of your work in this dialog is visible. +%PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + +

RGB

+ +

Red

+ +Sets the Red component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Red color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + +

Green

+ +Sets the Green component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Red and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Green color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + +

Blue

+ +Sets the Blue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Red components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Blue color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + + +

Hex #

+Displays and sets the color value in the RGB color model expressed as a hexadecimal number. + +

HSB

+ +

Hue

+ +Sets the Hue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Saturation and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359. +Set the Hue directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359. + +

Saturation

+ +Sets the Saturation component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). +Set the Saturation directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). + +

Brightness

+ +Sets the Brightness component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Saturation components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). +Set the Brightness directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). + +

CMYK

+ + +

Cyan

+Set the Cyan color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Magenta

+Set the Magenta color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Yellow

+Set the Yellow color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Key

+Set the Black color value or key (black) as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bf8a3a5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp + + + +opening; dialog settings + saving; dialog settings + years; 2-digit options + + + + +
+

General

+ Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+ +

Help

+ Specifies the behavior of the installed help. + +

Extended tips

+ Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. +

Document status

+ +

Printing sets "document modified" status

+ Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. + + +
+

Year (two digits)

+ Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. +
+ In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. +
+
+ +

Help Improve %PRODUCTNAME

+

Send crash reports to The Document Foundation

+Send crash reports to help developers improve the software’s reliability. Whenever %PRODUCTNAME crashes, you can opt to send reports containing certain debugging information, useful to help track down the cause of the bug and fix it eventually. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Quickstarter

+

Load %PRODUCTNAME during system start-up

+If enabled, loads %PRODUCTNAME into memory when the computer is booted, or when %PRODUCTNAME is restarted. When loaded, it reduces the time for opening %PRODUCTNAME. An icon is also added to the system tray. Right-click on the icon to show a menu for opening new or existing documents, and for stopping the quickstarter. +

%PRODUCTNAME File Associations

+

Windows Default Apps

+Call Windows file associations management. This button behaves according to Microsoft file association management policy, which is to open "Default apps" on Windows 7, 8, and 8.1; and to show a message telling user how to open that applet manually in Windows 10. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..967018c72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Fonts +/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp + + + +
+HTML;fonts for source display +Basic; fonts for source display +fonts;for HTML and Basic + + + +Fonts +Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document. +
+If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document. +
+ +
+Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. + + +Apply replacement table +Enables the font replacement settings that you define. + +Replacement table +Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing. + + + +Always checkbox + + +Screen only checkbox + + +Replacement action + + + + +checked + + +blank + + +Font replacement on screen and when printing, whether the font is installed or not. + + + + +checked + + +checked + + +Font replacement only on screen, whether the font is installed or not. + + + + +blank + + +checked + + +Font replacement only on screen, but only if font is not available. + + + + +blank + + +blank + + +Font replacement on screen and when printing, but only if font is not available. + + +
+ + +Font +Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. + +Replace with +Enter or select the name of the replacement font. + +Apply +Applies the selected font replacement. + + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + +Delete +Deletes the selected font replacement. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete + + +
+ +Font settings for HTML and Basic sources +Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. + +Fonts +Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. + +Non-proportional fonts only +Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. + +Size +Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e8c78258 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp + + + + +
+ + views; defaults + defaults; views + settings; views + icons; sizes + icons; styles + WYSIWYG in fonts lists + previews; fonts lists + font lists + font name box + mouse; positioning + mouse; middle button + clipboard; selection clipboard + selection clipboard + Skia;settings + Skia;graphics output + notebook bar;icon size + + + + + +

View

+Specifies view options. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Icon Theme

+Specifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs. + +

Icon Size

+ + +

Toolbar

+Specifies the display size of toolbar icons. + + +

Notebookbar

+Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons. + + +

Sidebar

+Specifies the display size of sidebar icons. + +

Visibility

+ + +

Menu icons

+Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes. + +

Shortcuts

+Displays shortcut keys next to corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide", and "Show". "Automatic" displays shortcut keys according to system settings. + +

Mouse

+ +

Positioning

+Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs. + + +

Middle button

+Defines the function of the middle mouse button. + + + + Automatic scrolling - dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. + + + Paste clipboard - pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the "Selection clipboard" at the cursor position. + + +The "Selection clipboard" is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit - Copy/Cut /Insert or the respective keyboard shortcuts. Clipboard and "Selection clipboard" can contain different contents at the same time. + + + + + + + Clipboard + + + Selection clipboard + + + + + Copy content + + + Edit - Copy CommandCtrl+C. + + + Select text, table, object. + + + + + Paste content + + + Edit - Paste CommandCtrl+V pastes at the cursor position. + + + Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the mouse pointer position. + + + + + Pasting into another document + + + No effect on the clipboard contents. + + + The last marked selection is the content of the selection clipboard. + + +
+ +Press Shift+CommandCtrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document. +

Graphics Output

+ + + +

Use hardware acceleration

+Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display. The support for hardware acceleration is not available for all operating systems and platform distributions of %PRODUCTNAME. + + +

Use Anti-Aliasing

+When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts. + +Only WIN gets Skia controls in 7.1 + + +

Use Skia for all rendering (on restart)

+Use the high performance Skia graphics engine to render all visual elements of the application, including windows, menus, toolbars and icons. Skia uses the computer graphics device to accelerate the graphics rendering. + +

Force Skia software rendering (on restart)

+Select this control to disable Skia's use of the computer graphics device. +During installation, %PRODUCTNAME chooses the best options for configuring the Skia graphics engine. Normally you do not need to change the default settings if Skia is enabled. +If you experience graphical display problems (e.g., with the appearance of toolbar icons or drawing objects) and Skia is enabled, then you can try to disable Force Skia software rendering or disable Skia entirely. + + + +

Font Lists

+ + +

Show preview of fonts

+Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar. + +

Screen font antialiasing

+Select to smooth the screen appearance of text. + +

from

+Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing to. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b23553bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Print Options +/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp + + + +
+printing; colors in grayscale +grayscale printing +colors; printing in grayscale +printing; warnings +paper size warning + + + +Print Options +Specifies the print setting options. +
+
+ +
+ +Reduce print data +You can reduce the amount of data to be sent to the printer. Reducing the print data increases the print speed because the print files are smaller. This makes it easier for printers with a smaller memory to print. Reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality. + +Settings for +Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file. +Reduce transparency +If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons. +
+Transparency cannot be output directly to a printer. The areas of the document in which transparency is to be visible must therefore always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution a large amount of data may result. +
+Automatically +Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page. +No transparency +With this option transparency is never printed. +Reduce bitmaps +Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. + +High/normal print quality +High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi. + +Resolution +Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. +Include transparent objects +If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects. +Reduce gradient +If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality. + +Gradient stripes +Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing. +Intermediate color +Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color. +Convert colors to grayscale +Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale. +Printer warnings +Defines which warnings appear before printing begins. +Paper size +Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document. If the paper size used in the document is not provided by the current printer, you will receive an error message. +Paper orientation +Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document. If the format used by the current document is not available from the printer, an error message will appear. +Transparency +Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document. If you print such a document, a dialog appears in which you can select if the transparency is to be printed in this print instruction. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d84cad3d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Application Colors +/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+colors; appearance +options; appearance +appearance options +colors; applications + + + +Application Colors +Sets the colors for the $[officename] user interface. You can save the current settings as color scheme and load them later. +
+
+ +
+ +Color scheme +Save and delete color schemes. + +Scheme +Selects the color scheme you want to use. + +Save +Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later. The name is added to the Scheme box. + +Name of color scheme +Enter a name for the color scheme. + +Delete +Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme. + +Custom Colors +Select the colors for the user interface elements. +To apply a color to a user interface element, ensure that the box in front of the name is checked. To hide a user interface element, clear the check box. + Some user interface elements cannot be hidden. +To enhance cursor visibility, set the application background color between 40% and 60% gray, it is automatically changed to 40% gray. +The Automatic color setting changes the user interface element to the preset color from the color scheme. +The color settings for "Visited links" and "Unvisited links" only apply to documents created after the settings are applied. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ead062060 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + +Accessibility +/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp + + + +
+disabled persons +text colors for better accessibility +animations; accessibility options +Help tips; hiding +high contrast mode +accessibility; options +options; accessibility + + + +

Accessibility

+Sets options that make %PRODUCTNAME programs more accessible for users with reduced sight, limited dexterity or other disabilities. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Miscellaneous options

+Sets accessibility options. +

+Support assistive technology tools (program restart required)

+ +Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support. +

Use text selection cursor in read-only text document

+Displays cursor in read-only documents. +

Allow animated images

+Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Allow animated text

+Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Options for high contrast appearance

+High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability. You can decide how %PRODUCTNAME uses the high contrast settings of the operating system. +Cell borders and shadows are always shown in text color when high contrast mode is active. The cell background color is ignored then. +

Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system

+Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark. +

Use automatic font color for screen display

+Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display. +

Use system colors for page previews

+Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4821b155d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Load/Save options +/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Load/Save options + Specifies general Load/Save settings. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a82b40e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Proxy +/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp + + + +
+settings; proxies +proxy settings + + + +Proxy +
+Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed. +
+ +
+ +Settings +Defines the settings for the proxy server. +Proxy server +Specifies the type of proxy definition. +None +Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. +Manual +Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. +Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.example.com, not http://www.example.com. +System +On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE, this option tells %PRODUCTNAME to use the system settings. You must restart %PRODUCTNAME to initiate this setting.UFI: see spec "System-Settings" +HTTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +HTTPS proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field. +FTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +No proxy for +Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. +You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. + + + +Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9e01434 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Email +/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp + + + +
+Email +
+ + +On UNIX systems, specifies the email program to use when you send the current document as email. + + +Email program +Enter the email program path and name. +Browse +Opens a file dialog to select the email program. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e83543310 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + Internet options + /text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp + + + + Internet options + Specifies Internet settings. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8ff8dd82 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + +Security +/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp + + + +
+macros;selecting security warnings +security;options for documents with macros +macros;security + + + +

Security

+Defines the security options for saving documents, for web connections, and for opening documents that contain macros. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Security Options and Warnings

+Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog. + +

Passwords for web connections

+You can enter a master password to enable easy access to sites that require a user name and password. +

Persistently save passwords for web connections

+If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password. + +

Protected by a master password (recommended)

+Check to enable all connections' passwords to be protected by a master password. +

Master Password

+Opens the Enter Master Password dialog. + +Enter the master password. +Enter the master password again. + +Enter the master password to continue. +

Connections

+Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog. + + +The Stored Web Connection Information dialog shows a list of web sites and user names that you entered previously. You can select any entry and remove it from the list. You can view the password for the selected entry.Remove +Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All +Removes all entries from the list.Change Password +Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. +

Macro security

+Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro authors. + +

Macro Security

+Opens the Macro Security dialog. + +

Certificate Path

+Allows you to choose between different installed key store locations to use when signing ODF documents or exporting signed PDF. (Only on systems that use the Network Security Services NSS.) +

Certificate

+Opens the Certificate Path dialog. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b83606ce8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +HTML compatibility +/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp + + + +
+$[officename] Basic scripts in HTML documents +HTML;compatibility settings + + + +

HTML compatibility

+Defines settings for HTML pages. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

Font sizes

+Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. +

Import

+Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. + +

Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers

+When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". +If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. + +

Import unknown HTML tags as fields

+Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. + +

Ignore font settings

+Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. + +

$[officename] Basic

+Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. +You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. + +

Display warning

+If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost. + +

Print layout

+If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename], Mozilla Firefox, and MS Internet Explorer. +The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. + +

Copy local images to Internet

+Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9cf83e19e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Text Document Options +/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer Options

+These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document. + The global settings are automatically saved. +
+ +
+ + + + +

Basic Fonts (Western)

+Specifies the settings for the basic fonts. +

Basic Fonts (Asian)

+Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + +

Basic Fonts (CTL)

+Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31fe317e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + +View +/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp + + + +
+ +snap lines; showing when moving frames (Writer) +scrollbars; horizontal and vertical (Writer) +horizontal scrollbars (Writer) +vertical scrollbars (Writer) +smooth scrolling (Writer) +displaying; pictures and objects (Writer) +pictures; displaying in Writer (Writer) +objects; displaying in text documents +displaying; tables (Writer) +tables in text; displaying +limits of tables (Writer) +borders;table boundaries (Writer) +boundaries of tables (Writer) +showing; drawings and controls (Writer) +drawings; showing (Writer) +controls; showing (Writer) +displaying; comments in text documents + + + +

View

+Defines the default settings for displaying objects in your text documents and also the default settings for the window elements. +
+
+ +
+

Guides

+Specifies settings that refer to the representation of boundaries. + +

Helplines While Moving

+Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values. +

Display

+Defines which document elements are displayed. + +

Images and objects

+Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen. + If these elements are hidden, you will see empty frames as placeholders. +You can also control the display of graphics through the Images and Charts icon. If a text document is open, this icon is displayed on the Tools bar. +If the Images and objects option is not selected, no graphics will be loaded from the Internet. Graphics within a table and without an indication of their size can cause display problems when using an older HTML standard on the browsed page. + +

Tables

+Displays the tables contained in your document. +To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document. +

Drawings and controls

+Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document. +

Comments

+Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author. +

Display fields

+ +

Hidden textUFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed

+Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. + +

Hidden paragraphs

+Display paragraphs that contain a Hidden Paragraph field. This option has the same function as the menu command View - Field Hidden ParagraphsView - Hidden Paragraphs. +

View

+Specifies whether scrollbars and rulers are displayed. + +

Horizontal ruler

+Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. + +

Vertical ruler

+Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. + +

Smooth scroll

+Activates the smooth page scrolling function. The scrolling speed depends of the area and of the color depth display. + +

Right-aligned

+ +Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border. +
+ + + +outline folding buttons;settings + +

Outline folding

+ +

Show outline-folding buttons

+ Displays outline folding buttons on the left of the outline headings. +

Include sub levels

+ Also displays the folding buttons of the outline sub levels. +
+

Settings (for HTML document only)

+ +

Measurement unit

+Specifies the Unit for HTML documents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4dbd4419 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Basic Fonts +/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+fonts;default settings +defaults;fonts +basic fonts +predefining fonts +fonts;changing in templates +templates;changing basic fonts +paragraph styles;modifying basic fonts + + + +

Basic Fonts

+Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents. +
+You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +These settings define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. You can also modify or customize the default text templates. +
+ +
+

Basic fonts

+ +

Default

+Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style. The Default Paragraph Style font is used for nearly all Paragraph Styles, unless the Paragraph Style explicitly defines another font. + + + + + +

Size

+Specifies the size of the font. + +

Heading

+Specifies the font to be used for headings. + +

List

+Specifies the font and font size for the List paragraph style, which is inherited by all derived paragraph styles. +When you choose Format - Bullets and Numbering + +Format - Bullets and Numbering to format a paragraph with numbers or bullets in a text document, the program assigns these Paragraph Styles automatically. + +

Caption

+Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables. + +

Index

+Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4fd5606f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + Print (Options) + /text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp + + + +
+pictures; printing +tables in text; printing +drawings; printing in text documents +controls; printing +backgrounds; printing +printing; elements in text documents +text documents; print settings +printing; text always in black +black printing in Calc +printing; left/right pages +even/odd pages;printing +printing; text in reverse order +reversing printing order +brochures; printing several +printing; brochures +comments; printing in text +printing; creating individual jobs +faxes;selecting a fax machine +mw made "fax machine selection" a two level entry + + +

Print

+Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document. +
+
+ +
+The print settings defined on this tab page apply to subsequent new documents, until you change the settings again. If you want to change the settings for the current print job only, use the File - Print dialog. +

Contents

+Specifies which document contents are to be printed. + + +

Images and objects

+Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed. + + +

Form controls

+ Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. + + +

Page background

+ Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.UFI: fixes #i21977# + + +

Print text in black

+ Specifies whether to always print text in black. + + +

Hidden text

+ Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. The following hidden text is printed: text that is formatted as hidden by Format - Character - Font Effects - Hidden, and the text fields Hidden text and Hidden paragraphs.UFI: sorry, due to a bug no links allowed in extended help text + + +

Text placeholder

+ Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.Text placeholders are fields. +

Pages

+ Defines the print order for $[officename] Writer documents with multiple pages. + +

Left pages (not for HTML documents)

+ Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document. + +

Right pages (not for HTML documents)

+ Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document. + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format. The brochure format is as follows in $[officename] Writer: +
+ If you print a document in portrait on a landscape page, two opposing sides in a brochure will be printed next to each other. If you have a printer with double-sided printing capability, you can create an entire brochure from your document without having to collate the pages later. If you have a printer that only has single-sided printing capability, you can achieve this effect by first printing the front pages with the "Front sides / right pages /odd pages" option marked, then re-inserting the entire paper stack in your printer and printing all the back pages with the "Back pages / left pages / even pages" option marked. +
+ +

Right to left

+ Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script. +This control appears only if Complex text layout is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +

Other

+ + +

Print automatically inserted blank pages

+If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not. + +

Paper tray from printer settings

+ For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. + +

Fax

+ If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine. +

Comments

+ + + + + + + Specifies whether comments in your document are printed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..379af95e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + +Table (Options) +/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserting; new text tables defaults +tables in text; default settings +aligning;tables in text +number formats; recognition in text tables + + + +

Table

+Defines the attributes of tables in text documents. +
+Specifies the default settings for columns and rows and the table mode. Also specifies the standard values for moving and inserting columns and rows. For further information see Editing Tables Using the Keyboard + in the $[officename] Writer Help. +
+ +
+
+

Default

+Defines the defaults for all newly created text tables in text documents. +
+
+ +

Heading

+Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style. +
+
+ +

Repeat on each page

+Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break. +
+ +

Do not split (not in HTML)

+Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break. You can also find this option in menu Table - Properties - Text Flow. +
+ +

Border

+Specifies that table cells have a border by default. +
+
+

Input in tables

+
+
+ + +

Number recognition

+
+Specifies that numbers entered into a text table cell are recognized and formatted as numbers. Table cells in %PRODUCTNAME Writer can recognize a number when it is represented in one of the number formats available in categories of Numbers, Percent, Currency, Date, Time, Scientific, Fraction and Boolean. +
+ +The recognized number is displayed with default number format for table cells, and sets the cell format to the recognized category. For example, if a number is recognized as Date, the cell format category is set to Date. You can set a specific number format for the cell, for example, a date entered as 8/3/2018 displays as Thursday March 8, 2018 when the cell number format is set to "Friday, December 31, 1999" in the Number Format dialog. + +Recognized Date and Time numbers are converted to internal date and time serial values. Percent numbers are converted internally to their numeric values. Boolean values are converted internally to 0 or 1. +
+When an input cannot be recognized as a number, the number category changes to Text and the input is not changed. + +If Number recognition is not marked, numbers are saved in text format and are automatically left-aligned. +
+
+
+ +

Number format recognition

+If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text. + +For example, if a cell contains a date value and has its cell format as date, a new input of a percent value in the cell set the cell format to Text and the percent input number is not recognized. + +When Number format recognition is marked, input numbers sets the cell format to the recognized number category. +
+
+ +

Alignment

+Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. If this field is not marked numbers are always top left aligned in the cell. +Direct formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. If you center align the cell contents directly, they remain centered irrespective of whether text or numbers are involved. +
+

Keyboard handling

+Move cells +Defines the default settings for moving rows and columns with the keyboard. + +Row +Specifies the value to be used for moving a row. + +Column +Specifies the value to be used for moving a column. +

Insert cell

+Specifies the default settings for inserting rows and columns with the keyboard. + +Row +Specifies the default value for inserting rows. + +Column +Specifies the default value for inserting columns. +Behavior of rows/columns +Determines the relative effect of rows and columns on adjacent rows or columns, as well as on the entire table. + +Fixed +Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area. + +Fixed, proportional +Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table. + +Variable +Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58ca4d557 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formatting Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+non-printing characters (Writer) +formatting marks (Writer) +displaying; non-printing characters (Writer) +displaying; formatting marks (Writer) +paragraph marks; displaying (Writer) +characters; displaying only on screen (Writer) +optional hyphens (Writer) +soft hyphens (Writer) +hyphens; displaying custom (Writer) +custom hyphens (Writer) +spaces; displaying (Writer) +spaces; showing protected spaces (Writer) +protected spaces; showing (Writer) +non-breaking spaces (Writer) +tab stops; displaying (Writer) +break display (Writer) +hidden text;showing (Writer) +hidden fields display (Writer) +paragraphs; hidden paragraphs (Writer) +cursor; allowing in protected areas (Writer) + + + +

Formatting Aids

+In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor. +
+
+ +
+

Display formatting

+Defines which formatting marks are visible on screen. Activate the Formatting Marks icon on the Standard bar. All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed. + +

Paragraph end

+Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. + +

Soft hyphens

+Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) +Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated. + +

Spaces

+Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. + +

Non-breaking spaces

+Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar +Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys. + +

Tabs

+Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. + +

Breaks

+Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. + +

Hidden charactersUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer"

+Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Formatting Marks is enabled. +

Bookmarks

+Specifies that bookmark indicators are shown. | indicates the position of a point bookmark. [ ] indicates the start and end of a bookmark on a text range. + +The following controls appear only for Writer documents, not for HTML documents. + +

Protected Areas

+

Enable cursor

+Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. +

Direct cursor

+Defines all the properties of the direct cursor. + +

Direct cursor

+Activates the direct cursor. You can also activate this function by clicking the Toggle Direct Cursor Mode icon on the Tools bar or by choosing the Edit - Direct Cursor Mode command in a text document. +

Insert

+Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: + +

Tabs

+When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. + +

Tabs and Spaces

+When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. + +

Spaces

+When the direct cursor is used, spaces are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. +

Left paragraph margin

+When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. + +

Paragraph alignment

+Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. +All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e2bff3b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changes + /text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp + + + +
+ + +Changes + Defines the appearance of changes in the document. +
+ To record or show changes in your text or spreadsheet document, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record or Edit - Track Changes - Show. +
+ +
+ Text display + Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. + +Insertions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. + +Deletions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. + +Changed attributes / Attributes + Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. + + + +Color + You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. + Lines changed + To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. + +Mark + Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. + +Color + Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3f82c5c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Comparison Options + /text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp + + + + + document comparison;options + comparison;automatic + comparison;by word + comparison;by character + document comparison;random ID + +
+ +

Document Comparison Options

+ Defines the comparison options for the document. +
+ +
+ Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Comparison. +
+ + + +

Compare documents

+ + + Automatic: Uses traditional algorithm for document comparison (default). + + + By word: compares documents segmenting contents word by word. + + + By characters: compares documents segmenting contents character by character. You can define the minimal number of character for the comparison. + + + +

Random Number to improve accuracy of document comparison

+ Introduce an identifier to improve accuracy of document comparison when done by word or by characters. + These options are enabled when the Compare documents options are by words or by characters. + +

Take it into account when comparing

+ Activates the document comparison using By word and By character options. + +

Ignore pieces of length

+ Set the minimum number of characters to trigger a valid comparison. + +

Store it when changing the document

+ Stores the random number in the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..734d6d1d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + links; updating options (Writer) + updating; links in text documents + updating; fields and charts, automatically (Writer) + tab stops; spacing in text documents + spacing; tab stops in text documents + word counts; separators + + + + + +

General

+Specifies general settings for text documents. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Update

+ +

Update links when loading

+ + +Settings for automatic links updates stored in documents are ignored for security reasons. Link updates are always bounded by %PRODUCTNAME Security settings in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME – Security. + +

Always

+Always updates links while loading a document, and only if the document is in a trusted file location or the global security level is Low (Not recommended). +This setting is treated as On request unless either the global macro security level is set to Low in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Macro Security... - Security Level - Low (not recommended) or the document is located in a trusted place defined by %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Macro Security... - Trusted Sources - Trusted File Locations. + + + +

On request

+Updates links only on request while loading a document. + + + +

Never

+Links are never updated while loading a document. +
+ +

Automatically

+ + +To update fields manuallyi81240 + + + + +

Fields

+The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place. The following table lists the fields that are updated without regard to this checkbox. + + + + + Condition + + + Automatically updated fields + + + + + Printing the document (also exporting as PDF) + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time, References, Last printed + + + + + Reloading the document + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + + Saving the document + + + File name, Statistics, Document number, Editing time, Modified + + + + + Editing the text line where the field is in + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + + Manually changing a variable + + + Conditional text, Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Variables, DDE field + + + + + Switching off "fixed content" + + + Author, Sender, all document information fields + + + + + Changing the page count + + + Page + + +
+ + + +

Charts

+Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.see message "[sw-features] changed/CWS chart2mst3 : Automatic update for charts in Writer" by Thomas Lange + +

Settings

+ + +

Measurement unit

+Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents. + + +

Tab stops

+Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops. The horizontal ruler displays the selected spacing. + + +

Enable char unit

+When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line. + + +

Use square page mode for text grid

+When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page. Square page is a kind of page layout which is used to train students to write articles in China and Japan. + +

Word count

+ +

Additional separators

+Specifies the characters that are considered as word separators when counting words, in addition to spaces, tabs and line and paragraph breaks. +

Show standardized page count

+Editors and publishers often define a “standard” page as containing a specified number of characters or words. Mark this field to allow quick calculation of the number of these pages. +

Characters per standardized page

+Set the number of characters for the standardized page. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fa9aadb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Compatibility + /text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp + + + +Word documents;compatibility + importing;compatibility settings for text import + options;compatibility (Writer) + compatibility settings for MS Word import + Microsoft Office;importing Word documents + layout;importing Word documents + formatting;printer metrics (Writer) + metrics;document formatting (Writer) + printer metrics for document formatting (Writer) + +
+ + +Compatibility + +Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents. +
+
+ +
+Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document. +
+ +Use printer metrics for document formatting +Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. +If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default. +
+Add spacing between paragraphs and tables +In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in Microsoft Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding Word documents. +Specifies whether to add Microsoft Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents. +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages +Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page will also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. +If you import a Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" +Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the old tab stop handling is applied. +Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading +Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the additional leading is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the additional leading is not used. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" +If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer and in Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the previous process is used. +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells +Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. +If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning +Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. +If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. +The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0 the option is on. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec doc adjust-text-wrapping.sxw +Microsoft Word and Writer have different approaches on wrapping text around floating screen objects. Floating screen object are Writer frames and drawing objects, and the objects 'text box', 'graphic', 'frame', 'picture' etc. in Microsoft Word. +In Microsoft Word and in current versions of Writer, page header/footer content and footnote/endnote content does not wrap around floating screen objects. Text body content wraps around floating screen objects which are anchored in the page header. +In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the opposite was true. +If the option is off, which is the default setting, the new text wrapping will be applied. If the option is on, the former text wrapping will be applied. +Consider wrapping style when positioning objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping +Specifies how the complex process of positioning floating objects that are anchored to a character or paragraph should work. In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, an iterative process was used, while in current versions a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. +If the option is off, the old %PRODUCTNAME iterative process of object positioning is used. If the option is on, the new straightforward process is used to ensure compatibility with Microsoft Word documents. +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphsUFI: i79041 +If enabled, Writer adds spacing between words, in lines that end with Shift+Enter in justified paragraphs. If disabled, spacing between words will not be expanded to justify the lines. +This setting is on by default for .odt text documents. It will be saved and loaded with the document in the .odt text document format. This setting cannot be saved in old .sxw text documents, so this setting is off for .sxw text documents. +Tolerate white lines of PDF page backgrounds for compatibility with old documents +Use %PRODUCTNAME 4.3 anchoring paint order and tolerate white lines that may appear in PDF page backgrounds created from legacy documents. + +Use as Default +Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. +The factory defaults are set as follows. Enabled are the following options, while all other options are disabled: + + +Add spacing between paragraphs and tables + + +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages + + +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells + + +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphs + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..407944e0c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +AutoCaption +/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +automatic captions (Writer) +AutoCaption function in %PRODUCTNAME Writer +captions;automatic captions (Writer) + + mw deleted "adding;" + + + AutoCaption + Specifies the settings for captions that are automatically added to inserted objects. + +
+
+ + + +
+ + + Add captions automatically when inserting + Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid. + Caption + Defines the options to be applied to the selected object type. These options are identical to those in the Insert - Caption menu, which is available when an object is selected. Below the settings is a preview of the object category, together with numbering type. + + + Category + Specifies the category of the selected object.UFI: copied text from optionen/01040801 + + + Numbering + Specifies the type of numbering required. + + + + + Separator + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + + + Position + Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object. + Numbering captions by chapter + + + Level + Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start. + + Separator + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + Category and frame format + + + Character style + Specifies the character style of the caption paragraph. + + + Apply border and shadow + Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b7742e50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Document Options +/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web Options + +Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..391fd75fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp + + + +
+grids; defaults (Writer/Calc) + defaults; grids (Writer/Calc) + snap grid defaults (Writer/Calc) + + + +Grid + Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid. +
+
+ +
+ Grid + +Snap to grid +
+ Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key +Ctrl key. +
+ + +Visible grid + Specifies whether to display the grid. + + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + + + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + + +
+ Resolution + +Horizontal + Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. + +Vertical + Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. + Subdivision + +Horizontal + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831#UFI: see #i112000 + +Vertical + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis. + +Synchronize axes + Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. + There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: +There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: + +
+ +Grid to Front +Grid to Front + + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. +Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + +Snap Lines to Front +Snap Lines to Front + + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. +Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. + + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. +
+ Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..349b93802 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + +Background +/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Background

+ Specifies the background for HTML documents. The background is valid for both new HTML documents and for those that you load, as long as these have not defined their own background. +
+
+ +
+Click a color. Click the None button to remove a background color. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0f7a8d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Spreadsheet Options +/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Calc Options +Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3179d2658 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + + View + /text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp + + + +
+cells; showing grid lines (Calc) + borders; cells on screen (Calc) + grids; displaying lines (Calc) + colors; grid lines and cells (Calc) + page breaks; displaying (Calc) + guides; showing (Calc) + displaying; zero values (Calc) + zero values; displaying (Calc) + tables in spreadsheets; value highlighting + cells; formatting without effect (Calc) + cells; coloring (Calc) + anchors; displaying (Calc) + colors;restriction (Calc) + text overflow in spreadsheet cells + references; displaying in color (Calc) + objects; displaying in spreadsheets + pictures; displaying in Calc + charts; displaying (Calc) + draw objects; displaying (Calc) + row headers; displaying (Calc) + column headers; displaying (Calc) + scrollbars; displaying (Calc) + sheet tabs; displaying + tabs; displaying sheet tabs + outlines;outline symbols +MW copied "displaying;comments" over to Calc guide note_insert.xhp and deleted "comments;displaying" + + +View + Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables. +
+
+ +
+ Visual aids + Specifies which lines are displayed. + +Grid lines + Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them. For printing, choose Format - Page - Sheet and mark the Grid check box. + +Color +Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". + +Page breaks + Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. + +Helplines While Moving + Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects. These guides help you align objects. + Display + Select various options for the screen display. + +Formulas + Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells. + +Zero values + Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. + +Comment indicator +Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. + +To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. + You can type and edit comments with the Insert - Comment command. Comments that are permanently displayed can be edited by clicking the comment box. Click the Navigator and under the Comments entry you can view all comments in the current document. By double clicking a comment in Navigator, the cursor will jump to the corresponding cell containing the comment. + +Value highlighting +Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted. +When this command is active, any colors assigned in the document will not be displayed until the function is deactivated. + +Anchor + Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected. + +Text overflow + If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.UFI: sc.features "Alignment of text that is larger than a cell" + +Show references in color + Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing. + Objects + Defines whether to display or hide objects for up to three object groups.removed "placeholder" text, see i81634 + +Objects/Graphics + Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden. + +Charts + Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden. + +Drawing objects + Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden. + Zoom + +Synchronize sheets + If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor. + Window + Specifies whether some Help elements will or will not appear in the table. + +Column/Row headers + Specifies whether to display row and column headers. + +Horizontal scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window. + +Vertical scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window. + +Sheet tabs + Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document. If this box is not checked, you will only be able to switch between the sheets through the Navigator +Navigator. + +Outline symbols + If you have defined an outline +outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1d1e8ceb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp + + + +
+ + metrics;in sheets + tab stops; setting in sheets + cells; cursor positions after input (Calc) + edit mode; through Enter key (Calc) + formatting; expanding (Calc) + expanding formatting (Calc) + references; expanding (Calc) + column headers; highlighting (Calc) + row headers; highlighting (Calc) + + + + + General + + Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents. +
+
+ +
+ Metrics + + Measurement unit + + Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. + + + Tab stops + + Defines the tab stops distance. + + + Input settings + + + Press Enter to move selection + + Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. + + + + see i53756 + Press Enter to switch to edit mode + + Determines the behavior of the Enter key in a spreadsheet. Checking this option causes Enter to open cell contents for editing. + + Uncheck this option to make the Enter key select the cell below the current cell. + If a range of cells is selected, each time Enter is pressed will select the next cell inside the range. Hence, enabling this option is useful when entering values into a range of cells sequentially. + + Expand formatting + Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. If, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command +Ctrl + * (multiplication sign on the number pad) shortcut. This format also applies to all new values inserted within this range. The normal default settings apply to cells outside this range. + + Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted + + Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. + + Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. + If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. + + Highlight selection in column/row headings + + Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. + + + Use printer metrics for text formatting + Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. + + Show overwrite warning when pasting data + + Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. + + + Position cell reference with selection + + With the option set, expanding a selection (with Command + Ctrl +Shift+Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column that was added as last to the initial selection. + When the option is not set, expanding a selection (with CommandCtrl+Shift + +Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column where selecting the cell range was started. + The same of course applies when extending a selection on rows, with CommandCtrl+ + Shift+Left/Right. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f253c111f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sort Lists +/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Sort Lists +All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848# +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +Lists +Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. + +Entries +Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. + +Copy list from +Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. + +Copy +Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. + + +New/Discard +Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. + + +Add/Modify +Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbdb298a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Copy List +/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sort lists; copying to in Calc + + + +Copy List +Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list. +
+ +
+List from +Choose between the options Rows and Columns. Cells without text will be ignored when copying. + +Rows +Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list. + +Columns +Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14625f669 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculate + /text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp + + + +
+references; iterative (Calc) + calculating;iterative references (Calc) + iterative references in spreadsheets + recursions in spreadsheets + dates; default (Calc) + dates; start 1900/01/01 (Calc) + dates; start 1904/01/01 (Calc) + case sensitivity;comparing cell contents (Calc) + decimal places displayed (Calc) + precision as shown (Calc) + values; rounded as shown (Calc) + rounding precision (Calc) + search criteria for database functions in cells + Excel; search criteria +UFI: removed a double entrymw changed "cell contents;" to "case sensitivity;.."mw deleted "numbers;decimal places (Calc)" + + +

Calculate

+ Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets. +
+
+ +
+

Iterative references

+ In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. + +

Iterations

+ Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. + + Example: calculating the cost of an item without the value-added tax. + + + Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. + + + Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. + + + You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. + + + Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. + + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 5 + + + Selling Price + + + 100 + + + + + 6 + + + Net + + + =B5-B7 + + + + + 7 + + + Tax + + + =B6*0.15 + + +
+ + +

Steps

+ Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. + +

Minimum Change

+ Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. +

Date

+ Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. + +

12/30/1899 (default)

+ Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. + +

01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0)

+ Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. + +

01/01/1904

+ Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. + +

Case sensitive

+ Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. + + Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. + The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. + Disable case sensitivity for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + +

Precision as shown

+ Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. + +

Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells

+ Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions. + + + + * in following position: + + + Search result: + + + + + win + + + Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind + + + + + win* + + + Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind + + + + + *win + + + Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind + + + + + *win* + + + Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind + + +
+ + If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like "*win*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. + Enable whole cell match for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + +
+ +

Enable wildcards in formulas

+ Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. + + + ? (question mark) matches any single character + + + * (asterisk) matches any sequence of characters, including an empty string + + + ~ (tilde) escapes the special meaning of a question mark, asterisk or tilde character that follows immediately after the tilde character + + + Enable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. +
+ + +

Enable regular expressions in formulas

+ Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. +Sorry, no more switches allowed inside AVIS tags + Do not enable regular expressions in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + + +

No wildcards or regular expressions in formulas

+ Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. + + Do not disable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + + +

Automatically find column and row labels

+ Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. + + Example: Cell E5 contains the text "Europe". Below, in cell E6, is the value 100 and in cell E7 the value 200. If the Automatically find column and row labels box is marked, you can write the following formula in cell A1: =SUM(Europe). + + +

Limit decimals for general number format

+You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows. + +

Decimal places

+ Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85ffe2ca5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changes +/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Changes +The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents. +
+To record changes to your work, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record. +
+ +
+Color Definition for Changes +Defines colors for recorded changes. If you select the "By author" entry, $[officename] will automatically set the color depending on the author who undertook the changes. + +Changes +Specifies the color for changes of cell contents. + +Deletions +Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document. + +Insertions +Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document. + +Moved entries +Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6be8fcf9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Print +/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Print

+Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets. +
+%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button. +
+ +
+

Pages

+ + + printing;manual breaks + +

Always apply manual breaks

+Setting this option gives manual row breaks precedence over automatic page breaks done using the Reduce/enlarge printout scaling mode. + +

Suppress output of empty pages

+Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. Cell attributes such as borders or background colors are not considered cell contents. Empty pages are not counted for page numbering. +

Sheets

+ +

Print only selected sheets

+Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed. +To select multiple sheets, click on the sheet names on the bottom margin of the workspace while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af721498b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Compatibility + /text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp + + + +
+ + compatibility settings;key bindings (Calc) + + + + Compatibility + Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +
+
+ +
+ Key bindings + The following table shows what actions are associated with what key bindings for the two key binding types (Default and OpenOffice.org legacy): + + + + + Key binding + + + Default + + + OpenOffice.org legacy + + + + + Backspace + + + delete contents + + + delete + + + + + Delete + + + delete + + + delete contents + + + + + CommandCtrl+D + + + fill down + + + data select + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + data select + + + increase row height + + +
+ Where the actions are: + + + delete contents - launch the Delete Contents dialog. + + + delete - immediately delete the cell content, without the dialog. + + + fill down - fill cell content downward within selection. + + + data select - launch the Selection List dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..790c3851a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + Formula + /text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp + + + +
+ +formula options;formula syntax +formula options;separators +formula options;reference syntax in string parameters +formula options;recalculating spreadsheets +formula options;large spreadsheet files +formula options;loading spreadsheet files +separators;function +separators;array column +separators;array row +recalculate;formula options +recalculating;formula options +recalculating;large spreadsheet files +loading;large spreadsheet files + + + +

Formula

+ Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +
+
+ +
+

Formula options

+

Formula syntax

+ There are three options. Let's see it by example. In a sample spreadsheet there are two worksheets, Sheet1 and Sheet2. In A1 cell of Sheet1 there is a reference to C4 cell of Sheet2. + + + + Calc A1 - This is the default of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. The reference will be =$Sheet2.C4 + + + Excel A1 - This is the default of Microsoft Excel. The reference will be =Sheet2!C4 + + + Excel R1C1 - This is the relative row/column addressing, known from Microsoft Excel. The reference will be =Sheet2!R[3]C[2] + +

Use English function names

+ In %PRODUCTNAME Calc function names can be localized. By default, the check box is off, which means the localized function names are used. Checking this check box will swap localized function names with the English ones. This change takes effect in all of the following areas: formula input and display, function wizard, and formula tips. You can of course uncheck it to go back to the localized function names. + +

Separators

+ This option group lets you configure separators in your formula expressions. This comes in handy when, for instance, you want to separate your function parameters by commas (,) instead of semicolons (;). + For example, instead of =SUM(A1;B1;C1) you can type =SUM(A1,B1,C1). + Likewise, you can also change the column and row separators for in-line arrays. Previously, an in-line array used semicolons (;) as the column separators and the pipe symbols (|) as the row separators, so a typical in-line array expression looked like this for a 5 x 2 matrix array: + ={1;2;3;4;5|6;7;8;9;10} + By changing the column separators to commas (,) and the row separators to semicolons (;), the same expression will look like this: + ={1,2,3,4,5;6,7,8,9,10} + + + +

Recalculation on File Load

+ Recalculating formulas can take significant time while loading very large files. + +

Excel 2007 and newer:

+ Loading a large spreadsheet file can take a long time. If you don't need to update your large spreadsheet data immediately, you can postpone the recalculation at a better time. %PRODUCTNAME allows you to defer recalculation of Excel 2007 (and above) spreadsheets to speedup loading time. + +

ODF Spreadsheet (not saved by %PRODUCTNAME):

+ Recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME caches spreadsheet formula results into its ODF file. This feature helps %PRODUCTNAME to recalculate a large ODF spreadsheet saved by %PRODUCTNAME faster. + For ODF spreadsheets saved by other programs, where such cached formula results may not exist, recalculation can be deferred to speedup file loading as with Excel 2007 files. + For the entries above the following choices are possible: + + + + Never recalculate - No formulas will be recalculated on loading the file. + + + Always recalculate - All formulas will be recalculated on file load. + + + Prompt user - Prompt user for action. + + %PRODUCTNAME saved ODF spreadsheets will honor Never recalculate and Always recalculate options. + +
+ Array formulas +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99375130e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + Defaults + /text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp + + + +
+ + defaults;number of worksheets in new documents + defaults;prefix name for new worksheet + number of worksheets in new documents + prefix name for new worksheet + + + + Defaults + Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents. +
+
+ +
+ New spreadsheets + You can set the number of worksheets in a new document, and the prefix name for new worksheets. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef698f054 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Presentation Options +/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Impress Options +Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b20196029 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +View +/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp + + + +
+rulers; visible in presentations +moving; using guide lines in presentations +guides; displaying when moving objects (Impress) +control point display in presentations +Bézier curves; control points in presentations +mw made "line contours..." a two level entryremoved "placeholder" entries, see i81634 + + + +

View

+Specifies the available display modes. By selecting an alternative display, you can speed up the screen display while editing your presentation. +
removed 4 options, see i81634 + +

Display

+

Rulers visible

+Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area. + +

Helplines While Moving

+Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object. + +%PRODUCTNAME creates dotted guides that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and which cover the entire work area, helping you position the object. + +You also can use this function through the icon +icon +icon with the same name in the Options bar if a presentation or a drawing document is opened. +

All control points in Bézier editor

+Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible. +

Contour of each individual object

+%PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object. The Contour of each individual object option enables you to see if single objects conflict with other objects in the target position. If you do not mark the Contour of each individual object option, %PRODUCTNAME only displays a square contour that includes all selected objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36cfd8bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp + + + +
+snapping in presentations and drawings + points;reducing editing points when snapping (Impress/Draw) + +

Grid

+ Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects. +
+
+ +
+ + If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without constraining them, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. + +

Snap

+ + +

To snap guides

+ Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap guide when you release the mouse. + + You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Snap Guides +Snap to Snap Guides +Snap to Snap Guides icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. + + +

To the page margins

+ Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. + + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. + + +

To object frame

+ Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. + + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. + + +To object points + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. + + This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. + +Snap range + Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. + Constrain Objects + +When creating or moving objects + Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. + +Extend edges + Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. + + +When rotating + Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. + +Point reduction + Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d58cd47ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Print + /text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp + + + + +
+ + printing; drawings defaults + drawings; printing defaults + pages;printing page names in presentations + printing; dates in presentations + dates; printing in presentations + times; inserting when printing presentations + printing; hidden pages of presentations + hidden pages; printing in presentations + printing; without scaling in presentations + scaling; when printing presentations + printing; fitting to pages in presentations + fitting to pages; print settings in presentations + printing; tiling pages in presentations + + + +

Print

+ Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Print

+ Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. + +

Page name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name. + +

Date

+ Specifies whether to print the current date. + +

Time

+ Specifies whether to print the current time. + +

Hidden pages

+ Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. +

Quality

+ See also Printing in Black and White. + +

Default

+ Specifies that you want to print in original colors. + +

Grayscale

+ Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. + +

Black & white

+ Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. +

Page options

+ Define additional options for printing the pages. + +

Default

+ Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. + +

Fit to page

+
+ Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer. +
+ + +

Tile pages

+ Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. + + + + + + +

Front

+ Select Front to print the front of a brochure. + +

Back

+ Select Back to print the back of a brochure. + +

Paper tray from printer settings

+ Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..808bfdcf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp + + + +
+presentations; starting with wizard +objects; always moveable (Impress/Draw) +distorting in drawings +spacing; tabs in presentations +tab stops; spacing in presentations +text objects; in presentations and drawings + + + +

General

+Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents. +
+
+ +
+ +

Text objects

+ + +

Allow quick editing

+If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text. + + + + + +In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate the text editing mode through the Allow Quick Editing icon in the Options bar. + + +

Only text area selectable

+Specifies whether to select a text box by clicking the text. + +In the area of the text box that is not filled with text, an object behind the text box can be selected. + + + + + +In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Options bar. +

New document (only in presentations)

+ +

Start with Template Selection

+Specifies whether to activate the Select a Template window when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. +

Settings

+ +

Use background cache

+Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master slide. + +

Copy when moving

+If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the CommandCtrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. + +

Objects always moveable

+Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. + +

Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings)

+Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. + +

Unit of measurement

+Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. + +

Tab stops

+Defines the spacing between tab stops. + +

Presentation (only in presentations)

+ +

Enable remote control

+Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running. Unmark Enable remote control to disable remote controlling. + + +

Enable Presenter Console

+Specifies that you want to enable the Presenter Console during slideshows. + +

Scale (only in drawings)

+ +

Drawing scale

+Determines the drawing scale on the status bar. Right-click on the scale factor in the status bar to open a list of possible values. +

Compatibility (document specific settings)

+The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. + + +

Add spacing between paragraphs and tables

+Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. +Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17d7fb087 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Options +/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options +Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0afda169 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula +/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Math Options +Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. + You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document. +
+ +
+Options + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69a4bbe6a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Settings +/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp + + + +printing;formulas in $[officename] Math +title rows; printing in $[officename] Math +formula texts; printing in $[officename] Math +frames; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; in original size in $[officename] Math +original size; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; fitting to pages in $[officename] Math +format filling printing in $[officename] Math +printing; scaling in $[officename] Math +scaling; printing in $[officename] Math +fitting to pages;print settings in Math +mw inserted "fitting..." + + +Settings +Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents. + +
+ +
+Print options +Title +Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. +Formula text +Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. +Border +Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. Title and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. +Print format +Original size +Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. +Fit to size +Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. + +Scaling +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling control, or set the value using the arrow buttons. +Other options +Ignore ~ and ' at the end of the line +Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. + +Embed only used symbols (smaller file size) +Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula. In earlier versions of $[officename], all symbols were saved with each formula. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b42edbab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart options +/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Chart options + Defines the general settings for charts. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2b4f94e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Default colors +/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp + + + +
+charts; colors +colors;charts + + + +Default colors +Assigns colors to the data rows. The settings only apply for all newly created charts. +
+
+ +
+Chart colors +Displays all the colors available for the data series. Select a data series to change its color. Select the desired color from the adjacent color table. +Color table +This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows. For example, if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8, the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8. The name of the selected color is shown below the color table. +Default +Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18971986f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + VBA Properties + /text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Microsoft Office; importing/exporting VBA code + importing; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + exporting; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + loading; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + saving; VBA code in Microsoft Office documents + VBA code; loading/saving documents with VBA code + Visual Basic for Applications; loading/saving documents with VBA code + + + + + +

VBA Properties

+Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP

+Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. + + + + +

Load Basic code

+Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. + +
+ + +

Executable code

+The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. +After loading the VBA code, %PRODUCTNAME inserts the statement Option VBASupport 1 in every Basic module to enable a limited support for VBA statements, functions and objects. See Option VBASupport Statement for more information. +
+ +

Save original Basic code

+ + + + +
+Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form. +When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. +The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. +To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code. +
+ +

Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP

+Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. + +

Load Basic code

+ + + +

Save original Basic code

+ + +

Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP

+Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. + +

Load Basic code

+ + +

Save original Basic code

+ + +
+ + +Setting the default file format +VBA support in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d838ec3a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Microsoft Office + /text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp + + + + +
+ + + +Microsoft lock files +lock files;Microsoft Office +lock files;%PRODUCTNAME +OLE objects;import and export +embedded objects;import and export +OLE objects;Microsoft Office +OLE objects;PDF +character highlighting;Microsoft Office export +character shading;Microsoft Office export + +

Microsoft Office

+Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office and other documents. +
+
+ +
+

Embedded Objects

+ The Embedded Objects section specifies how to import and export Microsoft Office or other OLE objects. + These settings are valid when no Microsoft or other OLE server exists (for example, in UNIX) or when there is no $[officename] OLE server ready for editing the OLE objects. + If an OLE server is active for the embedded object, then the OLE server will be used to handle the object. + If no OLE server is active for MathType objects, then embedded MathType objects can be converted to %PRODUCTNAME Math objects. For this conversion, the embedded MathType objects must not exceed the MathType 3.1 specifications.mail answer by Thomas Lange re i97686 + +

[L] and [S] Columns

+ The [L] and [S] checkbox displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] [L] and/or when saving into a Microsoft format [S]. + Mark the box in the [L] column in front of the entry if a Microsoft or other OLE object is to be converted into the specified $[officename] OLE object when a Microsoft or other document is loaded into $[officename]. + Mark the box in the [S] column in front of the entry if a $[officename] OLE object is to be converted into the specified Microsoft OLE object when a document is saved in a Microsoft file format. + + +

Character Highlighting

+Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character highlighting. Use this control to select the attribute, highlighting or shading, that $[officename] should use when exporting $[officename] character highlighting to Microsoft Office file formats. +Highlighting exports the closest match between a $[officename] highlighting color and one of the 16 Microsoft highlighting colors, using the Office character attribute that makes it easy for Office users to edit with the highlighting tool in Office applications. This is the default setting in $[officename] 5.0 to 6.4. +Shading exports all RGB colors to the other Office character attribute. This preserves color fidelity between $[officename] and Microsoft Office documents, but Office users must edit this character attribute with a tool that is not commonly used or easy to find in Office applications. This is the default setting since $[officename] 7.0. +The "compatibility" filter in the Character Highlighting Color dialog provides the Microsoft Office highlighting colors. Use those colors and choose Export as: Highlighting if you want both color fidelity and ease of editing for Office users. + +

Lock files

+Mark this checkbox to generate a Microsoft Office lock file in addition to %PRODUCTNAME own lock file. Lock files signal to applications that a resource or file should not be used until the lock is released. +%PRODUCTNAME can read lock files generated by Microsoft Office. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab67c9772 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + Languages (Options) + /text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp + + + +
+languages; locale settings + locale settings + Asian languages; enabling + languages; Asian support + complex text layout; enabling + Arabic;language settings + Hebrew;language settings + Thai;language settings + Hindi;language settings + decimal separator key + date acceptance patterns + + + +

Languages

+ Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Language of

+ +

User interface

+ Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME. + The "Default" entry selects the language of the user interface for the operating system. If this language is not available in the %PRODUCTNAME installation, the language of the %PRODUCTNAME installation is the default language. + +

Locale setting

+ Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure. + The "Default" entry selects the locale which name is reported by the operating system. + A change in this field is immediately applicable. However, some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded. + +

Default currency

+ Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields. If you change the locale setting, the default currency changes automatically. + The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting. + A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents. + +

Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting

+ Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad. + If this checkbox is activated, the character shown after "Same as locale setting" is inserted when you press the key on the number pad. If this checkbox is not activated, the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted. + + +

Date acceptance patterns

+ Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date. + If you type numbers and characters that correspond to the defined date acceptance patterns in a table cell, and then move the cursor outside of the cell, %PRODUCTNAME will automatically recognize and convert the input to a date, and format it according to the locale setting. + The initial pattern(s) in Date acceptance patterns are determined by the locale (set in Locale setting), but you can modify these default patterns, and add more patterns. Use ; to separate each pattern. + Patterns can be composed according to the following rules: + + + A pattern must start with D, M, or Y, and include at least two items, with at least one separator between each one. + A pattern may also include all three, in any order. + + + Y means year, M means month, and D means day, regardless of which locale is set. Each can only be used once in a pattern. + + + . - : / , can be used as separators between and after D, M, and Y. + Any combination of separators can be used, and more than one separator can be used between D, M, and Y, but the input must match the separator pattern exactly for recognition. + + + Patterns can combine different separators, and may include a trailing separator. + Examples of valid patterns are: D,Y ; Y-M ; M.D.Y ; D-M/Y ; M.D. + + + If you change the Locale setting, the date acceptance pattern will be reset to the new locale default, and any user-defined modifications or additions will be lost. + In addition to the explicit patterns defined in the edit box, input matching the Y-M-D pattern is implicitly recognized and converted automatically to a date. Input that starts from 1 to 31 is not interpreted with this implicit Y-M-D pattern. Since %PRODUCTNAME 3.5, this input is formatted as YYYY-MM-DD (ISO 8601). + For all patterns, two-digit year input is interpreted according to the setting in Tools - Options - General - Year (Two Digits). +

Default languages for documents

+ Specifies the languages for spelling, thesaurus and hyphenation. + +
+ The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module. + +
+ +

Western

+ Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets. + +

Show UI elements for East Asian writings

+ Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME. + If you want to write in Chinese, Japanese or Korean, you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface. + +

Asian

+ Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets. + + +

Show UI elements for Bi-Directional writing

+ Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME. + +

Complex text layout

+ Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck. + +

For the current document only

+ Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document. +

Enhanced language support

+ +

Ignore system input language

+ Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fefd17e91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Language Setting Options +/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp + + + +languages;setting options +mw changed index entryLanguage Setting Options +Defines the properties for additional languages. + +The Searching in Japanese and Asian Layout tab pages are only visible if the Asian language support option in the Languages tab page is activated and the Options dialog is re-opened. The Complex Text Layout tab page is only visible if the CTL support is enabled. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2db9d1a9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Asian Layout +/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Asian Layout

+Defines the typographic default settings for Asian text. + +
+
+ +
+kerning;Asian texts + + +

Kerning

+Defines the default settings for kerning between individual characters. + +

Western text only

+Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text. + +

Western text and Asian punctuation

+Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation. +

Character spacing

+Defines the default settings for character spacing in Asian texts, cells, and drawing objects. + +

No compression

+Specifies that no compression at all will occur. + +

Compress only punctuation

+Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed. + +

Compress punctuation and Japanese Kana

+Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed. +

First and last characters

+Defines the default settings for 'first' and 'last' characters. In the dialog that appears when you choose Format -Asian Typography, you can specify whether the list of forbidden characters applies to those at the beginning or end of a line in a paragraph. + +

Language

+Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters. + +

Default

+When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language: + +

Not at start of line:

+Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the beginning of a line after a line break, it is automatically moved to the end of the previous line. For example, an exclamation point at the end of a sentence never appears at the start of a line if it is part of the Not at start of line list. + +

Not at end of line:

+Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the end of a line due to a line break, it is automatically moved to the beginning of the next line. For example, a currency symbol that appears in front of an amount never appears at the end of a line if it is part of the Not at end of line list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64f5445f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Searching in Japanese +/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Searching in Japanese + Defines the search options for Japanese. + +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Treat as equal + Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search. + + + + Ignore + Specifies the characters to be ignored. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0ab9fa43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CTL; options + + + +

Complex Text Layout

+Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Sequence checking

+In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. + +

Use sequence checking

+Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai. + + +

Restricted

+Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations. +

Cursor control

+Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). + +

Logical

+Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text. + +

Visual

+Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction. +

General options

+ +

Numerals (in text only)

+Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.UFI: see http://www.webster-dictionary.org/definition/Indian%20numerals + + +Arabic: All numbers are shown using Arabic numerals. This is the default. + + +Hindi: All numbers are shown using Hindi numerals. + + +System: All numbers are shown using Arabic or Hindi numerals, according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. + + +This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6a1d266d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Data sources options +/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Data sources options +Defines the general settings for the data sources in $[officename]. + +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c3fff9c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Connections +/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+connections to data sources (Base) +data sources; connection settings (Base) + + +Connections +Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled. +
+The Connections facility allows you to stipulate that connections that are no longer needed are not deleted immediately, but are kept freeUFI: better: idle ? for a certain period of time. If a new connection to the data source is needed in that period, the free connection can be used for this purpose. +
+ +
+Connection Pool + +Connection pooling enabled +Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled. +Drivers known in $[officename] +Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data. +Current driver +The currently selected driver is displayed below the list. + +Enable pooling for this driver +Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection. + +Timeout (seconds) +Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed. The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e95443025 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Registered Databases +/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp + + +UFI: Registered Databases tab page + + + +
MW deleted "registered databases (Base)" and "databases;" and copied "lists;" to Shared guide data_register.xhp +Databases +Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window. +
+
+ +
+ +Registered Databases +Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. + +New +Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. + +Delete +Removes the selected entry from the list. + +Edit +Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..772900b68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database Link +/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp + + + +Database Link +should be New Database Link or Edit Database Link, respective to the button that was clicked + + +Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page. + +Database file +Enter the path and the file name of the database file. The name of the file must end with the *.odb extension. + +Browse +Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file. + +Registered name +Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99ef436b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Basic IDE + /text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + Basic IDE;Autocorrection + Basic IDE;Autocompletion + Basic IDE;Autoclose quotes + Basic IDE;Basic UNO extended types + Basic IDE;Autoclose parenthesis + Basic IDE;options + options;Basic IDE + +Basic IDE +Defines the settings for the Basic IDE (Integrated Development Environment) to help edit macros in Basic. +
+ +
+
+ +Code Completion +This feature helps the Basic programmer to complete the code, saves extensive typing and helps to reduce coding errors. + +Enable code completion +Display methods of a Basic object. Code completion will display the methods of a Basic object, provided the object is a UNO extended type. Its does not work on a generic Object or Variant Basic types. +When a variable is a UNO interface or structure, a list box appears when pressing the dot after a variable's name (like aVar. [list box appears] ). Its methods and variables are listed in the list box, displayed just below. You can navigate between the suggested methods and variables with the arrow keys. To insert the selected entry, press the Enter key or double click on it with the mouse. To cancel the list box, press the Esc key. +When typing the method's name, and pressing the Tab key once, it will complete the selected entry, pressing the Tab key again will cycle through the matches with the longest prefix. For example, when aVar.aMeth is typed, it will cycle through aMeth1, aMethod2, aMethod3 entries, and other entries are not hidden. +Example: + +is a valid variable definition, its methods can be accessed via the dot (".") operator: + +Code Suggestion +These are coding helpers for the Basic programmer. + +Autocorrection + +Correct cases of Basic variables and keywords while typing. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will modify the typing of Basic statements and Basic variables of your code to improve coding style and readability. Modifications of the code are based on the program's variables declarations and on the %PRODUCTNAME Basic commands parsed. +Example: + +and when writing Intvar, will be corrected to intVar to match the case existing in the declaration of intVar . +Basic keywords are also automatically corrected (the list of the keywords is grabbed out from the parser). +Examples: +Integer, String, ReDim, ElseIf, etc... + +Autoclose quotes +Automatically close open quotes. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a closing quote each time you type an opening quote. Handy for inserting strings in the Basic code. + +Autoclose parenthesis +Automatically close open parenthesis. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a closing parenthesis “)” each time you type an opening parenthesis “(“. + +Autoclose procedures +Automatically insert closing statements for procedures. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a statement End Sub or End Function after you type a Sub or Function statement and press Enter. + +Language Features + +Use extended types +Allow UNO object types as valid Basic types. This feature extend the Basic programming language standard types with the %PRODUCTNAME UNO types. This allows the programmer to define variables with the right UNO type and is necessary for the code completion feature. +Example: + +The use of UNO Extended Types in Basic programs can restrain interoperability of the program when executed in other office suites. + +
+Basic IDE +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b14c0a9b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Detailed Calculation + /text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp + + + + + + string;conversion to number settings + string conversion to number options + string;conversion to date settings + string conversion to date options + string;conversion to reference settings + string conversion to reference options + string;setting in spreadsheet formulas + cell reference syntax in strings;Excel R1C1 + cell reference syntax in strings;Excel A1 + cell reference syntax in strings;Calc A1 + Excel R1C1;cell reference syntax in strings + Excel A1;cell reference syntax in strings + Calc A1;cell reference syntax in strings + +
+ + +

Detailed Calculation Settings

+ Sets the rules for conversion from strings values to numeric values, string values to cell references, and strings values to date and time values. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value or date and time functions that takes arguments as string values in local or ISO 8601 formats. +
+
+ Menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula, and in section Detailed Calculation Settings press Details... button. +
+

Contents to Numbers

+

Conversion from text to number

+ How to treat text when encountered as operand in an arithmetic operation or as argument to a function that expects a number instead. Unambiguous conversion is possible for integer numbers including exponents and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Fractional numeric values with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601 are locale dependent. Note that in locale dependent conversions the resulting numeric value may differ between locales! + Generate #VALUE! error: Text found where numeric data is expected will generate #VALUE! error. Example: "123.45" will generate a #VALUE! error, while 123.45 not. + Treat as zero: Any text found where numeric data is expected will be considered as a number of value zero. Example: "123.45" will map to zero, while 123.45 not. + Convert only if unambiguous: If the text represents a valid and unambiguous numeric value, convert it. Example: "123.456" will generate a #VALUE! error because the text contains a separator, while "123456" will not.
See Converting Text to Numbers for details. + Convert also locale dependent: convert values valid in the locale representation. Example: "123,45" is a valid number in some locales because the comma is the decimal separator there. +

Treat empty string as zero

+ This option determines how an empty string is treated when used in arithmetic operations. If you have set "Conversion from text to number" to either "Generate #VALUE! error" or "Treat as zero", you cannot choose (here) if conversion of an empty string to a number will generate an error or if it will treat empty strings as zero. Otherwise this option determines how empty strings are treated. +

Reference syntax for string reference

+ Formula syntax to use when parsing references given in string parameters. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value. + + + Use formula syntax + + + Calc A1 + + + Excel A1 + + + Excel R1C1 + + + Calc A1 | Excel A1 + + +

Apply those settings to current document only

+ Mark this checkbox to apply the settings to the document only. +
+ Date and time functions + INDIRECT function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1cd77c756 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + Experimental Feature + /text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp + + + +
+This feature is experimental and may produce errors or behave unexpectedly. To enable it anyway, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced and select Enable experimental features checkbox. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..004d0e9c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Expert Configuration + /text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp + + + + + + + + + expert configuration;setting options + + + +Expert Configuration + +
+Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced - Open Expert Configuration. +
+Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME. The Expert Configuration dialog allows user to access hundreds of %PRODUCTNAME configuration preferences, and most of them are not available in the user interface or in the options dialogs. +The Expert Configuration dialog lets you access, edit and save configuration preferences that can harm your %PRODUCTNAME user profile. It can turn the user profile of %PRODUCTNAME unstable, inconsistent or even unusable. Proceed only if you know what you are doing. +The expert configuration does not modify the %PRODUCTNAME system installation in your computer. + +Text search entry area +Type the preference you want to display in the text area. Then click in the Search button. + +Search button +Click to search your preference text in the Preferences tree. + +Preferences tree +List the preferences organized hierarchically in a tree layout. To open the branches, double click in the (+) sign. Once the preference is visible in the tree, you can edit it. + +Preference Name +The name of the preference. + +Property +Shows the name of the property of the preference. + +Type +Defines the type of the property. Valid types are: + + + + string: Alphanumeric values; + + + long: integer numbers; + + + boolean: true or false values; + + + void: properties of type of void cannot be modified. + + +Value +Current value of the property. + +Edit +Opens a dialog to edit the preference. +Double-click in the preference row to edit current string and long values or toggle boolean types. + +

Reset

+Undo changes done so far in this dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee6849843 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + Advanced + /text/shared/optionen/java.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + + + Java;setting options + experimental features + unstable options + expert configuration;setting options + + + +

Advanced

+Specifies the support options for Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME, including which Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to use. It also specifies whether to use experimental (unstable) features such as macro recording and access expert configuration. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Java options

+ +The current list of %PRODUCTNAME modules and resources that depends on Java is available in the wiki. +

Use a Java runtime environment

+Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME. When a Java application attempts to access your hard drive, a prompt opens.UFI: moved this para here from Security tab page + + +Make sure to install a JRE compatible with the %PRODUCTNAME architecture: 64-bit JRE for 64-bit %PRODUCTNAME and 32-bit JRE for 32-bit %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + +

Java runtime environments (JRE) already installed:

+Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting. The path to the JRE is displayed beneath the list box. +You can override the default JRE of the operating system with one of the following alternatives: + + + By setting the environment variable JAVA_HOME, + + + By adding a JRE to the $PATH variable, + + + By providing the configuration file + javasettings_macOS_X86_64.xml + javasettings_Windows_X86_64.xml + javasettings_Linux_X86_64.xml + javasettings_${_OS}_${_ARCH}.xml + in the folder <instdir>/presets/config. + + + + + +

Add

+Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer. The path is set in the following dialog.UFI: #i38927# + + +

Parameters

+Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog. + + +

Class Path

+Opens the Class Path dialog. + +

Optional Features

+ +

Enable experimental features

+Enables features that are not yet complete or may contain known bugs. The list of these features is different version by version, or even it can be empty. + +

Enable macro recording

+Enables macro recording. The Tools - Macros - Record Macro menu item is available. + +

Expert Configuration

+Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3707abf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Class Path +/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp + + +UFI: new dialog from Java tab page + + + + + +Class Path +You use this dialog to add folders and archives to the Java class path. These paths are valid for any JRE that you start. +
+ +
+ +Assigned folders and archives +Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries. The new classpath becomes valid after you restart %PRODUCTNAME.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page +Java classes that are accessed through the classpath do not undergo a security check.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page + +Add Archive +Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path. + +Add Folder +Select a folder and add the folder to the class path. + +Remove +Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fccda285d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Start Parameters +/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp + + +UFI: new dialog from Java tab page + + + + + +Java Start Parameters +You can use this dialog to enter optional start parameters for the Java runtime environment (JRE). The settings that you specify in this dialog are valid for any JRE that you start. +
+ +
+ +Java Start parameter +Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters. +Do not use escape characters or quotes in path names. +For example, to point the system property "myprop" to a folder, enter the following parameter: +-Dmyprop=c:\program files\java +To enable debugging in a JRE, enter the following parameters: +-Xdebug +-Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,server=y,address=8000 +These changes take effect after you restart %PRODUCTNAME. + +Assigned start parameters +Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove. + +Add +Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list. + +Edit +Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited. + +Remove +Deletes the selected JRE start parameter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c47ddd15 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Macro Security +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp + + + +Macro Security +The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d99df5a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Security Level +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp + + + +security;security levels for macros +macros;security levels +levels;macro security + + + +Security Level + +Select the macro security level from one of four options. The options differ according to the security level. Macros that are allowed to run on a higher security level are also allowed to run in all lower levels. + +Very high +Only macros from trusted file locations are allowed to run. All other macros, regardless of whether they are signed or not, are disabled.UFI: for each option, the first para is copied from the string table. +Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. + +High +Only signed macros from trusted sources are allowed to run. Unsigned macros are disabled. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. + +Medium +Confirmation required before executing macros from unknown sources. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation. + +Low (not recommended) +All macros will be executed without confirmation. Use this setting only if you are certain that all documents that will be opened are safe. +A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed7a5c854 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Trusted Sources +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp + + + +Trusted Sources + + + +Specifies the macro security settings for trusted certificates and trusted file locations. +Trusted certificates +Lists the trusted certificates. +View +Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate. +Remove +Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates. +Trusted file locations +Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations. +Add +Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute. +Remove +Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d87d18c4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Email +/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge E-Mail tab page for Writer options + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Email +Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as email messages. +
+
+ +
+User information +Enter the user information to use when you send email. + +Your name +Enter your name. + +Email address +Enter your email address for replies. + +Send replies to different email address +Uses the email address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to email address. + +Reply address +Enter the address to use for email replies. +Outgoing server (SMTP) settings +Specify the server settings for outgoing emails. + +Server name +Enter the SMTP server name. + +Port +Enter the SMTP port. + +Use secure connection +When available, uses a secure connection to send emails. + +Server Authentication +Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure email. + +Test Settings +Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fa05a8c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + Online Update + /text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp + + + +
+update options + online update options + options;online update + online updates; checking automatically + updates; checking automatically + Internet; checking for updates + +Online Update + + + Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+ +
+ +Online Update is a module that is installed by default. To exclude, choose "Custom" in the Setup when installing %PRODUCTNAME. Check your distribution package to see if it is possible to exclude installation of Online Update. +

Online Update Options

+Check for updates automatically + Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar Update Icon displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. + If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. + +Every Day + A check will be performed once a day. + +Every Week + A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting. + +Every Month + A check will be performed once a month. + +Check now + A check will be performed now. +

Download Destination

+Displays the selected folder to store the downloaded files. + +

Download updates automatically

+Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder. + + +Change +Click to select the destination folder for downloaded files. +

User Agent

+Enable the check to send information about your %PRODUCTNAME version, operating system and basic hardware. This information is used to optimize the download. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..939f70b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +OpenCL +/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp + + + +
+ + + +OpenCL;setting options +setting options;OpenCL + +OpenCL +OpenCL is a technology to speed up calculation on large spreadsheets. +
+
+
+OpenCL™ is the first open, royalty-free standard for cross-platform, parallel programming of modern processors found in personal computers, servers and handheld/embedded devices. OpenCL (Open Computing Language) greatly improves speed and responsiveness for a wide spectrum of applications in numerous market categories from gaming and entertainment to scientific and medical software +for more information on OpenCL, visit the OpenCL site + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91f85e305 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Search Commands + /text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp + + + + + + search commands + head-up display (hud) + + +

Search Commands

+ Allows to search and execute all commands available in application menus by their names. +
+ Choose Help - Search Commands + Use the shortcut Shift + Esc +
+ When the Search Commands feature is activated, a head-up display (HUD) is shown and can be used to quickly search commands by their names. As the search string is typed, all matching commands are shown in a list below the search field. + To execute a command: + + + Use the mouse to click on one of the items shown in the list. This will immediately run the selected command. + + + Use the arrow keys in the keyboard to navigate through the items shown in the list and press Enter to run the desired command. + + + This feature is available in Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..101c13c87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Security Options and Warnings + /text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp + + + + +
+ + selecting;security warnings + selecting;security options + options;security + warnings;security + + Security Options and Warnings + + + Set security related options and warnings about hidden information in documents. +
+
+ Press the Options button on the Security page. +
+ The Security options and warnings dialog contains the following controls: + + When saving or sending + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments. + + When printing + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments. + + When signing + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments. + + When creating PDF files + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments. + + Remove personal information on saving + Select to always remove user data from file properties, comments and tracked changes. The names of authors in comments and changes will be replaced by generic values as "Author1", "Author2" and so forth. Time values will also be reset to a single standard value. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General. + + Recommend password protection on saving + Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. + + CommandCtrl-click required to follow hyperlinks + If enabled, you must hold down the CommandCtrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink. + + Block any links from documents not among the trusted locations (see Macro Security) + Blocks the use of linked images by documents not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog. This can increase security in case you work with documents from untrusted sources (e.g. the internet) and are worried about vulnerabilities in image processing software components. Blocking the use of links means that images are not loaded in untrusted documents, only a placeholder frame is visible. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99f89a939 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Server Authentication +/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp + + + + + +Server Authentication +On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. + +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication +Enables the authentication that is required to send email by SMTP. + +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires separate authentication +Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password. + +User name +Enter the user name for the SMTP server. + +Password +Enter the password for the user name. + +The outgoing mail server uses the same authentication as the incoming mail server. +Select if you are required to first read your email before you can send email. This method is also called "SMTP after POP3". + +Server name +Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server. + +Port +Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server. + +POP 3 +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3. + +IMAP +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP. + +User name +Enter the user name for the IMAP server. + +Password +Enter the password. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c5cef74a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Test Account Settings +/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp + + + + + +Test Account Settings +When you enter settings on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. +(Results list box) +In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. + +Errors +In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings. + +Stop +Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9063f06a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +View Certificate +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp + + + +View Certificate +The View Certificate dialog opens when you click the View Certificate button on the Trusted Sources tab page of the Macro Security dialog. +The dialog has the following tab pages: + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f1989c6d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Certificate Path +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp + + +UFI: View Certificate Path tab page + + + + + + + +Certificate Path + +The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b94f1fef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Details +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp + + +UFI: View certificate Details tab page + + + + + + +Details + +The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate. + +Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d12e018d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp + + +UFI: View certificate General tab page + + + + + +General + +The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9639b2b31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + Spacing + /text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + +

Increase Paragraph Spacing

+ Increases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. + + + + + Icon Increase Paragraph Spacing + + + + Increase Paragraph Spacing + + +
+

Decrease Paragraph Spacing

+ Decreases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. + + + + + Icon Decrease Paragraph Spacing + + + + Decrease Paragraph Spacing + + +
+

Increase Indent

+ Increases the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the next default tab position. If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. + + + + + Icon Increase Indent + + + + Increase Indent + + +
+

Decrease Indent

+ Decreases the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the previous default tab position. If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is decreased. + + + + + Icon Decrease Indent + + + + Decrease Indent + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d87549ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ + + + + + + Text + /text/shared/submenu_text.xhp + + + +
+ +

+ Text +

+ + Opens a submenu where you can choose text formatting commands. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +

+ Overline +

+ + + + + +

+ Shadow +

+ +

+ Outline +

+ + + + +

Wrap Text

+ + Break text automatically at the right edges of the selected cells. + + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ UPPERCASE +

+ + + +

+ lowercase +

+ + + + +

Cycle Case

+ + Cycles the case of the selected characters between Title Case, Sentence case, UPPERCASE and lowercase. + + + +

Sentence case

+ + Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character. + + +

+ Capitalize Every Word +

+ + + + + +

tOGGLE cASE

+ + Toggles case of all selected characters. + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + + + +

Half-width

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters. + + +

Full Width

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to full-width characters. + + +

Hiragana

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters. + + +

Katakana

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d436dfb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + +To access this command +/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +To access this command + + +Save as Picture context menu, #i63795 +Opens a dialog to save the selected bitmap picture as a file. The default file format is the internal format of the image. +Custom Animation context menu +Opens the Custom Animation sidebar deck. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Rectangle + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Curve + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Alignment + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Arrange + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14bf42add --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +File Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + File Menu + Choose File - Export + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdb8ffb52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit Menu + /text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp + + + + Edit Menu +
+ Choose Edit - Duplicate + + Shift+F3 +
+ Choose Shape - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) + + Choose Edit - Delete Slide + + Open the context menu of an inserted layer, then choose Delete Layer + + Choose Edit - Fields + + Click the Show Gluepoint Functions icon on the Drawing Bar +UFI: this is called from text\simpress\02\10030200.xhp to fix bug #i23785# + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9107f1bb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + View Menu + /text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp + + + + + + +

View Menu

+Choose View - Rulers +Choose View - Toolbars - Options + +
+Choose View - Toolbars - Presentation +
+Choose View - Color/Grayscale + +
+Choose View - Normal +
+ +
+Choose View - Outline +
+ +
+Choose View - Slide Sorter +
+ +
+Choose View - Notes +
+ +
+Choose View - Master Handout +
+ +
+Choose Slide Show - Slide Show +F5 +On the Standard toolbar, click + +
+ + + + + Slide Show Icon + + + Slide Show + + +
+ +
+
+ +Choose View - Normal + +
+Choose View - Master Slide +
+Choose View - Master Slide +Choose View - Master Notes +Choose Slide - Master Elements + +
+Choose Insert - Header and Footer +Choose Insert - Page number +Choose Insert - Date and time +
+Choose View - Normal +Choose View - Master Slide +Choose View - Notes + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe61c5e46 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000404.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Insert Menu

+Choose Insert - Duplicate Slide +UFI: will be changed "SO later" to Page (for Draw) +Choose Insert - Expand Slide + +Choose Insert - Summary Slide + +
+Choose Insert - Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open context menu of layer tabs - choose Insert Layer (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +
+
+Choose Insert - Insert Snap Point/Line (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open a context menu and choose Insert Snap Point/Line + +
+Select a snap point or line, open the context menu, and choose Edit Snap Point/Line + +
+Choose Insert - Table + +On the Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Insert Table + + +Table + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Slide - Insert Slide from FilePage - Insert Page from File +On the Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Slide from FileInsert Page from File + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Field +Choose Insert - Field - Date (fixed) +Choose Insert - Field - Date (variable) +Choose Insert - Field - Time (fixed) +Choose Insert - Field - Time (variable) +Choose Insert - Field - Page Number +Choose Insert - Field - Author +Choose Insert - Field - File Name + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6fec0b666 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/simpress/00/00000405.xhp + + + + Format Menu +
+ In the context menu of a dimension line, choose Dimensions. + On the Lines and Arrows toolbar, click the Dimension Line icon. +
+
+ In a Draw document, right-click a layer tab and choose Modify Layer + + Choose Format - Layer (only $[officename] Draw) +
+
+ Choose Format - Interaction + + On the Standard toolbar, click +
+ + + + + Icon Interaction + + + Interaction + + +
+ +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ded1d974 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Tools Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000406.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation + +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show and then click New. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23a563d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + +Slide Show Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000407.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Slide Show Menu

+Choose View - Slide Transition + +
+Choose Insert - Animated Image + +
+
+Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation + +On the Drawing toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Custom Animation + + +
+ +
+
+ +Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings + +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc7ca1331 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shape Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000413.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Shape Menu +
+Choose Shape - Convert (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To Curve (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Curve + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To Polygon (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Polygon + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To 3D (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To 3D Rotation Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Body + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To Bitmap (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Bitmap + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To Metafile (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Metafile + +
+
+Choose Shape - Convert - To Contour (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Convert - To Contour + +
+
+Choose Shape - Arrange - In Front of Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - In Front of Object + +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: + + + + +Icon + + + +In Front of Object + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Shape - Arrange - Behind Object (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Behind Object + +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: + + + + +Icon + + + +Behind Object + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Shape - Arrange - Reverse (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Open the context menu of a selected object and choose Arrange - Reverse + +On the Drawing bar, open the Arrange toolbar and click: + + + + +Icon + + + +Reverse + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Shape - Combine (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Combine. +
+
+Choose Shape - Split (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select a combined object, open the context menu and choose Split. +
+
+Choose Shape - Connect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Connect. +
+
+Choose Shape - Break (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select a line that was created by connecting two or more lines, open the context menu and choose Break. +
+
+Choose Shape (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes + +
+
+Choose Shape - Merge (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Merge + +
+
+Choose Shape - Subtract (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Subtract + +
+
+Choose Shape - Intersect (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) +Select two or more objects, open the context menu and choose Shapes - Intersect + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eeb135d6a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + Slide Menu + /text/simpress/00/slide_menu.xhp + + + + Choose Slide - Slide Properties + + Choose Slide - Slide Properties and then click the Page tab + + Choose Slide - Slide Properties and then click the Background tab + + Choose Slide - Layout + + Choose Slide - Change Slide Master + + Choose Slide - Change Slide Master - Load +
+ Choose Slide - New Slide + On the Presentation bar, click +
+ + + + Icon New slide + + + New Slide + + +
+
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d39e594a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Export +/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Presentation HTML export Drawing HTML export +exporting;to HTML format + +Export +Exports your presentation or drawing and sets the export options. + +
+
+ +
+The following file formats present you with additional export options after you click Save: +HTML Document, JPEG, SVM/WMF/PICT/MET, BMP, GIF, EPS, PNG, PBM, PPM, PGM. +If you choose "HTML Document" as your file format, the HTML Export Wizard appears. This wizard guides you through the export process and includes the option to save the pictures in your presentation in GIF or JPG format. +
+Export dialog +Information on Import and Export Filters +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac6717fe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + Page + /text/simpress/01/01180001.xhp + + + +
+ + slides; formatting + formatting;slides + + + Page + + Sets page orientation, page margins, background and other layout options. +
+
+ +
+ Paper format + Format + Select a paper format supported by your printer. You can also create a custom page size by selecting User and entering the size dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. + Width + Shows the width of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the width of the page. + Height + Shows the height of the paper format you selected in the Format box. If you selected the User format, enter a value for the height of the page. + Portrait + Page orientation is vertical. + Landscape + Page orientation is horizontal. + Paper tray + Select the paper source for your printer. + If your document uses more than one paper format, you can select a different tray for each format. + + Margins + Specify the distance between the edge of a printed page and the printable area. + Left + Enter the distance between the left edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. + Right + Enter the distance between the right edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. + Top + Enter the distance between the top edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. + Bottom + Enter the distance between the bottom edge of the page and the data. You can see the result in the preview. + Format + Specify the format for page numbering. + Fit object to paper format + Reduces the scale of objects and the size of the font on the page so that they print on the selected paper format. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c4844655 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + Background + /text/simpress/01/01180002.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ Background + Defines a background for a single page or for all of the pages in the active file. +
+
+ +
+ The options for this dialog are described here. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48e2c9927 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Navigator +/text/simpress/01/02110000.xhp + + + + +You can dock the Navigator to the edge of your workspace. +
+ +
+Press CommandCtrl+Shift+F5 to open the Navigator when you are editing a presentation. +Pointer +Switches the mouse pointer to a pen that you can use to write on slides during a slide show. You cannot change the color of the pen. + + + + + + + +Icon + + +Pointer + + +
+ + + +Drag Mode +Drag and drop slides and named objects into the active slide. You can only insert slides and named objects from a saved file. You can only insert named objects as copies. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert as hyperlink + + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert as link + + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert as copy + + +
+Insert as hyperlink +Inserts slides as a hyperlink (URL) into the active slide. +Insert as link +Inserts slides as a link into the active slide. +Insert as copy +Inserts a copy of a slide or named object into the active slide. +Show Shapes +In the submenu you can choose to display a list of all shapes or only the named shapes. Use drag-and-drop in the list to reorder the shapes. When you set the focus to a slide and press the Tab key, the next shape in the defined order is selected. +Existing Slides +Lists available slides. Double-click a slide to make it the active slide. +Open Documents +Lists available $[officename] files. Select a file to display the contents you can insert. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a54672da4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Duplicate + /text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Duplicate + Makes one or more copies of a selected object. + +
+
+ +
+ + +Number of copies + Enter the number of copies you want to make. + +Values from selection + + + + +Icon + + + + Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box. The rotation angle of the selected object is not entered. + + +
+ + Placement + Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. + +X axis + Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. + +Y axis + Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. + +Angle + Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. + Enlargement + Sets the size of a duplicate object. + +Width + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. + +Height + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. + Colors + Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. + +Start + Choose a color for the selected object. + +End + Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e7740ca6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Slide +/text/simpress/01/02130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+deleting; slides +slides;deleting + + +Delete Slide +Deletes the current slide or page. + +
+
+ +
+In the context menu of a slide or page you find the following command, among others: + +Rename Slide +Rename Page +Renames the selected slide page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..667679f90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete Layer + /text/simpress/01/02140000.xhp + + + +layers; deleting + deleting; layers + + +Delete Layer + Deletes the active layer. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e773b4de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cross-fading +/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Cross-fading +Creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects. + +$[officename] draws a series of intermediate shapes between two selected objects and groups the result. +
+ +
+Settings +Sets the options for cross-fading. + +Increments +Enter the number of shapes you want between the two selected objects. + +Cross-fade attributes +Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects. For example, if the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the two colors is applied. + +Same orientation +Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3664004f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Fields + /text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp + + + + + + + fields; editing + editing; fields + fields; formatting + formatting; fields + + + + + + +Edit Fields +Edits the properties of an inserted field. To edit an inserted field, double-click it. Then choose Edit - Fields. +Then choose Edit - Fields. + + +
+ +
+ +Field type +Sets the type of a field. + + +Fixed +Displays the content of the field when the field was inserted. + + +Variable +Displays the current value of the field. + + +Language +Select the language for the field. + + +Format +Select a display format for the field. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483d499e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Option Bar +/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Option Barto be deleted +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e22a4c8b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Rulers + /text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Rulers +Displays or hides rulers at the top and left or right edges of the workspace. +
+ +
+ +
+You can use rulers to position objects in the workspace, to set paragraph indents or to drag guides onto the page. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67b4b0c5a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Presentation +/text/simpress/01/03070000.xhp + + + +
+ +Presentation +Common commands for slides. +
+
+ +
+Slide + +Slide Layout + +

Change Slide Master

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d1d7cc90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Normal View + /text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + normal view;presentations + + + + + + + Normal + Switches to normal view, where you can create and edit your slides. +
+ +
+ +
some context menu commands in Normal viewSlide command in context menu + + Opens a submenu with commands for the current slide.Display Background of Master + + When enabled, the current slide shows the background of the master slide.Display Objects from Master + + When enabled, the current slide shows the objects of the master slide.Set Background Picture for Slidei83563 + + Opens a file dialog to select a picture. The picture will be scaled and inserted on the background of the current master slide. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a902a198e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Outline View + /text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + outline view + editing;slide titles + + + + + +Outline +Switches to outline view, where you can add, edit and reorganize slide titles and headings. +
+ +
+ +
+The Text Formatting bar contains the following icons for slide titles:Promote, Demote, Move Up and Move Down. If you want to reorder slide titles with the keyboard, ensure that the cursor is at the beginning of a title and press Tab to move the title one level lower in the hierarchy. To move the title up one level, press Shift+Tab. +The upper outline level corresponds to slide titles, and the lower levels correspond to the headings on a slides. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e02967aa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Slide Sorter + /text/simpress/01/03100000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Slide Sorter +Displays miniature versions of the slides so they can easily be rearranged. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9ea9603a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Notes View + /text/simpress/01/03110000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + notes; adding to slides + slides;inserting speaker notes + speaker notes;inserting + + + + + +Notes +Switches to notes view, where you can add notes to your slides. Notes are hidden from the audience when you give your presentation. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62c16da0d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Handout Page + /text/simpress/01/03120000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Handout Page +Switches to the handout page view, where you can scale several slides to fit on one printed page. +
+To modify the number of slides you can print on a page, open the Properties sidebar deck and double-click a layout on the Layout content panel. + +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5e1a15b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Slide Show +/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
MW transferred three index entries to the guide show.xhp + +Slide Show +Starts your slide show. +
+
+ +
+You can specify settings for running a slide show in Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. +Specify whether a slide show starts with the current slide or with the first slide on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +To start a slide show, do one of the following: + + +Click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar. + + +Right-click a slide in Normal view and choose Slide Show. + + + +Press F5. + + + + + +Under Windows, right-click the *.sxi or *.odp file in the File Explorer, then choose Show. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc8a7b8ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Master +/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +master views + + +Master +Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. +
+ +
+ + +link to 03151000 reinserted, i59749 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6519c54c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Master Slide + /text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + normal view; backgrounds + backgrounds; normal view + views;master slide view + master slide view + + + + +Master Slide +Switches to master slide view, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides that use the same master slide. +
+ +
+ +
+ +Inserts a new master slide into the document. Double-click the new master slide on the Slides pane to apply it to all slides. + +Select a master slide and click this icon to remove the master slide from the document. + +Select a master slide and click this icon to rename the master slide. + +Closes the master slide view. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..246a7ea67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Master Notes + /text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + notes;default formatting + backgrounds;notes + speaker notes;defaults + + + + +Master Notes +Displays the master notes, where you can set the default formatting for notes. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e125a8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Master Elements + /text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp + + + + + + + headers and footers;master slides layouts + master slides layouts with headers and footers + + + +
+ + +Master Elements +Add header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the master slide. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..77ea57ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Master Slide Layout +/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Master Slide Layout

+Adds or removes header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the layout of the master slide. +
+
+ +
+ +
+

Placeholders

+

Header

+Adds a header placeholder to the master slide for notes. +

Date/time

+Adds a date/time placeholder to the master slide. +

Footer

+Adds a footer placeholder to the master slide. +

Slide number

+Adds a slide number placeholder to the master slide. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91c16232f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Master Notes Layout +/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp + + + +
+Master Notes Layout +Add header, footer, date, and slide number to the master notes. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e446c63d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + +Header and Footer +/text/simpress/01/03152000.xhp + + + +slides;page numbers +slides;headers and footers +footers;slides +headers and footers;slides + +
+ + + + +

Header and Footer

+Adds or changes text in placeholders at the top and the bottom of slides and master slides. +
+
+ +
+The Header and Footer dialog contains the following tab pages: + + + +Slide tab page where you can specify options for the current slide or for all slides. + + + +Notes and Handouts tab page where you can specify options for the notes pages and the handout pages. + + + + + + + + + +

Include on slide

+Specify the elements to include on your slides. + +

Header

+Adds the text that you enter in the Header text box to the top of the slide. +

Header text

+Adds the text that you enter to the top of the slide. + + + +

Date and time

+Adds the date and time to the slide. + +

Fixed

+Displays the date and time that you enter in the text box. + +

Variable

+Displays the date and time that the slide was created. Select a date format from the list. +

Language

+Select the language for the date and time format. + +

Footer

+Adds the text that you enter in the Footer text box to the bottom of the slide. +

Footer text

+Adds the text that you enter to the bottom of the slide. + + + +

Slide number / Page number

+Adds the slide number or the page number. + +

Do not show on first slide

+Does not display your specified information on the first slide of your presentation. +

Apply to All

+ +Applies the settings to all the slides in your presentation, including the corresponding master slides. + +

Apply

+Applies the current settings to the selected slides. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..543fdbfd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Color/Grayscale +/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+display qualities of presentations +colors; displaying presentations +black and white display +grayscale display + +Color/Grayscale +Shows slides in color, grayscale, or black and white. +
+
+ +
+
+ +Color +Shows slides in color. +
+ +Grayscale +Shows slides in shades of black and white. + +Black and White +Shows slides in pure black or white without shading. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db2c6d240 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Snap Point/Line +/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp + + + +snap lines, see also guides +snap points;inserting +guides; inserting +magnetic lines in presentations + +
+ + + +

Snap Point/Line

+Inserts a snap point or snap line (also known as guide) that you can use to quickly align objects. + Snap points and snap lines do not appear in printed output. +
+
+ +
+You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. +Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. +To set the snap range, choose %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid +%PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog box. +Snap points dialog +

Position

+Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. +You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. +

X axis

+Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page. +

Y axis

+Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. +

Type

+Specified the type of snap object you want to insert. +

Point

+Inserts a snap point. +

Vertical

+Inserts a vertical snap line. +

Horizontal

+Inserts a horizontal snap line. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1df27604 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rows +/text/simpress/01/04030000m.xhp + + + +rows; inserting +inserting; rows + + +Rows +Inserts a new row above the active cell. The number of rows inserted correspond to the number of rows selected. The existing rows are moved downward. +
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Rows + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58c1554f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Edit Snap Line / Point +/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +guides; editing +editing; guides and snap points +snap points; editing + + +

Edit Snap Line / Point

+Sets the position of the selected snap point or snap line relative to the top left corner of the page. well, relative to the origin, which can easily be dragged away from that corner +
+ +
+ + +

Delete Snap Line/Point

+Deletes the selected snap point or snap line. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdb6af0b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Columns +/text/simpress/01/04040000m.xhp + + + +inserting; columns +columns; inserting + + +Columns +Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell. The number of columns inserted correspond to the number of columns selected. The existing columns are moved to the right. +
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Insert - Columns + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f52f520eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Table +/text/simpress/01/04080100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Table

+Inserts a new table into the current slide or page. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8088e0ebf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Insert Slides/Objects +/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp + + + + + +inserting; objects from files +objects; inserting from files +slides; inserting as links +inserting; slides as links +backgrounds; deleting unused + +
+

Insert SlidePage/Objects from File

+Allows you to insert the entire file or specific elements in the file. +
+
+ +
+

To insert specific elements from a file:

+ + +Click the plus sign next to the file name and select the elements you want to insert. Hold down Command +Ctrl to add to or Shift to expand your selection. + + +If you want to insert the file as a link, select Link. + + +Click OK. + + +At the prompt, click Yes to scale the elements to fit on the slide or No to preserve the original size of the elements. + + +

Link

+Inserts a file or some file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified. +

Delete unused backgrounds

+Unused master pages are not inserted. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4340d709 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Text +/text/simpress/01/04110200.xhp + + +mw deleted "text documents;" and moved "inserting;" to the impress guide html_import.xhp +

Insert Text

+Inserts text from an ASCII, RTF, or HTML file into the active slide. +
+ +
+The inserted text uses the default text formatting of the active slide. If you want, you can drag a text box in your slide, and then insert the text. The box automatically extends downwards for longer text passages. +

Display list

+Select the text you want to insert from the list. +

Link

+Inserts the text as a link. Links are updated automatically when the source file changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67f1b5c10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Duplicate Slide +/text/simpress/01/04120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Duplicate Slide + Inserts a copy of the current slide after the current slide. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e709b068 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Expand Slide +/text/simpress/01/04130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +expanding;slides +slides;expanding + + +
+ Expand Slide + Creates a new slide from every top-level outline point (text one level below the title text in the outline hierarchy) in the selected slide. The outline text becomes the title of the new slide. Outline pointspoints? below the top level on the original slide are moved up one level on the new slide. +
+
+ +
+You can only use the Expand Slide command if your slide layout contains a title object and an outline object. +If you want to keep the original slide, choose Edit - Undo. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ff44b938 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Summary Slide +/text/simpress/01/04140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + summary slide + +
+ Summary Slide + Creates a new slide that contains an unordered list from the titles of the slides that follow the selected slide. The summary slide is inserted behind the last slide. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c72e0f3b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fields +/text/simpress/01/04990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ fields;in slidesFields + Lists common fields that you can insert into your slide. +
+ If you want to edit a field in your slide, select it and choose Edit – Fields. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7f9f13a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Date (fixed) +/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+dates; fixed +fields; dates (fixed) + + +Date (fixed) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated. +
+
+ +
+To edit an inserted field in your slide, double-click the field, place the cursor in front of the first character in the field and choose Edit - Fields. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34bea3c57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Date (variable) +/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+dates; variable +fields; dates (variable) + + +Date (variable) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1bc18bd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Time (fixed) +/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+times; fixed +fields; times (fixed) + + +Time (fixed) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9607cb2a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Time (variable) +/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+times;variable +fields;times (variable) + + +Time (variable) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f55aae00a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Page Number +/text/simpress/01/04990500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+fields; page numbers +page number field +slide numbers +presentations; numbering slides in + + +Page Number +Inserts the page number into the current slide or page. If you want to add a page number to every slide, choose View - Master Slide and insert the page number field. To change the number format, choose SlidePage - Properties - Page tab and then select a format from the list in the Layout Settings area. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8629d2ae9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Author +/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp + + + +
+authors +fields; authors + + +Author +Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide. +
+To edit the name, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7da4f39e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +File name +/text/simpress/01/04990700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+fields; file names + + +File name +Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after you save the file. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67a65b0ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Format Cells +/text/simpress/01/05090000m.xhp + + + + +

Format Cells

+Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, fonts, font effects, borders, and background. + +
+On the Table Bar, click Table Properties. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3b65636d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + Styles + /text/simpress/01/05100000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Styles window; graphics documents + fill format mode; styles + + + +

Styles

+Opens the Styles deck of the Sidebar, which lists the available graphic and presentation styles for applying and editing. +
+
+The Styles window in %PRODUCTNAME Impress behaves differently than in other %PRODUCTNAME programs. For example, you can create, edit and apply Graphic Styles, but you can only edit Presentation Styles. + +
+ +
+When you edit a style, the changes are automatically applied to all of the elements formatted with this style in your document. If you want to ensure that the styles on a specific slide are not updated, create a new master slide for the slide. + + +

Presentation Styles

+Show styles used in %PRODUCTNAME Impress AutoLayouts. You can only modify Presentation Styles. + + + + + Icon Presentation Styles + + + Presentation Styles + + +
+ + + +

Graphic Styles

+Show styles for formatting graphical elements, including text objects. + + + + + Icon Graphic Styles + + + Graphic Styles + + +
+ + + +

Fill format mode

+Applies the selected style to an object on your slide. Click the paint bucket icon and then click an object in your slide to apply the style. Click the paint bucket icon again to exit this mode. + + + + + Icon Fill format mode + + + Fill format mode + + +
+ + + +

New Style from Selection

+Creates a new style using the format attributes of a selected object. + + + + + Icon New Style from selection + + + New Style from selection + + +
+ + + +

Update Style

+Updates the Style selected in the Styles window with the current formatting of the selected object. + + + + + Icon Update Style + + + Update Style + + +
+ + + +

Style List / Style Groups / Context menu: New / Modify / Delete

+Create, edit, apply and manage styles. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9f74ed24 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/simpress/01/05110500m.xhp + + + + +Delete +Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. + +
+On Table Bar, click + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Row + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..348c005d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + Change Slide Master + /text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp + + + + + + + + + +
+

Master Page

+ Displays the Available Master Slides dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current page. Any objects in the page design are inserted behind objects in the current page. +
+ + +
+

Change Slide Master

+ Displays the Available Master Slides dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide. +
+ + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ +

Slide design

+ Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide. Select a design and click OK to apply it to the current slide. + +

Exchange background page

+ Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document. + +

Delete unused backgrounds

+ Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document. + +

Load

+ + + Displays the Load Master Page dialog, where you can select additional page designs. + + + Displays the Load Master Slide dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5a6fa2da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/simpress/01/05120500m.xhp + + + + +Delete +Deletes the selected column(s) from the table. + +This command is only available if the cursor is in a table. +
+On Table Bar, click + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Column + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3e2c8c7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + Layout + /text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp + + + + + changing; slide layouts + slide layouts + + +
+ Layout + Opens a submenu with slide layouts. +
+
+ +
+ + + The icon in the Presentation toolbar opens a submenu. Select the slide layout for the slide. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b296fb3c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + +Dimensioning +/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp + + + +dimension lines; properties of + + + + +Dimensioning +Changes the length, measurement and guide properties of the selected dimension line. + +If you want to modify the line style or the arrow style of a dimension line, choose Format - Line. +
+ + +
+A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. +Line +Sets the distance properties of the dimension line and the guides with respect to each other and to the baseline. + +Line distance +Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0). + +Guide overhang +Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline. + +Guide distance +Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line. + +Left guide +Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. + +Right guide +Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. + +Dimension line below the object +Reverses the properties set in the Line area. + +Decimal places +Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties. +Legend +Sets the properties of the dimension text. + +Text position +Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides. +The AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal checkboxes must be cleared before you can assign the Text position. + +AutoVertical +Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text. + +AutoHorizontal +Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text. + + +Show meas. units +Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list. + +Parallel to line +Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..932d22a3f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Connectors + /text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp + + + + + + connectors; properties of + + + + +

Connectors

+ Sets the properties of a connector. + +

Type

+ Lists the types of connectors that are available. There are four types of connectors: standard, line, straight, and curved. +

Line skew

+ Defines the skew of a connector line. The preview window displays the result. + +

Line 1

+ Enter a skew value for Line 1. + +

Line 2

+ Enter a skew value for Line 2. + +

Line 3

+ Enter a skew value for Line 3. +

Line spacing

+ Sets the line spacing for the connectors. + +

Begin horizontal

+ Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector. + +

Begin vertical

+ Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector. + +

End horizontal

+ Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector. + +

End vertical

+ Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector. + +

Reset line skew

+ Resets the line skew values to the default. (This command is only accessible through the context menu). + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d5729e6f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Arrange +/text/simpress/01/05250000.xhp + + + +
mw deleted one index entryArrange +Changes the stacking order of a selected object. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee62d6e1c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +In Front of Object +/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; in front of object command +in front of object command + + +In Front of Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. +
+
+ +
+Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – In Front of Object, and then click an object in your slide. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c53e68f5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Behind Object +/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; behind object command +behind object command + + +Behind Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. +
+
+ +
+Select the object(s) that you want to move behind another object. Right-click and choose Arrange - Behind Object, and then click an object in your slide. +Arranging objects affects the stacking order of all objects in your document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81976503b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Reverse +/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+reversing objects +objects; reversing + + +Reverse +Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. +
+
+ +
+You can select this function only if at least two drawing elements are selected together. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2af6d843 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/simpress/01/06030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Hyphenation + Turns hyphenation option for text objects on or off. You can turn hyphenation on or off for each paragraph. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fee32eee1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Slide Transition +/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp + + + +slide transitions; manual +slide transitions; sounds +sounds; on slide transitions +MW transferred two index entries to the guide show.xhp. + + + + +
+ Slide Transition + Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show. +
+
+ +
+To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide, switch to the Slide Sorter, select the slides, and then choose Slide - Slide Transition. + + +Slide Transition +Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides. + +Variant +Select a variation of the transition. This list is only available for certain transitions. + +Duration +Sets the duration of the slide transition. + +Sound +Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition. +Loop until next sound +Select to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts. +Advance slide +Specifies how to get the next slide. +On mouse click +Select to advance to the next slide on a mouse click. + +Automatically after +Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Enter the seconds in the numerical field next to the spin button, or click the spin button. +Apply Transition to All Slides +Applies the selected slide transition to all slides in the current presentation document. +Play +Shows the current slide transition as a preview. +Automatic preview +Select to see the slide transitions automatically in the document. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5170c0e10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ + + + + + + + + + Animation + /text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Animation

+ Creates a custom animation on the current slide. You can only use existing objects to create an animation. +
+
+ +
+ You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +

Animation

+ Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. + + Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. + + + + + Icon + + + First image + + +
+ + + Plays the animation backwards. + + + + + Icon + + + Backwards + + +
+ + + Stops playing the animation. + + + + + Icon + + + Stop + + +
+ + + Plays the animation. + + + + + Icon + + + Play + + +
+ + + Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. + + + + + Icon + + + Last image + + +
+ + +

Image Number

+ Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. + +

Duration

+ Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. + +

Loop count

+ Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. +

Image

+ Adds or removes objects from your animation. + +

Apply Object

+ Adds selected object(s) as a single image. + + + + + Icon + + + Apply Object + + +
+ + +

Apply Objects Individually

+ Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. + You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. + + + + + Icon + + + Apply Objects Individually + + +
+ + +

Delete Current Image

+ Deletes current image from the animation sequence. + + + + + Icon + + + Delete Current Image + + +
+ + +

Delete All Images

+ Deletes all of the images in the animation. + + + + + Icon + + + Delete All Images + + +
+ +

Number

+ Total number of images in the animation. +

Animation group

+ Sets object properties for your animation. + +

Group object

+ Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. + +

Bitmap object

+ Combines images into a single image. + +

Alignment

+ Aligns the images in your animation. + +

Create

+ Inserts the animation into the current slide. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a0cf4ce6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + + +Animation Pane +/text/simpress/01/06060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sounds; for effects +effects; sounds +sounds; formats +presentations; ordering of effects +lists;animations +animations;list of + + + + +Animation Pane +Assigns effects to selected objects. + +
+
+ +
+ +Animation List +The animation list displays all animations for the current slide. + + +Each slide has one main animation that runs when the slide is shown. + + +More animations may be present, which run when a shape is shown. If any of these animated shapes are present, they are listed in the lower half of the animation list. Tabs display the name of each shape that runs an animation. + + +Each list entry consists of the following two rows: + + +The first row of the entry shows a mouse icon if the animation is started by a mouse click, and a clock if the animation starts after the previous animation ends. The name of the shape for the animation effect or the first characters of the animated text. + + +In the second row an icon shows the animation effect, followed by the category and the name of the effect. + + + +Add +Adds another animation effect for the selected object on the slide. + +Remove +Removes the selected animation effects from the animation list. + + +Change order +Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list. + + +Category +Select an animation effect category. The following categories are available: + + +Entrance: Select an entrance effect from the list of effects. + + +Emphasis: Select an emphasis effect from the list of effects. + + +Exit: Select an exiting effect from the list of effects. + + +Motion Paths: Select a motion path effect from the list of effects. + + + +Effect +Select an animation effect. + + +Start +Displays when the selected animation effect should be started. The following start options are available: + + + +On click - the animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click. + + + +With previous - the animation runs immediately. + + + +After previous - the animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends. + + + + + + + + + + + +Properties: Direction, Amount, Color, Fill color, Size, Line color, Font, Font size, Typeface +Selects the additional properties of the animation. Click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog, where you can select and apply properties. + + +Duration +Specifies the duration of the selected animation effect. + +Delay +The animation starts delayed by this amount of time. + +Automatic preview +Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide while you assign them. + +Play +Plays the selected animation effect in the preview. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2aa0c0bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + +Interaction +/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp + + + +interactions; objects in interactive presentations +programs run by mouse click in presentations +running macros/programs in presentations +macros; running in presentations +presentations;exiting by interaction +exiting;by clicking objects +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry + + + +
+

Interaction

+Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show.UFI: Deleted many paras, see #60550 +
+
+ +
+ +

Action at mouse click

+Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show. You can also assign actions to grouped objects. +

No action

+No action occurs. +

Go to previous slide

+Moves back one slide in the slide show. +

Go to next slide

+Moves forward one slide in the slide show. +

Go to first slide

+Jumps to the first slide in the slide show. +

Go to last slide

+Jumps to the last slide in the slide show. +

Go to page or object

+Jumps to a slide or a named object in a slide. +

Target

+Lists the slides and the objects that you can target. +

Slide / Object

+Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for. +

Find

+Searches for the specified slide or object. +

Go to document

+Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open. +

Document

+Define the location of the target document. +

Document

+Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. +

Browse

+Locate the file you want to open. +

Play audio

+Plays an audio file. +

Audio

+Define the location of the audio file. +

Audio

+Enter a path to the audio file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. +

Browse

+Locate the audio file you want to play. +If you did not install audio files with $[officename], you can run the $[officename] Setup program again and select Modify. +

Play

+Plays the selected audio file. +

Run program

+Starts a program during a slide show. +

Program

+

Program

+Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program. +

Browse

+Locate the program you want to start. +

Run macro

+Runs a macro during the slide show. +

Macro

+

Macro

+Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro. +

Browse

+Locate the macro you want to run. +

Exit presentation

+Ends the presentation. +

Start object action

+You can choose the "Start object action" entry for inserted OLE objects. +

Edit

+Opens the object in edit mode. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c34eca1ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + Slide Show Settings + /text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp + + + + + + + presentations; settings for + slide shows; settings for + presentations; window / full screen + multiple displays + + + + + + +

Slide Show Settings

+Defines settings for your slide show, including which slide to start from, the way you advance the slides, the type of presentation, and pointer options. + +
+ +
+ +

Range

+Specifies which slides to include in the slide show. + + +

All slides

+Includes all of the slides in your slide show. + + + +

From:

+Enter the number of the start slide. + + + +

Custom Slide Show

+Runs a custom slide show in the order that you defined in Slide Show - Custom Slide Show. + +

Presentation Mode

+Select the slide show type. + + +

Full screen

+A full screen slide is shown. + + +

In a window

+Slide show runs in the $[officename] program window. + + +

Loop and repeat after

+Restarts the slide show after the pause interval you specify. A pause slide is displayed between the final slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key to stop the show. + + +

Duration of pause

+Enter the duration of the pause before the slide show is repeated. If you enter zero, the show restarts immediately without showing a pause slide. + + +

Show logo

+Displays the $[officename] logo on the pause slide. The logo cannot be exchanged. + +

Options

+ + +

Change slides manually

+Slides never change automatically when this box is selected. + + +

Mouse pointer visible

+Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show. + + +

Mouse pointer as pen

+Changes the mouse pointer to a pen which you can use to draw on slides during the presentation. +Anything you write with the pen will appear in your slides after exiting the slideshow. The properties of the pen can be changed by choosing the Pen Width or Change pen Color command in the context menu of the running slide show. + + +

Animations allowed

+Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show. If this option is not selected, only the first frame of an animated GIF file is displayed.see #i63884 + + +

Change slides by clicking on background

+Advances to the next slide when you click on the background of a slide. + + +

Presentation always on top

+The $[officename] window remains on top during the presentation. No other program will show its window in front of your presentation. + +

Multiple Displays

+By default the primary display is used for slide show mode. If the current desktop is displayed on more than one display, you can select which display to use for full screen slide show mode. If the current desktop spans only one display, or if the multi display feature is not supported on the current system, you cannot select another display. + + +

Presentation display

+Select a display to use for full screen slide show mode. +If the system allows the user to span a window over all available displays, you can also select "All displays". In this case the presentation is spanned over all available displays. +This setting is saved in the user configuration and not inside the document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eda46db91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Custom Slide Shows + /text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp + + + + + + +

Custom Slide Shows

+ Defines a custom slide show using slides within the current presentation. You can then pick slides to meet the needs of your audience. You can create as many custom slide shows as you want. + +
+ +
+ + + Read the help page Creating a Custom Slide Show to learn more about how to set up your own custom slide shows. +

List of custom slide shows

+ Lists the custom slide shows that are available in the document. + + To create a custom slide show, click New. +

To run a custom slide show:

+ + + Select a custom slide show from the list. + + + Click Start. + + + +

New

+ + +

Edit

+ Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show. + + +

Copy

+ Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit. + +

Start

+ Runs the selected custom slide show. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8dc7f3b3a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Define Custom Slide Show +/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Define Custom Slide Show

+ Creates a custom slide show.called from 06100000, so do not delete avis/aend!!! +
+ +
+ + + Select a slide and click >> or << to add or remove the slide from the list. + Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button. + Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button. +

Name

+ Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name. +

Existing slides

+ Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document. +

Selected slides

+ Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f956fecf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Convert +/text/simpress/01/13050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Convert + Options for converting the selected object. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd7ec4bd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Curve +/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +To Curve +Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8537138e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Polygon +/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +To Polygon +Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines). The appearance of the object does not change. If you want, you can right-click and choose Edit Points to view the changes. +
+
+ +
+ +Convert to Polygon +The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. +Settings +Set the conversion options for the image. + +Number of colors: +Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. + +Point reduction +Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter. + +Fill holes +Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction. + +Tile size +Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. +Source image: +Preview of the original image. +Vectorized image: +Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. +Progress +Displays the conversion progress. + +Preview +Previews the converted image without applying the changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68e6ebf4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Convert to 3D +/text/simpress/01/13050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Convert to 3D +Converts the selected object to a three-dimensional (3D) object. +
+
+ +
+ +The selected object is first converted to a contour, and then to a 3D object. + +If you select two or more objects and convert them to 3D, the result is a 3D group that acts as a single object. You can edit the individual objects in the group by choosing +Shape - Group - Enter Group + +Format - Group - Enter Group. Choose +Shape - Group - Exit Group + +Format - Group - Exit Group when you are finished. +Converting a group of objects to 3D does not change the stacking order of the individual objects. +Press F3 to quickly enter a group and CommandCtrl+F3 to leave the group. +You can also convert bitmap images and vector graphics, including clipart, to 3D objects. $[officename] treats bitmaps as rectangles and vector graphics as a group of polygons when converting to 3D. +Even drawing objects that contain text can be converted. +If you want, you can also apply a 3D Effect to the converted object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30175485d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Convert to 3D Rotation Object +/text/simpress/01/13050400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Convert to 3D Rotation Object +Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..efb6a56f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Bitmap +/text/simpress/01/13050500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+converting; to bitmaps +bitmaps; converting to + + +To Bitmap +Converts the selected object to a bitmap (a grid of pixels that represents an image). +
+For more information, see the Glossary. +
+ +
+You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select the bitmap format from the list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..56bdd8838 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +To metafile +/text/simpress/01/13050600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+converting; to metafile format (WMF) +metafiles; converting to + + +To metafile +Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap and vector graphic data. +
+For more information on WMF, see the Glossary. +
+ +
+You can also copy the selected object and choose Edit - Paste Special and select MetaFile from the list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..501e9ce74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Contour +/text/simpress/01/13050700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+converting; to contours +contours; converting to + + +To Contour +Converts the selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons. If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, when you convert a text object), then press F3 to enter the group before you can select an individual polygon. +
+
+ +
+Once you convert a line or a text object to a contour, you can no longer edit it as you normally would. Instead, you can edit the contour as you would any polygon, including using the Edit – Points command to adjust its shape. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bbe6367a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combine +/text/simpress/01/13140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Combine +Combines two or more selected objects into a single shape. Unlike grouping, a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. You can split apart combined objects, but the original object properties are lost. +
+When you combine objects, the drawing elements are replaced by Bézier curves and holes appear where the objects overlap. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3aed627a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Split +/text/simpress/01/13150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+combining; undoing +splitting; combinations + + +Split +Splits a combined object into individual objects. The resulting objects have the same line and fill properties as the combined object. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fee673941 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Connect +/text/simpress/01/13160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Connect + Creates a line or Bézier curve by connecting two or more lines, Bézier curves, or other objects with a line. Closed objects containing a fill are converted to lines and lose their fill. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..886965ed8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Break +/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; breaking connections +breaking object connections + + +Break +Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command. +
+You cannot apply a fill to closed shapes that have been broken apart with this command. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf73f92a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shapes +/text/simpress/01/13180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Shapes + Creates a shape from two or more selected objects. +
+
+ +
+ Shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0858919a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merge +/text/simpress/01/13180100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Merge + Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the selection. This command is best used with overlapping objects. +
+
+ +
+ Any spaces that are visible between the objects are preserved. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82640fe67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Subtract +/text/simpress/01/13180200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Subtract + Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object. +
+
+ +
+ Any spaces between the objects are preserved. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f60c98f9e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Intersect +/text/simpress/01/13180300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Intersect + Creates a shape from the overlapping area of the selected objects. +
+
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5a9b57a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Bullet and Position + /text/simpress/01/bulletandposition.xhp + + + + +
+ + + +bullets;Impress +ordered list;Impress +unordered list;Impress +bullets;Draw +ordered list;Draw +unordered list;Draw + + +

Bullet and Position

+ +
+ +
+In a selected text, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. +
+ + +

Properties

+

Type

+Select the type of list. Unordered with character bullet, unordered with graphics bullet, or ordered with a numbering scheme of your choice. +

Character

+Select the character for the unordered list. +

Start at

+For ordered lists, select the value of first item of the list. +

Color

+Select the color of the list characters for ordered and unordered lists. Color does not apply for lists with graphic bullets. +

Separator

+For ordered lists, set the text to display before and after the numbering scheme. +

Before

+Enter the text to display before the numbering. +

After

+Enter the text to display after the numbering. +

Size

+Set the size of the character and graphic bullets with respect to the paragraph font size. +

Width

+Enter the width of the graphic bullet character. +

Height

+Enter the height of the graphic bullet character. +

Keep ratio

+Check this box to preserve the height to width ratio of the graphic bullet. +

Rel. Size

+For character unordered and ordered lists, set the relative size of the list character. The relative size applies to the Before and After text as well. +

Position

+

Indent

+Enter the distance from the left edge of the containing object to the start of all lines in the list. +

Width

+Enter or select the width of the list element. +The combined total length of Before, After and the numbering characters may override the width setting. +

Relative

+Relative to the upper list level. The entered value is added to that of this field in the level before. If “Indent: 20mm” on list level 1 and “Indent: 10mm Relative” on list level 2 will result in an effective indent of 30mm for level 2. + +

Alignment

+Select the alignment of the ordered list numbering contents inside the list Width setting. + +

Scope

+

SlidePage +

+Applies the modification to the whole slidepage. +

Selection

+Applies the modification to the selection. +

Apply to Master

+Click to apply the modification to all slidespages that use the current master slidepage. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef278d8c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Effect Options +/text/simpress/01/effectoptions.xhp + + + +Effect Options +Specifies additional properties for the selected element in the Custom Animations pane. +Assign an effect to an object, then click the Options button to open the Effect Options dialog. +The dialog contains the following tab pages: + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1b35cbdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + +Effect +/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp + + + + + +

Effect +

+Specifies the settings and enhancements for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. +

Settings

+For some effects, the settings can be specified on the Effect tab page. +

Direction

+Specifies the direction for the effect. +

Accelerated start

+Enable this option to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect. +

Decelerated end

+Enable this option to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect. +

Enhancements

+Specifies the enhancements for the current effect. + + +

Sound

+Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries. + + + +No sound - no sound is played during animation of the effect. + + + +Stop previous sound - the sound of the previous effect is stopped as soon as the current effect runs. + + + +Other sound - displays a file open dialog to select a sound file. + + +

Sound button

+Plays the selected sound file. + +

After animation

+Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list: + + + +Dim with color - after the animation a dim color fills the shape. + + + +Don't dim - no after-effect runs. + + + +Hide after animation - hides the shape after the animation ends. + + + +Hide on next animation - hides the shape on the next animation. + + +

Dim color

+Select the dim color. +

Text animation

+Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape: + + + +All at once - animates the text all at once. + + + +Word by word - animates the text word by word. + + + +Letter by letter - animates the text letter by letter. + + +

Delay between characters

+Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0417527f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + +Text Animation +/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp + + +UFI: Effect Options, tab page Text Animation + + + + + +

Text Animation +

+Specifies the text animation settings for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. + + +

Group text

+Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated: + + + +As one object - all paragraphs are animated as one object. + + + +All paragraphs at once - all paragraphs are animated at once, but can have different effects. + + + +By 1st level paragraphs - the first level paragraphs, including sub-level paragraphs, are animated one after another. + + + +

Automatically after

+If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other. + +Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs. + +

Animate attached shape

+Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape. + +

In reverse order

+Animates the paragraphs in reverse order. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe46409e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Timing +/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp + + + + + +

Timing

+Specifies the timing for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. + + +

Start

+Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: + + + +On click - the animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click. + + + +With previous - the animation runs immediately. + + + +After previous - the animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends. + + +

Delay

+Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts. +

Duration

+Specifies the duration of the effect. +

Repeat

+Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or select from the list: + + + +(none) - the effect is not repeated. + + + +Until next click - the animation is repeated until the next mouse click. + + + +Until end of slide - the animation repeats as long as the slide is displayed. + + +

Rewind when done playing

+Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends. +

Animate as part of click sequence

+Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence. +

Start effect on click of

+Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. +Select the shape by its name from the list box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82f8e28d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +New Slide +/text/simpress/01/new_slide.xhp + + + +inserting; slides +slides; inserting + + +
+ New Slide + Inserts a slide after the currently selected slide. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..895da9e36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Impress Remote Connections + /text/simpress/01/remoteconnections.xhp + + + + +Impress Remote;remote connection dialog +presentation;remote control connections + +
+ + + Remote Connections + List all Impress Remote available connections. +
+
+ Initially, mark the Enable remote control checkbox in + %PRODUCTNAME – Preferences + Tools – Options + – %PRODUCTNAME Impress – General. + Select menu Slide Show - Impress Remote. +
+ Remote connection setup + To activate the remote connection: + + + Open the Impress Remote application in the mobile device. + + + Open the Remote Connection dialog, + + + Select the device in the list, + + + Enter the PIN number displayed by the device and press Connect to authorize a connection. + + + The device and the computer are now connected, the current presentation enters in Presentation Mode immediately, controlled by the mobile device. + To disconnect from a mobile device + + + Open the Remote Connection dialog, + + + Select the device in the list, + + + Click Remove Client Authorization. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de4ef1daa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + Slide Properties + /text/simpress/01/slide_properties.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ Slide Properties + Sets slide orientation, slide margins, background and other layout options. +
+
+ +
+ + + + To change the background of all of the slides in the active file, select a background, click OK and click Yes in the Page Setup dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9931f5ede --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +Page/Slide Pane +/text/simpress/01/slidesorter.xhp + + +UFI: Slide Sorter Panel in Impress and Draw + + + +
+ + +

Page Slide Pane

+Switches the Page Slide Pane on and off. +
+You can use the Page Slide Pane to add, to rename, to delete, and to arrange slides or pages in Impress and Draw. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74ada0301 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Show/Hide Slide +/text/simpress/02/04010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Show/Hide SlideUFI: menu and icon +Hides the selected slide so that it is not displayed during a slide show. +
+The number of a hidden slide is crossed out. To show a hidden slide, choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide again. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Show/Hide Slide + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09bfaedde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Slides Per Row +/text/simpress/02/04020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Slides Per Row +Enter the number of slides to display on each row in the Slide Sorter. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45a626e1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Slide Effects +/text/simpress/02/04030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Slide Effects +Select the transition effect that appears before the current slide is shown. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebeddc7aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Time +/text/simpress/02/04060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Time +Enter the amount of time before the slide show automatically advances to the next slide. This option is only available for automatic transition. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e5312f90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Rehearse Timings +/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Rehearse Timings +Starts a slide show with a timer in the lower left corner. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Rehearse Timings + + +
+ +
+ + +Slide Show Settings + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c5566dd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Current Size +/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp + + + +
+ +Current Size +Displays the X and Y position of the cursor and the size of the selected object. +
+This Status bar field uses the same measurement units as the rulers. You can define the units by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b0d1e4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Current Slide/Level +/text/simpress/02/08060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Current Slide/Level + Displays the current slide number followed by the total number of slides. +
+ In Layer Mode, the name of the layer containing the selected object is displayed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53d5955d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom +/text/simpress/02/10020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+increasing sizes of views +views; display sizes +decreasing sizes of views +zooming; in presentations +views; shift function +hand icon for moving slides + + +Zoom +Reduces or enlarges the screen display of the current document. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Zoom toolbar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom ($[officename] Impress in Outline and Slide View) + + +
+ +
+ +Zoom In +Displays the slide at two times its current size. +You can also select the Zoom In tool and drag a rectangular frame around the area you want to enlarge. + + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom In + + +
+ + +Zoom Out +Displays the slide at half its current size. + + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom Out + + +
+ + +Zoom 100% +Displays the slide at its actual size. + + + + +Icon + + + +Zoom 100% + + +
+ + +Previous Zoom +Returns the display of the slide to the previous zoom factor you applied. You can also press Command +Ctrl+Comma(,). + + + + +Icon + + + +Previous Zoom + + +
+ + +Next Zoom +Undoes the action of the Previous Zoom command. You can also press Command +Ctrl+Period(.). + + + + +Icon + + + +Next Zoom + + +
+ + +Entire Page +Displays the entire slide on your screen. + + + + +Icon + + + +Entire Page + + +
+ + +Page Width +Displays the complete width of the slide. The top and bottom edges of the slide may not be visible. + + + + +Icon + + + +Page Width + + +
+ + +Optimal View +Resizes the display to include all of the objects on the slide. + + + + +Icon + + + +Optimal View + + +
+ + +Object Zoom +Resizes the display to fit the object(s) you selected. + + + + +Icon + + + +Object Zoom + + +
+ + +Shift +Moves the slide within the $[officename] window. Place the pointer on the slide, and drag to move the slide. When you release the mouse, the last tool you used is selected. + + + + +Icon + + + +Shift + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad9ff692d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ + + + + + +Transformations +/text/simpress/02/10030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +flipping around a flip line +mirroring objects +3D rotation objects; converting to +slanting objects +objects; effects +distorting objects +shearing objects +transparency; of objects +gradients; transparent +colors; defining gradients interactively +gradients; defining colors +circles; of objects +mw made "slanting;..." a one level entry + +
+

Transformations

+Modifies the shape, orientation or fill of the selected object(s). +
+ +
+ Choose View - Toolbars - Transformations. + + + Click the arrow next to the Transformations icon on the Standard bar. + + + + + Icon Transformations + + + Transformations + + +
+ + +
+ +

Rotate

+Rotates or skews the selected 2D object(s) around a pivot point. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it. To skew an object, drag a center handle in the direction you want to skew it. +Each slide has only one pivot point. Double-click an object to move the pivot point to the center of the object. You can also drag the pivot point to a new location on the screen, and then rotate the object. +If you select a group that includes a 3D object, only the 3D object is rotated. You cannot skew a 3D object, instead, you can rotate it about the X and Y axes by dragging the center handles. +
+ + + + +Icon Rotate + + + +Rotate + + +
+ +
+ +

Flip

+Flips the selected object(s) around a flip line, that you can drag to anywhere on the slide. Drag a handle of the object(s) across the flip line to flip the object(s). To change the orientation of the flip line, drag one of its end points to new location. + + + + +Icon Flip + + +Flip + + +
+ + +

In 3D Rotation Object

+Converts the selected 2D object(s) to a 3D object, by rotating the object(s) around a symmetry line. +Drag the symmetry line to a new location to change the shape of the converted object. To change the orientation of the symmetry line, drag one of its end points. Click the object to convert it to 3D. + + + + +Icon In 3D rotation object + + +In 3D Rotation Object + + +
+ + +

Set in circle (perspective)

+Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles, and then adding perspective. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. + + + + +Icon Set in circle + + +Set in circle (perspective) + + +
+ + +

Set to circle (slant)

+Distorts the selected object by wrapping it around imaginary circles. Drag a handle of the selected object to distort it. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. + + + + +Icon Set to circle + + +Set to circle (slant) + + +
+ + +

Distort

+Lets you drag the handles of the selected object to change its shape. If the selected object is not a polygon or Bézier curve, you are prompted to change the object to a curve before you can distort it. + + + + +Icon Distort + + +Distort + + +
+ + +

Transparency

+Applies a transparency gradient to the selected object. The transparency line represents a grayscale, with the black handle corresponding to 0% transparency and the white handle to 100% transparency. +Drag the white handle to change the direction of the transparency gradient. Drag the black handle to change the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change their grayscale values. +To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. + + + + +Icon Transparency + + +Transparency + + +
+ + +

Gradient

+Modifies the gradient fill of the selected object. This command is only available if you applied a gradient to the selected object in Format - Area. Drag the handles of the gradient line to change the direction of the gradient or the length of the gradient. You can also drag and drop colors onto the handles from the Color Bar to change the color of the gradient endpoints. +To display the Color Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar. + + + + +Icon Gradient + + +Gradient + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51ff30e34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + + +Gluepoints Bar +/text/simpress/02/10030200.xhp + + + +object bars; editing gluepoints + +Gluepoints Bar + +Insert or modify the properties of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a point where you can attach a connector line. By default, %PRODUCTNAME automatically places a gluepoint at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle for every object you create. +
+ +
+ + +Insert Gluepoint +Inserts a gluepoint where you click in an object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Point + + +
+ + +Exit Direction Left +Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint. + + + + +Icon + + + +Exit Direction Left + + +
+ + +Exit Direction Top +Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint. + + + + +Icon + + + +Exit Direction Top + + +
+ + +Exit Direction Right +Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint. + + + + +Icon + + + +Exit Direction Right + + +
+ + +Exit Direction Bottom +Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint. + + + + +Icon + + + +Exit Direction Bottom + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Relative +Maintains the relative position of a selected gluepoint when you resize an object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Relative + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Horizontal Left +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the left edge of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Horizontal Left + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Horizontal Center +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the center of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Horizontal Center + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Horizontal Right +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the right edge of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Horizontal Right + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Vertical Top +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the top edge of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Vertical Top + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Vertical Center +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the vertical center of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Vertical Center + + +
+ + +Gluepoint Vertical Bottom +When the object is resized, the current gluepoint remains fixed to the bottom edge of the object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Gluepoint Vertical Bottom + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd279bb1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Text +/text/simpress/02/10050000.xhp + + + +
+text; toolbar +floating text +callouts; inserting in presentations +inserting; callouts in presentations + + +Text +The Text toolbar contains some icons to enter different types of text boxes. +
+ +Text +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Text + + +
+
+ +Fit Text to Frame +Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the text box. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Fit Text to Frame + + +
+Callouts +Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout from where you drag in the current document. The text direction is horizontal. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Callouts + + +
+ + + + +Fit Vertical Text to Frame +Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. The text that you enter is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of the box. (Enable Asian text support to enable this icon). Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a box, and then type or paste your text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Fit Vertical Text to Frame + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce1290faf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rectangles +/text/simpress/02/10060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +rectangles +forms; inserting +geometric forms +inserting;rectangles +mw added "inserting;..." and made "rectangles;..." a one level entry + +Rectangles +Using Customize Toolbar, you can add the Legacy Rectangles toolbar. + +Rectangle +Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rectangle + + +
+ + +Square +Draws a filled square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Square + + +
+ + +Rounded Rectangle +Draws a rounded rectangle with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rounded Rectangle + + +
+ + +Rounded Square +Draws a rounded square with a fill where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rounded Square + + +
+ + +Rectangle, Unfilled +Draws an empty rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rectangle, Unfilled + + +
+ + +Square, Unfilled +Draws an empty square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Square, Unfilled + + +
+ + +Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled +Draws an empty rounded rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rounded Square, Unfilled + + +
+ + +Rounded Square, Unfilled +Draws an empty rounded square where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rounded square, and drag to the size you want. To draw a rounded rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rounded Square, Unfilled + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae6b4fcd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,249 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Ellipse +/text/simpress/02/10070000.xhp + + + +toolbars;ellipses +ellipses; toolbars + +
+inserting; ellipses + + +Ellipse +Using Customize Toolbar, you can add the Ellipse icon which opens the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar.i60204 +
+Ellipse +Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse + + +
+ +Circle +Draws a filled circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle + + +
+Ellipse Pie +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse Pie + + +
+ +Circle Pie +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle pie + + +
+ +Ellipse Segment +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse segment + + +
+Circle Segment +Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle segment + + +
+ +Ellipse, Unfilled +Draws an empty oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse, Unfilled + + +
+ +Circle, Unfilled +Draws an empty circle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the circle, and drag to the size you want. To draw an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle, Unfilled + + +
+ +Ellipse Pie, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse Pie, Unfilled + + +
+ +Circle Pie, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and two radius lines in the current document. To draw a circle pie, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle Pie, Unfilled + + +
+ +Ellipse Segment, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and a diameter line in the current document. To draw an ellipse segment, drag an ellipse to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the ellipse. To draw a circle segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse Segment, Unfilled + + +
+ +Circle Segment, Unfilled +Draws an empty shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw a segment that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle Segment, Unfilled + + +
+Arc +Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Arc + + +
+ +Circle Arc +Draws an arc that is based on a circle in the current document. To draw an arc, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an arc that is based on an ellipse, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle Arc + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe48a8e97 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + +Curve +/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +toolbars;curves +curves; toolbar +polygons; inserting +inserting; polygons +freeform lines; drawing +drawing; freeform lines + + +
+ +Curve +The Curve icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar, where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide. +
+If you hold the Shift key down, the movement of the mouse is limited to multiples of 45 degrees. If you hold down the OptionsAlt key, the new point will not be connected to the last point. This allows you to create objects that consist of curves that are not connected together. If you draw a smaller object while holding down the OptionAlt key into a larger object that you have not closed yet, the smaller object is subtracted from the larger one, thus appearing as a hole in the larger one. +Closed shapes automatically receive the fill that is displayed in the Area Style/Filling box on Line and Filling bar. + +Curve, Filled +Draws a filled closed shape that is based on a Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to close the shape. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curve, Filled + + +
+ + +Polygon, filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon, Filled + + +
+ + +Polygon (45°), Filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments that are constrained by angles of 45 degrees. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To draw a polygon that is not constrained to a 45 degree angle, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon (45°), Filled + + +
+ + +Freeform Line, Filled +Draws a freeform line where you drag in the slide. When you release, $[officename] creates a closed shape by drawing a straight line segment from the endpoint to the starting point of the line. The shape within the lines will be filled with the current area color. + + + + +Icon + + + +Freeform Line, Filled + + +
+ +Curve + + + + + +Icon + + + +Curve + + +
+ +Polygon + + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon + + +
+ + +Polygon (45°) +Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments, that are constrained by angles of 45 degree. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, hold down OptionAlt and double-click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon (45°) + + +
+ +Freeform Line + + + + + +Icon + + + +Freeform Line + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37ce7df75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + + +3D Objects +/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp + + + +toolbars;3D objects +3D objects; inserting +inserting;3D objects +cubes +spheres +cylinders +cones +pyramids +torus +shells +half-spheres +drawing;3D objects + + +
+ +3D Objects +Opens the 3D Objects toolbar. The objects are three dimensional, with depth, illumination, and reflection. Each inserted object initially forms a 3D scene. You can press F3 to enter the scene. For these 3D objects, you can open the 3D Effects dialog to edit the properties. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +3D Objects + + +
+ +
+To rotate a 3D object around any of its three axes, click to select the object, and then click again to display its rotation handles. Drag a handle in the direction you want to rotate the object. + +Cube +Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Cube + + +
+ + +Sphere +Draws a filled sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Sphere + + +
+ + +Cylinder +Draws a cylinder that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cylinder that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Cylinder + + +
+ + +Cone +Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Cone + + +
+ + +Pyramid +Draws a pyramid with a square base where you drag in the slide. To draw a pyramid with a rectangular base, hold down Shift while you drag. To define a different polygon for the base of the pyramid, open the 3D Effects dialog and click the Geometry tab. In the Segments area, enter the number of sides for the polygon in the box labeled Horizontal, and then click the green checkmark. + + + + +Icon + + + +Pyramid + + +
+ + +Torus +Draws a ring-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a torus that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Torus + + +
+ + +Shell +Draws a bowl-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a shell that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Shell + + +
+ + +Half-Sphere +Draws one half of a sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a one half of a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Half-sphere + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc5d70600 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,518 @@ + + + + + + + + +Connectors +/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp + + + +
+ +Connectors + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector + + +
+ +Open the Connectors toolbar, where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide. A connector is a line that joins objects, and remains attached when the objects are moved. If you copy an object with a connector, the connector is also copied. +
+There are four types of connector lines: + + +Standard (90-degree angle bends) + + +Line (two bends) + + +Straight + + +Curved + + + +When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object, or the edge of an unfilled object, gluepoints appear. A gluepoint is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line. You can add custom gluepoints to an object. +To draw a connector line, click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click. The unattached end of the connector is locked in place, until you drag the end to a different location. To detach a connector, drag either end of the connector line to a different location. + +Connector +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector + + +
+ + +Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector Starts with Arrow + + +
+ + +Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector Ends with Arrow + + +
+ + +Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector with Arrows + + +
+ + +Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector Starts with Circle + + +
+ + +Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector Ends with Circle + + +
+ + +Connector with Circles +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Connector with Circles + + +
+ + +Line Connector +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector + + +
+ + +Line Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector that starts with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector Starts with Arrow + + +
+ + +Line Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector that ends with an arrow and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector Ends with Arrow + + +
+ + +Line Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector with Arrows + + +
+ + +Line Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector that starts with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector Starts with Circle + + +
+ + +Line Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector that ends with a circle and bends near a gluepoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector Ends with Circle + + +
+ + +Line Connector with Circles +Draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint and has circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag the bend point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Connector with Circles + + +
+ + +Straight Connector +Draws a straight line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector + + +
+ + +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow + + +
+ + +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow + + +
+ + +Straight Connector with Arrows +Draws a straight line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector with Arrows + + +
+ + +Straight Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector Starts with Circle + + +
+ + +Straight Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector Ends with Circle + + +
+ + +Straight Connector with Circles +Draws a straight line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Straight Connector with Circles + + +
+ + +Curved Connector +Draws a curved line connector. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector + + +
+ + +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow + + +
+ + +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow + + +
+ + +Curved Connector with Arrows +Draws a curved line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector with Arrows + + +
+ + +Curved Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector Starts with Circle + + +
+ + +Curved Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector Ends with Circle + + +
+ + +Curved Connector with Circles +Draws a curved line connector with circles at both ends. Click a gluepoint on an object, drag to a gluepoint on another object, and then release. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curved Connector with Circles + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c36f287b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + +Insert +/text/simpress/02/10110000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Insert

+
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert + + +
+
+Open the Insert toolbar, where you can add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document. +

Slide

+ + +

Floating Frame

+ + + + + + +

Spreadsheet

+ + +

From File

+ + + + +

Formula

+ + +

Chart

+ +

OLE Object

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c34eb8b46 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Arrows +/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp + + + +lines;inserting +arrows; inserting +inserting; lines +inserting; arrows +dimension lines; drawing + + +Arrows +Open the Arrows toolbar, where you can add straight lines, lines with arrows, and dimension lines to the current slide or page. +If you want, you can add an arrow after you draw a line by choosing Format - Line, and then selecting an arrow style from the Style box. +Line +Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line + + +
+ +Line Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Ends with Arrow + + +
+ +Line with Arrow/Circle +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a circle where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line with Arrow/Circle + + +
+ +Line with Arrow/Square +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a square where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line with Arrow/Square + + +
+ +Line (45°) +Draws a straight line that is constrained by angles of 45 degrees. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line (45°) + + +
+ +Line Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line Starts with Arrow + + +
+ +Line with Circle/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a circle and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line with Circle/Arrow + + +
+ +Line with Square/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line with Square/Arrow + + +
+ +Dimension Line +Draws a line that displays the dimension length bounded by guides. Dimension lines automatically calculate and display linear dimensions. To draw a dimension line, open the Arrows toolbar, and click the Dimension Line icon. Move your pointer to where you want the line to start and drag to draw the dimension line. Release when finished. +If you want the dimension line to be the same length as the side of a nearby object, hold down the Command +Ctrl key while dragging. To constrain the dimension line to 45 degrees, hold down the Shift key while dragging. +In %PRODUCTNAME Draw, a dimension line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any dimension line in your drawing. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Dimension Line + + +
+
+ +Line with Arrows +Draws a straight line with arrows at both ends where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Line with Arrows + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a93fa2b4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Show Only First Level +/text/simpress/02/11060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ levels; hidinghiding; levels + +

Show Only First Level

+ Hides all of the headings of the slides in the current slide show except for the titles of the slides. Hidden headings are indicated by a black line in front of a slide title. To show the headings, click the Show All Levels icon. +
+
+ + + + Icon Show Only First Level + + + Show Only First Level + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9a8bd73e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Show All Levels +/text/simpress/02/11070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ levels; showingshowing; levels + +

Show All Levels

+ Displays the hidden headings of the slides in the current slide show. To hide all of the headings in the current slide show, except for the slide titles, click the Show Only First Level icon. +
+
+ + + + Icon Show All Levels + + + Show All Levels + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9510d0ad3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Hide Subpoints +/text/simpress/02/11080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ subpoints; hidinghiding; subpoints + +

Hide Subpoints

+ Hides the subheadings of a selected heading. Hidden subheadings are indicated by a black line in front of a heading. To show the lower level headings, click the Show Subpoints icon. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Hide Subpoints + + + Hide Subpoints + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48aacc42b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Show Subpoints +/text/simpress/02/11090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ subpoints; showingshowing; subpoints + +

Show Subpoints

+ Displays the hidden subheadings of a selected heading. To hide the subheadings of a selected heading, click Hide Subpoints icon. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Show Subpoints + + + Show Subpoints + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d76c0321 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Show Formatting +/text/simpress/02/11100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+formatting;slides headings + + +

Show Formatting

+Shows or hides the character formatting of the slide headings. To change the character formatting of a heading, open the Styles window, right-click a style, and then choose Modify. +
+
+ + + + +Show Formatting Icon + + + +Show Formatting + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1999e436 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Black and White +/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+views; black and white +black and white view + + +

Black and White

+Shows your slides in black and white only. +
+
+ + + + +Black and White Icon + + +Black and White + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14fe29037 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Gluepoints +/text/simpress/02/13010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Gluepoints

+ Insert or modify the properties of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a custom connection point where you can attach a connector line. + + + + + + + Icon Glue Points + + + Show Gluepoints Functions + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a12f0394 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+rotation mode + + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that rotation handles appear after you click an object, and then click it again. Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e99ab972d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Allow Effects +/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +allowing; effects +effects; preview + + +Allow Effects +Plays a preview of an animation effect that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Allow Effects + + +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8295ae434 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Allow Interaction +/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +interactions; preview +allowing; interaction + + +Allow Interaction +Runs a preview of the interaction that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionAlt key when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Allow Interaction + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc3f7d9f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Show Snap Lines +/text/simpress/02/13050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+guides; show snap lines icon +showing; guides + + +Show Snap Lines +Shows or hides snap lines so can you align objects on your slide. To remove a snap line, drag it off the slide. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Show Snap Lines + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88a86a1c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Double-Click to add Text +/text/simpress/02/13060000.xhp + + + +
+text; double-clicking to edit + + + +Double-Click to add Text +Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that you can double-click an object to add or edit text. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Double-click to add Text + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bced333af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify Object with Attributes + /text/simpress/02/13090000.xhp + + + +
+attributes; objects with + objects; with attributes + + +Modify Object with Attributes + If this icon on the Options bar is activated, objects are shown with their attributes, but with 50% transparency, while you move or draw them. If this icon is not activated, only a contour is shown while drawing, and the object is shown with all attributes when you release the mouse button. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Modify Object with Attributes + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29503e686 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Exit all Groups +/text/simpress/02/13100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Exit all Groups

+ Exits all groups and returns to normal view. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Exit all groups + + + Exit all groups + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..526fa788e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Snap to Snap Guides +/text/simpress/02/13140000.xhp + + + +

Snap to Snap Guides

+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Snap to Snap Guides + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee378dda4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Snap to Page Margins +/text/simpress/02/13150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Snap to Page Margins

+ + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Snap to Page Margins + + + Snap to Page Margins + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..597aaa8f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Snap to Object Border +/text/simpress/02/13160000.xhp + + + +

Snap to Object Border

+ + +
+ + + + Icon Snap to Object Border + + + Snap to Object Border + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ae8f4964 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Snap to Object Points +/text/simpress/02/13170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Snap to Object Points

+ + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Snap to Object Points + + + Snap to Object Points + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a4dde293 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Allow Quick Editing +/text/simpress/02/13180000.xhp + + + +

Allow Quick Editing

+ +
+ + + + Icon Allow Quick Editing + + + Allow Quick Editing + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8aee1a195 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Select Text Area Only +/text/simpress/02/13190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Select Text Area Only

+ + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Select Text Area Only + + + Select Text Area Only + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0005b06d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,865 @@ + + + + + + +Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress +/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys; in presentations +presentations; shortcut keys + +Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress + +The following is a list of shortcut keys for $[officename] Impress. +You can also use the general shortcut keys in $[officename]. + +
+Function Keys for $[officename] Impress + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +F2 + + +Edit text. + + + + +F3 + + +Enter Group. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+F3 + + +Exit Group. + + + + +Shift+F3 + + +Duplicate + + + + +F4 + + +Position and Size + + + + +F5 + + +View Slide Show. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+F5 + + +Navigator + + + + +F7 + + +Spelling + + + + +Command +Ctrl+F7 + + +Thesaurus + + + + +F8 + + +Edit Points. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + +Fit text to frame. + + + + +Command+TF11 + + +Styles + + +
+Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows + + + +Shortcut Keysall hlp_keycode are rendered as bold in a table -> don't use + + + +Effect + + + + + + Esc + + +End presentation. + + + + + Spacebar or Right arrow or Down arrow or Page Down or Enter or Return or N + + +Play next effect (if any, else go to next slide). + + + + +OptionAlt+Page Down + + +Go to next slide without playing effects. + + + + +[number] + Enter + + +Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide. + + + + + Left arrow or Up arrow or Page Up or Backspace or P + + +Play previous effect again. If no previous effect exists on this slide, show previous slide. + + + + +OptionAlt+Page Up + + +Go to the previous slide without playing effects. + + + + + Home + + +Jump to first slide in the slide show. + + + + + End + + +Jump to the last slide in the slide show. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ Page Up + + +Go to the previous slide. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ Page Down + + +Go to the next slide. + + + + +B or . + + +Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel event. + + + + +W or , + + +Show white screen until next key or mouse wheel event. + + +
+Shortcut Keys in the Normal View + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Plus(+) Key + + +Zoom in. + + + + +Minus(-) Key + + +Zoom out. + + + + +Times(×) Key (number pad) + + +Fit page in window. + + + + +Divide(÷) Key (number pad) + + +Zoom in on current selection. + + + + +Shift+Command +Ctrl+G + + +Group selected objects. + + + + +Shift+Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+A + + +Ungroup selected group. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ click + + +Enter a group, so that you can edit the individual objects of the group. Click outside the group to return to the normal view. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+K + + +Combine selected objects. + + + + +Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K + + +Split selected object. This combination only works on an object that was created by combining two or more objects. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ Plus key + + +Bring to Front. + + + + +Shift+Command +Ctrl+ Plus key + + +Bring Forward. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ Minus key + + +Send Backward. + + + + +Shift+Command +Ctrl+ Minus key + + +Send to Back. + + +
+Shortcut Keys when Editing Text + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Ctrl +Ctrl+Hyphen(-) + + +Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) + + +Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+Space + + +Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. + + + + +Shift+Enter + + +Line break without paragraph change + + + + +Arrow Left + + +Move cursor to left + + + + +Shift+Arrow Left + + +Move cursor with selection to the left + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Arrow Left + + +Go to beginning of word + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left + + +Selecting to the left word by word + + + + +Arrow Right + + +Move cursor to right + + + + +Shift+Arrow Right + + +Move cursor with selection to the right + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Arrow Right + + +Go to start of next word + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right + + +Selecting to the right word by word + + + + +Arrow Up + + +Move cursor up one line + + + + +Shift+Arrow Up + + +Selecting lines in an upwards direction + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Arrow Up + + +Move cursor to beginning of the previous paragraph + + + + +Arrow Down + + +Move cursor down one line + + + + +Shift+Arrow Down + + +Selecting lines in a downward direction + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Arrow Down + + +Move cursor to end of paragraph. Next keystroke move cursor to end of next paragraph + + + + +Command+Arrow LeftHome + + +Go to beginning of line + + + + +Command+Shift+Arrow LeftShift+Home + + +Go and select to the beginning of a line + + + + +Command+Arrow RightEnd + + +Go to end of line + + + + +Command+Shift+Arrow RightShift+End + + +Go and select to end of line + + + + +Command+Arrow Up +Ctrl+Home + + +Go to start of text block in slide + + + + +Command+Arrow Down +Ctrl+End + + +Go to end of text block in slide + + + + +Option+Fn+Backspace +Ctrl+Del + + +Delete text to end of word + + + + +Option +Ctrl+Backspace + + +Delete text to beginning of word +In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph + + + + +Command+Fn +Ctrl+Shift+Del + + +Delete text to end of sentence + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+Backspace + + +Delete text to beginning of sentence + + +
+

Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress

+ + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Arrow key + + +Moves the selected object or the page view in the direction of the arrow. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ Arrow Key + + +Move around in the page view. + + + + +Shift + drag + + +Constrains the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. + + + + +Command +Ctrl+ drag (with Copy when moving option active) + + +Hold down Command +Ctrl and drag an object to create a copy of the object. + + + + +OptionAlt Key + + +Hold down OptionAlt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward. + + + + +OptionAlt key+click + + +Select the object behind the currently selected object. + + + + +OptionAlt+Shift+click + + +Select the object in front of the currently selected object. + + + + +Shift+click + + +Select adjacent items or a text passage. Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of the selection, and then hold down Shift while you click. + + + + +Shift+drag (when resizing) + + +Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the proportions of the object. + + + + +Tab key + + +Select objects in the order in which they were created. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created. + + + + +Escape + + +Exit current mode. + + + + +Enter + + +Activate a placeholder object in a new presentation (only if the frame is selected). + + + + +Command +Ctrl+Enter + + +Moves to the next text object on the slide. +If there are no text objects on the slide, or if you reached the last text object, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. + + + + +PageUp + + +Switch to the previous slide. No function on the first slide. + + + + +PageDown + + +Switch to the next slide. No function on the last slide. + + +
+
+

Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter and Slide Pane

+ + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Home/End + + +Set the focus to the first/last slide. + + + + +Left/Right arrow keys or Page Up/Down + + +Set the focus to the next/previous slide. + + + + +Option +Alt+Shift+PageDown + + +Move selected slides down one position in Slide Sorter list. If you select multiple slides, they are moved together with the last selected slide in the list. + + + + +Option +Alt+Shift+PageUp + + +Move selected slides up one position. If you select multiple slides, they are moved together with the first selected slide in the list. + + + + +Option +Alt+Shift+End + + +Move selected slides to end of Slide Sorter list. + + + + +OptionAlt+Shift+Home + + +Move selected slides to start of Slide Sorter list. + + + + +Enter + + +Change to Normal Mode with the active slide when in Slide Sorter. Add a new slide when in Slide Pane. + + +
+
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ffc67f83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + Presenter Console Keyboard Shortcuts + /text/simpress/04/presenter.xhp + + + + +Presenter Console shortcuts + +Presenter Console Keyboard Shortcuts +
+ When running a slide show using the Presenter Console, you can use the following keys: + + + + Action + + + Key or Keys + + + + + Next slide, or next effect + + + Left click, right arrow, down arrow, spacebar, page down, enter, return, 'N' + + + + + Previous slide, or previous effect + + + Right click, left arrow, up arrow, page up, backspace, 'P' + + + + + First slide + + + Home + + + + + Last slide + + + End + + + + + Previous slide without effects + + + Alt+Page Up + + + + + Next slide without effects + + + Alt+Page Down + + + + + Black/Unblack the screen + + + 'B', '.' + + + + + White/Unwhite the screen + + + 'W', ',' + + + + + End slide show + + + Esc, '-' + + + + + Go to slide number + + + Number followed by Enter + + + + + Grow/Shrink size of notes font + + + 'G', 'S' + + + + + Scroll notes up/down + + + 'A', 'Z' + + + + + Move caret in notes view backward/forward + + + 'H', 'L' + + + + + Show the Presenter Console + + + Ctrl-'1' + + + + + Show the Presentation Notes + + + Ctrl-'2' + + + + + Show the Slides Overview + + + Ctrl-'3' + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60fbfa727 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + + Lists + /text/simpress/format_submenu_lists.xhp + + + +
+ +

Lists

+ For the selected paragraphs, adds numbering or bullets, edit the outline levels and move them up or down in the slide. +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..279c762fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects +/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp + + + +3D rotation objects; generating +3D objects; generating +3D scenes; creating +converting; to curves, polygons, 3D +extrusion objects +added 3D scenes, issue 109330 +Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects + +You can convert two-dimensional (2D) objects to create different shapes. $[officename] can convert 2D objects to the following object types: + + +Curved object based on Bézier curves + + +Polygon object consisting of straight line segments + + +3D object with shading and a light source + + +3D rotation object with shading and a light source + + + +Two types of 3D objects + + +The Status bar displays "3D scene selected". The 3D scenes are built from objects which have dimensions in x, y, and z coordinates. Examples are the objects inserted by the 3D Objects toolbar, and rectangles, ellipses, or text that got created by the Rectangle, Ellipse, or Text icons left on the Drawing toolbar, or any Custom Shapes, and that got converted to 3D by using the context menu "Convert - To 3D". These 3D scenes can be entered (for example, by pressing F3), and the objects can be rotated in 3D. Microsoft Office doesn't know these real 3D objects. When exporting these 3D scenes to Microsoft Office formats, a snapshot of the current view will be exported as a bitmap. 3D bars in charts are of this type, too. + + +The Status bar displays "Shape selected". The Custom Shapes can be viewed in a 2D mode or in a 3D mode. At any time, you can switch the view between the two modes. You use the Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, and the following icons on the Drawing toolbar to create Custom Shapes. The Custom Shapes can be changed using the 3D Settings toolbar. They do not form a 3D scene, they cannot be illuminated by more than one light source, they show no reflections, and there are some more limitations. You can convert them to a 3D scene, but then they are no longer Custom Shapes. Custom Shapes in 2D or 3D mode can be exported to and imported from Microsoft Office formats. + + + + +To convert an object to a curved shape: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. + + +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Curve. + + +To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon +Icon + on the Drawing toolbar, and drag the handles of the object. You can also drag the control points of a handle to modify the shape of the curve. +To convert a 2D object to a polygon: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. + + +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To Polygon. + + + +To modify the shape of the object, click the Points icon +Icon + on the Drawing toolbar, and drag the handles of the object. +To convert a 2D object to a 3D object: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. + + +Click the Extrusion On/Off icon +Icon + on the Drawing bar, or right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D. + + +To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. +To convert a text object to 3D, use the Fontwork icon +Icon + on the Drawing toolbar. +To convert a 2D object to a 3D rotation object: +A 3D rotation object is created by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. + + +Select a 2D object on the slide or page. + + +Right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Object + + + +To edit the properties of the 3D object, use the Line and Filling toolbar and the 3D Settings toolbar. +You can rotate the 2D object before converting it to create a more complex shape. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7a9c441e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating Animated GIF Images +/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +cross-fading; creating cross-fades +GIF images; animating +animated GIFs + +Creating Animated GIF Images + +You can animate drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on your slides to make your presentation more interesting. $[officename] Impress provides you with a simple animation editor where you can create animation images (frames) by assembling objects from your slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating through the static frames that you create. +If you create a bitmap animation (animated GIF), you can assign a delay time to each frame, and specify the number of times the animation is played. +To create an animated GIF: + + +Select an object or group of objects that you want to include in your animation and choose Insert - Media - Animated Image. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Click the Apply Object button +Note Icon + to add a single object or a group of objects to the current animation frame. + + +Click the Apply Objects Individually button +Tip Icon + to create a separate animation frame for each of the selected objects. + + + + +In the Animation Group area, select Bitmap object. +Use the animation timeline to specify the duration for displaying a frame and the number of times an animation sequence is presented (looping). + + +Enter a frame number in the Image Number box (left box). + + +Enter the number of seconds you want the frame to display in the Duration box (middle box). + + +Repeat the last two steps for each frame in your animation. +You can preview your animation by using the controls to the left of the Image Number box. + + +Select the number of times you want the animation sequence to repeat in the Loop count box (right box). + + +Select an alignment option for the objects in the Alignment box. + + +Click Create. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b96fe17ce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Exporting Animations in GIF Format +/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_save.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +animations; saving as GIFs +exporting; animations to GIF format + +Exporting Animations in GIF Format + + + +Select an animated object on your slide. + + +Choose File - Export. + + +Select GIF - Graphics Interchange Format (.gif) in the File type list. + + +Click the Selection check box to export the selected object, and not the entire slide. + + +Locate where you want to save the animated GIF, enter a name, and then click Save. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8044cc507 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + +Animating Objects in Presentation Slides +/text/simpress/guide/animated_objects.xhp + + + + + + +objects; moving along paths +connecting; paths and objects +paths; moving objects along +motion paths +deleting;animation effects +effects;applying to/removing from objects +animation effects +animations;editing +custom animation + + MW deleted "applying;" +

Animating Objects in Presentation Slides +

+ You can apply preset animation effects to objects on your slide. +

To apply an animation effect to an object:

+ + + On a slide in Normal view, select the object you want to animate. + + + Choose View - Animation, to open the Custom Animation pane in the Sidebar. Click on Add (+) button, and then select an animation effect. + + + In the Custom Animation dialog, click a tab page to choose from a category of effects. Click an effect, then click OK. + + + To preview the animation, click the Play button. + On Slide Pane an icon appears next to the preview of those slides, which have one or more objects with custom animation. When you present the slide show with the Presenter Console, icon indicates that the next slide has custom animation. +

To apply and edit a motion path effect:

+ An object can be animated to move along a motion path. You can use predefined or your own motion paths. + If you select "Curve", "Polygon", or "Freeform Line", the dialog closes and you can draw your own path. If the drawing is finished and not canceled, the created path is removed from the document and inserted as a motion path effect. + Editing motion paths + If the Custom Animation Panel is visible, the motion paths of all effects of the current slide are drawn as a transparent overlay on the slide. All paths are visible all the time, therefore animations with consecutive paths can be created easily. + A motion path can be selected by clicking on the path. A selected path will support handles, it can be moved and resized like a shape. A double click on a path starts the point edit mode. The point edit mode can also be started by Edit - Points or by pressing F8. +

To remove an animation effect from an object:

+ + + On a slide in Normal view, select the object from which to remove the effect. + + + Choose Slide Show - Custom Animation. + + + Click Remove. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9a726d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + +Animating Slide Transitions +/text/simpress/guide/animated_slidechange.xhp + + + +cross-fading; slides +slide transitions; applying effects +animated slide transitions +transition effects +deleting; slide transition effects +effects;animated slide transitions +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."

Animating Slide Transitions +

+You can apply a special effect that plays when you display a slide. +

To apply a transition effect to a slide

+ + +In Normal view, select the slide that you want to add the transition effect to. + + +On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. + + +Select a slide transition from the list. + + +You can preview the transition effect in the document window. +On Slide Pane an icon appears next to the preview of those slides, which have slide transition. When you present the slide show with the Presenter Console, icon indicates that the next slide has slide transition. +

To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide

+ + +In Slide Sorter view, select the slides that you want to add the transition effect to. +If you want, you can use the Zoom toolbar +Icon Zoom to change the view magnification for the slides. + + +On the Tasks pane, click Slide Transition. + + +Select a slide transition from the list. + + +To preview the transition effect for a slide, click the small icon underneath the slide on the Slides Pane. +

To remove a transition effect

+ + +In Slide Sorter View, select the slides that you want to remove the transition effect from. + + +Choose No Transition in the listbox on the Tasks pane. + + +
+Slide Transition + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59d7b362c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Slide Order +/text/simpress/guide/arrange_slides.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +slides; arranging +presentations; arranging slides +changing;order of slides +arranging;slides +ordering;slides + +Changing the Slide Order + +Do one of the following: + + +Choose View - Slide Sorter, select one or more slides, and then drag the slides to another location. To select multiple slides, hold down shift and click on the slides. To create a copy of a selected slide, hold down CommandCtrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to a plus sign. You can also drag a copy of a slide into another open $[officename] Impress document. + + +Choose View - Outline, select a slide, and then drag the slide to another location. + + +Choose View - Normal or Notes, select the slide preview on the Slides Pane, and then drag the slide preview to another location. + + +To temporarily remove a slide from your presentation, go to Slide Sorter, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide. The number of the hidden slide is crossed out. To show the slide, right-click the slide, and then choose Show/Hide Slide. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f76bce674 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + Changing the Slide Background Fill + /text/simpress/guide/background.xhp + + + + +backgrounds; changing +master slides; changing backgrounds +master pages; changing backgrounds +slides;changing backgrounds +pages;changing backgrounds + + + + Changing the SlidePage Background Fill + + + + + You can change the background color or the background fill of the current slide or all of the slides in your document. For a background fill, you can use hatching, a gradient, or an image. + If you want to change the background fill for all of the slides, choose View - Master Slide. To change the background fill of a single slide, choose View - Normal. + + Click Set Background Picture for Slide in the context menu of a slide in Normal view to select an image file. This file is used as a background picture. + + + + You can change the background color or the background fill of the current page or all of the pages in your document. For a background fill, you can use hatching, a gradient, or an image. + If you want to change the background fill for all of the pages, choose View - Master Page. To change the background fill of a single page, choose View - Normal. + + Click Set Background Picture for Page in the context menu of a page in Normal view to select an image file. This file is used as a background picture. + + + + insert help id when available + removed a para, #63970 +

To use a color, gradient, or hatching pattern for the slidepage background

+ + + Choose Slide - PropertiesPage - Properties, and then click on the Background tab. + + + In the Fill area, do one of the following: + Select Color, and then click a color in the list. + Select Gradient, and then click a gradient style in the list. + Select Hatching, and then click a hatching style in the list. + + + Click OK. + + +

To use an image for the slidepage background

+ You can display an entire image as a slidepage background, or you can tile the image to produce a patterned background. + + + Choose Slide - PropertiesPage - Properties, and then click on the Background tab. + + + In the Fill area, select Image, and then click an image in the list. + To use a custom image for the slidepage background, click the Import button. Locate the image and click Open. On returning to the Background tab, the imported image is in the Image list. + + + Do one of the following: + To display the entire image as the background, clear the Tile check box in the Position area, and then select AutoFit. + To tile the image on the background, select Tile, and set the Size, Position, and Offset options for the image. + + + Click OK. + + + This modification is only valid for the current presentation or drawing document. +

To save a new master slidepage as a template

+ + + Choose View - Master Slide to change to the master slideChoose View - Master Page to change to the master page. + + + Choose Slide - Properties to change the slide background, or choose other formatting commands. Objects that you add here will be visible on all slides that are based on this master slide.Choose Page - Properties to change the page background, or choose other formatting commands. Objects that you add here will be visible on all pages that are based on this master page.. + + + Choose View - Normal to close the master view. + + + Choose File - Templates - Save As Template to save the document as a template. + + + Enter a name for the template. Do not change the category from "My Templates". Click OK. + + + Now you can use the Templates window to open a new presentation or drawing based on your new template. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..77ef6bcca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Zooming With the Keypad +/text/simpress/guide/change_scale.xhp + + + +zooming;keyboard +keyboard; zooming + +Zooming With the Keypad + +You can use the keypad to quickly enlarge or reduce the view on your slide. + + +To zoom in, press the Plus Sign. + + +To zoom out, press the Minus Sign. + + +If you are using a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can hold down CommandCtrl and turn the wheel to change the zoom factor in all main modules of %PRODUCTNAME. + +Shortcut keys for presentations + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9825d29a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + +Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides +/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp + + + +footers;master slides +master slides; headers and footers +headers and footers; master slides +inserting;headers/footers in all slides +slide numbers on all slides +page numbers on all slides +date on all slides +time and date on all slides + + mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +

Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides +

+ Every slide is based on a master slide. The text, pictures, tables, fields or other objects that you place on the master slide are visible as a background on all slides that are based on that master slide. + Masters exist for slides, notes, and handouts. + + + To edit a master slide, choose View - Master Slide. Click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar, or choose View - Normal, to leave the master slide. + + + To edit a master notes, choose View - Master Notes. Click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar, or choose View - Normal, to leave the master notes. + + + To edit a master handout, click the Handout tab above the slide. Click the Normal tab to leave the master handout. + + +

Adding predefined header or footer objects

+ see i53011 + Every type of master has some predefined areas to hold the date, footer, and slide numbers. + When you switch to the master view, you can move those areas to any position on the master. Also, you can enter additional text into them, resize them, and select their contents to apply text formatting. For example, you can change the font size or color. + A predefined Header Area is available only for notes and handouts. If you want a header on all slides, you can move the Footer Area on the master slide to the top. + Objects that you insert on a master slide are visible on all slides that are based on that master slide. + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer. + You see a dialog with two tab pages: Slides and Notes and Handouts where you can enter contents to the predefined areas. + + By default, the Date and Time checkbox is enabled, but the format is set to Fixed and the text input box is empty, so no date and time is visible on the slides. + By default, the Footer checkbox is enabled, but the text input box is empty, so no footer is visible on the slides. + By default, the Slide number checkbox is cleared, so no slide numbers are visible. + + + Enter or select the contents that should be visible on all slides. + + + If you want to change the position and formatting of the master objects, choose View - Master. + You see the master slide with areas near the bottom. You can move the areas , and you can select the fields and apply some formatting. You can also enter some text here which will be shown next to the fields. + + + Click the Date Area and move the time and date field. Select the <date/time> field and apply some formatting to change the format for the date and time on all slides. The same applies to the Footer Area and the Slide Number Area. + + + Normally the predefined elements of the master slide are set to visible in the presentation. You can control the visibility of the predefined elements by choosing Slide - Master Elements. + + + +

Adding text objects as header or footer objects

+ You can add a text object anywhere on the master slide. + + + Choose View - Master Slide. + + + On the Drawing bar, select the Text icon +Icon + . + + + Drag in the master slide to draw a text object, and then type or paste your text. + + + Choose View - Normal when you are finished. + + + You can also add fields, such as the date or page number, to a header or footer by choosing Insert - Field. +
+ + + + Insert Fields +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf7b2f19f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Gluepoints +/text/simpress/guide/gluepoints.xhp + + + +gluepoints;using + +Using Gluepoints + +In Impress and Draw, you can connect each two shapes with a line called a connector. When you draw a connector between shapes, the connector will be attached to a gluepoint on each shape. Each shape has some default gluepoints, and the positions of the default gluepoints depend on the specific shape. You can add your own custom gluepoints to a shape and then attach connectors to the custom gluepoints. +To add and edit gluepoints + + +Do one of the following to get existing gluepoints visible for all elements: + + + + +Click the Gluepoints icon on the Drawing toolbar; or + + +Choose Edit - Gluepoints. + + + + +Click the Insert Gluepoint icon on the Gluepoints toolbar. + + +Select element on slide where you want to add gluepoints. + + +Click inside the shape where you want to add the new gluepoint. +If the shape is filled, you can click anywhere inside the shape. If the shape is unfilled, you can click the border to insert a gluepoint. Once inserted, you can drag the gluepoint to another position inside the shape. + + +With the four icons next to the Insert Gluepoint icon, you choose the directions which will be permitted for a connector at this gluepoint. You can choose one or more directions for a particular gluepoint. +If the Gluepoint Relative icon is active, the gluepoint moves when you resize the object to keep its position relative to the object borders. +If the Gluepoint Relative icon is not active, the icons next to it are no longer grayed out. With these icons you can decide where a gluepoint will be placed when the size of the object is changed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83f291bea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving a Presentation in HTML Format +/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +exporting;presentations to HTML +saving;as HTML +presentations; exporting to HTML +HTML; exporting from presentations + +Saving a Presentation in HTML Format + + + +Open the presentation that you want to save in HTML format. + + +Choose File - Export. + + +Set the File type to HTML Document ($[officename] Impress) (.html;.htm). + + +Enter a File name, and then click Export. + + +Follow the instructions in the HTML Export Wizard. + + +
+ + +HTML Export Wizard +File - Export +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bd6b6f73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Importing HTML Pages Into Presentations +/text/simpress/guide/html_import.xhp + + + +importing; presentations with HTML +presentations; importing HTML +HTML; importing into presentations +text documents;inserting in slides +inserting; text in presentations +mw moved "inserting;" from simpress/01/04110200.xhp +

Importing HTML Pages Into Presentations +

+You can import any text file, including text in HTML documents, into a slide. +

To insert text from a file into a slide:

+ + +In the place where you want to insert the text, + choose Slide - Insert Slide from File + Page - Insert Page from File. + + +Select "Text" or "HTML Document" as the File type. + + +Locate the file containing the text that you want to add, and then click Insert. + + +If the text file contains more text than can be inserted into a single slide, you can divide the text over several slides. + + +Double-click in the inserted text to enter edit mode. + + +Select all of the text that lies below the visible slide area and press Command +Ctrl+X. + + +Choose Slide - New SlidePage - New Page, and then press CommandCtrl+V. + + +Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all of the text is on slides. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9bf3e6773 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + + Impress Remote Guide + /text/simpress/guide/impress_remote.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Impress slide show;remote control + remote control;Bluetooth connection + remote control;controlling slide show + Impress Remote;controlling slide show + + + +

Slideshow Remote Control – Impress Remote User Guide

+
+%PRODUCTNAME Impress Remote is an open-source application available for the Android and iOS operating systems, which lets you control %PRODUCTNAME Impress slideshows with a mobile device. +Impress Remote Icon +Impress Remote displays slide thumbnails in the device screen with any corresponding notes below. Flick your finger on the screen to go forward or backward in the presentation. You can also display a mosaic of slides to jump directly to the desired one for easier presentation dynamic. +The connection between the computer running the %PRODUCTNAME Impress presentation and the mobile device is done through Bluetooth or a network link. + +

Impress Remote Features

+Impress Remote is a very useful application to let you control slideshows at a distance of the computer, enabling you to walk while doing your presentation. Its main features are: + + + + Control the slideshow with finger gestures and taps on the mobile device screen. + + + Slide object animations are triggered with taps on the mobile screen. + + + Slide previews: the presentation slides can be previewed in the mobile device when both the computer and device are connected. + + + Speaker notes: there is an exclusive speaker notes section below the slides on your device where all the slide notes are displayed. + + + Timer: sets the time a slide is displayed for automatic slide shows. + + + Visual pointer: display a “laser pointer” on the computer screen, controlled by your finger’s position on the slide thumbnail on the mobile device. + + +

Requirements:

+ +

Computer:

+ + + + GNU/Linux, Windows or macOS. + + + Bluetooth or network connectivity. + + + %PRODUCTNAME version 4.1 or higher. + + +

Mobile device:

+ + + + A phone or tablet with Android 2.3 or higher or iOS, with Bluetooth or network connectivity. + + + Impress Remote application installed in the mobile device. + + +

Downloading and Installing Impress Remote in Your Mobile Device

+Download Impress Remote from the Google Play Store or the Apple Store by searching for “Impress Remote” in the search box. Be sure that the results bring Impress Remote from The Document Foundation (TDF). Install Impress Remote in the mobile device as with other mobile applications. + +

Impress Remote Settings

+ + Impress Remote;settings + + +With Impress Remote enabled in the mobile device and in the Computer page, access the Setting page by tapping the right corner of the screen. The following settings are available: + + + + Volume key actions: check to enable the device’s volume keys to go forward when pressing the volume-up button and move backward when pressing the volume-down button. + + + Keep screen on: check to prevent the automatic screen off and device from automatically locking while using Impress Remote. + + + Quiet mode: put the device in silent mode to avoid audio notifications of incoming calls or other messages. This setting does not affect the vibration mode you may have previously set. + + +

Connecting the Computer to the Mobile Device

+ + Impress Remote;connecting to computer + + +Enable Bluetooth on both the device and the computer and pair them. Refer to the instructions manuals of your device and your computer operating system to know how to enable Bluetooth, set up a Bluetooth identifier and pair devices. Once the pairing is established, the mobile device is ready to control the presentation. +Alternatively, you can connect through a network (including Wi-Fi). In this case, both the computer and the device must be connected to the same network. + +

Enabling Impress Remote control in %PRODUCTNAME Impress

+To run an Impress slideshow, you must allow Impress to be controlled by the mobile device. Proceed as follows: + + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Impress. + + + Go to Tools – Options – %PRODUCTNAME Impress – General. You should see the screen depicted in the figure below. + + + In the presentation options, select the Enable remote control checkbox and click OK. + + +Close %PRODUCTNAME Impress and start it again. + + +

Controlling the slideshow:

+ + Impress Remote;using + + +Disable screen saving and screen locking from the mobile device as indicated above before running a slideshow. Ensure that the mobile device has enough battery power for the show’s duration with the screen on. + + + + Make sure both device and computer are already paired via Bluetooth or network connection. + + + Open the presentation you want to show in %PRODUCTNAME Impress. + + + Open the Impress Remote application on the mobile device and select the Bluetooth ID of the computer. + + + Once you clicked on the computer’s name, it will automatically load the presentation slides on the Impress Remote with the notes section. + + + Flick your finger left or right on the mobile screen to change the slides. Slide notes are in the bottom part of the mobile screen. + + + Optionally, set the timer for defining each slide’s display time from the mobile application. + + + The slides can also be changed with the volume keys on the mobile device. To enable it, open the settings and enable volume key actions in the Impress Remote. + + + +

Some Impress Remote mobile screenshots:

+ + + +
+Impress Remote in Google Play Store +Impress Remote in Apple iTunes Store +The Presenter Console + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e214c987 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + +Creating a Custom Slide Show +/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +slide shows; custom +custom slide shows +starting; always with the current slide +starting;custom slide shows +hiding;slides +showing;hidden slides +hidden pages;showing + +

Creating a Custom Slide Show +

+You can create custom slide shows to meet the needs of your audience using slides within the current presentation. +

To create a custom slide show:

+ + + +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Shows. + + +Click New and enter a name for your slide show in the Name box. + + +Under Existing Slides, select the slides to add to your slide show, and click the >> button. Hold down Shift to select a range of consecutive slides, or CommandCtrl to select multiple individual slides. + + +You can change the order of the slides in your custom slide show, by dragging and dropping the slides under Selected Slides. +

To start a custom slide show:

+ + + +Choose Slide Show - Custom Slide Show. + + +Select the show you want to start from the list. + + +Click Start. + + +If you want the selected custom slide show to start when you click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar, or when you press F5, select Use Custom Slide Show. +

Options for Running a Slide Show

+

To always start a slide show from the current slide:

+ + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. + + +In the Start presentation area, select the Always with current page check box. + + +Do not select this option if you want to run a custom slide show. +

To hide a slide:

+To hide the current slide, click the Hide Slide action button. + + +To hide several slides, choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the slide(s) that you want to hide. + + +Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide. +The slide is not removed from your document. + + +

To show a hidden slide:

+ + +Choose View - Slide Sorter, and then select the hidden slide(s) that you want to show. + + +Choose Slide Show - Show/Hide Slide. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59c8b1c90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + +Using Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress +/text/simpress/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +accessibility; $[officename] Impress + +

Using Shortcut Keys in $[officename] Impress +

+ +You can use the keyboard to access $[officename] Impress commands as well as to navigate through the workspace. $[officename] Impress uses the same shortcut keys as $[officename] Draw to create drawing objects. +

Selecting placeholders

+$[officename] Impress AutoLayouts use placeholders for slide titles, text, and objects. To select a placeholder, press CommandCtrl+Enter. To move to the next placeholder, press CommandCtrl+Enter again. +If you press CommandCtrl+Enter after you reach the last placeholder in a slide, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. + +

During a Slide Show

+

To start a Slide Show

+To start a slide show from the beginning, press F5. + To start a slide show from the current slide, press Shift+F5. +

Advance to the next slide or to the next animation effect

+ +Spacebar + +

Advance to the next slide without playing object animation effects

+ +OptionAlt+PageDown + +

Return to previous slide

+ +OptionAlt+PageUp + +

Go to a specific slide

+Type the page number of the slide, and then press Enter. +

Stop slide show

+Esc or -. +

Slide Sorter

+When you first switch to Slide Sorter, press Enter to change the keyboard focus to the workspace. Otherwise, press F6 to navigate to the workspace, and then press Enter. +

Selecting and deselecting slides

+Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to select, and then press the Spacebar. To add to the selection, use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide(s) that you want to add, and press Spacebar again. To deselect a slide, navigate to the slide, and then press Spacebar. +

Copying a slide:

+ + +Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to copy, and then press CommandCtrl+C. + + +Move to the slide where you want to paste the copied slide, and then press CommandCtrl+V. + + +

Moving a slide:

+ + +Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to move, and then press CommandCtrl+X. + + +Position the cursor where you want to move the slide, and then press CommandCtrl+V. + + +Select Before or After the current slide, and then click OK. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d1ad74f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Loading Line and Arrow Styles + /text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp + + + +line styles;loading + lines;about line ends + arrows;loading arrow styles + styles;arrow and line styles + loading;arrow and line styles +mw changed "line ends;" to "lines;" +

Loading Line and Arrow Styles +

+ You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. +

To load a line styles file:

+ + + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Line Styles tab. + + + Click the Load Line Styles button. + + + Locate the file containing the line styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].sod. + + + To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. +

To load an arrow styles file:

+ + + Choose Format - Line, and then click the Arrow Styles tab. + + + Click the Load Arrow Styles button. + + + Locate the file containing the arrow styles that you want to load, and then click OK. The file has the format [filename].soe. + + + To save an arrow styles file, click the Save Arrow Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. + + Format - Line + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecb9fc27a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Curves +/text/simpress/guide/line_draw.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +lines; drawing +curves; drawing +control points definition +corner points +drawing;lines + +Drawing Curves + +The Curve icon +Icon + on the Drawing toolbar opens a toolbar to draw Bézier curves. Bézier curves are defined by a start point and an end point, which are called "anchors". The curvature of the Bézier curve is defined by control points ("handles"). Moving a control point changes the shape of the Bézier curve. +Control points are only visible in "Edit Points" mode. Control points are represented by circles, anchor points are represented by squares. The start point is a little bit larger than the other anchor points. +Bézier curve segments and straight line segments can be joined to form more complex Bézier curves. Three different transitions can be applied to join adjacent segments: + + +A symmetrical anchor point has the same line curvature on either side, and two control lines that move together as a straight line. + + +A smooth anchor point may have different line curvatures on either side. + + +A corner anchor point has one or two independent control lines. Changing one side has no effect on the other side. + + +How to use the Curve tool + + +On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar +Icon + and select the Curve +Icon + tool. + + +Click where you want the curve to start, and drag in the direction where you want the curve to go. The control line will indicate the direction. +Hold down Shift while you drag to restrict the direction to a 45 degree grid. + + +Release the mouse where the first control point should be. + + +Move the pointer to where you want the curve segment to end. The curve follows the pointer. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Double-click on the position of the end point to finish drawing the line. +To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. + + +Click and release the mouse button to add an anchor point. Move the mouse to draw the next segment. + + +Click and drag in any direction to add a smooth anchor point. + + +How to use the Freeform Line tool + + +On the Drawing toolbar, open the Curves toolbar +Icon + and select the Freeform Line +Icon + tool. + + +Click where you want the curve to start, and keep holding the mouse button down. + + +Draw the freeform line as you would do with a pencil. + + +Release the mouse button to finish the line. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64f51d9ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Editing Curves +/text/simpress/guide/line_edit.xhp + + + +curves; editing +editing; curves +splitting;curves +closing;shapes +deleting;points +converting;points +points;adding/converting/deleting +MW deleted "adding;"Editing Curves + +A curved line segment consists of two data points (endpoints) and two control points (handles). A control line connects a control point to a data point. You can change the shape of a curve by converting a data point to a different type, or by dragging the control points to a different location. +You can also modify the properties of the line by selecting the line and choosing Format - Line. + + + + +Icon + + + +To view the data points and control points of a curved line, select the line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. The data points are represented by squares and the control points by circles. A control point might overlay a data point. + + +
+To adjust a curved line segment: + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Drag a data point to resize the line. If a control point overlies the data point, drag the control point until you can see the data point, and then drag the data point. + + +Drag a control point. The curve pulls in the direction that you drag the control point. + + +To split a curved line: +You can only split a curved line that has three or more data points. + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +Select a data point, and then click the Split Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. + + +To create a closed shape: + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Close Bézier icon. + + +To convert a data point on a curved line: + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +Click the data point you want to convert, and do one of the following: + + + + +To convert the data point to a smooth point, click the Smooth Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. + + +To convert the data point to a symmetrical point, click the Symmetric Transition icon on the Edit Points Bar. + + +To convert the data point to a corner point, click the Corner Point icon on the Edit Points Bar. + + +To add a data point: + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Insert Points icon. + + +Click the line where you want to add the point, and drag a short distance. + + +If a data point does not have a control point, select the data point, and then click the Convert to Curve icon on the Edit Points Bar. +To delete a data point: + + +Select a curved line, and then click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar. + + +Click the point you want to delete. + + +On the Edit Points Bar, click the Delete Points icon. + + +
+Edit Points bar + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95837fab3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress +/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp + + + +$[officename] Impress instructions +instructions; $[officename] Impress + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress + + +Viewing and Printing a Presentation + + + + + + + + +Animated Objects and 3D Objects + + + + + +Importing and Exporting + + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1448d06e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + +Changing and Adding a Master Page +/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp + + + + +slide designs +page designs +master slides; designing +master pages; designing +backgrounds; slides +backgrounds; pages +slides; backgrounds +pages; backgrounds +master pages +master slides + + +

Changing and Adding a Master SlidePage +

+ + + Every slide in a presentation has exactly one master slide. A master slide determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for all slides that use this master slide. + Every page in a drawing has exactly one master page. A master page determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for all pages that use this master page. + + +

To apply a new master slidemaster page

+ + + + Select Slide - Change Slide MasterPage - Master Page. + + + Click Load. + + +Under Categories, select the category of templates. + + + Under Templates, select a template with the master slidemaster page that you want to apply. To preview the template, click Preview. + + + Click OK. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + + + + To apply the master slide to all of the slides in your presentation, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + + To apply the slide design to the current slide only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + + + + + + To apply the master page to all of the pages in your document, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + + To apply the page design to the current page only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + + + +Check Delete unused backgrounds to remove unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from the document. + +Moved from taskpanel.xhp - the described controls belong on the Master Page sidebar + + + +Left-click to apply the master slide to all slides. Right-click for a context menu. + +Applies the master slide to all slides. + +Applies the master slide or the slide design to the selected slides. + + +Resizes the preview of the master slides. + +Click to apply a slide design to all selected slides. Right-click for a context menu. +
+ + Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fbf6e51c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Moving Objects +/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +objects;moving in slides +moving;objects in slides + +Moving Objects + +You can move selected objects in your slide by dragging them, using the arrow keys, or by copying the objects and pasting them in another location. + + +The arrow keys let you move objects more precisely than with the mouse.UFI: add grid, guides, snap points + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c7590102 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Creating a Flowchart +/text/simpress/guide/orgchart.xhp + + + +connectors; using +flowcharts +organization charts +hot spots in flowcharts +interactions; hot spots +changed orgcharts (Google about 1 million pages) to organization charts (about 33 million pages)Creating a Flowchart + +To create a flowchart: + + +Select a tool from the Flowchart toolbar on the Drawing bar. + + +Drag a shape in your slide. + + +To add more shapes, repeat the last steps. + + +Open the Connectors toolbar on the Drawing bar, and select a connector line. + + +Move the pointer over the edge of a shape so that the connection sites appear. + + +Click a connection site, drag to a connection site on another shape, and then release. + + +To add more connectors, repeat the last steps. + + +You now have the basic outline for your flowchart. +To add text to the shapes on your flowchart +Do one of the following: + + +Double-click the shape, and type or paste your text. + + + + +Click the Text icon on the Drawing bar, and drag a text object over the shape. Type or paste your text into the text object. + + +To add a color fill to a shape: + + +Select the shape, and choose Format - Area. + + +Select Color, and then click a color in the list. + + +To add some hot spots that call other slides: +Assign interactions to some objects on your slide. + + +Select the object, then choose Slide Show - Interaction. + + +Select an interaction in the dialog. For example, select to go to the next slide when the user clicks the object. + + +
+Connectors +Gluepoints +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db55cd3d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + +Insert Slide from File +/text/simpress/guide/page_copy.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + copying; slides + slides; copying between documents + pages; copying + inserting; slides from files + pasting;slides from other presentations +mw added "pasting;" +
+

Insert Slide from File

+ You can insert slides from another presentation into the current presentation. You can also copy and paste slides between presentations. +
+

To insert a slide from another presentation:

+ + +Open a presentation, and choose View - Normal. + + +Choose Slide - Insert Slide from FilePage - Insert Page from File. + + +Locate the presentation file containing the slide that you want to insert, and click Insert. + + +Click the plus sign next to the icon for the presentation file, and then select the slide(s) that you want to insert. + + +Click OK. + + +

To copy and paste slides between presentations:

+ + +Open the presentations that you want to copy and paste between. + + +In the presentation containing the slide(s) that you want to copy, choose View - Slide Sorter. + + +Select the slide(s), and then choose Edit - Copy. + + +Change to the presentation where you want to paste the slide(s), and then choose View - Normal. + + +Select the slide that you want the copied slide to follow, and then choose Edit - Paste. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd56eecc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Impress Photo Album + /text/simpress/guide/photo_album.xhp + + + + + + + + + Photo Album + Impress Photo Album + Multimedia show;Impress Photo Album + Kiosk;Impress Photo Album + Slideshow;Impress Photo Album + Album;Impress Photo Album + +
+

Impress Photo Album

+Inserts a photo album into your presentation document. +
+The Impress photo album is a quick way to insert several pictures into a presentation and create a document suitable to run continuously in a kiosk or multimedia show. +
+Choose Insert – Media – Photo Album +
+ +

To insert a photo album into your presentation

+ + + + Open an existing or blank presentation. + + + Go to the slide that precede the photo album. + + + Choose Insert – Media – Photo Album. + + + In the Create Photo Album dialog, click Add. + + + Locate the files you want to insert. + If several images are in the same folder, you can select a group of photos using the Shift or CommandCtrl keys while clicking on their filenames. + + + Click Open to add the files to the Photo Album. + Click on a file name to display it in the Preview area + + + Select the number of images per slide in the Slide layout list box. + + + Mark Add caption to each slide checkbox if necessary, to insert a text box for the caption. + + + Mark Keep aspect ratio checkbox to avoid distorting the images when laying them in the slide. The image will be fully contained in the slide. + + + Mark Fill screen to make the image fill the whole presentation screen. The resulting image may be larger than the slide. + + + Mark Link images to create a link to the image location in your file system or internet. This option will not embed the images in the presentation document. + + + Click Insert Slides. + + + +Clicking Undo will not delete a photo album. Right-click the slides on the slide panel and select Delete Slide to delete the slides. +
+Slide Shows +Insert images +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e7cd3419 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Using the Presenter Console + /text/simpress/guide/presenter_console.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + presenter console;slide show + slide show;presenter console + + +

Using the Presenter Console

+ The Presenter Console displays the slide show in an external screen (projector or large television), while the presentation controls are shown in the computer screen. +
+ The Presenter Console provides extra control over slide shows by using different views on your computer display and on the display seen by the audience. The view you see on your computer display includes the current slide, the upcoming slide, optionally the slide notes, and a presentation timer. + The Presenter Console works only on an operating system that supports multiple displays and only when two displays are connected (one may be the laptop built-in display). +

Presenter console activation

+ To enable the Presenter Console: + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. + + + Select Enable Presenter Console in the Presentation area. + + + + To activate the Presenter Console: + + + Connect an auxiliary display to your computer, + + + Run the slide show. Press F5 or Shift-F5 or choose Slide Show - Start from First Slide or Start from Current Slide. + + +

Presenter console controls

+ + Presenter Console Controls + + + + Previous: move to previous slide.different formatting after the term and its description in different files and so in help texts, not sure how to continue, leave it for now. + + + Next: move to next slide. + + + Notes: display the Presenter Console Notes mode. + + + Slide: display the Presenter Console Slide sorter mode. + + + Restart: restart the slide show’s elapsed time. + + + Exchange: Switch the displays between the computer and the presentation display. + + + Close: In the Notes and Slide Sorter mode, return to the Normal mode. + + +

Presenter Console Keyboard Shortcuts

+ + +

Presenter Console modes

+ +

Normal Mode

+ The Normal mode shows the current slide on the left and the next slide on the right of the computer display. + + Presenter console normal mode + +

Notes mode

+ The Notes mode displays the current slide on the left, the slides notes on the right and the next slide below the current slide. + + Notes mode + +

Slide sorter mode

+ The Slide Sorter mode displays all slides in the computer screen and allows to display the selected slide out of the presentation order. + + Slide sorter mode + +
+ Impress Remote User Guide +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db66f81ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing a Slide to Fit a Paper Size +/text/simpress/guide/print_tofit.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +fitting to pages; individual slides +pages; fitting to printed pages +printing; fitting to paper + +Printing a Slide to Fit a Paper Size + +You can reduce the size of a slide when you print, so that the slide can fit on a printed page. + + +Open the document that you want to print. + + +In Normal View, choose Slide - Properties, and then click the Page tab. + + +In Layout settings area, select the Fit object to paper format check box. + + +In the Paper format area, select a Format. + + +Click OK. The slide is resized to fit the printed page, while maintaining the relative positions of the objects on the slide. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bf194ae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Presentations + /text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp + + + +printing; presentations + slides; printing + notes; printing in presentations + outlines; printing + presentations; printing + tiled printing of slides + changing;layout for handouts + handout printing + layout;printing handouts +MW made "handouts;.." a one level entry and added "layout;..." +

Printing Presentations +

+

Default printer settings

+ + + To set the default printing options for $[officename] Impress, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. + + +

Setting printer options for the current presentation

+ + + Choose File - Print. + + + Click the %PRODUCTNAME Impress or the Options tab page, and then select the printer options. + These settings override the default printer options in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print for the current print job only. + + +

Choosing a print layout for handouts

+ + + Choose File - Print. + + + On the General tab page of the Print dialog, select the "Handouts" entry from the Document listbox. + + + Select the number of slides to print per page of paper. + + +

Defining print options for handouts

+ + + Click the Handout tab. + + + Choose Insert - Page Number to open the Header and Footer dialog box. + + + Click Notes and Handouts to enter the header and footer text for handouts. + You see four areas on this dialog with check boxes for Header, Date and time, Footer, and Page number. These four areas correspond to the four areas in the corners of the master handout view. + + + Enter text for header, footer, and date. Check the Page number box, if you want to number the handout pages. Ensure the Header check box is enabled if you want your header text to be printed. + + + Click Apply to All. + The fields in the master handout view on screen are not updated, but the text that you entered will be printed. + + +

Printing handouts or notes

+ + + Choose File - Print. + + + Click the Document listbox and select the type of contents to print. + + + Select Handouts or Notes and select the number of slides to print on each page of paper. + + + If you want another layout of the slides on the printed paper pages, use the mouse to move the slides around on the Handout view. +

Printing a range of slides

+ + + Choose View - Slide Sorter. + + + Hold down Shift, and click the range of slides that you want to print. + + + Choose File - Print. + + + In the Range and copies area, click Slides. + + + Enter the slide numbers you want to print, and click OK. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e409ef40 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Rehearse Timings of Slide Changes +/text/simpress/guide/rehearse_timings.xhp + + + +presentations;rehearse timings +rehearse timings +timings; rehearse timings +automatic slide changes;rehearse timings +recording;display times for slides + +Rehearse Timings of Slide Changes + +$[officename] assists you in defining the right rehearse timings for automatic slide changes. +Prepare the slides, start the show using a special icon, tell your imaginary audience what you want to tell for the first slide, then advance to the next slide and so on. $[officename] records the display time for each slide, so the next time you play the show with automatic slide changes, the timing will be as recorded. +To record a show with rehearse timings + + +Open a presentation, and switch to Slide Sorter View. + + +Start the show with the Rehearse Timings icon +Icon + in the Slide View bar. You see the first slide, and a timer in the bottom corner. + + +When it's time to advance to the next slide, click the timer. To keep the default setting for this slide, click the slide, but not the timer. Continue for all slides in your presentation. + + +$[officename] has recorded the display time for each slide. Save your presentation. + + +If you want the whole presentation to auto-repeat, open the menu Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. Click Loop and repeat after and OK. + + +
+Slide Show Settings +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47a537809 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Underlying Objects +/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +objects; selecting +selecting; hidden objects +covered objects +underlying objects + +Selecting Underlying Objects + + + +To select an object that is covered by other objects, hold down OptionAlt and click through the objects until you reach the underlying object. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, hold down OptionAlt+Shift when you click. + + +To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard, press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7be2daf99 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Showing a Slide Show + /text/simpress/guide/show.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + running slide shows + showing;slide shows + slide shows; starting + presentations; starting + starting; slide shows + automatic slide shows + slide transitions;automatic + automatic slide transition + +

Showing a Slide Show

+ Different ways exist to start a slide show. Once a slide show is running, you can take control pressing keys or clicking the mouse buttons. + By default, a slide show always starts with the first slide. You advance manually through slides up to the last slide. You can change these settings. +

Running a Slide Show

+ + + Choose Slide Show - Slide Show to run the show. + + + Click to advance to the next effect or to the next slide. + + + Press Esc to abort the slide show before its end. + Many more keys are available to control a slide show. You can also right-click to open a context menu with useful commands. +

Showing an automatic slide show (kiosk mode)

+ For an automatic change to the next slide, you must assign a slide transition to each slide. + + + Open the Slide Transition sidebar deck. + + + In the Advance Slide area, click After and enter a time duration. + + + Click Apply Transition to All Slides. + + + You can assign a different time for every slide to advance to the next slide. The rehearse timings feature can assist you to get the timing right. + To advance to the first slide, after all slides have been shown, you must set the slide show to repeat automatically. + + + Choose Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. + + + In the Presentation Mode area, choose Loop and repeat after and set the duration of the pause between shows. + + +

Running a slide show from a file

+ You can start %PRODUCTNAME from a command prompt, followed by the parameter -show and an Impress filename. For example, to start the file filename.odp from the command prompt, enter the following command: + + soffice -show filename.odp + + This assumes that soffice is in the program path of your system, and that filename.odp is located in the current directory. + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0ff46034 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + +Including Spreadsheets in Slides +/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp + + + +spreadsheets;in presentations +presentations;inserting spreadsheets +including spreadsheets + +

Including Spreadsheets in Slides

+You can apply different methods to insert spreadsheet cells into your Impress slides or Draw pages: + + + + +Insert a native table - you enter the data into the cells and apply fancy formatting using the Table Design section on the Tasks pane. + + +Insert a new table as an OLE object or insert an existing file as an OLE object - you can specify the link to a file to be a live link to the latest data saved in a spreadsheet file. + +Insert table dialog - Number of columns + +Enter the number of columns for the new table.Insert table dialog - Number of rows + +Enter the number of rows for the new table.Contextmenu of a table in Impress and DrawCell + +Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells. + +The cell contents are align at the top of the cells. + +The cell contents are aligned vertically centered in the cells. + +The cell contents are aligned at the bottom of the cells. + +Selects the current table. +Row + +Choose commands for the selected or all rows. + +Distributes the height of the selected or all rows to the same size. The height of the table is not changed. + +If currently no cell is selected, all rows will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all rows containing the selected cells will be selected. + +If currently no cell is selected, a new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new rows as the selection has will be inserted below the selection. + +All rows of the current selection will be deleted.Column + +Choose commands for the selected or all columns. + +Distributes the width of the selected or all columns to the same size. The width of the table is not changed. + +If currently no cell is selected, all columns will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all columns containing the selected cells will be selected. + +If currently no cell is selected, a new column will be inserted at the right border of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new columns as the selection has will be inserted right of the selection. + +All columns of the current selection will be deleted. +sic +Align the table within the page or slide. +

Inserting a native table

+ + +Go to the Impress slide or Draw page where you want to insert the table. + + +Choose Insert - Table or use the Table icon on the Standard toolbar to insert a table. + + +Double-click the table and enter or paste the data into the cells. + + +Select some cell contents and right-click to open the context menu. Choose commands to change the cell's contents, like font size and line spacing. + + +Right-click the table border to open the table's context menu. Use the table's context menu to enter a name and description for the table, or to distribute the rows or columns equally, among other commands. + + +Select some cells and right-click to open a context menu, where you can insert or delete rows and columns, among other commands. +To select a rectangular area of cells, point to a cell in one corner of the rectangle, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the rectangle, then release the mouse button. +To select one cell, point to that cell, hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse to the next cell and back, then release the mouse button. + + +

Inserting a new spreadsheet as an OLE object

+You can add a blank $[officename] Calc spreadsheet to a slide as an OLE object. + + +Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. + + +Choose Insert - OLE Object - OLE Object. Click Create new and select the %PRODUCTNAME Spreadsheet. Click OK. Click in the spreadsheet to enter your data. + + +Click outside the spreadsheet to view the slide. + + +To resize the spreadsheet without resizing the cells, double-click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. To resize the cells of the spreadsheet, click the spreadsheet, and then drag a corner handle. +

Inserting a spreadsheet from a file

+When you insert an existing spreadsheet into your slide, changes that are made to the original spreadsheet file are not updated on your slide. You can, however, make changes to the spreadsheet in your slide. + + +Go to the slide where you want to insert the spreadsheet. + + +Choose Insert - OLE Object - OLE Object. + + +Select Create from file, and click Search. + + +Locate the file you want to insert, and then click OK. +Enable the Link to file checkbox to insert the file as a live link. + + +The entire spreadsheet is inserted into your slide. If you want to change the sheet that is displayed, double-click the spreadsheet, and then select a different sheet. + +Format - Slide Layout +Insert - OLE Object - OLE Object + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cda010bd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects +/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text; converting to curves +characters; converting to curves +sign conversion to curves +converting; text to curves +draw objects;converting text to +curves;converting text to + +Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects + +You can convert text characters into curves that you can edit and resize as you would any drawing object. Once you convert text into a drawing object, you can no longer edit the content of the text. +To convert text into a drawing object: + + +Select the text that you want to convert, and do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Shape - Convert - To Curve. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the border of the text object, and then choose Convert - To Curve. + + +If your text contains more than one character, the converted text becomes a grouped object. Double-click the group to edit individual objects. Press Esc when finished. + + +Now, click the Points icon on the Drawing bar. Click the object. You can see all the Bézier points of the object. On the Edit Points bar, you can find various icons for editing, inserting and deleting points. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21c06cc89 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics +/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +vectorizing bitmaps +converting; bitmaps to polygons +bitmaps; converting to vector graphics +vector graphics; converting bitmaps + +Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics + +A vector graphic can be resized without losing the quality of the graphic. In $[officename] Draw and Impress, you can convert a bitmap image into a vector graphic. + + +Select the bitmap image that you want to convert. + + +Do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Shape - Convert - To Polygon. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Polygon. + + +Set the conversion options for the image, and then click OK. See Convert to Polygon for a description of the conversion options. + + +
+Convert to Polygon + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa069665e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help +/text/simpress/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help + +How to Work With $[officename] Impress + + + + +$[officename] Impress Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..814526799 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Menus + /text/simpress/main0100.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0528bd84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + File + /text/simpress/main0101.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +File +These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6139cacfe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/simpress/main0103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +View +This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ + + + +Handout + + + + + + + + + + + +Object Moving Helplines + + + +Comments +Show or hide a presentation's annotations. + +Master Background +Toggle the visibility of a master slide's background to be used as the background of the current slide. + +Master Objects +Toggle the visibility of a master slide's objects to appear on the current slide. + + + + +Clip Art Gallery + + + +Zoom + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9641a3a06 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Insert + /text/simpress/main0104.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Insert

+This menu contains the commands that are used to insert new elements into the document, for example, graphics, objects, special characters and other files. +
+ + + +

Chart

+Inserts a chart. +

Table

+ + + + + + +

+ + +

Floating Frame

+ + +

Hyperlink

+ +

Special Character

+ + +

Slide Number

+Adds the slide number or the page number. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84d7cb1c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Window + /text/simpress/main0107.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Window +Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows. +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d83b6cff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0113.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Modify +/text/simpress/main0113.xhp + + + +
+Modify +Contains commands for modifying objects in your document. +
+Rotate +Rotates the selected object(s). + + + + + +Name Object + +Group + +Ungroup + +Enter Group + +Exit Group + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3f81967d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Slide Show + /text/simpress/main0114.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Slide Show +Contains commands and options for running a presentation. +
+ + +Slide Show Settings + + + +Interaction + + +Custom Animation + + + + +Custom Slide Show + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88020488b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/simpress/main0200.xhp + + + +
+

Toolbars

+
+ +
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +Add objects, including charts, spreadsheets, and images, to your document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dc58a34b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Line and Filling Bar +/text/simpress/main0202.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Line and Filling Bar

+The Line and Filling Bar contains commands and options that you can apply in the current view. +
+ + + + + + +

Line Style

+ + +

Line Width

+ + +

Line Color

+ + + + +

Area Style / Filling

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6eda91af3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + + + + Text Formatting Bar + /text/simpress/main0203.xhp + + + +
+ Text Formatting Bar + To display the Text Formatting Bar, place the cursor inside a text object. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + Font Color + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Character + + + Paragraph + + + Numbering Symbols + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Increase Font Size

+
+ + Increases the font size of the selected text. +
+

Decrease Font Size

+
+ + Reduces the font size of the selected text. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c2125669 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Slide View Bar +/text/simpress/main0204.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Slide View Bar

+The Slide View bar opens with the Slide Sorter view. +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9d43733d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Status Bar +/text/simpress/main0206.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Status Bar + The status bar displays information about your document, including the currently selected object. You can double-click some status bar items to open a related dialog window. +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b52836f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rulers +/text/simpress/main0209.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +rulers; in presentations +origin of rulers + +Rulers +You can use vertical and horizontal rulers at the left and upper edges of the $[officename] Impress workspace to assist you in creating your slide. The sections of the rulers that cover the area of the slide are white. +When you select an object, its dimensions are displayed on the rulers as gray double lines. To precisely resize the object, drag one of the double lines to a new location on the ruler. +When you select a text object on a slide, indents and tabs are displayed on the horizontal ruler. To change the indent or tab settings for the text object, drag an indent or a tab marker to a new location on the ruler. +You can also drag a snap line from a ruler to help you align objects on your slide. To insert a snap line using a ruler, drag the edge of a ruler into the slide. +To show or hide the rulers, choose View - Rulers. +To specify the measurement units for a ruler, right-click the ruler, and then choose a new unit from the list. +To change the origin (0 point) of the rulers, drag the intersection of the two rulers in the top left corner into the workspace. Vertical and horizontal guides appear. Continue to drag until the vertical and horizontal guides are where you want the new origin to be, and then release. To reset the origins of the rulers to the default values, double-click the intersection. +To change the slide margins, drag the edge of the white areas in the rulers. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f83ce75c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + +Drawing Bar +/text/simpress/main0210.xhp + + + +
+ +

Drawing Bar

+The Drawing bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands. + +
+You can view the Drawing bar also from a text document or spreadsheet. The set of visible icons can be slightly different according to the current document type. +

Select

+To select an object on the current slide, click the Select tool (white arrow) on the Drawing bar, and then click the object. +To select more than one object, hold down Shift while you click. +To select an object that is behind another object, hold OptionAlt, and then click the object. To select the next underlying object in the stacking, hold OptionAlt, and then click again. To return the selection to the previously selected object, hold down Shift + OptionAlt, and then click. +To add text to a selected object, double-click the object and type or enter your text. +To remove a selection, click anywhere outside the selected object, or press Escape. + + + +

Rectangle

+Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + +

Ellipse

+Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + +

Text

+Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. + + + + +

Lines and Arrows

+Opens the Arrows toolbar to insert lines and arrows. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Points

+Enables you to edit points on your drawing. +

Gluepoints

+Enables you to edit gluepoints on your drawing. + + +

From File

+ + + + +

Rotate

+This tool is used to rotate the object. + + + + + +

Extrusion On/Off

+Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5265688f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0211.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Outline Bar +/text/simpress/main0211.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Outline Bar

+In Outline View, the Outline bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feadc64a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0212.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Slide Sorter Bar +/text/simpress/main0212.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Slide Sorter Bar +In Slide Sorter view, the Slide Sorter bar can be used. +
+ + +Slide Show + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9cc6d7495 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Options Bar +/text/simpress/main0213.xhp + + + +
+Options Bar +To display the Options Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Options. +
+
+ +
UFI: changed some links, see #i52549 + +Display Grid + + + + +Helplines While Moving + + +Snap to Grid + + +Snap to Snap Lines + + +Snap to Page Margins + + +Snap to Object Border + + +Snap to Object Points + + +Allow Quick Editing + + +Select Text Area Only + + + + + +removed 4 icons, see i81634 + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc0bba804 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Image Bar +/text/simpress/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Image Bar +Use the Image bar to set the color, contrast, and brightness options for the selected graphic object(s). +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..562a3aa5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Impress Features +/text/simpress/main0503.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ $[officename] Impress Features + $[officename] Impress lets you create professional slide shows that can include charts, drawing objects, text, multimedia and a variety of other items. If you want, you can even import and modify Microsoft PowerPoint presentations. +
+ For on-screen slide shows, animation, slide transitions and multimedia are a few of the techniques you can use to make your presentation more exciting. + Creating Vector Graphics + Many of the tools for creating vector graphics in $[officename] Draw are available in $[officename] Impress. + Creating Slides + $[officename] Impress provides you with templates to create professional-looking slides. + You can also assign a number of dynamic effects to your slides, including animation and transition effects. + Creating Presentations + Several views or pages are available when you design a slide show. For example, the Slide Sorter displays an overview of your slides in thumbnail form, while the Handout page contains both the slide and the text you want to distribute to the audience. + $[officename] Impress also lets you rehearse the timing of your slide show. + Publishing Presentations + You can publish your slides on-screen, as handouts, or as HTML documents. + Giving Presentations + $[officename] Impress gives you the choice of running a slide show automatically or manually. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4ecca22c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/simpress/main_edit.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit

+This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Points

+Switches the Edit Points mode on and off. + +

Gluepoints

+Switches the Edit Gluepoints mode on and off. + + +

Fields

+ + + +

Links

+ + +

Object

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91c99411d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + Format + /text/simpress/main_format.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Format

+ Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. +
+ + + temporary solution for "Align Text", until submenu is made + +

Lists

+ Opens a submenu where you can modify the formatting of list paragraphs. + + + +

Styles

+ Shows commands to edit, update, create, and manage styles.Needs a submenu page + +

Character

+ + +

Paragraph

+ + +

Bullets and Numbering

+ + +

Table

+ Shows commands to format, edit, and delete a table and its elements.Needs a submenu page + +

Image

+ Shows commands to crop, edit, and manage images.Needs a submenu page. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_slide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_slide.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b4363d34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_slide.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + Slide + /text/simpress/main_slide.xhp + + + + +
+ + Slide + This menu provides slide management and navigation commands. +
+ New Slide + +

Duplicate Slide

+ Creates a copy of the currently selected slide. + Insert Slide from File + + Layout + +

Delete Slide

+ Deletes the selected slide(s). +

Save Background Image

+ If the slide has a background image, this option allows the user to save the corresponding background image file. +

Set Background Image

+ Opens a File Picker to choose an image file to be set as the background of the current slide. + Slide Properties + + Change Slide Master + +

New Master

+ Creates a new Master Slide. This function is only available in Master View. + To enter the Master View, go to View - Master Slide. To exit the Master View, go to View - Normal. +

Delete Master

+ Deletes the currently selected Master Slide. This function is only available in Master View +

Master Background

+ This option allows to show or hide the background image defined in the master slide. +

Master Objects

+ This option allows to show or hide objects defined in the master slide. +

Master Elements

+ Displays a dialog box where the following elements from the master slide can be enabled or disabled: + + + Header + + + Date/Time + + + Footer + + + Slide Number + + +

Show Slide

+ If a slide is hidden, this function makes it visible again. +

Hide Slide

+ If a slide is visible, this function hides it. +

Rename Slide

+ Opens a dialog box where a name can be set for the current slide. +

Jump to Last Edited Slide

+ Navigates to the last edited slide in the document. +

Move

+ Shows a list of move operations that can be applied to the current slide: + + + Slide to Start: Moves the current slide to the first position. + + + Slide Up: Moves the current slide one position up in the presentation. + + + Slide Down: Moves the current slide one position down in the presentation. + + + Slide to End: Moves the current slide to the last position. + + +

Navigate

+ Shows a list of functions that can be used to navigate through the slides: + + + To First Slide: Selects the first slide in the presentation. + + + To Previous Slide: Navigates to the previous slide with respect to the currently selected slide. + + + To Next Slide: Navigates to the next slide with respect to the currently selected slide. + + + To Last Slide: Selects the last slide in the presentation. + + + Summary Slide + + Expand Slide + + Slide Transition + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_tools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_tools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c39b11072 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main_tools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Tools + /text/simpress/main_tools.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Tools +Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences. +
+ + + +ImageMap + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect Options + + +Customize + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf0b7bfa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + Textbox and Shape (Impress) + /text/simpress/submenu_object_shape.xhp + + + +
+

Textbox and Shape

+Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected textbox or shape. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bec6bee34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ + + + + + +To access this function... +/text/smath/00/00000004.xhp + + + +

To access this function... +

+
+Choose Edit - Next Marker + +F4 key +
+
+Choose Edit - Previous Marker + +Shift+F4 +
+
+Choose Edit - Next Error + +F3 key +
+
+Choose Edit - Previous Error + +Shift+F3 +
+On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Zoom 100% + + +Zoom 100% + + +
+
+
+Choose View - Zoom In + +On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Zoom In + + +Zoom In + + +
+
+
+
+Choose View - Zoom Out + +On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Zoom Out + + +Zoom Out + + +
+
+
+
+Choose View - Show All + +On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Show All + + +Show All + + +
+
+
+
+Choose View - Update + +F9 key +On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Update + + +Update + + +
+
+
+Choose View - AutoUpdate Display + +Choose View - Elements + +
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Unary/Binary Operators + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Unary/Binary Operators from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Relations + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Relations from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Operators + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Operators from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Functions + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Functions from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Brackets + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Brackets from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Attributes + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Attributes from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Formats + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Formats from the listbox. +
+
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Set Operations + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Set Operations from the listbox. +
+Choose Format - Fonts + +Choose Format - Fonts - Modify + +Choose Format - Font Size + +Choose Format - Spacing + +Choose Format - Align + +Choose Format - Text Mode + +
+Choose Tools - Symbols + +On the Tools bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Symbols + + +Symbols + + +
+
+
+Choose Tools - Symbols - Edit + +Choose Tools - Import Formula + +Choose Tools - Import MathML from Clipboard + +Choose Tools - Customize + +
+Open the context menu in the Commands window - choose Others + +Choose View - Elements; then on the Elements pane select Others from the listbox. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Formula Cursor + + +Formula Cursor + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d62e92ce7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Next Marker +/text/smath/01/02080000.xhp + + + +
+markers; next +placeholders; position of next +markers; definition + + +Next Marker +Moves the cursor to the next marker (to the right). +
+"Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95db9d13a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Previous Marker +/text/smath/01/02090000.xhp + + + +
+markers; previousplaceholders; previous marker + + + Previous Marker + Moves the cursor to the previous marker (to the left). +
+ "Markers" are placeholders. They take the form of <?> in the Commands window. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37569d403 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Next Error +/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp + + + +
+error search; next error +finding ;errors in %PRODUCTNAME Math + + +Next Error +Moves the cursor to the next error (moving right). +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9668d002 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Previous Error +/text/smath/01/02110000.xhp + + + +
+error search; previous error + +Previous Error +Moves the cursor to the previous error (moving left). +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3b4b2a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom In +/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+zooming in on formula display +formulas; increasing size of display + + +Zoom In +Increases the display scale of the formula by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3adfe125d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+views; zooming out $[officename] Math +formula display sizes +formulas; zooming out +zooming out on formula display + + +Zoom Out +Decreases the display scale of formulas by 25%. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb370d700 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Show All +/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp + + + +
+views; maximum size +maximum formula size +formulas; maximum size + + +Show All +Displays the entire formula in the maximum size possible so that all elements are included. The formula is reduced or enlarged so that all formula elements can be displayed in the work area. The current zoom factor is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available zoom options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains zoom commands. The zoom commands and icons are only available in Math documents, not for embedded Math objects. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e8229002 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Update +/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp + + + +
+updating formula view +formula view; updating + + +Update +This command updates the formula in the document window. +Changes in the Commands window are automatically updated if AutoUpdate Display is activated. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8aadc143c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoUpdate Display +/text/smath/01/03080000.xhp + + + +
+changes; accepting automatically + + +AutoUpdate Display +Automatically updates a modified formula. If you do not select this option, the formula will only be updated after you choose View - Update or press F9. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73fecf69b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Elements + /text/smath/01/03090000.xhp + + + +
+ +selection options in formulas +formulas; selections +elements;in Math + + + + +

Elements +

+ This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula. +
+ Some examples show you the range of operations. + The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. + You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9c37a7f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Unary/Binary Operators +/text/smath/01/03090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+unary operators +binary operators +operators; unary and binary +plus signs +plus/minus signs +minus/plus signs +multiplication signs +NOT operator +AND operator +logical operators +Boolean operators +OR operator +concatenating math symbols +addition signs +subtraction signs +minus signs +slash division sign +backslash division sign +indexes; adding to formulas +powers +division signs +user-defined operators;unary and binary + + +Unary/Binary Operators +You can choose various unary and binary operators to build your $[officename] Math formula. Unary refers to operators that affect one placeholder. Binary refers to operators that connect two placeholders. The lower area of the Elements pane displays the individual operators. The context menu of the Commands window also contains a list of these operators, as well as additional operators. If you need an operator that is not contained in the Elements pane, use the context menu or type it directly in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a complete list of the unary and binary operators. The symbol next to the operator indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Unary and Binary Operators + + + + + Plus Icon + + + + +Plus +Inserts a plus with one placeholder. You can also type + <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Minus Icon + + + + +Minus +Inserts a minus with one placeholder. You can also type -<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Plus/Minus Icon + + + + +Plus/Minus +Inserts a plus/minus with one placeholder. You can also type +-<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Minus/Plus Icon + + + + +Minus/Plus +Inserts a minus/plus with one placeholder. You can also type -+<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Addition (plus) Icon + + + + +Addition (plus) +Inserts a plus with two placeholders. You can also type <?>+<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Multiplication (dot) Icon + + + + +Multiplication (dot) +Inserts a dot operator with two placeholders. You can also type <?>cdot<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Multiplication (x) Icon + + + + +Multiplication (x) +Inserts an 'x' multiplication with two placeholders. You can also type <?>times<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Multiplication (*) Icon + + + + +Multiplication (*) +Inserts an asterisk multiplication sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>*<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Subtraction Icon + + + + +Subtraction +Inserts a subtraction sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>-<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Division (Fraction) Icon + + + + +Division (Fraction) +Inserts a fraction with two placeholders. You can also type <?>over<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Division Icon + + + + +Division +Inserts a division sign with two placeholders. You can also type <?>div<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Division (Slash) Icon + + + + +Division (Slash) +Inserts a slash '/' with two placeholders. You can also type <?>/<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Boolean NOT Icon + + + + +Boolean NOT +Inserts a Boolean NOT with one placeholder. You can also type neg<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Boolean AND Icon + + + + +Boolean AND +Inserts a Boolean AND with two placeholders. You can also type <?>and<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Boolean OR Icon + + + + +Boolean OR +Inserts a Boolean OR with two placeholders. You can also type <?>or<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + + Concatenate Icon + + + + +Concatenate +Inserts a concatenation sign with two placeholders. You can also type circ in the Commands window. + + +
+ +You can also insert user-defined unary operators by typing uoper in the Commands window, followed by the syntax for the character. This function is useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. For example, the command uoper %theta x produces a small Greek letter theta (a component of the $[officename] Math character set). You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. + You can also insert user-defined binary commands by typing boper into the Commands window. For example, the command y boper %theta x produces the small Greek letter theta preceded by a y and followed by an x. You can also insert characters not in the $[officename] character set by choosing Tools - Symbols - Edit. +By typing <?>oplus<?> in the Commands window, you insert a circled plus operator in your document. +Type <?>ominus<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled minus operator. +Type <?>odot<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled dot operator in the formula. +Type <?>odivide<?> in the Commands window to insert a circled division operator in the formula. + +Type a wideslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from lower left to upper right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is up, and everything to the right is down. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. + +Type a widebslash b in the Commands window to produce two characters with a slash (from upper left to lower right) between them. The characters are set such that everything to the left of the slash is down, and everything to the right is up. This command is also available in the context menu of the Commands window. +Type sub or sup in the Commands window to add indexes and powers to the characters in your formula; for example, a sub 2. +If you want to use a colon ':' as division sign, choose Tools - Symbols or click the Symbols icon on the Tools bar. Click the Edit button in the dialog that appears, then select the Special symbol set. Enter a meaningful name next to Symbol, for example, "divide" and then click the colon in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click OK to close the Symbols dialog,too. Now you can use the new symbol, in this case the colon, by entering its name in the Commands window, for example, a %divide b = c. +When entering information manually in the Commands window, please note that a number of operators require spaces between the elements for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are using values instead of placeholders in your operators, for example, to construct a division 4 div 3 or a div b. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..742300282 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,527 @@ + + + + + + + + +Relations +/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+relations; in $[officename] Math +$[officename] Math; relations +equal sign +inequation +unequal sign +identical to relation +congruent relation +right angled relations +orthogonal relations +divides relation +does not divide relation +less than relations +approximately equal to relation +parallel relation +less than or equal to signs +greater than or equal to signs +proportional to relation +similar to relations +toward relation +logic symbols +double arrow symbols +much greater than relation +considerably greater than relation +greater than relations +much less than relation +considerably less than relation +defined as relation +correspondence; picture by +picture by correspondence +image of relation +correspondence; original by +original by correspondence +precedes relation +not precedes relation +succeeds relation +not succeeds relation +precedes or equal relation +succeeds or equal relation +precedes or equivalent relation +succeeds or equivalent relation + + +Relations +You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Relations: + + + + +is equal Icon + + + + +is equal +Inserts an equal sign (=) with two placeholders. You can also directly type <?> = <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +does not equal Icon + + + + +does not equal +The neq icon or command inserts an inequality with two placeholders. You can also type <?> neq <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +identical to Icon + + + + +identical to +Inserts a character for the identical to (congruent) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> equiv <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +orthogonal to Icon + + + + +orthogonal to +Inserts a character for an orthogonal (right angled) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ortho <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +divides Icon + + + + +divides +Inserts the divides character. You can also type <?> divides <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +does not divide Icon + + + + +does not divide +This icon inserts the does not divide character. You can also type <?>ndivides<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +less than Icon + + + + +less than +Inserts the less than relation. You can also type <?>lt<?> or <?> < <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +greater than Icon + + + + +greater than +Inserts the greater than relation. You can also type <?> gt <?> or <?> > <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +approximately equal to Icon + + + + +approximately equal to +Inserts the approximately equal relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> approx <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +parallel to Icon + + + + +parallel to +Inserts a parallel relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>parallel<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +less than or equal to (slanted) Icon + + + + +less than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts a less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> leslant <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +greater than or equal to (slanted) Icon + + + + +greater than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>geslant<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +similar or equal to Icon + + + + +similar or equal to +Inserts the similar or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>simeq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +proportional to Icon + + + + +proportional to +Inserts the proportional to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> prop <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +less than or equal to Icon + + + + +less than or equal to +Inserts the less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> le <?> or <?> <= <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +greater than or equal to Icon + + + + +greater than or equal to +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ge <?> or <?> >= <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +similar to Icon + + + + +similar to +This icon inserts the similar to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>sim<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +toward Icon + + + + +toward +Inserts a toward relation symbol with two placeholders. You can also type <?> toward <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +double arrow pointing left Icon + + + + +double arrow pointing left +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left. You can also type dlarrow in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +double arrow pointing left and right Icon + + + + +double arrow pointing left and right +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left and right with two operators. You can also type dlrarrow in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +double arrow pointing right Icon + + + + +double arrow pointing right +Inserts the logical operator arrow with double bar pointing right with two placeholders. You can also type drarrow in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +precedes Icon + + + + +precedes +Inserts the logical operator precedes with two placeholders. You can also type prec in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +succeeds Icon + + + + +succeeds +Inserts the logical operator succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type succ in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +not precedes Icon + + + + +not precedes +Inserts the logical operator not precedes with two placeholders. You can also type nprec in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +not succeeds Icon + + + + +not succeeds +Inserts the logical operator not succeeds with two placeholders. You can also type nsucc in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +precedes or equal Icon + + + + +precedes or equal +Inserts the logical operator precedes or equal with two placeholders. You can also type preccurlyeq in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +succeeds or equal Icon + + + + +succeeds or equal +Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equal with two placeholders. You can also type succcurlyeq in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +precedes or equivalent Icon + + + + +precedes or equivalent +Inserts the logical operator precedes or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type precsim in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +succeeds or equivalent Icon + + + + +succeeds or equivalent +Inserts the logical operator succeeds or equivalent with two placeholders. You can also type succsim in the Commands window. + + +
+ + +To create the much greater than relation with two placeholders, type <?> gg <?> or >> in the Commands window. +Type ll or << in the Commands window to insert the much less than relation into the formula. +The is defined as relation with two placeholders is inserted by typing <?>def<?>. +Insert the picture by correspondence character with two placeholders by typing <?> transl <?> in the Commands window. +The <?>transr<?> command inserts the original by correspondence character with two placeholders. +When entering information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are working with values instead of placeholders. For example, for the "is considerably greater" relation, type either 10 gg 1 or a gg b. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e74d8ab28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,256 @@ + + + + + + + + +Operators +/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+operators; general +upper limits +limits; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +product +coproduct +lower limits +curve integrals +user-defined operators; general +integrals; signs +summation + + +Operators +You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Elements pane. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Operator Functions + + + + +Limit Icon + + + + +Limit +Inserts the limit sign with one placeholder. You can also enter lim <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Summation Icon + + + + +Summation +Inserts a summation sign with one placeholder. You can also enter sum <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Product Icon + + + + +Product +Inserts a product sign with one placeholder. You can also type prod <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Coproduct Icon + + + + +Coproduct +Inserts a coproduct symbol with one placeholder. You can also enter coprod <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Upper and Lower Limit Icon + + + + +Upper and Lower Limit +Inserts a range statement upper and lower limit for integral and summation with one placeholder. You can also type from{<?>} to{<?>} <?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements must be combined with the appropriate operators. The limits will be centered above/below the summation character. + + +
+ + + + + +Integral Icon + + + + +Integral +Inserts an integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type int <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Double Integral Icon + + + + +Double Integral +Inserts a double integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type iint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Triple Integral Icon + + + + +Triple Integral +Inserts a triple integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type iiint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Lower Limit Icon + + + + +Lower Limit +Inserts a lower limit range statement for integral and sum with placeholders. You can also type from {<?>}<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Curve Integral Icon + + + + +Curve Integral +Inserts a curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type lint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Double Curve Integral Icon + + + + +Double Curve Integral +Inserts a double curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type llint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Triple Curve Integral Icon + + + + +Triple Curve Integral +Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Upper Limit Icon + + + + +Upper Limit +Inserts the range statement upper limit for integral and summation with placeholders You can also type to <?><?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements can only be used if combined with the appropriate operators. + + +
+ +You can also add limits to an operator (for example, an integral) by first clicking the desired operator and then clicking the limit symbol. This method is faster than typing the commands directly. +The command liminf inserts the limit inferior with one placeholder. +The command limsup inserts the limit superior with one placeholder. +By typing oper in the Commands window, you can insert user-defined operators in $[officename] Math, a feature useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. An example is oper %theta x. Using the oper command, you can also insert characters not in the default $[officename] character set. oper can also be used in connection with limits; for example, oper %union from {i=1} to n x_{i}. In this example, the union symbol is indicated by the name union. However, this is not one of the predefined symbols. To define it, choose Tools - Symbols. select Special as the symbol set in the dialog that appears, then click the Edit button. In the next dialog, select Special as the symbol set again. Enter a meaningful name in the Symbol text box, for example, "union" and then click the union symbol in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click Close to close the Symbols dialog. You are now finished and can type the union symbol in the Commands window, by entering oper %union. +Limits can be arranged in ways other than centered above/below the operator. Use the options provided by $[officename] Math for working with superscript and subscript indexes. For example, type sum_a^b c in the Commands window to arrange the limits to the right of the sum symbol. If your limit entries contain longer expressions, you must put them in group brackets, for example, sum_{i=1}^{2*n} b. When formulas are imported from older versions this is done automatically. To change the spacing (gaps) between the characters choose Format - Spacing - Category - Indexes or Format - Spacing - Category - Limits. Additional basic information about indexes is given elsewhere in the Help. +When you type information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for correct structure. This is especially true when your operators are supplied with values instead of placeholders, for example, lim a_{n}=a. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..822fb9736 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ + + + + + + + + +Functions +/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+functions; in $[officename] Math +natural exponential functions +natural logarithms +exponential functions +logarithms +variables; with right exponents +exponents; variables with right +trigonometrical functions +sine function +cosine function +cotangent function +hyperbolic sine function +square roots +hyperbolic cosine function +hyperbolic tangent function +hyperbolic cotangent function +roots +arc sine function +arc cosine function +arc cotangent function +absolute values +area hyperbolic cosine function +area hyperbolic tangent function +area hyperbolic cotangent function +factorial +values; absolute +tangent function + + +Functions +Choose a function in the lower part of the Elements pane. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Elements pane need to be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Elements pane. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +List of functions + + + + +Natural Exponential Icon + + + + +Natural Exponential Function +Inserts a natural exponential function. You can also type func e^<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Natural Logarithm Icon + + + + +Natural Logarithm +Inserts a natural (base e) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type ln(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Exponential Icon + + + + +Exponential Function +Inserts an exponential function with one placeholder. You can also type exp(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Logarithm Icon + + + + +Logarithm +Inserts a common (base 10) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type log(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Power Icon + + + +PowerUFI: removed help id +Inserts x raised to the yth power. You can also type <?>^{<?>} in the Commands window. You can replace the ^ character with rsup or sup. + + +
+ + + + + +Sine Icon + + + + +Sine +Inserts a sine function with one placeholder. You can also type sin(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Cosine Icon + + + + +Cosine +Inserts a cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type cos(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Tangent Icon + + + + +Tangent +Inserts a tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type tan(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Cotangent Icon + + + + +Cotangent +Inserts a cotangent symbol with a placeholder. You can also type cot(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Hyperbolic Sine Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts a hyperbolic sine with one placeholder. You can also type sinh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Square Root Icon + + + + +Square Root +Inserts a square root symbol with one placeholder. You can also type sqrt(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Hyperbolic Cosine Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts a hyperbolic cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type cosh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Hyperbolic Tangent Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts a hyperbolic tangent symbol with one placeholder. You can also type tanh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Hyperbolic Cotangent Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts a hyperbolic cotangent symbol with one placeholder. You can directly type coth(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +nth Root Icon + + + + +nth Root +Inserts an nth root function with two placeholders. You can also type nroot n x in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Arc Sine Icon + + + + +Arc Sine +Inserts an arc sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcsin(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Arc Cosine Icon + + + + +Arc Cosine +Inserts an arc cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type arccos(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Arc Tangent Icon + + + + +Arc Tangent +Inserts an arc tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arctan(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Arc Cotangent Icon + + + + +Arc Cotangent +Inserts an arc cotangent function with one placeholder. You can directly type arccot(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Absolute Value Icon + + + + +Absolute Value +Inserts an absolute value sign with one placeholder. You can also type abs(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Sine Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts an area hyperbolic sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arsinh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cosine Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts an area hyperbolic cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcosh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Tangent Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type artanh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cotangent Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic cotangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arcoth(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Factorial Icon + + + + +Factorial +Inserts the factorial sign with one placeholder. You can directly type fact <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ +You can also assign an index or an exponent to a function. For example, typing sin^2x results in a function "sine to the power of 2x". +When typing functions manually in the Commands window, note that spaces are required for some functions (for example, abs 5=5 ; abs -3=3). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15185c043 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ + + + + + + + + +Brackets +/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+brackets; in $[officename] Math +brackets; round (Math) +parentheses (Math) +brackets; square (Math) +brackets; double square (Math) +braces in %PRODUCTNAME Math +brackets; angle (Math) +brackets; operator (Math) +brackets; angle with operator +brackets; group +grouping brackets +round brackets +square brackets +double square brackets; scalable +scalable braces +scalable round brackets +scalable lines with ceiling +vertical bars +brackets; scalable +operator brackets +floor brackets +lines; with edges +ceiling brackets; lines with +lines; scalable +ceiling brackets;scalable lines with +brackets; single, without group function +single brackets without group function +brackets;widowed +widowed brackets +orphaned brackets + + +Brackets +You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Bracket types + + + + +Icon + + + + +Round brackets (parentheses) +Inserts a placeholder within normal round brackets (parentheses). You can also type (<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within square brackets. You can also type [<?>] in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Double square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within double square brackets. You can also type ldbracket <?> rdbracket in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Braces (curly brackets) +Inserts a placeholder within braces (curly brackets). You can also type lbrace<?>rbrace directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Single vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within vertical bars. You can also type lline <?> rline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Double vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within double vertical bars. You can also type ldline <?> rdline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Angle brackets +Inserts a placeholder within angle brackets. You can also type langle <?> rangle in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Operator brackets +Inserts two placeholders within operator brackets. You can also type langle <?> mline <?> rangle in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Group brackets +Inserts group brackets. You can also type {<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Round brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable rounded brackets with one placeholder. You can also type left(<?> right) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left[<?> right] in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Double square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable double square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left ldbracket <?> right rdbracket directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + + +Braces (scalable) Icon + + + + +Braces (scalable) +Inserts scalable braces with a placeholder. You can also type left lbrace <?> right rbrace in the Commands window. The size of the braces is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + + +Single vertical bars (scalable) Icon + + + + +Single vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable single vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left lline <?> right rline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + + +Double vertical bars (scalable) Icon + + + + +Double vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable double vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left ldline <?> right rdline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + + +Angle brackets (scalable) Icon + + + + +Angle brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable angle brackets with a placeholder. You can also type left langle <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + + +Operator brackets (scalable) Icon + + + + +Operator brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable operator brackets with placeholders. You can also type left langle <?> mline <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + + +Brace top (scalable) Icon + + + + +Brace top (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal upper brace with placeholders. You can also enter <?> overbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + + +Brace bottom (scalable) Icon + + + + +Brace bottom (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal lower brace with placeholders. You can also type <?> underbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + +To insert floor brackets, type lfloor<?>rfloor directly in the Commands window. + +To insert ceiling brackets, type lceil<?>rceil directly in the Commands window. + +To insert scalable floor brackets, type left lfloor<?>right rfloor directly in the Commands window. + +To insert scalable ceiling brackets, type left lceil<?>right rceil directly in the Commands window. +Brackets are automatically sized when you type left and right in front of the bracket command, for example, left(a over b right). You can also set the size and spacing of brackets by choosing Format - Spacing - Category - Brackets and setting the desired percentages. Mark the Scale all brackets check box to apply the changes to all brackets in the formula. +You can also use single brackets. To do this, type a backslash \ in front of the command. For example, when you type \[, the left square bracket appears without its counterpart. This is useful for creating reverse brackets or for constructing intervals. Note that only non-scalable brackets can be used individually. To change the size, use the size command. +Examples of single brackets +For non-scaled brackets: +a = \{ \( \[ b newline +{} + c \] \) \ } +For scaled brackets use none as the bracket name +a = left ( a over b right none newline +left none phantom {a over b} + c right ) +The phantom statement ensures that the last bracket is the correct size. +Be sure to put spaces (gaps) between elements when entering them directly in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is recognized. +Useful information about indexes and exponents as well as scaling helps you structure formulas effectively. For more information about brackets, see Brackets and Grouping. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..49da44278 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ + + + + + + + + + Attributes + /text/smath/01/03090600.xhp + + + +
+ +attributes; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +formulas; attributes in +accents; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +attributes; accents +vector arrows as attributes +harpoon arrow attribute +tilde as attribute +circumflex attribute +bold attribute +italic attribute in %PRODUCTNAME Math +resizing;fonts +scaling;fonts +attributes; changing fonts +changing; fonts +attributes; colored characters +colored characters +attributes; changing defaults +circle attribute +double dot attribute +dot attribute +line through attribute +line above attribute +reversed circumflex attribute +overline attribute +wide vector arrow attribute +wide harpoon arrow attribute +wide tilde attribute +wide circumflex attribute +underline attribute +triple dot attribute +transparent character as attribute +mw added "scaling;fonts" + + Attributes + + You can choose from various attributes for %PRODUCTNAME Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Elements pane or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+ The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (choose View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. + In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. + Attribute Functions + + + + + Acute accent Icon + + + + + Acute accent + Inserts a placeholder with an acute accent. You can also type acute <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Grave accent Icon + + + + + Grave accent + Inserts a placeholder with a grave accent (grave). You can also type grave <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Reverse Circumflex Icon + + + + + Reverse Circumflex + Inserts a placeholder with a reverse circumflex ("checkmark") over it. You can also type check <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Breve Icon + + + + + Breve + Inserts a placeholder with an accent breve. You can also type breve <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Circle Icon + + + + + Circle + Inserts a placeholder with a circle over it. You can also type circle <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Vector arrow Icon + + + + + Vector arrow + Inserts a placeholder with a vector arrow. You can also type vec <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Harpoon Arrow Icon + + + Harpoon arrow + Insert a placeholder with a harpoon arrow. You can also type harpoon <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Tilde Icon + + + + + Tilde + Inserts a placeholder with a tilde. You can also type tilde <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Circumflex Icon + + + + + Circumflex + Inserts a placeholder with a circumflex ("hat"). You can also directly enter hat <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Line above (bar) Icon + + + + + Line above (bar) + Inserts a line ("bar") above a placeholder . You can also type bar <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Dot Icon + + + + + Dot + Inserts a placeholder with a dot over it. You can also type dot <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Wide vector arrow Icon + + + + + Wide vector arrow + Inserts a wide vector arrow with a placeholder. You can also type widevec in the Commands window. + + + + + Wide harpoon arrow Icon + + + + Wide harpoon arrow + Inserts a wide harpoon arrow with a placeholder. You can also type wideharpoon in the Commands window. + + + + + + Wide tilde Icon + + + + + Wide tilde + Inserts a wide tilde with a placeholder. You can also type widetilde directly in the Commands window. + + + + + + Wide circumflex Icon + + + + + Wide circumflex + Inserts a wide circumflex ("hat") with a placeholder. You can also type widehat in the Commands window. + + + + + + Double dot Icon + + + + + Double dot + Inserts a placeholder with two dots over it. You can also directly enter ddot <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Line over Icon + + + + + Line over + Inserts a line over a placeholder. You can also type overline <?> in the Commands window. The line adjusts itself to correct length. + + + + + + Line below Icon + + + + + Line below + Inserts a line below a placeholder. You can also type underline <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Line through (overstrike) Icon + + + + + Line through (overstrike) + Inserts a placeholder with a line (or overstrike) through it. You can also type overstrike <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Triple dot Icon + + + + + Triple dot + Inserts three dots over a placeholder. You can also type dddot <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Transparent Icon + + + + + Transparent + Inserts a placeholder for a transparent character. This character takes up the space of "a" but does not display it. You can also type phantom <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Icon + + + + + Bold font + Inserts a placeholder with bold formatting. You can also type bold <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Icon + + + + + Italic font + Inserts a placeholder with italic formatting. You can also type ital <?> or italic <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Icon + + + + + Resize + Inserts a command for modifying the font size with two placeholders. The first placeholder refers to the font size (for example, 12) and the second one contains the text. For proper structure, insert a space between the values. You can also directly enter size <?> <?> in the Commands window. + + + + + + Icon + + + + + Change font + Inserts a command for changing the font type, with two placeholders. Replace the first placeholder with the name of one of the custom fonts, Serif, Sans or Fixed. Replace the second placeholder with the text. You can also type font <?> <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + Use the color command to change the color of your formula. Type color, then type the color name (the available colors are white, black, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green and yellow), then the formula, character or character sequence. The input color green size 20 a results in a green letter "a" with a font size of 20. + The nbold and nitalic commands remove the bold or italic default fonts of formula components. For example, remove italics from the x in the formula 5 x + 3=28 by typing nitalic before the x as in 5 nitalic x + 3=28. + The attributes "acute", "bar", "breve", "check", "circle", "dot", "ddot", "dddot", "grave", "hat", "tilde" and "vec" have fixed sizes. Their width or length cannot be adjusted when positioned over a long symbol. + For size changes you can use size n, +n, -n, *n and /n , where n is a placeholder. This method is useful when the base size of the formula is subject to change. The commands size +n and size -n change point size, and size *n and size /n change the size by a percentage. For example, the command size *1.17 increases the size of a character by exactly 17%. + Note that some entries require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when you specify attributes with fixed values instead of placeholders. + For more information about formatting in %PRODUCTNAME Math, see Brackets and Grouping. + Information on attributes, indexes and exponents, and scaling can help you structure your documents more efficiently. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cd24b4cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,302 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Format +/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp + + + +
+formatting;in $[officename] Math +$[officename] Math; formatting +superscripts +binomials +vertical elements +lines; inserting in formulas +subscripts +stacks +vertical arrangement of elements +small gaps +alignment; left (Math) +left-justified alignment (Math) +alignment; horizontally centered (Math) +centered horizontally; alignment (Math) +alignment; right (Math) +right-justified alignment in %PRODUCTNAME Math +matrices; arranging +spaces in formulas +gaps in formulas +inserting; gaps +arranging;matrices +formulas;aligning +aligning formulas +mw added two index entries about formula alignment and made "formatting.." a two level entry + +Format +You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower part of the Elements pane. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. +
+
+ +
+The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Elements pane (menu View - Elements) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. +Formatting options + + + + +Superscript left Icon + + + +Superscript left +Inserts a superscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsup{<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Superscript top Icon + + + +Superscript top +Inserts a superscript directly above a placeholder. You can also type <?>csup<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Superscript right Icon + + + +Superscript right +Inserts a superscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>^{<?>} directly in the Commands window, or you can use rsup or sup. + + +
+ + + + +Vertical stack (2 elements) Icon + + + +Vertical stack (2 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack (binomial) with two placeholders. You can also type binom<?><?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +New line Icon + + + +New line +Inserts a new line in your document. You can also type newline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Subscript left Icon + + + +Subscript left +Inserts a subscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsub{<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Subscript bottom Icon + + + +Subscript bottom +Inserts a subscript directly under a placeholder. You can also type <?>csub<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Subscript right Icon + + + +Subscript right +Inserts a subscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>_{<?>} in the Commands window, and the subscript dash can be replaced by rsub or sub. + + +
+ + + + +Vertical stack (3 elements) Icon + + + +Vertical stack (3 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack with three placeholders. You can also type stack {<?>#<?>#<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Small gap Icon + + + +Small gap +Inserts a small gap between a placeholder and the next element. You can also type ` directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. + + +
+ + + + +Align left Icon + + + +Align left +This icon assigns left-alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can type alignl<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Align to horizontal center Icon + + + +Align to horizontal center +Assigns horizontal central alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can also type alignc<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Align right Icon + + + +Align right +Inserts the command for right alignment and a placeholder. You can also type alignr<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + +Matrix stack Icon + + + +Matrix stack +This icon inserts a matrix with four placeholders. You can also type matrix{<?>#<?>##<?>#<?>} directly in the Commands window. The position of an element inside this diagram is indicated by two coordinates; the first specifies the line number and the second the column number. You can expand this matrix in any direction in the Commands window by adding characters. + + +
+ + + + +Gap Icon + + + +Gap +This icon inserts a gap or space between placeholders. You can also type ~ directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. + + +
+For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are + + +aligning numerators and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} + + + +constructing binomials or stacks, for example binom{2*n}{alignr k} + + + +aligning the elements in a matrix, for example matrix{alignr a#b+2##c+1/3#alignl d} and + + +beginning a new line, for example a+b-c newline alignr x/y + + + +When using the align instructions, note that + + +they can only placed at the beginning of expressions and can only occur once. Therefore you can type a+b alignr c, but not a+alignr b + + + +they affect each other, which means that typing {alignl{alignr a}}over{b+c} aligns a on the right. + + +To align using the "matrix" command +matrix{ +alignr sin^2 x + cos^2 x#{}={}#alignl 1 ## +alignr cos^2 x #{}={} #alignl 1 - sin^2 x +} +Aligning to the left +If a line or an expression begins with text, it is aligned on the left by default. You can change this with any of the align commands. An example is stack{a+b-c*d#alignr "text"}, where "text" appears aligned to the right. Note that text must always be surrounded by quotation marks. +The standard centralized formulas can be aligned to the left without using the Format - Align menu. To do this, place an empty character string, that is, the inverted commas which surround any text "", before the section of formula that you want to align. For example, typing "" a+b newline "" c+d results in both equations being left-aligned instead of centered. +When typing information in the Commands window, note that some formats require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when entering values (for example, a lsup{3}) instead of placeholders. +Click Brackets and Grouping for more information about formatting in $[officename] Math. +Useful information about Indexes and Exponents and Scaling, helps you organize your document in the best possible way. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..daa4c0459 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,397 @@ + + + + + + + + +Set Operations +/text/smath/01/03090800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+set operations in $[officename]Math +sets of numbers +included in set operator +not included in set operator +owns command +includes set operator +empty set +intersection of sets +union of sets +difference set operator +quotient set +cardinal numbers +subset set operators +superset set operators +not subset set operators +not superset set operators +natural numbers +whole numbers +real numbers +complex numbers; set +rational numbers + + +Set Operations +Assign different set operators to the characters in your $[officename] Math formula. The individual operators are shown in the lower section of the Elements pane. Call the context menu in the Commands window to see an identical list of the individual functions. Any operators not found in the Elements pane have to be entered directly in the Commands window. You can also directly insert other parts of the formula even if symbols already exist for them. +
+
+ +
+After selecting the Set Operations item in the Elements pane, relevant icons will be shown in the lower part of this pane. Simply click a symbol to incorporate the operator in the formula being edited in the Commands window. +The set operations in detail: + + + + +is included in Icon + + + + +is included in +Use the icon to insert the is included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> in <?> directly into the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +is not included in Icon + + + + +is not included in +Use this icon to insert the is not included in set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> notin <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +includes Icon + + + + +includes +Use this icon to insert the set operator includes with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> owns <?> or <?> ni <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +empty set Icon + + + + +empty set +Use this icon to insert an empty set. Enter emptyset in the Commands window, in order to insert an empty set into your document. + + +
+ + + + + +Intersection Icon + + + + +Intersection +Use this icon to insert two placeholders with the set operator intersection of sets . The same happens if you enter <?> intersection <?> Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Union Icon + + + + +Union +Use this icon to insert the union set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?> union <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Difference Icon + + + + +Difference +Use this icon to insert the difference set operator. You can also enter <?> setminus <?> or <?> bslash <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Quotient set Icon + + + + +Quotient set +Use this icon to insert a slash for creating a quotient set with two placeholders. Enter <?>slash<?> in the Commands window, to achieve the same result. + + +
+ + + + + +aleph Icon + + + + +aleph +Use this icon to insert a cardinal number. You can achieve the same result by entering aleph in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Subset Icon + + + + +Subset +Use this icon to insert the is a subset of set operator. You can also enter <?>subset<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Subset or equal to Icon + + + + +Subset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the is a subset or equal to set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>subseteq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Superset Icon + + + + +Superset +Use this icon to insert the set operator is a superset of and two placeholders. You can also enter <?>supset<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Superset or equal to Icon + + + + +Superset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the set operator is a super set or equal to with two placeholders. Alternatively, you can enter <?>supseteq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +not subset Icon + + + + +not subset +Use this icon to insert the not subset set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this, you can also enter <?>nsubset<?>. + + +
+ + + + + +not subset or equal to Icon + + + + +not subset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the not subset or equal set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsubseteq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +not superset Icon + + + + +not superset +Use this icon to insert the not superset set operator with two placeholders. You can also enter <?>nsupset<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +not superset or equal to Icon + + + + +not superset or equal to +Use this icon to insert the not superset or equal set operator with two placeholders. Instead of this you can type <?>nsupseteq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Set of natural numbers Icon + + + + +Set of natural numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of natural numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setn in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Set of whole numbers Icon + + + + +Set of whole numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of whole numbers. You can also do this by entering setz in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Set of rational numbers Icon + + + + +Set of rational numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of rational numbers. You can also do this by directly entering setq in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Set of real numbers Icon + + + + +Set of real numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of real numbers. Instead of this, you can enter setr in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Set of complex numbers Icon + + + + +Set of complex numbers +Use this icon to insert a character for the set of complex numbers. You can also enter setc in the Commands window. + + +
+ +Be sure to leave spaces (gaps) between values and commands when entering them manually in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is achieved. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2228cf57d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Math Examples +/text/smath/01/03090900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+examples;$[officename] Math formulas +$[officename] Math;examples +formulas;examples + +$[officename] Math Examples + +The following is a list of sample formulas in $[officename] Math. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..228c27fad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Symbols with Indices +/text/smath/01/03090901.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Symbols with Indices +The following example explains how to create symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window by using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +
+ + Symbols with Indices + +D_mn^ size /2 LEFT(3 OVER 2 RIGHT) + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e4b038d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Symbols with Indices +/text/smath/01/03090902.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Symbols with Indices +Here is another example of creating symbols with indexes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +
+ + Symbols with Indices + +%SIGMA_g^{{}+{}}lsup 3 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..156091bcd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Symbols with Indices +/text/smath/01/03090903.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Symbols with Indices +A third example of how to use $[officename] Math to create symbols with indexes is shown below. You can copy the example into the clipboard and use it in your own formula in the Commands window. +
+ + Symbols with Indices + +%PHI^{i_1 i_2 dotsaxis i_n}_{k_1 k_2 dotsaxis k_n} + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..52468f2e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Matrix with Varying Font Sizes +/text/smath/01/03090904.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Matrix with Varying Font Sizes +Here is an example of how to create a matrix with varying font sizes in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +
+ + Matrix with varying font sizes + +func G^{(%alpha" ," %beta)}_{ x_m x_n} = left[ matrix { arctan(%alpha) # arctan(%beta) ## x_m + x_n # x_m - x_n }right] + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d20c47de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Matrix +/text/smath/01/03090905.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Matrix +Here is an example of how to create a matrix with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, you can copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +
+ + Matrix + +font sans bold size *2 A =left[matrix{A_11#A_12#dotsaxis#A_{1n}##A_21#{} #{}#A_{2n}##dotsvert#{}#{}#dotsvert##A_{n1}#A_{n2}#dotsaxis#A_nn}right] + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2808349e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Matrix in Bold Font +/text/smath/01/03090906.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Matrix in Bold Font +Here is an example of how to create a bold font matrix in $[officename] Math. You can copy this example to the Commands window using the clipboard and use it in your own formula. +
+ + Matrix in bold font + +bold { f(x", "y) = left [ stack { x + y over z + left lbrace matrix { 2 # 3 # 4 ## 4 # 5 # 6 ## 6 # 7 # 8} right rbrace # {y + sin (x)} over %alpha # z + y over g } right ]} + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08f98a713 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Functions +/text/smath/01/03090907.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Functions +Here is an example of how to create functions with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +
+ + Functions + +func f(x","y)={x sin x~ tan y} over {cos x} + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f1b34304 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Square Root +/text/smath/01/03090908.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Square Root +Here is an example of how to create a square root with $[officename] Math. If you want to use the example in your own formula, copy it to the Commands window using the clipboard. +
+ + Square Root + +%LAMBDA_{deg","t}=1 + %alpha_deg SQRT {M_t over M_{(t=0)}-1}~"." + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfde5e63d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fonts and Font Sizes +/text/smath/01/03090909.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+font sizes;example +sum range example +examples ;integral +range of integral example +integrals;example + +UFI: as fix to #i23019#, tried to make Integral and Range more visible in the HelpIntegral and Sum Ranges, Font Size +Here is an example of how to use various fonts and font sizes within a formula in $[officename] Math. +
+ + Integral and Sum Ranges, Font Size +f(t)=int from size*1.5 0 to 1 left[g(t')+sum from i=1 to N h_i(t')right] + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65955e7b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Attributes +/text/smath/01/03090910.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Attributes +This section contains an example of how you can use different attributes in a formula in $[officename] Math. +
+ +Icon + +%rho(font sans bold q","%omega) = int func e^{i %omega t}%rho(font sans bold q","t)"d"t + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..310fb6175 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Brackets and Grouping +/text/smath/01/03091100.xhp + + + + + brackets and grouping in Math + grouping and brackets in Math + +Brackets and Grouping +The quotation marks in the examples are used to emphasize text and do not belong to the content of the formulas and commands. +When typing example formulas into the Commands window, note that spaces are often required for correct structure. +Braces "{}" are used to group expressions together to form one new expression. For example, sqrt {x * y} is the square root of the entire product x*y, while sqrt x * y is the square root of x multiplied by y. Braces do not require an extra space. +Set brackets were previously inserted in the Elements pane or directly in the Commands window as "left lbrace <?> right rbrace". Now, a left and a right set bracket can also be inserted using "lbrace" and "rbrace", with or without wildcards. +There are a total of eight (8) different types of brackets available. The "ceil" and "floor" brackets are often used for rounding up or down the argument to the next integer: lceil -3.7 rceil = -3 or lfloor -3.7 rfloor = -4. +Operator brackets, also known as Bra-kets (angle brackets with a vertical line in between), are common in Physics notation: langle a mline b rangle or langle a mline b mline c over d mline e rangle. The height and positioning of the vertical lines always corresponds exactly to the enclosing brackets. +All brackets may only be used in pairs. The brackets have some common characteristics: +All types of brackets have the same grouping function as described for "{}" brackets. +All types of brackets, including those that are visible, permit empty group definition. The enclosed expression may therefore be empty. +Brackets do not adjust their size to the enclosed expression. For example, if you want ( a over b ) with a bracket size adjusted to a and b you must insert "left" and "right". Entering left(a over b right) produces appropriate sizing. If, however, the brackets themselves are part of the expression whose size is changed, they are included the size change: size 3(a over b) and size 12(a over b). The sizing of the bracket-to-expression ratio does not change in any way. +Since "left" and "right" ensure unique assignment of the brackets, every single bracket can be used as an argument for these two commands, even placing right brackets on the left side, or left brackets on the right. Instead of a bracket you can use the "none" qualifier, which means that there is no bracket shown and that there is no space reserved for a bracket. Using this, you can create the following expressions: + + +left lbrace x right none + + + left [ x right ) + + + left ] x right [ + + + left rangle x right lfloor + + +The same rules apply to "left" and "right" as to the other brackets: they also work as group builders and may enclose empty expressions. +The combination of mismatched brackets, single brackets and repositioned left and right brackets occurs often in mathematical formulas. The following is a formula that will create an error when typed: + + +[2, 3) - right open interval + + +Using "left" and "right" makes the above expression valid in $[officename] Math: left [2, 3 right ). However, the brackets do not have any fixed size because they adjust to the argument. Setting a single bracket is a bit cumbersome. Therefore, there you can display single brackets with a fixed size by placing a "\" (backslash) in front of normal brackets. These brackets then act like any other symbol and no longer have the special functionality of brackets; that is they do not work as group builders and their orientation corresponds to that of other symbols. See size *2 \langle x \rangle and size *2 langle x rangle. +The complete overview is as follows + + +\{ or \lbrace, \} or \rbrace + + + \(, \) + + + \[, \] + + + \langle, \rangle + + + \lceil, \rceil + + + \lfloor, \rfloor + + + \lline, \rline + + + \ldline, \rdline + + +In this way, intervals like the one above can be built in $[officename] Math without any problems: \[2", "3\) or "\]2", "3\[ (Attention: These quotation marks are part of the entry.) +Please note that the quotation marks must be entered and can be obtained with Shift+2 and not with typographical quotation marks. Generally, punctuation marks (like the comma in this case) are set as text. Although it is also possible to type "\[2,~3\)" the above option is preferable. In the previous example, "fixed size" always describes a bracket size dependent on the font size used. +Nesting groups within each other is relatively problem-free. In the formula hat "{a + b}" the "hat" is displayed simply over the center of "{a + b}". Also, color red lceil a rceil and grave hat langle x * y rangle work as expected. The result of the latter can be compared to grave {hat langle x * y rangle}. These attributes do not compete, but rather can be combined. +This differs slightly for competing or mutually influencing attributes. This is often the case with font attributes. For example, which color does the b have in color yellow color red (a + color green b), or which size does it have in size *4 (a + size /2 b)? Given a base size of 12, does it have the size 48, 6 or even 24 (which could be seen as a combination)? The following are basic resolution rules, which will be followed consistently in the future. In general, the rules apply to all group operations. This only has a visible effect on the font attributes, like "bold", "ital", "phantom", "size", "color" and "font": + + + Group operations in sequence are treated as if every single operation is enclosed by braces. They are nested, and in every level there can be no more than one operation. Here is an example of a formula with many group operations: + size 12 color red font sans size -5 (a + size 8 b)" like "{size 12{color red{font sans{size -5 (a + {size 8 b})}}}}. + + +This example formula is then interpreted from left to right. The operations only affect its corresponding group (or expression). Operations further to the right "replace" or "combine themselves with" their predecessors. + + + A group operation does not have any effect on higher-level operations but rather affects only lower-level groups and expressions, including their brackets and super-/subscripts. For example, + a + size *2 (b * size -8 c_1)^2 + + +"color ..." and "font ..." as well as "size n" (n is a decimal) replace any preceding operations of the same type +for "size +n", "size -n", "size *n", and "size /n" the effects of the operations are combined, +size *2 size -5 a would be double the starting size minus 5 +font sans ( a + font serif b) +size *2 ( a + size /2 b ) +To change the size of a formula, use "size +" or -,*,/. Do not use "size n". These can easily be used in any context. This enables you to copy to other areas by using Copy and Paste, and the result remains the same. Furthermore, such expressions survive a change of base size in the menu better than when using "size n". If you use only size * and size / (for example, size *1.24 a or size /0.86 a) the proportions remain intact. +Examples (with a base size of 12 and 50% for indexes): +Exactly identical proportions with size 18 a_n and size *1.5 a_n. +This differs in different contexts: x^{size 18 a_n} and x^{size *1.5 a_n} +Examples with size +n for a comparison. They look identical: +a_{size 8 n} +a_{size +2 n} +a_{size *1.333 n} +The following examples, however, do not look identical: +x^{a_{size 8 n}} +x^{a_{size +2 n}} +x^{a_{size *1.333 n}} +All n here have different sizes. The size 1.333 results from 8/6, the desired size divided by the default index size 6. (Index size 50% with a base size of 12) + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f69b6bc38 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Indexes and Exponents +/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math +exponents and indexes in $[officename] Math + +Indexes and Exponents +Here, you will find basic information about indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math. You can try the examples described here to help you understand the details discussed. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) +The index and exponent for a character are displayed one on top of the other, left-justified to the base character. For example, type a_2^3 or a^3_2. This can be in any order. Instead of '_' and '^', you can use 'sub' and 'sup'. +However, it is no longer possible to use the following patterns +a_2_3 +a^2^3 +a_2^3_4 +Each sub-/superscript position of a base character can only be used once. You must use brackets to indicate the desired result. The following examples illustrate this +a_{2_3} +a^{2^3} +a_2^{3_4} +a_{2^3}^{4_5} +Unlike other formula editors where "_" and " ^ " only refer to the next character ("a_24" refers only to the "2"), $[officename] Math refers to the entire number(s)/name(s)/text. If you want to put superscripts and subscripts in sequence, the expression can be written as follows: a_2{}^3 or a^3{}_2 +To write tensors, $[officename] Math provides several options. In addition to the notation "R_i{}^{jk}{}_l", common in other applications, additional notations can be used, namely "R_i{}^jk{}_l" and "{{R_i}^jk}_l". +Super- and subscripts to the left of the base character can also be right-justified. To do this, the new commands "lsub" and "lsup" are used. Both commands have the same effect as "sub" and "sup", except that they are left of the base character. See also "a lsub 2 lsup 3". +The rules governing unambiguity and the necessity of using brackets remain the same. In principle, this can be achieved with {}_2^3 a. +The commands "sub" and "sup" are also available as "rsub" and "rsup". +Using the "csub" and "csup" commands, you can write super- and subscripts directly above or below a character. An example is "a csub y csup x". Combinations of indexes and exponents together are also possible: "abc_1^2 lsub 3 lsup 4 csub 55555 csup 66666". +Super- and subscripts can be attached to most unary and binary operators. Two examples: "a div_2 b a<csub n b +_2 h" and "a toward csub f b x toward csup f y". +Be sure to also enter all spaces between characters when entering these examples into the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7b775f66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Attributes +/text/smath/01/03091300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +attributes; additional information + +Attributes +Additional information about attributes in $[officename] Math is found here. +The acute, bar, breve, check, circle, dot, ddot, dddot, grave, hat, tilde and vec attributes always have a fixed size and do not become wider (longer) if they are above a long symbol. By default, the attributes are centered. +The only attributes which grow with the length of the symbol are overline, underline and overstrike. +For some character strings, it is possible that a line inserted with underline is too close to the character. In this case, an empty group can solve the problem: underline Q sub {} instead of underline Q. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67b129f63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Scaling +/text/smath/01/03091400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + scaling; in %PRODUCTNAME Math Scaling + More detailed information about scaling in %PRODUCTNAME Math as well as some examples can be found here. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) + The factorial is not scaled (example: "fact stack{a#b}" and "fact {a over b}") but is oriented using the baseline or center of the arguments. + Brackets always have a fixed size as well. This applies to all symbols that can be used as brackets. Compare "(((a)))", "( stack{a#b#c})", "(a over b)". + Brackets preceded by "left" or "right", however, are always adjusted to the argument. See "left(left(left(a right)right)right)", "left(stack{a#b#c}right)", "left(a over b right)". + Some Attributes have fixed sizes; do not change these if they are placed above a long symbol. + The spaces in the examples are required for the correct structure. You may not delete them when making entries in the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2030434a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Formula Reference Tables +/text/smath/01/03091500.xhp + + + +$[officename] Math;reference list +formulas;reference tables +reference tables; formulas +operators;in Math + +

Formula Reference Tables +

+This reference section contains lists of many operators, functions, symbols and formatting features available in $[officename] Math. Many of the commands displayed can be inserted using the icons in the Elements window or the context menu of the Commands window. + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6decdb7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,411 @@ + + + + + +Unary and Binary Operators +/text/smath/01/03091501.xhp + + + +unary operators; list of +binary operators; list of + +

Unary and Binary Operators +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +- + + + + +Icon + + + +Subtraction + + + + + +- + + + + +Icon + + + +- Sign + + + + + +-+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Minus/Plus + + + + + +/ + + + + +Icon + + + +Division + + + + + +* + + + + +Icon + + + +Multiplication + + + + + ++ + + + + +Icon + + + +Addition + + + + + ++ + + + + +Icon + + + ++ Sign + + + + + ++- + + + + +Icon + + + +Plus/Minus + + + + + +and or & + + + + +Icon + + + +Boolean AND operation + + + + + +boper + + + +No symbol. + + + +Binary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is used as a binary operator. +Usage a boper %SYM1 b + + + + + +uoper + + + +No symbol + + + +Unary operator. A user-defined symbol follows, which is a used as a unary operator. +Usage: uoper %SYM2 b + + + + + +cdot + + + + +Icon + + + +Multiplication, small multiply symbol + + + + + +circ + + + + +Icon + + + +Concatenate symbols + + + + + +div + + + + +Icon + + + +Division + + + + + +neg + + + + +Icon + + + +Boolean NOT + + + + + +odivide + + + +No symbol. + + +Slash / in circle + + + + + +odot + + + +No symbol. + + +Small multiply symbol in circle + + + + + +ominus + + + +No symbol. + + +Subtract symbol in circle + + + + + +oplus + + + +No symbol. + + +Add symbol in circle + + + + + +or or | + + + + +Icon + + + +Boolean OR operation + + + + + +otimes + + + +No symbol. + + +Multiply symbol times in circle + + + + + +over + + + + +Icon + + + +Division/Fraction + + + + + +times + + + + +Icon + + + +Multiplication + + + + + +widebslash + + + +No symbol. + + +Backslash \ between two characters, of which the right is superscript, the left subscript + + + + + +wideslash + + + +No symbol. + + +Slash / between two characters, of which the left is superscript, the right subscript + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f853caa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,548 @@ + + + + + +Relations +/text/smath/01/03091502.xhp + + + +relations operators;list of + +

Relations +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +< or lt + + + + +Icon + + + +Less than + + + + + +<< or ll + + + + +Much less than + + + + + +<= or le + + + + +Icon + + + +Less than or equal to + + + + + +<> or neq + + + + +Icon + + + +Not equal + + + + + += + + + + +Icon + + + +Equation + + + + + +> or gt + + + + +Icon + + + +Greater than + + + + + +>= or ge + + + + +Icon + + + +Greater than or equal to + + + + + +>> or gg + + + + +Much greater than + + + + + +approx + + + + +Icon + + + +Is approximately + + + + + +def + + + + +is defined as/by definition equal to + + + + + +divides + + + + +Icon + + + +divides + + + + + +dlarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Arrow with double line to the left + + + + + +dlrarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Arrow with double line to the left and the right + + + + + +drarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Arrow with double line to the right + + + + + +equiv + + + + +Icon + + + +Is equivalent/congruent to + + + + + +geslant + + + + +Icon + + + +Greater than-equal to + + + + + +leslant + + + + +Icon + + + +Less than-equal to + + + + + +ndivides + + + + +Icon + + + +does not divide + + + + + +ortho + + + + +Icon + + + +Is orthogonal to + + + + + +parallel + + + + +Icon + + + +Is parallel to + + + + + +prop + + + + +Icon + + + +Is proportional to + + + + + +sim + + + + +Icon + + + +Is similar to + + + + + +simeq + + + + +Icon + + + +Is similar or equal to + + + + + +toward + + + + +Icon + + + +Toward + + + + + + +prec + + + + +Icon + + + +Precedes + + + + + + +nprec + + + + +Icon + + + +Not precedes + + + + + + +succ + + + + +Icon + + + +Succeeds + + + + + + +nsucc + + + + +Icon + + + +Not succeeds + + + + + + +preccurlyeq + + + + +Icon + + + +Precedes or equal to + + + + + + +succcurlyeq + + + + +Icon + + + +Succeeds or equal to + + + + + + +precsim + + + + +Icon + + + +Precedes or equivalent to + + + + + + +succsim + + + + +Icon + + + +Succeeds or equivalent to + + + + + + +transl + + + + +Correspondence symbol image of + + + + + +transr + + + + +Correspondence symbol original of + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4f26afd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ + + + + + +Set Operators +/text/smath/01/03091503.xhp + + + +set operators;list of + +

Set Operators +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +aleph + + + + +Icon + + + +Cardinal number + + + + + +emptyset + + + + +Icon + + + +Empty set + + + + + +in + + + + +Icon + + + +is contained in + + + + + +intersection + + + + +Icon + + + +Intersection of sets + + + + + +notin + + + + +Icon + + + +is not contained in + + + + + +nsubset + + + + +Icon + + + +Not subset to + + + + + +nsubseteq + + + + +Icon + + + +Not subset or equal to + + + + + +nsupset + + + + +Icon + + + +Not superset + + + + + +nsupseteq + + + + +Icon + + + +Not superset or equal to + + + + + +owns or ni + + + + +Icon + + + +Contains + + + + + +setc + + + + +Icon + + + +Complex number + + + + + +setminus or bslash + + + + +Icon + + + +Difference between sets + + + + + +setn + + + + +Icon + + + +Natural number + + + + + +setq + + + + +Icon + + + +Rational number + + + + + +setr + + + + +Icon + + + +Real number + + + + + +setz + + + + +Icon + + + +Integer + + + + + +slash + + + + +Icon + + + +Slash / for quotient set (slash) between characters + + + + + +subset + + + + +Icon + + + +Subset + + + + + +subseteq + + + + +Icon + + + +Subset or equal to + + + + + +supset + + + + +Icon + + + +Superset + + + + + +supseteq + + + + +Icon + + + +Superset or equal to + + + + + +union + + + + +Icon + + + +Union of sets + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47cb24247 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,444 @@ + + + + + +Functions +/text/smath/01/03091504.xhp + + + +functions operators;list of + +

Functions

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +abs + + + + + Icon Absolute amount + + +Absolute amount + + + + + +arccos + + + + + Icon Inverse cosine or arccosine + + + +Inverse cosine or arccosine + + + + + +arccot + + + + + Icon Inverse cotangent or arccotangent + + + +Inverse cotangent or arccotangent + + + + + +arcosh + + + + + Icon Inverse hyperbolic cosine + + + +Inverse hyperbolic cosine + + + + + +arcoth + + + + + Icon Inverse hyperbolic cotangent + + + +Inverse hyperbolic cotangent + + + + + +arcsin + + + + + Icon Inverse sine or arcsine + + + +Inverse sine or arcsine + + + + + +arctan + + + + + Icon Inverse tangent or arctangent + + + +Inverse tangent or arctangent + + + + + +arsinh + + + + + Icon Inverse hyperbolic sine + + + +Inverse hyperbolic sine + + + + + +artanh + + + + + Icon Inverse hyperbolic tangent + + + +Inverse hyperbolic tangent + + + + + +backepsilon + + + + +Back epsilon + + + + + +cos + + + + + Icon Cosine + + + +Cosine + + + + + +cosh + + + + + Icon Hyperbolic cosine + + + +Hyperbolic cosine + + + + + +cot + + + + + Icon Cotangent + + + +Cotangent + + + + + +coth + + + + + Icon Hyperbolic cotangent + + + +Hyperbolic cotangent + + + + + +exp + + + + + Icon General exponential function + + + +General exponential function + + + + + +fact + + + + + Icon Factorial + + + +Factorial + + + + + +func e^{} + + + + + Icon Natural exponential function + + + +Natural exponential function + + + + + +ln + + + + + Icon Natural logarithm + + + +Natural logarithm + + + + + +log + + + + + Icon General logarithm + + + +General logarithm + + + + + +nroot + + + + + Icon n-th root of x + + + +n-th root of x + + + + + +sin + + + + + Icon Sine + + + +Sine + + + + + +sinh + + + + + Icon Hyperbolic sine + + + +Hyperbolic sine + + + + + +sqrt + + + + + Icon Square root + + + +Square root + + + + + +sub + + + + +x with subscript n + + + + + +sup + + + + + Icon n-th power of x + + + +n-th power of x + + + + + +tan + + + + + Icon Tangent + + + +Tangent + + + + + +tanh + + + + + Icon Hyperbolic tangent + + + +Hyperbolic tangent + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3471ecd00 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,277 @@ + + + + + +Operators +/text/smath/01/03091505.xhp + + + +operators;list of + +

Operators +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +coprod + + + + +Icon + + + +Coproduct + + + + + +from + + + + +Icon + + + +Lower limit of an operator + + + + + +from to + + + + +Icon + + + +Range from ... to + + + + + +iiint + + + + +Icon + + + +Triple integral + + + + + +iint + + + + +Icon + + + +Double integral + + + + + +int + + + + +Icon + + + +Integral + + + + + +liminf + + + + +Limes inferior + + + + + +limsup + + + + +Limes superior + + + + + +lint + + + + +Icon + + + +Curve integral + + + + + +llint + + + + +Icon + + + +Double curve integral + + + + + +lllint + + + + +Icon + + + +Triple curve integral + + + + + +oper + + + + +Placeholder, user-defined operator + + + + + +prod + + + + +Icon + + + +Product + + + + + +sum + + + + +Icon + + + +Sum + + + + + +to + + + + +Icon + + + +Upper limit of an operator + + + + + +lim + + + + +Icon + + + +Limes + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2681bdc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,399 @@ + + + + + +Attributes +/text/smath/01/03091506.xhp + + + +attributes; list of + +

Attributes +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +acute + + + + +Icon + + + +Accent to top right above a character + + + + + +bar + + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal bar above a character + + + + + +bold + + + + +Icon + + + +Bold + + + + + +breve + + + + +Icon + + + +Top open arc above a character + + + + + +check + + + + +Icon + + + +Upside down roof + + + + + +circle + + + + +Icon + + + +Circle above a character + + + + + +color + + + + +formulas;in colorcolors;in formulas + +The color command changes the character color; first enter the color command directly in the Commands window. Then enter the color name (black, white, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green, or yellow). Then enter the characters to be changed. + + + + + +dddot + + + + +Icon + + + +Three dots above a character + + + + + +ddot + + + + +Icon + + + +Two dots above a character + + + + + +dot + + + + +Icon + + + +Dot above a character + + + + + +grave + + + + +Icon + + + +Accent to bottom right above a character + + + + + +hat + + + + +Icon + + + +"Roof" above a character + + + + + +ital + + + + +Icon + + + +Italics + + + + + +nbold + + + + +Remove the Bold attribute + + + + + +nitalic + + + + +Remove the Italics attribute + + + + + +overline + + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal bar above a character + + + + + +overstrike + + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal bar through a character + + + + + +phantom + + + + +Icon + + + +Phantom character + + + + + +tilde + + + + +Icon + + + +Tilde above a character + + + + + +underline + + + + +Icon + + + +Horizontal bar below a character + + + + + +vec + + + + +Icon + + + +Vector arrow above a character + + + + + +widehat + + + + +Icon + + + +wide roof, adjusts to the character size + + + + + +widetilde + + + + +Icon + + + +wide tilde, adjusts to the character size + + + + + +widevec + + + + +Icon + + + +wide vector arrow, adjusts to the character size + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7909a0d03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,360 @@ + + + + + +Others +/text/smath/01/03091507.xhp + + + +other operators;list of + +

Others +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +<?> + + + + +Placeholder + + + + + +dotsaxis + + + + +Icon + + + +Math-axis ellipsis + + + + + +dotsdown + + + + +Icon + + + +Downward diagonal ellipsis + + + + + +dotslow + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipsis + + + + + +dotsup or dotsdiag + + + + +Icon + + + +Upward diagonal ellipsis + + + + + +dotsvert + + + + +Icon + + + +Vertical ellipsis + + + + + +downarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Down arrow + + + + + +exists + + + + +Icon + + + +Existential quantifier, there is at least one + + + + + +notexists + + + + +Icon + + + +Existential quantifier, there does not exist + + + + + +forall + + + + +Icon + + + +Universal quantifier, for all + + + + + +hbar + + + + +Icon + + + +h with line over it + + + + + +im + + + + +Icon + + + +Imaginary part of a complex number + + + + + +infinity or infty + + + + +Icon + + + +Infinite + + + + + +lambdabar + + + + +Icon + + + +Lambda with line over it + + + + + +leftarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Left arrow + + + + + +nabla + + + + +Icon + + + +Nabla vector + + + + + +partial + + + + +Icon + + + +Partial derivative or set margin + + + + + +re + + + + +Icon + + + +Real part of a complex number + + + + + +rightarrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Right arrow + + + + + +uparrow + + + + +Icon + + + +Up arrow + + + + + +wp + + + + +Icon + + + +p function, Weierstrass p + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3646fc4dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,377 @@ + + + + + + + Brackets + /text/smath/01/03091508.xhp + + + + + + + brackets; reference list + + + +

Brackets

+ + + + + Typed command(s) + + + Symbol in Elements pane + + + Meaning + + + + + (...) + + + Icon + + + Normal round left and right bracket + + + + + [...] + + + Icon + + + Left and right square bracket + + + + + ldbracket ... rdbracket + + + Icon + + + Left and right square double bracket + + + + + lline ... rline + + + Icon + + + Left and right vertical line + + + + + ldline ... rdline + + + Icon + + + Left and right double vertical lines + + + + + lbrace ... rbrace + + + Icon + + + Left and right curly brackets, set bracket + + + + + langle ... rangle + + + Icon + + + Left and right pointed bracket + + + + + langle ... mline ... rangle + + + Icon + + + Left and right pointed operator bracket + + + + + {...} + + + Icon + + + Left and right group bracket. They are not displayed in the document and do not take up any room. + + + + + left( ... right) + + + Icon + + + Brackets, scalable + + + + + left[ ... right] + + + Icon + + + Square brackets, scalable + + + + + left ldbracket ... right rdbracket + + + Icon + + + Double square brackets, scalable + + + + + left lbrace ... right rbrace + + + Icon + + + Braces, scalable + + + + + left lline ... right rline + + + Icon + + + Single lines, scalable + + + + + left ldline ... right rdline + + + Icon + + + Double lines, scalable + + + + + left angle ... right angle + + + Icon + + + Angle brackets, scalable + + + + + left langle ... mline ... right rangle + + + Icon + + + Scalable left and right pointed operator bracket + + + + + overbrace + + + Icon + + + Scalable curly set bracket on top + + + + + underbrace + + + Icon + + + Scalable curly set bracket below + + + + + lfloor ... rfloor + + + + + Left and right line with lower edges + + + + + lceil ... rceil + + + + + Left and right line with upper edges + + + + + \lbrace \rbrace or \{ \} + + + + + Left curly bracket or right curly bracket + + + + + \( \) + + + + + Left and right round bracket + + + + + \[ \] + + + + + Left and right square bracket + + + + + \langle \rangle + + + + + Left and right pointed bracket + + + + + \lline \rline + + + + + Left and right vertical line + + + + + \ldline \rdline + + + + + Left and right double line + + + + + \lfloor \rfloor + + + + + Left and right line with lower edges + + + + + \lceil \rceil + + + + + Left and right line with upper edges + + + + + none + + + + + Qualifier to suppress one bracket, as in right none + + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eadc9c0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,286 @@ + + + + + +Formatting +/text/smath/01/03091509.xhp + + + +formatting; reference list (Math) +MW changed index entry

Formatting +

+ + + +Typed command(s) + + +Symbol in Elements pane + + +Meaning + + + + + +lsup + + + + +Icon + + + +Left exponent + + + + + +csup + + + + +Icon + + + +Exponent directly above a character + + + + + +^ or sup or rsup + + + + +Icon + + + +Right exponent + + + + + +binom + + + + +Icon + + + +Binom + + + + + +newline + + + + +Icon + + + +New line + + + + + +lsub + + + + +Icon + + + +Left index + + + + + +csub + + + + +Icon + + + +Index directly below a character + + + + + +_ or sub or rsub + + + + +Icon + + + +Right index + + + + + +stack{...} + + + + +Icon + + + +Stack + + + + + +` + + + + +Icon + + + +Small space/small blank + + + + + +alignl + + + + +Icon + + + +Align left + + + + + +alignc + + + + +Icon + + + +Align to horizontal center + + + + + +alignr + + + + +Icon + + + +Align right + + + + + +matrix{...} + + + + +Icon + + + +Matrix + + + + + +~ + + + + +Icon + + + +Wide space/gap + + + + + + +nospace{e1 e2 ...} + + + + +Suppress horizontal space between elements + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57f2852bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ + + + + + + + + +Other Symbols +/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+mathematical symbols; other +real part of complex numbers +symbols;for complex numbers +partial differentiation symbol +infinity symbol +Nabla operator +there exists symbol +there does not exist symbol +existence quantor symbol +for all symbol +universal quantifier symbol +h-bar symbol +lambda-bar symbol +imaginary part of a complex number +complex numbers; symbols +weierstrass p symbol +left arrow symbol +right arrow symbol +up arrow symbol +down arrow symbol +arrows;symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math +center dots symbol +axis-ellipsis +vertical dots symbol +diagonal upward dots;symbol +diagonal downward dots;symbol +epsilon; back +back epsilon symbol +placeholders; inserting in formulas +ellipsis symbols + + + +Other Symbols +Shows miscellaneous mathematical symbols. +
+
+ +
+Symbols in detail + + + + +Partial Icon + + + + +Partial +Inserts the symbol for a partial differentiation. Command for the Commands window: partial + + + + + + +Infinity Icon + + + + +Infinity +Inserts the symbol for infinity. Command for the Commands window: infinity or infty + + + + + + +Nabla Icon + + + + +Nabla +Inserts the symbol for a Nabla vector operator. Command for the Commands window: nabla + + + + + + +There exists Icon + + + + +There exists +Inserts the symbol for an existential quantifier. Command for the Commands window: exists + + + + + + +There does not exist Icon + + + + +There does not exist +Inserts the symbol for an existential quantifier. Command for the Commands window: notexists + + + + + + +For all Icon + + + + +For all +Inserts the symbol for a universal quantifier "for all". Command for the Commands window: forall + + + + + + +h Bar Icon + + + + +h Bar +Inserts the symbol for the h-bar constant. Command for the Commands window: hbar + + + + + + +Lambda Bar Icon + + + + +Lambda Bar +Inserts the symbol for a lambda-bar. Command for the Commands window: lambdabar + + + + + + +Real Part Icon + + + + +Real Part +Inserts the symbol for the real part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: re + + + + + + +Imaginary Part Icon + + + + +Imaginary Part +Inserts the symbol for the imaginary part of a complex number. Command for the Commands window: im + + + + + + +Weierstrass p Icon + + + + +Weierstrass p +This icon inserts a Weierstrass p-function symbol. Command for the Commands window: wp + + + + + + +Left Arrow Icon + + + + +Left Arrow +This icon inserts a left arrow. Command for the Commands window: leftarrow + + + + + + +Right Arrow Icon + + + + +Right Arrow +This icon inserts a right arrow. Command for the Commands window: rightarrow + + + + + + +Up Arrow Icon + + + + +Up Arrow +This icon inserts an up arrow. Command for the Commands window: uparrow + + + + + + +Down Arrow Icon + + + + +Down Arrow +This icon inserts a down arrow. Command for the Commands window: downarrow + + + + + + +Ellipsis Icon + + + + +Ellipsis +This icon inserts an ellipsis (three low horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotslow + + + + + + +Math-axis Ellipsis Icon + + + + +Math-axis Ellipsis +This icon inserts an axis-ellipsis (three vertically centered horizontal dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsaxis + + + + + + +Vertical Ellipsis Icon + + + + +Vertical Ellipsis +This icon inserts a vertical ellipsis (three vertical dots). Command for the Commands window: dotsvert + + + + + + +Upward Diagonal Ellipsis Icon + + + + +Upward Diagonal Ellipsis +This icon inserts an upward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from the bottom left to the top right)Command for the Commands window: dotsup or dotsdiag + + + + + + +Downward Diagonal Ellipsis Icon + + + + +Downward Diagonal Ellipsis +This icon inserts a downward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from upper left to lower right). Command for the Commands window: dotsdown + + + +
+ +A back epsilon can be inserted by typing backepsilon in the Commands window. +To insert a placeholder into your formula, type <?> in the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9734678d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + +Fonts +/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +fonts; in $[officename] Math +formula fonts; defining +defining; formula fonts + + + + +

Fonts

+Defines the fonts that can be applied to formula elements. + +
+ +
+ +

Formula Fonts

+You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. +The list boxes in the Fonts dialog display a default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, then select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. +If you want to mark individual text segments with a font other than that used for the whole text, then enter the Font command in the Commands window. + +

Variables

+You can select the fonts for the variables in your formula. For example, in the formula x=SIN(y), x and y are variables, and will reflect the assigned font. + +

Functions

+Select the fonts for names and properties of functions. For example, the functions in the formula x=SIN(y) are =SIN( ). + +

Numbers

+You can select the fonts for the numbers in your formula. + +

Text

+Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. +

Custom Fonts

+In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. +These custom fonts are used if you set a different font with the FONT command in the Commands window. + +

Serif

+You can specify the font to be used for the font serif format. Serifs are the small "guides" that can be seen, for example, at the bottom of a capital A when the Times serif font is used. Using serifs is quite helpful since it guides a reader's eye in a straight line and can speed up reading. + +

Sans

+You can specify the font to be used for sans font formatting. + +

Fixed

+You can specify the font to be used for fixed font formatting. + +

Modify

+Click one of the choices from this pop-up menu to access the Fonts dialog, where you can define the font and attributes for the respective formula and for custom fonts. + +

Default

+Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22c2c7b23 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fonts +/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Fonts + Use this dialog to select the font for the respective category in the Fonts dialog. +
+ +
+ Font + Select a font from the list. + Example + You can see a preview of the selected font with its attributes. + Attributes + You can assign additional attributes to the selected font. + Bold + Check this box to assign the bold attribute to the font. + Italic + Check this box to assign the italic attribute to the font. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2a697812 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Font Sizes +/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp + + + +font sizes; in $[officename] Math +sizes; of fonts in $[officename] Math + + + +Font Sizes +Use this dialog to specify the font sizes for your formula. Select a base size and all elements of the formula will be scaled in relation to this base. + +
+ +
+ +Base size +All elements of a formula are proportionally scaled to the base size. To change the base size, select or type in the desired point (pt) size. You can also use other units of measure or other metrics, which are then automatically converted to points. +To permanently change the default size (12 pt) used in $[officename] Math, you must first set the size (for example, 11 pt) and then click the Default button. +Relative Sizes +In this section, you can determine the relative sizes for each type of element with reference to the base size. +Text +Select the size for text in a formula relative to the base size. +Indexes +Select the relative size for the indexes in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Functions +Select the relative size for names and other function elements in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Operators +Select the relative size of the mathematical operators in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Limits +Select the relative size for the limits in a formula in proportion to the base size. +Default +Click this button to save your changes as a default for all new formulas. A security response appears before saving any changes. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d07c80747 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + +Spacing +/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp + + + +spacing; formula elements +formulas;element spacing + + + + +

Spacing

+Use this dialog to determine the spacing between formula elements. The spacing is specified as a percentage in relation to the base size defined under Format - Font Size. + +
+ +
+ +Use the Category button to determine the formula element for which you would like to specify the spacing. The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected category. A preview window shows you which spacing is modified through the respective boxes. + +

Category

+This button allows you to select the category for which you would like to change the spacing. +

Spacing

+Defines the spacing between variables and operators, between lines, and between root signs and radicals. + +

Spacing

+Defines the spacing between variables and operators. + +

Line Spacing

+Determines the spacing between lines. + +

Root Spacing

+Determines the spacing between the root sign and radicals. +

Indexes

+Defines the spacing for superscript and subscript indexes. + +

Superscript

+Determines the spacing for superscript indexes. + +

Subscript

+Determines the spacing for subscript indexes. +

Fractions

+Defines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator or denominator. + +

Numerator

+Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the numerator. + +

Denominator

+Determines the spacing between the fraction bar and the denominator. +

Fraction Bars

+Defines the excess length and line weight of the fraction bar. + +

Excess length

+Determines the excess length of the fraction line. + +

Weight

+Determines the weight of the fraction line. +

Limits

+Defines the spacing between the sum symbol and the limit conditions. + +

Upper limit

+Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the upper limit. + +

Lower limit

+Determines the spacing between the sum symbol and the lower limit. +

Brackets

+Defines the spacing between brackets and the content. + +

Excess size (left/right)

+Determines the vertical distance between the upper edge of the contents and the upper end of the brackets. + +

Spacing

+Determines the horizontal distance between the contents and the upper end of the brackets. + +

Scale all brackets

+Scales all types of brackets. If you then enter ( a over b) in the Commands window, the brackets will surround the whole height of the argument. You normally achieve this effect by entering left ( a over b right ). + +

Excess size

+Adjusts the percentage excess size. At 0 percent the brackets are set so that they surround the argument at the same height. The higher the entered value is, the larger the vertical gap between the contents of the brackets and the external border of the brackets. The field can only be used in combination with Scale all brackets. +

Matrices

+Defines the relative spacing for the elements in a matrix. + +

Line spacing

+Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a row. + +

Column spacing

+Determines the spacing between matrix elements in a column. +

Symbols

+Defines the spacing of symbols in relation to variables + +

Primary height

+Defines the height of the symbols in relation to the baseline. + +

Minimum spacing

+Determines the minimum distance between a symbol and variable. +

Operators

+Defines the spacing between operators and variables or numbers. + +

Excess size

+Determines the height from the variable to the operator's upper edge. + +

Spacing

+Determines the horizontal distance between operators and variables. +

Borders

+Adds a border to your formula. This option is particularly useful if you want to integrate the formula into a text file in $[officename] Writer. When making settings, be sure that you do not use 0 as a size, since this creates viewing problems for text that surrounds the insertion point. + +

Left

+The left border is positioned between the formula and background. + +

Right

+The right border is positioned between the formula and background. + +

Top

+The top border is positioned between the formula and background. + +

Bottom

+The bottom border is positioned between the formula and background. + + +

Default

+Saves your changes as your default settings for all new formulas. A security response will appear before saving these changes. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40b6d0c13 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp + + + + + + aligning; multi-line formulasmulti-line formulas; aligning + + + Alignment + You can define the alignment of multi-line formulas as well as formulas with several elements in one line. Create multi-line formulas by entering a NEWLINE command in the Commands window. +
+ +
+ + Horizontal + Specifies the type of horizontal alignment for multi-line formulas. + Left + Aligns the selected elements of a formula to the left. + Text is always aligned left. + Centered + Aligns the elements of a formula to the center. + Right + Aligns the elements of a formula to the right. + Default + Click here to save your changes as the default settings for new formulas. A security response will appear before saving. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..761fc0f12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Mode +/text/smath/01/05050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text mode in $[officename] Math +formulas; fit to text + + +Text Mode +Switches the text mode on or off. In text mode, formulas are displayed as the same height as a line of text. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c90cc96ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Symbols + /text/smath/01/06010000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + symbols; entering in %PRODUCTNAME Math + %PRODUCTNAME Math; entering symbols in + catalog for mathematical symbols + mathematical symbols;catalog + Greek symbols in formulas + formulas; entering symbols in + + + + + + + +Symbols +Opens the Symbols dialog, in which you can select a symbol to insert in the formula. +
+ +
+ +
+ + +Symbol Set +All symbols are organized into symbol sets. Select the desired symbol set from the list box. The corresponding group of symbols appear in the field below. +When a symbol is selected, its command name appears below the symbol list and a magnified version appears in a box to the right. Note that the name must be typed in the Commands window exactly as displayed here (case-sensitive). +To insert a symbol, select it from the list and click Insert. The corresponding command name appears in the Commands window. + + +Edit +Click here to open the Edit Symbols dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08c025b3b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + +Edit Symbols +/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +new symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math +symbols; adding in %PRODUCTNAME Math + +

Edit Symbols

+Use this dialog to add symbols to a symbol set, to edit symbol sets, or to modify symbol notations. You can also define new symbol sets, assign names to symbols, or to modify existing symbol sets. +
+ +
+ +

Old Symbol

+Select the name of the current symbol. The symbol, the name of the symbol, and the set that the symbol belongs to are displayed in the left preview pane at the bottom of the dialog box. + +

Old Symbol Set

+This list box contains the name of the current symbol set. If you want, you can also select a different symbol set. + +

Symbol

+Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. +

Adding a New Symbol

+To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set list box, select a symbol set, or type a new name to create a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click Add and then OK. +

Modifying the Name of a Symbol

+To change the name of a symbol, select the old name in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. + +

Symbol Set

+The Symbol set list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. +

Creating a New Symbol Set

+To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. + +

Font

+Displays the name of the current font and enables you to select a different font. + +

Subset

+If you selected a non-symbol font in the Font list box, you can select a Unicode subset in which to place your new or edited symbol. When a subset has been selected, all symbols belonging to this subset of the current symbol set are displayed in the symbols list above. + +

Style

+The current typeface is displayed. You can change the typeface by selecting one from the list box. + +

Add

+Click this button to add the symbol shown in the right preview window to the current symbol set. It will be saved under the name displayed in the Symbol list box. You must specify a name under Symbol or Symbol Set to be able to use this button. Names cannot be used more than once. + +

Modify

+Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. +

Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set

+As an example, to transfer the large ALPHA from the "Greek" set to the "Special" set, select the old set (Greek) and then the ALPHA symbol using the two top list boxes. The symbol appears in the left preview window. In the Symbol set list box, select the "Special" set. Click Modify and then OK. The ALPHA symbol is now only in the "Special" symbol set. + +

Delete

+Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. +You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fff4bbdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Import formula + /text/smath/01/06020000.xhp + + + +
+importing; %PRODUCTNAME Math formulas +MathML; import from file + +Import Formula from File + This command opens a dialog for importing a formula. + The Insert dialog is set up like the Open dialog under File. Use the Insert dialog to load, edit and display a formula saved as a file in the Commands window. + You can import MathML files created by other applications as well. The MathML source must have a math element with an xmlns attribute with value "http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML". The languages MathML and StarMath are not fully compatible, therefore you should revise the import result. For details about the language MathML see its specification. +
+ +
+
+
+MathML; import via clipboard +importing; MathML + +Import MathML from Clipboard + This command transforms MathML clipboard content to StarMath and inserts it at the current cursor position. + If the transformation fails, nothing is inserted. +
+ +
+ This command handles only MathML content. If you have copied a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula to clipboard, insert it using the command Paste under Edit. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/chemical.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/chemical.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36a1f521f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/chemical.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Chemical Formulas + /text/smath/01/chemical.xhp + + + + + chemical formula + +
+

Chemical Formulas Examples

+ The primary purpose of %PRODUCTNAME Math is to create mathematical formulas, but it can also be used to write chemical formulas. However, in chemical formulas, the chemical symbols are normally written in uppercase using upright, rather than italic, characters. +
+ To create chemical formulas using Math, you may want to change the font used for variables to a non-italic font, or use the nitalic modifier. +

Molecules

+ nitalic{H_2 SO_4} + nitalic{2 C_6 H_5 COOH + 15 O_2 = 14 CO_2 + 6 H_2 O} + nitalic{2 KMnO_4 + 16 HCl = 2 KCl + 2 MnCl_2 + 8 H_2 O + 5 Cl_2} + +

Isotopes

+ U lsub 92 lsup 238 + nitalic{{U lsup 238 lsub 92 + n} ~~toward~~ {U lsup 239 lsub 92 + %gamma} ~~binom{{size 6{{%beta}-{}}}} {toward} ~~ Np lsup 239 lsub 93 ~~binom{{size 6{{%beta}-{}}}}{toward}~~ Pu lsup 239 lsub 94} +

Ions

+ SO_4^{2-{}} or SO_4^{2"-"} + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4f508f68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + +Formula Cursor +/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp + + + +formula cursor in $[officename] Math +cursor; in $[officename] Math + + +

Formula Cursor

+Use this icon on the Tools bar to turn the Formula Cursor on or off. The part of the formula where the cursor is positioned in the Commands window is marked with a thin border when the formula cursor is active. + + +You can also click a position in the document to move the cursor to its corresponding position in the Commands window. +Double-clicking a character or symbol in the document moves the focus of the cursor to the Commands window and highlights its respective position. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a2c67835d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + +Formula Shortcut Keys +/text/smath/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+shortcut keys; in formulas + +

Formula Shortcut Keys +

+A list of the shortcut keys specific to creating formulas is contained in this section. +The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. +
+

Shortcut Keys for Formula Functions

+The following shortcut keys correspond to commands in the Edit and View menus. +
+
+
+

F3

+Next Error +
+

Shift+F3

+Previous Error +

F4

+Next Marker (Placeholder) +

Shift+F4

+Previous Marker (Placeholder) +
+

F9

+Update +
+

Navigation in the Elements pane

+
+

Left or right arrow

+Move left or right to the next category or function. +
+
+

Enter key

+Selects a category (within the category section) or inserts a function in the Commands window (within the function section). +
+
+

Tab

+Jump from the first category item to the first function of the category. +
+
+

Shift+Tab

+Jump from the last category item to the last function of the category. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/06/screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/06/screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ad9048dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/06/screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Math screenshots + /text/smath/06/screenshot.xhp + + + +
+ + Alignment Dialog + +
+
+ + Font Dialog + +
+
+ + Font Size Dialog + +
+
+ + Font Type Dialog + +
+
+ + Save Default Dialog + +
+
+ + Spacing Dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..318989973 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/align.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Manually Aligning Formula Parts +/text/smath/guide/align.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +aligning; characters in %PRODUCTNAME Math +formula parts; manually aligning + +Manually Aligning Formula Parts + +How do you align characters in $[officename] Math quickly and easily? +To accomplish this, you must define empty groups and character strings. They do not require any space, but carry information that helps in the alignment process. +To create empty groups, enter curly brackets {} in the Commands window. In the following example, the goal is to achieve a line break so that the plus signs are beneath one another, even though one less character is entered in the upper line: +a+a+a+{} newline {}{}{}{}{}a+a+a+a +Empty character strings are a simple way to ensure that texts and formulas are left-aligned. They are defined using double inverted commas "" . Make sure you do not use any typographic inverted commas. Example: +"A further example." newline a+b newline ""c-d + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d16e7afd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing Default Attributes +/text/smath/guide/attributes.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +attributes; changing in $[officename] Math +font attributes;changing defaults +formatting;changing default attributes +defaults;changing default formatting +changing;default formatting + +Changing Default Attributes + +Can default formats in $[officename] Math be modified? +Some parts of formulas are always formatted bold or italic by default. +You can remove these attributes using "nbold" and "nitalic". Example: +a + b +nitalic a + bold b. +In the second formula, the a is not italic. The b is bold. You cannot change the plus sign by this method. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a119b628d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merging Formula Parts in Brackets +/text/smath/guide/brackets.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +brackets; merging formula parts +formula parts; merging +fractions in formulas +merging;formula parts + +Merging Formula Parts in Brackets + +Inserting fractions into formulas +In the case of a fraction whose numerator and denominator consist of a product, a sum, and so on, the values that belong together must be bracketed together. +Use the following syntax: +{a + c} over 2 = m +or +m = {a + c} over 2 +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/color.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/color.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75ac48cdc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/color.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ + + + + + + + Applying Color to Formula Parts + /text/smath/guide/color.xhp + + + + + + Color in formulas + +

Applying Color to Formula Parts

+ Use the command color to apply color to the subsequent formula part. + The example below creates a formula where a is shown using the default color (black) and b is shown in red. + + a + color red b + + Beware that the color command only changes the color of the formula part that comes immediately after it. For example, in the formula below only b will be shown in red, whereas c will be shown in black. + + a + color red b + c + + Use braces to apply color to more parts of the formula. In the following example, b and c are shown in red. + + a + color red { b + c } + + A list with predefined color names is available here. + + + RGB colors + +

Using RGB colors

+ Use the command color rgb to apply colors using RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values. + + color rgb 192 0 128 var + + RGB values range between 0 and 255. + + + Hex colors + +

Using hex notation

+ Use the command color hex to apply colors using the hexadecimal notation. + + color hex C00080 var + + +

Combining color with other commands

+ It is possible to combine the color command with other commands as bold, italic or size. + The example below writes var in bold blue: + + color blue bold var + + To change color and font size, use color in combination with size and the desired font size. + + color blue size 20 var + + + + List of predefined colors + +
+

Predefined color names

+ %PRODUCTNAME provides a set of predefined color names that can be used along with the color command. +
+ + + + Markup language + + + Color + + + Hex value + + + RGB values + + + + + aqua or cyan + + + Aqua + + + 00FFFF + + + rgb(0, 255, 255) + + + + + black + + + Black + + + 000000 + + + rgb(0, 0, 0) + + + + + blue + + + Blue + + + 0000FF + + + rgb(0, 0, 255) + + + + + coral + + + Coral + + + FF7F50 + + + rgb(255, 127, 80) + + + + + crimson + + + Crimson + + + DC143C + + + rgb(220, 20, 60) + + + + + fuchsia or magenta + + + Fuchsia + + + FF00FF + + + rgb(255, 0, 255) + + + + + gray or grey + + + Gray + + + 808080 + + + rgb(128, 128, 128) + + + + + green + + + Green + + + 008000 + + + rgb(0, 128, 0) + + + + + hotpink + + + Hot pink + + + FF69B4 + + + rgb(255, 105, 180) + + + + + indigo + + + Indigo + + + 4B0082 + + + rgb(75, 0, 130) + + + + + lavender + + + Lavender + + + E6E6FA + + + rgb(230, 230, 250) + + + + + lime + + + Lime + + + 00FF00 + + + rgb(0, 255, 0) + + + + + maroon + + + Maroon + + + 800000 + + + rgb(128, 0, 0) + + + + + midnightblue + + + Midnight + + + 191970 + + + rgb(25, 25, 112) + + + + + navy + + + Navy + + + 000080 + + + rgb(0, 0, 128) + + + + + olive + + + Olive + + + 808000 + + + rgb(128, 128, 0) + + + + + orange + + + Orange + + + FFA500 + + + rgb(255, 165, 0) + + + + + orangered + + + Orange red + + + FF4500 + + + rgb(255, 69, 0) + + + + + purple + + + Purple + + + 0x800080 + + + rgb(128, 0, 128) + + + + + red + + + Red + + + FF0000 + + + rgb(255, 0, 0) + + + + + seagreen + + + Sea green + + + 2E8B57 + + + rgb(46, 139, 87) + + + + + silver + + + Silver + + + C0C0C0 + + + rgb(192, 192, 192) + + + + + teal + + + Teal + + + 008080 + + + rgb(0, 128, 128) + + + + + violet + + + Violet + + + EE82EE + + + rgb(238, 130, 238) + + + + + yellow + + + Yellow + + + FFFF00 + + + rgb(255, 255, 0) + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60b84f695 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entering Comments +/text/smath/guide/comment.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +comments; entering in $[officename] Math +inserting;comments in $[officename] Math + +Entering Comments + +How does one attach comments that don't appear in the document to a formula? +A comment begins with a double percent sign %%, and extends to the next line-end character (Enter key). Everything that lies in between is ignored and is not printed out. If there are percent signs in the text, they are treated as part of the text. +Example: +a^2+b^2=c^2 %% Pythagorean theorem. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b77627474 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) +/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +accessibility; $[officename] Math shortcuts + +

Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility)

+You can control $[officename] Math without a mouse. +

Inserting a Formula Directly

+If you want to insert a formula into a text document, and you already know the correct writing, you can proceed as follows: + + +Write the formula into your text + + +Select the formula + + +Choose the command Insert - OLE Object - Formula Object. + + +

Inserting a Formula using a Window

+ + +If you want to use the $[officename] Math interface to edit a formula, choose the command Insert - OLE Object - Formula Object without any text selected. + + +The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. + + +You can compose formulas using the Elements pane. Open it with the menu View - Elements if it is not already open. + + +If the Elements pane is open, use F6 to switch from the Commands window to the Elements pane and back. + + +

Elements pane

+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65b4d02c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Working with Limits +/text/smath/guide/limits.xhp + + + +limits;in sums/integrals +integral limits + +

Working with Limits

+

How can I define the limits in a Sum or Integral formula?i83226

+You want to insert a summation formula like "summation of s^k from k = 0 to n" at the cursor in a Writer text document. + + + +You see the Math input window and the Elements pane on the left. + + +From the list on the upper part of the Elements pane, select the Operators item. + + +In the lower part of the Elements pane, click the Sum icon. + + +To enable lower and upper limits, click additionally the Upper and Lower Limits icon. + + +In the input window, the first placeholder or marker is selected, and you can start to enter the lower limit: +k = 0 + + +Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the upper limit: +n + + +Press F4 to advance to the next marker, and enter the summand: +s^k + + +Now the formula is complete. Click into your text document outside the formula to leave the formula editor. + + +In the same way, you can enter an Integral formula with limits. When you click an icon from the Elements pane, the assigned text command is inserted in the input window. If you know the text commands, you can enter the commands directly in the input window. + + + + + +Click in the input window and enter the following line: +int from{a} to{b} f(x)`dx +A small gap exists between f(x) and dx, which you can also enter using the Elements pane: select the Formats item from the list on the top, then the Small Gap icon. + + +If you don't like the font of the letters f and x, choose Format - Fonts and select other fonts. Click the Default button to use the new fonts as default from now on. +If you need the formula within a line of text, the limits increase the line height. You can choose Format - Text Mode to place the limits besides the Sum or Integral symbol, which reduces the line height. +
+Example of Integral and Sum ranges +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8176eedd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Math +/text/smath/guide/main.xhp + + + +$[officename] Math;general instructions +instructions; $[officename] Math +Equation Editor, see $[officename] Math +mw added a cross-referenceInstructions for Using $[officename] Math + + +Entering and Editing Formulas + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c39d92cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entering Line Breaks +/text/smath/guide/newline.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +line breaks; in formulas +formulas;line breaks +wrapping text;in formulas + +Entering Line Breaks + +How to write formulas in $[officename] Math over two lines (with manual line break): +Create a line break by using the "newline" command. Everything coming after the line break is placed on the next line. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..087d7df78 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Brackets +/text/smath/guide/parentheses.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +brackets; inserting in %PRODUCTNAME Math +inserting;brackets +distances between brackets + +Inserting Brackets + +In %PRODUCTNAME Math, can brackets be shown separately so that the distance between them is freely definable? +You can set individual brackets using "left" and "right", but the distance between the brackets will not be fixed, as they adapt to the argument. Nevertheless, there is a way to display brackets so that the distance between them is fixed. To accomplish this, place a "\" (backslash) before the normal brackets. These brackets now behave like any other symbol and the alignment is the same as with other symbols: +left lbrace x right none +size *2 langle x rangle +size *2 { \langle x \rangle } +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fee8c00c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entering Text +/text/smath/guide/text.xhp + + + +text strings; entering in $[officename] Math +direct text; entering in $[officename] Math +inserting;text in $[officename] Math + +Entering Text + +How to enter direct text strings that do not get interpreted? +Some text strings get interpreted as operators automatically. Sometimes this is not what you want. If you want to write W* (a letter with a superscripted asterisk), the asterisk will be interpreted as a multiplication operator. Enclose the direct text within double quotes or add spaceholders. +Examples:collected from several issues: i78812, i9167, i21484, i25573 +An imported MathType formula contains the following string +W rSup { size 8{*} } +If you have set up Math to convert imported MathType formulas (in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office), you see the formula with a placeholder instead of the asterisk. +Change {*} to {} * {} as in the following formula: +W rSup { size 8{} * {} } +You can also use W^"*" to enter the character as direct text. +Some formulas start with an = sign. Use "=" to enter that character as direct text. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7393e0863 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Welcome to the $[officename] Math Help + /text/smath/main0000.xhp + + + +

Welcome to the $[officename] Math Help

+ +

How to Work With $[officename] Math

+ + +Formula Reference Tables + + + +

$[officename] Math Menus, Toolbars, and Keys

+ + + +Have a look at www.dmaths.org for a set of additional %PRODUCTNAME Math icons and macros. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..454459dc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Menus +/text/smath/main0100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aeca8941d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + File + /text/smath/main0101.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

File

+ This menu contains the general commands for working with formula documents, such as open, save and print. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..341ccd173 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Edit +/text/smath/main0102.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Edit

+ The commands in this menu are used to edit formulas. In addition to basic commands, (for example, copying contents) there are functions specific to $[officename] Math such as searching for placeholders or errors. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7cab1928b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +View +/text/smath/main0103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

View

+Sets the display scale and defines which elements you want to be visible. Most of the commands that you can enter into the Commands window can also be accessed through a mouse click if you have already opened the Elements pane with View - Elements. +
+

Zoom

+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1421a4ecf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + +Format +/text/smath/main0105.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Format

+ This menu contains commands needed to format formulas. +
+

Fonts

+ +

Font Size

+ +

Spacing

+ +

Alignment

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..969c8ab2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Tools +/text/smath/main0106.xhp + + + +
+

Tools

+Use this menu to open and edit the symbol catalog, or import an external formula as a data file or via clipboard. The program interface can be adjusted to meet your requirements. You can also change the program options. +
+ +

Import Formula

+ +

Import MathML from Clipboard

+ +

Customize

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c634ea5ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Window +/text/smath/main0107.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Window

+ In the Window menu, you can open a new window and see the document list. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..efb49927e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/smath/main0200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Toolbars +

+The default toolbars available when working with an activated formula document in $[officename] Math are described here. You can customize the toolbars to meet your requirements by moving, deleting or adding new icons. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43ecd4662 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + +Status Bar +/text/smath/main0202.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Status Bar

+The status bar displays information about the active document. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..921ba444a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Tools Bar +/text/smath/main0203.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Tools Bar

+The Tools bar contains frequently used functions. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +

Formula Cursor

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..55b111d69 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +$[officename] Math Features +/text/smath/main0503.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

$[officename] Math Features +

+This section contains an overview of some of the important functions and capabilities that $[officename] Math offers. +
+$[officename] Math provides numerous operators, functions and formatting assistants to help you create formulas. These are all listed in a selection window, in which you can click the required element with the mouse to insert the object into your work. There is an exhaustive reference list and numerous samples contained in the Help. +

Creating a Formula

+As with charts and images, formulas are created as objects within a document. Inserting a formula into a document automatically starts $[officename] Math. You can create, edit and format the formula using a large selection of predefined symbols and functions. +

Typing a Formula Directly

+If you are familiar with the $[officename] Math language, you can also type a formula directly into the document. For example, type this formula into a text document: "a sup 2 + b sup 2 = c sup 2". Select this text and choose Insert - Object - Formula. The text will be converted into a formatted formula. +Formulas cannot be calculated in $[officename] Math because it is a formula editor (for writing and showing formulas) and not a calculation program. Use spreadsheets to calculate formulas, or for simple calculations use the text document calculation function. +

Creating a Formula in the Commands Window

+ +Use the $[officename] Math Commands window to enter and edit formulas. As you make entries in the Commands window, you see the results in the document. To maintain an overview when creating long and complicated formulas, use the Formula Cursor on the Tools bar. When this function is activated, the cursor location within the Commands window is also shown in the text window. +

Individual Symbols

+You can create your own symbols and import characters from other fonts. You can add new symbols to the basic catalog of $[officename] Math symbols, or create your own special catalogs. Numerous special characters are also available. +

Formulas in Context

+To make working with formulas easier, use the context menus, which can be called up with a right mouse click. This applies especially to the Commands window. This context menu contains all the commands that are found in the Elements pane, and also operators, and so on, which can be inserted into your formula by mouse-click without having to key them into the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3140db62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + +To access this function... +/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + To access this function... +
+ + + + + + + Wrap Off Icon + + + Wrap Off + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Wrap On Icon + + + Wrap On + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Wrap Through Icon + + + Wrap Through + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Jump to Previous Script Icon + + + Jump to Previous Script + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Jump to Next Script Icon + + + Jump to Next Script + + + +
+
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..973db9710 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +File Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp + + + +File Menu +Menu File - Export + +Choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation + +Choose File - Send - Outline to Clipboard + +Choose File - Send - Create AutoAbstract + +Choose File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation + +Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document + +
+Insert at least one address database field into a text document, then start printing the document. Answer "Yes" to the question whether you want to print a form letter.i80170 +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Mail Merge + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364b0e600 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp + + + +Edit Menu +
+Choose Tools - AutoText +Command +Ctrl+F3 +On the Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +AutoText + + +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Exchange Database + +Choose Edit - Fields + +Choose Edit - Footnotes + +
+Choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry... + +Open context menu - choose Index Entry + +
+Choose Format - Sections + +Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText - Rename + +Choose Edit - Bibliography Entry + +Choose Edit - Selection Mode + +Choose Edit - Direct Cursor Mode + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a02972dee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + View Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp + + + + +

View Menu

+Choose View - Rulers - Rulers +Choose View - Text Boundaries + +
+Choose View - Field Shadings +Command +Ctrl+F8 +
+ +
+Choose View - Field Names +Command +Ctrl+F9 +
+ +
+Choose View - Formatting Marks +Command +Ctrl+F10 +On Standard bar, click + +
+ + + + + Formatting Marks Icon + + + Formatting Marks + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose View - Show Whitespace. + + + + + Icon Show Whitespace + + + + Show Whitespace + + +
+
+ + + +
+Choose View - Web +On Tools bar, enable + +
+ + + + + Web Icon + + + Web + + +
+ +
+
+ +
+Choose View - Normalremoved table with icon (was copy/paste error) +
+Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b79e105d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,316 @@ + + + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp + + + +

Insert Menu

+Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break + +
+Choose Insert - More Breaks +
+
+Choose Insert - Field +Fields do not have context menus (15.01.20) +Open context menu - choose Fields (inserted fields) +
+Choose Insert - Field - Date +Choose Insert - Field - Time +Choose Insert - Field - Page Number +Choose Insert - Field - Page Count +Choose Insert - Field - Subject +Choose Insert - Field - Title +Choose Insert - Field - First Author +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields +Command +Ctrl+F2 +On Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Fields + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Document tab +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Cross-references tab +Choose Insert - Cross-reference +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Functions tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - DocInformation tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Database tab +
+Choose Insert - Section + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Section + + + +Section + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Section - Section tab or choose Format - Sections + +Choose Insert > Section > Indents tab or choose Format > Sections - Options button - Indents tab + +
+Choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote + +Open context menu - choose Footnote/Endnote (inserted Footnote/Endnote) +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Footnote Directly + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Endnote Directly + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Caption + +Open context menu - choose Caption + +
+
+Choose Insert - Caption - Options + +Open context menu - choose Caption - Options + +
+
+Choose Insert - Bookmark + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Bookmark + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Script (only HTML documents) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index + +
+Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Entry + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (depending on the type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Table of Contents is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Alphabetical Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Illustration Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Index of Tables is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when User-Defined is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Table of Objects is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Bibliography is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type, mark "Additional Styles" check box and then click Assign styles + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (depending on type selected) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Table of Contents is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Alphabetical Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Illustration Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Index of Tables is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when User-Defined is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Table of Objects is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Bibliography is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry and click Edit + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Styles tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Envelope tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Format tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Printer tab + +
+Choose Insert - Frame + +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Insert Frame + + +Insert Frame Manually + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Table - Insert Table + +Command +Ctrl+F12 +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Table + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Horizontal Rule + +
+Choose Insert - Text from File + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Text from File + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header + +Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c940e4a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp + + + +

Format Menu

+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Drop Caps tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Drop Caps tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Text Flow tab. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format - Text Flow tab. +
+
+ Right-click a paragraph with style Text body. Choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Condition tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11). Right-click any paragraph style. Choose New - Condition tab. +
+
+ Choose Styles - Load Styles from Template + In the Styles window, do a long click on the Styles action icon on the top right. Choose Load Styles from Template from the submenu. + Different ways to open Styles window: + + Press Command+TF11 + Choose View - Styles + Choose Styles - Manage Styles + +
+
+ Choose Format - Page Style. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Page Styles - open context menu for selected style - New/Modify. +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & List tab. + Right-click a paragraph, choose Paragraph - Paragraph - Outline & List tab. + Right-click a paragraph, choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Outline & List tab. + Choose Styles - Edit Style - Outline & List tab (Paragraph Styles). + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - List & Numbering tab (Paragraph Styles). +
+ Choose Format - Sections - Options button. +
+ Choose Format - Page Style - Columns tab. + Choose View - Styles - Page Styles - open context menu for selected page style - Modify/New - Columns tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Columns tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Columns tab. + Choose Insert - Section - Columns tab. + Choose Format - Section - Options button - Columns tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Page Style - Footnote tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Footnote tab. +
+
+ Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab. + Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab. +
+ Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles). +
+ + + Choose View - Styles or Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) to open Styles deck. + + + Click on the Character Style icon at top of the deck, then select a character style. + + + Right-click to open context menu and choose Modify/New. + + + + + + +Character Style Icon + + + + Character Style icon + + +
+
+ Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New (for Frame Styles). +
+ Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - open context menu Modify/New (for List Styles). +
+ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. + Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles (with cursor in a table). +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Area tab. + On the Image bar (when images are selected), click +
+ + + + Icon Graphics Properties + + + Graphics Properties + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Position and Size tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Position and Size tab.UFI: removed some lines with Format-Object, see #i64150 +Choose View - Styles - Frame Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Position and Size tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Wrap tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Wrap tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Wrap tab. + Choose Format - Wrap - Edit - Wrap tab. +
+ Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Hyperlink tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Hyperlink tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Hyperlink tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu for selected Frame style - Modify/New - Options tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Options tab. + Right-click selected object, choose Properties - Options tab. +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +
+ Choose Insert/Format - Image - Properties - Macro tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro tab. + Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro. + Choose Tools - ImageMap - open context menu Macro. + Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button. +
+
+ Choose Table - Properties. + On the Table bar (with cursor in table), click +
+ + + + +Table Properties Icon + + + + Table Properties + + +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Split Table. + Choose Table - Merge Table. + Choose Table - Properties - Table tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Columns tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Text Flow tab. + Right-click in a table, choose Cell. +
+ Choose Table - Merge Cells. + On the Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Merge Cells + + + Merge Cells + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Split Cells. + On the Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Unmerge Cells + + + Unmerge CellsSplit Cells + + +
+ +
+
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect. +
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Unprotect. + Open context menu in Navigator for tables. +
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Row. + In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height. +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Optimal Row Height + + + Optimal Row Height + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Evenly. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Distribute Rows Evenly + + + Distribute Rows Evenly + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Select - Row. +
+ Choose Table - Delete - Rows. + On Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Delete Row + + + Delete Row + + +
+ +
+
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Column. + In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width. +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Optimal Column Width + + + Optimal Column Width + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Distribute Columns Evenly + + + Space Columns Equally + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Select - Column. +
+ Choose Table - Insert - Columns. + Choose Table - Insert - Rows. + On Table bar, click + + + + Icon Insert Column + + + Insert Column + + + + + Icon Insert Row + + + Insert Row + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Delete - Columns. + On Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Delete Column + + + Delete Column + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Object Properties + + + Object Properties + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + Icon Frame Properties + + + Frame Properties + + +
+ +
+
+ Menu Format - Page Style - tab Text Grid, if Asian language support is enabled +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e67b4042 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp + + + + + +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation +Choose Tools - Word Count +Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering +Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering - Numbering tab +Choose Tools - Line Numbering (not for HTML format) +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes - Footnotes tab +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes - Endnotes tab +Choose Table - Convert - Text to Table +Choose Tools - Sort + +
+Choose Tools - Calculate +CommandCtrl + plus sign +
+Choose Tools - Update +Choose Tools - Update - Page Formatting +Choose Tools - Update - Current Index +Choose Tools - Update - Indexes and Tables +Choose Tools - Update - Update All + +
+Choose Tools - Update - Fields +F9 key +
+Choose Tools - Update - Links +Choose Tools - Update - Charts + +
+ Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Fields. + Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Bookmarks. +
+ +
+Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Mail Merge bar: +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Table Data bar: + + + + Icon + + + Mail Merge + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..189848a60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + The styles menu + /text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp + + + + Choose Styles - Edit Styles. + Choose Styles - Update Selected Style or CommandCtrl+ Shift+F11. + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection or Shift+F11. + Choose Styles - Load Styles from Template. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or Command+TF11. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..827ce08eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Print Preview + /text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Print Preview

+Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview. +
+ +
+ +
+Use the icons on the Print Preview Bar to scroll through the pages of the document or to print the document. +You can also press Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll through the pages. +You cannot edit your document while you are in the print preview. + +To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6dd10953f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge +/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp + + + + + + +Mail Merge +The Mail Merge dialog helps you in printing and saving form letters. + +
+ +
+During printing, the database information replaces the corresponding database fields (placeholders). For more information about inserting database fields refer to the Database tab page under Insert - Field - More Fields.db browser explorer +Select a database and table.db browser records + +Records +Determines the number of records for printing the form letter. One letter will be printed for each record. +All +Processes all the records from the database. +Selected records +Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database. + +From: +Specify the number of the first record to be printed. +To: +Specify the number of the last record to be printed. +Output +Determines whether to send your form letters to a printer or save them to a file. +Printer +Prints the form letters. +File +Saves the form letters in files. + + +Save as single document +Create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents + + +Save as individual documents +Create one document for every one data record. + +Generate file name from database + +Generate each file name from data contained in a database. + +Field + +Uses the content of the selected database field as the file name for the form letter. + + + +Path +Specifies the path to store the form letters. + + +... +Opens the Select Path dialog. + + +File format +Select the file format to store the resulting document. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..616b8a97a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Outline to Presentation +/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Outline to Presentation +Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95f0ed5a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Outline to Clipboard +/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +send;outline to clipboard +outline;outline to clipboard +clipboard;outline to clipboard + +Outline to Clipboard +Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF). +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f307f707c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create AutoAbstract +/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Create AutoAbstract + +Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents. You can specify the number of outline levels as well as the number of paragraphs displayed therein. All levels and paragraphs under the respective settings are hidden. + +
+ +
+ +Included Outline Levels +Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document. For example, if you choose 4 levels, all paragraphs formatted with Heading 1 to Heading 4 are included, along with the number of subsequent paragraphs specified in Subpoints per Level. + +Subpoints per Level +Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading. All of the paragraphs up to the maximum defined are included until the next paragraph with a Heading Style is reached. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..909d2124f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoAbstract to Presentation +/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +AutoAbstract to Presentation +Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style. +
+
+ +
+Included Outline Levels +Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. +Subpoints per Level +Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaa0114cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Name and Path of HTML Documents +/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp + + + + + + +

Name and Path of HTML Documents

+Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document. If you choose this option, a separate page of links to all of the pages that are generated is also created. + +
+ +
+Consecutive numbers are added to the file name if more than one HTML document is created. The titles of the HTML pages are created from the topmost chapter heading. +

File name

+ +

separated by

+Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page. To use this option, apply one of the heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs where you want to start a new page in the document. +

File type

+ +

Save

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce0153ae9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,548 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator + /text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +
+To open the Navigator, choose View - Navigator (F5). To move the Navigator, drag its title bar. To dock the Navigator, drag its title bar to the left, right or bottom edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, hold down the CommandCtrl key and double-click on a grey area of the Navigator. +Click the expander icon next to a category in the Navigator to view the items in the category. To view the number of items in a category, rest your mouse pointer over the category in the Navigator. To jump to an item in the document, double-click the item in the Navigator. +To jump to the next or previous item in a document, use the Navigate by box to select the item category, and then click the up or down arrows. + +The navigator shows what corresponds to the editing location in the navigator view. This can be according to different categories: Headings, Tables, Hyperlinks and so on. When the "Content Navigation View" button is pressed and headings are selected, the heading belonging to the current editing position is displayed and highlighted in the Navigator. When tables are selected, the associated table is displayed, and so on. If the element is located in a collapsed layer, the required layers above it are automatically expanded and remain expanded afterwards. + + + + + + +

Navigate By

+Use selection box to choose which type of item should be navigated, when using the Previous and Next buttons. + + +

Previous

+Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigate By list, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". + + + + + Icon Previous Object + + + Previous Item + + +
+ + + +

Next

+Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigate By list, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". + + + + + Icon Next Object + + + Next Item + + +
+ + +

Page number

+Type the number of the page that you want to jump to, and then press Enter. Use the spin buttons to navigate. + +

Content Navigation View

+Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category. +Context menus use a selection of commands found on this help page. The commands in a context menu change, depending on which category or item is selected. + + + + Icon Switch Content Navigation View + + + Switch Content Navigation View + + +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Category + + + Context Menu + + + + + Headings Icon + + + Headings + + + Collapse/Expand All, Send Outline to Clipboard, Outline Folding, Outline Tracking, Outline Level + + + + + + Heading item + + + Collapse/Expand All, Go to, Select, Delete, Promote Chapter, Demote Chapter, Promote Level, Demote Level, Outline Content Visibility, Outline Tracking, Outline Level + + + + + +Tables Icon + + + Tables + + + + + + + Table items + + + Go to, Select, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + Frames icon + + + Frames + + + + + + +Images Icon + + + Images + + + + + + +OLE Objects Icon + + + OLE Objects + + + + + + +Bookmarks Icon + + + Bookmarks + + + + + + + Frame, Image, OLE Objects, Bookmark items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + +Sections Icon + + + Sections + + + + + + + Section items + + + Go to, Select, Edit, Rename + + + + + +Hyperlinks Icon + + + Hyperlinks + + + + + + + Hyperlink items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + +References Icon + + + References + + + + + +Indexes Icon + + Indexes + + + + + + + References, Indexes items + + + Go to + + + + + +Comments Icon + + + Comments + + Show All, Hide All, Delete All + + + + + + + Comments items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete + + + + + +Drawing objects Icon + + + Drawing objects + + + + + + + Drawing objects items + + + Go to, Delete, Rename + + + + + + All + + + Drag Mode, Display + + +
+A hidden section in a document appears gray in the Navigator, and displays the text "hidden" when you rest the mouse pointer over it. The same applies to header and footer contents of Page Styles that are not used in a document, and hidden contents in tables, frames, graphics, OLE objects, and indexes. +

Toggle Master View

+Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. + + + + + Icon Toggle Master View + + + Toggle Master View + + +
+ + + +

Header

+Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area. + + + + + Icon Header + + + Header + + +
+ + + +

Footer

+Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area. + + + + + Icon Footer + + + Footer + + +
+ + + +

Anchor <-> Text

+Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor. + + + + + Icon Anchor <-> Text + + + Anchor <-> Text + + +
+ + + +

Set Reminder

+Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. + + + + + Icon Set Reminder + + + Set Reminder + + +
+Reminders are navigated in the order in which they are set. Reminders are not saved when a document is closed. + + + +

Outline Level

+ + + + Icon Outline level + + + Outline level + + +
+ +Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window. You can also access this command by right-clicking a heading in the Navigator window. + + +

1-10

+Click 1 to only view the top level headings (chapter heading) in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings. + + + +

List Box

+Shows or hides the Navigator list. + + + + + Icon List box on/off + + + List box on/off + + +
+ + + +

Promote Level

+Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Promote level + + + Promote level + + +
+ + + +

Demote Level

+Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Demote level + + + Demote level + + +
+ + + +

Promote Chapter

+Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Chapter Up + + + Chapter Up + + +
+ + + +

Demote Chapter

+Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Chapter down + + + Chapter down + + +
+ +To quickly reorder headings and their associated text in your document, select the "Headings" category in the list, and then click the Content View icon. Now you can use drag-and-drop to reorder contents. + + + +

Drag Mode

+Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use. + + + + + Icon Drag mode + + + Drag mode + + +
+ + + +

Insert As Hyperlink

+Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to. + + +

Insert As Link

+Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. + + +

Insert As Copy

+Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. + + + +

Open Documents

+Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list. +You can also right-click an item in the Navigator, choose Display, and then click the document that you want to view. + +

Outline Tracking

+Set Navigator’s mode of outline tracking. This feature applies only to outline entries under Headings in the Content View frame of Navigator. To see, enable, or change the mode, right-click on Headings or an item under Headings and choose Outline Tracking. The selected mode is applied to the entire document. +In Default and Focus mode, Navigator will automatically select the nearest heading before the current cursor position in the document. + In Default mode, the display of outline entries in Navigator is never changed, only an outline entry is selected. +In Focus mode, Navigator shows only the headings for the selected outline level, relative to the next higher outline level. For example, if a level 2 heading is selected, then all level 2 headings under the same level 1 heading are shown, while any level 3-10 headings (under the same level 1 heading) are collapsed. Other headings, not under the same level 1 heading, are also collapsed. +Choose Off to disable Outline Tracking. +
+ +Using Navigator to Arrange Headings + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73df40a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Navigation +/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Navigation +If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document. You can then use the up and down arrow icons to position the text cursor in the document on the previous or next target. + +Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object. + +Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object. +By default, as long as you have not selected any other entry, the arrow buttons jump to the previous or the next page in the document. The arrow buttons are black if you are browsing through pages and blue if you jump to other objects. +The entries largely correspond to those in the Navigator selection box. You can also select other jump destinations. An example are the reminders, which you can set with the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator. You can select an object from among the following options on the Navigation toolbar: table, frame, graphics, OLE object, page, headings, reminder, drawing object, control field, section, bookmark, selection, footnote, note, index entry, table formula, wrong table formula. +Reminders are navigated in the order in which they are set. +For table formulas, you can either jump to all table formulas located within your document or only to the incorrect ones. For incorrect formulas, you jump only to formulas that have resulted in errors. The program skips over formulas with resulting errors (those that reference incorrect formulas). +Working With the Navigation Toolbar +Open the Navigation toolbar by clicking on its top left icon located on the top of the Navigator display area. You can break the toolbar away from its place by dragging and arranging it on the screen. + +Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected. +You can configure $[officename] according to your specific preferences for navigating within a document. To do this, choose Tools - Customize. The various tables for adapting menus, keyboard input or toolbars contain various functions for navigation within the document under the "Navigate" area. In this way you can jump to the index tags in the document with the "To Next/Previous Index Tag" functions. +searching; repeating a search + +Repeat Search +With the Repeat search icon on the Navigation toolbar you can repeat a search you started with the Search and Replace dialog. To do this, click the icon. The blue arrow buttons on the vertical scrollbar now take on the functions Continue search forwards and Continue search backwards. If you now click one of the arrow surfaces, the search will be continued for the term entered in the Search and Replace dialog. + +Select this icon to browse through bookmarks. + +Select this icon to browse through control fields. + +Select this icon to browse through drawing objects. + +Select this icon to browse through frames. + +Select this icon to browse through footnotes. + +Select this icon to browse through graphics. + +Select this icon to browse through index entries. + +Select this icon to browse through reminders. + +Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type. + +Select this icon to browse through OLE objects. + +Select this icon to browse through headings. + +Select this icon to browse through pages. + +Select this icon to browse through comments. + +Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type. + +Select this icon to browse through sections. + +Select this icon to browse through selections. + +Select this icon to browse through search results. + +Select this icon to browse through table formulas. + + +Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas. + +Select this icon to browse through tables. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a8681f8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + +AutoText +/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

AutoText

+Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3. + +
+You can also click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert. +
+ +
+ +

AutoText

+The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. + +Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing +Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press CommandCtrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. +To display the list in reverse order, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + +Name +Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + +Shortcut +Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. +List box +Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. +You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. +Insert +Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. +If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. + + +AutoText +Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. + +New +Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command. + +New (text only) +Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command. + +Copy +Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard. + +Replace +Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document. + +Rename +Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. + + +Edit +Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close. + +Macro +Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. +You can also use the macros that are linked to some of the provided AutoText entries in AutoText entries that you create. The AutoText entries must be created with the "text only" option. For example, insert the string <field:company> in an AutoText entry, and $[officename] replaces the string with the contents of the corresponding database field. + +Import +Opens a dialog where you can select the 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. + +Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. + + +Edit Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. + +Category +Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. + +Path +Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. + +New +Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. + +Rename +Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. + +Selection list +Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. + + +Path +Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. +To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. +Save links relative to +Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. + +File system +Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. + +Internet +Links to files on the Internet are relative. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26ffb84cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rename AutoText +/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Rename AutoText + Allows you to change the name of an AutoText entry. +
+ +
+ Name + Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item. + New + Type the new name for the selected AutoText component. + Shortcut + Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1420907c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Bibliography Entry + /text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp + + + + + + + +Edit Bibliography Entry +Edits the selected bibliography entry. + +
+ +
+ +Entry + +Short name +Displays the abbreviation for the bibliography entry. + +Author, Title +Displays the author and title information contained in the bibliography entry. + +Apply +Applies the changes that you made, and then closes the Edit Bibliography Entry dialog. + +Close +Closes the dialog. + +New +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new entry. + +Edit +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can edit the current entry. + +Tips for working with bibliography entries. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6f51b126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Fields + /text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp + + + + + + + +

Edit Fields

+Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command. In the dialog, you can use the arrow buttons to move to the previous or the next field. +You can also double-click a field in your document to open the field for editing. + +
+ +
+To change the view between field names and field contents in your document, choose View - Field Names. +If you select a DDE link in your document, and then choose Edit - Fields, the Edit Links dialog opens. +If you click in front of a "sender" type field, and then choose Edit - Fields, the User data dialog opens. + +

Type

+Lists the type of field that you are editing. +The following dialog elements are only visible when the corresponding field type is selected. + +

Select

+Lists the field options, for example, "fixed". If you want, you can click another option for the selected field type. + + +

Format

+Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format. The formats that are available depend on the type of field that you are editing. + +

Offset

+Displays the offset for the selected field type, for example, for "Next Page," "Page Numbers" or "Previous Page". You can enter a new offset value which will be added to the displayed page number. +If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + +

Level

+Change the defined values and outline levels for the "Chapter" field type. + +

Name

+Displays the name of a field variable. If you want, you can enter a new name. + +

Value

+Displays the current value of the field variable. If you want, you can enter a new value. + + +

Condition

+Displays the condition that must be met for the field to be activated. If you want, you can enter a new condition. + +

Then, Else

+Change the field contents that are displayed depending on whether the field condition is met or not. + + +

Reference

+Insert or modify the reference text for the selected field. + +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the macro assigned to the selected field. + +

Placeholder

+Displays the placeholder text of the selected field. + +

Insert Text

+Displays the text that is linked to a condition. + +

Formula

+Displays the formula of a formula field. + + + + +

Database selection

+Select a registered database that you want to insert the selected field from. You can also change the table or query that the selected field refers to. + +

Record number

+Displays the database record number that is inserted when the condition specified for the "Any record" field type is met. + + +

Left Arrow

+Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document contains more than one field of the same type. + + + + + Icon Previous Field + + + Previous Field + + +
+ + + +

Right Arrow

+Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document contains more than one field of the same type. + + + + + Icon Next Field + + + Next Field + + +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81871eaba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Footnote or Endnote + /text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit Footnote or Endnote

+Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command. +
+ +
+ +
+To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the footnote area at the bottom of the page, or at the end of the document. +To quickly jump to the footnote or endnote text, click the anchor for note in the document. You can also position the cursor in front of or behind the marker, and then press CommandCtrl+Shift+PgDn. To jump back to the anchor for the note, press PgUp. + +

Numbering

+Select the numbering type for the footnote or endnote. + +

Auto

+ + +

Character

+ + +

Choose

+ +To change the format of a footnote or endnote anchor or text, select it, and then choose Format - Character. You can press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles window and modify the footnote or endnote paragraph style. + +

Type

+Select the type of note to insert, that is, footnote or endnote. A footnote is placed at the bottom of the current page, whereas an endnote is placed at the end of the document. + +

Footnote

+Converts an endnote to a footnote. + +

Endnote

+Converts a footnote to an endnote. + + +

Arrow left

+Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document. + + + + + Icon Previous footnote + + + Previous footnote + + +
+ + + +

Arrow right

+Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document. + + + + + Icon Next footnote + + + Next footnote + + +
+ + +Insert Footnote/Endnote dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ad7f5d43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Index Entry + /text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Index Entry

+Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command. +To insert an index entry, select a word in the document, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry. + +
+ +
+ +

Selection

+Edits the selected index entry. + + +

Index

+Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to. You cannot change the index type of an index entry in this dialog. Instead, you must delete the index entry from the document, and then insert it again in a different index type. + +

Entry

+Edit the index entry if necessary. When you modify the index entry, the new text only appears in the index, and not at the index entry anchor in the document. For example, you can enter an index with comments such as "Basics, see also General". + +

1st key

+To create a multilevel index, type the name of the first level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name. + +

2nd key

+Type the name of the second level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name. + +

Level

+Changes the outline level of a table of contents entry. + + + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted. + + +

End arrow to left

+Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon End arrow to left + + + End arrow to left + + +
+ + + +

End arrow to right

+Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon End arrow to right + + + End arrow to right + + +
+ + + +

Arrow to left

+Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon Left Arrow + + + Left Arrow + + +
+ + + +

Arrow to right

+Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon Right Arrow + + + Right Arrow + + +
+ +You can jump quickly to index entries with the Navigation Bar. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0766b1c63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Sections +/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Edit Sections +Changes the properties of sections defined in your document. To insert a section, select text or click in your document, and then choose Insert - Section. + +
+ +
+The Edit Sections dialog is similar to the Insert - Section dialog, and offers the following additional options: + +Section +Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list. If the cursor is currently in a section, the section name is displayed on the right side of the status bar at the bottom of the document window. +The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list. An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glasses symbol. +Options +Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of the selected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first. + +Remove +Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd72ff252 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Rulers + /text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Rulers +Contains a submenu for showing or hiding the horizontal and vertical rulers. +
+ +Rulers +Show or hide the horizontal ruler and if activate, the vertical ruler. The horizontal ruler can be used to adjust page horizontal margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. + +
+ +
+ +Vertical Ruler +Show or hide the vertical ruler. The vertical ruler can be used to adjust page vertical margins, table cells, and object heights on the page. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df47d5fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Text Boundaries + /text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Text Boundaries +Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23c707f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Field Shadings + /text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Field Shadings +Shows or hides shadings around fields in your document like non-breaking spaces, soft hyphens, indexes, and footnotes. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+Formatting Marks On/Off +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8125574c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Field Names + /text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Field Names +Switches between showing fields as field names or field values. When enabled the field names are displayed, and when disabled the field values displayed. Some field contents cannot be displayed. +
+ +
+ +
+To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. +When you print a document with View - Field Names enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out. + +
+Insert - Field. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e93b6f3bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Marks + /text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Formatting Marks

+Shows hidden formatting symbols in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces. +
+ +
+ +
+When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. +To specify which formatting marks are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display formatting area. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..808a7d170 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Web Layout + /text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Web Layout +Displays the document as it would be viewed in a Web browser. This is useful when you create HTML documents. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b486dc8b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Normal Layout + /text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Normal Layout +Displays how the document will look when you print it. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df3469006 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Field Hidden Paragraphs + /text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Field Hidden Paragraphs

+Shows or hides hidden paragraphs. This option only affects the screen display of hidden paragraphs, and not the printing of hidden paragraphs. +
+ +
+ +
+To enable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display fields area is selected. +Use the field command "Hidden Paragraph" to assign a condition that must be met to hide a paragraph. If the condition is not met, the paragraph is displayed. +When you hide a paragraph, footnotes and frames that are anchored to characters in the paragraph are also hidden. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bb0a94c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Manual Break + /text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp + + + + + + + + +manual break;next full line +manual break;right +manual break;clear right +clear right;manual break +manual break;clear left +manual break;left +clear left;manual break +manual break;next line + +

Insert Manual Break

+Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position. + +
+ +
+ +

Type

+Select the type of break that you want to insert. + + +

Line Break

+
+Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph. +The restart location specifies where the next line will start after a line break. +
+Possible values are below. +Original text layout: + + Original text layout + + + + + Value + + + Formatting Mark + + + Meaning + + + + + [None] + + + + Line break none + + + Continue right after the current line. + + Example of line break None (default) + + + + + Next Full Line + + + Line break full + + + Continue at the next full line, that is below all of the anchored objects intersecting with the current line. + + Example of line break Next full line + + + + + Left + + + Line break left + + + Continue at the next line which is unblocked on the left hand side. + + Example of Line break left + + + + + Right + + + Line break right + + + Continue at the next line which is unblocked on the right hand side. + + Example of Line break right + + + +
+The default value for the line break is none. + +You can also insert a default line break by pressing Shift+Enter. + + +

Column Break

+
+Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column. +Insert a column break by pressing CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter +
+ + +

Page Break

+Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page. +You can also insert a page break by pressing Command +Ctrl+Enter. However, if you want to assign the following page a different Page Style, you must use the menu command to insert the manual page break. + + +

Page Style

+Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break. +To switch between landscape and portrait orientation, choose the Default Page Style to apply portrait orientation or the Landscape style to apply landscape orientation. + + +

Change page number

+Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break. + + +

Page number

+Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break. +To display manual breaks, choose View - Nonprinting Characters. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8a5b999c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Insert Section +/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

+Insert Section +

+ +Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met. + +
+ +
+You can insert an entire document in a section, or a named section from another. You can also insert a section as a DDE link. +To edit a section, choose Format - Sections. +The Insert Section dialog contains the following tabs: + + + + + +

Insert

+Inserts the section that you defined at the current cursor position in the document. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a08febae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + +Section +/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sections;inserting sections by DDE +DDE; command for inserting sections + + + + + +Section +Sets the properties of the section. +
+
+ +
+ + +New Section +Type a name for the new section. By default, $[officename] automatically assigns the name "Section X" to new sections, where X is a consecutive number. +Link + + +Link +Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section. + + +DDEUFI: WIN only, while fixing #109638# +Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected. +
+The general syntax for a DDE command is: "<Server> <Topic> <Item>", where server is the DDE name for the application that contains the data. Topic refers to the location of the Item (usually the file name), and Item represents the actual object. +
+ For example, to insert a section named "Section1" from a $[officename] text document abc.odt as a DDE link, use the command: "soffice x:\abc.odt Section1". To insert the contents of the first cell from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file called "abc.xls", use the command: "excel x:\[abc.xls]Sheet1 z1s1". You can also copy the elements that you want to insert as a DDE link, and then Edit - Paste Special. You can then view the DDE command for the link, by selecting the contents and choosing Edit - Fields. + + +File name / DDE command + +Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button to locate the file. If the DDE check box is selected, enter the DDE command that you want to use. + + + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert. + + +Section +Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, you are prompted to update the links. +Write Protection + + +Protect +Prevents the selected section from being edited. + + +With password +Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters. + + +Password +Opens a dialog where you can change the current password. +Hide + + +Hide +Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden sections appear gray in the Navigator. When you rest your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Help tip "hidden" is displayed. +You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer, footnote, frame, or table cell. + + +With condition +Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section. A condition is a logical expression, such as "SALUTATION EQ Mr.". For example, if you use the mail merge form letter feature to define a database field called "Salutation" that contains "Mr.", "Ms.", or "Sir or Madam", you can then specify that a section will only be printed if the salutation is "Mr.". +Another example would be to create the field variable "x" and set its value to 1. Then specify a condition based on this variable for hiding a section, such as: "x eq 1". If you want to display the section, set the value of the variable "x" to "0". +Properties +You see this area of the dialog when the current document is an XForms document. +Editable in read-only document +Select to allow editing of the section's contents even if the document is opened in read-only mode. + +Field commands +Syntax for conditions + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a21a26d93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Indents (Sections) +/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Indents

+Indents the section with a left and right margin. +
+
+ +
+ +

Before section

+Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin. + +

After section

+Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin. +
+ +Field commands +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6abcc8a44 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Footnote/Endnote +/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp + + + + + + + + +Footnote/Endnote +Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position. You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol. + +The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes. + +Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document. +UFI: what about sections? Will endnotes be placed there? +
+ +
+Numbering +Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. + +Automatic +Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes. + + + +Character +Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter, number or special character. + +Choose +Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. + +Type +Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. + +Footnote +Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. + +Endnote +Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f16025c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Bookmark + /text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp + + + + + + bookmarks;inserting + +UFI: added "bookmarks;inserting" index + + + + +

Insert Bookmark

+Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time. In an HTML document, bookmarks are converted to anchors that you can jump to from a hyperlink. + +
+ +
+To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmarks entry, and then double-click the bookmark. + +You can also right-click the Page Number field at the left end of the Status Bar at the bottom of the document window, and then choose the bookmark that you want to jump to. + +

Name

+Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. Then, click Insert. +You cannot use the following characters in a bookmark name: / \ @ : * ? " ; , . # + +

Bookmarks

+Lists all the bookmarks in the current document. + +

Rename

+To rename a bookmark, select the bookmark, press Rename, then type the new name in the dialog box. + +

Delete

+To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow. +If bookmarks are protected, then they cannot be deleted or renamed. + +

Go to

+To move the cursor in the document to a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..516870d83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Caption + /text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp + + + + + + + + + +
+ +Caption +Adds a numbered caption to a selected image, table, chart, frame, or shape. You can also access this command by right-clicking the item that you want to add the caption to. +
+ +
+ +
+ +Properties +Set the caption options for the current selection. + + +Category +Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name. For example, the "Illustration" caption category is formatted with the "Illustration" paragraph style. + + +Numbering +Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption. + + +Caption +Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number. + + +Separator +Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text. +moved help id to here + +Position +Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects. + +Options + + + +AutoCaption +Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8189ce30f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Options +Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document. + +
+ +
+ + +Numbering by chapter +When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". + +Level +Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. + +Separator +Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. +Category and frame format + +Character style +Specifies the character style. + +Apply border and shadow +Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b1ad5fef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Envelope + /text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp + + + +inserting;envelopes + letters;inserting envelopes + envelopes +MW made "envelopes;" a one level entry + +Envelope + Creates an envelope. On three tab pages, you can specify the addressee and sender, the position and format for both addresses, the size of the envelope, and the envelope orientation. + +
+ +
+ + + + +New doc. + Creates a new document and inserts the envelope. + +Insert + Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. + + To delete an envelope from a document + + + Click into the envelope page to make it the current page. + + + Right-click the field on the status line that shows "Envelope". + A submenu opens showing some page styles. + + + Choose the "Default" page style from the submenu. + This removes the special "Envelope" page formatting. + + + Delete the frames for sender and recipient. Click the border of each frame and press the Del key. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b54da535 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Envelope +/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Envelope + Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database. +
+
+ +
+ Addressee + Enter the delivery address. You can also click in this box, and select a database, a table, and field, and then click the arrow button to insert the field in the address. If you want, you can apply formatting, such as bold and underline, to the address text. + +Sender + Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return address. $[officename] automatically inserts your user data in the Sender box, but you can also enter the data that you want. + Database + Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert. + Table + Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert. + Database field + Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60c14049c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Format +/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Format +Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope. +
+
+ +
+Addressee +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the addressee field. +Position +Sets the position of the recipient's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Sender +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the sender field. +Position +Sets the position of the sender's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the sender field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the sender field. +Size +Select the envelope size format that you want to use, or create a custom size. +Format +Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size. +Width +Enter the width of the envelope. +Height +Enter the height of the envelope. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbc3e3124 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printer +/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Printer +Set the print options for the envelope. +
+
+ +
+Consult the documentation that came with your printer for setting up the printer for envelopes. Depending on the printer model, envelopes may have to be placed left, right, in the middle, and either face up or face down. + +Horizontal left +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray. + +Horizontal center +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray. + +Horizontal right +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray. + +Vertical left +Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray. + +Vertical center +Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray. + +Vertical right +Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray. + +Print from top +Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray. + +Print from bottom +Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray. + +Shift right +Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right. + +Shift down +Enter the amount to shift the print area down. +Current printer +Displays the name of the current printer. + +Setup +Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6bf15121 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp + + + + + +

Fields

+Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The dialog lists all available fields. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

Insert

+Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button. +Closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6ff3328e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + + Document (Fields) + /text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + +

Document

+Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time. +
+ +
+ +
+ +To insert a field in your document, first select the field Type, then click in the Select list, to choose which information item should be inserted, then click Insert. + +
+ + +

Type

+Lists the available field types. +
+ +
+ + +

Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection"

+Lists what information can be inserted for a selected field type. + +
+

Available field Types and Select lists

+ + + + Type + + + Select list + + + + + Author + + + Name or initials of current user (as entered in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data). + + + + + Chapter + + + Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. + + + + + Date + + + Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. + + + + + File name + + + Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. + + + + + Page + + + Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. + + + + + Paragraph Signature + + + Inserts a meta-data field with a digital signature for the paragraph. You must have a digital certificate to sign a paragraph. + + + + + + Sender + + + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + + + + + Statistics + + + Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. + + + + + Templates + + + Inserts the filename, the filename without the file extension, the path, or the path and filename of the current template. You can also insert the Template name and Category of the current template. + + + + + Time + + + Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9. + + +
+ +To quickly insert a field from the Select list, double-click the field. + +
+ +

Format

+If a field is displaying a date, time or number, then Format is used to customize the appearance of the date, time, or number. Common formats are shown in the Format window, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +
+When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. +If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Chapter numbering are not displayed. +If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. + + +Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used. + + + +

Level

+Enter outline level of the chapter to be displayed. The inserted field will display the value taken from last paragraph with the specified outline level placed before the inserted field. + + +
+ +

Offset

+Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1". +
+With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty. +If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + +

Offset in days/minutes

+Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..513b5fcc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + + + + + +Cross-references +/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp + + + +
+
+ + + +

Cross-reference

+This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document. + +
+The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually every time you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 and the references in the document are updated too. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Type

+Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Set Reference + + +Set target for a referenced field. Under Name, enter a name for the reference. When inserting the reference, the name will then appear as an identification in the list box Selection. +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For the target in HTML documents, you have to insert a bookmark. + + + + +Insert Reference + + +Inserting a reference to another position in the document. The corresponding text position has to be defined with "Set Reference" first. Otherwise, inserting a reference by choosing a field name under Selection is not possible. +In master documents, you can also reference from one sub-document to another. Note that the reference name will not appear in the selection field and has to be entered "by hand". +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For referenced fields in HTML documents, you have to insert a hyperlink. + + + + +Headings + + +The Selection box shows a list of all headings in the order of their appearance in the document. + + + + +Numbered Paragraphs + + +The Selection box shows a list of all ordered paragraphs in the order of their appearance in the document. The list includes: + + + paragraphs with a paragraph style assigned a numbering scheme in the Tools > Chapter Numbering dialog + + + + ordered list paragraphs, formatted with the Formatting toolbar or Bullets and Numbering dialog + + + paragraphs formatted with a numbered list style + + + paragraphs formatted with a paragraph style with a numbered list style applied in the Outline & List tab. + + + + + + +Bookmarks + + +After inserting a bookmark in the document with Insert - Bookmark, the bookmarks entry on the References tab becomes usable. Bookmarks are used to mark certain text passages in a document. In a text document, you can use the bookmarks, for example, to jump from one passage in the document to another. +In an HTML document, these bookmarks become anchors <A name>, which determine the target of hyperlinks for example. + + + + +Footnotes + + +If your documents contains a footnote, you can select the Footnotes entry. A reference to a footnote returns the footnote number. + + + + +(Inserted objects with captions) + + +You can set references to objects that have captions applied. For example, insert a picture, right-click the picture, choose Caption. Now the object shows up as a numbered "Illustration" in the list. + + +
+ +References are fields. To remove a reference, delete the field. If you set a longer text as a reference and you do not want to reenter it after deleting the reference, select the text and copy it to the clipboard. You can then reinsert it as "unformatted text" at the same position using the command Edit - Paste special. The text remains intact while the reference is deleted. + + +

Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection"

+Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Refer using" list, and then click Insert. +To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down CommandCtrl and double-click the field. +
+In the Refer using list, click the format that you want to use. + +

Refer using

+Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field. The following formats are available: + + + +Format + + +Meaning + + + + +Page number (unstyled) + + +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target. + + + + +Referenced text + + +Inserts the complete reference target text. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + + +“Above”/“Below” + + +Inserts "above" or "below", depending on the location of the reference target relative to the position of the reference field. + + + + +Page number (styled) + + +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target using the format specified in the page style. + + + + +Number + + +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including superior levels depending on the context. See note below this table for more information. + + + + +Number (no context) + + +Inserts only the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. + + + + +Number (full context) + + +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including all superior levels. + + + + +Chapter + + +Inserts the number of the chapter containing the reference target. + + + + +Category and Number + + +Inserts the category (caption type) and the number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + + + +Caption Text + + +Inserts the caption label of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + + + +Numbering + + +Inserts the caption number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + +
+ +The "Number" format inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. The superior levels are included depending on the context, as necessary. +For example, when you are in a chapter 1, subchapter 2, subpart 5, this may be numbered as 1.2.5. When you insert here a reference to text in the previous subpart "1.2.4" and you apply the "Number" format, then the reference will be shown as "4". If in this example the numbering is set to show more sublevels, the same reference will be shown as "2.4" or "1.2.4", depending on the setting. If you use the "Number (full context)" format, you will always see "1.2.4", no matter how the numbered paragraph is formatted. +
+
+
+ +

Name

+
+Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. To set a target, click "Set Reference" in the Type list, type a name in this box, and then click Insert. To reference the new target, click the target name in the Selection list. +
+In a master document, targets that are in different sub-documents are not displayed in the Selection list. If you want to insert a reference to the target, you must type the path and the name in the Name box. + +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields. +
+

Value

+Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. +
+If you select text in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the field that you insert.Value box (always disabled) + +Edit the value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38f9e93b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + +Functions +/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp + + + +
+

Functions

+ + +Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select. + + +Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you can define a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides a field. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your document when needed. +
+
+ +
+ +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Conditional text + + +Inserts text if a certain condition is met. For example, enter "sun eq 1" in the Condition box, and then the text that you want to insert when the variable "sun" equals "1" in the Then box. If you want, you can also enter the text that you want to display when this condition is not met in the Else box. To define the variable "sun", click the Variables tab, select "Set variable", type "sun" in the Name box, and its value in the Value box. + + + + +Input list + + + Inserts a text field that displays one item from a list. You can add, edit, and remove items, and change their order in the list. Click an Input list field in your document or press CommandCtrl+Shift+F9 to display the Choose Item dialog. + + + + +Input field + + +Inserts a text field that you can open by clicking it in the document. You can then change the text that is displayed. + + + + +Execute macro + + +Inserts a text field that runs a macro when you click the field in the document. To assign a macro to the field, click the Macro button. + + + + +Placeholder + + +Inserts a placeholder field in the document, for example, for graphics. When you click a placeholder field in the document, you are prompted to insert the item that is missing. + + + + +Hidden text + + +Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View and clear the Hidden text check box. + + + + +Hidden Paragraph + + +Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. + + + + +Combine characters + + +Combines up to 6 characters, so that they behave as a single character. This feature is only available when Asian fonts are supported. + + +
+
+The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list. +
+ + +

Format

+For function fields, the format field is only used for fields of the type placeholder. Here, the format determines the object for which the placeholder stands. +
+

Condition

+For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. +
+ + +

Then, Else

+Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box. +You can also insert database fields in the Then and Else boxes using the format "databasename.tablename.fieldname". +If the table or the field name does not exist in a database, nothing is inserted. +If you include the quotes in "databasename.tablename.fieldname", the expression is inserted as text. +
+

Reference

+Type the text that you want to display in the field. If you are inserting a placeholder field, type the text that you want to display as a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field. +
+

FormatUFI: see spec "Macro Selector..."

+Select the macro that you want to run when the field is clicked. +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the selected macro. +

Placeholder

+Type the text that you want to appear in the placeholder field. +

Hidden text

+Type the text that you want to hide if a condition is met. +

Characters

+Enter the characters that you want to combine. You can combine a maximum of 6 characters. This option is only available for the Combine characters field type. +

Value

+Enter a value for the selected field. +
+ +

Macro

+Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field. +
+The following controls are displayed for Input list fields: + +

Item

+Enter a new item. + +

Add

+Adds the Item to the list. + +

Items on list

+Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document. + +

Remove

+Removes the selected item from the list. + +

Move Up

+Moves the selected item up in the list. + +

Move Down

+Moves the selected item down in the list. + +

Name

+Enter a unique name for the Input list. + + +

Choose Item

+This dialog is shown when you click an Input list field in the document. +Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK. + +

Edit

+Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list. + +

Next

+Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available. You see this button when you open the Choose Item dialog by CommandCtrl+Shift+F9. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3af7f363 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + +DocInformation +/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp + + + +
+ + +

DocInformation

+DocInformation fields contain information about the properties of a document, such as the date a document was created. To view the properties of a document, choose File - Properties. +
+
+ +
+When you export and import an HTML document containing DocInformation fields, special $[officename] formats are used. + +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Comments + + + Inserts the comments as entered in the Description tab page of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Created + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time when the document was created. + + + + +Custom + + + Inserts the contents of the properties found on the Custom Properties tab of the File - Properties dialog. (Only shown if Custom properties are added.) + + + + +Keywords + + + Inserts the keywords as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Last printed + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date or time that the document was last printed. + + + + +Modified + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time of the last save. + + + + +Revision number + + + Inserts the version number of the current document. + + + + +Subject + + + Inserts the subject as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Title + + + Inserts the title as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Total editing time + + + Inserts the amount of time spent on editing a document. + + +
+ + +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. + +For the "Created", "Modified", and "Last printed" field types, you can include the author, date, and time of the corresponding operation. + +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. + + +
+ +

Fixed content

+Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +
+Fields with fixed content are only evaluated when you create a new document from a template that contains such a field. For example, a date field with fixed content inserts the date that a new document was created from the template. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c2a1188d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + +Variables (fields) +/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp + + + +
+user-defined fields, restriction + + + +

Variables

+Variable fields let you add dynamic content to your document. For example, you can use a variable to reset the page numbering. +
+
+ +
+ + +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + + +Type + + +Description + + + + +Set Variable + + +Defines a variable and its value. You can change the value of a variable by clicking in front of the variable field, and then choosing Edit - Field. + + + + +Show Variable + + +Inserts the current value of the variable that you click in the Select list. + + + + +DDE field + + +Inserts a DDE link into the document, that you can update as often as you want through the assigned name. + + + + +Insert Formula + + +Inserts a fixed number, or the result of a formula. + + + + +Input field + + +Inserts a new value for a variable or a User Field. +The value of a variable in an Input field is only valid from where the field is inserted and onwards. To change the value of the variable later in the document, insert another Input field of the same name, but with a different value. However, the value of a User Field is changed globally. +The variables are displayed in the Select field. When you click the Insert button, the dialog Review Fields appears, where you can enter the new value or additional text as a remark. + + + + +Number range + + +Inserts automatic numbering for tables, graphics, or frames. + + + + +Set page variable + + +Inserts a reference point in the document, after which the page count restarts. Select "on" to enable the reference point, and "off" to disable it. You can also enter an offset to start the page count at a different number. + + + + +Show page variable + + +Displays the number of pages from the "Set page variable" reference point to this field. + + + + +User Field + + +Inserts a custom global variable. You can use the User Field to define a variable for a condition statement. When you change a User Field, all instances of the variable in the document are updated. + + +
+
+ +

Select

on all tab pages this is called "Select", except for "Cross-References", which uses "Selection" +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. +
+To quickly insert a field from the Select list, hold down CommandCtrl and double-click the field. + +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Provides Format header and explanation + +Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. +Provides Name header and explanation + This option is available for "Set variable", "DDE field", "Number range" and "User Field" field types. +User-defined fields are only available in the current document. + +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. + + +In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number. +Warns that following types depend on the selection in the Type list +In an HTML document, two additional fields are available for the "Set variable" field type: HTML_ON and HTML_OFF. The text that you type in the Value box is converted to an opening HTML tag (<Value>) or to a closing HTML (</Value>) tag when the file is saved as an HTML document, depending on the option that you select. +

DDE Statement

+taken from DDE in Section +This option is only available if the "DDE field" field type is selected. +

Formula

+This option is only available if the "Insert Formula" field type is selected. + + +This option is only available if the "Set page variable" field type is selected. +
+ +

Invisible

+Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is only available for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types. +
+

Numbering by Chapter

+Sets the options for resetting chapter numbers. + +

Level

+Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document. + +

Separator

+Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels. +Numbering by Chapter, Level and Separator are only available for the "Number range" field type. +
+ +

Apply

+Adds the user-defined field to the Select list. + +
+
+ +Delete +Removes the user-defined field from the select list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document. To remove a field that is used in the current document from the list, first delete all instances of the field in the document, and then remove it from the list. + + + +Icon + + +Delete + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a88c9583 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database +/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp + + + +
+ + +Database +You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document. +
+
+ +
+ +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Field type + + +Meaning + + + + +Any Record + + +Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. +You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. + + + + +Database Name + + +Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. + + + + +Mail merge field + + +Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. + + + + +Next record + + +Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. +You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. + + + + +Record number + + +Inserts the number of the selected database record. + + +
+ + +Database Selection +Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. + +For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. + +If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. + +Record number +Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. +If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. +Format +Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is available for numerical, boolean, date and time fields.see #i64135 + +From database +Uses the format defined in the selected database. + +Browse +Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. + +User defined +Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. + + +List of user-defined formats +Lists the available user-defined formats. + +Printing a form letter +When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..829009a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + +Special Tags +/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tags; in $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer; special HTML tags +HTML;special tags for fields +fields;HTML import and export +time fields;HTML +date fields;HTML +DocInformation fields +MW changed "$[officename] Writer;tags" to "$[officename];special HTML tags" +Special Tags +When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. +$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type. +
+Date and Time Fields +For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. +For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. +Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Date is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Date is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+
+DocInformation Fields +For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. +The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. +Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Description (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ YY">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation time (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> + + + + +Modification date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..935104d45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Input Field +/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Input Field +Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. +To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. + +Reference +This box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box on the Functions or Variables tab of the Fields dialog. The box underneath displays the contents of the field. + +Next +Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ff2a5a16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,447 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Conditions + /text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp + + + +logical expressions + formulating conditions + conditions; in fields and sections + fields;defining conditions + sections;defining conditions + variables; in conditions + user data;in conditions + databases;in conditions + hiding; database fields + +

Defining Conditions +

+ Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. + You can define conditions for the following field types: + + + Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. + + + Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. + + + Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. + + + Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. + + + The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: + + + + TRUE + + + The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + + + + + FALSE + + + The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + + +
+ + If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. + When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. + You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: + + + Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties + + + Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field + + + Variables based on user data + + + Variables based on the contents of database fields + + + You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. +

Conditions and Variables

+ The following examples use a variable called "x": + + + + x == 1 or x EQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + + + + + x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + + + + + sinx == 0 + + + The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + + +
+ + To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: + + + + x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + + + Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + + + + + x == "" or x EQ "" + or + !x or NOT x + + + Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + + +
+ + The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. +

User Data

+ You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). + The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: + + + + Variable + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + Email address + + + + + user_state + + + State (not in all $[officename] versions) + + +
+ + For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". +

Conditions and Database Fields

+ You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: + + + + Example + + + Meaning + + + + + Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company NEQ "" + Database.Table.Company != "" + + + The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) + + + + + !Database.Table.Company + NOT Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company EQ "" + Database.Table.Company =="" + + + Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. + + + + + Database.Table.Company !="Sun" + Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun" + + + Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is not "Sun". (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) + + + + + Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name + + + Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. + + +
+ + Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). + When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# +

Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field

+ You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. + Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" + or type the following + NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company + If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. +

Examples of Conditions in Fields

+ The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. +

To display conditional text based on the number of pages:

+ + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type "page == 1". + + + In the Then box, type "There is only one page". + + + In the Or box, type "There are several pages". + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + +

To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable

+ + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Set Variable". + + + In the Name box, type "Profit". + + + In the Value box, type "5000". + + + Click Insert. + + + Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". + + + In the Then box, type "Target is not met". + + + In the Or box, type "Target is met". + + + Click Insert. + + + To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. +

To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field:

+ The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Database tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". + + + In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". + + + In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: + + + Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". + + + In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. + + + You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type box, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" + + + In the Then box, type "Dear". + + + In the Else box, type "Hello". + + + Click Insert. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36e8d43d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Edit fields (variables) + /text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + + + + fields;editing + edit;fields + +

Edit Fields (variables)

+ Edit field contents. +
+
+ Choose Edit Fields of the context menu of the selected field. +
+

Type

+ Shows the type of the selected field. + select heading + Provides Format header and explanation + + + apply control +

Arrow buttons

+ Use the arrow buttons to go to next or previous field of same type in the document. +

Edit

+ When visible, opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. The dialog depends on the type of the field. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e25fb59e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Table of Contents and Index + /text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +Table of Contents and Index +Opens a menu to insert an index or bibliography entry, as well as inserting a table of contents, index, and or bibliography. +
+ +
+ +
+ +Index Entry + + +Bibliography Entry + + +Table of Content, Index or Bibliography + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41b90158e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Index Entry +/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Insert Index Entry +Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry. + +
+ +
+To edit an index entry, place the cursor in front of the index field, and then choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry...removed a para - see #i64023 +You can leave the Insert Index Entry dialog open while you select and insert entries. +Selection + +Index +Select the index that you want to add the entry to. + +Entry +Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed. + +1st key +Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold". + +2nd key +Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold". +
+ +Phonetic reading +Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled. +
+ +Main Entry +Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index. $[officename] displays the page number of the main entry in a different format than the other entries in the index. + +Level +Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style. +This option is available only for table of contents and user-defined index entries. + +Apply to all similar texts +Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included. +You cannot use the function for an Entry that you entered manually in this dialog. +To include all occurrences of a text passage in an index, select the text, choose Edit - Find & Replace, and click Find All. Then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry and click Insert. + +Match case + + +Whole words only + + +Insert +Marks an index entry in your text. + +Close +Closes the dialog. + +New user-defined index +Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index. + +Name +Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables. + +Using Tables of Content and Indexes + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..976c11982 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography +/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography

+ Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. To edit an index or table of contents, place the cursor in the index or table of contents, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. +
+ +
+ You can also preview the index or table in this dialog. + Depending on the type of index or table that you select, the following tabs are present. + + + + + Use this tab to specify the column layout for the index or table of contents. By default, the index title is one-column wide and extends out from left page margin. + + + Using Tables of Content and Indexes + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21431e1cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Styles +/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Styles +You can assign different paragraph styles to change the formatting of index titles, separators and index entries. You can also modify paragraph styles in this dialog. +
+
+ +
+Assignment + +Levels +Select the index level that you change the formatting of. + +Paragraph Styles +Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button. + +< +Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style. + +Default +Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style. + +Edit +Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebd512dab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Type +/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Type + Use this tab to specify and define the type of index that you want to insert. You can also create custom indexes. +
+
+ +
+ Depending on the type of index that you select, this tab contains the following options. + Table of Contents + + Alphabetical Index + + Illustration Index + + Index of Tables + + User-Defined + + Table of Objects + + Bibliography + + + Using Tables of Content and Indexes + Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4723157aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Index + /text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp + + + + + +

Index

+ The following options are available when you select Table of Contents as the index type. + +
+ +
+
+

Type and Title

+ Specify the type and title of the index. + +

Type

+ Select the type of index that you want to insert or edit. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that you select. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography, you can then edit that index. + +

Title

+ Enter a title for the selected index. + +

Protected against manual changes

+ Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Enable cursor check box in the Protected Areas section. +
+
+ +

Create Index or Table of Contents

+

For

+ Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter. +
+ +

Evaluate up to level

+ Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index. +

Create from

+ Use this area to specify which information to include in an index. + +

Outline

+ Creates the index using outline levels. Paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index. + You can also assign outline levels to paragraphs in the Outline & List tab page of the Format - Paragraph dialog. + +

Additional Styles

+ Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box. + +You can include the Figure Index Heading or Bibliography Heading styles, as well as any other relevant heading style, to the Table of Contents. +
+ +

Assign styles

+Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index. Choose the proper heading level on which the style will be included in the index. +
+ +
+ +

Index marks

+ Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry in the index. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c623eb659 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index +The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + +Options + +Combine identical entries +Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43". + +Combine identical entries with f or ff +Replaces identical index entries that occur on the directly following page(s), with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "f" or "ff". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11" are combined as "View 10f", and "View 10, View 11, View 12" as "View 10ff". Actual appearance depends on the locale setting, but can be overridden with Sort - Language. + +Combine with - +Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12". + +Case sensitive +Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry, select Combine identical entries. +To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-level collation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms of the entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths of the characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + +AutoCapitalize entries +Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry. + +Keys as separate entries +Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that are assigned to the key as indented subentries. +To define an index key, choose Insert Index Entry dialog. + +Concordance file +Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index. + +File +Select, create, or edit a concordance file. +
+Sort +Sets the options for sorting the index entries. + +Language +Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries. + +Key type +Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c3ef3b4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + +
+Create from +Specify the information to be combined to form an index. + +Captions +Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + +Category +Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. + +Display +Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. + + + +Selections in the Display list box + + +Entry in the Index + + + + +Reference Text + + +Illustration 24: The Sun + + + + +Category and Number + + +Illustration 24 + + + + +Caption + + +The Sun + + +
+ +If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. + +Object names +Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b10ca371 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7ec6ff09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type. + +
+ +
+User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. + + +Create from +Styles + + + + +Tables +Includes tables in the index. + +Graphics +Includes graphics in the index. + +Frames +Includes frames in the index. + +OLE objects +Includes OLE objects in the index. + +Use level from source chapter +Indents table, graphic, frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. + +Defining an index entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9550c6a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + + +Create from the following objects +Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89d479099 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Bibliography as the index type. + +
+ +
+ +Formatting of the entries + +Number entries +Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. + +Brackets +Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00bd71569 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Assign Styles +/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + Assign Styles + Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles. +
+ +
+ Styles + The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels. + To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to move the style to the index level that you want. + << + Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy. + >> + Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..378484461 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entries (indexes/tables) +/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Entries (indexes/tables) + Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Type tab. +
+
+ +
+ Table of Contents + Alphabetical Index + Illustration Index + Index of Tables + User-Defined + Table of Objects + Bibliography + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6404ec33f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + Entries (table of contents) + /text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp + + + + + + +Entries (table of contents) +Specify the format of the entries in the table of contents. + +
+ +
+ +
+ +Level +Select the level that you want to define. +
+ +
+ +Structure and formatting +The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you can enter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click a code button.this line also appears for bibliographic index + +Displays the remainder of the Structure line.UFI: see #i27934# + + + + To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key. + + + To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button. + + + + + To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button. + +
+ +
+ + +Chapter number (E#) +Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. +
+ +
+ + +Entry text (E) +Inserts the text of the chapter heading. +
+ +
+ + +Tab stop (T) +Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box. +
+ +
+ + +Page number (#) +Inserts the page number of the entry. +
+ + + Hyperlink (LS and LE) +Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents. + + +All +Applies the current settings to all levels without closing the dialog. + +
+ + +Character Style +Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line. + + +Edit +Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style. + + +Fill character +Select the tab leader that you want use. + + +Tab stop position +Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop. + + +Align right +Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin. +
+ +
+ + +Format +Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator. + + + +Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent +Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5af1cbc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (alphabetical index) +/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp + + + +Entries (alphabetical index) +Specify the format of the alphabetical index entries. + +
+ +
+ +Level "S" refers to the single letter headings that divide the index entries alphabetically. To enable these headings, select the Alphabetical delimiter check box in the Format area. + + + +
+Chapter Info +Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box. +Chapter entry +Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry. +
+Evaluate up to level +Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index. +
+
+ + + +Character Style for main entries +Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry. +Alphabetical delimiter +Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings. +Key separated by commas +Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ae8959f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (illustration index) +/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp + + + +Entries (illustration index) +Specify the format for the illustration index entries. + +
+ +
+ +Illustration Indexes only have one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f96d1b8ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (index of tables) +/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp + + + +Entries (index of tables) +Specify the format for the entries in an Index of Tables. + +
+ +
+ +An Index of Tables only has one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb1e24102 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (user-defined index) +/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp + + + +Entries (user-defined index) +Specify the format for the entries in a user-defined index. + +
+ +
+ +User-defined indexes do not support sub-keys. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e632780e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (table of objects) +/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp + + + +Entries (table of objects) +Specify the format for the entries in a Table of Objects. + +
+ +
+ +A Table of Objects only has one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1019e73bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (bibliography) +/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp + + + +Entries (bibliography) +Specify the format for bibliography entries. + +
+ +
+Type +The types that are displayed depend on the different literature sources. + + +Type +Lists the available bibliography entries. To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert. Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries. +Insert +Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button. +Remove +Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line. + +Sort by +Specify the sorting options for the bibliography entries. +Document position +Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document. Select this option if you want to use automatically numbered references. +Content +Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication. +Sort keys + + +1, 2 or 3 +Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area. + + +AZ +Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order. + + +ZA +Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b44fb66e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define Bibliography Entry + /text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp + + + + + +Define Bibliography Entry + Change the content of a bibliography entry. +
+ +
+ Entry data + Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. + +Short name + Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. + +Type + Select the source for the bibliography entry. + + Formatting bibliography entries + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ba60bb2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Concordance File + /text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp + + + + + + + editing; concordance files + concordance files; definition + + + + + +

Edit Concordance File

+Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index. A concordance file lists words that should be referenced in an alphabetical index, together with the page number(s) where they appear in the document. +You can use the Find All button on the Find & Replace dialog to highlight all places where a word appears, then open the Insert Index Entry dialog to add that word and places to the alphabetical index. However, if you need the same set of alphabetical indexes in multiple documents, the concordance file allows you to enter every word just once, then use the list many times.i61650 + +The default filter for creating or opening concordance files is *.sdi. However, the file format of the concordance file is plain text. + +

To access the Edit Concordance File dialog:

+ + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type. + + + In the Type box, select "Alphabetical Index". + + + In the Options area, select the Concordance file check box. + + + Click the File button, and then choose New or Edit. + + +A concordance file contains the following fields: + + + + Term + + + Meaning + + + + + Search term + + + "Search term" refers to the index entry that you want to mark in the document. + + + + + Alternative entry + + + "Alternative entry" refers to the index entry that you want to appear in the index. + + + + + 1st and 2nd Keys + + + The 1st and 2nd Keys are parent index entries. The "Search term" or the "Alternative entry" appears as a subentry under the 1st and 2nd Keys. + + + + + Comment + + + Add a comment line above the entry. Commented lines start with #. + + + + + Match case + + + "Match case" means that uppercase and lowercase letters are considered. + + + + + Word only + + + "Word only" searches for the term as a single word. + + +
+ +To enable the "Match case" or "Word only" options, click in the corresponding cell, and then select the check box. + +

To create a concordance file without the Edit Concordance File dialog:

+Use the following format guidelines when you create a concordance file: + + + + Each entry in the concordance file is on a separate line. + + + Commented lines start with #. + + + Use the following format for the entries: + + Search term;Alternative entry;1st key;2nd key;Match case;Word only +The entries "Match case" and "Word only" are interpreted as "No" or FALSE if they are empty or zero (0). All other contents are interpreted as "Yes" or TRUE. + +

Example

+For example, to include the word "Boston" in your alphabetical index under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line in the concordance file: +Boston;Boston;Cities;;0;0 UFI: translate this with same name as in par_id3155907. Pay attention to the following paras also +This also finds "Boston" if it is written in lowercase letters. +To include the "Beacon Hill" district in Boston under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line: +Beacon Hill;Boston;Cities; + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f2c532a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Bibliography Entry +/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp + + + + + +Insert Bibliography Entry +Inserts a bibliography reference. + +
+ +
+Entry +From bibliography database +Inserts a reference from the bibliography database. +From document content +Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document. An entry that is stored in the document has priority over an entry that is stored in the bibliography database. +
+When you save a document that contains bibliography entries, the corresponding records are automatically saved in a hidden field in the document. +
+ +Short name +Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert. +Author, Title +If available, the author and the full title of the selected short name are displayed in this area. +Insert +Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document. +Close +Closes the dialog. +New +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database. +Edit +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record. + +Tips for working with bibliography entries + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c23bbd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Frame +/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp + + + + +
+

Frame

+Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects. +
+
+ +
+To edit a frame, click the border to select it, and then choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. You can also resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys. +To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. +If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. +In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. +You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. + + + + + + + + + + +

Icon on the Insert toolbar:

+Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bd239e77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard +/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp + + + +moving;objects and frames +objects;moving and resizing with keyboard +resizing;objects and frames, by keyboard +MW changed "objects;"Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard +You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. +To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +To resize a selected frame or object, first press CommandCtrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press CommandCtrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d26d5e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Insert Table +/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Insert Table

+Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. + +
+
+ +
+ + +To insert a table from another document, copy the table, and then paste the table into the current document. + + +To convert text into a table, select the text, and then choose Table - Convert - Text to Table. + + +To insert a table into a table, click in a cell in the table and choose Table - Insert Table. + + +$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the table. + +Columns +Enter the number of columns that you want in the table. + +Rows +Enter the number of rows that you want in the table. +Options +Set the options for the table. + +Heading +Includes a heading row in the table. + +Repeat heading rows on new pages +Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page. + +

Heading rows

+Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading. The spinbox accepts values up to one less than the number of rows being inserted. + +

Don't split the table over pages

+Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. + +List of table styles +Select a predefined style for the new table. +Icon on the Insert toolbar +On the Insert toolbar, click the Table icon to open the Insert Table dialog, where you can insert a table in the current document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. + +
+ + + +Table - Properties - Text Flow +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57c340300 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Exchange Database + /text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + databases; exchanging + address books; exchanging + exchanging databases + replacing;databases + + + + + + +Exchange Database +Change the data sources for the current document. To correctly display the contents of inserted fields, the replacement database must contain identical field names. +
+ +
+ +
+For example, if you inserting address fields in a form letter from an address database, you can then exchange the database with another address database to insert different addresses. + +Exchange Databases +You can only change one database at a time in this dialog. + + +Databases in Use +Lists the databases that are currently in use. The current document contains at least one data field from each of the databases in the list. + + +Available Databases +Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +Browse +Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list. + + +Define +Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list. + +To exchange a database: +Ensure that both databases contain matching field names and field types. + + + + Click in the document that you want to change the data source for. + + + Choose Edit - Exchange Database. + + + In the Databases in Use list, select the database table that you want to replace. + + + In the Available Databases list, select the replacement database table. + + + Click Define. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88e6e05ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Insert (Text from File) + /text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp + + + + + + + +Insert (Text from File) +Inserts the contents of another document into the current document at the cursor position. + +
+ +
+To always have the latest version of the contents of a file, insert a section into your document, and then insert a link to the text file in the section. See insert a section for details. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f1c00beb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Script + /text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp + + + + + + +

Insert Script

+ Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document. + +
+ +
+ An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. + +Jump to Previous Script. + + +Jump to Next Script. + + Contents + +

Script Type

+ Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. + + +

URL

+ Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the Browse button, locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: + <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> + /* ignore all text here */ + </SCRIPT> + +Browse + Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + +

Text

+ Enter the script code that you want to insert. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6cd4997f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Header + /text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+The headers are visible only when you view the document in print layout (enable View - Normal). +A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have headers. +To remove a header, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and then select the page style containing the header. The header is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. +To add or remove headers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header - All. +To format a header, choose Format - Page - Header. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6da40fa30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Footer + /text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+The footers are visible only when you view the document in print layout (enable View - Normal). +A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have footers. +To remove a footer, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style containing the footer. The footer is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. +To add or remove footers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - All. +To format a footer, choose Format - Page - Footer. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3eb332d2e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Fields (submenu) + /text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Field

+The submenu lists the most common field types that can be inserted into a document at the current cursor position. To view all of the available fields, choose More Fields. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

More Fields

+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a47ba415 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp + + + +
+text flow;at breaks +paragraphs;keeping together at breaks +protecting;text flow +widows +orphans +block protect, see also widows or orphans +mw added two index entries + + +Text Flow +Specify hyphenation and pagination options. +
+
+ +
+Hyphenation +Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. + +Automatically +Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. + +Don't hyphenate words in CAPS +Don't insert hyphens in words written entirely in capital letters. + +Don't hyphenate the last word +Don't insert hyphens in the last word of paragraphs. + +Characters at line end +Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. + +Characters at line begin +Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. + +Maximum consecutive hyphenated lines +Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. + +Minimum word length in characters +Enter the minimum word length in characters that can be hyphenated. + +Hyphenation zone +To reduce hyphenation, enter the length of the hyphenation zone. Instead of the possible hyphenation, the line will break between words, if the remaining horizontal space does not exceed the hyphenation zone. Hyphenation zone results in enlarged spaces between words in justified text, and greater distance from paragraph margins in non-justified text. + +Breaks +Specify the page or column break options. + +InsertUFI: #i30777# +Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. + +Type +Select the break type that you want to insert. + +Position +Select where you want to insert the break. + +With Page Style +Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. + +Page Style +Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. + +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. +Options +Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. + +Do not split paragraph +Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. + +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. + + +Orphan control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. + + +Widow control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. + + + +Orphans. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab7106324 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drop Caps +/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+first letters as large capital letters +capital letters;starting paragraphs +drop caps insertion + + + +Drop Caps +Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box. +
+
+ +
+Settings + +Display drop caps +Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. + +Whole word +Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. + +Number of characters +Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. + +Lines +Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. + +Space to text +Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. +Contents + +Text +Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. + +Character Style +Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..802430d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Outline & List + /text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Outline & List

+ Adds or removes outline level, list style, and line numbering from the paragraph or paragraph style. You can also restart or modify the start number for numbered lists and line numbering. +
+
+ +
+ + + To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + + +

Outline

+

Outline level

+ Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Text Body to reset the outline level. +

Apply List Style

+ +

List Style

+ Select the List Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Styles window (Command+TF11) if you click the List Styles icon. + + +

Edit Style

+ Edit the properties of the selected list style. These properties will apply to all paragraphs formatted with the given list style. + This button is disabled when Chapter Numbering is applied. Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering to edit the outline level and numbering format. +Outline level and List style are independent of each other. Use Tools - Chapter Numbering to assign a numbering format to paragraph styles used as headings in a document outline structure. + This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph. + +

Restart numbering at this paragraph

+ Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph. + +

Start with

+ Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. + + +

"Start with" spin button

+ Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. +

Line numbering

+ Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + +

Include this paragraph in line numbering

+ Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering. + + +

Restart at this paragraph

+ Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter. + + +

Start with

+ Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering + +The following buttons appear only for Paragraph Style. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1cc41955 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Page Style +/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Page Style

+Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d13d99dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + Columns + /text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp + + + +
+ + + +added two Help IDs, see i97180 +

Columns

+ Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section. + +
+
+ +
+ You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, all pages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that use that style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame. +

Settings

+ + +

Columns

+ Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section. +

Selection fields

+ You can also select one of the predefined column layouts. + Tooltips describe each predefined selection. + +

Apply to

+ Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog by choosing Format - Columns. +The following two options are only available when formatting sections. +

Evenly distribute contents to all columns

+ + Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically. Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. + + + The column layout preview only shows the columns and not the surrounding page. +

Width and spacing

+

AutoWidth

+ Creates columns of equal width. + If the AutoWidth check box is not selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. +

Column

+ Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. + +

Left Arrow

+ Moves the column display one column to the left. + + + + +Left Arrow Icon + + + Left Arrow + + +
+ +

Right Arrow

+ Moves the column display one column to the right. + + + + +Right Arrow Icon + + + Right Arrow + + +
+ + + +

Width

+ Enter the width of the column. + + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns. + +

Separator line

+ This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column. + +

Style

+ Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". +

Width

+Enter width of the separator line. +

Color

+Select a color for the separator line. + +

Height

+ Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area. + +

Position

+ Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32db94ea2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Options

+Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for the section. +
+ +
+Sections follow the text flow behavior of the page they are inserted into. +For example, if you insert a section that uses a two-column layout into a page style that uses a four-column layout, the two-column layout is nested inside one of the four columns. +You can also nest sections, that is, you can insert a section into another section. + +UFI: changed embedded links, see #i64128 + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fbb206ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Footnote + /text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp + + + +
+ + +Footnote + Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document. +
+
+ +
+Footnote area + Set the height of the footnote area. + + +Not larger than page area + Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. + + +Maximum footnote height + Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height. + + + Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. + + +Space to text + Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. + + Separator Line + Specifies the position and other properties of the separator line. + +Position + Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. + + +Style + Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". + + +Thickness + Select the thickness of the separator line. + + +Color + Select the color of the separator line. + + + +Length + Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. + + +Spacing to footnote contents + Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. + To specify the spacing between two footnotes, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..492bab2af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes +/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Footnotes/Endnotes

+ Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats. +
+
+ +
+

Footnotes

+ Collect at end of text + Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear. + Restart numbering + Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number. + Spin button own format + Select the numbering scheme for the footnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number. +

Endnotes

+ Collect at end of section + Adds endnotes at the end of the section. + Restart numbering + Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number + Spin button own format + Select the numbering scheme for the endnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e83d47f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Grid +/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp + + + +
+ + +text grid for Asian layout + +Text Grid +Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +Grid +Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style. +Grid layout + +Lines per page +Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page. + +Characters per line +Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line. + +Max. base text size +Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line. + +Max. Ruby text size +Enter the font size for the Ruby text. + +Ruby text below/left from base text +Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text. + + + +Grid display +Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8cf380da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Image +/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Image

+Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected image. + +You can also change some of the properties of the selected image with shortcut keys. +
+ +
+The Image dialog contains the following tab pages: + + +

Wrap

+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..098d2c9ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ + + + + + + + Position and Size + /text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp + + + + +
+ resizing;aspect ratio + aspect ratio;resizing objects + UFI: new index entries, see i54237 + + +

Position and Size

+ Specifies the size and the position of the selected image, frame, or OLE object on a page. +
+
+ +
+ +

Size

+ +

Width

+ Enter the width that you want for the selected object. + +

Relative

+ Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area. + +

Relative width relation

+ Decides what 100% width means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). + +

Height

+ Enter the height that you want for the selected object. + +

Relative

+ Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area. + +

Relative height relation

+ Decides what 100% height means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). + +

Keep ratio

+ Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. + +

Original Size

+ Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. + This option is not available for frames. + + +

Automatic

+ Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. + The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. + +
+

Anchor

+ Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you open the dialog from the Styles window. + +

To page

+ Anchors the selection to the current page. + +

To paragraph

+ Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. + +

To character

+ Anchors the selection to a character. + +

As character

+ Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. +
+ +
+

Position

+ Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. + +

Horizontal

+ Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". + +

by

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. + +

to

+ Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. The following options are available: + + + Paragraph area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for the paragraph, including indent spaces. + + + Paragraph text area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for text in the paragraph, excluding indent spaces. + + + Left of paragraph text area: the object is positioned in the region from the left text boundary to the first character on the left edge of the anchored paragraph text. For multicolumn paragraphs, the region is defined in relation to the column where the anchor is located. When the anchor is not located in the first column, then the region starts at the left column margin. + + + Right of paragraph text area: the object is positioned in the region from the last character on the right edge of anchored paragraph text to the right text boundary. When the anchor is not located in the last column then the region ends at the right column margin. + + + Left of page text area: the object is positioned in the region between the left edge of the page and the left margin plus any left page padding. + + + Right of page text area: the object is positioned in the region between the right edge of the page and the right margin plus any right page padding. + + + Entire page: the object is positioned considering the whole width of the page, from the left to the right page borders. + + + Page text area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for text in the page, from the left to the right page margins. + + + Character: the object is positioned considering the horizontal space used by the character. + + +
+ Beware that the set of options available depend on the Anchor settings. Therefore, not all options listed above may be shown due to the current Anchor choice. +
+
+ You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. +
+ +

Mirror on even pages

+ Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. +
+ You can also use the Image flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. + +
+ +

Vertical

+ Select the vertical alignment option for the object. The selection specifies the position of the object relative to the region or reference line selected in the to dropdown list. + + +

by

+ Enter the amount of space to leave from the top edge of the object to the region or reference line selected in the to dropdown list. This option is active only when the following combinations of Vertical and Anchor are selected. For these combinations, you can specify the amount of space to leave from: + + + + + Vertical + + + with Anchor + + + + + From top + + + Top edge of selected region.
Positive values move the object down, negative values up. + + + To page, To paragraph, To character or To frame + + + + + From bottom + + + Selected reference line.
Positive values move the object up, negative values down. + + + To character or As character + + +
+ + +

to

+ Select the region or reference line for the vertical alignment. The object can be positioned in relation to the following regions or reference lines: + + + Margin: Depending on the anchoring type, the object is positioned considering the space between the top margin and the character ("To character" anchoring) or bottom edge of the paragraph ("To paragraph" anchoring) where the anchor is placed. + + + Paragraph text area: the object is positioned considering the height of the paragraph where the anchor is placed. + + + Entire page: the object is positioned considering the full page height, from top to bottom page borders. + + + Page text area: the object is positioned considering the full height available for text, from top to bottom margins. + + +
+
+ + + Character: available only for "To character" or "As character" anchoring, the object is positioned relative to the region between the top border and bottom border of the character immediately before where the anchor is placed. A character formatted with a common border with other characters or objects uses the region for the highest character or object in the common border. + + + Line of text: available only for "To character" anchoring, the object is positioned considering the height of the line of text where the anchor is placed. + + + Baseline: available only for "As character" anchoring, this option will position the object considering the text baseline over which all characters are placed. + + + Row: available only for "As character" anchoring, this option will position the object considering the height of the row where the anchor is placed. + + + Entire frame: available only for "To frame" anchoring, the outer edges of the frame. + + + Frame text area: available only for "To frame" anchoring, the text area of the frame. + + + + +If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. +
+ +
+

Keep inside text boundaries

+ Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. + By default, the Keep inside text boundaries option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of Writer older than OpenOffice.org 2.0. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). +
+ + + The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. + + Format - Anchor + Format - Align Text + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..212fd2412 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wrap +/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + + +Wrap +Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object. + +
+
+ +
+To wrap text around a table, place the table in a frame, and then wrap the text around the frame. +Settings + + +None +Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object. + + + + + +Icon + + + +None + + +
+ + + +Before +Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space. + + + + +Icon + + + +Before + + +
+ + + +After +Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space. + + + + +Icon + + + +After + + +
+ + + +Parallel +Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + + +Through +Places the object in front of the text. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Through + + +
+ + + +Optimal +Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Optimal + + +
+ +Options +Specify the text wrap options. + + +First Paragraph +Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object. + + + +In Background +Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type. + + + +Contour +Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. + + +Outside only +Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape. This option is not available for frames. +Allow overlap +Specifies whether the object is allowed to overlap another object. This option has no effect on wrap through objects, which can always overlap. +Gaps +Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text. + +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text. + +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text. + +Top +Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text. + +Bottom +Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd512353b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ + + + + + + + + +Contour Editor +/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Contour Editor +Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object. + + +Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length +
+ +
+ +Apply +Applies the contour to the selected object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + +Workspace +Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. + + + + +Icon + + + +Workspace + + +
+ + +Select +Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Select + + +
+ + +Rectangle +Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rectangle + + +
+ + +Ellipse +Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse + + +
+ + +Polygon +Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon + + +
+ + +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Edit Points + + +
+ + +Move Points +Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Move Points + + +
+ + +Insert Points +Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Points + + +
+ + +Delete Points +Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Points + + +
+ + +Auto Contour +Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. + + + + +Icon + + + +AutoContour + + +
+ + +Undo +Reverses the last action. + + + + +Icon + + + +Undo + + +
+ + +Redo +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. + + + + +Icon + + + +Redo + + +
+ + +Color Replacer +Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. + + + + +Icon + + + +Color Replacer + + +
+ + +Tolerance +Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c75739c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Image +/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Image +Specify the flip and the link options for the selected image. +
+
+ +
+Flip + + +Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT +Flips the selected image vertically. + + + +Horizontally +Flips the selected image horizontally. + + +On all pages +Flips the selected image horizontally on all pages. + +On left pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on even pages. + +On right pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on odd pages. + +Link +Inserts the image as a link. + +File name +Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the Browse button and then locate the file that you want to link to. + +Browse +Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. + +Format - Flip +Edit - Links + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d5731518 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ + + + + + + + + +Macro +/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Macro +Specifies the macro to run when you click an image, frame, or an OLE object. +
+
+ +
+ +Event +Lists the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to the selected object are listed. +The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: + + + +Event + + +Event trigger + + +OLE object + + +Image + + +Frame + + +AutoText + + +ImageMap area + + +Hyperlink + + + + +Click object + + +object is selected + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Mouse over object + + +mouse pointer moves over the object + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Trigger Hyperlink + + +hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + +✓ + + + + +Mouse leaves object + + +mouse pointer moves off the object + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Image loaded successfully + + +image is loaded successfully + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Image loading terminated + + +loading of the image is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Could not load image + + +image is not successfully loaded + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Input of alpha characters + + +text is inputted + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Input of non-alpha characters + + +Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Resize frame + + +frame is resized + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Move frame + + +frame is moved + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Before inserting AutoText + + +before AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + +After inserting AutoText + + +after AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + +
+ +For events that are linked to controls in forms, see Control properties or Form properties. +Assigned Action +Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. + +Macro From +Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to pick the macro from. + +Existing Macros +Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. + +Assign +Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. + +Remove +Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5f45cbe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hyperlink + /text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ Link to + Set the link properties. + +URL + Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. + +Browse + Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. + +Name + Enter a name for the hyperlink. + +Frame + Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. + Image Map + Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. + +Server-side image map + Uses a server-side image map. + +Client-side image map + Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. + + URL + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8468c711f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Options

+Specify properties for the selected image, frame or OLE object. +
+
+ +
+

Accessibility

+ +

Name

+Enter a name for the selected item. +Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate it afterwards in long documents. + + +

Text Alternative (images and OLE objects only)

+ + +

Sequences (frames only)

+ +

Previous link

+Displays the frame that comes before the selected frame in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the selected frame and the target frame must be empty. + +

Next link

+Displays the frame that comes after the selected frame in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty. +

Protect

+Specifies protection options for the selected item. + +

Contents

+Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item. +You can still copy the contents of the selected item. + +

Position

+Locks the position of the selected item in the current document. + +

Size

+Locks the size of the selected item. +

Content alignment (frames only)

+

Vertical alignment

+Specifies the vertical alignment of the frame's content. Mainly it means text content, but it also affects tables and other objects anchored to the text area (anchored as character, to character or to paragraph), for example frames, graphics or drawings. +

Properties

+Specifies print and text options for the selected item. + +

Editable in read-only document (frames only)

+Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected). + +

Print

+Includes the selected item when you print the document. + +

Text direction (frames only)

+Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list. + + + +Text direction. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1db1114d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Object +/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Name is not related to UI, dialog is called by Format - Image or Format - Frame, so name should be Frame / Image or we need two files that are the same except for title +

Object

+Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name. + +
+ +
+ + +

Wrap

+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..189e3d4fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Table Properties +/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Properties

+Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + +

+Background

+Set or remove color or image background for selected cells, rows, or table. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82df530e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Table +/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; positioning +tables; inserting text before + + +UFI: deleted "tables;sizing" +

Table

+Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table. +
+
+ +
+Properties + +Name +Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator. + +Width +Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is not selected. + +Relative +Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width. +Alignment +Set the alignment options for the selected table. + +Automatic +Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins. This is the recommended setting for tables in HTML documents. + +Left +Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin. + +Left margin +Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area. + +Right +Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin. + +Centered +Centers the table horizontally on the page. + +Manual +Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area. $[officename] automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individual column widths. +Spacing + +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area. + +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area. + +Above +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table. + +Below +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table. +To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, place the cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press OptionAlt+Enter. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..431d16f30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Columns +/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Columns +Specify the column width properties. +
+
+ +
+ +Adapt table width +Reduces or increases table width with modified column width. This option is not available if Automatic alignment or Relative width is selected on the Table tab, or if any table rows have been selected. + +Adjust columns proportionally +Change all the other column widths by the same percentage as the one being changed. For example, if you reduce by half the size of a column, the sizes of all the other columns will be halved. This option requires that Adapt table width can be enabled. + +Remaining space +Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab. +Column width +Specify the column widths for the table. + + + + + + +Column widths +Enter the width that you want for the column. + +Left Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column. + +Right Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..084911d0d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Tables Using the Keyboard +/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tables; editing with the keyboard + +Editing Tables Using the Keyboard + +You can resize and delete table columns with the keyboard. +Resizing Columns and Rows + + +To resize a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down Alt, and then press the left or the right arrow. To resize the column without changing the width of the table, hold down Command+OptionCtrl+Alt, and then press the left or the right arrows. + + +To increase the left indent of the table, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the right arrow. + + +To resize a row, place the cursor in the row, hold down OptionAlt, and then press the up or the down arrows. + + +To move the table downwards on the page, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the down arrow. + + +Inserting and deleting columns or rows + + +To insert a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. + + +To delete a column, place the cursor in the column that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. + + +To insert a row, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. + + +To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. + + +To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. + +Table Bar + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e7c34ddab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables;text flow around text tables +text flow;around text tables +columns; breaks in text tables +row breaks in text tables +tables; allowing page breaks +page breaks; tables +splitting tables;row breaks + + + +Text Flow +Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table. +
+
+ +
+Text flow + +Break +Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. + +Page +Inserts a page break before or after the table. + +Column +Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. + +Before +Inserts a page or column break before the table. + +After +Inserts a page or column break after the table. + +With Page Style +Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. + +Page Style +Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. + +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. + +Allow table to split across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. + + +Allow row to break across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. + +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. + +Repeat heading +Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. + +The first ... rows +Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. + +Text orientation +Select the orientation for the text in the cells. You can use the following formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells: + + +Horizontal + + +Vertical (top to bottom) + + +Use superordinate object settings + + +Vertical (bottom to top) + + + +Vertical alignment +Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..429259e12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cell +/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Cell +This command is only available if you have selected a table in your document, or if the cursor is in a table cell. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16ad0563c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Protect + /text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp + + + +
+ +

Protect

+
+ Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified. +
+
+
+ +
+ When the cursor is in a read-only cell, a note appears on the Status Bar. + To remove cell protection, select the cell(s), right-click, and then choose Cell - Unprotect. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..987f60a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Unprotect + /text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp + + + +
+ +

Unprotect

+
+ Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table. +
+
+
+ +
+ To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove the protection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+T. + You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8cf8a71e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row +/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Row +Set the height of rows, or select, insert, and delete rows. +
+ +
+Height + +Optimal Height + + + +Insert... + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95e181034 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row Height +/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Row Height +Changes the height of the selected row(s). + +
+ +
+ +Height +Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s). + +Fit to size +Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. +You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da7745128 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Optimal Height +/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +Optimal Height + Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells. This is the default setting for new tables. +
+ +
+ This option is only available if the table contains a row with a fixed height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a47847695 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select +/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Select + Selects the row that contains the cursor. +
+
+ +
+ This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f46d86b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea4e808cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column +/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Column +Set the width of columns, or select, insert, and delete columns. +
+ +
+Width... + +Optimal width + + + +Insert... + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38b7f1dba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column Width +/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Column Width +Changes the width of the selected column(s). + +
+ +
+Width + +Columns +Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of. + +Width +Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).removed 2 sentences, see #i64155 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47b2b784a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Optimal Width +/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Optimal Width +Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells. Changing the width of a column does not affect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the table cannot exceed the page width. + +The change affects only selected cells. You can adjust multiple cells next to each other if you select the cells together. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..180db97cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select +/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp + + + +
+Select + Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c7b8955c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Columns/Rows +/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Inserts a row into the table. + +Inserts a column into the table. +Insert Columns/Rows +Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table. + +
+ +
+ + +Insert +Number +Enter the number of columns or rows that you want. +Position +Specifies where to insert the columns or rows. + +Before +Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row. + +After +Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c02e36509 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected column(s) from the table. + +
+This command is only available if the cursor is in a table. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c29583155 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + +Styles in Writer +/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +styles;categories +character styles;style categories +paragraph styles;style categories +frames; styles +page styles;style categories +list styles;style categories + +

Styles in Writer

+
+UFI: this is no more "Style Catalog" dialog, but we need the links and tablesUFI: another comment: the Style Catalog can be customized to be visible again!!! Dont know it this is temporary bug, workaround, or feature +The following information concerns Writer styles that you can apply using the Styles deck of the Sidebar. +
+If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save the document as template, choose File - Templates - Save as Template. + +

Style Category

+These are the different categories of formatting styles. + + + +Name + + +Description + + + + +Character Styles + + +Use Character Styles to format single characters, or entire words and phrases. If you want, you can nest Character Styles. + + + + +Paragraph Styles + + +Use Paragraph Styles to format paragraphs, including the font type and size. You can also select the paragraph style to apply to the next paragraph. + + + + +Frame Styles + + +Use Frame Styles to format text and graphic frames. + + + + +Page Styles + + +Use Page Styles to organize the structure of the document, and to add page numbers. You can also specify the page style to apply to the first page that follows after a page break. + + + + +List Styles + + +Use List Styles to format ordered or unordered lists. + + +
+ +
+

Style Groups

+These are the style groups that you can display in the Styles window. + + + +Name + + +Meaning + + + + +Automatic + + +Displays styles appropriate to the current context. + + + + +All Styles + + +Displays all styles of the active style category. + + + + +Applied Styles + + +Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the current document. + + + + +Custom Styles + + +Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category. + + + + +Character Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for text. + + + + +Chapter Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for headings. + + + + +List Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for ordered or unordered lists. + + + + +Index Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for indexes. + + + + +Special Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes, tables, and captions. + + + + +HTML Styles + + +Displays a list of styles for HTML documents. + + + + +Conditional Styles + + +Displays the user-defined conditional styles. + + + + +Hierarchical + + +Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To view the styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevel name. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a8555cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Character Style +/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Character Style

+Character styles provide a way to customize the formatting for individual characters. Use character styles to change the properties of a character, word or selected part of a paragraph. When you apply a character style to a text selection, the character style properties override the corresponding paragraph character properties. +For example, if you apply a character style with 15pt font size to a selection in a paragraph with character property of 12pt font size, the selection is set to 15pt, while the rest of the paragraph remains with 12pt font size. +No Character Style is actually the set of character properties of the current paragraph style. Choose No Character Style to reset the character properties of the selection to those of the paragraph style. You cannot customize No Character Style. +
+ +
+Direct formatting overrides any formatting provided by a character style. To remove direct formatting from a selection, use Format - Clear Direct Formatting (CommandCtrl+M). + +Use the Contains section in the Organizer to see the properties of the character style. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16ae38f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +List Style +/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

List Style

+Here you can create a List Style. The List Styles are organized in the Styles window. +
+ +
+When a List Style is created, a name is assigned to the style. The list style can be applied to paragraphs or assigned to a paragraph style in the Apply List Style section of the Outline & List tab. +Ordered lists and unordered lists created in the Bullets and Numbering dialog or with the Toggle Ordered List and Toggle Unordered List icons of the Formatting bar use direct formatting. They are not list styles. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..158011486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +Condition +/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp + + + +
+styles; conditional +conditional styles + + + +

Condition

+Define conditions for conditional styles here. +
+
+ +
+Conditional styles are paragraph styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the conditional properties of a conditional style. +$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: + + +Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page - Header). + + +Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New in the Styles window, and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this style "Business letter". + + +Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. + + +In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. + + +You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Apply. + + +Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) + + +The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. +The "Text Body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derive from it can be used as conditional styles. +The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). + +

Conditional style

+Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. + +

Context

+Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, list levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. +

Applied Styles

+Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. + +

Paragraph Styles

+A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. + + +

Remove

+Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. + +

Assign

+Click Apply to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b3f6173c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (Sidebar) + /text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Styles window;applying styles + styles;previews + previews;styles + +mw deleted "applying;." + + +

Styles (Sidebar)

+Use the Styles deck of the Sidebar to apply, create, edit, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style. + +Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style. +
+ +
+ +
+To dock the Styles window, drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, double-click a free space on its toolbar. +By default, the Styles deck displays a preview of the available styles. The previews can be disabled by unchecking the Show Previews box below the list of styles. + + +

Style Category

+ + + + + + Icon Paragraph Styles + + + Paragraph Styles + Displays formatting styles for paragraphs. Use paragraph styles to apply the same formatting, such as font, numbering, and layout to the paragraphs in your document. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Character Styles + + + Character Styles + Displays formatting styles for characters. Use character styles to apply font styles to selected text in a paragraph. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Frame Styles + + + Frame Styles + Displays formatting styles for frames. Use frame styles to format frame layouts and position. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Page Styles + + + Page Styles + Displays formatting styles for pages. Use page styles to determine page layouts, including the presence of headers and footers. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon List Styles + + + List Styles + Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists. Use list styles to format number and bullet characters and to specify indents. + + +
+ + + + + Icon Table Styles + + + Table Styles + Displays formatting styles for tables. Use table styles to apply borders, backgrounds, fonts, alignment, and number formats to tables. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Fill Format Mode + + + Fill Format Mode + Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style. To exit this mode, click the icon again, or press Esc. + + +
+ + + + + Icon New Style from Selection + + + Style actions menu + Opens a submenu with more commands. + + + + + + + + New Style from Selection + Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection. + + + + + + + + Update Selected Style + The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window. + + Load Styles from Template + Opens the Load Styles from Template dialog to import styles from another document. + + +
+ +

How to apply a Character style to a selected text

+ + + Select the text. + + + Double-click the desired character style in the Styles window. + + +

How to apply a Paragraph style

+ + + Place the cursor in the paragraph, or select multiple paragraphs. + + + Double-click the desired paragraph style in the Styles window. + + +You can assign shortcut keys to Styles from the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab. Some shortcuts are predefined. + Command+0 +Ctrl+0 + (zero) applies the Text Body paragraph style. Heading 1 through Heading 5 paragraph styles can be applied by using the + Command +Ctrl + key and the heading number. For example + Command+2Ctrl+2 + applies the Heading 2 paragraph style. +The Formatting (Styles) toolbar contains icons for applying and modifying styles. +
+More information about styles. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aed08b4d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + AutoCorrect + /text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function;text documents + +

AutoCorrect

+ Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. +
+
+ +
+ + + +

AutoCorrect Options

+ Opens the AutoCorrect dialog. + To open the AutoFormat for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddee2b297 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + +While Typing (AutoCorrect) +/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp + + + +
+ +automatic heading formatting +AutoCorrect function;headings +headings;automatic +separator lines;AutoCorrect function + + +

While Typing

+Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options, and then click the Options tab. +
+
+ +
+You can use AutoCorrect to format text documents and plain ASCII text files, but not characters that you have manually formatted. Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document. +To reverse the last AutoCorrect action, choose Edit - Undo. +When you apply automatic formats, the following rules apply: +

AutoCorrect for Headings

+ A paragraph is formatted as a heading when the following conditions are met: + + + paragraph begins with a capital letter + + + paragraph does not end with a punctuation mark + + + empty paragraph above and below the paragraph + + +

AutoCorrect for Separator Lines

+ If you type three or more hyphens (---) or certain other characters in a row and then press Enter, the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph. The bottom padding of such a paragraph will be set to 0.75 mm. The following rules apply: + + + Three hyphens (-) yield a single line (0.05 pt thick). + + + Three underscores (_) yield a single line (0.75 pt thick). + + + Three equal signs (=) yield a thin double line (0.75 pt thick). + + + Three asterisk signs (*) yield a thick/thin double line (2.25 pt thick). + + + Three tilde signs (~) yield a thin/thick double line (2.25 pt thick). + + + Three hash signs (#) yield a medium double line (1.5 pt thick). + + +
+Other AutoCorrect rules +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..717c091fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoFormat for Tables +/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp + + + + + + +tables;AutoFormat function + styles;table styles + AutoFormat function for tables + +

AutoFormat for Tables

+ Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders. + +
+ +
+

Applying an AutoFormat to a Table

+ + + Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. + + + Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles, and then click the format that you to want to apply. + + + Click OK. + + + +

Format

+ Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. + +

Add

+ Adds a new table style to the list. + + + Format a table in your document. + + + Select the table, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. + + + + + Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK. + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected table style. You cannot delete "Default Table Style". +

Rename

+ Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename "Default Table Style". +

Formatting

+ Select the formatting attributes to include in the selected table style. + +

Number format

+ Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. + +

Font

+ Includes font formatting in the selected table style. + +

Alignment

+ Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. + +

Borders

+ Includes border styles in the selected table style. + +

Pattern

+ Includes background styles in the selected table style. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46418a5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combine +/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Combine + + +Minimum Size +Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..663773071 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Apply (AutoCorrect) + /text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp + + + +
+ + +autocorrect;apply manually + +

Apply

+ Automatically formats a document or a selection according to the options set in the AutoCorrect Options tab. + To select options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, then select options in the [M] column to be applied when the Apply command is chosen. +
+
+ +
+ +

AutoCorrect for Bullets / Numbering

+ To create a bulleted list, type a hyphen (-), star (*), or plus sign (+), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + To create a numbered list, type a number followed by a period (.), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Paragraph Style, Text Body or Text Body Indent paragraph styles. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc74ac1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Apply and Edit Changes +/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp + + + + +
+ +Apply and Edit Changes +Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes. +
+
+ +
+ +Accept All +Applies all of the formatting changes. + +Reject All +Rejects all of the formatting changes. + +Edit Changes +Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date. + +Manage Changes, Filter tab + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..014a7bb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + +Load Styles +/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

+ + Load Master Slide + Load Master Page + Load Styles + +

+ + + Load additional slide designs for your presentation. +
+ +
+ + + Load additional page designs for your drawing. +
+ +
+ + Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +

Categories

+ Displays the available slide design categories. +

Templates

+ Displays the templates for the selected design category. +

Preview

+ Shows or hides a preview of a selected master slide. + Some master slides may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. + + +

Categories

+ Displays the available page design categories. +

Templates

+ Displays the pages designs for the selected design category. +

Preview

+ Shows or hides a preview of a selected page design. + Some page designs may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. + + +

Categories

+ Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list. +

Templates

+ Lists the available templates for the selected category. +

Paragraph and Character

+ Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Frame

+ Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Page

+ Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

List

+ Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Overwrite

+ Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading. No warning message is given. + Only applied styles and modified styles are loaded from a document or template. The styles shown in the sidebar cannot be used as a guide. + +

From File

+ Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open. + To save styles from a document as a template, use From File to load the styles to an empty document, then choose File - Templates - Save as Template. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0825bb7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Split Table +/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; splitting +splitting tables; at cursor position +dividing tables + + + + +Split Table +Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position. You can also access this command by right-clicking in a table cell. +
+
+ +
+Mode + +Copy heading +Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table. + +Custom heading (apply style) +Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table. + +Custom heading +Inserts an additional blank row in the second table. + +No heading +Splits the table without copying the header row. +When you split a table that contains formulas, the formulas may be affected. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3721b92c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merge Table +/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; merging +merging; tables + + + + +Merge Table +Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph. +
+
+ +
+If you choose this command when the cursor is in the middle of three consecutive tables, you are prompted to select the table that you want to merge with. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1eabfef90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Hyphenation +Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line. $[officename] searches the document and suggests hyphenation that you can accept or reject. If text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the selected text only. If no text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the whole document. +
+
+ +
+ +To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. In text where automatic hyphenation is enabled, the Hyphenation dialog will not find any word to hyphenate. +When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: + + +To accept the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Hyphenate. + + +To change the hyphenation of the displayed word, click the left or right arrow below the word, and then click Hyphenate. The left and right buttons are enabled for words with multiple hyphenation points. + + +To reject the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Skip. This word will not be hyphenated. + + + +To automatically hyphenate the remaining part of the selection or the document, click Hyphenate All and answer "Yes" to the following question. + + + +To end hyphenation, click Close. The hyphenation that is applied already will not be reverted. You can use Edit - Undo to undo all hyphenation that was applied while the Hyphenation dialog was open. + + + +To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. +To disable the Hyphenation dialog and always hyphenate automatically, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. +To manually enter a hyphen directly in the document, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +Ctrl+Minus sign (-). +To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen directly in the document, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+CommandCtrl+Minus sign(-). +To hide soft hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. +Word + +Word +Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. + + +Left / Right Arrow + +Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. + +Next +Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. + +Hyphenate +Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. + +Remove +Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea4b1c558 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Word Count + /text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+

Word Count

+ Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document. The count is kept up to date as you type or change the selection. +
+
+ +
+ +
+ File - Properties - Statistics +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94e796d6f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Chapter Numbering + /text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + +

Chapter Numbering

+Specifies the numbering scheme and outline format for chapter numbering in the current document. + +
+ +
+Chapter numbering is achieved by assigning paragraph styles to outline levels, and a numbering scheme for each outline level. By default, the "Heading" paragraph styles (1-10) are assigned to the corresponding outline levels (1-10). You can use the dialog to assign a different paragraph style to an outline level. +If you want numbered headings, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. This command opens a dialog where numbering schemes can be assigned to paragraph styles used for headings. Do not use the Toggle Ordered List icon on the Formatting Bar or the Format - Bullets and Numbering dialog. + + +
+ +

Load/Save

+Saves or loads a chapter numbering format. A saved chapter numbering format is available to load into other text documents. +The Load/Save button is only available for chapter numbering. Use List styles to save formatting for ordered or unordered lists. +
+ + + + + + + + + +

Untitled 1 - 9

+Select a predefined numbering format. Save your own predefined numbering formats using Save As. + + +

Save As

+Opens a dialog where you can save the current numbering and position settings for all levels. Saved settings are available to load into other documents. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62383d74d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + Numbering + /text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp + + + + +
+

Numbering

+ + +Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. +
+ +
+ +
+ + +

Level

+Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for paragraph style, to all the levels, click "1-10". + +

Numbering

+Specify the formatting for the selected outline level. + + +

Paragraph Style

+Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. + + +

Number

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to apply to the selected outline level. + + + + + Selection + + + Description + + + + + 1, 2, 3, ... + + + Arabic numerals + + + + + A, B, C, ... + + + Capital letters + + + + + a, b, c, ... + + + Lowercase letters + + + + + I, II, III, ... + + + Roman numerals (upper) + + + + + i, ii, iii, ... + + + Roman numerals (lower) + + + + + A,... AA,... AAA,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". + + + + + a,... aa,... aaa,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". + + + + + None + + + No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line. + + +
+ + + +

Character Style

+Select the character style of the numbering character. + + +

Show sublevels

+Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 + + + + +

Separator Before

+Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". + + +

Separator After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." + + +

Start at

+Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecd2f5020 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes Settings +Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes. + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..697611098 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + +Footnote Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Footnote Settings

+Specifies the formatting for footnotes. +
+
+ +
+To set additional option for footnotes, choose Format - Page Style, and then click the Footnote tab. +

AutoNumbering

+ +
+

Numbering

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to use. + + + +Selection + + +Description + + + + +1, 2, 3 + + +Arabic numerals + + + + +A, B, C + + +Uppercase + + + + +a, b, c + + +Lowercase + + + + +I, II, III + + +Roman numerals (upper case) + + + + +i, ii, iii + + +Roman numerals (lower case) + + + + +A,... AA,... AAA,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "AA". + + + + +a,... aa,... aaa,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "aa". + + +
+ +
+ +

Counting

+Select the numbering option for the footnotes. + + + +Option + + +Meaning + + + + +Per page + + +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the top of each page. This option is only available if the End of page check box is selected in the Position area. + + + + +Per chapter + + +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the beginning of each chapter. + + + + +Per document + + +Numbers the footnotes in the document sequentially. + + +
+ +

Before

+Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " to display "To 1". + +

After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +Footnote numbers are left aligned by default in the footnote area. For right aligned footnote numbers first edit the paragraph style Footnote. Press Command+TF11 to open Styles dialog and select Footnote from the list of paragraph styles. Open the local menu with right click and choose Modify. Go to the Indents & Spacing tab page and set indent to 0 before and after the paragraph, including the first line. On Tabs tab page create a tab of right type at 12pt and a tab of left type at 14pt. Then in Footnotes/Endnotes Settings dialog enter \t into the Before and After edit boxes. + +

Start at

+Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box. +

Position

+ +

End of page

+Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page. + +

End of document

+Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes. +

Styles

+To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnote text, and assign character styles to the footnote anchor number and the number in the footnote area. + +

Paragraph

+Select the paragraph style for the footnote text. Only special styles can be selected. + +

Page

+Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes. +This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Position area. + +

Text area

+Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document. + +

Footnote area

+Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area. +

Continuation notice

+ +

End of Footnote

+Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page. + +

Start of next page

+Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8963235c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + +Endnote Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Endnote Settings

+Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the options available. +
+
+ +
+ +

AutoNumbering

+ + +

Start at

+Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span more than one document. + +

Before

+Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " to display "re: 1". + +

After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +

Styles

+To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style, and assign character styles to the endnote anchor number and the number in the endnote area. + +

Paragraph

+Select the paragraph style for the endnote text. Only special styles can be selected. + +

Page

+Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes. + +

Text area

+Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document. + +

Endnote area

+Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5868654e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Convert Text to Table +/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp + + + +converting; text, into tables +text; converting to tables +tables; converting to text + + + + +Convert Text to Table +Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text. + +
+ +
+The options available in this dialog depending on the type of conversion. +Separate text at +A separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in the selection is converted into a row in the table. Similarly, when you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed to the character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph. + +Tabs +Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers. + +Semicolons +Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers. + +Paragraph +Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers. + +Other: +Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker. + +Text box +Type the character that you want to use as a column marker. + +Equal width for all columns +Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker. + + +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. + +Options + +Heading +Formats the first row of the new table as a heading. + +Repeat heading +Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans. + +The first ... rows +Repeats the first n rows as a header. + +Don't split table +Does not divide the table across pages. + +Border +Adds a border to the table and the table cells. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48f41ab73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sort +/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp + + + +tables;sorting rows + sorting;paragraphs/table rows + text; sorting paragraphs + lines of text; sorting paragraphs + sorting;paragraphs in special languages + Asian languages;sorting paragraphs/table rows + + + + + +Sort + Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys. + +
+ +
+ Sort criteria + + + +Keys 1 to 3 + Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. + + + +Column 1 to 3 + Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para + + + +Key type 1 to 3 + Select the sorting option that you want to use. + Order + Ascending + + + +Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). + + + +Descending + Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). + Direction + +Columns + Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. + +Rows + Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. + Separator + Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. + +Tabs + If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. + + +Character + Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. + +Select + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. + +Language + Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. + +Match case + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. + For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826e8f33c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Calculate +/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Calculate + Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..537221e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Page Formatting +/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Page Formatting + Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar. +
+
+ +
+ In long documents, updating the page formatting can take a while. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1068c66f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Current Index +/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Current Index + Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor. +
+
+ +
+ You can also right-click in an index or table of contents, and then choose Update Index or Table of Contents. The following commands are also available in the context menu: + + +Edit Index or Table of Contents + Edits the current index or table. + + +Delete Index or Table of Contents + Deletes the current index or table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a54bc17da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +All Indexes and Tables +/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +All Indexes and Tables + Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af179cc1c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + +Line Numbering +/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Line Numbering

+Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering, click in the paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Outline & List tab, and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + You can also exclude a paragraph style from line numbering. +Line numbers are not available in HTML format. +
+ +
+ +

Show numbering

+Adds line numbers to the current document. +

View

+Set the properties of the line numbering. + +

Character Style

+Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers. + +

Format

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to use. + +

Position

+Select where you want the line numbers to appear. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text. + +

Interval

+Enter the counting interval for the line numbers. +

Separator

+You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one. + +

Text

+Enter the text that you want to use as a separator. + +

Every

+Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators. +Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered. +

Count

+Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in frames in the line count. + +

Blank lines

+Includes empty paragraphs in the line count. + +

Lines in frames

+Adds line numbers to text in frames. The numbering restarts in each frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted. + +

Restart every new page

+Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9c88f27d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Update All +/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Update All + Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad94620ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Fields + Updates the contents of all fields in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be96318fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Links +/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a025da151 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +All Charts +/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +All Charts + Updates the charts in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..148868b45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Update +/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ updating; text documents +

Update

+ Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..923049f5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Accessibility Check + /text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp + + + + + accessibility;check in text document + PDF/UA;check + + + +
+

Accessibility Check

+ Review common accessibility problems in the document, and support for PDF/UA specifications in the PDF export dialog. +
+
+Choose Tools - Accessibility Check. +Select File - Export as PDF - General - Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA) and click OK. +
+ +The Accessibility Check tool traverses the document structure and gather all possible accessibility issues. The check can be run manually through the menu or it will be triggered after PDF export dialog, when the PDF/UA support is enabled. + +

The Accessibility Check dialog

+The Accessibility Check dialog shows a list of all issues found in the text document. +

Go to Issue

+Click the button to jump to the page and select the object or issue that requires attention for accessibility. + +

Common accessibility checks

+ +The checks that are currently implemented are: + + + Check that the document title is set. + + + Check that the document language is set, or that all styles that are in use, have the language set. + + + Check all images, graphics, OLE objects for the alt (or title in some objects) text. + + + Check that tables do not include split or merged cells, which could be disorienting for users with visual impairments. + + + Check for fake/manual numbering (not using integrated numbering). For example writing "1." "2." "3." at the beginning of the paragraphs. + + + Check that hyperlink text is not a hyperlink itself - hyperlink should be described. + + + Check for the contrast between text and the background. The algorithm is described in the WCAG specification. + + + Check for blinking text, which can be problematic for people with cognitive disabilities or photosensitive epilepsy. + + + Check for footnotes and endnotes, which should be avoided. + + + Check for heading order. Order of the headings must increase incrementally with no skips (for example Heading 1 to Heading 3, skipping Heading 2). + + + Check, if text conveys additional meaning with (direct) formatting. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..532d1e9f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Reference (Edit) + /text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp + + + + +
+

Reference

+A submenu that offers possibilities to edit footnotes, endnotes, index entries, and bibliography entries. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Footnote or Endnote

+ + +

Index Entry

+ + +

Bibliography Entry

+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c03d61a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Text Box and Shape +/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp + + +Format Object menu in Writer + + + +
+ +

Text Box and Shape

+Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected textbox or shape. +
+ + + +Text Attributes +

Fontwork

+Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15d51ad7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Position (List Styles - Legacy) + /text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp + + + + +numbering;OpenOffice.org +OpenOffice.org legacy numbering + +
+ +

Position (List Styles - Legacy)

+
+ +
+ +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME Writer uses the position controls shown here when opening documents that use a different method for positioning and spacing. For default controls see Position (List Styles).see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt + + + + +Indent +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering area. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. + + +Relative +Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. + + +Width of numberingi85347 +Enter the width of the numbering area. The numbering symbol can be left, center or right in this area.UFI: fixed #i31282# + + + + + Minimum space between numbering and text. + The alignment of the numbering symbol is adjusted to get the desired minimum space. If it is not possible because the numbering area is not wide enough, then the start of the text is adjusted. + + +provides heading "Number Alignment +Aligns the numbering symbol left, center, or right in the numbering area. The position might be adjusted to maintain the minimum space. +provides note about "Number Alignment + + + + +provides Apply control help +
+Position (List Styles) +Paragraph alignment +Indenting Paragraphs +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..629a3eef0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Mail Merge Wizard +Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send email messages to many recipients. +
+
+ +
+Before starting the Mail Merge Wizard you might want to review the whole process of creating a mail merge: + + + + + + + + + +First step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document. + +
+ + Configurable Mail Merge dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe9a4c8b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting Document +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 1 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document +Specify the document that you want to use as a base for the mail merge document. +
+ +Use the current document +Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document. + +Create a new document +Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge. + +Start from existing document +Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document. + +Browse +Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open. + +Start from a template +Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with. + +Browse +Opens a template selector dialog. + +Start from a recently saved starting document +Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document. + +Select the document. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7a9924b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +Specify the type of mail merge document to create. +
+Letter +Creates a printable mail merge document. +Email message +Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an email message or an email attachment. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf72b3273 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 3 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +Specify the recipients for the mail merge document as well as the layout of the address block. +
+The Mail Merge wizard opens to this page if you start the wizard in a text document that already contains address database fields. If the wizard opens directly to this page, the Select Address List button is called Select Different Address List. +The title of this page is Insert address block for letters and Select address list for email messages. + +Select Address List +Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list. +When you edit some records in a Calc spreadsheet data source that is currently in use for a mail merge, those changes are not visible in the mail merge.ufi: see i9899 + +This document shall contain an address block +Adds an address block to the mail merge document. + +Select the address block layout that you want to use. +If you select This document shall contain an address block, the third and fourth substeps become enabled on this page. Then you have to match the address block elements and the field names used in the mail. + +Suppress lines with just empty fields +Enable to leave empty lines out of the address. + +More +Opens the Select Address Block dialog. + +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. +Unless all address elements are matched with a column header, you cannot finish the Mail Merge wizard with the Finish button or continue to the fourth step of the wizard. + +Shows a preview of the address block template filled with data. + + +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..387ad7204 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 4 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +Specify the properties for the salutation. If the mail merge database contains gender information, you can specify different salutations based on the gender of the recipient. +
+ +This document should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation. + +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation to the mail merge document. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. + +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Female recipient) dialog. + +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Male recipient) dialog. + +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. + +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. + +General salutation +Select the default salutation that is used when you do not specify a personalized salutation. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the salutation. + +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. + + +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2dabe402f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust Layout +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 5 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +Specify the position of the address blocks and salutations on the documents. +
+Address Block Position + +From top +Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block. + +Align to text body +Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin. + +From left +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block. +Salutation Position + +Up +Moves the salutation up. + +Down +Moves the salutation down. + + +Preview area +Provides a preview of the salutation positioning on the page. + + +Zoom +Select a magnification for the print preview. +Use the commands in the context menu of the preview to move the view up and down. +Press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e888d2ee9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copies To +/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp + + +UFI: mail merge email copy to dialog + + + + + +Copy To +Specify additional email recipients for the mail merge document. + +CC +Enter the recipients of email copies, separated by a semicolon (;). + +BCC +Enter the recipients of email blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..899a6f201 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customize Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp + + +UFI: Customize Address List dialog of mail merge + + + + + +Customize Address List +Customizes the address list for mail merge documents. + + +Address list elements +Select the fields that you want to move, delete, or rename. + + + +Add +Inserts a new text field. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected field. + + +Rename +Renames the selected text field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e22c7ffc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Custom Salutation +/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp + + +UFI: Custom Greeting Line dialog in mail merge + + + + + +Custom Salutation +Specify the salutation layout for mail merge or email merge documents. The name of this dialog is different for female recipients and male recipients. + +Salutation elements +Select a field and drag the field to the other list. + +> +Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once. + +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. + +Drag salutation elements into the box below +Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. + +Customize salutation +Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current salutation layout. + + + + +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b40546f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Email Message +/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp + + +UFI: E-Mail Body dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Email Message +Type the message and the salutation for files that you send as email attachments. + +This email should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation to the email. + +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. + +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a female recipient. + +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a male recipient. + +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. + +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. + +General salutation +Select the default greeting to use if a personalized salutation cannot be created. + +Write your message here +Enter the main text of the email. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a505e5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Send merged document as email + /text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Send merged document as email +Sends the mail merge output as email messages to all or some recipients. +
+ +Email options + + +To +Select the database field that contains the email address of the recipient. + + +Copy to +Opens the Copy To dialog where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses. + + +Subject +Enter the subject line for the email messages. + + +Send as +Select the mail format for the email messages. +The Plain text and HTML message formats are sent in the body of the message, whereas the *.odt, *.doc, and *.pdf formats are sent as attachments. + + +Properties +Opens the Email Message dialog where you can enter the email message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments. + + +Name of the attachment +Shows the name of the attachment. + +Send records + + +Send all documents +Select to send emails to all recipients. + + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Send Documents +Click to start sending emails. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c97f59f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Find Entry +/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp + + +UFI: Find Entry dialog of mail merge + + + + + +Find Entry +Searches for a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. + + +Find +Enter the search term. + + +Find only in +Restricts the search to one data field. + + +Select the data field where you want to search for the text. + + +Find +Displays the next record that contains the search text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8e061ac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Match Fields +/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp + + +UFI: Match Fields dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Match Fields +Matches the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database when you create new address blocks or salutations. + + +Matches to field: +Select a field name in your database for each logical address element. + + +Address block preview +Displays a preview of the values of the first data record. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c8782f72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Address Block / Edit Address Block +/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp + + +UFI: New Address Block dialog for mail merge + + + +New Address Block or Edit Address Block +Specify the placement of address data fields in an address block in mail merge documents. + +Address elements +Select an address field and drag the field to the other list. + +> +Adds the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list. You can add the same field more than once. + +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. + +Drag address elements here +Arrange the fields with drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current address block layout. + +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9851f672f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp + + +UFI: New Address List dialog for mail merge + + + + + +New Address List +Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for mail merge documents. When you click OK, a dialog prompts you for the location to save the address list. + + +Address Information +Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. + + + + + + + +Show Entry Number +Click the buttons to navigate through the records or enter a record number to display a record. + + +New +Adds a new blank record to the address list. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected record. + + +Find +Opens the Find Entry dialog. You can leave the dialog open while you edit the entries. + + +Customize +Opens the Customize Address List dialog where you can rearrange, rename, add, and delete fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bf857598 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Print merged document + /text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + + + +Printer options + +Printer +Select the printer. + + +Properties +Changes the printer properties. + +Print records + +Print all documents +Prints documents for all recipients. + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Print Documents +Prints the mail merge documents. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92c9e83c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Save merged document + /text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Save merged document +Save the mail merge output to file. +
+ +Save As options + + +Save as single large document +Saves the merged document as a single file. + + +Save as individual documents +Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record. + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Save Documents +Saves the documents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..919594e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Address Block +/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp + + +UFI: Select Address Block dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Select Address Block +Select, edit, or delete an address block layout for mail merge. + + +Select your preferred address block +Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK. + + +Never include country/region +Excludes country or regional information from the address block. + + +Always include country/region +Includes country or regional information in the address block. + + +Only include country/region if it is not: +Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box. + + +Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed. + + +New +Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout. + + +Edit +Opens the Edit Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected address block layout. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73a05ae81 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp + + +UFI: mail merge select address list dialog + + + + + +Select Address List +Select the address list that you want to use for mail merge, then click OK. + +Add +Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list. If the file contains more than one table, the Select Table dialog opens. + +Create +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list. + +Filter +Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see. + +Edit +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list. + +Change Table +Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94941febb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Select Table +/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp + + + + + +Select Table +Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses. +Preview +Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7da989e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Outline Content Visibility + /text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp + + + + +outline content folding;enabling +show;outline folding +hide;outline folding + + +

Outline Folding

+Hide and show all content under headings, including text, images, tables, frames, shapes, and text boxes. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web) - View, and select the Show Outline Folding Buttons checkbox. + Open the Navigator (F5) and display the Headings entry. Hover the mouse on a heading and open the context menu. Select Outline Folding submenu. +
+Use this feature to selectively hide and show contents under all paragraphs that have a non-zero outline level, usually headings. In large documents, it allows to quickly scroll to the right position for editing and reading. + + +navigator;outline folding +outline folding;with Navigator + + +

Using Outline Folding with Navigator

+ All outline folding commands in the navigator are shown in the context menu of the Headings entries. Open the context menu of a heading and choose Outline Folding. + + + + +Headings Icon + + + + Headings icon + + +
+

Fold all

+Hides all contents for the selected heading and its sub-headings. Sibling outline headings with same level are not hidden. If applied on the main Headings entry of the navigator, only the document headings are displayed. +

Unfold all

+ Headings and its sub-headings contents are displayed in the document area. If applied on the main Headings entry of the navigator, the document is displayed in full. +

Toggle

+ Toggles the outline folding of the selected item. + + +outline folding;with mouse + +

Using Outline Folding with the Mouse

+

Over a heading

+ Press the CommandCtrl key and place the mouse over a heading. An arrow in left margin gives a visual cue. + When mouse pointer image changes to hand pointer, the following commands are possible: + + + Click to toggle folding of content from selected heading to next heading. + + + Right-click to hide or show all content from selected heading (and all its subheadings) to next heading at same outline level. + + + +

Arrows in left margin

+ Place mouse in left margin next to a heading. An arrow appears if content is shown. + + + A down arrow indicates the heading and its contents are visible. + + + A left arrow indicates the heading has hidden contents. + + +

Saving Document Outline Folding State

+Documents saved in Open Document Format (.odt) will retain the current settings of hidden and shown contents at time of the save command. +The document contents are not affected by the folding settings. +

Printing and exporting to PDF with Outline Folding Contents

+To print or to export the full document, set the outline folding to Unfold All beforehand. +Folded outline contents will not be printed or exported to PDF. +
+Set Paragraph Outline Level + Modify Outline Levels for Headings + + Adding a Button to a Toolbar +Customizing a Context Menu +Making a Shortcut Key +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fce04fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Protect Document + /text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp + + + + +protection;fields in text documents +protection;bookmarks in text documents + + + +
+

Protect Document

+Toggles write protection for fields and bookmarks in the document. +
+ +
+ +
+

Protect Fields

+Toggles fields write protection. When checked, the fields cannot be edited or deleted. +

Protect Bookmarks

+Toggles bookmark write protection. When checked, the bookmarks cannot be deleted or renamed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03ae6221c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Selection Mode +/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp + + + +
+Selection Mode +Choose the selection mode from the submenu: normal selection mode, or block selection mode. +
+
+ +
+In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. +In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6efb1e722 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + Show Whitespace + /text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp + + + +
+ +

Show Whitespace

+ Displays the document with the top and bottom margins, header and footer and a gap between pages. Uncheck to collapse all the elements cited and display the document in a contiguous page stream. Hiding whitespace is only possible in Single-page view. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..713b72c4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Style Inspector + /text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp + + + + + +styles;inspector +style inspector + +
+

Style Inspector

+ The Style Inspector is located on the Sidebar. It displays all the attributes of the styles (paragraph and character) and any direct formatting present in the paragraph and character where the cursor is located. These details can be useful when you are trying to figure out why some formatting in a document appears to be incorrect or inconsistent. +
+ +
+ Open the sidebar, click on the Style Inspector icon + + + + + Icon Style Inspector + + + + Icon Style Inspector on the Sidebar + + +
+ Press CommandCtrl+Alt+5 +
+

The Style Inspector Panel

+

Properties

+ Paragraph Styles: shows the list of the paragraph styles applied to the text at the cursor position, following the style hierarchy, where the parent style comes above any child style. + + Paragraph direct formatting: shows the list of paragraph properties which are set directly to the text at the cursor location. + + Character Styles: shows the list of the character styles applied to the text at the cursor, following hierarchy, where the parent style comes above any child style. + + Character direct formatting: shows the list of character properties which are set directly to the text at the cursor location. + +

Values

+ Display the values of the properties. +

Usage

+ Use the Style Inspector to uncover formatting issues in your text document. + + + Style properties overwritten by direct formatting are greyed out in the Paragraph and Character style tree, indicating that the style property is not effective anymore. + + + Paragraph style properties that are re-defined by a child paragraph style are greyed out. + + + Character style properties that are re-defined by a child character style are greyed out. + + + Paragraph style and direct properties that are re-defined by character styles or character direct properties are greyed. + + + For example, if the margins of the paragraph are changed by direct formatting using the rulers, the margins property of the paragraph style are greyed out and the margins properties are displayed in the Paragraph Direct Formatting entry of the Style Inspector. + + Another example, if the Emphasis character style highlights a word with a yellow background, and the user mistakenly overwrote it by using a white background, the yellow attribute would be greyed-out and white is listed under Direct Formatting in the Style Inspector. The Style Inspector shows only those attributes that diverge from the parent (which is usually the Default Paragraph Style). + + Some features of the Style Inspector are of interest mainly to advanced users: + + + The Style Inspector can show any hidden RDF (Resource Description Framework, a W3C standard) metadata at the cursor position associated with text spans, paragraphs, and bookmarks. For annotated text spans, “Nested Text Content” item can show the boundary of the nested annotated text ranges and metadata fields. + + + Custom color metadata field shadings can be set for an annotated text range or a metadata field, for visualization of metadata categories in the document editor. Use View - Field Shadings or press CommandCtrl+F8 to disable or enable these field shadings. + + +
+ Release notes for Style Inspector + RDF Metadata in Style Inspector + Custom color metadata +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7aaeeda52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + Using title pages in your document + /text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + + + page;title page + title pages;first page style + title pages;modifying + title pages;inserting + + + +Inserting title pages in the document +Insert title pages in your document. +
+Title pages are pages at the beginning of the document that lists the publication information, such as the title of the publication, the name of the author etc. These pages have a different layout than the pages of the document body, because they may not have page numbering, sometimes a different heading and footer and even different margins settings or background. + +
+Choose menu Format - Title Page +
+Many documents, such as letters and reports, have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document. For example, the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer, while the other pages do. This is simple to achieve with %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +Page header and footer, numbering, margins and orientation are some of the properties that belongs to page styles. %PRODUCTNAME Writer let your to insert a blank title page at any point of your document, or format an existing page like a title page, by inserting a page break followed by a page style of your choice or by changing the page style at cursor position. +Using the Default (or any other) page style for your document, you can add a header or footer as you wish to the first page by deselecting the Same content on first page option on the header/footer tabs in the Page Style dialog, and then adding the header or footer. You can then add a different header or footer to the other pages of the document. + +To convert the first page of the document into a title page + + + + Place the cursor on the first page, + + + From the Menu Bar, choose Format - Title page… + + + Select Converting existing pages to title pages + + + Select the style of the title page in the Edit Page Properties area + + +By default, %PRODUCTNAME selects the First Page page style. + + + + Set the page numbering reset options. + + + Click OK. + + +This will change the current page style to First Page and the following pages will have the Default Style. + +To insert a title page anywhere in the document +Place the cursor where you want to insert a new title page. + + + + From the menu bar select Format - Title page. + + + Select Insert new title pages + + + Set number of title pages to add and + + + Set the title page location by setting its page number in the spin box. + + + Set the page numbering reset options. + + + Click OK + + +This will insert a page break and change the current page style to First Page. The following pages will have the Default Style page style. + +To delete a title page: +You cannot delete a title page. You must change its page style format from First Page to whatever other page style you wish. + + + + Place the cursor in the page you want to change the style + + + From the Sidebar Deck, select Sidebar Settings - Styles. + + + From the Styles, select button Page Styles. + + + From the Style list, select the page style you want to apply. + + + Double click on the page style to apply. + + + +
+ + + + Format page, + + + Page break, + + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page. + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2c222ecd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Page Watermark + /text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + Page Watermark + Insert a watermark text in the current page style background. + + watermark;text documents + watermark;page background + page background;watermark + +
+
+ Choose Format - Watermark. +
+ A watermark is an identifying image or pattern in paper that appears as various shades of brightness when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were originally created directly during paper manufacturing to discourage counterfeiting of documents, currency bills, stamps and more. + Use watermarks in %PRODUCTNAME Writer to simulate a paper watermark on the document pages. + Fill the dialog settings below. + The values entered applies to the actual page style. + Watermark dialog + + Text + Enter the watermark text to be displayed as image in the page background. + + Font + Select the font from the list. + You cannot choose font size or font style for the watermark text. The text size will be scaled to fit in one line in the page background. + + Angle + Select the rotation angle for the watermark. The text will be rotated by this angle in counterclockwise direction. + + Transparency + Select the transparency level for the watermark. A 0% value produces an opaque watermark and a value of 100% is totally transparent (invisible). + + Color + Select a color from the drop-down box. + To change a watermark contents or setting. + If the watermark in use is a text inserted by the Format - Watermark menu command or by the document classification settings, you can edit the contents and settings on opening the watermark dialog. +
+ Document classification watermarks + Page background +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7a76464f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Toggle Ordered List +/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+ +

Toggle Ordered List

+Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs. +
+To define the numbering format, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. To display the Bullets and Numbering Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Bullets and Numbering.UFI changed last sentence, see #60925 +
+Some of the bullets and numbering options are not available when working in the Web Layout.UFI: online layout is now web layout +
+ + + + +Toggle Ordered List Icon + + +Toggle Ordered List + + +
+ +
+
+Bullets and Numbering +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3bb78cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Link Frames +/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+Choose Format - Frame and Object - Link Frames. +On the Format bar, click the Link Frames icon. +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca9da786a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Unlink Frames +/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03c8e703e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Rows +/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; inserting rows +rows; inserting in tables, using icon + + +Insert Rows +Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon. The second method inserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Row + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..775ddfa06 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Column +/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; inserting columns in +columns; inserting in tables + + +Insert Column +Inserts one or more columns into the table, after the selection. You can insert several columns at the same time by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon. If the latter method is used, the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Column + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..016d55239 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Fixed +/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Fixed

+ If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect only the neighboring lines or columns in question. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Fixed + + + Table: Fixed + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9feda413c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Fixed, Proportional +/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Fixed, Proportional

+ If this mode is active, changes to the line and/or column affect the entire table. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Fixed, Proportional + + + Table: Fixed, Proportional + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5165bbd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Variable +/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Variable

+ If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect the size of the table. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Variable + + + Table: Variable + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..657d6cdb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Sum +/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Sum

+Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear. +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME recognizes the cell range for the sum function as long as the cells are filled with numbers. Prior to entering the data, you must choose Table - Number Recognition to enable this feature. +Click Apply to accept the sum formula as it appears in the entry line. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Sum + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b2f5ac8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +No List +/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ +

No List

+ Removes numbering or bullets and list indenting for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. +
+
+ + + + Icon No List + + + No List + + +
+
+ + To preserve indenting, but remove bullet or number, place cursor at the beginning of the paragraph and press Backspace. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c5b8590 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Demote Outline Level with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +i66535, was Shift down with Subpoints +

Demote Outline Level with Subpoints

+Demotes the list of a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to the next list level. Multiple list paragraphs can be selected. Demotes the outline level of a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings to the next outline level. This command is active only when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or a chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Demote Outline Level with Subpoints + + +Demote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e36bc1df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Promote Outline Level With Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +i66535, was Shift up with Subpoints +

Promote Outline Level With Subpoints

+Promotes the list level of a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to the next list level. Multiple list paragraphs can be selected. Promotes the outline level of a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings to the next outline level. This command is active only when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Promote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +Promote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f868b841a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Unnumbered Entry +/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Insert Unnumbered Entry +Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Unnumbered Entry + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de7ebfa42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Move Item Up with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Move Item Up with Subpoints

+ Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to before the previous list paragraph with the same list level. Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings and text to before the previous heading at the same outline level. You can also select and move more than one list paragraph or chapter heading. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned within a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + Icon Move Up with Subpoints + + + Move Item Up with Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e61e7d1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Move Item Down with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Move Item Down with Subpoints

+ Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to after the following list paragraph with the same list level. Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings and text to after the following heading at the same outline level. You can also select and move more than one list paragraph or chapter heading. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + Icon Move Down with Subpoints + + + Move Item Down with Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12be81f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Restart Numbering + /text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Restart Numbering

+ Restarts list numbering from 1. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned within a list. +
+
+ Choose Format - Lists - Restart Numbering. + Place cursor in a list paragraph, right-click and choose List - Restart Numbering. + On Bullets and Numbering bar, click +
+
+ + + + Icon Restart Numbering + + + Restart Numbering + + +
+
+ + + To remove the numbering restart, apply the command again in the paragraph where the numbering was restarted. + + + To restart numbering with a number greater than 1, right-click in the paragraph where you want to restart numbering, choose Paragraph - Paragraph - Outline & List tab, select Restart numbering at this paragraph and enter the start number in Start with. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0a9d407c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Page Number +/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Page Number +The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar. A click opens "Go to Page", with which you can navigate in the document. A right-click shows all bookmarks in the document. Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location. +
+The displayed page (x) and the total number of pages (y) are shown in the form Page x/y When you scroll through a document with the mouse, the page number is displayed when you release the mouse button. When you scroll using the right scrollbar, the page numbers are displayed as a Help tip. The page numbering format of the status bar and scrollbar is identical. +You can turn the Navigator display on or off by double-clicking the Page Number field. +To go to a specific page, enter the page number in the Page spin button in the Navigator and then press Enter. +By pressing the shortcut keys Shift+Command +Ctrl+F5, you switch to entering a page number. When you press Enter, the cursor moves to the selected page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca88ca4c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combined Display +/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Combined Display + Displays current information about the active document. +
+ When the cursor is in a named section, the section name appears. When the cursor is in a table, the name of the table cell appears. The size of the object is shown when you edit frames or drawing objects. + When the cursor is positioned within text, you can double-click this field to open the Fields dialog. In this dialog, you can define a field to be inserted in your document at the current cursor position. When the cursor is positioned in a table, a double-click in this field will call the Table Format dialog. Depending on the object selected, you can call up a dialog to edit a section, a graphic object, a floating frame, an OLE object, direct numbering or the position and size of a drawing object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f008fb0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Zoom In +/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Zoom In

+ Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document. +
+
+ + + + Icon Zoom In + + + Zoom In + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8b65d691 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Zoom Out

+Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size. +
+
+ + + + +Zoom Out Icon + + +Zoom Out + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8714571a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Preview Zoom +/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Preview Zoom +Determines the zoom level of the print preview. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a2329c4e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Single Page Preview + /text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Single Page Preview

+Displays one page at a time in the Print Preview window. +
+
+ + + + +Single Page Preview Icon + + + Single Page Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c3ddeac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Two Pages Preview +/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Two Pages Preview

+ Displays two pages in the Print Preview window. Uneven numbers will always appear on the right side, even numbers on the left. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Two Pages Preview + + + Two Pages Preview + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be7c44554 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Multiple Pages Preview +/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Multiple Pages Preview

+Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Multiple Pages Preview + + +Multiple Pages Preview + + +
+
+After clicking the Multiple Pages Preview icon, move the mouse over the desired number of rows and columns. +

More Options

+You can also choose settings by clicking More Options to open a new dialog, then use the two spin buttons to set the number of pages to be displayed. + +

Rows

+Defines the number of rows of pages. + +

Columns

+Defines the number of pages shown in columns. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d79ac485 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Book preview +/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp + + +UFI: new icon Spec doc "BookPreview" + + + +previews;book preview +book previews + +
+ +

Book preview

+Select to display the first page on the right side in the print preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview. +
+
+ + + + +book preview icon + + +Book Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c9d52f22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print page view + /text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp + + + +
+ +Print page viewremove this pageid="par_id3151170" <AVIS hid=".uno:PrintPagePreview">Opens the Print dialog to print the page preview. Use the Print options page view icon to set the printing scale and other printing properties.</AVIS> +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Print page view + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58e43b704 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cell Reference +/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Cell Reference +Displays the position of the cell cursor in a table. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b72bb1d76 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,661 @@ + + + + + +Formula +/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp + + + +
+ +formulas; in text documents +operators; in table formulas +statistical functions in tables +mathematical functions in tables +trigonometric functions in tables +pages;number of pages in table formulas +variables;document properties in table formulas +arithmetical operators in formulas + + + + +

Formula

+Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu. +
+The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs. +
+ With the cursor in a table, press F2 +In the Table toolbar, press the Formula icon. +
+ + + + +Formula icon in Table toolbar + + +Formula + + +
+
+
+

Summary of Formula Options

+

Basic Calculation Functions

+ + + + Operation + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Addition + + ++ + + +Calculates the total. +Example: <A1> + 8 + + + + +Subtraction + + +- + + +Calculates the difference +Example: 10 - <B5> + + + + +Multiplication + + +MUL or * + + +Calculates the product. +Example: 7 MUL 9 + + + + +Division + + +DIV or / + + +Calculates the quotient +Example: 100 DIV 15 + + +
+

Basic Functions in the Submenu

+ + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + + +Sum + + +SUM + + +Calculates the sum of the selected cells. +Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 + + + + +Round + + +ROUND + + +Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. +Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 + + + + +Percent + + +PHD + + +Calculates a percentage +Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 + + + + +Square Root + + +SQRT + + +Calculates the square root. +Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 + + + + +Power + + +POW + + +Calculates the power of a number. +Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00 + + +
+

Operators

+You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: + + + + Operator + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +List Separator + + +| + + +Separates the elements in a list. +Example of using a list: +MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 + + + + +Equal + + +EQ or == + + +Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. +Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Not Equal + + +NEQ or != + + +Tests for inequality between selected values. +Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Less than or Equal + + +LEQ + + +Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. +Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. + + + + +Greater than or Equal + + +GEQ + + +Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value +Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. + + + + +Less + + +L + + +Tests for values less than a specified value +Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. + + + + +Greater + + +G + + +Tests for values greater than a specified value +Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. + + + + +Boolean Or + + +OR + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean OR +Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean X Or + + +XOR + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR +Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean And + + +AND + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean AND +Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean Not + + +NOT + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT +Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false) + + +
+

Statistical Functions

+You can choose from the following statistical functions: + + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Mean + + +MEAN + + +Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. +Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 + + + + +Minimum Value + + +MIN + + +Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. +Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 + + + + +Maximum Value + + +MAX + + +Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. +Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00 + + + + + Product + + + PRODUCT + + + Calculates the product of the selected cells. + Example: PRODUCT <A2:C2> displays the product of the values in cells A2 to C2 + + + + + Count + + + COUNT + + + Counts the number of non empty cells. + Example: COUNT <A2:C2> displays the number of non empty cells in A2 to C2. + + +
+

Functions

+You can choose from the following functions: + + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Sine + + +SIN + + +Calculates the sine in radians +Example: SIN (PI/2) + + + + +Cosine + + +COS + + +Calculates the cosine in radians. +Example: COS 1 + + + + +Tangent + + + TAN + + +Calculates the tangent in radians. +Example: TAN <A1> + + + + +Arc Sine + + +ASIN + + +Calculates the arc sine in radians. +Example: ASIN 1 + + + + +Arc Cosine + + +ACOS + + +Calculates the arc cosine in radians. +Example: ACOS 1 + + + + +Arc Tangent + + +ATAN + + +Calculates the arc tangent in radians. +Example: ATAN 1 + + + + + Absolute value + + + ABS + + + Returns the absolute value of the number. + Example: ABS -34 returns 34 + + + + + Sign + + + SIGN + + + Returns the algebraic sign of the number. + Example: SIGN -23 returns -1 + + +
+

Variables for document properties

+The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. + + + + Name + + + Description + + + + +CHAR + + +Number of characters in the document + + + + +WORD + + +Number of words in the document + + + + +PARA + + +Number of paragraphs in the document + + + + +GRAPH + + +Number of graphics in the document + + + + +TABLES + + +Number of tables in the document + + + + +OLE + + +Number of OLE objects in the document + + + + +PAGE + + +Total number of pages in the document + + +
+

More Defined Values

+ + + + Description + + + Name + + + Value + + + + +PI + + +PI + + +3.1415... + + + + +Euler's constant + + +E + + +2.71828... + + + + +True + + +TRUE + + +not equal to 0 + + + + +False + + +FALSE + + +0 + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57e93e26d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel +/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Cancel +Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Cancel + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d0c050b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Apply +/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Apply

+ Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar. The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Apply + + + Apply + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..80ad856e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula Area +/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Formula Area + Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulas in submenu. +
+
+ + + + + + + Formula area with formula + + + Formula Area + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a86d2d8e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert +/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Insert +The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +
+You can select the following functions: +Table + + +Section + + +Insert Frame Manually + + +Floating Frame + + +Insert Footnote Directly + + +Insert Endnote Directly + + +Note +Inserts a note at the current cursor position. +Bookmark + +UFI: "insert cross reference" hereFile + + +AutoText + +Special Character + + +Insert Fields +Inserts a field at the current cursor position. + +Controls +The Controls icon opens a toolbar with the tools that you need to create an interactive form. + +From File + + + + +Formula + + +Chart + +OLE ObjectUFI: this may be called "Insert Object" in UI, but is not the removed "Insert Object" bar + +Insert Index +Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. +Entry + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..098f74f4c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Fields +/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu. Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu.UFI: changed to fix #i20539# + +You can choose from the following functions: + + + + + + + +Other + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be060bd17 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Date +/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Date +Inserts the current date as a field. The default date format is used, and the date is not automatically updated. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to define a different date format, or have the date updated automatically, select Insert - Field - More Fields to insert a field command and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The format of an existing date field can be modified at any time by choosing Edit - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d83c0635 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Time +/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ time fields;insertingfields;inserting time + +Time + Inserts the current time as a field. The time is taken directly from the system settings of your operating system. A fixed time format is applied, which cannot be updated by using the F9 function key. +
+
+ +
+ To assign a different time format, or adapt the actual time data, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired changes in the Fields dialog. Additionally, you can modify the format of an inserted time field at any time by choosing Edit - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5523ec75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Page Number + /text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Page Number +Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position. The default setting is for it to use the Page Number character style. +
+ +
+ +
+If you would like to define a different format or modify the page number, insert a field with Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. It is also possible to edit a field inserted with the Page Number command with Edit - Fields. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..355896c11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Page Count +/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Page Count

+Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document. +
+
+ +
+The format of the field inserted using the Page Count command can be modified using the Edit - Fields command. +
+Document Statistics Fields +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e39399a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Subject +/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+subject fields +fields; subject + + +Subject +Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field . This field displays the data entered in the Subject field under File - Properties - Description. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fa4ed853 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Title +/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Title +Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0e6b4258 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +First Author (field) +/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +First Author (field) +Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84a1651cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Images and Charts + /text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp + + + + + + + +

Images and Charts

+ + graphics;do not show + images;do not show + pictures;do not show + + +If the Images and Charts icon on the Tools bar is activated, no graphics are displayed - only empty frames as placeholders. + + + + + Icon Images and Charts + + + Images and Charts + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46ef9a6fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Direct Cursor Mode +/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp + + + +direct cursor; restriction + + +

Direct Cursor Mode

+Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +
+ +On Tools bar, click + + + + +Icon Toggle Direct Cursor Mode + + + +Toggle Direct Cursor Mode + + +
+ +
+The direct cursor allows you to click in any blank area of a page to place text, images, tables, frames, and other objects. +If you place the direct cursor approximately in the middle between the left and the right margin of a page or a table cell, the text you insert will be centered. Similarly, text is right-aligned when the direct cursor is placed on the right margin. +The AutoCorrect tool automatically removes empty paragraphs, tabs, and spaces that are inserted by the direct cursor. If you want to use the direct cursor, then disable the AutoCorrect tool. + +The direct cursor sets tabs to position the cursor. If you change the tabs later. the position of the text on the page may change as well. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e8d3d5a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Header +/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f93daa84a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Footer +/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97b4e93df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert +/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Insert +Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar with various functions for inserting graphics, tables, documents, and special characters. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert + + +
+ +You can select the following functions: +Insert single-column frame manually + + +From File + + +Insert Table + + +Insert Document + + +Insert Special Character + + +Insert Section + + +Insert Bookmark + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34b79493f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Fields +/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon and select the required field from the submenu. +You can select the following functions: + + + +UFI added two lines, see #i60664 + + +Other + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5333208fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Text Animation +/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Text Animation

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Text Animation + + + Text Animation + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9343a6222 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Add to List + /text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp + + + +
+ +Add to List +Lists;merging + +

Add to List

+Include selected paragraphs, whether a list item or not, as part of a list. +
+
+Choose Format - Lists - Add to List. +Right-click a paragraph, choose List - Add to List. +On Bullets and Numbering bar, click Add to List icon. +
+ + + + Add to List Icon + + + Add to List + + +
+
+
+The list labeling and indent formatting are applied to the selected paragraphs. The position of the paragraphs in the document does not change. + +

Add Consecutive List Entries to an Immediately Prior List

+ + + Select one or more consecutive list entries, starting from the first entry, that you want to add to the immediately prior list. + + + + + +Use this procedure to combine two lists. + +

Add Selected Paragraphs to a List

+ + + Select paragraphs, whether in a list or not, to be added to a list. + For multiple selections, press and hold the Ctrl key after the first selection. Only one character needs to be selected in each paragraph to be added. The Ctrl key can be released without losing the selections, but must be pressed whenever clicking in the document to preserve the selection. + + + Press and hold the Ctrl key, select at least one character in the list, then release the Ctrl key. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + + + + + + Right-click anywhere in highlighted selection, choose List - Add to List. + + +This procedure works for ordered and unordered lists. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a68d647 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + + +Word Count Status Bar Field +/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp + + +Muhammad Haggag. + + + +
+ +Word Count Status Bar Field +The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed745db06 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1108 @@ + + + + + + + Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer + /text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys; in text documents + text documents; shortcut keys in + +

Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer +

+ You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + +
+ You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + F2 + + + Formula Bar + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F2 + + + Insert Fields + + + + + F3 + + + Complete AutoText + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F3 + + + Edit AutoText + + + + + Shift+F4 + + + Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+F4 + + + Open Data Source View + + + + + F5 + + + Navigator on/off + + + + + Shift+F5 + + + Moves the cursor to the position that it had when the document was last saved before it was last closed. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F5 + + + Navigator on, go to page number + + + + + F7 + + + Spelling + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F7 + + + Thesaurus + + + + + F8 + + + Extension mode + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F8 + + + Field shadings on / off + + + + + Shift+F8 + + + Additional selection mode + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + + Block selection mode + + + + + F9 + + + Update fields + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F9 + + + Show fields + + + + + Shift+F9 + + + Calculate Table + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F9 + + + Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F10 + + + Nonprinting Characters on/off + + + + + Command+TF11 + + + Styles window on/off + + + + + Shift+F11 + + + Create Style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F11 + + + Sets focus to Apply Style boxi81468 + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F11 + + + Update Style + + + + + F12 + + + Toggle Ordered List + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F12 + + + Insert or edit Table + + + + + Shift+F12 + + + Toggle Unordered List + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F12 + + + Ordered / Unordered List off + + +
+ +

Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command +Ctrl+A + + + Select All + + + + + Command +Ctrl+J + + + Justify + + + + + Command +Ctrl+D + + + Double Underline + + + + + Command +Ctrl+E + + + Centered + + + + + Command +Ctrl+H + + + Find and Replace + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+P + + + Superscript + + + + + Command +Ctrl+L + + + Align Left + + + + + Command +Ctrl+R + + + Align Right + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+B + + + Subscript + + + + + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + + + Redo last action + + + + + Command +Ctrl+0 (zero) + + + Apply Text Body paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+1 + + + Apply Heading 1 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+2 + + + Apply Heading 2 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+3 + + + Apply Heading 3 paragraph style + + + + + + Command +Ctrl+4 + + + Apply Heading 4 paragraph style + + + + + + + Command +Ctrl+5 + + + Apply Heading 5 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl + Plus Key(+) + + + Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Hyphen(-) + + + Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) + + + Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) + + + + + Command +Ctrl+multiplication sign * (only on number pad) + + + Run macro field + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Space + + + Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Line break without paragraph change + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter + + + Manual page break + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter + + + Column break in multicolumnar texts + + + + + Option +Alt+Enter + + + Inserting a new paragraph without numbering inside a list. Does not work when the cursor is at the end of the list. + + + + + Option +Alt+Enter + + + Insert a new paragraph directly before or after a section or table. + For sections, the cursor must be placed at the first or last character. For tables, the cursor must be placed at the first character of the first cell or the last character of the last cell. + + + + + Arrow Left + + + Move cursor to left + + + + + Shift+Arrow Left + + + Move cursor with selection to the left + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Left + + + Go to beginning of word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left + + + Selecting to the left word by word + + + + + Arrow Right + + + Move cursor to right + + + + + Shift+Arrow Right + + + Move cursor with selection to the right + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Right + + + Go to start of next word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right + + + Selecting to the right word by word + + + + + Arrow Up + + + Move cursor up one line + + + + + Shift+Arrow Up + + + Selecting lines in an upwards direction + + + + + Ctrl+Arrow Up + + + Move cursor to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke moves cursor to beginning of previous paragraph + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up + + + Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph + + + + + Arrow Down + + + Move cursor down one line + + + + + Shift+Arrow Down + + + Selecting lines in a downward direction + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Down + + + Move cursor to beginning of next paragraph. + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down + + + Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph + + + + + Command+Arrow Left +Home + + + Go to beginning of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Left +Home+Shift + + + Go and select to the beginning of a line + + + + + Command+Arrow Right +End + + + Go to end of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Right +End+Shift + + + Go and select to end of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Up +Ctrl+Home + + + Go to start of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Up +Ctrl+Home+Shift + + + Go and select text to start of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Down +Ctrl+End + + + Go to end of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Down +Ctrl+End+Shift + + + Go and select text to end of document + + + + + Command +Ctrl+PageUp + + + Switch cursor between text and header + + + + + Command +Ctrl+PageDown + + + Switch cursor between text and footer + + + + + Insert + + + Insert mode on/off + + + + + PageUp + + + Screen page up + + + + + Shift+PageUp + + + Move up screen page with selection + + + + + PageDown + + + Move down screen page + + + + + Shift+PageDown + + + Move down screen page with selection + + + + + Option+Fn+Backspace +Ctrl+Del + + + Delete text to end of word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Backspace + + + Delete text to beginning of word + In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph + + + + + Command+Fn+Backspace +Ctrl+Del+Shift + + + Delete text to end of sentence + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Backspace + + + Delete text to beginning of sentence + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Tab + + + Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab + + + Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + + + Paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. + + + + + CommandCtrl + double-click or CommandCtrl + Shift + F10 + + + Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Styles window, or other windows + + +
+headings; switching levels by keyboard + paragraphs; moving by keyboard + +

Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs, List Paragraphs and Heading Levels

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Up ArrowUFI: see sw-features "Ctrl + Up/Down accelerators added to move paragraphs". See now also i31697 + + + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow + + + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. + + + + + Tab + + + With the cursor positioned in front of a heading or list paragraph: The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. For list paragraphs, the list level is moved down one level. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. For list paragraphs, the list level is moved up one level. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + +tab stops; before headings + headings; starting with tab stops + + With the cursor placed anywhere in a heading or list paragraph: Increases the alignment for all headings. For list paragraphs, increases the alignment for all paragraphs in the same list. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab + + + With the cursor placed anywhere in a heading or list paragraph: Decreases the alignment for all headings. For list paragraphs, decreases the alignment for all paragraphs in the same list. + + +
+ To insert a tab at the beginning of a heading or list paragraph, use the Numbering followed by option in the Position tab in the Chapter Numbering or Bullets and Numbering dialog. Alternatively, a tab can be copied and then pasted at the beginning. +

Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command +Ctrl+A + + + If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Home + + + If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+End + + + If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Tab + + + Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option +Alt+Tab may be used instead. + + + + + Option +Alt+Arrow Keys + + + Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edgeUFI: deleted two rows, see i31697 + + + + + Option +Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge + + + + + Option+Command +Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + + Like Option +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + + Option+Command +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Like Option +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + +removing; cell protection in text documents + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+T + + + Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Del + + + If no whole cell is selected, the text from the cursor to the end of the current sentence is deleted. If the cursor is at the end of a cell, and no whole cell is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. + If no whole cell is selected and the cursor is at the end of the table, the paragraph following the table will be deleted, unless it is the last paragraph in the document. + If one or more cells are selected, the whole rows containing the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table will be deleted. + + +
+

Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Esc + + + Cursor is inside a frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the frame. + Frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the frame. + + + + + F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen + + + If a frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. + + + + + OptionAlt+Arrow Keys + + + Move object. + + + + + Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + + Resizes by moving lower right corner. + + + + + Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Resizes by moving top left corner. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode). + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bf0970ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + Positioning Objects + /text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp + + + + + + + objects;anchoring options + positioning;objects (guide) + anchors;options + frames;anchoring options + pictures;anchoring options + centering;images on HTML pages + + + +

Positioning Objects

+An object, such as an image or frame, is positioned within a document using an anchor attached to another element. +An anchor determines the reference point for an object. The reference point could be the page or frame where the object is, a paragraph, or even a character. An object always has an anchor. +An anchor moves with the element it is attached to as the document is edited. An object retains its position relative to the reference point determined by its anchor, such that, whenever the reference point moves or changes, the object moves relative to it. +The following anchoring options are available: + + + + + Anchoring + + + Effect + + + + + As character + + + Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected object is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the object is increased. + To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. + + + + + To character + + + Anchors the selected object to the paragraph that contains the character to which the anchor is attached. The reference point for the object is the start of the paragraph that contains the character. + For example, if you split the paragraph at a point before the anchor, the reference point moves to the start of the new paragraph and the object moves relative to that point. If you join the paragraph to the one before it, the reference point moves to the start of the combined paragraph and the object moves to a position relative to that. + + + + + To paragraph + + + Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph. + + + + + To page + + + Anchors the selected object to the current page. + + + + + To frame + + + Anchors the selected object to the surrounding frame. + + +
+ Objects can only be positioned on the page where their anchor is located. +
+

Moving an Anchor

+
+When you insert a shape, textbox, OLE object, image, or frame in your document, an anchor icon appears where the object is anchored. You can move an anchor or, keeping other object constraints in mind, position an object relative to the anchor's reference point by dragging the object. +
+
+
+

Changing an Anchor

+To change the anchoring options of an object, right-click the object, and then choose an option from the Anchor submenu. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..839cf20b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp + + + + + + +headings;rearranging +rearranging headings +moving;headings +demoting heading levels +promoting heading levels +Navigator;heading levels and chapters +arranging;headings +outlines;arranging chapters + + +

Arranging Chapters in the Navigator

+You can move headings and subordinate text up and down in a document text by using the Navigator. You can also promote and demote heading levels. To use this feature, format the headings in your document with one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. To use a custom paragraph style for a heading, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, select the style in the Paragraph Style box, and then double-click a number in the Levels list. +To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in the Navigator list. +To dock the Navigator, drag the title bar to the edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, double-click its frame while holding the CommandCtrl key. + +

To Move a Heading Up or Down in the Document

+Ensure that all heading levels are shown in the Navigator. By default all levels are shown. See steps below how to change the heading levels that are shown. + + + + On the Standard Bar, click the Navigator icon Icon navigator to open the Navigator. + + + On the Navigator, click the Content Navigation View icon Icon Content Navigation View. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Drag a heading to a new location in the Navigator list. + + + Click a heading in the Navigator list, and then click the Promote Chapter Icon promote or Demote Chapter icon Icon demote. + + +To move the heading without the subordinate text, hold down CommandCtrl while you drag or click the Promote Chapter or Demote Chapter icons. + +

To Promote or Demote the Level of a Heading

+ + + + Select the heading in the Navigator list. + + + Click the Promote Level Icon promote level or Demote Level icon Icon demote level. + + + +

To Change the Number of Heading Levels That Are Displayed

+Click the Heading Levels Shown icon Icon heading levels, and then select a number from the list. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2994782bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + /text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp + + + +numbering; lists, while typing + bullet lists;creating while typing + lists;automatic numbering + numbers;lists + automatic bullets/numbers; AutoCorrect function + bullets; using automatically + paragraphs; automatic numbering +MW deleted "applying;"mw deleted "automatic bullets" and changed "automatic numbering;" +Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + + $[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. + To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select “Bulleted and numbered lists”. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. + + + The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type + + + Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). + + + Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. + + + Press Enter again to finish the list. + + + You can start a numbered list with any number. + +
+ + Format - Bullets and Numbering +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d2dbd163 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + Turning Off AutoCorrect + /text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp + + + +turning off automatic correction +text;turning off automatic correction +uppercase;changing to lowercase +capital letters;changing to small letters after periods +quotation marks;changing automatically +words;automatic replacement on/off +lines;automatic drawing on/off +underlining;quick +borders; automatic drawing on/off +automatic changes on/off +changes;automatic +AutoCorrect function;turning off + + +

Turning Off AutoCorrect +

+ By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. + + + To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command +Ctrl+Z. + + + To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + + +

To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List

+ + + + + + Click the Replace tab. + + + In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + + + Click Delete. + + +

To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks

+ + + + + + Click the Localized Options tab + + + Clear the "Replace" check box(es). + + +

To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence

+ + + + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box. + + +

To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters

+ $[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # + + + + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the "Apply border" check box. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48ceed5fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Automatically Check Spelling + /text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp + + + +spellcheck;Automatic Spell Checking on/off + automatic spellcheck + checking spelling;while typing + words;disabling spellcheck +MW deleted "text;" +
+

Automatic Check Spelling

+ %PRODUCTNAME can automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelled words with a red wavy line. +
+

To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type

+ + + Choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. + + + Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + + + If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. + You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. +

To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck

+ + + Select the words that you want to exclude. + + + Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. + + + Choose "None (Do not check spelling)". + + + + Creating a new dictionary. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc39d041 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List + /text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions + exceptions; AutoCorrect function + abbreviations + capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations +MW added "capital letters;..." +Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List + + You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. + + + Do one of the following: + Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. + Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. + + + To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command +Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..352daf5be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Using AutoText + /text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp + + + + + + + AutoText + networks and AutoText directories + lists;AutoText shortcuts + printing;AutoText shortcuts + inserting;text blocks + text blocks + blocks of text + + + + + +Using AutoText +In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. + +To Create an AutoText Entry + + + + Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. + + + Choose Tools - AutoText. + + + Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. + + + Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + + + Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + + + Click the Close button. + + + +To Insert an AutoText Entry + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. + + + Choose Tools - AutoText. + + + Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. + + +You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. +To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type fn, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type dt, and then press F3. + +To Print a List of AutoText Entries + + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + + + In the Macro from tree control, select Application Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText. + + + Select "Main" in the Existing macros in: AutoText list and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + + + Choose File - Print. + + + +Using AutoText in Network Installations +You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. +For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. +The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. +Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. + +
+Tools - AutoText +Word Completion +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8b6b5675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + /text/swriter/guide/background.xhp + + + +backgrounds;text objects +words;backgrounds +paragraphs; backgrounds +text;backgrounds +tables; backgrounds +cells; backgrounds +backgrounds;selecting +MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries +

Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +

MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. +

To Apply a Background To Text Characters

+ + + Select the characters. + + + Choose Format - Character. + + + Click the Highlighting tab, select the background color. + + +

To Apply a Background To a Paragraph

+ + + Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph. + + + On the Area tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + To select an object in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object. +

To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table

+ + + Place the cursor in the table in your text document. + + + Choose Table - Properties. + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + + + You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. + To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and use the Table Cell Background Color button dropdown on the Table toolbar. + To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph and then use the Background Color dropdown button on the Formatting toolbar. +
+ + + + +Character Highlighting Color icon + Background tab page + Watermarks + Page Backgrounds as Page Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d536fa3c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Characters + /text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp + + + + +characters;defining borders + borders; for characters + frames; around characters + defining;character borders + +Defining Borders for Characters + + If two adjacent text ranges' all border properties are identical (same style, width, color, padding and shadow), then those two ranges will be considered to be part of the same border group and rendered within the same border in the document. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border. + + + Choose Format - Character - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border. + + + Choose Format - Character - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b0d8bcb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Objects + /text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp + + + +objects; defining borders + borders; for objects + frames; around objects + charts;borders + pictures;borders + OLE objects;borders + defining;object borders +MW deleted "adding;" +

Defining Borders for Objects +

+ In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. +

To Set a Predefined Border Style

+ + + Select the object for which you want to define a border. + + + Click the Borders icon on the OLE Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. + + + Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. + + +

To Set a Customized Border Style

+ + + Select the object for which you want to define a border. + + + Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdf0b96ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Pages + /text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp + + + +pages;defining borders + borders; for pages + frames; around pages + defining;page borders +MW deleted "adding;" +Defining Borders for Pages + + In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..370f56243 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ + + + + + + + + + User Defined Borders in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp + + + +borders;for text tables + cells;borders in text tables + defining;table borders in Writer + frames;around text tables + tables;defining borders +MW changed "text tables;" to "tables;" +

User Defined Borders in Text Documents +

+ You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. + + + Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. + + + Choose Table - Properties. + + + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + + + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + + + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. +

Selection of cells

+ Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. + + + + Selection + + + Line arrangement area + + + + + One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected + + + +one cell border + + + + + + A one cell table, the cell is selected + + + +one selected cell border + + + + + + Cells in a column selected + + + +column selected border + + + + + + Cells in a row selected + + + +row selected border + + + + + + A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected + + + +block selected border + + + +
+ +

Default settings

+ Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + + + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + + + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + + + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + + +

Examples

+ Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Table - Properties - Borders tab. + +default icons for borders + + + + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. + + + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + + + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. + + + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. +

User defined settings

+ In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. + + + + Line types + + + Image + + + Meaning + + + + + A black line + + + +solid line for border + + + + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + + + + + A gray line + + + +gray line for border + + + + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + + + + + A white line + + + +white line for border + + + + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + + +
+ +

Examples

+ + + Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Properties - Borders. + + + Select a thick line style. + + + To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. + + + +setting thick lower border + + All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. + All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0352f5884 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Calculating in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp + + + + + + + calculating; in text + formulas; calculating in text + references;in Writer tables + =;in Writer tables + tables;starting cell with = + +mw deleted "formula bar in text" + +

Calculating in Text Documents

+You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. + + + Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, =10000/12, and then press Enter. + + +You can also click the Formula icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. +To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. +

Cell Entries that Start with Equal Sign (=)

+To make a table cell entry that starts with = sign, first enter a space, then the = sign, and then delete the space. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b9bc0a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp + + + +pasting;results of formulas + clipboard;calculating in text + formulas;pasting results in text documents + + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + + If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. + + + Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. + + + Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command +Ctrl+Plus Sign (+). + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command +Ctrl+V.
The selected formula is replaced by the result. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b3d77b11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Cell Totals in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp + + + +calculating;sums in text tables + totals in text tables + tables;calculating sums + cells;calculating sums + table cells;calculating sums + sums of table cell series +mw deleted "text tables;" +Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells + + + + Choose Table - Insert Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + + + Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. + + + Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The + Formula Bar appears with the entry "=sum". + + + Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. + + + Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + + + If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. + Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ca20390b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp + + + + + + + formulas; complex formulas in text + calculating;formulas/mean values + +mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry + +Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents +You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. +For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. + + + Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. + + + Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). + + + Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + + +To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e63c3172 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp + + + +calculating;in text tables + tables; performing calculations in +MW reduced "text tables;" to "tables;" +Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table + + You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. + + + Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. + + + Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. + + + Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74d08c1df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Across Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp + + + +calculating; across multiple text tables + tables;calculating across +mw changed "text tables;" to "tables;" +Calculating Across Tables + + You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. + + + Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. + + + Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. + + + Press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46047d24f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Using Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp + + + + + + + inserting; captions + captions; inserting and editing + editing;captions + objects; captioning + tables; labeling + charts; labeling + frames; labeling + draw objects; inserting captions + legends, see also captions + +mw deleted "adding;" + + +Using Captions +In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. +You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. +When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. +To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. +To define a caption proceed as follows: + + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category box, for example Figure. + + +You can edit caption text directly in the document. +A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. +$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b39002211 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp + + + +captions; adding chapter numbers + objects; captioning automatically + numbering; captions + automatic numbering;of objects + chapter numbers in captions + inserting;chapter numbers in captions + +

Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions +

+ You can include chapter numbers in captions. + Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering scheme in the Numbering box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. + + + Click Options. + + + In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. + + + Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. + + + In the Caption dialog, click OK. + + + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. +
+ + AutoCaption dialog + Chapter numbering +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14509d0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page + /text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp + + + + + + + headers; inserting + footers; inserting + page styles; changing from selection + new page styles from selection + +mw deleted "creating;" + +Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page +You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. +For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. + + + + Open a new text document, choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + Click the Styles actions icon and select New Style from Selection from the submenu. + + + Type a name for the page in the Style name box, and then click OK. + + + Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. + + + Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. + + + In the Type area, select Page break and then select “Default Page Style” from the Style box. + + + Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f43c2e63a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Chapter Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp + + + + + + + outlines;numbering + chapters;numbering + deleting;heading numbers + chapter numbering + headings; numbering/paragraph styles + numbering;headings + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entry + +

Chapter Numbering

+You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the chapter hierarchy. + +

To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + In the Paragraph style box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. + + + In the Number box, select the numbering scheme that you want to use, and then click OK. + + + +

To Remove Automatic Chapter Numbering From a Heading Paragraph

+ + + + Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. + + + Press the Backspace key to delete the number. + + +Press Shift+Backspace with the cursor at the beginning of the heading to return the number. +

To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. + + + Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a064b4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + Conditional Text + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp + + + + + + + matching conditional text in fields + if-then queries as fields + conditional text; setting up + text; conditional text + defining;conditions + + + +Conditional Text +You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. +Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. + +To Define a Conditional Variable +The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + Click "Set variable" in the Type list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example Reminder. + + + Click "Text" in the Format list. + + + Enter 1 in the Value box, and then click Insert.
The Format list now displays a "General" format. + + + +To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text +The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. + + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. + The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. + + + + + + Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + +To Display the Conditional Text +In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. + + + + Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + + + Replace the number in the Value box with 3, and then click Close. + + + If the field does not automatically update, press F9. + + + +
+ + + +List of conditional operators +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3618e4059 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Conditional Text for Page Counts + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp + + + + + + + page counts + conditional text;page counts + + + +Conditional Text for Page Counts +You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. + + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Count, and then enter a space. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Page > 1 in the Condition box. + + + Type Pages in the Then box. + + + Type Page in the Else box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df71cac2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + /text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp + + + + + + + user-defined dictionaries; removing words from + custom dictionaries; removing words from + deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." + +Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + + + Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit. + + + Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d99a25baf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Moving and Copying Text in Documents + /text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp + + + +sections;moving and copying + moving; text sections + copying; text sections + pasting;cut/copied text sections + mouse;moving and copying text +mw deleted "text sections;" +Moving and Copying Text in Documents + + + + Select the text that you want to move or copy. + + + Do one of the following: + To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.
+Mouse cursor moving data + + To copy the selected text, hold down Command +Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+).
+Mouse cursor copying data + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30523652d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + /text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp + + + + + + + page styles; left and right pages + blank pages with alternating page styles + empty page with alternating page styles + pages; left and right pages + formatting; even/odd pages + title pages; page styles + First Page page style + Left Page page style + right pages + even/odd pages;formatting + +MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries. + +Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + + + + + Icon + + + $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + + +
+ + +To Set Up Alternating Page Styles + + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Organizer tab. + + + Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + + + Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles window. + + +To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. +To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. +If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. + +To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages +If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. + + + +
+ + +Insert Break dialog +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..544c8a474 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Converting a Field into Text + /text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp + + + +fields; converting into text + converting;fields, into text + replacing;fields, by text + changing;fields, into text + +Converting a Field into Text + + You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. + + + Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. + + + Choose Edit - Paste Special. + + + Click "Unformatted text" in the + Selection list, and then click + OK. + + + + + Paste Special + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca839452c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + About Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp + + + +fields;updating/viewing + updating;fields + Help tips;fields + properties;fields + disabling;field highlighting + changing;field shadings + viewing;fields +mw changed "fields;..." +About Fields + + Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. + Viewing Fields + Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + To change the color of field shadings, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. + Field Properties + Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. + The following field types execute an action when you click the field: + + + + Field Type + + + Property + + + + + Placeholder + + + Opens a dialog to insert the object corresponding to the placeholder, except for text placeholders. For text placeholders, click on the placeholder and type over it. + + + + + Insert Reference + + + Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. + + + + + Run macro + + + Runs a macro. + + + + + Input Field + + + Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. + + +
+ + Updating Fields + To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. + To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. + Placeholders are not updated. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798e32e51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field + /text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp + + + + + + + inserting;date fields + dates;inserting + date fields;fixed/variable + fixed dates + variable dates + + + +Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field +You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + Click “Date” in the Type list and do one of the following: + To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the Select list. + To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the Select list. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2215d06b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Input Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp + + + + + + + text; input fields + fields; input fields in text + input fields in text + inserting;input fields + +MW deleted "adding;" + +Adding Input Fields +An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click “Input field”in the Type list. + + + Click Insert and type the text for the variable. + + + Click OK. + + +To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F9. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf74c016e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions + /text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp + + + + + + + fields; user data + user data; querying + conditions; user data fields + hiding;text, from specific users + text; hiding from specific users, with conditions + user variables in conditions/fields + + + +Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions +You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: + + + + + Operator + + + Meaning + + + + + == or EQ + + + equals + + + + + != or NEQ + + + is not equal to + + +
+ +If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. + + + + Select the text in the document that you want to hide. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select the Hide check box. + + + In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. + + + Click Insert and then save the document. + + +The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. +The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: + + + + + User variables + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip Code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + Email address + + + + + user_state + + + State + + +
+ + +
+ + + +List of operators +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84c5b609c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Finding and Replacing in Writer + /text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp + + + +
+finding; text/text formats/styles/objects + replacing; text and text formats + styles;finding + searching, see also finding + text formats; finding + formats; finding and replacing + searching; formats + objects;finding by Navigator + Asian languages;search options +3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries. +Finding and Replacing in Writer + + In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text. +
+ The Find & Replace dialog + To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. + To Find Text + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to find in the Find text box. + + + Either click Find Next or Find All. + + + When you click Find Next, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found text. + If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. + Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. + When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. + To Replace Text + Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to search in the Find text box. + + + Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. + + + Either click Replace or Replace All. + + + When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Find box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace text box. Click Find Next to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. + When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. + To Find Styles + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click Other options to expand the dialog. + + + Check Paragraph Styles.
The Find text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. + + + Select the style to search for, then click Find Next or Find All. + + + To Find Formats + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. + Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Click the Format button. + + + + + Click Find Next or Find All. + + + More options + The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. + Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the Similarities button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) + When you have enabled Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + The Navigator + The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. + Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. + Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. + Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31cfd6c25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages + /text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp + + + + + + + pages; continuation pages + next page number in footers + continuation pages + page numbers; continuation pages + + +

Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages

+You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. +The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. + + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Field - More Fields. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. + + + Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. + + + Click a numbering scheme in the Format list. + If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. + + + Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4ad56f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Page Numbers in Footers + /text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp + + + +footers; with page numbers + pages; numbers and count of + page numbers; footers + numbering;pages + +Inserting Page Numbers in Footers + + You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12" + To Insert a Page Number + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Number. + + + If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. + To Additionally Add a Page Count + + + Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Count. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1994a5c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp + + + + + + + endnotes;inserting and editing + inserting;footnotes/endnotes + deleting;footnotes + editing;footnotes/endnotes + organizing;footnotes + footnotes; inserting and editing + + +

Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes

+Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. + +

To Insert a Footnote or Endnote

+ + + + Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. + + + Choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote. + + + In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the Choose button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. + + + In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. + + + Click OK. + + + Type the note. + + + + + + + Icon + + + You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. + + +
+ + + + + +Insert Endnote Icon + + + + You can insert endnotes directly by clicking the Insert Endnote icon on the Standard or Insert toolbar or choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Endnote. + + +
+ + +

To Edit a Footnote or Endnote

+ + + + The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. + + + + + To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text, or press CommandCtrl+Shift+PageDown. + + + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + + + To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. + + + + + To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. + + + To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes. + + + To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + + + To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. + +Shortcut keys can be made to insert, edit, and navigate to footnotes and endnotes. Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab and enter note in the Functions box to see possibilities. +
+ + +Making a Shortcut Key +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1796acad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Spacing Between Footnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp + + + + + + + spacing; endnotes/footnotes + endnotes; spacing + footnotes; spacing + borders;for footnotes/endnotes + lines;footnotes/endnotes + + + +Spacing Between Footnotes +If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. + + + + Click in a footnote or endnote. + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. + + + Click the Borders tab. + + + In the Default area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. + + + In the Line area, click a line in the Style list. + + + Select "White" in the Color box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. + + + In the Padding area, clear the Synchronize check box. + + + Enter a value in the Top and Bottom boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + + +Format - Paragraph - Borders + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..894d9ffaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Creating a Form Letter + /text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp + + + +serial letters + form letters + mail merge + letters; creating form letters + wizards;form letters +mw added "serial letters" +Creating a Form Letter + + + To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by email. + If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the email. + The Mail Merge Wizard helps you to create form letters. + To create a form letter + + + Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard. + You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages: + + + Select Start from a template, and click the Browse button. + You see the New dialog. + + + Select Business Correspondence in the left list, and then "Modern" business letter in the right list. Click OK to close the Templates dialog, and click Next in the wizard. + + + Select Letter and click Next. + + + On the next step of the wizard, click the Select Address List button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click Next. + + + Next follows the Create a salutation step. Deselect the Insert personalized salutation box. Under General salutation, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters. + + + If you want to place mail merge fields anywhere else in the document select the corresponding column in your address data source and then drag and drop the column header into the document where you would like the field to be. Be sure to select the entire column. + + + Click Next and finally Finish to create the mail merge. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a0a73d75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp + + + +master documents;properties + subdocuments;properties + central documents + subsidiary documents + documents; master documents and subdocuments + styles;master documents +Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhp +Master Documents and Subdocuments +MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures) +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + Characteristics of Master Documents + + + When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. + + + You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. + + + Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. + + + When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. + + + Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. + + + When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. + Example of Using Styles + A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. + When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. + In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. + To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. +
+ + + Navigator in master mode +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cae87b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ + + + + + + + Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp + + + + + + + Navigator;master documents + master documents;creating/editing/exporting + subdocuments;creating/editing/removing + removing;subdocuments + indexes; master documents + +MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries + +Working with Master Documents and SubdocumentsMW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + +To Create a Master Document + + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Choose File - New - Master Document. + + + Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. + + + + + If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. + + + In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert icon, and do one of the following: + + + + + + To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click Open. + + + To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. + + + To insert some text between subdocuments, choose Text. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + Choose File - Save. + + + +To Edit a Master Document +Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. + + + + To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. + + + + + To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. + + + + + To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. + + + + + To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. + + + + + + Icon + + + To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + + +
+ +When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. + +To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page + + + + Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". + + + In the master document, choose View - Styles, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Breaks area, select Insert, and then select “Page”in the Type box. + + + If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Export a Master Document + + + + Choose File - Export. + + + In the Save as type list, select a text document file format and click Save. + + +The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. + +
+ + +Navigator in master mode +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef1b4791b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + About Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp + + + + + + + headers;about + footers;about + HTML documents; headers and footers + + +

About Headers and Footers

+Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. +The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + + + + To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + + + You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. + + + + + To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. + + +

Headers and Footers in HTML Documents

+Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. + +
+ + + + +Page Styles +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..385887ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Different Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + headers;defining for left and right pages + footers;defining for left and right pages + page styles; changing + defining; headers/footers + mirrored page layout + + + +Defining Different Headers and Footers +You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. +You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose “Mirrored” in the Page layout box. +For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. + + + + Open a new text document. + + + Choose View - Styles and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles sidebar deck. + + + Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". + + + Click OK. + + + In the Styles window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". + + + Click OK. + + + Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. + + + Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7460d4145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp + + + + + + + running titles in headers + floating titles in headers + headers; chapter information + chapter names in headers + names; chapter names in headers + + +

Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer

+Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the chapter numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. + +

To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. + + + In the Style box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". + + + Select the numbering scheme for the chapter titles in the Number box, for example, "1,2,3...". + + + Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before box. + + + Enter a space in the After box. + + + Click OK. + + + +

To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer

+ + + + Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header or Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + Click in the header or footer. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + + + + Click "Chapter" in the Type list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format list. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + +The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. +
+ + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..797c227b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Headers or Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp + + + + + + + inserting;lines under headers/above footers + lines; under headers/above footers + headers;formatting + footers;formatting + shadows;headers/footers + borders;for headers/footers + +MW changed "inserting;" + +Formatting Headers or Footers +You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. + + + + Choose Format - Page and select the Header or Footer tab. + + + Set the spacing options that you want to use. + + + To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background dialog opens. + + + + + + To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the Line arrangement area. Click a line style in the Style box. + + + To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the Synchronize box, and then enter a value in the Bottom box. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8bddbe45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Hiding Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp + + + +text; hiding + sections;hiding + paragraphs;hiding + hiding;text, with conditions + variables;for hiding text +mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhpMW added "variables;" +

Hiding Text

+ You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. + Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. +

To Create a Variable

+ + + Click in your document and choose Insert - Field - More Fields. + + + Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. + + + Click "General" in the Format list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. + + + Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. + + + To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + +

To Hide Text

+ + + Click in the document where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + +

To Hide a Paragraph

+ + + Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + + You must enable this feature by removing the check mark Hidden Paragraphs in the dialog %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. +

To Hide a Section

+ + + Select the text that you want to hide in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert. + + +
+ + + Displaying Hidden Text + Creating Non-printing Text + Insert - Field - More Fields + Insert - Section + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01244aa96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Displaying Hidden Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp + + + +hidden text; displaying + displaying;hidden text +MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp +

Displaying Hidden Text +

MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhp +If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: + + + Check the Hidden Paragraphs box in the dialog %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View. + + + + + Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. + + + Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement. + + +
+ Hiding Text + + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4087575b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp + + + + + + + hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator + inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator + cross-references; inserting with Navigator + Navigator;inserting hyperlinks + +mw deleted "adding;" + +Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator +You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. + + + + Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. + + + On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. + + + Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink is selected. + + + In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. + + + Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. + + +The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bda3fe52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words + /text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp + + + +hyphenation;preventing for specific words + words;wrapping/not wrapping in text + switching off;hyphenation for specific words + +

Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words +

MW created this guide from splitting using_hyphen.xhp +If your text is automatically hyphenated and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words: + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + + + + Select a dictionary in the User-defined dictionary list, and then click Edit. + If the list is empty, click New to create a dictionary. + + + In the Word box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, "pretentious=". + + + Click New, and then click Close. + + + To quickly exclude a word from hyphenation, select the word, choose Format - Character, click the Font tab, and select "None" in the Language box. + Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows: + + + Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur. + + + Choose Insert - Formatting Mark - Word Joiner. + The inserted formatting mark will be shown in gray. To remove it, simply place the cursor over the formatting mark and press the Del key. + + +
+ + Text Flow +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c996dde28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Indenting Paragraphs + /text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp + + + +formatting; indenting paragraphs + indents;in text + paragraphs; indents + hanging indents in paragraphs + right indents in paragraphs + lines of text; indents + changing;indents +mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" +

Indenting Paragraphs +

see i66307 + You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. + + + Right-click a paragraph and choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Indents & Spacing tab to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. + + + You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. +

Positioning indents

+ Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. +To change the measurement units, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the Before text indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. +

Hanging indents

+ For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value for First line. +The Hanging Indent icon is found in the Paragraph section of the Properties sidebar. Click on this icon to switch the values of Before text and First line. This enables you to toggle a paragraph between an indented first line and a hanging indent. +To create a hanging indent: Enter a first line indent where you want the indent to start, then click the Hanging Indent icon to create the hanging indent. + + + + +Hanging Indent Icon + + + Hanging Indent Icon + + +
+ The Hanging Indent command can be added as a button to a toolbar, an item in a menu or context menu, or a shortcut key. +
+ + + Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11db2b3be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; editing or deleting entries + tables of contents; editing or deleting entries + deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents + editing;table/index entries + + + +Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries +Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View and ensure that Field Shadings is selected. + + + + Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. + + + Choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry..., and do one of the following: + + + + + + To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry box. + + + To remove the entry, click Delete. + +To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b19250d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp + + + +indexes; editing/updating/deleting + tables of contents; editing and deleting + updating;indexes/tables of contents + editing;indexes/tables of contents + deleting;indexes/tables of contents + +Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents + + + + Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. + If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable cursor in the Protected Areas section. + + + Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. + + + You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index or Table of Contents, click Type tab, and then clear the Protected against manual changes check box. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7841d0a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; defining entries in + tables of contents; defining entries in + entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents + + + +

Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries

+ +

To Define Index Entries

+ + + + Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + + + To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. + + + To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. + + + To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. + + +

To Define Table of Contents Entries

+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. + +

To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + + + Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + + + In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + + + Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb4f86377 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp + + + +indexes; formatting + editing; index format + tables of contents; formatting + entries; in tables of contents, as hyperlinks + tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries + hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes + formatting;indexes and tables of contents + +Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents + + You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. + To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. + + + Click the Styles tab. + + + Click an index level in the Levels list. + + + Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + + + Click the assign button <. + + + Click OK. + + + To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents + You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. + + + Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. + + + Click the Entries tab. + + + In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. + + + In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe59a885 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Creating Alphabetical Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp + + + + + + + concordance files;indexes + indexes; alphabetical indexes + alphabetical indexes + + + +Creating Alphabetical Indexes + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + On the Type tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + + + If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. + + + Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + + + Click OK. + + + To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index or Table of Contents. + + + +Creating a concordance file + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..076aa1f87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Bibliography + /text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp + + + + + + + indexes;creating bibliographies + databases;creating bibliographies + bibliographies + entries;bibliographies + storing bibliographic information + + + +Creating a Bibliography +A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. + +Storing Bibliographic Information +$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. + +To Store Information in the Bibliography Database + + + + Choose Tools - Bibliography Database + + + Choose Data - Record. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. + + + Close the Bibliography Database window. + + + +To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry. + + + Select From document content and click New. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. + + + Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. + + + + +Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry. + + + + + + Select From bibliography database. + + + Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + + +
+Bibliography Database + + + + + + + + +Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..096758bc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Indexes Covering Several Documents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp + + + +indexes;multiple documents + multiple documents;indexes + merging;indexes + master documents;indexes +MW inserted "master documents;" +Indexes Covering Several Documents + + There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: + + + Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. + + + Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose + Insert - Section, select Link, click the Browse button, and then locate and insert a named index section. + + + Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87d1775e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp + + + + + + + tables of contents; creating and updating + updating; tables of contents + + + + + +

Creating a Table of Contents

+ +
+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. + +

To Insert a Table of Contents

+ + + + Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography, and then click the Type tab. + + + Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the Assign styles button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. +
+
+%PRODUCTNAME creates the table of contents entries based on the outline level of the paragraph style and the paragraph contents. If the paragraph is empty, it will not be included in the table of contents. To force the empty paragraph to be listed in the table of contents, manually add a space or a non breaking space to the paragraph. Spaces added in the After text box of the Numbering tab in the Chapter Numbering dialog will not work for this purpose, since they are part of the paragraph numbering, not the paragraph contents. +
+

To Update a Table of Contents

+Do one of the following: + + + + Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index or Table of Contents. + + + Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64236a4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + User-Defined Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; creating user-defined indexes + user-defined indexes + + + +User-Defined Indexes +You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. + +To Create a User-Defined Index + + + + Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry. + + + Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. + + + Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. + + + Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. + + + Click Close. + + + +To Insert a User-Defined Index + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + On the Type tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. + + + + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Additional styles, and then click the Assign styles button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the chapter level for the paragraph style. + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc8411b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page +/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tables;start/end of document +paragraphs;inserting before/after tables +inserting;paragraphs before/after tables + +Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page + +If you want to insert text before a table that is at the top of a page, click in the first cell of the table, in front of any contents of that cell, and then press Enter or OptionAlt+Enter. +To insert text after a table at the end of the document, go to the last cell of the table and press OptionAlt+Enter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f40136788 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text; inserting pictures in +images; inserting in text +inserting; pictures +pictures; inserting options +mw deleted "illustrations;" +Inserting Graphics + +There are several ways to insert a graphic object in a text document. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5778d23aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Graphic From a File + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp + + + + +pictures; inserting by dialog +inserting; pictures, by dialog + +

Inserting a Graphic From a File +

+ +By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e4a19b57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp + + + +charts;copying from Calc into Writer + copying; charts from $[officename] Calc + text documents;inserting Calc charts + +Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document + + You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. + + + Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. + + + Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. + + + In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. + + + Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. + + + You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..faa7d2892 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text; inserting pictures from Draw +pictures; inserting from Draw + +Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress + + + +Open the document where you want to insert the object. + + +Open the Draw or Impress document containing the object that you want to copy. + + +Hold down CommandCtrl and click and hold the object for a moment.see i70967 + + +Drag to the document where you want to insert the object. + +ufi: paragraph removed because I cannot verify: id="par_id3152755" If a hyperlink is attached to the object in the original document, the hyperlink is inserted instead of the object. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66a8f7130 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +inserting; from Gallery into text +pictures; inserting from Gallery into text +replacing;objects from Gallery + +Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop + +You can drag-and-drop an object from the gallery into a text document, spreadsheet, drawing, or presentation. +To replace a gallery object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different gallery object onto the object. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..751d644f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Scanned Image + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp + + + +inserting;scanned images + pictures; scanning + scanning pictures + +Inserting a Scanned Image + + To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. + The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. +The scanner must support the SANE standard. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. + + + Choose Insert - Media - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. + + + Follow the scanning instructions. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d9010382 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph +/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp + + + + +tab stops; inserting in lists +numbering; changing the level of +lists;changing levels +levels;changing chapter levels +bullet lists;changing levels +lowering chapter levels +rising chapter levels +changing;chapter levels +promote level;in lists +demote level;in lists + +
+

Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph +

+ + + To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph down one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Tab. + + + To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph up one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Shift+Tab. + + + To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text for all list paragraphs at a given list level, use the Numbering followed by option in the Position tab in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. For an individual list paragraph, a tab can be copied and then pasted at the beginning of the list paragraph. + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f343d4a52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Combining Numbered Lists + /text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + numbering; combining + merging;numbered lists + joining;numbered lists + lists;combining numbered lists + paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive + + +

Combining Ordered Lists

+You can combine two ordered lists into a single list. + +

To Combine Two Ordered Lists

+ + + + Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon twice. + + + +

To Create a Ordered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs

+ + + + Hold down CommandCtrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. + + + Continue to hold down CommandCtrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon twice. + + +To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use Format - Lists - Add to List. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd1aeb5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + Going to Specific Bookmark + /text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp + + + +bookmarks; positioning cursor + jumping;to bookmarks + +Going to Specific Bookmark + + To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click +right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. + + Insert Bookmark + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bfce4969 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) + /text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + +keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer + accessibility; $[officename] Writer + +Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) + + + Press the keys Option +Alt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press Option +Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then H to insert a hyperlink. + To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. + To Insert Sections + + + Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Insert toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + To Insert Text Tables + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Standard toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d607750f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Using Styles From Another Document or Template + /text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp + + + + + + formatting styles; importing + styles; importing from other files + importing;styles from other files + loading;styles from other files + +

Using Styles From Another Document or Template +

+ You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. + Open the Load Styles dialog box by either + + + Choose Styles - Load Styles or + + + Choose View - Styles or + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar deck. + + + Click the arrow next to the Styles actions icon to open the submenu, and choose Load Styles + + + + + Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. + + + Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. + + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feb19e264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer +/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp + + + +$[officename] Writer; instructions +instructions; $[officename] Writer + +

Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer +

+ +

Entering and Formatting Text

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatically Entering and Formatting Text

+ + + + + + + + +

Using Styles, Numbering Pages, Using Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Editing Tables in Text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Images, Drawings, ClipArt, Fontwork + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Table of Contents, Index + + + + + + + + + + + +Headings, Types of Numbering + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Headers, Footers, Footnotes + + + + + + + +Editing Other Objects in Text + + + + + + + + + +Spelling, Dictionaries, Hyphenation + + + + + + +Form Letters, Labels and Business Cards + + + + + +Working with Documents + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +removed a line + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fba988fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Navigator for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp + + + +Navigator; overview in texts + hyperlinks;jumping to + objects;quickly moving to, within text + frames;jumping to + tables;jumping to + headings;jumping to + pages;jumping to + jumping;to text elements + overviews;Navigator in text documents +MW added "pages;" +Navigator for Text Documents + + The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. + + + To open the Navigator, press F5. + + + To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. + + + + + Navigator + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eed375cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Non-printing Text + /text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp + + + +non-printing text + text; non-printable +mw copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp +Creating Non-printing Text +MW created this guide from hidden_text.xhp +To create text that is not to be printed do the following: + + + Choose Insert - Frame and click OK. + + + Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Options tab. + + + In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ Hiding Text +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e69f6230d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp + + + + + numbers; automatic recognition in text tables + tables; number recognition + tables; date formatting + table cells; date formatting + dates;formatting automatically in tables + recognition;numbers + +

Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables +

+ $[officename] can automatically recognize numbers or dates that you enter into a table cell, converting them from text to an appropriate number format. Use Table - Number Format to change the display of the entered value. + + To enable or disable this feature, do one of the following: + + + Choose Table - Number Recognition. + When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number Recognition command. + + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number Recognition check box. + + +This feature applies globally to all tables in all documents. When enabled, typing a date or number into a table cell will result in automatic formatting. Enabling and disabling this feature does not change existing data formatting. +
+%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eea42da16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Number Ranges + /text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp + + + + + + + numbering;quotations/similar items + +MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;" + +Defining Number Ranges +You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. + + + + Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + + + + Click "Number range" in the Type list. + + + Type "Quotation" in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering. + + + Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box. + + + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..677a66084 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Line Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp + + + + + + line numbers + text; line numbers + paragraphs;line numbers + lines of text; numbering + numbering; lines + numbers; line numbering + marginal numbers on text pages + +

Adding Line Numbers

+ $[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. + Line numbers are not available in HTML format. + +

To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document

+ + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +

To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs

+ + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering. + + + Press Command+T + F11 to open the Styles window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. + All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. + + + + + + Click the Outline & List tab. + + + In the Line Numbering area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. + + + Click OK. + + + You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. + +

To Specify the Starting Line Number

+ + + Click in a paragraph. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & List tab. + + + Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Select Restart at the paragraph check box. + + + Enter a line number in the Start with box. + + + Click OK. + + + +
+ Tools - Line Numbering + + Format - Paragraph - Outline & List + Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddf4c84e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp + + + + + + + numbering; removing/interrupting + bullet lists; interrupting + lists;removing/interrupting numbering + deleting;numbers in lists + interrupting numbered lists + changing;starting numbers in lists + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..." + +

Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List

+You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in an ordered list or change the number that an ordered list starts with. + + +

To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in an Ordered List

+ + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. + + + To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the No List icon on the Formatting Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. + + +

To Change the Number That an Ordered List Starts With

+ + + + Click anywhere in the ordered list. + + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Customize tab. + + + Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + +Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c6b50ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp + + + + + inserting; page breaks + deleting;page breaks + pages; inserting/deleting page breaks + manual page breaks + tables;deleting page breaks before + +

Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks +

+

To Insert a Manual Page Break

+ + + Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. + + + Press CommandCtrl+Enter. + + +

To Delete a Manual Page Break

+ + + Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. + + + Press Backspace. + + +

To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table

+ + + Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + Clear the Break check box. + + +

To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout

+ + Read the help page Changing Page Orientation to learn more about advanced configurations that can be defined concerning page orientation. + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08909788e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Page Backgrounds + /text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp + + + + + + + page styles;backgrounds + backgrounds; different pages + changing;page backgrounds + pages;backgrounds + +MW deleted "page backgrounds" + +Changing Page Background +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. + +
+ +To Change the Page Background + + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11). + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + + + + + To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". + + + To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. + + + + + Click the Area tab. + + + Select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ +To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11). + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. + + + +To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. + + + + + + To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". + + + To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. + If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e10d00314 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + Page Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp + + + +page numbers;inserting/defining/formatting + page styles;page numbering + starting page numbers + formatting;page numbers + defining;starting page numbers + inserting;page numbers + styles;page numbers +mw inserted six index entriesmw added "styles;" +Page Numbers + + In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. + To Insert Page Numbers + Choose Insert - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. + If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field Names (Command+F9Ctrl+F9). + However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style. + To Start With a Defined Page Number + Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. + + + Click into the first paragraph of your document. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow tab. + + + In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. + + + The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. +

To Select the Page Number Format

+ You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. + + + Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. + + + Select a number format and click OK. + + +

Using Different Page Number Formats in Headers and Footers

+ You need some pages with the roman numbering format, followed by the remaining pages in another format. + In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. + Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. + + + An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". + For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default Page Style" as the next style. To see this, you may press Command+TF11 to open the Styles window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the "First Page" entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "Next style". + + + A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. + If you just press Command+EnterCtrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. + If you choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. + + + It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: + To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page + + + Click into the first page of your document. + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11). + + + In the Styles window, click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the "First Page" style. + + + Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default Page Style". + You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default Page Style" only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. + To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change + + + Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. + + + In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. + + + The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d2500bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) + /text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp + + + + page styles;orientation/scope + page formats; changing individual pages + formatting; changing individual pages + portrait and landscape + landscape and portrait + printing;portrait/landscape format + orientation of pages + paper orientation + pages;orientation + sideways orientation of pages + scope of page styles + +

Changing Page Orientation +

+ All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. + It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. +

To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages

+ If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: + + + Choose Format - Page Style. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + +

To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages

+ $[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. + At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. + Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. + To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + + Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. + +

To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout

+
+ The default template provided by %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers several page layout styles, among which the Default Page Style has Portrait orientation and the Landscape style has landscape orientation. + These styles can be used to quickly switch between portrait and landscape orientation by inserting manual breaks and choosing the appropriate page styles as described below: + + + Place the cursor where the page break is to be inserted. + + + Go to Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. The Insert Break dialog will open. + + + Choose the option Page break and in the Page Style drop-down list choose the page style to be applied to the page after the break (Default Page Style, Landscape, etc). + + + If the applied has to be changed again at a certain point in the document (for instance, to switch back from landscape to portrait orientation), place the cursor at this point and repeat the steps previously described. + + +
+ +
+

The Scope of Page Styles

+ You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? +

One Page Long Styles

+ A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page Style - Organizer tab page. + A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. + To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press CommandCtrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. +

Manually Defined Range of a Page style

+ The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page Style - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. + You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. + Perform any one of the following commands: + + + To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose View - Styles. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5e77e0df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + Creating and Applying Page Styles + /text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + page styles;creating and applying + defining;page styles + styles;for pages + overriding next style;for pages + + +

Creating and Applying Page Styles

+$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. + +

To Define a New Page Style

+ + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. + + + To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. + + + + + Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + + + +

To Apply a Page Style

+ + + + Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Style icon. + Double-click a name in the list. + + + Right-click the page style displayed in the Status Bar. Select another page style. + + + +

To Manually Override the “Next style” of a Page Style

+ + + + Place cursor between the page with the page style and the page with the style specified in Next style. + + + Right-click and choose Edit Page Break. + + + Select the With page style checkbox. + + + Enter the page style to be applied. + + +See Manually Defined Range of a Page style. + + A special situation arises when a Next style is different than the page style itself, and you want to apply that page style to two consecutive pages. For example, if you have applied First Page style to a page, and want to apply First Page style again to the immediately following page, then you must manually override First Page style, because it is configured to be followed by Default Page Style. + +

To Apply a Page Style to a New Page

+ + + + Click in the document where you want a new page to start. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Page Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e11774fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Printing a Brochure + /text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp + + + +printing; individual brochures + booklet printing + brochures; printing individual + +

Printing a Brochure +

+ You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. + When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. +%PRODUCTNAME is not designed to handle brochure printing of documents that include landscape page orientations, but it is possible to print such documents. + It is not possible to print a large image across two pages. Cut the image into two parts, and insert each part on different pages. +

To Print a Brochure

+ + + Choose File - Print. + + + In the Print dialog, click Properties. + + + In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. + + + If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. + + + Return to Print dialog. + + + In the Page Layout section, select Brochure. + + + For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify in the Range and Copies section to include Odd and Even Pages. + + + + + Click Print. + + + + If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, select Print in reverse order in the Range and Copies section, and then print the document again. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dc17c276 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Previewing a Page Before Printing + /text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp + + + +printing; previews + previews; print layouts + print layout checks + book view + pages;previews +MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews" +Previewing a Page Before Printing + + + + Choose File - Print Preview. + + + Use the zoom icons on the Print Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + To print your document scaled down, set the print options on the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog. + + + Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Print Preview bar to scroll through the document. + + +
+ + File - Print Preview. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6902aef23 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting What to Print + /text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp + + + + +selecting; pages to print +printing;page range +printing;selection + + +

Selecting What to Print

+You can choose to print individual pages, a range of pages, or a selection from a document. +

Printing a single page

+ + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, select the Pages option. The text box will show the current page number. + + + Enter the page number you want to print. + + + The preview box on the left shows the selected page. + + + + +

Printing a range of pages

+ + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, select the Pages option. The text box will show the current page number. + + + Enter the page numbers to print. +
+ + + Use - for a range of pages. For example, 1-4 prints all pages from 1 to 4. + + + Partial ranges are also allowed: -5 prints all pages up to page 5; 10- prints from page 10 to end of document. + + + Use , or ; for a list of pages. For example, 1,3;7 prints pages 1, 3 and 7. Spaces are optional: 1, 3, 7 also works. + + + Combinations are also possible. For example, 1, 3, 5-10, 15- prints pages 1,3, 5 to 10, and 15 to end of document. + + +
+ + + The preview box on the left shows the selected pages. + + + +

Printing a selection of text or graphics

+ + + Select the content to print. + + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, choose the Selection option. + + + The preview box shows the selected material. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3a287f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet + /text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp + + + +multi-page view of documents + pages;printing multiple on one sheet + overviews;printing multi-page view + printing;multiple pages per sheet + reduced printing of multiple pages + MW changed "overviews;" +

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet +

+ In the Page Layout section of the File - Print dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. + + + Choose File - Print + + + In the Page Layout section, do one of the following: + + + + + To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select "2" in the Pages per sheet box. + + + To print multiple pages on the same sheet, select the number of pages per sheet and optionally set the order of pages. The small preview shows the arrangement of pages. + + + + + Click Print. + + +
+ + File - Print Preview +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..878c9f302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting printer paper trays + /text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp + + + + + + + selecting;paper trays + paper tray selection + +mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry + +Selecting Printer Paper Trays +Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. + + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. + + + In the Paper tray box, select the paper tray that you want to use. + + + Click OK. + + + Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. + + + Apply the page style to the pages that you want. + + + + +Creating and applying page styles + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aac6b5646 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing in Reverse Order + /text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp + + + +ordering;printing in reverse order + printing; reverse order + +Printing in Reverse Order + + + + Choose File - Print. + + + Click the General tab. + + + Choose Print in reverse page order. + + + Click Print. + + + + + Printing + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bf9bf2bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + /text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp + + + + + + + indexes;unprotecting + tables of contents;unprotecting + tables;protecting/unprotecting cells + sections;protecting/unprotecting + unprotecting tables of contents and indexes + protecting;tables and sections + cells;protecting/unprotecting + document;protection from changes + + + +

Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from being modified or deleted. + +

Protecting Sections in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+Any section of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text document can be protected against changes, and with an optional password. +Protection is not intended to be an information security protection, it is a switch to prevent accidental changes. + +

Turning on protection

+Information to protect must be in a section. To create or select a section: + + + + If the section does not exist: Select the text, then choose menu Insert - Section... . + + + If the section already exists: Choose menu Format - Sections... and select the section in the list Section, or right-click on the section in the Navigator and choose Edit.... + + +To enable protection + + + + If you want to protect the contents without a password, choose the Protect check box under the Write protection. + + + If you want the protection with a password, choose Protect and With password check boxes and click on the Password… button. Enter and confirm a password of at least five characters. + + + +

Modification of protection

+ + + + + If the protection does not have a password and you would like to use one, choose the With password checkbox, click the Password button, and enter and confirm a password of at least five characters. + + + If the protection has a password and you want to clear it, uncheck the With password box under Write protection and enter the correct password. + + + If the section is protected with a password and you want to change it, click on the Password button in the Edit Sections window and enter the correct password twice. + + + +

Turning off protection

+ + + + + If the protection does not have a password, uncheck the Protect box under Write protection. + + + If the protection has a password, uncheck the Protect box under Write protection and enter the correct password. + + + +

Protecting Cells in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer Table

+You can protect the contents of individual cells of tables or whole table in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from changes. + + +

+ + + + For one or several cells, place the cursor in a cell or select needed several cells. Choose the Table - Protect Cells in menu bar. + + + For whole table, select the table, and choose the Table - Protect Cells in menu bar. + + + +

+If necessary, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Enable cursor under the Protected Areas. + + + + Place the cursor in the cell or in the selected cells and choose the Table - Unprotect Cells in menu bar. + + + For whole table, right-click on the table in the Navigator, and choose Table - Unprotect in the context menu or select the whole table and choose Table - Unprotect Cells in menu bar. + + + +

Contents Protection in Tables of Contents and Indexes

+Tables of contents and indexes created in %PRODUCTNAME Writer, are automatically protected against accidental changes. + + +

+ + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose Edit Index... in the context menu. Choose Protected against manual changes on the Type tab. + + + Right-click on the index or table of contents in the Navigator and choose Index - Read-only item. + + + +

+ + + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose Edit Index... in the context menu. Uncheck Protected against manual changes on the Type tab. + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents in the Navigator and uncheck Index - Read-only. + + + +

Protecting fields and bookmarks from changes

+Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Fields to protect all fields against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental changes in fields. +Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Bookmarks to protect all bookmarks against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental bookmark changes. + +

Protection of the whole %PRODUCTNAME Writer document from changes.

+You can protect the contents of %PRODUCTNAME Writer document from changes, with one of the following file formats: .doc, .docx, .odt, .ott. + +To enable the protection of the whole document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility and choose Protect form. To disable protection, uncheck it. + + + +Protecting Other Contents + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d3e0522b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references.xhp + + + + + + + references; inserting cross-references + cross-references; inserting and updating + tables; cross-referencing + pictures; cross-referencing + objects; cross-referencing + OLE objects;cross-referencing + draw objects;cross-referencing + updating;cross-references + inserting;cross-references + + + +Inserting Cross-References +Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. +Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. + +Cross-Referencing Text +Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. + +To Insert a Target + + + + Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. + + + Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. + + + Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection list. + + +Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. + +To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target + + + + Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. + + + In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". + + + In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Refer using list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Cross-Referencing an Object +You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. + + + In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Refer using list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Updating Cross-References +To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose Tools - Update - Fields from the menu or press F9. +Choose View - Field Names to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ebe6ae8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Modifying Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp + + + + + + + references; modifying cross-references + cross-references; modifying + editing;cross-references + searching;cross-references + + + +Modifying Cross-References + + + + Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. + If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press CommandCtrl+F8. + + + Choose Edit - Fields. + + + Set the options that you want, and then click OK. + + +Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..025fb73e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Printing with Page line-spacing (register-true) + /text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp + + + +rows; register-true text + lines of text; register-true + pages;register-true + paragraphs;register-true + register-true;pages and paragraphs + spacing;register-true text + formatting;register-true text + +

Printing with Page line-spacing

+ Page line-spacing printing is particularly useful for documents that will have two pages set next to each other (for example, in a book or brochure), for multi-column layouts, and for documents intended for double-sided printing. + +

To Enable a Document for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab. + + + In the Layout Settings section, select the Use page line-spacing checkbox, set the Reference Style, and click OK. + The Reference Style sets an invisible vertical (typographical) grid, using the line distance specified in the style. All paragraphs that have Page line-spacing activated will use that line distance, aligning the bottom of a text line to the next grid line, regardless of font size or presence of graphics. + All paragraphs with the selected Reference Style (or that inherit the Reference Style) will be activated automatically for Page line-spacing. + + +

To Exempt or Enable Paragraphs for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + + Clear the Activate page line-spacing checkbox to exempt paragraphs. Set the checkbox to enable. + The checkbox has no effect, if Page line-spacing is disabled in the Page style. + + +

To Exempt or Enable Paragraph Styles for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Open the Styles window (Command+TF11), click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa51f9af4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Removing Line Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp + + + +hard returns in pasted text + line breaks;removing + deleting; line breaks + copies;removing line breaks + paragraph marks;removing +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...".MW changed "paragraph marks;..." +Removing Line Breaks + + Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. + This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + + + On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. + + + In the Apply Style box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e760da92b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resetting Font Attributes + /text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp + + + +formats; resetting + font attributes; resetting + fonts; resetting + resetting; fonts + direct formatting;exiting + formatting;exiting direct formatting + exiting;direct formatting +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry +Resetting Font Attributes + + + + You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing CommandCtrl+Shift+X. For example, if you have pressed CommandCtrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press CommandCtrl+Shift+X to return to the default character format of the paragraph. + + + To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b49105552 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Docking and Resizing Windows +/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Navigator;docking and resizing +Styles window;docking and resizing +Gallery;docking and resizing +docking; Navigator window +resizing;windows + +Docking and Resizing Windows + +You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles window. + + +To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles window, hold down the CommandCtrl key and double-click on a gray area in the window. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. + + +To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..643b7276c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Using Rulers + /text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp + + + +rulers;using rulers +horizontal rulers +vertical rulers +indents; setting on rulers +page margins on rulers +table cells;adjusting the width on rulers +showing;rulers +hiding;rulers +adjusting page margins + +

Using Rulers +

+ To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. +

Adjusting Page Margins

+ The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. +

Changing Indents

+ Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. + + + To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + For example, to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right + You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef209ff8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches + /text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + + + + + searching; with regular expressions + regular expressions;searching + examples for regular expressions + characters;finding all + invisible characters;finding + paragraph marks;searching + + Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches + Regular expressions can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. + Searching with regular expressions is different from searching with wildcards. %PRODUCTNAME Writer only supports searching with regular expressions. + You can use regular expressions when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Select the Regular expressions check box. + + + In the Find box, type the search term and the regular expression(s) that you want to use in your search. + + + Click Find Next or Find All. + + + Regular Expression Examples + + + The regular expression for a single character is a period (.). + + + The regular expression for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + + The regular expression combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + + The regular expression for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The regular expression character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + + The regular expression for a tab character is \t. + + + A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c937b8fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp + + + +sections; editing +sections;deleting +deleting;sections + editing;sections + read-only sections + protecting;sections + converting;sections, into normal text + hiding;sections +ufi: added two deleting sections entries +Editing Sections + + You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. + + + Choose Format - Sections. + + + In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Command +Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or Command +Ctrl+click to select some sections. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + +To convert a section into normal text, click Remove. + + +To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area. + + + Add an optional protection password. The password can be empty and no password will be required to remove protection. If the password is not empty, it will be required to unprotect the section. + + +To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area. + + +removed ordered list with startvalue 4, not sure if such a list will survive all transformations + + + + + + Read-only contents;editing + Protect section;removing + +

Editing Read-Only Contents

+ A warning message is displayed if you try to edit protected sections. + To remove protection of a section, do the following: + + + Choose Format - Sections. + + + Select the section to unprotect in the Section area of the dialog. + + + Uncheck the Protect option in the Write Protection area of the dialog. + + + If the section was protected with a non-empty password, type the password into the dialog that opens. + + + Click OK . + + + + + + + Format - Sections + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483fe31bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp + + + + + + + sections; inserting + inserting; sections + HTML documents;inserting linked sections + updating;linked sections, manually + links;inserting sections + + + +Inserting Sections +You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. + +To Insert a New Section + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. + If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. + + + +To Insert a Section as a Link +Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. +You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + In the Link area, select the Link check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. + + + + Click the Browse button next to the File name box. + + + Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + + In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert. + + + Click Insert. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93cb92f5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Sections + /text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp + + + +multi-column text + text; multi-column + columns; on text pages + text columns + sections; columns in/use of +mw changed a typo in "multicolumn"mw deleted "sections;using" and changed "section;columns in" +Using Sections + + Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: + + + To prevent text from being edited. + + + To show or hide text. + + + To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. + + + To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. + + + A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. + You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. + To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press Option +Alt+Enter. + Sections and Columns + You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. + A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style. +
+ + + DDE +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddba944b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Saving Text Documents in HTML Format + /text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp + + + + + + + text documents; publishing in HTML + HTML documents; creating from text documents + homepage creation + saving;in HTML format + + + +Saving Text Documents in HTML Format +You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. +When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG. + + + + Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. + + + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. + + + In the Styles box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. + + + Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a1115f1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Text Formatting While You Type + /text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp + + + +text; formatting bold while typing + formatting; bold, while typing + keyboard;bold formatting + bold;formatting while typing + shortcut keys;bold formatting + +Applying Text Formatting While You Type + + To apply bold formatting + + + Select the text that you want to format. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+B. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press Command +Ctrl+B when you are finished. + + + To apply italic formatting + + + Select the text that you want to format. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+I. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+I, type the text that you want to format in italic, and then press Command +Ctrl+I when you are finished. + + + To underline text + + + Select the text that you want to underline. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+U. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+U, type the text that you want underlined, and then press Command +Ctrl+U when you are finished. + + + + + Keyboard shortcut for text documents + Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a5b0d50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Smart Tags + /text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp + + + +smart tags +AutoCorrect function; smart tags +options;smart tags +disabling;smart tags +installing;smart tags +MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries +Using Smart Tags + + Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. + Installing Smart Tags + Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: + + + Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. + + + Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. + + + Smart Tags Menu + Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. + When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to CommandCtrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. + In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. + To Enable and Disable Smart Tags + When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. + Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1d0026834 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Checking Spelling and Grammar + /text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp + + + + + + + spellcheck; checking text documents manually + checking spelling;manually + grammar checker + + +Checking Spelling and Grammar +You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document. +To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the extensions web page. +The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. + + + + Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. + + + Choose Tools - Spelling. + + + When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spelling dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. + + + Do one of the following: + To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Correct. + Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Correct. + To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. + + + +
+removed a line +Spelling dialog + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11654e207 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp + + + +fill format mode + copying; styles, by fill format mode + brush for copying styles + styles; transferring + formats; copying and pasting + text formats; copying and pasting +mw changed "copying;" +Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode + + You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles window. + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. + + + Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon +Icon + in the Styles window. + + + Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. + + + Press Esc when finished. + + +
+ + + + + + + Styles +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2bbd4a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Creating New Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp + + + + + + + styles; creating from selections + drag and drop;creating new styles + copying;styles, from selections + +mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;" + +

Creating New Styles From Selections

+ +

To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection

+ + + + Choose View - Styles to open the Styles deck in the Sidebar. + + + Click the icon at the top of the Styles deck for the style category of the new style. + + + Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph to which you applied manual formatting. + + + Click the Style actions menu icon at the top right corner of the Styles deck and choose New Style from Selection from the submenu. + + + Enter a name for the new style in the New Style from Selection dialog box. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + +Icon New Style from Selection + + + + Styles actions menu icon + + +
+ + +

To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop

+ + + + + + + + + + For paragraph, character and list styles, select at least one character in the style that you want to copy, then drag the selection to the Styles deck and release. For frame styles, select the frame and hold the mouse button pressed until the mouse icon changes, then drag to the Styles deck and release. + Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop the selection onto the respective icon at the top of the Styles deck. You do not need to open that style category in advance. + + + + + + + +For page and table styles, you must use the Styles actions menu at the top right corner of the Styles deck. The drag-and-drop method is not possible with these styles. +
+Styles (Sidebar) +Styles - New Style from Selection + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..600c80e90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Updating Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp + + + +Stylist, see Styles window + styles; updating from selections + templates; updating from selections + Styles window; updating from selections + updating; styles, from selections + +

Updating Styles From Selections +

+ + + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# + + + In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now. + + + In the Styles window, click the style that you want to update. + + + Click the arrow next to the Style actions icon and choose Update Selected Style from the submenu. + + + Only the manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window. Any attributes that were applied as part of a style will not be added to the updated style. +
+ + + + Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..505b5f8a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Making Text Superscript or Subscript + /text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp + + + +text; subscript and superscript + superscript text + subscript text + characters;subscript and superscript + +Making Text Superscript or Subscript + + + + Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. + + + Do one of the following: + + + somehow the following list disappeared, see issue 112471, and this remained: (list type="unordered"/) (replaced brackets) + + + +Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. + + +Press CommandCtrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and CommandCtrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. + + +In the Properties deck of the sidebar, go to the Character area and click the Superscript or Subscript buttons. + + + + + Format - Character - Position + Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5afd032cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merging and Splitting Cells + /text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp + + + +cells; merging/splitting + tables; merging cells + cell merges + splitting cells;by menu command + merging;cells +mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry +Merging and Splitting Cells +mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021 + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. + To Merge Cells + + + Select the adjacent cells. + + + Choose Table - Merge Cells. + + + To Split Cells + + + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + + + Choose Table - Split Cells. + A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..412f0595b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table + /text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp + + + +deleting; tables or table contents + tables; deleting + +Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table + + You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. + + + To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. + + + To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command +Ctrl+A UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enoughuntil all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4631a1f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Tables + /text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp + + + +tables; inserting text tables + inserting; tables in text + DDE; inserting tables + OLE objects; inserting tables in + cells;inserting from spreadsheets + tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text + spreadsheets;inserting tables from +mw changed "cell ranges;" to "cells;" +Inserting Tables + + There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? + To Insert a Table From a Toolbar + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + On the Standard or the Insert bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. + + + In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. + + + To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant + To Insert a Table With a Menu Command + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + Choose Table - Insert Table. + + + In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. + + + Select the options that you want, click OK. + + + To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Choose Edit - Copy. + + + In your text document, do one of the following: + + + + + + + +Choose Edit - Paste. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object. + + +Choose Edit - Paste Special, and choose from the following options: + + + + + + + + + Options + + + Is inserted as... + + + + + $[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet + + + OLE object - as with Command +Ctrl+V or drag-and-drop + + + + + GDIMetaFile + + + Graphic + + + + + Bitmap + + + Graphic + + + + + HTML + + + HTML table + + + + + Unformatted text + + + Text only, tab stops as separators + + + + + Formatted text [RTF] + + + Text table + + + + + DDE link (only under Windows) + + + + Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating + + + +
+ + Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. + + + Drag the selected cells into the text document. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3e30c0a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Repeating a Table Header on a New Page + /text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp + + + + + + + tables; heading repetition after page breaks + repeating; table headings after page breaks + headings; repeating in tables + multi-page tables + +MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"mw added "multi-page tables" + + +Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page +You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + + + + Choose Table - Insert Table. + + + Select the Heading and the Repeat heading rows on new pages check boxes. + + + Select the number of rows and columns for the table. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cfb07023 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns +/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp + + +UFI: Selecting tables + + + +selecting;tables +tables;selecting +columns;selecting +rows;selecting + +Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns + +You can select a table in a text document with a keyboard or with a mouse. + + +To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press CommandCtrl+A until all the cells are selected. + + +To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table. + + +To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..838de6e43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + +Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table +/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp + + + + +cells; enlarging and reducing in text tables +table cells; enlarging/reducing in text +keyboard; resizing rows/columns +resizing;rows and columns in text tables +enlarging columns,cells and table rows +reducing rows and columns in text tables +tables; resizing/juxtaposing +juxtaposing tables +heights of table rows +widths of table columns +rows;resizing in tables +columns;resizing in tables +column widths in tables +mw deleted "text tables;enlarging cells", "tables;changing the size", "tables;arranging" and "arranging;tables". MW changed "tables;sizing" and "table cells;". MW added "reducing rows and columns in text tables"MW changed "tables;" and added "juxtaposing tables"MW added 5 index entries wrt column widths and row heights +

Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table

+You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows. + + + + +Icon + + + +You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the Optimize Size toolbar on the Table Bar. + + +
+ +

Changing the Width of Columns and Cells

+

To Change the Width of a Column

+Do one of the following: + + +Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + +Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + +Hold down Command +Ctrl and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally. + + +Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option +Alt key, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + +To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option +Alt+Shift, and then press the right arrow key. + +You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. +

To Change the Width of a Cell

+Hold down Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key +

Changing the Height of a Row

+To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the OptionAlt key, and then press the up or the down arrow key. +

Resizing a Whole Table

+To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following: + + +Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table. + + +Click inside the table. Choose Table - Properties to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers. + +To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command +Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. +Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfadc1b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp + + + +table mode selection +proportional distribution of tables +relative distribution of table cells +tables; adapting the width by keyboard +cells; adapting the width by keyboard +keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns +behavior of rows/columns + +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. + Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 + To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. There are three display modes for tables: + + + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7385cfbb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Templates and Styles + /text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp + + + +formatting styles; styles and templates + styles; styles and templates + organizing; templates (guide) + templates; organizing (guide) + +

Templates and Styles +

+ A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. + Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. + $[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types of text documents, such as business letters. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84dc222a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Animating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp + + + + + + + text animation + effects; text animation + animations;text + +mw made "animating text" a two level entry + +Animating Text +You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. + + + + Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. + + + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the Text Animation tab. + + + In the Effect box, select the animation that you want. + + + Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e95968718 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing the Case of Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp + + + +characters; uppercase or lowercase + text; uppercase or lowercase + lowercase letters; text + uppercase; formatting text + capital letters;changing to small letters + changing;cases of text + initial capitals in titles + small capitals (guide) +MW added "small capitals" +Changing the Case of Text + + You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. + When you apply formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Text or Format - Text - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. + To Capitalize Text + + + Select the text that you want to capitalize. + + + Do one of the following: + Choose Format - Text - Uppercase. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all letters. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word. "Small capitals" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size. + + + To Change Text to Lowercase + + + Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. + + + Do one of the following: + Choose Format - Text - Lowercase. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3d93590b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + /text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp + + + + + + + frames; centering on pages + centering;frames on pages + title pages; centering text on + + + +Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + + + + Select the text that you want to center on the page. + + + Choose Insert - Frame. + + + In the Anchor area, select To page. + + + In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. + + + In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. + + + Click OK. + + +To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. +To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c91cbb451 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Using the Direct Cursor + /text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp + + + +text; cursor +entering text with direct cursor +direct cursor; settings +writing with direct cursor +cursor;direct cursor +settings;direct cursor + +

Using the Direct Cursor

+ The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + + + On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon +Icon. Alternatively, enable Direct Cursor by going to Edit - Direct Cursor Mode. + + + Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: + + + + + + + +Align left + + + + Align left + + + + + +Centered + + + + Centered + + + + + +Align right + + + + Align right + + +
+ + + + Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82f79284c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Emphasizing Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp + + + +text; emphasizing + emphasizing text + +Emphasizing Text + + Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document: + + + Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. + + + Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. + + + Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. + + + Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. + + + Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f48e81f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames + /text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp + + + +frames; inserting/editing/linking + editing;frames + inserting;frames + resizing;frames, by mouse + scaling; frames, by mouse + links;frames + text flow; from frame to frame + frames; linking + printing;hiding frames from printing +mw deleted "text;" and changed "printing;" +Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames + + A frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. + To Insert a Frame + + + Select the text that you want to include in the frame. + + + Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + + + To Edit a Frame + + + To edit the contents of a frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. + + + To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. + + + To resize a frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. + + + To Hide Text From Printing + Any Writer frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. + + + Select the frame (you see the eight handles). + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options. + + + In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + + + To Link Frames + You can link Writer frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. + + + Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. + + + On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon +Icon + . + + + Click the frame that you want to link to. + + + You can only link frames if: + + + The target frame is empty. + + + The target frame is not linked to another frame. + + + The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. + + + The source frame does not have a next link. + + + The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. + + + When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. + The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed +id="par_id3147542" You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. +Obviously this works now +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8af8c9511 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + + Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp + + + +text; navigating and selecting with keyboard + navigating; in text, with keyboard + selecting;text, with keyboard + keyboard; navigating and selecting in text + +Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard + + You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. + + + To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. + + + To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. + + + + + + Key + + + Function + + + + +Command key +Ctrl key + + + + + Right, left arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. + + + Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. + + + + + Up, down arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor up or down one line. + + + (Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. + + + + + Home + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + Home + In a table + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + End + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the document + + + + + End + In a table + + + Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. + + + + + PgUp + + + Scrolls up one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the header. + + + + + PgDn + + + Scroll down one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the footer. + + +
+
+ + + Selection Modes +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9da6f39ca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Rotating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + + + + + text; rotating + rotating;text + + + +Rotating Text +You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. + + + + Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. + + + Select the Text icon Icon. + + + Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. + + + Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon Icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + + Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. + + +You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. + +
+ +Show Draw Functions +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..638ba62cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting an Entire Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp + + + +sections;inserting external content + text documents;merging + links;inserting text documents as + inserting;text documents +mw deleted "text;" +Inserting an Entire Text Document + + To Insert a Text File + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Text from File. + + + Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. + + + The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. + To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. + + + In the File Name box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button and locate the file. + If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the + Sections box. + + + If you want, set the formatting options for the section. + + + Click Insert. + + + $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0806e1eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hyphenation + /text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp + + + +hyphenation;manual/automatic + separation, see hyphenation + automatic hyphenation in text + manual hyphenation in text +mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhp +Hyphenation + + By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: + Automatic Hyphenation + Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph + + + Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs + If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. + For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Manual Hyphenation + You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. + To Manually Hyphenate Single Words + To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +Ctrl+Hyphen(-). + If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. + To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection + + + Select the text that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + + + + + + + + Text Flow + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b84146bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Bullets + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + unordered lists;turning on and off + paragraphs; bulleted + bullets;adding and editing + formatting;bullets + removing;bullets in text documents + changing;bulleting symbols + + +

Adding Bullets

+ +

To Add Bullets

+ + + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Unordered List icon (Shift+F12). + + + + +To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Toggle Unordered List icon on the Formatting Bar. + +

To Format Bullets

+ + + To change the formatting of an unordered list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + + + Click on the Unordered tab or the Image tab, and then select a symbol style in the Selection area. + + + To introduce another bulleting symbol, click on the Customize tab, click the Select button next to Character, then select a special character. + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..914e71aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp + + + +numbering;paragraphs, on and off + paragraphs;toggle ordered list + formatting;ordered lists + inserting;numbering + +

Adding Numbering

+

To Add Numbering to a List

+ + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon (F12) + + + Right-click, choose List, then select a list style. + + + +A paragraph style can be configured to add numbering. +

To Remove Paragraphs from an Ordered List

+To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, then click the Toggle Ordered List icon or the No List icon on the Formatting Bar. +

To Format an Ordered List

+To change the formatting of a numbered list, do one of the following: + + + Click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + + + Right-click in the list, then choose List - Bullets and Numbering. + + +To change the hierarchy of an ordered list, click in the list, then use the icons in the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. + Copying or moving an item from a numbered list to a new location continues the list numbering. To start a new numbering with the pasted item, click Toggle Ordered List twice. Any formatting on the pasted item is reset to default. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86fb4b4e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Numbering and Paragraph Styles + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp + + + + + + numbering;manually/by styles + list styles + manual numbering in text + paragraph styles;numbering + +

Numbering and Paragraph Styles +

+ You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. + If you want numbered headings, use Tools - Chapter Numbering, instead of numbering manually. +

To Apply Numbering Manually

+ To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Toggle Ordered List icon on the Formatting bar, or use the dropdown box on the icon to select a numbering format. + You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles window. + + + UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. + + + To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + Use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering bar to change the order and level of list paragraphs. + + + To see which paragraphs are in the same list, click to the left of a number or symbol at the beginning of a list paragraph, with View - Field Shadings (CommandCtrl+F8) enabled. + + + To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use Format - Lists - Add to List. + +

To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style

+ Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the list style assigned to a paragraph style, then the numbering format in the list style is applied automatically to all paragraphs using the paragraph style. + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Outline & List tab. + + + In the List style box, select the list style to apply. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the paragraph style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + List Style +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..051ec6145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + Thesaurus + /text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp + + + +thesaurus; related words + related words in thesaurus + spelling in thesaurus + dictionaries; thesaurus + lexicon, see thesaurus + synonyms in thesaurus + searching;synonyms + +
+

Thesaurus

+ Use the thesaurus to look up synonyms or related terms. +
+ + + Click in the word that you want to look up or replace. + + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press CommandCtrl+F7. + + + In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the "Replace with" text box. + + Optionally double-click an entry to look up related terms for that entry. On your keyboard, you can also press the arrow up or down keys to select an entry. Then press Return to replace, or press the spacebar to look up. + + Click Replace. + + + + + Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use. To look up the word in a different language, click the Language button, and select one of the installed thesaurus languages. A thesaurus library may not be available for all installed languages. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page.If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word. + + + Thesaurus + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1fb694dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp + + + +automatic word completion + completion of words + AutoCorrect function; word completion + word completion;using/disabling + disabling;word completion + switching off;word completion + deactivating;word completion + refusing word completions + rejecting word completions +mw made a two level entry of "switching off..." and "word completion", copied two entries to word_completion_adjust.xhp and added a new entry +Word Completion for Text Documents + + $[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. + If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Command +Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + To Accept/Reject a Word Completion + + + By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. + + + To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. + + + To Switch off the Word Completion + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion. + + + Uncheck Enable word completion. + + +
+ Fine-Tuning the Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798296486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp + + + +settings;word completion + word completion;settings + text documents;word completion settings + weekdays; automatically completing + months; automatically completing +mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp +If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. + To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: + To Insert an Additional Space Character + Select Append space. + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + To Define the Accept Key + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + To Select the Minimum Number of Characters + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + To Select the Scope of Collected Words + Disable the option When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. + If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. + To Use the Word List for Further Sessions + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. + + + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. + + + Select all or some of the words in the list. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + + +
+ Word Completion + Using Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3d6b0346 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Counting Words + /text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp + + + +words; counting in text + number of words + documents; number of words/characters + text; number of words/characters + characters; counting + number of characters + counting words + word counts +MW deleted "character counts" +Counting Words + + + + Word and character count is shown in the status bar, and is kept up to date as you edit. + + + If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. + + + To display extended statistics such as count of characters without spaces, double click the word count in the status bar, or choose Tools - Word Count. + + +
+ How does %PRODUCTNAME count words? + In general, every string of characters between two spaces is a word. Dashes, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph breaks are word limits, too. + Words with always visible hyphens, as in plug-in, add-on, user/config, are counted as one word each. + The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 "$" http://www.example.com. + To add a custom character to be considered as the word limit, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General and add the character into the Additional separators field. +
+ To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. + + File - Properties - Statistics + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a81260620 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Wrapping Text Around Objects + /text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp + + + + + + + text wrap around objects + contour editor + contour wrap + text; formatting around objects + formatting; contour wrap + objects; contour wrap + wrapping text;editing contours + editors;contour editor + + + +Wrapping Text Around Objects + +To Wrap Text Around an Object + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. + The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. + + + +To Specify the Wrapping Properties + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab. + + + + + + Set the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic +You can change the shape that the text wraps around. + + + + Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + + + + + + Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). + + + Close the Contour Editor window. + + + +
+ +Contour Editor +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c21c15651 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +LibreLogo +Logo +Turtle graphics + + +LibreLogo +LibreLogo is a simple, localized, Logo-like programming environment with turtle vector graphics for teaching of computing (programming and word processing), DTP and graphic design. See http://www.numbertext.org/logo/librelogo.pdf. +LibreLogo toolbar +The LibreLogo toolbar (View - Toolbars - Logo) contains turtle moving, program start, stop, home, clear screen, program editor/syntax highlighting/translating icons and an input bar (command line). +Turtle moving icons +They are equivalents of the Logo commands “FORWARD 10”, “BACK 10”, “LEFT 15”, “RIGHT 15”. Clicking on one of the icons will also focus the turtle shape scrolling the page to its position. +Start Logo program +Click on the icon “Start Logo program” to execute the text (or only the selected) text of the Writer document as a LibreLogo program. In an empty document an example program will be inserted and executed. +Click on the icon “Stop” to stop the program execution. +Home +Click on the icon “Home” to reset the position and settings of the turtle. +Clear screen +Click on the icon “Clear screen” to remove the drawing objects of the document. +Program editor/Syntax highlighting/Translating +The “magic wand” icon sets 2-page layout for program editing, expands and converts to uppercase the abbreviated, lowercase Logo commands in the Writer document. Change the language of the document (%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Western) and click on this icon to translate the Logo program to the selected language. +Command line +Hit Enter in the command line to execute its content. To stop the program use the icon “Stop”. +Hold down the Enter to repeat the command line, for example, on the following command sequence: + FORWARD 200 LEFT 89
 +To reset the command line triple-click it or press CommandCtrl+A to select the previous commands, and type the new commands. +Graphical user interface of basic turtle settings +Turtle shape of LibreLogo is a normal fixed size drawing object. You can position and rotate it on standard way, too, using the mouse and the Rotate icon of the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. Modify Line Width, Line Color and Area Color settings of the turtle shape to set PENSIZE, PENCOLOR and FILLCOLOR attributes of LibreLogo. +Program editing +LibreLogo drawings and programs use the same Writer document. The LibreLogo canvas is on the first page of the Writer document. You can insert a page break before the LibreLogo programs and set page zoom using the “magic wand” icon of the Logo toolbar, also change the font size for a comfortable 2-page layout for LibreLogo programming: left (first) page is the canvas, right (second) page is the LibreLogo program editor. +LibreLogo programming language +LibreLogo is an easily localizable, Logo-like programming language, localized in several languages by LibreOffice native language communities. It is back-compatible with the older Logo systems in the case of the simple Logo programs used in education, eg. + TO triangle :size
REPEAT 3 [
FORWARD :size
LEFT 120
]
END

triangle 10 triangle 100 triangle 200
 +Differences from the Logo programming language + + + List members are comma separated: POSITION [0, 0] + + + Program blocks and lists are different + + FIXME: Hack to get a nested list + + + Program blocks need space or new line at parenthesization: REPEAT 10 [ FORWARD 10 LEFT 36 ] + + + Lists need close parenthesization: POSITION [0, 0], and not POSITION [ 0, 0 ] + + + + + 1-line function declarations are not supported (TO and END need new lines). + + +Other features of LibreLogo + + + The colon is optional before the variable names. + TO triangle size
REPEAT 3 [ FORWARD size LEFT 120 ]
END
 + + + String notation supports also orthographical and Python syntax. + PRINT "word ; original Logo syntax
PRINT “Arbitrary text.” ; orthography, Writer
PRINT 'Arbitrary text.' ; Python syntax
 + + + Python list and string handling + PRINT “text”[2] ; print “x”
PRINT “text”[1:3] ; print “ex”
 + + + Python-like FOR loop + + + Python-like variable declaration: + x = 15
PRINT x
 + + + There are no extra query functions: + PRINT FILLCOLOR
p = POSITION
PRINT p
REPEAT 10 [ POSITION ANY POSITION p ]
 + + + Alternative parenthesization in function calls + TO star size color
FILLCOLOR color
REPEAT 5 [ LEFT 72 FORWARD size RIGHT 144 FORWARD size ]
FILL
END

star 100 “red”
star (100, “green”)
star(100, “blue”)
 + + +LibreLogo commands +Basic syntax +Case sensitivity +Commands, color constants are case insensitive: + PRINT “Hello, World!”
print “Hello, World, again!”
 +Variable names are case sensitive: + a = 5
A = 7
PRINT a
PRINT A
 +Program lines +Lines of a LibreLogo program are paragraphs in the Writer document. A program line can contain multiple commands: + PRINT “Hello, World!” PRINT “LibreLogo”
 +Comments +Lines or line parts are comments from a semicolon to the end of the line (paragraph): + ; some comments
PRINT 5 * 5 ; some comments
 +Break program lines to multiple paragraphs +It’s possible to break a program line for more paragraphs using the character tilde at the end of the line: + PRINT “This is a very long ” + ~
“warning message”
 +Turtle moving +FORWARD (fd) + FORWARD 10 ; move forward 10pt (1pt = 1/72 inch)
FORWARD 10pt ; see above
FORWARD 0.5in ; move forward 0.5 inch (1 inch = 2.54 cm)
FORWARD 1" ; see above
FD 1mm
FD 1cm
 +BACK (bk) + BACK 10 ; move back 10pt
 +LEFT (lt) + LEFT 90 ; turn counterclockwise 90 degrees
LEFT 90° ; see above
LT 3h ; see above (clock position)
LT any ; turn to a random position
 +RIGHT (rt) + RIGHT 90 ; turn clockwise 90 degrees
 +PENUP (pu) + PENUP ; turtle will move without drawing
 +PENDOWN (pd) + PENDOWN ; turtle will move with drawing
 +POSITION (pos) + POSITION [0, 0] ; turn and move to the top-left corner
POSITION PAGESIZE ; turn and move to the bottom-right corner
POSITION [PAGESIZE[0], 0] ; turn and move to the top-right corner
POSITION ANY ; turn and move to a random position
 +HEADING (seth) + HEADING 0 ; turn north
HEADING 12h ; see above
HEADING [0, 0] ; turn to the top-left corner
HEADING ANY ; turn to a random direction
 +Other turtle commands +HIDETURTLE (ht) + HIDETURTLE ; hide turtle (until the showturtle command)
 +SHOWTURTLE (st) + SHOWTURTLE ; show turtle
 +HOME + HOME ; reset initial turtle position
 +CLEARSCREEN (cs) + CLEARSCREEN ; remove drawing objects of the document
 +FILL and CLOSE + FILL ; close and fill the actual line shape or points
CLOSE ; close the actual line shape or join the actual points
 +Example: filling a regular triangle: + FORWARD 50 LEFT 120 FORWARD 50 FILL
 +Example: drawing a regular triangle: + FORWARD 50 LEFT 120 FORWARD 50 CLOSE
 +Pen settings +PENSIZE (ps) + PENSIZE 100 ; line width is 100 points
PENSIZE ANY ; equivalent of PENSIZE RANDOM 10
 +PENCOLOR/PENCOLOUR (pc) + PENCOLOR “red” ; set red pen color (by color name, see color constants)
PENCOLOR [255, 255, 0] ; set yellow color (RGB list)
PENCOLOR 0xffff00 ; set yellow color (hexa code)
PENCOLOR 0 ; set black color (0x000000)
PENCOLOR ANY ; random color
PENCOLOR [5] ; set red color (by color identifier, see color constants)
PENCOLOR “invisible” ; invisible pen color for shapes without visible outline
PENCOLOR “~red” ; set random red color
 +PENTRANSPARENCY + PENTRANSPARENCY 80 ; set the transparency of the actual pen color to 80%
 +PENCAP/LINECAP + PENCAP “none” ; without extra line end (default)
PENCAP “round” ; rounded line end
PENCAP “square” ; square line end
 +PENJOINT/LINEJOINT + PENJOINT “rounded” ; rounded line joint (default)
PENJOINT “miter” ; sharp line joint
PENJOINT “bevel” ; bevel line joint
PENJOINT “none” ; without line joint
 +PENSTYLE + PENSTYLE “solid” ; solid line (default)
PENSTYLE “dotted” ; dotted line
PENSTYLE “dashed” ; dashed line

; custom dot–dash pattern specified by a list with the following arguments:
; – number of the neighbouring dots
; – length of a dot
; – number of the neighbouring dashes
; – length of a dash
; – distance of the dots/dashes
; – type (optional):
; 0 = dots are rectangles (default)
; 2 = dots are squares (lengths and distances are relative to the pensize)

PENSTYLE [3, 1mm, 2, 4mm, 2mm, 2] ; ...––...––...––
 +Fill settings +FILLCOLOR/FILLCOLOUR (fc) + FILLCOLOR “blue” ; fill with blue color, see also PENCOLOR
FILLCOLOR “invisible” CIRCLE 10 ; unfilled circle
FILLCOLOR [“blue”, “red”] ; gradient between red and blue
FILLCOLOR [[255, 255, 255], [255, 128, 0]] ; between white and orange
FILLCOLOR [“blue”, “red”, 1, 0, 0] ; set axial gradient (with the required rotation and border settings), possible values: 0-5 = linear, axial, radial, elliptical, square and rectangle gradients
FILLCOLOR [“red”, “blue”, 0, 90, 20] ; linear with 20% border, rotated with 90 degrees from the actual heading of the turtle
FILLCOLOR [“red”, “blue”, 0, 90, 20, 0, 0, 200, 50] ; from 200% to 50% intensity
FILLCOLOR [ANY, ANY, 2, 0, 0, 50, 50] ; radial gradient with random colors and 50-50% horizontal and vertical positions of the center
 +FILLTRANSPARENCY + FILLTRANSPARENCY 80 ; set the transparency of the actual fill color to 80%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80] ; set linear transparency gradient from 80% to 0%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20] ; set linear transparency gradient from 80% to 20%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20, 1, 90] ; set axial transparency gradient rotated with 90 degrees from the actual heading of the turtle
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20, 2, 0, 20, 50, 50] ; set radial transparency gradient from outer 80% to inner 20% transparency with 20% border and with 50-50% horizontal and vertical positions of the center
 +FILLSTYLE + FILLSTYLE 0 ; fill without hatches (default)
FILLSTYLE 1 ; black single hatches (horizontal)
FILLSTYLE 2 ; black single hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 3 ; black single hatches (-45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 4 ; black single hatches (vertical)
FILLSTYLE 5 ; red crossed hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 6 ; red crossed hatches (0 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 7 ; blue crossed hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 8 ; blue crossed hatches (0 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 9 ; blue triple crossed
FILLSTYLE 10 ; black wide single hatches (45 degrees)

; custom hatches specified by a list with the following arguments:
; – style (1 = single, 2 = double, 3 = triple hatching)
; – color
; – distance
; – degree

FILLSTYLE [2, “green”, 3pt, 15°] ; green crossed hatches (15 degrees)
 +Drawing objects +CIRCLE + CIRCLE 100 ; draw a circle shape (diameter = 100pt)
 +ELLIPSE + ELLIPSE [50, 100] ; draw an ellipse with 50 and 100 diameters
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h] ; draw an elliptical sector (from 2h clock position to 12h)
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h, 2] ; draw an elliptical segment
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h, 3] ; draw an elliptical arc
 +SQUARE + SQUARE 100 ; draw a square shape (size = 100pt)
 +RECTANGLE + RECTANGLE [50, 100] ; draw a rectangle shape (50×100pt)
RECTANGLE [50, 100, 10] ; draw a rectangle with rounded corners
 +POINT + POINT ; draw a point with size and color of the pen
 +CLOSE can join the last points, FILL can fill the shape defined by points. For example, it’s easy to draw a “flat” star starting from its center: + PENUP
REPEAT 5 [
FORWARD 80
POINT
BACK 80
RIGHT 36
FORWARD 50
POINT
BACK 50
RIGHT 120
] FILL
 +LABEL + LABEL “text” ; print text in the turtle position
LABEL 'text' ; see above
LABEL "text ; see above (only for single words)
 +TEXT + CIRCLE 10 TEXT “text” ; set text of the actual drawing object
 +Font settings +FONTCOLOR/FONTCOLOUR + FONTCOLOR “green” ; set font color
 +FONTFAMILY + FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G” ; set font (family)
FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G:smcp=1” ; set also font feature (small caps)
FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G:smcp=1&onum=1” ; small caps + old figures
 +FONTSIZE + FONTSIZE 12 ; set 12pt
 +FONTWEIGHT + FONTWEIGHT “bold” ; set bold font
FONTWEIGHT “normal” ; set normal weight
 +FONTSTYLE + FONTSTYLE “italic” ; set italic variant
FONTSTYLE “normal” ; set normal variant
 +PICTURE (pic) +PICTURE is for + + + shape grouping; + + + starting new line shapes; + + + saving SVG images and SVG/SMIL animations; + + + keeping the consistency of positions and line shapes at the left border. + + +Shape grouping + ; PICTURE [ LibreLogo_commands ]
PICTURE [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 100 ] ; tree-like grouped shape
 +See also “Group” in %PRODUCTNAME Writer Help. + TO tree location
PENUP POSITION location HEADING 0 PENDOWN
PICTURE [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 100 ] ; tree-like grouped shape
END

PICTURE [ tree [230, 400] tree [300, 400] ] ; grouped shapes in a grouped shape
 +Starting new line shapes + PICTURE ; start a new line shape
FORWARD 10 PICTURE FORWARD 10 ; two line shapes
 +Saving SVG images + PICTURE “example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; save the picture as an SVG image file in the user folder
PICTURE “Desktop/example.svg” [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 5 ] ; as above, with a relative path
PICTURE “/home/user/example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; absolute path for Unix/Linux
PICTURE “C:\example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; absolute path for Windows
 +Saving SVG/SMIL animations (drawings with SLEEP commands) + PICTURE “animation.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 SLEEP 1000 CIRCLE 99 ] ; save as an SVG/SMIL animation (see also SLEEP)
PICTURE “animation2.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 SLEEP 1000 CIRCLE 99 SLEEP 2000 ] ; as above, but using SLEEP after the last object will result looping: after 2 seconds the SVG animation restarts in SMIL-conformant browsers +Consistency at the left border +Use PICTURE to keep the consistency of positions and line shapes at the left border of Writer: + PICTURE [ CIRCLE 20 POSITION [-100, 100] CIRCLE 20 ]
 +Loops +REPEAT + ; REPEAT number [ commands ]

REPEAT 10 [ FORWARD 10 LEFT 45 CIRCLE 10 ] ; repeat 10 times
 + ; number is optional

REPEAT [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
 +REPCOUNT +Loop variable (also in the FOR and WHILE loops). + REPEAT 100 [ FORWARD REPCOUNT LEFT 90 ]
 +FOR IN +Loop for the list elements: + FOR i IN [1, 5, 7, 9, 11] [
FORWARD i
LEFT 90
]
 +Loop for the characters of a character sequence: + FOR i IN “text” [
LABEL i
FORWARD 10
]
 +WHILE + WHILE TRUE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
WHILE REPCOUNT <= 10 [ FORWARD 50 LEFT 36 ] ; as REPEAT 10 [ ... ]
 +BREAK +Stop the loop. + REPEAT [ ; endless loop
POSITION ANY
IF REPCOUNT = 100 [ BREAK ] ; equivalent of the REPEAT 100 [ ... ]
]
 +CONTINUE +Jump into the next iteration of the loop. + REPEAT 100 [
POSITION ANY
IF REPCOUNT % 2 = 0 [ CONTINUE ]
CIRCLE 10 ; draw circles on every 2nd positions
]
 +Conditions +IF + ; IF condition [ true block ]
; IF condition [ true block ] [ false block ]

IF a < 10 [ PRINT “Small” ]
IF a < 10 [ PRINT “Small” ] [ PRINT “Big” ]
 +AND, OR, NOT +Logical operators. + IF a < 10 AND NOT a = 5 [ PRINT “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 or 9” ]
IF a < 10 AND a != 5 [ PRINT “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 or 9” ] ; as above
 +Subroutines +TO, END +New word (or procedure). + TO triangle
REPEAT 2 [ FORWARD 100 RIGHT 120 ] FILL
END

REPEAT 10 [ triangle PENUP POSITION ANY PENDOWN ]
 +OUTPUT +Return value of the function. + TO randomletter
OUTPUT RANDOM “qwertzuiopasdfghjklyxcvbnm”
END

PRINT randomletter + randomletter + randomletter ; print 3-letter random character sequence
 +STOP +Return from the procedure. + TO example number
IF number < 0 [ STOP ]
PRINT SQRT number ; print square root
]

example 100
example -1 ; without output and error
example 25
 +Default variables +ANY +Default random value of colors, etc. + PENCOLOR ANY ; random pen color
 +TRUE +Logical value. + WHILE TRUE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
PRINT TRUE ; print true
 +FALSE +Logical value. + WHILE NOT FALSE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
PRINT FALSE ; print false
 +PAGESIZE + PRINT PAGESIZE ; print list of the page sizes in points, eg. [595.30, 841.89]
 +PI/π + PRINT PI ; print 3.14159265359
 +Input/Output +PRINT + PRINT “text” ; print “text” in a dialog box
PRINT 5 + 10 ; print 15
 +INPUT + PRINT INPUT “Input value?” ; ask and print a string by a query dialog box
PRINT FLOAT (INPUT “First number?”) + FLOAT (INPUT “Second number?”) ; simple calculator
 +SLEEP + SLEEP 1000 ; wait for 1000 ms (1 sec)
 +GLOBAL +Set global variables used in procedures. + GLOBAL about
about = “LibreLogo”

TO example
PRINT about
GLOBAL about ; when we want to add a new value
about = “new value for the global variable”
END

example
PRINT about
 +Functions +RANDOM + PRINT RANDOM 100 ; random float number (0 <= x < 100)
PRINT RANDOM “text” ; random letter of the “text”
PRINT RANDOM [1, 2] ; random list element (1 or 2)
 +INT + PRINT INT 3.8 ; print 3 (integer part of 3.8)
PRINT INT RANDOM 100 ; random integer number (0 <= x < 100)
PRINT INT “7” ; convert the string parameter to integer
 +FLOAT + ; convert the string parameter to float number
PRINT 2 * FLOAT “5.5” ; print 11.0
 +STR + ; convert the number parameter to string
PRINT “Result: ” + STR 5 ; print “Result: 5”
PRINT 10 * STR 5 ; print 5555555555
 +SQRT + PRINT SQRT 100 ; print 10, square root of 100
 +SIN + PRINT SIN 90 * PI/180 ; print 1.0 (sinus of 90° in radians)
 +COS + PRINT COS 0 * PI/180 ; print 1.0 (cosinus of 0° in radians)
 +LOG10 + PRINT LOG10 100 ; print 2.0 (common logarithm of 100)
 +ROUND + PRINT ROUND 3.8 ; print 4 (rounding 3.8)
PRINT ROUND RANDOM 100 ; random integer number (0 <= x <= 100)
 +ABS + PRINT ABS -10 ; print 10, absolute value of -10
 +COUNT + PRINT COUNT “text” ; print 4, character count of “text”
PRINT COUNT [1, 2, 3] ; print 3, size of the list
 +SET + ; Convert list to Python set
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] ; print {4, 5, 6}
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] | SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {1, 4, 5, 6, 9}, union
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] & SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {4}, intersection
PRINT SET ([4, 5, 6, 6]) - SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {5, 6}, difference
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] ^ SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {1, 5, 6, 9}, symmetric difference
+RANGE + ; Python-like list generation
PRINT LIST RANGE 10 ; print [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]
PRINT LIST RANGE 3 10 ; print [3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]
PRINT LIST RANGE 3 10 3 ; print [3, 6, 9]

FOR i IN RANGE 10 50 10 [ ; loop for [10, 20, 30, 40]
FORWARD i
LEFT 90
]
 +LIST + ; remove the repeating elements of a list using set and list conversion
PRINT LIST (SET [1, 3, 5, 5, 2, 1]) ; print [1, 3, 5, 2]
 +TUPLE +Conversion to Python tuple (non-modifiable list) + PRINT TUPLE [4, 5]
 +SORTED +It returns with a sorted list. + PRINT SORTED [5, 1, 3, 4] ; print [1, 3, 4, 5]
 +SUB +Substitute character sequences using regex (regular expression) patterns. + PRINT SUB (“t”, “T”, “text”) ; print “Text”, replacing “t” with “T”
PRINT SUB (“(.)”, “\\1\\1”, “text”) ; print “tteexxtt”, doubling every characters
 +SEARCH +Search character sequences patterns using regex patterns. + IF SEARCH (“\w”, "word") [ PRINT “Letter in the word.” ]
 +FINDALL +Find all character sequences in the input string matching the given regex pattern. + PRINT FINDALL(“\w+”, “Dogs, cats.”) ; print [“Dogs”, “cats”], the list of the words.
 +MIN + PRINT MIN [1, 2, 3] ; print 1, the lowest element of the list
 +MAX + PRINT MAX [1, 2, 3] ; print 3, the greatest element of the list
 +Color constants + PENCOLOR “SILVER” ; set by name
PENCOLOR [1] ; set by identifiers
PENCOLOR “~SILVER” ; random silver color

 + +Identifier +Name + +0 +BLACK + +1 +SILVER + +2 +GRAY/GREY + +3 +WHITE + +4 +MAROON + +5 +RED + +6 +PURPLE + +7 +FUCHSIA/MAGENTA + +8 +GREEN + +9 +LIME + +10 +OLIVE + +11 +YELLOW + +12 +NAVY + +13 +BLUE + +14 +TEAL + +15 +AQUA + +16 +PINK + +17 +TOMATO + +18 +ORANGE + +19 +GOLD + +20 +VIOLET + +21 +SKYBLUE + +22 +CHOCOLATE + +23 +BROWN + +24 +INVISIBLE +
+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a140c180 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Mail Merge Toolbar + /text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +Mail Merge Toolbar +The Mail Merge Toolbar contains commands for the final steps of the mail merge process. +
+ +
+Go to menu View - Toolbars and select Mail Merge +
+ + + + +(Recipient number) +Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient. + + + + + +Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records. + + +Exclude recipient +Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge. + + +Edit Individual Documents +Creates a single merged document with page breaks between each recipient. The names and the addresses of the recipients are contained in the document, which can be customized as needed. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..405fe1b47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Writer Help +/text/swriter/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer Help + +Working With %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + + +Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + + +
+Help about the Help + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..877821025 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Menus +/text/swriter/main0100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c0141c4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + File + /text/swriter/main0101.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

File

+ These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46b53eac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/swriter/main0102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit

+This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +

Select Text

+ + + + + +

Go to Page

+Opens a dialog box to enter which page number should be shown. (CommandCtrl+G) + + +

Comment

+ Shows submenu that gives options to reply, resolve and delete comments.When a submenu for Comment is made, then replace label and description with an embed - 19.10.20 + + +

Fields

+ + +

Links to External Files

+ + +

Object

+ + +

Direct Cursor Mode

+Allows a user to click at the beginning, middle, or end of any possible text line on a page and then begin typing. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc44b893 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/swriter/main0103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

View

+This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ +

Normal

+ + +

Web

+ + + + + + + +

Scrollbars

+Show or hide the horizontal and vertical scroll bars that are used to change the viewable area of a document that doesn't fit within the window. + + + + + +

Table Boundaries

+Shows or hides the borders of table cells that have no set borders. The boundaries are only visible on screen and are not printed. + +

Images and Charts

+Show or hide graphical objects like images and charts within a document. + + + + +

Comments

+Show or hide a document's comments and replies to them. + +

Resolved comments

+Show or hide resolved comments. + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Zoom

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5fee8f302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Insert + /text/swriter/main0104.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Insert

+The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes images, media, charts, objects from other applications, hyperlink, comments, symbols, footnotes, and sections. +
+

Page Break

+Inserts a manual page break at the current cursor position and places the cursor at the beginning of the next page. + +

Image

+ + + + + +

Section

+ +

Text from File

+ +

Textbox

+ + + + + + +

Bookmark

+ + + + +

Horizontal Line

+Inserts a horizontal line at the current cursor position. + + + + + +

Envelope

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef80781df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Format + /text/swriter/main0105.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Format

+Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. +
+ + +
+

Align Text

+Opens a submenu where you can align text and objects.shared/01/05080000.xhp is the start for a submenu, but it needs to be elaborated and probably needs appl-switches for other modules. Heading and description here can be replaced with an embed to that submenu file. Can also embed submenu in simpress/main_format.xhp, then the section id here can be removed. +
+ + +

Character

+ +

Paragraph

+ +
+

Lists

+Opens a submenu where you can modify the formatting of list paragraphs.When a submenu is made for Lists, then the heading and text can be replaced with an embed to that file. Can also be embedded in simpress/main_format.xhp, and then section id can be removed. +
+

Bullets and Numbering

+ + +

Title Page

+Opens a dialog where you can design a title page.When a help page is made for Title Page, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. +

Comments

+When comments are present, the character dialog is presented. Changes to font and font formatting are applied to all comments. + +

Columns

+ +

Watermark

+ +

Sections

+ +

Image

+ +Text Box and Shape +

Frame and Object

+Opens a submenu to link and unlink frames, and edit properties of a selected frame.When a submenu is made for Frame and Object, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. + + + + + +

Rotate or Flip

+Opens a submenu where you can rotate or and flip a selected shape or image. Text boxes can only be rotated.When a submenu is made for Rotate or Flip, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bd635d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Tools + /text/swriter/main0106.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Tools

+ Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences. +
+ + +

Automatic Spell Checking

+ + + + + + + + +

ImageMap

+ + +

Redact

+ + +

Auto-Redact

+ + +

Chapter Numbering

+ + +

Line Numbering

+ + +

Footnotes and Endnotes

+ + + + + + +

Address Book Source

+ + + + + +

Sort

+ + + + +

Customize

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a058f883d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Window +/text/swriter/main0107.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Window + Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e75ca333 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + + Table + /text/swriter/main0110.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Table

+Shows commands to insert, edit, and delete a table and its elements inside a text document. +
+ +

Insert Table

+Inserts a new table. + +

Insert

+Opens a submenu with the following command options: +

Rows Above

+Insert a row above the row where the cursor is currently placed. +

Rows Below

+Insert a row below the row where the cursor is currently placed. +

Rows

+Opens dialog box for inserting rows.see also swriter/02/0409 +

Columns Before

+Inserts a column before the column where the cursor is currently placed. +

Columns After

+Inserts a column after the column where the cursor is currently placed. +

Columns

+Opens dialog box for inserting columns.see also swriter/02/0410 + +

Delete

+ + +

Rows

+Deletes the selected rows. + +

Columns

+Deletes the selected columns. + + +

Table

+Deletes the current table. + +

Select

+ + + + +

Cell

+Selects the current cell. + +

Row

+Selects the current row. + +

Column

+Selects the current column. + +

Table

+Selects the current table. + +

Size

+ + +

Row Height

+Opens the Row Height dialog where you can change the height of a row. + +

Minimize Row Height

+Set the row height to the smallest possible for the content in each selected row. + +

Optimal Row Height

+ + +

Distribute Rows Evenly

+ + +

Column Width

+Opens the Column Width dialog where you can change the width of a column. + +

Minimize Column Width

+Set column width to the smallest possible for the content in each selected column. + +

Optimal Column Width

+ + +

Distribute Columns Evenly

+ + +

Merge Cells

+ + +

Split Cells

+ + + + +

Protect Cells

+ + +

Unprotect Cells

+ + +

AutoFormat Styles

+ + +

Number Format

+Opens a dialog where you can specify the format of numbers in the table. + + +

Number Recognition

+Toggles the setting for automatically recognizing numbers or dates that you enter into a table cell, converting them from text to an appropriate number format. + +

Header Rows Repeat Across Pages

+Repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + +

Rows to Break Across Pages

+Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. + +

Convert

+ + + +

Text to Table

+Opens a dialog where you can convert the selected text to a table. Opens a dialog where you can convert the selected text to a table. + + +

Table to Text

+Opens a dialog where you can convert the current table to text. Opens a dialog where you can convert the current table to text. + +

Text Formula

+Opens the Formula bar to enter or edit a formula. + +

Sort

+UFI: removed help ids + +

Properties

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a26fb7871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (menu) + /text/swriter/main0115.xhp + + + +
+ +

Styles

+ Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a text document. +
+

Text styles entries

+ The entries includes most common paragraph, character and list styles. Click on the style to apply. + You can customize the list of styles entries using menu Tools - Customize. Because custom styles belongs to the actual document, remember to store the customized menu in the document scope. +

Edit Style

+ Opens the Paragraph Style dialog box of the current paragraph. +

Update Selected Style

+ Update the paragraph style with the direct formatting applied to the current paragraph. +

New Style from Selection

+ Adds a paragraph style with the settings of the current selection. You will be prompted to enter the style name. +

Load Styles from Template

+ Import styles from another document or template into the current document. +

Manage Styles

+ Opens the Styles deck in the sidebar. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..61582ff91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Form Menu + /text/swriter/main0120.xhp + + + +
+ +

Form

+ Contains commands for activate form design mode, open control wizards and insert form controls in your document. +
+
+

Design Mode

+ Enable or disable form design mode. +
+
+

Control Wizards

+ Enable or disable control wizards. +
+ + + + + + + + + +

More fields

+Date, time, numerical, currency and pattern form fields. + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Automatic Control Focus

+ Enable or disable Automatic Control Focus +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d895fac1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/swriter/main0200.xhp + + + +
+

Toolbars +

+This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Writer. + +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec3c296d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Bar + /text/swriter/main0202.xhp + + + +
+

Formatting Bar

+ The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Font Color

+ + + + + + +

Additional icons

+

Increase Font

+
+ + Increases the font size of the selected text. +
+

Reduce Font

+
+ + Reduces the font size of the selected text. +
+ If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. + +

Left-To-Right

+ + + + +left to right icon + + + + The text is entered from left to right. + + +
+ + +

Right-To-Left

+ + + + +right to left icon + + + + The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5180db61c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + +Image Bar +/text/swriter/main0203.xhp + + + +
+ +Image Bar +The Image Bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected bitmap graphics. +
+Flip Vertically +Flip Horizontally +Graphics Properties + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdd3894bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Table Bar +/text/swriter/main0204.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Bar

+The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +
+ + + + +Delete Row + + +Delete Column + + +following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row +

Merge Cells

+ + + + + + + + + + +AutoFormat + + + + + + + +

Sort

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97db0006a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Object Properties Bar +/text/swriter/main0205.xhp + + + +
+ +Drawing Object Properties Bar +You can see the Drawing Object Properties bar in Writer and Calc. Select the menu View - Toolbars - Drawing Object Properties. The controls are enabled when a drawing object is selected. You see some different icons by default, whether the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet. +
+ + + + + +Line Style + + +Line Width + + +Line Color + + + + +Area Style/Filling + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d32fdb294 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Bullets and Numbering Bar +/text/swriter/main0206.xhp + + + +
+ +

Bullets and Numbering Bar

+The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of list paragraphs, including changing their order and list level. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..018d4d4d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Status Bar (Writer) + /text/swriter/main0208.xhp + + + + + +
+

Status Bar

+The Status Bar contains information about the current document and offers various buttons with special functions. +
+ + + + + +

Language

i80434 +Displays the language for the selected text. Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the current paragraph. + + + Choose None to exclude the text from spellchecking and hyphenation. + + + Choose Reset to Default Language to re-apply the default language for the selection or the paragraph. + + + Choose More to open the character formatting dialog with more options. + + + + + + + +

Digital Signature

+Click to start digital signature process. You must have a digital certificate to complete the process. See also Digital Signatures. + + +

Zoom & View Layout

+Three controls on the Writer Status Bar allow you to change the zoom and view layout of your text documents. + +The View Layout icons show from left to right: Single column mode. View mode with pages side by side. Book mode with two pages as in an open book. + +Drag the Zoom slider to the left to show more pages, drag to the right to zoom into a page and show a smaller area of the page. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d47a09fd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Print Preview Bar (Writer) +/text/swriter/main0210.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Jump to Specific Page

+ To go to a specific page in the Print Preview, type the page number in the entry box, then press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print

+Open the Print dialog. + +
+

Close Preview

+Exit from Print Preview. + + + + +Close Preview Icon + + + + Close Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c59b373e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rulers +/text/swriter/main0213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Rulers + Rulers display the dimensions of the page, and the position of tabs, indents, borders and columns. You can modify all of these on the rulers using the mouse. +
+ By double-clicking on the ruler, you can open the Paragraph dialog and assign direct paragraph formatting for the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc6dd6736 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula Bar +/text/swriter/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Formula Bar + +The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document. To activate the Formula Bar, press F2. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..349205342 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Frame Bar + /text/swriter/main0215.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Frame Bar

+ When a frame is selected, the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame. +
+ + +

Wrap Off

+ + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. + +

Wrap On

+ + This icon represents the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. + +

Wrap Through

+ + You can also define this setting on the Wrap tab page. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Background Color

+ + +

Frame Properties

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..159323924 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +OLE Object Bar +/text/swriter/main0216.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +OLE Object Bar +The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects. +
+ + +No Wrap + + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. + +Wrap + + This icon corresponds to the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. + +Wrap Through + + You can also achieve the same effect through the Wrap tab page. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Object Properties + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01436cc62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Object Bar +/text/swriter/main0220.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Text Object Bar +Contains formatting commands for text that is contained in a draw object. The Text Object bar appears when you double-click inside a draw object. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +Superscript + + +Subscript + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Select All + + +Character + + +Paragraph +Here you can define the indents, spacing, alignment and line spacing for the paragraph currently selected. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ea4fc0a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Writer Features +/text/swriter/main0503.xhp + + + +
+$[officename] Writer Features + +$[officename] Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. You can then save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized OpenDocument format (ODF), Microsoft Word .doc format, or HTML. And you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format (PDF). +
+Writing +$[officename] Writer lets you create both basic documents, such as memos, faxes, letters , resumes and merge documents, as well as long and complex or multi-part documents, complete with bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. +$[officename] Writer also includes such useful features as a spellchecker, a thesaurus, AutoCorrect, and hyphenation as well as a variety of templates for almost every purpose. You can also create your own templates using the wizards. +Designing and Structuring +$[officename] offers a wide variety of options to design documents. Use the Styles window to create, assign and modify styles for paragraphs, individual characters, frames and pages. In addition, the Navigator helps you to quickly move around inside your documents, lets you look at your document in an outline view, and keeps track of the objects that you have inserted into your document. +You can also create various indexes and tables in text documents. You can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs. Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text. +Desktop Publishing with $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer contains numerous desktop publishing and drawing tools to assist you in creating professionally styled documents, such as brochures, newsletters and invitations. You can format your documents with multi-column layouts, frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +Calculations +Text documents in $[officename] have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links. You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations. +Creating Drawings +The $[officename] Writer drawing tool lets you create drawings, graphics, legends, and other types of drawings directly in text documents. +Inserting Graphics +You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document, including graphics with a JPG or GIF format. In addition, the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics, and the Fontwork Gallery creates stunning font effects. +Flexible Application Interface +The program interface is designed so that you can configure it according to your preferences, including customizing icons and menus. You can position various program windows, such as the Styles window or the Navigator as floating windows anywhere on the screen. You can also dock some windows to the edge of the workspace. +Drag&Drop +The drag-and-drop feature enables you to work quickly and efficiently with text documents in $[officename]. For example, you can drag-and-drop objects, such as graphics from the Gallery, from one location to another in the same document, or between open $[officename] documents. +Help Functions +You can use the Help system as a complete reference for $[officename] applications, including instructions for simple and complex tasks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d63ccf819 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Footnote and Endnote + /text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Footnote and Endnote +The menu contains commands to insert a footnote or endnote with or without additional user interaction. +
+ +Footnote +Insert a footnote at the current cursor position without a prompt. + +Endnote +Insert a endnote at the current cursor position without a prompt. + +Footnote or Endnote + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68e857636 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Frame + /text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Frame +This submenu contains both interactive and non-interactive means of inserting a frame. +
+ +Frame Interactively +Insert a frame by drawing its shape with the mouse cursor. + + +Floating Frame + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a0772f5d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Header and Footer + /text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0260ab332 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + More Breaks (submenu) + /text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp + + + +
+ +
+
+

+More Breaks

+Submenu with additional row, column, and page breaks +
+

Insert Manual Row Break

+Manual Row Break Icon + + +text documents; inserting column breaks +column breaks; inserting +inserting; manual column breaks +manual column breaks + +

Insert Manual Column Break

+Manual Column Break Icon + +

Manual Break

+Manual Break icon + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eff70974a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ + + + + + + + Track Changes Toolbar + /text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp + + + +
+ +

Track Changes Toolbar

+ Contains the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file. +
+
+ Choose View - Toolbars - Track Changes. +
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Show track changes + + + + Show track changes + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Record Changes + + + + Record Changes + + +
+
+ +

Previous Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Previous track change + + + + Previous track change + + +
+ +

Next Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Next track change + + + + Next track change + + +
+ +

Accept Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Accept Track Change + + + + Accept Track Change + + +
+ +

Reject Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Reject Track Change + + + + Reject Track Change + + +
+ +

Accept All Tracked Changes

+ + + + + Icon Accept All Tracked Changes + + + + Accept All Tracked Changes + + +
+ +

Reject All Tracked Changes

+ + + + + Icon Reject All Tracked Changes + + + + Reject All Tracked Changes + + +
+ +

Accept Track Change and select next one

+ + + + + Icon Accept Track Change and select next one + + + + Accept Track Change and select next one + + +
+ +

Reject Track Change and select next one

+ + + + + Icon Reject Track Change and select next one + + + + Reject Track Change and select next one + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + Icon Manage Track Changes + + + + Manage Track Changes + + +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Insert Comment + + + + Insert Comment + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Insert Track Change Comment + + + + Insert Track Change Comment + + +
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Protect Changes + + + + Protect Changes + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Compare Document + + + + Compare Document + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + + + + Icon Merge Document + + + + Merge Document + + +
+
+ + + -- cgit v1.2.3